JP2021180893A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which has enhanced interest of a game.SOLUTION: Prior determination is made on the basis of information stored by storage means prior to set determination means, and prior information for showing a result determined by the prior determination is notified before dynamic display of identification information for showing a determination result is started. When a specific determination result is determined by the set determination means, the type of a privilege game is determined in prior with respect to information stored to storage means before it is determined by the determination means. It is performed by prior privilege game type notification means for notifying prior game information for showing the determination result by the privilege game type determined in prior before the dynamic display of the identification information is started.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Different types of benefits that can be obtained by multiple types of players are set for the privileged games to be executed, and if a hit is made, one privileged game type is determined. A gaming machine has been proposed that makes the player's interest different depending on the type of privileged gaming that is being executed even if it is a hit.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-217766

By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machines are required to improve not only the effect of improving the interest in hitting and losing, but also the interest in the type of privileged game. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with further improved interest in gaming.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is an entry means capable of entering a game ball and an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry means of the game ball entering the ball entry means. To show a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, a determination means capable of performing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and a determination result by the determination means. A privilege that is advantageous to the player when the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information and the identification information for indicating a specific determination result are stopped and displayed on the display means. A game execution means and a privilege game type determining means for determining the type of the privilege game to be executed based on the information stored in the storage means when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. , And a pre-determination means for executing a pre-determination based on the information stored in the storage means prior to the pre-determination means, and a pre-determination for showing the result of the pre-determination by the pre-determination means. The pre-notification means for notifying the information before the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result corresponding to the pre-determined information is started, and the determination means for determining the specific determination result. If so, the privilege game type predetermined in advance with respect to the information stored in the storage means before the privilege game type determined by the privilege game type determination means is determined by the determination means. Prior to notifying the determination means and the advance game information for showing the determination result by the privilege game type advance determination means before the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determined information is started. It has a privilege game type notification means.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is a symbol display means for displaying on the display means the symbol corresponding to the information stored in the storage means before being determined by the determination means in the gaming machine according to claim 1. The advance notification means notifies by changing the display mode of the symbol displayed by the symbol display means.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is an effect means for executing an effect when the privilege game is executed in the game machine according to claim 1 or 2, and the advance privilege game type notification means is the effect means. It is intended to execute a specific effect.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, an entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means, and an acquisition means thereof. A storage means for storing the information acquired by the method, a determination means capable of performing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and an identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means. A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the information, and a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. It has a privilege game type determining means for determining the type of the privilege game to be executed based on the information stored in the storage means when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. The pre-determination means for executing the pre-determination based on the information stored in the storage means prior to the determination means, and the pre-information for showing the result of the pre-determination by the pre-determination means. When the advance notification means for notifying before the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the determination result corresponding to the determined information is started and the determination means determines that the determination result is a specific determination result. The privilege game type pre-determination means for preliminarily determining the type of the privilege game determined by the privilege game type determination means with respect to the information stored in the storage means before being determined by the determination means, and the privilege game type pre-determination means thereof. Pre-privilege game type notification means for notifying before the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the information for which the pre-game information for indicating the determination result by the privilege game type pre-determination means is determined is started. And have.

Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it has a symbol display means for displaying the symbol corresponding to the information stored in the storage means before being determined by the determination means on the display means, and the advance notification means is provided by the symbol display means. Notification is given by changing the display mode of the displayed symbol.

Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the effect means for executing the effect when the privilege game is executed and the advance privilege game type notification means cause the effect means to execute the specific effect.

Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily identify that the notification is related to the privilege game.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective front view of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective front view of an operation unit and a game board. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a game board. (A) is a front view of the general winning opening unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the general winning opening unit in the line XIIb-XIIB of FIG. 12 (a). It is sectional drawing of the game board in the XIII-XIII line of FIG. It is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board in the range XIV of FIG. It is a rear view of a general winning opening unit. It is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board in the range XIV of FIG. It is an exploded perspective front view of a center frame. (A) is a front view of the first unit, (b) is a side view of the first unit, and (c) is a rear view of the first unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of the 1st unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the 1st unit. It is sectional drawing of the 1st unit in the XXI-XXI line of FIG. 18B. FIG. 21 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit shown in FIG. FIG. 18 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit on the line XXIII-XXIII. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit in the line XXIVa-XXIVa of FIG. 21, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit in the line XXIVb-XXIVb of FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view of the first unit in line 21 XXIVc-XXIVc. (A) is a partially enlarged view of the first unit in the range XXVa of FIG. 21, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit in the line XXIVb-XXIVb of FIG. 25 (a). (A) is a partially enlarged view of the first unit in the range XXVa of FIG. 21, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit in the line XXIVb-XXIVb of FIG. 26 (a). (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the line XXVIIa-XXVIIa of FIG. 25 (a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the line XXVIIb-XXVIIb of FIG. 25 (a). Yes, (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the XXVIIc-XXVIIc line of FIG. 25 (a). (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the line XXVb-XXVb of FIG. 25 (a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the line XXVIIIb-XXVIIIb of FIG. 25 (a). be. (A) is a front view of the second unit, and (b) is a rear view of the second unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of the 2nd unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the 2nd unit. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd unit in the XXXII-XXXII line of FIG. (A) is a front view of the center frame, and (b) is a side view of the center frame. (A) is a perspective front view of the center frame, and (b) is a perspective rear view of the center frame. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a center frame. It is sectional drawing of the center frame in the XXXVI-XXXVI line of FIG. 33. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a game board, and (b) is a schematic disassembled cross-sectional view of a game board. (A) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case. (A) is an exploded perspective front view of the rear case, and (b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear case. (A) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case. (A) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case. (A) is a perspective rear view of the rear case and the board box, and (b) is a rear view of the back case and the board box. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit. It is a rear view of the lower displacement unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement unit. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit in the retracted state. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit in the 1st overhanging state. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit in the 2nd overhanging state. It is a rear view of the lower displacement unit in the retracted state. It is a rear view of the lower displacement unit in the 1st overhanging state. It is a rear view of the lower displacement unit in the 2nd overhanging state. (A) is a rear view of the first link member and the cam member in the retracted state, (b) in the first overhanging state, and (c) in the second overhanging state. It is sectional drawing of the lower displacement unit in the LIVa-LIVA line of FIG. 50, and (b) is the sectional schematic diagram of the lower displacement unit in the LIVb-LIVA line of FIG. 51. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit in the LVa-LVa line of FIG. 50, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit in the LVb-LVb line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the lower displacement unit in the LVc-LVc line of 52. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit in the LVIa-LVIa line of FIG. 52, and (b) is a front view of a first link member and a cam member of the lower displacement unit in the second overhanging state. (A) is a front view of the lower displacement member, and (b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member. It is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member. (A) and (b) are front views of the lower displacement member. It is a front view of the lower displacement member in a 1st position. It is a front view of the lower displacement member in a 2nd position. It is a front view of the lower displacement member in the 3rd position. (A) to (c) are partially enlarged views of the lower displacement member. (A) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member. (A) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member. (A) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member. (A) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member. (A) is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member in the range LXIXa of FIG. 68 (b), and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member in the range LXIXb of FIG. 68 (a). (A) is a top view of the sorting unit, and (b) is a rear view of the sorting unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a sorting unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a sorting unit. It is sectional drawing of the distribution unit in the LXXIII-LXXIII line of FIG. 70A. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit in the range LXXIV of FIG. 73. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit. It is a front view of the distribution unit and the lower displacement unit. It is a top view of the distribution unit and the lower displacement unit. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit. It is sectional drawing of the distribution unit. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit. It is sectional drawing of the distribution unit. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit. It is sectional drawing of the distribution unit. It is a front view of a rotating unit. It is a rear view of a rotating unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a rotating unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rotating unit. It is a front view of a decorative unit. (A) is a side view of the decorative unit in the direction of arrow XCIIa of FIG. 91, and (b) is a side view of the decorative unit in the direction of arrow XCIIb of FIG. 91. It is an exploded perspective front view of a decorative unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a decorative unit. It is a rotation unit in the direction view of the arrow XCVa of FIG. 89, and (b) is a rotation unit in the arrow XCVb of FIG. It is a rotation unit in the direction view of the arrow XCVa of FIG. 89, and (b) is a rotation unit in the arrow XCVb of FIG. (A) is a closed state, (b) is an intermediate state, and (c) is an open state, each of which is a side view of a decorative unit and a right transmission member. (A) is an open state, (b) is an intermediate state, and (c) is a side view of a decorative unit and a right transmission member in a closed state, respectively. (A) is a side view of the decorative unit in the closed state, and (b) is a side view of the decorative unit in the open state. (A) is a front view of a rotating body, (b) is a side view of the rotating body in the direction of arrow Cb of FIG. 100 (a), and (c) is an arrow Cc of FIG. 100 (a). It is a side view of a rotating body in a directional view. It is an exploded perspective front view of a rotating body. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a rotating body. (A) is a side view of the rotating body when the opening / closing member is closed, and (b) is a side view of the rotating body when the opening / closing member is open. (A) and (b) are side views of the decorative unit. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit and a rotation unit. It is a top view of the lower displacement unit in the arrow CVI direction view of FIG. 105. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit and a rotation unit. (A) is a top view of the ball pedestal, (b) is a front view of the ball pedestal, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the ball pedestal in the CVIIIc-CVIIIc line of FIG. 108 (a). Is. It is an exploded perspective view of a ball cradle. (A) and (b) are sectional views of a ball cradle. (A) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of a rotating unit in the CXI-CXI line of FIG. 87. It is a front view of the upper displacement unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of the upper displacement unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the upper displacement unit. It is a front view of the upper displacement unit in the state which the upper displacement member is arranged in the retracted position. It is a front view of the upper displacement unit in the state which the upper displacement member is arranged in the intermediate position. It is a front view of the upper displacement unit in the state which the upper displacement member is arranged in the overhanging position. (A) is a front view of the variable portion, and (b) is a rear view of the variable portion. It is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the lower displacement member. It is a front view of the lower displacement member in the 3rd position. (A) is a front view of the lower displacement member in the third embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member. It is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member. (A) and (b) are front views of the lower displacement member. (A) is a front view of the lower displacement member at the first position, and (b) is a front view of the lower displacement member at the second position. (A) is a front view of the lower displacement member at the third position, and (b) is a front view of the lower displacement member at the second position. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit. (A) is a top view of the distribution unit according to the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the distribution unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a sorting unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a sorting unit. It is sectional drawing of the distribution unit in the CXXXIV-CXXXIV line of FIG. 131 (a). (A) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit in the range CXXXV of FIG. 134. It is a front view of the rotating unit in 6th Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective front view of a rotating unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a sorting unit. (A) to (c) are side views of the decorative unit in the arrow CXXXIX directional view of FIG. 138. (A) to (c) are side views of the decorative unit in the arrow CXXXIX directional view of FIG. 138. It is a side schematic diagram of the displacement unit in 7th Embodiment. It is a side view of the displacement unit. It is a side view of the displacement unit when the game ball is held by the displacement member. It is a side view of the displacement unit when the game ball is held by the displacement member. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 8th embodiment. It is an exploded perspective front view of a rotation operation unit. It is sectional drawing of the pachinko machine in the CXLVII-CXLVII line of FIG. 145. It is sectional drawing of the pachinko machine. 9 is a perspective front view of the first link member in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 9B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit. It is sectional drawing of the game board in 10th Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member in eleventh embodiment. (A) and (b) are front views of the lower displacement member. (A) is a front view of the lower displacement member, (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member in the CLIIIb-CLIIIb line of FIG. 153 (a), and (c) is a sectional view of FIG. 153 (a). It is sectional drawing of the lower displacement member in the CLIIIc-CLIIIc line of. (A) is an exploded perspective front view of the ball receiving portion in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a front view of the ball receiving portion. (A) and (b) are front views of the lower displacement member, and (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member in the CLVc-CLVc line of FIG. 155 (b). (A) is a front view of the special winning device according to the thirteenth embodiment, (b) is a perspective front view of the special winning device, and (c) is the CLVIc-CLVIc line of FIG. 156 (a). It is sectional drawing of the special prize-winning apparatus. It is an exploded perspective front view of a special winning device. (A) is a top view of the special winning device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device in the CLVIIIb-CLVIIIb line of FIG. 158 (a). (A) is a rear view of the rear case in the 14th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case in the CLIXb-CLIXb line of FIG. 159 (a). (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case in the sixteenth embodiment. (A) is a rear view of the rear case in the 17th embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the rear case in the CLXIb-CLXIb line of FIG. 161 (a). (A) is a front view of the rear case according to the eighteenth embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case. (A) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case. (A) is a schematic top view of the game board, and (b) is a schematic top view of the pachinko machine 10. It is an exploded perspective front view of the engaging member in 19th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a one-way sectional view taken along the line CLXVIb-CLXVIb of FIG. 165. It is an exploded perspective view of the back case and the rotating unit in 20th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the engaging member, and (b) is a rear view of the rotating unit and the engaging member. (A) is a rear view of the rotating unit and the engaging member, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case 20300. FIG. 170 is an exploded perspective view of the rear case and the rotating unit according to the 21st embodiment. (A) is a rear view of a rotating unit and an engaging member, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rotating unit in the CLXXIb-CLXXIb line of FIG. 171 (a). (A) is a rear view of a rotating unit and an engaging member, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a rear case and a rotating unit. (A) is a rear view of a rotating unit and an engaging member, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a rear case and a rotating unit. It is a perspective front view of an engaging member and a fixing member. (A) and (b) are front views of the rear case. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a rear case in the CLXXVIa-CLXXVIa line of FIG. 175 (b). It is a front view of the back case in 24th Embodiment, and FIG. 177 (b) is a sectional view of the back case in line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb of FIG. 177 (a). It is sectional drawing of the back case in the CLXXVIII-CLXXVIII line of FIG. 177 (b). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the game board in the 25th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the game board in the 26th embodiment. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the game board in 27th Embodiment. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the 28th embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the 29th embodiment. (A) is a sectional view of a general winning opening unit in the thirtieth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of a general winning opening unit in the thirty-first embodiment. It is an exploded perspective front view of the special prize apparatus in 32nd Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the special winning device, (b) is a top view of the special winning device, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device in the CLXXXVc-CLXXXVc line of FIG. 185 (a). Is. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a special winning device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device in the CLXXXVIb-CLXXXVIb line of FIG. 186 (a). (A) is an exploded perspective front view of the first path member in the 33rd embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of a special winning device. (A) is a front view of the game board in the 34th embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the game board in the CLXXXVIIIb-CLXXXVIIIb line of FIG. 188 (a). It is an exploded perspective front view of a game board. It is sectional drawing of the pachinko machine in the CXC-CXC line of FIG. 188. (A) is a front view of the game board in the 35th embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the game board in the CXCIb-CXCIb line of (a). It is an exploded perspective view of a special winning device. (A) to (c) are sectional views of the game board 13 in the CXCIII-CXCIII line of FIG. 191 (b). (A) is an exploded perspective front view schematically showing the game board in the 36th embodiment, and (b) is a sectional schematic view of the game board. (A) is an exploded perspective front view schematically showing the game board in the 37th embodiment, and (b) is a sectional schematic view of the game board. It is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member in 38th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the lower displacement member, (b) is a sectional view of the lower displacement member in the CXCVIIb-CXCVIIb line of FIG. 197 (a), and (c) is a sectional view of the lower displacement member of FIG. 197 (a). It is sectional drawing of the lower displacement member in the CXCVIIc-CXCVIIc line. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member in 39th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the lower displacement member, and FIGS. 199 (b) and 199 (c) are cross-sectional views of the lower displacement member. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the 40th embodiment, and FIG. 200 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the CCb-CCb line of FIG. 200 (a). (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the 41st embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the CCIb-CCIb line of FIG. 201 (a). (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the line CCIIa-CCIIa of FIG. 201 (a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the line CCIIb-CCIIb of FIG. 201 (a). be. It is an exploded perspective front view of the rear case in 42nd Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case in the CCIVb-CCIVb line of FIG. 204 (a). (A) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case in the CCVb-CCVb line of FIG. 205 (a). (A) is a rear view of the game board, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the CCVIb-CCVIb line of FIG. 206 (a). It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the internal structure of the special prize-winning apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display content which showed the fluctuation of a 16R probability variation jackpot in the 1st control example, and (b) is an example of the display mode of the rotation unit at the time of the 16R probability variation jackpot fluctuation. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display content which showed the fluctuation of the 6R probability variation jackpot in the first control example, and (b) is an example of the display mode of the rotating unit at the time of the 6R probability variation jackpot fluctuation. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display content showing the fluctuation during the CHARGE effect in the first control example, and (b) is the display content showing the change stop during the CHARGE effect in the first control example. It is a figure which showed an example. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display content showing the roulette effect after the special symbol is stopped in the first control example, and (b) is the display content showing the result of the roulette effect in the first control example. It is a figure which showed an example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content in which the button press valid period occurs in the first control example, and (b) is the display content when the button press valid period in the first control example elapses for a certain period. It is a figure which showed an example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents during button pressing in the first control example, and (b) is a fusion of button effects after the display of each button pressing effective period in the first control example matches. It is a figure which showed an example of the case. It is a timing chart which showed the period during the button pressing effect in the 1st control example. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display content of the button automatic pressing effect 1 in the first control example, and (b) shows an example of the display content of the button automatic pressing effect 2 in the first control example. It is a figure. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content of the button automatic pressing effect 3 in the 1st control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents when the attacker wins during the jackpot game in the first control example, and (b) is the case where the pseudo attacker wins during the jackpot game in the first control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content of. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the main controller in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows the RAM configuration of the main controller in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special symbol big hit random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a small hit random number table, and (c) is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the ordinary hit random number table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table, (c). Is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of the variation pattern selection table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table for normal / latent probability schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the variation pattern selection table for probability variation schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram shown in. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hold rank selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hold mode selection table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the treasure box mode selection table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the effect counter group schematically. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the display control device in 1st control example. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surfaces B to D. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the back surface E. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through-gate passage processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the general drawing look-ahead process which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the other winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern reception process which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the prize information-related processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the hold mode selection process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the treasure box mode selection process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-related processing which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the right attacker jackpot related processing executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pseudo-attacker effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the stop process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation effect setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the operation effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the charge effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the liquid crystal display execution management process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the operation effect management process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (A) is a flowchart showing the advance notice effect display process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the variable replacement switching process executed by the MPU in the display control device. Is. (A) is a flowchart showing the operation effect command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the button fusion display process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo winning display process executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control device. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the start of the point acquisition effect in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content indicating the end of the point acquisition effect. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the point acquisition effect on the reserved ball in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content showing the reach selection variation pattern. be. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the pseudo-variation in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content showing the point consumption re-variation. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the symbol HOLD selection screen in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the symbol HOLD screen in the second control example. .. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram shown in. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the point selection table with hold in the 2nd control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the point selection table without hold in the 2nd control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation point selection table in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the display position in the second control example. be. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit consumption point selection table in the second control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the deviated consumption point selection table in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern reception process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the point selection process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the advance notice setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special point selection process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the consumption reach selection process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the V interrupt process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 2nd control example. (A) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member in the third control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the third control example. It is a schematic diagram shown in. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content of the initial operation data in the 3rd control example schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the launch operation data in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the origin operation data in the third control example. be. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first operation data in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic showing the contents of the second operation data in the third control example schematically. It is a figure. It is a flowchart which showed the initial operation setting process which is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the initial discharge operation setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the operation control processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st operation setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge operation setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd operation setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the firing operation setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 4th control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the internal structure of the special prize-winning apparatus in the 4th control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine in the 4th control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of the effect executed corresponding to the game state in the 4th control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of display contents showing the effect in the latent effect A mode in the fourth control example, and (b) is the effect in the latent effect B mode in the fourth control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content which showed. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol per random number 4 table in the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small hit random number 4 table in the fourth control example schematically. It is a schematic diagram shown, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ordinary random number 4 table in the fourth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 table in the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table in the fourth control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents schematically. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection 4 table in the 4th control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the 4 tables for probability variation in the 4th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the latent accuracy 4 tables in the 4th control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the time saving 4 tables in the 4th control example. It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the RAM of the main control device in the 4th control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol change start processing 4 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol variation execution process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol change start processing 4 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process 4 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special figure 2 deviation variation processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol variation execution process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the ordinary symbol variation process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot end processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process 4 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the state command processing 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the pseudo-effect setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of the 1st control example.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 111, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following description, the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1 will be described with the front side of the paper as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper as the rear (back) side. Further, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left side (left). ) Side will be explained respectively. Further, the arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 4 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. The outer frame 11 has a front view (in order to support the inner frame 4).
(See FIG. 1) Metal hinges 18 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side, and the inner frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side with the side on which the hinge 18 is provided as an opening / closing axis.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to perform a ball game. In the inner frame 4, a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a are mounted on the game board 1.
A launch rail (not shown) or the like that guides the vehicle to the front region of 3 is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof.
And are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front door 5 and the lower plate unit 15. 5 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 4 and the lock of the front door 5 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyway 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 5c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses 8 is arranged on the back surface side of the front door 5, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, on the upper surface of the upper plate 17, the frame button 2
2 is provided. The frame button 22 is, for example, a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).
It is operated by the player when changing the stage of the effect displayed in, or changing the effect content of the super reach.

The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door 5 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 5c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. 2)
The certificate stamp or the like attached to the pachinko machine 10 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

Below the window portion 5c, a ball lending operation portion 40 is arranged. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. Pachinko machine 10
When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the banknote, the ball is lent out according to the operation. Will be.
Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium).
As long as there is a balance on the card or the like, the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17. Return button 43
Is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. The pachinko machine, a so-called cash machine, in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. Lower plate 5
On the right side of 0, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launching unit 112a, and a launch stop switch 51 for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period.
It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 by the change of electric resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 is formed on a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view.
In addition to a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills for ball guidance, rails 76, 77, general winning openings 63, 1st
The winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled and configured, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). Be done. The base plate 60 is made of wood made by laminating thin plate materials, and is formed so that the player cannot see various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof.
The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in the through hole of the game board 13. It is fixed from the front side with tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape on the front surface of the game board 13.
Is planted, and an arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed of a strip-shaped metal plate is planted at the inner position of the outer rail 77, similarly to the outer rail 77. The inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area (a winning opening or the like is arranged) on the front surface of the game board 13 which is partitioned by two rails 76, 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails.
The area where the fired ball flows down).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. The tip of the inner rail 76 (Fig. 2)
A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the upper left portion of the game board 13 to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. 1st
The symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first one. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable change jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or an off symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. In addition, a plurality of L
The ED is configured so that the emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED is different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is given to either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. The jackpot type determined here is the 15R probability variation jackpot,
4R probability variation jackpot and 15R normal jackpot are available. 1st symbol display device 37A, 3
In 7B, not only whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit is shown as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the big hit type is shown.

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high-probability state after. In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds.
It is a big hit that shifts to a low-probability state and shortens the time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations).

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a big hit is increased as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" means a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In the "low probability state", the time saving state (during the time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game that is neither probable nor shortened (
Neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol has increased).

During probabilistic change or shortening of time, not only the probability of winning the second symbol increases, but also the second winning opening 64
The time for opening the first electric accessory 640a accompanying 0 is also changed, and a longer time is set as compared with the normal time. When the first electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the second winning opening 640 is compared with the case where the first electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). The ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit. The change may be made so that the number of times that the first electric accessory 640a is opened is increased more than in the normal state. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the time when the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the first electric accessory per hit. At least one of the number of times the 640a is opened may be changed. In addition, the time during which the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the number of times the first electric accessory 640a is opened at one time are not changed during the probability change or the time reduction. It may be changed so that only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased as compared with the normal medium.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 has a first winning opening 64 and a second winning opening 64.
The first symbol display device 37A, triggered by any winning (starting winning) of any of the winning openings 640,
Passing of a ball of a first through gate 66 and a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays fluctuations of the third symbol while synchronizing with the fluctuation display in 37B. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of an LED that variablely displays the second symbol is provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three. Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device displays a symbol each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 66 (second symbol (second symbol).
(Not shown)), a variable display is performed in which the "○" symbol and the "×" symbol are alternately lit for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. In addition, if the result of the winning lottery is not correct, the second symbol display device will display the change of the third symbol and then "
The symbol of "x" is stopped and displayed.

The pachinko machine 10 is a first electric accessory 64 attached to the second winning opening 640 when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”).
It is configured so that 0a is in the operating state (opened) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the normal time.
Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the first electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the first one for each hit that increases the hit probability.
If the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or the shortening of the time by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a, the variation display of the second symbol is displayed. The time may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. 1st to
The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board can pass through the balls flowing down the game board. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, the second through gate 66
A lottery will be held to win the design. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and
If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.
If the result of the winning lottery is wrong, the symbol of "x" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the first through gate 66 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). ) Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol hold lamps are provided for the maximum number of hold lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37A,
It may be performed by using a part of 37B and the third symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. again,
The maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the first through gate 66 is not limited to four times.
It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins in the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 (not shown) is turned on due to the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In this embodiment, the first
The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same, but the ball wins in the first winning opening 64. The number of prize balls paid out when the ball is won and the number of prize balls paid out when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball is won in the first winning opening 64. To 3 pieces
The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins a prize in the second prize opening 640 may be configured as five.

Further, on the left side of the front view of the first winning opening 64, a third winning opening 82 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins, the third winning opening 82 can throw the winning ball to the first opening 511 of the distribution unit 500, which will be described later, via the throwing unit 600. That is, the third winning opening 82 is arranged in a state of communicating with the first opening 511, which will be described later.

A third electric accessory 82a is attached to the third winning opening 82. The third electric accessory 82a is configured to be rotationally displaced with respect to the game board 13 so as to be openable and closable, and is normally configured to be openable and closable.
a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win a prize in the third winning opening 82.
On the other hand, when a big hit is determined triggered by the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, the third electric accessory 82a is opened (expanded) for a predetermined time before, after, or during the big hit. The state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the third winning opening 82. In addition, the third winning opening 82
A sensor device SE1 that detects a passing ball is mounted on the downstream side of the above.

The timing of opening the third electric accessory 82a is the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 56.
It does not have to be performed with the winning of 40 as a trigger, and as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed with the passage of the ball of the first through gate 66 sleeping, the symbol of "○" is displayed with the second symbol. When displayed on the device, it may be open.

A first electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. This first electric accessory 64
0a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state).
Therefore, it is difficult for the ball to win the second prize opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 640a is displayed. It becomes an open state (enlarged state), and it becomes easy for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the probabilistic change and during the time reduction than during the normal period.
In addition, since the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, "○" is displayed in the variable display of the second symbol.
The symbol of is easily displayed, and the number of times that the first electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the first electric accessory 640a is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 640 is compared with the normal time.
It is possible to create a state in which the ball is easy to win.

Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first electric accessory 640a as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed").
), It is advantageous for the player to get many chances of a big hit lottery by winning a prize in the first winning opening 64 and aim to become a big hit.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning opening 640 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is launched toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the first through gate 66. It is advantageous for the player to open the first electric accessory 640a and aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). How to do "
It can be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because the way of hitting the ball can be changed.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10,
When the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a jackpot, the first winning symbol is set so that the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is set for a predetermined time (for example, 30).
It will be released until the lapse of seconds or until 10 balls are won.

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis.
And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64, for example. It may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

In the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82, is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. NS. The first out opening 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 1.
16 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. Board box 100 ~
The 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). again,
A sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal,
It is possible to know whether or not the board boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is equipped with a case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispenses balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the launch control device 11 is provided.
No. 2 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A RAM 203
In addition, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 3 are used by the MPU 201.
7A, 37B, the display setting in the third symbol display device 81, the lottery of the display result in the second symbol display device, and the like, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. Work area where values are stored (
It has a work area). The RAM 203 retains data by supplying a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off (backup).
All the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, and first symbol display devices 37A and 37B.
A solenoid consisting of a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a as an axis, and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory. 209 is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 and a power supply device 1 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and the like.
A RAM erase switch circuit 253, which will be described later, is connected to the MPU 201, and the MPU 201 has signals output from various switches 208 and R output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.
Various processes are executed based on the AM erasure signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is M, similarly to the RAM 203 of the main control device 110.
A stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the PU211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU211 are stored, and a work area (work area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I / O, etc. are stored. have. RAM 213 is a pachinko machine 10
Even after the power supply is cut off, the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) the data, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 also has a power failure signal SG from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like.
1 is configured to be input, and when the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as a power failure processing is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 is a ball launch unit 112 so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51.
It controls a. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off ().
The firing solenoid is excited according to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 on the condition that it is not operated), and the ball is launched with the strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51. ..

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). Display control device 114 such as display) and notice effect
It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed in 1. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. I / O port 2
A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to 25, respectively. The other device 228 includes drive motors KM1, KM2, and KM3.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22.
The display control device 114 is instructed to change the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81 or change the effect content at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113,
Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226 according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81, and the display content is made to correspond to the display content. Controls the lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and the third symbol display device 8 is based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113.
It controls the display such as the variation effect of the third symbol in 1. In addition, the display control device 1
14 appropriately transmits a display command notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are combined. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (FIG. 3).
It has a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with (see). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 is an alternating current 2 supplied from the outside.
Various switches such as various switches 208 and solenoid 20 that take in a voltage of 4 volts.
Generates 12 volt voltage for driving solenoids such as 9, motor, etc., 5 volt voltage for logic, backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage and backup voltage are generated. The required voltage is supplied to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 uses the MPU of the main controller 110 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like.
This is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 211 of the 201 and the payout control device 111. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Power supply unit 2
In 51, even after the DC stable 24 volt voltage becomes less than 22 volt, the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, is returned to the normal value for a sufficient time for executing the NMI interruption process. It is configured to maintain. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operating unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 10. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective front view of the operating unit 200 and the gaming board 13. 7 to 10 are front views of the operating unit 200.

In FIG. 7, the upper displacement member 940 is retracted upward and the lower displacement member 440 is retracted downward. In FIG. 8, the upper displacement member 940 rotates downward from the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 9, the displaced state is the state in which the lower displacement member 440 is projected from the state shown in FIG. 7 to the first overhang position described later, and in FIG. 10, the lower displacement member 440 is the maximum overhang. The states displaced to the second overhanging position, which is the position, are shown in the figure.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operation unit 200 is a back case 30 formed in a box shape.
Distribution unit 5A 00, which is provided with 0 and is attached to the back surface of the upper displacement unit 900, the lower displacement unit 400, the rotation unit 700, and the game board 13 in the internal space of the rear case 300.
And the throwing unit 600 are accommodated.

The rear case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front, and the wall portions 301 and 302 respectively. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. A front-view rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 can be visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

The upper displacement unit 900 is slidably arranged on a horizontally long base member 910 in front view rectangular arranged in the upper portion of the opening 301a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and the base member 910 thereof. With the upper displacement member 940, the opening 301a of the rear case 300 (that is, that is,
On the front side of the third symbol display device 81), an effect of rotationally displacing the upper displacement member 940 while sliding it is executably formed. A detailed description of the upper displacement unit 900 will be described later.

The lower displacement unit 400 is slidably arranged on a horizontally long base member 410 with a rectangular front view arranged in the lower portion of the opening 301a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and the base member 410 thereof. The lower displacement member 440 is provided, and the lower displacement member 440 is slidably and rotationally displaced on the front side of the opening 301a (that is, the third symbol display device 81) of the rear case. A detailed description of the lower displacement unit 400 will be described later.

The rotating unit 700 has a rear base 720 having a substantially rectangular front view arranged on the right side (arrow) of the front view of the lower portion of the opening 301a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and the front of the back base 720. The rotating body 800 is provided in the above, and the effect of rotationally displacing the rotating body 800 via a transparent plate portion formed on the lower right side of the front view of the game board 13 is visible to the player. A detailed description of the rotating unit 700 will be described later.

The throwing unit 600 is attached to the back side of the game board 13, and is the third winning opening 82 of the game board 13.
A path for throwing the game ball thrown from the back side of the game board 13 to the first opening 511 of the distribution unit 500, which will be described later, is formed.

The distribution unit 500 includes a path forming member 510 attached to the back surface side of the game board 13 and a base plate 520 arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed so as to face the path forming member 510.
It is provided with a distribution member 540 that distributes a game ball attached to the base plate 520 and flowing down between the path forming member 510 and the base plate 520 to each throwing path (second throwing path KR2 or third throwing path KR3). .. The game ball distributed to the distribution member 540 is sent to the lower displacement unit 400. A detailed description of the distribution unit 500 will be described later.

<The first decorative body and the second decorative body are arranged adjacent to each other in the front-rear direction>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16, the general winning opening unit 1 arranged on the game board 13
50 will be described.

First, the general winning opening unit 150 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12.
11 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13, and FIG. 12A is a general winning opening unit 1.
50 is a front view, FIG. 12 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the general winning opening unit 150 in line XIIb-XIIb of FIG. 12 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a center frame 86 arranged in an opening portion formed in the base plate 60. And a general winning opening unit 150.

The base plate 60 includes a first opening 60a that is opened in the central portion in a front view, and a second opening 60b that is opened downward in the gravity direction of the game region formed by the rail members 76 and 77. .. A center frame 86 is arranged in the first opening 60a, and the second opening 60 is provided.
A general winning opening unit 150 is arranged in b. Further, a sticker having a decoration (pattern, pattern, etc.) formed on the front side (arrow F direction side) is attached to the base plate 60 so that the player can visually recognize the decoration. The decoration on the front side of the base plate 60 is not limited to the sticker, and the decoration may be printed (painted) on the front surface of the base plate 60.

The general winning opening unit 150 is arranged in the game area (front of the base plate 60) of the game board 13, and the route of the game ball flowing down the game area can be changed. In addition, the general winning opening unit 1
50 is arranged at a position along the lower end in the gravity direction (arrow D direction side) in the front view (arrow B direction view) with respect to the game area formed by being surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77. Will be done. In addition, in FIGS. 13 to 16, the seal arranged on the base plate 60 is illustrated with the reference numeral of the decorative member 60c. Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative member 60c has a character (person).
Is drawn.

The general winning opening unit 150 has a main body portion 151 formed in a crescent shape when viewed from the front, and a main body portion 151.
The first standing portion 152, which is erected on the front side (arrow F direction side) from the end portion of the main body portion 151,
Arranged on the back side of the main body portion 151 and the second standing portion 153 extending from the end portion of the first standing portion 152 on the upper side in the gravity direction (arrow U direction side) toward the center side of the game area. Decorative member 15 to be
4 and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) general winning openings 63 formed on the front side of the main body portion 151.
And mainly prepare.

The main body portion 151 is set to have an outer shape slightly larger than the opening shape of the second opening 60b opened in the plate thickness direction of the base plate 60, and is covered with the opening of the second opening 60b.
It is arranged on the front side of 0. Further, the second opening 60b allows the game ball flowing into the general winning opening 63 arranged in the main body portion 151 to be thrown to the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60). Further, the main body portion 151 has a base plate 6 toward the outer end portion from the inner portion in the front view.
An inclined surface 151a inclined to the 0 side, a recess 151b recessed in the back surface on the base plate 60 side (arrow B direction side), and a back surface portion 151 forming the back surface of the main body portion 151 excluding the recessed portion 151b.
It is formed mainly with d and.

The inclined surface 151a is formed so as to be inclined by about 30 degrees with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 can be brought into contact with the inclined surface 151a and flowed down along the inclination of the inclined surface 151a, and can be moved to the front side of the main body portion 151.

Here, the inclined surface 151a is not formed at the end portion of the main body portion 151, and the side surface of the main body portion 151 is formed.
When formed perpendicular to the front surface of the base plate 60, the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 abuts (collides) with the side surface of the main body 151 from a direction orthogonal to the side surface of the main body 151. There is a risk that the abutting game ball will bounce in the direction opposite to the flow direction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the game ball abutting on the side surface of the main body portion 151 can be moved to the front side of the main body portion by the inclined surface 151a, the flow of the game ball flowing down the game area is temporary. It is possible to suppress the stagnation. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down from the front side of the base plate 60 to the front of the main body portion 151 of the general winning opening unit 150.

As described above, the back surface portion 151d is the back surface of the main body portion 151, and the recess 1 in the rear view
It is formed with a constant width around 51b. Further, the back portion 151d is a general winning opening unit 1.
In a state where the 50 is arranged on the base plate 60, it is arranged in contact with the front surface of the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c).

The recess 151b is recessed toward the front side (the side in the direction of arrow F). In addition, the recess 151b
Has a recessed bottom surface 151b2 which is a bottom surface in the recessed direction, and an inner side surface 151b3 which is erected from the outer edge of the recessed bottom surface 151b2 toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side).

The recessed bottom surface 151b2 is an adhesive surface of the decorative member 154 described later, and is formed as a flat surface parallel to the front surface of the main body portion 151. As a result, when the decoration of the decorative member 154 is visually recognized through the main body portion 151, the decoration of the decorative member 154 can be uniformly visually recognized.

The inner side surface 151b3 extends in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) in the front view. Further, the shape of the inner side surface 151b3 in the front view is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the decorative member 154 described later. As a result, when the decorative member 154 is arranged in the recess 151b, the decorative member 1
It is possible to prevent the 54 from protruding to the outside of the recess 151b. Therefore, the general winning opening unit 1
When the 50 is arranged on the base plate 60, the decorative member 154 is sandwiched between the back surface portion 151d and the base plate 60, so that a gap is formed between the back surface portion 151d of the main body portion 151 and the base plate 60. It can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the main body portion 151 from projecting to the front side of the base plate 60 from the normal arrangement position. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down from the front side of the base plate 60 to the front of the main body portion 151 of the general winning opening unit 150.

The recess 151b is a recess for accommodating the decorative member 154 described later in the recessed space, and the recessed depth (the recessed distance to the front side (arrow F direction side)) is larger than the thickness dimension of the decorative member 154. It is set large. Further, the recess 151b is formed from the end portion of the main body portion 151 in the front view to the main body portion 1.
It is recessed inside the 51 along the shape of the end portion of the main body portion 151 at a position separated by a certain distance.

Therefore, when the decorative member 154 is arranged inside the recess 151b, it is possible to prevent the back surface of the decorative member 154 from projecting toward the back surface side of the main body portion 151. Therefore, when the general winning opening unit 150 is arranged on the base plate 60, the decorative member 154 is sandwiched between the recessed bottom surface 151b2 and the base plate 60, so that the back surface portion 151d of the main body portion 151 and the base plate 60 are combined. It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two. As a result, it is possible to prevent the main body portion 151 from projecting to the front side of the base plate 60 from the normal arrangement position. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down from above the gravity direction (arrow U direction) of the main body portion 151 to the front of the main body portion 151 of the general winning opening unit 150.

The first upright portion 152 is erected on the front side (arrow F direction side) from the end portion of the main body portion 151 on the end portion side (inner rail 76 side) of the game area. The erection dimension of the first erection portion 152 is set to be substantially the same as the width dimension of the inner rail 76 planted in front of the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c) in the planting direction. Further, in the first standing portion 152, the distance between the front door 5 covering the front side of the game board 13 facing the glass unit 16 is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball flowing down the front side of the main body portion 151 is moved to the first standing portion 1 at the lower end portion in the gravity direction of the game region.
It can collide with 52. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the front side of the main body portion 151 from colliding with the inner rail 76, and it is possible to prevent the inner rail 76 from colliding with the game ball and being bent.

Here, the space between the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 facing each other is a space for guiding the game ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13, and the inner rail 7
The space for disposing reinforcement or the like between the facing 6 and the outer rail 77 is limited. Therefore, it is difficult to dispose the reinforcement for the purpose of preventing the inner rail 76 from bending, and there is a risk that the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the inner rail 76 and the inner rail 76 bends.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the general winning opening unit 150 arranged in the game area (
The first upright portion 152) makes it difficult for the game ball flowing down the game area to collide with the inner rail 76. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the distance between the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 from being changed by bending the inner rail 76. As a result, the game ball can be stably launched into the game area.

The second erection portion 153 extends downwardly and inclined toward the center of the game area (first winning opening 64) from the end portion of the first erection portion 152 on the upper side in the gravity direction (arrow U direction side) in the front view. It is installed (see Fig. 2). As a result, the game ball flowing down between the inner rail 76 and the center frame 83 facing each other (see FIG. 2) is placed on the upper surface (the surface on the arrow U direction side) of the downwardly inclined extending portion of the second standing portion 153. When the ball is thrown, the game ball can be rolled along the downward inclination of the second standing portion 153 and thrown toward the center of the game area. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area on the side opposite to each other (arrow L direction side) between the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 is won (inflow) into the first winning opening 64 arranged in the center of the game area. It can be made easy.

The decorative member 154 is formed in a plate shape and is adhered to the back surface side of the main body portion 151. Further, in the decorative member 154, a decoration formed on the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and a decoration continuous with the front view are formed on the front surface on the main body portion 151 side. As a result, the decoration formed on the base plate 60 can be visually recognized as the decoration of 1 together with the decoration of the decorative member 154. note that,
In the present embodiment, a part of the character (person) is drawn on the decorative member 154, and the character of the decorative member 60c and the character of the decorative member 154 can be visually recognized as one character.

Further, the decorative member 154 is formed of a light transmitting material. As a result, the light passing through the second opening 60b from the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 60 is incident from the back surface of the decorative member 154 and emitted from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the decorative member 154. Can be made to. Therefore, the decoration formed on the front surface of the decorative member 154 can be brightened so that the player can see it, and the player can easily see the decoration of the decorative member 154.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the base plate 60 and the general winning opening unit 150 will be described. FIG. 13 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in line XIII-XIII of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 13, the decorative member 154 is formed to have a larger outer shape than the opening shape of the second opening 60b of the base plate 60 in the front view. As a result, the general winning opening unit 150
Is disposed on the base plate 60, the end portion of the decorative member 154 is a recess 151b of the main body portion 151.
Is arranged between the recessed bottom surface 151b2 and the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c). Therefore,
When the adhesion between the main body portion 151 and the decorative member 154 is peeled off due to aged deterioration or the like, the decorative member 1
It is possible to prevent 54 from falling off from the game board 13.

Further, the decorative member 154 has a width dimension that overlaps with the base plate 60 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and has a circular shape of the base plate 60 into which a protrusion 155 projecting from the back surface of the main body portion 151 to be described later is inserted. It is set larger than the diameter of the opening 60 g (see FIG. 11). This will result in
It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the decoration of the decoration member 154 and the decoration member 60c in the front view due to the misalignment of the arrangement of the decoration member 154 with respect to the main body portion 151 or the misalignment of the position where the decoration member 60c is formed. .. As a result, the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decorative member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

Further, the three general winning openings 63 arranged in the main body 151 are connected to openings 514 to 516 of the distribution unit 500 (see FIG. 71) arranged on the back side of the game board 13.
The game ball that has won a prize in the general winning opening 63 is thrown to the fourth throwing path KR4 of the distribution unit 500. A detailed description of the distribution unit 500 will be described later.

Further, in the distribution unit 500, a substrate (not shown) having a light source capable of irradiating light on the front side is arranged on a base plate 520 (see FIG. 71), and the light emitted from the substrate is arranged on the base plate. The back surface of the general winning opening unit 150 is irradiated through the second opening 60b of 60.

Therefore, the second opening 60b is used as a space for irradiating the path of the game ball winning from the general winning opening 63 of the general winning opening unit 150 and the back surface of the general winning opening unit 150 with light. This eliminates the need to separately form an opening for throwing a game ball, an opening for passing light, and two openings, so that the entire back surface of the general winning opening unit 150 is irradiated with light. It can be made easier, and the main body 151 of the general winning opening unit 150
General winning openings 63 can be arranged in the entire area of. As a result, the general winning opening unit 150
In addition to being able to improve the degree of freedom in designing the above, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the decoration (decorative member 154) of the general winning opening unit 150 by emitting light from the entire area of the general winning opening unit 150.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, the decorative decorative member 154 connected to the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is a main body portion arranged along the front surface of the base plate 60. Since it is arranged on the back surface of 151, the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decorative member 154 can be arranged at positions adjacent to each other (approaching) in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).
As a result, the decorative member 60 is tilted from an angle inclined with respect to the front view of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as the upper end in the gravity direction of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1)).
When c and the decorative member 154 are visually recognized, the decorations of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 are visually recognized in a shifted manner as compared with the case where the decoration of the general winning opening unit is arranged in front of the general winning opening unit. Can be suppressed. As a result, the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 of the base plate 60
The connecting portion with the decoration of the above can be visually recognized by the player in the same positional relationship regardless of the viewpoint of the player, and the design of the game board 13 can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the connection between the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 will be described in detail. FIG. 14 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the gaming board 13 in the range XIV of FIG. In FIG. 14, the light path visually recognized by the player is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As described above, the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decorative member 154 are visually recognized by the player as one decoration in total. Therefore, in order for the player to visually recognize the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decorative member 154 as one decoration (pattern), it is necessary to suppress the positional deviation between the two decorations. However, when forming the decoration on the base plate 60 or when arranging the decorative member 154 on the main body portion 151, it is difficult to arrange the decoration in an accurate position (the same position each time). Therefore, when the general winning opening unit 150 is arranged on the base plate 60, the decorative member 154 is arranged so as to be displaced from the position of the decorative member 154 with respect to the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60, so that the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 are arranged. There is a problem that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decoration of 1 as a decoration of 1.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the end portion of the decorative member 154 is arranged on the back surface side of the inclined surface 151a. As a result, the decoration of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60 of the base plate 60
The connection portion with the decoration of c can be made difficult to be accurately recognized by the player (the connection portion is blurred and made visible to the player). Therefore, the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 can be recognized by the player as the decoration of 1.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, the connecting portion between the decoration of the decorative member 154 and the decoration of the decorative member 60c (hereinafter referred to as “boundary P1” (see FIG. 14)) is the inclined surface 1 of the main body portion 151.
It is located on the back side of 51a. Therefore, the light emitted from the boundary P1 toward the player's viewpoint and the connecting portion between the front surface of the main body 151 and the inclined surface 151a (hereinafter referred to as “boundary P2” (see FIG. 14)) of the player The light emitted toward the viewpoint can be the light reflected at different positions of the decorative member 60c or the decorative member 154 (that is, on the path of the light emitted from the boundary P1 toward the player's viewpoint). In addition, it is possible to suppress the formation of the boundary P2).

Therefore, at the boundary P1, the misalignment of the decorative member 60c with respect to the decorative member 154 is easily recognized by the player as the misalignment of the decoration, and at the boundary P2, the misalignment of the decoration due to the difference in the refraction direction of the light is easily recognized by the player. Since the decorations visually recognized by the player from the respective positions of the boundary P1 and the boundary P2 can be the decorations at different positions, the misalignment of the decorations at the boundary P1 and the boundary P2 is the same at the same position. It can be suppressed from being visually recognized by the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being recognized by the player because the misalignment of the decoration at the boundary P1 and the misalignment of the decoration at the boundary P2 are combined to increase the amount of the misalignment of the decoration. As a result, the decoration of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as the decoration of 1, and the design of the game board 13 can be improved.

Further, by arranging the boundary P1 on the back side of the inclined surface 151a, from the player's point of view, the connecting portion between the decorative member 60c and the main body portion 151 (hereinafter referred to as "boundary P3" (see FIG. 14)) and The boundary P1 can be arranged between the boundary P2 and the boundary P2. Therefore, during the position shift position (boundary P2, P3) of the decoration due to the refraction of the light when the light is emitted from the main body portion 151,
The boundary P1 can be arranged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the area to be recognized as being displaced from the position of the decoration from being extended. That is, it is possible to limit the area where the decoration is visually recognized out of position with respect to the front surface of the game board 13. As a result, the misaligned area of the decoration can be reduced with respect to the game area of the game board 13, so that the decoration of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as the decoration of 1.

In this embodiment, the face of the character is decorated on the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60.
The body of the character decorated on the decorative member 60c is decorated on the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 150. That is, the outline of the decoration is positioned at the connecting portion of the decoration between the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the positional deviation of the connecting portion between the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 is the contour line of the decoration. As a result, the decorative member 6
The decoration of 0c and the decorative member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as the decoration of 1.

Further, in this embodiment, the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 is decorated up to the neck of the character's face, the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 150, the decorative member 154, and the decorative member 6
The clothes worn by the body of the character decorated in 0c are decorated, and the color of the character's face (neck) and the clothes are different (in this embodiment, the face is flesh-colored and the clothes are black). As a result, by setting the misalignment of the connecting portion between the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 as a portion having a different hue, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 are separated. Can be done. As a result, the decoration of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as the decoration of 1.

As described above, the main body portion 151 is provided with a recess 151b on the back surface side, and a decorative member 154 is disposed inside the recess 151b. Further, the shape of the inner side surface (inner side surface 151b3) of the recess 151b is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the decorative member 154 in the front view. Thereby, when the decorative member 154 is arranged in the main body portion 151, the inner side surface 151b3 of the recess 151b can be used as a guide (positioning). As a result, when the decorative member 154 is attached to the main body portion 151, it is possible to prevent the arrangement of the decorative member 154 from being displaced with respect to the main body portion 151.

Further, on the back surface side of the main body portion 151, protrusions 155 (see FIG. 15) protruding in a columnar shape are formed at a plurality of positions (three places (see FIG. 15) in the present embodiment). The protrusion 155 is a positioning protrusion that positions the general winning opening unit 150 with the base plate 60 when the general winning opening unit 150 is arranged in the base plate 60, and is inserted into the recess 60d recessed in the base plate 60. Also, the protrusion 155
At least one place (one place in this embodiment) is the recessed bottom surface 151b2 of the recess 151b.
It is projected from and inserted into an opening formed in the decorative member 154. Therefore, the protrusion 155 can be used for positioning when the decorative member 154 is arranged on the main body portion 151.

Therefore, the protrusion 155 can be used for positioning when the general winning opening unit 150 is arranged on the base plate 60, and can be positioned when the decorative member 154 is arranged on the main body portion 151. Therefore, since the positioning portion when arranging the decorative member 154 on the front side of the decorative member 60c can be the same portion, the decoration of the decorative member 60c and the decoration of the decorative member 154 are misaligned. Can be suppressed. As a result, the decoration of the decorative member 60c and the decoration of the decorative member 154 can be combined and easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

Further, the protrusion 155 projecting from the recessed bottom surface 151b2 has a range E1 described later (FIG. 15).
It is formed in the area of (see) (the area to which the adhesive tape 154a is attached). As a result, the main body 15
When arranging the decorative member 154 in 1, with the protrusion 155 inserted in the opening of the decorative member 154, one part of the edge portion of the decorative member 154 is arranged so as to be aligned with the inner side surface 151b3 of the recess 151b. This makes it possible to position the decorative member 154 at two locations with respect to the main body portion 151. Therefore, it is not necessary to align the edges of the decorative member 154 at two positions on the inner side surface 151b3 of the recess 151b and dispose the decorative member 154 on the main body portion 151. As a result, the work of arranging the decorative member 154 on the main body portion 151 can be simplified.

Next, the adhesion between the main body portion 151 and the decorative member 154 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16. FIG. 15 is a rear view of the general winning opening unit 150, and FIG. 16 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the range XIV of FIG. In addition, in FIG. 15, the decorative member 1
The range of the adhesive tape 154a attached to the 54 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line with the reference numeral E1. Further, in FIG. 14, the light path visually recognized by the player is illustrated by a two-dot chain line. In the present embodiment, the adhesive tape 154a is formed of the light-transmitting double-sided tape, and the range E is formed.
It is affixed to 1.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the adhesive tape 154a for adhering the decorative member 154 and the main body portion 151 is attached along the end portion of the decorative member 154 with a constant width. As a result, in the area where the adhesive tape 154a is not attached (the part other than the range E1), the adhesive tape 154
A gap (space) having a predetermined width is formed between the main body portion 151 (concave bottom surface 151b2) and the decorative member 154 (front surface of the decorative member) by the thickness of a.

Further, the adhesive tape 154a passes through the boundary P3 from the end of the decorative member 154 and passes through the inclined surface 1
It is adhered to the region beyond the virtual line PK1 (see FIG. 14) orthogonal to 51a. This will result in
The range E1 (the end of the decorative member 154) to which the adhesive tape 154a is attached to the portion where the light emitted from the inclined surface 151a passing through the main body portion 151 is affected by the decoration of the decorative member 154 (the portion where the wavelength is changed) is attached. Department) can be. As a result, even when the player visually recognizes the general winning opening unit 150 from an angle equal to or higher than a predetermined angle, the decorative member 60c and the decoration of the decorative member 154 can be easily visually recognized by the player as one decoration.

Here, when the player visually recognizes the game board 13 from a position higher than usual (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as the upper end in the gravity direction of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1)), FIG. As shown, the light L exiting from the inclined surface 151a toward the player's line of sight repeatedly reflects the front and back surfaces of the main body portion 151 and passes through the inside of the main body portion 151. In this case, the decorative member 15
If the entire front surface of 4 is in contact with the main body portion 151 via the adhesive tape 154a, the wavelength of light is changed by the decoration of the decorative member 154 each time it is reflected on the decorative member 154 side. Therefore, the light that passes through the inside of the main body portion 151 and is emitted from the inclined surface 151a is the decorative member 15.
It cannot be reflected only by the change of wavelength due to the decoration of the end of 4. Therefore, the inclined surface 151
Since the decoration recognized by the player from a is different from the wavelength of the decoration visually recognized by the player from the front of the main body 151, there is a problem that the decorations are not connected between the main body 151 and the inclined surface 151a. rice field.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the range E1 is the adhesive portion of the decorative member 154 to the main body portion 151.
By doing so, it is possible to prevent the light L that reflects and passes through the inside of the main body portion 151 from being affected by the decoration of the decorative member 154 (so that the wavelength of the light is not changed). As a result, as shown in FIG. 16, the light emitted from the inclined surface 151a passing through the main body portion 151 attaches the adhesive tape 154a to the portion affected by the decoration of the decorative member 154 (the portion where the wavelength is changed).
Can be set to the range E1 (the end of the decorative member 154) to which the above is affixed, and can be easily seen by the player as being connected to the decoration of the inclined surface 151a which is visible to the player and the decoration adjacent to the decoration. As a result, the design of the game board 13 can be improved.

Next, the special winning device 550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 36. First, a method of arranging the special winning device 550 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective front view of the center frame 86.

As shown in FIG. 17, the center frame 86 has a base frame 86a formed in a substantially circular frame shape surrounding the central opening of the base plate 60, and a projecting portion protruding outward in the radial direction of the base frame 86a. It is configured to include 86b.

The base frame 86a has a shape along the central opening of the base plate 60, a part of the base frame 86a is inserted inside the central opening, and a portion excluding a part of the base frame 86a is the base plate 60. It is arranged on the base plate 60 in a state of projecting to the front side of the above.

The projecting portion 86b is projected on the right side of the front view (the side in the direction of the arrow R) with respect to the game area of the game board 13. As a result, the special winning device 550 arranged in the projecting portion 86b can be arranged on the right side of the front view (on the side in the direction of the arrow R) with respect to the game area, and when hitting right in the special game state. A part of the throwing path of the game ball can be configured by the special winning device 550.

Further, the projecting portion 86b is located above the opening 86b1 that opens in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) and above the opening 86b1 (arrow U direction) and toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side). It mainly includes a recess 86b2 to be recessed.

A part of the first unit 551 of the special winning device 550, which will be described later, is inserted into the opening 86b1. As a result, the first unit 551 can be connected to the second unit 552 of the special winning device 550 arranged on the back surface side of the projecting portion 86b via the opening 86b1.

The recess 86b2 is capable of accommodating a part of the first unit 551 of the special winning device 550, which will be described later, inside. Further, in the recess 86b2, a detection device 86b3 capable of detecting the passage of a game ball is provided.
Is arranged. Thereby, the game ball passing through the portion accommodated inside the recess 86b2 of the first unit 551 can be detected.

The special winning device 550 is arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the projecting portion 86b of the center frame 86 and the back side (arrow B direction side) of the projecting portion 86b. The second unit 552 is mainly provided with the second unit 552.

The first unit 551 is provided with a space (path) through which the game ball can flow, and a part of the first unit 551 is arranged in the game area of the game board 13. Further, the first unit 551 is arranged on the center frame 86 by a screw inserted through the second unit 552. A detailed description of the arrangement method of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 will be described later.

Next, the configuration of the first unit 551 of the special winning device 550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 20. 18 (a) is a front view of the first unit 551, and FIG. 18 (b) is a front view.
) Is a side view of the first unit 551, and FIG. 18 (c) is a rear view of the first unit 551. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective front view of the first unit 551, and FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective rear view of the first unit 551.

As shown in FIGS. 18 to 20, the first unit 551 includes a first path member 560 arranged on the front side and a second path member 570 arranged on the back side of the first path member 560. , A third path member 580 arranged on the back surface of the second path member 570, and the third path member 580 are mainly provided.

The first path member 560 is formed with a front plate 564 formed in a plate shape along the front surface of the game area of the game board 13 and a substantially U-shaped cross section opened on the upper side (arrow U direction side). The first receiving section 561, the second receiving section 562, and the third receiving section 563 projecting from the upper end to the back side of the face plate 564, and the first receiving section 561, the second receiving section 562, and the third receiving section 563 thereof. A first wall portion 565 formed in a row on the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the portion 563 and extending along a partial end portion of the front plate 564, and a lower portion of the first wall portion 565 thereof. It mainly comprises two sets of second wall portions 566 and third wall portions 567, which are formed in the above and are projected from two places separated by a predetermined interval.

The front plate 564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side of the flow path of the game ball formed between the second path member 570 or the third path member 580, which will be described later, and is formed of a light transmitting member. NS. As a result, the player can move the game ball flowing down inside the first unit 551 to the front plate 564.
It can be visually recognized through (through).

Further, the front plate 564 includes a guide portion 564a projecting from the second path member 570 side (back surface side (arrow B direction side)).

The guide portion 564a is provided with a front plate 564 by a game ball flowing down inside the first unit 551.
It is a wall portion that suppresses the entire wall surface of the wall surface from becoming dirty, and is a second path member 570 or a third path member described later.
It is extended along the flow path of the game ball flowing down between the paths facing the path member 580. Further, the guide portion 564a is projected at a position where the radius of the game ball is separated from the rolling surface of the game ball flowing down the first unit 551. In other words, the guide portion 564a is projected at a position substantially the same as the center position of the game ball flowing down the first path member 560. As a result, the portion where the front plate 564 and the game ball come into contact with each other can be limited to the protruding tip portion of the guide portion 564a. Therefore, the front plate 5
It is possible to suppress the occurrence of scratches and the transfer of dirt adhering to the game ball by contacting the entire area of 64 with the game ball. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down inside the first path member 560 via the front plate 564.

The first receiving unit 561, the second receiving unit 562, and the third receiving unit 563 are portions that receive the game ball flowing down from the gaming area above the first unit 551 (in the direction of arrow U) into the inside of the first unit 551. , The upper opening is set to a size larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562, and the third receiving portion 563 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) at the end portion on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the front plate 564. NS.

The first receiving unit 561 is set to have a larger receiving width (width dimension in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction)) of the game ball than the second receiving unit 562 and the third receiving unit 563. As a result, the game ball flowing into the special winning device 550 is more likely to flow into the first receiving unit 561 than the second receiving unit 562 or the third receiving unit 563.

Further, the first receiving portion 561 is communicated with a flow path formed inside the first unit 551. As a result, the game ball received by the first receiving unit 561 is flowed down inside the first unit 551. The flow path of the game ball of the first unit 551 will be described later.

The second receiving section 562 and the third receiving section 563 are communicated with a flow path formed inside the second unit 552, which will be described later. As a result, the game ball received by the second receiving unit 562 and the third receiving unit 563 is flowed down inside the second unit 552. The second unit 55
The flow path of No. 2 will be described later.

The first wall portion 565 is an inner wall that forms a space for throwing a game ball between facing the fourth wall portion 573 formed on the second path member 570, which will be described later. One end of the first wall portion 565 is connected to the lower side of the first receiving portion 561 described above, and the other end side extends in the left-right direction (arrow LR) over the lower side of the second receiving portion 562 and the third receiving portion 563. It is mainly composed of an upper side wall portion 565a extending in the direction) and a curved wall portion 565b formed by being curved in a substantially C shape in the rear view and connected to the upper side wall portion 565a.

The upper side wall portion 565a is an inner wall that covers the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573 (the surface on the arrow U direction side), which will be described later, above the rolling surface when the game ball rolls, and is the fourth wall portion 573. It is formed at a position separated from the diameter of the game ball on the upper side (arrow U direction side) in the direction orthogonal to the upper surface of the game ball.

The curved wall portion 565b is an inner wall that changes the rolling direction of the game ball that rolls on the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573, which will be described later, and is formed at a position facing the rolling side end portion of the fourth wall portion 573. NS. Further, the curved wall portion 565b is formed in a semicircular shape centered on the rolling side end portion of the fourth wall portion 573. As a result, the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573 can be guided to the lower surface side of the fourth wall portion 573 by flowing down along the inner wall of the curved wall portion 565b, and the rolling thereof can be performed. The moving direction can be opposite to the rolling direction of the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573.

The second wall portion 566 is an inner wall forming a space of a path branching from the main flow path of the game ball flowing down inside the first unit 551, and is a pair of wall portions projecting from the back surface of the front plate 564. The distance between the two is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. This makes it possible to increase the number of routes flowing down the first unit 551.

The third wall portion 567 is a wall portion forming an inner surface of a path branching from the main throwing path (main path SK3) of the game ball flowing down the inside of the first unit 551, and protrudes from the back surface of the front plate 564. The distance between the pair of wall portions facing each other is set to a dimension slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to increase the path of the game ball flowing down the first unit 551.

Further, the second wall portion 566 and the third wall portion 567 each have a downstream end as the first unit 5.
It is arranged on the opposite side of the 51 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). As a result, the game ball can be thrown to both sides of the first unit 551 in the left-right direction from the branch passage described later.

The second path member 570 includes a plate-shaped base plate 571 facing the front plate 564 of the first path member 560, and a fourth wall portion 5 projecting from the front surface of the base plate 571 toward the first path member 560.
73, a fifth wall portion 574 projecting downward from the fourth wall portion 573 at a predetermined distance, and a fifth wall portion 574 projecting downward from the fifth wall portion 574 at a predetermined distance. The sixth wall portion 575 to be formed is mainly provided.

The base plate 571 is arranged at a position slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball from the front plate 564 of the first path member 560. As a result, the game ball can flow down between the front plate 564 and the base plate 571. Further, the base plate 571 has a first opening portion 571 that opens at a position corresponding to each of the first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562, and the third receiving portion 563.
a, the second opening 571b and the third opening 571c, the fourth opening 571d opening below the first opening 571a, and opening above each of the fifth wall portion 574 and the sixth wall portion 575. 5th opening 571e and 6th opening 571f, 5th wall 574 and 6th wall 575
It is provided with a recessed portion 571 g, which is located between the two and is recessed on the back surface side.

The first opening 571a, the second opening 571b, and the third opening 571c provide game balls that flow into the first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562, and the third receiving portion 563 of the first path member 560 described above. It is an opening through which the base plate 571 is passed to the back surface side.

Further, the base plate 571 has a first opening 571a, a second opening 571b, and a third opening 5.
A first rolling portion 576, a second rolling portion 577, and a third rolling portion 578 projecting from the lower end portion of the 71c to the back surface side are provided. As a result, the game ball that passes through the first opening 571a is attached to the third path member 580, which will be described later, and the game ball that passes through the second opening 571b or the third opening 571c is attached to the third path member 580, which will be described later.
The ball is thrown to the second unit 552, which will be described later.

The first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d have a third path member 580, which will be described later, on the back surface side.
Part of is overturned. As a result, the game ball passing through the first opening 571a is thrown from the fourth opening 571d to the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 571.

The fourth wall portion 573 projects from the base plate 571 along the lower end portion of the fourth opening 571d, and extends in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). Further, the fourth wall portion 573 is formed so that the upper surface is inclined downward from the side of the fourth opening 571d opened on the left side of the front view of the base plate 571 toward the right side of the front view (the side in the direction of arrow R). .. As a result, the game ball that passes through the fourth opening 571d and is thrown to the front side of the base plate 571 is placed on the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573, and the base plate 571 is tilted by the inclination of the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573. You can throw the ball to the right side of (arrow R direction side).

The fifth wall portion 574 is a portion serving as a rolling surface of the game ball thrown from the curved wall portion 565b of the first wall portion 565 described above, and is a portion of the game ball in a direction orthogonal to the lower surface of the fourth wall portion 573. It is projected at a position separated below the diameter, and is extended in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) of the base plate 571. Further, the upper surface (the surface on the arrow U direction side) of the fifth wall portion is inclined downward as it goes from the curved wall portion 565b side (arrow R direction side) to the recessed portion 574g side (arrow L direction side) described later. Is formed. As a result, the game ball thrown from the curved wall portion 565b to the upper surface of the fifth wall portion 574 can be rolled to the recessed portion 574g side. Further, the fifth wall portion 574 includes a first receiving recess 574a and a second receiving recess 574b that are recessed downward on the rolling surface of the game ball.

The first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b are arranged side by side in the extending direction of the fifth wall portion 574. Further, the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b are set so that the recessed width and the recessed depth are larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, a fifth opening 571e that opens into the base plate 571 is formed inside the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b. As a result, the game ball flowing into the first receiving recess 574a or the second receiving recess 574b passes through the fifth opening 571e and is sent to the back surface side of the base plate 571.

The recessed portion 574g is formed above the downstream end portion (the end portion on the arrow L direction side) of the fifth wall portion 574, and a gaming ball that rolls on the upper surface of the fifth wall portion 574 is recessed. The ball can flow into the inside of the 574 g and be thrown to the upper part of the sixth wall portion 575 formed below the recessed portion 574 g (in the direction of arrow D).

The sixth wall portion 575 is a portion that becomes a rolling surface of a game ball that rolls on the fifth wall portion 574 and is thrown to the recessed portion 574 g, and is a game ball downward from the lower surface of the fifth wall portion 574. It is projected from the base plate 571 at a position separated from the diameter of the base plate 571, and extends in the left-right direction (arrow LR) of the base plate 571. Further, the sixth wall portion 575 is formed with its upper surface inclined downward from the recessed portion 574 g side (arrow L direction side) toward the above-mentioned third wall portion 567 side. As a result, the recessed portion 574
The game ball thrown from g to the upper surface of the sixth wall portion 575 can be rolled toward the throwing path side formed by the third wall portion 567. Further, the sixth wall portion 575 includes a third receiving recess 575a and a fourth receiving recess 575b that are recessed downward on the rolling surface of the game ball.

The third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b are arranged side by side in the extending direction of the sixth wall portion 575. Further, the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b are set so that the recessed width and the recessed depth are larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, a sixth opening 571f that opens into the base plate 571 is formed inside the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b. As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b passes through the sixth opening 571f and is sent to the back surface side of the base plate 571.

The third path member 580 includes a first lining member 581 arranged on the back surface of the second path member 570 on the upper side in the gravity direction (arrow U direction side) and a lower side in the gravity direction of the second path member 570 (arrow). The second lining member 582 arranged on the back surface of the D direction side), the first lining member 581, and the second lining member 5
A first drive unit 583 arranged between 82 and a second drive unit 584 arranged on the back surface of the second lining member 582 are mainly provided.

The first covering member 581 includes a curved portion 581a arranged on the back surface side of the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d described above, and a plate-shaped mounting portion 58 connected to the lower side of the curved portion 581a.
Mainly includes 1b.

The curved portion 581a includes a first opening 571a and a fourth opening 571d (second path member 570).
) Is curved in a U-shaped cross section with the side open, and the first rolling portion 576 is disposed inside the curved portion (see FIG. 24 (a)). Further, the curved inner wall surface of the curved portion 581a and the first rolling portion 576.
The distance from the tip of the protrusion is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the first
A game ball that rolls the rolling portion 576 can be made to flow down along the inner wall of the curved portion 581a and thrown to the lower side of the first rolling portion 581a. Therefore, by throwing the game ball to the curved portion 581a that curves toward the back side, the rolling time of the game ball can be lengthened. As a result, even when the rolling surface of the game ball cannot be secured on a plane parallel to the game area of the game board 13, the rolling speed of the game ball can be slowed down.

Further, the curved portion 581a is arranged at a position where the lower end portion is slightly higher than the lower inner edge of the fourth opening portion 571d. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has flowed down from the first rolling portion 576 along the inner wall of the curved portion 581a and has been thrown into the fourth opening 571d to flow back and flow into the inside of the curved portion 581a.

The mounting portion 581b is formed with through holes 581b1 through which screws for fastening the first lining member 581 to the back surface of the second path member 570 are inserted. Further, the mounting portion 581b has a mounting portion 581b.
A columnar body 551a is provided so as to project in a columnar shape toward the back surface side. The columnar body 551a is provided with a screw hole at the tip thereof for fastening the second unit 552, which will be described later, to the first unit 551. As a result, the screw inserted from the back surface side of the second unit 552 can be screwed into the columnar body 551a to fasten the first unit 551 and the second unit 552.

The second covering member 582 is a second curved portion 582a arranged on the back surface side of the sixth opening 571f.
And the back side wall portion 58 arranged on the back side of the first receiving recess 574a to the fourth receiving recess 575b.
Mainly equipped with 2b.

The second curved portion 582a is formed by being curved in a U-shaped cross section in which the sixth opening 571f (second path member 570) side is opened (see FIG. 24 (c)). Further, the second curved portion 582a is provided with an erection wall 582a1 erected from the front side to the back side inside the U-shape. Erecting wall 5
Due to 82a1, the internal space of the second curved portion 582a is the first on the left side (arrow L direction side) when viewed from the front.
It is divided into a space 582a2 and a second space 582a3 formed next to the first space 582a2 with the erection wall 582a1 in between.

The first space 582a2 and the second space 582a3 are spaces larger than the diameter of the game ball, and are formed from the front side to the back side. In addition, the first space 582a2 and the second space 58
2a3 is connected on the back side. Further, the inner surface of the first space 582a2 is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the back surface side, and the inner surface of the second space 582a3 is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the front side. As a result, the game ball thrown from the recessed portion 571g to the second curved portion 582a is rolled to the back side due to the inclination of the first space 582a2 and is second at the end portion on the back side.
The ball is thrown into the second space 582a3 by the bending of the curved portion 582a, rolled to the front side by the inclination of the second space 582a3, passes through the opening of the sixth opening 571f, and is thrown to the front side of the base plate 571. ..

The back side wall portion 582b is thrown into the first receiving recess 574a to the fourth receiving recess 575b, and the ball is thrown into the first receiving recess 574a to the fourth receiving recess 575b.
It is a wall portion on the back side of the throwing path that guides the game ball passing through the fifth opening 571e and the sixth opening 571f to the lower side of the special winning device 550. As a result, the first receiving recesses 574a to the fourth
The game ball thrown into the receiving recess 575b can be collected. Therefore, the first receiving recess 5
The ball thrown into the 74a to the fourth receiving recess 575b, passes through the detection devices SE3 to SE6 described later, and gives the player a game value. The game ball flows down the game area again, and the game value is given to the player again. It can be prevented from being done.

The first drive unit 583 includes a first solenoid 583a having an axis that is displaced in the front-rear direction by electric power, a first variable plate 583b connected to the axis of the first solenoid 583a, and a first.
It mainly includes a first protective member 583c that surrounds the solenoid 583a and the first variable plate 583b.

The first variable plate 583b is a rectangular plate member long in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction), and is displaced in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) according to the displacement of the axis of the first solenoid 583a. ..
Further, in a state where the first variable plate 583b is projected to the front side, the tip of the first variable plate 583b is inserted into the above-mentioned fifth opening 571e, and the first receiving recesses 574a and the second are received.
It is arranged above the receiving recess 574b. As a result, when the first variable plate 583b is projected to the front side, the first variable plate 583b can prevent the game ball from flowing into the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b.

The first protective member 583c is formed in a box shape in which the second path member 570 side is open, and a mechanism for connecting the shaft of the first solenoid 583a and the first variable plate 583b is arranged inside the first protective member 583c. Further, the first protective member 583c includes a plurality of through holes 583c1 that penetrate in the front-rear direction.

The through hole 583c1 is a portion through which a screw for fastening the first drive unit 583 to the second path member 570 is inserted. The screw inserted through the through hole 583c1 is the first covering member 581.
Through the through hole 581b1 or the through hole 582b1 of the second covering member 582, the second through hole 581b1 is inserted.
It is screwed into a hole formed in the path member 570. Therefore, by arranging the first drive unit 583 in the second path member 570, the first lining member 581 and the second lining member 582 can be arranged in the second path member 570. As a result, the number of screw fastening portions of the first lining member 581 and the second lining member 582 can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Further, since the first lining member 581 or the second lining member 582 can be sandwiched between the second path member 570 and the first drive unit 583, the first drive unit 583 can be placed in a state of being sandwiched between the second path member 570 and the first drive unit 583.
When forcibly removed from the special winning device 550, the first lining member 581 or the second lining member 5
It is easy to make the fastening between the 82 and the second path member 570 incomplete so that the game ball cannot pass through the first lining member 581 or the second lining member 582. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued in a state of being cheated.

Like the first drive unit 583, the second drive unit 584 includes a second solenoid 584a having an axis that is displaced in the front-rear direction by electric power, and a second variable plate 584b connected to the axis of the second solenoid 584a. It mainly includes a second protective member 584c that covers the periphery of the second solenoid 584a and the second variable plate 584b.

The second variable plate 584b is formed of a plate-like body that is long in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) and is formed by being bent like a crank in a front view. Further, in a state where the second variable plate 584b is projected to the front side, the tip of the second variable plate 584b is the sixth opening 57 described above.
It is inserted into 1f and is arranged above the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b. As a result, when the second variable plate 584b is projected to the front side, the second variable plate 584b can prevent the game ball from flowing into the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b.

The second protective member 584c is formed in a box shape in which the second path member 570 side is open, and a mechanism for connecting the shaft of the second solenoid 584a and the second variable plate 584b is arranged inside the second protective member 584c. Further, the second protective member 584c includes a back side wall portion 584c1 that covers the back side of the throwing path formed by the second wall portion 566 of the first path member 560. As a result, the back side wall portion 584c
Not only can the throwing path be formed between 1 and the second wall portion 566, but also the back side wall portion 584c1 and the second wall portion
The wall portion 566 can cover the second path member 570. As a result, the first unit 55
Detection device SE3 to which an illegal member is inserted from the side surface of 1 and is arranged in the second path member 570.
It is possible to easily suppress fraudulent activities in SE6.

Next, the throwing path of the game ball flowing into the inside of the first unit 551 from the first receiving unit 561 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 24. 21 is an XXI-XX of FIG. 18 (b).
It is sectional drawing of the 1st unit 551 in line I. FIG. 22 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 shown in FIG. 21. FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 on the line XXIII-XXIII of FIG. 18B. FIG. 24 (a) shows XXIVa-XXIV of FIG.
It is sectional drawing of the 1st unit 551 in line a, and FIG. 24 (b) is XXIVb of FIG.
It is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 in the −XXIVb line, and FIG. 24 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 in the XXIVc-XXIVc line of FIG.

The game ball flowing into the first unit flows down the main path SK1 to SK6 of the game ball in the order of main path SK1, main path SK2, main path SK3, main path SK4, main path SK5, and main path SK6. Alternatively, the main route SK from the main route SK3 on the way down the main routes SK1 to SK6.
It flows into the sub-path HK1 communicating with 3 and flows down the sub-path HK1. Or the main route SK
1-A sub-route HK communicating from the main route SK5 in the middle of flowing down the main route SK6 to the main route SK5
It flows into either 2 or the sub-path HK3 and flows down either the sub-path HK2 or the sub-path HK3.

Further, the sub-pathways HK1 to HK3 are provided with detection devices SE3 to SE6 for detecting the passage of the game ball, and the detection of the game ball by the detection devices SE3 to SE6 gives the player a predetermined game value. Granted. In the present embodiment, a player is given a game value by a predetermined number of prize balls.

As shown in FIGS. 21 to 24, the main path SK1 is a curved portion 581 of the first lining member 581.
It is a space formed by a and the first rolling portion 576 (see FIG. 24 (a)) of the second path member 570, and communicates the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d. As described above, the curved portion 581a is formed by being curved in a U-shaped cross section in which the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d (second path member 570) side are opened, and the game passes through the main path SK1. The ball can be diverted to the back side. As a result, when the game ball passes through the space where the area in the front view is limited (the inside of the first opening 571a or the fourth opening 571d, the amount of movement of the game ball in the left-right direction can be reduced. It is possible to make it easier for the player to see the game ball passing through the main route SK1. This makes it easier for the player to see the game ball passing through the first unit 551 and enhances the interest of the player. can.

Further, as will be described later, since the game ball flowing into the main route SK1 is given a predetermined game value to the player, the game is to roll the game ball which may be given the game value to the player. It can be made easier for people to see. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to enjoy the hobby. The main route SK1 is communicated with the main route SK2, which will be described later, and a game ball passing through the main route SK1 can flow into the main route SK2.

Further, the curved portion 581a of the main path SK1 is the recess 86b of the center frame 86 described above.
2 (see FIG. 17) is housed and arranged. As a result, when the game ball is clogged in the main path SK1 (the flow is slow), the defect can be detected by the detection device 86b3 (see FIG. 17) and an error can be notified.

Further, the passage width of the main path SK1 is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and is also set.
It is set smaller than the opening through which the game balls of the detection devices SE3 to SE7 (see FIG. 23) pass. As a result, a game ball (illegal game ball) having a diameter larger than the diameter of the standard game ball (11 mm) is manufactured, and when the ball is illegal (game), the ball is used as the main path. S
Can be fastened to the inside of K1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the illegal game ball from flowing down to the detection devices SE3 to SE7 arranged on the downstream side of the main path SK1 and being illegally performed. Further, by keeping the illegal game ball on the main path SK1, it is possible to detect it by the detection device 86b3 (see FIG. 17) and notify the error (illegal). The fraud in this case is the detection device S.
An illegal game ball is fitted in any of the openings of E3 to SE7, and detection is continued by the detection devices SE3 to SE7 to obtain an illegal game ball payout (game value).

The main path SK2 includes a first wall portion 565 of the first path member 560 and a fourth of the second path member 570.
It is a space formed between the wall portion 573 and the wall portion 573. The game ball flowing into the main path SK2 rolls on the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573 and flows down. As described above, the fourth wall portion 573 is in the left-right direction (
It extends in the direction of the arrow LR) and is formed so as to be inclined downward as it is separated from the fourth opening 571d.

Therefore, since the above-mentioned curved portion 581a (curved path to the back surface side) is formed in the switching portion of the throwing direction of the game ball (the connecting portion between the main path SK1 and the main path SK2), the player can take the main path. It is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the SK1 from being lost. That is, when a path curved to the back side is formed in the middle of a linear throwing path extending in the left-right direction (for example, the main path SK2), the gaming ball rolling at a constant acceleration along the curved path. Since the acceleration is changed (decreased), the line of sight chasing the game ball may precede the game ball, and the player may lose sight of the game ball.

On the other hand, since the curved path to the back side is formed in the portion where the rolling direction of the game ball is switched and the rolling speed of the game ball is originally slowed down, the player's line of sight must precede the game ball. Can be suppressed to prevent the player from losing sight of the game ball.

Further, the curved portion 581a, which is the inner wall of the main path SK1, is arranged on the left side (arrow L direction) of the first unit 551 slightly to the right (arrow R direction) with respect to the left-right central portion of the game board 13. Formed at the side end). Therefore, a curved path (main path SK1) to the back side is formed on the side where the first unit 551 is easily visible from the player located in front of the game board 13, so that the player can easily see the first unit 551 from the main path SK1. It is possible to easily suppress losing sight of the game ball passing through SK2.

Further, the main path SK2 is communicated with the curved path WK1 and is communicated with the curved path WK1 via the curved path WK1.
It communicates with the main route SK3, which will be described later. As a result, the game ball passing through the main path SK2 flows into the main path SK3 via the curved path WK1. A detailed description of the curved path WK1 will be described later.

The main path SK3 is a space formed between the fourth wall portion 573 and the fifth wall portion 574 of the second path member 570. The game ball flowing into the main path SK3 rolls on the upper surface of the fifth wall portion 574 and flows down. Further, in the main path SK3, the first variable plate 583b of the first drive unit 583 described above is projected onto the main path SK3 at the time of overhanging. The first variable plate 5 on this main path SK3
In the state where the 83b is projected, the game ball rolling on the upper part of the fifth wall portion 574 is the first variable plate 58.
The ball is rolled on the upper surface of 3b and thrown into the main path SK4.

On the other hand, in a state where the first variable plate 583b is retracted from the main path SK3, the sub-path HK1 of the space formed inside the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b formed in the fifth wall portion 574. Game balls are flowed in. The secondary path HK1 is sent to the recovery path formed by the back side wall portion 582b via the fifth opening 571e.

As described above, the first unit 551 includes a first variable plate 583b that overhangs the throwing path of the game ball or retracts from the throwing path, and due to the displacement of the first variable plate 583b, the main unit 551 is main. When the game ball flowing down the route SK3 is guided to the secondary route HK1 and when the main route S
Since it can be changed between the case of being guided by K4 and the case of being guided by K4, it is possible to give a change in the flow direction of the game ball flowing down the first unit 551.

In this case, since the game ball flowing into the sub-path HK1 is given a predetermined game value to the player, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the game ball has flowed into the sub-path HK1. Further, since the first variable plate 583b is arranged in the middle of the throwing path formed in the first unit 551 and is displaced in the viewing direction of the player (arrow FB direction), the first variable plate from the player 583
It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the displacement of b. As a result, it is possible to pay attention to the flowing game ball of the first unit 551, and it is possible to easily give the player a hobby due to the flowing game ball.

Further, the sub-path HK1 is located below the main path SK3 that throws the game ball from the right side (arrow R direction side) to the left side (arrow L direction side) and the game ball from the left side in the front view. It is formed on the fifth wall portion 574 forming between the main path SK6 for throwing a ball on the right side. Therefore,
Since the sub-path HK1 is formed by utilizing the space between the game balls being thrown to the left and right, it is possible to prevent the outer shape of the first unit 551 from becoming large in the vertical direction. As a result, by reducing the outer shape of the first unit 551, the range in which the player can visually follow the game ball can be narrowed.
It is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the first unit 551.

The main path SK4 is a space formed by the recessed portion 571 g and the protrusion 568 of the first path member 560. The game ball flowing into the main path SK4 abuts on the protrusion 568 and has a recessed portion 571 g.
After the ball is thrown to the inside (back side) of the recessed portion, the ball is rolled around the protrusion 568 along the inner surface of the recessed portion and thrown to the outside (front side) of the recessed portion. That is, the game ball is rolled so as to bypass the protrusion 568. Further, the main route SK4 is communicated with the main route SK5, and a game ball passing through the main route SK4 can flow into the main route SK5.

The main path SK5 is the first space 582 of the second covering member 582 of the third path member 580 described above.
It is a space formed by a2 and the second space 582a3. The game ball flowing into the main path SK5 rolls inside the first space 582a2 to the back side as described above, and then the second space 5
The inside of 82a3 is rolled to the front side. Further, in the main path SK5, the second variable plate 584b of the second drive unit 584 described above projects onto the main path SK5 at the time of overhanging. This main route SK
In the state where the second variable plate 584b protrudes above 5, the game ball rolling inside the second curved portion 582a is sent to the main path SK6.

On the other hand, when the second variable plate 584b is retracted from the main path SK5, the sub-path HK2 of the space formed inside the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b formed in the sixth wall portion 575 The game ball is evacuated. The secondary path HK2 is sent to the recovery path formed by the back side wall portion 582b via the sixth opening 571f.

Further, the second curved portion 582a constituting the main path SK5 is formed so as to be curved toward the back side as described above, and the game ball passing through the main path SK5 can be diverted to the back side.
As a result, even when the area in the front view is set to a predetermined limited space, the distance that the game ball can roll can be increased.

Further, the second variable plate 584b is configured so that a part of the upstream side of the main path SK5 and a part of the downstream side of the main path SK5 are overhanging or retracted, and the main path SK5 is displaced. Since a curved path to the back side is formed between the upstream side of the main path SK5 and the downstream side of the main path SK5, the main path S
It is possible to prolong the time in which the game value may be given to the player by the game ball passing through K5. As a result, it is possible to prolong the time for giving the player an interest.

The sub-route HK3 is communicated with the communication portion between the main route SK4 and the main route SK5. Secondary route H
K3 has a second wall portion 566 of the first path member 560 and a back side wall portion 58 of the third path member 580.
It is a space formed between facing 4c1.

The sub-path HK3 is in a direction different from the flow direction of the game ball when the game ball flows from the main path SK4 to the main path SK5 (front view right direction (arrow R direction) (front view left direction (arrow L direction)). The sub-path HK3 is opened. The lower inner edge of the inflow port of the sub-path HK3 is set below the second variable plate 584b (in the direction of arrow D).

Here, when the game ball normally flows down from the main path SK4 to the main path SK5 (in a state where an external force other than gravity does not act), the game ball flows from the main path SK4 into the main path SK5 or the sub-path HK2. NS. On the other hand, at the timing when the game ball flows from the main path SK4 into the sub-path HK2, the second variable plate 584b is extended and the tip surface of the second variable plate 584b comes into contact with the game ball, and an external force other than gravity is applied to the game ball. Is acted on, the game ball is pushed out to the inflow port of the sub-path HK3 by the second variable plate 584b and flows into the sub-path HK3.

Therefore, the first unit 551 includes a second variable plate 584b that overhangs the throwing path of the game ball or retracts from the throwing path, and due to the displacement of the second variable plate 584b, the main path SK4 of the first unit 551. Alternatively, the game ball flowing down the main route SK5 is the main route SK5 and the sub-path HK2.
Alternatively, since it is guided to either of the sub-path HK3, it is possible to give a change in the flow direction of the game ball flowing down the first unit 551.

In this case, since the game ball flowing into the sub-path HK2 or the sub-path HK3 gives the player a predetermined game value, the player is closely watched whether the game ball has flowed into the sub-path HK2 or the sub-path HK3. Can be made to. Further, since the second variable plate 584b is arranged in the middle of the throwing path formed in the first unit 551, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the displacement of the plate member 584b2. As a result, the first unit 551 can be made to pay attention to the flowing game ball, and it is possible to easily give the player a hobby due to the flowing game ball.

Further, as described above, on the upstream side of the main path SK4, the path through which the game ball flows is switched by the first variable plate 583b. Therefore, the game ball that does not flow into the sub-path HK1 on the upstream side and is not given the game value to the player is allowed to flow further downstream to the sub-path HK2 or H.
It can flow into K3. Therefore, by passing the game ball, which may be given the game value to the player once, through the switching portion of the flow path, the game ball becomes the sub-paths HK2 and H.
The player can regain the desire to flow into K3.

Further, a main path SK4 curved on the back surface side is arranged between the main path SK3 and the main path SK5 on which the path through which the game ball flows is switched. Therefore, the game ball can be rolled within a predetermined range in the front view, and the position of the game ball can be easily recognized by the player. That is, after flowing down the main path SK3, the player is made to recognize the position of the game ball through the main path SK4, so that the player pays attention to the game ball rolling on the main path SK5 connected to the downstream of the main path SK4. It can be made easy. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball in which the game ball flows into the secondary paths HK2 and HK3, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Further, on the left and right ends of the second variable 584b on the front side, inclined surfaces 584b1 (see FIG. 24C) that incline toward the back side toward the ends in the left-right direction are formed. This will result in
When the second variable plate 584b is extended at the timing when the game ball flows from the main path SK4 into the sub-path HK2 and the tip surface of the second variable plate 584b comes into contact with the game ball, the game ball is brought into contact with the inclined surface 584b1. Can be pushed out to the inlet side of the sub-path HK3. Therefore, the inclined surface 584b1
And the sub-path HK2 can prevent the game ball from being pinched between the second variable plate 584b and the first path member 560, and a path in which the flow direction is switched depending on the timing at which the game ball is flowed down. A plurality of (three routes in this embodiment) can be formed.

The main path SK6 is a space surrounded by the third wall portion 567 of the first path member 560. The game ball flowing down the main path SK6 is sent to the game area of the game board 13. Therefore, the first receiving unit 5
If the game ball that has flowed into the 61 is not flowed into the first receiving recesses 574a to the fourth receiving recesses 575b, the game value is not given to the player, and the ball is thrown from the main path SK6 to the game area of the game board 13. , Collected from the out port 71 formed in the game board 13.

<Guide means to displace the game ball in the front-back direction>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 28, the flow of the game ball from the main path SK2 to the main path SK3 will be described. 25 (a) and 26 (a) are partially enlarged views of the first unit 551 in the range XXVa of FIG. 21, and FIGS. 25 (b) and 26 (b) are FIGS. 25 (a).
) Is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 in the line XXVb-XXVb. 27 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 in the line XXVIIa-XXVIIa of FIG. 25 (a), and FIG. 27 (b) is the first in the line XXVIIb-XXVIIb of FIG. 25 (a).
FIG. 27 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the unit 551, FIG. 27 (c) is XXVIIc-X of FIG. 25 (a).
It is a schematic cross-sectional view of the 1st unit 551 in the XVIIc line. 28 (a) is FIG. 25.
FIG. 28 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 in the line XXVb-XXVb of (a).
(B) is the first unit 55 in the XXVIIIb-XXVIIIb line of FIG. 25 (a).
1 is a schematic cross-sectional view of 1. Note that FIG. 26 shows a game ball flowing down the curved path WK1.

As shown in FIGS. 25 to 28, the main path SK2, the main path SK3, and the curved path WK1 are
The first is recessed in the base plate 571 of the second path member 570 in an arc shape in cross section toward the back surface side.
A recess 571h, a second recess 571i and a third recess 571j, a first step portion 571k projecting stepwise from the inner wall on the main path SK2 to the front side, and a second step projecting from the inner wall on the main path SK3. It is provided with a step portion 571 m.

The front plate 564 of the first path member 560 has a first recess 571h, a second recess 571i, and a third recess.
First convex portion 564b, second convex portion 564c and third, respectively, at positions facing the concave portion 571j.
The convex portion 564d is projected.

The dimension L11 between the second concave portion 571i and the second convex portion 564c facing each other (see FIG. 28A) is
It is set to a value larger than the diameter of the game ball and set to a value smaller than the distance dimension L12 (see FIG. 28A) between the front plate 564 and the base plate 571 facing each other. This will result in
First concave portion 571h, second concave portion 571i, third concave portion 571j, first convex portion 564b, second
The game ball thrown between the convex portion 564c and the third convex portion 564d facing the first concave portion 571h,
The rolling (flowing) speed of the game ball can be slowed down by abutting the second concave portion 571i and the third concave portion 571j on the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d.

Further, the facing distance between the first concave portion 571h and the first convex portion 564b and the facing distance between the third concave portion 571j and the third convex portion 564d are the facing distance dimensions between the second concave portion 571i and the second convex portion 564c. It is set to substantially the same distance as L11.

Further, a projecting tip surface of the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d, and
The distance dimension L13 (see FIG. 28A) between the front surface of the base plate 571 excluding the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, the third recess 571j, and the first recess
A game ball thrown between the convex portions 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d can be made to collide with the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d.
As a result, the rolling (flowing) speed of the game ball can be slowed down.

Further, in this case, the game ball in contact with the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d is flowed down inside the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571j. .. Therefore, the flowing game ball is moved into the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 57.
It can be guided in the concave direction of 1j.

The step portion 571k is projected toward the front side from the inner wall on the back side of the main path SK2. In addition, the step portion 5
71k is formed on the downstream side in the main route SK2. The step portion 571k is set at a position where the upstream end of the main path SK2 protrudes from the front of the base plate 571 to the front side, and the downstream end is at the same position as the back surface of the curved path WK1. Set. This will result in
The game ball flowing down the main path SK2 can be brought into contact with the step portion 571k and moved to the front side.

Further, the step portion 571k is formed as an inclined surface whose upstream end portion projects from the upstream side to the downstream side toward the front side. As a result, the game ball that flows down the main path SK2 and comes into contact with the upstream end of the step portion 571k can be guided to the front side and flowed down to the downstream side.

Further, the step portion 571k has a first convex portion 564 whose upstream end is formed on the front plate 564.
It is formed on the upstream side of the main path SK2 with respect to b. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball that comes into contact with the step portion 571k and is guided to the front side to come into contact with the first convex portion 564b.

The first recess 571h is recessed in the base plate 571 constituting the main path SK2, and is formed in an elliptical shape long in the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction) in the front view. Further, the first recess 571h is formed in the base plate 571 at a position protruding to the front side by the step portion 571k. The depth of the recess toward the back surface at the center of the first recess 571h in the vertical direction is the step portion 571.
It is set to be substantially the same as the height dimension L22 (see FIG. 27B) to the front side of k. As a result, the game ball to which the main path SK2 is thrown without violence flows into the inside of the first recess 571h without being displaced in the recessing direction of the first recess 571h (the back side (arrow B direction side)). be able to.

On the other hand, the game ball to which the main path SK2 is thrown in a violent state is brought into contact with the upstream end of the step portion 571k and guided to the front side of the main path SK2, and the first convex of the front plate 564. It is brought into contact with the portion 564b. As a result, the game ball can be thrown inside the first recess 571h while suppressing the rampage of the game ball.

Further, the first recess 571h has a height dimension Y8 (the height dimension Y8) from the rolling surface of the game ball on the upstream side of the main path SK2 (the surface on the arrow U direction side of the fourth wall portion 573) to the recessed bottom surface in the direction orthogonal to the first recess 571h. FIG. 25
(See (a)) is set to the radius of the game ball, and the concave bottom surface in the direction orthogonal to the rolling surface of the game ball (the surface on the arrow U direction side of the fourth wall portion 573) on the downstream side of the main path SK2. Height dimension up to Y
9 (see FIG. 25 (a)) is set higher than the radius of the game ball. As a result, the main route S
When the game ball flowing down K2 is thrown along the first recess 571h, it is on the upper side in the direction of gravity (arrow U).
The rolling speed of the game ball can be reduced by applying the resistance in the direction of lifting to the direction side) to the game ball. As a result, the rolling speed of the game ball flowing into the curved path WK1 can be sufficiently reduced, and the game ball can be easily flowed down smoothly.

The radius X11 (see FIG. 27B) in the cross section of the first recess 571h is set to a value larger than the radius of the game ball, and when the game ball is thrown inside the first recess 571h, the radius X11 is set to a value larger than the radius of the game ball. The game ball can be brought into contact with the inner wall. As a result, it is possible to suppress the number of contact portions of the game ball in contact with the first recess 571h from being two, and to prevent the resistance to rolling of the game ball from increasing due to the increase in the contact portions. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from stopping on the main path SK2.

The first convex portion 564b formed at a position facing the first concave portion 571h is a first concave portion 571h.
It is formed at a position separated from the upstream end of the main path SK2 in the throwing direction (arrow R direction in FIG. 27 (b)), and the separated value is set to a dimension smaller than the radius of the game ball. Will be done.
As a result, the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 is brought into contact with the first convex portion 564b, and the first concave portion 5 is brought into contact with the first convex portion 564b.
It can be easily thrown inside 71h.

The second recess 571i is recessed in the base plate 571 of the curved path WK1 and is formed in an elliptical shape whose outer shape in front view is long in the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction). In addition, the second recess 5
In the 71i, the central position in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) in the front view is set to the intermediate position of the curved path WK1. Further, the second recess 571i is formed at the center position in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) in the front view in the direction orthogonal to the throwing direction of the curved path WK1.

The main path SK1, the curved path WK1, and the main path SK2 are all set to have the same width dimension L18 (see FIG. 25 (a)) orthogonal to the throwing direction of the game ball in the front view. The width dimension L18 is set to be approximately 1.1 times the diameter of the game ball.

Further, in the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i and the third recess 571j, the maximum width dimension in the lateral direction in the front view is set to approximately ½ of the above-mentioned width dimension L18. As a result, the center of the game ball passing through each path (main path SK1, curved path WK1 and main path SK2) can be passed through the front side of the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i and the third recess 571j. , The game ball can be easily thrown inside the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j.

The step portion 571m is projected toward the front side from the inner wall on the back side of the main path SK3. In addition, the step portion 5
71m is formed on the upstream side in the main route SK3. The step portion 571m is set at a position where the downstream end portion of the main path SK3 projects toward the front side of the base plate 571, and the step portion 571m is set at a position where the end portion is projected toward the front side of the base plate 571.
The upstream end is set at the same position as the back surface of the curved path WK1. As a result, the main route S
It is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the K3 from flowing backward (rebounding) beyond the step portion 571m to the upstream side after being thrown to the downstream side of the step portion 571m.

The third recess 571j is formed in the base plate 571 constituting the inner wall of the main path SK3, and is formed in an elliptical shape long in the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction) in the front view. Further, the third recess 571j is a base plate 571 at a position where the third recess 571j is projected to the front side by the stepped portion 571m.
Is formed in. The depth of the recess toward the back surface at the center of the third recess 571j in the vertical direction is set to be substantially the same as the height dimension L23 (see FIG. 27 (c)) of the step portion 571 m toward the front surface. As a result, the game ball to which the main path KR3 is thrown can be easily discharged from the inside to the outside of the third recess 571j.

Further, the end of the third recess 571j on the downstream side of the main path SK3 is a sub-path H described later.
It is arranged above the gravity direction (arrow U direction) of the end portion (end portion on the arrow R direction side) on the upstream side of the main path SK3 of the first variable plate 583b that switches the path flowing down to K1. As a result, when the stop position of the first variable plate 583b shifts upward in the direction of gravity due to its displacement (variable plate 583).
(When b is arranged above the downstream end of the curved wall portion 565b), a game ball passing through the main path SK3 is thrown along the inner surface of the third recess 571j to cause a first variable plate. 583b
You can throw the ball without getting caught in. As a result, it is not necessary to arrange the first variable plate 583b downward in the portion where the first wall portion 565 and the first variable plate 583b are adjacent to each other, and it is possible to prevent the vertical dimension of the first unit 551 from becoming large. ..

Further, in this case, the longitudinal direction of the third recess 571j in the front view is the horizontal direction (arrow L).
Since it is formed in the −R direction) and is separated upward from the game ball flowing down the main path SK3, it is upward with respect to the game ball thrown from the first wall portion 565 to the first variable plate 583b. A resistance in the direction of lifting to the side can be applied. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball thrown from the first wall portion 565 to the first variable plate 583b from being caught by the first variable plate 583b.

Further, the first unit 551 is located on one side in the horizontal direction with respect to the game board 13 in the front view.
The main path SK2 that throws the game ball in the direction of the arrow R), and the main path SK3 that throws the game ball thrown from the main path SK2 to the other side in the horizontal direction opposite to the guidance direction of the main path SK2.
A curved path WK1 that connects one side of the main path SK2 and the main path SK3 is provided, and the curved path WK1 is a guiding means (first) for sending a game ball to at least one of the front side and the back side of the game board. Since the two convex portions 564c and the second concave portion 571i) are provided on the inner walls on the front side and the back side of the game board, the game ball passing through the curved path WK1 can be placed on the front side or the back side (front and back of the game board 13 in the front view). Can be moved in the direction).

Therefore, the flow of the game ball accelerated by rolling on the main path SK2 (first path) rather than when the throwing path of the game ball passing through the curved path WK1 is formed on the same plane in the front-rear direction in the front view. You can slow it down. Therefore, the game ball that collides with the inner wall of the curved path WK1 returns to the main path SK2 by the amount that the flow speed of the game ball can be slowed down, or the throwing direction of the main path SK2 inside the curved path WK1 (horizontal direction in front view (horizontal direction in front view). It is possible to suppress shaking (shaking) in the direction of the arrow LR)). As a result, the line of sight of the player can follow the game ball passing through the curved path WK1 in a certain direction. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball sent to the curved path WK1.

In addition, since it is possible to suppress the game ball from swinging (shaking) in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in the front view) with respect to the game board 13 in the front view, the curved path WK1 connecting the main path SK2 and the main path SK3 by that amount. It is no longer necessary to lengthen the path to prevent the game ball from swinging.
The path of the curved path WK1 can be shortened. As a result, the first unit 551 can be accommodated in a predetermined area with respect to the game board 13, and the first unit 551 with respect to the game board 13 can be accommodated.
It is possible to secure the arrangement space of.

Further, the recess width of the first recess 571h is increased toward the upstream side of the main path SK2 in a direction orthogonal to the flow direction of the main path SK2 (arrow UD direction). As a result, the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 can be easily received in the first recess 571h. Further, since the recessed width of the first recess 571h is set to be smaller toward the downstream side of the main path SK2, it is easy for the game ball received in the first recess 571h to come out from the same position. That is, the first recess 5
The 71h can easily accept the game ball on the upstream side of the main path SK2, and can easily let the game ball escape from the same position on the downstream side of the main path SK2. As a result, the game ball can be easily thrown into the second recess 571i of the curved path WK1 that communicates downstream of the main path SK2.

In this case, the concave end portion of the first recess 571h in the flow direction (arrow R direction) of the main path SK2 is the rolling surface of the main path SK2 (fourth) in the rolling direction of the game ball to which the main path SK2 is sent.
It is formed at a position exceeding the upper surface of the wall portion 573). Therefore, it is possible to make the game ball that escapes from the first recess 571h less susceptible to the influence of the rolling surface of the main path SK2. As a result, the game ball that has escaped from the first recess 571h can be easily sent to the second recess 571i of the curved path WK1.

Further, the main path SK2 is inside the path from the fourth opening 571d side toward the curved wall portion 565b side (that is, from the front left side (arrow L direction side) to the front view right side (arrow R direction side)). The space is formed so as to be inclined toward the front plate 564 side (front side (arrow F direction side)). In addition, the main route S
The K2 is formed with its rolling surface (the surface on the upper side of the fourth wall portion 573 in the direction of gravity) inclined downward toward the front side. As a result, the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 can be easily rolled on the front plate 564 side, and the game ball can be easily brought into contact with the first convex portion 564b formed on the front plate 564. As a result, the rolling speed of the game ball can be easily slowed down by the first convex portion 564b, and the reaction force of the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 collides with the curved wall portion 565b to make the main path SK2.
Can be suppressed from flowing back. As a result, the game ball can be stably flowed down at the position where the throwing direction of the game ball is changed.

The upper end portion (end portion in the arrow U direction) of the second recess 571i is drawn linearly along the rolling locus of the center of the game ball rolling on the main path SK2 (fourth wall portion 573). It is formed at a position in contact with the virtual line IL3 (see FIG. 25 (a)). As a result, the game ball that is thrown from the main path SK2 at a relatively high speed and flows into the curved path WK1 can be easily received by the second recess 571i.

A second concave portion 571i and a second convex portion 564c are formed at a portion where the throwing direction of the game ball is changed (curved path WK1). As described above, the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c and the third
The protruding tip surface of the convex portion 564d, the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571.
Since the distance dimension L13 (see FIG. 28 (a)) between the front surface of the base plate 571 excluding j is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball, it is between the second concave portion 571i and the second convex portion 564c. The game ball flowing down the ball can be brought into contact with the second convex portion 564c and pushed into the inside of the second concave portion 571i. Therefore, it flows into the main path SK3 (second concave portion 571i and second convex portion 564c).
A game ball (which escapes from between) can flow down along an arc on the inner surface of the second recess 571i.

Here, the game ball thrown from the main path SK2 to the curved path WK1 tends to flow down a position closer to the rolling direction of the game ball on the main path SK2. Therefore, the game ball flowing down inside the second recess 571i comes into contact with the inner surface of the region on the right side of the front view (on the side in the direction of arrow R) of the second recess 571i and flows down. Therefore, the throwing direction of the game ball flowing into the main path SK3 can be easily directed to the flow direction of the main path SK3 (from the curved wall portion 565b side to the recessed portion 571g (see FIG. 21) side). As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from colliding with the curved wall portion 565b and temporarily stopping the flow at the position where the throwing direction of the game ball is changed (see FIG. 28).

Further, the throwing direction of the game ball thrown from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK3 is set to the main path SK.
Since it can be directed in the direction toward the flow down of 3, the force with which the game ball collides with the curved wall portion 565b can be reduced. As a result, damage to the curved wall portion 565b due to repeated collisions of the game ball with the curved wall portion 565b can be suppressed.

Further, the first convex portion 564b is formed on the first path member 560 arranged on the front side, and is the first.
The recess 571h is formed in the second path member 570 arranged on the back surface side.

Here, a recess (second path member 570) recessed in the first path member 560 toward the front side.
When the concave portion corresponding to the first concave portion 571h of the above is formed, the concave portion is recessed and the first path member 56 is formed.
It is necessary to increase the plate thickness of 0. Therefore, as the plate thickness of the first path member 560 increases, the transparency of the first path member 560 deteriorates, and it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the first unit 551.

Further, when a concave portion is formed on the back surface of the bulging portion that partially bulges in front of the first path member 560, the bulging portion bulges toward the front side of the first path member 560, and the game board 13 It is necessary to increase the gap between the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) arranged on the front side of the glass unit. Therefore, since the first path member 560 is separated from the glass unit 16, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the inside of the first path member 560.

On the other hand, the first convex portion 564b is formed on the first path member 560 arranged on the front side, and the first concave portion 571h is formed on the second path member 570 arranged on the back side. The thickness of the first path member 560 arranged on the front side can be reduced. Further, since the portion that partially protrudes from the front side of the first path member 560 is not formed, the first path member 560 can be arranged close to the glass unit 16. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the inside of the first path member 560.

The second convex portion 564c is located below the main path SK2 (upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573) in the direction of gravity (arrow D direction), and descends in substantially the same direction as the rolling direction of the main path SK2 in front view. Formed at an angle. As a result, the game ball flowing down between the second convex portion 564c and the second concave portion 571i is guided to the region on the right side of the front view (arrow R direction side) of the second concave portion 571i by the inclination of the second convex portion 564c. can do. As described above, since the recessed surface of the second recess 571i is formed to be curved, a game ball that abuts on the inside of the region on the right side (arrow R direction side) of the second recess 571i and flows down is moved. The ball can be thrown in the flow direction of the main path SK3 (from the curved wall portion 565b side to the recessed portion 571g (see FIG. 21) side). As a result, the curved path WK
The inflow of the game ball from 1 to the main route SK3 can be made smooth.

Further, in the second recess 571i, the end portion on the lower side (arrow D direction side) in the front view is the main path S.
Virtual line IL4 drawn linearly along the rolling trajectory of the center of the game ball rolling on K3 (FIG. 25)
It is formed at a position in contact with (a)). Thereby, the height of the center of the game ball discharged from the downstream end of the second recess 571i can be set on the virtual line IL4. As described above, in the present embodiment, the game ball discharged from the second recess 571i is thrown toward the flow direction of the main path SK3 (from the curved wall portion 565b side to the recessed portion 571g (see FIG. 21) side). Therefore, the game ball discharged from the second recess 571i can be the main path SK3 or the curved path WK.
It is possible to prevent a game ball that comes into contact with the inner surface of 1 and is thrown into the main path SK3 from colliding with the inner wall of the curved path WK1 and staying inside those paths.

The flow direction of the game ball flowing into the main path SK3 can be directed to the throwing direction of the main path SK3 at a position close to the rolling surface of the main path SK3. As a result, the curved path WK1 to the main path S
It is possible to prevent the game ball flowing into K3 from being thrown in a direction orthogonal to the throwing direction of the game ball on the curved path WK1. As a result, the game ball sent to the main path SK3 has a curved path W.
It is possible to prevent the vehicle from colliding with the inner wall of K1 and becoming stagnant.

<Place the first member to which high game value is given on the front side>
Next, the configuration of the second unit 552 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. 29 (a) is a front view of the second unit 552, and FIG. 29 (b) is the second unit 55.
It is a rear view of 2. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective front view of the second unit 552, and FIG. 31 is a view.
It is an exploded perspective rear view of the 2nd unit 552.

As shown in FIGS. 29 to 31, the second unit 552 is a fourth path member 610 arranged on the first unit 551 side (front side (arrow F direction side)) and a fourth path member 610 thereof. A game ball throwing path is formed between the fifth path member 620 arranged on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) and the fifth path member 620 arranged on the back surface side of the fifth path member 620. A sixth path member 630 and a decorative member 650 arranged on the side surface of the second unit 552 are mainly provided.

The fourth path member 610 is the first unit 551 via the center frame 86 described above.
It is attached to the back side (arrow B direction side) of. Further, the fourth path member 610 stands on the mounting plate 611 formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular plate in front view and on the first unit 551 side (front side (arrow F direction side)) from the end of the mounting plate 611. It is provided with a side wall portion 612 to be provided, and a first continuous passage 615 and a second continuous passage 616 through which an internal space is communicated to a second rolling portion 577 and a third rolling portion 578 of the first unit 551.

The mounting plate 611 is recessed in a circular shape on the first unit 551 side (front side (arrow F direction side)), and the insertion portion 617 in which a through hole is formed in the recessed bottom surface, and the fifth path member 620. side(
The path side fastening portion 618 and the decorative side fastening portion 619, and the mounting plate 611, which are projected in a circular shape on the back side (arrow B direction side) and have holes for screwing screws on the protruding tip surface. A second insertion portion 614 opened to the outside of the opening 613 and an opening 613 opened in the center of the opening 613.

The insertion portion 617 is a portion through which the tip of a screw for fastening the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is inserted, and is formed at a plurality of locations (three locations in the present embodiment) of the mounting plate 611.

The path-side fastening portion 618 is a portion to which a screw to be inserted into the insertion hole 632 of the sixth path member 630, which will be described later, is screwed, and is formed at a position facing the insertion hole 632. As a result, the sixth
The path member 630 can be fastened to the fourth path member 610.

The decorative side fastening portion 619 is a portion to which a screw inserted into the fastening hole 652 formed in the decorative member 650 described later is screwed, and is formed at a position facing the fastening hole 652. As a result, the decorative member 650 can be fastened to the fourth path member 610.

The opening 613 is formed at a position facing the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a arranged in the first unit 551. As a result, when the fourth path member 610 is arranged on the back surface of the first unit 551, the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be arranged inside the opening 613. Therefore, when the fourth path member 610 is arranged on the back surface of the first unit 551, it is possible to suppress the fourth path member 610 from becoming large in the front-rear direction, and the circumference of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be suppressed. Fourth
It can be surrounded by a path member 610.

The first passage 615 and the second passage 616 are formed in a U shape in which the upper side (arrow U direction side) is open in the front view, and are extended in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). .. again,
In the first-passage passage 615 and the second-passage passage 616, the end portion on the front side is in contact with the back side of the second rolling portion 577 and the third rolling portion 578 of the first unit 551, and the rear side is abutted. The end portion abuts on the front side of the end portion of the first inflow port 625 and the second inflow port 626 of the fifth path member 620 described later. Further, the first continuous passage 615 and the second continuous passage 616 are the fifth from the first unit 551 side.
It is formed so as to incline downward toward the path member 620. As a result, the game ball thrown from the second rolling section 577 and the third rolling section 578 of the first unit 551 to the first continuous passage 615 and the second continuous passage 616 is transferred to the first continuous passage 615 and the second passage. The communication passage 616 can be rolled and flowed into the first inflow port 625 and the second inflow port 626 of the fifth path member 620.

The second insertion portion 614 is a hole for inserting a screw to be screwed into the screw hole 86b4 of the protrusion portion 86b when the fourth path member 610 is fastened to the protrusion portion 86b of the center frame 86. It is formed at a position corresponding to the screw hole 86b4 (see FIG. 35) formed in 86b. As a result, the fourth path member 610 can be arranged on the back surface of the projecting portion 86b of the center frame 86.

The side wall portion 612 is the side surface of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a arranged on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the first unit 551 when the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are fastened. It is a plate member that covers the side surface of the mounting plate 611, and is erected on the first unit 551 side (front side (arrow F direction side)) from the entire end portion of the mounting plate 611. The vertical dimension of the side wall portion 612 on the front side (first unit 551 side) is set to a length that abuts on the protruding portion 86b of the center frame 86. As a result, since the side wall portion 612 is arranged between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552. As a result, it is possible to prevent an illegal object from being inserted between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552.

The fifth path member 620 includes a plate member 621 formed of a plate having a substantially rectangular front view, a first inflow port 625 and a second inflow port 626 opened in the plate member 621, and a periphery of the second inflow port 626. 6th path member 630 side (back side (arrow B direction side)) from to below the 2nd inflow port 626
The second erection wall 623 erected in the west, and the first erection wall 624 erected on the sixth path member 630 side from the periphery of the first inflow port 625 to the lower part of the first inflow port 625. Plate member 621 to 6th
Mainly includes a fastened portion 627 projecting from the path member 630 side.

The plate member 621 is formed in an outer shape smaller than the outer shape in the front view of the fourth path member 610, and is arranged on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the fourth path member 610. Further, the plate member 621 includes a central opening portion 622 which is opened at the central portion in the front view. The central opening 622 is formed larger than the outer shape of the second solenoid 584a in the rear view, and is formed at a position corresponding to the second solenoid 584a. As a result, the plate member 621 (
When the fifth path member 620) is arranged on the back surface side of the fourth path member 610, the fourth path member 61
A second solenoid 584a inserted through the inside of the opening 613 of 0 can be arranged inside the central opening 622.

The first inflow port 625 and the second inflow port 626 are the first of the fourth path member 610 as described above.
It is a portion (opening for flowing in) for receiving a game ball interlocking the continuous passage 615 and the second continuous passage 616 between the facing portions of the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630.

The fastened portion 627 is a portion for screwing the tip of the screw inserted through the fastening hole 633 formed in the sixth path member 630, which will be described later, and is formed at a position corresponding to the fastening hole 633. As a result, the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630 are fastened. In addition, the fastened portion 62
The protrusion dimension of 7 toward the 6th path member 630 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, a gap is formed between the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630 so that the game ball can flow down.

The first erection wall 624 has a fifth path member 620 and a sixth path member 63 from the first inflow port 625.
It is a wall that guides the game ball that flows in between the opposite sides of 0, and is extended downward and connected to the second standing wall 623. The second upright wall 623 is a wall that guides the game ball that has flowed into the fifth path member 620 from the second inflow port, and extends in the vertical direction of the plate member 621. note that,
A description of the throwing path formed by the first erection wall 624 and the second erection wall 623 will be described later.

The sixth path member 630 is a second central opening 634 opened to a base plate 631 formed of a plate having a substantially rectangular front view and a base plate 631 at a position facing the central opening 622 of the fifth path member 620. And the insertion hole 6 formed through the circumference of the second central opening 634 of the base plate 631.
32 and a fastening hole 633.

The second central opening 634 is formed to have substantially the same size as the central opening 622 of the fifth path member 620 in front view, and when the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630 are combined, the second central opening 634 is formed to have substantially the same size as the central opening 622. It communicates with the central opening 622 of the fifth path member 620. Thereby, when the second unit 552 is arranged on the back surface side of the first unit 551, the first solenoid 583a of the first unit 551 can be arranged inside the second central opening 634.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the throwing path formed by the fifth path member 620 will be described. FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view of the second unit 552 on the XXXII-XXXII line of FIG. 29.

As shown in FIG. 32, the second unit 552 is the first standing wall 624 of the fifth path member 620.
Subpath HK4 formed by being surrounded by, and subpath H formed by being surrounded by the second erection wall 623.
It is equipped with K5.

The sub-path HK4 extends downward from the first inflow port 625, and then is bent toward the sub-path HK5, which will be described later, and communicates with the sub-path HK5. Further, in the sub-path HK4, a detection device SE7 for detecting the passage of a game ball is arranged in a downwardly extending portion. This makes it possible to detect that the game ball has passed through the sub-path HK4. Further, when the detection device SE7 detects the passage of the game ball,
A predetermined game value is given to the player (in this embodiment, a prize ball of the game ball).

In the present embodiment, the number of game balls (for example, 3) awarded to the player as the game balls pass through the detection device SE7 is the detection device SE3 arranged in the first unit 551. ~
The number of game balls (for example, 15) that are awarded to the player as the game balls pass through SE6.
Less than. That is, the game value given to the player by passing through the detection device SE7 is given to the player as the game ball passes through the detection devices SE3 to SE6 arranged in the first unit 551. It is set higher than the game value to be played. This makes it easier to draw attention to the game ball passing through the first unit 551. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to enjoy the hobby.

The sub-path HK5 extends downward from the second inflow port 626 and the second unit 552.
Below the pachinko machine 10, it is communicated with the recovery path of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the sub-path HK5 is collected without giving the player a game value. Further, the game ball that has flowed down the sub-path HK4 and is detected by the detection device SE7 is sent to the sub-path HK5 and collected by the pachinko machine 10.

Further, the special winning device 550 is a first unit 551 formed of a material capable of transmitting light and arranged on the front side of the game area, and a second unit arranged on the back side of the first unit 551. The first unit 551 is provided with 552, and the first unit 551 is a first receiving unit 561 capable of entering a game ball.
The second unit 552 includes a second receiving unit 562 and a third receiving unit 5 capable of entering a game ball.
A game ball having 63 and entering the first receiving unit 561 has a higher game value to the player than a game ball entering the second receiving unit 562 and the third receiving unit 563 (payout of the game ball). Is given.

Therefore, the handling of the throwing path of the game ball of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is complicatedly formed (for example, the throwing path of the first unit 551 and the throwing path of the second unit 552 are in the front-rear direction in the front view. It is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 when the game ball is flowed down to the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 at the same timing as compared with the case of crossing the first unit 551. Therefore, the first receiving unit 5 having a high game value
It is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 provided with the 61. As a result, the player can visually recognize the game ball passing through the route that gives the player a high game value, so that the player's interest can be easily improved.

In addition, the inflow port of the throwing path for throwing the game ball to the first unit 551 (first receiving section 561).
And, since the inlets (second receiving section 562 and third receiving section 563) of the throwing path for throwing the game ball to the second unit 552 are formed at adjacent positions, the first one to which high gaming value is given. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the ball flows into the unit 551 or the second unit 552 to which a low game value is given, or until the game ball flows in. As a result, it is possible to easily give the player an interest until just before the game ball flows into the special winning device 550.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 33 to 37, the special winning device 550 for the center frame 86
The arrangement state of the above will be described. FIG. 33A is a front view of the center frame 86.
FIG. 33B is a side view of the center frame 86. 34 (a) is a perspective front view of the center frame 86, and FIG. 34 (b) is a perspective rear view of the center frame 86. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective rear view of the center frame 86. 36 is XX of FIG. 33.
It is sectional drawing of the center frame 86 in the XVI-XXXVI line. FIG. 37 (a) shows.
It is a schematic sectional view of the game board 13, and FIG. 37 (b) is a schematic disassembled sectional view of the game board 13.
Note that FIGS. 37 (a) and 37 (b) correspond to the cross section of FIG. 36.

<Fixing means for urging the first member to the base member side>
As shown in FIGS. 33 to 37, the special winning device 550 has a first unit 551 that can be removed on the front side of the center frame 86 and a removable first unit 551 on the back side of the center frame 86 with the center frame 86 in between. It consists of a possible second unit.

The first unit 551 has a first solenoid 583a and a second solenoid 584a arranged on the back side of the first unit 551 inserted into the opening 86b1 of the center frame 86, and the front side of the projecting portion 86b. Is arranged in. Further, the first unit 551 includes a columnar body 551a projecting in a columnar shape on the second unit 552 side.

The columnar body 551a is an insertion portion 61 formed in the fourth path member 610 of the second unit 552.
The tip is provided with a hole formed at a position facing the 7 and into which a screw through which the insertion portion 617 is inserted is screwed.

The first unit 551 is fixed to the center frame 86 by a screw inserted into the insertion portion 617 and the second insertion portion 614 formed in the fourth path member 610 of the second unit 552. More specifically, the first unit 551 is disposed between the first unit 551 and the fourth path member 610 disposed on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) via the projecting portion 86b of the center frame 86. Further, the first unit 551 is fastened to the second unit 552 by screwing a screw inserted from the insertion portion 617 of the fourth path member 610 into the columnar body 551a.

Further, with the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 fastened, the screw inserted into the second insertion portion 614 formed in the second unit 552 is recessed in the protrusion 86b (screw hole 86b4). By screwing it into (see FIG. 35), the projecting portion 86b and the fourth path member 610 can be fastened. As described above, since the fourth path member 610 and the first unit 551 are fastened and fixed, the first unit 551 is fastened to the projecting portion 86b by the fourth path member 610.
Is fastened to the projecting portion 86b.

Further, as shown in FIG. 37, the opening dimension Y1 (see FIG. 37 (b)) in the vertical direction of the first opening 60a of the base plate 60 is the vertical dimension of the first unit 551 (second path member 570). It is set slightly smaller than Y2 (see FIG. 37 (b)). In addition, the first unit 55
The distance dimension Y4 (see FIG. 37 (b)) from the contact surface with the front surface of the base plate 60 of 1 to the contact surface of the second unit 552 with the base plate 60 is the first unit 551 and the second unit. 552
Is set to be slightly smaller than the thickness dimension Y3 of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 37 (b)) when the two are fastened.

As a result, when the first unit 551, the second unit, and 552 are fastened, the first unit 551 can be urged to the base plate 60 side (back side). Therefore, the base plate 6
It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the front surface of 0 and the first unit 551. Therefore, it is not necessary to fasten the first unit 551 from the front side of the base plate 60 with screws, and the amount is increased accordingly.
Since the screw fastening allowance is not required in front of the first unit 551, the area on the front side of the first unit 551 can be used as a throwing space for the game ball. As a result, the first
It is possible to secure a throwing space for the game ball formed in the unit 551.

Further, the fastening portion (columnar body 551a) between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is
Since it is formed so as to project on the back side of the first unit 551, it is possible to secure a throwing space for the game ball formed on the first unit 551 as compared with the case where the fastening portion is formed on the front side of the base plate 60. can.

Further, since the second unit 552 can be urged to the base plate 60 (front side), it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the second unit 552 and the base plate 60. Therefore,
It is possible to prevent an illegal object such as a wire or a piano wire from being inserted from between the second unit 552 and the base plate 60 facing each other and being illegally inserted into the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a of the first unit 551.

Further, since the first unit 551 is arranged on the base plate 60 by a screw inserted from the back surface side of the base plate 60, a fastening allowance (screw is inserted) with the base plate 60 on the front side of the first unit 551. It is not necessary to form an extended portion) in which an opening is formed. As a result, the entire area can be used as a throwing path with respect to the outer shape of the first unit 551 in the front view, and the throwing path of the first unit 551 can be increased.

Further, since the fastening portion between the base plate 60 and the first unit 551 is on the back side of the base plate 60, the fastening portion between the base plate 60 and the first unit 551 is outside due to fraud from the front side of the game board 13. It can be suppressed. As a result, fraud to the first unit 551 can be suppressed. Further, since the fastening portion between the base plate 60 and the first unit 551 is on the back side of the base plate 60, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the head of the screw. As a result, the first
By the player recognizing the configuration for fixing the unit 551 to the base plate 60,
It is possible to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating.

Further, the first unit 551 is a fixing means (screw) fastened from the back surface side of the base plate 60.
Therefore, it is arranged on the base plate 60 in a state of being urged to the back side with respect to the base plate 60.
Due to the urging force acting on the first unit 551 on the back surface side, the first unit 551 and the base plate 60 can be arranged in close contact with each other.

Further, since the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are arranged on the center frame 86 in a state where a throwing path capable of throwing a game ball is formed in each of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, the first unit 5
It is possible to prevent the throwing path of 51 and the throwing path of the second unit 552 from being displaced during assembly of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552. As a result, the game balls flowing down inside the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are the first unit 551 and the second unit 55.
It is possible to suppress stopping at the throwing path of 2.

Further, the first unit 551 includes a rolling surface (second rolling section 577 and third rolling section 578) for flowing the game ball thrown into the first unit 551 into the second unit 552.
Therefore, each of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is the center frame 8.
If it is fastened to the projecting portion 86b of No. 6, an error in assembling the first unit 551 to the center frame 86 occurs, and the game ball is smoothly thrown from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552. There was a risk that it would not be lost.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first unit 551 is the second unit 5.
Since it is fastened to 52, the error at the time of fastening the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 can be minimized (the place where an error is generated at the time of fastening is the minimum). As a result, the game ball can be smoothly thrown from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552.

The fifth and sixth path members 620 and 630 to be fastened to the fourth path member 610 are arranged at positions overlapping with at least a part of the insertion portion 617 and the second insertion portion 614 of the fourth path member 610 in the rear view. .. As a result, the first unit 551 can be removed from the center frame 86 only after the fifth and sixth path members 620 and 630 fastened to the fourth path member 610 are removed. As a result, the first unit 55 forming the main paths SK1 to SK6
It is possible to prevent 1 from being removed from the center frame 86 and fraudulently performed on the main routes SK1 to SK6.

Further, the projecting portion 86b includes an upright portion 86b5 that stands (folds back) on the side of the second unit 552 at the end (see FIG. 33 (b)). As a result, in a state where the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are arranged on the center frame 86 with the projecting portion 86b of the center frame 86 interposed therebetween, the upright portion 86b5 is the first unit 551. It is in a state of surrounding the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a arranged on the back side.

Therefore, with the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 arranged on the center frame 86, an illegal object such as a wire or a piano wire may be inserted between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 facing each other. Can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a of the first unit 551 from being illegally performed while the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are arranged on the center frame 86.

Further, between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, the first solenoid 583a
A part of the front side of the second solenoid 584a is arranged, and an upright portion 86b5 is interposed. Therefore, the first solenoid 583a is used in the space where the upright portion 86b5 is arranged.
And a part of the front side of the second solenoid 584a can be arranged. Therefore, a part of the front side of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a is accommodated between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, so that the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 5 are accommodated.
It is possible to prevent the 84a from protruding toward the back surface side. As a result, the circumference of the back side of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be easily surrounded by the second unit 552, and the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be fraudulently performed from the back side. It can be suppressed by 2 units 552.

Further, between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, the first solenoid 583
Since a part of the front side of the a and the second solenoid 584a is arranged, the game ball flowing down the second unit 552 is hidden by the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a to make it difficult for the player to see. Can be done. As a result, even if the flow line of the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 and the flow line of the game ball flowing down the second unit 552 overlap in the front view, the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 can be moved. It can be easily made visible to the player. As a result, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the game ball flowing down the first unit 551, which is given to the player a game value higher than the game value given to the player by the game ball flowing down the second unit 552. Because it can be done, it can be easily given to the player.

Further, in the state where the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are arranged on the center frame 86, the decorative member 650 is arranged so as to cover the inner side surface of the base frame 86a of the center frame 86. As a result, it is possible to prevent an illegal object such as a wire or a piano wire from being inserted into the special winning device 550 through (inserting) the opening of the base frame 86a of the center frame 86.

As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the first solenoid 58 disposed in the first unit 551.
3a is inserted inside the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634 whose back surface side is formed in the fourth path member 610 and the fifth path member 620 of the second unit 552. This will result in
The second unit 552 can be prevented from bulging toward the back side (arrow B direction side), and the first unit can be prevented from bulging.
It is possible to prevent unauthorized objects such as wires and piano wires from being accessed by the solenoid 583a.

Further, since the load of the first solenoid 583a can be supported by the second unit 552, the second path member 570 of the first unit 551 in which the first solenoid 583a is arranged can be supported.
Can be suppressed from bending. As a result, the passage of the game ball of the first unit 551 can be stabilized.

Further, as described above, the opening 8 of the projecting portion 86b formed in the center frame 86
Since the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a are surrounded by 6b1, the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a having a relatively large load (heavy) are supported by the opening 86b1 (protruding portion 86b). can do. As a result, the projecting portion 86b can be prevented from bending due to the load of the special winning device 550.

Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the center frame 86 arranged on the base plate 60 from bending (bending), the arrangement of the first unit 551 arranged on the center frame 86 is the arrangement of the base plate 60.
It is possible to suppress the displacement with respect to the position. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed from the game area of the game board 13 into the first unit 551 (special winning device 550).

In addition, the second rolling unit 57 that throws a game ball from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552.
The 7 and the third rolling portion 578 are formed on the outside of the opening 86b1 of the projecting portion 86b. As a result, the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 5 arranged inside the opening 86b1
Due to the electromagnetic force generated by the drive of 84a, the first unit 551 to the second unit 552
It is possible to prevent the rolling of the game ball thrown into the ball from being hindered. In other words, the protrusion 86b can suppress the electromagnetic force generated by driving the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a from acting on the outside of the protrusion 86b. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of the game ball from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552.

As described above, the first solenoid 583a is arranged so that the back surface side is inserted into the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634 of the second unit 552. As a result, the wiring of the detection devices SE3 to 6 of the first unit 551 and the first solenoid 583a can be arranged by inserting the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634. Further, since the wiring can be arranged along the first solenoid 583a, it is possible to suppress the wiring from being entangled.

Further, since the load of the first solenoid 583a can be supported by the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634 of the second unit 552, the projecting portion 86b on which the first unit 551 is arranged bends. Can be suppressed. Therefore, since the center frame 86 arranged on the base plate 60 can be prevented from bending (bending), the arrangement of the first unit 551 arranged on the center frame 86 can be prevented from being displaced with respect to the base plate 60. Can be suppressed. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed from the game area of the game board 13 into the first unit 551 (special winning device 550).

<Displacement member that arranges the fixing member of the board unit on the back member>
Next, the connection structure of the back case 300 and the substrate unit 110 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 38 to 42. First, with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39, the rear case 30
The structure of 0 will be described.

38 (a) is a front view of the rear case 300, and FIG. 38 (b) is a rear case 30.
It is a rear view of 0. FIG. 39 (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the rear case 300, which is FIG. 39.
(B) is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear case 300.

As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the back case 300 has an engaging member 310 arranged on the front side (open side (arrow F direction side) formed in a box shape) of the bottom wall portion 301 and a back surface. Case 300
The board box 100 (main control device 110) described above is arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the above-mentioned board box 100.
) Is mainly provided with a fixing member 320 for fixing.

Further, the rear case 300 is a projecting portion 30 projecting from two locations on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301.
1b, a first opening 301c that opens at a position facing the fixing member 320, and an engaging member 31.
A second opening 301d that opens at a position facing 0 is provided.

The projecting portion 301b is a shaft for holding the engaging member 310 in a slidable state.
It is inserted inside the sliding groove 314 that opens in the engaging member 310 described later. In addition, the projecting portion 30
1b is projected in an annular shape, and a screw can be screwed into the annular shape. Therefore, after the projecting portion 301b is inserted inside the sliding groove 314, a screw having a head having a diameter larger than the groove width of the sliding groove 314 is screwed into the projecting portion 301b to engage the engaging member. 310 on the back case 3
It can be arranged at 00.

The first opening 301c is an opening for inserting a part of the fixing member 320 (engaged portion with the engaging member 310) described later, and the engaging portion of the fixing member 320 (engaged portion 332 described later). )
Is formed into a shape that can be inserted. As a result, the fixing member 320 arranged on the back side of the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301) is engaged with the engaging member 310 arranged on the front side of the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301). be able to.

Further, the first opening 301c is a protrusion 301c1 projecting toward the back surface at an end portion on the opposite side (arrow R direction side) of the engaging member 320 and the engaging member 310 on the engaging side (arrow L direction side). To prepare for. The protrusion 301c1 is formed in a hook shape in which the tip of the protrusion on the back surface side bends by approximately 90 degrees, and the bending direction is set in a direction away from the first opening 301c (arrow R direction).

The protruding wall 301c1 is inserted into the locking portion 331 of the fixing member 320 whose tip is described later. Thereby, the opposite side (the arrow R direction side) of the engaging portion between the fixing member 320 and the engaging member 310 can be locked. As a result, the fixing member 320 arranged on the rear case 300 is moved to the left and right (
It can be supported (engaged) at both ends in the direction of the arrow LR), and the fixing member 320 and the engaging member can be suppressed from concentrating the force on the engaging portion between the fixing member 320 and the engaging member 310. 310
Can be prevented from being damaged. A detailed description of the arrangement of the fixing member 320 in the first opening 301c will be described later.

The second opening 301d is an opening for inserting a part (operator 315) of the engaging member 310 described later into the back side of the back case 300, whereby the engaging member 310 is inserted into the back side of the back case. It can be operated from. Therefore, as described above, after the fixing member 320 is arranged on the back surface of the back case 300, the engaging member 310 is operated from the back side of the back case 300 to attach the fixing member 320 and the engaging member to the back case 300 ( It can be engaged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301).

The engaging member 310 has a crank-like outer shape in a front view, and extends in a direction parallel to each other, the first piece 311 and the second piece 312, and the first piece 311 and the second piece 3 thereof.
It is composed of a third piece 313 that connects the ends of the 12 pieces in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 311 and the second piece 312.

The above-mentioned 2 sliding grooves 314 are formed in the first piece 311 and the second piece 312, respectively, and are long in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the first piece 311 and the second piece 312. It is opened like a long hole. As a result, the engaging member 310 is slidable in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the first piece 311 and the second piece 312.

In the first piece 311, the end portion on one side (arrow R direction side) opposite to the other side (arrow L direction side) to which the third piece 313 is connected serves as an engaging portion with the fixing member 320 described later. An engaging portion 316 that is formed and projects outward on both sides in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), which is a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 311, and the engaging portions 316 at the two locations. From the substantially intermediate position toward the recess 317 recessed in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the first piece 311 and the bottom wall portion 301 side (back side (arrow B direction side)) of the back case 300. It is provided with a protruding operator 315.

The engaging portion 316 has a substantially triangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and is on one side (the side in the R direction of the arrow).
The outer surface of the first piece 311 is formed as an inclined surface protruding outward from the end of the first piece 311 toward the other side (arrow L direction side), while the outer surface of the other side is the first piece 311. Extension direction (arrow LR
It is extended in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), which is a direction substantially orthogonal to the direction).

The recess 317 is formed by notching in the thickness direction of the first piece 311 and the first piece 311.
It is recessed from one side (arrow R direction side) end toward the other side (arrow L direction side). Therefore,
One side of the first piece 311 is bifurcated. As a result, the rigidity of one side of the first piece 311 can be made lower than that of the other side. As a result, one side of the first piece 311 can be easily elastically deformed, and the engaging member 310 can be easily engaged with the fixing member 320. A detailed description of the engagement between the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 will be described later.

The operator 315 is an operation portion for operating the engaging member 310, and is formed at the other end of the first piece 311. The protruding dimension thereof is larger than the plate thickness of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300. It is set to a value and is projected toward the back side of the back case 300 by at least a size that can be grasped by an operator with a finger. As a result, the operator 315 can be projected from the second opening 301d of the bottom wall portion 301, and the protruding portion (the tip of the operator 315) can be grasped and operated.

The second piece 312 is provided with a fastening hole 318 recessed in a circle on the front side. The fastening hole 318 is
This is a portion for screwing a screw to be inserted into a hole (see FIG. 89) penetrated through the rear base 720 of the rotating unit 700, which will be described later. As a result, the inside of the rear case 300 (bottom wall portion 301)
After arranging the rotating unit 700 on the front side of the rotating unit 700, the engaging member 310 arranged on the back side of the rotating unit 700 is operated to place the engaging member 310 in a specified position (engagement with the fixing member 320 described later). It can be operated to the mating position), and the engaging member 31 is screwed into the fastening hole 318.
0 can be fastened to the rotating unit 700 (rear base 720). Therefore, the operator 315 that projects the engaging member 310 arranged at the specified position from the back side of the back case 300.
It can be disabled only by the operation of. As a result, with the pachinko machine 10 assembled, the actuator 315 is illegally operated, and the fixing member 320 and the board box 100 (
It is possible to prevent the main control device 110) from being easily replaced with an unauthorized board box.

In this case, the fastening hole 318 is inserted through the hole of the back base 720 of the rotating unit 700.
The screw to be fastened to may be operable from the hole from which the first winning opening 64 arranged in the game board 13 is removed. In this case, since it is not necessary to release the fastening between the game board 13 and the rear case 300, it is possible to suppress the complicated replacement work with the normal board box 100. As a result, the normal replacement work of the board box 100 can be simplified.

The fixing member 320 is composed of a rear case 300 and a separate member. As a result, the substrate box 100 can be caulked and fixed to the fixing member 320 having a smaller outer shape than the rear case 300. Therefore, the substrate box 100 can be fixed as compared with the case where the fixing member 320 is integrally formed with the rear case 300. It can be easily arranged. As a result, the board box 100 can be easily arranged in the back case 300 in a state where the board box 100 is difficult to be removed from the fixing member 320.

Further, the rear case 300 can be diverted as a component having the same shape in each pachinko machine model, but the board box 100 has a different shape and size depending on the model of each pachinko machine 10, so that the board box 100 The fixing member 320 on which the slingshot is arranged cannot be used as a diversion with another pachinko machine. Therefore, as compared with the case where the fixing member 320 is integrally formed with the back case 300, the mold at the time of molding the back case 300 can be the same mold as another pachinko machine. As a result, it is only necessary to form a mold for the fixing member 320 having a smaller outer shape than the rear case 300, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

The fixing member 320 is composed of an intermediate member 330 that engages with the above-mentioned engaging member 310, and a shaft support member 340 that is fastened to the intermediate member 330. As a result, the shaft support member 340 can be used as a diversion item having the same shape as the fixing member of another gaming machine.

The interposition member 330 is formed in a box shape in which the front side (arrow F direction side) is open, and the other side (arrow L).
A locking portion 331 projecting from the side surface on the side (direction side) and an engaged portion 332 formed in a frame shape protruding from the side surface on the other side (arrow L direction side) toward the rear case 300 side (front side). Mainly includes an insertion hole 333 that opens in a circular shape on the bottom surface of the box shape, and a protrusion 334 that protrudes from the back surface toward the shaft support member 340.

The locking portion 331 is provided with an opening for engaging the other side (arrow L direction side) of the fixing member 320 with the bottom wall portion 301, and the opening has an L-shaped cross section from the periphery of the first opening 301c described above. By inserting the protruding wall 301c1 projecting into the bottom wall portion 301, the wall portion 301 is engaged with the bottom wall portion 301. As a result, when the intermediate member 330 (fixing member 320) is arranged in the rear case 300, the protrusion 301c1 is inserted through the locking portion 331 of the intermediate member 330 and one side of the intermediate member 330 (arrow R). The directional side) can be locked to the rear case 300.

The engaged portion 332 is a portion that engages with the engaging member 310, and the protrusion dimension toward the rear case 300 side (arrow F direction side) exceeds the engaging member 310 arranged in the rear case 300. The distance dimension from the inner surface of the front side (arrow F direction side) of the enclosed space to the front of the bottom wall portion 301 is larger than the distance from the front of the engaging member 310 to the front of the bottom wall portion 301. Set. As a result, the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 and the engaging member 310 are arranged at overlapping positions in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

The insertion hole 333 is a through hole through which a screw for fastening the intermediate member 330 to the shaft support member 340 described later is inserted, and is set coaxially with the fastening hole 343 of the shaft support member 340.

The protrusion 334 is formed in a substantially L-shaped cross section, and the distance between the tip end portion on the bent side and the bottom surface of the intermediate member 330 is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the insertion portion 344 of the shaft support member 340 described later. Will be done.
As a result, the insertion portion 3 is between the tip of the protrusion 334 on the bent side and the bottom surface of the interposing member 330 facing each other.
44 can be inserted and arranged.

The shaft support member 340 has a box-shaped main body portion 341 that is open on the back case 300 side (arrow F direction side) and a substantially U-shaped cross section from the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the main body portion 341. It is mainly provided with a support portion 342 that bulges out.

The main body portion 341 is an insertion portion 3 projecting upward from the side surface on the upper side (arrow U direction side).
44 is mainly provided with a fastening hole 343 recessed from the bottom surface side (arrow D direction side) to the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the main body portion 341 formed in a box shape.

As described above, the insertion portion 344 is a plate member inserted between the tip end portion of the protrusion 334 on the bent side and the bottom surface of the interposition member 330 facing each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent the upper side of the shaft support member 340 from tilting toward the back side of the back case 300.

The fastening hole 343 is arranged on the lower side (the side in the direction of arrow D) that is biased toward the end on the opposite side of the insertion portion 344. Further, as described above, the fastening hole 343 is the insertion hole 333 of the interposing member 330 (FIG. 39).
It is a hole for fastening a screw through which (b) is inserted. Therefore, the shaft support member 340 is on the upper side (
The insertion portion 344 (on the side in the direction of arrow U) is inserted into the protrusion 334 of the intermediate member 330, and the lower side is fastened and fixed to the intermediate member 330. Therefore, since the shaft support member 340 is fixed to the intermediate member 330 only by fastening the screw on the lower side, the number of fastening portions can be reduced and the manufacturing process can be simplified.

The support portion 342 is a portion to be caulked and fastened to the bearing portion 117 of the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) described above, and is formed in a hollow shape in which a caulking metal fitting can be arranged. The board box 100 is held in a rotatable state with respect to the shaft support member 340 by fastening with a caulking metal fitting.

Then, referring to FIGS. 40 (a) to 41 (b), the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320
The engagement with is described. 40 (a) is a front view of the rear case 300 in a state before engaging the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320, and FIG. 40 (b) is a front view of the rear case 300 before engaging the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320. It is a rear view of the rear case 300 in the state of. FIG. 41 (a)
) Is a front view of the rear case 300 in the state after the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged, and FIG. 41 (b) is the rear surface in the state after the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged. It is a rear view of the case 300. In FIGS. 40 (b) and 41 (b), a part of the outer shape of the engaging member 310 that overlaps with the back case 300 is shown by a chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b), before engaging the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320, the interposing member 330 and the shaft support member 340 are placed on the interposing member 330 side (front side (arrow). It is fastened and combined with screws inserted from the F direction side)). As a result, the interposition member 330
Further, it is possible to prevent the shaft support member 340 from being illegally disassembled (the fastened screw is removed) from the back side of the back case 300. As a result, it is possible to prevent the board box 100 caulked and fixed to the shaft support member 340 from being replaced with an illegal board box.

As described above, the interposing member 330 and the shaft support member 340 (fixing member 320) in the fastened state have a protrusion 30 formed in the first opening 301c inside the locking portion 331 of the interposing member 330.
1c1 is inserted. In this case, the intervening member 330 and the shaft support member 340 in the fastened state (
The fixing member 320) has a first opening 301c from the bent side (arrow R direction side) of the protruding wall 301c1.
Is arranged in.

When the fixing member 320 is arranged in the rear case 300, the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 is arranged at a position facing one side (engaging portion 316 side) end portion of the engaging member 310. As a result, by sliding-displace the engaging member 310, one side (arrow R direction side) end portion of the engaging member 310 can be inserted into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332.

Here, the outer dimensions of the two engaging portions 316 of the engaging member 310 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) are the openings in the vertical direction of the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 described above. It is set larger than the dimensions. Therefore, there is a problem that the engaging member 310 cannot be arranged in the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332.

On the other hand, as described above, the engaging member 310 can easily elastically deform the first piece 311 by the recess 317 recessed on one side (arrow R direction side) of the first piece 311 and is engaged. Due to the triangular shape of the joining portion 316, the force when the engaging member 310 is slidably displaced and comes into contact with the inner edge of the engaged portion 332 can be applied to the concave portion 317 side of the engaging member 310. As a result, the first piece 311 formed in the fork can be elastically deformed and inserted into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332.

As shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b), the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are
The engaging member 310 is slidably displaced, and the first piece 311 of the engaging member 310 is replaced with the interposing member 33.
When inserted into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 of 0, the elastically deformed first piece 311 is returned to the shape before deformation. As described above, the engaging portion 316 has the first piece 311 on the other side surface.
It is extended in a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of. Therefore, the force that elastically deforms the first piece 311 toward the recess 317 is not applied only by the force that slides and displaces the engaging member 310 in the opposite direction. That is, the first piece 311 is engaged with the engaged portion 332 by the inclined surface and the recess 317 of the engaging portion 316.
It can be easily inserted into the space surrounded by, and the other side of the engaging part 316 (arrow L direction side).
The first piece 311 inserted into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 can be made difficult to come off by the side surface of the above. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fixing member 320 from being removed from the back side of the back case 300 due to an illegal act by the player, and the board box 100 (main control device 110) caulked and fastened to the fixing member 320 is an illegal board box. It can be suppressed from being exchanged for.

Further, the back case 300 is arranged between the base plate 60 and the back case 300, and is the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 60, and is the base plate 60 and the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301). The fixing member 320 includes an engaging member 310 that can be operated from the outside between the facing portions of the fixed member 320.
An engaged portion 332 projecting to the front side (arrow F direction side) of the rear case 300 is provided, and the engaged portion 332 and the engaging member 310 are engaged with each other and are arranged on the rear case 300. The engaging member 310 is operated from the outside between the base plate 60 and the back case 300 with the accessory device (rotating unit 700 in this example) disposed between the base plate 60 and the back case 300. , The engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 can be engaged.

Therefore, the fixing member 320 can be arranged on the back case 300 without being disturbed by the accessory device arranged between the base plate 60 and the back case 300 facing each other. As a result, the fixing member 320 can be easily arranged on the back case 300.

Further, since the engaging member 310 is engaged with the engaged portion 332 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the rear case 300, the engaging portion between the rear case 300 and the fixing member 320 is used as the base plate. It can be arranged between the 60 and the rear case 300 facing each other. As a result, the base plate 6
It is difficult to access the engaging portion between the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 from the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of 0. As a result, the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 3 are viewed from the back surface side of the base plate 60.
It is possible to prevent the fixing member 320 from being illegally (for example, replaced with an illegal fixing member) by being disengaged from the 20.

Further, the rear case 300 includes a first opening 301c opened in a portion where the fixing member 320 is arranged, and a second opening 301d opened in the portion where the engaging member 310 is arranged. The engaging member 310 is arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the back case 300 and from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 300 via the second opening 301d (passing through). The fixing member 320 is operable, and since the engaged portion 332 that has passed through the first opening 301c is arranged on the front side of the rear case 300, the engaged portion 332 of the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 is arranged. It is possible to make it difficult to access the engaging portion with the rear case 300 from the rear side. resulting in,
The fixing member 320 can be fixed to the back case 300 regardless of the size of the accessory device arranged in the back case 300, and is operated from the back side of the game board 13 to be replaced with an illegal board box. Can be prevented.

Further, since the engaging member 310 includes an operator 315 that penetrates the second opening 301d and projects to the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 300, the front side of the back case 300 (arrow F direction side). ), The engaging member 310 can be easily operated in the state where the engaging member 310 is arranged.
As a result, it is possible to facilitate the engagement operation between the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320.

Further, since the engaging member 310 can be slidably displaced on a plane parallel to the front side of the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301), the engaging member 310 can be displaced in the front-rear direction (arrow) with respect to the back case 300. Since it is not displaced in the FB direction, the front side (arrow F direction side) of the engaging member 310 can be easily used as an arrangement space for the accessory device arranged in the rear case 300. As a result, the area on the front side of the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301) can be easily used as a space for arranging the accessory device.

Next, an operation when the fixing member 320 is removed from the rear case 300 from the state shown in FIG. 41 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 41, the first opening 301c is opened in a substantially L-shape in front view, and the recess 317 of the engaging member 310 in the engaged state with the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 is the first. It can be operated from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 300 through the opening 301c.

Therefore, by elastically deforming the outer portion of the concave portion 317 of the engaging member 310 to the concave side of the concave portion 317 with a dedicated tool or the like, the engagement portion 316 of the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 are engaged with each other. The match is canceled. In the disengaged state, the engaging member 310 is displaced in the direction of pulling out from the internal space engaged by the engaged portion 332 (direction of arrow L), and then the deformation of the engaging member 310 is returned. , The engagement between the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 can be released.

It is preferable that the gap between the outer portion of the recess 317 of the engaging member 310 and the first opening 301c is formed as small as possible. According to this, the fixing member 3 from the rear case 300
The finger of the person who removes the 20 can be made uninsertable, and a special tool can be inserted.
As a result, the board box 100 (main control device 110) can be replaced only by an operator having a dedicated tool, and it is possible to prevent the board box 100 from being replaced by an unauthorized board box 100.

Next, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) caulked and fastened to the shaft support member 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b). 42 (a) is a perspective rear view of the rear case 300 and the board box 100 (main control device 110), and is shown in FIG. 42 (a).
b) is a rear view of the rear case 300 and the board box 100 (main control device 110). In FIG. 42B, the outer shape of the engaging member 310 overlapping with the substrate box 100 is shown by a chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b), the substrate box 100 has one end side (arrow R).
A bearing portion 117 protruding from the end portion (on the directional side) is provided. The bearing portion 117 is in the vertical direction (arrow U).
A pair is arranged at a predetermined interval (in the −D direction). As described above, the pair of bearing portions 117 are portions that are caulked and fastened to the support portion 342 of the shaft support member 340, and the dimensions of the support portion 342 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) and the distance between the facing portions are substantially equal to each other. Set to the same. As a result, the substrate box 100 is fastened to the shaft support member 340 by disposing the support portion 342 between the pair of bearing portions 117 facing each other and inserting a caulking pin from above the bearing portion 117 to caulking and fixing the board box 100. Will be done.

According to the board box 100 configured as described above, the board box 100 is rotatably held with respect to the shaft support member 340 and is arranged on the back surface side of the engaging member 310, as described above. As described above, when the operating element 315 is operated to engage the engaging member 310 with the fixing member 320, the operating element 315 can be easily operated by rotating the board box 100. Further, after the engaging member 310 is engaged with the fixing member 320, the board box 10 is used.
By arranging 0 on the back side of the engaging member 310, it is possible to make it difficult to operate the actuator 315 from the back side of the back case 300. As a result, after the pachinko machine 10 is assembled, the operator 3
It is possible to prevent 15 from being operated and replaced with an illegal board box.

The other end side (arrow L direction side) of the board box 100 is the bottom wall portion 3 of the rear case 300.
It is inserted from the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the board box 100 toward 01 and fixed by a screw fastened to the back surface case 300. As a result, the board box 100 is arranged on the back side of the back case 300 in a non-rotatable (operable) state.

Next, a detailed configuration of the lower displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 69. First, a structure for displacing the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46.

FIG. 43 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIG. 44 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400. FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement unit 400. It should be noted that FIGS. 43 to 14 show a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at the retracted position (the position arranged at the lowermost position with respect to the base member 410).

As shown in FIGS. 43 to 46, the lower displacement unit 400 includes a base member 410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300 and a transmission member disposed on the base member 410. The 420, the link member 430 connected to the base member 410 and displaced with the displacement of the transmission member 420, one end slidably connected to the base member 410 and the other end connected to the link member 430. It is mainly provided with a lower displacement member 440 that is displaced by transmitting a driving force from the link member 430.

The base member 410 is formed by combining two horizontally long plate members having a rectangular front view in the front-rear direction, and includes a front base 411 arranged on the front side and a back base 412 arranged on the back side. A transmission member 420 and a link member 430 are arranged between the front base 411 and the back base 412 facing each other.

The front base 411 has two sliding grooves 411 penetrating in the front-rear direction (the depth direction of the paper in FIG. 43).
It is mainly provided with a, 411b, two columnar shaft support pins 411c, 411d protruding toward the back surface side, and a curved wall portion 411e protruding in an arc shape with the shaft support pin 411d as an axis. ..

The sliding grooves 411a and 411b have two protrusions 47 protruding from the back surface side of the lower displacement member 440.
Holes 2, 473 are inserted into the holes, respectively. The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are formed so as to extend long in the left-right direction, respectively. Therefore, the protrusion 47 inserted into the sliding grooves 411a and 411b
By displacing 2,473 along the sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the lower displacement member 440 can be slid in the left-right direction.

Further, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are formed by being curved in an arc shape, respectively, and are upward (FIG. 4) from the left end (left side in FIG. 43) to the right end (right side in FIG. 43) of the front base 411.
3 Opened in the upward direction). Further, in the sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the axes of the respective arcs are arranged at different positions, and the gap between the facing portions in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 43) is narrowed from the left end portion to the right end portion.

Since the distance between the protrusions 472 and 473 of the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440, which will be described later, does not change, the lower displacement member 440 rotates when the lower displacement member 440 is slid along the sliding groove. It can be displaced while being displaced. That is, the two sliding grooves 411a and 411b
By changing the distance between them, the lower displacement member 440 can be rotated along with the sliding without applying a rotational driving force to the lower displacement member 440. The details of the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 will be described later.

The shaft support pin 411c is a protrusion inserted into the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 of the transmission member 420 described later, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft portion 422a. again,
The shaft support pin 411c is formed of a metal rod and is fitted onto the front base 411. Therefore, when a force acts on the cam member 422 from the outer peripheral surface thereof in the axial direction, the shaft support pin 4
It is possible to prevent the 11c from breaking (breaking).

The shaft support pin 411d is a through hole 431 formed at one end of the first link member 431, which will be described later.
It is a protrusion inserted into a and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 431a. Further, the shaft support pin 411d is formed of a metallic rod-like body and is externally fitted to the front base 411. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the shaft support pin 411d from breaking (damaging) when a force is applied to the first link member 431 toward the through hole 431a.

The curved wall portion 411e protrudes from the back surface side of the front base 411 and also has a shaft support pin 411.
It is formed by bending around the axis of d. The protruding distance of the curved wall portion 411e is set to a distance that abuts on the protruding tip surface of the plate-shaped protrusion 431b of the first link member 431, which will be described later. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first link member 431 from being displaced forward. In addition, the curved wall portion 411e
Is formed so as to be curved around the axis of the shaft support pin 411d, so that even when the first link member 431 is rotated around the axis of the shaft support pin 411d, the plate-shaped protrusion 431 of the first link member 431
b can be brought into contact with the protruding tip surface of the curved wall portion 411e.

The collection port 411f is an opening for allowing the ball ejected from the exit opening 471 to flow into the collection port 411f and collect it by moving the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440, which will be described later. The downstream side of the collection port 411f is connected to the collection path of the ball. The collection port 411f is a front base 41.
It is a hole formed protruding from the right end of No. 1, and its opening surface is a surface facing the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state and below the gravitational direction of the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 in the first overhanging state. It is considered to be a surface located on the side.

Further, the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state is arranged above the recovery port 411f. Therefore, the ball emitted from the emission opening 471 can be received in the collection port 411f and quickly collected.

The back base 412 has groove portions 412a and 412b recessed from the front side (front side of the paper in FIG. 44) toward the back side, and a locking portion 412c formed so as to project toward the front side in the vicinity of the groove portion 412b. Formed primarily in preparation.

The groove portion 412a is a hole for inserting the tip end side of the shaft support pin 411c of the front base 411 described above, is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft support pin 411c, and faces the shaft support pin 411c. It is recessed in the position. Therefore, the cam member 422 is held in a non-detachable manner from the base member 410 by combining the front base 411 and the rear base 412 after inserting the shaft support pin 411c into the shaft portion 422a. Further, since the rear base 412 can hold the tip end portion of the shaft support pin 411c, the shaft support pin 411c and the front base 411 when a force is applied to the cam member 422 in the axial direction from the outer peripheral surface thereof. It is possible to prevent bending and breaking from the connecting portion.

The groove portion 412b is a hole for inserting the tip end side of the shaft support pin 411d of the front base 411 described above, is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft support pin 411d, and faces the shaft support pin 411d. It is recessed in the position. Therefore, the first link member 431 has a through hole 431.
After the shaft support pin 411d is inserted through a, the front base 411 and the back base 412 are combined so as to be held in a non-removable manner from the base member 410. Also, the back base 412
However, since the tip of the shaft support pin 411d can be held, when a force is applied to the first link member 431 in the direction of the through hole 431a, the shaft support pin 411d bends from the connecting portion with the front base 411. It can be prevented from breaking.

The locking portion 412c is a plate for locking one end side of the urging spring SP1 described later, and the urging spring S
It is formed on the outside of P1. As a result, one end side of the urging spring SP1 can be locked. A detailed description of the urging spring SP1 will be described later.

The transmission member 420 has a transmission gear 421 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM1 attached to the front side of the front base 411, and a cam meshed with the transmission gear 421 and rotated by driving the transmission gear 421. It is mainly provided with a member 422.

The transmission gear 421 is a gear having a toothed surface over the entire outer peripheral surface, and is externally fitted to the shaft portion of the drive motor KM1. Therefore, when electric power is applied to the drive motor KM1 and the shaft portion is rotated, the transmission gear 421 is also rotated in the same manner.

The cam member 422 is formed in a shape in which one ends of two semicircles having different outer shapes in a front view are combined, and is formed of a plate-like body having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The small semicircular portion of the outer shape of the cam member 422 has a tooth surface 4 that meshes with the transmission gear 421 on the outer peripheral surface.
22b is engraved, and a shaft portion 422a is formed through the center of the semicircle. Cam member 42
A sliding groove 422c recessed on the back surface side facing the link member 430, which will be described later, is formed in the semicircular portion having a large outer shape of 2.

The shaft portion 422a is a hole through which the shaft support pin 411c is inserted as described above, and the shaft support pin 41
By rotatably supporting the shaft portion 422a to 1c, the cam member 422 is supported by the shaft support pin 411c.
It is held rotatably around the axis of.

The cam member 422 is a base member 410 in a state where the tooth surface 422b is in mesh with the transmission gear 421.
When the transmission gear 421 is rotated, the cam member 422 can rotate about the axis of the shaft portion 422a.

The sliding groove 422c is recessed along the outer peripheral portion of the semicircular portion having a large radius of the cam member 422. Therefore, the distance from the shaft portion 422a increases from one end side to the other end side. Further, the sliding groove 422c is a stepped portion 422c1 extending downward from the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 in the direction of the through hole 431a when the lower displacement member 440 is located in the retracted state described later. When the member 440 is located in the second overhanging state described later, the step portion 422c3 extending from the sliding projection 431d in the direction of the through hole 431a, and the lower displacement member 440 are in the retracted state and the second overhanging state. It is provided with a step portion 422c2 extending in the direction of the through hole 431a from the sliding projection 431d when it is located in the first overhanging state in the intermediate state.

The link member 430 is formed of two link members, a first link member 431 and a second link member 432. Further, the link member 430 is formed by rotatably connecting the ends of the first link member 431 and the second link member 432.

The first link member 431 is formed by being bent into a dogleg shape in front view, and is formed into a plate shape having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The first link member 431 is a link that is displaced with the displacement of the cam member 422, and has a through hole 431a that penetrates in the front-rear direction on one end side and a columnar connecting projection 431c that protrudes on the back side on the other end side. , A plate-shaped protrusion 431b protruding at a position facing the curved wall portion 411e described above, and a columnar sliding protrusion 4 protruding toward the front side of the bent portion.
It is formed mainly with 31d.

The through hole 431a is a through hole into which the shaft support pin 411d is inserted as described above. 1st
The link member 431 is rotatably held with respect to the base member 410 by combining the front base 411 and the back base 412 with the shaft support pin 411d inserted into the through hole 431a.

The plate-shaped protrusion 431b is a protrusion that suppresses the position shift of the first link member 431 in the front-rear direction and prevents the first link member 431 from colliding with the cam member 422 arranged in the front, and penetrates through the plate-shaped protrusion 431b. It is formed in a plate-like body that protrudes in a curved shape about the hole 431a, and the protruding length thereof is set to be larger than the thickness of the cam member 422 in the front-rear direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the back surface of the cam member 422 from colliding with the front surface of the first link member 431.

Further, the protruding dimension of the plate-shaped protrusion 9431b is set to be larger than the thickness (dimension in the arrow FB direction) of the cam member 422. Further, there is a slight gap (distance X14 (see FIG. 55A)) with the base member 410 (curved wall portion 411e) facing the protruding tip surface of the plate-shaped protrusion 431b.
) Are placed apart.

The cam member 422 is arranged in a displaceable state between the front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-shaped projection 431b and the facing surface (rear surface) of the curved wall portion 411e. Further, the dimensions of the two gaps including the gap between the cam member 422 and the first link member 431 facing each other and the gap between the cam member 422 and the base member 410 facing each other are the above-mentioned distance X1.
It is set to be larger than 4.

As a result, the first link member 9 is in the direction in which the above-mentioned distance X14 becomes smaller (arrow F direction).
When the 431 bends, the protruding tip surface of the plate-shaped protrusion 431b can be brought into contact with the facing base member 410 (curved wall portion 411e). Therefore, the cam member 422 is located between the front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-shaped protrusion 9431b and the projecting surface (rear surface) of the curved wall portion 411e.
It is possible to prevent the displacement from being regulated by being pinched.

The connecting protrusion 431c is a shaft portion connected to the second link member 432, which will be described later, and is inserted into the through hole 432a of the second link member 432, and the outer diameter of the head is the through hole 4 from the back surface side.
Screws or the like larger than 32a are fastened. As a result, the first link member 431 and the second link member 432 are rotatably connected.

A wall portion 431f projecting to the back surface side is formed at the edge portion of the through hole 431a. Wall 431
reference numeral f is a wall surface for fitting and holding the urging spring SP1 described later on the outer peripheral surface thereof.

The link-side engaging portion 431e is a protrusion that locks the other end side of the urging spring SP1 fitted to the wall portion 431f, and is formed so as to project like a hook on the back surface side of one end side of the first link member 431. ..
Therefore, one end of the urging spring SP1 is engaged with the locking portion 412c of the rear base 412, and the other end of the urging spring SP1 is engaged with the link-side engaging portion 431e of the first link member 431. NS. Therefore, the urging force of the urging spring SP1 can be applied in the direction of rotating the other end side of the first link member 431 upward with respect to the base member 410. As a result, when the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced, the urging force of the urging spring SP1 acts, so that the drive motor K
The energy consumption of M1 can be suppressed.

The sliding projection 431d is formed at a position separated from the through hole 431a at a distance substantially the same as the separation distance from the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 from the through hole 431a. Further, the tip portion of the sliding protrusion 431d is inserted inside the sliding groove 422c. That is, the size of the outer diameter of the sliding protrusion 431d is formed to be smaller than the width dimension between the sliding grooves 422c facing each other.

By arranging the sliding projection 431d inside the sliding groove 422c, the sliding projection 431d slides and is displaced inside the sliding groove 422c with the rotational displacement of the cam member 422. That is, when the cam member 422 is displaced, the first link member 431 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 431a. A detailed description of the displacement of the first link member 431 will be described later.

Further, since the sliding protrusion 431d and the plate-shaped protrusion 431b are formed at positions close to each other, the plate-shaped protrusion 431b suppresses the displacement of the first link member 431 to the front. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the sliding protrusion 431d from pushing the cam member 422 forward. As a result, it is no longer necessary to increase the recessed depth of the sliding groove 422c recessed in the cam member 422, and the cam member 42
The rigidity of 2 can be ensured without increasing the thickness in the front-rear direction.

One of the second link members 432 is formed into a long front view rectangle, and is formed into a plate shape having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The second link member 432 is mainly provided with a through hole 432a formed through the one end side in the front-rear direction and a through hole 432b formed through the other end side in the front-rear direction.

The through hole 432a is a hole for being connected to the first link member 431 as described above, and the connecting protrusion 431c is inserted therein. As a result, the second link member 432 is rotatably connected to the first link member 431.

The through hole 432b is connected to the lower displacement member 440 described later and can transmit the displacement of the link member 430 to the lower displacement member 440. The through hole 432b is a protrusion 48 of the rear case 482, which will be described later.
It is a hole into which 2a is inserted, and its inner diameter is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 482a. Therefore, by inserting the protrusion 482a into the through hole 432b and fastening a screw or the like having a head larger than the inner diameter of the through hole 432b to the tip of the protrusion 482a, the lower displacement member 440 becomes the second link member 432. It is held rotatably against. Therefore, in the drive of the lower displacement member 440, when the cam member 422 is rotationally displaced, the displacement is transmitted via the link member 430.

Next, the displacement operation of the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 52. 47 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state, FIG. 48 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first overhanging state, and FIG. 49 is a lower displacement unit in the second overhanging state. It is a front view of 400. FIG. 50 shows the lower displacement unit 40 in the retracted state.
0 is a rear view, FIG. 51 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first overhang state, and FIG. 52 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the second overhang state. In addition, FIG. 5
0 to 52 show a transparent view of the back base 412. Further, in FIGS. 50 to 52, a part of the plate-shaped protrusion 431b and the curved wall portion 411e of the first link member 431 is shown by a chain line.

Further, in the retracted state, the sliding projection 431d arranged inside the sliding groove 422c is the stepped portion 4.
It is in a state where the lower displacement member 440 is arranged on the lower side while being arranged between the facing portions of the 42c1. In the second overhanging state, the sliding protrusions 431d are arranged between the facing portions of the step portions 442c3, and the lower displacement member 440 is provided.
The tip side of is placed at the top. The first overhanging state is a state in which the sliding projections 431d are arranged between the facing portions of the step portions 442c2, and the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in an intermediate state between the retracted state and the second overhanging state.

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 50, in the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state, the cam member 422 at the first position is rotated by the transmission gear 421 and the other end side of the sliding groove 422c (step portion 422).
The c3 side) is positioned on the right side (right side in FIG. 50) of the shaft portion 422a when viewed from the rear. In this case, the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 is guided along the inner wall of the sliding groove 422c and is positioned at the step portion 422c1. Therefore, the first link member 431 is in a state where the other end side (connecting projection 431c side) is located on the right side (right side in FIG. 50) of the through hole 431a on one end side when viewed from the rear (rotating around the through hole 431a). It is in a state where the end side is positioned at the lower end of the rotatable range (first driven position).

Since the second link member 432 is connected to the first link member 431, the first link member 4
One end side (through hole 432a side) connected to 31 is located on the right side of the rear view (right side of FIG. 50). As a result, the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432 is the front base 4.
The protrusions 472 and 473 connected to 11 are on the right side of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b when viewed from the rear (FIG. 5).
It is considered to be located on the right side of 0). As described above, the distance between the sliding grooves 411a and 411b in the vertical direction is larger on the right side in the rear view than on the left side, so that the lower displacement member 44
0 is arranged in a state where the longitudinal direction is substantially parallel to the left-right direction. That is, it is in a state of being arranged in front of the front base 411.

The displacement from the retracted state shown in FIGS. 47 and 50 to the first overhanging state shown in FIGS. 46 and 51 is performed by displacing the cam member 422.

In the first overhanging state, the transmission gear 421 is rotated by the driving force of the driving motor KM1, and the cam member 422 is rotated by approximately 90 degrees from the retracted position and displaced to the third position. As a result, the other end side (step portion 422c3 side) of the cam member 422 is positioned above the shaft portion 422a. The first link member 43 guided to the inner wall of the sliding groove 422c by this rotational displacement.
The sliding projection 431d of No. 1 is displaced with the displacement of the sliding groove 422c and is arranged at the third driven position. In the first overhanging state, the sliding projection 431d is the stepped portion 422c of the sliding groove 422c.
Guided between the two inner walls facing each other.

Therefore, the first link member 431 is rotated approximately 30 degrees around the through hole 431a due to the displacement of the sliding projection 431d, and the other end side (connecting projection 431c side) is from the retracted position to the upper left of the rear view (FIG. 51). It is displaced to the upper left).

Due to the rotational displacement of the first link member 431, the second link member 432 connected to the first link member 431 is displaced, and the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432 is displaced. In this case, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced along the shape of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b because the protrusions 472 and 473 are slidably connected to the sliding grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411. As described above, the distance between the sliding grooves 411a and 411b in the vertical direction is narrowed from the right side in the rear view to the left side, so that the lower displacement member 440 slides to the right side in the front view (right side in FIG. 48). While being displaced, the tip side is rotationally displaced upward.

Further, in the first overhanging state, the collection port 411f is located on the lower side in the gravity direction on the tip side. That is, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced from the retracted state to the first overhanging state, the tip side of the lower displacement member 440 is overhanging to the right side of the front view of the base member 410 by rotationally displacing the lower displacement member 440. It can be displaced without causing it. As a result, it is possible to easily form a displacement region different from the variable region of other displacement accessories. It is possible to suppress collision with other displacement accessories.

Further, since the recovery port 411f is located below one end side of the lower displacement member 440 (the side opposite to the protrusions 472 and 473 sides connected to the front base 411), the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440, which will be described later, is located. When the ball is launched and falls downward from the exit opening 471 as it is, the ball can be thrown to the collection port 411f.

The displacement from the first overhanging state shown in FIGS. 48 and 51 to the second overhanging state shown in FIGS. 49 and 52 is performed by further displacing the cam member 422 from the first overhanging state.

In the second overhanging state, the transmission gear 42 is driven by the driving force of the driving motor KM1 from the first overhanging state.
1 is rotated, and the cam member 422 is arranged at a second position rotated by approximately 90 degrees from the position in the first overhanging state (third position). Therefore, the other end side of the cam member 422 (the step portion 422c3 side is positioned above the shaft portion 422a. Further, the sliding of the first link member 431 guided to the inner wall of the sliding groove 422c by this rotational displacement. The moving protrusion 431d is displaced along with the displacement of the sliding groove 422c and is arranged at the second driven position. In the second overhanging state, the sliding protrusion 431d
Is guided between the facings of the inner walls of the stepped portion 422c1 of the sliding groove 422c.

Therefore, the first link member 431 is rotated approximately 30 degrees around the through hole 431a due to the displacement of the sliding projection 431d, and the other end side (connecting projection 431c side) is seen from the position in the first overhanging state. It is displaced to the upper left (upper left of FIG. 52).

Due to the rotational displacement of the first link member 431, the second link member 432 connected to the first link member 431 is displaced, and the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432 is displaced. In this case, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced along the shape of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b because the protrusions 472 and 473 are slidably connected to the sliding grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411. As described above, the distance between the sliding grooves 411a and 411b in the vertical direction is narrowed from the right side in the rear view to the left side, so that the lower displacement member 440 slides to the right side in the front view (right side in FIG. 49). While being displaced, the tip side is rotationally displaced upward.

Further, as in the first overhanging state, in the second overhanging state, the collection port 41 is on the lower side in the gravity direction on the tip side.
It is assumed that 1f is positioned. That is, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced from the retracted state to the second overhanging state, the tip side of the lower displacement member 440 is overhanging to the right side of the front view of the base member 410 by rotationally displacing the lower displacement member 440. It can be displaced without causing it. As a result, it is possible to easily form a displacement region different from the variable region of the other displacement accessory, and it is possible to suppress collision with the other displacement accessory.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the positional relationship between the first link member 431 and the cam member 422 in each state will be described. FIG. 53 (a) shows the first link member 431 and the cam member 42 in the retracted state, FIG. 53 (b) shows the first overhanging state, and FIG. 53 (c) shows the second overhanging state.
It is a rear view with 2. In FIGS. 53 (a) to 53 (c), the first cam member 422 is shown.
The portion overlapping with the link member 431 is shown by a chain line.

As shown in FIG. 53 (a), in the retracted state, the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431d.
Is arranged between the facings of the inner walls of the stepped portion 422c1 of the sliding groove 422c. Further, as described above, the sliding projection 431d is formed at a position substantially the same as the distance between the through hole 431a and the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422, and at a position separated from the through hole 431a. Therefore, when a force rotating around the axis of the through hole 431a acts on the first link member 431 located in the retracted state,
The force can be applied to the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 from the sliding projection 431d. Therefore, the rotational force of the first link member 431 can prevent the cam member 422 from rotating. As a result, in the retracted state, the first link member 431 via the second link member 432
It is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 440 connected to the displacement member 440 from being displaced.

As shown in FIG. 53 (b), in the first overhanging state, the sliding projection 43 of the first link member 431
1d, it is arranged between the facings of the inner walls of the stepped portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c. Therefore, as in the retracted state, when a force rotating around the through hole 431a acts on the first link member 431 located in the first overhanging state, the force is applied from the sliding projection 431d to the cam member 422. Shaft 422a
Can act on. Therefore, with the rotational force of the first link member 431, the cam member 422
Can be suppressed from rotating. As a result, in the first overhanging state, the second link member 432
It is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 440 connected to the first link member 431 from being displaced.

Here, in the first overhanging position, the drive motor KM1 needs to be maintained in the stopped state in order to maintain the stopped state because it is in the intermediate position of the displacement of the lower displacement member 440. Therefore, there is a problem that energy consumption increases when the lower displacement member 440 is stopped at the first overhanging position (intermediate position of displacement).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the first overhanging state, the sliding protrusion 4 of the first link member 431
Since the 31d is arranged between the inner walls of the stepped portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c facing each other, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 as described above. Therefore, even if the power of the drive motor KM1 is stopped when the lower displacement member 440 is stopped at a position in the middle of the displacement, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the lower displacement member 440. As a result, it is possible to prevent the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 from increasing when the lower displacement member 440 is stopped in the middle of displacement.

As shown in FIG. 53 (c), in the second overhanging state, the sliding projection 43 of the first link member 431
1d, it is arranged between the facings of the inner walls of the stepped portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c. Therefore, as in the retracted state and the first overhanging state, the through hole 4 is provided in the first link member 431 located in the second overhanging state.
When a force rotating about the axis of 31a acts, the force can be applied to the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 from the sliding projection 431d. Therefore, the rotational force of the first link member 431 can prevent the cam member 422 from rotating. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 440 connected to the first link member 431 via the second link member 432 from being displaced in the second overhanging state.

Further, each step portion 422c1, 422c2, 422c3 has a sliding protrusion 431d and a through hole 43.
Since it is extended in the direction connecting to 1a, the width dimension of the sliding groove 422c in the direction in which the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 is displaced can be reduced. Therefore, the gap between the sliding groove 422c and the sliding protrusion 431d at which the first link member 431 can be rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 431a at the retracted position, the first overhanging position, and the second overhanging position is made small. can. Therefore, the first link member 431 in each state can reduce the clearance that can be rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 431a. As a result, the width in which the lower displacement member 440 in each state sways due to vibration or inertial force when the displacement is stopped can be reduced, and the player can easily visually recognize the stopped state.

Therefore, the transmission member 420 and the link member 430 (drive mechanism) that drive the lower displacement member 440 regulate that the lower displacement member 440 is displaced in the direction of reaction when the game ball is ejected from the ball receiving portion 467. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 440 from being displaced with respect to the base member 410 due to the reaction. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the relationship between the link member 430 and the cam member 422 in the front-rear direction will be described. FIG. 54 (a) shows the lower displacement unit 4 in the LIVA-LIVA line of FIG. 50.
FIG. 54 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of 00, which is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the LIVb-LIVb line of FIG. 51. In addition, in FIG. 51 and FIG. 52, the back base 412
Is shown transparently, but in FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b), a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 in a non-transparent state is shown.

As shown in FIG. 54 (a), the link member 43 of the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state.
0 is arranged between the back base 412 and the cam member 422. Therefore, the lower displacement member 44
It is possible to suppress 0 from swinging in the front-back direction. That is, since the other end side of the first link member 431 is connected to the lower displacement member 440 configured by combining a plurality of equipments via the second link member 432, the load of the lower displacement member 440 causes the front-back direction. Since the cam member 422 is arranged forward where there is a risk of bending, it is possible to prevent the first link member 431 from bending forward. As a result, it is possible to suppress the movement of the first link member 431 forward, so that the lower displacement member 44
It is possible to suppress 0 from swinging in the front-back direction.

As shown in FIG. 54 (b), the link member 430 of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first overhanging state is arranged between the back surface base 412 and the cam member 422 as in the case of the retracted state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the downward displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction.

Further, in the retracted state and the first overhanging state, the cam member 422 is arranged on the front side of the connecting portion between the first link member 431 and the second link member 432 of the link member 430. Therefore, when the link member 430 is formed of the two members, it is necessary to make the connecting portion rotatable, so that the rigidity of the link member 430 is weaker than that of the other portions due to the gap, and the link member 430 is easily bent. Since the member 422 is arranged, it is possible to prevent the connecting portion of the link member 430 from bending. As a result, it is possible to suppress the downward displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction.

<Regulate the displacement of the displacement member by the regulatory means that regulates the displacement of the driven member>
Next, the relationship between the cam member 422 and the curved wall portion 411e will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55 (a) shows the lower displacement unit 4 in the LVa-LVa line of FIG. 50.
00 is a cross-sectional view, FIG. 55 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the LVb-LVb line of FIG. 51, and FIG. 55 (c) is a lower displacement unit in the LVc-LVc line of FIG. 52. It is sectional drawing of 400.

As shown in FIG. 55 (a), when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the retracted state (first position), the cam member 422 and the curved wall portion 411e are in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). Placed in different positions. Therefore, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the retracted state (first position) to the first overhanging state (third position), it is possible to suppress an increase in resistance acting on the cam member 422. As a result, the displacement start of the lower displacement member 440 can be stabilized.

As shown in FIGS. 55 (b) and 55 (c), the lower displacement unit 400 is in the first overhanging state (
In the case of the third position), a part of the cam member 422 is arranged at a position separating a predetermined gap on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the curved wall portion 411e. As a result, when the cam member 422 is displaced in the front direction, the axial side surface of the cam member 422 is brought into contact with the curved wall portion 411e, and the cam member 422 can be prevented from being displaced to the front side.

The surface of the cam member 422 on the front base 411 side (arrow F direction side) is the front base 41.
It is formed on a flat surface parallel to the back surface of No. 1 (see FIG. 45). As a result, when the cam member 422 is displaced toward the curved wall portion 411e, the flat surface of the cam member 422 can be brought into contact with the curved wall portion 411e. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cam member 422 from partially contacting the curved wall portion 411e and to prevent the force from being concentrated on a part of the cam member 422. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cam member 422 from being damaged.

Here, as described above, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced from the retracted state (first position) to the first overhanging state (third position), the protrusion 473 connected to the tip side (front base 411). And the opposite side in the longitudinal direction) is rotationally displaced upward (in the direction of arrow U). Therefore, as the longitudinal direction component of the lower displacement member 440 approaches the direction of gravity, the force component at which the lower displacement member 440 tilts in the front-rear direction is increased. Therefore, in the case of the first overhanging state (third position), the force in the front-rear direction acting on the link member 430 supporting the lower displacement member 440 is higher than in the case of the retracted state (first position). Be enlarged. As a result, the cam member 422 connected to the link member 430 is likely to be displaced in the front-rear direction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower displacement unit 400 is first from the retracted state (first position).
A part of the cam member 422 is a curved wall portion 41 when the cam member 422 is displaced beyond the overhanging state (third position).
Since it is arranged on the front side of 1e, it is possible to regulate the displacement of the cam member 422 toward the front side. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction between the first overhang state (third position) and the second overhang state (second position), and the player can displace the lower displacement member 440. Can be easily seen.

The displacement of the link member 430 toward the back surface can be regulated by disposing the link member 430 between the back surface base 412 and the cam member 422 as described above. That is, when the link member 430 swings toward the back surface, the link member 430 can be brought into contact with the back surface base 412 to regulate the displacement of the link member 430. As a result, it is possible to suppress the downward displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction.

Further, the front base 411 is provided with a regulating means (curved wall portion 411e) for restricting the swing of the link member 430 in a direction other than the driven direction, and the cam member 422 is displaced between the first position and the second position. The first displacement region that displaces the third position between the first position and the intermediate position between the first position and the second position and the second displacement region that displaces the second position from the third position can be displaced. The link member 430 is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position by the displacement of the cam member 422 from the first position to the second position, and the link member 430 is driven from the first driven position to the first driven position and the second driven position. The first driven area that displaces the third driven position at the intermediate position with and the second driven area that displaces the second driven position from the third driven position can be displaced, and the second displacement area and the first driven area can be displaced. When a part of and is set in the same area and the cam member 422 is displaced in the second displacement area, the regulating means (curved wall portion 4)
Since the swing of the cam member 422 in a direction other than the displacement direction is regulated by 11e), the swing of the link member 430 and the cam member 422 is regulated by using the same portion of the regulating means (curved wall portion 411e). be able to.

Therefore, since it is sufficient to form the regulating means (curved wall portion 411e) at one place, the cam member 42
Compared with the case where the regulating means for regulating the displacement is formed in each of the 2 and the link member 430, the shape of the regulating means can be simplified and the manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Further, the means for regulating the swing of the link member 430 and the cam member 422 (curved wall portion 411e).
Since it can be regulated by using the same part of 1 (curved wall portion 411e)
Since it is not necessary to form the link member 430, the cam member 422, and the regulation portion, respectively, the regulation means (curved wall portion 411e) can be reduced accordingly.

Further, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the retracted state to the second overhanging state, the protrusions 472 and 473 of the lower displacement member 440 inserted into the sliding grooves 411a and 411b formed in the front base 411. (Color C arranged on the protrusions 472 and 473 (see FIG. 14)) is on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the other end side (step portion 422c3 side) of the cam member 422 as the cam member 422 is displaced. (See FIGS. 50 to 52). As a result, when the other end side (step portion 422c3 side) of the cam member 422 is pushed out to the back surface side by the protrusions 472 and 473 (color C arranged on the protrusions 472 and 473), the cam member 422 is pushed to the back surface side. There is a risk that it will be rotationally displaced in the front-rear direction around 422a and come into contact with the link member 430.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the displacement of the cam member 422 toward the front side can be regulated by abutting against the curved wall portion 411e, so that the cam member 422 can be regulated by the shaft portion 422a.
It is possible to suppress rotational displacement in the front-back direction around the center. As a result, it is possible to prevent the link member 430 and the cam member 422 from coming into contact with each other.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the cam member 422 is displaced beyond the first overhanging state (third position), the displacement is restricted by the curved wall portion 411e, so that the cam member 422 is curved during the initial operation. It is possible to prevent the frictional resistance from increasing due to contact with the wall portion 411e. As a result, the initial operation of the cam member 422 can be stabilized.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the cam member 422 and the first link member 431 when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state will be described. 56 (a) is L of FIG. 52.
It is sectional drawing of the lower displacement unit 400 in the VIa-LVIa line, and FIG. Is. In FIG. 56B, the outer shape of the base member 410 is shown by a chain line.

As shown in FIG. 56, when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state, the end portion of the cam member 422 comes into contact with the plate-shaped protrusion 431b of the first link member 431. This makes it possible to regulate the rotational displacement of the cam member 422 in the direction in which the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the retracted state (first position) to the second displacement state. As a result, the operation of stopping the rotational displacement of the cam member 422 can be dispersed between the meshing portion of the transmission gear 421 and the tooth surface 422b and the contact portion of the cam member 422 and the first link member 431, and transmission is possible. Gear 421 and tooth surface 42
It is possible to prevent the tooth surface of 2b from being damaged.

Further, when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state, the first link member 431
The contact surface between the plate-shaped projection 431b and the cam member 422 is set in a direction orthogonal to the virtual line KS1 passing through the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 and the contact portion thereof. As a result, when a force that displaces from the second displacement state to the retracted state (first position) acts around the axis of the first link member 431, the force is applied to the shaft of the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422. It is possible to suppress the action in the direction of rotating around. As a result, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the cam member 422 by the force acting on the first link member 431.

Here, as described above, the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced upward (in the direction of arrow U) on the tip end side (the side opposite to the protrusion 473 connected to the front base 411 in the longitudinal direction). Therefore, the first that supports the lower displacement member 440 by the amount that the directional component in the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 approaches the direction of gravity.
When the force in the rotational direction acting around the axis of the through hole 431a of the link member 431 is maximized, the transmission of the force from the first link member 431 to the cam member 422 is suppressed, so that the lower displacement member 440 is seconded. It can be easily maintained in the displaced position.

Further, when the cam member 422 is arranged at the position of the second displacement state, the lower displacement member 440
A force that rotates around the axis of the through hole 431a of the first link member 431 is applied by the load of. In this case, the force PW1 (see FIG. 56B) in the direction in which the end portion of the cam member 422 is pushed out by the plate-shaped protrusion 431b and the cam member 422 rotates around the axis of the shaft portion 422a, and the cam member 42.
The inner wall of the sliding groove 422c of 2 is pushed out from the sliding projection 431d, and the cam member 422 is the shaft portion 4.
The force PW2 (see FIG. 56B) in the direction of rotation around the axis of 22a acts in a direction in which they cancel each other out. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cam member 422 from rotating due to the force acted on by the first link member 431.

Next, the configuration of the lower displacement member 440 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. 57 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440, and FIG. 57 (b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member 440. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 440, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 440. 60 (a) and 60 (b) show the lower displacement member 4
It is a front view of 40.

Note that FIG. 60 (a) shows a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 is transparently viewed, and FIG. 60 (b) shows the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 transparently. The state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 57 to 60, the lower displacement member 440 includes a base member 470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 that covers the front and rear of the base member 470, and a case member 480 and a base member 470. It is mainly provided with a transmission mechanism 460 displaceably arranged between them and a decorative member 450 formed so as to cover the front and back of the case member 480.

The base member 470 is a plate member formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, and has a protrusion 472 and 473 protruding to the back side on one end side and an erection wall 471a standing on the front side from the edge on the other end side. , Left-right direction (FIG. 57 left-right direction) A projecting wall 477 that protrudes vertically from the upper end of the central portion to the front side in an up-down U-shape, and a projecting wall 477 engraved on the upper end of the base member 470 from the end of the projecting wall 477 to one end. A rack gear 476 to be installed, a shaft portion 474, 475 protruding to the front side, a rectangular wiring locking portion 478 attached to the back surface on one end side of the base member 470, and a vertical center portion of the base member 470. It is mainly provided with an opening 479 that extends from one end side to the other end side and is recessed.

As described above, the protrusions 472 and 473 have sliding grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411.
It is a connecting portion that is inserted into and connects the lower displacement member 440 and the front base 411. Therefore, it is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the dimension between the facings of the inner walls of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b.

The erection wall 471a is a wall portion for forming a gap between the front case 481 and the base member 470 facing each other when the front case 481, which will be described later, is attached to the base member 470.
It is set to an upright dimension that is larger than the diameter of the sphere.

The shaft portions 474 and 475 are protrusions that are inserted into the shafts of the transmission gears 462 and 463 of the transmission mechanism 460, which will be described later, to rotatably hold the transmission gears 462 and 463, and the transmission gears 462 and 463.
It is formed in a columnar shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole.

The rack gear 476 is engraved with a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 465 described later. As a result, the movable rack 464, which will be described later, slides and displaces with respect to the base member 470.
The transmission gear 465 can be rotated.

When the ball thrown from the ball throwing unit 600, which will be described later, is received in front of the base member 470 through the opening 451a of the decorative member 450, the projecting wall 477 causes the ball to be displaced downward.
It is a wall surface for suppressing falling to the outside of the sphere, and the space between the facing wall portions formed in a substantially U shape is formed larger than the diameter of the sphere.

The wiring locking portion 478 is a member for locking the flexible wiring (not shown) to the control board arranged on the back side of the base member 470, and is one end of the flexible wiring between the wiring locking portion 478 and the base member 470. It is attached to the back surface side of the base member 470 in a state of being via the base member 470. As a result, even if the lower displacement member 440 is displaceably arranged with respect to the base member 410, it is possible to prevent the flexible wiring from being entangled.

Further, the wiring locking portion 478 is provided with a protrusion 478a projecting in a columnar shape on the back surface side. The protrusion distance of the protrusion 478a is set to a distance that protrudes toward the back surface side of the link member 430 connected to the back surface side, and is set to a distance that allows contact with the front surface of the back surface base 412. As a result, the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed from swinging backward, and the link member 430 can be prevented from swinging backward.
Can be prevented from colliding with the back base 412.

The opening 469 is an opening that defines the slide displacement direction of the movable rack 464 arranged on the front side, and the guide plate 464d of the movable rack 464 described later is inserted inside.

The transmission mechanism 460 is a member arranged in front of the base member 470, and is a transmission gear 461.
, 462, 463, a drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461, and a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463, and is movable so as to be slidably displaceable in front of the base member 470. The movable rack 464 has a transmission gear 465 that is rotatably arranged on the rack 464 and its movable rack 464 and is in a state of being meshed with the rack gear 476, and a tooth surface meshed with the transmission gear 465. The rack 466, which is arranged so that it can be slid and displaced in the front,
It is mainly provided with a ball receiving portion 467 rotatably arranged on one end side of the rack 466.

The transmission gear 461 is a gear in which the shaft portion of the drive motor KM2 is fitted in the shaft hole, and the drive motor KM2 is attached to the base member 470 in a state of being connected to the drive motor KM2, whereby the base member 470 is attached. Arranged in.

As described above, the transmission gears 462 and 463 have the shaft portion 474 of the base member 470 in the shaft hole.
The 475 is inserted and rotatably held by the base member. Also, transmission gears 461 to 46
Reference numeral 3 is an meshed gear train, and the transmission gear 461 is rotated by the drive motor KM2 to rotate the terminal transmission gear 463.

The movable rack 464 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular plate in a front view, and has a rack gear 464a engraved on the lower end surface, a shaft portion 464b projecting in a columnar shape from the front side, and projecting upward from one end side of the upper end surface. A contact plate 464c, a guide plate 464d projecting from one end to the other end at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and a rack guide portion 464e projecting to the front side opposite to the guide plate 464d.
It is mainly provided with a collision portion 464f protruding from the lower end.

The rack gear 464a is a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463. Therefore, the base member 4
By arranging the rack gear 464a and the transmission gear 463 in the toothed state on the 70, the movable rack 464 can be displaced by the drive of the drive motor KM2.

The shaft portion 464b is a shaft portion in which the transmission gear 465 is rotatably held, and the transmission gear 46
It is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than that of the shaft hole of 5.

The contact plate 464c is a contact portion that abuts on the distribution member 540 of the distribution unit 500, which will be described later, to displace the distribution member 540. That is, the distribution member 540 can be displaced by the displacement of the movable rack 464. The mode of contact between the contact plate 464c and the distribution member 540 will be described later.

As described above, the guide plate 464d is a plate-shaped body inserted inside the opening 479 of the base member 470, and can define the displacement direction of the movable rack 464 displaced by the drive of the drive motor KM2. That is, the movable rack 4 that is displaced by the drive of the drive motor KM2.
64 can be displaced along the extension direction of the opening 479. In this embodiment, it should be noted that
Since the opening 479 extends in the left-right direction, the movable rack 464 can be slid and displaced in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470.

The rack guide portion 464e is a protrusion for regulating the displacement direction of the rack 466, which will be described later, and is projected from one end to the other end in the left-right direction.

The collision portion 464f comes into contact with the protrusion 492b of the displacement member 492, which will be described later, and the displacement member 492
It is a wall portion for displacing and is formed so as to project from the lower end of the movable rack 464. Further, the collision portion 464f is formed so that the other end side is inclined. As a result, the protrusion 4 of the displacement member 492
The 92b can be displaced by sliding along its inclined surface.

The rack 466 is formed of a horizontally long rod-shaped body having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a rack gear 466a engraved on the upper end surface, a shaft portion 466b which protrudes in a columnar shape from the other end to the back side, and a shaft portion 466b which protrudes to the front side. Two sliding plates 466c and a recessed portion 466 recessed from one end to the other on the back side.
It is formed mainly with d.

The rack gear 466a is meshed with a transmission gear 465 attached to the movable rack 464.
As a result, when the rack 466 is arranged in front of the movable rack 464, the movable rack 464 slides and displaces, so that the transmission gear 465 is rotated along with the slide displacement, and the driving force is transmitted to the rack 466. .. Therefore, the rack 466 can be displaced with respect to the movable rack 464.

The shaft portion 466b is a protrusion inserted into the shaft hole 467b of the ball receiving portion 467, which will be described later, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 can be held rotatably.

The sliding plate 466c is a protrusion inserted into the opening 481a of the front case 481 described later, and is formed of a plate-shaped body having a predetermined thickness. As a result, the transmission gear 46 is attached to the rack 466.
When the driving force is transmitted from 5 and the rack 466 is displaced with respect to the movable rack 464,
The displacement direction of the rack 466 can be defined as the extending direction of the opening 481a.

The recessed portion 466d is in a state where the rack guide portion 464e is arranged inside when the rack 466 is arranged in front of the movable rack 464. As a result, the transmission gear 4 is attached to the rack 466.
When the driving force is transmitted from 65 and the rack 466 is displaced with respect to the movable rack 464, the displacement direction of the rack 466 can be defined as the extension direction of the rack guide portion 464e.

Here, in order to regulate the displacement direction of the rack 466, if the recessed portion 466d and the rack guide portion 464e are formed, the displacement direction of the rack 466 can be defined as the extension direction of the rack guide portion 464e. However, since the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced while being slid and displaced in the left-right direction, the meshing state of the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 changes due to its own weight depending on the displacement state of the lower displacement member 440, and transmission occurs. Gear 465 to rack 46
There was a risk that the driving force would not be transmitted well to 6.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the position that defines the displacement direction of the rack 466 is the sliding plate 46.
Since the 6c and the opening 481a, the recessed portion 466d, and the rack guide portion 464e are formed at two locations, the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 are formed when the displacement state of the lower displacement member 440 is changed.
It is possible to suppress the change in the tooth alignment state of. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transmission of the drive from the transmission gear 465 to the rack 466 to be hindered.

Further, the sliding plate 466c is formed so as to project from two positions in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 57 (a)) of the rack 466, and the sliding plate 466c on the other end side (opposite side of the shaft portion 466b) is formed. It is arranged below the transmission gear 465 (lower side in FIG. 57) at the displacement end position of the rack (the position where the rack 466 most overhangs the movable rack 464).

Here, at the displacement end position, the ball receiving portion 467 arranged on the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466 performs a firing operation (rotational displacement) as described later, so that the ball receiving portion arranged on one end side of the rack 466 is arranged. The other end side of the rack is likely to be displaced due to the inertial force due to the displacement of the portion 467. Therefore, a load is likely to be applied to the tooth mating surfaces of the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466, and the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 are likely to be loaded.
Was in danger of being damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the sliding plate 466c on the other end side (opposite side of the shaft portion 466b) is
At the displacement end position of the rack (the position where the rack 466 is most overhanging with respect to the movable rack 464), the ball receiving portion 467 is launched (because it is arranged below the transmission gear 465 (lower side in FIG. 57)). It is possible to prevent the rack 466 from being displaced at the position where it meshes with the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 when the rotation operation is performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 from being damaged.

The ball receiving portion 467 is a portion that holds the game ball, is formed in a substantially U-shape in front view, and is formed so that the ball can be received in the inner portion of the U-shape. That is, the inside of the U-shape of the ball receiving portion 467 is formed slightly larger than the outer shape of the ball. As a result, one ball can be formed in the inner portion of the ball receiving portion 467. Further, the ball receiving portion 467 has a shaft hole 467b penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower end position of the U-shape, and
It is mainly provided with a leg portion 467a projecting downward from the lower outer peripheral surface.

As described above, the shaft hole 467b is a shaft hole for holding the ball receiving portion 467 in the rack 466 in a rotatable state, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 can be rotatably held by inserting the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466 into the shaft hole 467b. Further, after the shaft portion 466b is inserted into the shaft hole 467b, the urging spring SP2 is arranged around the shaft portion 466b, and a screw or the like having a head larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b is fastened to the shaft portion 466b. NS. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged in the rack 466 in a state of being urged around the right side of the front view. A detailed description of the aspect of the ball receiving portion 467 will be described later.

The leg portion 467a is a protrusion that urges the ball receiving portion 467 to be rotated by the urging spring SP2, and the front end thereof is described later with the U-shaped open portion of the ball receiving portion 467 facing upward. It is set at a position where it abuts on the bottom wall portion 481b of the case 481. Thereby, it is possible to regulate the rotation of the ball receiving portion 467.

The case member 480 is a member that covers the front and rear of the base member 470, and is a base member 47.
It mainly includes a front case 481 arranged on the front side of 0 and a back case 482 arranged on the back side.

The front case 481 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular plate in the front view, and has an opening 481a that extends in the left-right direction at a position substantially intermediate in the direction of gravity, a bottom wall portion 481b that is formed so as to protrude from the lower end surface on the back side, and a lower edge portion. It is mainly provided with a shaft hole 481c penetrating in the front-rear direction.

The opening 481a is formed through in the front-rear direction, and as described above, the base member 470a is formed.
When the front case 481 is arranged in the rack, the sliding plate 466c of the rack is inserted inside.

The bottom wall portion 481b is formed so as to project from the lower end portion of the front case 481 toward the back surface side, and extends in the left-right direction. Further, the bottom wall portion 481b is in a state where the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is in contact with the upper surface of the front case 481 in a state where the front case 481 is arranged on the base member 470.

The back case 482 is a plate member for arranging the control board 491 on the back side of the base member 470, and the outer shape in the front view is formed in a rectangular horizontal shape smaller than the outer shape of the base member 470. Further, the back case 482 includes a protrusion 482a protruding toward the back side.

As described above, the protrusion 482a is a connecting portion connected to the through hole 432b of the second link member 432, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 432b. Therefore, after inserting the protrusion 482a into the through hole 432b, the through hole 432b is inserted into the tip of the protrusion 482a.
By fastening a screw or the like having a head larger than the inner diameter of the rear case 482, the rear case 482 and the second link member 432 can be connected in a rotatable state.

The decorative member 450 is formed in an outer shape imitating a pattern or a character, and the pattern or a picture of the character is drawn on the surface of the decorative member 450. The decorative member 450 includes a front side decorative portion 451 arranged on the front side of the front case 481 and a back side decorative portion 452 arranged on the back side of the back case 482.
It is formed mainly with and. In this embodiment, a shark pattern (character) is drawn on the decorative member 450.

The front side decorative portion 451 is formed to have an outer diameter larger than the outer diameter of the front case 481 in the front view, and is attached to the front case 481. As a result, the members (case member 480, base member 470, etc.) arranged on the back side of the front side decorative portion can be made invisible to the player.

The back side decorative portion 452 is arranged behind the upper end of the front side decorative portion 451. As a result, the member arranged on the back side of the front side decoration portion 451 from above the back side decoration portion 452 can be made invisible to the player.

Further, the displacement member 492 is arranged on the same plane as the front decorative portion 451 in the front-rear direction. The displacement member 492 is mainly provided with a shaft portion 492a projecting to the back surface side and a protrusion 492b.

The shaft portion 492a is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 481c of the front case 481. Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 492a into the shaft hole 481c, the displacement member 492 can be connected to the front case in a rotatable state. Further, the shaft portion 492 into which the shaft hole 481c is inserted
An urging spring SP3 is arranged on the tip end side of a. As a result, the displacement member 492 can be arranged in an urged state. A detailed description of the displacement of the displacement member 492 will be described later.

The shaft portion 492a can transmit a driving force that rotates about the axis of the shaft portion 492a to the displacement member 492 by colliding with the collision portion 464f of the movable rack 464 described above. That is, the movable rack 464 can rotationally displace the displacement member 492 according to its displacement.

Therefore, the lower displacement member 440 includes a displacement member 492 (arrangement member) displaceably disposed on the lower displacement member 440 (base member), and the ball receiving portion 467 (displacement member) can hold the game ball. Moreover, since the displacement member 492 is formed so as to be injectable and can be displaced when the game ball is ejected from the ball receiving portion 467, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the lower displacement member 440.

That is, when the game ball is launched from the ball receiving portion 467, the lower displacement member 440 is equal to the weight of the game ball.
Where the position of the center of gravity is changed, for example, when a configuration is adopted in which the displacement member 492 is displaced in a direction that cancels the change in the position of the center of gravity due to the launch of the game ball, the lower displacement member 440 due to the change in the position of the center of gravity is adopted. The occurrence of rattling can be suppressed. Further, when the game ball is launched from the ball receiving portion 467, the lower displacement member 440 receives a reaction due to the launch of the game ball, for example, the displacement member 492 is provided in a direction that cancels the reaction caused by the launch of the game ball. When the displaceable configuration is adopted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the lower displacement member 440 due to the reaction.

Further, as described above, when the cam member 422 is arranged at the position of the second displacement state, the force PW1 in the direction in which the cam member 422 rotates around the axis of the shaft portion 422a (see FIG. 56 (b)). And the force PW2 (see FIG. 56B) in the direction in which the cam member 422 rotates around the axis of the shaft portion 422a acts in a direction in which they cancel each other out, and the cam member 422 is acted on from the first link member 431. Rotation by force can be suppressed. Therefore, in the second displacement state, the cam member 422 and the link member 430 can be arranged in a stable state. Therefore, when the game ball is launched from the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 at the position of the second displacement state, the first link member 431 or the cam member 422 swings due to the inertial force generated by the launch of the game ball. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the displacement of the displacement member 492 is performed by the collision portion 464f colliding with the shaft portion 492a due to the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for displacing the displacement member 492. .. That is, the drive motor KM2 for displacing the ball receiving portion 467 is
It can also be used as a driving means for displacing the displacement member 492. Therefore, the weight of the lower displacement member 440 can be reduced by that amount, and the rattling can be easily suppressed.

Further, since the displacement member 492 can be displaced mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, for example, the position of the ball receiving portion 467 is detected by the sensor device, and the displacement member 492 is detected according to the detection result. It is possible to eliminate the need for control of driving the displacement member 492 with the driving means, thereby reducing the product cost and ensuring the reliability of the displacement operation of the displacement member 492 with respect to the ball receiving portion 467.

Next, the transition of the transmission mechanism 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 64. Figure 6
1 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the first position, FIG. 62 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the second position, and FIG. 63 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the third position. Is. 64 (a) to 64 (c) are partially enlarged views of the lower displacement member 440.

The first position is a position where the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at a substantially central position in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 61) with respect to the base member 470. The second position is the position where the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged on the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 62) of the projecting wall 477. The third position is the position where the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the right end in the left-right direction of the base member 470.

Further, in FIGS. 61 to 64, the decorative member 450 and the front case 48 of the lower displacement member 440 are shown.
1 is viewed transparently, and the outer shape of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown by a chain line. Further, in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), the transition state immediately before the displacement to the third position is shown in order, and in FIG. 64 (c), the lower displacement member 440 at the third position is shown.

As shown in FIG. 61, the lower displacement member 440 at the first position is in a state where the movable rack 464 is located at the left end in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470. Further, in the first position, the rack 466 is arranged in front of the movable rack 464, and the rack 466 and the movable rack 464 are overlapped in the front-rear direction. That is, the rack 466 is also positioned at the left end in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470, like the movable rack 464. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 connected to the rack 466 is arranged at a substantially central position in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470.

In the first position, as described above, the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are the base member 470.
It is said that they are collected at the left end in the left-right direction. Here, since the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced while being slid and displaced (displaced from the retracted state to the first and second overhanging states), the position of the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the vicinity of the rotating axis. It is desirable to make it in the state of being displaced.

According to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism 460 that displaces the ball receiving portion 467 is in a state in which the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are superposed on the front and back (two-stage rack), so that the position of the center of gravity thereof is slid on the front base 411. It can be brought closer to the grooves 411a and 411b side (rotating shaft side of the lower displacement member 440).

Therefore, as described above, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced from the retracted position to the first and second overhanging positions, the lower displacement member 440 is set to the first position so that the lower displacement member 44 can be displaced.
The driving force when 0 is rotationally displaced can be reduced. Therefore, the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 that displaces the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

The displacement from the first position shown in FIG. 61 to the second position shown in FIG. 62 is performed by driving the drive motor KM2.

When the drive motor KM2 is driven from the first position, the transmission gear 461 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2 is rotated. As a result, the transmission gear 462 and the transmission gear 463 are rotated. When the transmission gear 463 is rotated, a driving force is transmitted from the rack gear 464a meshing with the transmission gear 463 to the movable rack 464, and the movable rack 464 is slid and displaced to the right with respect to the base member 470.

When the movable rack 464 is slide-displaced, the movable rack 46 is accompanied by the slide displacement.
The transmission gear 465 arranged in 4 is rotated by the rack gear 476 of the base member 470. As a result, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 466 by the rack gear 466a meshed with the transmission gear 465. As a result, the rack 466 is slid and displaced to the right in the left-right direction with respect to the movable rack 464, and the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the second position.

The displacement from the second position shown in FIG. 62 to the third position shown in FIG. 63 is performed by driving the drive motor KM2 in the same manner as the displacement from the first position to the second position. Since the transmission of the drive from the drive motor KM2 to the rack 466 is the same as the displacement from the first position to the second position, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the ball receiving portion 46
The contact state between the leg portion 467a and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is released, and the 7 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 467b by the urging force of the urging spring SP2 arranged on the shaft portion 466b. ..

More specifically, in the first and second positions (the state where the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged on the left side of the ball receiving portion 467 in the front view from the ball receiving portion 467 in the third position), the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is in front. It is in a state of being in contact with the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b of the case 481, and the rotation clockwise around the shaft hole 467b due to the urging force of the urging spring SP2 is restricted.

On the other hand, when the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the bottom wall portion 48
Arranged on the right side of the front view from the end of 1b, the bottom wall portion 481b and the standing wall 4 of the base member 470
It is arranged inside the recess 481b1 formed between the faces of 71a. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 46
7 is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 467b by the urging force of the urging spring SP2. When the ball receiving portion 467 is rotated at the third position, the tip of the leg portion 467a comes into contact with the end surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, and the rotation of the ball receiving portion 467 around the shaft hole 467b is restricted. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 is stopped at a position rotated about 40 degrees around the shaft hole 467b. In the following, the rotational displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 at the third position will be referred to as a firing operation.

Further, the ball receiving portion 467 is provided with a recess 481b1 recessed in the track region when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the first position to the third position direction (first direction), and the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced in the first direction. In the recess 4
Since the leg portion 467a to be engaged with the 81b1 is provided and the posture is variably formed by engaging the leg portion 467a with the recess 481b1, the structure for changing the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 is simplified. Can be changed.

Further, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the second position to the third position, the collision portion 464f is slid and displaced to the right side in the front view due to the displacement of the movable rack 464, and the protrusion 492 of the displacement member 492 is displaced.
Collision with b. As a result, the displacement member 492 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft portion 492a.

That is, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the ball receiving portion 467 is rotationally displaced and the displacement member 492 is rotationally displaced. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 launches and the ball is discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, and the lower displacement member 440 becomes lighter, so that the lower displacement member 440 becomes lighter.
The swaying force and the inertial force in which the displacement member 492 is rotationally displaced can be applied in opposite directions. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging when the sphere is discharged from the inside of the lower displacement member 440.

Next, the operation of receiving the ball into the ball receiving portion 467 will be described with reference to FIG. 65. FIG. 65
(A) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member 440. It should be noted that FIGS. 65 (a) to (c)
Then, the transition states in which the ball is received by the ball receiving unit 467 are shown in order.

Further, in FIGS. 65 (a) to 65 (c), the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are transparently viewed, and the outer shape of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown by a chain line.

Further, in FIGS. 65 (a) to 65 (c), the horizontal direction of the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state is illustrated by a two-dot chain line with a reference numeral of the virtual line H1, and the lower displacement member 440 is first stretched. The horizontal direction in the output state is illustrated with the reference numeral of the virtual line H2. Further, the angle at which the lower displacement member 440 is rotated from the position in the retracted state to the position in the first overhanging state is shown with a reference numeral of angle θ. The virtual line H1, the virtual line H2, and the angle θ are also shown in the figures after FIG. 65.

As shown in FIG. 65 (a), in the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state (the state in which the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is parallel to the virtual line H1), the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is positioned at the first position. The game ball T1 is thrown from the distribution unit 500, which will be described later, to the opening 451a formed in the front side decorative portion 451 of the lower displacement member 440. The game ball T1 thrown into the opening 451a is thrown inside the projecting wall 477 and thrown inside the lower displacement member 440.

As shown in FIG. 65 (b), when the game ball T1 is thrown into the opening 451a, the lower displacement member 44
0 is displaced to the second position. Therefore, as described above, in the second position, the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged below the projecting wall 477, so that the game ball T1 thrown inside the projecting wall 477 is placed inside the ball receiving portion 467. You can throw a ball. By accepting the game ball T1 in the ball receiving portion 467, the game ball T1 can be displaced according to the operation of the ball receiving portion 467.

As shown in FIG. 65 (c), when the game ball T1 is thrown to the ball receiving portion, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the first position. As a result, the first ball is placed in the ball receiving portion 467 with the game ball T1.
The ball receiving portion 467 can be arranged at the position.

Here, a gaming machine including a base member, a base member displaceable on one side of the base member, and a displaceable member displaceable on the base member is known. According to this gaming machine, in addition to the effect of being displaced between the overhanging position where the base member is extended to the game area and made visible to the player and the retracted position where the base member is retracted from the game area, the base member is provided. It is possible to perform an effect of displacing the displacement member in the state of being arranged at the overhanging position.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, one side of the base member is displaceably arranged on the base member. Therefore, when the displacement member is displaced, the base member rattles with respect to the base member with one side as a dead center. There was a problem that sticking was likely to occur. In particular, when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state, the change in acceleration is maximized, so that the base member tends to rattle due to the influence of inertial force.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 starts the displacement from the second position.
It is formed so that the displacement can be started from the first position closer to one side of the lower displacement member 440 (base member) than the first position, and at least the lower displacement member 440 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the base member 410. In the arranged state (for example, the first overhanging state in which the lower displacement member 440 overhangs to the game area and is visible to the player), the displacement starts from the first position, so that the lower displacement member 440 of the base member It is possible to suppress rattling. That is, the first position is more than the second position.
Since the position is close to one side of the lower displacement member, by setting such a first position as the displacement start position of the ball receiving portion 467, the weight of the ball receiving portion 467 is transferred to the base member 410 by the lower displacement member 440. On the other hand, the dead center can be kept close to the dead center when rattling, and the influence of the inertial force when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the stopped state can be made less likely to act on the lower displacement member 440. As a result, it is possible to easily suppress the rattling of the lower displacement member 440.

Further, as described above, the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced (displaced from the retracted state to the first and second overhanging states) while being slidably displaced. Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced while the game ball T1 is arranged far away from the rotation axis, centrifugal force is likely to be generated in the game ball T1, and the game ball T1 moves to move the inner wall of the ball receiving portion 467. A collision sound is generated due to the collision between the ball and the game ball T1.
Alternatively, there is a problem that the ball receiving portion 467 is damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after the game ball T1 is received by the ball receiving portion 467, the lower displacement member 440 can be displaced to the first position, so that the game ball T1 can be displaced to the first position. It can be placed (close) in the vicinity. Therefore, the game ball T is attached to the lower displacement member 440.
When the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced (displaced from the retracted state to the first and second overhanging states) in the state of accepting 1, it is possible to suppress the generation of centrifugal force on the game ball T1. As a result, it is possible to prevent a collision sound from being generated when the game ball T1 and the ball receiving portion 467 collide with each other, or to prevent the ball receiving portion 467 from being damaged.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lower displacement member 440 is a transmission mechanism 4 that operates the ball receiving portion 467.
Since 60 is formed of a movable rack 464, a transmission gear 465 (pinion gear) and a rack 466 (rack member), and a ball receiving portion 467 is arranged on the rack 466, the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 is started from the first position. In that case, not only the weight of the rack 466 but also the weights of the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 should be close to one side of the lower displacement member 440 (the fulcrum when the lower displacement member 440 rattles with respect to the base member 410). Can be done. As a result, it is possible to easily suppress the rattling of the lower displacement member 440 when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the stopped state.

Further, in the state where the game ball T1 is received by the ball receiving portion 467, the load of the lower displacement member 440 is increased by the load of the game ball T1. Therefore, as described above, by setting the lower displacement member 440 to the first position, the position of the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 is set to the sliding groove 4 of the front base 411.
It can be easily moved to the 11a, 411b side (the rotation axis side of the lower displacement member 440). Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced from the retracted position to the first and second overhanging positions,
By setting the lower displacement member 440 as the first position, the driving force when the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced can be reduced. Therefore, the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 that displaces the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

Next, the payout operation of the ball will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIGS. 66 (a) to (c)
Is a front view of the lower displacement member 440. In addition, in FIGS. 66A to 66C, the transition state of the lower displacement member 440 in the payout operation of the sphere is shown in order. Further, from FIGS. 66 (a) to (c).
), The decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are transparently viewed, and the outer shape of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown by a chain line. Further, the ball payout operation is an operation of paying out the game ball T1 received by the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 from the ejection opening 471 to the outside of the lower displacement member 440.

As shown in FIGS. 66A to 66C, the payout operation of paying out the ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 displaces the lower displacement member 440 from the first position to the third position in order. It is done by.

That is, by receiving the game ball T1 inside the ball receiving portion 467 in the receiving operation and displacing the lower displacement member 440 arranged at the first position to the third position, the game ball T1 is placed on the ball receiving portion 467. With the displacement, it is carried to the exit opening 471 side. The game ball T1 moved to the exit opening 471 side is given an inertial force to the exit opening 471 side by the slide displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 and the firing operation of the ball receiving portion 467 at the third position, and the ball receiving portion 471 is applied. It pops out from the inside of the part 467. As a result, the sphere can be discharged from the inside of the lower displacement member 440.

Here, since the displacement direction when the ball receiving portion 467 (displacement member) starts the displacement from the first position is the direction away from the position side of the lower displacement member 440, the ball receiving portion 467 is set to the first position. In the arranged state, the rack 466 (rack member) can be brought closer to the base member 410 from one side of the lower displacement member 440. That is, in order for the ball receiving portion 467 (rack 466) to be displaced in the direction away from one side of the lower displacement member 440, the rack 466 is subjected to the transmission gear 465 (the transmission gear 465) after the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 is started. Rack gear 466a to which the pinion gear) is engaged
The side portion will be directed to one side of the lower displacement member 440. Therefore, the weight of the rack 466 can be kept closer to one side of the lower displacement member 440 (the fulcrum when the lower displacement member 440 rattles with respect to the base member 410), and as a result, the ball receiving portion 467 can be moved closer. It is possible to easily suppress the rattling of the lower displacement member 440 when it is displaced from the stopped state.

The ball receiving portion 467 is displaced in the third position direction (first direction), and when the third position is reached, the posture can be changed. Therefore, up to the third position, one game ball T1 is received. While it is possible to easily maintain the state held by the portion 467 and prevent the game ball T1 from falling off from the ball receiving portion 467, the second
When the position is reached, the game ball T1 is transferred to the ball receiving portion 467 by utilizing the change in the posture of the ball receiving portion 467.
It can be easily paid out from the inside of.

It should be noted that the ball receiving portion 467 shown in FIGS. 66 (a) to 66 (c) is paid out at the position where the lower displacement member 440 is retracted (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged horizontally with the virtual line H1). When performing the operation, the game ball discharged to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 is thrown into the inside of the collection port 411f.

On the other hand, when the lower displacement member 440 performs the payout operation of the ball receiving portion 467 at the position in the first overhanging state (the state in which the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is rotated by an angle θ from the virtual line H1), the lower displacement member 4
The game ball paid out to the outside of the 40 is thrown to the upper part of the ball cradle 710 of the rotating unit 700.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68, the ejection operation when two or more balls are thrown inside the lower displacement member 440 will be described. FIGS. 67 (a) to (c) and FIGS. 68 (a) to (c)
) Is a front view of the lower displacement member 440.

In addition, in FIGS. 43 (a) to (c) and FIGS. 44 (a) to (c), the transition state of the discharge operation is shown in order. Further, in FIGS. 43 (a) to (c) and FIGS. 44 (a) to (c), the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 440 are transparently viewed, and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is seen transparently. The outer shape of is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 67A to 67C, when two or more balls are continuously thrown from the distribution unit 500 described later, the lower displacement member 440 is operated to receive the second ball. The game ball T2 can be dropped on the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467.

That is, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced from the first position to the second position to throw the first game ball T1 inside the ball receiving portion 467, and the second game ball T2 can be the first ball. It can be brought into contact with the game ball T1 and fastened to the inside of the projecting wall 477 (see FIG. 67 (b)). By displacing the ball receiving portion 467 to the first position after receiving the first game ball T1 at the second position, the ball receiving portion is in a state where the first ball receiving portion T1 is received by the ball receiving portion 467. The 467 can be displaced to the first position, and the second game ball T2 can be dropped onto the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467.

Here, in a gaming machine that displaces a ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 at the second position to the third position due to the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, a malfunction occurs in the displacement of the distribution member 540 of the distribution unit 500, which will be described later. There is a possibility that more than a specified number of game balls are thrown into the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467, and in this case, there is a problem that a problem may occur due to the number of game balls exceeding the specified number. For example, a transmission mechanism 4 in which a game ball exceeding a specified number drives a ball receiving portion 467.
There was a risk of damage by entering the 60 and being bitten by the moving part. Alternatively, the number of game balls exceeding the specified number is outside the game area (for example, the back side of the game board 13 or the back case 3).
There was a risk of leaking to the inside of 00).

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 is formed so as to be displaceable from the second position to the first position opposite to the throwing direction of the ball. The orbital region can be expanded. Therefore, for example, even if a malfunction occurs in the distribution member 540 and a specified number or more of game balls are thrown, the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 is expanded, and the number of game balls exceeding the specified number is increased. Can be accepted in the orbital region. As a result, the number of game balls that exceeds the specified number
It can be moved with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 to the third position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding the specified number from entering the transmission mechanism 460 that drives the ball receiving portion 467 and flowing out of the game area, and as a result, the games exceeding the specified number. It is possible to prevent problems caused by balls.

Further, the ball receiving portion 467 can receive and hold one game ball T1 thrown from the distribution unit 500 described later at the second position, and can hold the ball in the direction from the second position to the first position (second direction). ) At least because it is formed so that it can be displaced by a distance exceeding the diameter of the game ball.
After receiving one game ball at the second position, the ball receiving portion 467 is moved from the second position to the third direction (
By displacing in the first direction), the number of game balls exceeding the specified number is displaced to the orbital region (orbital region) of the ball receiving portion 467.
The ball can be thrown to a region in the first direction from 467 of the ball receiving portion). Therefore, the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be moved along with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 in the third position direction (first direction).

In this case, since the ball receiving portion 467 holds the first game ball T1 and the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be sent to the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467, the first game balls T1 and 2 Game ball T after the ball
2 can be separated. Therefore, for example, by displacing the ball receiving portion 467 in the third position direction (first direction), while maintaining the state in which the ball receiving member holds the first game ball T1, 2
It is possible to discharge only the game ball T2 after the ball from the orbital region.

Further, in the case where the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the second position to receive the first ball and then the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position to eject the game ball T1 from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the second ball is used. Game ball T2
Drops onto the top of the rack 466, and the second game ball T2 has a ball receiving portion 467 and a transmission gear 465.
There is a possibility that the second game ball T2 cannot be discharged to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 due to being thrown between the ball and the ball.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the receiving operation of receiving the ball in the ball receiving portion 467 is performed, and after receiving the game ball T1 inside the ball receiving portion 467 at the second position, the first position opposite to the exit opening 471 is performed. Since it can be displaced to, it is possible to prevent the second game ball T2 from being unable to be discharged to the outside of the lower displacement member 440.

In other words, in a gaming machine provided with a bonus machine that ejects a game ball thrown into the accessory, a position for receiving the ball is performed by a member that ejects the ball (ball receiving portion 467 in this embodiment). If only the ball is displaced to the (second position) and the position where the ball is ejected (third position), when two or more game balls are thrown into the accessory, the ball is ejected to the member that ejects the ball. Exit (exit opening 471)
In the present embodiment, after receiving the first game ball T1, the ball receiving portion 467 is ejected from the first ball receiving portion 471 on the opposite side to the exit opening 471. By displacing the ball to the position, the second game ball T2 can be thrown between the ball receiving portion 467 and the exit opening 471.

As shown in FIGS. 68 (a) to 68 (c), after the second game ball T2 is thrown onto the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467, the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position before the firing operation. By letting it, 2
The game ball T2 of the ball can be rolled toward the exit opening 471 in a state of being in contact with the ball receiving portion 467. As a result, the second game ball T2 can be discharged from the exit opening 471.

In this case, the lower end surface of the U-shaped portion of the ball receiving portion 467 is above the center position of the second game ball T2 in which the lower end surface of the U-shaped portion is thrown on the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467 (above FIG. 68 (a)). Is placed in. Further, in a state where the leg portion 467a is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, the leg portion 467a is arranged in a state of being tilted by approximately 45 degrees with respect to the contact surface with the bottom wall portion 481b. Further, since the side surface of the right side of the U-shape (right side of FIG. 68 (a)) of the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the same position in the vertical direction as the right end portion of the leg portion 467a, the second ball is played. The outer surface of T2 can be brought into contact with the leg portion 467a.

Further, since the leg portion 467a is in a state of being tilted by approximately 45 degrees with respect to the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, the leg portion 467a and the outer surface of the lower hemisphere of the second game ball T2 (lower hemisphere on the bottom wall portion 481b side). Be abutted.
As a result, when the second game ball T2 is rolled toward the exit opening 471, a force for lifting the second game ball T2 upward can be generated on the inclined surface of the leg portion 467a. Therefore,
The frictional force between the second game ball T2 and the bottom wall portion 481b when the second game ball T2 rolls on the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball receiving portion 467 from being stopped when the second game ball T2 is rolled toward the exit opening 471.

In other words, the leg portion 467a is projected from the ball receiving portion 467 in the direction from the first position to the third position (first direction), and the protruding tip thereof is the trajectory of the ball receiving portion 467. Since the ball receiving portion 467 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower half surface of the game ball (that is, the game ball T2 after the second ball) sent to the region, the ball receiving portion 467 is in the direction from the first position to the third position (first direction). When displaced to, the game ball can be moved while pushing its lower half surface with the leg portion 467a. As a result, the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily discharged from the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467.

Further, a leg portion 467a is provided between the first game ball T1 held by the ball receiving portion 467 and the game ball sent to the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 (the second and subsequent game balls T2). By interposing, the distance between the first game ball T1 and the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be secured by the protrusion length of the leg portion 467a. Therefore, while maintaining the state in which the ball receiving portion 467 holds the first game ball T1, only the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily discharged from the orbital region.

Further, since the leg portion 467a has a role of changing the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 and a role of moving the game ball while pushing the lower half surface thereof by engaging with the recess 481b1, the number of parts can be increased accordingly. It can be reduced to reduce the product cost.

Further, since the size of the recess 481b1 in the direction from the first position to the third position (first direction) is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball sent to the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 (that is, that is). When the second and subsequent game balls T2) are moved with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 in the first direction, they can easily pass through the recess 481b1. As a result, the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily discharged from the orbital region.

As described above, when the lower displacement unit 400 is arranged in the retracted state, the lower displacement member 440
It is assumed that the collection port 411f is arranged below the emission opening 471. Therefore, the game ball T2 discharged in the retracted state is sent to the collection port 411f.

On the other hand, when the lower displacement unit 400 is arranged in the first overhanging state, the recovery port 411f is in a state of being located below the exit opening 471. Further, the opening of the collection port 411f is opened on the upper side. Therefore, the ejected game ball T2 is sent to the collection port 411f.

That is, the recovery port 411f is on the first direction side (standing wall 471a side) of the base member 470.
Since it is arranged vertically below the end of the ball and has an opening in the vertical direction, the ball receiving portion 467.
The opening of the collection port 411f for the game ball (that is, the game ball T2 after the second ball) that is moved along with the movement in the third position direction (first direction) and discharged from the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467. Can be accepted and collected from.

Further, the opening of the recovery port 411f is vertical at the end of the base member 470 on the first direction side (standing wall 471a side) at least in the retracted state, the first overhanging state, and the second overhanging state. It is arranged downward in the direction. As a result, the game ball (that is, the second ball) discharged from the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 regardless of whether the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced to the retracted position, the first overhanging state, or the second overhanging state. Subsequent game balls T2) can be received and collected from the opening of the collection member.

It should be noted that FIGS. 67 (a) to (c) and FIGS. 68 (a) to (c) are in the position where the lower displacement member 440 is retracted (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged horizontally with the virtual line H1). When the ball receiving portion 467 is ejected as shown in the above, the game ball discharged to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 is
The ball is thrown inside the collection port 411f. Further, when the ball receiving portion 467 is discharged at the position where the lower displacement member 440 is in the first overhanging state (the state in which the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is rotated by an angle θ from the virtual line H1), the lower displacement member 440 is discharged. The game ball paid out to the outside of the 440 is thrown to the collection port 411f as described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the configuration when the second game ball T2 is discharged from the exit opening 471 will be described. 69 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member 440 in the range LXIXa of FIG. 68 (b), and FIG. 69 (b) is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member 440 in the range LXIX b of FIG. 68 (a). It is a figure.

As shown in FIG. 69, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position immediately before the firing operation, the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the side surface of the ball receiving portion 467 on the erection wall 471a side to open the exit. It can be pushed out of the downward displacement member 440 from 471.

In this case, the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is inserted between the bottom wall portion 481b and the standing wall 471a, and when the ball receiving portion 467 rotates, the game ball T2 and the ball receiving portion 467 come into contact with each other. By doing so, the rotational force of the ball receiving portion 467 can be transmitted to the game ball T2. As a result, the game ball T2 can be easily discharged from the exit opening 471. Further, the ball receiving portion 467 can be returned to the state before the rotational operation by utilizing the repulsive force when the ball receiving portion 467 is in contact with the game ball T2. Therefore, when the game ball T2 thrown into the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 is discharged, the ball receiving portion 46
It is possible to prevent the first game ball T1 held in 7 from falling off.

Further, in the lower displacement member 440, the ball receiving portion 467 is in the second position to the third position direction (first direction).
It is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball in the orbital region when it is displaced to, and the recess 481b.
A standing wall 471a located on the first direction side of 1 is provided, and the second and subsequent game balls thrown into the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 accompany the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 in the first direction. When the ball T2 is moved, the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the erection wall 471a and the ball receiving portion 467, and the posture change of the ball receiving portion 467 is regulateably formed. While maintaining the state held by the ball receiving portion 467, it is possible to easily eject only the second and subsequent game balls from the orbital region.

That is, since the height of the standing wall 471a from the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b to the tip of the standing wall is lower than the radius of the game ball, the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced in the first direction. When the game ball T2 is moved by being pushed by the legs, the lower half surface of the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the erection wall 471a.
The game ball can easily get over the standing wall 471a. In this case, the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the ball receiving portion 467 (that is, the game ball T2 is interposed between the ball receiving portion 467 and the standing wall 471a).
Since a reaction force can be applied from the game ball T2 to the ball receiving portion 467, the posture change of the ball receiving portion can be regulated, and the first game ball held by the ball receiving portion 467 may fall off. Can be suppressed.
As a result, while maintaining the state in which the ball receiving portion 467 holds the first game ball, only the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily discharged from the game area.

On the other hand, when the second and subsequent game balls T2 are not thrown into the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467, the game ball is not interposed between the standing wall 471a and the ball receiving portion 467, so that the leg Part 467a
Is engaged with 481b1 in the recess, so that the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 can be changed. As a result, the first game ball T1 (that is, the ball receiving portion 4) is utilized by utilizing the change in the posture of the ball receiving portion 467.
The game ball held in 67) can be easily discharged from the ball receiving portion 467.

Next, the distribution unit 500 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72. 70 (a) is a top view of the distribution unit 500, and FIG. 70 (b) is a rear view of the distribution unit 500. FIG. 71 is an exploded front perspective view of the distribution unit 500, and FIG. 72 is an exploded rear perspective view of the distribution unit 500.

As shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, the distribution unit 500 is attached to the base plate 520 formed in a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and is attached to the front side of the base plate 520 to face the base plate 520. A path forming member 510 that forms a plurality of flow paths through which a sphere can flow, and a base plate 52.
A distribution member 540 rotatably attached to the back side of 0 and an extension extending the flow path of a sphere attached to the end surface of the base plate 520 and formed between the base plate 520 and the path forming member 510 facing each other. It is mainly provided with a path member 530.

The base plate 520 has a columnar shaft portion 523 projecting to the back surface side, a first opening 521 formed through an arc shape centered on the axis of the shaft portion 523, and a radius larger than the first opening 521. A second opening 522 that is formed through a large arc, a rolling portion 525 that has a U-shaped cross section that opens on the upper end side and extends in the left-right direction, and a hook-like protrusion on the back side. It is mainly provided with a locking portion 524 to be formed.

The shaft portion 523 is inserted into the shaft hole 545 of the distribution member 540 described later, and the distribution member 54 is inserted.
It is a shaft that attaches 0 to the base member in a rotatable state, and is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 545.

The first opening 521 and the second opening 522 are openings through which the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 of the distribution member 540, which will be described later, are inserted, and the opening has a width larger than the thickness of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542. It is formed. Further, the distribution member 540 is a base plate 5 in a rotatable state.
Since it is attached to 20, the length of the arc of the first opening 521 and the second opening 522 is formed to be larger than the circumferential dimension of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 in the front view.

The locking portion 524 is an engaging portion for engaging the urging spring SP4 with the locking portion 544 formed on the distribution member 540, and one end of the urging spring SP4 is locked.

The rolling portion 525 is a bottom surface on which the sphere rolls, and has a curved shape formed in a U shape while being inclined downward toward one end on the left side of the rear view (left side in FIG. 70 (b)). It is formed larger than the outer shape of the sphere. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 from stopping at the rolling portion and to roll the ball to one end side.

Further, the rolling portion 525 has a plurality of protrusions 525 protruding inward of the U-shape from the front and rear side surfaces.
b is provided with an opening 525a that opens to the back side at one end.

The protrusions 525b are formed on the front and rear side surfaces at regular intervals, and the protrusions 525b formed on the front side and the protrusions 525b formed on the back side are formed at positions where they are staggered in front view. Therefore, since the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 can collide with the protrusion 525b, the rolling speed of the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 can be slowed down.

Here, as described above, the ball is thrown to the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement unit 400 in a state where the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the first position (FIGS. 65 (a) and 65 (b). )reference).
Therefore, when the throwing speed of the game ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 of the third throwing path KR3 is increased, the game ball is thrown into the lower displacement member 440 before moving the ball receiving portion 467 to the second position. There is a risk of being struck.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a plurality of protrusions 525b are formed so as to project from the inner surface of the rolling portion 525 of the third throwing path KR3, and the gaming ball passes through the rolling portion 525 of the third throwing path KR3. Since resistance can be applied, the speed of the game ball passing through the third throwing path KR3 can be slowed down. Therefore, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the switching position (first position) to the receiving position (second position), the time required can be increased by that amount, so that the ball receiving portion 46 can be extended.
7 can surely receive the game ball. Further, the output of the displacement speed of the drive motor KM2 can be reduced by the amount that the displacement speed required for the ball receiving portion 467 can be slowed down, so that the product cost can be reduced.

The opening 525a is formed so as to be open to the back surface side of one end of the rolling portion 525, and the outer shape in the rear view thereof is formed to be larger than the size of the sphere. Therefore, the sphere that rolls the rolling portion 525 toward one end is discharged from the opening 525a.

The path forming member 510 is formed in the shape of a rectangular vertically long plate having a width smaller in the left-right direction than the base plate 520, and a plurality of walls larger than the outer diameter of the game ball are formed on the back side thereof. By forming the space between the two facing each other larger than the outer diameter of the sphere, a flow path of a plurality of spheres is formed inside the sphere.

The path forming member 510 includes a first opening 511 that opens on the upper end surface, a first throwing path KR1 formed between the side walls of the first opening 511, and a second throwing path connected to the first throwing path KR1. KR2 and the third throwing path KR3, and the second opening 512 and the third opening 513 opening on the side surface of the path forming member 510 at the ends of the second throwing path KR2 and the third throwing path KR3 are formed through in the front-rear direction. Multiple openings 514,515,516 and openings 514,515,5
It is mainly provided with a fourth throwing path KR4 formed on the wall on the back surface side of 16 and a fourth opening 517 opening on the side surface of the path forming member 510 at the end of the fourth throwing path KR4.

The first opening 511 is an opening for allowing a ball thrown from the ball throwing unit 600, which will be described later, to flow into the inside of the distribution unit, and is formed on the side surface of the upper end of the path forming member 510 and has an outer shape larger than the ball. It is formed large. Further, the first opening 511 is a ball throwing unit 60.
It is connected to 0 and the ball thrown from the throwing unit 600 can flow in.

The first throwing path KR1 is a path through which a ball flowing in from the first opening 511 flows down between the base plate 520 and the path forming member 510 facing each other, and is formed by extending downward. Further, the fourth throwing path KR4 is formed so as to extend to about one-third of the path forming member 510 in the vertical direction, and the downstream end is connected to the second throwing path KR2 and the third throwing path KR3. Will be done. That is,
A ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 is formed so as to be able to flow down the second throwing path KR2 or the third throwing path KR3.

As described above, the second throwing path KR2 is a path formed by being connected to the first throwing path KR1, and the downstream end is connected to the second opening 512. That is, when a ball flowing down from the first opening 511 and flowing down the first throwing path KR1 flows down to the second throwing path KR2, the second opening 5
It is discharged from 12 to the outside of the distribution unit 500.

The second opening 512 is connected to a recovery path (not shown) for collecting the sphere. Therefore, the ball discharged from the second opening is collected by the collection route. Also, inside the second opening 512 (second)
A sensor device SE2 for detecting the passage of a game ball is arranged at the downstream end of the throwing path KR2). Therefore, the sensor device SE1 detects the number of game balls passing through the third winning opening 82, and the sensor device SE2 detects the number of game balls passing through the second throwing path KR2. It is possible to detect the number of game balls passing through the path KR3.

That is, it is possible to detect whether or not a predetermined number of game balls (1 ball) are stored upstream of the regulation plate 541, which will be described later, by the difference between the sensor device SE1 and the sensor device SE1. For example, when the third electric accessory 82a is opened once, the number of balls passing through the third winning opening 82 (sensor device SE1) is eight, and the balls passing through the second throwing path KR2 (sensor device SE2). If the number is 7,
It can be detected that one game ball is flowing (reserved) in the third throwing path KR3.

As described above, the third throwing path KR3 is a path formed by being connected to the first throwing path KR1, and the downstream end is connected to the third opening 513. That is, when a ball flowing down from the first opening 511 and flowing down the first throwing path KR1 flows down to the third throwing path KR3, the third opening 5
It is discharged from 13.

The third opening 513 is formed above the other end side (opposite end side of the opening 525a) of the rolling portion 525 of the base plate 520. Therefore, the ball discharged from the third opening 513 is the rolling portion 525.
The ball is thrown inside. That is, the ball thrown to the third throwing path KR3 is thrown to the rolling portion 525 through the third opening 513.

The openings 514 to 516 are formed on the back side of the third winning opening 82 formed in the game board 13, respectively, and the ball winning in the third winning opening 82 is thrown. That is, when a ball flowing down the game area on the front side of the game board 13 wins in the third winning opening 82, the ball is thrown into the distribution unit 500 from the openings 514 to 516.

The fourth throwing path KR4 is formed by connecting to openings 514 to 516, and is 1 on the downstream side.
It is connected to one path and is connected to a fourth opening formed on the lower end surface of the path forming member 510. The fourth opening is connected to a recovery path (not shown) for collecting the sphere. Therefore, the ball winning in the third winning opening 82 of the game board 13 is thrown into the fourth throwing path KR4 of the distribution unit 500, and then discharged from the fourth opening 517 and collected.

The extension path member 530 is formed in a U-shaped cross section with the lower side open, and is extended in the left-right direction. Further, the extension path member 530 is formed so that the inner diameter of the U-shape is larger than the outer diameter of the sphere. Therefore, by disposing it on the upper part of the rolling portion 525 of the base plate 520, the ball thrown on the upper part of the rolling portion 525 can be thrown inside the rolling portion 525 and the extension path member 530. , The ball rolling on the rolling portion can be prevented from falling from the rolling portion 525.

Further, the extension path member 530 is formed with protrusions 531 formed at regular intervals at the same positions in the left-right direction as the protrusions 525b formed on the rolling portion 525. As a result, the rolling speed of the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 can be slowed down as in the case of the protrusion 525b.

The distribution member 540 is formed in a rectangular shape in front view, one of which is long, and has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The distribution member 540 is a regulation plate 541 projecting from the front side as a plate-like body.
A storage plate 542, a shaft hole 545 formed through the upper one end side, and a hook-shaped locking portion 544 formed on the back surface side are mainly provided.

As described above, the shaft hole 545 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 523 of the base plate 520 is inserted, and is formed through the shaft hole 545 in the front-rear direction. The distribution member 540 is a shaft portion 523 of the base plate 520.
Is inserted into the shaft hole 545, and a screw or the like having a head larger than the shaft hole is inserted from the back side of the shaft portion 523.
By fastening to, it is attached to the base plate 520 in a rotatable state.

The regulation plate 541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2 via the first opening 521, and the ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 flows into the second throwing path KR2. It is a plate member that regulates the above, and is formed so as to project toward the front side from the end surface on the front side of the shaft hole 545, and the protrusion distance from the base plate 520 to the front side is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere.

Further, the regulation plate 541 is formed by being curved in an arc shape centered on the axis of the shaft hole 545. As a result, when the distribution member 540 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 545, the regulation plate 54
The displacement region of 1 can be minimized.

The storage plate 542 is a plate member that is arranged on the second throwing path KR2 via the second opening 522 and stores the ball flowing down the second throwing path KR2 on the upstream side of the storage plate 542, and is a plate member of the shaft hole 545. It is formed so as to project to the front side from the end surface on the front side, and the protrusion distance from the base plate 520 to the front side is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere.

Further, the storage plate 542 is formed to be curved in an arc shape centered on the axis of the shaft hole 545, and the radius of the arc is formed to be larger than the radius of the curved portion of the regulation plate 541. Therefore,
The storage plate 542 is formed at a position separated from the shaft hole 545 from the regulation plate 541. As a result, the regulation plate 541 can be projected to the connecting portion between the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2, and the storage plate 542 can be arranged on the second throwing path KR2.
Further, the displacement region when the distribution member 540 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 545 can be minimized.

The protrusion 543 is a drive transmission member that exerts a rotational driving force on the distribution member 540 by colliding with the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 described above, and projects to the other end side of the distribution member 540. It is formed. That is, a protrusion 543 to which the driving force is transmitted is formed on the side opposite to the one end side where the shaft hole 545 which is the rotation axis of the distribution member 540 is formed. As a result, the collision force of the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 can be reduced.

Therefore, since the driving force of the drive motor KM3 that displaces the contact plate 464c can be reduced, the energy consumption of the drive motor KM3 can be reduced. Further, since the energy when the contact plate 464c collides with the protrusion 543 during driving can be reduced, the collision noise can be reduced when the contact plate 464c and the protrusion 543 collide with each other. note that,
A detailed embodiment of the collision between the contact plate 464c and the protrusion 543 will be described later.

Further, a bulging portion 543a that bulges in a circular shape is formed at the contact portion of the protruding portion 543 with the contact plate 464c at the protruding end. By bringing the contact plate 464c into contact with the bulging portion 543a, the contact area between the contact plate and the distribution member 540 can be reduced. Therefore, the distribution member 5
When the 40 is rotationally displaced, the frictional resistance between the protrusion 543 (bulging portion 543a) and the contact plate 464c can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in energy consumption of the drive motor KM3.

As described above, the locking portion 544 is the urging spring SP between the locking portion 524 and the locking portion 524 of the base plate 520.
It is a part that locks 4. Therefore, since the other end side of the distribution member 540 can always apply a force to rotate to the locking portion 524 side, it is possible to suppress the distribution member 540 from shaking due to the vibration of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the flow path of the ball of the distribution unit 500 will be described in detail. FIG. 73 is a cross-sectional view of the distribution unit 500 in the line LXXIII-LXXIII of FIG. 70 (a). In FIG. 73, the distribution member 540 is shown by a chain line. Further, in FIG. 73, a state in which the distribution member 540 is arranged at the storage position is shown.

Here, the state in which the distribution member 540 is arranged at the storage position is a state in which the distribution member 540 is rotated by the urging force of the urging spring SP4 and the storage plate 542 is arranged on the second throwing path KR2. ..

As shown in FIG. 73, in the first throwing path KR1, the lower end side of the flow path is the base plate 52.
It is tilted toward the central portion of 0 in the left-right direction (left-right direction of FIG. 73), and the tilted portion is formed by being curved in a gentle S-shape. Further, the tip portion curved in an S shape is connected to the third throwing path KR3, and the second throwing path KR2 tilts toward the end of the first throwing path KR1 in the direction opposite to the tilting direction of the first throwing path KR1. It is connected in the same state.

As a result, the ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 collides with the lower surface of the tilted portion, thereby causing the ball to collide with the lower surface of the tilted portion.
The flow direction of the sphere can be directed from the direction of gravity to the direction in which the first throwing path KR1 is tilted.
Therefore, the ball can flow down toward the entrance of the third throwing path KR3 (the connecting portion between the first throwing path KR1 and the third throwing path KR3). Therefore, in the state where the distribution member 540 is not arranged, the ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 can be thrown to the third throwing path KR3.

Here, the flow path through which the game ball flows down, the first branch passage and the second branch passage branched from the flow path, and the game ball flowing down the flow path to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage. A game machine for sorting is known.

However, since the conventional gaming machine has a structure in which the game balls flowing down the flow passage are alternately distributed to the first branch passage and the second branch passage one by one, the game balls flowing down the flow passage are the first branch. It is evenly distributed (that is, half each) to the aisle and the second branch aisle. That is, there is a problem that the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage cannot be changed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 which is formed so as to be displaceable and receives the game ball from the third throwing path KR3 is provided, and the contact plate 464c interlocking with the ball receiving portion 467 hits the distribution member 540. Since the distribution member 540 is displaced by being displaced in contact with the ball receiving portion 46
Depending on the displacement of 7, the number of game balls to be distributed to the third throwing path KR3 or the second throwing path can be changed. That is, the number of game balls distributed to the third throwing path KR3 can be changed.

For the displacement of the distribution member 540, the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 is used to determine the distribution member 540.
Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a drive means or a transmission mechanism for displacing the distribution member 540. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced by that amount, and the product cost can be reduced.

Further, for example, in a structure in which the displacement of the distribution member 540 is controlled by using the position detection by the sensor device or the drive by the drive means, the reliability of the distribution operation of the distribution member is lowered due to the malfunction due to the detection failure or the control failure. However, according to the present embodiment, the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 can be switched mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, so that the reliability of the distribution operation can be improved.

In particular, since the ball receiving portion 467 is a member that receives the game ball from the rolling portion 525 of the third throwing path KR3, the distribution destination of the distribution member 540 is set to the third distribution destination in synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467.
By switching to the throwing path, the displacement member can surely receive the game ball distributed to the third throwing path KR3.

Further, in the conventional gaming machine, since the game ball flowing down the flow path is only distributed to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, it is insufficient to give the player an interest.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the distribution destination by the regulation plate 541 (distribution means) is the third.
In the state where the throwing path KR3 (first branch passage) is set, the flow of the game ball in the third is restricted, and when the distribution destination by the sorting member 540 is set to the second throwing path KR2 (second branch passage). Since the storage plate 542 (means for changing the flow state) that allows the flow of the game ball in the third throwing path KR3 is provided, it is possible to give the player an interest.

That is, if the distribution destination by the regulation plate 541 is the third throwing path, the third throwing path KR3
When the flow of the game balls distributed to is restricted and the game balls are stored in the third throwing path KR3, and the distribution destination by the regulation plate 541 is the second throwing path KR2, the third throwing path KR3
It is possible to allow the game ball to flow down (open) in the third throwing path KR3. As a result, in addition to the operation of distributing the game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 (flowing path) to one of the third throwing path KR3 or the second throwing path KR2,
It is possible to form an action of flowing (opening) the game ball distributed to the third throwing path KR3. Further, these storage and opening operations can be alternately formed in conjunction with the distribution operation. As a result, the player can be given a hobby.

Further, since the distribution member 540 (integrated member) in which the regulation plate 541 (distribution means) and the storage plate 542 (flow state changing means) are integrally formed is provided, the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 are provided.
It is possible to simplify the structure for operating and improve the reliability of operation, that is, when the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 are formed separately, they are two parts. 2 The structure for operating the parts becomes complicated and the reliability of the operation is lowered.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 can be formed as one component, the structure can be simplified by that amount, the product cost can be reduced, and the reliability of operation can be improved. be able to.

Further, the distribution member 540 has a storage position (first state position) and a regulation position (second state position).
In a state where the distribution member 540 is displaced to the storage position, the regulation plate 5 is formed so as to be displaceable.
41 is arranged at a position where the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage) is the distribution destination, and the storage plate 542 is arranged at a position where the flow of the game ball in the third throwing path KR3 is restricted, and the distribution member 540 is regulated. In the state of being displaced to the position, the regulation plate 541 is arranged at the position where the second throwing path KR2 is the distribution destination, and the storage plate 542 is arranged at the position where the flow of the game ball in the third throwing path is allowed. By displacing the distribution member 540 at two positions (reservoir position and restricted position), the game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 (flowing path) is moved to the third throwing path KR3.
Alternatively, in addition to the operation of distributing to one of the second throwing paths, the operation of temporarily stopping (storing) the flow of the game ball distributed to the third throwing path KR3 and the operation of causing the stopped (stored) game ball to flow down. It is possible to form an operation of making (opening), and it is possible to form these storage and opening operations alternately in conjunction with the distribution operation. That is, the structure can be simplified to reduce the product cost and improve the reliability of operation.

The distribution member 540 (integrated member) is rotatably formed, and the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage), and the third throwing path. By projecting to KR3, the flow of the game ball is restricted, and the shape is curved in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the distribution member 540. The area of the hole (recess 519) opened in the inner wall of the can be reduced.

Since the storage plate 542 (means for changing the flow state) is arranged in such a posture that the side facing the upstream of the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage) is concave, the storage plate 542 to the third throwing path KR3 protrudes. In the initial state (that is, only the tip side of the flow state changing means is projected into the passage), the shape of the tip side of the storage plate 542 can be arranged in an direction that easily regulates the flow of the game ball. It is possible to easily regulate the flow of the game balls distributed to the third throwing path KR3.

Further, in a state where the storage plate 542 is projected to the maximum to the third throwing path to restrict the flow of the game ball, the concave portion of the storage plate 542 can stably hold the game ball, so that the game ball can be suppressed from going wild.

The distribution unit 500 applies an urging force to the distribution member 540 (integrated member) to urge the regulation plate 541 in the direction of projecting to the third throwing path (first branch passage). ), And the distance from the regulation plate 541 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540 is the regulation plate 541.
Since the distance from the distribution member 540 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540 is made larger than the distance from the distribution member 540 to the rotation axis, the posture in which the storage plate 542 projects the distribution member 540 into the third emergency path (that is, the storage position) by utilizing the urging force of the urging spring SP4. ) Can be easily maintained.

In this case, the distance from the storage plate 542 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540 is made larger than the distance from the regulation plate 541 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540. Due to the large distance from, even if the same impact force is applied, the storage plate 542
In the place where it is easy to immerse, the urging direction of the urging spring SP4 is that the storage plate 542 is the third throwing path KR.
By setting the direction of protrusion to 3, it is possible to prevent the storage plate 542 from being immersed in the recess 519 by the amount of the urging force.

Further, since the distribution member 540 (integrated member) is rotated in the direction in which the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) protrudes into the third throwing path (first branch passage) due to its own weight, the own weight is used. The distribution member 540 can be easily maintained in a posture (that is, a storage position) in which the storage plate 542 projects to the third throwing path KR3. Therefore, when the game ball collides, it is possible to prevent the storage plate 542 from being immersed in the recess 519 by the amount of its own weight.

Further, even if the urging spring SP4 (the urging means) is dropped, the distribution member 540 is maintained in a posture in which the regulation plate 541 protrudes to the third throwing path KR3 due to its own weight, and the game is played to the third throwing path. It is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down.

Further, it is provided with an urging spring SP4 that applies an urging force to the distribution member 540 to maintain the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 on either the third throw path KR3 or the second throw path KR2, and the ball receiving portion 467 is a distribution member. By displacing the 540 in a direction opposite to the direction of the urging spring SP4, the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is switched to the other of the third throw path KR3 or the second throw path KR2, and the urging force of the urging spring causes the distribution destination. , The distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is returned to either the third throw path KR3 or the second throw path KR2.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 from being inadvertently switched. In this case, after the distribution member 540 is displaced with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 and the distribution destination is switched, the return to the distribution destination before the switching can be performed by the urging force of the urging spring SP4. Therefore, the contact plate 464c interlocked with the ball receiving portion 467 is the distribution member 540.
It can be unnecessary to be in contact with. That is, the contact plate 464c interlocked with the ball receiving portion 467 can be separated from the distribution member 540. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the movable range of the ball receiving portion 467 can be increased.

Next, the displacement of the distribution member 540 will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 (a)
And (b) are a partially enlarged view of the distribution unit 500 in the range LXXIV of FIG. 73. In addition, in FIG. 74 (a), the state where the distribution member 540 is located at the storage position is shown in FIG. 74 (b).
) Shows the state in which the distribution member 540 is located at the regulated position. Further, in the state where the distribution member 540 is arranged at the regulated position, the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 collides with the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540, and the distribution member 540 is centered on the axis of the shaft hole 545. It is a state in which the regulation plate 541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first throwing path KR1 and the third throwing path KR3 after being rotated.

As shown in FIG. 74 (a), in the state where the distribution member 540 is arranged at the storage position, the storage plate 542 is arranged on the third throwing path KR3, and the regulation plate 541 is the path forming member 51.
It is arranged inside the recess 518 formed in the wall on the back side of 0.

In this case, the distance dimension L1 between the end of the tip protruding inward of the third throw path KR3 of the storage plate 542 and the inner wall of the third throw path KR3 facing the tip is made smaller than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, the ball thrown from the upstream of the third throwing path KR3 (the first throwing path KR1) is stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 542.

Further, from the inside of the curved portion of the storage plate 542, the first throwing path KR1 and the third throwing path KR
The distance dimension L2 to the connecting portion with 3 is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere and smaller than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the number of balls stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 542 is set to 1.
It can be a sphere. In the following, the state of the distribution unit 500 in which one ball is stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 542 is referred to as a storage state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), in the state where the distribution member 540 is arranged at the regulation position, the regulation plate 541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first throw path KR1 and the third throw path KR3. , The storage plate 542 is arranged inside the recess 519 formed in the wall portion on the back surface side of the path forming member 510.

In this case, the distance dimension L3 from the end of the tip protruding inward of the first throwing path KR1 of the regulation plate 541 to the inner wall of the entrance of the third throwing path KR3 is made smaller than the diameter of the ball. Therefore,
The ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 collides with the regulation plate 541 and is thrown to the second throwing path KR2.

That is, by switching the distribution member 540 between the regulated position and the storage position, the first throwing path K
A state in which the ball to which R1 is thrown is thrown to the third throwing path KR3 and stopped on the third throwing path KR3, and a ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 cannot flow into the third throwing path KR3. 2 It is possible to form a state in which a ball is thrown to the ball throwing path KR2.

Therefore, by displacing one distribution member 540, when the flow path of 1 is divided into the flow path of 2, the flow path of the sphere can be reliably switched to either of them.

Further, the urging spring SP4 applies an urging force to the distribution member 540 to maintain the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 in the second throwing path KR2, so that the ball receiving portion 467 cannot receive the game ball. It is possible to prevent the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 from being switched to the third throwing path.

Further, the regulation plate 541 (distribution means) is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the first throwing path KR1 (flow passage) or the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage), and the appearance position thereof is set.
Since it is an inner wall on an extension line in the flow direction at the downstream end of the first throw path KR1, the regulation plate 541 can be projected at a position close to the game ball flowing down from the lower end side of the first throw path KR1. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required from the start of projecting the regulation plate 541 to the flow-down passage or the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage) until the game ball can be distributed. As a result, the distribution destination can be reliably switched by the regulation plate 541.

Further, the regulation plate 541 (distribution means) projects from the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage) to allow the game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 (flowing passage) to the second throwing path (the second throwing path). It is distributed to the second branch passage), and the protruding direction of the regulation plate 541 is set to the direction toward the upstream end of the second throwing path KR2, so that the game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 is projected. When it comes into contact with the regulation plate in the middle of the above, the game ball can be pushed into the second throwing path KR with the protruding operation of the regulation plate. As a result, distribution to the second throwing path KR2 can be performed more reliably.

In the present embodiment, the regulation plate 541 of the distribution member 540 is arranged at a position closer to the shaft hole 545 than the storage plate 542, but the regulation plate 541 is located at a position farther from the shaft hole 545 than the regulation plate 541. May be placed in. That is, the shaft hole 545 of the distribution member 540 is shown in FIG. 74 (a).
And the axis of the distribution member 540 may be arranged at the position of the point P on the back surface on the downstream side of the third throwing path KR3 shown in FIG. 74 (b). In this case, the regulation plate 54 formed on the distribution member 540
1 and the storage plate 542 are arranged at the same positions as in the present embodiment.

In the state where the shaft hole 545 is arranged at the point P, the displacement speed of the regulation plate 541 when the distribution member 540 is rotationally displaced can be made faster than that of the storage plate 542. Therefore, when the distribution member 540 is displaced from the storage position to the regulation position as described later, the regulation plate 541 can be quickly projected onto the flow path. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 from flowing into the third throwing path KR3 at the timing when the distribution member 540 is switched from the regulated position to the storage position.

Further, in this case, the shape of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 in the front view is the point P.
It is formed in an arc shape centered on. Thereby, when the distribution member 540 is displaced from the regulation position to the storage position (or opposite), the displacement region of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 can be minimized. Further, the recesses 518 and 519 that receive the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 on the outside of the third throwing path KR3 have a concave shape along the displacement locus of the regulation plate 541 and the regulation plate 541.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76, a case where two or more balls are thrown from the throwing path when the sorting member 540 is arranged at the storage position will be described. 75 (a) and 75 (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit 500. FIGS. 76A and 76B are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit 500.

Note that FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b) correspond to a partially enlarged view of the distribution unit 500 of FIG. 74 (a). Further, from FIGS. 75 (a) to 76 (b), the transition states of the spheres when the spheres flow in are shown in order. Further, in FIGS. 75 (a) to 76 (b), the distribution member 540 is in a state of being arranged at the storage position.

As shown in FIGS. 75A and 75B, when the first game ball T1 is thrown to the first throwing path KR1 in a state where the distribution member 540 is arranged at the storage position, as described above. , The game ball T1 is thrown into the third throwing path KR3 and stopped above the storage plate 542.

In this case, since the storage plate 542 is located on the downstream side of the distance between the radius and the diameter of the sphere from the upper end of the third throwing path KR3, a part of the sphere stopped at the upper part of the storage plate 542. but,
It is in a state of being projected toward the KR1 side of the first throwing path (see FIG. 75).

Therefore, as described above, the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage) is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream, and the game ball is formed so as to be able to roll on the inner wall on the gravity direction side thereof. Since the storage plate 542 (means for changing the flow state) is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear from the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity into the third throwing path KR3, the game ball is started after the storage plate 542 starts to protrude into the third throwing path KR3. It is possible to shorten the time required to reach a state where the flow of gravity can be regulated. resulting in,
The distribution destination of the regulation plate 541 is from the second throwing path KR2 (second branch passage) to the third throwing path KR.
When the game ball is distributed to the third throwing path KR3 by being switched to 3, it is possible to easily make the protrusion of the storage plate 542 in time for the regulation of the flow of the game ball.

Further, the regulation plate 541 is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the third throwing path KR3, and in a state of being maximally protruding from the third throwing path KR3, a force component in the protruding direction is acted on from the game ball to the storage plate 542. Therefore, when the flow of the game ball distributed to the third throwing path KR3 is restricted, it is possible to prevent the storage plate 542 from immersing in the recess 519 due to the impact when the game ball collides.
Therefore, it is possible to easily regulate the flow of the game ball.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 76A and 76B, when the second game ball T2 is thrown to the first throwing path KR1 when the distribution unit 500 is in the stored state, the game ball T2 becomes a ball. The ball is thrown in the direction from the first throwing path KR1 to the upper end of the third throwing path KR3. Since the game ball T1 is stopped at the upper end of the third throwing path KR3, the game ball T2 collides with the game ball T1 and is thrown to the second throwing path KR2.

In this case, as described above, since the game ball T1 is in a state of protruding toward the first throwing path KR1, the second throwing path KR without throwing the game ball T2 inside the third throwing path KR3.
Since it can be guided to 2, the game ball T2 can be thrown to the second throwing path KR2 without staying inside the third throwing path KR3. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2.

That is, the second throwing path KR2 (second branch passage) in the first throwing path KR1 (flow passage).
The inner wall on the side where the ball is desired is a game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 and the third throwing path KR3 (first).
Of the specified number (1 ball) of game balls stored in the branch passage), the last game ball is used as the third throwing path K.
Since it is formed so as to be able to guide to the side surface of R3, the game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 is made to collide with the last game ball out of the specified number of game balls, and then flowed down to the second throwing path KR2. It can be done easily.

Of the specified number of game balls, the last game ball means a game ball located on the upstream side (the side opposite to the regulation plate 541). Further, in the present embodiment, the specified number is set to one ball. In this case, the game ball at the end means the game ball itself stored in the third throwing path KR3.

Further, as described above, in the first throwing path KR1 (flow passage), the lower end side of the flow path is tilted toward the central portion of the base plate 520 in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 73), and the lower end side thereof is tilted. The portion is formed by being curved in a gentle S shape. That is, since the flow direction of the downstream end of the first throw path KR1 (flow passage) is formed in the flow direction of the upstream end of the third throw path KR3, the game ball flowing down the first throw path KR1 is the third. If the direction of the repulsive force applied to the last game ball when it collides with the last game ball among the specified number of game balls stored in the throw path is different from the flow direction at the upstream end of the third throw path KR3. Can be made. As a result, due to the repulsive force at the time of collision, the trailing game ball jumps out from the upstream end of the third throwing path KR3, and the second throwing path KR2.
It is possible to suppress the inflow to.

Further, since the upper end portion of the third throwing path KR3 is formed so as to be inclined in the inclined direction of the lower end portion of the first throwing path KR1, the position where the game ball T2 collides with the game ball T1 is the upper hemisphere of the game ball T1. At the same time, it can be set to the second throwing path KR2 side. Therefore, the bounce direction of the game ball T2 that has collided with the game ball T1 can be set to the entrance (upper end) side of the second throwing path KR2. Therefore, the game ball T2 that collides with the game ball T1 can be easily thrown to the second throwing path KR2. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from staying in the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2.

Further, the distribution destination by the regulation plate 541 is set to the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage), and the flow of the game ball in the third throwing path KR3 is the storage plate 542 (means for changing the flow state).
In the state where the specified number (1 ball) of game balls is stored in the 3rd throwing path KR3.
Since the game balls flowing down the first throwing path KR1 (flowing passage) are formed so as to be able to flow down to the second throwing path KR2 (second branch passage), when a specified number or more of game balls flow down the flowing passage, It is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding the specified number (the second and subsequent game balls T2) from staying in the first throwing path KR1. Therefore, the displacement of the regulation plate 541 (operation in which the distribution destination is the second throwing path KR2).
However, it is possible to suppress the inhibition by the game ball stagnating in the first throwing path KR1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, a case where a ball is thrown into the throwing path when the sorting member 540 is arranged at the restricted position will be described. 77 (a) and 77 (b) show the distribution unit 500.
It is a partially enlarged view of.

Note that FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b) correspond to a partially enlarged view of the distribution unit 500 of FIG. 74 (a). Further, FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b) show the transition states of the spheres when the spheres flow in, respectively. Further, in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), the distribution member 540 is in a state of being arranged at the regulated position.

As shown in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), when a ball is thrown into the first throwing path KR1 with the distribution member 540 arranged at the regulated position, the thrown game ball T1 becomes the first thrown ball. Route KR
It collides with the regulation plate 541 at the lower end of 1. As a result, the game ball T1 is guided by the second throwing path KR2 and flows down the second throwing path KR2.

Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the operation when the ball is made to flow down to the downstream side of the third throwing path KR3 will be described. 78 (a) and 78 (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit 500.

Note that FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b) correspond to a partially enlarged view of the distribution unit 500 of FIG. 74 (a). Further, FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b) show the transition states of the spheres when the spheres flow in, respectively. Further, FIG. 78 (a) shows a state in which the distribution member 540 is arranged at the storage position, and FIG. 78 (b) shows a state in which the distribution member 540 is arranged at the restricted position.

As shown in FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b), the distribution unit 500 is in a stored state (FIG. 78 (a)).
), When the distribution member 540 is displaced and placed in the regulated position,
The game ball T1 stagnated above the storage plate 542 is flowed down to the downstream side of the third throwing path KR3.

That is, the flow of the ball into the third throwing path KR3 is limited to the ball stagnated above the storage plate 542. Further, as described above, the sphere stagnating above the storage plate 542 is set to 1, so that it is the third.
The ball can flow down to the throwing path KR3 one by one. Therefore, the third throwing route KR3
Since the number of balls flowing down to the downstream side of the ball can be stabilized, it is possible to prevent an unintended number of balls from flowing down in the third throwing path KR3.

Therefore, the sorting member 540 (sorting means) becomes a third with the displacement of the sorting member 540.
A regulation plate 541 (first infestation portion) and a storage plate (second infestation portion) formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the throwing path (first branch passage) are provided, and the regulation plate 541 projects into the third throwing path. By that, the first
A game ball flowing down the throwing path KR1 (flowing passage) is formed so as to be able to be distributed to the second throwing path KR2 (second branch passage), and the storage plate 542 is located downstream of the third throwing path KR3 from the regulation plate 541. By being located and projecting to the third throwing path KR3, the flow of the game balls distributed to the third throwing path KR3 can be regulated, and the regulating plate 541 and the storage plate 542 are formed.
In a state where one protrudes into the passage of the third throwing path KR3, the other is retracted to the outside of the passage of the third throwing path KR3 (inside the recesses 518 and 519), so that the ball receiving portion 467 (displacement member) By displacing the distribution member 540 according to the displacement, only a specified number (1 ball) of game balls can be distributed to the third throwing path KR3 and received by the ball receiving unit 467.

That is, the first state in which the regulation plate 541 projects to distribute the game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 to the second throwing path, and the regulation plate 541 retracts to the first throwing path KR1.
The second state of distributing the game ball flowing down to the third throwing path and the second infestation portion projecting to regulate the flow of the game ball distributed to the third throwing path KR3 (storing the game ball). Third
And by retracting the second haunting part, it is possible to form a fourth state in which the game ball stored in the third throwing path is allowed to flow down and be received by the ball receiving part. By combining the above, only the specified number (1 ball) of game balls is distributed to the third throwing path KR3, and the ball receiving unit 46
Can be received by 7.

Further, since the distribution member 540 includes the regulation plates 541 and 542, that is, is formed as a component of 1, the structure of the distribution member 540 (the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 are operated.
The structure for exerting those functions) can be simplified. Further, when one of the regulating plate 541 and the storage plate 542 protrudes into the passage of the third throwing path KR3, the other is retracted out of the passage of the third throwing path KR3, so that there are two ball receiving portions 467. It suffices if the distribution member 540 is also formed so as to be displaceable at two positions according to the positions (first position and second position). That is, by displacing the distribution member 540 at two positions, the above-mentioned first to fourth states can be formed. Therefore, with the structure of the distribution member 540 and the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, the distribution member 54
The structure for displacing 0 can be simplified, and the reliability of the game ball distribution operation can be improved accordingly.

Then, referring to FIGS. 79 to 80, the distribution unit 500 and the lower displacement unit 40
0 will be described. FIG. 79 is a front view of the distribution unit 500 and the lower displacement unit 400. FIG. 80 is a top view of the distribution unit 500 and the lower displacement unit 400.
The state in which the lower displacement unit 400 is arranged at the retracted position is shown in the figure.

As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, the distribution unit 500 is arranged on the front side (lower side of FIG. 80) of the lower displacement unit 400. In this case, the opening 525a formed in the rolling portion 525 of the distribution unit 500 and the opening 451a formed in the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440.
Is placed at a position where and overlap in the front-back direction. Therefore, the ball rolled on the rolling portion 525 is thrown into the lower displacement member 440 via the opening 525a and the opening 451a.

In other words, the ball is thrown to the lower displacement member 440 from the third winning opening 82 formed in the game board 13 via the ball throwing unit 600 and the distribution unit 500. Is done.

Therefore, the distribution unit 500 is a rolling unit 525 that communicates with the orbital region of the ball receiving unit 467.
Since the distribution member 540 regulates the passage of the game ball in the rolling portion 525, for example, even if the distribution member 540 malfunctions and the second and subsequent game balls T2 are thrown, two balls The game ball T2 after the eyes can be reliably sent to the orbital region of the distribution member 540 via the rolling unit 525. As a result, it is possible to prevent problems caused by the second and subsequent game balls T2.

Next, the relationship between the distribution member 540 and the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 86. 81, 83 and 85 are front views of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 82, 84 and 86 are cross-sectional views of the distribution unit 500. In addition, FIG. 81,
In FIGS. 83 and 85, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are transparently viewed, and only the distribution member 540 of the distribution unit 500 arranged on the front side is shown. Further, in FIGS. 82, 84 and 86, the distribution member 540 is shown by a chain line, and the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 arranged on the back surface side is shown by a chain line.

Further, in FIGS. 81 and 82, a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at the first position and the distribution member 540 is arranged at the regulated position is shown, and the lower displacement member 44 is shown.
The state in which 0 is located in the retracted state is illustrated. In FIGS. 83 and 84, a mode in which the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at the second position and the distribution member 540 is arranged at the storage position is shown, and the lower displacement member 440 is located in the retracted state. The state is illustrated. In FIGS. 85 and 86, a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at the first position and the distribution member 540 are arranged at the storage position is shown, and the lower displacement member 440 is in the first overhanging state. The state located in is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, when the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the first position, the ball receiving portion is as described above. The rack 466 that drives the 467 is arranged on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440 (the left side of the lower displacement member 440 when viewed from the front), and the movable rack 464 is arranged on the back side so as to overlap in the front-rear direction.

That is, the movable rack 464 is in a state of being arranged on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440 (the left side of the lower displacement member 440 when viewed from the front), similarly to the rack 466. Therefore, the contact plate 464c formed on the movable rack 464 is located on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440. In this case, the side surface on the other end side (the surface on the left side when viewed from the front) of the contact plate 464c is in contact with the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540. As a result, the distribution member 540 is displaced to a position (regulation position) where the regulation plate 541 is projected to the first throwing path KR1 by the driving force of rotation around the axis of the shaft hole 545.

Therefore, in the state where the lower displacement member 440 is retracted and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the first position, the ball thrown to the first throwing path KR1 of the distribution unit 500 is the third throwing path KR3. The ball is thrown to the second throwing path KR2 without flowing down. Also, as mentioned above,
By displacing the distribution member 540 from the stored state in which the ball is stored above the storage plate 542 to the regulated position, the game ball can be thrown to the downstream side of the third throwing path KR3 (downstream side of the storage plate 542). At this time, by operating the ball receiving portion 467 to receive the ball, the game ball can be thrown inside the ball receiving portion 467.

The third electric accessory 82a for storing the game ball in the distribution unit 500.
The opening operation is performed before the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the first position, and when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the first position, the third electric accessory 82a is in a closed state. .. As a result, when the distribution member 540 is displaced from the storage position to the regulation position, the game ball passing through the first throwing path KR1 is not restricted from flowing down by the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542, and the unintended game ball is the first. 3
It is possible to suppress the ball being thrown to the downstream side of the ball throwing path KR3.

Further, since the distribution member 540 is formed so as to be operable in conjunction with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, the throwing of the game ball to the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 is restricted according to the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467. Or acceptable. That is, since the regulation or allowance for throwing the game ball can be switched mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, for example, the sorting member can be switched according to the detection result of the sensor that detects the position of the sorting member 540. It is possible to eliminate the need to control the driving means for driving the 540 or each of these means, thereby reducing the product cost and improving the reliability of the operation.

Further, in the distribution member 540, the ball receiving portion 467 is in the first position direction (second direction) from the second position.
Since it is allowed to send the game ball T2 to the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 in conjunction with the displacement to, it is the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 and is in the first direction from the ball receiving portion 467. The game ball can be reliably thrown into the area on the side.

Further, the ball receiving portion 467 is formed so as to be displaceable at a switching position for switching the distribution member 540 and a receiving position (second position) set at a position different from the switching position (first position). In the state where the portion 467 is displaced to the switching position, the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is switched to the third throwing path KR3, and in the state where the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the receiving position, the ball receiving portion is transferred from the third throwing path. 467 will be able to receive the game ball, and at the same time
Since the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is switched to the second throw path KR2, the game balls exceeding the specified number (1 ball in this embodiment) that the ball receiving unit 467 can receive the balls are distributed to the third throw path KR3. It can be suppressed.

That is, when the switching position and the receiving position are set to the same position, the distribution member 5
Since the ball receiving section 467 receives the game ball while the distribution destination by 40 is switched to the third throwing path, the game ball exceeds the specified number that can be received by the ball receiving section 467 and the game ball receives the third throwing path KR3. There is a risk of being distributed to. If a means for regulating the inflow of the game ball into the third throwing path KR3 is separately provided, the structure becomes complicated, the reliability is lowered, and the product cost is increased.

On the other hand, in the embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the switching position, and a specified number of game balls (1 ball in the present embodiment) are distributed to the third throwing path KR3, and then the distribution member 540.
When is displaced to the receiving position, the distribution destination is switched to the second throwing path KR2, so that the game ball exceeding one ball can be prevented from flowing down to the third throwing path. Therefore,
The ball receiving unit 467 can prevent the game balls exceeding the receivable specified number (1 ball) from being distributed to the third throwing path KR3. Further, since it is not necessary to separately provide the above-mentioned means (means for restricting the inflow of the game ball into the third throwing path KR3), it is possible to improve the reliability and reduce the product cost.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 starts from a position where each operating unit is turned off (turned off) when the power is turned on (on). Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, only the control thereof may be reset. In that case, if the distribution member 540 is provided with a drive means, when the power is turned on, the distribution unit 500 in the stored state operates during the initial operation to cause the game ball to flow down to the third throw path KR3. There is a risk that the game ball will be thrown to the retracted side (first position side) of the ball receiving portion 467 arranged at the third position.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the displacement of the distribution member 540 and the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 are synchronized, so that even if the pachinko machine 10 is not positioned at a predetermined reference position and the power is turned off, the pachinko machine is turned off. It is possible to prevent an unintended gaming ball from being thrown into the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 when the power of the machine 10 is turned on. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being clogged inside the lower displacement member 440.

Further, when the power is turned off while the game ball is left in the orbital region of the lower displacement member 440, the ball receiving portion 467 is left in the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 by causing the ball receiving portion 467 to perform the discharge operation described above. The game ball can be discharged to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 and collected from the collection port 411f.

Next, it will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 and 84. As shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, the state in which the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 are second.
In the state of being arranged at the position or the third position (position other than the first position), as described above, the rack 466 for driving the ball receiving portion 467 is substantially centered in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 83) of the lower displacement member 440. The movable rack 464 is arranged at a position movable from the end of the lower displacement member 440 on the other end side (left side in the left-right direction in FIG. 83) to one end side.

Therefore, the contact plate 464c formed on the movable rack 464 is arranged at a position separated from the other end of the lower displacement member 4440 to one end. In this case, the surface on the other end side of the contact plate 464c (the surface on the left side when viewed from the front) is separated from the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540. As a result, the distribution member 540 is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 545 by the urging force of the urging spring SP4 interposed between the distribution member 540 and the base plate 520, and the storage plate 542 is third.
It is displaced to a position (storage position) protruding from the throwing path KR3.

Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is retracted and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the second position or the third position (position other than the first position), the first distribution unit 500 is placed.
The ball thrown to the throwing path KR1 is in a state of being stopped above the storage plate 542. again,
As described above, when the distribution unit 500 is in the stored state, the ball thrown into the first throwing path KR1 collides with the ball stopped above the storage plate 542 and is thrown into the second throwing path KR2.

Next, it will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. As shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, when the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the first overhanging state or the second overhanging state, the lower displacement member 440 slides with respect to the front base 411 as described above. It is displaced and rotationally displaced. Therefore, the contact plate 464c formed on the movable rack 464 is displaced with the displacement of the lower displacement member 440, and is in a state of being separated from the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540. As a result, the distribution member 540 is rotated around the axis of the shaft hole 545 by the urging force of the urging spring SP4 interposed between the distribution member 540 and the base plate 520, and the storage plate 542 is thrown into the third ball. It is displaced to a position (storage position) protruding from the path KR3.

Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the first overhanging state or the second overhanging state, the ball thrown into the first throwing path KR1 of the distribution unit 500 is stopped above the storage plate 542. Will be done. Further, as described above, when the distribution unit 500 is in the stored state, the ball thrown to the first throwing path KR1 collides with the ball stopped above the storage plate 542 and is thrown to the second throwing path KR2. ..

That is, the lower displacement member 440 is in the first overhanging state and the second overhanging state (states other than the retracted state).
In this case, the position of the opening 451a of the decorative member 450 is displaced with the displacement of the lower displacement member 440, so that the communication state between the opening 451a and the opening 525a of the distribution unit 500 is released. .. Therefore, if the ball flows down into the third throwing path KR3, the ball may be discharged into the rear case 300 from the opening 451a. However, in the present embodiment, the third throwing member is set as the storage position. It is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down to the downstream side of the path KR3. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball of the rear case 300 from being discharged inside.

In other words, the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 is formed so as to be displaceable in the retracted state, the first overhanging state, and the second overhanging state, and when the lower displacement member 440 is positioned in the retracted state, the lower displacement member 440 is formed. Since the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged on the lower displacement member 440, a mode in which the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced while the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the retracted state and a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged in the first or second overhanging state. It is possible to form a mode in which the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

In this case, in the state where the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the first or second overhanging state, the ball receiving portion 4
67 cannot receive the game ball from the rolling portion 525 of the third throwing path KR3 (third throwing path KR).
In such a state where the rolling portion 525 of 3 and the opening 451a of the lower displacement member 440 are not in communication), the contact plate 464c interlocking with the ball receiving portion 467 is made unable to contact the distribution member 540. Therefore, in a state where the ball receiving portion 467 cannot receive the game ball (a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the first overhanging state or the second overhanging state), the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is the third throwing ball. It is possible to suppress switching to the route KR3.

Further, since the distribution member 540 is arranged on the base plate 520 of the distribution unit 500 formed as a separate member from the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440, the lower displacement member 4 is correspondingly arranged.
It is possible to suppress the increase in size of the base member 470 of 40.

Here, since the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 from the first overhanging state to the retracted state is not only rotational displacement in the left-right direction but also rotational displacement, the contact plate 464c in the tilted state is subjected to the rotational displacement. , The protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540 abuts on the upper surface of the contact plate 464c, and the distribution member 540
May not be rotationally displaced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the state of being displaced to the first overhanging position shown in FIG. 85 to the retracted state, the ball receiving portion 467 is placed at a position other than the first position. ((
It is in a state of being displaced to the second position or the third position). As a result, it is possible to prevent the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 displaced in the retracted state from colliding with the protrusion 543. As a result, the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540 comes into contact with the upper surface of the contact plate 464c, and the distribution member 5
It is possible to prevent the 40 from being unable to be rotationally displaced.

Further, since the swelling portion 543a is formed in the distribution member 540 as described above, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the first overhanging state to the retracted state due to poor control or the like, the contact plate 464c is formed. Even when the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540 abuts on the upper surface, the distribution member 5
40 can be rotationally displaced.

That is, since the contact area with the contact plate 464c can be reduced by the bulging portion 543a, the bulging portion 543a can be easily slid along the surface when the contact plate 464c comes into contact with the contact plate 464c. Therefore, the distribution member 540 can be easily rotationally displaced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540 from coming into contact with the upper surface of the contact plate 464c and the distribution member 540 from being unable to be rotationally displaced.

Next, the configuration of the drive transmission portion of the rotating unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90. 87 is a front view of the rotating unit 700, FIG. 88 is a rear view of the rotating unit 700, and FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotating unit 700, FIG. 90.
Is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating unit 700.

As shown in FIGS. 87 to 90, the rotating unit 700 includes a decorative unit 750 composed of a plurality of displacement members and a ball cradle 71 arranged on the upper side of the decorative unit 750 in the direction of gravity.
0 and the back base 720 arranged on the back side of the ball cradle 710 and the decorative unit 750.
A left-side transmission member 730 arranged on the left side of the front view of the decoration unit 750, and a right-side transmission member 740 arranged on the right side of the front view of the decoration unit 750 are mainly provided.

The ball pedestal 710 is a member for dropping a game ball emitted from the emission opening 471 on one side of the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 described above. As a result, the ball thrown inside the lower displacement member 440 can be thrown to the rotating unit 700. The ball cradle 71
The detailed configuration of 0 will be described later.

The decoration unit 750 is a substantially D-shaped block body in which a curved portion is arranged upward in a side view, and a character or a pattern is decorated on the front side. Further, the decorative unit 750 is composed of a plurality of members, and is configured to be displaceable by transmission of a drive described later. The configuration of the decorative unit 750 will be described later.

The back base 720 is a plate member that connects the back side of the ball cradle 710 and the back side of the decorative unit 750, and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view. As mentioned above, the decorative unit 750
Since the fastening portion is limited because it is composed of a plurality of movable members, the decorative unit is connected by connecting the decorative unit 750 and the ball cradle 710 on the back side at a position invisible to the player. The decorative unit 750 and the ball cradle 710 can be assembled as one unit while ensuring the range of motion of the 750.

The left transmission member 730 is attached with a drive motor KM4 arranged on the left side surface (left side in FIG. 87) of the decorative unit 750, a transmission member 730 for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor KM4, and a drive motor KM4. Gear cover 7 that covers the motor base 732 and the transmission member 730
33 is mainly provided with a throwing path cover 734 which is attached to the gear cover 733 and forms a predetermined gap between the gear cover 733 and the gear cover 733.

The drive motor KM4 is a drive source for moving each member of the decorative unit 750, which will be described later. The drive of the drive motor KM4 is transmitted by a transmission member 730, which will be described later.

The transmission member 730 includes a transmission gear 731a attached to the shaft of the drive motor KM4, a transmission gear 731b meshing with the transmission gear 731a, a transmission gear 731c meshing with the transmission gear 731b, and a transmission gear 731c thereof. The transmission gear 731d is arranged adjacent to and coaxially arranged by the shaft 735, and the load gear 731e meshed with the transmission gear 731d is mainly provided.

The transmission gear 731a is attached to the drive motor KM4 as described above, and rotates when the drive motor KM4 is rotationally driven.

The transmission gear 731b is provided with a one-way clutch OW1 inside, and the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is connected to a shaft portion JB1 that transmits a rotational driving force to a right-side transmission member 740 on the right side of the decorative unit 750.

The one-way clutch OW1 includes an inner ring arranged inside and a cam surface formed on the outer peripheral surface, an outer ring arranged outside the inner ring, and a plurality of springs and rollers between the inner ring and the outer ring. When the outer ring tries to rotate in one direction with respect to the inner ring, the contact surface pressure between the cam surface and the roller increases, which becomes resistance and transmits power to the inner ring, and the outer ring moves in the other direction with respect to the inner ring. When rotated to, the contact surface pressure between the cam surface and the roller decreases, and the clutch slips and disconnects the power transmission.

Therefore, when the drive force in one direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4 to the transmission gear 731b,
When the driving force of rotation can be transmitted to the shaft portion JB1 and the driving force in the other direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, the outer ring slides with respect to the inner ring and the transmission of the driving force to the shaft portion JB1 is cut off.

Similar to the transmission gear 731b, the transmission gear 731c is provided with a one-way clutch OW1 inside. Further, a shaft 735 is arranged inside the one-way clutch OW1 of the transmission gear 731c.

Therefore, when the drive force in one direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4 to the transmission gear 731c,
When the driving force of rotation can be transmitted to the shaft 735 and the driving force in the other direction is transmitted from the driving motor KM4, the outer ring slides with respect to the inner ring and the transmission of the driving force to the shaft 735 is cut off. again,
The transmission gear 731c is meshed with the transmission gear 731b, and the directions of rotation are opposite to each other. Therefore, when the transmission gear 731b is rotated in one direction, the transmission gear 731c
Is the rotation in the other direction. On the other hand, when the transmission gear 731b is rotated in the other direction, the transmission gear 731b is rotated in one direction. That is, by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor KM4, it is switched to a mode in which the shaft portion JB1 rotates or a mode in which the shaft 735 rotates.

The transmission gear 731d is attached to the shaft 735. As described above, the shaft 735 is the transmission gear 7.
It is rotated only when 31c is rotated in one direction. Therefore, the transmission gear 731c rotates in one direction only when the transmission gear 731c is rotated in one direction, and rotation in the other direction is non-rotational.

The load gear 731e has a shaft portion 791a of a resistance member 791 whose shaft hole is attached to the box member 760.
Is linked to. The resistance member 791 is formed to include a shaft portion 791a that is rotatable with respect to a base portion fastened to the box member 760. The resistance member 791 is formed so that a predetermined amount of resistance acts when the shaft portion 791a rotates with respect to the base portion. That is, since a predetermined amount of force is required to rotate the shaft portion 791a, the load gear 73 connected to the shaft portion 791a
Similarly, the force for rotating 1e is required to be a predetermined amount or more.

As a result, when the rotating body 800 meshed with the transmission gear 731d is rotated and stopped by the rotation of the transmission gear 731d, it is possible to suppress the rotation due to the inertial force thereof. That is,
The resistance when the shaft portion 791a rotates with respect to the base portion is set to be larger than the inertial force acting around the axis of the rotating body 800 when the rotation of the rotating body 800 is stopped.

Further, the load gear 731e is connected to a transmission gear 731d coaxially arranged with the transmission gear 731c. Therefore, the resistance of the load gear 731e applied to the drive motor KM4 is reduced to the transmission gear 7.
It can only rotate in one direction to rotate 31d. That is, the transmission gear 731c is
When rotated in the other direction, the transmission of the drive between the transmission gear 731c and the transmission gear 731d is cut off, so that the resistance of the load gear 731e can be suppressed from acting. As a result, when the transmission gear 731b is rotated in one direction, it is possible to suppress the action of the resistance of the load gear 731e.

The motor base 732 is formed in a box shape in which the decorative unit 750 side is open, and the drive motor KM4 is arranged on the outside of the bottom portion of the box (left side in FIG. 87) with the shaft inserted inside the box. As a result, the transmission gear 731a connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM4 is connected to the motor base 73.
It can be arranged inside 2. That is, the depth dimension of the box of the motor base 732 is the transmission gear 731a.
It is set larger than the width dimension of. As a result, the drive motor KM4 and the transmission gear 731a can be arranged in the decorative unit 750 in a state of being attached to the motor base 732, and the transmission gear 731a can be prevented from colliding with the decorative unit 750.

The gear cover 733 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the rear, and is fastened to the decorative unit 750 with the left transmission member 730 arranged between them. Further, in the decorative unit 750, a through hole 733a is formed through the decorative unit 750 at a position facing the shaft hole of the rotating body 800 described later. As a result, the ball rolling inside the rotating body 800 can be discharged to the outside through the through hole 733a. A description of the ball thrown to the rotating body 800 will be described later.

The ball throwing path cover 734 is a member arranged on the outside of the gear cover 733 (left side in FIG. 87), is formed of a plate-like body, and has a wall portion protruding from the edge portion thereof toward the gear cover 733. As a result, a gap can be formed between the gear cover 733 and the ball throwing path cover 734 facing each other, and the ball inserted through the through hole 733a of the gear cover 733 is inserted through the gap and discharged to the outside of the rotating unit 700. Can be done. The ball discharged from the gap between the gear cover 733 and the ball throwing path cover facing each other is thrown to a recovery path (not shown) and collected.

The right transmission member 740 includes a rotating member 741 connected to the other end side of the shaft portion JB1 described above and a rotating member 741.
It is mainly provided with an arm member 742 having one end connected to the rotating member 741 and a crank cover 743 arranged on the decorative unit 750 with the rotating member 741 and the arm member 742 covered.

The rotating member 741 has a main body portion 741b formed in the shape of a disk and a main body portion 741b thereof.
One-way clutch OW1 fitted to the shaft of and the opposite side of the decorative unit 750 (Fig. 87)
It is mainly provided with a columnar protrusion 741a protruding from the right side).

In the one-way clutch OW1 attached to the rotating member 741, the shaft hole of the inner ring is inserted into the other end side of the shaft portion JB. Further, the one-way clutch OW1 is arranged so that the inner ring and the outer ring are not transmitted when a rotation opposite to the rotation direction of the shaft portion JB1 is input to the inner ring.

As a result, when a driving force having a rotation speed higher than the rotation speed transmitted from the shaft portion JB1 to the rotation member 741 is input to the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1, only the outer ring is rotated to drive the rotation member 741 of the drive motor KM4. It can be rotated by a driving force other than driving. As a result, the rotating member 741 can be rotated at two or more different speeds.

The arm member 742 has a shape that is a combination of a C-shape and an I-shape in a side view, and has an I at one end of the C-shape.
The other end of the character is connected and formed. Further, the arm member 742 includes a shaft hole 742a penetrating the connecting portion between the C-shaped portion and the I-shaped portion, an elliptical first sliding groove 742b penetrating the one end of the I-shaped portion, and C. It is mainly provided with an elliptical second sliding groove 742c formed through the other end of the character portion.

The shaft hole 742a is a shaft portion 764a formed in the right side surface plate 764 of the box member 760, which will be described later.
Is a hole into which a shaft portion 764a is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 764a. Therefore, the arm member 742 is rotatable with respect to the decorative unit 750 because the shaft portion 764a is inserted into the shaft hole 742a and arranged in the decorative unit 750.

The first sliding groove 742b is a hole into which the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is inserted, and the width dimension in the lateral direction formed in the ellipse is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 741a. Therefore,
The protrusion 741a can be inserted inside the first sliding groove 742b, and the arm member 742 can be rotationally displaced by the rotation of the rotating member 741.

Further, the rotating member 741 is formed so that the outer diameter is smaller than the longitudinal dimension of the I-shaped portion of the arm member 742, and the shaft is half the distance from the shaft hole 742a of the arm member 742 to the longitudinal dimension of the I-shaped portion. It is placed at a position farther away than. As a result, by rotating the rotating member 741, the arm member 742 can be reciprocated to rotate around the axis of the shaft hole 742a.

The second sliding groove 742c is a hole into which the protrusion 773a of the right side lid portion 773, which will be described later, is inserted, and the width dimension in the lateral direction formed in the ellipse is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 773a.
Therefore, the protrusion 773a can be inserted inside the second sliding groove 742c. In addition, the right side lid 773
Is formed so as to be rotatable and displaceable with respect to the box member 760. Therefore, as described above, the rotating member 741 is rotated, and the arm member 742 reciprocates in rotation to rotate the right lid portion 773 connected to the other end of the arm member 742 with respect to the box member 760. be able to.

The crank cover 743 is mainly provided with an elliptical portion 743a formed in a rear view ellipse and a ball throwing portion 743b formed so as to be connected to the back surface side of the elliptical portion 743a.

The elliptical portion 743a is a cover that covers the arm member 742, and the outer shape in the side view is formed to be larger than the displacement region of the arm member 742 and the arm member 742, and the arm member 742 is formed from the edge portion to the decorative unit 750 side. A wall portion is formed that protrudes larger than the thickness of the wall. Thereby, when the crank cover 743 is arranged in the decorative unit 750, the arm member 742 can be arranged between the crank cover 743 and the decorative unit 750 facing each other.

The ball throwing unit 743b is a path member for throwing the ball to the recovery path when the ball flowing down in the flow area in front of the game board 13 is collected from a predetermined collection port, and has a predetermined size inside. It is formed in the shape of a rod with a space of sword. Further, the upper end side of the ball throwing portion 743b is opened and connected to the collection port of the game board 13, and the lower end side is connected to the opening formed in the decorative unit 750. As a result, the ball collected on the game board 13 can be passed through the inside of the decorative unit 750 via the ball throwing unit 743b and guided to a collection path (not shown).

Next, the decorative unit 750 will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 95. FIG. 91 is a front view of the decorative unit 750. 92 (a) is a side view of the decorative unit 750 in the direction of arrow XCIIa of FIG. 91, and FIG. 92 (b) is a side view of the arrow XCIIb of FIG. 91.
It is a side view of the decorative unit 750 in a directional view. FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective front view of the decorative unit 750, and FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective rear view of the decorative unit 750. In addition, in FIG. 91 (b) and FIG. 91 (c), the right side surface plate 764 and the left side side plate 76 of the box member 760.
The state in which 5 is transparently viewed is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 91 to 94, the decorative unit 750 has a lid arranged on the upper side (upper side in FIG. 91 (a)) of the box member 760 and the box member 760, which are the outer decorative portions of the decorative unit 750. The rotating body 80 disposed inside the member 770, the box member 760, and the lid member 770.
It is formed mainly with 0.

The box member 760 includes a base member 762 arranged below the rotating body 800, a front plate 761 arranged in front of the base member 762, and a lower surface plate 763 arranged on the bottom surface of the base member 762. It is mainly provided with a right side side plate 764 arranged on the right side of the front view of the base member 762 and a left side side plate 765 arranged on the left side of the front view of the base member 762.

The base member 762 is formed in a rectangular shape that is larger than the rotating body 800 in the top view, and has a thickness larger than the outer diameter of the sphere in the direction of gravity. The upper surface of the base member 762 is formed on a curved surface coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800. Thereby, when the base member 762 is arranged in the vicinity of the rotating body 800, the collision between the base member 762 and the rotating body 800 can be suppressed.

The base member 762 is mainly provided with a recess 762a recessed downward in the left-right direction on the upper surface and a ball throwing portion 762b recessed in a substantially L shape on the bottom surface.

The recess 762a is a groove in which the shaft portion JB1 described above is arranged inside, and is a decorative unit 75.
It is recessed on the shaft of the transmission gear 731b arranged on the side surface of 0. Thereby, the driving force of the driving motor KM4 can be transmitted via the shaft portion JB1.

The ball throwing portion 762b is bent and recessed in an L shape on the bottom surface, and one end side is a right side plate 7
It is connected to the opening 764b of 64, and the other end side is connected to the back side of the winning opening 761a of the front plate 761. Further, the recessed width of the ball throwing portion 762b is formed to be larger than the diameter of the ball. As a result, by disposing the lower surface plate 763 on the lower side, it is possible to throw the ball inside the box member 760.

The front plate 761 is formed so as to be horizontally long in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a predetermined thickness on the back side. Further, the front plate 761 is formed with a winning opening 761a having a size capable of inserting a ball on the front side. The winning opening 761a is connected to the ball throwing portion 762b of the base member 762 arranged on the back surface side as described above. Therefore, the ball thrown inside the winning opening 761a is thrown to the ball throwing portion 762b of the base member 762.

The right side plate 764 is formed in a D shape whose outer shape is curved upward in the side view. Further, the right side plate 764 has a shaft portion 764a projecting to the outside of the decorative unit 750, a bearing portion 764c formed through below the shaft portion 764a, and a curved shape having the same shaft as the rotating shaft of the rotating body 800. The curved opening 764d formed in the opening and the ball throwing portion 762b of the crank cover 743.
764b, which opens at a position facing the lower end of the rotating body 800, and an engaging portion 764e, which is formed through a semicircular side view on the axis of the rotating shaft of the rotating body 800, are mainly formed.

The opening 764b uses a ball thrown from the ball throwing portion of the crank cover 743 as a base member 76.
It is a hole for allowing the ball to be thrown to 2, and is formed larger than the outer diameter of the ball. As a result, the ball thrown to the crank cover 743 can be thrown to the base member 762.

The bearing portion 764c is a hole into which the shaft portion JB1 described above is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion JB1. As a result, the driving force can be transmitted to the above-mentioned right side transmission member 740.

The curved opening 764d is an opening through which the protrusion 773a projecting from the right lid portion 773 is inserted into the inside. Further, the curved opening 764d has the lid member 770 because the lid member 770 is rotationally displaced.
It is formed in an arc shape coaxial with the rotation axis of. As a result, when the lid member 770 is rotationally displaced, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 773a from colliding with the curved opening 764d.

The engaging portion 764e is a member that engages with the end portion on the right side of the front view of the base plate 810 arranged inside the rotating body 800 to hold the base plate 810 non-rotatably. That is, the tip portion 811a of the right end portion 811 of the base plate 810 is inserted into the engaging portion 764e and arranged. This will result in
The base plate 810 is non-rotatable.

The left side surface plate 765 is formed so that the outer shape in the side view is substantially the same as that of the right side surface plate 764.
Further, the left side surface plate 765 has a through hole 765a formed through the shaft of the rotating body 800, a shaft portion 765b protruding toward the rotating body 800 side, and a penetrating portion 791a into which the shaft portion 791a of the resistance member 791 is inserted. It is mainly provided with a hole 765c.

The through hole 765a is an opening for inserting the ball discharged from the opening on the left side of the front view of the rotating body 800 into the through hole 733a of the motor base 732 described above. That is, the through hole 7
The 65a is formed on the axis of the rotating body 800, and the size of the inner diameter thereof is set to be the same as the inner diameter of the opening on the left side of the front view of the rotating body 800.

The shaft portion 765b is inserted into a shaft hole 781 formed in the rotation restricting member 780 described later, and the shaft portion 765b is inserted into the shaft hole 781.
The rotation restricting member 780 can be held in a rotatable state. The displacement of the rotation restricting member 780 will be described later.

As described above, the through hole 765c is a hole through which the shaft portion 791a of the resistance member 791 is inserted, and is formed at a position facing the side surface of the load gear 731e described above.

The lower surface plate 763 is a plate member that is disposed on the lower surface of the base member 762 to form a ball throwing path through which the ball can pass through the ball throwing portion 762b and the lower surface plate 763 of the base member 762.
Further, the lower surface plate 763 is formed with an opening 763a penetrating in the vertical direction. Aperture 763a
Is an opening for throwing a ball thrown inside the ball throwing unit 762b into a recovery path (not shown). Therefore, the ball won in the winning opening 761a of the front plate 761 and the ball is thrown from the game area to the ball throwing portion 743b of the right side transmission member 740, and the ball can be discharged from the inside of the decorative unit 750.

The lid member 770 has a curved lid portion 771 formed in a curved shape coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800, a right lid portion 773 fastened to the right side surface of the curved lid portion 771 in front view, and a curved lid portion 771. It is mainly provided with a left side lid portion 772 to be fastened to the left side surface of the front view.

As described above, the curved lid portion 771 has an outer shape in a side view formed in a curved shape coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800, and is formed with a radius larger than that of the rotating body 800. The curved lid portion 771 includes a transparent portion 771a formed of a transparent plate in a part on the front side.

The transparent portion 771a is a plate that allows the player to visually recognize a pattern, a character, or the like drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 from the player. That is, in the player, the rotating body 800 is the lid member 770.
Even in the embodiment in which the upper end side is covered, the display of the rotating body 800 can be visually recognized via the transparent portion 771a.

The right side lid portion 773 is formed in an annular shape in a side view, and the radius on the outer side of the annulus is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the curved lid portion 771. Further, the inner diameter of the right lid portion 773 is formed to be larger than the size of the outer diameter in the side view of the right end portion 811 of the rotating body 800. As a result, the right lid portion 773 becomes
It is arranged in a state where the right end portion 811 of the rotating body 800 is inserted through the inner portion of the annular shape.

Further, the right side lid portion 773 is formed mainly provided with a protrusion 773a projecting to the outside (right side in the front view) of the decorative unit 750 and a recess 773b recessed in the outer peripheral edge portion in the radial direction. .. As described above, the protrusion 773a is a protrusion inserted into the second sliding groove 742c of the arm member 742.

The opening / closing member 870 can be rotated by inserting the protrusion 871 of the opening / closing member 870, which will be described later, into the recess 773b. Therefore, the recessed width of the recess 773b is set to be larger than the outer shape of the protrusion 871. Further, the recess 773b is formed at a position substantially opposite to the edge portion of the right side lid portion 773 in which the curved lid portion 771 is arranged.

The left side lid portion 772 is formed in an annular shape in a side view, and the radius on the outer side of the annular shape is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the curved lid portion 771. Further, the inner diameter of the left side lid portion 772 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the tooth surface 881a of the left rotation portion 880, which will be described later. As a result, the left side lid portion 772 is arranged in a state where the left rotation portion 880 of the rotating body 800 is inserted through the inner portion of the annular shape.

Further, the left side lid portion 772 is formed with a plate-shaped sensor plate 772a projecting to the outside (left side when viewed from the front) of the decorative unit 750. The sensor plate 772a can detect the position of the left side lid portion 772 by arranging the sensor plate 772a between facing the bifurcated sensors (not shown).

Here, the lid member 770 for the rotating body 800 will be described. The arrangement of the lid member 770 in the assembled state of the rotating body 800 is the state in which the left and right ends of the rotating body 800 are inserted inside the right side lid portion 773 and the left side lid portion 772 before assembly (separate member). do. after that,
By assembling the right side lid portion 773, the left side lid portion 772, and the curved lid portion 771, the rotating body 800 and the lid member 770 are connected. Therefore, the lid member 770 is rotatable with respect to the rotating body about the axis of the rotating body 800.

The rotation restricting member 780 is formed by bending in a substantially L-shape in a side view. The rotation restricting member 780 is mainly provided with a shaft hole 781 penetrating the bent portion, a protrusion 782 protruding in the bending direction on one end side, and a contact surface 783 formed flat on the tip on the other end side. Will be done.

As described above, the shaft portion 765b of the left side surface plate 765 is inserted into the shaft hole 781. As a result, the rotation restricting member 780 is rotatably held with respect to the left side surface plate 765. Further, the urging spring SP5 is inserted into the shaft portion. As a result, a rotational force in one direction is applied to the rotation restricting member 780.

The protrusion 782 engages with the engaging protrusion 882 of the left-handed rotating portion 880, which will be described later, so that the rotating body 8
The rotational displacement of 00 can be regulated. The contact surface 783 is a surface to which the end portion on the back surface side of the above-mentioned lid member 770 abuts, and the rotation restricting member 780 can be rotated by abutting the lid member 770. The mode of regulation between the rotation restricting member 780 and the rotating body 800 will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 95 to 96, the transmission path of the driving force when the driving motor KM4 is rotated will be described. 95 (a) and 96 (a) are the rotating units 700 in the direction of arrow XCVa of FIG. 89, and FIGS. 95 (b) and 96 (b) are the arrow XC of FIG. 89.
It is a rotation unit 700 in Vb.

In FIG. 95, the displacement direction of each member when the axis of the drive motor KM4 is rotated in the positive direction (clockwise) is shown by a two-dot chain line. In FIG. 96, the displacement direction of each member is shown by a two-dot chain line when the axis of the drive motor KM4 is rotated in the negative direction (counterclockwise).

As shown in FIGS. 95A and 95B, when the drive motor KM4 is driven in the positive direction, the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the positive direction. When the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the positive direction, the transmission gear 731b is rotated in the negative direction and the transmission gear 731c is rotated in the positive direction.

In this case, the one-way clutch OW1 disposed on the transmission gear 731b does not transmit the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft portion JB1 does not rotate. Therefore, the driving force is not transmitted to the rotating member 741 connected to the shaft portion JB1, and the arm member 742 is stopped.

On the other hand, the one-way clutch OW1 disposed on the transmission gear 731 is in a state of transmitting the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft 735 is rotated. Therefore, the transmission gear 7 connected to the shaft 735
31d is rotated. As a result, the load gear 731e meshed with the transmission gear 731d and the tooth surface 881a of the rotating body 800 are rotated. That is, when the drive motor KM4 rotates in the forward direction, the driving force to the lid member 770 is not transmitted, and the driving force to the rotating body 800 is in the transmitted state.

As shown in FIGS. 96A and 96B, when the drive motor KM4 is driven in the negative direction, the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the negative direction. When the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the negative direction, the transmission gear 731b is rotated in the positive direction and the transmission gear 731c is rotated in the negative direction.

In this case, the one-way clutch OW1 disposed on the transmission gear 731b is in a state of transmitting the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft portion JB1 is rotated. Therefore, the driving force is transmitted to the rotating member 741 connected to the shaft portion JB1, and the rotating member 741 is rotated. As a result, the arm member 742 rotates and reciprocates around the axis of the shaft hole 742a, and the lid member 770 is displaced.

On the other hand, in the one-way clutch OW1 disposed on the transmission gear 731, the rotation of the outer ring is not transmitted to the inner ring, and the shaft 735 is not rotated. Therefore, the transmission gear 73 connected to the shaft 735
The driving force is not transmitted to 1d, and the rotating body 800 and the load gear 731e are in a non-rotating state. That is, when the drive motor KM4 makes a negative rotation, the driving force to the lid member 770 is in a transmitted state, and the driving force to the rotating body 800 is not transmitted.

Therefore, the transmission gear 731c that transmits the driving force from the driving motor KM4 to the rotating body 800.
By disposing the one-way clutch OW1 on the (rotational side drive means) and the transmission gear 731b (displacement side transmission means) transmitted to the opening / closing member 870 described later via the lid member 770, the drive motor KM4 can be rotated in the rotational direction. Depending on the rotational force, the transmission gear 731c or the transmission gear 731b
It is possible to transmit to one and block the transmission to the other. As a result, the drive motor K
By simply switching the rotation direction of the M4, the drive target driven by the rotation driving force can be switched, that is, the rotation of the rotating body 800, the stop of the rotation, and the opening / closing member are changed according to the rotation direction of the drive motor KM4. You can switch between 870 displacement and its stop,
The structure can be simplified while allowing the formation of multiple embodiments.

Here, in a structure in which the drive target (rotating body 800 or opening / closing member 870 (lid member 770)) is switched according to the rotation direction of the drive means using the one-way clutch OW1, the drive force is transmitted from the drive motor KM4. When it is cut off, it becomes a state in which it can freely rotate or displace in the direction driven by the driving force. Therefore, for example, the driving target of the driving means is the rotating body 8.
When the opening / closing member 870 (cover member 770) is switched from 00 and the transmission of the driving force is cut off, the rotating body 800 becomes in a rotatable state, and there is a possibility that the rotating body 800 will continue to rotate (rotate) due to the inertial force.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the load gear 731e (load gear) meshed with the transmission gear 731d driven by the transmission gear 731c is provided, the transmission of the rotational driving force from the drive motor KM4 is cut off. However, the load (resistance) when rotating the load gear 731e can be used to prevent the rotating body 800 from continuing to rotate.

Next, the displacement of the lid member 770 will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. Figure 97
(A) and FIG. 98 (c) are in the closed state, FIGS. 97 (b) and 98 (b) are in the intermediate state, and FIGS. 97 (c) and 98 (a) are in the open state. It is a side view of 750 and the right side transmission member 740.

In addition, in FIGS. 97 (a) to 97 (c) and 98 (a) to 98 (c), the state in which the crank cover 743 of the right side transmission member 740 is removed is shown. Further, the closed state of the decorative unit 750 is a state in which the lid member 770 is arranged so as to cover the upper half surface (upper side of FIG. 97 (a)) of the rotating body 800, and the open state is a state in which the lid member 770 rotates. It is in a state of being displaced and arranged on the back surface side (right side of FIG. 97 (c)) of the rotating body 800. The intermediate state is a state in which the lid member 770 is arranged at a position between the closed state and the open state.

Further, in FIGS. 97 (a) to 97 (c), the states of being displaced from the closed state to the open state are sequentially illustrated, and in FIGS. 98 (a) to 98 (c), the displacement from the open state to the closed state is shown. The states to be displacement are shown in order.

First, with reference to FIG. 97, the displacement of the lid member 770 when displaced from the closed state to the open state will be described. The transmission of the driving force to the arm member 742 is performed by the driving motor K as described above.
This is done by rotating M4 in the negative direction.

In the closed state, the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is arranged on the back surface side (right side of FIG. 97A) of the shaft hole 742a of the arm member 742. Therefore, the arm member 742
The first sliding groove 742b into which the protrusion 741a is inserted is arranged on the back surface side of the shaft hole 742a.

The shaft hole 742a, the first sliding groove 742b, and the second sliding groove 742c of the arm member 742 are formed on substantially the same straight line. Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the opposite end of the first sliding groove 742b is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 97 (a)) of the shaft hole 742a. As a result, the protrusion 773a protruding from the right side surface of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is arranged above the rotating body 800.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (b), the rotating member 741 is rotated by approximately 90 degrees, and the protrusion 741
When a is positioned below the axis of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742b of the arm member 742
Is displaced to the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 97 (b)) of the shaft hole 742a with the displacement of the protrusion 741a.

Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the opposite end of the first sliding groove 742b is arranged on the upper side in the gravity direction (upper side of FIG. 97B) of the shaft hole 742a. As a result, the protrusion 773a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is placed at a position where it is rotationally displaced toward the back surface side of the rotating body 800. ..

In this case, the position of the center of gravity of the lid member 770 is arranged on the back surface side of the rotation axis of the lid member 770 (the center position of the rotating body 800 formed in a columnar shape). Therefore, due to the load of the lid member 770, a rotational force is applied in the direction of displacing the lid member 770 from the closed state to the open state. As described above, the rotating member 741 is provided with the one-way clutch OW1 so that the outer ring can rotate in advance of the inner ring. Therefore, the drive motor KM is configured by the load of the lid member 770.
The drive of 4 can be stopped and the lid member 770 can be continuously rotated.

As shown in FIG. 97 (c), when the lid member 770 is displaced to the back surface side of the rotating body, the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is stopped at a position rotated by approximately 90 degrees from the position in the intermediate state.
That is, it is the leftmost end (left side in FIG. 97) of the displacement region of the protrusion 741a. Therefore, the rotation of the arm member 742 is restricted, and the rotation of the lid member 770 is stopped.

That is, the displacement of the lid member 770 from the closed state to the open state is performed by the operation of driving the drive motor KM4 to displace it to the intermediate state and the operation of loading and dropping the lid member 770.

As a result, when the lid member 770 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the drive motor KM
Since the section for driving 4 can be halved from the entire section, the energy consumption of the drive motor KM4 can be reduced.

Further, the displacement speed from the closed state to the intermediate state can be set to follow the rotational speed of the drive motor KM4, and the displacement speed from the intermediate state to the open state can be set to follow the load of the lid member 770. The displacement speed from the closed state to the open state can be changed in two stages. Therefore, since the displacement speed of the lid member 770 can be changed without changing the displacement speed of the drive motor KM4, it is not necessary to complicate the control. As a result, control can be simplified and control failure can be suppressed.

The displacement section in which the lid member 770 follows the rotation speed of the drive motor KM4 is referred to as a first section.
The displacement section in which the lid member 770 follows the load of the lid member 770 is referred to as a second section, and in the first section, D is used.
The reference numeral of K1 will be described by adding the reference numeral of DK2 to the second section.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the displacement of the lid member 770 when displaced from the open state to the closed state will be described.

As described above, in the open state, the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is the arm member 742.
The lid member 77 is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 98 (a)) of the shaft hole 742a of the above.
It is assumed that the curved lid portion 771 of 0 is arranged on the back surface side of the rotating body 800.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), the rotating member 741 is rotated by approximately 90 degrees, and the protrusion 741
When a is positioned above the axis of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742b of the arm member 742 is placed.
Is displaced to the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 98B) of the shaft hole 742a with the displacement of the protrusion 741a.

Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the opposite end of the first sliding groove 742b is arranged on the upper side in the gravity direction (upper side of FIG. 98B) of the shaft hole 742a. As a result, the protrusion 773a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is rotationally displaced upward by approximately 45 degrees from the state where the curved lid portion 771 is positioned on the back surface side of the rotating body 800. It is said that it is placed in the position where it was made.

Further, the lid member 770 displaced to the closed position (position in FIG. 97 (a)) is arranged in the game area (front side of the game board 13) and is located in the open position (FIG. 97 (c)). The lid member 770 displaced to the position of) is arranged outside the area of the game area (on the back side of the game board 13). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the game area from colliding with the rotating body 800 and rotating the rotating body 800. In particular, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the rotating body 800 is provided with an opening / closing member 870 that is displaced toward the game area side, so that the gaming machine flowing down the gaming area collides with the opening / closing member 870. It is possible to prevent the opening / closing member 870 from being opened (overhanging).

Further, since the lid member 770 is arranged outside the area of the game area in the open position, the displacement of the lid member 770 to the open position provides a space for the opening / closing member 870 to project to the game area. Can be secured. Therefore, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 can be brought closer to the game area side by that amount, and the opening / closing member 870 can be easily visually recognized by the player.

Further, the lid member 770 is rotatably formed around an axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the rotating body 800, and is formed in a curved plate shape along the outer surface of the rotating body 800, so that it is in a closed state. The space required for displacement between the position (embossed position) and the open position (retracted position) can be suppressed, and therefore the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly. Further, by forming the lid member 770 in a curved shape in this way, the game ball flowing down the game area can be formed.
It can be prevented from being stopped on the lid member 770 arranged in the closed position, and can be smoothly flowed down.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (c), the rotating member 741 is further rotated by approximately 90 degrees, and the protrusion 7 is further rotated.
When 1a is displaced to the right side of the axis of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742 of the arm member 742 is displaced.
b is displaced to the back surface side (right side of FIG. 98 (c)) of the shaft hole 742a with the displacement of the protrusion 741a.

Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the opposite end of the first sliding groove 742b is arranged on the front side (left side of FIG. 98C) with respect to the shaft hole 742a. As a result, the protrusion 773a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is placed above the rotating body 800.

In this case, the position of the center of gravity of the lid member 770 is displaced to the front side of the rotation axis of the lid member 770 with the displacement of the lid member 770. Therefore, the lid member 77 is in the middle of the closed state from the intermediate state.
Due to the load of 0, a rotational force is applied in the direction of displacing the lid member 770 from the open state to the closed state. Therefore, even when the drive of the drive motor KM4 is stopped, the lid member 770 can be continuously rotated by the load of the lid member 770.

Therefore, the lid member 770 can be closed by the load of the lid member 770.
The lid member 770 can be reliably closed.

Here, if the rotational displacement of the lid member 770 is displaced only by the drive motor KM4, there is a possibility that the lid member 770 cannot be stopped at a normal position when the drive stop operation of the drive motor KM4 is deviated. Further, as in the present embodiment, when the rotation member 741 has one rotation direction and the stop operation of the drive motor KM4 is delayed, one rotation is required to return to the normal position.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the position where the lid member 770 is stopped can be mechanically stopped by using the load of the lid member 770, so that it is possible to suppress the stop position of the lid member 770 from shifting. can.

Here, a gaming machine including a driving means for generating a driving force, a displacement member displaced by the driving force of the driving force, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force to the displacement member is known. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the transmission state of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is always constant, so that when the driving means is driven at a constant driving speed, the displacement member is also constant. It is displaced at a speed, and it is not possible to give a change to the displacement mode of such a displacement member. Therefore, there is a problem that the effect of the effect due to the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient.

Although the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed by increasing or decreasing the drive speed of the drive means, the displacement speed in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member is different from the displacement speed in other sections. In order to obtain the speed, it is necessary to arrange a sensor device that detects the position of the displacement member and control to increase or decrease the output of the drive means according to the detection result of the sensor device.
It leads to an increase in product cost and control cost. In addition, the structure and control become complicated, resulting in a decrease in reliability.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the transmission means (rotating member 741 and arm member 742) is
When the one-way clutch OW1 is provided and the inner ring (first member) of the one-way clutch OW1 is displaced in one direction with respect to the outer ring (second member) of the one-way clutch OW1, the roller engages with the inner ring and the outer ring. When the driving force is transmitted and the inner ring is displaced in the other direction with respect to the outer ring, the roller is disengaged from the inner ring and the outer ring, the transmission of the driving force is cut off, and the lid member. In the second section DK2 (predetermined section) of the displacement section of the 770 (displacement member), the outer ring is displaced in one direction with respect to the inner ring, so that the second section is irrespective of the driving state of the rotating member 741. The displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the other sections. Therefore, it is possible to give a change to the lid member 770 and enhance the effect of the displacement of the lid member 770.

Further, regardless of the drive state of the drive motor KM4, the outer ring can be preceded by the inner ring in one direction. Therefore, for example, the drive motor KM4 can be driven at a constant drive speed in the entire section of the displacement section of the lid member 770. It can be driven, and it is not necessary to increase or decrease the drive speed of the drive motor KM4 in the middle of the displacement section of the lid member 770 (that is, depending on whether it is the first section DK1 or the second section DK2). As a result, the control can be simplified, the control cost can be reduced, and the reliability of the operation can be improved. Alternatively, in the second section DK2, the operation of the driving means can be stopped, and in this case, energy consumption can be suppressed.

Further, in the driving state in which the inner ring is displaced in the other direction with respect to the outer ring, the roller is disengaged and the transmission of the driving force is cut off, so that the displacement member is in the stopped state (driven state). The driving force of the driving means (driving motor KM4) in such a driving state can be applied to the rotating body 8
It can be used as a driving force for driving 00. That is, the two members, the lid member 770 and the rotating body 800, can be displaced by switching the drive direction of the drive means (drive motor KM4).

Further, the lid member 770 is rotatably formed and its center of gravity is arranged at a position eccentric from the center of rotation. In the second section DK2, the weight of the lid member 770 displaces the outer ring in one direction. Since it is formed so as to be able to act in the direction, the outer ring can be displaced in advance in one direction with respect to the inner ring by utilizing the weight of the lid member 770. That is, the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the second section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the section of the first section DK1. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the lid member 770 and enhance the effect of the displacement of the displacement member.

Further, the transmission of the driving force is performed by the main body 741 to which the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is attached.
Since it is performed by the rotating member 741 (crank member) having the protrusion 741a (pin portion) protruding from b and its main body portion 741b and displaced from the rotation center of the main body portion 741c, and the arm member 742. The rotating member 741 is rotated by the outer ring, and the protrusion 741a
Is slid along the first sliding groove 742b, so that the other end side (second sliding groove 742c side) of the rotating member 741 can be reciprocated. In this case, the other end side of the arm member 742 can reciprocate the lid member 770 between the open position and the closed position as the lid member 770 reciprocates. That is, the displacement direction of the lid member 770 can be switched without switching the drive direction of the drive motor KM4.

Further, in this case, since the section of the second section DK can be formed in both reciprocating movements, when the lid member 770 is reciprocated, even when it is displaced in any direction, it starts from the middle of the displacement. The displacement speed of the lid member 770 can be increased, and as a result, the displacement mode of the lid member 770 can be changed, and the effect of the displacement of the lid member can be enhanced.

Next, the displacement of the rotation restricting member 780 will be described with reference to FIG. 99. FIG. 99 (a)
) Is a side view of the decorative unit 750 in the closed state, and FIG. 99 (b) is a side view of the decorative unit 750 in the open state. Note that FIGS. 99 (a) and 99 (b) show a transparent view of the left side surface plate 765 of the box member 760.

As shown in FIG. 99A, when the lid member 770 is in the closed state, the rotation restricting member 780 is in a state where the protrusion 782 side is pushed downward by the urging force of the urging spring SP5.
In FIG. 99A, the state is rotated clockwise about the axis of the shaft hole 781).

Therefore, the distance dimension L4 from the rotation axis of the rotating body 800 to the outside of the engaging protrusion 882 is smaller than the distance dimension L5 from the rotating shaft of the rotating body 800 to the tip of the protrusion 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 (L4). <L5).

Therefore, the rotating body 800 and the rotation restricting member 780 are not engaged with each other, and the rotating body 800 is made rotatable.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 99B, when the lid member 770 is in the open state, the rotation restricting member 780 has a lid member 770 in which the contact surface 783 is displaced to the back surface side of the rotating body 800. The contact surface 783 is in contact with the contact surface and is pushed downward (in FIG. 99 (b), the contact surface is rotated counterclockwise around the axis of the shaft hole 781).

Therefore, the distance dimension L4 from the rotation axis of the rotating body 800 to the outside of the engaging protrusion 882 is larger than the distance dimension L6 from the rotating shaft of the rotating body 800 to the tip of the protrusion 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 (L6). <L4).

As a result, in the rotating body 800 in which the engaging protrusion 882 of the left rotating portion 880 is arranged at the lowermost position in the direction of gravity, the protrusion 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 can be inserted inside the engaging protrusion 882. That is, since the rotating body 800 and the rotation restricting member 780 are engaged with each other, the rotating body 8
00 is considered non-rotatable. In the present embodiment, the position where the rotating body 800 cannot be rotated (the position where the protrusion 782 is inserted inside the engaging protrusion 882) is the position where the opening / closing member 870 of the rotating body 800, which will be described later, is in the open state. Is set to.

That is, in the rotation regulating member 780 (rotation regulating means) that regulates the rotation of the rotating body 800, the opening / closing member 870 (displacement member) is displaced to the open position (second position), and the other side of the displacement member is stretched in the game area. Since the rotation of the rotating body 800 is restricted when it is taken out, the rotating body 800 is rotated with the opening / closing member 870 overhanging, and the opening / closing member 87 is attached to another member located on the rotation locus.
It is possible to suppress the interference of 0. Further, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the rotating body 800 due to the load acting when the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

Here, a state in which the first member and the second member formed so as to be displaceable are provided, and the first member is arranged at an lining position that invisiblely covers at least a part of the second member and a lining position thereof. There is known a gaming machine formed so as to be displaceable from a retracted position that reduces an area that invisiblely covers the second member. According to this gaming machine, the second member is exposed by arranging the first member in the lining position and displacing the first member to the retracted position from the state where the second member is invisible to the player. It is possible to make the player visually recognize it.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the second member is formed so as to be displaceable, there is a possibility that the second member will be displaced when the second member is exposed. Therefore, there is a problem that the player cannot visually recognize the second member in an appropriate state, and the effect of the effect is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the displacement of the rotating body 800 (second member) can be regulated when the lid member 770 (first member) is displaced to the open position (retracted position). Since it is formed, the rotating body 800 can be visually recognized by the player in an appropriate state, and the effect of production can be ensured. That is, when the lid member 770 is displaced to the open position to expose the rotating body 800, the displacement of the lid member 770 to the open position, which must be performed for the effect, is rotated. It is used as a means to regulate the displacement of the body 800. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide or control a mechanism for regulating the displacement of the rotating body 800, and the amount is increased accordingly.
The structure can be simplified.

Further, as will be described later, the shape of the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 is formed asymmetrically from the center of rotation (see FIG. 101). Therefore, the rotating body 800 is rotatably formed and its center of gravity is eccentric from the center of rotation, so that the degree of freedom in designing the rotating body 800 can be increased. That is, it is not necessary for the rotating body 800 to have a shape in which the center of gravity of the rotating body 800 is located at the center of rotation, and a shape asymmetrical with respect to the rotation axis can be adopted, so that the effect of the rotating body 800 can be enhanced. On the other hand, when the position of the center of gravity of the rotating body 800 is eccentric in this way, the rotating body 800 is displaced to the closed position by the gravity of the rotating body 800 due to rotation (may be rotated) around the center of rotation. A configuration in which the lid member 770 is formed so that the displacement of the rotating body 800 can be regulated is particularly effective, whereby the rotating body 800 can be visually recognized by the player in an appropriate state, and the effect of effect can be ensured.

The rotating body 800 may be formed symmetrically with respect to the axis. In this case, the rotating body 8
By forming 00 from two or more members having different specific gravities, the position of the center of gravity thereof can be arranged at a position different from the rotation axis. For example, by forming one half surface from a metal material and the other half surface from a flexible material, the center of gravity can be generally positioned on the metal material side having a larger specific gravity than the flexible material.

Next, the configuration of the rotating body 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 102. Figure 1
00 (a) is a front view of the rotating body 800, FIG. 100 (b) is a side view of the rotating body 800 in the direction of arrow Cb of FIG. 100 (a), and FIG. 100 (c) is a view. It is a side view of the rotating body 800 in the direction view of the arrow Cc of 100 (a). FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotating body 800, and FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rotating body 800.

As shown in FIGS. 100 to 102, the rotating body 800 is formed into a columnar shape by combining a plurality of members. The rotating body 800 has a base plate 810 arranged on a shaft portion, and a first display unit 830, a second display unit 840, a third display unit 850, and a fourth display unit 830 arranged so as to surround the base plate 810 and combined in an annular shape. A display unit 860, a right-handed rotating unit 89 disposed at one end in the axial direction, a left-handed rotating unit 880 disposed at the other end in the axial direction, and an opening / closing member arranged inside the first display unit 830. It is formed mainly with 870.

The base plate 810 has a substantially L-shaped cross section in the axial direction and is formed in a shape extending in the axial direction. The base plate 810 is formed to include a right end portion 811 and a left end portion 812 that project outward from both left and right ends.

The right end portion 811 is formed so as to project in an annular shape from the right side of the base plate 810 when viewed from the front (right side in FIG. 100A). The right end portion 811 is formed mainly provided with a tip portion 811a that partially protrudes from the protruding tip of the right end portion 811 and a communication hole 811b that is an inner portion of the annular shape.

The tip portion 811a is further projected in the axial direction from the tip portion of the right end portion 811 and is further projected.
The protruding region in the right side view (direction view in FIG. 100 (c)) is the engaging portion 7 of the right side plate 764.
It is set smaller than the area inside 64e. The tip portion 811a is inserted inside the engaging portion 764e of the right side surface plate 764 as described above. As a result, the base plate 810 and the right side surface plate 764 (cover member 770) are brought into an engaged state. As a result, the base plate 810 can be stopped with respect to the rotational displacement of each display surface (first display unit 830, second display unit 840, third display unit 850, and fourth display unit 860) described later.

The communication hole 811b is an opening through which wiring (not shown) connected to the LED board 820, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed through the side surface on the right side of the front view of the base plate 810. This makes it possible to insert the wiring.

The left end portion 812 is formed so as to project in an annular shape from the left side of the base plate 810 when viewed from the front (left side in FIG. 100A). The left end portion 812 is a tip portion 8 protruding from the lower semicircle of the left end portion 812.
It is mainly provided with 12a and a communication hole 812b in the inner portion of the annular shape.

The tip portion 812a is further projected in the axial direction from the tip portion of the left end portion 812, and is further projected.
The protruding shape in the left side view (direction view in FIG. 100 (b)) is an annular lower semicircle.

The communication hole 812b is a path for discharging the ball thrown into the inside of the rotating body 800 by the opening / closing member 870 described later to the outside of the rotating body 800. The inner diameter of the communication hole 812b is set to be larger than that of the sphere, and is set to be substantially the same as the through hole 733a formed in the gear cover 733.

Further, the communication hole 812b is an opening connected to the through hole 733a of the gear cover 733, and the protruding distance of the left end portion 812 is set to the distance of contact with the through hole 733a. Further, a protrusion 733b is formed on the upper hemisphere of the end surface of the through hole 733a. The protrusion distance of the protrusion 733b is set to be substantially the same as the protrusion distance of the tip portion 812a. As a result, the base plate 810 and the gear cover 733 (left side transmission member 730) are brought into an engaged state. As a result, the base plate 810 can be stopped with respect to the rotational displacement of each display surface (first display unit 830, second display unit 840, third display unit 850, and fourth display unit 860) described later.

A reverse rotation prevention member 813 is arranged on the bottom surface of the base plate 810 in a rotatable state. The reverse rotation prevention member 813 is formed in a substantially circular shape when viewed from above, and has a protrusion 813a inclined toward one end.
Is formed. Further, the reverse rotation prevention member 813 is placed between the urging spring SP6 and the base plate 810.
Is arranged so that the protrusion 813a is always on the left side when viewed from the front (left side in FIG. 100 (a)).
It is said that it is in a state of being urged.

The right-handed rotating portion 890 is formed in the shape of a plate having a predetermined thickness and is formed in an annular shape in a side view. The right-handed rotating portion 890 is formed so that the inner diameter inside the annulus is larger than the size of the right end portion 811 of the base plate 810. As a result, the right end portion 811 of the base plate 810 is inside the right rotation portion 890.
Can be inserted. Further, the right-handed rotating portion 890 has a shaft hole 891 penetrating in the left-right direction and the shaft hole 8 thereof.
It is mainly provided with a sliding groove 892 that is curved and opened around 91.

The shaft hole 891 is a hole into which the shaft portion 872 of the opening / closing member 870 described later is inserted, and the shaft portion 87 is inserted.
It is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of 2. As a result, it is possible to prevent the shaft portion 872 of the opening / closing member 870 from being displaced with respect to the first display portion 830.

The sliding groove 892 is formed in a curved shape centered on the shaft hole 891, and its radius is set to be the same as the separation distance to the protrusion 871 and the shaft portion 872 of the opening / closing member 870. As a result, by inserting the protrusion 871 of the opening / closing member 870 into the sliding groove 892, the protrusion 871 can be slid inside the sliding groove 892 when the opening / closing member 870 is displaced.

The counterclockwise rotation portion 880 is formed in the shape of a plate having a predetermined thickness and is formed in an annular shape in a side view. The counterclockwise rotation portion 880 is formed so that the inner diameter inside the annulus is larger than the size of the left end portion 812 of the base plate 810. As a result, the left end portion 81 of the base plate 810 is inside the counterclockwise rotating portion 880.
2 can be inserted. Further, the counterclockwise rotating portion 880 mainly includes a wall portion 881 protruding from the inner edge portion in an annular shape, an engaging protrusion 882 protruding from the side wall, and a locking portion 883 in which inclined surfaces are continuously arranged on the inner edge portion. Formed in preparation.

The wall portion 881 is formed so as to project to the left side of the front view of the rotating body 800. The wall portion 881 has a gear tooth surface 881a engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the protruding tip, and a communication hole 881b that opens inward.
To prepare for. The tooth surface 881a is meshed with the transmission gear 881d as described above. As a result, the driving force of the driving motor KM4 can be transmitted to the rotating body 800.

The communication hole 881b is an opening that communicates the internal space and the external space of the rotating body 800, and the ball thrown into the rotating body 800 can be discharged by opening the opening / closing member 870 described later.

As described above, the engaging protrusion 882 is a protrusion to which the rotation restricting member 780 is engaged. The engaging protrusion 882 is formed so as to project from the side surface on the left side of the front view of the counterclockwise rotating portion 880. Further, two engaging protrusions 882 are formed at positions separated by a predetermined distance, and a protrusion 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 is formed so as to be insertable between them.

The cross section of the locking portion 883 is formed in a serrated shape. The counterclockwise rotation unit 880 is a base plate 810.
When arranged in, the tip of the protrusion 813a of the reverse rotation prevention member 813 described above is in contact with the locking portion 883. As a result, when a rotational force that rotates the left-handed rotating portion 880 in one direction acts, the protrusion 813a is slid along the inclined surface of the locking portion 883 to slide the left-handed rotating portion 880.
However, when a rotational force that rotates the left rotating portion 880 in the other direction acts, the surface of the locking portion 883 is caught by the protrusion 813a and the rotation is suppressed.

As a result, it is possible to regulate that the rotating body 800 is rotated in the direction opposite to the direction of rotation by the rotational driving force of the drive motor KM4. Therefore, for example, the position of the center of gravity of the rotating body 800 is biased or the game ball. It is possible to prevent the rotating body from rotating in the reverse direction due to a collision or the like.

Each of the first display unit 830 to the fourth display unit 860 is formed in the same curved shape, and by connecting the end faces of each other, it can be formed into one annular shape. Further, the inner diameters of the first display unit 830 to the fourth display unit 860 formed into one ring are set to be substantially the same as the outer diameters of the left and right rotating units 880 and 890. As a result, each display unit 830 to 860 is converted to the left and right rotating units 880 and 89.
By disposing it at 0, the first display unit 830 to the fourth display unit 860 can be formed into one columnar shape.

In addition, characters and patterns are drawn on the first display unit 830 to the fourth display unit 860, respectively, and as described above, the driving force is transmitted from the left rotation unit 880 to rotate the characters. And patterns can be visually recognized by the player.

The first display portion 830 is mainly provided with an opening 831 opened on the curved surface thereof and a bearing portion 832 which is open to the shaft side and is formed so as to project in a U shape.

The opening 831 is an opening in which an opening / closing member 870, which will be described later, is arranged, and is an opening / closing member 870.
It is formed in an opening with an inner diameter that is substantially the same as the outer shape of. The bearing portion 832 is formed in a size such that the shaft portion 872 of the opening / closing member 870 can be inserted into the open U-shaped portion. Therefore, by inserting the opening / closing member 870 into the opening 831 and inserting the shaft portion 872 of the opening / closing member 870 into the bearing portion 832, the opening / closing member 870 can be rotationally displaced with respect to the first display portion 830. The displacement mode of the opening / closing member 870 will be described later.

The LED board 820 is supplied with electric power, so that the LEDs mounted on the LED board 820 are mounted on the LED board 820.
The light can be emitted. Further, the LED board 820 is attached to the back surface side of the base plate 810.

Next, opening and closing of the opening / closing member 870 will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 (a)
) Is a side view of the rotating body 800 in the closed state of the opening / closing member 870. FIG. 103 (b)
Is a side view of the rotating body 800 in the open state of the opening / closing member 870. In FIG. 103, when the opening / closing member 870 overlaps with another member, its outer diameter is shown by a chain line.

Further, the closed state of the opening / closing member 870 means that the outer peripheral surface of the opening / closing member 870 is the first display unit 830.
It is in a state of being arranged substantially parallel to the outer peripheral surface of. On the other hand, the open state of the opening / closing member 870 is a state in which the outer peripheral surface of the opening / closing member 870 is arranged so as to intersect the outer peripheral surface of the first display unit 830.

As shown in FIG. 103A, in the rotating body 800 in the closed state of the opening / closing member 870, the protrusion 871 of the opening / closing member 870 is on one end side of the sliding groove 892 of the right rotating portion 890 (FIG. 103A).
Is located on the lower side of the shaft portion 872).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 103 (b), the rotating body 800 in the open state of the opening / closing member 870
The protrusion 871 of the opening / closing member 870 is located on the other end side of the sliding groove 892 of the right-handed rotating portion 890. That is, the displacement of the opening / closing member 870 is performed by the protrusion 871 sliding inside the sliding groove 892 of the right-handed rotating portion 890.

Next, the displacement of the protrusion 871 will be described with reference to FIG. 104. 104 (a) and 104 (b) are side views of the decorative unit 750. In addition, FIG. 104 (a) and FIG. 104 (
In b), the right side surface plate 764 of the box member 760 is shown in a transparent state.

Further, in FIG. 104 (a), a state in which the decorative unit 750 is in the closed state and the opening / closing member 870 is in the closed state is shown. FIG. 104 (b) shows a state in which the decorative unit 750 is in the open state and the opening / closing member 870 is in the open state.

As shown in FIG. 104 (a), when the decorative unit 750 is closed, the right lid portion 7
The outer edge of 73 is in contact with the protrusion 871. When the decorative unit 750 is closed, the outer diameter L7 from the rotation axis on the lower half surface of the right lid portion 773 is smaller than the distance L8 from the axis of the right rotation portion 890 to one end side of the sliding groove 892 (L7). <L8).

Further, the difference in dimensions between L7 and L8 is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the protrusion 871. Therefore,
When the outer edge of the right lid 773 is in contact with the protrusion 871, the protrusion 871 is displaced toward one end of the sliding groove 892. As a result, the opening / closing member 870 is closed. That is, when the decorative unit 750 is closed, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing member 870 from being displaced to the open state.

As shown in FIG. 104 (b), when the decorative unit 750 is in the open state, the right lid portion 7
With the displacement of 73, the recess 773b formed in the outer edge portion is displaced. In this case, recess 773
The protrusion 871 is inserted inside b. As a result, the protrusion 871 can displace the sliding groove 892 to the other side. As a result, the opening / closing member 870 is opened by the urging force of the urging spring SP7 arranged between the shaft portion 872 and the first display portion 830.

As described above, the displacement of the opening / closing member 870 to the open state can be performed according to the displacement of the lid member 770. Therefore, since it is not necessary to dispose the drive source for driving the opening / closing member 870 on the rotating body 800, the rotating body 800 can be formed small.

Further, the drive motor KM4 for displacing the opening / closing member 870 can also be used as a driving means for displacing the lid member 770. In this case, when the opening / closing member 870 and the lid member 770 are displaced by the driving force of different driving means, the opening / closing member 870 and the lid member 770 may interfere with each other if a control failure occurs. And the lid member 770 can be mechanically connected to synchronize their displacements, so that the opening / closing member 870 and the lid member 770 can be synchronized.
Can be suppressed from interfering with.

As shown in FIG. 104 (b), when the opening / closing member 870 is opened, the tip end side of the rotation is arranged above the winning opening 761a of the box member 760. As a result, the ball thrown from the throwing portion 711c of the ball cradle 710, which will be described later, can be dropped onto the upper surface of the opening / closing member 870.

In this case, the rotation tip side of the opening / closing member 870 is arranged above the shaft portion 872. Therefore, the sphere that falls on the upper surface can be rolled toward the inside of the rotating body 800. Rotating body 80
The game ball that is rolled inward of 0 is rolled on the upper surface of the base plate 810 arranged inside the rotating body 800. Further, since the base plate 810 is in a state of being inclined downward toward the left end portion 812 side, the sphere rolled on the upper surface of the base plate 810 is rolled toward the left end portion 812 side and rotated from the inside thereof. It can be discharged to the outside of the body 800. That is, the inside of the rotating body 800 can be used as a ball throwing path.

Further, as described above, the rotating body 800 is provided with the rotation restricting member 780 that regulates the rotation of the rotating body 800, so that the lid member 770 is displaced to the open position to expose the rotating body 800. When performing the effect, the effect of the effect can be further enhanced by further displacing the opening / closing member 870. On the other hand, the rotating body 800 may rotate (rotate). Therefore, it is particularly effective to configure the lid member 770 displaced to the open position so that the displacement of the rotating body 800 can be regulated, whereby the rotating body 800 can be visually recognized by the player in an appropriate state. And the production effect can be secured.

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a rotating member which is rotatably formed and whose outer surface around a rotation axis is arranged so as to be visible to a player. According to this gaming machine, the rotating member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the display (design) on the outer peripheral surface thereof can be visually recognized by the player while rotating the rotating member or stopping the rotating member. However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the rotation member is insufficiently utilized because it is only used as a member for holding a display for the player to visually recognize on the outer surface thereof. .. That is, the rotating member is formed to be relatively large because it is necessary to maintain a display that can be visually recognized by the player. Therefore, while the occupied space is large, the part other than the outer surface is not utilized.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the rotating body 800 (rotating member) communicates the internal space formed inside the rotating body 800 to the outside, and also has an opening 831 and a communication hole 881b formed so that the game ball can pass through. (Communication port) is provided, so that the game ball flowing down the game area can flow into or out of the internal space through the opening 831 and the communication hole 881b. Therefore, the internal space of the rotating body 800, which is regarded as a dead space, can function as a storage space or a throwing passage for the game ball, and the rotating body 800 can be utilized accordingly.

Further, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since it is only possible to form an effect mode in which the display of the outer peripheral surface is visually recognized by the player when the rotating member is stopped, there is little change in the effect mode and the effect is insufficient. There was a problem that it was.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the opening / closing member 870 (displacement member) displaceably arranged on the outer surface of the rotating body 800 (rotating member) is provided, the outer surface is formed as the rotating body 800 rotates or stops. In addition to the effect mode in which the display of the above is visually recognized by the player, an effect mode in which the opening / closing member 870 is displaced can be formed, so that the effect mode can be changed accordingly and the effect effect can be enhanced.

When the lid member 770 (displacement member) is displaced to the closed position (first position), the rotating body 800 (displacement member)
Since a part of the outer surface of the rotating member) is formed by the opening / closing member 870, the outer shape of the rotating body 800 can be reduced, and the space required for the rotating body 800 to rotate can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 870 is displaced to the open position (second position), the opening / closing member 870 is projected outward in the radial direction of the rotating body 800, so that the displacement of the opening / closing member 870 can be easily visually recognized by the player. It can be done and the effect of production can be enhanced. Further, the rotating body 800 is rotated with the opening / closing member 870 arranged at the closed position, and the opening / closing member 870 is arranged (displaced) at the open position when the rotation is stopped, so that the rotating body 800 can be used as an outer surface. The portion (opening / closing member 870) that has been visually recognized can form a mode in which the rotating body 800 protrudes outward in the radial direction, and the interest can be enhanced.

Further, an LED board 820 that emits light to the base plate 810 is arranged in the internal space of the rotating body 800. Therefore, when the opening / closing member 870 is set to the open position, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 is opened and the internal space is communicated with the outside, so that the light emitted from the LED board 820 can be emitted to the outside. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 870 is placed in the closed position, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 is closed, and the light emitted from the LED board 820 can be blocked from being emitted to the outside. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Here, in order to make the rotating body 800 rotatable and to displace the opening / closing member 870 on the rotating body 800, a drive means is required for each of the rotating body 800 and the opening / closing member 870, and the product cost. Is bulky. Further, if the driving means for displacing the opening / closing member 870 is mounted on the rotating body 800, the weight of the rotating body 800 increases, so that it becomes difficult to smoothly start or stop the rotation of the rotating body 800.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the opening / closing member 870 is displaced according to the displacement of the lid member 770, and the lid member 770 and the rotating body 800 are displaced by the same drive motor KM4. The rotating body 800 can be rotated and the opening / closing member 870 can be displaced by using the KM4 in combination. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced. Further, since it is not necessary to mount the driving means for displacing the opening / closing member on the rotating body 800, the weight of the rotating body 800 can be reduced, and the rotation of the rotating body 800 can be smoothly started or stopped.

Further, since the opening 831 (first communication port) and the communication hole 881b (second communication port) are formed at different positions, the opening 831 is used as an inflow port for the game ball to flow into the internal space from the outside, and the communication hole 881b is used. Can be used as an outlet for the game ball to flow out from the internal space to the outside. That is,
Even if the rotating body 800 (rotating member) is not rotated (while being kept in a stopped state), the rotating body 8
00 can be used as a throwing passage for a game ball.

Further, since the opening 831 is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 and the communication hole 881b is formed on the axial end surface of the rotating body 800, the gaming ball into the internal space of the rotating body 800 (rotating member) can be formed. The inflow can be easily seen by the player, and the game ball can be discharged while the rotating body 800 is kept in the stopped state.

That is, where the outer surface of the rotating body 800 is arranged so as to be visible to the player, the rotating body 800 has an outer surface thereof.
Since the opening 831 (inflow port) is formed, the inflow of the game ball can be easily visually recognized by the player. On the other hand, when the communication hole 881b is formed on the outer surface of the rotating body 800, when the rotating body 800 is arranged at the rotation position where the communication hole 881b is above, the game ball cannot flow out from the internal space. Since the communication hole 881b (outlet) is formed on the end face of the rotating body 800 in the rotation axis direction, it is possible to form a state in which the game ball can flow out from the internal space regardless of the rotation position of the rotating body 800.

Further, inside the opening 831 (first communication port), a displaceable opening / closing member 870 (displacement member)
When the opening / closing member 870 is displaced to the closed position (first position), the opening 831 is shielded by the opening / closing member 870, and when the opening / closing member 870 is displaced to the open position (second position).
Since the opening 831 is opened, the inflow of the game ball through the opening 831 can be switched between a shielded state and an allowable state.

Further, one side of the opening / closing member 870 (displacement member) is rotatably supported by the rotating body 800 (rotating member), and when the opening / closing member 870 is displaced to the open position (second position), the side opposite to the one side. Since the other side is projected to the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received by the upper surface of the opening / closing member 870. Therefore, when the opening 831 is formed as an inflow port,
A game ball flowing down the game area can be easily flowed into the internal space of the rotating body 800 by using the opening / closing member 870.

In addition, the game ball flowing down the game area can be easily stopped on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 870. Therefore, for example, when the inflow port of the game ball is formed in the rotating body 800, the game ball flowing down the game area can be easily flowed into the inflow port by using the opening / closing member 870. In this case, if the opening / closing member 870 receives the game ball flowing down the game area, the rotating body 800 may be rotated due to the load acting at that time or the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member. .. Therefore, the lid member 770 displaced to the open position is the rotation restricting member 78.
A configuration in which the displacement of the rotating body 800 is regulateably formed by displacing 0 is particularly effective, and this makes it easy to maintain a state in which the opening / closing member 870 is projected to a predetermined position in the game area.

The shaft portion 872 of the opening / closing member 870 is arranged on the rotation direction side of the rotating body 800. In other words, one side of the opening / closing member 870 (displacement member) is located on the front side in the rotation direction of the rotating body 800 (rotating member) with respect to the other side. Therefore, when the rotating body 800 is rotated, even if the opening / closing member 870 interferes with the member arranged around the rotating member, the force generated by the interference closes the opening / closing member 870 (displacement to the closed position). Can act in the direction of).
That is, when the rotating body 800 rotates, the opening / closing member 870 interferes with other members and overhangs (second).
It is possible to suppress the displacement to the position). Further, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing member 870 from engaging with other members and hindering the rotation of the rotating body 800.

Further, the base plate 810 (fixing member) arranged in the internal space of the rotating body 800 is the rotating body 8.
Since 00 is non-rotating with respect to the box member 760 (base member) that is rotatably arranged,
By rolling the game ball that has flowed into the internal space of the rotating body 800 from the opening 831 toward the communication hole 881b on the upper surface of the base plate 810, the game ball rampages in the internal space as the rotating body 800 rotates. Alternatively, it is possible to prevent the game ball from rolling and staying in the internal space.

As described above, since the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 870 is regulated by the displacement of the lid member 770, the opening / closing member 870 displaced to the open state (second position) interferes with the members around the rotating body 800. Can be suppressed.

As described above, the rotating body 800 has a communication hole 811b through which the wiring to the LED board 820 attached to the back surface side of the base plate 810 is inserted, and the rotating body 80 in which the communication hole 881b is formed.
It is formed on the end face opposite to the end face of 0. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space that can be used for each of the communication hole 881b and the communication hole 811b.

That is, when electrical wiring is made to the LED board arranged inside the rotating body 800, the rotating body 8 is used.
When the wiring is inserted from the outer peripheral surface of 00, the wiring is entangled by the rotation of the rotating body 800. Therefore, it is preferable to wire from the axial end surface of the rotating body. If it forms an opening through which the game ball flows out, it becomes difficult to secure a space for inserting the wiring.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the inlet of the game ball of the rotating body 800 can be the outer peripheral surface thereof, one of the axial end faces of the rotating body 800 is used as the outlet of the game ball, and the other is the insertion of wiring. Since it can be used as a mouth, it is easy to secure a space for inserting the wiring.

As a result, the game ball can be smoothly discharged through the communication hole 881b, and the wiring work to the opening of the electrical connection line (wiring to the LED board 820) can be easily performed. Further, since the communication hole 881b and the communication hole 811b can be separated as much as possible, it is possible to easily suppress the interference between the game ball rolling in the internal space of the rotating body 800 to the communication hole 881b and the electrical connection line.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106, the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotary unit 7
00 will be described. FIG. 105 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700, and FIG. 106 is a top view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the direction of arrow CVI of FIG. 105. In addition, in FIGS. 105 and 106, the lower displacement unit 40 in the retracted state
0 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700 are arranged at positions adjacent to each other in the left-right direction. Further, in the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700 in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 106), the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at a substantially central position in the front-rear direction of the ball cradle 710.

Next, with reference to FIG. 107, a mode of throwing a ball from the lower displacement unit 400 to the rotating unit 700 will be described. FIG. 107 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotary unit 700. Note that FIG. 107 shows a state in which the lower displacement unit 400 is arranged in the first overhanging state.

As shown in FIG. 107, the lower displacement unit 400 is in the first overhanging state, and the lower displacement member 4 is set.
When the ball receiving portion 467 arranged inside the 40 receives the ball inside (the state in which the ball receiving operation is performed), the ball receiving operation is performed, and as described above, the ball receiving portion 471 of the lower displacement member 440 receives the ball. The sphere arranged inside the portion 467 is discharged to the outside of the lower displacement member 440.

The ball discharged from the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 freely falls and falls on the ball cradle 710 of the rotating unit 700 arranged on the right side in the front view. As a result, the ball can be thrown from the lower displacement unit 400 to the rotating body 800.

Next, the configuration of the ball cradle 710 will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. 108 (a) is a top view of the ball cradle 710, FIG. 108 (b) is a front view of the ball cradle 710, and FIG. 108 (c) is the CVIIIc-CVIIIc of FIG. 108 (a). It is sectional drawing of the ball cradle 710 in line. FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective view of the ball cradle 710.

As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the ball cradle 710 has a dish receiving portion 711 formed in a box shape.
A solenoid 712 disposed inside the dish receiving portion 711, a displacement member 713 connected to the solenoid 712, and a cover member 714 covering the solenoid 712 are mainly provided.

The dish receiving portion 711 includes a bottom plate 711a forming a bottom surface, an upright portion 711b erected on the edge of the bottom plate 711a, a ball throwing portion 711c protruding from a part of the outer edge of the bottom plate 711a, and a ball throwing portion 711c. It is mainly provided with a shaft hole 711d formed through the erection portion 711b erected at the edge portion of the above.

The bottom plate 711a is formed in a shape that bends downward toward the throwing portion 711c, which will be described later. As a result, the ball thrown to the upper part of the bottom plate 711a is bent (inclined) to the thrown portion 711c.
Can be rolled to the side.

Further, the bottom plate 711a is formed of a flexible material and the lower surface of the bottom plate 711a (FIG. 10).
8 (c) The lower surface) is textured to form fine irregularities on the surface. This will result in
When the bottom plate 711a is molded, the ratio of heat shrinkage can be made different between the upper surface and the bottom surface to facilitate bending toward the bottom surface side. That is, it becomes difficult for a force to act on the bottom surface to which the textured surface is applied in a direction in which the bottom plate side is convexly curved when heat shrinks due to unevenness. On the other hand, since the upper surface side is formed on a flat surface, a pulling force in the horizontal direction acts when the heat shrinks, and the end portion tends to change upward (the upper surface side tends to form a concave curve). Therefore, when the sphere is thermally shrunk, it can be easily bent in a direction in which the sphere is likely to roll. As a result, it is possible to prevent the bottom plate 711a from becoming a defective product when it is molded.

The upright portion 711b is on the upper side in the direction of gravity from the outer edge portion of the ball throwing portion 711c (upper side in FIG. 108 (c)).
It is a wall part that is erected in. The standing distance of the standing portion 711b is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the sphere. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball thrown to the upper part of the bottom plate 711a from falling downward from the edge thereof. In this embodiment, the vertical dimension of the vertical portion 711b is approximately 1.5 of the diameter of the sphere.
Set to double.

Further, the upright portion 711b is a central upright portion 711b1 that divides the region of the bottom plate 711a into two.
Is formed by connecting to the erection portion 711b. The central standing portion 711b1 divides the upper region of the bottom plate 711a into a region where a ball is thrown on one side and a region where a solenoid 712, which will be described later, is arranged on the other side.

The ball throwing portion 711c is formed on the front side of the bottom plate 711a. Further, in the left-right direction (FIG. 108 (FIG. 108)
a) The position (in the left-right direction) is arranged on the right side (right side in FIG. 108) of the substantially center position of the bottom plate 711a. Further, the throwing portion 711c protrudes from the bottom plate and is therefore curved downward. As a result, the ball thrown from the bottom plate 711a can be dropped downward via the throwing portion 711c. A winning opening 761a of the lid member 770 is disposed below the ball throwing section 711c (see FIG. 106), and a ball falling from the throwing section 711c can be thrown into the winning opening 761a.

The shaft portion 713a of the displacement member 713, which will be described later, is inserted into the shaft hole 711d. This will result in
The displacement member 713 can be rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 711d.

When electric power is applied to the solenoid 712, the shaft inserted inside the solenoid 712 can be displaced by the piston. A transmission member 712a is attached to the shaft of the solenoid 712. The transmission member 712a is a member that transmits the driving force of the solenoid 712 to the displacement member 713 described later, and the communication hole 712a1 is formed through the tip thereof.

The displacement member 713 is formed in a C-shaped cross section, and a protrusion 71 projecting to the outside of the C-shape at one end thereof.
It is mainly provided with 3b and a shaft portion 713a projecting inward in a C shape at both ends.

The protrusion 713b is a protrusion inserted into the communication hole 712a1 of the solenoid 712, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the communication hole 712a1. As a result, the solenoid 7
The displacement of 12 is transmitted to the displacement member 713 via the transmission member 712a.

The shaft portion 713a is a shaft inserted into the shaft hole 711d. By inserting the shaft portion 713a into the shaft hole 711d, the displacement member 713 can rotate about the axis of the shaft portion 713a. That is, the displacement member 713 is driven by the displacement of the solenoid 712.

The cover member 714 is formed to have an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the solenoid 712, is arranged above the solenoid 712 arranged on the upper part of the bottom plate 711a, and has a dish receiving portion 71.
It is fastened and fixed to 1. As a result, the solenoid 712 can be fixed.

Next, a ball falling on the ball cradle 710 will be described with reference to FIG. 110. FIG. 110 (
a) and FIG. 110 (b) are cross-sectional views of the ball cradle 710. It should be noted that FIGS. 110 (a) and 110 (b) correspond to the cross section of the ball cradle 710 of FIG. 108 (c).

As shown in FIG. 110, the ball thrown from the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 freely falls in the direction of gravity, and the rotation unit 700 side (right side in FIG. 110 (a)) due to the firing operation of the ball receiving portion 467. ). That is, the ball cradle 710 is dropped in the lower right direction in the front view with respect to the bottom plate 711a.

In this case, as described above, the bottom plate 711a is formed by bending downward toward the ball throwing portion 711c side, and the ball throwing portion 711c is formed on the right side with respect to the bottom plate 711a, so that the upper surface of the bottom plate 711a on which the ball falls is formed. Can be an inclined surface that inclines downward toward the right side. Therefore, the displacement direction of the sphere and the inclination direction of the bottom plate 711a on which the sphere falls can be brought close to each other in parallel.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 110 (b), the sphere that has fallen on the bottom plate 711a moves upward (FIG. 1).
10 (b) Upward) can be suppressed from bouncing. Therefore, the ball thrown from the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 to the ball pedestal 710 of the rotating unit 700 is the ball pedestal 71.
It is possible to suppress the fall from 0.

Further, the ball that has fallen on the bottom plate 711a can be rolled to the throwing portion 711c side by the momentum of the falling. Therefore, the rolling time of the ball up to the throwing unit 711c can be shortened.
As a result, the ball thrown from the lower displacement member 440 to the ball cradle 710 can be smoothly thrown.

Next, the light emission of the ball cradle 710 will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111 (a)
And (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the rotating unit 700 in the CXI-CXI line of FIG. In FIG. 111 (a), the decorative unit 750 is in the closed state, and in FIG. 111 (b), the decorative unit 750 is in the closed state.
The state in which the decorative units 750 are arranged in the open state is shown in the figure.

As shown in FIG. 111 (a), the light emission to the ball cradle 710 in the state where the decorative unit 750 is arranged in the closed state is performed by the LED board 721 arranged on the back side of the rear base 720. ..

More specifically, the light emitted from the LED 721a of the LED board 721 is emitted from the lid member 77.
By reflecting it on the back side of 0, it is incident on the bottom plate 711a of the ball cradle 710. Further, as described above, since the bottom surface of the bottom plate 711a is textured, it is possible to diffusely reflect the incident light due to the unevenness of the textured processing. As a result, the entire bottom surface of the ball cradle 710 can be made to emit light.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 111B, when the decorative unit 750 is arranged in the open state, the transparent portion 771a is formed on the lid member 770 as described above, so that the LED board 7
The LED 721a of 21 is transmitted through the lid member 770 without being reflected. Since the rotating body 800 is formed inside the lid member 770, it can be reflected by the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 and incident on the ball cradle 710.

Further, in this case, by rotating the third display unit 850 of the rotating body 800 toward the ball cradle 710 side (upper side in FIG. 111B), the LE of the LED board 820 arranged on the back side of the base plate 810
The light emitted from D821 can be reflected on the inner wall of the rotating body 800 and emitted from the third display unit 850.

As described above, the inner wall of the third display unit 850 is textured, and a plurality of irregularities are formed on the surface. Therefore, the third display unit 850 can easily emit light to the outside of the rotating body 800 than the other display units. Therefore, it is preferable to arrange the third display unit 850 on the ball cradle 710 side.

Next, a detailed configuration of the upper displacement unit 900 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 118. First, a structure for displacing the upper displacement member 940 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114.

FIG. 112 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900. FIG. 113 shows the upper displacement unit 90.
It is an exploded perspective front view of 0. FIG. 114 is an exploded rear perspective of the upper displacement unit 900.
It should be noted that FIGS. 112 to 114 show a state in which the upper displacement member 940 is arranged at the retracted position (the position arranged at the uppermost position with respect to the base member 910).

As shown in FIGS. 112 to 114, the upper displacement unit 900 is disposed inside the base member 910 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300 and the base member 910 thereof. The transmission member 920, the rotary member 930 rotatably connected to the base member 910 and displaced due to the displacement of the transmission member 920, and one end slidably and displaceably connected to the base member 410 and the rotary member 930. It is mainly provided with an upper displacement member 940 that is connected to and displaced by transmitting a driving force from the rotating member 930.

The base member 910 is formed by combining two horizontally long plate members having a rectangular front view in the front-rear direction, and includes a front base 911 arranged on the front side and a back base 912 arranged on the back side. A transmission member 920 and a rotating member 930 are arranged between the front base 911 and the back base 912.

The front base 911 has three sliding grooves 91 penetrating in the front-rear direction (the depth direction of the page 112 in FIG. 112).
1c, 911d, 911e, a shaft support pin 911b protruding to the back side at the center position in the circumferential direction, and
It is mainly provided with a shaft portion 911f projecting to the front on one end side (left side in front view) of the front base and an opening 911a penetrating in the front-rear direction on the one end side.

The opening 911a is an opening for inserting the shaft of the drive motor KM5 arranged in the front base 911 to the back surface side. As a result, the shaft of the drive motor KM5 arranged on the front side of the front base 911 can be inserted into the back side of the front base 911.

The shaft support pins 911g and 911b are inserted into the shaft holes of the transmission gear 922 and the transmission gear 923 described later, and can rotatably hold the transmission gear 922 and the transmission gear 923. That is, the shaft support pins 911g and 911b are formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft holes of the transmission gear 922 and the transmission gear 923.

The sliding groove 911c is formed through the axis of the shaft support pin 911b in an arc shape. The sliding groove 911c is an opening through which the shaft support pin 923a of the transmission gear 923 described later is inserted, and the radius of the arc thereof is substantially the same as the distance from the shaft hole of the transmission gear 923 described later to the shaft support pin 923a. Set. As a result, when the transmission gear 923 is rotated with the shaft support pin 923a inserted inside the sliding groove 911c, it is possible to prevent the shaft support pin from colliding with the inner wall of the sliding groove 911c.

The sliding grooves 911d and 911e are grooves into which the shaft support pins 951 and 952 of the upper displacement member 940, which will be described later, are inserted, and the width dimension in the lateral direction thereof is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the shaft support pins 951 and 952. Will be done.

The sliding groove 911e is formed linearly in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in the front view) of the front base 911. On the other hand, the sliding groove 911d is formed in an arc shape centered on the lower side of the front base 911. That is, the sliding groove 911e and the sliding groove 911d are formed in a non-parallel manner. Therefore, at different positions in the left-right direction, the distance dimensions between the two sliding grooves 911e and 911d facing each other in the vertical direction are different. As a result, the shaft support pin 9 is inside the sliding grooves 911e and 911d.
When the 51 and 952 are slid, the upper displacement member 940 is slid while rotating due to the difference in the distance dimension between the facings in the vertical direction.

The shaft portion 911f is formed so as to project in a columnar shape on the front side. The shaft portion 911f can be inserted into a through hole 931 formed at one end of the rotating member 930, which will be described later, to hold the rotating member 930 in a rotatable state. That is, the shaft portion 911f is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 931 of the rotating member 930.

The back base 912 is a plate member attached to the back side of the front base 911 at predetermined intervals. The back base 912 is made of a metallic material. As a result, the base member 91
The overall rigidity of 0 can be improved. As a result, the base member 9 formed into a horizontally long rectangle
When the relatively heavy upper displacement member 940 is disposed on the 10, the base member 910 can be prevented from twisting.

The transmission member 920 is arranged between the front base 911 and the back base 912 facing each other. The transmission member 920 includes a transmission gear 921 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM5 and a transmission gear 9 thereof.
It is mainly provided with a transmission gear 922 meshed with 21 and a transmission gear 923 meshed with the transmission gear 922.

As described above, the transmission gear 921 is connected to the drive motor KM5 by inserting the shaft of the drive motor KM5 arranged on the front side of the front base 911 into the shaft hole. As a result, the transmission gear 9
21 can be rotationally displaced by the driving force of the driving motor KM5.

The transmission gear 922 is meshed with the transmission gear 921 and the transmission gear 923 as described above.
Thereby, the driving force of the rotation of the transmission gear 921 can be transmitted to the transmission gear 923.

The transmission gear 923 is formed so as to have a shaft support pin 923a projecting to the front side on the outer peripheral edge portion thereof. Therefore, when the transmission gear 923 is rotated, the shaft support pin 923a is rotationally displaced around the axis of the transmission gear 923.

The rotating member 930 mainly includes a through hole 931 formed in the shape of a long rod on one side and penetrating in the front-rear direction at one end, and an opening 932 extending in the longitudinal direction at a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction. Formed in preparation.

As described above, the through hole 931 is an opening into which the shaft portion 911f of the front base 911 is inserted, and the rotating member 930 can be rotated with respect to the front base 911 by inserting the shaft portion 911f. Can be retained. Further, at the tip of the shaft portion 911f, an urging spring SP
8 is arranged. As a result, the rotating member 930 is urged in the direction of lifting the other end side upward with respect to the front base 911.

The opening 923 is a groove into which the shaft support pin 923a of the transmission gear 923 is inserted, and the shaft support pin 923a is slidably formed inside. As described above, when the transmission gear 923 is rotationally displaced and the arrangement of the shaft support pin 923a is displaced, the shaft support pin 923a is displaced inside the opening 923. Therefore, since the rotating member 930 is arranged in a state where one end is rotatably supported by the shaft,
Due to the displacement of the shaft support pin 923a, one end is rotated around the shaft.

Further, on the other end side of the rotating member 930, an annular member 933 formed in a front view annular shape and formed in a plate shape having a predetermined thickness is arranged on the back surface side.

The front side of the annulus member 933 is formed with two sliding grooves 933a recessed at symmetrical positions along the outer peripheral edge thereof. The annular member 933 is a portion connected to the upper displacement member 940, which will be described later, and the shaft portion 953 of the upper displacement member 940 is inserted inside. Further, the annular member 933 and the upper displacement member 940 are rotatably connected to each other, and the upper displacement member 940 can be displaced as the rotary member 930 is rotationally displaced.

The protrusion 961 of the upper displacement member 940 is inserted inside the sliding groove 933a, and the protrusion 961 slides inside the sliding groove 933a due to the rotational displacement of the upper displacement member 940 with respect to the rotating member. can.

Further, the arc axis of the sliding groove 933a is arranged at a position different from the rotation axis of the upper displacement member 940 with respect to the rotation member 930. As a result, when the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the rotating member 930, the first open portion 960 can be displaced. A detailed description of the first opening portion 960 will be described later.

On one end side (rotating shaft side) of the rotating member 930, a shaft portion cover 913 and a deformation restricting cover 914 formed from a plate-shaped body are arranged in front of the rotating member 930. The shaft cover 913 has a rotating member 93.
It is arranged in front of the rotation shaft portion of 0, and the rotating member 930 is suppressed from rattling in the front-rear direction. The deformation control cover 914 is arranged at a position separated from the rotation axis by a predetermined distance, and it is possible to suppress the rotation member 930 from being deformed in the front-rear direction by the weight of the upper displacement member 940 arranged on the other end side.

The upper displacement member 940 is a base body 95 connected to the front base 911 and the rotating member 930.
0, two first open portions 960 rotatably arranged on the back side of the base body 950, and
It is mainly provided with two second open portions 970 rotatably arranged on the front side of the base body 950 and a variable portion 980 arranged on one end side.

The base body 950 has two shaft support pins 951,952 formed so as to project on the back surface on one end side, and
It is mainly provided with a shaft portion 953 that is formed so as to project from the back surface on the other end side.

As described above, the shaft support pins 951 and 952 have sliding grooves 911e and 91 of the front base 911.
It is a protrusion inserted in 1d. Therefore, when the upper displacement member 940 is driven by the rotating member 930, the shaft support pins 951 and 952 slide along the sliding grooves 911e and 911d, so that the upper displacement member 940 is slid and displaced in the left-right direction. At the same time, the other end side can be rotationally displaced downward.

As described above, the shaft portion 953 is a protrusion that is inserted into the annular member 933 and connected to the rotating member 930, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the annular member 933. As a result, the upper displacement member 940 can be rotatably connected to the rotating member 930. Therefore, the rotating member 9
When 30 is rotationally displaced about one end by the driving force of the driving motor KM5, the annulus member 933
The driving force is transmitted to the upper displacement member 940 by the displacement of. As a result, the upper displacement member 940 can be displaced along the sliding grooves 911e and 911d.

The first open portion 960 is a plate member having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, and two pieces are arranged on the back surface side of the base body 950. The first open portion 960 is rotatably pivotally supported and arranged on the other end side of the base body 950. Further, the first open portion 960 protrudes to the back surface side and the annulus member 9 is formed.
A protrusion 961 disposed inside the sliding groove 933a of 33 is provided. As a result, when the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the rotating member 930 due to the displacement of the rotating member 930, the protrusion 9
61 can be slid inside the sliding groove 933a.

In this case, as described above, the curved shaft of the sliding groove 933a is arranged at a position different from the rotating shaft of the upper displacement member 940 with respect to the rotating member 930, so that the protrusion 961 slides inside the sliding groove 933a. Along with this, the first open portion 960 pivotally supported by the base body 950 can be rotationally displaced.

The second opening portion 970 is a plate member having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, and two pieces are arranged on the front side of the base body 950. The second open portion 970 is rotatably pivotally supported and arranged on the other end side of the base body 950. Also. The second open portion 970 is formed to include an engaging projection (not shown) with which the first open portion 960 engages when a predetermined displacement is made. As a result, as described above, when the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced around the shaft support portion when the upper displacement member 940 is subjected to a predetermined rotational displacement, the first open portion 960 engages with the second open portion 970. The second open portion 970 can be rotationally displaced.

Next, the displacement of the upper displacement member 940 will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 117. FIG. 115 shows the upper displacement unit 9 in a state where the upper displacement member 940 is arranged at the retracted position.
It is a front view of 00. FIG. 116 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900 in a state where the upper displacement member 940 is arranged at an intermediate position. FIG. 117 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900 in a state where the upper displacement member 940 is arranged at the overhanging position.

The retracted position of the upper displacement member 940 is such that the shaft support pins 951 and 952 are the front base 91.
It is a position in a state of being arranged on the other end side of the sliding grooves 911d and 911e of No. 1 (on the right side of the front view of the front base 911). In addition, the overhanging position is that the shaft support pins 951 and 952 are the front base 911.
It is the position of the sliding grooves 911d and 911e arranged on one end side (the left side of the front view of the front base 911). Further, the intermediate position is a position in which the upper displacement member 940 is displaced to a position intermediate between the retracted position and the overhanging position.

As shown in FIGS. 115 to 117, when the upper displacement member 940 is displaced with respect to the front base 911, the upper displacement member 940 changes its longitudinal direction from a substantially horizontal direction (FIG. 115 left-right direction) to a substantially vertical direction (FIG. 115 left-right direction). It is rotationally displaced in the vertical direction of FIG. 117).

Further, with the rotational displacement, the position on one end side of the upper displacement member 940 is set to the front base 911.
It is displaced from the position of the right end of the front view to the substantially center position of the front view. That is, when the rotating member 930 is rotated by the driving force of the driving motor KM5 as described above, the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced while being slidably displaced.

Further, when the displacement is performed from the intermediate position shown in FIG. 116 to the overhanging position shown in FIG. 117, the first open portion 960 arranged in the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the base body 950. The second open portion 970, which engages with and displaces the rotational displacement of the first open portion 960, is also rotationally displaced with respect to the base body 950. Therefore, in the overhanging position, the longitudinal direction of the upper displacement member 940 is directed to the vertical direction, and the first open portion 960 and the second open portion 970 are displaced.

In the present embodiment, the upper displacement member 940 is formed in a shape imitating the shape of a human arm (including a hand). Therefore, it is displaced from the first position to the third position, and the first opening portion 960 and the second position are displaced.
By displacing the opening portion 970, the player can visually recognize the displacement that makes the human arm thicker.

Next, the variable portion 980 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 118. FIG. 118 (a) shows.
It is a front view of the variable portion 980, and FIG. 118 (b) is a rear view of the variable portion 980.

As shown in FIGS. 118 (a) and 118 (b), the variable portion 980 is formed in a shape imitating a human hand, and the main body portion 981 and the main body portion 981 forming the rear portion of the hand are formed. It is mainly provided with finger portions 982 to 986 which are connected to form a finger portion of the hand.

A drive motor (not shown) is arranged inside the main body 981, and the variable plate (not shown) arranged inside can be displaced in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 118 (a)). Will be done.

The finger portion 982 is a portion corresponding to the thumb, and the base portion side is connected to the variable plate of the main body portion 981. As a result, the finger portion 982 can be displaced by the piston movement of the variable plate.

The finger portions 983 to 986 are formed mainly including a first link RB1 disposed on the base side and a second link RB2 disposed on the distal end side inside the finger portions 983 to 986.

The first link RB1 is connected to the second link RB2 in a rotatable state on the tip side, and the base side is connected to the variable plate of the main body portion 981. Therefore, when the variable plate of the main body 981 is moved by the piston, the second link RB is passed through the first link RB1 and the first link RB1.
2 can be displaced. As a result, the fingers 983 to 986 can be displaced. In this embodiment, by displacing the finger portions 982 to 986, the player can visually recognize the operation of opening and closing the fingers of the hand.

The front base 411 has two sliding grooves 411 penetrating in the front-rear direction (the depth direction of the paper in FIG. 43).
It is mainly provided with a, 411b, two columnar shaft support pins 411c, 411d protruding toward the back surface side, and a curved wall portion 411e protruding in an arc shape with the shaft support pin 411d as an axis. ..

The sliding grooves 411a and 411b have two protrusions 47 protruding from the back surface side of the lower displacement member 440.
Holes 2, 473 are inserted into the holes, respectively. The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are formed so as to extend long in the left-right direction, respectively. Therefore, the protrusion 47 inserted into the sliding grooves 411a and 411b
By displacing 2,473 along the sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the lower displacement member 440 can be slid in the left-right direction.

Further, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are formed by being curved in an arc shape, respectively, and are upward (FIG. 4) from the left end (left side in FIG. 43) to the right end (right side in FIG. 43) of the front base 411.
3 Opened in the upward direction). Further, in the sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the axes of the respective arcs are arranged at different positions, and the gap between the facing portions in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 43) is narrowed from the left end portion to the right end portion.

Since the distance between the protrusions 472 and 473 of the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440 does not change, when the lower displacement member 440 is slid along the sliding groove, the lower displacement member 440 is rotated. It can be displaced. That is, by changing the distance between the two sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the lower displacement member 44 does not give a rotational driving force to the lower displacement member 440.
0 can be rotated along with sliding.

The shaft support pin 411c is a protrusion inserted into the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 of the transmission member 420 described later, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft portion 422a. again,
The shaft support pin 411c is formed of a metal rod and is fitted onto the front base 411. Therefore, when a force acts on the cam member 422 from the outer peripheral surface thereof in the axial direction, the shaft support pin 4
It is possible to prevent the 11c from breaking (breaking).

Then, with reference to FIGS. 119 to 121, the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment.
Will be explained. In the first embodiment, the case where the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are displaced in the same direction by the driving force of the drive motor KM2 has been described, but the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment includes the movable rack 2464 and the rack 466. It is displaced in the opposite direction by the driving force of the driving motor KM2. The same parts as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120. FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 2440 according to the second embodiment. FIG. 120 is a front view of the lower displacement member 2440. In addition, FIG. 120
Then, the state in which the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 2440 are transparently viewed is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment includes a base member 2470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 covering the front and rear of the base member 2470, and a case member 480. A transmission mechanism 2460 displaceably arranged between the base member 2470 and a decorative member 4 formed so as to cover the front and back of the case member 480.
It is formed mainly with 50.

The base member 2470 is a plate member formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, and includes protrusions 472 and 473 protruding from the back surface on one end side, and an erection wall 471a erected on the front surface from the edge on the other end side. Left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 120) A protruding wall 477 that protrudes in a U-shape opposite to the vertical direction from the upper end of the central portion to the front side, a shaft portion 474, 475 protruding from the front side, and a shaft portion 474. It is mainly provided with shaft portions 2470a and 2470b projecting above 475.

The shaft portion 2470a is a shaft member rotatably supported by the transmission gear 2468a described later, and is formed smaller than the shaft hole of the transmission gear 2468a.

The shaft portion 2470b is a shaft member to which a transmission gear 2468b, which will be described later, is rotatably supported, and is formed smaller than the shaft hole of the transmission gear 2468b. Transmission gear 246, as described below.
The 8a and the shaft portion 2470a are arranged in a state where the gear tooth surfaces engraved on the outer peripheral surface thereof are meshed with each other. That is, the distance between the shaft portion 2470a and the shaft portion 2470b in the front view is the transmission gear 2.
The distance is set to the radius of 468a and the transmission gear 2468b.

The transmission mechanism 2460 is arranged in front of the base member 470, and the transmission gears 461 and 4 are arranged.
A movable rack that has a tooth surface that meshes with 62, 463, a drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461, and a transmission gear 463, and is slidably displaceable in front of the base member 470. The 2464, the transmission gear 2468a meshing with the movable rack 2464, the transmission gear 2468b meshing with the transmission gear 2468a, the rack 46 meshing with the transmission gear 2468b, and the rack 46 meshing with the transmission gear 2468b can be rotated to one end side of the rack 466. It is mainly provided with a ball receiving portion 467 disposed in the above.

The movable rack 2464 is formed in a horizontally long plate-like body having a rectangular front view, and has a rack gear 464a engraved on the lower end surface, a rack gear 2464g engraved on the upper end surface, and a collision portion 464f protruding from the lower end surface. Is mainly formed.

The rack gear 2464 g is meshed with a transmission gear 2468a described later. As a result, when the drive is transmitted from the drive motor KM4 and the rack 466 is displaced, the transmission gear 2468a can be rotated according to the displacement.

The transmission gears 2468a and 2468b are pivotally supported by the shaft portions 2470a and 2470b of the base member 2470 in a state of being in mesh with each other as described above. As a result, the transmission gear 2
When the 468a is rotated, the transmission gear 2468b is rotated. In addition, the transmission gear 2468b
Is meshed with the rack gear 466a of the rack 466, and when the transmission gear 2468b is rotated, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 466 and the rack 466 is displaced.

That is, the rack 466 can be driven by the driving force of the drive motor KM4. The transmission gears 2468a and 2468b are arranged at positions partially displaced in the front-rear direction, so that the transmission gear 2468a is prevented from colliding with the rack 466 and the transmission gear 2468b is suppressed from colliding with the movable rack 2464.

Next, the displacement of the lower displacement member 2440 will be described with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121
Is a front view of the lower displacement member 2440. Note that, in FIG. 121, similarly to FIG. 120, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 2440 and the front case 481 are shown in a transparent state.

As shown in FIG. 121, electric power is applied to the drive motor KM2, and the transmission mechanism 24 described above is applied.
When the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the launch position by 60, the movable rack 464 and the rack 46
6 are displaced in different directions.

More specifically, when the drive motor KM4 is rotated, the movable rack 464 is displaced to the other end side (left side in FIG. 121) of the lower displacement member 440. With this displacement, the transmission gear 24
68a and 2468b are rotated to displace the rack 466 to one end side (right side in FIG. 3). As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced to the third position.

Therefore, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the first position, a displacement component that is in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the ball receiving portion 467 can be formed. The change in the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member 2440 can be reduced by the displacement of the movable rack 464. As a result, it is possible to suppress the rattling of the lower displacement member 2440 due to the change in the position of the center of gravity.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 122 to 127, the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment.
Will be explained. In the first embodiment, the case where the ball receiving portion 467 is slidly displaced by the rack and pinion mechanism has been described, but in the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 is slidly displaced by the link mechanism. In the same part as each of the above embodiments,
The same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 125. FIG. 122A shows the lower displacement member 344 in the third embodiment.
0 is a front view, and FIG. 122 (b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member 3440. FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 3440, and FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 3440. 125 (a) and 91 (b) are front views of the lower displacement member 3440.

Note that FIG. 125 (a) shows a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 3440 is transparently viewed, and FIG. 125 (b) shows the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 3440 and the front case 3481 transparently. The state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 122 to 125, the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment includes a base member 3470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 that covers the front and rear of the base member 3470, and a case member 480 and a base. A transmission mechanism 3460 displaceably arranged between the member 3470 and a decorative member 45 formed so as to cover the front and back of the case member 480.
It is formed mainly with 0.

The base member 3470 is a plate member formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, and includes protrusions 472 and 473 protruding from the back surface on one end side, and an erection wall 471a erected on the front surface from the edge on the other end side. The sliding wall 3470c, which is formed continuously from the base end side of the erection wall 471a and is erected on the lower edge of the base member 3470, and the upper end of the central portion in the left-right direction (FIG. 122 (a) left-right direction). Mainly provided with a protruding wall 477 that protrudes in a U-shape opposite to the vertical direction from the front side, and an opening 479 that is recessed in the central portion of the base member 470 in the vertical direction while extending from one end side to the other end side. It is formed.

The sliding wall 3470c is a wall portion for abutting with the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 and regulating the position (aspect) of the ball receiving portion 467. That is, it is formed so as to project to a position below the ball receiving portion 467. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 can be held in a state where the opening of the U-shaped portion faces upward.

Further, the sliding wall 3470c is a recess 3470 recessed below the end portion on the standing wall 471a side.
c1 is formed. The recess 3470c1 is a groove for receiving the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 into the recess 3470c1. As a result, when the ball receiving portion 467 is slid toward the upright portion by the transmission mechanism 3460 described later, the ball receiving portion 467 can be received in the recess and the ball receiving portion 467 can be rotated. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 can be made to perform a firing operation (an operation of discharging the ball held inside the U-shape to the outside of the lower displacement member 3440).

The transmission mechanism 3460 includes a drive motor KM2 attached to the front case 3480, which will be described later, and the transmission mechanism 3460.
A first link member 3468 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2 and rotatably arranged, a second link member 3469 connected to the first link member 3468 in a rotatable state, and a second link member thereof. It is mainly provided with a ball receiving portion 467 connected to one end side of the 3469.

The first link member 3468 is formed from a rectangular oblong plate-like body, has a shaft hole 3468b formed through one end side, a connecting hole 3468a connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2, and bulges toward the other end side. It is mainly provided with a load portion 3468c to be formed.

The shaft hole 3468b is a through hole through which the rotation shaft 3469a of the second link member 3469, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed through in the front-rear direction with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the rotation shaft 3469a.

The connecting hole 3468a is a hole fastened to the shaft of the drive motor KM2 as described above, and is formed to have an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the shaft of the drive motor KM2. The shaft of the drive motor KM2 is internally fitted into the connecting hole 3468a and fastened, so that the first link member 3468 is connected to the drive motor KM.
It can rotate with a driving force of 2.

The load portion 3468c is formed so as to bulge toward the other end side of the connecting hole 3468a. Load part 3
Reference numeral 46c is a member for applying a load for positioning the center of gravity of the first link member 3468 on the other end side of the connecting hole 3468a, and is formed so as to bulge outward from one end side.

The second link member 3469 is formed in a rectangular oblong state, and the first link member 34 is formed.
It is arranged on the back side of 68. The second link member 3469 has a rotating shaft 3469a projecting in a columnar shape from the other end side toward the front surface and a through hole 3469b formed through the one end side in the front-rear direction.
It is formed mainly with and.

As described above, the rotating shaft 3469a is inserted into the shaft hole 3468b of the first link member 3468. As a result, the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 can be connected in a rotatable state.

The through hole 3469b is an opening for connecting the ball receiving portion 467 to the second link member 3469. Further, the through hole 3469b is formed to be smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b of the ball receiving portion 467. Therefore, the shaft hole 467b and the through hole 3469b of the ball receiving portion 467 are arranged coaxially, and a screw having a head larger than the width in the lateral direction of the opening 469 is inserted into the opening 479 and the shaft hole 467b from the back side of the base member 3470. Is inserted and fastened to the through hole 3469b, so that the ball receiving portion 4
The 67 is rotatably connected to the second link member.

The case member 480 is a member that covers the front and rear of the base member 470, and is a base member 47.
It mainly includes a front case 3481 arranged on the front side of 0 and a back case 482 arranged on the back side.

The front case 3481 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular plate in front view, has an opening 3481d penetrating at a position facing the drive motor KM2, and a bottom wall portion 481b formed so as to project from the lower end surface on the back side.
And a shaft hole 481c that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the lower edge portion is mainly provided.

The opening 3481d is a hole for inserting the shaft of the drive motor KM2 arranged on the front side of the front case 3481 to the back side, and is formed to have an outer diameter larger than the shaft of the drive motor KM2. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor KM2 arranged on the front side of the front case 3481 can be transmitted to the first link member 3468 arranged on the back side.

Next, the displacement of the lower displacement member 3440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127. FIG. 126 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the first position, and is shown in FIG. 126 (a).
b) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the second position. FIG. 127 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the third position, and FIG. 127 (b) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the second position.

From FIG. 126 (a) to FIG. 127 (b), the transition states of the lower displacement member 440 are shown in order. In addition, FIGS. 126 (a) and 126 (b) or 127 (a) and FIG. 12
7 (b) shows a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 3440 and the front case 481 are transparently viewed.

As shown in FIGS. 126 and 127, in the downward displacement member 440 at the first position, the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 are in the longitudinal direction thereof (FIG. 126 (a) left-right direction).
Is placed substantially parallel to the longitudinal direction of the base member 3470 (left-right direction in FIG. 126 (a)), and the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 are arranged so as to overlap each other in the front-rear direction.

That is, the connecting portion with the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 is arranged on one end side (left side in FIG. 126 (a)) of the base member 3470. As a result, the second link member 3469 is arranged on one end side. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the first position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (b), when the drive motor KM2 is rotated from the state of the first position and the first link member 3468 is rotationally displaced, one end side of the first link member 3468 is the base member 3470. Displaced with respect to. As a result, the second link member 3469 connected to one end side of the first link member 3468 is displaced. In this case, the second link member 346
Since one end side of 9 is connected to the ball receiving portion 467 and slidable along the opening 479 of the base member 3470, one end side of the second link member 3469 is pushed out to the other end side of the base member 3470. .. As a result, the ball receiving portion 46 connected to the other end side of the second link member 3469.
7 can be displaced to the second position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (a), when the drive motor KM2 is further rotationally displaced from the state of the second position and the first link member 3468 is rotated by approximately 180 degrees from the state of the first position. , The connecting portion between the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 is arranged on the other end side of the base member 3470 with respect to the rotation axis. Therefore, the second link member 34
One end side of 69 is further pushed out to the other end side of the base member 3470, and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the third position.

In this case, the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged inside the recess 3470c1, so that the ball receiving portion 467 is rotated by the urging spring SP2 and fired.

Further, the load portion 3468c of the first link member 3468 is displaced to one end side of the base member 3470. As a result, it is possible to prevent the position of the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 3440 from being changed when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced with respect to the base member. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 3440 can be suppressed.

That is, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the first position, a displacement component that is in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the ball receiving portion 467 can be formed. The change in the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member 3440 can be reduced by the displacement of the load portion 3468c. As a result, it is possible to suppress the rattling of the lower displacement member 440 due to the change in the position of the center of gravity.

Further, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 127 (b), the ball receiving portion 467 can be retracted to the second position and the first position by continuing the rotation of the first link member 3468. Therefore, it is not necessary to switch the control of the drive motor KM2, and the displacement to the second position or the first position can be performed quickly.

Therefore, when the game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the position of the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 changes, so that the lower displacement member 3440 tends to rattle, and the ball receiving portion 467 is quickly retracted. Therefore, the rattling of the lower displacement member 3440 can be suppressed by quickly bringing the position of the center of gravity closer to the rotation axis of the lower displacement member 440.

Further, by immediately displacementing the ball receiving portion 467, it is possible to suppress the wobbling of the lower displacement member 3440 due to the reaction of the ejection operation when the game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467.

That is, when the game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the load of the lower displacement member 440 is reduced by the amount of the ejected game ball, and the lower displacement member 3440 is likely to be displaced upward due to the reaction. By immediately displacing the ball receiving portion 467, a force that displaces the base member 470 downward by the reaction due to the rotational displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 is applied to cancel the reaction when the ball is ejected from the lower displacement member 3440. be able to.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 128 to 130, the lower displacement unit 44 in the fourth embodiment.
00 will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the lower displacement member 440 arranged in the retracted state is formed so as to be capable of launching has been described, but the lower displacement unit 440 in the fourth embodiment has been described.
0 regulates the firing operation of the lower displacement member 440 arranged in the retracted state. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 4400 according to the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 128, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are shown transparently, and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown by a chain line. Further, in FIG. 128, a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged in the first position is shown.

As shown in FIG. 128, the lower displacement unit 4400 according to the fourth embodiment has an opening opened in the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440 between the standing wall 471a and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481. 4471b is formed.

The tip portion 4411g1 of the engagement wall 4411g, which will be described later, is inserted into the opening 4471b. That is, the opening 4471b is opened larger than the tip portion 4411g1.

On the front base 411, an engaging wall 4411g formed in a substantially L shape continuous with the bottom surface of the collection port 411f is formed.

The engaging wall 4411g can regulate that the ball receiving portion 467 is rotated at the third position (launching operation) by inserting the tip portion 4411g1 bent into a substantially L shape into the opening 4471b. .. That is, the tip position of the tip portion 4411g1 is set to be substantially the same as the height of the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b of the lower displacement member 440 located in the retracted state.

Next, a state in which each member of the lower displacement unit 4400 is displaced will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130. 129 and 130 are front views of the lower displacement unit 4400. In addition, in FIGS. 129 and 130, a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are transparently viewed is shown as in FIG. 128, and the front case 48 is shown.
The bottom wall portion 481b of 1 is illustrated by a chain line.

Further, in FIG. 129, a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the third position is shown. Further, in FIG. 130, a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is in the first overhanging state and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged in the first position is shown.

As shown in FIG. 129, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 comes into contact with the upper surface of the tip portion 4411g1 of the engaging wall 4411g and the recess 481.
Intrusion into b1 or opening 4471b is restricted. As a result, the rotation of the ball receiving portion 467 is restricted.

Therefore, when the ball thrown on the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 is discharged to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 by the ball receiving portion 467, the ball receiving portion 467 is at the third position. Rotates,
It is possible to prevent the game ball held inside the ball receiving portion 467 from being discharged.

That is, with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 to the third position, the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 is changed when the game balls exceeding the specified number (1 ball) are discharged from the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467. Can be regulated. Therefore, it is possible to easily eject only the game balls exceeding the specified number from the orbital region.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 130, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the position in the first overhanging state (the position other than the position in the retracted state), the lower displacement member 440 is displaced with respect to the base member 470. Therefore, the opening 4471b of the lower displacement member 440 and the engaging wall 4411g are separated from each other. Therefore, in the first overhanging state, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced to the third position to perform the firing operation.

That is, when the number of game balls exceeding the specified number (1 ball) is discharged from the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 due to the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 to the third position, the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 is changed. It is possible to suppress the change and make it easier to maintain the state in which the ball receiving portion 467 holds a specified number of game balls, while engaging when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the first and second overhanging positions. Wall 4411g has an opening 4471b
Since it is separated from the internal space of the leg portion 467a as the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position.
Is engaged with the opening 4471b, the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 can be changed, and a predetermined number of game balls can be easily discharged from the ball receiving portion 467.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 131 to 135, the distribution unit 55 in the fifth embodiment
00 will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the distribution member 540 rotates to form the storage state and the regulated state has been described, but the distribution member 540 in the fifth embodiment slides and displaces to form the storage state and the regulated state. do. The same parts as those of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the distribution unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134. FIG. 131 (a) is a top view of the distribution unit 5500 according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 131 (b) is a rear view of the distribution unit 5500.
FIG. 132 is an exploded perspective front view of the distribution unit 5500, and FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective rear view of the distribution unit 5500. FIG. 134 shows the CXXXIV-C of FIG. 131 (a).
It is sectional drawing of the distribution unit 5500 in XXXIV line. In FIG. 134, the outer shape of the distribution member 540 is shown by a chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 131 to 133, the distribution unit 5500 according to the fifth embodiment has a base plate 5520 formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and is attached to the front side of the base plate 5520 and faces the base plate 5520. A path forming member 510 that forms a plurality of flow paths through which a ball can flow, and a distribution member 5540 that is slidably attached to the back side of the base plate 5520.
And an extension path member 530 that is attached to the end surface of the base plate 5520 and extends the flow path of the sphere formed between the base plate 5520 and the path forming member 510 facing each other.

The base plate 5520 has two cylindrical shaft portions 5526 protruding to the back surface side, a first opening 5521 and a second opening 5522 formed through the shape of a rectangle, and a U-shaped cross section in which the upper end side is open to the side surface of the upper end. It is mainly provided with a rolling portion 525 that is formed in a shape and extends in the left-right direction, and a locking portion 524 that protrudes like a hook on the back surface side.

The shaft portion 5526 is formed so as to project two on the back surface side, and is inserted into each of the two sliding grooves 5546 described later.

The first opening 5521 and the second opening 5522 are the regulation plates 54 of the distribution member 5540, which will be described later.
1 and an opening through which the storage plate 5542 is inserted, and is formed in an opening having a width larger than the thickness of the regulation plate 5541 and the storage plate 5542. Further, since the distribution member 5540 is attached to the base plate 5520 in a slidable state, the first opening 5521 and the second opening 5522 are larger in the slide direction of the distribution member 5540 than the regulation plate 5541 and the storage plate 5542. Formed in the opening.

The distribution member 5540 is formed in a rectangular shape in front view, one of which is long, and has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The distribution member 5540 is a regulation plate 55 projecting in a plate shape on the front side.
41 and the storage plate 5542, a sliding groove 5546 formed in a long hole substantially in the same direction as the extension direction of the regulation plate 5541 and the storage plate 5542, and a hook-shaped locking portion 544 formed on the back surface side.
It is formed mainly with and.

The regulation plate 5541 passes through the first opening 5521 and the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path K.
The game ball disposed in the connecting portion with R2 and flowing down the first throwing path KR1 is the second throwing path K.
It is a plate member that regulates the inflow to R2, and the distance protruding from the first opening 5521 is set to a distance larger than the radius of the game ball.

Further, the regulation plate 5541 is formed in a straight line in front view, and the extending direction thereof is set to be substantially the same as the slide direction of the distribution member 540. As a result, when the distribution member 5540 is slide-displaced, the displacement region of the regulation plate 5541 can be minimized. resulting in,
The opening region of the first opening 5521 can be minimized, and the rigidity of the base plate 5520 can be ensured.

The storage plate 5542 is a plate member that is arranged on the second throwing path KR2 via the second opening 5522 and causes a game ball flowing down the second throwing path KR2 to flow down to the upstream side of the storage plate 5542.
The distance projected from the second opening 5522 is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball.

Further, the storage plate 5542 is formed in a straight line in front view, and the extending direction thereof is set to be substantially the same as the slide direction of the distribution member 540. As a result, when the distribution member 5540 is slide-displaced, the displacement region of the storage plate 5542 can be minimized. resulting in,
The opening region of the second opening 5522 can be minimized, and the rigidity of the base plate 5520 can be ensured.

The sliding groove 5546 is an elongated hole formed through in the front-rear direction. The shaft portion 5526 of the base plate 5520 is inserted into the sliding groove 5546. Therefore, the shaft portion 5526 is provided with the sliding groove 55.
By inserting it into the 46 and fastening a screw or the like to the tip of the shaft portion 5526 from the back surface side, the distribution member 5540 can be held in a state where it can be slidably displaced with respect to the base plate 5520.

The sliding grooves 5546 are formed at two locations, and their respective longitudinal directions are formed in parallel. As a result, the distribution member 5540 can be slidably displaced while suppressing the rotational displacement of the distribution member 5540.

Next, the displacement of the distribution member 5540 will be described with reference to FIG. 135. Figure 135
(A) and FIG. 135 (b) show the distribution unit 550 in the range CXXXV of FIG. 134.
It is a partially enlarged view of 0. Note that FIG. 135 (a) shows a state in which the distribution member 5540 is arranged at the storage position, and FIG. 135 (b) shows a state in which the distribution member 5540 is arranged at the restricted position.

As shown in FIG. 135 (a), in the state where the distribution member 5540 is arranged at the regulated position, the storage plate 5542 is arranged in the shape of the third throwing path KR3, and the regulation plate 5541 is on the back side of the path forming member 510. It is arranged inside the recess 518 formed in the wall.

In this case, the distance dimension L9 between the tip protruding inward of the third throw path KR3 of the storage plate 5542 and the inner wall of the third throw path facing the tip is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the ball thrown from the upstream of the third throwing path KR3 (the first throwing path KR1) is the storage plate 55.
It is stopped on the upstream side of 42.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 135 (b), in the state where the distribution member 5540 is arranged at the regulation position, the regulation plate 5541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first throw path KR1 and the third throw path KR3. , The regulation plate 5541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first throwing path KR1 and the third throwing path KR3, and the storage plate 5542 is formed in the recess 5 formed in the wall portion on the back surface side of the path forming member 510.
It is placed inside 19.

In this case, the distance dimension L10 between the end of the tip protruding inward of the first throwing path KR1 of the regulation plate 5541 and the inner wall of the entrance of the third throwing path KR3 is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 collides with the regulation plate 5541 and is thrown to the second throwing path KR2.

That is, by switching the distribution member 5540 between the regulated position and the storage position, the ball thrown in the first throwing path KR1 is thrown into the third throwing path KR3 and stopped on the third throwing path KR3. Assuming that the ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 cannot flow into the third throwing path KR3,
It is possible to form a state in which the ball is thrown to the second throwing path KR2.

Therefore, by sliding-displaceting one distribution member 5540, it is possible to reliably switch the flow path of the sphere to either of the flow paths when the flow path is divided into the flow path of 1 and the flow path of 2.

Further, the regulation plate 5541 (distribution means) is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the first throwing path KR1 (flow passage) or the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage), and the appearance position thereof is set.
It is an inner wall on an extension line in the flow direction at the downstream end of the first throwing path KR1. Therefore, the regulation plate 5541 can be projected at a position close to the game ball flowing down from the lower end side of the first throwing path KR1. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required from the start of projecting the regulation plate 5541 to the flow-down passage or the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage) until the game ball can be distributed. As a result, the distribution destination can be reliably switched by the regulation plate 5541.

Further, the regulation plate 5541 (distribution means) projects from the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage) to allow the game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 (flowing passage) to the second throwing path (the second throwing path). It is distributed to the second branch passage), and the protruding direction of the regulation plate 5541 is set to the direction toward the upstream end of the second throwing path KR2, so that the game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 is projected. When it comes into contact with the regulation plate in the middle of, the game ball is moved to the second regulation plate as the regulation plate protrudes.
It can be pushed into the throwing path KR. As a result, distribution to the second throwing path KR2 can be performed more reliably.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 140, the rotary unit 670 in the sixth embodiment
0 will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the load gear 731e is connected to the drive of the rotating body 800 and the rotating body 800 is restricted from operating by the inertial force has been described. However, the rotating body 800 in the sixth embodiment has a load. The gear 731e is removed. The same parts as those of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the rotating unit 6700 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 138. 136 is a front view of the rotating unit 6700 according to the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 137 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotating unit 6700. FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective rear view of the distribution unit 6500.

As shown in FIGS. 136 to 138, the rotating unit 6700 is a rotating body 8 that is rotationally displaced.
A decorative unit 6750 provided with 00, a ball pedestal 710 arranged on the upper side of the decorative unit 6750 in the direction of gravity, a rear base 720 arranged on the back side of the ball pedestal 710 and the decorative unit 6750, and a decorative unit 6750. Left side transmission member 7 arranged on the left side of the front view of
30 and a crank cover 743 arranged on the right side of the front view of the decorative unit 6750 are mainly provided.

The decorative unit 6750 is a box member 760 formed in a box shape in which the upper side in the direction of gravity is opened.
And a rotating body 800 rotatably arranged inside the box member.
That is, in the first embodiment, the decorative unit 750 is formed in a state where the rotating body 800 is arranged inside the box member 760 and the lid member 770, but in the sixth embodiment, the lid member 770 is removed. NS.

The left side transmission member 730 is attached with a drive motor KM4 arranged on the left side surface (left side in FIG. 136) of the decorative unit 750, a transmission member 6731 for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor KM4, and a drive motor KM4. Mainly, the motor base 732, the gear cover 733 that covers the transmission member 6731, and the throwing path cover 734 that is attached to the gear cover 733 and is formed with a predetermined gap between the gear cover 733 and the gear cover 733. Formed in preparation.

The transmission member 6731 includes a transmission gear 731a attached to the shaft of the drive motor KM4, a transmission gear 6731b meshing with the transmission gear 731a, a transmission gear 731c meshing with the transmission gear 6731b, and a transmission gear 731c thereof. It is mainly provided with a transmission gear 731d which is arranged adjacent to and coaxially arranged by a shaft 735.

The transmission gear 6731b is a gear that transmits a driving force to the transmission gear 731c. The first
In the embodiment, the one-way clutch OW1 is attached to the inside of the transmission gear 731b, but the one-way clutch OW1 is removed from the transmission gear 6731b of the sixth embodiment. Further, since the transmission gear 731c and the transmission gear 731d are the same as those in the first embodiment,
The detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Therefore, when the driving force in one direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, the driving force for rotation can be transmitted to the shaft 735, and when the driving force in the other direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, the driving force in the other direction is transmitted to the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1. The outer ring slips (spins) and the transmission of the driving force to the shaft 735 is cut off.

Next, the rotation of the rotating body 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 and 140. 139 (a) to 139 (c) are side views of the decorative unit 6750 in the arrow CXXX direction view of FIG. 138, and FIGS. 140 (a) to 140 (c) are views of the arrow CXXXIX direction of FIG. 138. It is a side view of the decoration unit 6750 in.

In addition, in FIG. 139 and FIG. 140, the state in which the left side surface plate 765 of the box member 760 is transparently shown is shown. Further, in FIGS. 139 (a) to 139 (c), the center of gravity G of the rotating body 800 is shown.
The mode in which the second section DK2 is displaced is shown in order, and in FIGS. 140 (a) to 140 (c), the mode in which the center of gravity G of the rotating body 800 displaces the first section DK1 is shown in order.

As shown in FIG. 139, when the driving force in one direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, the rotating body 800 is rotationally displaced clockwise (clockwise) when viewed in the left direction (viewing in the 139 direction in FIG. 139).

As described above, the rotating body 800 is formed asymmetrically around the rotation axis, and the center of gravity G is arranged at a position different from the rotation axis. Therefore, the rotating body 800 is rotated from the state where the center of gravity G shown in FIG. 140 (a) is arranged above the rotation axis, and the center of gravity G shown in FIG. 140 (b) is displaced to a position substantially horizontal to the rotation axis. When started, the load exerts a force that rotates in the direction of rotation.

Therefore, the engagement of the roller interposed between the outer ring and the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1 arranged in the transmission gear 731c is released, and the outer ring (rotating body 800 side) precedes the inner ring (drive motor side). It is in a state of being driven. That is, in the second section, the rotation speed of the rotating body 800 can be made faster than the rotation speed of the drive motor KM4.

The rotating body 800 that rotates the second section DK2 under the load is shown in FIG. 13 due to the load.
The center of gravity G shown in 9 (c) is rotated to a position located below the rotation axis.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 140, when the center of gravity G of the rotating body 800 is displaced in the first section DK1, the load of the rotating body 800 acts in the direction opposite to the direction of rotation. Therefore, the rotating body 800 is rotated according to the rotation speed of the drive motor KM4.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, the displacement speed of the rotating body 800 in the second section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the rotating body 800 in the first section DK1. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the rotating body 800 and enhance the effect of the effect according to the displacement of the rotating body 800.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 144. In the first embodiment described above, the case where the lid member 770 causes the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 to precede the inner ring (that is, the displacement speed of the lid member 770 is increased) by its own weight has been described. The displacement member 7710 in the embodiment uses the weight of the game ball to lead the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 to the inner ring (that is, to increase the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710). The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

141 and 142 are schematic side views of the displacement unit 7700 according to the seventh embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 141, the state in which the displacement member 7710 is arranged in the ascending position is shown in FIG. 142.
Then, the state in which the displacement member 7710 is arranged in the descending position is schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, the displacement unit 7700 transmits the rotational driving force of a driving means (not shown, for example, an electric motor) to the displacement member 7710 formed so as to be slidable and the displacement member 7710. The transmission member 7720 and the load gear 7730 rotated with the slide displacement of the displacement member 7710 are mainly provided.

The displacement member 7710 is a member that is supported by a support mechanism (not shown) so as to be linearly displaceable along the virtual line L1, and the driven pin 7711 projecting from the side surface of the displacement member 7710.
A rack gear 7712 is mainly provided on the lower surface of the displacement member 7710 along the virtual line L1, and a ball receiving member 7713 rotatably supported at the tip of the displacement member 7710.

The virtual line L1 is set as a straight line that inclines downward from the ascending position shown in FIG. 141 toward the descending position shown in FIG. 142. That is, in the ascending position, the displacement member 7710 is positioned above the descending position in the direction of gravity.

The driven pin 7711 is a drive groove 772 in the arm member 7723 of the transmission member 7720.
It is a member slidably inserted into 3b, and is formed as a columnar body having an outer shape slightly smaller than the groove width of the drive groove 7723b. A load gear 7730 is meshed with the rack gear 7712, and the load gear 7730 is rotated with the slide displacement of the displacement member 7710.

The ball receiving member 7713 is a member for holding the game ball on the upper surface of the displacement member 7710, and by being rotated around the rotation shaft 7713a, the upright state shown in FIG. 141 and the tilted state shown in FIG. 142 can be obtained. It can be formed. In the upright state, one end side is projected from the upper surface of the displacement member 7710 so that the game ball can be held (see FIG. 143). On the other hand, in the tilted state, the one end side is positioned below the upper surface of the displacement member 7710, so that the game ball can be ejected from the upper surface of the displacement member 7710 (see FIG. 144).

The ball receiving member 7713 is maintained in an upright state by an urging force acting from an urging spring (for example, a torsion spring) (not shown). An engagement pin 7740 is fixed on the track of the displacement member 7710 (ball receiving member 7713), and when the displacement member 7710 is slid and displaced to the descending position, the engaging pin is on the other end side of the ball receiving member 7713. When the 7740 is engaged, the ball receiving member 7713 is rotated and put into a tilted state. On the other hand, when the displacement member 7710 is slid and displaced to the ascending position, the ball receiving member 7713 is rotated by the elastic recovery force of the urging spring, and the ball receiving member 7713 is rotated.
Return to the tilted state.

The transmission member 7720 is a disk-shaped rotating member 7721 that is rotationally driven by a driving means (not shown) described above, and the rotating member 772 is projected from the axial end surface of the rotating member 7721 and is projected from the axial end surface of the rotating member 7721.
A columnar drive pin 7722 located eccentrically from the center of rotation of 21 and its drive pin 772.
Arm member 77 in which a driven groove 7723a through which 2 is slidably inserted toward one end is formed.
Mainly equipped with 23.

A one-way clutch OW1 is interposed between the rotating member 7721 and the driving means. Specifically, in the one-way clutch OW1, when the inner ring is connected to the drive means, the outer ring is connected to the rotating member 7721, and the inner ring is rotationally driven by the drive means in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141). When the rotational driving force is transmitted to the outer ring (that is, the rotating member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A), while the inner ring is rotationally driven by the driving means in the direction opposite to the direction of arrow A (counterclockwise in FIG. 141). , The power transmission to the outer ring (rotating member 7721) is cut off.

The arm member 7723 has a drive groove 77 into which the driven pin 7711 of the displacement member 7710 is slidably inserted into the other end side opposite to the one end side on which the driven groove 7723a is formed.
23b is formed as an opening, and between the driven groove 7723a and the driving groove 7723b (
The intermediate portion) is rotatably supported by the rotating shaft 7723c.

The drive pin 7722 is formed as a columnar body having an outer shape slightly smaller than the groove width of the driven groove 7723a. Further, the driven groove 7723a and the drive groove 7723b are the arm member 7.
It is formed as a linear groove along the longitudinal direction of the 723.

According to the displacement unit 7700 formed as described above, the displacement member 7710 is shown in FIG. 141.
When the rotating member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141) from the state of being arranged in the ascending position shown in the above, the drive pin 7722 acts on the inner wall surface of the driven groove 7723a, and the arm member 7723 Is rotated clockwise in FIG. 141 about the rotation axis 7723c. Along with the clockwise rotation of the arm member 7723, the inner wall surface of the drive groove 7723b acts in the direction of pushing down the driven pin 7711, so that the displacement member 7710 is slidably displaced along the virtual line L1 and is shown in FIG. 142. It is placed in the descending position shown in.

On the other hand, from the state where the displacement member 7710 is arranged at the descending position shown in FIG. 142, the rotating member 7
When the 721 is further rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141), the drive pin 7722 acts on the inner wall surface of the driven groove 7723a, and the arm member 7723 is centered on the rotation shaft 7723c in the counterclockwise direction of FIG. 141. Is rotated to. As the arm member 7723 rotates counterclockwise, the inner wall surface of the drive groove 7723b acts in the direction of pushing up the driven pin 7711, so that the displacement member 7710 is slid and displaced along the virtual line L1. It is arranged in the ascending position shown in 141.

Here, the load gear 7730 is formed so as to generate a predetermined amount of resistance when rotating, similar to the load gear 731e in the first embodiment. As a result, the weight (self-weight) of the displacement member 7710 acts on the arm member 7723, and the rotating member 7721 is directed in the direction of arrow A (FIG. 141).
By rotating the one-way clutch OW1 clockwise), it is possible to prevent the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 from leading in one direction (arrow A direction) with respect to the inner ring. That is, in the state where the game ball is not held, it is possible to suppress that the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 when going from the ascending position to the descending position is increased.

That is, due to the rotational driving force of the driving means, the rotating member 7721 is moved in the direction of arrow A (FIGS. 141 and 1).
While being rotated clockwise (42), the displacement member 7710 is reciprocally displaced (slide displacement) between the ascending position and the descending position at a sliding speed corresponding to the rotational driving speed of the rotational driving means.
Will be done.

143 and 144 are schematic side views of the displacement unit 7700 when the game ball is held by the displacement member 7710. In FIG. 143, the displacement member 7710 is arranged in the ascending position, and in FIG. 144, the displacement member 7710 is arranged in the descending position.
Each is schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, the displacement member 7710 is formed on the upper surface thereof so as to be able to hold the game ball. That is, in the present embodiment, the displacement unit 7700 is arranged in the area where the game ball flows down in the game area, and the displacement member 7710 is formed so as to be able to receive the flowing game ball on the upper surface thereof. In FIG. 143, the four game balls indicated by reference numeral T are the displacement members 7.
The state held on the upper surface of the 710 is exemplified.

In this case, in the state where the displacement member 7710 holds the game ball, the weight of the displacement member 7710 as a whole is increased (heavier) by the weight of the game ball to exceed the resistance due to the rotation of the load gear 7730. Can be made to. That is, the weight of the entire displacement member 7710 (weight including the game ball) is applied to the arm member 7723, and the rotating member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 143) to rotate the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1. Can be preceded in one direction (arrow A direction) with respect to the inner ring. As a result, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 when going from the ascending position to the descending position can be made faster than the displacement speed when the game ball is not held (see FIG. 141).

Further, the weight of the displacement member 7710 as a whole can be made different according to the number of game balls held. As a result, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be changed (changed) not only depending on whether or not the game ball is held by the displacement member 7710, but also depending on the number of the game balls held. As a result, the variation of the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be increased, and the effect of the effect associated with the displacement of the displacement member 7710 can be enhanced accordingly.

As described above, the displacement member 7710 is provided with a ball receiving member 7713 at its tip (end on the downwardly inclined side). Therefore, when the displacement member 7710 (the upper surface thereof or the ball receiving member 7713) receives the game ball flowing down the game area, the displacement member 7710 is removed from the game ball.
The force acting on the can be acted as a force for sliding displacement toward the descending position. That is, the applied force can be applied to the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 in one direction (arrow A direction) with respect to the inner ring via the arm member 7723 and the rotating member 7721.

As a result, the flowing game ball is displaced by the displacement member 7710 (the upper surface thereof or the ball receiving member 771).
When 3) receives it, the kinetic energy of the game ball can be used to increase the displacement speed of the slide displacement in the direction toward the descending position of the displacement member 7710.

In this case, the flowing game balls have different flow directions and flow speeds. for that reason,
The force (magnitude of kinetic energy) applied to the displacement member 7710 can be made different according to the difference in the flow state (flow direction and flow speed) of the game ball to be received. As a result, not only whether or not the game ball is held by the displacement member 7710 and the number of the game ball held, as well as
The displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 is different (changed) depending on the flow state of the game ball.
be able to. As a result, the variation of the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be increased, and the effect of the effect associated with the displacement of the displacement member 7710 can be enhanced accordingly.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, since the rotation direction of the rotating member 7721 is unidirectional, it is not necessary to switch the driving direction of the driving means. In other words, the displacement member 7710 can be reciprocally displaced by continuously rotating the rotating means in one direction. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the time for switching the drive direction of the drive means. As a result, the displacement member 7710 can be immediately displaced by the amount that the switching of the driving means is not required.

In this case, by immediately displacementing the displacement member 7710, the ball receiving member 7713 is rotationally displaced due to the reaction when the displacement member 7710 (the upper surface thereof or the ball receiving member 7713) drops the game ball received by the displacement member 7710. It is possible to suppress the rattling of the displacement member 7710.

That is, when the game ball is dropped from the displacement member 7710 (ball receiving member 7713), the load of the displacement member 7710 is reduced by the amount of the dropped game ball, and the displacement member 7710 is likely to be displaced upward due to the reaction. However, by immediately displacing the displacement member 7710, the ball receiving member 77
By the reaction due to the displacement of 13, a force that displaces the displacement member 7710 downward can be applied to cancel the reaction when the sphere is dropped from the displacement member 7710.

The game ball flowing down the game area is not limited to the game ball that moves along the front surface (front surface) of the game board 13, but also includes the game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity. As a game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity, for example, a game ball that collides with a nail, a tulip, an object, etc. and moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity, or a game ball that rolls a stage and then jumps out of the stage. An example is a game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity.

Here, in the present embodiment, by providing the load gear 7730, when the displacement member 7710 is not holding the game ball (see FIG. 141), the displacement member 7710 is slid and displaced toward the descending position. , The outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is unidirectional with respect to the inner ring (arrow A)
It is configured so as not to precede the direction (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 does not increase).

On the other hand, when the load gear 7730 is omitted or the resistance of the load gear 7730 is set to a small value and the displacement member 7710 is slid and displaced toward the descending position, the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is displaced with respect to the inner ring. It may be configured to precede in one direction (direction of arrow A) (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 becomes faster). That is, only the weight (self-weight) of the displacement member 7710 is applied to the arm member 7723, and the rotating member 7721 is directed in the direction of arrow A (FIG. 1).
Even when the clutch is rotated clockwise (41), the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 may precede the inner ring.

Next, the upper plate 8017 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 to 148. On the upper plate 8017 in the eighth embodiment, the rotation operation unit 8650 is arranged at a substantially central position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The same parts as those of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, regarding the overall configuration of the rotation operation unit 8650 in the eighth embodiment, FIG. 145.
Will be described with reference to FIG. 147. FIG. 145 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotation operation unit 8650. FIG. 14
7 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 in the CXLVII-CXLVII line of FIG. 145.

As shown in FIGS. 145 to 147, the rotation operation unit 8650 is arranged in the internal space of the upper plate 8017 of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation unit 8654 described later protrudes outward of the upper plate 8017. It is arranged in the state of being.

The rotation operation unit 8650 includes a drive motor KM6, a transmission gear 8651 connected to the shaft portion of the drive motor KM6, and a transmission gear 86 meshed with the outer peripheral surface of the transmission gear 8651.
52, a shaft portion 8653 that is internally fitted in the shaft hole of the transmission gear 8652, a one-way clutch OW1 in which an inner ring is externally fitted in the shaft portion 8653, and a rotation operation unit 8654 in which an outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is internally fitted. It is formed mainly with and.

The transmission gear 8651 is connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM6. Therefore, the drive motor KM6
The transmission gear 8651 can be rotated by applying a rotational driving force to the gear. As mentioned above
The transmission gear 8652 is arranged in a meshed state with the transmission gear 8652. Therefore, when the driving force for rotation is applied to the drive motor KM6, the transmission gear 865 is transmitted via the transmission gear 8651.
2 can be rotated.

The shaft portion 8653 is a rod member formed in a columnar shape, and its axial length is the rotation operation portion 86.
It is formed longer than the width dimension in the left-right direction of 54. As described above, one of the shaft portions 8653 is internally fitted into the shaft hole of the transmission gear 8652, and the other is inserted into the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1. As a result, the driving force when the transmission gear 8652 is rotated can be transmitted to the one-way clutch OW1.

As described above, the one-way clutch OW1 is formed of an inner ring, an outer ring, and a roller engaged between them. When the inner ring is rotated in one direction, the rotation of the inner ring can be transmitted to the outer ring and the inner ring is moved in the other direction. When rotated, the rotation of the inner ring can be non-transmitted to the outer ring.

The rotation operation unit 8654 is formed in an annular shape, and is arranged in a state in which a part of the outer peripheral surface thereof protrudes from the upper plate 8017. Further, the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is internally fitted in the inner circle portion of the rotation operation portion 8654. That is, the inward tilt of the rotation operation unit 8654 is formed to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the one-way clutch OW1. Therefore, the rotation of the rotation operation unit 8654 is transmitted by rotating the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1.

As a result, when the drive motor KM6 is driven and rotated in one direction, the rotation is transmitted to the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 via the transmission gears 8651, 8652 and the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1, and the rotation operation unit 8654. Is rotated. On the other hand, the drive motor KM6
Is driven and rotated in the other direction, the inner ring and the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 are not transmitted, and the transmission of the rotation drive to the rotation operation unit 8654 is cut off.

Next, a case where the player operates the rotation operation unit 8654 will be described with reference to FIG. 148. FIG. 148 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10. The cross section of FIG. 148 is shown in FIG. 147.
Corresponds to.

As described above, the rotation operation unit 8654 rotates the rotation operation unit 8654 by rotating the drive motor KM6 to rotate the rotation operation unit 8654 and by making the rotation of the drive motor KM6 non-rotational. It is possible to form an embodiment in which the displacement is stopped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 148, the drive motor KM6 is rotated in one direction, and the rotation operation unit 8 is rotated.
When the 654 is rotated in the A direction, the player operates the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation unit 8654 to generate a rotational force in the rotation operation unit 8654 in the same direction as the rotation A direction.
The outer peripheral surface of W1 and the rotation operation unit 8654 are rotated in advance. That is, the rotation operation unit 865
4 can be operated at a speed higher than the rotation speed of the drive motor KM6 by the operation of the player.

Further, when the rotation operation unit 8654 is set to be non-rotational (the drive motor KM6 is non-rotational), the player applies a driving force to the rotation operation unit 8654 in the rotation A direction to rotationally displace the rotation operation unit 8654. be able to.

Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, not only the rotation operation unit 8654 forms a non-rotational or rotation state by driving the drive motor KM6, but also the rotation operation unit 8654 rotates from the stopped state by the operation of the player. And the rotation operation unit 8654 can be formed in a mode in which the rotation operation unit 8654 is rotated at a higher speed from the rotation state by the operation of the player.

As a result, it is possible to form a plurality of modes in which the player can visually recognize the displacement mode of the rotation operation unit 8654, which can give the player an interest. Further, by forming a plurality of rotation modes of the rotation operation unit 8654, it is possible to form a plurality of production modes of the pachinko machine 10, so that the effect can be increased and the player can be given a hobby.

A sensor device or the like for measuring the number of rotations is arranged on the side surface of the rotation operation unit 8654, and it is possible to perform an effect that is changed based on the rotation speed and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 8654.

Next, the first link member 9431 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 149. The plate-shaped projection 9431b of the first link member 9431 in the ninth embodiment includes an inclined surface 9431b1 formed by inclining the contact surface with the cam member 422. The same parts as those of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 149 (a) is a perspective front view of the first link member 9431 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 149 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400. In addition, FIG. 149 (b)
Corresponds to the schematic cross-sectional view of FIG. 56 (a).

The lower displacement unit 400 in the ninth embodiment is the same as the lower displacement unit 400 in the first embodiment, the base member 410 arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and the base member 410 thereof. A transmission member 420 disposed on the base member 410 and a transmission member 4 thereof.
A lower displacement member 440 (see FIG. 45) that is displaced by transmitting a driving force from 20 is provided. Further, the lower displacement unit 400 in the ninth embodiment is connected to the base member 410 and the lower displacement member 440, and the link member 94 is displaced by driving the transmission member 420.
30 is provided, and the lower displacement member 440 is displaced by the displacement of the link member 9430.

As shown in FIG. 149, the first link member 9431 in the ninth embodiment is formed by being bent into a dogleg shape in front view, and is formed into a plate shape having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The first link member 9431 has a through hole 431a penetrating in the front-rear direction on one end side (the side in the direction of arrow D in FIG. A columnar connecting projection 431c (see FIG. 46), a plate-shaped projection 9431b projecting at a position facing the curved wall portion 411e of the base member 410, and a columnar sliding projection 431d projecting to the front side of the bent portion. And prepare.

The plate-shaped protrusion 9431b is extended in a curved shape about the axis of the through hole 431a, and is projected toward the front side (front base 411 side (arrow F direction side)). In addition, the plate-shaped protrusion 94
The protrusion dimension of 31b is set to be larger than the thickness (arrow FB direction dimension) dimension of the cam member 422. Further, the base member 410 (curved wall portion 411e) facing the protruding tip surface of the plate-shaped protrusion 9431b is arranged with a slight gap (distance X14 (see FIG. 149 (b))).

The cam member 422 is arranged in a displaceable state between the front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-shaped projection 9431b and the projecting surface (rear surface) of the curved wall portion 411e facing each other. Further, the dimensions of the two gaps including the gap between the cam member 422 and the first link member 9431 facing each other and the gap between the cam member 422 and the base member 410 facing each other are larger than the above-mentioned distance X14. It is set large.

As a result, the first link member 9 is in the direction in which the above-mentioned distance X14 becomes smaller (arrow F direction).
When the 431 bends, the protruding tip surface of the plate-shaped protrusion 9431b can be brought into contact with the facing base member 410 (curved wall portion 411e). Therefore, the cam member 42 is located between the front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-shaped protrusion 9431b and the projecting surface (rear surface) of the curved wall portion 411e.
It is possible to prevent the displacement from being regulated by being pinched by 2.

Further, the plate-shaped projection 9431b is provided with an inclined surface 9431b1 that projects toward the front side toward the cam member 422 on the side surface in the circumferential direction of the cam member 422 side (the side in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 149 (b)). As shown in FIG. 149 (b), the inclined surface 9431b1 has a protruding side (arrow F direction side).
It is formed with an inclination of approximately 45 degrees toward.

As a result, when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state and the end portion of the cam member 422 comes into contact with the plate-shaped protrusion 9431b, the cam member 422 is placed on the back surface of the first link member 9431 (on the side in the arrow F direction). It can be pressed (displaced) against the surface), and the first link member 94
The protruding tip surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow F) of the plate-shaped protrusion 9431b of 31 can be pressed against the curved wall portion 411e. As a result, it is possible to suppress the cam member 422 and the first link member 9431 from swinging in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and it is possible to easily maintain the lower displacement member 440 in the position of the second displacement state.

In this case, it is preferable that a flat surface parallel to the inclined surface 9431b1 is formed at the end portion of the cam member 422 at the contact portion with the inclined surface 9431b1. As a result, the cam member 422
When the inclined surface 9431b1 and the inclined surface 9431b1 come into contact with each other, the cam member 422 can be easily displaced toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side).

Then, with reference to FIG. 150, the general winning opening unit 10150 in the tenth embodiment.
Will be explained. In the first embodiment, the general winning opening unit 150 is the adhesive tape 1.
Although the case where the 54a is attached to the end portion of the decorative member 154 has been described, in the tenth embodiment, the adhesive tape 10154a is attached to the inside separated from the end portion of the decorative member 10154 by a predetermined width. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 150 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 according to the tenth embodiment. In addition, FIG. 150 is shown in FIG.
Corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. In addition, the general winning opening unit 1015 in the tenth embodiment
0 is arranged in the game area (front of the base plate 60) of the game board 13 like the general winning opening unit 150 in the first embodiment, and the route of the game ball flowing down the game area can be changed. .. Further, the general winning opening unit 10150 is the end on the lower side (arrow D direction side) in the gravity direction in the front view (arrow B direction view) with respect to the game area formed by being surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77. It is placed along the part.

Further, the general winning opening unit 10150 has a main body portion 151 formed in a crescent shape in front view, and a first standing portion 152 erected on the front side (arrow F direction side) from the end portion of the main body portion 151. (See FIG. 12) and the second erection portion 153 extending from the end of the first erection portion 152 on the upper side in the gravity direction (arrow U direction side) toward the center side of the game area (FIG. 12 (FIG. 12). a)) and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) general winning openings 63 (see FIG. 12A) formed on the front side of the main body portion 151.

As shown in FIG. 150, the general winning opening unit 10150 in the tenth embodiment includes a decorative member 10154 arranged on the back surface of the main body portion 10151. In the decorative member 10154, the adhesive tape 10154a to be adhered to the main body portion 151 is attached to the inside of the decorative member 10154 so as to be separated from the end portion by a predetermined width. As a result, the thickness of the adhesive tape 10154a is reduced.
A predetermined gap (space) is formed at the end of the decorative member 10154 between the main body portion 151 and the decorative member 10154. As a result, the player has an angle equal to or greater than a predetermined angle (for example, the pachinko machine 10 (FIG. 1).
When the general winning opening unit 10150 is visually recognized from the viewpoint of the same height as the upper end in the gravity direction of the reference), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the boundary between the decorative member 60c and the decoration of the decorative member 10154. ..

More specifically, by forming an air layer between the decorative member 10154 and the main body 151, the inside of the main body 151 is reflected and the player side is seen from the end (inclined surface 151a) of the main body 151. It is possible to prevent the light L emitted from the light L from being affected by the decoration at the end portion of the decorative member 10154 (making it difficult for the wavelength of the light L to be changed). Further, the light that has passed through the inside of the adhesive tape 10154a and is affected by the decoration of the decorative member 10154 is repeatedly reflected inside the main body portion 151 and is emitted to the outside of the main body portion 151. The influence of the decoration of the decorative member 10154 can be reduced when the light is reflected toward the viewpoint.

Therefore, it is possible to reduce the change in the wavelength of the light L emitted to the player, and when the player visually recognizes the general winning opening unit 10150 from a predetermined angle or more, the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 10154 are decorated. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize the boundary of. As a result, the decorative member 60c is viewed from a normal angle (for example, a viewpoint having a height substantially equal to the position substantially intermediate in the gravity direction of the game board 13).
When the player visually recognizes the decoration of the decorative member 10154, the decorative member 60c of the base plate and the decoration of the decorative member 10154 can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration, and at a predetermined angle (for example, pachinko). A viewpoint at the same height as the upper end of the machine 10 (see Fig. 1) in the direction of gravity)
When visually recognizing from, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the decoration at the boundary portion and to make it difficult for the player to understand that the decoration is divided.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 151 to 153, the lower displacement member 114 in the eleventh embodiment.
40 will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the decorative member 450 is irradiated with light by the control board 491 arranged on the back surface side of the lower displacement member 440 has been described, but the lower displacement member 11440 of the eleventh embodiment is the control board. The position of the game ball inside can be recognized by the player by the light emitted from 491. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 151 and 152, the lower displacement member 114 in the eleventh embodiment.
The overall configuration of 40 will be described. FIG. 151 shows the lower displacement member 11 in the eleventh embodiment.
It is an exploded perspective front view of 440. FIGS. 152 (a) and 152 (b) show the lower displacement member 11.
It is a front view of 440. In FIG. 152 (a), the outer shape of the light emitting body 11491a arranged on the control board 491 is shown by a chain line, and in FIG. 152 (b), the state in which the decorative member 11450 is removed is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 152 (a) and 152 (b), the lower displacement member 11440 in the eleventh embodiment is the base member 470 connected to the front base 411 (see FIG. 45) and the front and rear of the base member 470. Case member 480, case member 480 and base member 4
It is mainly provided with a transmission mechanism 11460 displaceably arranged between the 70s, and a decorative member 11450 formed so as to cover the front and rear (arrow FB direction) of the case member 480.

The decorative member 11450 is formed in an outer shape imitating a pattern or a character, and a picture of the pattern or the character is drawn on the surface thereof. The decorative member 11450 has a front side decorative portion 11451 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the front case 481 and a back side decorative portion 11451 arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 482. It is formed mainly with 452. In this embodiment, a shark pattern (character) is drawn on the decorative member 11450.

The front side decorative portion 11451 is formed in an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the front case 481 in the front view, and is attached to the front case 481. As a result, the members (case member 480, base member 470, etc.) arranged on the back side of the front side decorative portion 11451 can be made invisible to the player. Further, the front-side decorative portion 11451 includes a transmission portion 11451b formed of a light-transmitting material inside in front view.

The transmission unit 11451b is a plurality of light emitters 11491 arranged on a control board 491 to be described later.
It is formed in the entire area of the position facing a, and can guide the light emitted from the plurality of light emitters 11491a to the player side. Further, the transmission portion 11451b is on the front side (arrow F direction side).
Is formed so as to be curved toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side) toward the outer end portion in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). As a result, the light incident from the back surface side of the transmitting portion 11451b is transmitted through the transmitting portion 11.
When it passes through the inside of 451b and is emitted from the front side, it is easily diffused.

The transmission mechanism 11460 is a member arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member 470, and includes a transmission gear 461, 462, 463, a drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461, and a drive motor KM2. A movable rack 464 having a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463 and rotatably arranged on the front side of the base member 470 so as to be slidable, a transmission gear 465 rotatably arranged on the movable rack 464, and a base. A movable rack 46 having a tooth surface rack gear 476 formed on the member 470 and meshed with the transmission gear 465 and a tooth surface meshed with the transmission gear 465.
Rack 11466 and its rack 11466 are arranged so that the front side of 4 can be slidably displaced.
Mainly includes a ball receiving portion 467 which is rotatably arranged on one end side of the above.

The rack 11466 is formed of a horizontally long rod-shaped body having a rectangular front view, and has a rack gear 466a engraved on the upper end surface and a rear end side (arrow B direction side) from the other end side (arrow L direction side) in the longitudinal direction. A shaft portion 466b projecting in a columnar shape, two sliding plates 466c projecting toward the front side (arrow F direction side), and a recess in the back surface from one end in the longitudinal direction (arrow R direction side) to the other end. A recessed portion 466d (see FIG. 59) to be provided, and a shielding plate 11466e projecting upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the front side of the rack gear 466a are provided.

The shielding plate 11466e is made of a non-light transmissive material, and can block the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a. Further, the shielding plate 11466e has an upward protrusion height (
The height in the arrow U direction) is set to a position higher than the light emitter 11491a arranged on the back surface side (the position on the arrow U direction side). As a result, with the displacement of the rack 11466, the shielding plate 1146
The light emitted from the light emitter 11491a can be blocked by displacing 6e in the front-back direction (arrow FB direction).

The control board 491 is arranged on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the base member 470, and includes a plurality of light emitting bodies 11491a capable of irradiating light on the front surface side. The plurality of light emitters 11491a are arranged side by side in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the lower displacement member 11440, and are arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) via the base member 470. It is arranged above 467 (in the direction of arrow U). As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball receiving unit 467 from blocking the light emitted from the light emitting unit 11491a.

Next, a state in which the game ball is thrown inside the ball receiving portion 467 will be described with reference to FIG. 153. 153 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 11440, and FIG. 153 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 11440 in the CLIIIb-CLIIIb line of FIG. 153 (a). ) Is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 11440 in the CLIIIc-CLIIIc line of FIG. 153 (a).

As shown in FIG. 153, when the game ball is received by the ball receiving portion 467, the accepted game ball is arranged at a position overlapping the front side (arrow F direction side) of the light emitting body 11491a. As a result, the game ball received by the ball receiving unit 467 can block the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a to the player side. As a result, the position of the game ball thrown inside the lower displacement member 11440 can be recognized by the player by the shadow formed by blocking the light.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the control board 491 is provided on the back surface side of the decorative member 11450 and can emit light toward the displacement region of the ball receiving portion 467, and the control board 491 is the ball receiving portion 46.
The light emitted from the control board 491 is blocked by the game ball arranged on the back surface side of the 7 and received by the ball receiving portion 467 or the ball receiving portion 467, and the amount of light emitted from the decorative member 11450 is reduced. Since they are partially different, the amount of light emitted from the decorative member 11450 located on the front side of the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 or the ball receiving portion 467 and the light emitted from the decorative member 11450 at other positions are emitted. By making the amount of light different from that of the light (darkening to form a shadow), the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 or the ball receiving portion 467 is located on the back side of the portion having the different light amount. It can be recognized by the player.

More specifically, when the control board 491 is arranged on the back side of the ball receiving portion 467, the light emitted from the control board 491 is blocked by the ball receiving portion 467 or the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the decorative member 11450 on the front side of the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 or the ball receiving portion 467 can be made darker than the other parts of the decorative member 11450. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 or the ball receiving portion 467 is located on the back side of the portion where the amount of light emitted from the decorative member 11450 is small (dark).

Further, the ball receiving portion 467 is formed in a shape that receives the lower hemisphere of the game ball, and is a light emitter 1149.
Since 1a is arranged at a position higher than the center of the game ball accepted by the ball receiving portion 467,
It is possible to make it difficult for the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a to be applied to the ball receiving portion 467. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 46 that receives the game ball by the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a.
7 and the outer shape of the rack 11466 that slide-displaces the ball receiving portion 467 become a shadow, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a shadow on the transmission portion 11451b. As a result, since the shadow can be formed on the transmission portion 11451b only by the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467, the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced while the game ball is not received by the ball receiving portion 467. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player's line of sight from paying attention to the ball receiving portion 467.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155, the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment.
Will be explained. In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a by the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 is blocked has been described, but in the twelfth embodiment, the second embodiment is arranged in the ball receiving portion 12467. The light emitted from the illuminant 11491a is shielded by the three pieces 12467e. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 154. FIG. 154 (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 154 (b) is a front view of the ball receiving portion 12467. In addition, FIG. 154 (a)
), A part of the ball receiving portion 12467 is shown by a chain line.

The lower displacement member 12440 in the twelfth embodiment is the base member 470 connected to the front base 411 (see FIG. 45) and the front and rear of the base member 470, similarly to the lower displacement member 11440 in the eleventh embodiment. Case member 480 that covers the case member and case member 480
The decorative member 11450, which is formed so as to cover the front and back (direction of the arrow FB) of the above, is mainly provided. Further, the lower displacement member 12440 in the twelfth embodiment is a case member 480.
And a transmission mechanism 12460 having a ball receiving portion 12467c displaceably disposed between the base members 470 and deformable by receiving a game ball.

As shown in FIG. 154, the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment includes a first piece 12467c formed by bending in a substantially L-shape in front view and a second piece 12467d connected to the first piece 12467c. , A third piece 12467e connected to the second piece 12467d and disposed on the back side of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d.

The first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d are portions for holding the game ball thrown inside the lower displacement member 12440 from the opening 451a (see FIG. 57), and the first piece 12467c.
And when the game ball is thrown between the opposite pieces of the second piece 12467d, the second piece 12467d is displaced in the direction away from the first piece 12467c, and a part of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12
The 467d and the 467d are arranged in a U shape in front view, and the game ball can be held in the inner portion of the U shape.

The first piece 12467c includes a receiving piece 12467c4 forming an L-shape in a front view, a leg portion 467a forming the other extending side, and a receiving piece 12467c4 and a leg portion 467a. An annular bent portion 12467c5 in which a shaft hole 467b penetrating in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) is formed in the connecting portion (bending portion), and a connecting portion 12467c1 projecting to the opposite side with the bent portion 12467c5 in between. And prepare.

The receiving piece 12467c4 is a portion forming the side surface of the other side (arrow R direction side) formed in a U shape in front view by the 1 piece 12467c and the 2nd piece 12467d, and is formed in a crescent shape in the front. It is formed in a curved shape that is concave in the direction away from the second piece 12467d.

The connecting portion 12467c1 is projected from two positions at a predetermined interval in the axial direction (arrow FB direction) of the bent portion 12467c5. Further, the connecting portion 12467c1 is a second piece 1 described later.
It is a portion that connects 2467d and the third piece 12467e, and includes a connecting hole 12467c2 that extends along the axial direction of the shaft hole 467b and is opened in a circular cross section.

The connecting hole 12467c2 is a shaft portion 12467e projecting from a third piece 12467e, which will be described later.
The opening into which 3 is inserted. In the connecting hole 12467c2, the shaft portion 12467e3 inserted into the insertion hole 12467d3 formed in the second piece 12467d, which will be described later, is on the back side (arrow B direction side).
Is inserted from. Further, the shaft portion 12467e3 is fastened by a screw inserted from the side opposite to the insertion side (front side (arrow F direction side)) of the connecting hole 12467c2. Thereby, the second piece 12467d and the third piece 12467e can be fastened to the first piece 12467c.

Further, the first piece 12467c is provided with a recess 12467c3 that is recessed downward in the gravity direction (side in the arrow D direction) on the projecting base end side of the connecting portion 12467c1. The concave bottom surface of the recess 12467c3 is formed at the lowest position (bottom) of the bottom surface where the game ball is held by the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d. As a result, the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d
The game ball held in the recess 12467c3 is rolled inward.

The second piece 12467d is a receiving piece 12467c4 and a second piece 124 of the first piece 12467c.
It is a portion forming the side surface of the other side (arrow L direction side) formed by 67d in a U shape in front view, is formed in a crescent shape in front view, and is concave in a direction away from the receiving piece 12467c4. It is formed in a curved shape. In addition, the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d
An insertion hole 12467d3 that opens in a circular shape in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) in the connecting portion of
It mainly includes a recessed portion 12467d2 that is recessed in a circular cross section from the back surface side (arrow B direction side) to the front side (arrow F direction side).

The second piece 12467d has a shaft portion 1246 of the third piece 12467e in the insertion hole 12467d3.
7e3 is inserted, and the connecting shaft 12467e of the third piece 12467e is inserted into the recessed portion 12467d2.
4 is inserted. Therefore, when the second piece 12567d is displaced, the third piece 12467e is also displaced as well. Therefore, when the second piece 12567d is rotationally displaced with respect to the first piece 12467c, the third piece 12567e is also rotationally displaced with respect to the first piece 12467c.

Further, the second piece 12467d is a connecting portion 12 projecting from two places of the first piece 12467c.
It is disposed between the opposite sides of 467c1 and is connected to the first piece 12467c. As a result, the second
When the piece 12467d is twisted in the axial direction of the insertion hole 12467d3, the connecting portion 12467c
It is possible to prevent the shaft portion 12467e3 from breaking by bringing the second piece 12467d into contact with the side surface on the opposite side of 1.

The recessed portion 12467d2 is a hole for inserting the connecting shaft 12467e4 of the third piece 12467e, which will be described later, and is recessed in substantially the same shape as the connecting shaft 12467e4.

The third piece 12467e includes a shielding plate 12467e1 formed in a substantially semicircular front view and a shielding plate 12467e1.
Shaft portion 124 projecting from the shielding plate 12467e1 toward the front side (arrow F direction side)
It includes 67e3 and a connecting shaft 12467e4.

The shield plate 12467e1 is formed of a non-light transmissive material and is a light emitter 11491a.
When arranged on the front side of the light emitter, the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a can be shielded. The light shielding of the light emitter 11491a by the shielding plate 12467e1 will be described later.

As described above, the shaft portion 12467e3 is a cylindrical body inserted into the connecting hole 12467c2 of the first piece 12467c and the insertion hole 12467d3 of the second piece 12467d. In addition, the shaft portion 1
In the protruding tip surface of 2467e3, a connecting hole 124 is provided from the side opposite to the insertion side of the shaft portion 12467e3.
A hole is formed in which the screw to be inserted into 67c2 can be screwed. Therefore, with the shaft portion 12467e3 inserted into the connecting hole 12467c2 and the insertion hole 12467d3, the shaft portion 12467e3
By fastening a screw to the insertion tip surface of, the first piece 12467c, the second piece 12467d and the third piece 12467e can be connected, and the third piece 12467e can be connected to the first piece 1246.
It can be made rotatable with respect to 7c.

As described above, the connecting shaft 12467e4 has a recessed portion 12467d of the second piece 12467d.
It is inserted in 2. As a result, the second piece 12467d has the shaft portion 1 with respect to the first piece 12467c.
When rotationally displaced around 2467e3, the connecting shaft 12467e4 can be displaced along with the displacement of the second piece 12467d. Therefore, the third piece 12467e is replaced with the second piece 12467.
It can be displaced with the displacement of d.

Next, with reference to FIG. 155, the displacement of the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment will be described in detail. 155 (a) and 155 (b) are front views of the lower displacement member 12440, and FIG. 155 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 12440 in the CLVc-CLVc line of FIG. 155 (b). be. In FIGS. 155 (a) and 155 (b), a part of the lower displacement member 12440 and the light emitting body 11491a are shown by a chain line. Also, FIG. 155.
In (a), the state before the game ball is received (held) by the ball receiving portion 12467 is illustrated, and in FIG. 155 (b), the game ball is received (held) by the ball receiving portion 12467. rice field)
The state is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 155, in the ball receiving portion 12467, in the state before the game ball is received between the opposite pieces of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d, the second piece 12467d is the first due to the load of the third piece 12467e. It is considered to be in a state of approaching the piece 12467c side, and the third piece 12467e
Is located below the illuminant 11491a disposed on the back surface side of the ball receiving portion 12467. Therefore, before the game ball is received by the ball receiving unit 12467, the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a can be emitted to the player side.

On the other hand, when the game ball is received between the opposite pieces of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d, the accepted game ball is formed on the receiving surface (front view U-shape) of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d. The concave portion 12 located at the lowermost end of the receiving surface by rolling the inner side surface)
You will be guided to 467c3. As a result, the second piece 12467d is attached to the shaft portion 124 on the outer surface of the game ball.
It can be rotated around 67e3 in a direction away from the first piece 12467c. As a result, the third piece 12467e, which moves with the displacement of the second piece 12467d, is moved to the ball receiving portion 1246.
It can be arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the light emitting body 11491a arranged on the back side of 7.

Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a is emitted from the shielding plate 1246 of the third piece 12467e.
It can be shielded by 7e1. As a result, the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a can be easily shielded only when the game ball is received by the ball receiving portion 12467. Therefore, the position of the game ball received by the lower displacement member 12440 can be determined by the light emitting body 11491a. The player can be made to recognize the position of the shadow that blocks the light.

Further, in the second piece 12467d, the connecting shaft 12467e4 is inserted into the recessed portion 12467d2, and the load of the third piece 12467e is always applied. Center of gravity G of the third piece 12467e (FIG. 1)
54 (b)) is set on the opposite side of the connecting portion with the second piece 12567d and the third piece 12567e with the shaft portion 12467e3 interposed therebetween. As a result, in a state where no force other than gravity acts on the second piece 12467d and the third piece 12467de, the load of the third piece 12467e can rotate the second piece 12467d to the first piece 12467c4 side. ..

Therefore, when the game ball is ejected (taken out) from the ball receiving portion 12467, the third piece 124
The load of 67e can displace the second piece 12467d to the ball receiving piece 12467c4 side of the first piece 12467c.

Further, the ball receiving portion 12467 is rotated around the shaft hole 12467b by the operation of sliding displacement inside the lower displacement member 12440, similarly to the ball receiving portion 467 in the first embodiment, and the lower displacement member 12440 is emitted. The game ball received from the opening 471 (see FIG. 66) is discharged to the outside.

Here, as a structure for discharging the game ball received by the ball receiving unit 12467, the ball receiving unit 12
In the structure in which the ball receiving portion 12467 is rotated around the shaft hole 467b with the slide movement of the 467, the ball receiving portion 12 centering on the shaft hole 467b is caused by the sliding speed of the ball receiving portion 12467.
The rotation speed of 467 is changed. Therefore, since the rotation speed depends only on the slide speed of the ball receiving portion 12467, there is a problem that the discharging speed of the game ball from the ball receiving portion 12467 is not stable.

On the other hand, in the twelfth embodiment, the load of the third piece 12467e causes the second piece 12467.
Since the direction in which d rotates and the rotation direction of the ball receiving portion 12467 about the shaft hole 467b when the game ball is ejected are set in substantially the same direction, the gaming ball emitted from the exit opening 471 is set to substantially the same direction. A driving force can be applied when the second piece 12467d is displaced. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 124
Even if the force acting on the game ball from the ball receiving portion 12467 when the game ball is ejected from the exit opening 471 by displacing the 67 is reduced, the speed of the game ball to be emitted can be maintained. As a result, the ejection speed of the game ball emitted from the ball receiving portion 12467 can be stabilized.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 156 to 158, the special winning device 13 according to the thirteenth embodiment.
550 will be described. In the first embodiment, the first unit 5 of the special winning device 550
The case where the throwing path of the game ball flowing into the inside of the 51 is switched by the first and second drive units 583 and 584 of the third path member 580 has been described, but in the thirteenth embodiment, the throwing path of the special winning device 13550 By changing the facing interval, the flow path of the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 is adjusted. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 156 and 157, the special winning device 13 according to the thirteenth embodiment.
The overall configuration of the 550 will be described. 156 (a) is a front view of the special winning device 13550 according to the thirteenth embodiment, FIG. 156 (b) is a perspective front view of the special winning device 13550, and FIG. 156 (c) is FIG. 156 (c). It is sectional drawing of the special winning apparatus 13550 in the CLVIc-CLVIc line of a). FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective front view of the special winning device 13550.

As shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, the special winning device 13550 according to the thirteenth embodiment.
Includes a first path member 13560 disposed on the front side and a second path member 13570 disposed on the back side of the first path member 13560.

The first path member 13560 is a front plate 13564 formed in a plate shape along the front of the game area of the game board 13, and projects from the left and right ends of the front plate 13564 to the back side (base plate 60 side). The first wall portion 13565 to be formed is mainly provided.

The front plate 13564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side of the flow path of the game ball formed between facing the second path member 13570, which will be described later, and is formed of a light transmitting member. As a result, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 via the front plate 13564. Further, the front plate 13564 has a first convex portion 13564b and a second convex portion 13564c protruding toward the second path member 13570 side, and the first convex portion 13564b and the second.
The third convex portion 135 located below the convex portion 13564c and projecting toward the second path member 13570 side.
64d and.

The first convex portion 13564b and the second convex portion 13564c are protrusions for guiding the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550, and are outside of the front plate 13564 in the left-right direction (arrow L).
It is formed by inclining downward from the outer side in the −R direction toward the center side in the left-right direction of the front plate 13564.

The third convex portion 13564d is located at the center of the front plate 13564 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) and extends in the gravity direction (arrow UD direction). In the thirteenth embodiment, in the game area of the game board 13, the throwing path of the game ball flowing down from the special prize device 13550 is different on the left and right at the substantially center position in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) of the special prize device 13550. , Special winning device 1
The game ball flowing down from the left side of the front view of the 3550 is thrown to the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 2).
The thrown game ball gives the player a specific game value (a predetermined number of game balls are paid out). On the other hand, the game ball flowing down from the right side of the front view of the special winning device 13550 is sent to the out port 71 of the game board 13 and collected by the pachinko machine 10.

In the thirteenth embodiment, it is below the left side (arrow L direction side) of the special winning device 13550 (the arrow L direction side).
The first winning opening 64 is arranged on the side in the direction of the arrow D. As a result, the game ball flowing down from the left side of the front view of the special winning device 13550 can flow into the first winning opening 64.

The first wall portion 13565 is a portion that connects the base plate 60 of the game board 13 and the special winning device 13550, and the connecting plates 13565a projecting outward to the left and right at the tip of the protrusion are connected to the left and right first wall portions 13565, respectively. Prepare two places each.

The connecting plate 13565a is formed through a through hole 13565a1 for inserting a screw for fastening the special winning device 13550 to the base plate 60 of the game board 13. This through hole 13
The special winning device 13550 can be fastened to the base plate 60 by the screw inserted through the 565a1.

The second path member 13570 is a plate-shaped base plate 13571 facing the front plate 13564 of the first path member 13560, and the first path member 13560 from the left and right (arrow LR direction) ends of the base plate 13571. A fourth wall portion 13573, which is projected on the front plate 13564 side, is provided.

The base plate 13571 is a member that forms a throwing path for a game ball in a gap between the first path member 13560 facing the front plate 13564, and the outer shape in front view is formed smaller than the outer shape of the front plate 13564. As a result, the front side of the base plate 1356 is set to the front plate 1356.
Since it can be covered with 4, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the base plate 13571.

Further, the base plate 13571 has a fourth convex portion 1357 protruding toward the first path member 13560.
1b, the fifth convex portion 13571c, and the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c.
A sixth convex portion 13571d, which is located below the front plate and protrudes to the front plate 13564 side, is mainly provided.

The fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c are protrusions for guiding the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550, and are from the left-right direction outer side (arrow (LR direction outer side)) of the base plate 13571. It is formed by inclining downward toward the center side of the base plate 13571.

The sixth convex portion 13571d is formed at a position facing the third convex portion 13564d described above, and is formed to have a length having a predetermined gap from the tip of the third convex portion 13564d. The third
The gap between the convex portion 13564d and the sixth convex portion 13571d facing each other is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

In the fourth wall portion 13573, two fastening holes 13573a for fastening the screw inserted through the first path member 13560 are bored in each of the left and right fourth wall portions 13573. As a result, the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 are fastened and fixed.

Further, around the fastening hole 13573a of the fourth wall portion 13573, the first path member 13560
A shim member SI for adjusting the gap between the surface and the second path member 13570 is arranged.

The shim member SI is made of a thin plate-shaped transparent material, which makes it difficult for the player to see. Further, in the present embodiment, the shim member SI is arranged at the end on the left side of the front view, and the distance between the front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 on the left side of the front view is increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 158, a game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 158 (a) is a top view of the special winning device 13550, and FIG. 158 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device 13550 in the CLVIIIb-CLVIIIb line of FIG. 158 (a).

As shown in FIG. 158, the special winning device 13550 has a shim member SI at the left end when viewed from the front.
Is arranged, and the distance L14 between the front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 158 (a)) is the front plate 13564 and the base plate 1 on the right side of the front view.
It is set to be larger than the distance L15 between facing each other (see FIG. 158 (a)) (L1).
4> L15).

The distance L14 is the distance between the left end (side in the direction of arrow L) at the position where the front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 face each other. Further, the distance L15 is the distance between the right end (side in the direction of the arrow R) at the position where the front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 face each other. Further, the interval L15 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the special winning device 1355
A game ball flowing down from above 0 can flow into the inside of the special winning device 13550 from any position in the left-right direction (L14>L15> diameter of the game ball).

Further, the special winning device 13550 is divided into left and right on the downstream side by the third convex portion 13564d and the sixth convex portion 13571d. As a result, the game ball flowing down the main path SK1 (see FIG. 158 (b)) on the upstream side of the special winning device 13550 is on the main path SK2 formed on the left side of the front view of the special winning device 13550 and on the right side of the front view. It flows into either one of the formed sub-pathways HK1. As described above, the gaming area on the downstream side of the special winning device 13550 is
The throwing path is formed differently at the substantially center position in the left-right direction of the special winning device 13550.
Therefore, the game ball thrown from the main path SK2 to the game area is thrown to a specific winning opening, and the game ball thrown from the sub-path HK1 to the game area is sent to the out port 71 of the game board 13.

Further, the first convex portion 13564b and the second convex portion 13564c of the above-mentioned front plate 13564
And the protrusion dimensions of the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c of the base plate 13571 are set to be substantially the same. That is, the protruding dimensions of the first convex portion 13565b and the second convex portion 13564c protruding from the front plate 13564 toward the back surface side are set to be the same. again,
The fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13 projecting from the base plate 13571 toward the front side.
The protrusion dimension is set to be the same as that of 571c. Further, the first convex portion 13565b and the fourth
The protruding dimension is set to be the same as that of the convex portion 13571b.

Further, the first convex portion 13564b and the second convex portion 13564c and the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c are arranged at positions having different heights in the vertical direction. That is, the front plate 13
The first convex portion 13565b and the second convex portion 13564c protruding from 564 toward the back surface side are projected from the same height. Further, the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c protruding from the base plate 13571 toward the front side are projected from the same height. Further, the first convex portion 13565b and the fourth convex portion 13571b are arranged at different heights, and the fourth convex portion 13571b is arranged below the first convex portion 13565b. Further, a lower side of the first convex portion 13565b projecting from two points in the gravity direction is arranged at an intermediate position of the fourth convex portion 13571b projecting from two points in the gravity direction.

As a result, the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 is moved to the first convex portion 13564b.
And the fourth convex portion 13571b or the second convex portion 13564c and the fifth convex portion 13571c can be made to flow down while colliding in order. As a result, the game ball is placed on the first convex portion 13564b and the second convex portion.
It can flow down along the extending direction of the convex portion 13564c, the fourth convex portion 13571b, and the fifth convex portion 13571c.

The front plate 13564 and the fourth convex portion 1357 on the left side of the front view of the special winning device 13550.
The distance dimension L16 (see FIG. 158 (a)) between the facing of the base plate 13571 or the first convex portion 13564b is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball by the shim member SI, and the special winning device 13550. Front plate 13564 and fifth convex portion 1357 on the right side of the front view
The distance dimension L17 between the facing 1c or the base plate 13571 and the second convex portion 13564c is
It is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

The interval L16 is the fifth convex portion 13 of the fourth convex portion 13571b and the first convex portion 13564b.
Front plate 13564 at the ends of 571c and the second convex portion 13564c side (arrow R direction side)
Alternatively, it is a distance dimension between facing the base plate 13571. Further, the interval L17 is the fifth convex portion 1
The fourth convex portion 13571b and the first convex portion 13564b of the 3571c and the second convex portion 13564c
It is a distance dimension between facing the front plate 13564 or the base plate 13571 at the end on the side (arrow L direction side).

Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, the first winning opening 64 is arranged below the left side (arrow L direction side) of the special winning device 13550 (the first winning opening 64 is arranged on the arrow D direction side), whereby the special winning device 13550 is viewed from the front left side. The flowing game ball can flow into the first winning opening 64.

Therefore, the special winning device 13 is viewed from the right side of the front view (the side in the direction of arrow R) of the special winning device 13550.
The game balls flowing into the main path SK1 of the 550 are the second convex portion 13564c and the fifth convex portion 135.
It is easy to come into contact with the 71c, and it is easy to flow down along the extending direction of the second convex portion 13564c and the fifth convex portion 13571c and to be easily guided to the sub-path HK1 side. On the other hand, the special prize device 1355
The game ball flowing into the main path SK1 of the special winning device 13550 from the left side of the front view of 0 (arrow L direction side) is made difficult to collide with the first convex portion 13564b and the fourth convex portion 13571b, and directly enters the sub path HK1. It becomes easier to throw a ball. As a result, the flow direction of the game ball that has flowed into the special winning device 13550 can be changed.

In this embodiment, the first convex portion 13564b, the second convex portion 13564c, and the fourth convex portion 13
571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c are the sixth convex portion 13571d and the third convex portion 13564d.
It is formed above (in the direction of arrow U) above (the inlet of the game ball between the main path HK1 and the sub-path SK6). Therefore, most of the game balls flowing down the main path SK1 can be caused to flow down to the sub-path HK1, and a relatively smaller number of game balls than the sub-path HK1 can be made to flow down to the main path SK6.

Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, the distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 facing each other is adjusted by the shim member SI and is made non-parallel, so that the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13560 and the second path member 13560 are not parallel to each other.
It is possible to adjust the position (direction in which the game ball flows down) of the game ball flowing down between the paths facing the path member 13570.

Therefore, compared to the case where the angle of the nail struck on the front surface of the base plate 60 with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 is changed to adjust the direction in which the game ball is likely to flow down, the special winning device 13550
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the direction in which the inside of the is likely to flow down. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the game is disadvantageous before playing the game on the gaming machine, and it is possible to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Further, only by changing the two directions (front-back direction (arrow FB direction)) of the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 in the opposite direction, the flow of the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 Since the direction can be changed, the adjustment can be made easier than the nail that can be adjusted in all directions with respect to the front surface of the game board 13 (base plate 60). As a result, the game ball can be easily flowed down in the direction intended by the adjuster.

The direction intended by the adjuster is, for example, the direction between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 on the sub-path HK1 side (arrow L direction side) on the main path SK6 side (arrow R direction side). A game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550, which is larger than the space between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570, flows down to the sub-path HK1 or the main path SK6 side (arrow R direction side). ), The first path member 13560 and the second path member 135 on the secondary route HK1 side (arrow L direction side) between the opposites of the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570.
The game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 is made larger than the opposite space of 70, and flows down to the main path SK6.

Further, the second path member 13570 arranged on the back side is moved in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) by sandwiching the shim member SI with respect to the first path member 13560 arranged on the front side. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 facing each other. That is, since the second path member 13570 arranged on the far side from the player is moved in the front-rear direction, the first path member 13560 and the first path member 13560 are displaced as compared with the case where the first path member 13560 close to the player is displaced. Second path member 1357
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the distance between the opposite sides of 0. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

Next, the engaging member 14310 according to the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 159. In the first embodiment, the case where the operator 315 of the engaging member 310 is formed so as to project toward the bottom wall portion 301 side (back side (arrow B direction side)) of the back case 300 has been described. The actuator 14315 in the 14th embodiment is formed so that the protruding tip surface is inclined toward the proximal end side. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 159 (a) is a rear view of the rear case 300 in the 14th embodiment, FIG. 15
9 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case 300 in the CLIXb-CLIXb line of FIG. 159 (a).

The rear case 14300 in the 14th embodiment is the same as the rear case 300 in the 1st embodiment, from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular front view and the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is provided with an erected outer wall portion 302, and is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open by each of the wall portions 301 and 302. A front-view rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 can be visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

Further, the rear case 14300 in the 14th embodiment includes an engaging member 14310 arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 (open side formed in a box shape (arrow F direction side)) and the rear case 14300. Arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side), the board box 100 (main control device 11)
It mainly includes a fixing member 320 for fixing 0).

As shown in FIG. 159, the engaging member 14310 according to the 14th embodiment has a crank-like outer shape in a front view, and is a first piece 143 extending in a direction parallel to each other.
11 and the second piece 312, and the ends of the first piece 14311 and the second piece 312 are connected to each other in the first piece 1
It is composed of 4311 and a third piece 313 connected in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the second piece 312.

The first piece 14311 is one side opposite to the other side to which the third piece 313 is connected (the side in the direction of arrow R).
The end portion of the fixing member 320 is formed as an engaging portion with the engaged portion 332 (see FIG. 41 (a)) of the fixing member 320, and is in the vertical direction which is substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 14311. (Arrow U-
A recess 317 recessed in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the first piece 14311 from a substantially intermediate position between the engaging portion 316 protruding to both outer sides in the D direction) and the two engaging portions 316. And the operator 143 that protrudes toward the bottom wall portion 301 side (back side (arrow B direction side)) of the back case 300.
15 and.

The operator 14315 is formed at the other end (arrow L direction side) of the first piece 14311, and its protruding dimension is set to a value larger than the plate thickness of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and at least. It is projected toward the back side of the back case 14300 (bottom wall portion 301) by a size that can be grasped by an operator with a finger. As a result, the operator 14315 can be projected from the second opening 301d of the bottom wall portion 301, and the protruding portion (the tip of the operator 14315) can be grasped and operated.

Further, the protruding tip surface of the actuator 14315 is on the engaging portion 316 side (the other side of the first piece 14311 ((1)).
It is formed as an inclined surface 14315a that approaches the proximal end side of the actuator 14315 toward the side of the arrow L). As a result, when the operator operates the actuator 14315 in the direction of disengaging the engaging member 14310 and the fixing member 320 (arrow L direction side), the engaging member 14310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged with each other. It is possible to reduce the force acting in the direction of releasing.

That is, the inclined surface 14315a can disperse the force operated by the operator on the operator 14315. As a result, it is possible to operate the actuator 14315 from the back side of the back case 300 to make it difficult to disengage the engaging member 14310 and the fixing member 320. resulting in,
It is possible to prevent an operator who intends to illegally replace the board box 100 disposed on the fixing member 320 from operating the actuator 14315 from the back side of the back case 300 to remove the fixing member 320 from the back case 300. ..

Further, the end portion of the inclined surface 14315a on the engaging portion 316 side is the bottom wall portion 30 of the rear case 300.
It is arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the back surface of 1. As a result, the engaging member 14310
The operator's hand operating the actuator 14315 can be brought into contact with the inclined surface 14315a for the purpose of disengaging the fixing member 320. As a result, an operator who makes it difficult to operate the operator 14315 and tries to illegally replace the board box 100 disposed on the fixing member 320 operates the operator 14315 from the back side of the rear case 300. It is possible to prevent the fixing member 320 from being removed from the rear case 300.

Next, the engaging member 15310 according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 160 (a). In the first embodiment, the operator 315 of the engaging member 310 is the rear case 3.
Although the case where the operator is formed so as to project toward the bottom wall portion 301 side (back surface side (arrow B direction side)) of 00 has been described, the operator 15315 in the fifteenth embodiment is the first piece 15311 of the engaging member 15310. Is supported by. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 160A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case 300 according to the fifteenth embodiment. The cross section of FIG. 160 (a) corresponds to the cross section of FIG. 159 (b).

The rear case 15300 in the fifteenth embodiment is the same as the rear case 300 in the first embodiment, from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular front view and the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is provided with an erected outer wall portion 302, and is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open by each of the wall portions 301 and 302. A front-view rectangular opening 301a (see FIG. 5) is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and the bottom wall portion 30 is formed through the opening 301a.
The third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of No. 1 is visible.

Further, the back case 15300 in the fifteenth embodiment includes an engaging member 15310 arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 (open side formed in a box shape (arrow F direction side)) and the back case 15300. Arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side), the board box 100 (main control device 11)
It mainly includes a fixing member 320 (see FIG. 41) for fixing 0).

As shown in FIG. 160 (a), the engaging member 15310 in the fifteenth embodiment has a crank-shaped outer shape in a front view, and the first piece 15311 and the first piece 15311 extending in a direction parallel to each other. Two pieces 312 (see FIG. 41), the first piece 14311 and the second piece 312.
It is composed of a third piece 313 (see FIG. 41) that connects the ends of the first piece 15311 and the second piece 312 in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the second piece 312.

In the first piece 15311, the end portion on the one side (arrow R direction side) opposite to the other side (arrow L direction side) to which the third piece 313 is connected is the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 (FIG. It is formed as an engaging portion with 41 (a)), and is an engaging portion protruding outward on both sides in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), which is a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 15311. 316 (see FIG. 41) and a recess 317 (see FIG. 41) recessed in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the first piece 1531 from a substantially intermediate position between the two engaging portions 316. It mainly includes an operator 15315 inserted through the second opening 301d of the rear case 300, and a bearing portion 15319 to which the operator 15315 is pivotally supported.

The bearing portion 15319 is projected from the first piece 15311 on the other side (the side in the direction of arrow L) to which the third piece 313 of the first piece 1531 is connected. Further, the bearing portion 15319 has an actuator 1 described later.
A recess is formed in which the columnar shaft member 15315c inserted through the 5315 in the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction) is inserted.

The operator 15315 is formed in a rod shape, and has a through hole 15315b penetrating in the direction of gravity at the end on the first piece 15311 side and a shaft member 1531 inserted into the through hole 15315b.
5c and.

Therefore, the actuator 15315 is held in a state in which the shaft member 15315c inserted into the through hole 15315b can be rotationally displaced with respect to the first piece 15311 by being inserted into the recess of the bearing portion 15319. Further, the rotation shaft (shaft member 15315c) of the actuator 15315 is the first.
It is arranged on the front side of the piece 15311. As a result, the rotation of the operator 15315 in the state shown in FIG. 160 (a) in the upward direction (clockwise) can be restricted by being brought into contact with the other end of the first piece 1531. It is possible to allow rotation to the left (counterclockwise).

Therefore, when the operator operates the operator 15315 in the direction of disengaging the engaging member 15310 and the fixing member 320 (in the direction of the arrow L) (the operator 153 in the state shown in FIG. 160A).
When the 15 is rotated counterclockwise), the force acting in the direction of disengaging the engaging member 15310 and the fixing member 320 (in the direction of arrow L) can be reduced. As a result, the actuator 15315 is operated from the back side of the rear case 300 to operate the engaging member 15310 and the fixing member 3.
It is possible to make it difficult to disengage the engagement with 20. As a result, a player who attempts to illegally replace the board box 100 arranged on the fixing member 320 operates the actuator 15315 from the back side of the back case 300 to remove the fixing member 320 from the back case 300. Can be suppressed.

Next, the engaging member 15310 according to the sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 160 (b). In the first embodiment, the case where the slide operation of the engaging member 310 is performed by the actuator 315 has been described, but in the sixteenth embodiment, the first of the engaging member 16310 is described.
This is done by manipulating the ends of the piece 16311. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 160B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case 300 according to the 16th embodiment. The cross section of FIG. 160 (b) corresponds to the cross section of FIG. 160 (a). Further, the rear case 16300 in the 16th embodiment is the same as the rear case 300 in the 1st embodiment, from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular front view and the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is provided with an erected outer wall portion 302, and is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open by each of the wall portions 301 and 302. The bottom wall portion 301 has a rectangular opening 301a in the center thereof (FIG. 5).
(See FIG. 2) is formed, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 can be visually recognized through the opening 301a.

Further, the rear case 16300 in the 16th embodiment includes an engaging member 16310 disposed on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 (open side formed in a box shape (arrow F direction side)) and the rear case 16300. Arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side), the board box 100 (main control device 1)
It mainly includes a fixing member 320 (see FIG. 41) for fixing 10).

As shown in FIG. 160 (b), the engaging member 16310 according to the sixteenth embodiment has a crank-shaped outer shape in a front view, and the first piece 16311 and the first piece 16311 extending in a direction parallel to each other. Two pieces 312 (see FIG. 41), the first piece 16311 and the second piece 312.
It is composed of a third piece 313 (see FIG. 41) that connects the ends of the first piece 16311 and the second piece 312 in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the second piece 312. Further, the engaging member 1 in the 16th embodiment
The 6310 can be slidably displaced by a finger inserted from the back side into the second opening 301d formed in the back case 300.

In the first piece 16311, the end portion on the one side (arrow R direction side) opposite to the other side (arrow L direction side) to which the third piece 313 is connected is the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 (FIG. The engaging portion 316 (see FIG. 41) is formed as an engaging portion with (see 41) and protrudes to both outer sides in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), which is a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 311. 41) and the recess 317 (see FIG. 41) recessed in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the first piece 16311 from the substantially intermediate position of the two engaging portions 316. Be prepared.

As shown in FIG. 160 (b), in a state where the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 16310 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 are engaged, the other side (arrow L direction side) of the first piece 16311. Is arranged horizontally outward with respect to the opening of the second opening 301d. Therefore, the engaging member 16
The operator moves the engaging member 1 in the direction of disengaging the engagement between the 310 and the fixing member 320 (on the side of the arrow L).
When operating the 6310, use a finger inserted through the second opening 301d of the rear case 300.
It is possible to make it difficult to displace the engaging member 16310 in the direction of disengaging the engaging member 16310 and the fixing member 320. As a result, the substrate box 1 disposed on the fixing member 320
An operator trying to replace 00 is an engaging member 1631 from the back side of the back case 300.
It is possible to prevent the fixing member 320 from being removed from the rear case 300 by illegally manipulating 0.

Next, the back case 17300 according to the 17th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 161. In the first embodiment, the case where the operator 315 of the engaging member 310 protrudes from the second opening 301d of the rear case 300 has been described, but in the seventeenth embodiment, the second opening 301d of the rear case 17300 has been described. The operator 315 protruding from the rear case is covered with a part of the rear case at a predetermined position. The same parts as those of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 161 (a) is a rear view of the rear case 17300 in the 17th embodiment, and FIG. 161 (b) is a rear case 173 in the CLXIb-CLXIb line of FIG. 161 (a).
It is sectional drawing of 00.

As shown in FIG. 161 of the 17th embodiment, the rear case 17300 has a bottom wall portion 17301 having a substantially rectangular front view and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 17301 toward the front. And each of these wall portions 17301 and 302 forms a box shape with one side (front side) open. The bottom wall portion 17301 has a rectangular opening 301 in the center thereof.
An opening is formed, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 17301 can be visually recognized through the opening 301a.

Further, the rear case 17300 includes a protruding portion 301b projecting from two locations on the front side of the bottom wall portion 17301, a first opening 301c opening at a position facing the fixing member 320, and an engaging member 310. It includes a second opening 301d that opens at a position facing each other, and an lining portion 17301e that covers the back surface of the second opening 301d on the side of the first opening 301c (on the side in the direction of arrow R).

The lining portion 17301e is on the first opening 301c side (arrow R direction side) of the second opening 301d.
It is erected from the end of the to the back side (the side in the direction of arrow B). Further, the lining portion 17301e includes a bent portion 17301e1 in which the erected tip portion bends toward the inside of the opening of the second opening 301d in the rear view. As a result, the lining portion 17301e is on the side of the first opening 301c (
It is formed in a box shape with an opening on the side opposite to the arrow R direction side (arrow L direction side).

Further, the standing distance of the lining portion 17301e (from the back surface of the bottom wall portion 17301c to the bent portion 1730).
The distance from the front surface of 1e1) is set to be larger than the protruding dimension of the operator 315 protruding from the bottom wall portion 17301c. Further, the inverted portion 17301e is a bent portion 17 in the rear view.
The dimension of the 301e1 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) is set to be larger than the dimension of the operator 315 in the rear view in the left-right direction.

As a result, when the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 are engaged with each other, the operator 315 is inside the covering member 17301e as shown in FIG. 161 (b). Is placed in. Therefore, the direction in which the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are disengaged (
When the operator operates the engaging member 310 in the direction of the arrow L), it is possible to make it difficult to grip the actuator 315 from the back side of the back case 17300. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engaging member 310 from being displaced in the direction in which the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are disengaged (in the direction of the arrow L). As a result, a worker (player) who tries to illegally replace the board box 100 arranged on the fixing member 320 is asked to engage member 31 from the back side of the back case 17300.
0 can be operated to prevent the fixing member 320 from being removed from the rear case 17300.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 162 to 164, the back case 183 in the 18th embodiment.
00 will be described. In the first embodiment, the engaging member 310 is in the linear direction (arrow L-).
Although the case of slide displacement in the R direction) has been described, the engaging member 18310 in the eighteenth embodiment is rotationally displaced with respect to the rear case 18300. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163, the back case 183 in the eighteenth embodiment.
The configuration of 00 and the operation of the engaging member 18310 will be described. 162 (a) and 1
63 (a) is a front view of the rear case 18300 in the eighteenth embodiment, FIG. 162.
(B) and FIG. 163 (b) are rear views of the rear case 18300. In addition, FIG. 162 (
In a) and FIG. 162 (b), the state in which the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are engaged is illustrated, and in FIGS. 163 (a) and 163 (b), the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are shown. The state in which the engagement is disengaged is shown in the figure.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the rear case 18300 in the eighteenth embodiment is erected from the outer edges of the bottom wall portion 18301 having a substantially rectangular front view and the four sides of the bottom wall portion 18301 toward the front. It is provided with an outer wall portion 18302, and is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open by each of the wall portions 18301 and 18302. Further, the rear case 18300 is arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 18301 (the box-shaped open side (arrow F direction side)) and the engaging member 18310 on the back side of the back case 18300. It is provided with a fixing member 18320 for fixing the board box 100 (main control device 110).

A front view rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 18301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 18301 can be visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is said that. Further, the bottom wall portion 18301 is located below the first opening 18301c that opens at a position facing the fixing member 18320 and the first opening 18301c (in the direction of arrow D), and is a projecting portion that protrudes to the front side. 18301b and.

The first opening 18301c is an opening for inserting the engaged portion 18332 of the fixing member 18320, which will be described later, and is formed in a shape larger than the engaged portion 18332 in the front view. As a result, after the accessory device (rotating unit 700) is arranged inside the back case 18300, the engaging portion of the fixing member 18320 can be arranged from the back side of the back case 18300 to the front side of the back case 18300. can.

The projecting portion 18301b is a member that pivotally supports the engaging member 18310 described later, and the bottom wall portion 1
It is projected in a columnar shape from the front of 8301b. Further, a hole for screwing a screw is recessed in the protruding tip surface of the protruding portion 18301b. As a result, the engaging member 18310 is placed on the back case 183.
By screwing a screw into the projecting portion 18301b in the state of being arranged at 00, the engaging member 1831
It is possible to restrict 0 from coming out of the protrusion 18301b.

The outer wall portion 18302 is located on the side surface on the right side (arrow R direction side) in the front view in the left-right direction (arrow L).
It is provided with an opening 18302a that opens in the −R direction). The opening 18302a is formed on the rotation locus of the engaging member 18310 described later. Thereby, after the engaging member 18310 is arranged inside the back case 18300, the engaging member 18310 can be projected to the outside of the back case 18300 by rotating the engaging member 18310.

The fixing member 18320 is composed of an interposing member 18330 that engages with the engaging member 18310 described later, and a shaft support member 340 that is fastened to the interposing member 18330.

The interposition member 18330 is formed in a box shape with the front side open, and has a locking portion 18331 projecting from the side surface on the other side (arrow L direction side) and a rear case from the side surface on one side (arrow R direction side). 300
An engaged portion 18332 that protrudes to the side and is formed in a frame shape, an insertion hole 333 that opens in a circular shape on the bottom surface of the box (side surface in the direction of arrow B) (see FIG. 39 (b)), and from the back surface. Protruding protrusion 33
4 and are mainly prepared.

The locking portion 18331 is provided with an opening for engaging the other side (arrow L direction side) of the fixing member 320 with the bottom wall portion 18301, and the opening has an L-shaped cross section from the periphery of the first opening 18301c described above. By inserting the protruding wall 18301c1 projecting into the bottom wall portion 18301, the wall portion 18301 is engaged with the bottom wall portion 18301.

As a result, when the intermediate member 18330 (fixing member 18320) is arranged in the rear case 18300, the protrusion 18301c1 is inserted through the locking portion 18331 of the intermediate member 18330, and the other side of the intermediate member 18330 (arrow L). The directional side) can be locked to the rear case 18300.

The engaged portion 18332 is a portion that engages with the engaging member 18310, and is a rear case 183.
The engaging member 1 whose protrusion dimension toward the 00 side (arrow F direction side) is arranged on the rear case 18300.
The dimension is set to exceed 8310, and the distance dimension from the inner surface of the front side (arrow F direction side) of the enclosed space to the front of the bottom wall portion 18301 is from the front of the engaging member 18310 to the bottom wall portion 1830.
It is set larger than the distance to the front of 1. As a result, the space surrounded by the engaged portion 18332 and the engaging member 18310 are arranged at overlapping positions in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

The engaging member 18310 is formed in a substantially L-shape in front view, and is bent from one end of a second piece 18312 pivotally supported by a projecting portion 18301b of the rear case 18300 and the second piece 18312. It is composed of the first piece 18311 formed by the above.

The second piece 18312 is provided with a shaft support hole 18312a that is opened in a circular shape in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) at the end on the side opposite to the side on which the first piece 18311 is formed. Shaft hole 18312a
Is a hole into which the projecting portion 18301b of the rear case 18300 described above is inserted, whereby the engaging member 18310 can be arranged in a state of being pivotally supported inside the rear case 18300.

The first piece 18311 extends in an arc shape about the axis of the shaft support hole 18312a described above. As a result, the displacement region of the first piece 18311 can be minimized when the engaging member 18310 is rotated about the axis of the shaft support hole 18312a. Further, the first piece 18311 has an engaging portion 18316 protruding from the shaft support hole 18312a on both sides in the radial direction at an end opposite to the connecting side with the second piece 18312, and the engaging portions 316 at the two locations. The first piece 18 from the approximately intermediate position of
It is provided with a recess 18317 which is recessed in the extending direction of 311.

The outer shape of the two engaging portions 18316 is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front. again,
One of the engaging portions 18316 of the two engaging portions 18316 has a diameter of the first piece 18311 so as to go from the end opposite to the connecting portion with the second piece 18312 toward the connecting portion side with the second piece 18312. It is formed in an outer shape that protrudes outward in the direction. The other engaging part 18316 of the two engaging parts 18316
Is formed in an outer shape that projects inward in the radial direction of the first piece 18311 from the end opposite to the connecting portion with the second piece 18312 toward the connecting portion side with the second piece 18312.

The recess 18317 is formed by notching in the thickness direction of the first piece 18311, and the first piece is formed.
It is recessed from the end of the piece 18311 on the side opposite to the connecting side with the second piece 18312 toward the connecting side with the second piece 18312 along the extending direction of the first piece 18311. Therefore, the first piece 18
The end of 311 is bifurcated. As a result, the end portion of the first piece 18311 on the side opposite to the connecting side with the second piece 18312 is more easily elastically deformed than the connecting side with the second piece 18312, and the engaging member 18310 is attached to the fixing member 18320. Can be easily engaged.

Next, the engagement between the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 will be described. FIG. 16
As shown in 3, the interposing member 18330 and the shaft support member 340 are fastened and combined by a screw inserted from the interposing member 18330 side before engaging with the engaging member 18310.

Further, as described above, the engaging member 18310 is a projecting portion 1830 of the rear case 18300.
It is arranged in a state of being pivotally supported by 1b, and the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 is formed.
It is arranged so as to project from the opening 18302a of the rear case 18300.

The center of gravity of the engaging member 18310 pivotally supported by the rear case 18300 is the rear case 1.
It is located on the opening 18302a side of the projecting portion 18301b of the 8300, and in a state where no external force is applied, the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 is the opening of the rear case 18300 due to gravity. A force rotated in a direction protruding from the portion 18302a is applied to the engaging member 18310. As a result, when the engagement between the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 is incomplete, the engaging member 18310 is projected to the outside of the rear case 18300, and the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are engaged with each other. It is possible to prevent forgetting the match.

The intervening member 18330 and the shaft support member 340 (fixing member 18320) in the fastened state are
A protrusion 18301c1 projecting from the periphery of the first opening 18301c is inserted into the locking portion 18331 of the intermediate member 18330, and the left side (arrow L direction side) of the fixing member 18320 is locked to the rear case 18300. Will be done. In this case, the engaged portion 1833 of the fixing member 18320
2 is inserted inside the first opening 18301c, and the space surrounded by the engaged portion 18332 is arranged at a position facing the tip of the first piece 18311 of the engaging member 18310.

Next, the worker who engages the engaging member 18310 with the fixing member 18320 is the rear case 1.
The engaging member 18310 (connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312) protruding from the opening 18302a of the 8300 is pushed inside the rear case 18300 (on the side in the direction of arrow R1) (see FIG. 163). The joint member 18310 is rotated around the projecting portion 18301b.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 162, the tip of the engaging member 18310 is brought into contact with the engaged portion 1833.
It can be inserted into the internal space of 2. In this case, the distance between the outer ends of the two engaging portions 18316 is set to be larger than the vertical opening dimension of the internal space of the engaged portion 18332, but the recess 18317 of the engaging member 18310 Since the first piece 18311 is easily elastically deformed, the end portion of the first piece 18311 is elastically deformed inward of the recess 18317 so that the distance between the outer ends of the two engaging portions 18316 is covered. The end portion of the first piece 18311 can be inserted inside the engaged portion 18332 so as to be smaller than the vertical opening size of the internal space of the engaging portion 18332.

Further, since the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 of the engaging member 18310 is inserted inside the opening 18302a of the rear case 18300, the engaging member 18310
However, it is possible to prevent the engaging member 18310 from being operated from the outside of the rear case 18300 in the engaged state. As a result, the engaging member 18310 is illegally operated, and the fixing member 183 is operated.
It is possible to prevent the board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to 20 from being replaced with an unauthorized board.

Next, the disengagement of the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 in the eighteenth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 163 (a), the first opening 18301c is opened in a substantially L-shape in front view, and is recessed 18317 of the engaging member 18310 in an engaged state with the engaged portion 18332 of the fixing member 18320. However, it can be operated from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 1300 via the first opening 18301c.

Therefore, the outer portion of the concave portion 18317 of the engaging member 18310 is formed in the concave portion 18 with a special tool or the like.
By elastically deforming to the concave side of 317, the engagement between the engaging portion 18316 of the engaging member 18310 and the engaged portion 18332 is released. With this disengaged state, the engaging member 18310
Is displaced in the direction of pulling out from the internal space engaged by the engaged portion 18332 (direction of arrow L), and then the deformation of the engaging member 310 is returned to cause the engaging member 18310 and the engaged portion 1833.
The engagement with 2 can be released.

It is preferable that the gap between the outer portion of the recess 18317 of the engaging member 18310 and the first opening 18301c is formed as small as possible. According to this, the finger of the person who removes the fixing member 18320 from the rear case 300 can be made impossible to insert, and a special tool can be inserted. As a result, the board box 100 (main control device 110) can be replaced only by an operator having a dedicated tool, and it is possible to prevent the board box 100 from being replaced by an unauthorized board box 100.

Next, a case where the engaging member 18310 is forgotten to be engaged with the fixing member 18320 will be described with reference to FIG. 164. FIG. 164 (a) is a schematic top view of the game board 13, and FIG. 1
64 (b) is a schematic top view of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, FIG. 164 (a) and FIG. 164
In (b), a state in which the engaging member 18310 is forgotten to be engaged with the engaged portion 18332 is shown. Further, in FIGS. 164 (a) and 164 (b), a state in which a piece on the upper side of the outer frame 11 formed in a frame shape in a front view is removed is shown.

As described above, when the engaging member 18310 and the engaged portion 18332 are incompletely engaged, the engaging member 18310 can be projected to the outside of the rear case 18300 by gravity. In this case, the engaging member 183 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) of the game board 13
Distance dimension LR from the end of 10 to the right end (arrow R direction side) of the rear case 18300
1 (see FIG. 164 (a)) is set to be larger than the inner left-right direction dimension LR2 (see FIG. 164 (b)) in the left-right direction of the outer frame 11 on which the game board 13 is arranged. As a result, when the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are not engaged and the game board 13 is to be inserted inside the outer frame 11, the back side of the engaging member 18310 is in contact with the front surface of the outer frame 11. Can be touched. As a result, when the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are not engaged,
The engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18 are suppressed from being arranged on the outer frame 11.
It is possible to suppress forgetting to engage with the 320.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 165 and 166, the engaging member 1931 according to the 19th embodiment.
0 will be described. In the 18th embodiment, the engaging member 18310 is arranged inside the outer frame 11 to prevent the engaging member 18310 from being illegally operated, but in the 19th embodiment, the engaging member 19310 is released. The rotation to is restricted to prevent the engaging member 18310 from being tampered with. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 165 is an exploded perspective front view of the engaging member 19310 according to the 19th embodiment. FIG. 166 (a) is a front view of the rear case 18300, and FIG. 166 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the one-way 19350 in the CLXVIb-CLXVIb line of FIG. 165.

As shown in FIG. 165, the engaging member 19310 in the 19th embodiment is formed in a substantially L-shape in front view, and has a second piece 19312 having a rotation axis with respect to the rear case 19300 and a second piece thereof. It is composed of a first piece 18311 formed by bending from one end of 19312.

The second piece 19312 is provided with a fitting hole 19312b that opens in a circular shape in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) at the end on the side opposite to the side on which the first piece 18311 is formed. The fitting hole 19312b is a hole into which the one-way 19350 described later is fitted, and is the outer ring 1 of the one-way 19350.
It is formed to have substantially the same inner diameter as 9351.

The one-way 19350 has an inner ring 19352 having a cam surface formed on the outer peripheral surface and an inner ring 1 thereof.
An outer ring 19351 formed in an annular shape surrounding the outer side of the 9352, and a plurality of springs 19353 and rollers 19354 disposed between the outer ring 19351 and the inner ring 19352 are provided (see FIG. 166 (b)), and the outer ring is provided. When the inner ring 19352 tries to rotate in one direction with respect to 19351, the contact surface pressure between the cam surface and the roller 19354 becomes high, which becomes resistance and transmits power to the outer ring, and the inner ring moves in the other direction with respect to the outer ring 19351. When rotated, the contact surface pressure between the cam surface and the roller 10354 becomes low, and the clutch slips to disconnect the power transmission.
A detailed description of the one-way 19350 will be described later.

Further, the operator 19360 is inserted in the center of the inner ring 19352 of the one-way 19350. The operator 19360 has an operation unit 19361 arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the rear case 19300, and an insertion portion 19362 projecting from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the operation unit 19361. Mainly prepare.

The operation unit 19361 is a portion in which the operator operates the actuator 19360 from the back side of the rear case 19300, and is formed in a circular shape, and the outer shape thereof is formed to be larger than the opening through which the insertion portion 19362 described later is inserted. .. As a result, the operator 19360 is placed in the rear case 1930.
When arranged from the back side of 0, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 19361 from coming out to the front side (arrow F direction side) of the back case 19300.

The insertion portion 19362 is formed in a columnar shape coaxial with the axis of the operation portion 19361, and is projected on the front side (arrow F direction side). Further, the insertion portion 19362 includes a protrusion 19362a projecting radially from the outer peripheral surface thereof.

The ridge wall 19362a is an inner ring 1935 of the one-way 19350 with respect to the insertion portion 19362.
A recess 1935 formed in the inner ring 19352, which is an engaging portion for preventing the 2 from idling.
It is inserted in 2a. This makes it possible to prevent the rotational force acting on the actuator 19360 from being non-transmitted to the inner ring 19352.

Further, a concave portion recessed in a circular shape in the front view is formed on the protruding tip surface of the insertion portion 19362, and a screw is screwed into the concave portion from the front side to the back side to form a one-way 19350. The operator 19360 can be connected to the device.

Next, the arrangement state of the back case 19300 and the engaging member 19310 will be described with reference to FIG. 166. The rear case 19300 includes a bottom wall portion 19301 having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 19301 toward the front, and these wall portions 19301 and 302 are provided. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open.
Further, the rear case 19300 is on the front side (box-shaped open side (open side) of the bottom wall portion 19301.
An engaging member 19310 arranged on the side in the direction of arrow F), a fixing member 18320 arranged on the back side of the rear case 19300 and fixing the board box 100 (main control device 110), and the like.
To prepare for.

A front view rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 19301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 19301 can be visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is said that. Further, in the bottom wall portion 19301, a first opening 18301c that opens at a position facing the fixing member 18320 and a lower portion of the first opening 18301c (arrow D).
(Direction), it opens in the front-back direction, and the insertion part 1936 of the operator 19360 described above is inside.
It comprises an opening (not shown) into which the 2 is inserted.

In the above-mentioned engaging member 19310, after the engaging member 19310 with the one-way 19350 introspected inside the fitting hole 19312b is arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 10301, the operator 19360 is placed from the back side of the back case 19300. Insertion part 19362 in the back case 1930
It is arranged in the bottom wall portion 19301 by inserting it into the inner ring 19352 of the one-way 19350 through the opening of 0.

Next, the operation of the one-way 19350 will be described. One way 1 as mentioned above
The 9350 is switched between a case where power transmission to the outer ring 19351 is permitted and a case where power transmission is cut off in the rotation direction of the inner ring 19352 in one direction and the other direction.

First, a case where the power of the inner ring 19352 is transmitted to the outer ring will be described. Figure 166 (
As shown in b), when the inner ring 19352 is rotated in one direction (arrow LK direction (see FIG. 166 (b))), the roller 193 is located between the cam surface of the inner ring 19352 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer ring 19351.
54 is pinched, the contact of the roller 19354 becomes a resistance, and the power of the inner ring 19352 becomes the outer ring 1
It is transmitted to 9351. In this case, the rotation direction in one direction is set to the direction in which the engaging member 19310 is engaged with the fixing member 18320.

Next, a case where the power of the inner ring 19352 is cut off will be described. When the inner ring 19352 is rotated in the other direction (arrow RK direction (see FIG. 166 (b))), the roller 19354 is displaced inward in the radial direction due to the resistance of contact with the inner peripheral surface of the outer ring 19351. As a result, the contact surface pressure between the inner peripheral surface of the outer ring 19351 and the roller 19354 becomes low, and the roller 19354 slides against the outer ring 19351 to cut off power transmission. In this case, the rotation direction in the other direction is set to the direction in which the engaging member 19310 is disengaged from the fixing member 18320.

As a result, the operator 1 has the engaging member 19310 arranged in the rear case 19300.
The 9360 can be rotated to engage the engaging member 19310 with the fixing member 18320. Further, from the state where the engaging member 19310 and the fixing member 18320 are engaged, the operator 19
It is regulated to rotate 360 to disengage the engaging member 19310 and the fixing member 18320. As a result, the engaging member 19310 (operator 19360) is illegally operated, and the engagement member 19310 (operator 19360) is illegally operated.
It is possible to prevent the board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 18320 from being replaced with an unauthorized board.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 167 to 169, the engaging member 2031 in the 20th embodiment
0 will be described. In the first embodiment, the movement of the engaging member 310 is the rotation unit 70.
The case where it is regulated by the screw inserted into the rear base 720 of 0 has been described, but the second
In 0 embodiment, when the engaging member 20310 is engaged with the fixing member 320, the engaging member 20
The engaging portion 20 in which the movement of 310 is formed on the back base 20720 of the rotating unit 20700.
It is regulated by being engaged with 724a. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 167 and 168, the engaging member 2031 in the 20th embodiment.
0 and the rotary unit 20700 will be described. FIG. 167 is an exploded perspective view of the rear case 20300 and the rotating unit 20700 according to the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 168 (a)
Is a front view of the engaging member 20310, and FIG. 168 (b) is a rear view of the rotating unit 20700 and the engaging member 20310.

The rear case 20300 in the twentieth embodiment is the same as the rear case 300 in the first embodiment, from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular front view and the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is provided with an erected outer wall portion 302, and is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open by each of the wall portions 301 and 302. A front-view rectangular opening 301a (see FIG. 5) is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and the bottom wall portion 30 is formed through the opening 301a.
The third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of No. 1 is visible.

Further, the back case 20300 in the 20th embodiment includes an engaging member 20310 arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 (the open side formed in a box shape (arrow F direction side)) and the back case 20300. Arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side), the board box 100 (main control device 11)
It mainly includes a fixing member 320 for fixing 0). Further, in the back case 20300 according to the twentieth embodiment, the rotating unit 20700 is arranged in front of the bottom wall portion 301.

As shown in FIGS. 167 and 168, the engaging member 20310 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 20300 in the 20th embodiment has a crank shape in the front view. The first piece 31 which is formed in the above direction and extends in a direction parallel to each other.
1 and 2nd piece 20312 and 3rd piece 313 connecting the ends of the 1st piece 311 and the 2nd piece 20312 in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the 1st piece 311 and the 2nd piece 20312. Will be done.

The first piece 311 and the second piece 20312 are each formed with a sliding groove 314 having a long hole long in the extending direction, whereby the engaging member 20310 is the first piece 311 and the second piece 2.
It is slidable in the extension direction of 0312 (arrow LR direction).

Further, the second piece 20312 is provided with a recess 20312c recessed in a side surface parallel to the sliding direction of the engaging member 20310. The recess 20312c is a recess into which the tip of the engaging portion 20724a of the rear base 20720 of the rotation unit 20700, which will be described later, is inserted, and the engaging portion 207 is inserted.
It is formed in substantially the same shape as the outer shape of 24a.

More specifically, the recess 20312c has a dimension SH1 (see FIG. 168 (a)) up to the end on the side opposite to the connecting side (arrow L direction side) of the second piece 20312 with the third piece 313. Dimensions SH2 (FIG. 168 (FIG. 168)) in which the projecting portion 301b can slide inside the sliding groove 314 of 20310.
b) It is set to be substantially the same as (see). Further, the recess 20312c is recessed in a triangle having a right angle in front view, and the right-angled portion is set on the connecting side (arrow R direction side) of the second piece 20312 with the third piece 313.

The rotating unit 20700 has an opening 301 in the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 20300.
The right side of the lower part of a (front view rectangular back base 20720 arranged on the side in the direction of arrow R) and the rotating body 800 arranged on the front side (side in the direction of arrow F) of the back base 20720 (FIG. 9
3), and the effect of rotationally displacing the rotating body 800 via the light-transmitting center frame 86 arranged on the game board 13 can be visually recognized by the player.

The back base 20720 is a plate member that connects the back surface of the ball cradle 710 and the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the decoration unit 750, and is arranged on the back surface side of the ball cradle 710 and the decoration unit 750. Further, the back base 20720 includes an erection wall 20724 erected from the back.

The erection wall 20724 extends so as to surround the outer edge of the engaging member 20310 arranged in the back case 20300. Further, the erection wall 20724 has a recess 20 of the engaging member 20310.
It is provided with an engaging portion 20724a formed at a position facing the 312c and having a tip inserted inside the recess 20312c.

The engaging portion 20724a is projected from the erection wall 20724 in the direction in which the engaging member 20310 is engaged with the fixing member 320 (arrow R direction), and is erected in a direction orthogonal to the sliding direction of the engaging member 20310. It is formed with a predetermined gap from the wall 20724. As a result, the engaging portion 2
The rigidity of 0724a can be lowered to facilitate elastic deformation of the engaging portion 20724a. again,
A region where the engaging portion 20724a can be elastically deformed can be secured by the amount of the gap between the erection wall 20724 and the engaging portion 20724a.

Further, the engaging portion 20724a is a bent portion 2 that bends toward the engaging member 20310 at the protruding tip portion.
0724a1 is provided, and the front view shape of the bent portion 20724a1 is the recess 2031 described above.
It is formed in a triangular shape having substantially the same shape as 2c. As a result, the engaging member 20310 has a bent portion 2 inside the recess 20312c of the engaging member 20310 before engaging with the fixing member 320.
0724a1 is arranged. Therefore, the engaging member 20310 is displaced in its displacement direction (arrows L-R).
It can be made difficult to slide in the direction) (see FIG. 168 (b)).

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the engaging member 20310 from vibrating with respect to the rear case 20300 due to a force such as vibration or shaking and moving in the engaging direction (arrow R direction) with the fixing member 320. Therefore, before the fixing member 320 is arranged on the back case 20300, the position of the engaging member 20310 is displaced, and when the fixing member 320 is arranged on the back case 20300, the fixing member 32
It is possible to prevent the engaged portion 332 of 0 from coming into contact with the engaging member 20310. In other words,
When arranging the fixing member 320 on the rear case 20300, the engaged portion 33 of the fixing member 320
It is possible to prevent the engaging member 20310 from being positioned in the displacement region when 2 (see FIG. 167) is arranged. As a result, it is not necessary to operate the engaging member 20310 in the direction of disengaging the fixing member 320, so that the workability when engaging the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 320 can be improved. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the engaging member 20310 and the rotating unit 20700 in a state where the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged will be described. Figure 169
(A) is a rear view of the rotating unit 20700 and the engaging member 20310, and is shown in FIG. 169 (
b) is a rear view of the rear case 20300. In addition, FIG. 169 (a) and FIG. 169 (b).
) Shows the state in which the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 20320 are engaged with each other. Further, in FIG. 169 (b), a part of the engaging member 20310 and the outer shape of the standing wall 20724 are shown by a chain line.

As shown in FIG. 169, the operator 3 is displayed from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 20300.
15 is operated and the engaging member 20310 is arranged on the left side (arrow L direction side) of the front view with respect to the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 20300, and then the bottom wall portion 30 of the rear case 20300.
When displaced to the right side (arrow R direction side) of the front view with respect to 1, the recess 20 of the engaging member 20310
The bent portion 20724a1 disposed inside the 312c is pushed out into the recess 20312c by the inclined surface of the recess 20312c.

Here, as described above, the recess 20312c has a distance dimension SH1 to the end on the side opposite to the connection side (arrow L direction side) of the second piece 20312 with the third piece 313 (see FIG. 168 (a)). However, the dimension SH2 (where the protrusion 301b can slide inside the sliding groove 314 of the engaging member 20310)
Since it is set to be substantially the same as (see FIG. 168 (b)), the engaging member 20310 is the fixing member 320.
When displaced to a position where it engages with, the third piece 31 of the second piece 20312 of the engaging member 20310
The end portion on the side opposite to the connecting side with 3 (the side in the direction of arrow L) is the bent portion 20724a1 and the engaging member 20.
The 310s are arranged adjacent to each other in the displacement direction (arrow LR direction). As a result, it is possible to prevent the engaging member 20310 from being illicitly displaced in the direction of disengagement from the fixing member 320 (arrow L direction).

As in the first embodiment, in the engaging member 20310, the engaging portion 316 is a fixing member 3.
By being caught (engaged) with the engaged portion 332 of 20, the displacement of the engaging member 20310 in the direction of disengagement from the fixing member 320 is restricted. However, since the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 is inserted through the first opening 301c of the rear case 300, the engaged portion 3
The engagement between the 32 and the engaging portion 316 may be illegally released via the first opening 301c.

On the other hand, in the twentieth embodiment, the displacement of the engaging member 20310 in the direction of disengagement from the fixing member 320 is changed to the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 20310 that engages with the fixing member 320.
Since the end portion on the opposite side to the bending portion 20724a1 can be brought into contact with the bent portion 20724a1 to be regulated, an illegal object is inserted from the first opening portion 301c, and the end portion and the bent portion 20724a of the engaging member 20310a are inserted.
It is possible to prevent the engagement with 1 from being released. As a result, the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 3
It is possible to prevent the board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 320 from being replaced with an illegal board by illegally disengaging the engagement with the 20.

As for the fixing member 320 and the engaging member 20310, the rotating unit 20700 arranged inside the back case 20300 (bottom wall portion 301) is removed from the back case 20300, and the end portion and the bent portion of the engaging member 20310 are removed. After disengaging the engagement member 20724a1, the end portion of the first piece 311 of the engagement member 20310 is elastically deformed, and the end portion of the engagement member 20310 is pulled out from the internal space of the engaged portion 332. You can disengage.

Therefore, when removing the fixing member 320 from the rear case 20300, it is necessary to remove the rotating unit 20700 from the front side of the rear case 20300, so that the engaging member 2
It is possible to prevent the board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 320 from being replaced with an illegal board by illegally disengaging the engagement between the 0310 and the fixing member 320.

Further, since the engaging member 20310 is formed by bending the shape in the front view into a crank shape as described above, an illegal object such as a wire or a wire inserted from the first piece 311 side is linearly second. It is possible to restrict the feeding to the end of the piece 20312. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the illegal object inserted from the first piece 311 side from being accurately sent to the engaging portion between the second piece 20312 and the bent portion 20724a1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement member 20310 and the fixing member 320 from being illegally disengaged and the board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 320 from being replaced with an illegal board. ..

Then, with reference to FIGS. 170 to 173, the rotary unit 21 according to the 21st embodiment.
The 700 will be described. In the first embodiment, the back base 72 of the rotating unit 700
The case where the movement of the engaging member 310 is restricted by the screw inserted through 0 has been described.
In the 21st embodiment, the movement of the engaging member 310 is restricted by inserting the first piece 311 into the insertion portion 21724b formed on the back base 21720 of the rotating unit 21700. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the engaging member 310 and the rotating unit 21700 according to the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171. FIG. 170 is an exploded perspective view of the rear case 300 and the rotating unit 21700 according to the 21st embodiment. FIG. 171 (a
) Is a rear view of the rotating unit 21700 and the engaging member 310, and FIG. 171 (b) is a rear view.
FIG. 17A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rotating unit 21700 in the CLXXIb-CLXXIb line of FIG. 171 (a).

The rear case 21300 in the 21st embodiment is the same as the rear case 300 in the 1st embodiment, from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular front view and the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is provided with an erected outer wall portion 302, and is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open by each of the wall portions 301 and 302. A front-view rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 can be visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

Further, the rear case 21300 in the 21st embodiment includes an engaging member 310 arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 (open side formed in a box shape (arrow F direction side)) and the rear case 21.
The board box 100 (main control device 110) is arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the 300.
Mainly includes a fixing member 320 for fixing the above. Further, in the back case 21300 according to the 21st embodiment, a rotating unit 21700 is arranged in front of the bottom wall portion 301.

As shown in FIGS. 170 and 171, the rotary unit 21700 according to the 21st embodiment.
Is a front view rectangular rear base 21720 arranged on the right side (arrow R direction side) of the lower side (arrow D direction side) portion of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and its back surface. A rotating body 800 (see FIG. 93) arranged on the front side of the base 21720 is provided, and the rotating body 800 is rotationally displaced via a light-transmitting center frame 86 arranged on the game board 13. It can be visually recognized by the player.

The back base 21720 is a plate member that connects the back surface of the ball cradle 710 and the back surface side of the decorative unit 750, and is arranged on the back surface side of the ball cradle 710 and the decoration unit 750. Further, the back surface base 21720 includes an erection wall 21724 erected on the back surface thereof.

The erection wall 21724 is extended so as to surround the outer edge of the engaging member 310 in the state of being arranged in the back case 300. Further, in the erection wall 21724, the engaging member 310 is the back case 30.
A state located at the end on the left side (arrow L direction side) with respect to 0 (engagement member 310 and fixing member 320)
In the state where the engagement with the engagement member 310 is released), the engagement member 310 is directed toward the recess 317 (arrow L).
It comprises an insertion portion 21724b that is projected (towards the direction).

The insertion portion 21724b is displaced from the erection wall 21724 in the displacement direction of the engaging member 310 (arrows L-R).
It is extended in a direction parallel to the direction) and is set to a dimension that overlaps with the engaging member 310 in the state of being engaged with the fixing member 320 in the direction of gravity (arrow UB direction). Further, the insertion portion 21
A bent portion 21724b1 that bends to the back surface side (engagement member 310 side) is formed at the tip portion of the 724b, and the bent tip portion of the bent portion 21742b1 is formed in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) of the pachinko machine 10. , The length is set to overlap with the engaging member 310.

Further, the width dimension of the insertion portion 21742b in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) is set to be smaller than the width dimension in the vertical direction of the recess 317 of the engaging member 310. Therefore, the insertion portion 21724b is in a state where the engaging member 310 is engaged with the fixing member 320.
It is assumed that the bent portion 21724b1 is inserted inside the recess 317. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first piece 311 of the engaging member 310 from being elastically deformed inside the recess of the recess 317 from the state in which the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged. As a result, the engaging member 20310
It is possible to prevent the board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 320 from being replaced with an illegal board by illegally disengaging the engagement with the fixing member 320.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 171 to 173, the operation of the insertion portion 21724b when the engaging member 310 is engaged with the fixing member 320 will be described. 172 (a) and 173 (FIG. 173)
a) is a rear view of the rotating unit 21700 and the engaging member 310. 172 (b) and 173 (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the rear case 300 and the rotating unit 21700. In addition, in FIGS. 172 (a) and 172 (b), the state in which the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are disengaged is shown, and in FIGS. 173 (a) and 173 (b), the engagement member 310 is engaged. Combined member 3
The state in which 10 is being engaged with the fixing member 320 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 172 and 173, from the state in which the engaging member 310 is disengaged from the fixing member 320, the end portion of the first piece 311 of the engaging member 310 is engaged with the fixing member 320. Part 3
When inserted into the internal space of 32, the end of the first piece 311 is elastically deformed toward the inside of the recess 317. As a result, the width dimension of the recess 317 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) is made smaller than the width dimension in the vertical direction of the insertion portion 21724b.

Further, when the engaging portion 316 is located in the internal space of the engaged portion 332 (when the position is shown in FIG. 173 (a)), the end portion of the first piece 311 presses the protruding tip portion of the insertion portion 21724b. It is placed in a position that exceeds it. In other words, the length dimension of the engaging portion 316 in the left-right direction is the insertion portion 21.
It is set to be larger than the facing distance dimension from the protruding tip portion of the 724b to the end portion of the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320.

Therefore, when the engaging portion 316 is extruded from the internal space of the engaged portion 332, the end portion of the engaging member 310 on the first piece 311 side can be brought into contact with the bent portion 21724b1 of the insertion portion 21724b. .. In this case, the tip of the insertion portion 21724b is pushed out toward the front side (arrow F direction side) along the inclined surface of the bending portion 21724b1. As a result, the engaging member 310 can be displaced to a position where it engages with the fixing member 320.

As shown in FIG. 171, when the engaging portion 316 is pulled out from the internal space of the engaged portion 332, as described above, from the width dimension of the recess 317 in the vertical direction of the first piece 311. However, since the width dimension of the insertion portion 21724b in the vertical direction is increased, the recess 317
The bent portion 21724b1 is inserted inside the.

Therefore, as described above, it is possible to prevent the first piece 311 of the engaging member 310 from being elastically deformed inside the recess of the recess 317. As a result, the engagement between the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 320 is illegally released, and the substrate box 100 (main control device 1) connected to the fixing member 320 is connected.
It is possible to prevent 10) from being replaced with an illegal substrate.

The engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are inside the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301).
) Is removed from the rear case 21300 to disengage the end of the engaging member 310 from the rear case 20300, and then the first engaging member 310.
By elastically deforming the end portion of the piece 311 and pulling out the end portion of the engaging member 310 from the internal space of the engaged portion 332, the engagement between the two can be released.

Therefore, when removing the fixing member 320 from the rear case 21300, it is necessary to remove the rotating unit 21700 from the front side of the rear case 21300, so that the engaging member 3
The engagement between 10 and the fixing member 320 is illegally released from the back side of the back case 21300, and the engagement is illegally released.
It is possible to prevent the board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 320 from being replaced with an unauthorized board.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 174 to 176, the engaging member 2231 according to the 22nd embodiment.
0 and the fixing member 22320 will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 310 is engaged with the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 has been described.
In the 22nd embodiment, the fixing member 22 is formed in the recess 22311a recessed in the engaging member 22310.
The bent portion 22332a1 formed on the 320 is engaged. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIGS. 174 to 176 (a), the engaging member 22310 according to the 22nd embodiment.
The configuration of the fixing member 22320 and the fixing member 22320 will be described. FIG. 174 is a perspective front view of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320. 175 (a) and 175 (b) are front views of the rear case 22300. FIG. 176 (a) shows CLXXVIa- of FIG. 175 (b).
It is a schematic sectional drawing of the back case 22300 in the CLXXVIa line. In addition, FIG. 175 (
In a), the state before the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 are engaged is illustrated, and FIG.
In 75 (b), the state in which the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 are engaged is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 174 to 176 (a), the rear case 223 in the 22nd embodiment.
00 includes a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side open. Further, the rear case 22300 has an engaging member 22310 arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 (open side formed in a box shape (arrow F direction side)) and the bottom wall portion 3.
It is provided on the back side of the 01 and includes a fixing member 22320 for fixing the board box 100 (main control device 110).

The engaging member 22310 has a crank shape in outer shape when viewed from the front, and extends in a direction parallel to each other, the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312, and the first piece 2231.
It is composed of a third piece 313 that connects the ends of the first piece and the second piece 312 in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312.

Further, in the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312, a sliding groove 31 having a long hole long in the extending direction thereof 31
4 is formed respectively, whereby the engaging member 22310 is slidable in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312.

The first piece 22311 includes a recess 22311a recessed toward the back side (arrow B direction side) on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the end portion opposite to the side to which the third piece 313 is connected. ..

The recess 22311a is a bent portion 22332a1 formed in the fixing member 22320 described later.
Is inserted to engage the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320, and as will be described later, the end portion on one side (arrow R direction side) of the first piece 22311 of the engaging member 22310 is fixed. When housed in the internal space of the engaged portion 22332 of the member 22320, the fixing member 223
It is formed at a position facing the 22332a of 20.

Further, the internal shape of the recess 22311a has a substantially right-angled triangular cross section, the right-angled portion is set on the end side (arrow R direction side) of the first piece 22311, and the recessed bottom surface is the first. It is formed as an inclined surface that becomes deeper toward the back surface side (direction of arrow B) toward the end side of one piece 22311.

The fixing member 22320 is composed of an intermediate member 22330 that engages with the above-mentioned engaging member 22310, and a shaft support member 340 that is fastened to the back surface side of the intermediate member 22330.

The interposition member 22330 is formed in a box shape in which the front side (arrow F direction side) is open, and the locking portion 331 projecting to the side surface on one side (arrow R direction side) and the other side (arrow L direction side). The engaged portion 22332 that protrudes from the side surface of the rear case 22300 to the bottom wall portion 301 side (back side (arrow B direction side)) and is formed in a frame shape, and the box-shaped bottom surface (side surface in the arrow B direction side). It mainly includes an insertion hole 333 (see FIG. 39 (b)) that opens in a circular shape and a protrusion 334 that protrudes from the back surface.

The engaged portion 22332 is the first piece 2231 of the engaging member 22310 in the enclosed internal space.
The end portion on one side (arrow R direction side) of 1 is inserted, and the inner edge shape thereof is the first piece 22.
It is set slightly larger than the outer shape of 311. Further, the engaged portion 22332 is formed in a frame shape from one side on the front side (arrow F direction side) to the engaged portion 22332 of the engaging member 22310.
A protrusion 22332a projecting in the insertion direction (arrow R direction side) is provided.

The protrusion 22332a is a bent portion 2233 that bends toward the front side (arrow F direction side) at the end of the tip.
2a1 is provided, and the bent portion 22332a1 thereof is a recess 223 of the engaging member 22310 described above.
By being inserted into 11a, the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 can be engaged with each other. That is, in the bent portion 22332a1, the engaging member 22310 is engaged with the engaged portion 22332.
It is formed at a position facing the recess 22311a in the state of being inserted into.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 176 (a), the engaging portion between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 is formed on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 22300 with the engaging member 22310 interposed therebetween. Will be done. Therefore, since the engaging portion between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 can be separated from the first opening 301c formed in the bottom wall portion 301, the first
It is possible to prevent an illegal member such as a wire or a wire from being inserted through the opening 301c and illegally disengage the engagement member 22310 from the fixing member 22320.

Further, since the first piece 22311 of the engaging member 22310 can be arranged between the bottom wall portion 301 and the engaging portion of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320, the bottom wall portion 301 can be arranged.
It is possible to prevent a wire, a wire, or the like illegally inserted from an opening such as the first opening 301c formed in the above from reaching the engaging portion of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 linearly. As a result, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized member (wire, wire, or the like) from being inserted through the opening of the bottom wall portion 301 and illegally disengaging the engagement member 22310 from the fixing member 22320.

Further, in the present embodiment, the protrusion 22332a is projected in the direction of inserting the engaging member 22310 into the internal space of the engaged portion 22332. Therefore, the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 223
The engagement portion with 20 is set on the front side of the fixing member 22320. As a result, the bottom wall portion 3
When an illegal member such as a wire or a wire is inserted from the first opening 301c of 01, the bottom wall portion 3 indicates the insertion direction of the illegal member that reaches the engaging portion between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320.
It can be tilted diagonally with respect to the front of 01. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the force in the direction of disengaging the engaging portion between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 to be transmitted from the tip of the fraudulent member. As a result, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized member from being inserted through the first opening 301c of the bottom wall portion 301 and illegally disengaging the engagement member 22310 and the fixing member 22320.

Next, the engaging member 23310 and the fixing member 23320 in the 23rd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 176 (b). In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the protrusion 22332a for engaging the engaging member 22310 is projected in the direction of inserting the engaging member 22310 into the engaged portion 22332 has been described, but in the 23rd embodiment, the case has been described. Engagement portion 23 of the engagement member 23310
The protrusion 23332a is projected in the direction opposite to the insertion direction of the 332. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 176 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rear case 23300 according to the 23rd embodiment. The cross-sectional view of FIG. 176 (b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 176 (a). Further, in the 23rd embodiment, as described above, the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 223 in the 22nd embodiment
Since the engagement position is different from that of 20, the description is omitted because it is the same as the 22nd embodiment except for the engagement portion between the engagement member 23310 and the fixing member 23320.

The rear case 22300 in the 23rd embodiment has a bottom wall portion 233 having a substantially rectangular front view.
01 and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 23301 toward the front are provided, and one side (front side) is opened by each of the wall portions 23301 and 302 in a box shape. It is formed. A front-view rectangular opening 301a (see FIG. 5) is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 5) is arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 through the opening 301a. 2) is visible.

Further, the rear case 23300 in the 23rd embodiment is on the front side of the bottom wall portion 23301 (
The engaging member 23310 arranged in a box shape on the open side (arrow F direction side) and the board box 100 (main control device) arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 23300. It mainly includes a fixing member 23320 for fixing 110).

As shown in FIG. 176 (b), in the 23rd embodiment, as described above, the engaged portion 2333
The protruding direction of the protrusion 23332a protruding from 2 is the protrusion 22332a of the 22nd embodiment (
A bent portion 23332a1 is formed at the protruding tip of the protruding portion 23332a, which is set in the direction opposite to (see FIG. 176 (a)) and bends toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side).

The engaging member 23310 has a bent portion 23332a1 at a position facing the bent portion 23332a1.
A rectangular opening 23310b larger than the outer shape of is formed. As a result, the engaging member 23
When the 310 is inserted into the internal space of the engaged portion 23332 of the fixing member 23320, the opening 2
The bent portion 23332a1 is inserted inside the 3310b, and the engaging member 23310 and the fixing member 23320 are engaged with each other.

Further, in the bottom wall portion 23301 of the back case 23300 in the 23rd embodiment, a third opening portion 23301e is formed at a position facing the fixing member 23320. The third opening 23301e allows the operator to disengage the engaging portion between the engaging member 23310 and the fixing member 23320 from the back surface side of the bottom wall portion 23301. As a result, the back case 23300
The work of removing the fixing member 23320 can be simplified.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 177 and 178, the back case 243 in the 24th embodiment.
00 will be described. In the 18th embodiment, the fixing member 18320 is attached to the bottom wall portion 1830.
The case where the fixing member 18320 and the engaging member 18310 are disengaged from the fixing member 18320 has been described. However, in the 24th embodiment, when the fixing member 24320 is removed from the bottom wall portion 24301, the engaging member 24310 has been described. The insertion portion of the fixing member 24320 into the fixing member 24320 is cut.
The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 177 (a) is a front view of the rear case 24300 in the 24th embodiment, and FIG. 177 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rear case 24300 in the CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb line of FIG. 177 (a). FIG. 178 is the CLXXVIII-C of FIG. 177 (b).
It is sectional drawing of the back case 24300 in the LXXVIII line.

As shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, the rear case 24300 according to the 24th embodiment.
Includes a bottom wall portion 24301 having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 24301 toward the front, and one side of each of the wall portions 24301 and 302. The (front side) is formed in an open box shape. Further, the rear case 24300 has a bottom wall portion 2
Engagement member 2 disposed on the front side of 4301 (open side formed in a box shape (arrow F direction side))
4310 and the board box 100 (main control device 1) arranged on the back side of the bottom wall portion 24301.
A fixing member 24320 for fixing 10) is provided.

The bottom wall portion 24301 has a front view rectangular opening 301a formed in the center thereof, and the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) is arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 24301 through the opening 301a.
See) is visible. Further, the bottom wall portion 24301 is located on the left side (arrow L direction side) of the first opening 24301c that opens at a position facing the fixing member 24320 and the first opening 24301c, and is located in the front-rear direction (arrow F-). An operator 24 that opens in the B direction) and is described inside.
It comprises an opening (not shown) into which the insertion portion 24362 of 360 is inserted.

The engaging member 24310 is a second piece 24312 formed in a T shape when viewed from the front, and the second piece 2 thereof.
It mainly comprises a first piece 24311 that bends from the end of 4312 and extends in an arc shape. The second piece 24312 is a through hole 24 that penetrates in the front-rear direction through the connecting portion of two orthogonal extending portions.
The 312d is provided, and the distance from the through hole 24312d to the outside of the extended portion of the second piece 24312 is set to be substantially the same.

The through hole 24312d is a portion into which the insertion portion 24362 of the operator 24360 described later is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the insertion portion 24362. As a result, the actuator 24360 is rotationally operated, so that the engaging member 24310 is rotationally displaced around the through hole 24312d.

The first piece 24311 is formed in an arc shape centered on the through hole 24312d, and the second piece 2
It is projected from each end of the 4312 in one direction of rotation (front view left rotation). again,
Each first piece 24311 has an engaging portion 24316 protruding from the tip of the protrusion on both sides in the radial direction about the axis of the through hole 24312d, and from the tip surface of the protrusion toward the connecting side with the second piece 24312. A recess 24317, which is recessed, is provided.

The engaging portion 24316 is a portion that engages with the fixing member 24320, which will be described later, and is a recess 24.
By 317, the protruding tip portion (the portion where the engaging portion 24316 is formed) of the first piece 24311 can be elastically deformed and engaged with the engaged portion 24332 formed on the fixing member 24320. A detailed description of the shape of the engaging portion 24316 and the recess 24317 will be described later.

The operator 24360 is an operating member that transmits an operation from the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the bottom wall portion 24301 to the engaging member 24310 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the bottom wall portion 24301. It is provided with an operation portion 24361 formed in a columnar shape and an insertion portion 24362 protruding coaxially with the operation portion 24361. The operation portion 24361 is formed in the bottom wall portion 24301, and the outer diameter is set to a size larger than the opening through which the insertion portion 24362 is inserted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the entire operator 24360 from being displaced toward the front side of the bottom wall portion 24301.

The insertion portion 24362 is a portion to be inserted into the through hole 24312d of the engagement member 24310 as described above, whereby the rotational force input from the operation portion 24361 is applied to the engagement member 24.
Can be transmitted to 310.

The fixing member 24320 is composed of an intermediate member 24330 that engages with the above-mentioned engaging member 24310, and a shaft support member 340 arranged on the back surface side of the intermediate member 24330.

The interposition member 24330 is formed in a box shape in which the front side (the side in the direction of arrow F) is open. again,
The interposing member 24330 includes a housing portion 24335 that is projected from the front and is formed in a box shape with the lower side (arrow D direction side) open. The accommodating portion 24335 has an engaging member 2 inside.
It is a portion for inserting the engaging portion (tip portion of the first piece 24311) of the 4310, and the lower open portion is arranged on the displacement locus of the first piece 24311 of the engaging member 24310 described above. As a result, the engaging member 24310 can be rotated to accommodate the end portion of the first piece 24311 of the engaging member 24310 in the internal space of the accommodating portion 24335.

Further, the internal space of the accommodating portion 24335 is formed to be larger than the engaging portion of the engaging member 24310 at one location. As a result, when the engaging member 24310 is cut as described later, the cut portion of the engaging member 24310 can be accommodated in the internal space of the accommodating portion 24335. In this embodiment, the size of the internal space of the accommodating portion 24335 is the engaging member 243.
It is set to be approximately three times as large as the engaging portion of 10 (the tip portion of the first piece 24311), and is set to be approximately three times larger than that of the accommodating portion 24.
At least three or more engaging members 24310 can be accommodated in the internal space of the 335.

As shown in FIG. 178, the accommodating portion 24335 is opened on the lower side, and the stepped portion 24335a is projected from the opening portion in a stepped manner, and the engaging member 24310 is accommodated inside the accommodating portion 24335 in the stepped portion 24335a. The engaging portion 24316 of the above is engaged. As a result, when the engaging member 24310 is rotated, the tip end portion of the first piece 24311 can be inserted inside the accommodating portion 24335, and the engaging member 24310 and the fixing member 24320 can be engaged with each other.

Further, in this case, the recessed depth SH3 (see FIG. 178) of the recess 24317 is the accommodating portion 243.
The distance dimension SH4 from the end of the first piece 24311 in the state of being accommodated and engaged in 35 to the lower end of the accommodating portion 24335 is set. Therefore, the engaged first piece 24311
The recess 24317 formed in the above is in a state of being accommodated inside the accommodating portion 24335. As a result, the end portion of the first piece 24311 is elastically deformed to form the engaging member 24310 and the fixing member 24.
It is possible to prevent the engagement with the 320 from being released.

Therefore, in the 24th embodiment, the first piece 24311 inserted inside the accommodating portion 24335.
By cutting the first piece 24311 protruding from the accommodating portion 24335, the bottom wall portion 24301
The fixing member 24320 can be removed from.

In this case, the distance dimension SH5 (see FIG. 178) from the upper inner edge of the accommodating portion 24335 to the tip end portion of the first piece 24311 is set to be larger than the above-mentioned distance dimension SH4. As a result, the cut portion of the first piece 24331 can be moved above the accommodating portion 24335, and the other first piece 24311 is inserted from the open side (arrow F direction side) of the accommodating portion 24335 to insert the step portion 24335a. Can be engaged with.

Therefore, the number of times the fixing member 24320 is removed from the bottom wall portion 24301 is the number of times the engaging member 24 is removed.
It can be determined by the number of the remaining first piece 24311 of 310 or the number of the cut first piece 24311 housed in the accommodating portion 24335. As a result, the fixing member 2432
When 0 is illegally removed from the bottom wall portion 24301 and the board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 24320 is replaced with an illegal board, the engaging member 24
The number of the remaining first piece 24311 of the 310 or the number of the cut first pieces 24311 accommodated in the accommodating portion 24335 can make the operator aware that the fixing member 24320 has been illegally removed.

Further, as described above, the engaging member 24310 utilizes the region on the side where the second piece 24312 is formed in a T-shape in front view and the first piece 24311 is not formed (upper side of the T-shape). The first piece 24311 can be inserted into the fixing member 24320 by rotating the engaging member 24310. Further, when the first piece 24311 is cut, the engaging member 24310 is made rotatable by using the cut region of the first piece 24311, and the next (other) first piece 24311 is used as the fixing member 24320. Can be inserted. As a result, the accommodating portion 2433 of the first piece 24311
The order of accommodation in 5 can be determined. Therefore, the worker is the first undisconnected
Since it is possible to visually check the position of the piece 24311 and determine whether the fixing member 24320 has been illegally released, the number of the first piece 24311 is more illegal than when the operator counts the number. It is possible to prevent the operator from overlooking the traces.

Next, the game board 25013 in the 25th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 179. In the first embodiment, the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 150 is the main body 1
Although the case of being bonded to the 51 has been described, in the 25th embodiment, the decorative member 154 is bonded to the front side of the base plate 60. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

179 (a) and 179 (b) are sectional views of the game board 25013 in the 25th embodiment. Note that FIGS. 179 (a) and 179 (b) correspond to the cross-sectional views of FIG.
Further, in FIG. 179 (b), a state in which the general winning opening unit 25150 is disassembled from the base plate 60 is shown.

The game board 25013 in the 25th embodiment is the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the game board 25013 includes a base plate 60 formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a center frame 86 arranged in an opening portion formed in the base plate 60.
In addition, the game board 25013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76, 77, a general winning opening 63, and a first. Winning opening 6
4. The second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2) are assembled and configured, and the peripheral portion thereof is the back surface of the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). Attached to the side. Further, in the 25th embodiment, the second opening 60b of the base 60 (FIG. 1).
1) The general winning opening unit 25150 is arranged in the opening portion.

As shown in FIG. 179, the general winning opening unit 25150 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 25013 in the 25th embodiment has a main body portion 151 arranged along the front surface of the base plate 60. The first standing portion 152 which is erected at the end of the main body portion 151, and the second standing portion which is erected from the front of the main body portion 141 and one end of which is connected to the first standing portion 152. 1
It mainly includes 53, a decorative member 25154 arranged on the back surface side of the main body portion 151, and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) general winning openings 63 formed on the main body portion 151.

The decorative member 25154 is formed in a plate shape from a light-transmitting material, and is decorated with a pattern or characters (pictures) connected to the decorative member 60c arranged on the front side of the base plate 60. again,
The shape of the outer edge of the decorative member 25154 is formed to be slightly smaller than the shape of the inner edge of the recess 151b formed in the main body portion 151.

Further, the decorative member 25154 is provided with an adhesive tape 25154a to be adhered to the front surface of the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c) at the end portion of the back surface of the decorative member 25154. Thereby, the decorative member 25154 can be adhered to and arranged on the base plate 60. Therefore, when the decorative member 25154 is arranged on the base plate 60, the operator can attach the decorative member 25154 to the front surface of the base plate 60 while visually recognizing the decoration of the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60. Therefore,
It is possible to facilitate the alignment of the decoration between the decorative member 25154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60. As a result, it is possible to prevent the decorative member 25154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 from being displaced from each other, and to give the player the decorative member 25154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 as one decoration. It can be made easy to see.

Further, since the decorative member 25154 is directly attached to the front surface of the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c), the front-rear direction between the decorative member 25154 and the decorative member 60c is higher than when the decoration is applied to the front side of the main body portion 151. The arrangement in (arrow FB direction) can be brought closer. As a result, each decorative member 25154, 6 when the player visually recognizes the decorative member 25154 from an angle.
It is possible to suppress a large displacement of the decoration of 0c. As a result, the player is given a decorative member 25.
The 154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be easily visually recognized by the player as the decoration of 1.

Further, in the 25th embodiment, the concave dimension X1 of the concave portion 151b of the main body portion 151 is set to be smaller than the width dimension X2 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) in which the decorative member 25154 and the adhesive tape 25154a are combined. Will be done. As a result, when the main body portion 151 is arranged from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the decorative member 25154, the decorative member 25154 is placed in the recess 151b.
It is possible to prevent the front surface of the decorative member 25154 from coming into contact with the recessed bottom surface 151b2.

Therefore, the back surface portion 151d forming the back surface of the main body portion 151 excluding the recess 151b can be brought into contact with the front surface of the base plate 60, and a gap is formed between the back surface portion 151d and the base plate 60. Can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering between the back surface portion 151d and the base plate 60, making it difficult to visually recognize the decoration of the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60.

Next, the game board 26013 in the 26th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 180. In the first embodiment, the case where the linear inclined surface 151a is formed at the end of the main body portion 151 of the general winning opening unit 150 has been described, but in the 26th embodiment, the main body portion 26 has been described.
The inclined surface 26151a formed at the end of 151 is formed in an arc shape with a cross section bulging outward. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

180 (a) and 180 (b) are cross-sectional views of the game board 26013 in the 26th embodiment. It should be noted that FIGS. 180 (a) and 180 (b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG.
Further, in FIG. 180 (a), the player places the game board 26013 at a higher position than usual (for example, in FIG. 180 (a)).
The line of sight when visually recognized from the pachinko machine 10 (viewpoint at the same height as the upper end in the gravity direction) of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is illustrated by a two-dot chain line. The line of sight when visually recognized from the position of (for example, a viewpoint having the same height as the position substantially intermediate in the gravity direction of the game board 26013) is shown by a two-dot chain line.

The game board 26013 in the 26th embodiment is the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the game board 26013 has a base plate 60 formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) arranged in an opening portion formed in the base plate 60. Be prepared. Further, the game board 26013 is a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view.
In addition to a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills for ball guidance, rails 76, 77, general winning openings 63,
The first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2) are assembled and configured, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (FIG. 1). See) attached to the back side. Further, in the 26th embodiment, the general winning opening unit 26150 is arranged in the opening portion of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 180, the general winning opening unit 26150 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 26013 in the 26th embodiment is a plate-shaped main body portion 26151 along the front surface of the base plate 60 and its own. A decorative member 154 arranged on the back surface side of the main body portion 26151 is provided.

The main body portion 26151 is a decorative member 15 formed of a transparent resin material and arranged on the back surface side.
The decoration of the pattern, characters, etc. (picture) of 4 can be visually recognized from the player side. In addition, the main body 261
51 has an inclined surface 26151a whose end portion in front view is inclined toward the back surface side and bulges in an arc shape in cross section, and a recess 1 recessed from the back surface of the main body portion 26151 toward the front surface side.
51b and the like are mainly provided.

The inclined surface 26151a is set so that the inclination angle θ1 with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 of the virtual line IL1 connecting the connection point with the plane on the front side of the main body portion 26151 and the end portion on the back side is smaller than 45 degrees. Will be done. As a result, the light traveling in the horizontal direction on the main body 26151 is transmitted from the inclined surface 26151a to the main body 2615 more than when the inclination angle θ1 is set to be larger than 45 degrees.
The angle of incidence when incident on the outside of 1 is increased. Therefore, when the light is emitted to the outside of the main body portion 26151, the traveling direction of the light can be easily bent upward. Therefore, the player can enter the general winning opening unit 2615 from a position higher than the normal position with respect to the game board 26013.
When 0 is visually recognized, the connecting portion of the decorative members 154 and 60c can be easily visually recognized from the front side. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the difference in the positions of the connecting portions of the decorative members 154 and 60c in the front-rear direction.
And the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be combined to make it easy to visually recognize as the decoration of 1.
In this embodiment, the angle θ1 is set to 40 degrees.

Further, as described above, since the inclined surface 26151a is formed in a cross-sectional arc shape that bulges outward, the main body portion 2615 is directed toward the center side (lower side in FIG. 180 (a)) of the main body portion 26151.
The angle of incidence is increased when the light traveling in the horizontal direction of 1 is incident on the outside of the main body portion 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a. Therefore, as the direction toward the center side of the main body portion 26151 (lower side in FIG. 180 (a)), the light traveling horizontally through the main body portion 26151 is directed from the inclined surface 26151a to the main body portion 261.
The angle of incidence when incident on the outside of 51 is increased.

Therefore, the player is below the horizontal line HR1 (see FIG. 180 (a)) through which the player passes through the inclined surface 26151a and the intermediate position between the connection point with the front surface surface of the main body portion 26151 and the end portion on the back surface side. When the decoration on the side is visually recognized, the angle of the line of sight of the player passing through the main body portion 26151 can be easily brought closer to the direction orthogonal to the front surface of the base plate 60 (horizontal direction).

Further, the decorative member 154 disposed inside the recess 151b has a horizontal line H whose end position passes through an intermediate position between a connection point with a flat surface on the front side of the main body portion 26151 and an end portion on the back side.
It is set below R1 (see FIG. 180 (a)) and is set on the back side of the inclined surface 26151a. As described above, when the decoration below the horizontal line HR1 (see FIG. 180 (a)) is visually recognized by the player through the inclined surface 26151a, the angle of the line of sight of the player passing through the main body portion 26151. Can be easily brought closer to the direction orthogonal to the front surface of the base plate 60 (horizontal direction).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 180 (a), even when the player visually recognizes the general winning opening unit 26150 and the base plate 60 from a position higher than usual on the game board 26013, the inclined surface 26
The decoration of the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and the general winning opening unit 2615 via 151a.
Combined with the decoration of the decorative member 154 of 0, it can be easily made visible to the player. As a result, the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 26150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be combined and easily visually recognized as the decoration of 1.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 180 (b), when the player visually recognizes the general winning opening unit 26150 and the base plate 60 from the normal height of the game board 26013, the main body due to the bulging shape of the inclined surface 26151a. Since the incident angle when the light traveling in the horizontal direction through the portion 26151 is incident on the outside of the main body portion 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a is close to a right angle, it is possible to make it difficult to refract the light emitted to the outside of the main body portion 26151. Therefore, the decorative member 15 of the general winning opening unit 26150 is suppressed from bending the direction of the player's line of sight when passing through the inclined surface 26151a.
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the positional deviation in the front-rear direction between the 4 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60. As a result, the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 26150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be combined and easily visually recognized as the decoration of 1.

Next, the game board 27013 in the 27th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 181. In the first embodiment, the case where the linear inclined surface 151a is formed at the end of the main body portion 151 of the general winning opening unit 150 has been described, but in the 27th embodiment, the main body portion 2 has been described.
The inclined surface 27151a formed at the end of the 6151 is formed in a circular arc shape recessed inward of the main body 27151. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

181 (a) and 181 (b) are cross-sectional views of the game board 27013 in the 27th embodiment. It should be noted that FIGS. 181 (a) and 181 (b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG.
Further, in FIG. 181 (a), the player places the game board 27013 at a higher position than usual (for example, in FIG. 181 (a)).
The line of sight when visually recognized from the pachinko machine 10 (viewpoint at the same height as the upper end in the gravity direction) of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is illustrated by a two-dot chain line. The line of sight when visually recognized from the position of (for example, a viewpoint having the same height as the position substantially intermediate in the gravity direction of the game board 27013) is shown by a two-dot chain line.

The game board 27013 in the 27th embodiment is the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the game board 27013 has a base plate 60 formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) arranged in an opening portion formed in the base plate 60. Be prepared. Further, the game board 27013 is a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view.
In addition to a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills for ball guidance, rails 76, 77, general winning openings 63,
The first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2) are assembled and configured, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (FIG. 1). See) attached to the back side. Further, in the 27th embodiment, the general winning opening unit 27150 is arranged in the opening portion of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 181 the general winning opening unit 27150 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 27013 in the 27th embodiment is a plate-shaped main body 27151 along the front surface of the base plate 60 and its own. A decorative member 154 arranged on the back surface side of the main body 27151 is provided.

The main body 27151 is a decorative member 15 formed of a transparent resin material and arranged on the back surface side.
The decoration of the pattern, characters, etc. (picture) of 4 can be visually recognized from the player side. In addition, the main body 271
51 has an inclined surface 27151a having an arcuate cross section whose end portion in front view is inclined toward the back surface side and is recessed toward the inside of the main body portion 27151, and a concave portion from the back surface of the main body portion 27151 toward the front side. It is mainly provided with a recess 151b to be provided.

In the inclined surface 27151a, the inclination angle θ2 with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 of the virtual line IL2 connecting the connection point with the plane on the front side of the main body 27151 and the end portion on the back side is set to be larger than 45 degrees. Will be done. As a result, the projecting distance of the inclined surface 2751a to the outside can be reduced, and it is possible to prevent the outer shape of the main body portion 27151 from becoming large.

Further, as described above, since the inclined surface 27151a is formed in a circular arc shape recessed inside the main body portion 27151, the player can use each decorative member 60c via the inclined surface 27151a.
When 154 is visually recognized, the concave shape thereof can widen the visible area of the decoration of each of the decorative members 60c and 154 via the inclined surface 27151a. That is, the main body 27151
Due to the arcuate cross-section that is recessed toward the inside of, the inclined surface 2 from each of the decorative members 60c and 154
The light incident on the 7151a can be refracted and focused toward the player's viewpoint. As a result, the patterns and characters (pictures) visually recognized through the inclined surface 27151a can be reduced, and the connection of the decorative members 60c and 154 can be made difficult for the player to understand. As a result, the misalignment of the decorative members 60c and 154 can be obscured by the player, and the player's interest can be suppressed from being impaired.

Further, the decorative member 154 disposed inside the recess 151b has a horizontal line H whose end position passes through an intermediate position between a connection point with a flat surface on the front side of the main body portion 27151 and an end portion on the back side.
It is set above R2 and on the back side of the inclined surface 27151a.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 181 (a), when the player visually recognizes the general winning opening unit 27150 and the base plate 60 from a position higher than usual on the game board 26013, the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 The incident angle when light traveling in the horizontal direction on the main body portion 26151 on the front side of the connecting portion of the above is incident on the outside of the main body portion 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a is increased. Therefore, the light traveling in the horizontal direction on the main body 27151 on the front side of the connecting portion with the decorative member 154 is easily refracted toward the viewpoint side of the player, so that the player can move the light from the normal position with respect to the game board 27013. When the general winning opening unit 27150 is visually recognized from a high position, the connecting portion of the decorative members 154 and 60c can be easily visually recognized from the front side. As a result, the decorative member 15
Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the difference in the positions of the connecting portions of the 4, 60c in the front-rear direction, the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 27150 and the decorative member 6 of the base plate 60
Combined with 0c, it can be easily seen as a decoration of 1.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 181 (b), when the player visually recognizes the general winning opening unit 27150 and the base plate 60 from the normal height of the game board 27013, it is decorated by the concave shape of the inclined surface 27151a. Since the incident angle when the light traveling in the horizontal direction on the main body 27151 on the front side of the connecting portion with the member 154 is incident on the outside of the main body 27151 from the inclined surface 27151a is approximated at a right angle, it is emitted to the outside of the main body 27151. It is possible to make it difficult to refract the light to be emitted. Therefore,
By suppressing the bending of the direction of the player's line of sight when passing through the inclined surface 27151a, the player can play a game in which the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 27150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 are displaced in the front-rear direction. It can be difficult for people to recognize. As a result, the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 27150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be combined and easily visually recognized as the decoration of 1.

Next, the game board 28013 in the 28th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (a). In the first embodiment, the case where the inner surface of the end portion of the recess 151b recessed in the main body portion 151 of the general winning opening unit 150 is parallel to the plate thickness direction of the main body portion 151 has been described. The inner surface of the end portion of the recess 28151b in the embodiment is a recessed bottom surface 151.
It is inclined inward toward the b2 side. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 182 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 28013 in the 28th embodiment. note that,
FIG. 182 (a) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Further, in FIG. 182 (a), the line of sight when the player visually recognizes the game board 28013 from a normal position (for example, a viewpoint having the same height as the substantially intermediate position in the gravity direction of the game board 28013) is a two-dot chain line. Illustrated.

The game board 28013 in the 28th embodiment is the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the game board 28013 has a base plate 60 formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) arranged in an opening portion formed in the base plate 60. Be prepared. Further, the game board 28013 is a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view.
In addition to a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills for ball guidance, rails 76, 77, general winning openings 63,
The first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2) are assembled and configured, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (FIG. 1). See) attached to the back side. Further, in the 28th embodiment, the general winning opening unit 28150 is arranged in the opening portion of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 182 (a), the base plate 6 of the game board 28013 in the 28th embodiment.
The general winning opening unit 28150 arranged on the front side of 0 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 28151 along the front surface of the base plate 60, and a decorative member 154 arranged on the back side of the main body portion 28151. ..

The main body portion 28151 is a decorative member 15 formed of a transparent resin material and arranged on the back surface side.
The decoration of the pattern, characters, etc. (picture) of 4 can be visually recognized from the player side. In addition, the main body 281
The 51 mainly includes an inclined surface 151a whose end portion is inclined toward the back surface side, and a recess 28151b whose end portion is recessed from the back surface side toward the front surface side of the main body portion 28151.

As described above, the inner side surface 28151b3 of the recess 28151b has a main body portion 2 outward from the recess bottom surface 151b2 side toward the recess opening side (from the arrow F direction side toward the arrow B direction side).
It is formed so as to be inclined toward the end side of 8151. In this case, the inclination angle θ3 with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 of the inner side surface 28151b3 in the cross section of the recess 28151b (FIG. 182).
(A)) is an inclination angle θ4 (see) with respect to the base plate 60 of the inclined surface 151a of the main body portion 151 (see).
It is set smaller than FIG. 182 (a)).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 182 (a), the player can use the inclined surface 2815 of the main body portion 28151.
When the decorative member 60c is visually recognized via 1a, the decorative position of the virtual image that is bent by passing through the main body 28151 and is visually recognized by the player, and the decorative member 60c without passing through the main body 28151.
It is possible to bring it closer to the decorative position of the real image when the image is visually recognized. That is, the decorative member 60 that is refracted and visually recognized by the inclined surface 28151a of the main body portion 28151 and the inner surface surface 28151b3 of the recess.
The position of c can be positioned on an extension of the player's line of sight. As a result, when the decorative member 60c is visually recognized by the player via the main body portion 28151, the misalignment of the decoration caused by the refraction of light can be suppressed, and the player's interest can be suppressed from being impaired.

Next, the game board 29013 according to the 29th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (b). In the 28th embodiment, the inner side surface 2915 in the cross section of the recess 29151b
The case where the inclination angle θ3 with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 of 1b3 is set to be smaller than the inclination angle θ4 with respect to the base plate 60 of the inclined surface 151a has been described, but in the 29th embodiment, the inner side surface 29151b3 in the cross section of the recess 29151b has been described. The inclination angle θ5 with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 is set to be larger than the inclination angle θ6 with respect to the base plate 60 of the inclined surface 151a. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 182 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 29013 according to the 29th embodiment. note that,
FIG. 182 (b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Further, in FIG. 182 (b), the line of sight when the player visually recognizes the game board 29013 from a normal position (for example, a viewpoint having the same height as the substantially intermediate position in the gravity direction of the game board 29013) is a two-dot chain line. Illustrated.

The game board 29013 in the 29th embodiment is the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the game board 29013 has a base plate 60 formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) arranged in an opening portion formed in the base plate 60. Be prepared. Further, the game board 29013 is a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view.
In addition to a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills for ball guidance, rails 76, 77, general winning openings 63,
The first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2) are assembled and configured, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (FIG. 1). See) attached to the back side. Further, in the 29th embodiment, the general winning opening unit 29150 is arranged in the opening portion of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 182 (b), the base plate 6 of the game board 29013 according to the 29th embodiment.
The general winning opening unit 29150 arranged on the front side of 0 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 29151 along the front surface of the base plate 60, and a decorative member 154 arranged on the back side of the main body portion 29151. ..

The main body portion 29151 is a decorative member 15 formed of a transparent resin material and arranged on the back surface side.
The decoration of the pattern, characters, etc. (picture) of 4 can be visually recognized from the player side. In addition, the main body 291
The 51 mainly includes an inclined surface 151a whose end portion is inclined toward the back surface side, and a recess 29151b whose end portion is recessed from the back surface side toward the front surface side of the main body portion 29151.

As described above, the inner side surface 29151b3 of the recess 29151b has a main body portion 2 outward from the recess bottom surface 151b2 side toward the recess opening side (from the arrow F direction side toward the arrow B direction side).
It is formed so as to be inclined toward the end side of 9151. In this case, the inclination angle θ5 with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 of the inner side surface 29151b3 in the cross section of the recess 29151b (FIG. 182).
(B)) is an inclination angle θ6 (inclination angle θ6 with respect to the base plate 60 of the inclined surface 151a of the main body 151).
It is set larger than (see FIG. 182 (b)).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 182 (b), the player can use the inclined surface 151a of the main body portion 29151.
When the decorative member 60c is visually recognized, the light emitted from the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 to the player's viewpoint through the inclined surface 151a is emitted from the inner surface 2915 of the recess 29151b.
The light can be emitted in a direction substantially orthogonal to the inclination of 1b3. Therefore, when light is incident on the inner side surface 29151b3 of the recess 29151b from the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154, it is possible to suppress the refraction of the light. As a result, the inner surface 291 of the recess 29151b
When light is incident on 51b3, the light is refracted, so that the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154
It is possible to prevent the connecting portion of the above from being visually recognized from the upper side in the direction of gravity, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 as the decoration of 1.

Further, since a predetermined gap is provided between the inner side surface 29151b3 of the recess 29151b and the end portion of the decorative member 154, it is possible to absorb the dimensional error that occurs when the decorative member 154 is formed by the gap.

Then, with reference to FIG. 183 (a), the general winning opening unit 30 in the thirtieth embodiment
150 will be described. In the 28th embodiment, the inner surface 2815 of the recess 28151b
The case where 1b3 is formed in an inclined manner has been described, but in the thirtieth embodiment, the recess 301
The inner side surface 30151b3 of 51b is formed so as to bulge inward of the recess 28151b and to be curved in a circular arc shape in cross section. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The game board 30013 in the thirtieth embodiment is the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the game board 30013 has a base plate 60 formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) arranged in an opening portion formed in the base plate 60. Be prepared. Further, the game board 30013 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view.
In addition to a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills for ball guidance, rails 76, 77, general winning openings 63,
The first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2) are assembled and configured, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (FIG. 1). See) attached to the back side. Further, in the thirtieth embodiment, the general winning opening unit 30150 is arranged in the opening portion of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

FIG. 183 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the general winning opening unit 30150 in the thirtieth embodiment. Note that FIG. 183 (a) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Further, in FIG. 183 (a), the line of sight when the player visually recognizes the game board 30013 from a normal position (for example, a viewpoint having the same height as the substantially intermediate position in the gravity direction of the game board 30013) is a two-dot chain line. Illustrated in.

As shown in FIG. 183 (a), the base plate 6 of the game board 30013 according to the thirtieth embodiment.
The general winning opening unit 30150 arranged on the front side of 0 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 30151 along the front surface of the base plate 60, and a decorative member 154 arranged on the back side of the main body portion 30151. ..

The main body portion 30151 is a decorative member 15 formed of a transparent resin material and arranged on the back surface side.
The decoration of the pattern, characters, etc. (picture) of 4 can be visually recognized from the player side. In addition, the main body 301
The 51 mainly includes an inclined surface 151a whose end portion is inclined toward the back surface side, and a recess 30151b which is recessed from the back surface side of the main body portion 30151 toward the front surface side.

The inner side surface 30151b3 of the concave portion 30151b is formed so as to be inclined outward from the concave bottom surface 151b2 side toward the concave opening side (from the arrow F direction side toward the arrow B direction side) toward the end portion side of the main body portion 30151. At the same time, it bulges in an arc shape in cross section toward the inside of the recess 30151b.
As a result, the line of sight of the player who visually recognizes the decorative member 60c through the recess 30151b can be easily directed in a direction (horizontal direction) orthogonal to the decorative surface of the decorative member 60c. As a result, the recess 30
When the decoration of the game board 30013 is visually recognized via 151b, the end portion of the decorative member 154 can be suppressed from being visually recognized, and the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 can be easily visually recognized by the player as the decoration of 1. ..

Then, referring to FIG. 183 (b), the general winning opening unit 311 in the 31st embodiment
50 will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the inclined surface 151a is formed as a surface having a linear cross section has been described, but the inclined surface 31151a in the 31st embodiment includes a plurality of recessed portions 31151a1. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 183 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the general winning opening unit 31150 in the 31st embodiment. Note that FIG. 183 (b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Further, the game board 31013 in the 31st embodiment is the same as the game board 13 in the 1st embodiment.
Includes a base plate 60 formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) arranged in an opening portion formed in the base plate 60. Also, the game board 3
The 1013 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76, 77, a general winning opening 63, and a first winning opening 64. Second winning opening 640, variable winning device 65, first through gate 66, variable display device unit 80, etc. (FIG. 2)
(See) is assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). Further, in the 31st embodiment, the general winning opening unit 31150 is arranged in the opening portion of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 183 (b), the base plate 6 of the game board 31013 according to the 31st embodiment.
The general winning opening unit 31150 disposed on the front side of 0 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 31151 along the front surface of the base plate 60, and a decorative member 154 arranged on the back surface side of the main body portion 31151.

The main body portion 31151 is a decorative member 15 formed of a transparent resin material and arranged on the back surface side.
The decoration of the pattern, characters, etc. (picture) of 4 can be visually recognized from the player side. In addition, the main body 311
The 51 mainly includes an inclined surface 31151a whose end portion is inclined toward the back surface side, and a recess 151b which is recessed from the back surface side of the main body portion 31151 toward the front surface side.

The inclined surface 31151a has a plurality of recessed portions 311 recessed in a direction orthogonal to the inclined direction thereof.
51a1 is provided. A plurality of the recessed portions 31151a1 are arranged side by side in the inclined direction of the inclined surface 31151a, and are extended along the end portion of the main body portion 31151 in the front view. As a result, it is incident on the inside of the main body 31151 and the end of the main body 31151 (inclined surface 311).
The light emitted from 51a) can be diffusely reflected. Therefore, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the decoration that is visually recognized through the inclined surface 31151a in a blurred state.

Here, since the end portion of the decorative member 154 arranged on the main body portion 31151 is arranged on the back surface side of the inclined surface 31151a as in the first embodiment, the decoration of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60
The connecting portion of the decoration of c can be visually recognized by the player in a blurred state. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the connection of each decorative member, and it is possible to easily make the player recognize the decoration of the decorative member 60c and the decoration of the decorative member 154 as one decoration.

<Adjustment means to change the flow direction by adjusting the distance between facing each other>
Then, with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186, the special winning device 32 according to the 32nd embodiment.
550 will be described. In the thirteenth embodiment, the shim member SI is sandwiched between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 to adjust the facing distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570. As described above, in the 32nd embodiment,
A case where the facing distance between the first path member 32560 and the second path member 32570 is adjusted by the screw fastening position will be described. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 184 and 185, the special winning device 32 according to the 32nd embodiment.
The configuration of 550 will be described. FIG. 184 shows the special winning device 32 in the 32nd embodiment.
It is an exploded perspective front view of 550. 185 (a) is a front view of the special winning device 32550, FIG. 185 (b) is a top view of the special winning device 32550, and FIG. 185 (c) is a top view.
It is sectional drawing of the special winning apparatus 32550 in the CLXXXVc-CLXXXVc line of FIG. 185 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 184 and 185, the special winning device 32550 according to the 32nd embodiment.
Includes a first path member 32560 disposed on the front side and a second path member 32570 disposed on the back side of the first path member 32560.

The first path member 32560 is formed of a non-light transmitting material. Further, the first path member 32
The 560 is a front plate 32564 formed in a plate shape and arranged on the front side of the game area, and a first wall portion projecting from the left and right ends of the front plate 32564 to the back side (base plate 60 side). 3256
5 and.

The front plate 32564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side of the flow path of the game ball formed between facing the second path member 32570, which will be described later, and is formed of a non-light transmitting material. As a result, the player can make the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 33550 invisible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the flow direction of the game ball inside the special winning device 33550, and to prevent the player from stopping the game.

The first wall portion 32565 is a portion connected (fastened) to the second path member 32570, and has a through hole 32565c penetrating in a circular shape in the left-right direction (plate thickness direction) and the first wall portion 32565 of 2.
One-sided protrusions 32565d, which are juxtaposed on the facing surfaces of the above and are projected in a triangular cross section.
It mainly includes an upright portion 32565e that is erected on the facing surface side of the second wall portion 32566 from both upper and lower ends of the first wall portion 32565.

The through hole 32565c is a through hole through which a screw for fastening the first path member 32560 to the second path member 32570 is inserted, and is formed at one place on each first wall portion 32565.

The one-side protrusion 32565d is a portion inserted into the other side recess 32573c of the second path member 32570 described later to position the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570, and is a portion in the front-rear direction (arrow F). -B direction) and vertical direction (arrow U-D)
It is extended in the direction.

The erection portion 32565e covers the one-side protrusion 32565d, and the player lays the one-side protrusion 325.
It is a portion that makes 65d invisible, and is set to be larger than the protrusion distance of the one-side protrusion 32565d. As a result, the position where the one-side protrusion 32565d is inserted into the other-side recess 32573c is suppressed from being visually recognized, and the position of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570 is recognized by the player. Can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from not playing the pachinko machine 10 because it is determined to be disadvantageous.

The second path member 32570 is a plate-shaped base plate 32571 facing the front plate 32564 of the first path member 32560, and the first path member 32560 from the left and right (arrow LR direction) ends of the base plate 32571. It is provided with a fourth wall portion 32573 projecting from the front plate 32564 side.

The base plate 32571 is a member that forms a throwing path for a game ball in a gap between the first path member 32560 and the front plate 32564 facing the front plate 32564, and is a member in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) of the base plate 32571 in the front view. The size is made smaller than the front plate 32564. As a result, it is possible to prevent the base plate 32571 from being visually recognized from the player side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the facing distance between the base plate 32571 and the front plate 32564 and determining that the game is advantageous or disadvantageous.

Further, the base plate 32571 has a fourth convex portion 3257 protruding toward the first path member 32560.
1b and the fifth convex portion 32571c, and the fourth convex portion 32571b and the fifth convex portion 32571.
It is provided with a sixth convex portion 32571d, which is located below c and projects from the front plate 32564 side.

The fourth convex portion 32571b and the fifth convex portion 32571c are protrusions for guiding the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 32550, and are bases from the outer side in the left-right direction (outer side in the arrow LR direction) of the base plate 32571. It is formed by inclining downward toward the center side of the plate 32571.
As a result, the fourth convex portion 3 flows down between the base plate 32571 and the front plate 32564 facing each other.
A game ball that collides with 2571b or the fifth convex portion 32571c, and the fourth convex portion 32571b thereof.
Alternatively, it can be easily flowed down in the inclined direction of the fifth convex portion 32571c.

The sixth convex portion 32571d is formed on the lower side of the fourth convex portion 32571b and the fifth convex portion 32571c described above, and is formed at a substantially central position in the left-right direction of the base plate 32571. Further, the sixth convex portion 32571d is extended in the direction of gravity. As a result, it flows down between the base plate 32571 and the front plate 32564 facing each other, and the fourth convex portion 32571b or the fifth convex portion 32571
The game ball guided by c is distributed to either the left or right side of the sixth convex portion 32571d.

The two facing fourth wall portions 32573 have a plurality of other side recesses 32573c recessed inward in the facing direction on the outer side surfaces in the facing direction, and an adjusting hole 32573 penetrating in the facing direction.
b and two fourth wall portions 32573 are formed on the inside in the opposite direction in the opposite direction, and the adjustment hole 32573 is formed.
It mainly includes a housing portion 32573d that surrounds b.

A plurality of other side recesses 32573c are juxtaposed in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) of the fourth wall portion 32573, and are extended in the gravity direction. Further, the other side recess 32573c is formed by being recessed in a substantially triangular cross section, and the cross section shape thereof is set to be substantially the same as that of the one side protrusion 32565d. As a result, the one-side protrusion 32565d is inserted into the other-side recess 32573c, and the first path member 3
The 2560 can be positioned.

The adjusting hole 32573b is a portion through which the tip of the screw through which the through hole 32565c of the first path member 32560 described above is inserted is inserted into the accommodating portion 32573d side. In addition, the adjustment hole 3257
The 3b is formed in a long hole long in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), whereby the movement of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570 is allowed.

The accommodating portion 32573d is formed in a U-shaped cross section when viewed from the front, and both ends thereof are connected to the fourth wall portion 32573. Further, the accommodating portion 32573d extends from the front surface of the base plate 32571 to the front end portion of the fourth wall portion 32573. As a result, the accommodating unit 3
In the space surrounded by 2573d, a screw plate 32590 for screwing a screw through which a through hole 32565c and an adjustment hole 32573b are inserted can be accommodated.

The screw plate 32590 is set to a size that can be inserted into the space formed by the accommodating portion 32573d, and the width dimension in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) is the front-rear direction dimension of the space formed by the accommodating portion 32573d (the width dimension in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction)). It is set to be smaller than the protrusion dimension to the front side of the fourth wall portion 32573). As a result, the screw plate 32590 can be inserted inside the accommodating portion 32573d and can be moved in the front-rear direction.

Further, the screw plate 32590 has a screw hole 32591 for screwing a screw through which a through hole 32565c and an adjustment hole 32573b are inserted, and a front-back direction (arrow FB direction) of the screw hole 32591.
Guide protrusions 3259 that are projected from both ends of the wall toward the facing surfaces of the fourth wall parts 32573.
2 and.

The screw holes 32591 are formed at two positions, and are formed side by side in the vertical direction. Also, 2
The screw hole 32591 at the location is formed at a position where the distance dimension of one screw hole 32591 from the upper end and the distance dimension of the other screw hole 32591 from the lower end are the same. As a result, when the screw groove of either one of the screw holes 32591 is crushed, the screw can be fastened by using the other screw hole 32591 by turning the screw plate 32590 upside down.

The guide protrusion 32592 is provided with a predetermined amount of protrusions from both front and rear ends on both outer sides in the left-right direction, and has an inclined surface inclined toward the screw hole 32591 side. As a result, the through hole 325
The tip of the screw through which the 65c and the adjusting hole 32573b are inserted can be guided to the screwing hole 32591. In particular, in the present embodiment, when the screw hole 32591 is damaged, a new screw hole 32591 can be used by turning it upside down. In this case, the screw hole 32 for the tip of the screw
Since the position of 591 tends to be out of alignment, the tip of the screw is screwed into the hole 32 as in the present embodiment.
The configuration guided to 591 is particularly effective.

The method of adjusting the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570 of the special winning device 32550 configured as described above is as follows: First, the through hole 3256 of the first path member 32560.
Loosen the screw that is inserted into 5c and screwed into the screw plate 32590. As a result, the second
It is assumed that the movement of the first path member 32560 is permitted with respect to the path member 32570.

Next, the first path member 32 inserted into the other side recess 32573c of the second path member 32570 by elastically deforming the first wall portion 32565 with respect to the front plate 32564 in the left-right direction.
After pulling out the one-side protrusion 32565d of the 560 from the other-side recess 32573c, adjust the position in the front-rear direction to return the elastic deformation of the first wall portion 32655 at the adjusted position and return the one-side protrusion 3 again.
2565d is inserted into the other side recess 32573c. As a result, the second path member 32570
The first path member 32560 can be temporarily fixed (positioned) with respect to the above.

Finally, it is inserted into the through hole 32565c of the first path member 32560 and the screw plate 32 is inserted.
By retightening the screw screwed into the 590, the first with respect to the second path member 32570
The adjustment of the path member 32560 is completed.

According to this, as described above, the one-side protrusion 32565d and the other-side recess 32573c are formed in a corresponding shape. Therefore, by temporarily fixing the screw and then fastening the screw, the one-side protrusion 3256
5d can be pushed into the other side recess 32573c. Therefore, the one-side protrusion 32565d can be adjusted so as to always be at the same position at each position where the other-side recess 32573c can be inserted. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of variation in the flow of the game ball depending on the operator performing the adjustment, and it is possible to simplify the adjustment.

Next, with reference to FIG. 186, the position adjustment of the second path member 32570 of the first path member 32560 will be described. FIG. 186 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device 32550.
FIG. 186 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device 32550 in the CLXXXVIb-CLXXXVIb line of FIG. 186 (a).

As shown in FIG. 186, when the first path member 32560 on the left side (arrow L direction side) is pulled out to the front side (arrow F direction side) with respect to the second path member 32570, as shown in FIG. 185. In addition, the distance between the front plate 32564 and the base plate 32571 on the left side facing each other is wider than that on the right side. In this case, the game ball flowing down between the front plate 32564 and the base plate 32571 facing each other is less likely to collide with the fourth convex portion 32571b on the left side, so that the game ball can easily flow down between the facing areas on the left side. .. As a result, the front plate 32564 and the base plate 32571
It is possible to easily eject the game ball flowing down between the opposite sides from the lower left side.

Next, the special winning device 33550 according to the 33rd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 187. In the 32nd embodiment, the case where the position of the 2nd path member 32570 with respect to the 2nd path member 32570 is adjusted in a state where the 1st wall portion 32565 of the 1st path member 32560 is elastically deformed has been described. In the form, the first wall portion 33565 is a front plate 32.
It is variably linked to 564. In addition, about the same part as each above embodiment,
The same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 187 (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the first path member 33560 in the 33rd embodiment, and FIG. 187 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device 33550. In addition, FIG. 187 (
b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 186 (c).

As shown in FIG. 187, the special winning device 33550 according to the 33rd embodiment has a first path member 33560 arranged on the front side and a second path member arranged on the back side of the first path member 33560. 32570 and.

The first path member 33560 is a front plate 33 formed in a plate shape and arranged on the front side of the game area.
564 and a first wall portion 33565 pivotally supported at the left and right ends of the front plate 33564 are provided.

The front plate 32564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side of the flow path of the game ball formed between facing the second path member 32570, which will be described later, and is formed of a non-light transmitting material. As a result, the player can make the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 33550 invisible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the flow direction of the game ball inside the special winning device 33550, and to prevent the player from stopping the game.

The holding portion 33564e is a member that holds the rod RD that pivotally supports the first wall portion 33565, which will be described later, and is set to a size that allows the rod RD to be inserted into the inner portion formed in an annular shape. Further, the holding portions 33564e are formed at two positions separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, and the axes of the annular portions of the holding portions 33564e are coaxial in the vertical direction. Further, the holding portion 33564e formed on the lower side of the two holding portions 33564e is the front plate 33564e.
It is formed at the lower end and the lower end is closed. As a result, the rod RD is held in the holding portion 3
When the rod RD is inserted inside the holding portion 33564e from the upper side of the 3564e, it is possible to prevent the rod RD from falling off (exiting) from the lower end of the holding portion 33564e.

The first wall portion 33565 is a portion connected (fastened) to the second path member 32570, and has a through hole 32565c penetrating in a circular shape in the left-right direction (plate thickness direction) and two first wall portions 325.
One-sided protrusion 32565d that is juxtaposed on the facing surface of 65 and is projected in a triangular cross section.
And the vertical section 32565e erected on the facing surface side of the second wall portion 32566 from both ends of the first wall portion 32565 (in the direction of arrow UD), and the cross-sectional annular shape on the front plate 33564 side. It is mainly provided with a shaft-mounted branch portion 33565f that protrudes into the shaft.

The shafted branch portion 33565f is a portion into which the rod RD inserted into the holding portion 33564e of the front plate 33564 described above is inserted, and the inner portion formed in an annular shape is set to a size in which the rod RD can be inserted. .. Further, the shafted branch portion 33565f is formed at two locations separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, and the axis of the annular portion of the shafted branch portion 33565f is coaxial in the vertical direction. Further, the two shafted support portions 33565f have the holding portion 335 described above between them.
A holding portion 33564e formed above the 64e is arranged.

As a result, the connection between the front plate 33564 and the first wall portion 33565 is made possible by the holding portion 33564.
By arranging e and the shafted support portion 33565f coaxially and inserting the rod RD inside the holding portion 33564e and the shafted support portion 33565f from the upper side, the front plate 3356
No. 4 is arranged with the first wall portion 33565 in a rotatable state.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 187 (b), the base plate 325 of the second path member 32570.
When the front plate 33564 of the first path member 33560 is arranged non-parallel to 71, the angle of the first wall portion 33565 can be changed and arranged with respect to the front plate 33564.

That is, in the 32nd embodiment, when the front plate 32564 of the first path member 32560 is arranged non-parallel to the base plate 32571 of the second path member 32570, the front plate 325
It is necessary to hold the first wall portion 33565 in a state of being elastically deformed with respect to 64. Further, when adjusting the position of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570, the first wall portion 32565 is elastically deformed outward in the left-right direction with respect to the front plate 32564, and the second path member 3
One side protrusion 325 of the first path member 32560 inserted into the other side recess 32573c of 2570
It is necessary to pull out 65d from the other side recess 32573c. Therefore, the front plate 32564
And the first wall portion 32565 may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the 33rd embodiment, since the first wall portion 33565 can be rotated with respect to the front plate 33564, it is not necessary to elastically deform the first path member 33560, and the front plate 33564 and the first wall It is possible to prevent the connecting portion with the portion 33565 from being damaged.

The method of adjusting the first path member 33560 with respect to the second path member 32570 of the special winning device 33550 configured as described above is as follows: First, the through hole 3256 of the first path member 33560.
Loosen the screw that is inserted into 5c and screwed into the screw plate 32590. As a result, the second
It is assumed that the movement of the first path member 33560 is permitted with respect to the path member 32570.

Next, by rotating the first wall portion 33565 outward in the left-right direction with respect to the front plate 33564, the first path member 3356 inserted into the other side recess 32573c of the second path member 32570.
After pulling out the one-side protrusion 32565d of 0 from the other-side recess 32573c, adjust the position in the front-rear direction and return the rotation of the first wall portion 33565 at the adjusted position to return the one-side protrusion 32565 again.
d is inserted into the recess 32573c on the other side. As a result, the first path member 32560 can be temporarily fixed to the second path member 32570.

Finally, it is inserted into the through hole 32565c of the first path member 33560 and the screw plate 32 is inserted.
By retightening the screw screwed into the 590, the first with respect to the second path member 32570
The adjustment of the path member 33560 is completed.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 188 to 190, the special winning device 345 according to the 34th embodiment.
50 will be described. In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the flowing direction of the game ball is adjusted by adjusting the facing distance between the front and rear plates of the special winning device 13550 has been described.
In the 34th embodiment, the flow direction of the game ball can be adjusted by changing the position of the protrusion projecting toward the inside of the flow path. In addition, about the same part as each above embodiment,
The same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the special winning device 34550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 188 and 189. FIG. 188 (a) is a front view of the game board 34013 in the 34th embodiment, and FIG. 188 (b) is a CLXXXVIIIb-CLXXXVIIIb of FIG. 188 (a).
It is sectional drawing of the game board 34013 in line. FIG. 189 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 34013.

As shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, the special winning device 34550 according to the 34th embodiment.
Is disposed above the first winning opening 64 disposed on the game board 34013. Further, in the special winning device 34550, the center line in the left-right direction of the first path member 34560 arranged on the front side is arranged in the same straight line as the center line in the left-right direction of the first winning opening 64 in the front view. ..

Further, the special winning device 34550 and the first winning opening 64 are in the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction).
It is arranged at a position separated by the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the player can visually recognize the game ball discharged from the special winning device 34550.

The special winning device 34550 is a first path member 345 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side).
60, a second path member 34570 arranged on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the first path member 34560, and a fixture 34553 screwed to the back surface side of the second path member 34570. Be prepared.

The first path member 34560 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side of the flow path of the game ball formed between facing the second path member 34570, which will be described later, and is formed of a non-light transmitting material.
As a result, the player can make the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 34550 invisible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the flow direction of the game ball inside the special winning device 34550, and to prevent the player from stopping the game.

Further, the first path member 34560 is formed in a plate shape and is arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the game area, and the front plate 34564 and the left and right end portions of the front plate 34564 to the back side (arrow). It is provided with a first wall portion 34565 erected on the B direction side).

The front plate 34564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side of the flow path of the game ball formed between facing the second path member 32570 described later, and is from the base plate 34571 of the second path member 34570 described later. However, the outer shape in front view is formed large. As a result, the front plate 3 is provided with the second path member 34570 arranged on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the first path member 34560.
It can be made difficult to see with 4564. Therefore, from the player side, the second path member 3457
It is possible to suppress the recognition of 0. Therefore, when the position of the second path member 34570 is changed, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the change.

The first wall portion 34565 is a portion to be fastened to the base plate 34060 of the game board 13, and is formed in a substantially L-shaped cross section. The vertical dimension of the first wall portion 34565 on the back side is the front plate 345.
Dimensions X3 between 64 and the fourth convex portion 34571b of the base plate 34571, which will be described later (FIG. 18).
8 (b)) is set to a value slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball.

Further, the first wall portion 34565 has a bent portion 34565 g that is bent in a direction parallel to the front surface of the base plate 34060 from the erected tip portion, and a through hole 34565 g1 that penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed in the bent portion 34565 g. NS. The through hole 34565g1 is a hole through which a screw is inserted, and by screwing the screw inserted through the through hole 34565g1 into the base plate 34060, the first through hole 34565g1 is inserted.
The path member 34560 can be fastened to the base plate 34060.

The second path member 34570 includes a plate-shaped base plate 34571 facing the front plate 34564 of the first path member 34560, and a support portion 34579 projecting from the back surface side of the base plate 34571 in a columnar shape.

The base plate 34571 is a member that forms a throwing path for a game ball in a gap between the first path member 34560 and the front plate 34564 facing the front plate 34564, and is formed at a position separated from the front plate 34564 by a predetermined amount. Further, the base plate 34571 has a fourth convex portion 345 protruding toward the front plate 34564 side.
71b is provided. As a result, it is possible to change the direction in which the game ball flowing down between the base plate 34571 and the front plate 34564 is caused to collide with the fourth convex portion 34571b and flow down.

The support portion 34579 is a portion that pivotally supports the second path member 34570, and the columnar shaft has a columnar shaft.
It is formed at a position coaxial with the axis of the base plate 34571 (center of the base plate 34571). Further, in the base plate 34060 of the game board 34013, a circular through hole 34060d is opened at a position corresponding to the support portion 34579, and the support portion 34 is inside the through hole 34060d.
579 is inserted. As a result, the second path member 34570 is pivotally supported by the base plate 34060.

The support portion 34579 has a fastening hole 34579a recessed at the tip of the protrusion. Fastening hole 345
The 79a is recessed coaxially with the axis of the support portion 34579, and the inner peripheral surface is internally threaded. As a result, the threaded portion 34553b of the fixture 34553 inserted into the through hole 34060d from the back surface side of the base plate 34060 can be screwed into the fastening hole 34579a.

The fixture 34553 is a fastening member for fastening the above-mentioned second path member 34570 to the base plate 34060 of the game board 34013, and protrudes from the operation portion 34553a formed in a columnar shape and the front side of the operation portion 34553a. It is provided with a screw portion 34553b to be provided.

The operation unit 34553a is a portion gripped by an operator who arranges the second path member 34570 on the base plate 34060, and is formed in an outer shape larger than the through hole 34060d formed in the base plate 34060. Further, the operation unit 34553a has a through hole 34 of the base plate 34060.
The outer diameter is set to be larger than the inner diameter of 060d.

As a result, when the screw portion 34553b of the fixture 34553 is screwed into the fastening hole 34579a and the second path member 34570 is arranged on the base plate 34060, the fixture 34553
Can be prevented from coming out to the front side of the base plate 34060 through the through hole 34060d.

The threaded portion 34553b is formed in a columnar shape coaxial with the axis of the operating portion 34553a, and is also formed.
Male screw processing is performed on the outer peripheral surface. As described above, the threaded portion 34553b is a portion screwed into the fastening hole 34579a of the second path member 34570, is set to have an outer diameter smaller than the through hole 34060d of the base plate 34060, and is inserted through the through hole 34060d. Is screwed into the fastening hole 34579a of the second path member 34570.

According to the special winning device 34550 configured as described above, when changing the discharging position of the game ball discharged from the special winning device 34550, the operator can use the base plate 34 of the game board 13.
A hand (arm) is inserted from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the game board 13 to the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 34060 via the first opening 60a (center frame 86) formed in 060. To access the operation unit 34553a of the fixture 34553.

Next, the operation unit 34553a is rotated to have the fastening hole 34579 of the second path member 34570.
Loosen the screw portion 34553b screwed into a. As a result, the second path member 34570 is made rotatable about the support portion 34579, and the second path member 34570 is rotated to change the position of the fourth convex portion 34571b of the second path member 34570. 4th convex part 345
When the position of 71b is changed, the position where the game ball flowing down inside the special prize device 34550 collides with the fourth convex portion 34571b is changed, so that the discharge position of the game ball discharged from the special prize device 34550 is changed. Can be changed.

In this case, as described above, the base plate 34571 of the second path member 34570 is formed in a circular shape in front view, and the support portion 34579 is formed coaxially with the axis thereof. Therefore, the second path member 34570 is rotated. In this case, it is possible to suppress the change in the arrangement of the second path member 34570 with respect to the base plate 34060 in the front view. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the second path member 34570 has been rotated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from not playing the game because it is judged to be disadvantageous.

Next, with reference to FIG. 190, a change in the ejection position of the game ball when the position of the fourth convex portion 34571b (second path member 34570) is changed will be described. FIGS. 190 (a) to 1
90 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 34010 in the CXC-CXC line of FIG. 188.

As shown in FIG. 190, the fourth convex portion 34571b has a substantially V-shaped protruding shape in front view. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 190 (a), when the bent side of the V-shape is arranged on the lower side, the game ball flowing in from above the special winning device 34550 is thrown to the central portion along the inclination of the V-shape. It can be done easily. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the flow of the game ball into the winning opening 64 arranged below the special winning device 34550.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 190 (b), when the bent side of the V-shape is arranged on the upper side, the game balls flowing in from above the special winning device 34550 are placed on the left and right ends along the inclination of the V-shape. It can be easily thrown. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to flow into the winning opening 64 arranged below the special winning device 34550.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 190 (c) and 190 (b), when the V-shaped bent side is arranged at either the left or right end, the game ball flowing in from above the special winning device 34550 is inserted. It is possible to easily throw the ball along the slope on the upper side of the V-shape, and the game ball that is thrown to the lower side of the V-shape without colliding with the upper side of the V-shape is thrown along the slope on the lower side of the V-shape. Can be done. Therefore,
The direction in which the game ball is thrown can be changed by the difference in the area where the game ball collides between the upper side of the V-shape and the lower side of the V-shape.

Although detailed description is omitted, it is also possible to arrange the bent portion of the fourth convex portion 34571b at a position other than the positions shown in FIGS. 190 (a) to 190 (d). For example, FIG.
When the second path member 34570 is rotated 10 degrees to the right in the front view from the position shown in 0 (a), the game ball flowing in from above the special winning device 34550 is made to flow down along the V-shaped inclination. Therefore, the game ball can be easily ejected from a position slightly shifted to the left side (arrow L direction side) from the upper side of the winning opening 64 arranged below the special winning device 34550.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 191 to 193, the special winning device 355 in the 35th embodiment
50 will be described. In the 34th embodiment, the case where the 2nd path member 34570 is rotated to change the position of the 4th convex portion 34571b has been described, but in the 35th embodiment, the case has been described.
The second path member 35570 is slid to change the position of the fourth convex portion 35571b. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 191 and 192, the special winning device 35 according to the 35th embodiment.
550 will be described. FIG. 191 (a) shows the game board 35013 in the 35th embodiment.
191 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 35013 in the CXCIb-CXCIb line of FIG. 191 (a). FIG. 192 is an exploded perspective view of the special winning device 35550.

As shown in FIGS. 191 and 192, the special winning device 35550 according to the 35th embodiment.
Is arranged on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the first winning opening 64 arranged on the game board 35013. Further, in the special winning device 35550, the center line in the left-right direction of the first path member 35560 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) is the same straight line in the front view as the center line in the left-right direction of the first winning opening 64. It is arranged in a shape.

Further, the special winning device 35550 and the first winning opening 64 are in the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction).
It is arranged at a position separated by the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the player can visually recognize the game ball discharged from the special winning device 35550.

The special winning device 34550 is a first path member 355 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side).
60, a second path member 35570 arranged on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the first path member 35560, and a fixture 34553 screwed to the back surface side of the second path member 35570. Be prepared.

The first path member 35560 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side of the flow path of the game ball formed between facing the second path member 35570, which will be described later, and is formed of a non-light transmitting material.
As a result, the player can make the flow direction of the game ball inside the special winning device 35550 invisible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the flow direction of the game ball inside the special winning device 35550, and to prevent the player from stopping the game.

Further, the first path member 35560 stands on the front plate 34564, which is formed in a plate shape and is arranged on the front side of the game area, and on the back side (arrow B direction side) from the left and right ends of the front plate 34564. It is provided with a first wall portion 35565 to be installed.

The front plate 35564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the flow path of the game ball formed between facing the second path member 35570 described later, and is a second path member described later. The outer shape in the front view is formed larger than that of the base plate 35571 of 35570. As a result, the second path member 35 disposed on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the first path member 35560.
The front plate 35564 can make the 570 difficult to see. Therefore, the second from the player side
It is possible to prevent the path member 35570 from being visually recognized. Therefore, when the position of the second path member 35570 is changed, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the change.

The first wall portion 35565 is a portion to be fastened to the base plate 60 of the game board 35013, and the vertical dimension of the first wall portion 34565 formed in a substantially L-shaped cross section is the front plate 3556.
Dimension X4 between facing 4 and the fourth convex portion 35571b of the base plate 35571 described later (FIG. 191).
(B)) is set to a value slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball.

Further, the first wall portion 35565 has a bent portion 35565 g that is bent in a direction parallel to the front surface of the base plate 60 from the erected tip portion, and penetrates the bent portion 35565 g in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). A through hole 35565 g1 is formed, and a recessed portion 35565 g2 is formed which is recessed from the back surface of the bent portion 35565 g toward the front side (arrow F direction side).

The through hole 35565g1 is a hole through which a screw is inserted, and the first path member 35560 can be fastened to the base plate 60 by screwing the screw inserted through the through hole 35565g1 into the base plate 60.

The recessed portion 35565 g2 is a portion for accommodating both left and right (arrow LR direction side) ends of the base plate 35571 of the second path member 35570 described later inward, and is recessed from the base end of the bent portion 35565 g. , Is recessed in the central portion in the vertical direction of the bent portion 35565 g. As a result, when the left and right ends of the base plate 35571 are housed inside the recessed portion 35565 g2, the left and right ends of the base plate 35571 can be hidden by the bent portion 35365 g. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the position of the base plate 35571. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from not playing the game because it is judged to be disadvantageous.

Further, the recessed dimension of the recessed portion 35565 g2 is set to a depth dimension larger than the plate thickness of the base plate 35571, and the distance between the left and right ends of the bent portion 35565 g is X5 (FIG. 191).
(B)) is set to be larger than the width dimension X6 in the left-right direction of the base plate 35571 (see FIG. 191 (b)). As a result, the base plate 35571 (second path member 35570) can be displaced in the left-right direction. The base plate 35571 (second path member 3557)
The displacement method of 0) will be described later.

The second path member 35570 is projected from the plate-shaped base plate 35571 facing the front plate 35564 of the first path member 35560 and the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 35571 in a rectangular shape in the rear view. A support portion 35579 is provided.

The base plate 35571 is a member that forms a throwing path for a game ball in a gap between the first path member 35560 facing the front plate 35564, and is formed at a position separated from the front plate 35564 by a predetermined amount. Further, the base plate 35571 includes a fourth convex portion 35571b projecting toward the front plate 35564 side (arrow F direction side). As a result, the base plate 35571 and the front plate 3556
It is possible to change the direction of flow by causing the game ball flowing down between the facing surfaces of 4 to collide with the fourth convex portion 35571b.

The support portion 35579 is a portion that pivotally supports the second path member 35570, and is a base plate 345.
A columnar shaft is formed at a position coaxial with the shaft of 71 (center of the base plate 34571).
Further, in the base plate 60 of the game board 34013, a long hole-shaped sliding hole 35060e that is long in the left-right direction is opened at a position corresponding to the support portion 35579, and the support portion 35579 is inserted inside the sliding hole 35060e. NS. As a result, the second path member 35570 is supported by the base plate 60.

The sliding hole 35060e is set to have a width dimension in the lateral direction (arrow UD direction) substantially the same as the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) dimension of the support portion 35579, and the left and right sides of the support portion 35579. The width dimension in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) is set larger than the direction (arrow LR direction) dimension. As a result, the support portion 35579 inserted inside the sliding hole 35060e can be slidable in the longitudinal direction of the sliding hole 35060e.

Further, the support portion 35579 is provided with a fastening hole 35579a recessed at the tip of the protrusion. The fastening hole 35579a can be internally threaded on the inner peripheral surface, and the threaded portion 34553b of the fixture 34553 can be screwed into the fastening hole 35579a. In addition, the protrusion dimension of the support part 34579 is
It is set smaller than the thickness dimension of the base plate 60, and the fixture 34 is set in the fastening hole 35579a.
By screwing the threaded portion 34553b of 553, the second path member 35570 is attached to the base plate 6
It can be fixed at 0.

According to the special winning device 35550 configured as described above, when changing the discharging position of the game ball discharged from the special winning device 35550, the operator is formed on the base plate 60 of the game board 35013. Game board 3501 via 1 opening 60a (center frame 86)
A hand (arm) is inserted from the front side (arrow F direction side) of 3 into the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 60 to access the operation unit 34553a of the fixture 34553.

Next, the operation unit 34553a is rotated to have the fastening hole 35579 of the second path member 35570.
Loosen the screw portion 34553b screwed into a. As a result, the second path member 35570 is brought into a state where it can be slidably displaced in the left-right direction, and the second path member 35570 is slid and displaced to change the position of the fourth convex portion 35571b of the second path member 35570. 4th convex part 3557
When the position of 1b is changed, the position where the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 35550 collides with the fourth convex portion 35571b is changed, so that the discharging position of the game ball discharged from the special winning device 35550 is changed. Can be changed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 193, a change in the ejection position of the game ball when the position of the fourth convex portion 35571b (second path member 35570) is changed will be described. FIGS. 193 (a) to 1
93 (c) is the game board 3501 on the CXCIII-CXCIII line of FIG. 191 (b).
3 is a cross-sectional view of 3. In FIGS. 193 (a) to 193 (c), the position of the second path member 35570 in FIG. 193 (b) is used as a reference position, and in FIG. 193 (a), the second path member 35570 is in front of the reference position. The state of being displaced to the left side of the view is illustrated, and in FIG. 193 (c), the state of the second path member 35570 being displaced from the reference position to the right side of the front view (the side in the direction of arrow R) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 193, in the fourth convex portion 35571b, the protruding shape in the front view is formed in a substantially V shape, and the game ball flowing in from above the special winning device 35550 is centered along the V-shaped inclination. Guided to the portion (V-shaped bent portion).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 193 (b), when the V-shaped bent portion of the fourth convex portion 35571b is arranged above the first winning opening 64, it is discharged from below the special winning device 35550. It is possible to easily flow the game ball into the first winning opening 64.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 193 (a) and 193 (c), when the second path member 35570 is moved from the reference position (the position shown in FIG. 193 (b)), the V of the fourth convex portion 35571b
Since the bent portion of the character is arranged at a position shifted to the left or right from the upper part of the first winning opening 64, the special winning device 3555 is compared with the case where the second path member 35570 is arranged at the reference position.
The game ball discharged from below 0 is less likely to flow into the first winning opening 64.

Next, the special winning device 36550 according to the 36th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 194. In the first embodiment, the first unit 5 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60
The case where the 51 is fastened to the second unit 552 arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 and held in a state of being urged toward the back side of the base plate 60 has been described. In the embodiment, the first unit 36551 is urged toward the back surface side of the base plate 60 by the elastic recovery force of the fastening portion 36551b formed in the first unit 36551. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 194 (a) is an exploded perspective front view schematically showing the game board 36013 in the 36th embodiment, and FIG. 194 (b) is a sectional schematic view of the game board 36013. In addition, FIG.
94 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 194, the special winning device 36550 according to the 36th embodiment is slidably displaced from the inside of the first opening 60a in which the center frame 86 is arranged, and the base plate 6 is displaced.
It is formed from the first unit 36551 arranged at 0.

The first unit 36551 is provided with a space in which a game ball can be thrown, and the space is arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 60. As a result, the game ball flowing down the front surface of the base plate 60 can flow into the inside of the first unit 36551. Also, the first
The unit 36551 includes a fastening portion 36551b projecting from a side surface (rear surface) adjacent to the front surface of the base plate 60 toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side).

The fastening portion 36551b is a portion through which a screw for fastening the first unit 36551 to the base plate 60 is inserted, and is projected toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side) and the base plate 60.
The tip of the protrusion is bent in the direction parallel to the back surface of the.

Further, the fastening portion 36551b has a bulging portion 36551b2 that bulges toward the front side (arrow F direction side) on the side surface on the bending side thereof, and a plate thickness direction (arrow FB) toward the bending tip side of the bulging portion 36551b2. A through hole 36551b1 penetrating in the direction) is provided.

Further, the fastening portion 36551b has a distance dimension X7 from the base end (the back surface of the first unit 36551) to the front surface of the bent portion when the first unit 36551 is not mounted on the base plate 60 (see FIG. 194 (b)). However, it is set to be larger than the thickness dimension of the base plate 60.
Further, the fastening portion 36551b has a distance dimension X8 (FIG. 194) from the base end (rear surface of the first unit 36551) to the bulging tip position of the bulging portion 36551b2 when the first unit 36551 is not mounted on the base plate 60. (B)) is set to be the same as or slightly smaller than the thickness dimension of the base plate 60.

When a screw is fastened to the through hole 36551b1, the bulging portion 36551b2 presses (forces) the first unit 36551 against the back surface side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 60 to force the screw to be fastened. It is a portion to be converted into, and is formed between the base end of the bent portion of the fastening portion 36551b and the through hole 36551b1.

As a result, when the screw through which the fastening portion 36551b is inserted is fastened to the back surface of the base plate 60, the bulging portion 36551b2 comes into contact with the back surface of the base plate 60, so that the gap between the bent portion and the base plate 60 is divided. , The force of pushing the bent tip side toward the base plate 60 side by the screw can be converted into the force of pulling out the base end side of the bent portion toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side). As a result, it is possible to prevent the formation of a gap between the back surface of the first unit 36551 and the front surface of the base plate 60.

As a result, it is not necessary to fasten the screw through which the first unit 36551 is inserted to the base plate 60 from the front side, and it is possible to easily form the first unit 36551 by the amount of the fastening allowance. Further, in the 36th embodiment, the first unit 36551 is attached to the base plate 60 by using the first opening 60a to which the center frame 86 is fastened, so that the first unit 3 is attached.
The 6551 can be easily mounted in the first opening 60a of the base plate 60 by sliding displacement.

Next, the special winning device 37550 according to the 37th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 195. In the first embodiment, the first unit 5 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60
The case where the 51 is fastened to the second unit 552 arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 and held in a state of being urged toward the back side of the base plate 60 has been described. In the embodiment, the first unit 37551 is fastened by a screw inserted from the back surface side of the base plate 60, and is held in a state of being urged toward the back surface side of the base plate 60. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 195 (a) is an exploded perspective front view schematically showing the game board 37013 in the 37th embodiment, and FIG. 195 (b) is a sectional schematic view of the game board 37013. In addition, FIG.
95 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 36 (b).

As shown in FIG. 195, the special winning device 37550 according to the 37th embodiment is formed from the first unit 37551 arranged in front of the base plate 60.

The first unit 37551 is provided with a space in which a game ball can be thrown, and the space is arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 60. As a result, the game ball flowing down the front surface of the base plate 60 can flow into the inside of the first unit 37551. Also, the first
The unit 37551 has a plurality of annular convex portions 3 projecting in an annular shape on the back surface side (arrow B direction side).
7551b is provided.

The annular convex portion 37551b is a portion for screwing a screw inserted from the back surface side of the base plate 60, and a female screw is processed on the inner peripheral surface. In this embodiment, the annular convex portions 37551b are formed at four locations on the back surface of the first unit 37551.

Further, a concave portion 37060d recessed in a circular shape is formed in the base plate 60 at a position facing the annular convex portion 37551b. The concave portion 37060d is a portion for inserting the annular convex portion 37551b inward, and is formed to have an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the annular convex portion 37551b. Further, the recessed depth of the recess 37060d is set to be larger than the protrusion dimension of the annular convex portion 37551b.

Further, on the bottom surface of the recessed recess 37060d, a through hole 37060d1 formed through the concave surface in a circular shape on the same axis is formed. The through hole 37060d1 has an annular convex portion 3755.
It is a hole through which the tip of a screw screwed into 1b is inserted, and is formed in an opening having an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the recess 37060d. Thereby, the screw can be fastened to the first unit 37551 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 60 from the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 60.

In this case, as described above, the recessed depth of the concave portion 37060d is set to be larger than the protrusion dimension of the annular convex portion 37551b. Therefore, by screwing the screw into the annular convex portion 37551b, the annular ring is formed. The first unit 37551 can be arranged on the base plate 60 in a state where the convex portion 37551b (first unit 37551) is urged toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side). As a result, it is possible to prevent the formation of a gap between the back surface of the first unit 37551 and the front surface of the base plate 60.

As a result, it is not necessary to fasten the screw through which the first unit 37551 is inserted to the base plate 60 from the front side, and it is possible to easily form the first unit 37551 by the amount of the fastening allowance. Further, in the 37th embodiment, since the fastening portion of the first unit 37551 can be accommodated inside the recess 37060d of the base plate 60, the first unit 37551 can be accommodated by that amount.
It is possible to increase the space for throwing the game ball formed in.

<Change the amount of light emitted to the front side depending on the game ball>
Then, with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197, the lower displacement member 384 in the 38th embodiment.
40 will be described. In the eleventh embodiment, a case where a shadow is formed at the position of the game ball accommodated in the lower displacement member 11440 by the light emitted from the control board 491 and the position of the game ball is recognized at the position of the shadow will be described. However, the lower displacement member 11 in the 38th embodiment
The 440 reflects the light emitted from the control board 491 on the outer surface of the game ball, and recognizes the position of the game ball at a position where the amount of light is increased. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 196 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 38440 according to the 38th embodiment.
197 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 38440, and FIG. 197 (b) is FIG. 197.
(A) is a sectional view of the lower displacement member 38440 in the CXCVIIb-CXCVIIb line, and FIG. 197 (c) is a sectional view of the lower displacement member 38440 in the CXCVIIc-CXCVIIc line of FIG. 197 (a). In addition, in FIG. 197 (a), the front side decorative member 384
The state in which 51 and the front case 38481 are removed is shown, and the front case 38 is shown.
The LED 38483b arranged in 481 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line. In addition, FIG. 197 (b)
Further, in FIG. 197 (c), a state in which the front side decorative portion 451 is attached is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 196 and 197, the lower displacement member 38440 in the 38th embodiment is a base member 470 connected to a front base 411 (see FIG. 46) and a base member 4 thereof.
A case member 38480 that covers both sides of the 70 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), a transmission mechanism 460 that is displaceably arranged between the case member 38480 and the base member 470, and a case member 38480 that covers the front and back. It is mainly provided with a decorative member 11450 formed in an embodiment.

The case member 38480 is a member that covers both sides of the base member 470 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and is arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member 470.
It mainly includes an 8488 and a back case 482 arranged on the back side (the side in the direction of arrow B).

The front case 38481 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular front view. In addition, the front case 38
The 481 has an opening 481a that extends in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) at a substantially intermediate position in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) and a bottom wall portion that protrudes from the lower end surface on the back surface side (arrow B direction side). 481b, a shaft hole 481c penetrating the lower end in the front-rear direction, and an LED substrate 38 arranged on the back side.
Mainly equipped with 483.

The LED substrate 38483 is a member that emits light inside the lower displacement member 38440 (front case 38481), and has a plate-shaped main body portion 38483a and a main body portion 38483a thereof.
A plurality of LEDs 38483b, which are arranged in the above and irradiate light, are provided.

The main body portion 38483a is a base on which wiring for conducting electricity is laid through a plurality of LEDs 38483b, and extends in the displacement direction (arrow LR direction) of the ball receiving portion 467. Multiple LEDs 384
The 83b are arranged at predetermined intervals in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the main body portion 38483a.

Further, each LED 38483b is set in a direction toward the center of the game ball when the game ball passes through the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of each LED 38483b. As a result, each LED 38
When the game ball is located on the back side of the 483b, the light of the LED can be reflected on the outer surface of the game ball to irradiate the front side decorative portion 11451. Therefore, as described above, since the front side decoration portion 11451 includes the transmission portion 11451b capable of transmitting light, the light reflected by the outer surface of the game ball and irradiated to the front side decoration portion 11451 is transmitted to the transmission portion 11451b. It can be emitted to the player side (arrow F direction side) through the light. Therefore, the amount of light visually recognized from the player side through the transmission portion 11451b can be increased in the portion reflected by the game ball as compared with the other portions. As a result, by increasing (changing) the amount of light, the player can be made to recognize the position of the game ball thrown inside the lower displacement member 38440.

In this embodiment, the interval at which the plurality of LEDs 38483b are arranged is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, even when the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced, at least a part of the game ball can be irradiated with the light emitted from the LED 38483b. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 38483b can always irradiate the game ball received by the ball receiving unit 467.

Further, according to the 38th embodiment, the base member 470, the transmission mechanism 460, and the back case 482 arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the LED 38483b are preferably members having a high light absorption rate. For example, the outer surface of each member constitutes a black color scheme. According to this, LED
It is possible to suppress that the light emitted from 38483b is reflected inside the case member 38480 (lower displacement member 38440) and emitted from the transmissive portion 11451b of the front side decorative portion 11451. As a result, it is possible to increase the difference in the amount of light emitted between the front surface on which the game ball is placed and the other front surface, and the player recognizes the position of the game ball received inside the lower displacement member 39440. It can be made easier.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199, the lower displacement member 3944 in the 39th embodiment.
0 will be described. In the 38th embodiment, the case where the game ball reflects light to make the player recognize the position where the game ball is arranged has been described, but in the 39th embodiment, the ball receiving portion 3 has been described.
The light is reflected by the reflective member arranged on the 9467 to recognize the position of the game ball. note that,
The same parts as those of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 198 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 39440 according to the 39th embodiment.
199 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 39440, and FIGS. 199 (b) and 199.
(C) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 39440. In addition, FIG. 199 (b) and FIG. 199 (
c) corresponds to the cross section of FIG. 198 (c).

As shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, the lower displacement member 39440 in the 39th embodiment is a base member 470 connected to a front base 411 (see FIG. 46) and a base member 4 thereof.
A case member 38480 that covers the front and back of the 70, a transmission mechanism 39460 that is displaceably arranged between the case member 38480 and the base member 470, and a decorative member 11450 that is arranged so as to cover the front and back of the case member 38480. , Equipped with.

The transmission mechanism 39460 is a member arranged on the front side of the base member 470, and is a drive motor KM2 in which a transmission gear 461, 462, 463 and a shaft portion are connected to the transmission gear 461.
A movable rack 464 having a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463 and rotatably arranged on the front side of the base member 470 so as to be slidably displaceable, and a rack gear 476 that is rotatably arranged on the movable rack 464. A transmission gear 465 in a state of being meshed with each other, a rack 39466 having a tooth surface meshed with the transmission gear 465 and displaced on the front side of the movable rack 464 so as to be slidable, and a rack 39466 thereof. Ball receiving portion 39467 rotatably arranged on one end side
It is formed mainly with and.

The rack 39466 is formed of a horizontally long rod-shaped body having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a rack gear 466a engraved on the upper end surface, a shaft portion 39466b which protrudes in a columnar shape from the other end to the front side, and a shaft portion 39466b which protrudes to the front side. It is mainly provided with two sliding plates 466c and a recessed portion 466d recessed from one end to the other end on the back surface side.

The shaft portion 39466b is a protrusion inserted into the shaft hole 467b of the ball receiving portion 39467, which will be described later, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b. As a result, the ball receiving unit 4
67 can be held rotatably.

The ball receiving portion 39467 is connected to the first piece 39467c formed by bending in a substantially L-shape in the front view, the second piece 39467d connected to the first piece 39467c, and the second piece 39467d. It includes a third piece 39467e arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d.

The first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d are portions for holding the game ball thrown inside the lower displacement member 39440 from the opening 451a (see FIG. 57), and the first piece 39467c.
When the game ball is thrown between the opposite pieces of the second piece 39467d, the second piece 39467d is displaced in the direction away from the first piece 39467c, and a part of the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39
The 467d and the 467d are arranged in a U shape in front view, and the game ball can be held in the inner portion of the U shape.

The first piece 39467c includes a receiving piece 39467c4 forming an L-shape in a front view, a leg portion 467a forming the other extending side, and a receiving piece 39467c4 and a leg portion 467a. An annular bent portion 39467c5 in which a shaft hole 467b penetrating in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) is formed in the connecting portion (bending portion), and a connecting portion 39467c1 projecting to the opposite side with the bent portion 39467c5 sandwiched between them. And prepare.

The receiving piece 39467c4 is a portion forming the side surface of the other side (arrow R direction side) formed in a U shape in front view by the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d, and is formed in a crescent shape in the front. It is formed in a curved shape that is concave in the direction away from the second piece 39467d.

The connecting portion 39467c1 is projected from two positions at a predetermined interval in the axial direction (arrow FB direction) of the bent portion 39467c5. Further, the connecting portion 39467c1 is a second piece 3 described later.
It is a portion that connects 9467d and the third piece 39467e, and includes a connecting hole 39467c2 that extends along the axial direction of the shaft hole 467b and is opened in a circular cross section.

The connecting hole 39467c2 is a shaft portion 39467e projecting from a third piece 39467e, which will be described later.
The opening into which 3 is inserted. The connecting hole 39467c2 has a shaft portion 39467e3 inserted into the insertion hole 39467d3 formed in the second piece 39467d, which will be described later, on the front side (arrow F direction side).
Is inserted from. Further, the shaft portion 39467e3 is fastened by a screw inserted from the side opposite to the insertion side (arrow B direction side) of the connecting hole 39467c2. As a result, the first piece 39467
The second piece 39467d and the third piece 39467e can be fastened to c.

Further, the first piece 39467c is provided with a recess 39467c3 that is recessed downward in the gravity direction (arrow D direction side) on the projecting base end side of the connecting portion 39467c1. The concave bottom surface of the recess 39467c3 is formed at the lowest position (bottom) of the side surface where the game ball is held by the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d. As a result, the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d
The game ball held in is rolled inside the recess 39467c3. As a result, the load of the game ball can easily displace the second piece 39467d with respect to the first piece 39467c.

The second piece 39467d is the receiving portion 39467c4 and the second piece 394 of the first piece 39467c.
It is a part that forms the side surface of the other side (arrow L direction side) formed by 67d in a U shape in the front view, is formed in a crescent shape in the front view, and is concave in the direction away from the first piece 39467c. It is formed into a curved shape. Further, the second piece 39467d is the first piece 39467c.
An insertion hole 39467d3 that opens in a circular shape in the front-rear direction in the connecting portion of the above, and a concave portion 39467d2 that is recessed in a circular shape from the front side (arrow F direction side) to the back side (arrow B direction side). Mainly prepare.

The second piece 39467d has a shaft portion 3946 of the third piece 39467e in the insertion hole 39467d3.
7e3 is inserted, and the connecting shaft 39467e of the third piece 39467e is inserted into the recessed portion 39467d2.
4 is inserted. Therefore, when the second piece 39567d is displaced, the third piece 39467e is also displaced as well. Therefore, when the second piece 39567d is rotationally displaced with respect to the first piece 39467c, the third piece 39567e is also rotationally displaced with respect to the first piece 39467c.

Further, the second piece 39467d is a connecting portion 39 projecting from two places of the first piece 39467c.
It is disposed between the opposite sides of 467c1 and is connected to the first piece 39467c. As a result, the second
When the piece 39467d is twisted in the axial direction of the insertion hole 39467d3, the connecting portion 39467c
It is possible to prevent the shaft portion 39467e3 from breaking by bringing the second piece 39467d into contact with the side surface on the opposite side of 1.

The recessed portion 39467d2 is a hole for inserting the connecting shaft 39467e4 of the third piece 39467e, which will be described later, and is recessed in substantially the same shape as the connecting shaft 39467e4.

The third piece 39467e includes a reflector 39467e1 formed in the shape of a semi-circular plate in front view, and the third piece 39467e.
Shaft portion 394 projecting from the reflector 39467e1 toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side)
It includes 67e3 and a connecting shaft 39467e4.

The reflector 39467e1 is formed of a resin material and has an outer surface coated with plating. As a result, when the reflector 39467e1 is irradiated with the light emitted from the LED 38483b, the light can be reflected on the outer surface thereof. Further, the reflector 39467e1 is
The whole is formed by being curved in an arc shape toward the front side (arrow F direction side). As a result, when the light emitted from the front side is reflected, the light can be focused on a predetermined portion. The shielding of light by the light emitter 11491a by the reflector 39467e1 will be described later.

As described above, the shaft portion 39467e3 is a cylindrical body inserted into the connecting hole 39467c2 of the first piece 39467c and the insertion hole 39467d3 of the second piece 39467d. In addition, the shaft portion 3
In the protruding tip surface of 9467e3, a connecting hole 394 is formed from the side opposite to the insertion side of the shaft portion 39467e3.
A hole is formed in which the screw to be inserted into 67c2 can be screwed. Therefore, with the shaft portion 39467e3 inserted into the connecting hole 39467c2 and the insertion hole 39467d3, the shaft portion 39467e3
By fastening a screw to the insertion tip surface of, the first piece 39467c, the second piece 39467d and the third piece 39467e can be connected, and the third piece 39467e can be connected to the first piece 3946.
It can be made rotatable with respect to 7c.

As described above, the connecting shaft 39467e4 has a recessed portion 39467d of the second piece 39467d.
It is inserted in 2. As a result, the second piece 39467d has the shaft portion 3 with respect to the first piece 39467c.
When rotationally displaced around 9467e3, the connecting shaft 39467e4 can be displaced with the displacement of the second piece 39467d. Therefore, the third piece 39467e is replaced with the second piece 39467.
It can be displaced with the displacement of d.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 199, when the ball receiving portion 39467 receives the game ball between the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d facing each other, the accepted game ball is the first piece 3
The receiving surface (inner side surface formed in a U-shape in front view) of the 9467c and the second piece 39467d is rolled and guided to the recess 39467c3 located at the lowermost end of the receiving surface. This will result in
On the outer surface of the game ball, the second piece 39467d can be rotated around the shaft portion 39467e3 in a direction away from the first piece 39467c. As a result, the third piece 39467e, which moves with the displacement of the second piece 39467d, can be displaced upward and placed on the light irradiation of the LED 38483b.

Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 38483b is reflected by the reflector 394 of the third piece 39467e.
Reflected by 67e1 on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the lower displacement member 39440, the transmission portion 1
It can be emitted from 1451b. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the transmission portion 11451b can be partially increased so that the player can recognize the position of the game ball thrown into the lower displacement member 39440.

Further, in the second piece 39467d, the connecting shaft 39467e4 is inserted into the recessed portion 39467d2, and the load of the third piece 39467e is always applied. The center of gravity G of the third piece 39467e is set on the opposite side of the connecting portion with the second piece 39567d and the third piece 39567e with the shaft portion 394673e interposed therebetween. As a result, in a state where no force other than gravity acts on the second piece 39467d and the third piece 39467de, the load of the third piece 39467e causes the second piece 39.
The 467e can be rotated to the first piece 39467c4 side.

Therefore, when the game ball is ejected (taken out) from the ball receiving portion 39467, the third piece 394
The load of 67e can displace the second piece 39467d toward the ball receiving piece 39467c4 of the first piece 39467c. Therefore, only when the game ball is received by the ball receiving portion 39467, the amount of light reflected by the reflector 39467e1 and emitted from the transmitting portion 11451b can be partially increased. As a result, it is possible to suppress the reflection of light by the reflector 39467e1 due to the positioning operation of the ball receiving portion 39467 or the like.

Further, the ball receiving portion 39467 is rotated around the shaft hole 39467b by the operation of sliding displacement inside the lower displacement member 39440, similarly to the ball receiving portion 467 in the first embodiment, and the lower displacement member 39440 is emitted. The game ball received from the opening 471 (see FIG. 66) is discharged to the outside.

Here, as a structure for discharging the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 39467, the ball receiving portion 39
In the structure in which the ball receiving portion 39467 is rotated around the shaft hole 467b with the slide movement of the 467, the ball receiving portion 39 centering on the shaft hole 467b is caused by the sliding speed of the ball receiving portion 39467.
The rotation speed of 467 is changed. Therefore, since the rotation speed depends only on the slide speed of the ball receiving portion 39467, there is a problem that the discharging speed of the game ball from the ball receiving portion 39467 is not stable.

On the other hand, in the 39th embodiment, the load of the third piece 39467e causes the second piece 39467.
Since the direction in which d rotates and the rotation direction of the ball receiving portion 39467 about the shaft hole 467b when the game ball is ejected are set in substantially the same direction, the game ball emitted from the exit opening 471 is set to substantially the same direction. A driving force can be applied when the second piece 39467d is displaced. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 394
Even if the force acting on the game ball from the ball receiving portion 39467 when the game ball is ejected from the exit opening 471 by displacing the 67 is reduced, the speed of the game ball to be emitted can be maintained. As a result, the ejection speed of the game ball emitted from the ball receiving portion 39467 can be stabilized.

Next, the first unit 40551 in the 40th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 200. In the first embodiment, the case where the game ball is notified when the curved portion 581a of the main path SK1 is clogged has been described, but in the 40th embodiment, the game ball having a size other than the specified size is the main path. Fraud can be notified when passing through SK1. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 200 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 40551 in the 40th embodiment, and FIG. 200 (b) is a diagram of the first unit 405 in the CCb-CCb line of FIG. 200 (a).
It is a schematic cross-sectional view of 51. The cross-sectional view of FIG. 200 (a) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 25.

As shown in FIG. 200, the first unit 40551 in the 40th embodiment is on the front side (
The first path member 560 arranged on the side facing the arrow F, the second path member 570 arranged on the back surface side (the side in the direction of arrow B) of the first path member 560, and the second path member 570 thereof. A third path member 40580, which is arranged on the back surface of the above, is mainly provided.

The third path member 40580 includes a first covering member 40581 arranged on the back surface of the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the second path member 570 and a lower side (arrow D direction side) of the second path member 570. A second lining member 582 (see FIG. 19), a first lining member 40581, and a second lining member arranged on the back surface of the above.
Mainly, a first drive unit 583 (see FIG. 19) arranged between the lining members 582 and a second drive unit 584 (see FIG. 19) arranged on the back surface of the second lining member 582. It is configured in preparation for.

The first covering member 40581 is a member that forms a throwing path of a game ball that curves in a substantially U shape toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side), and is a member that forms a throwing path of a game ball, and is a back surface side of the first opening portion 571a and the fourth opening portion 571d. A curved portion 40581a connecting the two, and a plate-shaped mounting portion 4 connected to the lower side of the curved portion 40581a.
Mainly equipped with 0581b.

The curved portion 40581a includes a first opening portion 571a and a fourth opening portion 571d (second path member 5).
70) The side is formed by being curved in a U-shaped cross section with an open cross section, and the first rolling portion 576 is arranged inside the curved cross section. Further, the curved portion 40581a is formed so that the width dimension in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) becomes smaller toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side), and the width dimension in the left-right direction in the curved portion having a U-shaped cross section. X10 (see FIG. 200 (a)) is formed to have a size of 1.1 times or less the diameter of the game ball. As a result, when a game ball having a diameter 1.1 times or more the diameter of the specified game ball is thrown, the game ball can be stopped inside the curved portion 40581a (main path SK1).

Further, the curved portion 40581a is arranged inside the recess 86b2 (see FIG. 17) of the center frame 86, similarly to the curved portion 581a in the first embodiment. Therefore, the curved portion 40
The gaming ball stopped inside the 581a can be detected by the detection device 86b3 (see FIG. 17), and the pachinko machine 10 can be notified of an error (illegal).

Further, the curved portion 40581a has an opening 40581a1 that opens in a curved portion having a U-shaped cross section, and a box-shaped housing portion 4 that opens upward from an end portion on the back side of the opening 40481a1.
It is provided with 0581a2.

The opening 40581a1 is an opening for discharging a ball having a diameter smaller than the diameter of the specified game ball from the main path SK1, and the opening size X15 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) (FIG. 200 (FIG. 200).
a)) is formed to a size larger than 0.9 times the diameter of the game ball. The opening 40
The 581a1 is formed on the back surface side of the curved portion 40581 which is the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the first rolling portion 576, and the game ball passing through the main path SK1 can be sent to the opening 40581a1. .. As a result, when a game ball having a diameter smaller than the specified game ball by 0.9% or more is thrown, the game ball can be discharged from the opening 40581a1 to the outside of the main path SK1.

The accommodating portion 40581a2 is a box for accommodating the game ball discharged from the opening 40581a1, and the inner space is formed to have a size larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the opening 40
The game balls discharged from 581a1 can be housed in the storage section 40581a2, and the housed game balls can be detected by the detection device 86b3 to notify the pachinko machine 10 of an error (illegal).

In the 40th embodiment, the case where the width dimension X10 and the opening dimension X11 are formed in different sizes of 0.1 times the game ball having the specified diameter (11 mm) has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to, and the magnification of the size with respect to the game ball may be changed.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 201 and 202, the first unit 415 in the 41st embodiment
51 will be described. In the first embodiment, the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i and the third recess 571j formed in the main path SK2, the curved path WK1 and the main path SK3 move up and down (arrows) about the curved portion of the curved path WK1. The case where the object is formed substantially in the U-D direction) has been described, but the first recess 41571h and the second recess 41571i in the 41st embodiment have been described.
The third recess 41571j is formed in a different shape, and the same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 201 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 41551 in the 41st embodiment, and FIG. 201 (b) is the first unit 4 in the CCIb-CCIb line of FIG. 201 (a).
It is a schematic cross-sectional view of 1551. FIG. 202 (a) shows CCIIa-CCI of FIG. 201 (a).
It is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 41551 in line Ia, and FIG. 202 (b) is FIG. 20
1 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 41551 in the CCIIb-CCIIb line.

As shown in FIGS. 201 and 202, the first unit 41551 in the 41st embodiment.
Is disposed on the back surface of the first path member 41560 disposed on the front side, the second path member 41570 disposed on the back surface side of the first path member 41560, and the second path member 41570. It is mainly provided with a third path member 580 (see FIG. 19).

The first path member 41560 has a front plate 41564 formed in a plate shape along the front surface of the game area of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) and a substantially U-shaped cross section opened on the upper side (arrow U direction side). The first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562, and the third receiving portion 563, which are formed in the front plate 41564 and project from the upper end (arrow U direction side) end to the back side (arrow B direction side). (See Figure 21),
The lower side (arrow D direction side) of the first receiving unit 561, the second receiving unit 562, and the third receiving unit 563.
The first wall portion 41565 extending along the end of a part of the front plate 41564 and the first wall portion 565 formed below the first wall portion 565, which are formed at predetermined intervals. It mainly includes two sets of second wall portions 566 and third wall portions 567 (see FIG. 21) that are projected from two locations.

The front plate 41564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the flow path of the game ball formed between the second path member 41570 and the third path member 580, which will be described later.
It is formed from a light transmitting member. As a result, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down inside the first unit 551 through the front plate 41564.

Further, the front plate 564 has a first convex portion 41564b and a second convex portion 415 at positions facing the first concave portion 41571h, the second concave portion 41571i and the third concave portion 41571j, which will be described later, respectively.
64c and the third convex portion 41564d are projected.

The second path member 41570 is projected from the plate-shaped base plate 41571 facing the front plate 41564 of the first path member 41560 and the front surface (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 41571 toward the first path member 41560 side. 4th wall part 573 (see FIG. 21) and its 4th wall part 573
A fifth wall portion 574 (see FIG. 21) projecting downward from the fifth wall portion 574 at a predetermined distance from the fifth wall portion 574, and a sixth wall portion 574 projecting downward from the fifth wall portion 574 at a predetermined distance. It is formed mainly with a wall portion 575 (see FIG. 21).

The base plate 41571 is a throwing path of a game ball formed between facing the front plate 41564 (
The first recess 41571h, which is recessed in the main path SK2, the curved path WK1 and the main path SK3),
It is provided with a second recess 41571i and a third recess 41571j.

The first recess 41571h, the second recess 41571i, and the third recess 41571j are formed by being recessed in a curved shape toward the back surface side. Further, the first concave portion 41571h and the first convex portion 4
The facing dimension of 1564b, the facing dimension of the second recess 41571i and the second convex portion 41564c, and the facing dimension of the third recess 41571j and the third convex portion 41564d are the same facing dimension L19 (FIG. 201 (FIG. 201). b) Set to).

Further, the facing dimension L19 is set to a value larger than the diameter of the game ball and smaller than the facing dimension L20 (see FIG. 201 (b)) on the back surface of the front plate 41564 and the front surface of the base plate 571. Is set to. As a result, the first recess 41571h and the second recess 4157
The game ball thrown between the 1i and the third concave portion 41571j and the facing between the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c and the third convex portion 41564d is the first concave portion 41571h and the second concave portion 4.
1571i and 3rd concave portion 41571j, 1st convex portion 41564b, 2nd convex portion 41564c
And the third convex portion 41564d can be brought into contact with the third convex portion to slow down the rolling (flowing) speed of the game ball.

Further, the protrusion dimensions of the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c, and the third convex portion 41564d toward the base plate 41571 are set to be the same. Further, the protruding tip surfaces of the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c, and the third convex portion 41564d, and the first concave portion 41571h,
The distance dimension L21 (see FIG. 201 (b)) between the front surface of the base plate 41571 excluding the second recess 41571i and the third recess 41571j is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the first recess 41571h, the second recess 41571i and the third recess 41571j
And the game ball thrown between the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c and the third convex portion 41564d is the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c and the third convex portion 415.
It can collide with 64d. As a result, the rolling (flowing) speed of the game ball can be slowed down.

The first recess 41571h is formed in the base plate 41571 of the main path SK2, and is recessed long along the throwing direction of the game ball of the main path SK2. As a result, the first recess 41571
When the game ball thrown inside h is thrown inside the first recess 41571h, it is possible to suppress an increase in frictional resistance with the first recess 41571h. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 from stopping due to contact with the first recess 41571h.

The first convex portion 41564b projecting from the surface facing the first concave portion 41571h is the first concave portion 41.
It is extended in a direction orthogonal to the extension direction of 571h. As a result, when the game ball to which the main path SK2 is sent is brought into contact with the first convex portion 41564b, the game ball is brought into contact with the first concave portion 41571h.
It can be easily thrown inside.

The second recess 41571i is formed in the base plate 41571 of the curved path WK1 and is recessed long along the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction). Further, the second recess 41571i is formed into an ellipse whose shape in the front view is long in the vertical direction, and the intermediate position in the horizontal direction of the ellipse is set to the intermediate position in the horizontal direction of the curved path WK1 extending in the vertical direction. Further, the curved center on the upper side (main path SK2 side) of the ellipse of the second recess 41571i is arranged on the throwing locus of the center of the game ball to which the main path SK2 is thrown. Therefore, the second recess 41571i is recessed above the throwing locus of the game ball thrown from the main path SK2, so that even when the game ball is thrown at a relatively high speed in the main path SK2, the second recess 41571i is recessed. The center of the game ball is the second recess 41571
It can pass through the front side of i. As a result, the game ball passing through the main route SK2 is second.
It is possible to easily slow down the speed of the game ball by throwing it inside the recess 41571i, and it is possible to suppress the game ball from going wild on the curved path WK1.

The second convex portion 41564c projecting from the surface facing the second concave portion 41571i is formed by being bent in a substantially L shape in front view. Further, in the second convex portion 41564c, the bent portion is set on the front side of the curved center on the upper side of the ellipse of the second concave portion 41571i in the front view. Further, the bent portion on one side of the second convex portion 41564c is extended in a direction orthogonal to the throwing direction of the game ball on the curved path WK1, and the bent portion on the other side is the throwing portion of the game ball on the main path SK2. It is extended in the direction orthogonal to the direction. As a result, the game ball thrown from the main path SK2 to the curved path WK1 is brought into contact with the second convex portion 41564c on the other side and thrown inside the second concave portion 41571i, and at the same time, the ball is thrown into the second convex portion 41564c on one side. It is possible to easily reduce the throwing speed of the game ball that is brought into contact with the ball and is thrown on the curved path WK11. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball thrown to the curved path WK1 from going wild, and to smoothly throw the game ball.

The third recess 41571j is formed in the base plate 41571 of the main path SK3, and is recessed in an elliptical shape long in the throwing direction of the game ball of the main path SK3. As a result, the third recess 415
When the game ball thrown inside the 71j is thrown inside the third recess 41571j, the third
It is possible to suppress an increase in frictional resistance with the recess 41571j. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the main path SK3 from stopping due to contact with the third recess 41571j.

Further, in the third recess 41571j, the bending center of the upstream end of the throwing path of the game ball is set to the lower side of the center position in the left-right direction of the second recess 41571i. As a result, the curved path WK1
The game ball that has flowed down inside the second recess 41571i can be easily received by the second recess 41571i, and the game ball can be easily sent from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK3.

The third convex portion 41564d projecting from the surface facing the third concave portion 415671j is formed by being bent in a substantially L shape in front view. Further, in the third convex portion 41564d, the bent portion is set on the front side of the bending center of the upstream end portion of the third concave portion 41571j in the front view. The bent portion on one side of the third convex portion 41564d extends in a direction orthogonal to the throwing direction of the game ball on the main path SK3, and the bent portion on the other side is orthogonal to the throwing direction of the game ball on the curved path WK1. It is extended in the direction. As a result, the game ball thrown from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK3 is brought into contact with the third convex portion 41564d on the other side and thrown inside the third concave portion 41571j, and at the same time, the ball is thrown into the third convex portion 41564d on one side. It is possible to reduce the throwing speed of the game ball which is brought into contact with the ball and throws the main path SK3. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball thrown from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK1 from going wild, and to smoothly throw the game ball.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 203 to 206, the game board 42013 in the 42nd embodiment.
Will be explained. In the first embodiment, the other end side of the board box 100 (main control device 110) arranged in the back case 300 is fixed to the back case 300 by a screw inserted from the back side of the board box 100. As described above, in the 42nd embodiment,
A case where the second engaging member 42370 arranged in the rear case 42300 is engaged with the board box 42100 will be described.

First, with reference to FIGS. 203 and 204, the rear case 423 according to the 42nd embodiment.
The overall configuration of 00 will be described. FIG. 203 shows the back case 42 according to the 42nd embodiment.
It is an exploded perspective front view of 300. 204 (a) is a front view of the rear case 42300, and FIG. 204 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case 42300 in the CCIVb-CCIVb line of FIG. 204 (a). The same parts as those of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 203 and 204, the rear case 42300 in the 42nd embodiment is erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 42301 having a substantially rectangular front view and the four sides of the bottom wall portion 42301 toward the front. It is provided with an outer wall portion 42302, and is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open by each of the wall portions 42301 and 42302.

Further, the back case 42300 is arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 42301 (the box-shaped open side (arrow F direction side)) and the engagement member 310 on the back side of the back case 42300. A fixing member 320 for fixing one end side of the board box 42100 and a bottom wall portion 4230.
A second engaging member 423 that is arranged on the front side of 1 and fixes the other end side of the board box 42100.
70 and.

The bottom wall portion 42301 has a front-view rectangular opening 301a formed in the center thereof, and a third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) is arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 42301 through the opening 301a.
See) is visible. Further, the bottom wall portion 42301 is provided with a columnar shape on the front side.
A protruding portion 301b inserted into the sliding groove 314 of the engaging member 310, a first opening 301c opening at a position facing the fixing member 320, and a second opening opening at a position facing the engaging member 310.
A second projecting portion 42301f that is projected in a columnar shape on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the opening portion 301d and the bottom wall portion 42301 and inserted into the sliding groove 42372 of the second engaging member 42370 described later.
And a third opening 42301 g formed through the second projecting portion 42301f in the plate thickness direction (arrow FB direction) above (arrow U direction).

The second projecting portion 42301f is a protrusion that defines the displacement direction of the second engaging member 42370, and is formed side by side at two positions in the gravity direction. Further, the outer diameter of the second projecting portion 42301f is set to a dimension slightly smaller than the groove width in the lateral direction of the sliding groove 42372 of the second engaging member 42370, which will be described later. Further, the two second projecting portions 42301f are set so that the distance between the centers of the two portions 42301f is smaller than the groove width in the longitudinal direction of the sliding groove 42372. As a result, the sliding groove 4
Two second projecting portions 42301f can be inserted and arranged inside the 2372.

The third opening 42301 g is a projecting portion 4211 of the substrate box 42100, which will be described later, inside.
8 is an opening into which the protrusion 8 is inserted, and is opened with a dimension larger than the outer shape of the projecting portion 42118 in the front view. Further, in the third opening 42301 g, the engaging member 310 is fixed to the fixing member 320 in a state where the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged (the state shown in FIG. 204A).
It is formed at a position adjacent to each other in the direction of disengaging the engagement with (arrow L direction). This makes it impossible to disengage the engaging member 310 from the fixing member 320 when the projecting portion 42118 is inserted into the third opening 42301g. A detailed description of the positional relationship between the projecting portion 42118 and the engaging member 310 will be described later.

The outer wall portion 42302 includes a second opening portion 42302b that opens in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) on the side surface on the lower side (arrow D direction side) in front view. The second opening 42302b is
It is an opening through which an end portion on the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the second engaging member 42370, which will be described later, is inserted, and an opening is formed in the displacement region of the second engaging member 42370. As a result, the second engaging member 4
The 2370 can be displaced.

The outer shape of the board box 42100 in front view is formed into a horizontally long rectangular rectangle, and the main control device 110 is arranged inside. Further, the board box 42100 has a bearing portion 117 (see FIG. 206 (a)) protruding from one end on one end side (arrow R direction side) and a projecting portion projecting from one surface on the front side of the board box 42100. 42118 and.

As described above, the projecting portion 42118 is the third opening 42301 of the rear case 42300.
A length to be inserted into g, in which an opening 42118a, which will be described later, is arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 42301 of the rear case 42300 in a state where the front surface of the board box 42100 and the back surface of the rear case 42300 are parallel to each other. It is set to. Further, the projecting portion 42118 is
An opening 42118a that opens in the direction of gravity is provided, and a second engaging member 42370, which will be described later, is inserted inside the opening 42118a. As a result, the board box 42100 is suppressed from rotating around the fixing member 320, and the board box 4210 is prevented from rotating.
0 can be arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 42300 in a non-displaceable state.

Further, the third opening 42301 g into which the projecting portion 42118 is inserted is engaged in a state in which the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged (the state shown in FIG. 204A) as described above. Since the member 310 is formed at a position adjacent to the fixing member 320 in the direction of disengagement (arrow L direction), the projecting portion 42118 is arranged at a position adjacent to the engaging member 310. Further, the insertion dimension Y6 (see FIG. 204 (b)) of the protruding portion 42118 into the third opening 42301 g is a separation distance Y7 between the front surface of the engaging member 310 and the front surface of the bottom wall portion 42301 (FIG. 204 (b).
) See). As a result, as shown in FIG. 204 (b), the engaging member 310 and the projecting portion 42118 are arranged at overlapping positions in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

Therefore, in a state where the second engaging member 42370 is inserted into the opening 42118a of the protruding portion 42118, the engaging member 310 disengages the engagement with the fixing member 320 (protruding portion 42).
Displacement in the direction in which 118 is arranged) is regulated. As a result, the second opening 42118a
With the engaging member 42370 inserted, the engaging member 310 can be prevented from being illegally disengaged from the fixing member 320, and the board box 42100 (main control device 110) is replaced with an illegal board. Can be suppressed.

Further, the opening 42118a of the projecting portion 42118 is opened in the direction of gravity, and the second engaging member 42370 inserted into the opening 42118a is displaced and inserted in the direction of gravity. Therefore, since the displacement direction (gravity direction) of the second engaging member 42370 and the displacement direction (horizontal direction) of the engaging member 310 are set in the orthogonal direction, the engaging member 310 is unreasonable due to the player's fraud. Second engaging member 423 inserted into the opening 42118a
It can be easily received at 70. As a result, when the engaging member 310 is forcibly operated by the player's fraud, it is possible to prevent the engaging member 310 from being disengaged from the fixing member 320.

The second engaging member 42370 faces downward (arrow D direction) from the plate member 42371 formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular rectangular plate in front view and the end portion of the plate member 42371 on the upper side (arrow U direction side). The recessed portion 42374, which is recessed, and the second engaging portion 42373, which is projected outward in the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction) of the upper end (arrow U direction side) end of the plate member 42371, are recessed. Setting part 4237
A sliding groove 42372 that is opened in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) at a position below 4 is mainly provided.

As described above, the sliding groove 42372 is an opening for displaceably disposing the second engaging member 42370, and is opened long in the gravity direction (arrow UD direction). In addition, the sliding groove 423
In 72, the width dimension in the lateral direction (arrow LR direction) is set to be substantially the same as the diameter of the second projecting portion 42301f arranged inside the sliding groove 42372. Therefore, as described above, the sliding groove 4
When the second projecting portion 42301f is inserted into 2372, the sliding direction of the second engaging member 42370 is defined as the longitudinal direction of the opening of the sliding groove 42372.

The recessed portion 42374 is an opening for easily elastically deforming the upper end portion of the plate member 42371, and is recessed downward and cut out in the front-rear direction. As a result, the rigidity of the upper end portion of the plate member 42371 can be lowered to facilitate elastic deformation.

The second engaging portion 42373 is a portion that engages with the end portion of the opening 42118a of the protruding portion 42118 described above, and is projected from both side surfaces in a direction orthogonal to the notch direction of the recessed portion 42374. The separation distance X12 (see FIG. 204 (a)) at the ends of the protrusions on both sides is the opening 421.
It is set to be larger than the opening dimension X13 in the left-right direction of 18a (see FIG. 204 (b)). As a result, when the second engaging member 42370 is inserted into the opening 42118a, the second engaging portion 42373 engages with the end of the opening 42118a, so that the second engaging portion 42373 becomes the opening 42118a. It is possible to prevent the person from getting out of the room.

The second engaging portion 42373 is formed so as to project outward in the horizontal direction from the upper side to the lower side of the plate member 42371. As a result, the second engaging member 42370 has an opening 4
When inserted into 2118a, the second engaging portion 42373 can be brought into contact with the inside of the opening 42118a to facilitate elastic deformation of the upper side of the plate member 42371.

Further, the second engaging member 42370 is in a state of being inserted into the opening 42118a (engaging portion 42).
In the state where 373 is engaged with the projecting portion 42118), the lower end portion is the outer wall portion 4230.
It is arranged inside the second opening 42302b of 2. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second engaging portion 42370 from being operated from the outside of the rear case 42300. As a result, the second engaging portion 4
It is possible to prevent the board box 42100 (main control device 110) from being replaced with an illegal board by illegally disengaging the engagement between the 2373 and the projecting portion 42118.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 204 and 205, the board box 4 to the rear case 42300
The arrangement method of 2100 will be described. 205 (a) is a front view of the rear case 42300, and FIG. 205 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case 42300 in the CCVb-CCVb line of FIG. 205 (a). In addition, in FIG. 204 (a) and FIG. 204 (b), the state after the board box 42100 is arranged in the rear case 42300 is shown, and FIG. 205 shows.
In (a) and 205 (b), the state before the substrate box 42100 is arranged in the back case 42300 is illustrated.

The substrate box 42100 in the 42nd embodiment is the same as the 1st embodiment described above.
First, the fixing member 320 is engaged with the engaging member 310 and one side is disposed on the back side of the back case 42300.

As shown in FIGS. 205 (a) and 205 (b), the engaging member 310 is the fixing member 3.
In the state before engaging with 20 (before displacement), the tip of the second piece 312 of the engaging member 310 is arranged on the front side of the third opening 42301 g. As a result, before the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged with each other, the projecting portion 42118 of the board box 42100 becomes the third opening 42301.
It is possible to suppress the insertion inside g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the substrate box 42100 from being arranged in the back case 42300 only by engaging the projecting portion 42118 and the second engaging portion 42370.

Next, the substrate box 42100 is rotated around the connecting portion between the fixing member on one side and the 320 on the other side, and the projecting portion 42118 is inserted inside the third opening 42301 g of the rear case 42300. As a result, the projecting portion 42118 is arranged at a position where it can engage with the second engaging member 42370.

The second engaging member 42370 is inserted inside the third opening 42301g before being inserted, and the lower side is inserted through the second opening 42302b and arranged outside the back case 42300 (FIG. 205 (a)). reference). As a result, the board box 42100 is placed in the back case 42.
The operator disposing the 300 can operate the second engaging member 42370 from the outside of the back case 42300, and the second engaging member 42370 can be inserted into the inside of the third opening 42301 g.

Further, since the displacement direction of the second engaging member 42370 is set to the direction of gravity, the second engaging member 42370 is disposed inside the third opening 42301 g at the lower end due to the action of gravity in the state before insertion. .. As a result, the protruding portion 42118 becomes the third opening 42301 of the rear case 42300.
It is possible to suppress collision with the second engaging member 42370 when it is inserted inside g. As a result, the work efficiency of the worker can be improved.

Further, if the second engaging member 42370 is forgotten to be engaged with the projecting portion 42118, the second engaging member 42370 can be arranged on the outside of the rear case 42300, so that it is not in a normal state for the operator. Can be made easier to recognize. As a result, it is possible to prevent forgetting to engage the second engaging member 42370 with the projecting portion 42118.

Next, the rear case 42300 and the base plate 42060 will be described with reference to FIG. 206. FIG. 206 (a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and FIG. 206 (b) is FIG. 206 (
It is sectional drawing of the game board 13 in the CCVIb-CCVIb line of a).

As shown in FIG. 206, an erection member 42060f is arranged on the back surface of the base plate 42060 in the 42nd embodiment. The erection member 4260f is erected toward the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 42060, and the erection tip position is the back case 4230.
It is set in the same plane of the bottom wall portion 42301 of 0. Further, the erection member 4260f is a second.
It is arranged below the engaging member 42370 and outside the back case 42300. As a result, when the rear case 42300 is arranged on the game board 42013 in a state where the second engaging member 42370 and the projecting portion 42118 are forgotten to be engaged, the standing portion 42060f is placed on the second engaging member 42370. It can collide with the lower side. As a result, the second engaging member 42
It is possible to prevent the back case 42300 from being arranged on the base plate 42060 in a state where the 370 and the projecting portion 42118 are forgotten to be engaged or when the board box 42100 is forgotten to be arranged on the back case 42300.

In this embodiment, a light emitting substrate that illuminates the inside of the back case 42300 is arranged on the upright portion 42060f. As a result, the upright portion 42060f can be used as both a portion that irradiates light and a portion that suppresses the engagement between the back case 42300 and the base plate 42060 in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the outer shape of the base plate 42060 from becoming large.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In the first embodiment, in order to retract the ball receiving portion 467 from the third position to the second position or the first position, the drive motor KM2 is driven, but the third position to the second position or the second position is followed. The drive for retracting to one position may be driven by an urging spring. For example, an urging spring is arranged between the rack 466 or the movable rack 464 and the base member 470 so that an elastic force is applied as the rack 466 or the movable rack 464 is displaced.

In this case, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position and performs the payout operation, the drive motor K
By turning off the drive of M3, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced to the second position or the first position side by the urging force of the urging spring.

Therefore, the time until the driving force of the drive motor KM2 is switched at the third position is used.
Since the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced, it is possible to suppress the wobbling of the lower displacement member 440 due to the reaction of the ejection operation when the game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467.

That is, when the game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the load of the lower displacement member 440 is reduced by the amount of the ejected game ball, and the lower displacement member 440 is likely to be displaced upward due to the reaction. By immediately displacing the ball receiving portion 467, a force that displaces the base member 470 downward by the reaction due to the rotational displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 is applied to cancel the reaction when the ball is ejected from the lower displacement member 440. be able to.

In the first embodiment, the engaging protrusion 882 that regulates the rotation of the rotating body 800 is the rotating body 800.
Although the case where two pieces are formed on the side surface of the above surface at a predetermined interval is described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of them may be continuously provided on the side wall of the rotating body 800 at predetermined intervals. In this case, the rotation of the rotating body 800 can be restricted at any position, and the rotating body 800 can be restricted from rotating by an external force when the lid member 770 is opened.

In the first embodiment, the case where the opening 831 is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 and the game ball is thrown from the opening 831 has been described. However, the opening 831 is the communication hole 881 of the rotating body 800.
It may be formed on the side surface opposite to b. That is, openings may be formed on both side surfaces of the rotating body 800 in the axial direction, one of which may be the inlet of the sphere and the other of which may be the outlet of the sphere. In this case, since the ball throwing path can be formed inside the rotating body 800, the accessory (rotating body 800) can be used as the throwing path, especially when there is no placement space on the back side of the game board 13. , The throwing route can be secured without increasing the size of the game board 13.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating body 800 is formed in a columnar shape has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a polygonal shape, an elliptical shape, or a combination thereof may be used as a shape. In this case, since the shape of the rotating body 800 can be complicated, it is possible to make it easy for the player to visually recognize that the effect is switched due to the rotational displacement of the rotating body 800.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation unit 8654 is formed so as to be operable by the player has been described, but a push-in type button may be provided on the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation unit 8654. In this case, the player can not only apply the rotational force to the rotation operation unit 8654, but also press the push button or combine the rotation operation and the pressing operation of the rotation operation unit 8654. .. As a result, since a plurality of operation modes of the rotation operation unit 8654 can be formed, it is possible to give the player an interest.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the transmission gear 8651 and the transmission gear 8652 are in mesh with each other has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, transmission gear 8651
A torque limiter or the like that blocks the transmission of the driving force when an overload is applied may be interposed between the transmission gear 8652 and the transmission gear.

In this case, when the player stops the rotation of the rotation operation unit 8654 in the rotating state, the transmission of the driving force of the rotation from the drive motor KM6 can be blocked, and the rotation of the rotation operation unit 8654 can be suppressed from being continued. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotation operation unit 8650 from being broken when the rotation in the direction opposite to the rotation in the A direction is input to the rotation operation unit 8654 by the player.

Further, when the player operates the rotation operation unit 8654, when the player's finger or clothes is sandwiched between the upper plate 8017 on the rotation direction side of the rotation operation unit 8654, the rotation is stopped.
It is possible to prevent the player's fingers and clothes from being further pinched. Therefore, the player can rotate the rotation operation unit 8
It is possible to prevent an injury caused by being sandwiched between the 654 and the upper plate 8017.

In the eighth embodiment, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 8654 is set to the A direction, but the rotation direction is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 8654 may be the left-right direction with respect to the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the player can be made to perform the movement accompanying the effect of the gaming machine, and the effect of the effect can be improved. For example, by tapping the rotation operation unit 8654 with the left hand so as to rotate to the right, it is possible to produce an effect such as tapping (slap) a character or the like displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the first embodiment, the board box 100 is arranged on the fixing member 320, and the fixing member 320 is engaged with the engaging member 310 to prevent the board box 100 from being replaced with an illegal board. The case has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other members (for example, the third symbol) can be arranged on the fixing member 320 to have an effect of suppressing unauthorized removal. It may be a display device 81 or a detection device capable of detecting an illegal input such as an illegal radio wave or vibration).

In the first embodiment, the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i and the third concave portion 571j formed in the first unit 551, the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c and the third convex portion 5
Although 64d has been described as being formed at positions facing each other, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564 are not limited thereto.
d is arranged on the upstream side with respect to the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i and the third concave portion 571j, and the flowing game ball is placed on the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c and the third convex portion 564d. It may be formed so as to be accepted by the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i and the third recess 571j after being brought into contact with each other.

In the first embodiment, the decorative member 154 has a thickness dimension of a recess 151 of the main body portion 151.
Although the case where the depth is made smaller than the recessed depth of b has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the decorative member 154 is formed of an elastically deformable material, and the main body portion 15 is formed.
It may be formed thicker than the recessed depth of the recessed portion 151b of 1. In this case, by compressing and elastically deforming the general winning opening unit 150 when disposing it on the base plate 60, the main body portion 151 can be arranged in a state of being in contact with the base plate 60.

In the first embodiment, when the cam member 422 is arranged at the position of the second displacement state, the forces PW1 and PW2 applied from the first link member 431 to the cam member 422 act in a direction of canceling each other. The case has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this.
For example, the direction of the force input to the cam member 422 from the point where the end portion of the cam member 422 and the plate-shaped protrusion 431b abut may be set in the direction from the abutting point toward the axial center of the shaft portion 422a. .. According to this, it is possible to suppress the action of the force in the direction of rotation about the shaft portion 422a on the cam member 422.

In the first embodiment, the other end side of the board box 100 is screwed to the back case 300.
Although the case where it is arranged on the back side of the above is described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the other end side of the board box 100 may be fixed by a sealing tool that cannot be removed when engaged with the back case 300. More specifically, a columnar sealing tool through which openings formed at a plurality of locations on the other end side of the rear case 300 are inserted into the insertion portions recessed at a plurality of locations on the back surface side of the rear case 300 is inserted. By engaging the insertion portion and the sealing tool, the substrate box 100 is arranged on the back side of the back case 300 in a non-rotatable (operable) state.

When removing the board box 100, the other end side of the board box 100 can be removed from the back case 300 by cutting the engaging portion between the insertion portion and the sealing tool.
Further, when the other end side of the board box 100 is arranged in the back case 300 again, a new sealing tool is inserted through an unused opening of the board box 100, and an unused insertion portion of the back case 300 is inserted. The other end side of the board box 100 can be arranged on the back case 300 by engaging with.

In the first embodiment, the outer shape of the decorative member 154 in front view is formed to be larger than the opening shape of the second opening 60b, and the end portion of the decorative member 154 is the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60.
Although the case where the components are arranged so as to overlap each other in the front-rear direction has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the outer shape of the decorative member 154 in the front view may be set to be substantially the same as the opening shape of the second opening 60b.

In this case, the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 150 and the decorative member 6 of the base plate 60.
By forming 0c from the same material, the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c are formed of a single sheet, and by cutting the decorative member 154 from the sheet, the decorative member 154 is formed.
And the decorative member 60c can be formed. Therefore, since it is not necessary to form the decorative member 154 in a separate process, the yield when forming the decorative member 154 can be improved.

When the outer shape of the decorative member 154 in the front view is formed to be substantially the same as the opening shape of the second opening 60b, the decorative member 154 is arranged inside the second opening 60b to form the decorative member 15.
It is preferable to arrange the front surface of 4 and the decorative member 60c on the same plane. In this case, since the decorative surfaces of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c coincide with each other in the front-rear direction in the front view, the player can recognize the decoration of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c as one decoration.

In the first embodiment, the first convex portion 571h is projected toward the back side (arrow B side direction side) on the inner surface of the front side (arrow F direction side) of the throwing path of the game ball of the first unit 551. , 2nd convex portion 571i and 3rd convex portion 571k are formed, and the first concave portion 571h and the second concave portion 571i are recessed toward the back side on the inner surface on the back side of the throwing path of the game ball of the first unit 511. And the third
Although the case where the recess 571j is provided has been described, the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, the third concave portion 571j, and the first convex portion 571.
h, the second convex portion 571i and the third convex portion 571k may be formed on the inner surface on the opposite side in the front-rear direction in the front view.

Further, a recess may be formed on the inner surface on the front side at a position facing the second recess 571i so as to be recessed toward the front image. In this case, the concave portion is recessed in the throwing space of the curved path WK1.
The throwing space can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the flow of the game ball from becoming too slow on the curved path WK1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from staying on the curved path WK1.

In the ninth embodiment, the case where the inclined surface 9431b1 projects toward the front side toward the cam member 422 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. for example,
The inclined surface 9431b1 may be formed as an inclination in which the amount of protrusion toward the front side is reduced toward the cam member 422.

In this case, when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state and the end portion of the cam member 422 abuts on the plate-shaped protrusion 9531a, the cam member 422 is placed on the curved wall portion 411e of the front base 411.
Can be pressed against. As a result, it is possible to suppress the cam member 422 from swinging in the front-rear direction, and it is possible to easily maintain the lower displacement member 440 at the position of the second displacement state.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, the case where the light emitting body 11491a is formed at a position higher than the center of the game ball accepted by the ball receiving portion 467 (in the direction of arrow U) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light emitting body 11491a may be arranged at substantially the same height as the center of the game ball accepted by the ball receiving portion 467. In this case, the transparent portion 11451
It is preferable that the height position of b is formed from the center of the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 to the upper side of the center.

According to this, when a part of the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a is blocked by the game ball, the shadow of the game ball formed on the transmission portion 11451b is formed in a semicircular shape by the upper hemisphere of the game ball. can. As a result, since the roundness of the game ball can be formed in the shadow formed on the transmission portion 11451b, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the position of the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467.

In the twelfth and thirty-nine embodiments, the case where the displacement of the third piece 12467e and 39467e is performed by the load of the game ball has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a sensor for detecting that the game ball has passed is attached to the ball receiving portions 12467 and 39467 in the throwing path for throwing the game ball, and the third piece 12467e, due to the detection of the game ball by the sensor, The 39467e may be displaced independently. According to this, the second piece 12
Since it is not necessary to displace the 467d and 39467d by the load of the game ball, the ball receiving portion 12
The reliability of the displacement of 467 and 39467 can be improved. In this case, the third piece 12467e
, 39467e are independently displaced in the ball receiving portion 12467, 39467.

In the twelfth and 39th embodiments, the case where the rotation axis when the third piece 12467e and 39467e are rotationally displaced is formed on the first piece 12467c and 39467c has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the shaft portions 12467e3 and 39467e3 of the third piece 12467e and 39467e are inserted into the openings formed in the rack 466, and the third piece 1
The 2467e and 39467e may be rotationally displaced with respect to the rack 466. In this case, since the distance between the rotating shaft and the connecting portion between the second pieces 12467d and 39467d can be easily increased, the third pieces 12467e and 394 with respect to the displacement amount of the second pieces 12467d and 39467d can be easily increased.
The displacement amount of 67e can be easily increased. As a result, the shielding plate 124 of the third piece 12467e
67e1 can be easily arranged on the front side of the light emitting body 11491a. In this case, the opening formed in the rack 466 is formed in an elongated hole into which the shaft portions 12467e3 and 39467e3 can slide.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the second path member 13570 is moved in the front-rear direction with respect to the first path member 13560 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the first path member 13560 may be moved in the front-rear direction with respect to the second path member 13570. In this case, the relative positional relationship between the second path member 13570 and the front surface of the base plate 60 (game board 13) prevents the player from grasping the distance between the first member and the second member facing each other. can. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the first, tenth, and twenty-fifth embodiments described above, the case where the decorative members 154, 10154, 25154 are attached by the adhesive tapes 154a, 10154a, 25154a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the present invention is described. An adhesive composed of a liquid material may be used.

In the thirteenth, thirty-two, thirty-third, thirty-fourth, and thirty-fiveth embodiments, the first arranged on the front side.
The path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 are formed of a non-light transmissive material, and the first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35
Although the case where the space between the 560 and the second path member 13570, 32570, 34570 is difficult to be recognized by the player has been described, the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, first path member 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560
The first path member 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 and the second path member 1357 are formed so as to form a slit-shaped opening having a width smaller than the diameter of the game ball.
A game ball flowing down between the faces of 0, 32570 and 34570 may be made visible to the player through the opening. In this case, the distance to the adjacent openings of the plurality of slit-shaped openings is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

As a result, the first path member 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 355
It is possible to make the player recognize the game ball flowing down between the 60 and the second path member 13570, 32570, 34570 through the opening.

Further, the first path member 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 is formed with an opening that is opened in a circle smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the first path member 13560,
32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 and the second path member 13570, 3257
A game ball flowing down between the faces of 0,34570 may be made visible to the player through the opening. In this case, the width dimension of the plurality of openings adjacent to each other is formed to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, since the opening of the opening can be made smaller than that in the case where the opening is formed in a slit shape, the first path member 13560, 32560, 33560, 34 is passed through the opening.
It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the distance between the 560, 35560 and the second path member 13570, 32570, 34570 facing each other.

In the 18th embodiment, the portion where the displacement member 18310 is engaged (engaged portion 18332).
) Has been described in the case of forming the fixing member 18320, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the engaged portion 18332 to which the displacement member 18310 is engaged may be formed on the substrate box 100 to be caulked and fixed to the fixing member 18320.

In this case, when the board box 100 is not arranged in the rear case 18300,
The displacement member 18310 cannot be placed inside the rear case 18300, and the displacement member 1
The 8310 can be made to protrude to the outside of the rear case 18300 by its own weight.

As a result, if the board box 100 is forgotten to be attached to the rear case 18300, the displacement member 18310 is hooked on the outer frame 11 when the game board 18013 is arranged on the outer frame 11 (see FIG. 164 (b)). This makes it possible for the operator to notice that the board box 100 has been forgotten to be attached.

In the 21st embodiment, the front side (arrow F direction side) of the bottom wall portion 302 of the rear case 300.
The insertion portion 21724b of the rotary unit 21700 arranged in the displacement member 310 is a recess 31 of the displacement member 310.
Although the case where the displacement member 310 and the fixing member 320 are inserted inside the 7 to prevent the engagement between the displacement member 310 and the fixing member 320 from being illegally disengaged has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the insertion portion 21724b inserted inside the recess 317 of the displacement member 310 may be formed in the substrate box 100 arranged in the fixing member 320.

In this case, the insertion portion 21724b is arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 302 via the opening formed in the fixing member 320. Further, the insertion portion 21724b is formed at a portion where a shaft for caulking and fixing to the fixing member 320 is inserted. As a result, when the bearing portion 117 of the board box 100 is cut and illegally removed from the rear case 21300, the insertion portion 21 is used.
The 724b can be left inside the recess 317 of the displacement member 310. As a result, it can be difficult to remove the fixing member 320 from the rear case 21300.

Therefore, when replacing the fixing member 320, it is necessary to correctly (cut the crimped portion) the caulked portion between the substrate box 100 and the fixing member 320. As a result, the fixing member 32
Since it is possible to make it difficult to illegally remove 0 from the back surface member 21300, it is possible to prevent the fixing member 320 from being removed and replaced with an unauthorized board box.

In the 42nd embodiment, the case where the light emitting substrate that irradiates the light is arranged on the upright portion 42060f has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the drive member arranged on the base plate 42060 is not limited to this. It may be formed as a control board for controlling the ball or as a passage for throwing a game ball.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 287. It should be noted that the first control example is for explaining the control example by changing a part of the configuration for each of the above-described embodiments, and the detailed description of the same configuration as each of the above-described embodiments will be described. Is omitted. In addition, some of the configurations used in this control example have different reference numerals for the same configurations as those in the above embodiments, but they are for explaining the invention of this control example in an easy-to-understand manner. Since the specific configuration is the same as the corresponding configuration of each of the above embodiments, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Conventionally, when a big hit is won in a special symbol lottery, a big hit game is executed, and the ball is easily won by a winning device (for example, a variable winning device) during the big hit game, so that the player can win the big hit. There is a pachinko machine 10 that allows a game to be played with the aim of playing a game. In this way, in the pachinko machine 10, when the player has a hard time winning the jackpot and the jackpot game is executed, if the ratio of the balls winning the winning device (variable winning device) is low, the player's willingness to play is reduced. There was a problem of letting them do it.

Such a problem is that when the ball flows down the game area formed on the game board 13, the ball flows down due to collision with a plurality of obstacles (for example, nails) provided on the game board 13. This is an unavoidable problem in the pachinko machine 10 because the number of balls to be won in the variable winning device 65 increases or decreases due to the change.

On the other hand, in the first control example, the pseudo attacker (attacker for directing) 165 (see FIG. 208) is driven in synchronization with the attacker (variable winning device) 65 that is opened during the jackpot game. In addition to the balls that have won the variable winning device 65, the balls that have entered the right general winning opening 163 (see FIG. 208) and the specific out opening 166 (see FIG. 208) also flow into the pseudo-attacker 165. It is composed. The pseudo-attacker 165 is configured to be easier for the player to see than the variable winning device 65.

With this configuration, when the jackpot game is started, the player executes the jackpot game while watching the ball winning the pseudo-attacker 165. Therefore, it can be made to think that more balls than the balls actually winning the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game have won the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game.

Also, among the balls fired in the right-handed game executed during the jackpot game, the balls that have not won the variable winning device 65 (by the time the variable winning device 65 is reached, the other winning (ball) openings are won ( The ball) is configured to win a prize in the pseudo-attacker 165. Therefore, when the number of balls won in the variable winning device 65 decreases, the number of balls winning (balls) in other winning (ball) openings (hereinafter referred to as winning openings, etc.) tends to increase, so that the variable winning is possible. Regardless of the increase or decrease in the number of balls won in the device 65, a predetermined number of balls can be stably won in the pseudo-attacker 165.

Further, in the first control example, the ball that has won (winned) in each winning opening, etc. (specific winning opening 65a, right general winning opening 163, specific out opening 166) wins the pseudo attacker 165. It is configured to perform a winning effect.

As a result, it is possible to execute a winning effect based on the winning of the ball to the variable winning device 65 at the timing when the ball wins the pseudo attacker 165. Therefore, the pseudo attacker 165 can be used as a real attacker (variable winning device) for the player. 65) can be made to think. The winning effect executed based on the winning of the ball to the variable winning device 65 is, for example, a winning sound notification effect for notifying the player that the ball has won the variable winning device 65, or a third prize effect. In the prize ball number display effect for displaying information (acquisition information) for showing the amount of privilege (prize ball) given to the player based on the ball winning in the variable winning device 65 in the symbol display device 81, etc. be.

Further, in this control example, in order to make the pseudo-attacker 165 win the ball that has won a prize in a plurality of different winning openings, the guiding flow path is such that the ball that has passed through each winning opening is guided above the pseudo-attacker 165. 690 (see FIG. 208) is provided, but since the distance from each winning opening to the pseudo attacker 165 is different, the order in which the ball wins in each winning opening and the order in which the ball wins in the pseudo attacker 165 are different. There is. Therefore, in the first control example, the order in which the pseudo-attacker 165 is awarded can be determined based on the type of the winning opening in which the ball has won the prize and the winning timing. Then, when the number of pseudo-attackers 165 exceeds a predetermined number (the number for which the closing condition of the variable winning device 65 is satisfied (for example, 10)) during the period in which the pseudo-attacker 165 is continuously opened, a specific winning effect (overflow effect) is achieved. Is configured to run.

In this way, in the configuration in which the ball winning in each winning opening or the like flows down the induction flow path 690, the order in which the pseudo attacker 165 is won is calculated instead of the order in which each winning opening or the like is won, and based on the calculation result. By configuring to execute a specific winning effect (overflow effect), the winning effect can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

In this control example, the above-mentioned winning effect is executed based on the detection results of the detection sensors 65s1, 65s2, 163s, 166s (see FIG. 208) for detecting that the ball has won a prize in each winning opening or the like. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated detection sensor for executing a winning effect using a ball that wins the pseudo attacker 165. Therefore, the number of detection means (sensors) attached to the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, and the design cost can be suppressed.

Next, the characteristic effect contents used in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example will be briefly described. Conventionally, the lottery right of a special symbol has a structure that can be held and stored up to a predetermined number (for example, 4), and the period from when the lottery right is held and stored until the lottery of the special symbol is actually executed. A process (so-called pre-reading process) is performed to determine (predict) the lottery result of the jackpot in advance using the information (winning information) included in the lottery right stored on hold, and the effect is based on the advance determination result. There is a pachinko machine 10 that executes (so-called look-ahead effect).

In the conventional gaming machine using such a configuration, for example, the lottery result is given to the player by changing the display mode of the identification information (so-called reserved symbol) for indicating the lottery right stored in the hold. A look-ahead effect may be executed to notify in advance. By executing such a look-ahead effect, when the display mode of the reserved symbol is changed, the jackpot may be won in the special symbol lottery corresponding to the reserved symbol, and the special symbol lottery corresponding to the reserved symbol may be won. (Special symbol lottery period executed before the corresponding reserved symbol), the player can continue to have a sense of expectation.

However, in the case of the above-mentioned look-ahead effect, if the special symbol lottery corresponding to the reserved symbol (variable reserved symbol) whose display mode is changed is executed, the display of the variable reserved symbol disappears, so that it is currently being executed. There is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to easily determine whether or not the special symbol lottery (variation) corresponds to the variable reserved symbol. On the other hand, in this control example, it is configured to display the running display mode based on the variable display mode of the reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol lottery (variation) currently being executed. This makes it possible for the player to easily determine whether or not the special symbol lottery (variation) being executed corresponds to the variable reserved symbol.

Further, in the case of configuring to notify a plurality of types of effect results in the look-ahead effect of notifying the player of the lottery result of the special symbol in advance by changing the display mode of the reserved symbol as described above. (For example, in the case of configuring to notify a plurality of effect results having different expectations of winning a big hit), it is necessary to make the variable display mode different in an easy-to-understand manner so that each effect result can be easily identified. Therefore, there was a problem that it was difficult to notify a lot of information in advance.

On the other hand, in this control example, in addition to the pre-reading effect described above, an effect of changing the display mode of the effect device (treasure box accessory 750 (see FIG. 210)) provided separately from the third symbol display device 81 is executed. It is configured as follows. Then, among the plurality of information acquired by the look-ahead process, the information to be notified in advance to the player by changing the display mode of the reserved symbol (for example, the advance look-ahead information for showing the result of determining whether the jackpot is successful or not) and the treasure box role. By changing the display mode of the object 750, the information previously notified to the player (for example, the pre-reading information for indicating the type of the winning jackpot) is configured to be different.

In this way, by providing a plurality of objects to be directed to be used for the look-ahead effect and different types of information to be previously notified by each object to be directed, it is easy to notify the player of a large amount of information in advance. be able to. In addition, in this control example, since an effect device other than the third symbol display device 81 is used, it is possible to continuously easily notify the effect result of the look-ahead effect.

In addition, conventionally, a variable effect is executed in which the identification information (third symbol) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is variablely displayed (dynamically displayed) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and then stopped and displayed. There is something to make. According to such a pachinko machine 10, it is possible to predict whether or not the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit depending on the variation effect mode of the third symbol, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. rice field. However, since the variation effect mode of the third symbol is determined only based on the lottery result of the special symbol, the lottery result of the special symbol is determined for the player who plays the game for a long time according to the variation effect mode to be executed. There was a problem that it could be easily identified.

In addition, in order to execute a specific variation effect mode (stop display mode of the third symbol) indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a lottery result (for example, a big hit) that is advantageous to the player, the special symbol lottery is performed. Since the condition is that the result is a lottery result (for example, a big hit) that is advantageous to the player, there is a problem that the frequency of executing the variable effect mode is low.

On the other hand, in the first control example, the lottery result of a symbol other than the special symbol (for example, a normal symbol) can be notified by using the variation effect mode of the third symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol. It is configured to be possible. With this configuration, it is possible to set the variation effect mode of the third symbol based on information other than the lottery result of the special symbol (for example, the lottery result of the normal symbol). It is possible to prevent the lottery result of the special symbol from being easily determined.

Further, since the specific variation effect mode can be executed even when the lottery result of the normal symbol is a lottery result (for example, a hit) that is advantageous to the player, the execution frequency of the specific variation effect mode can be increased. ..

Further, in the first control example, in order to show the lottery result of the normal symbol by using the variation effect set based on the fluctuation time (special symbol fluctuation time) set based on the lottery result of the special symbol, it is normal. The third symbol is temporarily stopped (actually, it is moving (swinging), but it is almost stopped) at the timing when the fluctuation time of the symbol elapses. As a result, it is possible to make it appear as if the third symbol is stopped and displayed in accordance with the stop timing of the normal symbol.

In addition, in this control example, when the third symbol is temporarily stopped at the stop timing of the normal symbol during the variation effect corresponding to the variation time (special symbol variation time) set based on the lottery result of the special symbol. In addition, the production mode of the remaining time effect executed during the remaining time is configured to be different based on the remaining time from the temporary stop timing (the time from the temporary stop timing until the special symbol is stopped and displayed). For example, if the remaining time is less than 3 seconds, the temporary stop display of the 3rd symbol is continued, and if the remaining time is 3 seconds or more, the 3rd symbol being temporarily stopped is displayed. It is configured to display fluctuations again.

As a result, even though the remaining time is short (for example, 0.5 seconds), the third symbol during temporary stop is changed again, and it is possible to prevent the player from performing an effect that is difficult for the player to understand. Can be done. Further, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game because the temporary stop display is continued even though the remaining time is long (for example, 10 seconds).

Further, in the first control example, the length of the remaining time is roughly divided (for example, divided into 3 second intervals), and the revariation effect corresponding to the division is executed. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the re-variation effect corresponding to the length of the remaining time. In addition, the effect mode that can be set as the re-variation effect is that the effect period is preset at 3 second intervals such as 3 seconds, 6 seconds, 9 seconds, and so on, and after setting the effect period corresponding to the remaining time. In order to correspond to the detailed remaining time, it is configured to execute the re-variation effect in which the first half of the effect mode is deleted for a predetermined time.

With this configuration, it is possible to execute a re-variation effect corresponding to the remaining time randomly calculated using a preset effect period at regular intervals, so that the effect data used for re-variation can be executed. The capacity can be reduced. Although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, an effect in which the third symbol swings is set as the first half portion (for one second) of the effect mode preset in correspondence with the remaining time. .. As a result, even if a part of the first half of the effect mode is deleted corresponding to the actual remaining time, it is possible to suppress the execution of the effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, in this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is other than the big hit, and the player wins the small hit, which is the lottery result that can give the player a smaller amount of privilege (prize ball) than the big hit game. Also, the above-mentioned specific variation effect is configured to be executed.

Then, as the small hit game executed when the small hit is won, the winning game executed in the initial period (the first round game period) of the big hit game executed when the above-mentioned big hit is won. It is configured so that the same game content is executed.

As a result, even if the winning game is executed after the specific fluctuation effect is executed, at that time, the player is asked whether the winning game this time is a winning game based on the big hit winning or a winning game based on the small winning winning. Since it can be difficult to understand, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation for winning a big hit for a long period of time.

In this first control example, the player determines whether the running hit game is a big hit game or a small hit game by using a period in which the same game content is executed in the big hit game and the small hit game. It is configured to execute a notification effect for notifying the user. With such a configuration, information that is difficult to discriminate only by the content of the winning game can be notified by the effect, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Conventionally, as an effect (notice effect) for suggesting a lottery result of a special symbol to a player, an effect (operation effect) of displaying the advance notice content by having the player operate an operation means (frame button 22) is executed. There is something to do. When executing such an operation effect, a period (operation valid period) in which the operation of the operation means can be effectively determined is set, and a notice content is displayed when the operation means is operated within the operation valid period. It is generally configured to do so. Then, in order to notify the player that the above-mentioned operation validity period is set, for example, a display mode (button display) imitating the operation means and a display mode (for example, a time gauge display) indicating the operation validity period are displayed. ) Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, in one operation effect, in order to make the player operate the operation means a plurality of times, a display mode in which a time gauge is attached to each of the plurality of button displays may be displayed.

According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, the player can grasp a plurality of notice contents by operating the operation means within the operation valid period corresponding to each button display, so that the player can understand the contents of the notice. It was possible to actively participate in the production. However, if a plurality of button displays for which the operation valid period is set are displayed at the same time and the operation for the frame button 22 is temporarily neglected, the operation valid period set individually is set. Since it becomes difficult to properly operate the operation means, there is a problem that the motivation to participate in the production is reduced while the operation validity period is set.

On the other hand, in the first control example, a plurality of operation effects having overlapping operation validity periods can be executed, and further, when the operation validity period of each operation effect satisfies a predetermined condition, each operation effect is satisfied. It is configured to execute a fusion operation effect that fuses. Specifically, when the display mode of the time gauge indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period is the same among the plurality of operation effects, the fusion operation effect is executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to have the possibility that a plurality of operation effects can be changed into one fusion operation effect, so that it is possible to leave the possibility of completing the operation effect until the end. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the motivation to participate in the operation effect from being reduced during the operation effect.

Further, some conventional pachinko machines 10 are configured so that specific notice contents are displayed even when the operating means is not operated within the operation valid period set for the operation effect. In such a pachinko machine 10, since a specific notice content can be displayed even when the player does not operate the operating means, the playing motivation of the player who could not operate the operating means within the operation valid period is reduced. It is possible to prevent this from happening. However, in such a configuration, there is a problem that the relationship between operating the operating means within the operation valid period and displaying the notice content becomes low, and the effect of the effect is reduced.

On the other hand, in the first control example, when the operation means is not operated when a predetermined period of the operation valid period elapses, the operation means is automatically operated (automatic pressing effect). It is configured to run. As a result, it is possible to strengthen the relationship between operating the operating means within the operation valid period and displaying the notice content, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

Further, in the first control example, when the player operates the operating means during the automatic pressing effect, the effect mode of the automatic pressing effect can be changed in response to the player's operation. There is. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of operating the operating means until the end of the period in which the operation valid period is set.

Here, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 used in the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. 207. FIG. 207 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 207, the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is the left side region of the game board 13 (variable display device unit 80) with respect to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 2) in the first embodiment described above. The game area formed on the left side) is different in that the through gate 67 is provided, and the other points are the same. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 207, the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is provided with a through gate 67 in the left side region, and a player can play a left-handed game (a game for causing a ball to flow down to the left side region of the game board 13). It is configured so that all the balls fired at the time of playing pass through the through gate 67. With this configuration, the player plays a left-handed game (a game for flowing the ball down to the left area of the game board 13), and the ball is won in the first winning opening 64 to draw a lottery for the first special symbol. It is possible to execute a lottery of ordinary symbols even while performing. As a result, the lottery of ordinary symbols is performed using the variable effect (special figure 1 variable effect) in which the identification information (third symbol) for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol is dynamically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The result can be shown.

The detailed contents of the special figure 1 variation effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 212, but in this first control example, the dynamic display period of the special symbol is matched with the timing when the lottery result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. During the middle (during the third symbol change), the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed (the third symbol is swung to the extent that the player thinks that the third symbol is stopped and displayed). It is composed. As a result, since the lottery result of the normal symbol can be notified using the third symbol, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

Further, in the first control example, the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) and displayed in the same winning display mode depending on whether the normal symbol is won or the special symbol is won (charge effect (charge effect). (See FIG. 212)) is configured to be executed. As a result, the player is made to determine whether the hit display mode stopped and displayed to the player is a display mode for showing the lottery result of the special symbol or a display mode for showing the lottery result of the normal symbol. It can be difficult. Therefore, it is possible to easily give a sense of expectation to the winning game executed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed.

Furthermore, since it is configured to execute the above-mentioned charge effect in either the case where the normal symbol is won or the case where the special symbol is won, the chart effect is produced only when the special symbol is won. It is possible to increase the execution frequency of the charge effect as compared with the case where is executed.

Returning to FIG. 207, the description will be continued. A game area (lower right game area) covered with a resin outer edge member 73 (73b) is formed in the right side area of the game board 13. This lower right gaming area is more transparent than the other gaming areas because it is covered with an outer edge member 73b that is transparent and has a surface treatment (for example, textured) that diffuses light. It becomes a game area that is difficult to see.

A detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 208, but in the lower right game area, a special winning device 550 having a flow path for flowing the ball and various winning openings where the ball can win is provided. Further, a discharge flow path for using the winning balls in various winning openings for a simulated effect is formed. The ball flowing down the lower right game area is configured to enter an out port (not shown) and be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, with reference to FIG. 208, the types of entry openings (winning openings) provided in the special winning device 550 and the flow paths of the game balls that have entered each entry opening will be described. The flow path (main paths SK1 to SK6) of the game ball that has flowed into the inside of the first unit 551 of the special winning device 550 has already been described in the first embodiment with reference to FIG. 22 and the like. Then, the details will be omitted. FIG. 208 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the special winning device 550. As shown in FIG. 208, a specific out opening 166 is provided on the upper right side of the front view of the special winning device 550, and a specific general winning opening 163 is provided on the left side of the front view with respect to the specific out opening 166. The specific general winning opening 163 corresponds to the second receiving unit 562 (see FIG. 22) in the above-mentioned explanation of the first embodiment, and in order to make the explanation easy to understand (to clarify that it is a ball entrance opening). ), The name has been changed. Similarly, the specific out port 166 is a name change of the third receiving unit 563 (see FIG. 22) in the above-described description of the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 208, the specific general winning opening 163 and the out opening 166 are provided with a general winning sensor 163s and an out entering sensor 166s capable of detecting the entry of a game ball. The specific general winning opening 163 is configured as a winning opening in which three prize balls are given to the winning (winning) of one game ball, and the winning of the game ball is detected by the general winning sensor 163s. Three prize balls will be paid out each time. On the other hand, the specific out port 166 is configured as an entry port in which a prize ball is not given even if a game ball enters (simply discharges the entered game ball to the outside), and an out entry sensor. Even if the entry of the game ball is detected by 166s, the prize ball is not paid out.

Further, as shown in FIG. 208, a variable winning device 65 having a specific winning opening 65a into which a game ball can be entered is provided in a substantially central portion of the special winning device 550. The variable winning device 65 is composed of a first variable plate 583b, a first receiving recess 574a, and a second receiving recess 574b in the description of the first embodiment described above, and is a winning opening (ball entry opening). In order to clarify a certain point, in the description of the first control example, the first variable plate 583b is referred to as an opening / closing door 65f1, and the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b are simply referred to as a specific winning opening 65a. It is called. When a big hit is achieved by a big hit lottery, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened a predetermined number of times (6 to 16 rounds) (displaced from the state of being overhanging to the front side to the state of being retracted to the back side) to the specific winning opening 65a. And the game ball becomes ready to enter.

As shown in FIG. 208, the specific winning openings 65a are provided with specific winning sensors 65s1, 65s2 (detection devices SE3 and SE4 in the description of the first embodiment) capable of detecting the entry of a game ball, respectively. ing. The specific winning opening 65a is configured as a winning opening in which 15 prize balls are given to the winning (winning) of one game ball, and the winning of the game ball is performed by the specific winning sensors 65s1 and 65s2. Each time it is detected, 15 prize balls will be paid out. In each round of the jackpot, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 game balls are won) (the opening / closing door 65f1 retracts to the back side), so that the jackpot is hit. By launching a game ball aiming at the specific winning opening 65a (launching the game ball toward the flow path on the right side of the front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80), a large amount of prize balls are paid out. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game of the jackpot.

Further, as shown in FIG. 208, in the lower left of the variable winning device 65 in the special winning device 550, there is a second ball entry port (second winning opening) 640 (third receiving recess 575a in the description of the first embodiment, a third. 4 Receiving recess 575b (see FIG. 22) and a first electric accessory 640a (second variable member 584b in the description of the first embodiment) for opening and closing the second ball entry port (second winning opening) 640 are provided. ing. When a game ball enters the second entrance 640, a big hit lottery (lottery of a special symbol) is executed, and when a big hit is made, a big hit game in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened and closed a plurality of times is executed. Further, as described above, the first electric accessory 640a is in the operating state for a predetermined time when it is hit by a lottery of a normal symbol executed based on the passage of the game ball through the first through gate 66. ..

The game ball that has entered the specific general winning opening 163 (second receiving section 562) rolls the second rolling section 577 (see FIG. 20) to the back side of the front view (the back side of the base plate 60). Is guided to. The game ball guided to the back side of the front view flows into the guidance flow path 690 shown by the broken line in FIG. 208. Similarly, the game ball that has entered the specific out port 166 is guided to the back surface side of the base plate 60 by rolling the third rolling portion 578 (see FIG. 20), and flows into the guidance flow path 690. do. Further, the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a rolls on the auxiliary path HK1 (see FIG. 22) and is guided to the back surface side of the base plate 60 and flows into the guidance flow path 690. That is, the game ball that has entered the specific general winning opening 163, the game ball that has entered the specific out opening 166, and the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a all have an induction flow path 690. Flow down.

As shown in FIG. 208, the induction flow path 690 entered the general throwing unit 690a for flowing the game ball that entered the specific general winning opening 163 into the guidance flow path 690 and the specific out opening 166. An out-throwing unit 690b for flowing a game ball into the guidance flow path 690, a specific ball-throwing unit 690c for flowing a game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a into the guidance flow path 690, and a specific flow path 690. It is provided at the most downstream, and is composed of at least a merging path 690d for flowing (merging) the game ball from the back surface side of the base plate 60 to the effect flow path 691 (secondary path HK3 in the description of the first embodiment). Has been done. The game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path 690 via any of the general throwing section 690a, the out throwing section 690b, and the specific throwing section 690c is guided to the directing flow path 691 via the merging path 690d. .. The game ball guided to the effect flow path 691 falls from the discharge portion 691a at the lower end of the effect flow path 691 toward the pseudo attacker 165 (decorative unit 750 in the description of the first embodiment, see FIG. 91). do. This pseudo-attacker 165 has a pseudo-winning opening 165a in which a game ball can enter, an open state in which a game ball can enter the pseudo-winning opening 165a, and a pseudo-winning opening 165a cannot be entered. It is composed of at least a pseudo door 165f1 (opening / closing member 870 in the description of the first embodiment, see FIG. 104 (b)) which is variably configured to be in a closed state. Further, on the front side of the pseudo-attacker 165, an out port 167 for discharging the game ball that has reached the pseudo-attacker 165 to the outside with the pseudo-door 165f1 closed (winning in the description of the first embodiment). The mouth 761a) is arranged.

Although the details will be described later, in this first control example, the specific winning opening 65a is opened and closed and the pseudo door 165f1 of the pseudo attacker 165 is opened and closed in each round of the jackpot game. Then, in the first control example, the effect of suggesting the payout of the prize ball (pseudo-winning effect) is executed according to the timing of entering the game ball with respect to the pseudo-winning opening 165a. In other words, instead of executing the effect of notifying the payout of the prize ball based on the detection of the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a, the pseudo winning effect is performed according to the timing of entering the pseudo winning opening 165a. It is configured to be executed. That is, by using a pseudo-attacker 165, which is easier to see than the specific winning opening 65a covered by the first path member 560, it is suggested whether or not the prize ball is paid out, so that the prize ball is hit at the jackpot. It is possible to make the player understand the opportunity to be paid out more clearly.

After the ball is detected by any of the specific winning sensors 65s1 and 65s2, the detected game ball flows down the guidance flow path 690 and the effect flow path 691 and enters the pseudo winning opening 165a. It takes about 0.5 seconds to complete the process. Therefore, in the first control example, the timing at which the pseudo winning opening 165a is opened and the timing at which the pseudo winning opening 165a is closed are set to 0. It is configured to be delayed for 5 seconds. As a result, all the game balls that have won (winned) in the specific winning opening 65a can be entered into the pseudo winning opening 165a.

Further, in the first control example, as described above, the game ball that has entered the specific general winning opening 163 and the specific out opening 166 is also configured to be reachable to the pseudo attacker 165. From the appearance of the player, it is difficult to distinguish which entry port the ball entered and reached the pseudo attacker 165. Therefore, regardless of the type of entry opening, the pseudo winning opening 165a is reached. It is configured to execute a pseudo-winning effect for all the winning balls. As a result, the more the game balls enter the specific general winning opening 163 and the specific out opening 166 during the round period of the jackpot, the more times the pseudo winning effect is executed, so that the prize is larger than the actual one. You can make the illusion that you have won the ball. Therefore, the satisfaction of the player in the jackpot game can be further increased. As described above, each round of the jackpot ends when the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a 10 times. On the other hand, for the pseudo winning opening 165a, in addition to the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a, the game ball that has entered the specific general winning opening 163 or the specific out opening 166 can also enter. Therefore, in each round of the jackpot, 10 or more game balls can easily enter the pseudo winning opening 165a. Therefore, in each round of the jackpot, it is possible to make the player feel as if more game balls than usual have won the specific winning opening 65a, which makes the player feel more satisfied. be able to. Here, in the first control example, the mode of the pseudo winning effect is determined by whether or not the number of balls entered into the pseudo winning opening 165a during the opening period of the pseudo door 165f1 exceeds the specified number of times (10 times). (Pseudo winning sound) is configured to be different. As a result, when the pseudo winning sound changes, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a (over winning) in excess of the specified number. You can have a greater sense of satisfaction.

Further, in the first control example, whether or not the pseudo winning effect can be executed and the execution timing are the timings at which the balls entering each entry opening (specific general winning opening 163, specific out opening 166, specific winning opening 65a) are detected. It is configured to be determined by. That is, at the timing when the entry into each entry port is detected, it is predicted whether or not the timing at which the game ball in which the entry is detected reaches the pseudo attacker 165 is during the opening period of the pseudo door 165f1. Therefore, when the opening period is in progress (that is, when the game ball that has detected the entry is predicted to enter the pseudo winning opening 165a during the opening period of the pseudo door 165f1), it is decided to execute the pseudo winning effect. It is configured to be. In other words, the pseudo-winning opening 165a is not provided with any configuration for detecting the entry of a game ball, and whether or not the pseudo-winning effect can be executed only by the winning sensor originally provided in each entry opening. And it is configured to determine the execution timing. With this configuration, the number of sensors for detecting incoming balls can be reduced, so that the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the number of parts.

In this first control example, it takes about 1.5 seconds from the detection of the ball entering the specific general winning opening 163 to the time when the game ball in which the ball is detected reaches the pseudo-attacker 165. It takes about 1 second from the detection of the ball entering the specific out port 166 until the game ball in which the ball is detected reaches the pseudo attacker 165, and the specific winning opening 65a It takes about 0.5 seconds from the detection of the ball entering the ball to the game ball in which the ball is detected reaches the pseudo-attacker 165. Therefore, when a ball entering the specific general winning opening 163 is detected, it is determined (predicted) whether or not the pseudo door 165f1 is opened after 1.5 seconds, and the pseudo door 165f1 is opened. When it is predicted that (the game ball that has detected the winning ball will enter the pseudo winning opening 165a), the pseudo winning effect is set to be executed 1.5 seconds later. Similarly, when the ball entering the specific out port 166 is detected, it is determined (predicted) whether or not the pseudo door 165f1 is opened after 1 second, and the pseudo door 165f1 is opened (predicted). When it is predicted that the game ball that has detected the entry will enter the pseudo-winning opening 165a), the pseudo-winning effect is set to be executed one second later. When a ball entering the specific winning opening 65a is detected, it is determined (predicted) whether or not the pseudo door 165f1 is opened after 0.5 seconds, and the pseudo door 165f1 is opened (ball entry). When it is predicted that the detected game ball will enter the pseudo winning opening 165a), the pseudo winning effect is set to be executed 0.5 seconds later. As a result, the pseudo-winning effect can be executed at the timing when the game ball enters the pseudo-winning opening 165a, so that the prize ball can be more reliably entered into the pseudo-attacker 165 at the jackpot. It is possible to make the player feel as if it was given. Therefore, in the big hit, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the game ball enters the pseudo-attacker 165 and play the game, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the first embodiment, not only the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a, but also the game ball that has entered the specific general winning opening 163 and the specific out opening 166 can reach the pseudo-attacker 165. However, it is not limited to this. For example, a game ball that has entered at least one of the specific general winning opening 163 and the specific out opening 166 may be configured so as not to reach the pseudo attacker 165. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the difference between the number of prize balls estimated from the number of pseudo-winning effects and the number of prize balls actually paid out.

In the first embodiment, the specific winning opening 65a is provided on the downstream side of the specific general winning opening 163 and the specific out opening 166, but the arrangement of each entry opening may be arbitrarily determined.

Returning to FIG. 207, the description will be continued. A center frame 86 is arranged in a variable display device unit 80 provided in a substantially central portion of the game board 13 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86. Further, the center frame 86 projects toward the front surface side of the game board 13 and surrounds the periphery of the third symbol display device 81 to prevent the game ball from coming into contact with the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, left, middle, and right 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed (variable) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed). The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment displays the gaming state according to the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37a and 37b. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 209. FIG. 209 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in this control example, and FIG. 209 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in this control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the display contents schematically. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, there are three symbols, left, middle, and right. The symbol column is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 209 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, and the upper two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The lower 1/3 is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the advance notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The third symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is composed of 10 types of main symbols imitating the numbers "0" to "9". .. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, "777"), and variable display is performed. It is configured so that a big hit occurs after the fluctuation display is finished. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

Specifically, in the main display area Dm, three symbol rows L1, L2, and L3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol of each symbol row is stopped and displayed on the effective line V1. If the third symbol is aligned and stopped on the effective line V1 with a combination of jackpot symbols (in the first control example, the same combination of main symbols), a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

The mode of variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, and each symbol. The number of symbols in the column can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbol that is variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and a symbol that combines an image such as a figure or a character and a number may be configured as the third symbol. Further, the area in which the third symbol is variablely displayed may be varied. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol may be changed. By making the size smaller or moving the variable display area to a position that is difficult for the player to see (for example, the corner of the display screen), it is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the third symbol is changed. You may try to do it. Further, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again during the period when the special symbol is fluctuating.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the second special symbol are the same (to the extent that it is difficult for the player to identify). However, the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be different so as to correspond to the type of special symbol that is changing.

In addition, in the first control example, the specific symbol can be stopped and displayed as the third symbol which is variablely displayed in the middle symbol row Z2. The details of this specific symbol will be described later with reference to FIG. 212, but it is configured in a display mode in which identification information (for example, “charge”) different from the numbers is attached, and this specific symbol is on the effective line V1. By displaying a stop on the screen, it is possible to notify that the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result.

In this control example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, for example, when the third symbol showing the same number in the left symbol row L1 and the right symbol row L3 is stopped and displayed, the changing middle symbol row L2 is specified. It is configured so that a specific symbol is displayed by interrupting a place (for example, a place between the numbers "0" and "9"). As a result, since the specific symbol is suddenly displayed after the variation display of the third symbol has elapsed for a predetermined period, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected variation effect.

The conditions for displaying the specific symbol may be other than the above-mentioned conditions. For example, the numbers indicated by the third symbol stopped and displayed in the left symbol row L1 and the right symbol row L3 are a predetermined combination. It may be a condition, or it may be a condition that the player operates the operating means during the variable display of the third symbol. Further, it may be a condition that is established based on the lottery result of the special symbol. In addition, a variation effect in which the specific symbol is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the variation display of the third symbol may be set in advance at the time of setting the variation effect (at the start of the variation).

Further, when displaying a specific symbol, a method other than the method of interrupting and displaying the symbol string set in advance may be used, and for example, it may be replaced with one third symbol preset in the symbol string. good. In this case, for example, among the third symbols set in the middle symbol row L2, the combination of the third symbols that indicates the jackpot winning of the special symbol when the specific third symbol is stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed. If it is in the state of being reached, that is, in the reach state, it may be configured to display the specific symbol by replacing it with the third symbol set before and after the specific third symbol. As a result, the lottery result that is advantageous to the player is shown regardless of which of the plurality of consecutive third symbols is stopped and displayed, so that the player can pay attention to the variable effect while having a sense of expectation. ..

In this control example, as the lottery result of the special symbol, three types of "big hit", "small hit", and "missing" can be set as the lottery result of the special symbol. It is configured so that one of the multiple jackpot types having different contents of the jackpot game to be executed and the game state set after the jackpot game is set is set. Then, the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is configured to suggest (notify) the lottery result of the special symbol and the jackpot type at the time of winning the jackpot.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit D" in which the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player is set, one of the main symbols of "3,7", which is an odd number, is doublet. The variable display is performed, which is displayed as a stop. Further, in the case of "big hit A", "big hit B", "big hit C", and "big hit E", variable display is performed in which any one of the main symbols of "0 to 9" is aligned. Further, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "small hit", the chance eye composed of the combination of "341" is displayed. It should be noted that this combination of chances is not selected when the lottery result is out of order. In the present embodiment, the chance eye is configured to be displayed by a combination of a specific third symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a special symbol (for example, a golden fish symbol) different from the normal third symbol from 0 to 9 is displayed. ) May be displayed in one or a plurality of combinations, or characters such as "chance" may be displayed for notification.

The sub-display area Ds is divided into two small areas, and on the display screen capable of executing the variable display of the special symbol, information for showing the winning information of the special symbol currently being executed in the small area Ds1 (execution). Information for indicating the winning information of the special symbol (special figure 1 first reserved symbol m1 to special figure 1 4th reserved symbol m4, special figure 2) in which the middle symbol m0) is displayed and is stored in the small area Ds2. The first reserved symbol m5 to the special figure 2 the fourth reserved symbol m8) are displayed. Further, the information (contents) displayed in the sub-display area Ds is configured to be switched depending on the game state. For example, if the jackpot game is in progress, a guidance display mode for guiding the game content during the jackpot game. Is displayed, and even during the variation display of the third symbol, if the variation effect in which the expectation of winning the jackpot is set to be high is executed, the jackpot expectation of the variation effect is given to the player. The display mode for showing is displayed. Further, when the variation effect is executed using the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the sub-display area Ds is configured to be erased.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 209 (b). As shown in FIG. 209 (b), in the upper left of the front view in the main display area Dm, there is a special figure 1 display area Dm1a in which the fourth symbol is variablely displayed in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol, and a second special. A special figure 2 display area Dm1b for variable display of the fourth symbol in conjunction with the variable display of the symbol is formed, and variable display is performed in conjunction with the variable display of the normal symbol in the upper right of the front view in the main display area Dm. The normal map display area Dm2 is configured to be stopped and displayed.

In the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 209 (b), the special figure 1 display area Dm1a, the special figure 2 display area Dm1b, and the normal figure display area Dm2 are shown in a size that can be visually recognized by the player. In reality, it is formed in a size that is difficult for the player to see. With this configuration, the player can be made to pay attention to the variation effect of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm.

Further, when an effect using the entire display screen is executed as a variation effect of the third symbol, or a movable accessory for effect provided in the vicinity of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a lower displacement member 440 (see FIG. 9). )) Is movable to cover the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the size of the display area of the special figure 1 display area Dm1a, the special figure 2 display area Dm1b, and the normal figure display area Dm2 is reduced. It may be made to change, the display position may be changed, or it may be temporarily hidden. As a result, it is possible to provide a powerful production without discomfort.

Further, instead of the special figure 1 display area Dm1a, the special figure 2 display area Dm1b, and the normal figure display area Dm2, the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol are interlocked with the variable display outside the third symbol display device 81. The fourth symbol to be dynamically displayed may be displayed. In this case, it is preferable to provide the LED for the fourth symbol in the same place as the decorative LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 10 so as to correspond to each symbol. As a result, it is possible to execute the dynamic display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the variable display of each symbol, which is difficult for the player to understand.

<Regarding the production content in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 210 to 218, the contents of various effects executed in the first control example will be described. First, a look-ahead effect using a reserved symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with reference to FIGS. 210 and 211 and a treasure box accessory 750 which is an effect accessory provided outside the third symbol display device. Will be explained.

In this first control example, when a ball enters the special symbol start opening (first entry port 64, second entry opening 640) during the variable display of the special symbol, the lottery right (ball is) of the special symbol. The right to execute a lottery of special symbols using the values (winning information) of various counters acquired at the time of entering the ball) is stored (held storage) up to a predetermined number (4 for each special symbol). It is configured. Then, as a display mode for indicating the number of lottery rights stored on hold, the reserved symbols are displayed in the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81.

Further, the content of the winning information stored on hold is determined in advance before the special symbol lottery is actually executed, and based on the determination result, the display mode of the reserved symbol and the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 are determined. It is configured to execute a variable effect (look-ahead effect).

When this look-ahead effect is executed, the display mode of the reserved symbol displayed in the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Then, when the special symbol lottery corresponding to the reserved symbol having a variable display mode is executed, as shown in FIG. 210 (a), the running symbol is executed in the display mode corresponding to the reserved symbol having a variable display mode. m0 is displayed in the small area Ds1. That is, the running symbol m0 displayed in the small area Ds1 notifies the player of the display mode of the reserved symbol changed by the look-ahead effect even while the special symbol change based on the reserved symbol is being executed. It is configured so that it can be done.

In addition, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 211 (b), the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 can be changed in addition to the reserved symbol by the look-ahead effect. Further, even when executing a look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the reserved symbol for the same winning information and a look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750, the result of the look-ahead effect. Is configured to be different.

According to the example shown in FIG. 210, it is shown that there is a high expectation that the running symbol m0 will win the jackpot during the variable display of the special symbol whose lottery result is the jackpot D (16 round jackpot). By displaying the "green" display mode (in FIG. 210 (a), the display mode of the checkered pattern), it is suggested to the player that the special symbol variation during execution may be a jackpot variation. Then, the treasure box accessory 750 is displayed in a "red" display mode (in FIG. 210 (b), a diagonal line pattern display mode) indicating that the jackpot type is a jackpot D and the degree of expectation is high.

Further, according to the example shown in FIG. 211, it is highly expected that the running symbol m0 will win the jackpot while the lottery result is the jackpot A (6 round jackpot) and the variable display of the special symbol is displayed. By displaying the "green" display mode (display mode of the checkered pattern in FIG. 211 (a)), it is suggested to the player that the special symbol variation during execution may be a jackpot variation. Then, the treasure box accessory 750 is displayed with a "green" display mode (in FIG. 211 (b), a grid pattern display mode) indicating that the jackpot type is the jackpot A and the degree of expectation is high.

That is, in the first control example, the pre-reading effect that changes the display mode of the reserved symbol mainly sets the pre-reading effect mode based on the information indicating the winning / failing determination result of the jackpot among the target winning information. The look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 is configured to mainly set the effect mode of the look-ahead effect based on the information indicating the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won among the target winning information. ing.

As a result, the player can comprehensively determine the display mode of a plurality of objects to be displayed whose display mode is changed by the look-ahead effect, and predict the lottery result of the special symbol based on the target winning information. You will watch the production carefully. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 210 and 211, the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 is, at the latest, that a part of the third symbol that is variablely displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed. Is also configured so that the look-ahead effect is executed so that it can be changed before. That is, as described above, the numbers of the third symbol and the jackpot type are related, and when the jackpot is actually hit, each third symbol is stopped in a predetermined combination (for example, doublet). Since the numbers of the 3rd symbol are displayed, the numbers of the 3rd symbol more directly suggest the result (big hit type) of this special symbol lottery to the player. The display mode of the object 750 is changed.

With this configuration, the lottery result of the special symbol can be suggested to the player in order, and the various effects to be executed can be made interested until the end.

In this control example, when the look-ahead effect is executed, the display mode of the reserved symbol or the treasure box accessory 750 is configured to be changed to a display mode showing the effect result of the look-ahead effect. The display mode may be changed to show the effect result of the above, and for example, the display mode may be changed stepwise with the effect result of the look-ahead effect as the final stage. In this case, it is preferable to configure the effect result of the look-ahead effect so that it can be set in a plurality of stages according to the size of the privilege given to the player. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the production while expecting that the display mode can be changed more.

Further, it is configured to make the determination of whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the reserved symbol and the determination of whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750. Therefore, it is possible to understand at what timing and which display mode of the object to be directed changes during the period from when the prize information is reserved and stored until the change of the special symbol corresponding to the prize information is started. Since it can be made difficult, even if the effect result of the look-ahead effect is already displayed, it is possible to expect that the display mode will be further changed.

As described above, in this control example, as the look-ahead effect, the display mode of a plurality of objects to be produced can be randomly and variably displayed, but the display mode is variably displayed as the look-ahead effect. The order of the objects may be predetermined. As a result, it is possible to clearly inform the player which object is to be produced whose display mode can be changed next. Therefore, it can be easily determined that the display mode has changed.

Further, in the case of randomly changing the display mode of a plurality of objects to be directed as in this control example, which display mode of the object to be directed changes immediately before the timing when the display mode actually changes. The same effect can be achieved by configuring to notify.

Further, in this control example, the timing for variably displaying the display mode of the object to be produced is set at random, but the display mode may be changed at a predetermined specific timing, or the game may be played. The display mode may be changed based on the operation of the operating means by a person.

Further, in this control example, by changing the display mode of the reserved symbol, the winning information that is the target of the pre-reading effect of this time is notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, and the target winning information is difficult to understand. It is configured to execute a look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of. As a result, for example, when the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 is changed before the display mode of the reserved symbol, the player can enjoy predicting which winning information the pre-reading effect is being executed. Can be provided.

In this control example, the display mode of the reserved symbol corresponding to the winning information that is the target of the look-ahead effect is changed. It may be configured to make it. As a result, even when the look-ahead effect using the reserved symbol is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which reserved symbol (winning information) the look-ahead effect is executed for. Further, in the look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750, the player may be notified of the target reserved symbol (winning information).

In addition, in this control example, as a look-ahead effect, a plurality of variable display effects are executed by using a plurality of objects to be produced for one winning information, but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of objects to be directed may be configured to execute a look-ahead effect for different winning information, for example, a look-ahead effect using a plurality of objects to be directed for one winning information. It is configured to determine whether or not to execute, and as a result of the determination, only the object to be directed that is determined not to execute the look-ahead effect is set as the object to be directed by the look-ahead effect targeting other winning information. You may. As a result, when the display mode of the plurality of objects to be produced is changed, the player may have a look-ahead effect executed for one prize information, or a plurality of executions for the plurality of prize information. It can be difficult to understand whether it is a look-ahead effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the content of the look-ahead effect from getting bored at an early stage.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 212 and 213, the contents of the charge effect for displaying the specific symbol (charge symbol) as the third symbol will be described. FIG. 212 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the charge effect, and FIG. 212 (b) shows an example of a case where the specific symbol Z4 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the charge effect. It is a schematic diagram.

This charge effect is a middle symbol row L2 (FIG. 210 (FIG. 210 (FIG. 210)) in which the middle symbol Z2 is variablely displayed when the third symbol showing the same number in the left symbol Z1 and the right symbol Z3 is stopped (that is, in the reach state). This is an effect of interrupting and displaying a specific symbol (charge symbol) Z4 in (see a)). Then, when the specific symbol Z4 is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row L2, it becomes a combination of the third symbols indicating that the special symbol has won the big hit or the small hit. Further, during this charge effect, when the normal symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, an effect of temporarily stopping the specific symbol Z4 at the stop timing is executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 212 (a), the left symbol Z1 and the right symbol Z3 are stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating "7", and the middle symbol row L2 is in variable display, that is, "7". In the reach state of ", the specific symbol Z4 is displayed in the middle symbol row L2 by interrupting the normal middle symbol row L2. In this state, the variable display mode of the fourth symbol indicating that the first special symbol is variablely displayed is executed in the special symbol 1 display area Dm1a, and the normal symbol is variablely displayed in the normal symbol display area Dm2. A variable display mode indicating that the device is displayed is displayed.

Then, when the timing at which the normal symbol is stopped and displayed is reached from the state shown in FIG. 212 (a), the specific symbol Z4 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row L2 as shown in FIG. 212 (b). .. This temporary stop display is a display state in which the specific symbol Z4 is oscillated to the extent that the player can recognize that the specific symbol Z4 has stopped, and the temporary stop display is not actually completely stopped. In this state, the variable display mode of the fourth symbol indicating that the first special symbol is variablely displayed is executed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1a, and the normal symbol is displayed in the normal symbol display area Dm2. A variable display mode indicating that the stop display has been performed is displayed. Since FIG. 212 (b) shows an example in which a normal symbol is won, the first electric accessory 640a is opened after the temporary stop of the specific symbol Z4 (after the fluctuation stop of the normal symbol). Will be done.

With this configuration, when the specific symbol Z4 stops (temporarily stops) in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the player wins a special symbol hit (big hit, small hit). It is difficult to tell whether you have won the prize or if you have won the prize. Therefore, it is possible to be interested in the game content executed after the specific symbol Z4 is stopped (temporarily stopped).

Further, since the above-mentioned charge effect (effect in which the specific symbol Z4 is stopped (temporarily stopped) is displayed) can be executed depending on whether the special symbol is won or the normal symbol is won. It is possible to increase the execution frequency of the production and enhance the production effect.

Next, since the charge effect described above is configured to be executed regardless of whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the specific symbol Z4 is stopped and displayed based on the lottery result of the special symbol. If this is the case, the player can be expected to have a lottery result (big hit) that is more advantageous to the player. For example, a big hit game executed after the specific symbol Z4 is stopped and displayed. If the game content of the game is configured so that the game content of the small hit game is completely different (for example, the attacker (variable winning device) that is opened is different), the player can obtain the lottery result of this special symbol. Since it is determined immediately, it is difficult for the player to continue to have a sense of expectation.

On the other hand, in the first control example, the initial game content of the big hit game executed after the specific symbol Z4 is stopped and displayed and the game content of the small hit game are configured to be the same. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from easily determining what the running hit game is immediately after the big hit game or the small hit game is executed. Further, using the period in which the same game content is set (common game period), an effect (roulette effect) of notifying the player of the winning result of this time is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured in.

Here, the contents of the above-mentioned roulette effect will be described with reference to FIG. 213. FIG. 213 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displayed during execution of the roulette effect, and FIG. 213 (b) displays the effect result of the roulette effect. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of a display screen.

As shown in FIG. 212 (a), when the roulette effect is executed, the character 811b imitating the boy who is the main character of the roulette effect and the lottery result (big hit or small hit) of this special symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. ) Is displayed, and a sword 811k for notifying the lottery result of a special symbol using the roulette 811c is displayed.

Since the example shown in FIG. 212 (a) is a roulette effect executed when a small hit of a special symbol is won, the display mode “triangle” indicating that the small hit is won in the special figure 1 display area Dm1a. The fourth symbol is stopped and displayed. That is, this roulette effect is executed during the small hit game.

The roulette 811c has a big hit area (area with a "circle") 811c1 indicating that the lottery result of this special symbol was a big hit, and a small hit area ("X") indicating that it was a small hit. Areas marked with ”) 811c2 are formed to have the same size, and each area is rotated and displayed to the right at a speed that allows the player to identify each area. After that, the roulette 811c is rotated and displayed at a high speed (a speed at which it is difficult for the player to identify each area), and the sword 811k is thrown toward the roulette 811c.

When the sword 811k is stuck in the roulette 811c, the rotation speed of the roulette 811c gradually decreases, and the roulette 811c is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 213 (b). In this state, the player is notified that the area where the sword 811k is stuck is the lottery result of this special symbol. Since FIG. 213 (b) shows the roulette effect (roulette effect executed during the small hit game) that is executed after winning the small hit, the effect that the sword 811k sticks into the small hit area 811c2 is executed. ..

Since the above-mentioned roulette effect is executed during the same period (common game period) between the game content of the small hit game and the game content of the big hit game, the game content of the hit game is executed during the roulette effect. It is not possible to determine the lottery result of this special symbol from. Therefore, the player who wants to know the lottery result of this special symbol as soon as possible will pay attention to the effect mode of the roulette effect being executed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the above-mentioned example, the large hit area 811c1 and the small hit area 811c2 formed in the roulette 811c are shown in the same size, but the lottery is not limited to this. It is preferable to configure the size of each area to be variable according to the result. As a result, the player can predict the lottery result of this special symbol by grasping the display mode (size of each area) of the roulette 811c at the start of the roulette effect (before the roulette 811c rotates at a high speed). Can be done. Further, in the above-mentioned example, the display mode in which the big hit area 811c1 and the small hit area 811c2 are formed one by one is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a plurality of big hit areas 811c1 and a small hit area 811c2 are formed. And may be formed alternately.

Further, in the above-mentioned example, an example of forming two types of a big hit area 811c1 and a small hit area 811c2 as a region showing a lottery result of a special symbol is shown. It may be further subdivided according to the jackpot type of the winning jackpot.

In addition, the rotation display mode of the roulette 811c, the display mode of the sword 811k, and the display mode of the character 811b may be varied to suggest the lottery result of the special symbol this time.

In the first control example, the above-mentioned roulette effect is executed when the winning game is started, and the effect result is automatically displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a hit. The roulette effect may be started based on the start of the game, and the effect result of the roulette effect may be displayed based on the ball winning the attacker that is open during the common game period. It may be configured to display the effect result of the roulette effect based on the fact that a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means during the period. As a result, the player can be enthusiastically participated in the production.

Further, in the first control example, the roulette effect is configured to be executed during the winning game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the roulette effect is configured to be executed during the change of the special symbol. Is also good. That is, for example, when the effect period of the roulette effect is 10 seconds and the effect period of the charge effect is 15 seconds, the charge effect is started 25 seconds before the change stop timing of the special symbol, and the change stop timing is 10. A variation effect corresponding to a special symbol variation may be set so that the roulette effect is executed seconds before.

In this way, when the roulette effect is configured to be executable during the variable display of the special symbol, not during the winning game, the above-mentioned roulette effect is executed even in the charge effect executed based on the winning of the normal symbol. It becomes possible. In this case, for example, when it is determined that the winning normal symbol is stopped during the fluctuation period of the special symbol, the stop timing is calculated and the roulette effect is executed 10 seconds before the calculated stop timing. (So that the specific symbol Z4 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the charge effect), the effect mode of the charge effect may be set. Further, the roulette 811c displayed in the roulette effect may be set to form a normal symbol hit area indicating a normal symbol hit in addition to the large hit area 811c1 and the small hit area 811c2. As a result, it is possible to execute the roulette effect even when the normal symbol is won, so that the execution frequency of the roulette effect can be increased.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 214 and 215, the content of the first operation effect (button fusion effect), which is one of the operation effects in which the player operates the operation means, will be described. FIG. 214 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect content at the time when the first operation effect (button fusion effect) is started, and FIG. 214 (b) is a diagram after a certain period of time has elapsed thereafter. FIG. 215 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect content, and FIG. 215 (a) shows the effect content when the player operates the operation means (frame button 22) once in the first operation effect (button fusion effect). It is a schematic diagram showing an example, and FIG. 215 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect contents after the buttons are fused in the first operation effect (button fusion effect).

Here, the content of the first operation effect (button fusion effect) will be described. In this first operation effect (button fusion effect), the player operates the operation means to display the lottery result of the special symbol this time in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Then, the operation means is operated a number of times (three times) corresponding to the number of third symbols (three in this control example) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol.

An operation valid period is set for each operation of each operating means, and if the operating means is not operated within the operation valid period, the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is not displayed. In addition, when the display mode of the time gauge displayed corresponding to the operation validity period set for the operation of each operation means satisfies a predetermined condition (when the same display mode is obtained), each operation means. A plurality of third symbols are displayed based on the operation of one operation means by fusing the operations of. As a result, even when the remaining period of the operation valid period is short, it is possible to display all the third symbols, so that the player can enthusiastically operate the operation means until the end.

As shown in FIG. 214 (a), the left display area 81a, the middle display area 81b, and the right display area 81c are formed so as to cover the left symbol row L1, the middle symbol row L2, and the right symbol row L3 during the variable display. NS. Then, the first button 822a and the time gauge t1 for indicating the operation valid period of the first button 822a are displayed in the left display area 81a, and the second button 822b and its second button are displayed in the middle display area 81b. A time gauge t2 for indicating the operation validity period of the 822b is displayed, and a third button 822c and a time gauge t3 for indicating the operation validity period of the third button 822c are displayed in the right display area 81c.

In this state, when the player operates the operating means (frame button 22), the display mode of the first button 822a is first changed to a display mode indicating that the operating means has been operated, and the left display area 81a is on the left. 3 Symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 215 (a)).

The operation valid periods corresponding to the buttons 822a to 822 are all the same length (5 seconds), and the start timings of the operation valid periods are also the same. However, in FIG. 214 (a), the operation valid period is configured to be the same. On the display screen, the remaining time displays t1a to t3a of the time gauges t1 to t3 are displayed in a display mode indicating different remaining times. Specifically, the remaining time display t1a is displayed in a display mode indicating that the remaining time is 4 seconds, and the remaining time display t2a is displayed in a display mode indicating that the remaining time is 3.5 seconds. The time display t3a is displayed in a display mode indicating that the remaining time is 5 seconds.

Further, in this control example, the moving speeds (lengths of the arrows in FIG. 214A) of the gauges of the time gauges t1 to t3 are configured to be the same. That is, in a state where the same operation valid period is set, the movement start timings (subtraction display timings) of the time gauges t1 to t3 are configured to be different.

When executing a plurality of operation effects for which the same operation validity period is set in this way, the order of the operation effects is visually displayed to the player by displaying them so that the remaining apparent time is different. It is possible to make a distinction. In addition, it is possible to make the user think that the operation means must be operated quickly according to the decrease (subtraction) of the remaining time, and the operation means can be operated enthusiastically.

Here, in the present effect in which the same operation validity period is set and the moving speeds (lengths of the arrows in FIG. 214A) of the gauges of the time gauges t1 to t3 are the same. If the movement start timings (subtraction display timings) of the time gauges t1 to t3 are different, the timing at which the remaining time becomes 0 may be different. Therefore, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 214 (b), the effect of blinking the time gauge is executed, and the remaining time is not reduced during the period when the time gauge is off (hidden). doing. As a result, it is possible to easily unify the timing at which the remaining time of each time gauge t1 to t3 becomes 0 without preparing a plurality of timing movement speeds. In this control example, the remaining time display of each time gauge t1 to t3 is set to be the same at the timing when the remaining time of the operation valid period set for each operation effect is 1 second.

In FIG. 214 (b), the remaining time t1b of the time gauge t1 indicating the operation valid period of the first button 822a is displayed in a blinking display mode (display mode shown by a broken line) indicating 2.5 seconds, and the second button 822b is displayed. The remaining time t2b of the time gauge t2 indicating the operation valid period is displayed in a blinking display mode (display mode shown by a broken line) indicating 3.5 seconds, and the remaining time t3b of the time gauge t3 indicating the operation valid period of the third button 822c is displayed. Is displayed in a display mode indicating 4.5 seconds. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 214 (b), the moving speeds of the time gauge t1 and the time gauge t2 are displayed so as to be lower than the moving speed of the time gauge t3.

When the player operates the frame button 22 once in the state shown in FIG. 214 (b), as shown in FIG. 215 (a), the left third symbol Z1 indicates “7” in the left display area 81a. Displayed in mode. Even in this state, the time gauge t2 is displayed in the blinking display mode and the time gauge t3 is displayed in the normal display mode as in FIG. 214 (b).

Then, when the predetermined period elapses in the state of FIG. 215 (a), the moving speed of the time gauge t3 is faster than the moving speed of the time gauge t2, so that the remaining time display of the time gauge t2 and the time gauge t3 becomes the same. .. When the remaining time display modes of the two time gauges t2 and t3 are the same, as shown in FIG. 215 (b), the fusion button 822d in which the second button 822b and the third button 822c are fused is displayed, and the time gauge is displayed. The fusion operation effect in which the fusion time gauge t4 in which t2 and the time gauge t3 are fused is displayed executes execution.

As described above, in this control example, the remaining time display of each time gauge t1 to t3 is set to be the same at the timing of 1 second remaining time of the operation valid period set for each operation effect. In the fusion time gauge t4, the remaining time display t4a is displayed in a display mode indicating the remaining time of 1 second. When the player operates the operating means while the fusion button 822d is displayed, the middle symbol Z2 is displayed in the middle display area 81b and the right symbol Z3 is displayed in the right display area 81c at once.

In the above-mentioned example with reference to FIGS. 214 and 215, an example is shown in which the fusion button 822d is displayed while the left symbol Z1 is already displayed, but the operation means is once performed during the first operation effect. If the remaining time of the operation valid period is 1 second without being operated, the fusion button 822d is displayed using all of the left display area 81a to the right display area 81c.

In this way, since the display area in which the fusion button 822d is displayed indicates the range of the effect (effect of displaying the third symbol) executed when the operation means is operated, the operation effect that is easy for the player to understand is provided. Can be provided.

In this control example, when the fusion operation effect is set, the fusion button 822d is displayed to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even after the fusion operation effect is set, the display screen shown in FIG. 214 (a) is continuously displayed, and the fusion operation effect is executed based on the player operating the operation means. It may be configured in. As a result, it is possible to provide a player with an unexpected effect.

Further, in this control example, the fusion operation effect is executed when the display mode indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period set for each operation effect is the same, but other conditions are satisfied. It may be configured to execute the fusion operation effect with, for example, when the operation means is operated within a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) after a plurality of operation effects are started, the fusion operation effect is executed. Alternatively, the remaining time of the operation valid period set in the plurality of operation effects may be all predetermined timing conditions (for example, the remaining time is all odd, the value of a specific digit indicating the remaining time is 0, and the remaining time is set. When the added value obtained by adding the values of each digit of the indicated numerical values satisfies 10), the fusion operation effect may be executed. As a result, it is possible to provide an unexpected operation effect.

In this control example, the case where a plurality of operation effects are executed at the same time has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the operation validity periods set for the plurality of operation effects overlap, and the start timing of each operation effect is sufficient. May be different, or the length of each operation valid period may be different.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 216 to 218, the contents of the second operation effect (automatic pressing effect) in this control example will be described. FIG. 216 is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect executed in the second operation effect, and FIG. 217 (a) schematically shows the effect content executed in the initial period (first period) of the automatic pressing effect. 217 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect executed in the intermediate period (second period) of the automatic pressing effect, and is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. 218 (a). Is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the effect executed in the final period (third period) of the automatic pressing effect.

Here, with reference to FIG. 216, the content of the automatic pressing effect in this control example will be described. In this control example, an operation valid period of 10 seconds is set as an operation effect in which the automatic pressing effect is executed, and an effect result display period of 2 seconds is set after the operation valid period elapses. Then, out of the operation valid period of 10 seconds, the first 8 seconds is set as a button operation immediate response period in which the effect result is immediately displayed based on the operation of the frame button 22 (operation means), and the rest. For 2 seconds, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 (operation means) is operated within the predetermined period at the timing when the predetermined period has elapsed, and if it is operated, the effect result is displayed. It is set as a period.

During the button operation immediate response period, the button display Z8 (see FIG. 217) corresponding to the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed, and when the button operation immediate response period elapses, as shown in FIG. 216. The automatic pressing effect is executed. This automatic pressing effect is an effect executed in the remaining 2 seconds of the operation valid period (2 seconds from the elapse of 8 seconds to the elapse of 10 seconds after the operation valid period is set), and is a detailed explanation. Will be described later with reference to FIGS. 217 and 218, but the effect that the character appearing in the main display area Dm presses the button display Z8 is executed.

In this control example, the automatic pressing effect is set by dividing it into three periods (first period, second period, and third period), and automatic effect 1 (button automatic pressing effect 1) is executed during the first period. Then, the automatic effect 2 (button automatic pressing effect 2) is executed during the second period, and the automatic effect 3 (button automatic pressing effect 3) is executed during the third period.

In the second operation effect configured in this way, for example, when the frame button 22 is operated during the button operation immediate response period (see (Example 1) in FIG. 216), the effect result display is displayed immediately after the button operation is executed. Until the end of the period, the display mode showing the effect result is displayed in the main display area Dm. Further, when the frame button 22 is operated during the first period (see (Example 2) in FIG. 216), the effect display period ends from the timing of the second period after the waiting period until the first period elapses. In the meantime, the display mode showing the effect result is displayed in the main display area Dm. Further, when the frame button 22 is operated during the third period (see (Example 3) in FIG. 216), the display mode showing the same effect result as when the operating means is not operated during the operation valid period is the main display area. It is configured to be displayed in Dm.

In this way, by setting the period during which the automatic pressing effect is being executed as the button operation periodic response period, even if the frame button 22 is operated during the automatic pressing effect, the executing effect is suddenly interrupted. It is possible to suppress the execution of an effect having a sense of incongruity, and it is possible to cancel the automatic pressing effect by operating the frame button 22. Therefore, the player can be enthusiastically participated in the operation effect.

Further, during the waiting period generated when the frame button 22 during the execution of the automatic pressing effect is operated, the automatic pressing effect is continuously executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, but the sound is produced. It is configured to set an effect mode indicating that the light emitting means is in the waiting period. As a result, it is possible to reliably notify the player that the frame button 22 has been operated.

Here, the contents of the effect during the automatic pressing effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 217 and 218. As shown in FIG. 217 (a), when the automatic pressing effect is executed and the button automatic pressing effect 1 is executed, a character 811a imitating a bird appears in the main display area Dm and land on the button display Z8. The production is executed. In this state, it is shown that the remaining time display t5a of the time gauge t5 indicating the operation valid period of the button display Z8 is 2 seconds (first period).

Then, when the remaining time of the operation valid period reaches 1.5 seconds (second period), the button automatic pressing effect 2 shown in FIG. 217 (b) is executed. In this button automatic pressing effect 2, the effect that the character 811a rides on the button display Z8 and looks around is executed. In this state, it is shown that the remaining time display t5b of the time gauge t5 indicating the operation valid period of the button display Z8 is 1.5 seconds (second period). Next, when the remaining time of the operation valid period reaches 1 second (third period), the button automatic pressing effect 3 shown in FIG. 218 is executed. In this button automatic pressing effect 3, the effect that the character 811a on the button display Z8 presses the button is executed.

As described above, in this control example, the character 811a appears as an automatic pressing effect, the effect of pressing the button is executed, and the operation result display period is set at the timing when the automatic pressing effect is completed (the timing when the operation valid period has elapsed). Since the setting and the effect result of the operation effect are displayed, it is possible to give the player a relationship between the operation effect and the effect result.

Further, when the frame button 22 is operated during the automatic pressing effect, the effect result display is executed at the timing when the currently set period (first period to third period) has elapsed. However, in this case, the start mode of the effect result display (the effect mode executed for 0.5 seconds after the start) is different depending on the period during which the frame button 22 is operated. Specifically, when the frame button 22 is operated during the first period, an effect mode is set in which the character 811a flying in the sky falls and presses the button display Z8, and the frame button is set during the second period. When 22 is pressed, another character imitating a bird rides on the button display Z8, and the effect mode in which the button display Z8 is pressed by the weight is set.

With this configuration, it is possible to display the effect result without changing the effect mode of the automatic pressing effect based on the operation of the frame button 22 and without giving a sense of discomfort. In this control example, the effect mode of the automatic pressing effect executed in each period is configured not to be changed depending on whether or not the frame button 22 is operated. It may be configured to change only an easy element (for example, changing a color or adding a comment), and in this case, it is preferable to change the effect content only when the effect result is advantageous to the player. .. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of operating the frame button 22 during the automatic pressing effect, so that the motivation for playing can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 219, the effect content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165 will be described. FIG. 219 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display screen at the time when a ball wins a prize in the variable winning device 65 during a jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165, and FIG. 219 (b) is a pseudo diagram. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen at the time when a ball wins a prize in the attacker 165.

As shown in FIG. 219 (a), when the variable winning device 65 provided in the special winning device 550 wins the jackpot (big hit D) in which the opening operation is performed and the jackpot game is executed, the third symbol display device is executed. At 81, the screen during the jackpot game is displayed. On this jackpot gaming screen, a jackpot display 830 indicating that a jackpot game is in progress is displayed in the main display area Dm, and acquisition information 831 for indicating the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the small area Ds1 and the small area Ds2 are integrated, and a comment "Please hit right" indicating the game method during the big hit game is displayed.

In FIG. 219 (a), a ball fired by a right-handed game wins a prize in a specific winning opening 65a (a winning opening in which the ball can be won by opening the variable winning device 65) in the special winning device 550. Although the display content is shown, the acquisition information 831 is displayed in a state where the number of prize balls given based on the winning of the balls in the specific winning opening 65a is not added.

Then, as shown in FIG. 219 (b), the ball winning the specific winning opening 65a in the state shown in FIG. 219 (a) at the timing when the ball winning the special winning opening 65a wins the pseudo attacker 165. It is configured so that the number of prize balls given based on the above is added. Specifically, when the specific winning sensor 65s1, 65s2 (see FIG. 208) detects that the ball has won in the specific winning opening 65a, the timing 0.5 seconds have passed from that point, that is, the specific winning opening 65a. The display mode indicating that the prize ball has been given is displayed at the timing when the period (0.5 seconds) required for the winning ball to reach the pseudo-attacker 165 has elapsed.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the prize ball is given based on the fact that the ball has won the pseudo-attacker 165. Further, since the winning sound for notifying by voice that the ball has won the variable winning device 65 is also configured to be delayed according to the update timing of the above-mentioned acquisition information 831, FIG. 219 (b) shows. The winning sound is output from the audio output device 226 at the indicated timing.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example>
As described above with reference to FIG. 4, the main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, and a display setting in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 220, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 220 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the first control example. These counters and the like have a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, in order to select the special hit random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol. Special hit type counter C2 to be used, stop type selection counter C3 for determining the stop type of the special symbol (reach hit type, non-reach deviation (disengagement length A, deviation short A), reach deviation type), variation pattern selection The variation type counter CS1 used for the above and the initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1 are used. Further, the normal hit random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol, and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the normal hit random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 253). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a composed of four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) for storing the reserved balls of the first special symbol, and a reserved ball of the second special symbol. A special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b consisting of four holding areas (holding 1st to 4th areas) is provided for each, and a common special symbol holding for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol is provided. A ball execution area is provided. In each area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special hit random number counter C1, a special hit type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, and a variable type counter are set according to the timing of entering the first ball entry port 64. Each value of CS1 is stored. Similarly, in each area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, similar values are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the second ball entry port 640.

Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and balls are left and right in each of these areas. The value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

Next, each counter will be described in detail. The special hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 499), reaches the maximum value (for example, 499 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 499), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return. In particular, when the special hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1.

Further, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the special hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the special hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 499, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 499. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 253).

The value of the special hit random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), for example, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 222A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and is the value of the special hit random number counter C1. However, if it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. Further, this special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is used for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special) in which the probability of becoming a special symbol jackpot is higher than that of the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for (a period in which the symbol is in a high probability state) and the other, and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently.

In this way, by making the number of random numbers that become big hits different, the probability of becoming a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol. What is the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 222 (a)) for the high probability of the special symbol and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 222 (a)) for the low probability of the special symbol? , Is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

The special hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). , It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the special hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the timing at which the ball wins the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

Here, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol is out of order. If it is a random number, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is off.

On the other hand, if the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in is the one at the time of the big hit of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. .. In this embodiment, five types of jackpots, "big hit A", "big hit B", "big hit C", "big hit D", and "big hit E", are set, and the special hit type counter C2 is used. Either is decided. Then, the display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

The special hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 499. In this special hit random number counter C1, there are five random numbers that become big hits of the special symbol at the time of low probability of the special symbol, and the random number values "0 to 4" are the special symbol big hit random number table for the low probability. It is stored in 202a. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 5 while the total number of random numbers is 500, so the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is "1/100".

On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 6 random numbers that are the jackpots of the special symbol, and the values "4 to 9" are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability. .. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 6 while the total number of random numbers is 500, so the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is "6/500".

In this control example, the random number value that is the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the low probability time and the random number value that is the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the high probability time. So, the random number values that are the big hits are set so that the values do not overlap. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a random value that becomes a big hit regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random value may be input from the outside and the big hit may be easily assigned illegally. On the other hand, as in this control example, the random value that becomes a big hit is changed according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random value that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

Further, the value of the special hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 223 (a), the jackpot type selection table 202d for determining the jackpot type includes the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1 and the first, which are referred to in correspondence with the lottery of the first special symbol. 2 Special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2, which is referred to corresponding to the lottery of special symbols, is set respectively.

The special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1 is set (acquired and stored) in the special symbol holding ball execution area when the change of the first special symbol is stopped and the lottery result in the change is a jackpot. The determination value for collating (determining) with the value of the hit type counter C2 is stored corresponding to the jackpot type.

FIG. 223 (b) is a data table schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1. In the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1, when the random number value in the acquired special hit type counter is "0 to 49", the jackpot type is "big hit A". The jackpot type when the value was "50 to 68" was "big hit B", and the jackpot type when the value was "69 to 98" was the value of "big hit C" or "99". As the jackpot type of the case, "big hit D" is set respectively.

In this way, when the pachinko machine 10 of this control example wins a big hit with the first special symbol (special figure 1), four types of hit types are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the special hit type counter C2. It is configured to be.

Further, the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2 is set (acquired and stored) in the special symbol holding ball execution area when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped and the lottery result in the fluctuation is a jackpot. The determination value for collating (determining) with the value of the special hit type counter C2 is stored corresponding to the jackpot type.

FIG. 223 (c) is a data table schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2. In the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2, when the random number value in the acquired special hit type counter is "0 to 49", the jackpot type is "big hit D". Further, when the value is "50 to 99", "big hit E" is set as the jackpot type.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured so that five types of hit types are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the special hit type counter C2. In addition, since the selection ratio of the jackpot type selected when the determination result is a jackpot is different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the player is given the first special symbol and the second special symbol. You can be interested in which of the lottery is being executed. In addition, since the selection ratio of the probability variation jackpot to which the probability variation is given is the same (100%) for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the probability variation ratio differs between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the gaming machine. It is possible to suppress problems in which the probability variation rate is not constant as a whole. Further, since the selection ratio of the jackpot D in the second special symbol is set higher, the probability that the 16R probability variation jackpot is selected is set higher than that of the first special symbol, and it is configured to be advantageous to the player. There is.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. The stop type selection counter C3 and the variable type counter CS1 described above determine a rough display mode such as so-called short-time off, long-time off, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. The reach type and details of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 based on the fluctuation time determined by the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1. The pattern variation mode is determined. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 253) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 224) that stores the random value that determines the variation time of the symbol variation from the values (random values) of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 is the main control device 110. It is provided in ROM 202.

As shown in FIG. 224 (b), in the variation pattern selection table 202b, the normal / latent state used for the game state (normal state, latent state) when the probability of winning / failing the normal symbol is low is low. The variation pattern selection table 202b1 and the probability variation variation pattern table 202b2 used for the gaming state (probability variation state) when the probability of winning or failing the normal symbol is high are set respectively.

The pachinko machine 10 in this control example has a normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) as a gaming state. It is configured to be able to set three game states, a latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), and at the end of the jackpot game, the type of jackpot won or the jackpot is won. It is configured so that the game state is set according to the game state set at the time of the game.

Although it will be described in more detail in the description of the selection of the fluctuation pattern in the voice lamp control device 113 described later, in the main control device 110, the hit / fail determination result, the number of reserved balls, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type Based on the value of the counter CS1, the contents of the rough fluctuation pattern (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) and the fluctuation time are determined, and the fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined contents is set.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 225 and 226, the variation pattern selection table 202b used when the main control device 110 selects the variation pattern will be described. FIG. 225 is a data table schematically showing the contents of the normal / latent variation pattern selection table 202b1. In the normal / latent variation pattern selection table 202b1, various variation patterns are set corresponding to the lottery results of special symbols, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 are set for each of the variation patterns. A value with the variation type counter CS1 is assigned. If the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the variation pattern corresponds to the determined jackpot type (the jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d according to the acquired special hit type counter C2 value). Is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 226, it is a data table schematically showing the contents of the time saving variation pattern table 202b2. In the time saving variation pattern table 202b2, various variation patterns are set corresponding to the lottery results of the special symbols, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 are set for each of the variation patterns. The value of is assigned. If the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the variation pattern corresponds to the determined jackpot type (the jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d according to the acquired special hit type counter C2 value). Is set.

The normal hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the normal hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal hit random number counter C4. In this control example, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entry port (through gate) 67. At that time, it is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that is the hit of the normal symbol is set by the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 222 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is set. If it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by the normal hit random number table 202c, it is determined to be the hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 221 (c)) has a probability of hitting a normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability (a period during which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and when the probability is low. It is divided into two types, one for high probability time (the period during which the time is shortened for a normal symbol), and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently. Further, the hit type of the normal symbol is set to normal hit and long-time hit, and the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is set for each.

Here, in this control example, it is configured so that the long hit can be won only in the low probability state of the normal symbol, and when the long hit is won, the electric accessory 640a is released in the opening time of 4 seconds. A long hit is executed. This makes it possible to temporarily execute the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state. The normal hit (short hit) of the normal symbol other than the above-mentioned long hit is a hit in which the operation of operating the electric accessory 640a in the open state with an opening time of 0.2 seconds is executed once.

In this control example, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a, which is executed in the probable variation period during the time reduction in the normal hit, and the opening operation in the long-time hit are set to be the same, but the opening operation is not limited to that, and the long-time hit is different. It may be an opening operation of. Specifically, for example, the operation of being in the open state may be performed once for 3 seconds. With such a configuration, it is possible to allow the ball to enter the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 more when hitting for a long time, and the variation display with the second special symbol during the normal game. It is possible to make it easy to execute, and it is possible to entertain the player with a change in the game effect by the variable display of the second special symbol in which a fresh notice display or the like is displayed.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 222 (c), when the value of the acquired normal hit random number counter C4 is "5" at the time of low probability of the normal symbol, it is determined that the normal symbol is a normal hit. If it is "6", it is determined that it is a long hit. On the other hand, when the value of the acquired normal hit random number counter C4 is any of 5 to 204 at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, it is determined that the normal symbol is a normal hit.

In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be hit different, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability time of the normal symbol and the high probability time of the normal symbol. Therefore, at the time of low probability, the frequency of operating the electric accessory 640a can be reduced, and the frequency of entering the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to increase the consumption of the game ball by the player and increase the profit on the side of the game store. On the other hand, during the time reduction and the probability variation period, which have a high probability, the opportunity for the electric accessory 640a to operate can be given with a probability of "1 / 1.2", and the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 can be given. It is possible to increase the chance of entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the consumption of the game ball of the player and set the game state advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player can play the game aiming at the game with a high probability, and can play the game for a longer time.

The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the normal hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interruption process (see FIG. 238). , Is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 253).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 218, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 219, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 255) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 251) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 253) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 221 (a), the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has a special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 222), a variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 224), and a normal hit random number. In addition to the table 202c (see FIG. 222 (c)) and the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 223), a small hit random number table 202e, a jackpot scenario table 202f, and a small hit scenario table 202g are set. Further, although omitted in this control example, in addition to the above-mentioned ones, various data and programs necessary for the game are stored in the ROM 202.

The small hit random number table 202e is a table referred to when determining whether or not a player has won a small hit that can be given less privilege than the case where the big hit is won in the special symbol lottery. Here, the contents of the small hit random number table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 222 (b). As shown in FIG. 222 (b), in this control example, only the lottery of the special figure 1 is configured to win a small hit.

The jackpot scenario table 202f and the small hit scenario table 202g are data tables in which the game operation content during the jackpot game and the game operation content during the small hit game are stored in association with the determined hit type, respectively. , The game operation during each hit is executed based on the information (scenario) stored in this data table.

Further, as shown in FIG. 221 (b), the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. , Special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, small hit medium flag 203g, time saving medium counter 203j, probability variation counter 203m, and other memory areas. It has 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area for the first special symbol and four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area), and each of these areas has a reserved ball storage area 203a. The values of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored respectively.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (1st area to 4th area on hold), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. A determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having a smaller area number. Will be done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data shift is performed only for the reserved area (the second reserved area to the fourth reserved area) in which the winning data is stored. Further, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol.

The ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. A random number counter C4 is normally stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the sphere passes through either the left or right through gate 67, and the acquired data is the four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). ) Is stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th) in the vacant area. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the winning order is maintained and the data corresponding to the winning is stored. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a, the prizes stored in the other hold areas are won. The shift process is performed to pack the data of the above into the holding area which is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of times of waiting) of the variable display (variation display performed by the display device 81) up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. 1 is added. On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (holding number N of variation display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command. The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter that counts the reserved balls based on winning the second entry port 640, and the other configurations are the same as the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. The detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The voice lamp control device 113 is the main control device by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e are changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of reserved balls of the variable display held at 110. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number of reserved balls in the actual fluctuation display is deviated from the actual number of reserved balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of reserved balls command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f sets the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed.

If the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the sphere passes through either the left or right through gate 67, the value of the normal random number counter C4 Is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c.

The small hit medium flag 203g is a flag that is set to be on while the small hit game is being executed. The probability change counter 203m is a counter for measuring the period during which the probability change state continues, and when the probability change state is set, a predetermined value is set. Then, the counter value is updated at the timing when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed during the probability change state, and when the updated value reaches a predetermined value, the process of ending the probability change state is executed. Will be done.

The time saving medium counter 203j is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203j is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. The initial value of the time reduction / medium counter 203j is set to zero, and each time a special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110 and it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Will be done. That is, when a special symbol becomes a big hit, a value corresponding to the big hit type is newly set regardless of the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j.

In the other memory area 203z, flags, counters, stored data, and the like necessary for other control processing executed by the MPU of the main control device 110 are set, but details thereof will be omitted.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 253) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 290 that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content of the above, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

As shown in FIG. 227 (a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, a hold rank selection table 222b, a hold mode selection table 222c, and a treasure box mode selection table 222d.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining a variation pattern based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are set corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command and the fluctuation pattern type, and a counter value for selection (not shown) is acquired to determine one fluctuation pattern.

The hold rank selection table 222b is a data table for selecting a rank (holding rank) regarding whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect based on the winning information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110. In this control example, a hold rank is set for all of the winning information corresponding to the received winning command, and whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect according to the set hold rank, or whether to perform the look-ahead effect or not. It is configured to set the effect mode when the effect is executed.

Here, the contents specified in the hold rank selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 228 (a). FIG. 228 (a) schematically shows the contents of the reserved rank selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 228 (a), the hold rank selection table 222b corresponds to the type of the win / fail determination result included in the received winning command and the value of the hold rank counter 223p1 of the effect counter group 223p. A plurality of pending ranks (ranks 1 to 4) are specified.

Specifically, when the hit / fail determination result is the most advantageous "big hit D" for the player, the value of the hold rank counter 223p1 is in the range of "0 to 69", and "rank 2" is "70 to". If "Rank 3" is specified in the range of "89" and "Rank 1" is specified in the range of "90 to 99", and the winning / failing judgment result is "Big hit A, B, E", it is for the pending rank. "Rank 3" is specified in the range of "0 to 69", "Rank 2" is specified in the range of "70 to 89", and "Rank 3" is specified in the range of "90 to 99". ..

When the hit / fail determination result is "big hit C, small hit", the value of the hold rank counter 223p1 is "rank 3" in the range of "0 to 69" and "rank 3" in the range of "70 to 89". If "Rank 4" is defined as "Rank 2" in the range of "90 to 99" and the hit / fail judgment result is the most disadvantageous "missing" for the player, the value of the hold rank counter 223p1 is set. "Rank 4" is defined in the range of "0 to 69", "Rank 4" is defined in the range of "70 to 89", and "Rank 3" is defined in the range of "90 to 99".

That is, in this control example, four types of "Rank 1" to "Rank 4" can be selected as the types of reserved ranks selected for each winning information, and the winning / failing determination result is advantageous to the player. Indeed, an advantageous rank (a rank with a small value) is set so that it is easy to select.

In this way, when executing a plurality of pre-reading effects, the hold rank is set based on the winning / failing judgment result of the winning information, instead of setting the effect mode of each pre-reading effect based on the winning / failing judgment result of the winning information. By configuring to set the effect mode of each look-ahead effect based on the hold rank, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable with the effect mode of the look-ahead effect to be executed. ..

In other words, when executing the look-ahead effect when the result of the hit / fail judgment is wrong, in order to give the player a sense of expectation, it is possible to set an effect mode with a high degree of expectation of the hit, but the player is excessive. In order to prevent the player's motivation to play from being lowered due to expectations, it is common to configure a production mode with a low hit expectation so that it can be set. When executing the look-ahead effect, the effect mode with a low hit expectation is set at a rate of about 90%, and the effect mode with a high hit expectation is set at a rate of about 10%. The look-ahead effect is executed without causing discomfort to the player.

When the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way sets the effect mode of each look-ahead effect based on the hit / fail determination result, an effect mode with a low expectation is set as one of the look-ahead effect effect modes. On the other hand, there is a problem that the effect of the look-ahead effect cannot be enhanced because the effect of the look-ahead effect is set to have a high expectation.

On the other hand, by setting the hold rank in advance based on the hit / fail determination result and setting the effect mode of each look-ahead effect according to the set hold rank, for example, the hit / fail judgment result is out of order. In the case, the low expectation pre-reading effect in which each pre-reading effect effect mode is selected from the low-expected effect mode and the high-expected look-ahead effect selected from the high-expected effect mode are separately executed. Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate effect mode for each look-ahead effect without causing the above-mentioned problem.

Further, for example, by configuring so that more hold ranks can be set than the type of the pass / fail determination result, it is possible to execute a wider variety of look-ahead effects without discomfort.

The hold mode selection table 222c is a data table for selecting the display mode of the hold symbol displayed in the small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. In this control example, the display mode of the reserved symbol can be changed at the timing when the winning command is received from the main control device 110 or at the timing when a new special symbol change (lottery) is started. ..

Here, with reference to FIG. 228 (b), the contents specified in the hold mode selection table 222c will be described. FIG. 228 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the holding mode selection table 222c. As shown in FIG. 228 (b), the hold mode selection table 222c corresponds to the hold rank selected by using the hold rank selection table 222b and the value of the hold mode counter 223p2 possessed by the effect counter group 223p. , A plurality of hold modes are specified.

In this control example, the color of the reserved symbol is changed as the reserved mode, and the color of the reserved symbol, which is normally displayed in "white", is changed to "rainbow" and "red" in descending order of the degree of expectation. , "Green", "Yellow", "Blue".

Specifically, when the hit expectation is the highest (set only when the jackpot D is won) "hold rank 1", the value of the hold mode counter 223p2 is "0 to 69". "Red" in the range of "70-89", "-(no change)" in the range of "70-89", "green" in the range of "90-93", and "yellow" in the range of "94-96". When "rainbow" is defined in the range of "97 to 99" and "hold rank 2", "green" is set in the range where the value of the hold mode counter 223p2 is "0 to 69". "Yellow" in the range of "70 to 79", "-(no change)" in the range of "80 to 89", "red" in the range of "90 to 96", in the range of "97 to 99" "Blue" is specified.

When the value is "hold rank 3", the value of the hold mode counter 223p2 is "-(no change)" in the range of "0 to 69" and "yellow" in the range of "70 to 79". , "Green" is specified in the range of "80 to 89", "blue" is specified in the range of "90 to 96", and "red" is specified in the range of "97 to 99". In some cases, the value of the hold mode counter 223p2 is in the range of "0 to 89" with "-(no change)", in the range of "90 to 93" with "blue", and in the range of "94 to 96". "Yellow" is specified, "green" is specified in the range of "97 to 98", and "red" is specified in the value of "99".

In this control example, the mode in which the color of the reserved symbol is changed is selected as the reserved mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the shape of the reserved symbol may be changed. , The display mode showing the effect result of the look-ahead effect may be displayed in the vicinity of the reserved symbol (the range in which the player can identify the reserved symbol).

The treasure box mode selection table 222d is a data table referred to when selecting the display mode (color) of the treasure box accessory 750, and sets the display mode based on the jackpot type included in the corresponding winning information. be.

Here, the contents specified in the treasure box mode selection table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 229. FIG. 229 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the treasure box mode selection table 222d. As shown in FIG. 229, the treasure box mode selection table 222d shows whether or not the jackpot type information (win / fail determination result) included in the winning information and the display mode of the reserved symbol indicating the corresponding winning information are changed (the holding mode is already variable). A plurality of treasure chest modes are defined in correspondence with the value of the treasure chest mode counter 223p3 possessed by the effect counter group 223p.

Specifically, when the hit / fail determination result is "big hit D" and the display mode of the corresponding reserved symbol is not variable, the value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3 is "red" in the range of "0 to 69". , "Rainbow" is specified in the range of "70 to 89", and "-(no change)" is specified in the range of "90 to 99", and the display mode of the corresponding reserved symbol is variable. The value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3 is defined as "red" in the range of "0 to 89" and "rainbow" in the range of "90 to 99".

That is, in this control example, when the display mode of the reserved symbol has already been changed for the reserved symbol corresponding to the winning information indicating that the "big hit D" has been won, the treasure box accessory 750 The display mode is always changed, while the display mode of the treasure chest accessory 750 may not be changed when the display mode of the reserved symbol is not changed. As a result, it is possible to set an effect pattern in which the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed without changing the display mode of the reserved symbol or the display mode of the treasure chest accessory 750.

Further, it is configured so that the display mode of the "rainbow" having the highest expectation of hitting is selected when the hold mode is not changed, as compared with the case where the hold mode is changed. As a result, the display mode (holding mode) of the reserved symbol is not changed by the look-ahead effect, and the treasure box accessory 750 can be easily changed to the display mode "rainbow" having the highest expectation. It is possible to perform an unexpected effect while providing the enjoyment of predicting for which reserved symbol the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 is changed.

Next, when the hit / fail determination result is "big hit B" and the display mode of the corresponding reserved symbol is not variable, the value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3 is "blue" in the range of "0 to 69". When "-(no change)" is specified in the range of "70 to 89" and "red" is specified in the range of "90 to 99" and the display mode of the corresponding reserved symbol is variable, it is for the treasure box mode. The value of the counter 223p3 is defined as "blue" in the range of "0 to 69" and "red" in the range of "70 to 99".

When the hit / fail determination result is "big hit A, C, E, or small hit" and the display mode of the corresponding reserved symbol is not variable, the value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3 is "0 to 69". "-(No change)" is specified in the range of, "Blue" is specified in the range of "70 to 89", and "-(No change)" is specified in the range of "90 to 99". When the mode is variable, the value of the treasure chest mode counter 223p3 is defined as "blue" in the range of "0 to 89" and "red" in the range of "90 to 99".

Finally, when the hit / fail judgment result is "missing" and the display mode of the corresponding reserved symbol is not variable, the value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3 is "-(no change) in the range of" 0 to 89 ". ) ”,“ Blue ”is specified in the range of“ 90 to 99 ”, and when the display mode of the corresponding reserved symbol is variable, the value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3 is in the range of“ 0 to 69 ”. "Blue" is defined as "-(no change)" in the range of "70 to 99".

Further, as shown in FIG. 227, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, a normal reserved ball number counter 223c, and a fluctuation start flag. 223d, stop type selection flag 223e, winning information storage area 223f, state setting area 223g, operation effect type storage area 223h, operation effect type storage area 223i, pressed flag 223k, hold effect information storage area 223m, operation valid timer 223n, effect Counter group 223p, hold production flag 223q, treasure box production flag 223r, pseudo winning order storage area 223s, normal figure fluctuation start flag 223t, normal figure production prohibition flag 223u, normal figure production flag 223v, other memory area 223z At least it is provided.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223a is a variation display of the first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is the first reserved ball number counter in the main control device 110. A counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waits) for the special symbol variation effect up to 4 times for each type of special symbol. Update according to the timing of increase / decrease.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation display of the second special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a. , When a winning information command is received, a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the second special symbol fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times for each type of special symbol. It is updated according to the timing when the number of reserved balls increases or decreases, such as when a fluctuation pattern command is received.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Unable to get the value. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and causes the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. Therefore, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the start winning is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted. When this is done, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 hold ball count command is transmitted from the hold ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the counter corresponding to the command among the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S2207 in FIG. 298). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The values can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110.

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b. , A display hold ball count command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball count counter 223a or the special symbol 2 hold ball count counter 223b after storage. ..

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113, or the special symbol 2 hold. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the value of the ball number counter 223b is displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is the main. The value is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is also set to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

The normal reserved ball number counter 223c differs from the above-mentioned special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b in that the target is changed from the special symbol to the normal symbol. Since the technical control concept is the same, detailed explanation is omitted.

The variation start flag 223d is turned on when the variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the variation pattern command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2302 of FIG. 259), and the variation start flag 223d is turned on. It is turned off when the variable display is set in the display device 81 (see S3002 in FIG. 267). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, the variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 257) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 has a variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs variation display of the third symbol. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2204 in FIG. 258), and the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S3007 in FIG. 267). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The winning information storage area 223f has one execution area, four areas corresponding to the first special symbol (first area to the fourth area), and four areas corresponding to the second special symbol (first area to the first area). It has 4 areas) and 4 areas (1st area to 4th area) corresponding to ordinary symbols, and prize information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when a start winning prize for the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 is detected in the main control device 110, the special hit random number counter C1 acquired according to the start winning prize, From each value of the special hit type counter C2 and the variable type counter CS1, various information (win / fail, big hit type in case of big hit, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the starting prize is drawn is obtained. It is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and various predicted information is notified from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

Further, when the passage of the sphere to the through gate 67 is detected, a lottery of ordinary symbols corresponding to the passage is performed from the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in response to the passage. The lottery result is predicted in advance, and various predicted information is notified from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 receives various information notified by the winning information command (in the case of winning information of a special symbol, whether it is successful or not, in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type, the fluctuation pattern, and the normal symbol. In the case of the winning information, the winning / failing) is extracted as the winning information, and the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223f. More specifically, the extracted winning information corresponds to the type of the entry opening where the entry was detected (first entry opening 64 or the second entry opening 640), or the four areas corresponding to the normal symbol (the first entry opening 64 or the second entry opening 640). Among the vacant areas (1st area to 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the more the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

In this first control example, the main control device 110 is based on various information (win / fail, jackpot type in case of jackpot, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning prize is performed. Although the configuration in which the winning information command is set and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified is used, other configurations may be used.

For example, when a start winning is generated, various information already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in the various information predicted corresponding to the start winning. Is included in the setting means for setting the winning information command, various information (winning information) already stored in the winning information storage area 223f when the winning information command is received, and the received winning information command. A configuration may be provided in which a determination means for determining whether or not various information (winning information) matches is provided. This makes it possible to determine whether various information (winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223f is appropriately stored.

Further, in the first control example, when a new start winning is generated, a winning information command is set and notified to the voice lamp control device 113. However, the winning information command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. The timing of notification is not limited to the above-mentioned timing (timing when the winning information command is set). For example, a storage means for temporarily storing the winning information command is provided, and in addition to the starting winning timing, the notification is periodically performed. (For example, every 5 seconds), when the game conditions are variable (for example, when the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state, or when the jackpot game starts or ends), or when the special symbol changes start (or). At the time of (stop), a configuration may be used in which the winning information command stored in the storage means is notified to the voice lamp control device 113. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute an effect using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f (so-called look-ahead effect).

In this control example, based on each winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, as a look-ahead effect, setting of an effect mode such as changing the display color of the reserved symbol is executed. In this way, by executing various effects (look-ahead effects) based on each prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223f, the player can be asked about each reserved ball before the variable display is started. You can have a feeling of expectation that will be a big hit. It is also possible to perform a long-term effect using a plurality of variable display periods.

In the state setting area 223g, the current gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 and the gaming state before a predetermined period (for example, if the current jackpot game is in progress, the gaming state at the time when the jackpot is won) It is a storage area that is set (stored).

In this state setting area 223g, when various state commands output from the main control device 110 are received by the command determination process (see S2114 in FIG. 258), information indicating the game state included in the received state commands is extracted. Then, the current game state is set. Further, in the command determination process (see S2114 in FIG. 258), when it is determined that a command indicating that the jackpot game is executed has been received, the information set (stored) as the current game state is immediately before. It is configured to be set (memorized) as the set gaming state. As a result, it is possible to change the effect mode of the variable effect executed after the end of the big hit game according to the game state set at the time of winning the big hit. Further, for example, even if the jackpots are of the same jackpot type, in the case where the game state to be executed after the jackpot game ends is changed according to the game state at the time of winning, the jackpot game is in progress. It is possible to predict the game state set after the end of the big hit game on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and execute the effect during the big hit game to suggest the prediction result.

The operation effect in progress flag 223h is for indicating that the operation effect is being executed, is a flag set to be turned on when the operation effect is being executed, and is a setting status of the operation effect in progress flag 223h. The processing content when the operating means is operated is configured to be different according to the above.

This operation effect in-progress flag 223h is executed when it is determined in the variation effect setting process (see S3004 in FIG. 268) that the operation effect is included in the variation pattern to be executed this time (S3105: Yes in FIG. 268). It is set to ON in the operation effect setting process (S3106 in FIG. 269) (see S3204 in FIG. 269), referenced in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see S2107 in FIG. 271) (S3304 in FIG. 271), and set to ON. If this is the case (S3304: Yes in FIG. 271), the pressed flag 223k is set to ON (see S3305 in FIG. 271). Then, it is also referred to in the operation effect management process (see S2111 in FIG. 273) (see S3501 in FIG. 273), and the effect mode of the operation effect based on the presence or absence of the operation of the frame button 22 is set for the operation effect being executed. ..

The operation effect type storage area 223i is a storage area for temporarily storing the type of the operation effect to be executed, and stores the effect type of the operation effect determined in the operation effect setting process (see S3106 in FIG. 269). The indicated information is stored (see S3203 and S3207 in FIG. 269). The effect type of the operation effect stored here is referred to when determining what the operation effect currently being executed in the operation effect management process (see S2111 in FIG. 273) (see S3502 and S3509 in FIG. 273). ). As a result, different processes can be executed depending on the type of operation effect. Further, the information stored in the operation effect type storage area 223i is cleared when the operation effect is completed (when the corresponding variation pattern effect is completed).

The pressed flag 223k is for indicating that the player has pressed (operated) the frame button 22 (operation means), and is set to be on when the frame button 22 is pressed during the operation effect. It is a thing.

This pressed flag 223k is determined when it is determined in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (see S2107 in FIG. 271) that the operation of the frame button 22 is performed with the operation effect flag 223h set to ON (FIG. FIG. 271 S3304: Yes), set to on (see S3305 in FIG. 271), and referenced in the operation effect management process (see S2111 in FIG. 273) (S3503, S3511, S3518 in FIG. 273). Then, after the effect mode of the operation effect based on the reference result is set, it is set to off (S3505, S3513, S3520 in FIG. 273).

In this control example, as the operation effect, there are a case where the effect mode is changed immediately after the player operates the operation means, and a case where the effect mode is changed after a predetermined period has elapsed. In such a case, by using the pressed flag 223k, it is possible to surely change the effect mode of the operation effect based on the operation result of the operation means.

The hold effect information storage area 223 m is a storage area for storing various information set for executing the look-ahead effect, and has four storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and a second. It is formed of four storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, and each storage area is configured to store information indicating the hold rank, the hold mode, and the treasure box mode. Then, when a new special symbol change is started, various information stored in each storage area is configured to shift as in the winning information storage area 223f.

In this control example, by using the information stored in the hold effect information storage area 223 m, the special symbol change starts with the information set when the winning command is received (for example, the information indicating the hold rank). Since it can be held until it is done, it is possible to execute the look-ahead effect using the information at any timing. As a result, it is possible to execute a look-ahead effect that is unexpected for the player, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

In this control example, the look-ahead effect is executed at the timing when the effect mode of the look-ahead effect is determined. In addition to this, for example, the determined effect mode of the look-ahead effect is stored in the hold effect information. It may be stored in the area 223m, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the look-ahead effect may be executed by using the stored effect mode. With this configuration, for example, by executing the look-ahead effect for another reserved symbol, the winning information included in the winning command received during the period during which the execution of the look-ahead effect is prohibited is used. It is possible to determine the effect mode of the look-ahead effect and execute a new look-ahead effect based on the completion of the look-ahead effect executed for another reserved symbol.

Further, when the process of setting the effect mode of the look-ahead effect is executed once, the process of setting the effect mode of the look-ahead effect is executed again for a predetermined period (for example, until the change of the special symbol is executed twice). Period) When the prohibited process is used, the information for which the prohibited period is specified may be stored in the hold effect information storage area 223 m, or the hold indicating the special symbol change to be executed next may be used. It is configured to set the prohibition information specific to a specific storage area on the storage area side so as to prohibit the execution of the look-ahead effect based on the hold effect information stored in the storage area where the hold effect information corresponding to the symbol is stored. You may.

The operation valid timer 223n is a timer for timing the operation valid period (the period during which it is effectively determined that the player has operated the operation means (frame button 22)) during the operation effect, and the operation effect is executed. A value is set to measure the corresponding period. In the operation valid timer 223n, the value set in the counter update process (S2113) executed at 1 millisecond intervals in the main process (see FIG. 257) of the voice lamp control device 113 is periodically subtracted.

The effect counter group 223p is a counter group having a plurality of counters used for selecting various effects. The contents of various counters included in the effect counter group 223p will be described with reference to FIG. 230. FIG. 230 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect counter group 223p. As shown in FIG. 230, in this control example, as the effect counter group 223p, there are a hold rank counter 223p1, a hold mode counter 223p2, a treasure box mode counter 223p3, and other counters 223pz, and each counter is "0 to 0". It is composed of a loop counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of "99".

Each counter included in the effect counter group 223p is updated by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 257) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. Then, each counter is configured to update within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) without synchronization.

The hold effect in progress flag 223q is a flag for indicating that the hold effect, which is one of the look-ahead effects, is being executed, and is set to be on when the hold effect is being executed. This hold effect in progress flag 223q is set to on (see S2506 in FIG. 261) in the hold mode selection process (see S2405 in FIG. 261), and when it is set to on, a new hold mode is not set. It is referenced (see S2501 in FIG. 261). Then, in the stop processing (see FIG. 266), when it is determined that the special symbol variation that is the target of the hold effect has stopped (S2957: Yes in FIG. 266), it is set to off (see S2958 in FIG. 266).

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the hold effect from being executed for a plurality of hold symbols at the same time, so that the player is made to pay attention to the look-ahead effect executed for a specific hold symbol. be able to. In addition, when a winning command indicating that the winning / failing judgment result is a hit is received while the look-ahead effect in which the winning / failing judgment result is out of order is already executed, the look-ahead effect is executed for the winning information corresponding to the winning command. Therefore, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect in which the fluctuation result of the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved symbol for which the look-ahead effect is not executed becomes a big hit.

In this control example, the hold effect in progress flag 223q is used to suppress the execution of the look-ahead effect for a plurality of reserved symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, 2 The look-ahead effect may be executed up to one reserved symbol, or there is winning information indicating a lottery result that is more advantageous to the player than the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the pre-reading effect being executed. When it is determined that, the reserved symbol to be the target of the look-ahead effect may be switched.

The treasure chest effect in progress flag 223r is a flag for indicating that the treasure box effect, which is one of the look-ahead effects, is being executed, and is set to be on when the treasure box effect is being executed. Since the target of the pending effect flag 223q described above is replaced with a look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750, the treasure box effecting flag 223r is different in that detailed description thereof is omitted. do.

The pseudo winning order storage area 223s is a pseudo attacker 165 calculated for a ball that has won a prize in each winning opening (right general winning opening 163, specific out opening 166, specific winning opening 65a) provided in the special winning device 550. This is a storage area for temporarily storing the order of arrival (pseudo-winning order). In the pseudo-winning order storage area 223s, it is indicated that a ball has won a prize in each winning opening in the pseudo-attacker effect processing (see S2812 in FIG. 265) executed in the right attacker jackpot-related processing (see S2702 in FIG. 264). When the indicated command is received, the winning order to the pseudo attacker 165 is calculated by adding the ball flow period from each winning opening to the pseudo attacker 165, and the calculation result is stored (S2903 in FIG. 265). .. Then, the winning order stored in the winning order storage area 223s is referred to when setting a specific effect mode (overflow effect mode) for the pseudo winning information 10 or later. The information stored in the pseudo-winning order storage area 223s is cleared after each round game (see S2808 in FIG. 264).

The normal symbol effectable flag 223t is a flag for indicating whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the winning normal symbol is executed per long opening, and the fluctuation pattern of the winning normal symbol per long opening is executed. If set to on. Thereby, while the charge effect is being executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol, it is possible to determine whether the effect mode can be changed based on the lottery result of the normal symbol. .. In addition, when it is determined that the effect mode of the charge effect cannot be replaced when the variation pattern command indicating that the variation pattern of the winning normal symbol is executed per the long opening is received ( S2305: No) in FIG. 259, it is never set to ON.

The normal figure effect prohibition flag 223u is a flag for indicating that the execution of the normal figure effect (the effect of changing the effect mode of the charge effect based on the lottery result of the normal symbol) is prohibited, and is a flag for the normal figure effect. It is set to on when it is determined that the execution of is prohibited. This general figure production prohibition flag 223u determines that there is winning information indicating that a special symbol hit (big hit or small hit) is won in the winning information-related processing (see S2209 in FIG. 260) (Fig.). (See S2407 of 260), set to on (see S2408 of FIG. 260).

Then, in the variation pattern reception process (see S2202 in FIG. 259), it is referred to when the variation pattern command corresponding to the long open per normal symbol (per the normal figure length) is received (S2305 in FIG. 259), and the reference result is used. Based on this, the setting status of the normal map effectable flag 223t is changed. This normal figure effect prohibition flag 223u is set to off when the special symbol indicating a hit (big hit, small hit) is stopped and displayed.

With this configuration, if there is winning information indicating a special symbol hit (big hit, small hit) that is more advantageous for the player than the long open hit of the normal symbol, it is special based on the lottery result of the normal symbol. It is possible to suppress the variable effect of the symbol. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an effect that is difficult to understand by executing the effect based on the normal figure length hit while the look-ahead effect is being executed based on the winning information indicating the hit. be able to.

In this control example, the normal figure production prohibition flag 223u is set to be turned on when it is determined that there is winning information indicating that a special symbol hit (big hit or small hit) is won. , The normal figure effect prohibition flag 223u may be set to be on under other conditions. For example, the normal figure effect prohibition flag 223u may be set at a timing other than during high-speed fluctuation of the variable effect indicating the lottery result of the special symbol. May be set to on. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of incongruity that the variable effect being executed is suddenly switched.

Furthermore, in addition to the timing at which the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the long opening of the normal map is received, the normal drawing production prohibition flag 223u is set to be on based on the timing at which the game is executed per the long opening of the normal map. Is also good.

The normal map effecting flag 223v is a flag for indicating that the normal map effect is being executed, and is set to be turned on when the normal map effect is being executed. This normal map effect in progress flag 223v is set to on when the normal map effect is executed in the liquid crystal display effect execution management process (see S2110 in FIG. 272) (see S3406 in FIG. 272). Then, in order to set the display mode of the third symbol to be displayed at the stop timing of the special symbol, it is referred to in the stop processing (see S2213 in FIG. 266) executed when the stop command of the special symbol is received (see FIG. 266). 266 S2952). It is also referred to for setting a variation pattern of the variation effect set according to the variation start of the special symbol (see S3103 in FIG. 268).

The continuation flag 223x is a flag for determining that the normal drawing effect is executed so as to straddle a plurality of special symbol fluctuations, and is a flag when the normal drawing effect is executed so as to straddle a plurality of special symbol fluctuations. It is set to on. This continuation flag 223x is turned on when it is determined in the charge effect setting process (see S3104 in FIG. 270) that the normal figure fluctuation time is longer than the special figure fluctuation time being executed (S3224: Yes in FIG. 270). It is set (see S3231 in FIG. 270). Then, when it is referred to in the stop process (see S3103 in FIG. 266) (see S2953 in FIG. 266) and it is determined that it is set to ON (S2953: Yes in FIG. 266), the normal drawing effect (charge effect) is performed. A process for displaying the reduced third symbol for reducing and stopping the third symbol is executed in order to continue without discomfort.

In this way, while the charge effect is being executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol, when the process of changing the effect mode of the charge effect based on the lottery result of the normal symbol is performed, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped. Even when the timing is later than the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol, by using the continuation flag 223x, it is possible to execute the charge effect across the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol. Further, when the charge effect is executed across the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol, it is difficult for the player to discriminate the stop display mode of the third symbol showing the lottery result of the special symbol as compared with the normal stop display mode. By variably setting to, it is possible to make the player execute the charge effect without discomfort.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display (variation) in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It controls the production). The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG. 231.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 251).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 231. FIG. 231 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches it, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset is applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by 1. When the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading is possible for the data on the second and subsequent pages, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-consecutive data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 described later of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and is, for example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to read and write data to and from the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b has one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in one bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a in the NOR type ROM 234d, specifically, the first program stored in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be executed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and also specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (command code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (command code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The program storage area of the work RAM 233 for each fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed so that the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 274) stored in the program storage area 233a and executed after the boot process by the boot program (see S6001 in FIG. 274) is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 237) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. By expanding the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 276 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes an image drawing process for the next frame, and also executes a process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays an image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, since the image controller 237 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started during the drawing of the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display a third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is held without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area for storing the corresponding data. Further, in the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first starting port 64a is detected. In this case, it is an area for storing the image data corresponding to the variable image at the time of turning on the power, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by the variable effect.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see FIG. 274).

Here, the fluctuation image when the power is turned on will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image (see FIG. 35). It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the variation, the display control device 114 receives the main image at power-on. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position facing the screen and the fluctuation image of the "×" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the fluctuation period. It is displayed repeatedly in the middle and alternately. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image showing it is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the image showing it is stopped. It will be displayed for a certain period later.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the variable image area at power-on The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the images showing "○" and "×" are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball entering the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Returning to FIG. 231, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 209) with numbers from "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when performing variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37, but the variation effect occurs in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the production is not started immediately.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the apparatus 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 has an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used to draw the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. NS.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. NS. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A or jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

Further, since the first starting port 64a is a winning port in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory is opened as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball is the second starting port. The easier it is to enter 64b, the more prize balls. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held or the number of balls held is not reduced even if the pachinko machine 10 is played. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a big hit of a special symbol without it. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the game is not performed on the pachinko machine 10.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 235. FIG. 235 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is specified for each address. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are obtained with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table.

When it is specified that the MPU 231 displays one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (underwater, beach, background of preparation period, background dedicated to time production) depending on this back type, the player of the background The back image corresponding to the specified stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified with the passage of time.

In this embodiment, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not the display should be performed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the rear image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the third symbol can be the variation symbol in the previous variation effect or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110. By managing by the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variablely displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 36). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 237) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 236. FIG. 236 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, the transfer data table is prepared. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and the transfer timing thereof are specified.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 236). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data for which the transfer should be started does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data for which the transfer should be started does not exist corresponding to the address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 236).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

In the "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 236, in the example of FIG. 236, In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is the display data table. If a transfer data table corresponding to the above exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 237) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 236, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified in the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIG. 35 on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 274) (see S6005 in FIG. 274). Then, at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in order to display an image other than the image at the time of turning on the power. It is set to off (see S7705 in FIG. 285 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 276 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 276 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 276 (b)) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 276 (b) see S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 277 to 282) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 283 to 284 (b)) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7601 in FIG. 285 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 285 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 286) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 237), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the content of the image drawing instruction for the user. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 237) described later, which describes drawing instructions, is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Null data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to the later drawing list (see FIG. 237) that describes the instruction content for image drawing to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 moves the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 276 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S7305 in FIG. 284 (b)) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list to be described later. (See FIG. 237) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 237. FIG. 237 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 38, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Design 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as a design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and the image controller 237 includes various types. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. Processing is performed, synthesis processing with other sprites is performed according to the α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to the color information, and filtering processing is performed by the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 has a drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and other contents of an image to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can be used according to the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...). , Characters (character 1, character 2, ..., Hold ball number symbol 1, hold ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list contains this transfer data information, the image controller 237 prepares an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 276 (b). ) Is executed, the time counting counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7307 in FIG. 283). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes to be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 274) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 286) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "Off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S7809 in FIG. 286). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7810 in FIG. 286). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233i is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as "drawing target buffer") that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7902 in FIG. 287).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when the value is "1", it is set to "0". It is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 276 (b)) is executed, it is performed (see S7902 of FIG. 287).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. NS.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. NS. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 238 to 255. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt processing, first, the reading processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated to RAM203. Store in the corresponding buffer area of.

Further, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values become the maximum values (299, 99, 239, respectively in this embodiment). When it reaches, it clears to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C2 and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, and then a special symbol variation process is executed (S104). The start winning process associated with winning the first starting port 64a (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 33 to 36.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passage process accompanying the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 37 and 39. After executing the through gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and then the other winning process is executed (S109). Further, other processing to be executed periodically is executed (S110), and the timer interrupt processing is terminated. The launch control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and launches the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 238), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being hit (S201). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. It includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of reserved balls N2 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 ( S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205), and the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e changed by the calculation is set. (S206). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 253) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the second special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store in.

After the reserved ball number command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After the process of S207 is executed, the process of S213 is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired. (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d acquired in the process of S208 is 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to 1. Subtraction (S210) is performed, and a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 253) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store in.

After the reserved ball number command is set by the process of S211 the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display device 37 executes a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S213). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 34.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If (S214: No) has not elapsed, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol 2 variation start process (S208) and the special symbol 1 variation start process (S213), which will be described later with reference to FIGS. 240 and 241. When the special symbol 2 variation start process (S208) or the special symbol 1 variation start process (S213) is executed, the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are common to each other. A special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the provided execution area. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the special hit random number counter C1, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it is a big hit according to the value of the special hit type counter C2. The type is determined.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S215 is completed, the stop display of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S216). Then, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery performed by the special symbol 2 variation start process (S208) or the special symbol 1 variation start process (S213) is performed. It is determined whether the result (the result of the lottery this time) is a big hit of the special symbol (S217). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot with a special symbol (S217: Yes), a jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot scenario table 202f is set (S218). After that, the values of the probability variation counter 203m and the time saving medium counter 203j are set to 0 (S219), and the jackpot medium flag 203n is set to ON (S220). Then, a stop command is set (S221), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S217, if it is determined that the lottery result this time is not a big hit (S217: No), the small hit setting process (S222) is executed. The small hit setting process (S222) will be described later with reference to FIG. 242. Next, the game state update process (S223) is executed. The game state update process (S223) will be described later with reference to FIG. 239. Then, a stop command is set (S221), and this process is terminated.

Next, the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 240. FIG. 240 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (S209). This special symbol 2 variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 239) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and is a process of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery (win / fail determination) for "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed in.

In the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (S208), first, each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired. (S251). Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is currently in the probability change period (high probability gaming state) (S252). It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not it is the probability variation period is executed by determining whether or not the probability variation counter 203m is on. The probability variation counter 203m is set to ON based on the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot D and the jackpot E. On the other hand, it is set to off based on the start of the jackpot game.

If it is determined that the pachinko machine is in the probable change state (S252: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol, so the process proceeds to the process of S253. In the processing of S253, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S251 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 222A). Acquire (S253). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 500 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a one by one. As described above, six random number values of "5 to 10" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol in the probabilistic gaming state (special gaming state), and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and these random numbers. If it matches the random number value that is the hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After acquiring the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S255.

On the other hand, in the process of S252, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal gaming state of the special symbol (S252: No), the process of S254 is executed. In the process of S254, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S251 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (S254). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 500 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a one by one. Five random numbers of "0 to 4" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol in the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state), and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the random numbers that hit these. If it matches the numerical value, it is judged to be a big hit of a special symbol. After acquiring the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S255.

In the processing of S255, whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S253 or S254 is the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, the value of the acquired special hit random number counter C1 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a are displayed. (S255), and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S255: Yes), the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S251. Based on the above, the display mode at the time of a big hit is set (S256). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S251 is compared with the random number value stored in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2, and the jackpot of two types of special symbols (((() Among the jackpot D and jackpot E)), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined that it is a jackpot D (16R probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", the jackpot E (See FIG. 223 (c)).

In this process of S256, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit D, jackpot E). Further, the jackpot type (big hit D, jackpot E) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined based on the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1 for normal use (S257). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S257, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. Specifically, when the jackpot type determined this time is jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot D, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 50", normal reach, "51 to 250". If it is within the range of ", the fluctuation pattern of super reach is determined.

In the fluctuation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the fluctuation time of the third symbol for notifying the hit / fail determination result, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variation display mode actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the fluctuation time and the hit / fail determination result. The main control device 110 is configured so that even if the display mode of the out-of-reach is used, the voice lamp control device 113 can switch between the reach display mode and the non-reach display mode as long as the fluctuation time is the same. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and the production can be diversified.

For example, as the variation pattern for disengagement, various types of "short disengagement", "long disengagement", "disengagement normal reach", and "disengagement super reach" are specified. As the fluctuation pattern shared by jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot D, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined.

On the other hand, in the process of S255, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S255: No), the display mode at the time of out of alignment is set (S258). In the process of S258, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-order symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. The fluctuation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the above.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S259). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S258, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is confirmed, and the normal reach and super are based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. Determine the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as reach.

When the processing of S257 or the processing of S259 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S257 or the process of S259 is set (S260). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S257 or the process of S259 is set (S261). When the processing of S261 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing (S104).

Next, the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 241. FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (S213). This special symbol 1 variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 239) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and is a process of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery (win / fail determination) for "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed in.

In this special symbol 1 variation start process (S214), as in the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209), the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a acquired by the process of S271 is stored in the execution area. Each value of the hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 is acquired (S271).

Next, it is determined whether the gaming state is currently in the probabilistic change period (high probability gaming state) (S272). If it is determined that the gaming state is in the probabilistic change period (S272: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 has a special symbol. Since it is in a probabilistic state, the process proceeds to S273. In the process of S273, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S271 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (S273). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 500 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a one by one. As described above, 11 random numbers of "5 to 10" are set as the random number values that are the big hits of the special symbol, and the values of the special hit random number counter C1 and the random number values that are the hits match. In some cases, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S275.

On the other hand, in the process of S272, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the probable change state (S272: No), the process of S274 is executed. In the process of S274, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S271 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (S254). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 500 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a one by one. Five random numbers of "0 to 4" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol, and when the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the random number values of these hits match, the special symbol is set. It is determined that it is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S275.

In the processing of S275, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S273 or S274 is a big hit of the special symbol (S275), and if it is determined to be a big hit of the special symbol (S275: Yes), the display mode at the time of a big hit is set based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S271 (S276). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S271 is compared with the random number value stored in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1, and the jackpots (big hits) of four types of special symbols are compared. A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D), the jackpot type is determined. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined to be a jackpot A (6R probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 68", the jackpot B It is determined to be (16R probability variation jackpot), if it is in the range of "69 to 98", it is determined to be jackpot C (8R probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of "99", it is determined to be jackpot C. (See FIG. 223 (c)).

In the process of S276, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jacket A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined based on the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1 for normal use (S277). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S277, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. Specifically, when the jackpot type determined this time is jackpot A, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 50", it is normal reach, and if it is in the range of "51 to 250". Determine the fluctuation pattern of super reach.

In the fluctuation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the fluctuation time of the third symbol for notifying the hit / fail determination result, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variation display mode actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the fluctuation time and the hit / fail determination result. The main control device 110 is configured so that even if the display mode of the out-of-reach is used, the voice lamp control device 113 can switch between the reach display mode and the non-reach display mode as long as the fluctuation time is the same. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and the production can be diversified.

For example, as the fluctuation pattern for disconnection, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disengagement normal reach", "disengagement super reach", and "disengagement special reach" are specified. ing. As the fluctuation pattern shared by the jackpot A, the jackpot B, and the jackpot D, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined.

In the process of S275, if it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S275: No), the display mode at the time of out of alignment is set (S278). In the process of S278, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-design symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. The fluctuation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the above.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S279). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S278, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is confirmed, and the normal reach and super are based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. Determine the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as reach.

When the processing of S277 or the processing of S279 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S277 or the process of S279 is set (S280). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S277 or the process of S279 is set (S281). When the processing of S281 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing (S104).

Next, the small hit setting process (S222) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 242. FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing the small hit setting process (S222). This small hit setting process (S222) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 239) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and is an execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in, a process for determining whether or not a small hit is performed, and a scenario for a small hit performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is determined. It is a process.

In the small hit setting process (S222), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result this time is a small hit (S301). If it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S301: Yes), a small hit scenario is set based on the small hit scenario table 202g (S302). Next, the small hit medium flag 203g is set to ON (S303), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S301, if it is determined that the lottery result this time is not a small hit (S301: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the game state update process (S223) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 243. FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing the game state update process (S223). This game state update process (S223) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 239) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and the values of the probability variation counter 203 m and the time reduction / medium counter 203j are set. It is a process for executing the process of subtraction and updating the game state based on the subtracted value.

In the game state update process (S223), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203m is larger than 1 (S351). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203m is smaller than 1 (that is, 0) (S351: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203m is larger than 1 (S351: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203m is subtracted by 1 (S352). Next, in the process of S352, it is determined whether or not the value of the subtracted probability variation counter 203m is 0 (S353). When it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203m is 0 (S353: Yes), since it is the timing to end the probability change, a state command indicating a normal state is set (S354), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S353, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203m is not 0 (S353: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is larger than 1 (S355). If it is determined that it is smaller than 1 (that is, 0) (S355: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S355, when it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is larger than 1 (S355: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is subtracted by 1 (S356). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j subtracted in the process of S356 is 0 (S357). When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203j is 0 (S357: Yes), a state command indicating the transition to the latent state is set (S358), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S357, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203j is not 0 (S357: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 244. FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64, and if there is a starting winning, This is a process for holding a value indicated by various random number counters and a process for executing pre-reading of a lottery result in a special symbol from the values indicated by the held various random number counters.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of pending numbers N1 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball The value (N) of the number counter 203d is added by 1 (S404). Then, a hold ball number command of the first special symbol indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1301) of the main process (see FIG. 253) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S405, each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above. Is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, with respect to S408 to S414, in each of the processes of S401 to S406 described above, the process for winning the first winning opening 64 is only changed to the processing for winning the second starting opening 64b. Since the same processing is executed, the detailed description thereof will be omitted. When a game ball wins in the second winning opening 640, the values of the special hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 are acquired even when the game ball is stored as a reserved ball, and the corresponding special symbol 2 is obtained. It is stored in the empty hold area of the hold ball storage area 203b.

In this way, by acquiring the values of the special hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 similar to the first special symbol for the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640. Since the lottery can be executed using a random number common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the winning probability can be constant for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

After executing the process of S413, the look-ahead process is executed (S414). The details of the look-ahead process (S414) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 245, based on the values of various counters acquired for the ball entering the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Then, a process of determining in advance the result of each lottery executed at the start of the fluctuation is executed.

In the present embodiment, the value of each counter is configured to be selected based on the incoming ball, but it may be configured to be selected at the start of fluctuation. With such a configuration, a storage area for storing the value of each counter is not required until the start of fluctuation, and the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 can be suppressed. Further, among the counters, some counters (for example, only the fluctuation type counter CS1) may be configured to be acquired at the start of fluctuation. With this configuration, the counter related to the hit / miss judgment can be acquired at the time of entering the ball, and the counter not related to the hit / miss judgment can be acquired later, and the amount of data to be stored while maintaining the fairness of the game can be stored. It can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a look-ahead process (S414), which is one process in the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S414).

In the look-ahead process (FIG. 36, S414), first, the hit / fail determination at the start of fluctuation is determined based on the acquired value of the special hit random number counter C1 (S421). The hit / fail judgment at the start of fluctuation indicates whether the gaming state at the start of fluctuation is the normal gaming state (low probability) or the probabilistic gaming state (high probability gaming state). 203a, special symbol 2 It is determined by the hit / fail judgment and the hit type of the counter value that is variablely displayed before each counter value stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b.

In the process of S422, it is determined whether or not the determination result executed in the process of S421 is a hit (S422). When it is determined that the determination result is a hit (S422: Yes), it is determined whether the hit type is the jackpot A or based on the special hit type counter C2 (S423). If it is determined that the hit type is jackpot A (S423: Yes), a winning command indicating jackpot A is set (S424). On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type is jackpot B (S423: No), a winning command indicating that the jackpot is B is set (S425). Further, in the process of S422, when it is determined that the result of the determined hit / fail determination is out of order (S422: No), the out-of-winning command is set (S426).

In this way, the result of the hit / fail determination in advance before the start of fluctuation is output as a winning command to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the reserved ball is established, so that the voice lamp control device 113 can be used. It is possible to recognize the result of the hit / fail judgment and the type of hit in advance. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 may change the color of the reserved symbol to a color for notifying the winning / failing determination result (for example, the color of the reserved symbol may be changed to a color for notifying the winning / failing determination result) in advance to notify the player of the winning / failing determination result for the reserved ball based on the winning command. , An effect such as outputting a notification sound for notifying the hit / fail determination result in the reserved ball) can be executed. Further, as the winning command, one winning command is output for the reserved ball each time the reserved ball is established, so that the voice lamp control device 113 can also recognize the establishment of the reserved ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 245, a look-ahead process (S407), which is one process in the start winning process (see S105 in FIG. 244) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S407).

In this look-ahead process (S407), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new prize in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new prize in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the winning is a winning of the first special symbol (S502).

In the process of S502, when it is determined that the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (S502: Yes), it is based on the special symbol big hit random number table 202a1, the special figure 1 big hit type selection table 202d1 and the small hit random number table 202e. Then, the lottery result, the big hit type and the small hit type are acquired (S503), and the process proceeds to S504. In the process of S504, the prize information command including the big hit determination result, the big hit type, the small hit determination result, and the small hit type acquired in S503 (or S505) is set (S504), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S502, when it is determined that the winning is the winning of the second special symbol (S502: No), the lottery result is based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a and the special symbol 2 jackpot selection table 202d2. The jackpot type is acquired (S505), the process of S504 is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 246. FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation processing (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 238), and the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second winning opening 640 attached to the second winning opening 640 are performed. 1 This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640 and the like.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S601). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the first electric accessory 640 attached to the second winning opening 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. Includes what is being done. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number of holdings of variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604 :). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

Next, the normal symbol change start process is executed (S608), and this process is terminated. The normal symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 247. In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S609). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S637 or the process of S638 of FIG. 38 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

If the fluctuation time has not elapsed in the process of S609 (S609: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S609, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S609: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S610). In the processing of S610, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the processing of S707 of FIG. 247 or the processing of S710, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is displayed as the second symbol. The device 83 is set to display a stop display (lighting display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is out of order and the display mode is set by the process of S713 in FIG. 247, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). When the stop display is set by the process of S610, when the second symbol display update process (see S1307) of the main process (see FIG. 253) is executed next, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S707, the process of S710, or the process of S713 in FIG. 38.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process a hit of the ordinary symbol? Is determined (S611). If the result of this lottery is a hit of a normal symbol (S611: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the first electric accessory 640 attached to the second winning opening 640 is set (S612), and the operation command per normal figure is set. (S613), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the first electric accessory 640 is set by the process of S612, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1306) of the main process (see FIG. 253) is executed, the first electric motor is executed. The opening / closing control of the accessory 640 is started, and the opening / closing control of the first electric accessory 640 is continued until the opening time and the number of openings set in the process of S709 or the process of S712 of FIG. 247 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S611, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S611: No), the processes of S612 and S613 are skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the normal symbol variation start processing (S608) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 247. FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol change start processing (S608). This normal symbol change start process (S608) sets the setting at the start of change of the normal symbol executed in the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 246) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238). It is a process to execute.

It is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being hit (S701). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. It includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S701: Yes), the process proceeds to S704.

In the process of S701, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S701: No), it is determined whether or not it is in the probable change (S702). If it is not in the probable change (S702: No), the process proceeds to S704.

If the probability is changing (S702: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol. Based on the value of and the normal hit random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 222 (c)), the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S703). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 222 (c)) for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that it is a hit of a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 222 (c)).

In the processing of S704, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. , Based on the normal hit random number table 202c for low probability (see FIG. 222 (c)), the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S704). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 222 (c)) for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5", it is determined that it is a short hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "6", it is the long-time hit of the normal symbol. If it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary symbol (see FIG. 222 (c)).

In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is less likely to be a hit. This is because during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special gaming state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning opening 65a, so that the first electric accessory 640 attached to the second winning opening 640 This is to prevent the ball that has been opened and tried to win the specific winning opening 65a from entering the second winning opening 640 as much as possible. Since the specific winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the second winning opening 640, even if the ball is suppressed from entering the second winning opening 640 during the big hit of the special symbol, the second winning opening Many balls enter the 640. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the second winning opening 640 becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S703 or S704 is a hit of the normal symbol (S705), and if it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol (S705: Yes). , It is determined whether the type of hit of the normal symbol is a long-time hit (S706). When it is determined that the hit type of the normal symbol is a long-time hit (S706: Yes), the display mode for the long-time hit is set (S707). In the process of S707, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). Next, the variation pattern command per normal figure length is set (S708), the opening time and the number of times of the first electric accessory 640 are set to 2 seconds × 2 times (S709), and the process proceeds to S715.

When it is determined in the process of S706 that the type of hit of the normal symbol is normal hit (S706: No), the display mode at the time of normal hit is set (S710). Next, a variation pattern command per normal figure is set (S711). The opening period of the first electric accessory 640 attached to the second winning opening 640 is set to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to one (S712), and the process proceeds to S636.

In the process of S705, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S705: No), the display mode at the time of out of alignment is set (S713). In the process of S713, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of deviation is completed, the deviation pattern command is set (S714), and the process proceeds to S715.

In the process of S715, it is determined whether or not the probability change is in progress (S715), and if the probability change is in progress (S715: Yes), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S716). , End this process. On the other hand, if the process of S715 is not probable (S715: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S717), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the time of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further. Since the release period of the second winning opening 640 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640.

In this embodiment, the opening time and the number of opening times per long time are set to the same operation as the case where the normal symbol is hit in the probable change state and the time saving state, but the operation is not limited to this, and the opening time and the number of opening times are different. It may be configured to be set.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 248. FIG. 248 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, and when the ball has passed, it is normal. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the hit random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the first through gate 66 (S801). Here, the passage of the sphere at the first through gate 66 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the sphere has passed through the first through gate 66 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of holding the variation display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S803).

Whether the sphere has passed through the first through gate 66 (S801: No), or even if the sphere has passed through the first through gate 66, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4. If not (S803: No), the process proceeds to S806. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the first through gate 66 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter The value (M) of 203f is added by 1 (S804). Then, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set to the first of the empty hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4 area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area (S805), and the process proceeds to S806. In the process of S805, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area. Next, the normal map look-ahead process (S806) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, the general drawing look-ahead process will be described with reference to FIG. 249 (S806). FIG. 249 is a flowchart showing the contents of this normal map look-ahead process (S806). In the normal figure look-ahead process (S806), first, the pre-determination based on the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is executed (S901). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 newly stored in the process of S805 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal hit random number table 202c.

Next, the hit pre-determination result and the fluctuation time determination result are acquired based on the pre-determination result (S902). After that, the general drawing prize information command is set (S903), and this process is terminated.

Next, the other winning process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 250. FIG. 250 is a flowchart showing the contents of the other winning process (S109). This other winning process (S109) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 238), determines whether or not a ball has entered in the specific winning opening 65a and the specific outro, and if there is a ball, it is determined. This is the process for setting the command.

In the other winning process (S109), first, it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the specific winning opening 65a (S1001). When it is determined that there is a prize in the specific prize opening 65a (S1001: Yes), the specific prize command is set and the process proceeds to S1003. On the other hand, in the process of S1001, when it is determined that there is a prize in the specific winning opening (S1001: No), the process of S1002 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1003.

After executing the process of S1001 or S1002, it is determined whether or not there is a ball entering the specific outro (S1003). When it is determined that there is a ball entering in the specific outro (S1003: Yes), a specific out ball entering command is set (S1004), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1003, when it is determined that there is no ball entering the specific outro (S1003: No), the process of S1004 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S801) as a setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process shifts to S913. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the processing is also shifted to S913 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and even in such a case, the process is transferred to S913. As will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 253, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S913, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S913). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S914, S915) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S914, S915) is executed. Further, the initialization process (S914, S915) of the RAM 203 is also executed when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S914, S915), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S914), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S915). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S911.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power off occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), a status command is transmitted based on the long-time open flag 203i (S908). Next, while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203, the power cutoff occurrence information is cleared (S909). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (S910), and the process proceeds to S911. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S911, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S912), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 253, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1301 to S1307 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1310 and S1311 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is input to each control device (periphery) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1301). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading processing of S131 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 238) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls is corresponded to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 239) and the start winning process (see FIG. 244) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning command set in the start winning processing and the look-ahead processing (see FIG. 245) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1302). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1303), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1304). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1304) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, when the special symbol is in the small hit state, the small hit effect is executed, and the small hit control process for opening or closing the third winning opening 82 of the third electric accessory is executed (S1305). In the jackpot control process, the third winning opening 82 is opened for each round in the small hit state, and whether the maximum opening time of the third winning opening 82 has elapsed or whether the specified number of balls have won in the third winning opening 82 is determined. judge. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the third winning opening 82 is closed. The opening and closing of the third winning opening 82 is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In this embodiment, the small hit control process (S1305) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the first electric accessory 640 attached to the second winning opening 640 is executed (S1305). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the first electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S612 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 246), the opening / closing control of the first electric accessory 640a is started. .. The opening / closing control of the first electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S709 or S712 of FIG. 247 in the normal symbol variation start processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1306). In the first symbol display update process, the process of S257 or S259 of the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 240), or the process of S277 or S279 of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 241) When the variation pattern is set, the variation display according to the variation pattern is started by the first symbol display device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, the process of S257 or S259 of the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 240), or the process of S277 or S279 of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 241). When the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern set by the processing ends, the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, and the processing of S256 of the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 208) or The stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the process of S258, the process of S276 of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 241), or the process of S278. (Lighting display).

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1307). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S716 or the process of S717 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 247), the variation display is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the symbol of "○" and the symbol of "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S610 of the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 246), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S707 or the process of S710 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 247) after ending the variable display. (Lighting display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1308), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1308: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1309). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1309: Yes), the process is shifted to S1301 and each process after S1301 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if a predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1309: No), the initial time is reached until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. The value random number counter CINI1, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1310, S1311).

First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1310). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1302 (S1311).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1301 to S1307 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special hit random number counter C1). (Initial value of, initial value of random number counter C4 per normal) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the process of S1308, if the power off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1308: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 40 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1312 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1312), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmit (S1313). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1314), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1315), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1308 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1301 to S1307, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1310 and S1311 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1301. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1301 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S901). By setting a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1301. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S2204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 254. FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S2204). This jackpot control process (S2204) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 257), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a specific winning opening (see FIG. 257). Large opening port) This is a process for opening or closing 65a.

In the jackpot control process (S1304), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot scenario is set (S1401). If it is determined that the jackpot scenario has not been set (S1401: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1401 that the jackpot scenario is set (S1401: Yes), the jackpot scenario is updated (S1402), and it is determined whether it is the timing to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (S1403). ). More specifically, in the processing of S1402, 1 is added to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown), and in the processing of S1403, the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown) starts the opening of the jackpot scenario. Determine if the value corresponds to.

If it is determined in the process of S1403 that it is the timing to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (S1403: Yes), the jackpot opening command is set (S1404), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the timing of the opening start of the jackpot scenario is not (S1403: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S1405).

In the process of S1405, if it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S1405: Yes), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot is set (S1406), and the number of newly started rounds is set. The indicated round number command is set (S1407), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1405, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S1405: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S1405: No). S1408). Here, in this control example, when a predetermined number (for example, 5) of balls are won in total while the specific winning opening 65a is open, or the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a elapses for a predetermined time. If so, it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the round end condition of the specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S1408: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed by the processing of S1409 (the opening / closing plate 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set. Set the solenoid to off so that it is in the closed state), and end this process. The above-mentioned discrimination processing from S140 to S1409 is repeatedly executed for the number of rounds of the jackpot set in the jackpot scenario.

On the other hand, in the process of S1409, if it is determined that the round end condition of the currently executed round is not satisfied (S1409: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1410), and the ending effect is produced. If it is the start timing of (S1410: Yes), the ending command for big hit is set (S1411), and this process is terminated. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1301) of the main process (see FIG. 253) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1410, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1410: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1412). Here, the end timing of the jackpot indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed. If it is determined in the processing of S1412 that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1412: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is set based on the current jackpot type (S1413), and the probability changes based on the jackpot type. The value of the counter 203m is set (S1414), the jackpot middle flag 203n is set to off (S1415), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1412, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the end of the big hit (S1412: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 255, a small hit control process (S1305), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 253) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing the contents of this small hit control process (S1305).

In the small hit control process (S1305), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit scenario is set (S1501). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the process of S1604 of the special figure 2 out-of-order stop process (see FIG. 45) is executed and the small hit scenario is set. If the small hit scenario is not set in the process of S1501 (S1501: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the small hit scenario is set in the process of S1501 (S1501: Yes), the small hit scenario is updated (S1502), and it is determined whether it is the timing to start the opening of the small hit scenario (S1503). More specifically, in the processing of S1502, 1 is added to the counter value of the small hit scenario counter (not shown), and in the processing of S1503, the counter value of the small hit scenario counter (not shown) is the small hit scenario. Determine if the value corresponds to the opening start of.

If it is determined in the process of S1503 that it is the timing to start the opening of the small hit scenario (S1503: Yes), the small hit opening command is set (S1504), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening start of the small hit scenario (S1503: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing of the round start of the small hit scenario (S1505).

In the process of S1505, if it is determined that it is the timing to start the round of the small hit scenario (S1505: Yes), the opening of the third winning opening 82 is set (S1506), and then the round start command is set (S1507). ), This process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the round start of the small hit scenario (S1505: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S1508). Here, in this control example, when a predetermined number (for example, 5) of balls are won in total while the third winning opening 82 is open, or the opening period of the third winning opening 82 is a predetermined time. If it has passed, it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied.

If it is determined in the processing of S1508 that the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S1508: Yes), the third winning opening 82 is set to be closed in the processing of S1509. End the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round end condition of the third winning opening 82 is not satisfied (S1508: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1510).

If it is determined in the process of S1510 that it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1510: Yes), the ending command for small hits is set (S1511), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1301) of the main process (see FIG. 253) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect indicating the end of the small hit is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1510, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1510: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small hit (S1512). Here, the end timing of the small hit indicates the case where the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed.

If it is determined in the process of S1512 that it is the end timing of the small hit (S1512: Yes), the small hit medium flag 203 g is set to off (S1513), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the small hit (S1513: No), this process is terminated.

<Control processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 256 to 273, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 256. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of S2119 is performed by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") (see FIG. 257). ) Is started in the middle of execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 257, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S2116 in FIG. 257), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S2119. The power cutoff processing flag is turned on before the power cutoff process is executed, and the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off after the power cutoff process is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of S2119 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S2002: No), the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S2119 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of S2118 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to the process of S2208.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S2002: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the voice lamp control device 113 is being executed during the power-off processing of S2119. MPU221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S2006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2119 is executed (see S2118 in FIG. 259). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S2119 is executed, the process of S2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S2119 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010), and then an interrupt is performed. Set the permission (S2011) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S2008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the processing of S2008 via the processing of S2004 to S2006 is started. This is the case when the process is reached or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power cutoff command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009, which is the clearing process of the work area of RAM223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S2010, the initial value of RAM223 is set (S2010), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S2011), the process shifts to the main process. After that, it is determined whether or not a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2012). It should be noted that this state command is a command set in the process of S1208 of the start-up process (see FIG. 252) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. If it is determined in the process of S2012 that the state command has been received (S2012: Yes), the information indicating the received state command is set in the state setting area 223 g, and this process is terminated (S2013).

In this way, when the power is turned on, the main control device 110 outputs a command that can determine whether or not the normal symbol has been hit for a long time, so that the voice lamp control device 113 also determines the state. Can be done.

It should be noted that the reason for skipping the clearing process of S2009 is that when the processing of S2008 is reached via the processing of S2004 to S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S2004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 257, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S2101 this time was executed (S2101), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S2101: No), the process of S2102 to S2113 is not performed and the process proceeds to the process of S2114. In the process of S2101, whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is mainly related to display (effect) in S2102 to S2113, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S2114, the variation display setting process of S2115, and the process of updating various counter values (not shown) in a short cycle. That is, by executing the processing of S2114 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception omission of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S2115 in a short cycle, it is received by the command determination processing. Based on the command, the settings related to the variable effect can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S2103 to S2115 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2102). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process shifts to the process of S2105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S2105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, the hold lamp (not shown) is turned on according to the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a, the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b, and the normal hold ball number counter 223c. Is done.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process to set to perform the production. The details of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107) will be described later with reference to FIG. 271.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S2108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S2109, the liquid crystal display effect execution management process is executed (S2110), and the process proceeds to the process of S2111. In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81. The details of the liquid crystal display effect execution management process (S2110) described above will be described later with reference to FIG. 272.

When the processing of S2110 is completed, the operation effect management processing is executed (S2111). The details of this operation effect management process (S2111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 273, but the effect mode displayed during the operation effect depends on whether or not the operation means (frame button 22) is operated. The process for making it variable is executed.

After executing the operation effect management process (S2111), the operation control process (S2112) is executed. In this motion control process (S2112), motion control of various movable accessories for effect provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is executed. The operation control of the movable accessories for various effects is set based on the lottery result of the special symbol, the lottery result of the normal symbol, the operation result of the operation means (frame button 22), the game result during the jackpot game, and the like. It is executed according to the contents of the operation scenario of the movable accessory, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the processing of S2112 is completed, the counter update processing is executed (S2113). In this counter update process (S2113), a process for updating the value of a counter (timer) for timekeeping information, for example, an operation valid timer 223n, which is necessary when executing various effects, is executed.

When the processing of S2113 is completed, the command determination processing is executed next (S2114). The details of this command determination process (S2114) will be described later with reference to FIG. 258. After the command determination process (S2114) is executed, the variable display setting process is executed (S2115). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 267.

When the processing of S2115 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2116). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2116 (S2116: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S2118), and the power-off process is executed (S2119). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (S2120), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2116 (S2116: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2117), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2117: No), the process returns to the process of S2101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2117: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 258. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S2114). This command determination process (S2114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 257) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. ..

In the command determination process (S2114: FIG. 258), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the main control device 110 is used. It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (S2201). When the variation pattern command is received (S2201: Yes), the variation pattern reception process is executed (S2202), and this process is terminated. The details of the variation pattern reception process (S2202) will be described later with reference to FIG. 259.

On the other hand, in the process of S2201, when the fluctuation pattern command is not received (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not the stop type command is received (S2203). When the stop type command is received (S2203: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2204), the stop type is extracted from the received command (S2205), and this process is terminated. ..

If the stop type command is not received in the process of S2203 (S2203: No), it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command is received (S2206). When the hold ball number command is received (S2206: Yes), the hold ball number is extracted from the received command, and the corresponding special symbol hold ball number counter (special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a, special symbol 2 hold ball count counter). It is stored (S2207) in the number counter 223b), and this processing is terminated. Here, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. Stored. Further, when the reserved ball number command indicating the reserved ball number of the normal symbol is received, the information for indicating the reserved ball number is stored in the normal reserved ball number counter.

On the other hand, in the process of S2206, when the reserved ball number command is not received (S2206: No), it is determined whether or not the winning-related command is received (S2208). When the winning-related command is received (S2208: Yes), the winning information-related processing is started (S2209), and this processing is terminated. The details of the prize information-related processing (S2209) will be described later with reference to FIG. 260, but the prize command output from the main control device 110 (the prize command corresponding to the special symbol, the prize command corresponding to the normal symbol). Based on the above, the winning information included in the winning command is pre-determined, and the process of executing the effect (look-ahead effect) based on the pre-determined result and the process of temporarily storing the pre-determined result are executed. Will be done.

In the process of S2208, if the winning-related command is not received (S2208: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning-related command is received (S2210), and if it is determined that the winning-related command is received (S2210: Yes). , The hit-related process is executed (S2211), and this process is terminated. This hit-related process (S2211) will be described later with reference to FIG. 263.

In the process of S2210, when it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S2210: No), it is determined whether or not the stop command has been received (S2212). If it is determined that the stop command has been received (S2212: Yes), the stop process is executed (S2213), and this process is hunted. This stop process (S2213) will be described later with reference to FIG. 264. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received in the process of S2212 (S2212: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 259, the details of the variation pattern reception process (S2202), which is one of the processes in the command determination process (S2114: FIG. 258), will be described. FIG. 259 is a flowchart showing this fluctuation pattern reception process. In this variation pattern reception process (S2202), a variation pattern (variation effect) of a special symbol is set using the variation pattern selection table 222a based on the received variation pattern command. Further, when the variation pattern command indicating the result of the ordinary symbol lottery is received, it is determined whether or not the variation effect of the special symbol can be executed based on the lottery result of the ordinary symbol.

In the variation pattern reception process (S2202: FIG. 259), first, it is determined whether the variation pattern command received this time is for a special figure (S2301), and the variation pattern command for the special figure, that is, the variation pattern of the special symbol is shown. When it is determined that the command is a command (S2301: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2302), and the fluctuation pattern is extracted using the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a based on the received command. Then (S2303), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2301, when it is determined that the variation pattern command received this time is not for the special figure, that is, when it is determined that the variation pattern command for the normal figure is received (S2301: No), then, It is determined whether the fluctuation pattern command for the normal map received this time is a fluctuation pattern command indicating that the normal map length per (long open) is won (S2304). In the processing of S2304, if it is determined that a fluctuation pattern command indicating that the command has been won per the length of the normal map (per long open) has been received (S2304: Yes), then the normal map production prohibition flag 223u is set to ON. If it is determined whether or not the command is set (S2305), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S2305: No), the normal map effect enable flag 223t is set to ON, and this process is terminated.

In the processing of S2304, when it is determined that a command other than the fluctuation pattern command indicating that the command is won per the length of the normal figure (per long opening) is received (S2304: No), or in the processing of S2305, the normal drawing production is prohibited. If it is determined that the flag 223u is set to ON (S2305: Yes), this process ends without setting the normal map effectable flag 223t to ON.

Next, with reference to FIG. 260, a prize information-related process (S2209), which is one process in the command determination process (S2114: see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing the winning information-related processing (S2209). This winning information-related process (S2209) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the prize information-related processing (S2209), first, it is determined whether the received prize information command is a command indicating the prize information of the special symbol (the prize information command for the special figure) (S2401), and the prize information command for the special figure is used. If it is determined to be (S2401: Yes), the winning information included in the received winning information command is read (S2402), the winning / failing judgment result included in the read winning information, and the acquired value of the hold rank counter 223p1. The hold rank is selected based on the hold rank selection table 222b using and (S2403).

Then, the hold rank selected in the process of S2403 is stored in the place corresponding to the winning information command received this time in the hold effect information storage area 223m (S2404). After that, the hold mode selection process (S2405) and the treasure box mode selection process (S2406) are executed. Here, the hold mode selection process (S2405) executes a process for setting a look-ahead effect (hold effect) that changes the display mode of the corresponding hold symbol based on the winning information read this time. A detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 261. Further, the treasure box mode selection process (S2406) executes a process for setting a look-ahead effect (treasure box effect) that changes the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 based on the winning information read this time, and the details thereof. The description will be described later with reference to FIG. 262.

After finishing the processing of S2406, next, it is determined whether or not the winning information read this time contains the winning information (S2407), and if it is determined that the winning information is included (S2407: Yes), the normal drawing effect is produced. The prohibition flag 223u is set to ON (S2408), the received winning information is stored in the corresponding position of the winning information storage area 223f (S2409), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2401, if it is determined that the winning information command received this time is for a normal symbol (normal figure) (S2401: No), the process of S2402 to S2408 is skipped and the present process is terminated. Although detailed explanation is omitted, when the prize information command for general drawing is received in the prize information related process (S2209), whether or not the received prize information command includes information is checked. And, if the hit information is included, it is configured to determine whether or not the hit information in which the long open hit game is executed is included, and further, the normal map fluctuation time is determined. The result is stored in the general drawing area of the winning information storage area 223f.

This makes it possible to determine in advance how many seconds the long open per game will be executed by hitting the normal symbol, so the lottery result of the normal symbol can be spread over multiple normal symbol fluctuations as in the case of the special symbol. It is possible to execute the effect (normal map look-ahead effect) that suggests. In addition, since it is possible to determine whether or not the game per long opening is executed during the special symbol change period during execution, for example, an effect based on the normal figure change is interrupted during the out-of-order change of the special symbol. It is also possible.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 in which a lottery of a plurality of different symbols (a lottery of a special symbol and a lottery of a normal symbol) is executed in parallel, the fluctuation is based on the symbol fluctuation on the side which is the lottery result advantageous to the player. Since the effect (variable effect executed by the third symbol display device 81) can be executed, the interest of the game can be improved. Further, since it is possible to suppress the execution of the variable effect based on the lottery result (outlier) that is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to play.

Next, with reference to FIG. 261, the contents of the hold mode selection process (S2405) executed in the prize information-related process (see FIG. 260) will be described. FIG. 261 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hold mode selection process (S2405). In this hold mode selection process (S2405), a process for setting a hold effect, which is an effect of changing the display mode of the hold symbol based on the winning information received this time, is executed.

When the hold mode selection process (S2405) is executed, first, it is determined whether the hold effect in-progress flag 223q is set to on (S2501), and it is determined that the hold effect in progress flag 223q is not set to on. (S2501: No), that is, when it is determined that the hold effect is not currently set (executed), it is possible to set a new hold effect, so S2502 to set the hold effect. The process of S2506 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S2501, when it is determined that the hold effect in progress flag 223q is set to ON (S2501: Yes), a new hold effect cannot be set (executed). This process is terminated by skipping the processes of S2502 to S2506.

When the processing of S2502 is executed, the holding rank stored in the holding effect information storage area is read (S2502), and the holding rank read by the processing of S2502 and the acquired value of the holding mode counter 223p2 are used. The holding mode is selected based on the holding mode selection table 222c (S2503).

Then, a display hold command corresponding to the selected hold mode is set (S2504), the selected hold mode is stored in the hold effect information storage area 223 m (S2505), and the hold mode for varying the display mode of the hold symbol is selected. If this is the case, the hold effect in progress flag 223q is set to ON (S2506), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in this control example, it is configured to be able to execute a hold effect that changes the display mode of the hold symbol when the winning information is acquired. Further, by using the hold effect in progress flag 223q, it is possible to suppress duplicate setting of the hold effect.

In this control example, while the hold effect is being executed (set), the look-ahead effect (hold effect) is prevented from being executed (set) based on the newly received winning command. ) Are executed more than once, and it is configured so that it is possible to suppress the execution of an effect that is difficult for the player to understand, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a predetermined number of times (for example,). 2) may be configured to be executed in duplicate with the pending effect up to the upper limit.

Further, in this control example, the process of selecting the hold effect is always executed when the hold effect in progress flag 223q is not set to ON, but the process is not limited to this, and for example, a winning command is used. Is executed when the winning information-related process (see S2209 in FIG. 260) is executed, and when the lottery result is the predetermined lottery result, the above-mentioned hold mode selection process is executed. It may be configured in. By configuring the process for setting the hold effect to be randomly executed in this way, the hold pattern for which the hold effect has not been executed is not executed even though the hold mode selection process is executed. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the hold mode selection process has not been executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the variable effect of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol for which the hold effect has not been executed.

Further, once the hold effect is executed, a predetermined condition (for example, a condition that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 10 times or a condition that is satisfied when the time elapses 10 minutes) is satisfied. A discriminating means for determining whether or not the condition is satisfied may be provided so that the new hold mode selection process is not executed until it is determined by the discriminating means that the predetermined condition is satisfied. This makes it possible to set a period during which the hold effect is not intentionally executed.

In addition, in this control example, when the hold effect for changing the display mode of the hold symbol is selected in the hold mode selection process (when other than "-" is selected by the hold mode selection table 222c (see FIG. 228)). Is configured to turn on the hold effect in progress flag 223q, but for example, it is configured to set the hold effect in progress flag 223q to on even when the display mode of the hold symbol is not changed in the hold mode selection process. You may. In this case, it is advisable to provide a period during which the above-mentioned reserved effect is not intentionally executed. With this configuration, it is possible to set a period in which the display mode of the reserved symbol is not changed more randomly, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 262, the contents of the hold mode selection process (S2405) executed in the prize information-related process (see FIG. 260) will be described. FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing the contents of the treasure box mode selection process (S2406). In this treasure box mode selection process (S2406), a process for setting (executing) a treasure box effect (see FIG. 210 (b)), which is an effect of changing the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 based on the winning information received this time. Is executed.

When the treasure box mode selection process (S2406) is executed, first, it is determined whether the treasure box effecting flag 223r is set to ON (S2601), and it is determined that the treasure box effecting flag 223r is not set to ON. (S2601: No), that is, when it is determined that the treasure box effect has not been set (executed), a new treasure box effect can be set. Therefore, S2602 to S2606 for setting the treasure box effect. Executes the processing of. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2601 that the treasure chest effect in progress flag 223r is set to ON (S2601: Yes), a new treasure box effect cannot be set (executed). This process is terminated by skipping the processes of S2602 to S2606.

When the process of S2602 is executed, the notification determination result is read from the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f (S2602), and then the holding mode is changed from the information stored in the holding effect information storage area 223m. Information indicating the presence / absence (information indicating whether or not the pending symbol is executed for the pending effect) is read out (S2603). Then, based on the treasure box mode selection table 222d using the hit / fail determination result read in the process of S2602, the information indicating the presence / absence of the hold mode change read in the process of S2603, and the acquired value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3. Select the treasure chest mode (S2604).

Then, the treasure box command for the lamp corresponding to the selected treasure box mode is set (S2605), the selected treasure box mode is stored in the corresponding place in the hold effect information storage area 223 m (S2606), and the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 is displayed. When the treasure box mode to be changed is selected, the treasure box effecting flag 223r is set to ON (S2606), and this process is terminated.

The display mode of the treasure chest accessory 750 is variably controlled based on the lamp treasure chest command set by the process of S2605. The voice lamp control device 113 may have a means for variably controlling the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750, or a control device different from the voice lamp control device 113 may be used.

As described above, in this control example, the treasure box mode selection process (see S2406 in FIG. 262) is performed in the prize information related process (see S2209 in FIG. 260) in the same manner as the above-mentioned hold mode selection process (see S2405 in FIG. 261). See). Then, when selecting the treasure box mode in which the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 is changed in this treasure box mode selection process, it is based on the determination result of whether or not the display mode of the target reserved symbol is variably displayed. It is configured to select the treasure box mode, and further, in one prize information related process (S2209 in FIG. 260), after executing the hold mode selection process (S2405 in FIG. 261), the treasure box mode setting process (FIG. It is configured to execute S2406) of 262. This makes it possible to reliably set an appropriate effect.

Next, the contents of the hit-related process (S2211 in FIG. 263) will be described with reference to FIG. 263. FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related process (S2211). This hit-related process (S2211) is executed by the command determination process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2114 in FIG. 258), and is related to the hit (big hit, small hit) from the main control device 110. It is executed when a command is received.

In this control example, when the big hit C is won by lottery of a special symbol and when the small hit is won, the third electric accessory 82a (see FIG. 207) provided in the left area of the game board 13 is opened. When a winning game (left-handed game) is executed and the jackpots A, B, D, and E are won by lottery of special symbols, the variable winning device 65 provided in the right area of the game board 13 is opened. It is configured to execute a hit game (right hit game), and in the hit-related process (S2211 in FIG. 263), a display command for displaying information about the hit game on the third symbol display device 81 is set. The processing and the different winning effects depending on the type of winning game to be executed are configured to be executed.

When the hit-related process (S2211 in FIG. 263) is executed, first, it is determined whether the command received this time is a command related to a big hit C or a small hit, that is, a command related to a left-handed game (S2701). ). Here, if it is determined that the command is related to the big hit C or the small hit (S2701: Yes), the processes of S2703 to S2709 are executed in order to set various display contents related to the left hit game. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command received this time is not a command related to the big hit C or a small hit, that is, a command related to the right hit game (S2701: No), various display contents related to the right hit game are displayed. In order to set, the right attacker jackpot related process is executed (S2702), and this process is terminated. The contents of the right attacker jackpot related processing (S2702) will be described later with reference to FIG. 264, and first, the processing of S2703 to S2709 for setting various display contents related to the left hit game will be described.

When the process of S2703 is executed, it is determined whether the command received this time is a hit start command indicating the start of a hit (S2703), and if it is determined to be a hit start command (S2703: Yes), the hit type. The roulette effect corresponding to (see FIG. 213) is determined (S2704), the display command corresponding to the determined roulette effect is set (S2705), and this process is terminated.

Here, the roulette effect described above with reference to FIG. 213 is an effect executed for a predetermined period (5 seconds), and when the small hit game is executed, the small hit game period (5 seconds). That is, it is executed using the opening period (2 seconds), the round game period (1.5 seconds), and the ending period (1.5 seconds) of the small hit game. When the jackpot (big hit C) game is executed, 5 seconds after the jackpot game is started, that is, the opening period (2 seconds) and a part of the round game period of the first round (from the start of the round game). 3 seconds).

In this control example, the same winning operation is executed during the period when the roulette effect is executed regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol. That is, in the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot C, the opening period is set to 2 seconds, and as the first round game, the third electric accessory 82a is opened for 1.5 seconds after the round game is started. Later, a round game is set in which the third electric accessory 82a is opened for 28.5 seconds after a closing period of 3 seconds (a period for closing the third electric accessory 82a).

With this configuration, while the roulette effect is being executed (while the small hit game or the first half of the big hit game corresponding to the big hit C is being executed), the content of the running hit game is being executed. Based on the above, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the hit game currently being executed is a big hit game or a small hit game. Further, as described above, as the first round game in the jackpot game, a closing period of 1.5 seconds is set after the execution period (5 seconds) of the roulette effect has elapsed. As a result, the third electric accessory 82a is not released from the time when the effect result of the roulette effect is displayed until the player recognizes the effect result, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 213, the type of the winning game being executed is notified to the player by the roulette effect. However, in addition to the roulette effect, the hit during execution is performed. It may be configured to execute a roulette effect (gasel roulette effect) that notifies the player of a hit type different from the type of the game. In this case, even though the big hit game is actually executed. , It is preferable to display the effect result indicating the small hit game as the effect result of the gasher roulette effect. As a result, it is possible to provide a player with an unexpected effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 263, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S2703, if it is determined that the command received this time is not a hit start command (S2703: No), then it is determined whether the command received this time is a round number command (S2706), and the number of rounds is determined. If it is determined to be a command (S2706: Yes), a display round number command is set based on the number of rounds indicated by the round number information included in the received round number command (S2707), and this process is terminated.

In the process of S2706, when it is determined that the command received this time is not a round number command (S2706: No), it is determined whether the command received this time is an ending command (S2708), and it is determined that it is an ending command. In the case (S2708: Yes), the display ending command is set (S2709), and this process is terminated. Also. If it is determined that the ending command has not been received in the process of S2708 (S2708: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, in the hit-related processing (see S2701 in FIG. 263), when it is determined that the hit-related command received this time is a command related to jackpots A, B, D, and E (S2701: No in FIG. 263), the command is executed. The contents of the right attacker jackpot-related process (S2702) will be described with reference to FIG. 264. FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing the contents of the right attacker jackpot related process (S2702).

In this control example, when the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 provided in the special winning device 550 in the right side area of the game board 13 is opened is executed, the pseudo jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165 is executed. (See FIG. 219). Then, in the right attacker jackpot related process (S2702), the process necessary for making the effect content of the pseudo jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165 correspond to the jackpot game (right hit game) actually executed is executed.

When the right attacker jackpot related process (S2702) is executed, first, it is determined whether the command received this time is a jackpot start command (S2801), and if it is determined to be a jackpot start command (S2801: Yes). , Set the display jackpot start command (S2802), and end this process.

In the process of S2801, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S2801: No), then it is determined whether the command received this time is a round number command (S2803), and it is a round number command. (S2803: Yes), a display round number command is set based on the number of rounds (S2804), an opening operation for releasing the pseudo attacker 165 is set (S2805), and this process is terminated. .. When the open operation is set in the process of S2805, the solenoid (shown) for operating the pseudo attacker 165 in the operation control process (see S2112) executed in the main process (see FIG. 257) of the voice lamp control device 113. Is set to ON, and the pseudo-attacker 165 is variably operated from a closed state in which it is difficult to enter the ball to an open state in which the ball is easy to enter.

In this way, the actual jackpot is configured so that the pseudo-attacker 165 opening operation is executed at the timing when the round number command for indicating that a new round game is started is received from the main control device 110. Since the game content and the pseudo jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165 can be made similar, the pseudo jackpot effect can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

In the process of S2803, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S2803: No), then it is determined whether the closing command has been received (S2806), and if it is determined that the closing command has been received, it is determined. (S2806: Yes), the closing operation of the pseudo attacker 165 is set (S2807), the information stored in the pseudo winning order storage area 223s is cleared (S2808), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2806, when it is determined that the closing command has not been received (S2806: No), it is determined whether the ending command has been received (S2809), and when it is determined that the ending command has been received (S2809). : Yes), set the display ending command (S2810), and end this process. Further, in the process of S2809, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S2809: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning-related command has been received (S2811).

Here, the prize-related commands are various commands output when the ball wins in the winning opening where the ball can win (win) when the player plays a right-handed game during the jackpot game. Specifically, a specific winning command for indicating that the ball has won in the specific winning opening 65a, a specific general winning command for indicating that the ball has won in the specific general winning opening 163, and a specific out opening 166. Indicates a specific out entry command to indicate that the ball has entered.

In this control example, there is a winning (winning) of the ball in both the winning opening where the winning ball is given based on the ball entering and the entry opening (out opening) where the winning ball is not given. The main control device 110 is configured to execute the determination, but the determination is not limited to this, and for example, a means for determining that a ball has entered the specific out port 166 is provided on the voice lamp control device 113 side. Is also good.

That is, in the case of a winning opening in which a prize ball must be awarded when the ball wins (wins), the main control device 110 wins the ball in order to execute a process for granting the prize ball. Since it has a configuration for discriminating, the configuration can be diverted. On the other hand, since there is no particular process that the main control device 110 must perform when a ball enters the specific out port 166, the configuration for determining that the ball has entered the specific out port 166 is a voice lamp control device. It may be provided on the 113 side. With such a configuration, the load of the control process of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

If it is determined that the winning-related command has been received in the processing of S2811 (S2811: Yes), the pseudo-attacker effect processing is executed (S2812), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2811, if it is determined that the winning-related command has not been received (S2811: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the contents of the pseudo-attacker effect processing (S2812) will be described with reference to FIG. 265. FIG. 265 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pseudo-attacker effect processing (S2812). In this pseudo-attacker effect processing (S2812), a process for setting various effects executed during the pseudo-big hit effect for opening the pseudo-attacker 165 is performed.

When the pseudo-attacker effect processing (S2812) is executed, first, the command received this time is a specific winning command, that is, a ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 208) of the variable winning device 65. It is determined whether or not the command indicating the above is received (S2901). Then, when it is determined that the specific winning command has been received (S2901: Yes), a pseudo winning effect is set after 0.5 seconds (S2902).

When the pseudo winning effect is set in this process, the winning sound is output from the voice output device 226 based on the setting information, and the ball to the specific winning opening 65a is output on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The acquisition information 831 for indicating the number of prize balls given based on the winning is displayed. In addition, the variable winning device 65 is made to perform an effect for indicating that the ball has won a prize for various effect devices provided in the pachinko machine 10.

After the processing of S2902 is completed, the timing at which the pseudo-winning effect set this time is executed is stored in the pseudo-winning order storage area 223s (S2903). Here, to explain the processing of S2903 in detail, in the pseudo-winning order storage area 223s, the timing at which the pseudo-winning effect is executed, that is, the timing at which the ball wins (reaches) the pseudo-attacker 165 is arranged in chronological order. It is a storage area for storing. The pseudo-winning order storage area 223s is provided with an area capable of storing 20 timing information corresponding to the order in which the pseudo-winning effect is executed, and the timing at which the pseudo-winning effect is executed is set. Timing information is stored in each area in the execution order of the pseudo-winning effect (pseudo-winning order) for each.

In this control example, since the distance (ball flow distance) from each winning opening (ball entry opening) provided in the special winning device 550 to the pseudo attacker 165 is different, each winning opening (ball entry opening) is configured. The order in which the ball wins at the entry slot) may differ from the order in which the ball reaches (wins) the pseudo-attacker 165. For example, 0.2 seconds from the time when the ball wins in the specific general winning opening 163. If the ball wins in the specific winning opening 65a later, the winning ball in the specific winning opening 65a that won later reaches the pseudo-attacker 165 first.

Therefore, the pseudo winning order storage area 223s stores the information stored in each area so that the timing information set later can be stored so as to interrupt the order of the plurality of timing information already stored. It is configured so that it can be easily shifted. Further, the upper limit of the timing information (30 pieces) stored in the pseudo winning order storage area 223s is configured to be larger than the winning number (10 pieces) which is a closing condition of the round game executed during the jackpot game. However, the timing information (normal timing information) stored in the number of winnings (10) that is the closing condition of the round game and the timing stored outside the number of winnings (10) that is the closing condition of the round game. It is configured to distinguish it from information (over timing information).

As a result, in addition to the timing information set corresponding to the ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game, the ball that has won (winning) the specific general winning opening 163 or the specific out opening 166. The correspondingly set timing information can also be reliably stored.

After finishing the processing of S2903, next, based on the information stored in the pseudo-winning order storage area 223s, the timing information in which the winning order of winning the pseudo-attacker 165 is stored in the area after 10 is stored, that is, over. An over pseudo-winning effect is set for the timing information (S2904), and this process ends.

As the over-pseudo-winning effect set in the process of S2904, for example, the voice mode of the winning sound output from the voice output device 226 is changed, or the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is over-winned. The effect of displaying the display mode indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is displayed, or the effect of performing an effect for indicating that the over-winning has been given to various effect devices provided in the pachinko machine 10 is applicable.

In the process of S2901, if it is determined that the command received this time is not a specific winning command (S2901: No), then it is determined whether the received command is a specific general winning command (S2905), and the specific general winning is given. If it is determined to be a command (S2905: Yes), a pseudo winning effect is set after 1.5 seconds (S2906), the above-mentioned processes of S2903 and S2904 are executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2905, when it is determined that the received command is not a specific general winning command (S2905: No), then it is determined whether the received command is a specific out-ball entry command (S2907), and the specification is made. If it is determined that the command is an out-ball entry command (S2907: Yes), a pseudo-winning effect is set after 1 second (S2908), the above-mentioned processes of S2903 and S2904 are executed, and this process is terminated. If it is determined in the process of S2907 that the specific out-ball entry command has not been received (S2907: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In this control example, the prize ball is given when the ball is won in the specific winning opening 65a and when the ball is won in the specific general winning opening 163, and the specific out opening is provided. When a ball wins in 166, the prize ball is not given. Therefore, in the pseudo-winning effect (S2902 and S2906 in FIG. 265) set based on the winning of the balls in the specific winning opening 65a and the specific general winning opening 163, the acquisition information 831 for indicating the number of winning balls is provided. In the pseudo winning effect (S2908 in FIG. 265) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and set based on the ball entering the specific out port 166, the acquisition information 831 for indicating the number of winning balls is the first. 3 It is configured so that it is not displayed on the symbol display device 81.

With this configuration, the display mode of the acquired information 831 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the pseudo jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165, and the number of prize balls actually paid out to the player. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a large error. Further, since many balls win the pseudo-attacker 165 during the pseudo-big hit effect, the game does not need to execute the process of updating the display mode of the acquired information 831 for each ball that wins the pseudo-attacker 165. The display mode of the acquired information 831 can be updated without giving a sense of discomfort to the person.

Further, in this control example, when updating the display mode of the acquired information 831, the minimum unit (for example, if it is a numerical value) until the value displayed in the acquired information 831 reaches the value corresponding to the set display mode. It is configured to be updated every "1"). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which ball the winning information is displayed based on, so that it is possible to provide the player with a less discomforting effect. ..

As described above, in this control example, as a pseudo jackpot effect, the display mode of the acquisition information 831 is updated based on the fact that the ball wins in the winning opening where the prize ball is generated, but the present invention is limited to this. Without, for example, a storage means for storing the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game, and acquisition information displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of prize balls stored in the storage means. An update means for executing the update process of 831, a discriminating means for determining the number of prize balls (the number of unreported prize balls) for which the process by the update means has not been executed, among the number of prize balls stored in the storage means. If the number of unreported prize balls is a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) or more, the update process may be periodically executed by the update means.

Further, the pseudo-attacker 165 is provided with a detecting means for detecting that a ball has won a prize, and when the detecting means detects the ball, the updating means is executed based on the number of prize balls stored in the above-mentioned storage means. It may be configured to execute the update process based on the detection that a ball has won a prize in each winning opening included in the special winning device 550.

Next, the contents of the stop processing (S2213) will be described with reference to FIG. 266. FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop process (S2213). In this stop process (S2213), a process for setting the display mode of the third symbol to be stopped and displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is executed according to the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol.

When this stop process (S2213) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special symbol variation (executed special symbol variation) corresponding to the current stop command is a special symbol per-special variation (big hit variation, small hit variation). Then (S2951), if it is determined that there is no fluctuation per special figure (S2951: No), then it is determined whether the normal map effecting flag 223v is set to ON (S2952), and the normal map effecting flag is set. If it is determined that 223v is set to ON (S2952: Yes), then it is determined whether the continuation flag 223x is set to ON (S2953).

That is, in the above-mentioned processes of S2951 to S2953, a process for determining whether or not the normal drawing effect is executed across the special figure stop timing of this time is executed. In the process of S2953, when it is determined that the continuation flag 223x is set to ON (S2953: Yes), that is, when the normal drawing effect is continuously executed even after the special figure fluctuation is stopped, the reduced third symbol (S2954), the stop display of the corresponding third symbol is set (S2955), and the process proceeds to S2957.

In this way, by configuring the reduced third symbol to be displayed when the normal symbol effect is continuously executed even after the special symbol fluctuation is stopped, it is difficult for the player to understand the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol. Therefore, the charge effect being executed for the player (see FIG. 212) is executed based on the special symbol lottery, or is executed based on the normal symbol lottery. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to discriminate whether it is, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S2951 when it is determined that the variation is per special figure (S2951: Yes), or in the process of S2952, the normal map effecting flag 223v is not set on (set to off). ) (S2952: No), since the charge effect was not executed during the execution of the special symbol change, the process proceeds to the process of S2955 without setting the reduced third symbol.

Further, when it is determined that the continuation flag 223x is not set to ON in the processing of S2953 (S2953: No), that is, when the normal symbol effect is completed during the current special symbol change, the normal third symbol is displayed. Since the stop display may be sufficient, the flag 223v during the normal drawing effect is set to off (S2956), and the process proceeds to S2955.

In the process of S2957, it is determined whether the special symbol change this time is a change subject to the hold effect (see FIG. 210 (a)) or the treasure box effect (see FIG. 210 (b)). Here, the determination is executed based on the information stored in the hold effect information storage area 223m. Then, when it is determined that the target variation is (S2957: Yes), the hold effect in progress flag 223q and the treasure box effect in progress flag 223r are set to off (S2958), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2957 that the change is not the target variation (S2957: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 267, the variation display setting process (S2115) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 267 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S2115). This variation display setting process (S2115) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 257) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the variation display setting process (S2115: FIG. 267), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S3001). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S3001: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so that the fluctuation pattern command is not received from S3006. Move to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S3001: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S3002), and the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the display variation pattern command is set. Obtained from RAM 223 (S3003).

Next, the variation effect setting process is executed (S3004), a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. (S3005). The content of the variation effect setting process executed in the process of S3004 will be described later with reference to FIG. 268.

By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, although not shown, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted. In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223f is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S3006.

In the process of S3006, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is on (S3006). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S3006: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S3006: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S3007), and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is set. Obtained from RAM 223 (S3008). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S3009), and the process proceeds to S3010.

In the process of S3010, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3010). .. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled. After the processing of Z2509 is executed, this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 268, the contents of the variation effect setting process (S3004), which is one process in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 267) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. .. FIG. 268 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation effect setting process (S3004). In this variation effect setting process (S3004), a process for setting a detailed effect mode (notice content) of the variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is executed.

When the variation effect setting process (S3004) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a probable change state (S3101). Here, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a probable change state based on the information set in the state setting area 223g. If it is determined in the process of S3101 that the current state is the probable change state (S3101: Yes), the display pattern command during the probable change is set based on the extracted fluctuation pattern (S3102), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3101 that the current state is not in the probable change state (S3101: No), then it is determined whether the flag 223v during the normal drawing effect is set to ON (S3103), and the flag is set to ON. When it is determined that the pattern is correct, that is, the normal symbol effect (charge effect based on the result of the normal symbol lottery) is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the previous special symbol change, and the normal symbol effect straddles the current special symbol change. If it is executed later (S3103: Yes), the charge effect setting process is executed (S3104), and this process is terminated.

The detailed contents of this charge effect setting process (S3104) will be described later with reference to FIG. 270, but based on the remaining period of the normal map effect and the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the special symbol variation this time. The effect mode of the continuously executed charge effect and the variable effect after the end of the charge effect is set.

On the other hand, in the process of S3103, when it is determined that the normal figure effecting flag 223v is not set to ON (S3103: No), it is determined whether or not the variation pattern acquired this time has an operation effect (S3105), and the operation is performed. If it is determined that there is an effect (S3105: Yes), the operation effect setting process is executed (S3106), and this process is terminated. The detailed contents of the operation effect setting process (S3106) will be described later with reference to FIG. 269.

In the process of S3105, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern acquired this time does not include the operation effect (S3105: No), then the charge effect (charge effect executed based on the special symbol lottery) is included. (S3107), if it is determined that the charge effect is included (S3107: Yes), the charge effect in progress flag 223y is set to ON (S3108), and this process is terminated. Here, by setting the charge effect in progress flag 223y to ON, it becomes possible to determine that it is the timing at which the normal figure effect can be executed.

Then, in the process of S3107, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern acquired this time does not include the charge effect (S3107: No), the hold mode selection process is executed (S3109), and the treasure box mode selection process is executed (S3109). S3110), this process is terminated. In the hold mode selection process (S3109), the same process as the hold mode selection process (S2405) described above is executed, and in the treasure box mode selection process (S3110), the same process as the treasure box mode selection process (S2406) described above is performed. Will be executed, so the detailed explanation will be omitted.

As described above, in this control example, the look-ahead effect (hold) is performed at the timing when the winning command of the special symbol is received and the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol is started, that is, the timing when the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the special symbol is changed. It is configured to perform production (directing, treasure chest directing).

Next, with reference to FIG. 269, the contents of the operation effect setting process (S3106) executed in the variation effect setting process (see S3004 in FIG. 268) will be described. FIG. 269 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation effect setting process (S3106). In this operation effect setting process (S3106), the preparation process according to the operation effect type included in the current variation pattern is executed.

When the operation effect setting process (S3106) is executed, first, it is determined whether the operation effect this time is the first operation effect (see FIG. 214) (S3201), and it is determined that the operation effect is the first operation effect (S3201). S3201: Yes) sets the operation command corresponding to the first operation effect (S3202), stores the first operation effect type in the operation effect type storage area (S3203), and sets the operation effect flag to ON (S3204). ), End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S3201, when it is determined that it is not the first operation effect (S3201: No), it is determined whether it is the second operation effect (S3205), and when it is determined that it is the second operation effect (S3201: No). S3205: Yes), an effect command corresponding to the second operation effect is set (S3206), the second operation effect means is stored in the operation effect type storage area (S3207), and the process proceeds to S3204. If it is determined in the process of S3205 that it is not the second operation effect (S3205: No), another effect command corresponding to the operation effect is set (S3208), the above-mentioned process of S3204 is executed, and this process is performed. To finish.

In this control example, the first operation effect is configured to be set more frequently than the second operation effect. Then, it is configured to discriminate in descending order of frequency of setting. With such a configuration, the processing speed can be increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 270, the contents of the charge effect setting process (S3104) executed in the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 268) will be described. FIG. 270 is a flowchart showing the contents of the charge effect setting process (S3104). When the charge effect setting process (S3104) is executed, first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol is a hit (big hit, small hit) (S3221), and if it is determined to be a hit (S3221). : No), the normal drawing effect enable flag 223t is set to off (S3222), and this processing is terminated.

With this configuration, the charge effect (normal pattern effect) that indicates that the lottery result of the normal symbol is a hit (normal pattern hit) can be more advantageous to the player than the normal symbol lottery. It will be set with a lower priority than the variable effect to show the result. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution of the effect that the player is most interested in (for example, the effect for indicating that the jackpot has been won) from being hindered by other effects.

If it is determined in the processing of S3221 that the lottery result is not a hit (missing) (S3221: No), the special map fluctuation time extracted from the current special map fluctuation pattern and the remaining period of the normal map fluctuation at the present time are used. (S3223), and based on the determination result of S3223, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal map is longer (S3224). If it is determined that the normal map fluctuation time is shorter in the processing of S3224, that is, the normal map fluctuation that is the target of the normal map effect ends during the current special map fluctuation period (S3224: No), then, It is determined whether the difference is 3 seconds or more (S3225), and if it is determined that the difference is 3 seconds or more (S3225: Yes), the charge symbol (specific symbol) Z4 is temporarily stopped according to the end timing of the normal symbol variation. The pattern (variable effect) is determined (S3226).

Then, the fluctuation pattern using the remaining period after the specific symbol Z4 is temporarily stopped is determined (S3227), the normal figure effecting flag 223v is set to ON (S3228), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S3225, when it is determined that there is no difference between the stop timing of the normal symbol and the stop timing of the special symbol for 3 seconds or more (S3225: No), from the normal symbol fluctuation end timing to the special symbol fluctuation end timing. A fluctuation pattern for temporarily stopping the charge symbol (specific symbol) Z4 is determined, and the process proceeds to S3228.

That is, in this control example, when setting a variation effect corresponding to a new special symbol variation, it is determined whether or not an effect (normal symbol effect) for showing the lottery result of the normal symbol variation being executed is executed. , When the normal map effect is continuously executed, the variable effect corresponding to the normal map effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to easily set a variation effect (general map effect) corresponding to the normal map variation executed across a plurality of special symbol variations.

In addition, the display mode of the identification information (charge symbol) for showing the lottery result of the normal drawing effect and the identification information (charge symbol) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol are the same (including some errors). Since it is configured to be an embodiment, and further, it is configured to execute the normal figure effect by using a part of the variable effect of the special symbol (for example, the charge effect), so that the effect result (charge) of the charge effect is performed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the symbol display) displays the lottery result of the special symbol or the lottery result of the normal symbol.

Further, in this control example, if the time from the fluctuation stop timing of the normal symbol to the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol is longer than the predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), the special symbol lottery this time is performed after the normal symbol production is completed. It is configured to execute a variation effect for special figures to show the result. As a result, the player can be surely notified of the lottery result.

On the other hand, in this control example, if the time from the fluctuation stop timing of the normal symbol to the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol is shorter than the predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), it is assumed that the variation effect for the special symbol is executed for a short period of time. However, since the variation effect that is difficult to understand is only executed, the symbol showing the lottery result of the normal symbol is configured to be stopped for a long time (temporary stop display) without executing the variation effect for special figures. There is. Returning to the process of FIG. 270, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S3224 that the fluctuation time of the normal figure is shorter, a fluctuation pattern for continuing the charge effect is determined, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 271, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107), which is one of the main processing (see FIG. 257) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 271 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107). In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107), the pressing operation of the frame button 22 is determined, and the execution of the advance notice effect or the like is set based on the pressing operation.

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107: see FIG. 271), first, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been operated (S3301), and when it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been operated (S3301: No). , Ends this process as it is. When it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S3301: Yes), it is determined whether or not the operation is currently in the valid period (S3302). In the process of S3302, when the type of the operation effect is set in the operation effect setting process (S3106 of FIG. 269), the operation valid period corresponding to the type is set in the operation valid timer 223n, and the operation valid timer 223n is set. Determines if the value of indicates the operation validity period.

In the process of S3302, if it is determined that the operation is in the valid period (S3302: Yes), then it is determined whether the pressed flag 223k is set to ON (S3303), and the pressed flag 223k is set to ON. If it is determined that it is not set (S3303: No), it is determined whether the operation effect in-progress flag 223h is on (S3304), and if it is determined that the operation effect in progress flag 223h is set to on (S3304). : Yes), the pressed flag 223k is set to on, and this process ends.

That is, in this control example, when the first operation effect and the second operation effect are set among the operation effects, the frame button 22 has been pressed (pressed) during the operation valid period. The flag 223k is set to ON, and the effect mode is set according to the progress of the first operation effect and the second operation effect according to the setting status of the pressed flag 223k. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect based on the operation immediately after operating the frame button 22, or to execute an effect based on the operation after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after operating the frame button 22, so that there are variations in the operation effect. Can be increased.

On the other hand, in the process of S3304, when it is determined that the operation effect in-progress flag 223h is not set to ON (S3304: No), the operation mode corresponding to the set operation validity period is determined (S3306) and determined. A display command corresponding to the operation mode is set (S3307), and this process is terminated. Further, in the process of S3302, when it is determined that the operation is not in the valid period (S3302: No), or when it is determined in the process of S3303 that the pressed flag 223k is on (S3303: Yes), This process ends as it is.

In this control example, an example is shown in which a variable condition for changing the effect mode of the operation effect is satisfied based on the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 once, but the present invention is not limited to this. The variable condition may be satisfied when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) within the operation valid period, or an operation means having a plurality of operation methods may be provided. It may be configured so that the variable condition is satisfied when the operation means is operated by a specific operation method.

Further, in this control example, it is shown that the operation means has been operated by setting one flag (pressed flag 223k) to ON, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, depending on the operation method for the operation means. , It may be configured to show different operation results, and the effect mode of the operation effect may be changed according to the type of the operation result.

Further, in this control example, a display effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is described as an example of an operation effect in which the effect mode is changed based on the operation of the operation means. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect of moving the decorative movable device provided in the pachinko machine 10 may be executed based on the operation of the frame button 22 (operating means).

In this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated when the first operation effect or the operation effect other than the second operation effect is executed, the operation mode corresponding to the set operation valid period is determined. Although it is configured as such (see S3306 in FIG. 271), other configurations may be used.

Specifically, an operation valid period in which the operation of the frame button 22 (operation means) can be effectively determined is set within the effect period of the display effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, and the set operation is performed. The value of the operation valid timer 223n is set in order to determine the valid period. Then, a storage means for storing the length of the set operation valid period and a calculation means for calculating the remaining period of the operation valid period based on the value of the operation valid timer 223n at the time when the operation means is operated are provided. Further, it is preferable to provide an operation mode selection table in which different operation modes are defined according to the length of the remaining period calculated by the calculation means.

With this configuration, different operation modes are selected according to the timing at which the player operates the operating means (according to the remaining time at the time when the operating means is operated), so that the player can be given a variety of effects. Can be provided.

In addition, an operation valid period setting means that can determine one operation valid period from a plurality of operation valid periods and can be set within the effect period of the display effect, and an operation valid timer 223n at the time when the operation means is operated. A calculation means for calculating the progress rate (%) of the operation valid period may be provided based on the value of. With this configuration, different operation validity periods can be set for the display effects of the same display mode, and further, based on the length of the set operation validity period and the timing at which the operation means is operated. The calculated progress rate of the operation valid period, that is, the length of the entire operation valid period is set to 100, and the ratio of the period that has already passed (or the period that has not passed) is calculated according to the value (%) calculated as a percentage. The mode of operation to be performed can be different.

As a result, even if the operation means are operated at the same timing based on the display effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, different operation modes can be set, so that the player can provide various effects. be able to.

Further, instead of setting the operation mode according to the length of the remaining period (elapsed period) of the operation valid period, the operation mode is set by setting the operation mode according to the value of the percentage calculated by the calculation means. The range specified in the data table for selection can be limited to "1-100". That is, when the operation mode is set according to the length of the remaining period (elapsed period) of the operation valid period, for example, when the length of the operation valid period is configured to be 2 to 15 seconds, 6 seconds. When the operating means is operated at the 3rd second when is set (remaining time 3 seconds), and when the operating means is operated at the 7th second when 14 seconds is set (remaining time 7 seconds). Since the remaining time is different between and, different operation modes are set.

Further, in the above-mentioned examples, since the operation means are operated at the intermediate point of the operation valid period and the operation difficulty is the same in each case, the operation is performed when the same operation mode is to be set. It is necessary to specify the data table so that the operation mode is selected based not only on the remaining time of the valid period but also on the length of the set operation valid period and the remaining time of the operation valid period at the time when the operation means is operated. There is.

In this case, if the length of the operation validity period is variably set to a plurality of lengths, the capacity of the above-mentioned data table will be significantly increased, and the data capacity will be squeezed. .. On the other hand, as described above, by configuring the operation mode to be selected using the percentage value, the same value can be used regardless of the length of the operation validity period, so that the operation mode is selected. It is possible to reduce the data capacity of the data table for this purpose.

In addition, as a classification means for dividing the percentage value calculated by the calculation means into a plurality of ranges, for example, a first classification means for dividing into "1% to 50%" and "51% to 99%", and a first classification means. "1% -10%", "11% -20%", "21% -30%", "41% -50%", "51% -60%", "61% -70%" and "71" A second classification means for classifying into "% -80%", "81% -90%", and "91% -99%" is provided, and further, based on the presence or absence of certain conditions such as the lottery result of a special symbol. The percentage value calculated by the calculation means is divided by the division means determined by the determination means, and the operation mode is selected based on the divided information. It may be configured to do so.

Further, in the case of using a configuration in which the operation mode to be executed thereafter is changed according to the operation timing of the operation means, for example, the pachinko machine is used as an operation effect executed by operating the operation means. It is preferable to use the effect of moving the movable accessory for effect provided in 10. Thereby, the operation effect can be executed without worrying about the period of the operation effect executed based on the set operation mode and the display effect period displayed on the display means.

Next, the contents of the liquid crystal display effect execution management process (S2110) will be described with reference to FIG. 272. FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing the contents of the liquid crystal display effect execution management process (S2110). In the liquid crystal display execution management process (S2110), a process of updating the effect mode of the special figure variation effect being executed by the third symbol display device 81 based on a predetermined variation pattern and an effect mode of the special figure variation effect are performed. A process for replacing with an effect based on a normal symbol lottery (ordinary pattern effect) is executed.

When the liquid crystal display effect execution management process (S2110) is executed, first, it is determined whether the charge effect in-progress flag 223y is set to ON (S3401), and if it is determined to be set to ON (S3401: Yes). ), It is determined whether the currently executing special figure fluctuation is a hit fluctuation (S3402). In the process of S3402, if it is determined that the hit is not in motion (S3402: No), then it is determined whether the normal figure effectable flag 223t is set to ON (S3403), and the flag is set to ON. If it is determined that (S3403: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is within the effect replaceable period (S3404).

In this control example, only the period during which the special symbol fluctuation is fluctuating at high speed (the period during which none of the third symbols Z1 to Z3 is stopped and displayed) and the third symbol Z1 which is first stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed. Only during this period, the effect mode of the variable effect set based on the lottery result of the special symbol can be replaced with the effect mode based on the result of the normal symbol lottery. With this configuration, the variation effect of the special symbol progresses, and after the player is in a state where the lottery result of the special symbol can be predicted (for example, a reach state), the effect mode of the variation effect is replaced. It is possible to prevent the player from performing an effect that is difficult for the player to understand.

In the process of S3404, if it is determined that the effect is within the replaceable period (S3404: Yes), the normal figure effectable flag 223t is set to off (S3405), and the normal figure effecting flag 223v is set to on. (S3406), a replacement display command is set (S3407), another liquid crystal display effect execution management process is executed (S3408), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3401 when it is determined that the charge effect in progress flag 223y is not set to ON (S3401: No), in the process of S3402, when it is determined that the hit is changing (S3402: Yes), S3403 In the process of S3404, when it is determined that the normal figure effectable flag 223t is not set to ON (S3403: No), and in the process of S3404, it is determined that the effect is not within the effect replaceable period (S3404: No). Since it is in a state where it is not possible to execute the normal drawing effect, the process proceeds to S3408 as it is.

Next, the contents of the operation effect management process (S2111) will be described with reference to FIG. 273. FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation effect management process (S2111). In this operation effect management process (S2111), a process for setting an effect mode based on the operation of the frame button 22 is executed during the period during which the operation effect is being executed.

When the operation effect management process (S2111) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the operation effect in-progress flag 223h is set to ON (S3501). Then, when it is determined that the operation effect in progress flag 223h is not set to ON, that is, it is determined that the operation effect is not currently in progress (S3501: No), the present process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the operation effect in-progress flag 223h is set to ON (S3501: Yes), then the first operation effect is executed based on the information stored in the operation effect type storage area 223i. It is determined whether or not (S3502), when it is determined that the first operation effect is in progress (S3502), and then it is determined whether or not the pressed flag 223k is set to ON (S3503).

If it is determined in the process of S3503 that the pressed flag 223k is set to on (S3503: Yes), the corresponding button effect is set (S3504), and the pressed flag 223k is set to off (S3505). The process related to the first operation effect is completed, and the process proceeds to the process of S3509. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3503 that the pressed flag 223k is not set to ON (S3503: No), next, a display mode indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period set in each operation effect. Is the timing that matches (in this control example, the timing when the remaining period of the operation-enabled transition period is 1 second) is determined (S3506).

Here, when it is determined that the timing is the same (S3506: Yes), the fusion effect display mode for changing the button display that has not been operated at the present time to the fusion button display is set. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3506 that the timing does not match, the process proceeds to the process of S3509 as it is. As a result, when a predetermined condition is satisfied for a plurality of operation effects without operating the frame button 22 in the state where the first operation effect is being executed, the fusion operation effect in which the plurality of operation effects are fused is executed. Will be. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Next, in the process of S3509, it is determined whether it is the second operation effect (see FIG. 216). Then, when it is determined that the second operation effect is in progress (S3509: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is in the first operation period (button operation immediate response period) (S3510). As described above with reference to FIG. 216, in the second operation effect of this control example, an operation valid period of 10 seconds is set, and the first 8 seconds of the operation result immediately corresponds to the operation of the frame button 22. Is set as the period during which is displayed (button operation immediate response period), and the remaining 2 seconds periodically determine whether or not the frame button 22 has been operated (0.5 second interval, 1 second interval), and the remaining 2 seconds. It is set as a period (button operation periodical response period) in which the effect result is displayed based on the determination result.

In the process of S3510, when it is determined that the first operation period is in progress (S3510: Yes), it is determined whether the pressed flag 223k is on (S3511), and the pressed flag 223k is not set to on. If it is determined (S3511: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3511 that the pressed flag 223k is set to on (S3511: Yes), the corresponding button effect is set (S3512), and the pressed flag 223k is set to off (S3513). ), End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S3510, when it is determined that the current state is not during the first operation period (S3510: No), then it is determined whether the timing is the elapse of the first operation period (S3514). Here, if it is determined that the timing has passed the first operation period (S3516: Yes), the automatic pressing effect mode is set (S3515), and then it is determined whether or not the current operation period is in progress. (S3516). In S3516, when it is determined that the second operation period is in progress (S3516: Yes), it is determined whether the current timing is for determining the operation status of the frame button 22 (whether the predetermined period has elapsed) (S3517). If it is determined that it is not the timing for determination (S3517: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Further, in the process of S3517, if it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed (S3517: Yes), then it is determined whether the pressed flag 223k is set to ON (S3518), and the pressed flag 223k is turned ON. If it is determined that it has been set (S3518: Yes), the corresponding button effect is set (S3519), the pressed flag 223k is set to off (S3520), and the process proceeds to S3522. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3518 that the pressed flag 223k is not set to ON (S3518: No), the automatic pressing effect is set (S3521), and the process proceeds to the process of S3522. In the process of S3522, a display effect command corresponding to each set effect mode is set, and this process ends.

<Control processing in the display control device 114>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 274 to 287, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 274, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 274 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is set in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs initially processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM has a high speed. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 275. FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to the predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 274) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 274) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, in the display control device 114. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 275, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S6102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. It may execute the process set in 231a. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. And S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. 1 It may be stored in the program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231, which is possible after the boot process, earlier.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 274. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct to execute the display process. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the last address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of this register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6003, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 285 (a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7602 in FIG. 285 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, during that time, a simple command determination process is performed so that the power-on image (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276 (b)). (See S6308 in FIG. 276 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 276 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying the image on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. By using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, the player entered the first starting port 64 (starting prize), and the main control device 110 issued a voice lamp control device to instruct the start of the variation effect. When the variation pattern command for display is received, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image at power-on, which is not shown, can be immediately displayed during the variation effect period to perform a simple variation effect. can. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery is possible. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S6005, the interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 276 (a). FIG. 276 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 276 (b). FIG. 276 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 237) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, since the image controller 237 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started during the drawing of the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V-interruption process, as shown in FIG. 276 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. The command determination process (S6302) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then the display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. If the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start the variation effect, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 277 to 282.

In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 283 to 284.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous warning command (not shown) is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the production and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 285 and 286.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), which are determined by the task process (S6304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 237 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 287.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type (big hit A, big hit B1, big hit B2, big hit C) indicated by the display stop type command is displayed. It is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed to process S6304. Move to.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 277 to 282, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process (FIG. 277, S6302), as shown in FIG. 277, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command, there is no unprocessed new command. (S6401: No), the command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command. For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S6403).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S6405), the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 278 (a). FIG. 278 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly for display. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S6501 is turned on, and other fluctuations are performed. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S6503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S6503, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6504), and the pointer. Initialize 233f to 0 (S6505). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S6506), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S6502e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6504, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 277. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 278 (b). FIG. 278 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B1, big hit B2, big hit C) indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S6601), and the stop type table and the stop type table are determined. , The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276 (b)) is executed. Finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set to off (S6603). After that, the process returns to the process of S6401 in FIG. 277.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop symbol is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Returning to FIG. 277, the explanation will be continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display notice display command among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If it is determined that the display notice display command has been received (S6408: Yes), the notice effect display process is executed (S6409). The details of the advance notice effect display processing (S6409) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 279 (a), but the degree of expectation for the jackpot to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the variable display of the special symbol. And the setting of the notice display mode for notifying the player of the fact that it is a big hit is executed.

Here, the advance notice effect display process (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 279 (a). FIG. 279 (a) is a flowchart showing this notice effect display process (S6409).

In the notice effect display process (FIG. 279 (a), S6409), first, the display data table corresponding to the received display notice display command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S6701). Determine the transfer data table corresponding to the set advance notice display data table to be displayed at the display timing based on the display timing of the notice display indicated by the received notice display command, and set it in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (S6702).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S6703), and the time data representing the fluctuation time is measured based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d. The counter is set to 233h (S6704), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6705).

In this way, the notice display is set based on the display notice display command output from the voice lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the instructed timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even if the same variation pattern is used, it can be shown to the player as if the display modes are different.

In the present embodiment, the content of the notice display and the display timing are selected by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is configured to execute the selection of the notice display. You may.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table for advance notice is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table that has already been set may be set to be overwritten by setting the advance notice display. good.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 277. If it is determined in the process of S6408 that there is no display notice display command (S6408: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display variable replacement command among the unprocessed commands (S6410). If it is determined that there is a variable replacement command for display (S6410: Yes), the variable replacement display process is executed (S6411). The variable replacement display process (S6411) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 279 (b).

Here, the variable replacement display process (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 279 (b). FIG. 279 (b) is a flowchart showing this variable replacement display process (S6411).

In the variable replacement display process (FIG. 279 (b), S6411), first, the display data table corresponding to the received variable replacement command for display is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S6801). Determine the transfer data table corresponding to the set variable replacement display data table for displaying at the display timing based on the display timing of the variable replacement display indicated by the received variable replacement command, and transfer the data table. It is set to the buffer 233e (S6802).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S6803), and the time data representing the fluctuation time is measured based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d. The counter is set to 233h (S6804), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6805).

In this way, the fluctuation replacement display is set based on the display fluctuation replacement command output from the voice lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the instructed timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even if the same variation pattern is used, it can be shown to the player as if the display modes are different.

In the present embodiment, the content and display timing of the variable replacement display are selected by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, but the selection is not limited to this, and the variable replacement display is selected by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It may be configured to do so.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table for variable replacement is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the already set display data table is set to overwrite the variable replacement display. It may be configured.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 277. If it is determined in the processing of S6410 that there is no display variation replacement command (S6410: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display operation effect command among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If it is determined that there is a display operation effect command (S6412: Yes), the operation effect display process is executed (S6413). The operation effect display process (S6413) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 280 (a).

Here, the operation effect display process (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 280 (a). FIG. 280 (a) is a flowchart showing this operation effect display process (S6413).

In the operation effect display process (FIG. 280 (a), S6413), first, the display data table corresponding to the received display operation effect command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S6901). The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for the set operation effect to be displayed at the display timing based on the display timing of the operation effect display indicated by the received operation effect command is determined and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Set (S6902).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S6903), and the time data representing the fluctuation time is measured based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d. The counter is set to 233h (S6904), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6905).

In this way, the operation effect display is set based on the display operation effect command output from the voice lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the instructed timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even if the same variation pattern is used, it can be shown to the player as if the display modes are different.

In the present embodiment, the content and display timing of the operation effect display are selected by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, but the selection is not limited to this, and the operation effect display is selected by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It may be configured in.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table for the operation effect is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table that has already been set is configured to be overwritten by setting the operation effect display. You may.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 277. When it is determined that there is no display operation effect command in the processing of S6412 (S6412: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display button fusion command among the unprocessed commands (S6414). If it is determined that there is a display button fusion command (S6414: Yes), the button fusion display process is executed (S6415). The button fusion display process (S6415) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 280 (b).

Here, the button fusion display process (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 280 (b). FIG. 280 (b) is a flowchart showing this button fusion display process (S6415).

In the button fusion display processing (FIG. 280 (b), S6415), first, the display data table corresponding to the received display button fusion command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7001). Button for display received Button fusion command indicates Button fusion display set to display at display timing based on display timing Determine the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for fusion and use it in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Set (S7002).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S7003), and the time data representing the fluctuation time is measured based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d. The counter is set to 233h (S7004), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7005).

In this way, the button fusion display is set based on the display button fusion command output from the voice lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the instructed timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even if the same variation pattern is used, it can be shown to the player as if the display modes are different.

In the present embodiment, the content of the button fusion display and the display timing are selected by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, but the selection is not limited to this, and the selection of the button fusion display is executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It may be configured in.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table for button fusion is configured to be set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table that has already been set is configured to be overwritten by setting the button fusion display. You may.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 277. When it is determined that there is no display button fusion command in the processing of S6414 (S6414: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display pseudo winning command among the unprocessed commands (S6416). If it is determined that there is a display pseudo-winning command (S6416: Yes), the pseudo-winning display process is executed (S6417). The pseudo winning display process (S6417) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 281.

Here, the pseudo-winning display process (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. 281. FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing this pseudo winning display process (S6417).

In the pseudo-winning display process (FIG. 281, S6417), first, the display data table corresponding to the received display pseudo-winning command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7101). The transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table for pseudo-winning to be displayed at the display timing based on the display timing of the pseudo-winning display indicated by the received pseudo-winning command is determined and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Set (S7102).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S7103), and the time data representing the fluctuation time is measured based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d. The counter is set to 233h (S7104), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7105).

In this way, the pseudo-winning display is set based on the display pseudo-winning command output from the voice lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the instructed timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even if the same variation pattern is used, it can be shown to the player as if the display modes are different.

In the present embodiment, the content and display timing of the pseudo winning display are selected by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, but the selection is not limited to this, and the selection of the pseudo winning display is executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It may be configured in.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table for pseudo winning is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table that has already been set is configured to be overwritten by setting the pseudo winning display. You may.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 277. If it is determined that there is no display pseudo-winning command in the processing of S6416 (S6416: No), it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6418), and there is an error command. If (S6418: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. 282. FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7201). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S7202). Ends the process and returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7201, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S7202 is determined and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the error discrimination flag corresponding to all the error types indicated by each error command is set to ON in the process in S7202. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 277. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S6418 (S6418: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6420), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the processing of S6401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), The processing of S6402 to S6420 is executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6420 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276 (b)) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands required to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 35 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop. Extract only the type commands, execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 278 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 278 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and perform other processes. For a command, a process of discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 278 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 283 to 284, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 283, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7301), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7301: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the processes of S7302 to S7304 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S7305. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S7301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S7302), S7303 to S7304 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S7303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S7303). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7303: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S7304).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 284 (a). FIG. 284 (a) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to and all the error discrimination set to ON is performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S7401).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various required parameters.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7401, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 283. After the warning image setting process (S7304) or in the process of S7303, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is turned off (S7303: No), the process proceeds to the process of S7305.

In S7305, the pointer update process is executed (S7305). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 284 (b). FIG. 284 (b) is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7501). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the respective values are sequentially started from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the process of S7501, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S7502). As a result, if it is End information (S7502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S7503), and if it is a demo display data table (S7503: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7505), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demo effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7503, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S7503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S753: No). S7506), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawing contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image specified in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7502, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7502: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 283. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7306). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the drawing content developed in the processing of S7306 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinates are displayed for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7308). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7308: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is 0 or less (S7308: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S7309).

As a result, if the definite display flag is off (S7309: No), the definite display effect has not been performed yet, and it is the timing to perform the definite display effect. Therefore, first, the definite display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S7310), and then the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7311). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the definite display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7313). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7314), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7315), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final symbol display effect of the stopped symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing content can be set as such. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table. Further, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S6304), from the start of the fluctuation until the predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S7315, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7309, if the confirmation display flag is on instead of off (S7309: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S7316). If the demo display flag is off (S7316: No), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S7317) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7318). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7320), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S7321), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

In the process of S7316, if the demo display flag is on (S7316: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276 (b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the stop type command for display for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table specified to stop and display the image (FIG. 35) in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 285 and 286, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 285 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7601: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S7602), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 285 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, off as a result of the processing of S7601 (S7601: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 286.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7602), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 285 (b). FIG. 285 (b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S7701), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S7701: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7702). In the process of S7702, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237 after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. .. When it is determined by the process of S7702 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7702: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7702: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7703. Further, as a result of the processing of S7701, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7701: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7703.

In the process of S7703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7703), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S7703: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7704), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S7703 (S7703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S7705), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 276 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 276 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 277 to 282) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 283 to 284 (b)) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device is set. An image at normal time is displayed in 81. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 286) (see S7601: No in FIG. 285 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 286, a normal image transfer setting process (S7603), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 286 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7305) of the display setting process (S6303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S7801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7802), and if it is transfer data information (S7802: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is stored from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source final address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7803) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7804), and the process proceeds to S7805.

Further, in the process of S7802, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S7802: No), the processes of S7803 and S7804 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S7805. In the process of S7805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7806).

In the process of S7806, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S7806 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7806: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7806: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7807. Further, as a result of the processing of S7805, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S7805: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7807.

In the process of S7807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7807), and if the transfer start flag is on (S7807: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S7808), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7803 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S7809. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7807: No), this process ends.

In the process of S7809, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7809). The discrimination in the processing of S7809 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the stored state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the stored state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is a normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7809 (S7809: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7809 (S7809: No), the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set (S7810). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 includes the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S7810, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7811), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that became the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 287, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 287 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined by the task process (S6304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305) to generate the drawing list shown in FIG. 237 (S7901). That is, in the processing of S7901, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). Then, the specified stored RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task process. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address is read in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. Then, in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the image expanded in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the processing of S7902 (S7903). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when the value is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 276 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

Further, in the above embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are provided separately, but instead, the respective devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as one device.

Further, in the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the voice lamp control device 113. The command to be to be determined is determined, and then the command is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Then, the display control device 114 may be configured to send a command to the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read the image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, in this case, the image data read from the character ROM 234 by the MPU 231 is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether or not the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused. If it is not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 at the transfer destination.

In this case, the image controller 237 is accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, it is in use) to determine whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. A resident video RAM access flag (not shown) and a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing (ie, in use) the normal video RAM 236. ) May be provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the buffer RAM of the transfer destination.

Alternatively, the signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or the signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231 and used resident from the state of the signal. You may check whether the video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts to access the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 or ends the access, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time, so that the MPU 231 can be used. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether or not the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused.

Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the drive state of the image controller 237 or notifies from the image controller 237 whether or not the scan is in the blank period. If the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 is unused. As a result, the image controller 237 confirms only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not it is unused, so that the determination can be easily performed.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 is a transfer data that is not full data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. If the information exists, the process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be started according to the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is specified for a predetermined address, when the image data is transferred according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table and the predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table or the like, the drawing of the sprite is drawn. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, which is necessary for the resident video RAM 235, can always be stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

The process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in the display main process or the loop of the main process executed by the MPU 231. As a result, in the MPU 231, the image data transfer process can be executed by utilizing the time during which important processes such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are not performed in the display control device 114. Further, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed with priority over the display main process, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process, and the MPU 231 is used as image data. Transfer processing can be executed.

In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage each video RAM by using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but is commonly used by the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In the address system, a different address area may be allocated to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. By doing so, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the image controller 237, but simply specifies the address, and the address is used. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or for the normal video RAM 236. That is, when the MPU 231 specifies the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply specified. The structure of the instruction that specifies it can be simplified. For example, the address set in the common address system is simply used as the information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the structure of the drawing list can be simplified.

In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the character ROM 234 is not necessarily limited to this. It may be provided by directly connecting to 237. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specifications of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specifications of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. May be good.

By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the premise that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM is used as it is, and the NAND flash memory 234a is used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the character ROM 234 may be configured to be directly accessible from the MPU 231.

In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the character ROM 234 is configured by a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage means such as a hard disk. May be done. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow read speed, but by adopting the display control device 114 with the configuration described in the above embodiment, the image can be displayed without any problem at the time to be displayed. be able to.

In the above embodiment, the case where the NOR type ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. The first program storage area is provided in a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the first program storage area is provided in that area after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. It may be possible to store a part of the boot program executed in. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the character ROM 234, a first program storage area is provided in the character ROM 234, and after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. It may contain a part of the boot program that is executed first.

Further, in the above embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in that area. However, the case is not limited to this, and the internal bus (bus line 240) is a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a. A first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 may be stored in the area. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in an internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided in the internal bus (bus line 240). You may store a part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is released.

In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then sets the boot program in the buffer RAM 234c. When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and the internal bus (bus line 240) is read. It may be output to MPU231 via 240). In this case, if the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" for the internal bus (bus line 240) after the system reset is released, is the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 already set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since it is in the process of being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (command code) with less delay after the address "0000H" is specified by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the display main process can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can be done.

Further, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified in the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the ROM controller 234b detects that the control program is stored in the first program storage area 234d1. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be read directly from the MPU 231 and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after the address "0000H" is specified, so that the display main process can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can be done. Further, in this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, the power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the internal bus (bus) to which the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected is not necessarily limited. It may be provided by directly connecting to the line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video is configured even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to be able to directly connect the resident video RAM 235. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

In the above embodiment, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more. A video RAM may be provided. Further, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each, and a resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a 1-port type (1 port input / output port) DRAM is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the multi-port is not always limited. A type RAM may be used. As a result, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. Therefore, for example, the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn while being read from the character ROM 234. The process of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one RAM is divided into a resident area and a normal area. It may be divided and the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. When a resident area and a normal area are configured by one RAM, in order to prevent the input / output port of the memory from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the read or write process. , It is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. In this case, at least the image data corresponding to the image to be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident in response to the reception command received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 or other external input. It is preferable to make it resident in the video RAM 235.

In the above embodiment, a case where a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident has been described, but all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. You may. In this case, since the image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 does not exist, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. You may.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is not overwritten and its contents are continuously retained while the power is turned on is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 is not limited to this. Even if the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is overwritten and updated based on a predetermined opportunity, such as when the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is significantly different based on the command received from. good. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period while the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is kept in the resident video RAM 235. You may leave it. Further, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out new image data to be resident, and the read image data is transmitted to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. It may be transferred while it is unused (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read out). Alternatively, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) for image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer command (transfer). Image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information), and transferred to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is unused (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may try to do it.

Further, when updating the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is transferred using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. 3 It may be displayed on the symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234, reads out the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. May be good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 that has received the transfer instruction of the image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234, reads out the newly resident image data, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In the above embodiment, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, the RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal or not is stored when the power failure is resolved, and the power supply is stored. In the display main process or main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after the power-on, the RAM determination value is confirmed before starting the transfer of the main image data at the time of power-on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be normally stored, so that the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. It may be configured to do so. In this case, by turning off the simple image display flag, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be non-executed. As a result, even when a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power failure and the display main process or the execution of the main process is started by the MPU 231, the data of the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. If this is the case, it is possible to prevent the image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to shorten the time required for recovery from a power failure. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a having a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, if the data of the resident video RAM 235 remains normally due to a momentary power failure by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, the normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Further, instead of this RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

In the above embodiment, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided inside the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the buffer RAM 237a may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). Further, when the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the internal bus (bus line 240) with many data signal exchanges. Transfers can be performed efficiently without being affected by.

In the above embodiment, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be appropriately set. For example, in the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the buffer is being scanned during the period (blank period) of scanning on the blank area which is the scanning area other than the display area where the actual image is displayed. The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be such that the transfer of image data can be completed from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 that occurs during this blank period. ..

In the above embodiment, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred from another buffer RAM. It may be configured. Further, another area in which the image data is stored while the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area. The image data may be configured to be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In either case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Since it can be processed, the time required for the processing can be shortened.

In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to transfer the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on. can do. During this period, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so that the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

Similarly, in the above embodiment, the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are input. Although the case of transferring to 235b has been described, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 from the character ROM 234. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so that the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the above is transferred, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. When the power is turned on, the image may be directly transferred to the main image area 235a. Further, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power is turned on using the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236. When the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the main image, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235. The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of image data can be completed faster without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation of the resident video RAM 235. The case of transferring to the image area 235b has been described, but since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred, the power supply is supplied. The image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. May be good. Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the main image at power-on and the power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored. While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the variable image, the resident video RAM 235. When the image data is not read from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of image data can be completed faster without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

In the above embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a rear image change command or a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the rear image change command or the frame button. Although the case of changing the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of the super reach based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, in accordance with the change of the gaming state. A rear image change command or a game state command may be generated. As a result, the display control device 114 can change the rear image and the super reach effect mode according to the game state based on the rear image change command and the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 and change the rear image or the super reach effect mode according to the gaming state. Then, the rear image after the change or the image data corresponding to at least a part of the range of the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the back image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 235c.

Further, the display control device 114 may change the rear image according to the provisions of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the changed rear image is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. You may. Here, when the image data of the rear image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, or the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored is used. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be specified so that a new rear image is stored in the sub area, and what is the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored? The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be specified so that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again, so that the processing of the display control device 114 It is possible to suppress an increase in load.

Further, in the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The case where the display control device 114 immediately displays the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 to be main. A vibration error may be detected by the control device 110, and an error command notifying the error may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to either the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. Then, when an error command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further sends an error command notifying the display control device 114 of the error command. You may.

On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may be configured to detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. When a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and further, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error occurrence flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 283). By executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 284 (a)) when the above is determined, the warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this case, since it is not necessary to send and receive the error command from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the vibration sensor is attached to the back surface of the game plate 13 has been described, but instead of the vibration sensor or together with the vibration sensor, the magnet sensor is attached to the back surface of the game plate 13. May be good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to suppress the intentional entry of the ball into the entry port due to the change in the flow of the ball due to the magnetic field such as a magnet. Therefore, the output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main control device 110, if it is determined by the main control device 110 that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is detected. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113 or directly. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, if it is determined by the voice lamp control device 113 that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field is determined. An error command that conveys an error may be transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Then, in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 81 is resident. When an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error is received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, it is determined that the display control device 114 has applied a magnetic field to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, and the display control device 113 May display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error occurrence flag and setting the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on. As a result, when the display control device 114 receives an error command from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, or grasps the occurrence of a magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the character ROM 234 is displayed. Even when configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error without delay using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is the third symbol. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the third symbol display device 81, so that the player behaves illegally. It can be deterred.

When the drawing contents necessary for changing the color tone of a part or all in one effect are specified by the additional data table or the display data table, the additional data table or the display data table is 1 in the third symbol display device 81. The type of sprite that changes the color tone in the time corresponding to the address expressed in units of the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for the frame is displayed, and the type of sprite after the change in the sprite. It may specify the color information that specifies the color tone. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of sprite that changes the color tone to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. When the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. The drawing list may be created by replacing with the color information specified by the additional drawing contents of the data table. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

Further, when the drawing content required for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect is defined by the display data table, in the display data table, the image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 is used. Corresponds to the address represented by the time when is displayed (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) as one unit, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new sprite type. It may specify the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the MPU 231 sets the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the sprite type to be newly displayed at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d. When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Of these, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the display data table includes the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing contents specified in the display data table has been described. The transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data required for drawing the image according to the additional drawing contents specified in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with the identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the effect that can be additionally displayed. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines the effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. It may be configured in.

As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used for drawing according to the additional drawing contents to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and surely displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information specified in the display data table, it is possible to transfer the necessary image data to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of the image based on the additional drawing contents. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing contents. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the above embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that causes the player to select the super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table, and the player The case of specifying only the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table. You may. Thereby, the drawing content of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. Further, since it is not necessary to specify the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress the increase in the data third of the display data table.

In the above embodiment, the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are included in the display data table has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. However, the additional drawing contents of the effect to be additionally displayed may be specified in the additional data table. In this case, the work RAM 233 may be provided with an additional data table buffer, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. .. Further, even if the additional data table includes not only the additional drawing contents but also the transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data necessary for drawing the image performed according to the additional drawing contents. good. As a result, it is possible to specify the drawing content of the effect to be added and displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image required for the drawing, so that the additional data table and the additional transfer data table can be used. Compared with the case of specifying the drawing content and the transferred data information, the load of processing required for the specification can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the case where the display control device 114 prepares the display data table for each variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is not necessarily limited to this, and the variation effect is, for example, the present invention. A display data table is prepared for each element such as "variable start-up", "high-speed fluctuation", "notice effect", "normal reach", and "super reach", and the display data table is prepared according to the fluctuation pattern shown in the display fluctuation pattern command. After specifying the elements required for the variation effect, the display data table corresponding to the specified paper for the variation effect is put together into one, and the final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may do so. In many cases, "variable start-up", "high-speed fluctuation", "normal reach", etc. are displayed in common with each fluctuation pattern. Therefore, by elementizing the variation effect in this way and preparing a display data table corresponding to each element, it is possible to efficiently have the data table.

In the above embodiment, a case where a common pointer 233f is used in the display data table and the transfer data table to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f has been described. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

In the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at every display interval (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) of an image for one frame at which the drawing process is completed will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. Since the third symbol display device 81 is always driven so that the images for one frame are always displayed at equal time intervals (20 milliseconds intervals), the V interrupt signal is displayed for each display of the images for one frame. By sending, it is possible to keep the time interval accurate without timing.

In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded based on the drawing target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information expanded first from the other frame buffer. The case where the image is read and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded each time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list. May be alternately selected, and the previously expanded image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Further, every time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image information is output to the frame buffer for expanding the drawn image and the third symbol display device 81. It may be replaced with the frame buffer to be used.

In the above embodiment, after the definite display data table corresponding to the definite display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 before the definite display effect is completed. When neither the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) nor the demo command (demo command for display) is received, the display data table for demo corresponding to the demo effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. Further, in this case, the definite display effect is displayed until either the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or the demo command (display demo command) is received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. The final display data table corresponding to the final display effect may be reset to the display data table buffer 233d each time the command is completed. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can continue to display the definite display effect until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110.

In the above embodiment, the case where the demo effect changes the rear image and stops and displays the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers “0” to “9” has been described, but it is not always the case. The present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol consisting of the main symbol with a number or the main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Further, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above embodiment, in the display control means 114, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power on and the variable image at power on is first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power on and the power on of the resident video RAM 235. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b, displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and then transferring the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, it is not always limited to this. For example, in the display control means 114, after the power is turned on, only the image data corresponding to the main image at the time of turning on the power is first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at the time of turning on the power of the resident video RAM 235, and when the power is turned on after the transfer is completed. After displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of turning on the power can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier after the power is turned on. You can immediately confirm that the operation has started without any problem when the power is turned on.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 may monitor the completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b. As a result, if the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on the above, a simple fluctuation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. It is desirable that the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to speed up the variation display by the variation image when the power is turned on.

In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table should correspond to the time expressed in units of 20 milliseconds, and the content of the image to be drawn (drawing content) at that time and the transfer data table should be transferred at that time. The case where the information of the image data (transfer data information) is specified has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any display content may be specified at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since one frame of image is displayed every second, the display data table may specify the display contents at 1/30 second intervals.

Further, in the display data table, the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is not specified as the sprite type to be drawn specified at each predetermined time interval. May be specified. In the display control device 114, since the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manages the address of. Therefore, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is specified as the display content specified for each predetermined time interval in the display data table, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, instead of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233 when instructing the transfer of the image data of the predetermined sprite type, and the predetermined image data. Is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if it is not stored, a transfer instruction for image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. Further, when the transfer instruction of the image data of a predetermined sprite type is set, the MPU 231 stores the information indicating the sprite type in which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and also stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub-area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

In the above embodiment, when the image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. The case where the MPU 231 performs a process of non-execution of the transfer process if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 is described. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite is determined. You may memorize it. Further, the work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer the image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 is used in the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

In the above embodiment, the case where only the image data corresponding to the “rear surface A” among the plurality of rear image is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Image data corresponding to two or more rear images may be made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the rear image used in some super reach may be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by resident the rear image of the super reach that appears frequently or is expected to be high in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data transfer process from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. It is possible to suppress the number of times.

In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines a transfer command for image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 specifies the transfer command at a predetermined time specified by the display pointer. The case where the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data specified in 1 to the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data is at the top of the display data table. The information regarding the sprite type required in the table is described, and the MPU 231 is an image controller so as to transfer the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the voice lamp controller 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and normally outputs the image data of the image type from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer data to the video RAM 236.

In the above embodiment, the case where the color tone of a part of the image changes with time in the back surface C, which is the back image of the “island stage”, has been described, but even if the color tone of the entire image changes with time. good. Further, as a rear image, not only an object that scrolls or changes in color tone with the passage of time, but also an object (for example, a person) that appears with the passage of time instead of such a rear image. It may be something that moves or changes.

In the above embodiment, the information of various counters (special hit random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2) acquired at the time of starting winning to be notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the main control device 110 is used as a hold ball number command. Although the case of including is described, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and the information of various counters (special hit random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2) acquired at the time of starting winning is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by another command. You may notify.

In the above embodiment, when the variation effect is executed, the case where the high-speed variation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed so as not to be visible by the player is displayed has been described. , All symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an invisible degree and displayed, or all symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

In the above embodiment, the case where one first starting port 64a for starting the lottery of the big hit of the special symbol when the ball enters is arranged in the game board 13, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A plurality of (for example, two) first ball entrances may be arranged on the game board 13 so that the ball entry is independently detected and the big hit lottery is started. In this case, the hold ball number command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when there is a hold at each first ball entry port indicates which first ball entry port is the hold. Information may be included. Further, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started includes information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by the first ball entry port. good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a hold ball number counter is prepared for each first ball entry port, and when a hold ball number command is received, the first ball entry indicated in the hold ball number command is received. When the number of reserved balls is set in the hold ball number counter for the mouth and the fluctuation pattern command is received, the number of reserved balls counter for the first entry port indicated in the fluctuation pattern command is decremented by 1, and the first entry port is used. The number of reserved balls can be counted for each.

In the above embodiment, every time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control device 110 (that is, when it increases or decreases), the reserved ball number command is mainly used. Although the case of transmitting from the control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d increases in the main control device 110. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to reduce the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 sends the hold number command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, respectively. The control load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the winning of the first starting port 64a and the passage of the through gate 67 are each suspended up to 4 times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of reserved balls of the variable display based on the winning of the first starting port 64a is different by the number of the reserved balls in a part of the third symbol display device 81 or by the area divided into four. It may be displayed in an embodiment (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled vertically on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and is vertical. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol or in various ways separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

<Second control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 288 to 306. In addition to the contents described in the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above, in the second control example, an effect of giving points to the player is executed, and the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is correct or not is determined by the points. , A control example in a configuration in which the reach content and the like can be selected by consuming the points owned by the player himself / herself will be mainly described. The same description as that of the first control example will be omitted. Further, in the second control example, there is a part described by the control process in which the effect and the like described in the first control example are deleted, but they are omitted for convenience of explanation, and of course, the first control example. In addition to all the contents described in the above, the configuration may be such that the contents of the second control example are added. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

An example of the point acquisition effect and the point consumption effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 288 to 291. FIG. 288 is an example of the point acquisition effect. In this control example, as a privilege given to the player, in addition to the prize ball paid out to the player when the game ball enters the jackpot game or the general winning opening, points (numerical privilege) are given as a production privilege. Is given, and the point effect in which the given points are accumulated is executed.

FIGS. 288 (a) to 288 (b) show a part of the display mode in the point acquisition effect variation pattern in which the execution of the point acquisition effect is set, which is one of the variation patterns determined by the voice lamp control device 113. It is a figure. This point acquisition effect variation pattern is a variation pattern determined by lottery based on the variation pattern command acquired from the main control device 110 when the hit / fail determination result is a hit or a miss. In the case of a hit, it is composed of a variation pattern (dynamic display mode) displayed by a symbol (a combination of the same doublet in which the third symbol is the same) that notifies the final hit, and in the case of a miss. Is composed of a variation pattern displayed by a symbol (a combination of doublets other than doublets in the third symbol) that finally notifies that the symbol is out of alignment.

FIG. 288 (a) is a diagram showing a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the execution of the point acquisition effect is started in the point acquisition effect variation pattern. This point acquisition effect is set to start in the middle of the execution period (dynamic display period) of the fluctuation pattern regardless of whether it is a hit or a miss, and the displayed third symbol is hidden or displayed. The semi-transparent point acquisition effect is displayed in an easy-to-see state, and along with the tornado display, information values (numerical symbols) indicating multiple point values are rotated and displayed like a tornado. In the same display area, the character of the hero is displayed facing the tornado, and a plurality of (for example, four) swords are displayed above the hero's head. In the example of FIG. 288 (a), four swords (a1 to a4) are displayed. It is notified that the player can obtain the point value by piercing the point value with the sword against a large number of point values that are rotated and displayed together with the tornado. In addition, at the bottom of the display area, the characters "Get points !!" are displayed as a notification mode suggesting that the player can earn points, and the player is accompanied by a tornado. It is clearly notified that the effect is such that one of the rotating point values is given to the player. Further, the total value of the point values currently acquired by the player is displayed in the lower left of the display area (the upper part of the display area Ds of the pending symbol) (in the example of FIG. 288 (a), the present value is present. The points are 500 points).

In FIG. 288 (b), in the point acquisition effect, the sword displayed above the hero's head is released toward the point value (flying effect is performed), and the effect that each sword pierces the point value is executed. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the case of.

In the example of FIG. 288 (b), the sword a1 has a point value of 100 points, the sword a2 has a point value of 20 points, the sword a3 has a point value of 50 points, and the sword a4 has a point value of 70 points. The case is shown. The total point value obtained by the four swords is displayed in the letters "240 points GET !!" at the bottom of the display area.

As will be described in detail later, in this control example, the timing at which points are awarded to the player is mainly during the fluctuation period of the special symbol, and the timing at which the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed (variation display period). The notice display suggesting the lottery result is displayed according to the period in which the notice display suggesting the lottery result is executed, before the period from the end of the above to the time of confirmation. The point value is selected with the result of determining the lottery result of the special symbol that has started to fluctuate and the lottery result of the special symbol that is stored on hold before the start of fluctuation (look-ahead result) as one of the selection information, and the game. The notice effect given to the person is executed.

When the fluctuation display or the stored hold pass / fail determination result is a hit, a higher point value can be easily determined than when the hold is off. As a result, by displaying the notice mode of the high point value, it is possible to expect that the lottery result of the special symbol being changed or the special symbol held and stored will be a hit, and the change of the special symbol concerned. Not only that, it is possible to play a game with the expectation of hitting a reserved ball that has already been stored. That is, the notice display effect that gives the player a point value displayed as a notice display is not only the displayed special symbol of the fluctuation, but also the lottery result of the special symbol that is variablely displayed across a plurality of fluctuations. It is a notice display effect for the player, and the player can have an expectation corresponding to the advance notice effect for a longer period of time.

In addition, even if the point value is given, but there is no such change or the lottery result of the special symbol stored on hold, the given point value is accumulated and given later. It can be used for effects that use the points (such as the effect of selecting the reach mode using the points), and the larger the total value of the accumulated points, the higher the expectation of the jackpot. It is configured so that the player can select a high reach display mode by using the point value.

As a result, when the reach selection variation pattern that allows the player to select the type of reach display mode using the point value is executed while the total value of the accumulated point values is large, the player is notified. It is possible to have a high expectation for the jackpot game. Therefore, the effect to which the point value is given is not only for notifying the player of the fluctuation of the special symbol and the lottery result of the special symbol stored on hold, but also for the first winning opening 64 in the future. Alternatively, it is also used for notifying the future lottery result when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640 and the lottery is executed, so that the player can have expectations for a long period of time.

Although the details will be described later, the display data of the point value displayed together with the tornado of the point acquisition effect displayed in FIG. 288 (a) is a display control device in which individual data can be set so as to be individually identifiable. It is set to 114, and when the display timing of the point acquisition effect is reached by the voice lamp control device 113, the sword (a1 to 1) is drawn by lottery based on the current point value, the change or the lottery result of the special symbol stored on hold. The point values pierced by a4) are determined respectively.

In detail, the first basic point value, the second basic point value (low), and the second basic point value (high) are the basic point values at the fluctuation start timing of the point acquisition effect variation pattern (point consumption effect variation pattern). ) Is determined. At the start of fluctuation, the point value is determined based on the total of the current accumulated point values, the lottery result of the fluctuating special symbol (win / fail judgment result), and the lottery result of the special symbol stored in hold (winning information). Will be done.

However, in the configuration of this control example, since the advance notice effect of giving the point value is executed at a random timing after the change of the special symbol is started, the cumulative effect is accumulated at the timing when the point acquisition effect is actually executed. The total value of the point values that have been set is the pre-reading result of the reserved ball that has been raised or newly won (the new reserved ball memorized by winning the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640). Changes such as hitting have occurred. It is necessary to determine the current point value and the state of the lottery result again at the timing when the advance notice effect for giving the point value is executed, and determine the point value to be given.

Here, in this control example, the point value determined at the time of executing the point acquisition effect fluctuation pattern is the first basic point (a part of the point values to be given is distributed to either or both of the two swords). The second basic point (low), which is less than the value obtained by subtracting the first basic point from the point value to be granted, and the second basic point value obtained by subtracting the first basic point from the point value to be granted. By determining two point values, points (high), when the cumulative points increase by more than the reference value (for example, 500 points or more) from the time of determination at the execution timing of the point acquisition effect, , A display command indicating the first basic point and the second basic point (low) is output to the display control device 114.

In addition, even when the cumulative point value is higher than the reference value or higher than at the time of determination, if the reserved ball to be hit is stored, the first basic point and the second basic point (high) are shown. The display command is output to the display control device 114.

In this way, since the point values of the two patterns are determined in advance at the time of determination, it is possible to reduce the control load at the time of executing the point acquisition effect.

Next, the point effect in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 289 to 291. First, FIG. 289 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the execution of the point acquisition effect on the reserved ball is started in the point acquisition effect variation pattern. In FIG. 289 (a), the variation of the special symbol is executed, and the total points currently acquired (900 points in the example of FIG. 289 (a)) are displayed in the point display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm. , The points currently earned are notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Then, the executing symbol m0, the first reserved symbol m1 and the second reserved symbol m2 are displayed in the sub-display area, and the reserved ball written as 500p is displayed in the second reserved symbol m2. There is. In this way, in this control example, as a result of determining the lottery result of the special symbol stored on hold before the start of the change (look-ahead result), the point value is given to the second change from the change using the hold ball. Can be notified to the player. With this configuration, the player can have the expectation that the point value can be obtained not only by the result of the change but also by the change of the special symbol stored on hold. Further, the point-giving effect using the reserved ball is not limited to the reserved ball stored in the reserved ball, and may be displayed for the running symbol m0. With this configuration, the player can execute the game while expecting unexpected points to be obtained.

FIG. 289 (b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect display mode in which the player can select the reach desired by the next variation by consuming the point values acquired so far.

In the example of FIG. 289 (b), the currently acquired point value is displayed in the point display area Dm3 (1800 points in the example of FIG. 289 (b)), and the player selects the reach of the next variation by using this. can do. The reach pattern that can be selected this time is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the left option 822e, the middle option 822f, and the right option 822g are displayed. At the top of the main display area Dm, the characters "Buy a reach !!" are displayed, and the player is informed in an easy-to-understand manner that the player can select the reach of the next fluctuation using the current point value. NS. Further, the cursor ka is displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. As will be described in detail later, when the player presses the frame button 22, the displayed cursor ka moves under the options 822e to 822g, and the cursor ka is aligned with the option desired by the player to select. be able to.

The reach contents and required point values are displayed in the options 822e to 822g, respectively. In the example of FIG. 289 (b), the left option 822e has "A reach 500 points" and the middle option 822f has "B reach 800 points". , Right option 822g is displayed as "SP reach 10000 points" respectively. The player can select the reach based on the display content of each option and the current earned point value displayed in the point display area Dm3. In the example of FIG. 289 (b), since the current point value is 1800 points, the player can select "A reach" and "B reach" of the left option 822e.

In this way, by configuring the player to select the fluctuation pattern of the next fluctuation according to the current earned point value, the player can have a sense of expectation for the point earned game, and the hobby of the game. Can be enhanced. Further, in this control example, the reach that cannot be selected by the current point value is also displayed, such as the right option 822g, but only the reach that can be selected by the current point value is displayed. May be good. With this configuration, the player can play the game without feeling disappointed that he / she cannot select the desired reach.

FIG. 290 is a diagram showing an example of the effect content that when the pseudo-variation of the special symbol is executed by the third symbol display device 81, it can be re-variated using the points.

In the example of FIG. 290 (a), the result of the special symbol being removed is temporarily stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm. 7 is displayed on the left symbol Z1 and 7 is displayed on the right symbol Z3 to reach, but 4 is stopped on the middle symbol Z2, and the display mode is off and temporarily stopped. Then, in the lower right corner of the main display area Dm, the characters "Re-variate using 500 points !!" are displayed, and the player can re-variate the special symbol by using the currently acquired point value. It informs the player that it can be done.

FIG. 290 (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the special symbol is re-variated from FIG. 290 (a) using points. In the main display area Dm, 7 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol Z1 and the right symbol Z3, and the middle symbol Z2 is displayed in a re-variable manner.

In this way, even when the pseudo fluctuation is set as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, by setting the point consumption effect, it is possible to provide the player with a feeling of excitement even after the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped.

FIG. 291 is a diagram showing an example of display contents in which a part of the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not changed (fixed) by using the acquired point value. In FIG. 291 (a), the symbols Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner. Then, at the upper part of the main display area Dm, the characters "hold the left symbol with 2000 points and 3 fluctuations with 7 symbols !!" are displayed. That is, if 2000 points are used, the player is informed in an easy-to-understand manner that the left symbol Z1 is fixed to the 7 symbols that are easy to win the jackpot with higher expectation during the period from the fluctuation to the 3 fluctuations.

FIG. 291 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents when the left symbol Z1 is fixed at 7. In the main display area Dm, the left symbol Z1 in which the symbol is fixed at 7, and the changing middle symbol Z2 and the right symbol Z3 are displayed. "Remaining 2 fluctuation HOLD" is displayed at the upper part of the main display area Dm, and the remaining number of fluctuations to which the left symbol Z1 is fixed is notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

With this configuration, the chances of executing the point effect increase, and the player can have a higher expectation for the point effect.

<Electrical configuration in the second control example>
The electrical configuration in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 292 to 296. The second control example differs from the first control example in that the point selection table 222ad, the fluctuation point selection table 222ae, and the consumption point selection table 222af are added to the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, respectively. .. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, the description thereof will be omitted.

The point selection table 222ad is a selection table for selecting a point value to be given to the player by advance notice or the like. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 293 and 294, the selection table is configured to be switched between the state with the holding ball and the state without the holding ball, and the state with the holding ball (see FIG. 293). Then, the hold effect (the effect of changing the hold symbol to give points (the point value is displayed in the hold symbol)) and the PUSH effect (the effect that the point value is displayed and given by pressing the frame button 22). ), The character effect (the effect that the character for the notice is displayed while the special symbol is changing and the character earns points) is determined by the effect counter acquired, and the point value set in the table is set. Will be done. For example, if the value of the acquired effect counter is 100, 200 pt is determined by the character effect.

Further, in a state where the special symbol is not variablely displayed (fixed timing or the like), the hold effect is forcibly selected. For example, if the value of the effect counter is 100, the hold effect of 200 pt is selected.

Next, in the state where there is no reserved ball, it is selected from the point selection table 222ae shown in FIG. 294. It should be noted that the difference is that the hold effect is not selected when there is no hold ball.

The variable point selection table 222ae is a selection table for setting a point value set in the point acquisition effect shown in FIG. 288. The variable point selection table is a table for selecting a first basic point (first) and a second basic point (second (low), second (high)). At the start of fluctuation, the first basic point, the second basic point (low), and the second basic point (high) are selected. The first basic point is a point value displayed in the production in any state, and the second basic point value is a high point value due to the point value held by the player at the actual production execution timing. The second basic point (high) is selected or the second basic point (low), which is a low point value, is selected. The second basic point (high) is selected when the possessed points are not 1000 pt or more higher than at the time of selection, while the second basic point (low) is displayed when the possessed points are 1000 pt or more higher. It is configured in.

In this way, it is possible to reduce the processing load at the time of executing the effect by making a selection so that even if there is a change in the point value at the start of the change, it can be dealt with.

Further, as shown in FIG. 288 (a), how many point values are given to which swords (a1 to a4) are sorted based on the display position table shown in FIG. 295 (b). It is determined. When the acquired effect counter is 100, the first basic point value is distributed to the sword a4 and the sword a3. This distribution is distributed so as to be within the first basic point value selected in a possible combination with respect to the point value displayed in FIG. 288 (a). For example, when the effect counter is 100 and the hold point value is 300, 60 points are selected as the first basic point value, 60 points are selected as the second basic point (low), and 120 points are selected as the second basic point (high). Will be done. Further, in the display position table, 60 points, which is the first basic point value, is set to, for example, 40 points for the sword a4 and 20 points for the sword a3. Here, the display control device individually sets display data of each sword and each point value shown in FIG. 288 (a) as display data for each point value, and each sword and each point value data. By setting in correspondence with and, the point value selected in the variable point selection table is distributed to each sword, and the effect acquired by the player can be executed.

With this configuration, even if the same first basic point is selected, the point value corresponding to each sword can be randomized, and various effects can be produced. With this configuration, it is possible to execute various point acquisition effects with fewer fluctuation patterns than setting a plurality of effect of point values that can be acquired for each fluctuation pattern.

The winning consumption point selection table 222g is a selection table for determining the consumption points of each reach in the consumption effect shown in FIG. 289 (b) when the hit / fail determination result is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 296 (a), the selection is made based on the current possession points and the acquired effect counter values.

The out-of-order consumption point selection table 222g is a table for determining the point value to be selected when the out-of-order fluctuation display is executed (see FIG. 296 (b)). Since the specific configuration is the same as that of the hit consumption point selection table, the description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the second control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 297 to 304. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example is the advance notice setting process (S2131), the special point selection process (S2132), and the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above. The difference is that the consumption reach selection process (S2133) is added, and the command determination process 2 (S2134) is executed instead of the command determination process (S2114 in FIG. 258). Regarding other processes, the same parts as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the main process in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 297. FIG. 297 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main process in the second control example. In the main process in the second control example, after the liquid crystal display effect execution management process (S2110) is executed for the main process (see FIG. 257) of the first control example, the notice setting process (S2031) and the special point selection process are performed. (S2132), point to add consumption reach selection process (S2133), frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (S2130) instead of frame button input monitoring / effect process (S2107), command determination process (S2114) It differs in the command determination process 2 (S2134). Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the command determination process 2 (S2134) in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 298. FIG. 298 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 2 (S2134) in the second control example. In the command determination process 2 (S2134) in the second control example, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received for the command determination process (S2114) in the first control example (S2201: Yes), the variation pattern is received. The difference is that the process 2 (S2220) is executed. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the variation pattern reception process 2 (S2220) in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 299. FIG. 299 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern reception process 2 (S2220) in the second control example. The variation pattern reception process 2 (S2220) in the second control example determines whether or not the variation pattern command received this time is a point acquisition effect for the variation pattern reception process (S2202) in the first control example, and points. The difference is that the selection process is executed. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the variation pattern reception process 2 (S2220), first, the variation start flag 223d is set to ON (S2221), and the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern command received this time and the value of the variation pattern selection counter 223aa (S2221). S2222). Next, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern determined in the process of S2222 is a point acquisition effect (S2223). When it is determined that the determined fluctuation pattern is the point acquisition effect (S2223: Yes), the point selection process is executed (S2224), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the determined fluctuation pattern is not the point acquisition effect (S2223: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the point selection process (S2224), which is one process of the variation pattern reception process 2 (S2220) in the second control example, will be described with reference to FIG. 300. FIG. 300 is a flowchart showing the contents of the point selection process (S2224).

In the point selection process (S2224), first, the value of the point storage area 223ab is acquired (S2321), and it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern determined this time is a hit (S2322). When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern determined this time is a hit (S2322: Yes), it is determined whether or not the received winning information is a hit (S2323). If it is determined that the winning information is correct (S2323: Yes), a pointless effect is set (S2324), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S2322, when it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is not a hit (that is, it is out of order) (S2322: No), or when it is determined that the received winning information is not a hit (that is, it is not a hit) ( S2323: No), a basic point is selected from the variable point selection table 222ae based on the current point and set in the first basic point setting area (S2325). Then, based on the current point value, a point value is selected from the second basic point selection table 222ae2, the current point value and the selected point value are set in the second basic point setting area (S2326), and this processing is performed. To finish.

Next, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S2130) in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 301. FIG. 301 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S2130) in the second control example. In the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (S2130) in the second control example, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received in the command determination process (S2114) of the first control example (S2201: Yes). , The difference is that the operation processing related to the selection and determination of points is executed.

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S2130), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation valid timer 223n is larger than 0, that is, whether or not the button operation is valid (S2421). If it is determined that the value of the operation valid timer 223n is not larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S2421: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S2421 that the value of the operation valid timer 223n is larger than 0 (S2421: No), the value of the operation valid timer 223n is subtracted (S2422), and then the value is subtracted in the processing of S2422. It is determined whether or not the value of the operation valid timer 223n is larger than 0 (S2423). When it is determined that the value of the subtracted operation valid timer 223n is larger than 0 (S2423: Yes), a display command indicating the reach content corresponding to the cursor position is set (S2424), and the process proceeds to S2425. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the operation valid timer 223n is 0 in the process of S2423 (S2423: No), the process of S2424 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2425.

After executing the process of S2423 or S2425, it is determined whether or not the selection operation is executed (S2425). When it is determined that the selection operation has been executed (S2425: Yes), the information corresponding to the operation is stored in the cursor position storage area 223ac (S2426), and the display command corresponding to the cursor position is set (S2427). This process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the selection operation has not been executed in the process of S2425 (S2425: No), it is determined whether or not the determination operation has been executed (S2428). When it is determined that the determination operation has been executed (S2428: Yes), the reach command for displaying the reach content determined in the processing of S2428 is set (S2429), and the points corresponding to the determined reach content are subtracted. (S2430), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the determination operation has been executed in the process of S2428 (S2428: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the contents of the notice setting process (S2131) will be described with reference to FIG. 302. FIG. 302 is a flowchart showing the contents of the notice setting process (S2131). The notice setting process (S2131) is one of the processes in the main process (FIG. 297) in the second control example, and is a process of selecting the point value of the point effect from the point selection table 222ad when the special symbol is changing. Will be executed.

In the notice setting process (S2131), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is changing (S2511). If it is determined that the special symbol is not changing (S2511: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2511 that the special symbol is changing (S2511: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is within the execution period of the advance notice effect (S2512). When it is determined that it is within the execution period of the advance notice effect (S2512: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223ad is acquired (S2513), and the point selection table is based on the value of the effect counter 223ad acquired in the process of S2513. A point value is selected from 222ad (S2514), and this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2512 that the advance notice is not within the period in which the advance notice can be executed (S2512: No), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls is more than 0 (S2515). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls is more than 0 (S2515: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223ad is acquired (S2516) because it is a period during which the hold effect can be executed, and the effect counter 223ad acquired in the process of S2516 is acquired. Based on the value of, the point of the hold effect is selected from the point selection table 222ad (S2517), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2515 that the number of reserved balls is 0 (S2515: No), it is determined that the advance notice cannot be set, and the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the contents of the special point selection process (S2132) will be described with reference to FIG. 303. FIG. 303 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special point selection process (S2132).

In the special point selection process (S2132), first, it is determined whether or not the point effect is being executed (S2611). If it is determined that the point effect is not a variation to be executed (S2611: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2611, it is determined whether or not it is the timing of point setting (S2612). If it is determined that the timing is not the point setting timing (S2612: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the timing is the point setting (S2612: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current point effect is an effect for setting 0 points (S2613). If it is determined that the current point is an effect for setting 0 point (S2613: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2613 that the effect of this time is not an effect of setting 0 points (S2613: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2614.

After executing the process of S2613, it is next determined whether or not there is hit information in the winning information storage area 223f (S2614). If it is determined that there is a hit in the winning information storage area 223f (S2614: Yes), a display command indicating the high points of the first basic point setting area and the second basic point setting area is set (S2615). End the process. On the other hand, in the process of S2614, when it is determined that the winning information storage area 223f is not hit (S2614: No), it is determined whether or not the difference between the points acquired this time and the current points is 1000 points or more (S2616). When it is determined that the difference between the points acquired this time and the current points is 1000 points or more (S2616: Yes), the above-mentioned processing of S2615 is executed, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2616, when it is determined that the difference between the points acquired this time and the current points is not 1000 points or more (S2616: No), the first basic point setting area and the second basic point setting area A display command indicating the low point of is set (S2617), and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the consumption reach selection process (S2133) will be described with reference to FIG. 304. FIG. 304 is a flowchart showing the contents of the consumption reach selection process (S2133).

In the consumption reach selection process (S2133), first, it is determined whether or not the consumption reach is feasible (S2711). If it is determined that the consumption reach is not feasible (S2711: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the consumption reach is feasible (S2711: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is the reach data selection timing (S2712). If it is determined that it is not the reach data selection timing (S2712: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the reach data selection timing (S2712: Yes), the process proceeds to S2713.

In the process of S2713, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation is a winning fluctuation pattern (S2713). If it is determined that the current fluctuation is a hit (S2713: Yes), the consumption points are set from the hit consumption point selection table 222af based on the current number of points (S2714), and the process proceeds to S2717. do. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2713 that the current fluctuation is not a winning fluctuation pattern (that is, it is out of alignment), it is determined whether the current point is equal to or higher than the set value (S2715). If it is determined that the current point is not equal to or higher than the set value (S2715: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2715 that the current point is equal to or higher than the set value (S2715: Yes), the consumption point is set from the consumption point selection table 222af for deviation based on the current number of points (S2716). ), The process proceeds to S2717. In the process of S2717, a display reach selection command corresponding to the selection reach effect in which the selected consumption points are set is set (S2717), and this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 305 to 306, each control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described. In the process of the display control device 114 in the second control example, the V interrupt process is replaced with the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276 (b)) for the process of the display control device 114 in the first control example. 2 (see FIG. 305) is executed, and the command determination process 2 (S6311 in FIG. 306) is executed instead of the command determination process (S6302 in FIG. 277). Regarding other processes, the same parts as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the V interrupt process 2 executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 305. FIG. 305 is a flowchart showing the contents of the V interrupt process 2. The V interrupt process 2 in the second control example differs in that the command determination process 2 (S6311) is executed instead of the command determination process (S6302). Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the command determination process 2 (S6311) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 306. FIG. 306 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 2 (S6311).

In the command determination process 2 (S6311) in the second control example, if it is determined that there is no display notice display command this time in the process of S6408 (S6408: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display point command. (S6421). If it is determined that there is a display point command (S6421: Yes), the point command received this time is set in the display point storage area (S6422), and the process returns to S6401. On the other hand, in the process of S6421, when it is determined that there is no display point command (S6421: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display effect point command (S6423). If it is determined that there is a display effect point command (S6423: Yes), the point display process (S6424) is executed, and the process returns to the process of S6401.

On the other hand, in the process of S6423, when it is determined that there is no display effect point command (S6423: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display reach command (S6425). If it is determined that there is a display reach command (S6425: Yes), the reach display data table corresponding to the command received this time is set (S6426), and the process returns to S6401. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no display reach command in the processing of S6425 (S6425: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display reach selection command (S6427), and it is determined that there is a display reach selection command. (S6427: Yes), the display data table of the corresponding selection reach is set (S6428), and the process returns to S6401. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display reach selection command (S6427: No), the process proceeds to S6418.

<About the third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 307 to 319. In the second control example, the control in the lower displacement unit 400 described above will be described. Of course, the first control example and the second control example described above may be combined with the third control example, but for convenience, some of the first control example and the second control example will be described by omitting the illustration. ..

In the third control example, the operation control of the lower displacement unit 400 and the control in the configuration in which the game ball is launched from the exit opening 400 will be described. The same description as that of the first control example will be omitted. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<About the configuration of the lower displacement unit 400 in the third control example>
FIG. 307 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the third control example, which is substantially the same as FIG. 66 described above, but the storage sensor SP5 is added. The storage sensor SP5 is configured to be capable of detecting that a game ball has entered from the opening 451a and also detecting whether or not the game ball has entered the ball receiving portion 467. Further, since both tip portions of the ball receiving portion 467 are arranged at a detectable position, it is also possible to detect the position of the ball receiving portion 467.

As a method of detecting the position of the ball receiving portion, when the movable rack 464 is moved from the origin position toward the exit opening 471, the tip of the ball receiving portion 467 is detected by the storage sensor SP5, and then the ball on the rear side is detected. The tip of the receiving portion 467 is detected. In this case, after the slide motor is driven for 10 steps from the state in which the storage sensor SP5 on the front side is turned on, the stop is controlled so that the ball receiving position (the position shown in FIG. 307 (b)) is reached. It can be moved so that the ball receiving portion 467 is located.

Further, if the storage sensor is turned on 20 steps after the storage sensor detects the tip on the front side of the ball receiving unit 467 and before the slide motor KM2 is driven, the game ball is held by the ball receiving unit 467 ( It can be determined that the game ball is in the ball receiving portion 467). Further, when the movable rack 464 is moved from the state where it is movable to the launch position (the position shown in FIG. 307 (c)) to the origin position (the position shown in FIG. 307 (a)), the tip on the rear side is also moved. The storage sensor SP5 detects (ball receiving portion 467) first, but the method for detecting the position of the ball receiving portion 467 is the same.

The storage sensor SP5 is composed of a reflection type laser output sensor, and the laser light output to the front surface from the storage sensor SP5 is blocked and the laser light reflected by the detection unit of the storage sensor SP5 is detected ( On state) Sensor.

Therefore, the storage sensor SP5 not only detects that the game ball has entered the opening 451a, but also detects the state in which the game ball has entered the ball receiving portion 467, detects the position of the ball receiving portion 467, and is movable. The position of the rack 464 can also be detected.

In the initial state (at the end of the initial operation after the power is turned on), the movable rack 464 is moved to the origin position shown in FIG. 307 (a). As already described with reference to FIG. 81, at the origin position, the contact plate 464c rotates the bulging portion 543a in the rear direction to regulate the distribution of the game ball to the opening 451a. By moving the movable rack 464 from the origin position to the ball receiving position (see FIG. 307 (b)), the bulging portion 543a rotates forward and the game ball is distributed to the opening 451a. Here, the time required for the movable rack 363 to be moved to the ball receiving position is until the distribution member 540 rotates and the game ball that distributes the game ball toward the opening 451a reaches the opening 451a. It is configured to be movable in a shorter time than the time of. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game ball enters the ball before the ball receiving portion 467 moves to the ball receiving position and the game ball cannot be received by the ball receiving portion 467.

When the game ball is received by the ball receiving portion 467, the movable rack 464 is moved to the origin position in the accepted state, and then the tilt motor KM1 of the lower displacement unit 400 is driven to drive the lower displacement unit 400. 1 It is rotationally driven so as to rise to the overhanging state (see FIG. 48). As a result, the lower displacement unit is driven ascending while the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged on the rotation axis side of the lower displacement unit 400, so that the driving force required for ascending can be reduced, and the motor or the like can be used. The load can be reduced.

When the lower displacement unit 400 is in the first overhanging state, the lower displacement unit 400 is driven upward by the operation of the frame button 22 of the player. This drive is stopped when the slide motor KM2 is driven in 30 steps, and then when the frame button 22 is operated, the 30-step slide motor KM2 is driven to drive the downward displacement unit 400. At this time, it is determined whether or not it is detected (detected as on) by the ascending position sensor that detects that the lower displacement unit 400 is in the position of the first overhanging state while driving 30 steps, and it is detected. It is configured to be stopped and controlled at the timing. Further, in the state where the ascending position sensor is not turned on even after driving 30 steps, the slide motor KM2 is driven until the ascending position sensor is further turned on. If the ascending position sensor does not turn on even after driving 15 steps, the lower displacement unit 400 is stopped at the position where the ascending position sensor is increased by 15 steps. In this way, it can be determined that the ascending position sensor is clearly not turned on, and the game can be played by switching to the control of only the number of steps. In this case, an error may be notified by a lamp, a display, an external terminal, or the like.

When the ending at the time of a big hit is set, the lower displacement unit is moved to the ascending position, and then the movable rack 464 is moved toward the launch position to eject the game ball held in the ball receiving portion 467. Fire more game balls. The timing of firing is the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22, and if the frame button 22 is not operated even after the valid time of the frame button 22 has elapsed, the firing operation is automatically executed. ..

When the power is turned on, the initial operation described later is also executed in the lower variable unit 400. When the small hit or big hit C is executed in the state where the power is cut off, when the power is turned on, the executed small hit or big hit C is restored in the state when the power is turned off. 3 The electric accessory is opened. In that case, the game ball enters the third electric accessory and the game ball moves to the lower variable unit 400 in a state where the initial operation of the lower variable unit 400 executed by the voice lamp control device 113 is not completed. There is a risk of flowing down.

In that case, the game ball enters from the opening 451a of the lower variable unit 400 and the game ball enters the ball receiving portion 467, or the game ball enters from the opening 451a and the lower variable unit 400. There is a problem that the game ball enters the inside (see FIG. 67 (c)). However, in the third control example, a command from the main control device 110 (a payout command or a winning effect (payout award) based on the entry of a game ball of the third electric accessory during the period in which the initial operation is executed). In order to execute the command) for displaying the value corresponding to the number of balls on the third symbol display device 81), the monitoring of the storage sensor SP5 is started, and the ending command is displayed after the initial operation is completed. 2 after receiving either the fluctuation pattern command or the customer waiting command (command output from the main controller 110 when the fluctuation is not executed for a certain period of time or the state where the fluctuation and the firing handle are not operated for a certain period of time continues) Monitoring whether the storage sensor SP5 is turned on until the elapse of seconds (identifying whether the game ball is turned on at intervals (for example, 4 ms) through which the game ball can pass) is executed.

With this configuration, even during the period when the third electric accessory is opened due to the timing when the initial operation is executed, the storage sensor is available for the period during which the game ball can enter the opening 451a. The SP5 can be monitored, and it is possible to monitor whether or not the game ball has entered the lower variable unit 400. When the storage sensor SP5 is monitored and the passage of the game ball is detected, one of the ending command (command output at the end of the jackpot game), the variation pattern command, and the customer waiting command is output. 2 In the operation of ejecting the game ball from the lower variable unit 400 at the timing when the second has elapsed, the ejection operation (after the operation rack 464 moves to the launch position while the rotation of the lower variable unit 400 is in the origin position, the origin position The operation of moving up to) is executed, and the operation of collecting the game ball discharged from the exit opening 471 of the lower variable unit 400 from the collection port 411f (see FIG. 43) is executed.

As a result, even when the game ball is guided into the lower variable unit 400 during the initial operation, the ejection operation is executed after the game ball does not enter the lower variable unit 400.

After 2 seconds have passed from each of the above commands, the ejecting operation is executed by moving the movable rack 464 from the firing position to the origin position, and the distribution member 540 moves the game ball to the lower variable unit 400. A lapse of 2 seconds is set in consideration of the period from when the game ball is not sorted until the game ball reaches the opening 451a (the game ball that was finally sorted).

When the above command output based on the fact that the ball has entered the third electric accessory from the main control device 110 is received during the period in which the initial operation is being executed, the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is turned on. It is configured so that the selection of the effect (variation pattern) that tilts the lower variable unit 400 until the discharge operation is completed is prohibited, and the execution thereof is prohibited. That is, the effect of using the lower variable unit 400 is prohibited until the fluctuation when the discharge operation is completed.

On the other hand, if the command is received but the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is not turned on (that is, OFF), either the ending command (command output at the end of the jackpot game), the variation pattern command, or the customer waiting command. The storage sensor SP5 is monitored until the monitoring period of 2 seconds elapses after receiving the command, and the lower variable unit 400 is used for the fluctuation started until the execution is completed. It is configured to be banned.

With this configuration, the lower variable unit 400 is configured so that the lower variable unit 400 does not tilt when the game ball carelessly enters the lower variable unit 400 due to the initial operation, so that the game ball becomes the lower variable unit 400. It is possible to suppress a problem that the tilting motor KM1 is damaged due to an excessive load applied to the tilting motor KM1 when the ball is tilted while the ball is in the ball.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third control example>
In the third control example, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 has initial operation data 222ba, firing operation data 222bb, origin operation data 222bc, discharge operation data 222b, and first operation data 222be for ROM 222 of the first control example. The second operation data 222bf has been added. Since the other points are the same as those of the first control example, the description thereof will be omitted.

The initial operation data 222ba is movable data set to execute the initial operation of the lower variable unit 400, which is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 309, the type of motor to be driven, the driving direction, and the stop condition of the motor are set for each operation status. The operation status is set from the initial value 0 by the initial operation setting process (S2021, see FIG. 312) executed in the start-up process executed by the MPU221 of the voice lamp set control device 113 executed when the power is turned on. It is started, added one by one, the drive corresponding to the operation status is executed, the operation status is added each time the execution is completed, and the necessary initial operation is executed in order. Regarding the drive direction set in the initial operation data 222ba, the + direction of the slide motor is the direction of driving the motor in the direction of moving the movable rack 464 from the origin position to the launch position direction, and the plus direction of the tilt motor is. , The direction in which the lower variable unit 400 is rotated from the origin position (the retracted position sensor is on) to the first overhanging state direction.

The launch operation data 222bb is operation data in which the movable rack 464 is driven from the origin position to the launch position and the game ball is launched from the exit opening 471. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 310 (a), the slide motor is driven in the + direction until the launch position sensor is turned on.

The origin operation data 222bc is movable data for returning to the origin for moving the movable rack 464 and the lower variable unit 400 to the origin position. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 310 (b), after launching the game ball from the exit opening 471, the origin position sensor is turned on in the-direction (driving toward the origin position) of the slide motor. Drives up to, and drives the tilt motor in the negative direction (drives in the retracted position (origin position) direction) until the retracted position sensor is turned on.

Further, when the lower variable unit 400 is in the retracted position (origin position) and the ejecting operation is executed by the operation of the movable rack 464, the setting of the movable data in the tilting motor is not executed.

The discharge operation data 222b is operation data for discharging the game ball that has entered the lower variable unit 400, and the same data as the launch operation data 222bb is set.

The first motion data is motion data for receiving a game ball into the ball receiving portion 467 while the lower variable unit 400 is in the retracted position. After moving the movable unit 464 from the origin position to the ball receiving position, the origin It is the drive data to move to the position (see FIG. 311 (a)).

The second operation data 222bc moves the lower variable unit 400 to the ascending position (first overhanging state), raises it by 30 steps based on the operation of the frame button 22, and then operates the frame button 22. It is the data for executing the fanning operation (swinging operation) of lowering until the ascending sensor is turned on. Further, the display mode imitating the lower displacement unit 400 can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the lower displacement unit 400 is operated in the effect of launching the game ball from the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement unit 400. The display mode imitating the lower displacement unit can be changed to the first overhanging state, and the effect of firing the game ball can be displayed in place of the display mode. Further, when the lower displacement unit 400 is oscillated, the lower displacement unit 400 is changed to the first overhanging state, but in the oscillating effect, the lower displacement unit 400 is not oscillated and is in the first overhanging state. In the third symbol display device 81 on the back side of the lower displacement unit 400, the symbol imitating the lower displacement unit 400 is swung from the stopped lower displacement unit 400 within a predetermined movable range. It is possible to display the imitated display mode and fuse the display mode with the lower displacement unit 400 to produce a swing effect. Here, the voice lamp control device 113 is equipped with an RTC capable of clocking the date and time, and the swing effect of the lower displacement unit 400 is not executed after a certain period of time (for example, one year later). By switching to the swing effect fused with the display mode, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement unit 400 from failing due to movement exceeding the durability of the lower displacement unit 400. Further, when a failure that does not operate even if the operation data of the lower displacement unit 400 is set is detected, the display mode imitating the lower displacement unit 400 is variably displayed instead of the effect that the lower displacement unit 400 operates. You may try to do it.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 312 to 319, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example is the initial operation setting process (S2071) and the initial discharge operation setting process (S2140) with respect to the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above. ), The difference is that the operation control process (S2112) is added. Specifically, a process of controlling the operation of the lower displacement unit 400 and a process of confirming the initial operation of the lower displacement unit 400 at the time of start-up processing are added.

Next, the initial operation setting process (S2071), which is one process of the start-up process in the third control example, will be described with reference to FIG. 312. FIG. 312 is a flowchart showing the contents of the initial operation setting process (S2071). The initial operation setting process (S2071) is a process for confirming the operation content of the lower displacement unit 400 at the time of the start-up process.

In the initial operation setting process (S2071), first, it is determined whether or not the savings sensor monitoring flag 223bi is on (S2031). When it is determined that the savings sensor monitoring flag 223bi is not on (S2031: No), it is determined whether or not the upper left prize ball command has been received (S2032). When it is determined that the upper left prize ball command has been received (S2032: Yes), the operation prohibition counter 223bk is set to 2 (S2033), the savings sensor monitoring flag 223bi is set to ON (S2034), and the process of S2038 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, in the process of S2032, when it is determined that the upper left prize ball command has not been received (S2032), the processes of S2033 to S2034 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S2038.

On the other hand, in the process of S2031, when it is determined that the savings sensor monitoring flag 223bi is on (S2031: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ball discharge flag 223bj is on (S2035). When it is determined that the ball discharge flag 223bj is not "on" (S2035: No), the ball discharge flag 223bj is set to on (S2036), the savings sensor monitoring flag 223bi is set to off (S2037), and S2038. Move to processing. On the other hand, in the process of S2035, when it is determined that the ball discharge flag 223bj is on (S2035: Yes), the processes of S2036 to S2037 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S2038.

In the process of S2038, it is determined whether the ball ejection operation is completed or whether the operation status value stored in the operation status storage area 223bf is 0. If it is determined that the ball ejection operation is not completed (S2038: No), the processes of S2031 to S2037 are repeatedly executed until the operation is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation is completed (S2038: Yes), it is determined whether or not the operation status is set to 5 (S2039). If it is determined that 5 is not set in the operation status (S2039: No), +1 is set in the operation status (S2040), the corresponding operation data is set (S2041), and the confirmation display data table is used as the basis. The time data is set in the timekeeping counter (S2042), and the process returns to S2031. On the other hand, if it is determined that the operation status is 5 in the process of S2039 (S2039: Yes), the operation status is reset (S2043), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 313, the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. In the main process in the third control example, the same processes as in S2101 to S2111 of the main process (see FIG. 257) in the first control example are executed, and then the initial discharge operation setting process (S2140) and the operation control process (S2141) are performed. The difference is that and is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the initial discharge operation setting process (S2140), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 313) in the third control example, will be described with reference to FIG. 314. FIG. 314 is a flowchart showing the contents of the initial discharge operation setting process (S2140).

In the initial discharge operation setting process (S2140), first, it is determined whether or not the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is on (S3901). When it is determined that the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is not on (S3901: No), since the ball is not stored in the ball receiving unit 455, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is on (S3901: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the standby counter 223bl is larger than 0 (S3902). When it is determined that the value of the standby counter 223bl is not larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S3902: No), it is determined whether or not the ball discharge flag 223bj is ON (S3903). When it is determined that the ball discharge flag 223bj is not on (S3903: No), it is determined whether or not the storage sensor is on (S3904). When it is determined that the storage sensor is on (S3904: Yes), the ball discharge flag 223bj is set to on (S3905), and the process proceeds to S3906. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball discharge flag 223bj is on in the processing of S3903 (S3903: Yes), or when it is determined that the storage sensor is not on in the processing of S3904 (S3904: No). The process of S3905 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3906.

In the process of S3906, it is determined whether or not any of the jackpot ending command, the variation pattern command, and the customer waiting command has been received (S3906). If it is determined that any of the jackpot ending command, fluctuation pattern command, and customer waiting command has been received (S3906: Yes), the value of the standby counter corresponding to 2 seconds is set (S3907), and this process ends. do. On the other hand, if it is determined that none of the jackpot ending command, fluctuation pattern command, or customer waiting command has been received (S3906: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S3902, when it is determined that the value of the standby counter 223bl is larger than 0 (S3902: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ball discharge flag 223bj is ON (S3908). When it is determined that the ball discharge flag 223bj is not on (S3908: No), it is determined whether or not the storage sensor is on (S3909). When it is determined that the storage sensor is on (S3909: Yes), the ball discharge flag 223bj is set to on (S3910), and the process proceeds to S3911. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball discharge flag 223bj is on in the processing of S3908 (S3908: Yes), or when it is determined that the storage sensor is not on in the processing of S3904 (S3909: No). The process of S3910 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3911.

In the process of S3911, the value of the standby counter 223bl is subtracted by 1 (S3911). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the standby counter 223bl subtracted in the process of S3911 is 0 (S3912). When it is determined that the value of the standby counter 223bl is 0 (S3912: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ball discharge flag 223bj is ON (S3913). When it is determined that the ball discharge flag 223bj is on (S3913: Yes), the discharge operation data is set (S3914), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the standby counter 223bl is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) in the processing of S3912 (S3912: No), or the ball discharge flag 223bj is not turned on in the processing of S3913. If it is determined (S3913: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the operation control process (S2141), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 313) in the third control example, will be described with reference to FIG. 315. FIG. 315 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation control process (S2141). In this operation control process (S2141), a process for controlling the operation of the lower displacement unit 400 is executed according to the gaming state.

In the operation control process (S2141), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit medium flag 223ac or the large hit medium flag 223ab is on, that is, whether the current gaming state is a small hit or a big hit (S4001). If it is determined that the small hit medium flag 223ab or the big hit medium flag 223ab is on, the first operation setting process is executed (S4002), and this process is terminated.

Here, the first operation setting process (S4002), which is one process in the operation control process (S2141), will be described with reference to FIG. 316. FIG. 316 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first operation setting process (S4002). In this first operation setting process (S4002), a process for controlling the operation of the ball receiving unit 445 is executed when the gaming state is a small hit or a big hit.

In the first operation setting process (S4002), first, it is determined whether or not the operation status is 0 (S4101). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the operation status storage area 223bf is 0. When it is determined that the operation status is 0 (S4101: Yes), the operation status is set to 1 (S4102), and the operation data is set in the ball receiving unit 445 (S4103). The operation status 1 is defined in the first operation data 222be (see FIG. 310 (a)), but when the operation status is set to 1, the slide motor KM is driven and is driven in the positive direction from the origin position. Then, when the first sensor is set to ON, it stops. By driving in this way, it is possible to drive the ball flowing in from the third winning opening 82 to a position where it can be received by the ball receiving portion 467.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation status is not 0 in the process of S4101, it is determined whether or not the operation status is 1 (S4104). When it is determined that the operation status is 1 (S4104: Yes), it is determined whether or not the second position sensor is ON (S4105). When it is determined that the second position sensor is not on (S4105: No), the ball receiving unit 445 is not driven to the second position, so the processing of S4106 to S4107 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4108. .. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second position sensor is on, the operation status is set to 2 (S4106) and the operation data is set (S4107). In the operation status 2, a standby is set from the third winning opening 82 until the ball is stored in the ball receiving portion 467.

On the other hand, in the process of S4104, when it is determined that the operation status is not 1, it is determined whether or not the operation status is 2 (S4108). When it is determined that the operation status is 2 (S4108: Yes), it is determined whether or not the storage sensor is on (S4109). When it is determined that the storage sensor is not on (S4109), the processing of S411 to S4111 is skipped and the processing of S4112 is performed because the ball that has entered from the third winning opening 82 is not stored. Transition. On the other hand, in the process of S4109, when it is determined that the storage sensor is on (S4109: Yes), the operation status is set to 3 (S4110), the operation data is set (S4111), and the process proceeds to S4112. do. In the operation status 3, when the ball is stored in the ball receiving portion 467 from the third winning opening 82, the slide motor is driven in the negative direction. And when the origin sensor is set to on, it stops. That is, the ball receiving unit 445 is controlled to return to the origin position once when the ball is stored from the third winning opening 82. Then, the balls stored in the discharge operation setting process (S4004) and the launch operation setting process (S4008), which will be described later, are discharged.

On the other hand, in the process of S4108, when it is determined that the operation status is not 2 (S4108: No), it is determined whether or not the operation status is 3 (S4112). When it is determined that the operation status is 3 (S4112: Yes), it is determined whether or not the origin sensor is ON (S4113). If it is determined that the origin sensor is on (S4113: Yes), the operation status is reset (S4114), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 315, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4001, when it is determined that the small hit medium flag 223bb or the big hit medium flag 223ba is not on (S4001: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit ending flag 223bd is set to on (S4003). .. If it is determined that the small hit ending flag 223db is on (S4003: Yes), the discharge operation setting process (S4004) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 317, the discharge operation setting process (S4004), which is one of the operations in the operation control process (S2141), will be described. FIG. 317 is a flowchart showing the contents of the discharge operation setting process (S4004). In this discharge operation setting process (S4004), a process for controlling the operation of discharging the ball from the ball receiving unit 445 is executed at the timing of the ending of the small hit.

In the discharge operation setting process (S4004), first, it is determined whether or not the origin operation flag 223bh is on. When it is determined that the origin operation flag 223bh is not on (S4201: No), the discharge operation data is set (S4202). Then, it is determined whether the launch position sensor is set to ON (S4203). When it is determined that the firing position sensor is off (S4203: Yes), the origin operation data is set (S4204), the origin operation flag 223bh is set to on (S4205), and the process proceeds to S4206. On the other hand, when it is determined that the origin operation flag 223bh is off in the processing of S4201 (S4201: No), the processing of S4201 to S4205 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4206.

Next, it is determined whether the origin sensor is on (S4206). When it is determined that the origin sensor is on (S4206: Yes), the origin operation flag is set to off (S4207), the small hit ending flag 223db is set to off (S4208), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4206 that the origin sensor is not on (S4206: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Returning to FIG. 315, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4003, when it is determined that the small hit ending flag 223bad is off (S4003: No), it is determined whether or not the big hit round is the eighth round (S4005). If it is determined that the jackpot round is the 8th round (S4005: Yes), the second operation setting process (S4006) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Here, the second operation setting process (S4006), which is one process in the operation control process (S2141), will be described with reference to FIG. 318. FIG. 318 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second operation setting process (S4006). This second operation setting process (S4006) is for raising the lower displacement unit 400 to the firing position in the eighth round of the jackpot and executing the up / down fanning effect when the player presses the frame button 22. It is a control process.

In the second operation setting process (S4006), first, it is determined whether or not the operation status is 0 (S4301). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the operation status storage area 223bf is 0. When it is determined that the operation status is 0 (S4301: Yes), the operation status is set to 1 (S4302), and the operation data is set in the lower displacement unit 400 (S4303). The operation status 1 is defined in the second operation data 222bf (see FIG. 310 (b)), but when the operation status is set to 1, the tilt motor is driven and is driven in the positive direction from the origin position. Then, when the rise sensor is set to on, it stops.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation status is not 0 in the process of S4301 (S4301: No), it is determined whether or not the operation status is 1 (S4304). When it is determined that the operation status is 1 (S4304: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ascending sensor is ON (S4305). When it is determined that the rise sensor is not on (S4305: No), the lower displacement unit 400 is not driven to the first position, so the processing of S4306 to S4307 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4308. On the other hand, when it is determined that the rise sensor is on, the operation status is set to 2 (S4306) and the operation data is set (S4307).

On the other hand, in the process of S4304, when it is determined that the operation status is not 1, it is determined whether or not the operation status is 2 (S4308). When it is determined that the operation status is 2 (S4308: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ascending sensor is ON (S4309). When it is determined that the rise sensor is not on (S4309), the lower displacement unit 400 is in the standby state at the origin position, so that the processing of S431 to S4312 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4313. On the other hand, in the process of S4308, when it is determined that the rise sensor is on (S4309: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S4310). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S4310: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S4310: Yes), the operation status is set to 3 (S4311), the operation data is set (S4312), and the process proceeds to S4313. In the operation status 3, when the ball is stored in the ball receiving portion 467 from the third winning opening 82, the tilting motor is driven in the positive direction. Then, when the lower displacement unit 400 is set to rise by 30 steps, it stops.

On the other hand, in the process of S4308, when it is determined that the operation status is not 2 (S4308: No), it is determined whether or not the operation status is 3 (S4313). When it is determined that the operation status is 3 (S4313: Yes), it is determined whether or not the lower displacement unit 400 has risen by 30 steps (S4314). If it is determined that the lower displacement unit 400 has risen by 30 steps (S4314: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lower displacement unit 400 has risen by 30 steps (S4314: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4315). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S4315: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed in the process of S4315 (S4315: Yes), the operation status is set to 2 (S4316), the operation data is set (S4317), and the present process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 315, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4005, when it is determined that there is no 8th round of the jackpot (S4005: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot ending flag is 223 bc (S4007). When it is determined that the jackpot ending flag 223bc is on (S4007: Yes), the firing operation setting process (S4008) is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot ending flag 223bc is not on (S4007: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Here, with reference to FIG. 318, the firing operation setting process (S4008), which is one of the operations in the operation control process (S2141), will be described. FIG. 318 is a flowchart showing the contents of the firing operation setting process (S4008). This firing motion setting process (S4008) executes a process for firing the ball stored in the first motion setting process (S4002) from the lower displacement unit 400 at the ending of the jackpot.

In the firing operation setting process (S4008), first, it is determined whether or not the rise sensor is on (S4401). If it is determined that the ascending sensor is not on (S4401: No), the descending 30-step data is set (S4402), and the process proceeds to S4411. On the other hand, when it is determined that the rise sensor is on (S4401: Yes), it is determined whether or not the firing effect flag 223be is on, that is, whether or not the firing effect is set (S4403). When it is determined that the firing effect flag 223be is not on (S4403: No), since the firing effect is not set, the firing effect flag 223be is set to on (S4404) and the firing effect is set (S4405). , The process proceeds to S4411.

On the other hand, in the process of S4403, when it is determined that the firing effect flag 223be is on (S4403: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is on (S4406). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is on (S4406: Yes), the processing of S4407 to S4410 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the processing of S4411. When it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S4406: No), the firing effect is set (S4407), and the firing effect flag 223be is set to off (S4408). Next, the firing operation data is set (S4409), the operation flag 223bg during the firing effect is set to ON (S4410), and the process proceeds to S4411.

In the process of S4411, it is determined whether or not the launch position sensor is on (S4411). When it is determined that the firing position sensor is on (S4411: Yes), the origin operation data is set (S4412) and the origin operation flag 223bh is set to ON in order to return the lower displacement unit 400 to the origin position. (S4413), the process proceeds to S4414. On the other hand, in the process of S4411, when it is determined that the launch position sensor is off (S4411: No), the lower displacement unit 400 is not in the launch position, so the processes of S4412 and S4413 are skipped and the process of S4414 is performed. Transition.

After executing the process of S4411 or S4413, it is determined whether the origin sensor is on, that is, whether the lower displacement unit 400 is in the origin position (S4441). When it is determined that the origin sensor is on (S4414: Yes), the jackpot ending flag 223bc is set to off (S4415), the origin operation flag 223bh is set to off (S4416), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4441 that the origin sensor is not on (S44414: No), this process is terminated.

<Fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 320 to 351. In this fourth control example, the configuration of the game board 13 is changed, the control content of the main control device 110 is changed, and the control content of the voice lamp control device 113 is different from the first control example described above. It is different from the changed point. The same elements as those of the first control example described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The major differences between the fourth control example and the first control example described above will be briefly described. In the above-mentioned first control example, the control process of the main control device 110 is executed so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not dynamically displayed at the same time (in parallel). The fourth control example is significantly different in that the control process is executed so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are dynamically displayed at the same time (in parallel).

Further, in the above-mentioned first control example, the pseudo jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165 is configured to be executed while the jackpot game is being executed, whereas in the fourth control example, the pseudo jackpot effect is executed. There is a big difference in that when the latent state is set as the game state, the pseudo jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165 is configured to be executed. Furthermore, there is a big difference in that the contents of the pseudo jackpot production are different.

First, the configuration of the game board 13 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 320 and 321. The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example has a lower first ball entry port 64D in the lower region of the game board 13 with respect to the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above. , A lower electric accessory 64Da attached to the lower first ball opening 64D was provided, and a second variable winning device 650 (second specific winning opening 650a) was provided below the lower first winning opening 64D. The difference is that a special winning device 1550 is provided in place of the special winning device 550 in the right area of the gaming board 13.

The lower first ball entry port 64D is in a state where it is difficult for the ball to enter due to the lower electric accessory 64Da, which is variably controlled from the closed position to the open position where the ball is difficult to enter when the ball is won by lottery of a normal symbol. It is a ball entry means that can set a state in which the ball is easy to enter. When a ball enters the lower first entry port 64Da, the same process as when the ball enters the first entry port 64 is executed.

The lower first ball entry port 64D is arranged at a position that is harder for the player to see than the first ball entry port 64, and is configured in a shape that is harder for the player to see than the first ball entry port 64. It is configured so as not to notify the player that the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the first ball entry port 64D. This makes it difficult for the player to know at what timing the lottery right of Special Figure 1 was acquired. In this control example, the lower first entry port 64D is provided directly under the first entry port 64, and among the balls launched aiming at the first entry port 64, the ball enters the first entry port 64. By configuring the ball that has not been played to enter the lower first winning opening 64D, it is possible to allow the ball to enter the lower first winning opening 64D without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. However, the arrangement position of the lower first ball entry port 64D is not limited to this, and may be provided above the first ball entry port 64 or may be provided in the vicinity of the general winning opening 63 to make it inconspicuous. ..

The second variable winning device 650 is a winning device that is opened when a specific jackpot is won in the lottery shown in FIG. 1. By opening the opening / closing door 650f1, the ball is easily opened and the opening / closing door is opened. By closing the 650f1, the operation is controlled so that the ball is in a closed state in which it is difficult to win a prize. In this control example, when the second variable winning device 650 wins a big hit in which the opening operation is performed, a big hit game in which only a small amount (about 40) of prize balls is given is executed. Therefore, the winning of the jackpot in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened is not the jackpot aimed at winning the prize ball, but is shifted to a gaming state (in this control example, a latent state) that is advantageous to the player. It will be a big hit to aim for. In this way, even if the number of prize balls given to the player by one big hit is small, if the game state advantageous to the player is set after the big hit is completed, the big hit game. (Big hit winning) gives the player a favorable privilege.

Next, with reference to FIG. 321 in this fourth control example, the details of the special winning device 1550 provided in place of the special winning device 550 in the above-mentioned first control example will be described. FIG. 208 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the special winning device 1550. As shown in FIG. 208, in the special winning device 1550 in the fourth control example, the position where the specific general winning opening 163 is arranged with respect to the special winning device 550 in the first control example (front surface of the specific out opening 166). A point where a second entry port 640 is provided on the left side of the view), a point where a pseudo through gate 1167 is provided above the second entry port 640, and a pseudo second entry above the effect flow path 691. At the point where the ball mouth 1640 is provided, on the upstream side of the guidance flow path 690 (around the general throwing portion 690a), a game ball flows down to a flow path different from the guidance flow path 690 (pseudo second entry port 1640). At the point where the branch portion 694a that branches to the second guide flow path 694) is provided, the game ball that has reached the branch portion 694a is allowed to flow down to the guide flow path 690 or to the second lead flow path 694. It is different in that a flow path switching member 695 for switching between flowing down and flowing down is provided. Further, with the relocation of the second ball entry port 640 to the position where the specific general winning opening 163 in the first control example was provided, the second ball entry port 640 was provided in the first control example. The difference is that the position is hollow. Further, the difference is that the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball is detected in the specific winning opening 65a is changed to 10.

As shown in FIG. 321, the second ball entry port 640 in the fourth control example is provided only with a pseudo through gate 1167 above it, and is not provided with any structure for hindering ball entry. When the player hits right, he / she can always enter the ball. More specifically, about 1/3 of the right-handed game ball enters the second entry port 640, and about 2/3 flows into the main path SK1. The branch portion 694a provided at a position where the game ball that has entered the second ball entry port 640 can reach is branched toward the back side of the front view of the general ball throwing unit 690a, and the flow path switching member 695. In the state where the ball is retracted to the retracted position (back side in the front view), the game ball flows down along the inclination of the induction flow path 690, so that the game ball flows down to the second induction flow path 694 via the branch portion 694a. There is no. On the other hand, in the state where the flow path switching member 694a overhangs at the overhanging position shown in FIG. 321, it becomes impossible to proceed in the induction flow path 690. Further, since the flow path switching member 695 is inclined in the direction of guiding the game ball toward the back side of the front view at the overhanging position, the game ball is guided to the branch portion 694a by the inclination of the flow path switching member 695. Is distributed to the induction flow path 694. It should be noted that the flow path switching member 695 temporarily receives a lottery for the second special symbol based on the fact that the ball has entered the second entry port 640 during the execution of the latent probability effect B described later. It is moved to the overhanging position, and after the game ball that triggered the lottery of the second special symbol is distributed to the second guide flow path 694, it is evacuated to the evacuation position.

As shown in FIG. 321, the second guide flow path 694 is provided with a guide flow path sensor 694s capable of detecting the passage of a game ball. When the passage of the game ball is detected by the guidance flow path sensor 694s, the pseudo electric accessory 1640a attached to the pseudo second entry port 1640 is opened for 2 seconds to reach the pseudo second entry port 1640. You will be able to enter the ball. On the most downstream side of the second guide flow path 694, the game ball flowing down the second guide flow path 694 is rolled from the back side of the front view to the front side of the front view and falls to the pseudo second entry port 1640. A ball discharging portion 694b that can be made to be discharged is provided. The gaming ball that has fallen from the ball ejection portion 694b enters the pseudo second entry port 1640 or enters the out port 1640b provided on the left side of the pseudo second entry port 1640. Then, it is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Since the period required for the flow of the second lead flow path 694 is about 1 second, the game ball that has flowed down the second lead flow path 694 is basically the opening period of the pseudo electric accessory 1640a for 2 seconds. In the meantime, the ball enters the pseudo second ball entry port 1640. The out port 1640b has irregularities such as ball clogging, and the purpose is to normally discharge the game ball that has reached the pseudo second entry port 1640 after the opening period of the pseudo electric accessory 1640a has elapsed. It is provided.

As shown in FIG. 321, a pseudo electric accessory 1640a is attached to the pseudo second ball entry port 1640. The pseudo-electric accessory 1640a is opened and closed as a part of the hobby effect (latent effect B) in the latent probability mode (high probability state of the special symbol and low probability state of the normal symbol) which is most advantageous for the player. The details will be described later, but once the mode is changed to the latent probability mode, there is a high probability that the specific winning opening 65a will be opened for 1 second if it is missed in the lottery of the second special symbol (small hit). Will be. As a result, in the latent probability mode, in addition to being able to enter the ball into the second entry port 640 and execute the lottery of the second special symbol by simply continuing to hit right, the second special symbol can be executed. If a small hit is obtained in the lottery, the main routes SK1 to SK3 can be flowed down, and the game ball can be entered into the open specific winning opening 65a. That is, it is in an advantageous state that the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed without reducing the number of balls held. Further, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol in the latent probability mode, the gaming state after the end of the big hit is set to the latent probability mode again unless the probability variation limit number is reached. That is, the latent mode and the jackpot are repeated until the probability variation limit is reached. In this fourth control example, since the probability variation limit number is set to 36 times, the advantageous latent probability mode and the big hit are repeated until the maximum 36 big hits (loop the latent probability mode).

However, the probability variation limit number of times, small hits, etc. are relatively few models installed, and the specifications are not familiar to many players, so it becomes difficult to understand the playability, and the game with the pachinko machine 10 There is a risk that the player will be shunned. Therefore, in the fourth control example, an effect (latent effect B) is executed in which the player is made to recognize the behavior in the advantageous latent mode as if it is a probabilistic state of a general model. It is composed. More specifically, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the latent mode (and the pseudo jackpot effect described later is not executed), the game that triggered the lottery of the second special symbol. A ball (a game ball that has entered the second entry port 640) is allowed to flow down into the second guidance flow path 694 (that is, the flow path switching member 695 is moved to the overhanging position), and the guidance flow path sensor 694s is used. The pseudo electric accessory 1640a is opened at the timing when the passage is detected, and the game ball flowing down the second guide flow path 694 is configured to enter the pseudo second entry port 1640 in the open state. The third symbol display device 81 is configured to execute a jackpot variation display effect after the game ball enters the pseudo second entry port 1640. Further, the board surface configuration is such that the ball cannot enter the second entry port 640 unless it passes through the pseudo through gate 1167. As a result, the player can be made to think that the pseudo electric accessory 1640a is opened based on the passage of the game ball through the pseudo through gate 1167. In addition, it is possible to perform an effect as if a lottery for the second special symbol was executed based on the ball entering the pseudo second ball entry port 1640. That is, a behavior similar to the behavior of a probabilistic state (a gaming state in which the electric accessory is easily released and the probability of a big hit is high) in a general gaming machine (in a favorable probabilistic state, a high probability of passing through the through gate by right-handed). By opening the electric accessory of the second starting port and letting the game ball enter the second starting port, it is possible to realize a behavior that becomes a big hit with a high probability).

In all gaming states (modes) other than the latent probability mode, the behavior is similar to the normal state (a gaming state in which the electric accessory is difficult to be released and the jackpot probability is low) in a general gaming machine. The production mode and the like are set in. As a result, it is possible to realize a well-balanced game that is easy for a wide range of players to understand.

Further, in the fourth control example, in the probability variation mode, an effect (pseudo jackpot effect) is configured to make the jackpot of a plurality of times (for example, five times) appear as if it is one jackpot. More specifically, by making a plurality of rounds (for example, 5 rounds) in the jackpot appear as if they are one round by the production, the number of prize balls in one jackpot is the actual number of prize balls. It can be illusioned as if there are more. Therefore, in the case of a big hit, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of satisfaction. Further, as described above, in the fourth control example, once the latent mode is set, the jackpot and the latent mode are repeated until the maximum hit is 36 times, so that the actual internal state and the production content are linked. If this happens, the jackpot mode and the latent mode are frequently switched, which may make the player feel annoyed. On the other hand, in the fourth control example, a plurality of jackpots (and a latent mode between jackpots) are configured to appear as if they are one jackpot (pseudo jackpot effect), so that the number of jackpots is small. You can feel as if you were able to win more prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed. Further, in the fourth control example, once the latent mode is entered, the latent mode is looped until the probability variation limit is reached, so that the remaining number of jackpots can be easily determined when the latent mode is entered. It becomes possible to grasp. As a result, it is possible to easily determine how many jackpots can be used as one pseudo jackpot effect to clearly end the pseudo jackpot effect at the end of the latent probability mode (that is, when the probability variation limit number is reached). .. Therefore, the pseudo jackpot effect can be executed in a more natural manner.

In the fourth control example, when the latent probability mode is set and the pseudo jackpot effect is not being executed, each time the game ball enters the second entry port 640, the game is entered. The structure was such that the ball was made to enter the pseudo second entrance 1640, and it was made to appear as if the variation display effect of the second special symbol was executed when the ball entered the pseudo second entrance 1640. , Not limited to this. For example, only when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, the game ball that triggered the big hit lottery may be flowed down to the pseudo second entrance ball opening 1640. With this configuration, in the latent mode, when the ball enters the pseudo second entry port 1640, the behavior as if it is a big hit can be realized, so that the pseudo second entry port 1640 can be realized. It is possible to pay attention to whether or not the game ball enters the game. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 322, the flow of the game in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 322 is a transition diagram schematically showing the flow of the gaming state. As shown in FIG. 322, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example is configured to be able to set four gaming states (normal state, probable change state, latent probable state, and time saving state). Then, when the jackpot of the special symbol is won, the high probability state of the special symbol is always set after the jackpot game is completed. In addition, an upper limit is set for the number of times that the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set, and the number of times that the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set reaches the upper limit (probability variation limit state). Only when the jackpot is won, the low probability state (time saving state) of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends.

Further, in the fourth control example, among the gaming states in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the latent probability state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the probability variation state. Further, once the latent state is entered, it is easy to continuously set the latent state until the probability variation limit state is reached. With this configuration, the player can be made to play an advantageous game by shifting to the latent state while the number of times that the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set is small.

When the normal state is set as the game state, the game state in which the lottery of the special figure 1 is mainly performed (the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state is set as a variable time for a long period (for example, 10 minutes)). ), 99.5% of the cases where the jackpot of Special Figure 1 is won shifts to the probable state, and 0.5% shifts to the latent state.

While the probabilistic state is set, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, so that it is easier for the ball to win the lower first entry slot 64D than in the normal state, so the special figure 1 lottery is performed. It will be easier. Further, the jackpot winning probability of the special figure 1 is also set higher than the normal state, and the transition rate to the latent state when the jackpot of the special figure 1 is won is 10 times (5%) the normal state. Since a long time (for example, 10 minutes) is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 lottery even when the probability change state is set, the game state in which the lottery of the special figure 1 is mainly performed even during this probability change state. Will be.

Then, in the latent state, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 lottery is set to a long time (for example, 10 minutes), and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 lottery is set to a short time. It is a game state that is mainly performed, and is configured to allow the player to perform a right-handed game. If a big hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, the latent probability state is set again until the probability variation limit state is reached. In addition, in the special figure 2 lottery, it is set to win a small hit in most cases where a big hit is not won. Therefore, the special figure 2 lottery in the latent state is the lottery most advantageous to the player, and the special figure 2 lottery is the most advantageous game state to the player in the latent state.

If you win the jackpot in the probability variation limit state, the time saving state will be set. In this time-saving state, the lottery of the special figure 1 is mainly performed in the game state, and the big hit lottery of the special figure 1 is executed with the same jackpot probability as in the normal state. Since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the special figure 1 lottery is easier to execute than the normal state. In addition, the time saving state continues until a predetermined condition other than the big hit winning (for example, a condition that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (50 times), a condition that a predetermined number of times (1 time) is won for a small hit, etc.) is satisfied. If a big hit is won during this time saving state, it is configured to shift to the most advantageous latent state for the player with a high probability (95%). By shifting (pulling back) from the time-saving state to the latent state in this way, it is possible to execute the game in the latent state from the first time in which the high-probability state of the special symbol is continuously set. It is possible to provide a player with a game of play.

In this control example, even in the special figure 1 lottery, a small hit is won, and when the small hit is won, the small hit game in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened is executed in the same manner as the big hit winning in the special figure 1. doing. This makes it difficult to grasp the current probability variation number (remaining number of times until the probability variation limit state) based on the number of times the second variable winning device 65 is opened.

In addition, unlike the configuration of this control example, even if it is configured to execute a suggestion effect that suggests the current probability variation number (remaining number of times until the probability variation limit state) to the player based on winning a small hit. good.

Next, with reference to FIG. 323, among the effects executed in the fourth control example, the effects (effect mode) executed according to the set gaming state will be described. FIG. 323 is a transition diagram showing the transition contents of the effect executed in response to the gaming state. As shown in FIG. 323, in the state where the normal state and the probabilistic state are set, the same effect mode (normal effect mode) is set, and whether the player is currently in the normal state or the probabilistic state. Is configured to be difficult to understand. This makes it difficult to easily grasp the number of remaining probability changes up to the probability change limit state.

In this control example, the time saving state is set only when the jackpot is won in the state where the probability variation limit state is reached, so that the normal effect mode is executed without winning the jackpot during the time saving state. Only in this case, it is possible to make the player know that the current state is normal. Therefore, it is possible to provide advantageous game information only to a player who has been playing a game for a long time.

Further, in this control example, the fluctuation time set based on the special drawing 1 lottery is configured to be the same in the normal state and the probabilistic state (configured to use the same fluctuation pattern selection table). There). As a result, it is possible to prevent the current gaming state from being determined by the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 lottery to be executed. Not limited to this, a variable time that can be set only in a probabilistic state or a normal state can be set, and when the variable time is set, the current gaming state can be suggested. You may. Further, it is configured to set the fluctuation time by referring to a different fluctuation pattern selection table according to the current probability variation number (remaining number of times until the probability variation limit state), and according to the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 lottery to be executed. It may be configured so that the player can determine the current number of probable changes.

Next, when shifting to the latent probability state in the state where the normal effect is being executed (the state in which the normal state and the probability change state are set), two effect modes are set according to the current number of probability changes. NS. Specifically, when the latent probability state is set and the remaining number of times until the probability variation limit state is 30 or more, an odd number of doublets (for example, 777) is stopped and displayed as a third symbol indicating a big hit. Then, a latent effect A mode is set in which a pseudo jackpot game effect is executed during the period from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the jackpot game executed in a state where the probability variation limit state is reached.

When the number of remaining times until the probability variation limit state is less than 30 in the state where the latent probability state is set, even-numbered doublets (for example, 666) are stopped and displayed as the third symbol indicating the jackpot. The period from the end of the jackpot game to the end of the jackpot game that is executed when the probability variation limit state is reached, the period until the winning of a predetermined number of jackpots (1 to 5 times), and the game production in the latent state are executed. After that, the latent effect B mode for executing the pseudo jackpot game effect is set for the period until the jackpot is won a predetermined number of times (1 to 5 times).

That is, in this control example, a large number of prize balls are given to the player in two states, a big hit game state and a continuous small hit game state (so-called small hit RUSH) in the latent probability state. However, in the latent state, not only the small hits are won frequently, but also the big hits are won with high probability. If the winning game effect is configured to be executed, there is a problem that the effect becomes complicated and the player executes the effect that is difficult to understand.

On the other hand, in this control example, as described above, in the period in which the latent probability state is set, the period in which the big hit game effect is executed in a pseudo manner regardless of the big hit game or the small hit game, and the pseudo latent It is configured to set a period for executing a certain state game effect (small hit RUSH effect). As a result, it is possible to prevent the performance to be executed from becoming complicated, and to provide the pachinko machine 10 that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, when the probability variation limit state is reached and then the time saving state is set, the pullback mode is set, and a fanning effect is provided to show the player that the game state is easy to shift to the latent state. Will be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 324, the characteristic effect contents in the fourth control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 324 (a), the contents of the pseudo jackpot effect (super jackpot effect) executed during the latent probability effect A mode will be described. FIG. 324 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a pseudo jackpot effect (super jackpot effect) executed during the latent probability effect A mode. The same elements as those of the display screen in the first control example described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 324 (a), in the pseudo jackpot effect (super jackpot effect) executed during the latent probability effect A mode, a comment indicating that the super jackpot is being performed is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the super jackpot is displayed. The acquisition information 803 indicating the number of prize balls given during the production is displayed. Then, a stored image for showing the player with a dynamic image that the acquired information 803 is increasing is displayed in the center. Then, the guidance display Dm9 for guiding the right-handed game to the player is displayed.

Here, during the latent probability effect A mode, the prize ball given during the latent probability state, that is, the prize ball given by the ball played right-handed during the latent probability state wins each winning opening ( All of the balls entered in the second entrance 640 and the prize balls awarded based on the balls entered in the variable winning device 65 by the small hit game) are treated as the prize balls acquired during the big hit game. During the latent probability effect A mode, the flow path switching member 695 (see FIG. 321) is located at the buried position and enters the second entry port 640. The ball is configured to be a ball flow that wins a prize in the pseudo-attacker 165.

As a result, a pseudo jackpot effect is executed in which all the winning balls in the latent state are awarded to the pseudo attacker 165, and a pseudo jackpot effect indicating that the jackpot game is continuously executed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed. Can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute a pseudo jackpot effect during the latent state without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Next, with reference to FIG. 324 (b), among the effects executed in the latent probability effect B mode, the contents of the pseudo latent probability state game effect will be described. FIG. 324 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a pseudo-latent state game effect. As shown in FIG. 324 (b), in the pseudo latent state game production, the character "RUSH" for indicating that the current state is the latent probability game state is displayed, and whether or not the small hit game is executed. (A game in which the character 811 opens the treasure box 812, and if the content of the treasure box 812 is "V", a small hit is won) is executed. This pseudo-latent state game effect is executed during the period during which the jackpot game is performed until the latent probability state and a predetermined number of times are reached, and the jackpot is won and the jackpot is won during the pseudo-latent state game effect. When the game is executed, the acquisition information 803 is notified so that the number of prize balls given during the big hit game and the prize balls given by the small hit game.

Here, during the period during which the pseudo-latent state game effect is being executed during the latent probability effect B mode, the special figure 2 lottery is executed when the ball enters the second entrance 640. Since it is necessary to show the player that, the flow path switching member 695 (see FIG. 321) is located at the protruding position, and the ball that has entered the second entry port 640 flows down toward the pseudo-electric accessory 1640a. It is configured to be a ball flow.

It should be noted that the update timing of the acquisition information 803 displayed in each of the above-mentioned effects and the update timing of the effect mode are pseudo based on the timing when the ball actually wins, as in the first control example described above. The timing at which the ball arrives at the winning opening is predicted, and the timing is set according to the timing based on the prediction result. Since the detailed contents are the same as those of the first control example described above, they will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration of the main control device in the 4th control example>
The ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the fourth control example changes the random number 4 table 202ca per special symbol instead of the random number table 202a per special symbol with respect to the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the first control example described above. The variable pattern selection 4 table 202cc is replaced with the pattern selection table 202b, the normal hit random number 4 table 202cc is replaced with the normal hit random number table 202c, and the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d is replaced with the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202c. The difference is that 202cd1 is replaced with the special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202d2 and the special figure 2 big hit type selection 4 table 202cd2 is provided, and the small hit random number table 202e is replaced with the small hit random number 4 table 202ce.

The RAM of the main control device 110 of the fourth control example has a probability variation flag 203ca, a game state storage area 203cc, a jackpot medium flag 203cc, and a special figure with respect to the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the first control example described above. 1 fluctuation stop flag 203cd, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce, small hit flag 203cf, special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg, special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ch, special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203ci, probability variation upper limit counter 203cj have been added. It differs in that. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the random number 4 table 202ca per special symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 325 (a). The random number 4 per special symbol table 202ca is different from the above-mentioned random number table 202a per special symbol in that the range of the value of the first random number counter C1 which is the big hit of the special symbol is different. Specifically, the range of "0 to 4" in the low probability state of the special symbol and the range of "0 to 39" in the high probability state of the special symbol are defined in the range corresponding to the jackpot. ..

Next, the contents of the small hit random number 4 table 202ce will be described with reference to FIG. 325 (b). Unlike the small hit random number table 202e described above, the small hit random number 4 table 202ce is configured so that each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 wins a small hit. Specifically, in the case of Special Figure 1, the value of the first random number counter C1 is determined to be in the range of "50 to 59", and in the case of Special Figure 2, the range of "50 to 479" is determined to be a big hit. It is stipulated in. That is, in the fourth control example, the small hit is won with a probability of about 1/50 in the lottery of Special Figure 1, and the small hit is won with a probability of about 1 / 1.1 in the lottery of Special Figure 2. It is composed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 325 (c), the contents of the ordinary random number 4 table 202cc will be described. This normal hit random number 4 table 202cc has a point that the element per long open is deleted from the above-mentioned normal hit random number table 202c, and a point that the probability of winning in the low probability state of the normal symbol is lowered, and that it is normal. The difference is that the probability of winning is increased in the high probability state of the symbol, and the other points are the same.

Next, the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd1 will be described with reference to FIG. 326 (a). FIG. 326 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd1. As shown in FIG. 326 (a), when the jackpot of Special Figure 1 is won in the normal state, the first attacker (second variable winning device 650) is opened and the jackpot (big hit) in which the probability change state is set is set. A, jackpot B) and jackpot (big hit C) in which the second attacker (variable winning device 65) is opened and the latent state is set are defined in association with the value of the special hit type counter C2.

Next, the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd2 will be described with reference to FIG. 326 (b). FIG. 326 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd2. As shown in FIG. 326 (b), when the jackpot in Special Figure 2 is won, the jackpot (big hit C) in which the second attacker (variable winning device 65) is opened and the latent state is set is special. It is defined in association with the value of the hit type counter C2.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection 4 table 202cc will be described with reference to FIGS. 327 to 329. As shown in FIG. 327, in this control example, the normal probabilistic change 4 table 202 kb1 used when the normal state and the probabilistic change state are set, and the latent probability use used when the latent probability state is set. It has 4 tables 202 bb2 and 4 tables 202 bb3 for time saving used when a time saving state is set, and a table corresponding to the set gaming state is referred to.

FIG. 328 is a schematic diagram usually showing the contents of the probability variation 4 table 202cb1. As shown in FIG. 328, in this control example, a long-time fluctuation pattern is set as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 in the state where the normal state and the probable change state are set. Therefore, the lottery game of the actual special figure 1 is performed.

FIG. 329 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the latent probability 4 table 202cb2. As shown in FIG. 329 (a), in this control example, a long-time fluctuation pattern is set as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 in the state where the latent probability state is set. Therefore, the lottery game of the actual special figure 2 is performed.

FIG. 329 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time saving 4 table 202 bb3. As shown in FIG. 329 (b), in this control example, a long-time fluctuation pattern is set as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 in the state where the time saving state is set. Therefore, the lottery game of the actual special figure 1 is performed. Then, it is usually specified that the length of the fluctuation time selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 is shorter than that of the probability variation 4 table 202ccb1. Therefore, it is usually possible to execute the special figure 1 fluctuation more efficiently than in the probabilistic state.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 330. FIG. 330 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 203. This control example differs from the first control example described above in that the following configuration is added. Since the other elements are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The probability variation flag 203ca is a flag indicating whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and when it is set to ON, it indicates that the special symbol is in the high probability state. That is, when the probability variation flag 203ca is set to on, the game state is a probability variation state (special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: high probability state) or a latent probability state (special symbol: high probability state, It means that one of (normal symbol: low probability state) is set.

This probability change flag 203ca is set to ON at the end of the jackpot when the winning jackpot type is a jackpot that sets the probability variation state or the latent probability state after the jackpot ends. Then, when the symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit is stopped and displayed, it is set to off.

In this embodiment, as described above, the high-probability state of the special symbol is set based on the jackpot winning of the special symbol, and the high-probability state of the special symbol is continued until the next jackpot is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the special symbol after the high probability state of the special symbol (special symbol high probability state) is set as the special symbol high probability end condition for terminating the high probability state of the special symbol. When the number of fluctuations (number of fluctuations in the special figure) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), the probability variation flag 203ca may be set to off. In this case, in order to set the timing to turn off the probability change flag 203ca, a storage means for storing the number of special figure fluctuations as the special figure high probability end condition in advance and a storage means after the special figure high probability state is set are set. End determination to determine whether the number of special figure fluctuations measured by the measuring means and the special figure fluctuation number measured by the measuring means satisfy the special figure fluctuation number (special figure high probability end condition) stored in the storage means. Means and means may be provided.

Further, a plurality of special figure high-accuracy end conditions are prepared, for example, the special figure 1 high-accuracy end condition and the variation of the second special symbol that can be satisfied based only on the number of changes of the first special symbol in the special figure high-accuracy state. Various special figure 2 high probability end conditions that can be established based only on the number of times, and lottery end conditions that can be established when the lottery result of the special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a lottery result of winning a small hit). The special figure high probability end condition may be facilitated, and the probability change flag 203ca may be set to off when any of the special figure high probability end conditions is satisfied.

The special figure 1 jackpot flag is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on entering the first ball entry port 64 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. This is the flag to be set. This special figure 1 jackpot flag is set to off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot.

When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol ends while the special figure 1 jackpot flag is on, the process of forcibly stopping the second special symbol with the off symbol is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem in which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit while the other is being executed.

The special figure 2 jackpot flag is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on entering the second entry port 640 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. This is the flag to be set. This special figure 2 jackpot flag is set to off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot.

When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol ends while the special figure 2 jackpot flag is on, the process of forcibly stopping the first special symbol with the off symbol is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem in which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit while the other is being executed.

The game state storage area 203cc is a storage area for storing information indicating the currently set game state and the game state at the time when the jackpot is won. Specifically, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (if the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203j is 0 and the probability variation flag 203ca is off), the game state storage area 203cb is in the winning state. "00H" is stored in the area as information indicating the normal state. On the other hand, if the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the probability change state (if the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203j is 1 or more and the probability change flag 203ca is on), the game state storage area 203cc is set to the winning state area. , "01H" is stored as information indicating the probability change state. Further, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the latent state (if the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203j is 0 and the probability change flag 203ca is on), the game state storage area 203cc is set to the winning state area. , "02H" is stored as information indicating the latent state.

The information stored in the game state storage area 203cc is retained until the end of the jackpot, and is referred to when setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

The small hit flag 203cf is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the entry into the second entry port 640 matches the small hit determination value at the start of fluctuation. It is a flag to be set. The small hit flag 203cf is set to off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol ends with the small hit flag 203cf turned on, the fluctuation of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (the counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the special symbol is subtracted). The process to stop) is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a problem that a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol and the big hit is started during the small hit while the small hit of the second special symbol is being executed. can.

The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ch and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203ci are counters for measuring the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, and are the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When the fluctuation pattern of the symbol is selected, the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern is set. Whether or not the fluctuation time of each special symbol has ended is determined by the time measurement results of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ch and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203ci.

The jackpot middle flag 203cc is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot is being hit. If the jackpot medium flag 203cc is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot, and if it is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot. This jackpot middle flag 203cc is set to on when the start of the jackpot is set. On the other hand, it is set to off in the jackpot end processing executed at the end of the jackpot.

The small hit medium flag is a flag indicating whether or not the small hit is in progress. If the small hit medium flag is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a small hit, and if it is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a small hit. This small hit medium flag is set to on when the start of small hits is set. On the other hand, it is set to off at the end of the small hit.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to win a small hit with the second special symbol, and when the small hit is won (when the small hit medium flag is set to ON), the first It is configured to interrupt the variable display of special symbols. That is, among the multiple types of special symbols (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol), one of the special symbols (2nd special symbol) is selected by lottery to win a small hit, and the small hit medium flag is set to ON. In this state, the variation display of the other special symbol (first special symbol) does not end, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the small hit game and play the game. Further, during the small hit game, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from ending and the big hit game from starting.

In this control example, the first special symbol is also configured to win a small hit in the same manner as the second special symbol described above. Since the processing when a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol is the same as the processing when the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is a flag indicating that the fluctuation of the first special symbol is the period from the stop display (confirmed display) of the jackpot stop symbol to the start of the jackpot. When this special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is set to on, the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided even when a new ball is entered into the second entry port 640. Will be done. This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is set to on when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped by a missed symbol, and is set to off when the process for executing the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided. NS.

In this control example, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cd in which the target is changed from the special figure 2 to the special figure 1 is provided for the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce, but the content thereof is described above. Since the difference is only in that the target of the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is changed from the special figure 2 to the special figure 1, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the period for opening the first specific winning opening 65a is set to 1.5 seconds as the game content of the small hit game, and the end condition of the round established by the number of winnings is set to 10. doing. That is, the valid period (1.5 seconds) of the round game elapses by the time 10 balls are won in the first specific winning opening 65a during the small hit game (until the round end condition for the number of winnings is satisfied). It will be. Therefore, since the period of the small hit game can be fixed, the effect straddling the small hit game (the period from the start of the change of one special symbol to the end of the change of the other special symbol via the small hit game). It is possible to predetermine the production period of a series of productions to be performed. Therefore, the fluctuation timing of the special symbol and the execution timing of the effect can be easily synchronized, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is a flag indicating a period for stopping the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1, and when it is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped. When the state set to on is set to off, the update (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is restarted.

This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to on when stopping the change of the second special symbol (special figure 2) whose lottery result is a small hit, and is referred to in the special symbol change processing (see FIG. 32). NS. As a result of reference, when it is set to ON, the process of updating the display of the first symbol display device corresponding to the special figure 1 is executed in the same manner as during the change. That is, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped, but the fluctuation display is continuously executed in the first symbol display device. Become. As a result, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped by setting the temporary stop flag 203cg of the special figure 1 to ON. Then, when it is determined that it is set to on in the process during execution of the first special symbol change, it is set to off.

In addition, in this embodiment, since only the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be able to win the small hit, the special symbol whose variation display is temporarily stopped based on the winning of the small hit is the first special. Only symbols are available, but if the lottery for the first special symbol is configured so that a small hit can be won, even if the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is provided to temporarily stop the variation display of the second special symbol. good.

The probability change upper limit counter 203cj is a counter for setting an upper limit value in which the probability change state is continuously set. In this control example, the upper limit number of times that the probability change state is continuously set after the end of the big hit is specified (36 times). Then, the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is referred to when determining whether or not the number of times in which the probability variation state is continuously set has reached the upper limit number of times. The value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is incremented by 1 each time the probability variation state is set at the end of the jackpot game. Then, the value of the counter is cleared when the normal state or the time saving state is set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit, it is based on the fact that one special symbol is stopped in the combination indicating the big hit (based on the execution of the big hit game). ), The process of forcibly stopping the variable display of the other special symbol, and if the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit, one special symbol is stopped by the combination indicating the small hit. Based on this, the variable display of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped until the small hit game is completed).

That is, it is configured so that the variable display of the other special symbol can be processed in various modes according to the lottery result of one special symbol. With this configuration, the lottery result of one special symbol becomes the most advantageous game result (for example, big hit) for the player, and while the variable display for showing the game result is being executed, the other The special symbol (the lottery result is a small hit) is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to prevent the big hit from being erased by the small hit.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example>
Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 331. The RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example is different from the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above in that an effect mode storage area 223ca and a probability variation upper limit number counter 223cc are added. ing. Other than that, they are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The effect mode storage area 223ca is an area for storing the currently set effect mode. In the fourth control example, as the effect mode set when the latent state is set as the game state, the pseudo jackpot effect that simulates the jackpot game effect executed during the jackpot game (FIG. 324 (FIG. 324). The latent effect A mode that executes a)) and the latent state that is set continuously are divided into predetermined periods (for example, the period until the jackpot is won three times), and each division is simulated. The latent probability effect B mode for executing the latent probability game effect (see FIG. 324 (b)) can be set.

In this effect mode storage area 223ca, a jackpot is won in a game state (normal state, probability variation state, time saving state) other than the latency state, and the probability variation upper limit counter 223cc when the latency state is set after the jackpot game is completed. The effect mode selected based on the value of is stored. Then, while the latent state is continuously set, the same effect mode is stored, and the information (effect mode) stored based on the fact that the game state other than the latent state is set is cleared. NS.

The probability variation upper limit number counter 223cc is a counter for measuring the number of times that the high probability state (probability variation state, latent probability state) of the special symbol is continuously set, and is a counter for continuously setting the high probability of the special symbol. It is referred to when determining whether the number of states (probability change state, latent state) has reached the upper limit number of times (for example, 36 times). This probability variation upper limit counter 223cc is cleared when the counter value is incremented by 1 when the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends, and when the high probability state of the special symbol is not set after the jackpot game ends. NS.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the 4th control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 332 to 347. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

First, with reference to FIG. 332, the contents of the special symbol variation processing 4 (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in this control example will be described. FIG. 332 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation processing 4 (S104). When the special symbol variation process 4 (S104) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current is a big hit or a small hit (S4501), and if it is determined that the current is a big hit or a small hit (S4501: Yes). ), Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON (S4502). In the process of S4502, it is determined whether the subtraction of the other special figure fluctuation time during the change is interrupted by the stop display of one special figure with the symbol indicating the hit. When it is determined in the processing of S4502 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON (S4502: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the temporary stop special figure is updated. (S4503), that is, the process of continuing the variable display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed for the special figure in which the subtraction of the variable time is interrupted, and this process is terminated. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the special figure fluctuation has not been forcibly stopped.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4501, when it is determined that the current is a big hit or a small hit (S4501: No), is the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ch larger than 0 (that is, the special figure 1 changes)? (S4504), and if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ch is not larger than 0 (0) (S4504: No), the first special symbol fluctuation start processing is performed. (S4508) is executed, and then the process proceeds to S4509, which executes the variation processing related to the special figure 2. The details of the first special symbol change start processing (S4508) will be described later with reference to FIG. 333.

In the process of S4504, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ch is larger than 0 (S4504: Yes), the first special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4505) is executed. The first special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4505) executes the process during the special diagram 1 variation, and a detailed description thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 336.

After finishing the first special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4505), it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the variation time (whether the variation time counter 203ch of the special figure 1 is 0) (S4506), and the variation time. If it is determined that it is the end timing of (S4506: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S4507) is executed, and then the process proceeds to S4509. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4506 that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation time (S4506: No), the processing of S4507 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4509.

In the processing of S4509 to S4513, the same processing as that of S4504 to S4507 executed for the special figure 1 is executed. When the processing of S4509 is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203ci is larger than 0 (that is, whether the special figure 2 is changing) (S4509), and the special figure 2 change. If it is determined that the value of the time counter 203ci is not larger than 0 (0) (S4509: No), the second special symbol variation start process 4 (S4510) is executed, and then this process ends. The details of the second special symbol change start processing 4 (S4510) will be described later with reference to FIG. 338.

On the other hand, in the process of S4509, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203ci is larger than 0 (S4509: Yes), the second special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4511) is executed. The second special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4511) executes the process during the special diagram 2 variation, and will be described later with reference to FIG. 343.

After finishing the second special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4511), it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the variation time (whether the variation time counter 203ci in the special figure 2 is 0) (S4512), and the variation time. If it is determined that it is the end timing of (S4512: Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (S4513) is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4512 that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation time (S4512: No), the process of S4513 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 333, the first special symbol variation start process (S4508), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (S104 in FIG. 332) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. .. FIG. 333 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start processing (S4508).

In the first special symbol change start processing (S4508), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is acquired (S4601), and the value of the acquired first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d (N1). ) Is a value greater than 0 (S4602). In the process of S4602, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S4602: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set. After subtracting 1 (S4603), a hold ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the hold ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d after the subtraction is set (S4604). ..

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol hold ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store in 223c. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

When the processing of S4604 is completed, the data of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is then shifted to the previous data (S4605). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

When the processing of S4605 is completed, the first special symbol jackpot determination processing is then executed (S4606). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (S4606) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 334, but the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. This is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not a jackpot is a jackpot based on the set gaming state.

When the processing of S4606 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 4 is next executed (see FIG. 335). Although the details will be described later, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S4607), the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol and the variation type stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. This is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on the value of the counter CS1.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S4607) is completed, it is then determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is larger than 0 (S4608). When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203j is larger than 0 (S4608: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203j is subtracted by 1 (S4609), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4608, when it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is not a value larger than 0 (S4608: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4602 that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S4602: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 334, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S4606), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S4504 in FIG. 333) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. explain. FIG. 334 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S4606). In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, whether or not the jackpot was won in the other special symbol lottery during the period during which the fluctuation display (big hit fluctuation) in which the jackpot was won in one of the special symbols is executed. It is configured so that no discrimination is made.

In other words, in a state where it is confirmed that the jackpot game will be executed after a predetermined period (after the fluctuation time has elapsed) by one special symbol lottery, the jackpot will be won by the other special symbol lottery, and multiple times in a short period of time. It is configured to prevent the jackpot from being won and giving excessive benefits.

In this way, the process of acquiring various counter values is performed in the same manner as in the normal special symbol lottery, the determination based on the various counter values acquired in the process is skipped, and the outlier symbol is set. It is possible to respond quickly to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S4606), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S4701). Next, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203ca is set to ON (S4702). That is, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in a high probability state (probability change state, latent probability state). When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203ca is on (that is, the probability variation state of the special symbol) (S4702: Yes), the random number value that becomes the jackpot specified in the first random number table 202a for high probability time. And whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer matches is determined, and the determination result (lottery result) is acquired (S4703). On the other hand, in the process of S4702, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203ca is off (that is, it is a low probability state of the special symbol) (S4702: No), the first random number table 202a for the low probability time is displayed. It is determined whether or not the specified random number value that becomes a big hit and the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer match, and the lottery result is acquired (S4704).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in S4703 or S4704 is a big hit (S4705), and if the lottery result is a big hit (S4705: Yes), the special figure 1 big hit flag 203ck is set for the first special symbol. It is set to ON (S4706), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a jackpot (S4707). Then, based on the acquired value of the hit type counter, the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S4709), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4705, when it is determined that the lottery result is out of order (S4705: No), the out-of-order symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S4709), and then. , End this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 335, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S4607), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S4508 of FIG. 333), will be described. FIG. 335 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S4607).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S4607 in FIG. 335), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S4606 in FIG. 334), the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot, that is, It is determined whether or not the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S4801). Here, the determination of whether or not the jackpot is a big hit is determined by whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is on. This special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is set to ON in the process of S4707 in the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 334).

When it is determined in the process of S4801 that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S4801: Yes), the first obtained in the process of S4701 in the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 334). Based on the value of the 1-per-type counter C2, the jackpot type is determined from the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 table 202d1 (see FIG. 326 (a)) (S4802), and the process proceeds to S4803.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4801 that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of order (that is, the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is off) (S4801: No), the processing of S4802 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S4803.

In the process of S4803, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S4803). Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 327 to 329) according to the gaming state is read out (S4804), and the process proceeds to S4805. The gaming state is determined based on the state of the probability change flag 203ca and the value of the time reduction counter 203f. In the process of S4805, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S4805), and then the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern (S4805). S4806).

When the processing of S4806 is completed, the special figure 1 stop type command indicating the stop symbol is set (S4807), then the change start of the first special symbol is set by the first symbol display device 37 (S4808), and the processing of S4805 is set. A value indicating the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in 1 is set in the fluctuation time counter 203ch of the special figure 1, and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 336, of the first special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4505) executed in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S154 of FIG. 332) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Explain the contents. FIG. 336 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4505). In the first special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4505), when the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure 1 is interrupted, the process of restarting the subtraction and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed.

When the first special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4505) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON (S4901). Here, a case where this process is executed with the temporary stop flag 203cg of Special Figure 1 set to ON will be briefly described. As described above, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to on when the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a hit (small hit) while the special figure 1 is changing. Then, when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON, the jackpot middle flag 203o is set to ON in the process, so that the timer interrupt executed every 2 milliseconds by the main control device 110 is performed. When the process loops and the next special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 332) is executed (after 2 milliseconds when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203 cg is set to ON), a big hit is made in the process of S4501. Therefore, the first special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4505) is not executed. Then, when the big hit game (or small hit game) is completed and it is determined in the process of S4501 that the game is not during the big hit (or during the small hit), the first special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4505) is executed. Will be. With this configuration, the state in which the first special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4505) is executed while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to the big hit (or small hit) game. Is completed, and the timing is set so that the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation, which has been suspended from the subtraction of the fluctuation time, is resumed.

Returning to FIG. 336, the explanation will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S4901 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to on (S4901: Yes), then the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is set (S4902), and the special figure 1 provisional stop flag 203cg is set. The stop flag 203cg is set to off (S4903), and the process proceeds to S4904. On the other hand, in the processing of S4901 when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is not set to on (set to off) (S4901: No), the processing of S4902 and S4903 is skipped and S4904. Move to the processing of.

In the process of S4904, the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ch is decremented by 1 and updated (S4904), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S4905), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 337, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S4507), which is one of the special symbol variation processing 4 (S154 of FIG. 332), will be described. FIG. 337 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S4507).

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S4507), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is set to ON for the first special symbol (special figure 1) (S5001). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is set to on for the first special symbol (S5001: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is set to on (S5002), and the special figure is set. 2 A special figure 2 indicating that the fluctuation stop flag 203ce is turned on is set (S5003). Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with a detached symbol (S5004).

When the processing of S5004 is completed, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203ci is set to 0 (S5005), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203cl is set to ON (S5006). The stored information for the special figure 2 jackpot is deleted (S5008), and the process proceeds to S5009. On the other hand, in the process of S5006, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203cl is set to off (S5006: No), the processes of S5007 to S5008 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S5009.

After executing the process of S5006 or S5008, the jackpot scenario is set (S5009). Next, the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck, the probability change flag 203ca, and the time saving / medium counter 203j are reset (S5010), the jackpot medium flag 203cc is set to ON (S5011), and the process proceeds to S5012. On the other hand, even when it is determined in the process of S5001 that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is not on (S5001: No), the process proceeds to the process of S5012.

In the process of S5012, a special figure 1 confirmation command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the first special symbol is confirmed and stopped is set (S5012). After that, a process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is variablely displayed by the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S5013), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the first special symbol stop process (S4507), the process (S5002 to S5009) of stopping the variable display with the symbol showing the determination result of the first lottery game is executed. Further, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a big hit (S5001: Yes), the process of forcibly stopping the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner (S5003, S5004) is executed.

In the fourth control example, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed by the jackpot symbol, the second special symbol being displayed in the variable manner is forcibly stopped and displayed by the off symbol. It is not limited to. For example, at the time when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol may be interrupted (temporarily stopped). Then, after the jackpot of the first special symbol is completed, the variable display of the second special symbol may be restarted. As a result, it is possible to produce a natural aspect as compared with the case where the forced stop is caused by the detachment.

Next, with reference to FIG. 338, the contents of the second special symbol variation start process 4 (S4510) executed in the special symbol variation process 4 (FIG. 332) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. do. FIG. 338 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol change start processing 4 (S4510). In the second special symbol change start processing 4 (S4510), a process for starting the change of the special figure 2 is executed. It should be noted that, in response to the above-mentioned processing related to the fluctuation of the first special symbol with reference to FIGS. 333 to 337, the target of the variation is simply changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. The detailed description of the element will be omitted.

In the second special symbol change start processing 4 (S4510), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 change stop flag 203ce is set to ON (S5101). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is set to on (S5101: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is set to off (S5102), and this process is terminated. As described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is a flag that is set to be turned on while displaying the stop of the second special symbol with the stop symbol corresponding to the deviation when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol ends. .. That is, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is on, it means that the jackpot is started, so that the fluctuation start of the second special symbol should not be set. Therefore, when the variation stop flag 203ce in FIG. 2 is turned on in the process of S5101, the present process is terminated as it is without executing each process of S5102 to S5107 for setting the variation start.

On the other hand, in the process of S5101, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is set to off (that is, it is not set to on) (S5101: No), the second special symbol execution area Acquire data (various counter values) (S5103). Next, it is determined whether or not there is acquired data based on the data acquired in the process of S5103 (S5104). That is, when it is determined that there is no data in the second special symbol execution area (S5104: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5103, when it is determined that there is data (S5104: Yes), the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 for executing the jackpot determination of the second special symbol based on each stored counter value. Is executed (S5105). The details of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 will be described later with reference to FIG. 339.

When the process of S5105 is completed, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 for selecting the variation pattern is executed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol and the data acquired in the process of S5103 (S5106). ). The details of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S5106) will be described later with reference to FIG. 341. After the processing of S5106 is completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203j is larger than 0 (S5107). When it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is larger than 0 (S5107: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is subtracted by 1 (S5108), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5107, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203j is 0, that is, it is determined that the time reduction is not in progress (S5107: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 339, the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S5105), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process 4 (S4510 in FIG. 338) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. ) Will be explained. FIG. 339 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S5105).

In the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S5105), the same process as the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 334) is executed, so that the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 334) is executed. The differences from the above will be mainly explained.

When the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S5105) is executed, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area is acquired (S5201). Then, the processes of S5202 to S5204 for acquiring the lottery result of whether or not it is a big hit are executed based on each acquired counter value and the state of the probability change flag 203ca. The only difference between these processes is that the counter value used for the lottery (judgment) is acquired from the second special symbol execution area, and the other controls are the same as those of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 334). Is executed.

When the processing of S5203 or S5204 is completed, it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a big hit (S5205), and if it is determined to be a big hit (S5205: Yes), the lottery result of the second special symbol is obtained. The processes of S5206 to S5208 for setting the jackpot are executed, and this process is terminated. In each of these processes S5206 to S5208, the same processes as those of S4706 to S4708 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol to the jackpot are executed in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 334). Will be done.

On the other hand, in the process of S5205, when it is determined that the lottery result of the acquired second special symbol is not a big hit (S5205: No), a stop symbol corresponding to a small hit or a miss of the second special symbol is set. The special figure 2 deviation variation processing 4 is executed (S5209), and this processing is terminated. The details of the special figure 2 deviation variation processing 4 (S5209) will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 deviation variation processing 4 (S5209).

In the special figure 2 deviation variation processing 4 (S5209), first, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in the processing of S5203 or S5204 of FIG. 339 is a small hit of the second special symbol (S5301), and the lottery result is small. When it is determined that it is a hit (S5301: Yes), the small hit flag 203cf is set to ON (S5302), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to the small hit (S5303). Then, the small hit symbol indicating the small hit type corresponding to the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is set as the stop symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S5304), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5301 that the lottery result is out of order (S5301: No), the out-of-order symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S5305), and then. This process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 341, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S4510 of FIG. 338), which is one of the second special symbol variation start processes 4 (S4510 in FIG. 338) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 ( S5106) will be described. FIG. 341 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S5106).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S5106 in FIG. 341), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area (S5401). Next, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S5105 in FIG. 339), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot of the second special symbol is set. (S5402). Here, the determination as to whether or not the jackpot is a big hit is determined by whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203cl is turned on for the second special symbol. The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203cl is set to ON in the process of S5207 in the above-mentioned second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see FIG. 339).

When it is determined in the process of S5402 that the jackpot of the second special symbol is set (S5402: Yes), the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 328 and 329) corresponding to the current gaming state is read out. (S5403). Then, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S5201 in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see FIG. 339) described above, the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd2 (FIG. 326 (b). )) To determine the jackpot type (S5404).

When the processing of S5404 is completed, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S5405), and then the special figure 2 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern. (S5406). Then, the process proceeds to S5408.

On the other hand, in the process of S5402, when it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is not set (S5402: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 4 (S5407) is executed, and the process of S5408 is executed. Move to.

In the process of S5408, a special figure 2 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S5408). Next, the variation start of the second special symbol is set by the first symbol display device 37 (S5409), and the value indicating the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the process of S5405 is set in the special figure 2 variation time counter 203ci (S). S5410), this process is terminated.

Next, the special FIG. 2 deviation pattern selection process 4 (S5407) will be described with reference to FIG. 342. FIG. 342 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation pattern selection process 4 (S5407).

In the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 4 (S5407 in FIG. 342), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S5501). Here, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203cf is set to ON (S5501). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203cf is on (S5501: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area (S5502). Then, the small hit type is selected based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type selection table 202ce (not shown) (S5503).

Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 327 to 389) corresponding to the current gaming state is read (S5504), and the variation pattern of the small hit corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is read from the read variation pattern selection table. Is selected (S5505). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command indicating the selected small hit fluctuation pattern is set (S5506), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5501, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is out of order) (S5501: No), the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current gaming state (FIG. (See 327 to FIG. 389) is read (S5507), and an outlier variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S5508). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is set (S5509) based on the selected deviation pattern, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 343, the second special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4511), which is one of the processes in the special symbol variation process (see S154 in FIG. 332) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. I will explain the contents of. FIG. 343 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4511). In the second special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4511), when the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure 2 is interrupted, the process of restarting the subtraction and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed.

When the second special symbol change execution processing 4 (S4511) is executed, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203ci is subtracted by 1 and updated (S5601), and the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated. The display is updated (S5602), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 344, the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (S4513) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 344 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (S4513). The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (S4513) executes a process for stopping the fluctuation of the special figure 2.

When the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (S4513) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203cl is set to ON (S5701), and the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203cl is set to ON. If it is determined that the command is present (S5701: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the stop of the special figure 1 fluctuation is set (S5703). Next, when the processing of S5703 is completed, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with a detached symbol (S5704). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is on (S5706). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is on (S5706: Yes), the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is set to off (S5707), and the stored information for the special figure 1 jackpot is deleted (S5708). , S5709. On the other hand, in the process of S5706, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is off (S5706: No), the processes of S5707 to S5708 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S5709.

In the process of S5709, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S5709), and the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203cl, the probability change flag 203ca, and the time saving / medium counter 203j are reset (S5710). Next, the jackpot middle flag 203cc is set to ON (S5711), and the process proceeds to S5712.

In the process of S5712, a special figure 2 confirmation command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the second special symbol is confirmed and stopped is set (S5712). After that, a process of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol that is variablely displayed by the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S5713), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5701, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203cl is not set to ON (S5701: No), the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 4 is executed (S5702), and the above-mentioned S5712, The process of S5713 is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 345, the special figure 2 deviation stop process 4 (S5702), which is one process of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (S4513 of FIG. 344), will be described. FIG. 345 is a flowchart showing the special drawing 2 off-off stop process 4 (S5702). In this special figure 2 loss stop process 4 (S5702), when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is other than a big hit (small hit, miss), the special figure 2 showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a small hit, the process for temporarily stopping the change of the special figure 1 being executed is executed.

In the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 4 (S5702), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203cf is set to ON (S5801). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203 cf is set to ON (S5801: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203 cg is set to ON (S5802). Next, a special figure 1 temporary stop command indicating that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203 cg is turned on is set (S5803).

When the processing of S5803 is completed, a small hit scenario based on the selected small hit type is set (S5804). After that, the small hit flag 203cf is set to off (S5805), and the small hit medium flag 203g is set to on (S5806).

When the processing of S5806 is completed, a special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the second special symbol is set (S5807). After that, the second special symbol, which is variablely displayed by the first symbol display device 37, is stopped to change at the small hit symbol (S5808), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5801 that the small hit flag 203cf is off (that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order) (S5801: No), the second special symbol is fixedly stopped. A special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to do so is set (S5809). After that, the second special symbol that is variablely displayed by the first symbol display device 37 is deviated and stops variable at the symbol (S5810), and this process is terminated.

As described above, since the control of the variation display between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is independently and can be executed in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are varied at the same time. It can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to execute a lottery game with more special symbols within a predetermined time, and it is possible to increase the probability that the player will be given a big hit within the predetermined time. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

In this control example, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be configured to be variablely displayed in a state where the temporary stop or the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special symbol is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode in which the player can know that the temporary stop is in progress, so that the player loses the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display. You can know that you haven't done so, and you can play big hit games with confidence.

Next, the normal symbol variation processing (S156) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 346. FIG. 346 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S156). This normal symbol variation process (S156) is executed in the timer interrupt process, and the variation display and variation time of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83, the lower electric motor attached to the lower first ball entry port 64D. This is a process for controlling the opening operation and opening time of the accessory 64Da.

In this normal symbol variation processing (S156 in FIG. 346), first, it is determined whether or not the current symbol is hit by the normal symbol (second symbol) (S5901). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the lower electric accessory 64Da attached to the lower first entrance ball opening 64D is being made while the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the hit. Is included in the process of being done. As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S5901: Yes), a new normal symbol change (lottery) cannot be started (executed), so that it is as it is. This process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S5901: No), then whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (normal symbol is changing). When it is determined (S5902) and it is determined that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not changing (normal symbol changing) (S5902: No), that is, even if the normal symbol is currently hit, the normal symbol changes. If it is determined that there is no such state, that is, it is possible to start (execute) a new normal symbol change (lottery), the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203e (hold of change display in the normal symbol). The number of times M) is acquired (S5903).

Next, when it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S5904), and it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0. (S5904: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S5904: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S5905). The data stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S5906).

In the process of S5906, the data stored in the normal symbol hold first to fourth areas of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, normal symbol hold 1st area → execution area, normal symbol hold 2nd area → normal symbol hold 1st area, normal symbol hold 3rd area → normal symbol hold 2nd area, normal symbol hold 4th area → Shift the data in each area, such as the 3rd area for holding normal symbols. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S5907).

Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is larger than 0 (S5908). When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203j is larger than 0 (S5908: Yes), since it is in the time reduction state, the lottery result is acquired based on the normal random number 4 table 202cc for high probability time (S5909). ). Specifically, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "205-232", the normal symbol is out of order. It is determined that. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S5908 that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is not larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S5908: No), it is based on the normal random number 4 table 202cc for low probability. Then, the lottery result is acquired (S5910). Specifically, the lottery result is acquired based on the random number 4 table 202cc of the normal symbol for low probability. If the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5", it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 6 to 232", it is determined that the normal symbol is out of order. do.

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S5909 or S5910 is a hit of the normal symbol (S5911), and when it is determined that the lottery result is a hit of the normal symbol (S5911: Yes). ), Set the display mode at the time of hit (S5912), and proceed to the process of S5914. In the process of S5911, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "○" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

On the other hand, in the process of S5911, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S5911: No), the display mode at the time of out of alignment is set (S5913), and the process proceeds to S5914. In the process of S5913, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S5914. When the processing of S5912 or the processing of S5913 is completed, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined based on the value of the normal symbol variation type counter (S5914), and this processing is terminated.

When the processing of S5912 or S5914 is completed, in the processing of S591, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol (S5911), and the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol. If it is determined to be in the state) (S5911: Yes), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device is set to 3 seconds (S5913), and then the normal symbol short fluctuation flag 203t is set to ON. (S5914), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol (it is the low probability state of the normal symbol) (S5911: No), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device. Is set to 10 seconds (S5915), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5902 that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S5902: Yes), the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S5915). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S5910 or the process of S5912 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

If it is determined in the process of S5915 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S5915: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5915, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S5915: Yes), then the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S5916). In the processing of S5916, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the processing of S5912, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighting display) in the second symbol display device. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is out of order and the display mode is set by the process of S5913, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. Is set. The period during which the second symbol is stopped and displayed is longer than the period during which one part of the blinking display (alternate display of "○" and "×") indicating that the second symbol is changing is turned on. It is configured to be (confirmed display). This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp that the second symbol has been stopped and displayed.

After finishing the processing of S5916, next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation processing (S156) (this lottery result). However, it is determined whether or not it is a hit of a normal symbol (S5917). If it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S5917: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S5917: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is larger than 0 (S5918).

In the process of S5918, when it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is 0, that is, when it is determined that the gaming state at the timing when the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol this time is started is the normal state (S5919). : No), the opening time of the lower electric accessory 64Da is set to 0.9 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S5920), and the process proceeds to S5921.

On the other hand, in the process of S5918, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203j is larger than 0, that is, when it is determined that the gaming state at the timing when the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol this time is started is the time reduction state. (S5918: Yes), the opening period of the lower electric accessory 64Da attached to the lower first entry port 64D is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S5924), and the process proceeds to S5923. do.

As described above, in this control example, the timing at which the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol is executed and the timing at which the opening operation of the lower electric accessory 64Da executed based on the winning of the normal symbol is set are set. Is configured to set an opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player as the opening operation of the lower electric accessory 64Da only when both are in the time saving state.

With this configuration, it is possible to strictly set the conditions for setting the opening operation that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, for example, a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed in a state where the normal state is set as the game state (for example). Even if the time reduction state is set before the fluctuation time (10 seconds) of the normal symbol is set after the execution of the fluctuation) is executed and the winning is won, the long opening is set as the operation of the lower electric accessory 64Da. There is no such thing. Similarly, in the change of the normal symbol (lottery) executed in the state where the time saving state is set, the normal state is set as the game state until the change of the normal symbol is stopped. Even in this case, the long opening of the lower electric accessory 64Da is not set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous privilege (long opening of the lower electric accessory 64Da).

Further, since it is possible to prevent the lower electric accessory 64Da from being opened for a long time in a state where the normal state is set as the game state, a lottery of a special symbol (second special symbol) advantageous to the player is executed. The easy period can be limited to the time saving state. In this control example, the game state is determined between the timing when the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol is started and the timing when the opening operation of the lower electric accessory 64Da is set, and the game state set at each timing. The above-mentioned configuration is used as the configuration for setting the opening operation content of the lower electric accessory 64Da based on the above, but other configurations may be used.

For example, the opening operation that is disadvantageous to the player only when both the timing when the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol is started and the timing when the opening operation of the lower electric accessory 64Da is set are in the normal state (FIG. 346). The opening operation set in S5924 may be set (short opening is set), and the long opening (opening operation set in S5922 in FIG. 346) may be set in other states. With this configuration, a privilege (long opening) that is advantageous to the player is provided even for normal symbol fluctuations that are executed during the period before and after the time saving state, which is the gaming state that is advantageous to the player, is set. Therefore, it is possible to make the time saving state more advantageous to the player.

In this way, while the time saving state is set as the game state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is very short, "10 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case where the normal state is set, and further. Since the opening period of the lower first entrance 64D is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", it is easy for the ball to enter the lower first entrance 64D. Become. In this control example, when the jackpot game is executed, the time saving state is configured to end, so that the normal state is reached during the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the small hit game is executed, the time reduction state is continuously set unless the time reduction end condition is satisfied, so that the small hit state is executed while the time reduction state is set. During the winning game, the first variable winning device 65 is opened in the small hit game, and the lower electric accessory 64Da is opened for a long time, and a plurality of winning openings (first specific winning opening 65a, lower first winning ball) are opened. It is a specific period during which the ball can easily enter the mouth 64D).

By using such a configuration, for example, instead of the configuration of the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2, the lower electric accessory 64Da and the lower first ball entrance 64D are arranged above the first variable winning device 65. However, it is preferable to configure the ball to enter the two winning openings (V winning device 65a, lower first entry opening 64D) during the small hit game, whereby the winning ball that can be obtained during the small hit game. The number can be increased, and it becomes possible to give more advantageous benefits to the player.

Returning to FIG. 346, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S5920, the opening / closing control start of the lower electric accessory 64Da attached to the lower first ball entry port 64D is set (S5921), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the lower electric accessory 64Da is set by the process of S5923, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started when the electric accessory opening / closing process of the main process is executed next, and the process of S5924 is started. Alternatively, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S5922 are completed.

Next, the jackpot end processing (S1451) will be described with reference to FIG. 347. FIG. 347 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (S1451). In the jackpot end process (S1451), a process for setting the game state after the jackpot is executed at the end of the jackpot game.

In the jackpot end processing (S1451), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is 35 or less (S5951). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is 35 or less (S5951: Yes), the probability variation flag 203ca is set to ON (S5952), and the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is added by 1 (S5953). Next, a number-of-times command indicating the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is set (S5954), and the process proceeds to S5955.

In the process of S5955, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203 cn added in the process of S5953 is 35 (S5955). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is 35 (S5955: Yes), the state command before reaching the upper limit is set (S5956), and the process proceeds to S5957. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5955 that the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is not 35 (S5955: No), the processing of S5956 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5957.

In the process of S5957, the read of the jackpot type executed this time is executed (S5957). Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type read in the process of S5957 is jackpot C (S5958). When it is determined that the read jackpot type is jackpot C (S5958: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is set to 0 (S5960), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5598 that the jackpot type is not the jackpot C (S5958: No), it is determined whether or not the read jackpot type is the jackpot B (S5959). When it is determined that the read jackpot type is jackpot B (S5959: Yes), the game state at the time of winning is read out from the game state storage area 203cc (S5961). Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the time of winning read in the process of S5962 is a latent or probable changing state (S5962). When it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning is not a latent state or a probable change state (that is, a normal state or a time saving state) (S5962: No), the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is set to 10000. (S5964), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5962, when it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning is a latent state or a probable change state (S5962: Yes), 0 is set to the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j (S5963). This process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5959 that it is not a jackpot B (S5959: No), the game state at the time of winning is read out from the game state storage area 203cc (S5965). Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the time of winning is the reduced working hours state (S5966). If it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning is the time saving state (S5966: Yes), 0 is set in the time saving medium counter 203j (S5960), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5966, if it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning is not the time saving state (S5966: No), 10000 is set in the time saving medium counter 203j (S5964), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5951 when it is determined that the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is not 35 or less (S5951: No), 50 is set to the value of the time saving medium counter 203j (S5967), and the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is set. The value is set to clear (S5968), and this process ends.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 348 to 351, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the voice lamp control device 110 in the fourth control example will be described. First, the main process 4 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 348. This main process 4 is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 257) in the first control example.

Of the main processes 4 (see FIG. 348) in the fourth control example, in each of the processes S2101 to S2113 and S2115 to S2120, S2101 to S2113 and S2115 of the main processes (see FIG. 257) in the first control example, respectively. The same process as each process of ~ S2120 is executed. Further, in the main process 4 (see FIG. 348) in the fourth control example, the command determination process 4 is used instead of the command determination process (see S2114 and FIG. 258) of the main process (see FIG. 257) in the first control example. It is executed (S2171), and the process shifts to S2115. This command determination process 4 (S2171) is a process for executing control according to the type of the command received from the main control device 110, similarly to the command determination process (see FIG. 258) in the first control example. The details of this command determination process 4 (S2171) will be described with reference to FIG. 349.

FIG. 349 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 4 (S2171) described above. As described above, the command determination process 4 (S2171) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 258) in the first control example. Of the command determination processes 4 (S2171) in the fourth control example, the processes of S2201 to S2213 are the same as the processes of S2201 to S2213 of the command determination process (see FIG. 258) in the first control example, respectively. Will be executed.

Further, in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 349) in the fourth control example, when it is determined that the unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 does not include the stop command in the process of S2212. (S2212: No) Then, it is determined whether or not the state command is included in the unprocessed command (S2251), and if it is determined that the state command is included (S2251: Yes), the state is determined. The state command for executing the control according to the game state notified by the command is executed (S2252). The details of this state command processing (S2252) will be described later with reference to FIG. 350. Further, when the state command processing (S2252) is completed, the effect type and effect of the pseudo effect (pseudo jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165, pseudo variable effect using the pseudo second entrance 1640, etc.) and the effect. The pseudo-effect setting process for setting the period is executed (S2253), and this process is terminated. The details of this pseudo-effect setting process (S2253) will be described later with reference to FIG. 351.

Further, in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 349) in the fourth control example, when it is determined that the unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 does not include the state command in the process of S2251. (S2251: No) Next, it is determined whether or not the probabilistic number command is included in the unprocessed command (S2254), and it is determined that the probabilistic number command is included in the unprocessed command. If this is the case (S2254: Yes), the number of consecutive probabilistic changes notified by the probabilistic change count command (value of the probabilistic change upper limit counter 203 cn provided in RAM 203 of the main controller 110) is used as the value of the probabilistic change upper limit counter 223 kb. After setting (S2255), this process ends. By the processing of S2255, every time the value of the probability change upper limit counter 203cj is changed on the main control device 110 side (every time the jackpot ends and the probability change state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol is set). , The value of the probability variation upper limit counter 223cc can be updated in synchronization with the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj. Therefore, on the voice lamp control device 113 side, it is possible to accurately grasp the remaining number of jackpots until the upper limit of the probability change state is reached. If it is determined in the processing of S2251 that the probability variation number command is not included in the unprocessed commands (S2251: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Next, the details of the state command process 4 (S2252) will be described with reference to FIG. 350. As described above, the state command process 4 (S2252) is a process for executing control according to the type of the gaming state notified by the state command received from the main control device 110.

In this state command process 4 (see FIG. 350), first, it is determined whether or not the change of the game state has been notified (S3601), and the game state has not been changed (that is, the number of time reductions has been subtracted by 1). If it is determined (S2601: No), the process shifts to S3609. On the other hand, when it is determined that the change of the gaming state is notified by the state command (S3601: Yes), whether the changed gaming state is either the normal state (normal mode) or the probable change state (probability change mode). (S3602), and if it is determined to be in either the normal state or the probabilistic state (S3602: Yes), a display command indicating the normal effect mode is set, and the process shifts to S3609. As described above, the normal effect mode is an effect mode in which an effect that pretends to be a normal state in a general gaming machine is executed.

As described above, in the fourth control example, both the normal state and the probable change state are game states in which the game progresses by performing a left-handed game aiming at the first ball entry port 64. In addition, even if it becomes a big hit, if the game state after the big hit does not become a latent state, the fact that it became a big hit is concealed, and the game ball simply enters the general winning opening in the normal state. The structure is such that it looks as if a prize ball has been awarded. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player play the game without being aware of the relatively complicated state transition until the transition to the most advantageous latent state (latent mode). In other words, despite being a big hit, getting only a few (40) prize balls can discourage the player, or shift to a probable state and easily open and close the lower electric accessory 64Da. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the disadvantage to the player. This makes the player feel as if the unfavorable gaming state simply continues during the type of jackpot state that does not transition to the normal state, probable change state, and latent state, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player. Since it can be pretended, it is possible to provide a player with a more understandable effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to understand the playability, and it is possible to prevent the player from avoiding the game by the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Further, in the state command process 4 (see FIG. 350) in the fourth control example, when it is determined in the process of S3602 that the notification by the current state command is neither the normal state nor the probable change state (S3602: No). ), It means that the gaming state notified by the status command is either the latent state (latent mode) or the time saving state, so next, the gaming state notified by the status command is the latent state. It is determined whether or not there is (S3604). In the process of S3604, if it is determined that the transition to the latent state (latent mode) is notified by the state command (S3604: Yes), then whether or not the value of the probability change upper limit number counter 223cc is 5 or less. (S3605), and it was determined that the value of the probability variation upper limit number counter 223b is 5 or less (that is, the number of loops in the latency mode remains 30 times or more before reaching the probability variation limit number). In the case (S3605: Yes), a display command indicating the latent probability effect A mode is set (S3606), and the process shifts to S3609. As a result, it is possible to continue to execute the effect (see FIG. 324 (a)) as if the jackpot state continues until the latent mode ends, so that the number of rounds is very large, 60 rounds or more. It is possible to make the player feel as if the jackpot of was executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of satisfaction.

On the other hand, in the process of S3605, it is determined that the value of the probability change upper limit number counter 223b is 6 or more (that is, the number of times the latent mode is looped before reaching the probability change limit number is less than 30 times). If this is done (S3605: No), a display command indicating the latent probability effect B mode is set (S3607), and the process shifts to S3609. In this latent effect B mode, the pseudo electric accessory 1640a is released every time the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by the pseudo special 2 variation effect, and the game ball is opened to the pseudo second entrance 1640. Is entered, and a period during which the variable display effect is executed and a period during which the pseudo jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165 is executed are set. In the pseudo jackpot effect, an effect is performed in which a maximum of five jackpots (and a latent mode between jackpots) appear to be one jackpot. As a result, a lottery of special symbols is executed based on the entry of the ball into the pseudo-second entry port 1640, and the pseudo-attacker 165 can be opened and closed as if it were in a big hit state. It is possible to realize an operation that is easier for a person to understand. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

On the other hand, in the process of S3604, when it is determined that the gaming state notified by the state command is not the latent state (S3604: No), it is notified by the state command that the transition to the time saving state (time saving mode) is notified. Therefore, a display command indicating the time saving mode is set (S3608), and this process is terminated.

In the processing of S3609, the information indicated by the received status command is stored (stored) in the status setting area 223g (S3609), and the information corresponding to the effect mode set by any of the processes of S3603, S3606, S3607, and S3608. Is stored in the effect mode storage area 223ca (S3610), and this process ends. By executing this state command process 4 (see FIG. 350), it is possible to set the effect mode according to the game state notified from the main control device 110.

Next, with reference to FIG. 351, the details of the above-mentioned pseudo-effect setting process (S2253) will be described. This pseudo-effect setting process (S2253) is a process for setting an effect operation according to the type of pseudo-effect set in the state command process 4 (see FIG. 350).

In this pseudo effect setting process (see FIG. 351), first, the information stored in the effect mode storage area 223ca is read (S3701), and whether or not the read information is the information indicating the latent effect A mode is determined. Determine (S3702). When it is determined in the process of S3702 that the information indicating the latent effect A mode is stored in the effect mode storage area 223ca (S3702: Yes), the discharge for controlling the closing and opening of the flow path switching member 695 is performed. By setting the path switching solenoid to off, the flow path switching member 695 is set to be in an open state (S3703). Next, as the number of rounds of the super jackpot effect, the number of rounds corresponding to the value of the probability variation upper limit number counter 223cc is set (S3704), and the process shifts to S3705. In the super jackpot effect, an effect is performed in which the actual 5 rounds of the jackpot appear to be one round. Since the jackpot of the second special symbol is all 10 rounds, the number of rounds of the super jackpot production is the value of the remaining number of jackpots up to the probability variation limit number (value obtained by subtracting the value of the probability variation upper limit number counter 223cc from 36). A value multiplied by 2 is set. On the other hand, in the process of S3702, if it is determined that the information stored in the effect mode storage area 223ca is not the information indicating the latent effect A mode (S3702), each process of S3703 and S3704 is skipped. The process shifts to S3705.

In the process of S3705, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the effect mode storage area 223ca is the information indicating the latent effect B mode (S3705), and it is determined that the information indicates the latent effect B mode. In the case (S3705: Yes), the value of the probability variation upper limit number counter 223cc is read out (S3706), the effect period of the pseudo jackpot effect is set based on the read counter value (S3707), and the effect period of the set jackpot effect is set. The period outside (outside the execution period of the pseudo jackpot effect) is set as the effect period of the pseudo special figure 2 variation effect (S3708), and the process shifts to S3709.

In the processing of S3707 and S3708, for example, when each pseudo jackpot is set to be as many as 5 actual jackpots and the remaining number of jackpots (the number of remaining jackpots up to the probability variation limit) is not divisible by 5. The jackpot for the remaining number of times divided by 5 is set as the continuation period of the first pseudo jackpot production. More specifically, for example, in the process of S3705, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 223cc is 8, the number of remaining jackpots up to the probability variation limit number (the number of jackpots won in the latent mode this time). ) Means 28 times, so the jackpot (and the duration of the latent mode between jackpots) of the 1st to 3rd times (the remainder of dividing 28 times by 5) is 1 pseudo jackpot effect. Set as the production period of. After that, the pseudo-special 2 variable effect period linked to the latent mode period between jackpots and the pseudo-big hit effect period that continues over 5 jackpots (and the latent mode period between jackpots) will be repeated. Set to.

On the other hand, in the process of S3705, if it is determined that the information stored in the effect mode storage area 223ca is not the information indicating the latent effect B mode (S3705: No), each process of S3706 to S3708 is skipped. , The process shifts to S3709. In the process of S3709, a display effect command corresponding to each set effect is set, and this process ends.

By executing this pseudo effect setting process (see FIG. 351), the effect mode of the pseudo effect executed in the latent mode is changed to the remaining number of big hits (the number of big hits to be won before reaching the probability variation limit number). It can be set according to the mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game in the latent mode.

In the fourth control example, in the latent effect B mode, the period of five jackpots is adjusted so as to be the effect period of one pseudo jackpot effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, the production period of each pseudo jackpot effect may be configured to be as close as possible (number of jackpots). Specifically, for example, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 223cc is 8, as a pseudo effect, a pseudo jackpot composed of four jackpot execution periods (and a latent mode period between jackpots). The effect may be set twice, and the pseudo jackpot effect composed of five jackpot execution periods (and the latent mode period between jackpots) may be set four times. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the difference in the duration of each pseudo jackpot effect and the number of prize balls won, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

<About a modified example of the first control example>
Next, a modified example of the first control example described above will be described with reference to FIG. 352. FIG. 352 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 in this modified example. In the configuration of the game board 13 of the first control example described above, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 and the second ball entry port 640 is provided in the right side region (see FIG. 208). On the other hand, in this modification, the difference is that the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 and the second ball entry port 640 is provided in the right side region.

With this configuration, if a player wins a game while playing a left-handed game, the ball can be inserted into the second entrance without changing the game method. Therefore, when the effect mode of the charge effect is changed based on the normal drawing lottery result, it is possible to notify the player of the lottery result which is advantageous to the player, so that it is possible to pay attention to the effect content to be executed. There is.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit is made, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the big hit until multiple (for example, two or three times) big hits occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, a first special symbol and a second special symbol, are used as a plurality of special symbol types, but the types of special symbols are not limited to this, and three or more. The special symbol type may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a game property in which a lottery (variation) is performed according to a predetermined rule for a plurality of special symbols and a game property in which a lottery (variation) is individually performed independently are described. However, each of the playability described in each embodiment may be replaced or combined.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Concept of the invention using the lower displacement unit 400 as an example>
A displacement member formed so as to be displaceable from the reference position in the first direction and movably formed to move the game ball in accordance with the displacement in the first direction, and a game from outside the orbital region of the displacement member to the orbital region of the displacement member. In a gaming machine provided with a regulating means for regulating the throwing of a ball, the displacement member is
A gaming machine A1 characterized in that it is formed so as to be displaceable from the reference position in a second direction opposite to the first direction.

Here, a displacement member formed so as to be displaceable in the first direction from the reference position and a game ball movably formed in accordance with the displacement in the first direction, and a track region of the displacement member from outside the track region of the displacement member. A gaming machine provided with a regulating means for regulating the throwing of a gaming ball to the ball is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-166997). According to this gaming machine, it is possible to prevent a predetermined number or more of gaming balls from being thrown into the orbital region of the displacement member by the regulation of the regulating means. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, if a malfunction occurs in the regulating means due to, for example, sticking or wear, there is a possibility that more than a specified number of gaming balls are thrown toward the track region of the displacement member. In this case, there is a problem that a problem may occur due to the amount of game balls exceeding the specified number. That is, for example, a game ball exceeding a specified number may enter the drive mechanism of the displacement member and be bitten into the movable portion, resulting in damage. Alternatively, there is a risk that more game balls than the specified number will flow out of the game area (for example, the back side of the game board).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable from the reference position in the second direction opposite to the first direction, so that the track region of the displacement member can be expanded accordingly. Therefore, for example, even if a malfunction occurs in the regulatory means and a specified number or more of game balls are thrown, the ball is thrown.
Since the orbital region of the displacement member is expanded, more game balls than the specified number can be accepted in the orbital region. As a result, the number of game balls exceeding the specified number can be moved along with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding the specified number from entering the drive mechanism portion of the displacement member and flowing out of the game area, and as a result, problems caused by the game balls exceeding the specified number can be prevented. It can be difficult to occur.

The gaming machine A1 includes a passage member formed as a passage through which the game ball can pass and whose downstream is communicated with the trajectory region of the displacement member, and the regulating means restricts the passage of the game ball in the passage member. Characteristic gaming machine A2.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, a passage member formed as a passage through which the game ball can pass and whose downstream is communicated with the track region of the displacement member is provided, and the regulating means is the game in the passage member. Since the passage of balls is restricted, for example, even if a malfunction occurs in the regulating means and a specified number or more of game balls are thrown, the number of game balls exceeding the specified number is transferred to the displacement member via the passage member. The ball can be reliably thrown into the orbital region. As a result, it is possible to prevent problems caused by the number of game balls exceeding the specified number.

In the gaming machine A2, the displacement member is formed so as to be able to receive and hold a predetermined number of gaming balls thrown from the passage member at the reference position, and at least the diameter of the gaming ball in the second direction from the reference position. The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that it is formed so as to be displaceable only by a distance exceeding the above.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2, the displacement member is formed so as to be able to receive and hold a predetermined number of game balls thrown from the passage member at the reference position, and is formed to be second from the reference position. Since it is formed so that it can be displaced at least by a distance exceeding the diameter of the game ball in the direction, after receiving the specified number of game balls at the reference position, the displacement member is displaced from the reference position in the second direction to reduce the specified number. The excess game ball can be thrown into the orbital region of the displacement member (the region on the first direction side of the displacement member). Therefore, the game balls exceeding the specified number can be moved along with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction.

In this case, since the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls and the number of game balls exceeding the specified number can be sent to the orbital region, the specified number of game balls and the number of game balls exceeding the specified number are separated. can do. Therefore, for example, by displacing the displacement member in the first direction, the operation of discharging only the game balls exceeding the specified number from the orbital region while maintaining the state in which the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls is performed. It will be possible.

The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine A3, the displacement member is displaced in the first direction and is formed so as to be able to change its posture when it reaches a predetermined position.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, the displacement member is displaced in the first direction and is formed so that the posture can be changed when the predetermined position is reached. Therefore, a predetermined number of games can be played up to the predetermined position. While it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the displacement member holds the ball and prevent the game ball from falling off from the displacement member, when the ball reaches a predetermined position, the change in the posture of the displacement member is used to prevent the game ball from falling off. Can be easily discharged from the displacement member.

In the game machine A4, the displacement member is provided with a recess recessed in the track region when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction from the reference position, and the displacement member is recessed in the recess when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. The gaming machine A5 is provided with a protrusion to be engaged, and the posture can be changed by engaging the protrusion with the recess.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of the game machine A4, the displacement member is provided with a recess recessed in the track region when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction from the reference position, and the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. The structure for changing the posture of the displacement member can be simplified because the protrusion is provided and the protrusion is engaged with the recess so that the posture can be changed.

In the gaming machine A5, the protrusion is projected from the displacement member toward the first direction, and the tip of the protrusion hits the lower half surface of the gaming ball thrown into the orbital region of the displacement member. A gaming machine A6 characterized by being touched.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5, the protrusion is projected from the displacement member in the first direction, and the tip of the protrusion is thrown into the orbital region of the displacement member. Since it is formed so as to be able to abut on the lower half surface (that is, a game ball exceeding a specified number), when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction, the game ball is placed on the lower half surface at the protrusion. You can move it while pushing it. As a result, it is possible to easily eject the game balls exceeding the specified number from the orbital region.

Further, the protrusion is interposed between the specified number of game balls held by the displacement member and the game balls sent to the orbital region of the displacement member (game balls exceeding the specified number). It is possible to secure the distance between the specified number of game balls and the number of game balls exceeding the specified number by the amount of the protrusion length of the portion. Therefore, while maintaining the state in which the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls, it is possible to easily eject only the game balls exceeding the specified number from the track region.

Furthermore, since the role of changing the posture of the displacement member by engaging with the concave portion and the role of moving the game ball while pushing the lower half surface thereof are also used for the protrusion, the number of parts is reduced by that amount and the product is manufactured. It is possible to reduce the cost.

In the gaming machine A5 or A6, the concave portion is characterized in that the size in the first direction is smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5 or A6, the size of the concave portion in the first direction is smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball, so that the gaming ball sent to the orbital region of the displacement member. (That is, a game ball exceeding a specified number) can easily pass through the recess when it is moved with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction. As a result, it is possible to easily eject the game balls exceeding the specified number from the orbital region.

In any of the game machines A5 to A7, the displacement member is erected in the orbital region when the displacement member is displaced from the reference position in the first direction at a height lower than the radius of the game ball and more than the recess. A wall portion located on the first direction side is provided, and when a game ball thrown into the orbital region of the displacement member is moved along with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction, the game ball moves to the wall. The gaming machine A8, characterized in that the displacement member is brought into contact with the portion and the posture change of the displacement member is regulated.

According to the game machine A8, in any of the game machines A5 to A7, the displacement member is erected in the orbital region when the displacement member is displaced from the reference position in the first direction at a height lower than the radius of the game ball and is recessed. A wall portion located on the first direction side of the displacement member is provided, and when a game ball thrown into the orbital region of the displacement member is moved along with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction, the game ball becomes a wall portion. Since the displacement member is in contact with the displacement member and the posture change of the displacement member is regulateably formed, only the number of game balls exceeding the specified number is maintained while the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls. It can be easily discharged from the orbital region.

That is, since the wall portion is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball, when the game ball is moved by being pushed by the protrusion as the displacement member is displaced in the first direction, the game ball is moved. The lower half surface can be brought into contact with the wall portion so that the game ball can easily get over the wall portion. In this case, the game ball is brought into contact with the displacement member (that is, the game ball is interposed between the displacement member and the wall portion), and a reaction force can be applied from the game ball to the displacement member. It is possible to regulate the change in posture and prevent the specified number of game balls held by the displacement member from falling off. As a result, it is possible to easily discharge only the game balls exceeding the specified number from the track region while maintaining the state in which the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls.

On the other hand, when a game ball (that is, a game ball exceeding a specified number) is not thrown in the orbital region of the displacement member, the game ball is not interposed between the wall portion and the displacement member, so that the protrusion is recessed. By being engaged, the posture of the displacement member can be changed. As a result, it is possible to easily discharge a predetermined number of game balls (that is, game balls held by the displacement member) from the displacement member by utilizing the change in the posture of the displacement member.

A9 is characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the restricting means is formed so as to be operable in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the regulating means is formed so as to be operable in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member, so that the displacement member is displaced according to the displacement of the displacement member. It is possible to regulate or allow the throwing of a gaming ball into the orbital region of a member. That is, since the regulation or tolerance of the throwing of the game ball can be switched mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member, for example, depending on the sensor device for detecting the position of the regulating means and the detection result of the sensor device. It is possible to eliminate the need to control the driving means for driving the regulating means or each of these means, thereby reducing the product cost and improving the reliability of the operation.

In the gaming machine A9, the regulating means allows the gaming ball to be thrown into the trajectory region of the displacement member in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member from the reference position in the second direction. A featured gaming machine A10.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A9, the regulating means is linked to the displacement of the displacement member from the reference position to the second direction, and the gaming ball of the displacement member to the orbital region. Since the ball is allowed to be thrown, the game ball can be reliably thrown in the orbital region of the displacement member and in the region on the first direction side of the displacement member.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the displacement member is displaceably arranged in the base member, and the end portion of the base member on the first direction side is arranged below the vertical direction and upward in the vertical direction. The gaming machine A11 is provided with a recovery member having an opening in the slingshot.

According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effect of the game machine A10, the displacement member is displaceably arranged and the base member is arranged vertically below the end portion on the first direction side of the base member. Along with this, a recovery member having an opening in the vertical direction is provided, so that the game balls are moved along with the movement of the displacement member in the first direction and discharged from the orbital region of the displacement member (that is, the amount exceeding the specified number). The game ball) can be received and collected from the opening of the collection member.

In the game machine A11, the base member is formed so as to be displaceable between the retracted position and the displaced position, and the opening of the recovered member is at least the first in the base member displaced to the retracted position or the displaced position. A game machine A12 characterized in that it is formed in a size located below the vertical end of the end on the directional side.

According to the game machine A12, in addition to the effect of the game machine A11, the base member is formed so as to be displaceable between the retracted position and the displacement position, and the opening of the recovery member is displaced to at least the retracted position or the displaced position. Since it is formed in a size located vertically below the end on the first direction side of the base member, it is discharged from the track region of the displacement member regardless of whether the base member is displaced to the retracted position or the displacement position. It is possible to receive and collect the game balls (that is, the game balls exceeding the specified number) from the opening of the collection member.

By being inserted into the recessed space of the recess in any of the gaming machines A5 to A8,
The gaming machine A13 is provided with an insertion member that regulates the engagement of the protrusion with the recess.

According to the gaming machine A13, in any of the gaming machines A5 to A8, a displacement member is provided because it is provided with an insertion member that regulates the engagement of the protrusion with the recess by being inserted into the recessed space of the recess. It is possible to suppress the change in the posture of the displacement member when the game balls exceeding the specified number are discharged from the orbital region of the displacement member due to the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction. Therefore, while maintaining the state in which the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls, it is possible to easily eject only the game balls exceeding the specified number from the track region.

The gaming machine A13 includes a base member that is displaceably formed between the retracted position and the displaced position and in which the displaced member is displaceably arranged. The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that it is inserted into the recessed space of the recess and is separated from the recessed space of the recess when the base member is displaced to the displacement position.
4.

According to the game machine A14, in addition to the effect of the game machine A13, when the base member is displaced to the retracted position, the insertion member is inserted into the recessed space of the recess, so that the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. Along with this, when the number of game balls exceeding the specified number is discharged from the orbital region of the displacement member, the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls by suppressing the change in the posture of the displacement member. On the other hand, when the base member is displaced to the displacement position, the insertion member is separated from the recessed space of the recess, so that the protrusion is engaged with the recess as the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. By being combined, the posture of the displacement member can be changed, and a predetermined number of game balls can be easily discharged from the displacement member.

<Concept of the invention using the distribution unit 500 as an example>
The flow-down passage through which the game ball flows, the first branch passage and the second branch passage branched from the flow passage, and the game ball flowing down the flow passage to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage. In a game machine provided with a distribution means for distribution, the game machine is provided with a displacement member which is formed so as to be displaceable and receives a game ball from the first branch passage, and the displacement member is in contact with the distribution means and is displaced. The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that the distribution means is displaced and the distribution destination is switched.

Here, the flow-down passage through which the game ball flows down, the first branch passage and the second branch passage branched from the flow-down passage, and the game ball flowing down the flow-down passage to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage. A gaming machine equipped with a sorting means for sorting is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-223).
176). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the gaming ball that has flowed down the flow passage is
Since the structure is such that one ball is alternately distributed to the first branch passage and the second branch passage, the game balls flowing down the flow passage are evenly distributed between the first branch passage and the second branch passage (that is, half each). It is sorted. That is, there is a problem that the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage cannot be changed.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, a displacement member that is formed so as to be displaceable and receives a game ball from the first branch passage is provided, and the displacement member abuts on the distribution means and is displaced to distribute. Since the means is displaced and the distribution destination is switched, the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage or the second branch passage can be changed according to the displacement of the displacement member. That is, the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage can be changed.

According to the gaming machine B1, the distribution means can be displaced by using the displacement of the displacement member, so that it is not necessary to separately provide a drive means or a transmission mechanism for displacementing the distribution means. can. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced by that amount, and the product cost can be reduced.

Further, for example, in a structure in which the displacement of the sorting means is controlled by using the position detection by the sensor device or the drive by the driving means, the reliability of the sorting operation of the sorting means is lowered due to the malfunction due to the detection failure or the control failure. However, according to the gaming machine B1, the distribution destination by the distribution means can be switched mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member, so that the reliability of the distribution operation can be improved.

In particular, since the displacement member is a member that receives the game ball from the first branch passage, the distribution destination of the distribution means can be switched to the first branch passage in synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member, so that the first branch can be obtained. It is possible to reliably receive the game balls distributed in the passage to the displacement member.

The gaming machine B1 is provided with an urging means for applying an urging force to the distribution means to maintain the distribution destination by the distribution means in either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, and the displacement member. Displaces the distribution means in a direction opposite to the direction of the urging force, so that the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage or the other of the second branch passage, and the urging means is used. The gaming machine B2, characterized in that the distribution destination by the distribution means is returned to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage by the urging force of the means.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the distribution means is given an urging force.
Since the urging means for maintaining the distribution destination by the distribution means in either the first branch passage or the second branch passage is provided, it is possible to prevent the distribution destination by the distribution means from being inadvertently switched. In this case, the distribution means is displaced according to the displacement of the displacement member, and after the distribution destination is switched, the return to the distribution destination before the switching can be performed by the urging force of the urging means. It can be unnecessary that the member is in contact with the distribution means. That is, the displacement member can be separated from the distribution means. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the movable range of the displacement member can be increased.

The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that the urging means applies an urging force to the sorting means to maintain the sorting destination by the sorting means in the second branch passage.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the urging means applies an urging force to the sorting means to maintain the sorting destination by the sorting means in the second branch passage, so that the displacement member. In a state where the pachinko ball cannot be received, it is possible to prevent the distribution destination by the distribution means from being switched to the first branch passage.

In the gaming machine B3, a base member that is displaceably formed between the first position and the second position and in which the displacement member is arranged is provided, and the base member is arranged in the first position. In a state where the displacement member can receive the game ball from the first branch passage and can come into contact with the distribution means, and the base member is arranged at the second position, the displacement member. The gaming machine B4, wherein the member cannot receive the gaming ball from the first branch passage and cannot contact the sorting means.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of the game machine B3, a base member formed so as to be displaceable between the first position and the second position is provided, and the displacement member is arranged on the base member. It is possible to form a mode in which the displacement member is displaced with the base member arranged at the first position and a mode in which the displacement member is displaced with the base member arranged at the second position. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

In this case, when the base member is arranged at the second position, the displacement member cannot receive the game ball from the first branch passage, but in such a state, the displacement member cannot contact the distribution means. Therefore, in a state where the displacement member cannot receive the game ball (a state in which the base member is arranged at the second position), it is possible to prevent the distribution destination by the distribution means from being switched to the first branch passage.

The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that a second base member formed as a member separate from the base member is provided, and the distribution means is arranged on the second base member.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B4, a second base member formed as a member separate from the base member is provided, and the distribution means is arranged on the second base member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the increase in size of the base member.

In any of the game machines B1 to B5, the displacement member is formed so as to be at least displaceable at a switching position and a receiving position set at a position different from the switching position, and the displacement member is displaced to the switching position. In this state, the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage, and in the state where the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position, the displacement member can receive the game ball from the first branch passage. The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the second branch passage.
..

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the displacement member is formed so as to be at least displaceable between the switching position and the receiving position set at a position different from the switching position. When the displacement member is displaced to the switching position, the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage, and when the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position, the displacement member moves the game ball from the first branch passage. Since it is possible to receive and the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the second branch passage, it is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding the specified number that can be received by the displacement member from being distributed to the first branch passage.

That is, when the switching position and the receiving position are set to the same position, the displacement member receives the game ball while the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage, so that the displacement member. There is a risk that the game balls will be distributed to the first branch passage in excess of the specified number that can be received. If a means for restricting the inflow of the game ball into the first branch passage is separately provided, the structure becomes complicated, the reliability is lowered, and the product cost is increased.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B6, the displacement member is displaced to the switching position, the specified number (or less than the specified number) of game balls are distributed to the first branch passage, and then the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position. Then, since the distribution destination is switched to the second branch passage, it is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding the specified number from flowing down to the first branch passage. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding the specified number that can be received by the displacement member from being distributed to the first branch passage. again,
Since it is not necessary to separately provide the above-mentioned means, it is possible to improve reliability and reduce product cost.

In the gaming machine B6, the first branch passage is formed as one or a plurality of protrusions or recesses protruding or recessed in the inner wall surface thereof, and a resistance is given to a gaming ball passing through the first branch passage. A gaming machine B7 characterized by being provided with means.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B6, the first branch passage is formed as one or more protrusions or recesses protruding or recessed in the inner wall surface thereof, and passes through the first branch passage. Since the resistance means for imparting resistance to the gaming ball is provided, the speed of the gaming ball passing through the first branch passage can be slowed down. Therefore, the time required for the displacement member to be displaced from the switching position to the receiving position can be lengthened by that amount, so that the displacement member can reliably receive the game ball. Further, the output of the drive means can be reduced by the amount that the displacement speed required for the displacement member can be slowed down, and the product cost can be reduced.

In the gaming machine B6 or B7, the distribution means is the first as the displacement of the distribution means.
It is provided with a first haunting portion and a second haunting portion formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the branch passage, and the first haunting portion projects into the first branch passage to allow a game ball flowing down the down passage. The second
The second haunting portion is formed so as to be able to be distributed to the branch passage, and the first haunting portion is more than the first haunting portion.
By being located on the downstream side of the branch passage and projecting to the first branch passage, the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage can be regulated, and the first haunting portion and the second of them are formed.
The gaming machine B8 is characterized in that when one of the haunting portions protrudes into the passage of the first branch passage, the other is retracted out of the passage of the first branch passage.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of the game machine B6 or B7, the distribution means has a first haunting portion and a first haunting portion formed so as to appear and disappear with respect to the first branch passage with the displacement of the distribution means. A second haunting portion is provided, and the first haunting portion is formed so that the game ball flowing down the downflow passage can be distributed to the second branch passage by projecting to the first branch passage, and the second haunting portion is formed by the first. It is located on the downstream side of the first branch passage from the haunting part, and by projecting to the first branch passage, the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage can be regulated, and the first haunting part thereof. And in the state where one of the second haunting portions protrudes into the passage of the first branch passage, the other is retracted out of the passage of the first branch passage, so that the distribution means is displaced according to the displacement of the displacement member. Then, only the specified number of game balls can be distributed to the first branch passage and received by the displacement member.

That is, the first state in which the first infestation portion protrudes to distribute the game ball flowing down the flow passage to the second branch passage, and the first infestation portion retracts to cause the game ball to flow down the downflow passage. The second state of distributing to the first branch passage, the third state of restricting the flow of the game ball distributed to the first branch passage (storing the game ball) by projecting the second haunting portion, and the third state. 2 By retracting the haunting part, the game ball stored in the first branch passage is made to flow down and is received by the displacement member.
By combining these states, only a predetermined number of game balls can be distributed to the first branch passage and received by the displacement member.

Further, according to the gaming machine B8, the distribution means includes a first haunting portion and a second haunting portion, that is,
Since it is formed as one component, the structure of the distribution means (structure for operating the first infestation portion and the second infestation portion to exert their functions) can be simplified. Further, in the state where one of the first infested portion and the second infested portion protrudes into the passage of the first branch passage, the other is retracted out of the passage of the first branch passage, so that two positions (switching positions) of the displacement members are obtained. And the receiving position), it is sufficient if the sorting means is also formed so as to be displaceable at two positions. That is, by displacing the sorting means at two positions, the above-mentioned first to fourth states can be formed. Therefore, the structure of the distribution means and the structure of displacement of the distribution means according to the displacement of the displacement member can be simplified, and the reliability of the distribution operation of the game ball can be improved accordingly.

<Concept of the invention using the distribution unit 500 as an example>
The flow-down passage through which the game ball flows, the first branch passage and the second branch passage branched from the flow passage, and the game ball flowing down the flow passage to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage. A gaming machine provided with a distribution means for distributing, characterized in that it is located downstream of the distribution means and is provided with a flow state changing means for restricting or allowing the flow of a game ball in the first branch passage. Game machine C1.

Here, the flow-down passage through which the game ball flows down, the first branch passage and the second branch passage branched from the flow-down passage, and the game ball flowing down the flow-down passage to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage. A gaming machine equipped with a sorting means for sorting is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-223).
176). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the gaming ball flowing down the flowing passage is
Since it is only distributed to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, there is a problem that it is insufficient to give the player an interest.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, it is located on the downstream side of the distribution means and is provided with a flow state changing means for restricting or allowing the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage, which is interesting to the player. Can be given.

That is, the flow of the game ball distributed to the first branch passage is regulated by the operation of the flow state changing means, the game ball is stored in the first branch passage, and the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage is allowed. , The game ball stored in the first branch passage can be flowed down (opened).
As a result, in addition to the operation of distributing the game ball flowing down the flow-down passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, the operation of temporarily stopping (storing) the flow of the game ball distributed to the first branch passage is performed. , The action of causing the stopped (stored) game ball to flow down (open) can be formed. As a result, the player can be given a hobby.

In the gaming machine C1, the first branch passage is provided in a state where the distribution means and the flow state changing means are integrally formed, and the distribution destination by the distribution means is the first branch passage. In a state where the flow of the gaming ball in the above is regulated by the flow state changing means and the distribution destination by the distribution means is the second branch passage, the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage is regulated by the flow state changing means. A gaming machine C2 characterized by being tolerated.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, an integrated member in which the sorting means and the flowing state changing means are integrally formed is provided, so that the sorting means and the flowing state changing means are operated. It is possible to simplify the structure and improve the reliability of operation. That is, when the sorting means and the flow state changing means are formed separately, the two parts are formed, which complicates the structure for operating the two parts and lowers the reliability of the operation. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, since the sorting means and the flow state changing means can be formed as one component, the structure can be simplified by that amount, the product cost can be reduced, and the reliability of operation can be improved. Can be planned.

Further, in this case, if the distribution destination by the distribution means is set to the first branch passage by the operation of the integrated member, the flow of the game ball distributed to the first branch passage is regulated by the flow state changing means, and the first When the game ball is stored in the branch passage and the distribution destination by the distribution means is the second branch passage, the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage is allowed by the flow state changing means and stored in the first branch passage. The game ball that has been played can be flowed down (opened). That is, in addition to the operation of distributing the game ball flowing down the flow-down passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, the operation of temporarily stopping (storing) the flow of the game ball distributed to the first branch passage. Not only can the stopped (stored) game ball flow down (open) motion, but these storage and release motions can be alternately formed in conjunction with the distribution motion.

In the game machine C2, the integrated member is formed so as to be displaceable in the first state position and the second state position, and in a state where the integrated member is displaced to the first state position, the distribution means is the first. The flow state changing means is arranged at a position where the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage is restricted, and the integrated member is displaced to the second state position. In the state, the distribution means is arranged at a position where the second branch passage is the distribution destination, and the flow state changing means is arranged at a position where the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage is allowed. The game machine C3.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C2, the integrated member is formed so as to be displaceable between the first state position and the second state position, and in the state where the integrated member is displaced to the first state position. , The distribution means is arranged at the position where the first branch passage is the distribution destination, and the flow state changing means is arranged at the position where the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage is restricted, and the integrated member is displaced to the second state position. In this state, the distribution means is arranged at a position where the second branch passage is the distribution destination, and the flow state changing means is arranged at a position where the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage is allowed.
By displacing the integrated member at two positions (first state position and second state position), in addition to the operation of distributing the game ball flowing down the flow-down passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, the first
It is possible to form an operation of temporarily stopping (storing) the flow of the game balls distributed to the branch passage and an operation of causing the stopped (stored) game balls to flow down (open), and to store and open these. Can be formed alternately in conjunction with the distribution operation. That is, the structure can be simplified to reduce the product cost and improve the reliability of operation.

In the gaming machine C3, the integrated member is rotatably formed, and at least the flow state changing means is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the first branch passage, and the gaming ball is projected to the first branch passage. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that it is formed into an arc-shaped curved shape centered on the rotation axis of the integrated member while restricting the flow of the slingshot.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3, the integrated member is formed rotatably, and at least the flow state changing means is formed so as to appear and disappear with respect to the first branch passage, and the first branch passage is formed. By protruding to, the flow of the game ball is restricted, and the shape is curved in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the integrated member. The area of the hole to be opened can be reduced.

In the gaming machine C4, the flowing state changing means is arranged in a posture in which the side facing the upstream of the first branch passage is concave.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4, the flow-down state changing means is arranged in a posture in which the side facing the upstream of the first branch passage is concave, so that the flow-down state is changed to the first branch passage. In the initial state where the means starts to protrude (that is, only the tip side of the flow state changing means is projected into the passage), the shape of the tip side of the flow state changing means can easily regulate the flow of the gaming ball. It can be arranged in a direction, and it is possible to easily regulate the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage.

Further, in a state where the flow-down state changing means is projected to the first branch passage to the maximum and the flow-down of the game ball is restricted, the game ball can be stably held by the recess of the flow-down state changing means, so that the game ball can be suppressed from rampaging. ..

In the gaming machine C4 or C5, the integrated member is provided with an urging means for urging the integrated member in a direction in which the flow state changing means projects in the direction of projecting to the first branch passage, and the flow state changing means is described as described above. The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that the distance to the rotation axis of the integral member is made larger than the distance from the distribution means to the rotation axis of the integral member.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4 or C5, an urging means for applying an urging force to the integrated member to urge the flow state changing means in the direction of projecting to the first branch passage is provided. Therefore, by utilizing such urging force, it is possible to easily maintain the integrated member in a posture in which the flow-down state changing means projects into the first branch passage (that is, the first state position).

In this case, in the game machine C6, the distance from the flow-down state changing means to the rotation axis of the integrated member is larger than the distance from the distribution means to the rotation axis of the integral member, so that the flowing game balls collide with each other. And, because the distance from the rotation axis is large, even if the same impact force is applied, the flow state changing means is likely to be absorbed, but the urging direction of the urging means is such that the flow state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage. It is possible to suppress the immersion of the flow state changing means by the amount of the urging force.

In the gaming machine C6, the integrated member is rotated in a direction in which the flow-down state changing means projects in the direction of projecting to the first branch passage due to its own weight.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C6, the integrated member is rotated in the direction in which the flow-down state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage due to its own weight. A posture in which the flow-down state changing means projects the member into the first branch passage (that is, the first state position).
Can be easily maintained. Therefore, when the game ball collides, it is possible to further suppress the immersion of the flow state changing means by the amount of its own weight.

Further, even if the urging means falls off, the integrated part is maintained in a posture in which the flow-down state changing means protrudes to the first branch passage due to its own weight, and the game ball flows down to the first branch passage. Can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines C2 to C7, the distribution destination by the distribution means is set to the first branch passage, and the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage is regulated by the flow state changing means. When a specified number of gaming balls are stored in the branch passage, the gaming machine C is characterized in that the gaming balls flowing down the flow-down passage are formed so as to be able to flow down to the second branch passage.
8.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C2 to C7, the distribution destination by the distribution means is set to the first branch passage, and the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage is the flow state changing means. In a state where a specified number of game balls are stored in the first branch passage, the game balls flowing down the flow passage are formed so as to be able to flow down to the second branch passage, so that more than the specified number of game balls flow down. When flowing down the aisle, it is possible to prevent the number of game balls exceeding the specified number from staying in the flowing down aisle. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the distribution means (the operation of the distribution destination as the second branch passage) from being obstructed by the game ball stagnating in the flow passage.

In the gaming machine C8, the inner wall of the flow passage on the side facing the second branch passage has the game balls flowing down the flow passage at the end of the specified number of game balls stored in the first branch passage. The gaming machine C9 is formed so as to be able to be guided to the side surface of the gaming ball on the side of the second branch passage.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C8, the inner wall on the side facing the second branch passage in the flow passage has a specified number of gaming balls flowing down the flow passage stored in the first branch passage. Since it is formed so that it can be guided to the side surface of the second branch passage side of the game ball at the end of the game balls.
After colliding the game ball flowing down the flow-down passage with the last game ball out of the specified number of game balls, it can be easily made to flow down to the second branch passage.

The last game ball out of the specified number of game balls means a game ball located on the upstream side (the side opposite to the flow state changing means). When the specified number is 1, the game ball at the end means the game ball itself stored in the first branch passage.

In the gaming machine C8 or C9, the gaming machine C10 is characterized in that the flowing direction of the downstream end of the flowing passage is formed in a direction different from the flowing direction of the upstream end of the first branch passage.

According to the game machine C10, in addition to the effect of the game machine C8 or C9, the flow direction at the downstream end of the flow passage is formed in a direction different from the flow direction at the upstream end of the first branch passage. When the flowing game ball collides with the last game ball among the specified number of game balls stored in the first branch passage, the direction of the repulsive force applied to the last game ball is the direction of the first branch passage. It can be different from the flow direction at the upstream end. As a result, it is possible to prevent the trailing game ball from jumping out from the upstream end of the first branch passage and flowing into the second branch passage due to the repulsive force at the time of collision.

In any of the gaming machines C2 to C10, the distribution means is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the flow passage or the first branch passage, and the appearance position thereof is the flow direction at the downstream end of the flow passage. A gaming machine C11 characterized by being an inner wall on an extension of the above.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effect of either of the gaming machines C2 to C10, the distribution means is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the flow-down passage or the first branch passage, and the appearance position thereof is the flow-down position. Since it is an inner wall on the extension line in the flow direction at the downstream end of the passage, the distribution means can be projected at a position close to the game ball flowing down from the downstream end of the flow passage. Therefore,
It is possible to shorten the time required from the start of projecting the sorting means to the flow-down passage or the first branch passage until the game balls can be sorted. As a result, it is possible to more reliably switch the distribution destination by the distribution means.

In the gaming machine C11, the distribution means distributes a game ball flowing down the flow passage to the second branch passage by projecting to the flow passage or the first branch passage. The gaming machine C12 characterized in that the protruding direction of the means is set in the direction direction at the upstream end of the second branch passage.

According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C11, the distribution means distributes the game ball flowing down the flow-down passage to the second branch passage by projecting to the flow-down passage or the first branch passage. Since the protruding direction of the distribution means is set to the direction toward the upstream end of the second branch passage, when the gaming ball flowing down the flow passage comes into contact with the distribution means in the middle of the protrusion operation. Can push the game ball into the second branch passage with the protruding operation of the distribution means. As a result, distribution to the second branch passage can be performed more reliably.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C12, the first branch passage is formed so as to incline downward toward the downstream, and the gaming ball is formed so as to be able to roll on the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity. The gaming machine C13 is characterized in that the changing means is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear from the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity into the first branch passage.

According to the game machine C13, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C12, the first branch passage is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream, and the game ball is formed on the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity. Since the flow state changing means is formed so as to be rollable and can appear and disappear from the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity into the first branch passage, the game is performed after the flow state changing means starts to protrude into the first branch passage. It is possible to shorten the time required for the flow of the ball to be regulated. As a result, when the distribution destination of the distribution means is switched from the second branch passage to the first branch passage and the game ball is distributed to the first branch passage, the flow state changing means is regulated by the flow regulation of the game ball. You can easily make the protrusion in time.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C13, the flow-down state changing means is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the first branch passage, and at least in a state of maximally projecting to the first branch passage, in a protruding direction. A gaming machine C14 characterized in that a force component is acted on from a gaming ball to the flow state changing means.

According to the gaming machine C14, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C13, the flow-down state changing means is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the first branch passage, and protrudes at least in a state of maximally projecting to the first branch passage. Since the force component in the direction of movement is applied from the game ball to the flow state changing means, when the flow of the game ball distributed to the first branch passage is restricted, the flow is caused by the impact when the game ball collides. It is possible to suppress the immersion of the state changing means. Therefore, it is possible to easily regulate the flow of the game ball.

<Concept of the invention using the lower displacement unit 400 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a base member, a base member displaceable on one side of the base member, and a displacement member displaceable on the base member, the base member is associated with the displacement of the displacement member. The gaming machine D1 comprising a suppressing means for suppressing the reaction of a member.

Here, a gaming machine including a base member, a base member displaceable on one side of the base member, and a displaceable member displaceable on the base member is known (for example,). , JP-A-2015-029849). According to this gaming machine, in addition to the effect of displacing the base member between the overhanging position where the base member is extended to the game area and visible to the player and the retracted position where the base member is retracted from the game area, the base member is displaced. It is possible to perform an effect of displacing the displacement member in the state of being arranged at the overhanging position.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since one side of the base member is displaceably arranged on the base member, when the displacement member is displaced, the base member rattles with respect to the base member with one side as a fulcrum. There was a problem that it was easy to occur.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the suppression means for suppressing the reaction of the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member is provided, the occurrence of rattling of the base member with respect to the base member when the displacement member is displaced is suppressed. can do.

The reaction force associated with the displacement of the displacement member is, for example, one generated by a change in the center of gravity due to the displacement of the displacement member, or an inertial force generated by an increase or decrease in the displacement speed of the displacement member (change in acceleration). Examples include those generated by the reaction force when the displacement member is displaced and the game ball is ejected.

In the gaming machine D1, the suppressing means includes an arrangement member displaceably arranged on the base member, the displacement member is formed so as to be able to hold and eject a game ball, and the disposition member is formed. A gaming machine D characterized in that it is formed so as to be displaceable when a gaming ball is ejected from the displacement member.
2.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the suppressing means includes an arrangement member displaceably arranged on the base member, and the displacement member is formed so that the gaming ball can be held and ejected. Being done
Since the disposing member is formed so as to be displaceable when the game ball is ejected from the displacement member, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the base member with respect to the base member. That is, when the game ball is launched from the displacement member, the position of the center of gravity of the base member is changed by the weight of the game ball, for example, the change in the position of the center of gravity due to the launch of the game ball is offset. When a configuration in which the installation member is displaced is adopted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the base member due to a change in the position of the center of gravity. Further, when the game ball is launched from the displacement member, the base member receives a reaction due to the launch of the game ball. For example, the arrangement member is displaced in a direction that cancels the reaction caused by the launch of the game ball. When adopted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the base member due to the reaction.

The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that, when the displacement member is displaced, the gaming machine D1 or D2 includes a reverse member that is displaced with at least a displacement component that is in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the displacement member.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1 or D2, when the displacement member is displaced, the reverse member is displaced with at least a displacement component that is in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the displacement member. Therefore, the change in the position of the center of gravity of the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member can be reduced by the displacement of the reverse member. As a result, rattling of the base member due to a change in the position of the center of gravity can be suppressed.

If the configuration is such that the displacement of the reverse member is started when the displacement of the displacement member is started, at least a part of the inertial forces of both can be canceled out. As a result, it is possible to easily suppress the rattling of the base member when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state.

The gaming machine D2 or D3 is characterized by comprising a transmission mechanism that transmits the displacement of the displacement member to the disposition member or (and) the reverse member to displace the displacement member or (and) the reverse member. Amusement machine D4.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D2 or D3, a transmission mechanism that transmits the displacement of the displacement member to the displacement member or (and) the reverse member to displace the displacement member or (and) the reverse member. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for displacing the disposing member or / or the reverse member. That is, the driving means for displacing the displacement member is a disposing member or (and).
It can also be used as a driving means for displacing the reverse member. Therefore, the weight of the base member can be reduced accordingly, and the rattling can be easily suppressed.

Further, since the arrangement or / or the reverse member can be displaced mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member, for example, the position of the displacement member is detected by a sensor device and arranged according to the detection result. It is possible to eliminate the need for control to drive the member or (and) reverse member by the driving means, thereby reducing the product cost and the reliability of the displacement operation of the displacement member or (and) reverse member with respect to the displacement member. Can be secured.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement member starts the displacement from the second position, and the displacement member starts the displacement from the first position closer to one side of the base member than the second position. D5 is a gaming machine D5, characterized in that the displacement is started from the first position, at least in a state where the base member is arranged at a predetermined position with respect to the base member.

Here, when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state, the change in acceleration is maximized.
The base member tends to rattle due to the influence of inertial force.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D4, the displacement member starts the displacement from the second position and one side of the base member from the second position. A mode in which the displacement is started from the first position close to the base member is formed so as to be formable, and at least the base member is arranged at a predetermined position with respect to the base member (for example, the base member protrudes into the game area and is displayed by the player. At the visible overhang position), the displacement is started from the first position, so that the rattling of the base member can be suppressed. That is, since the first position is closer to one side of the base member than the second position, the weight of the displacement member can be determined by setting the first position as the displacement start position of the displacement member. The member can be kept close to the fulcrum when the member rattles with respect to the base member, and the influence of the inertial force when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state can be made less likely to act on the base member by that amount. As a result, rattling of the base member can be easily suppressed.

The gaming machine D5 includes a pinion gear disposed on the base member and a rack member having a rack gear meshed with the pinion gear, and the displacement member is disposed on the rack member. Machine D6.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D5, a pinion gear arranged on the base member and a rack member on which a rack gear meshed with the pinion gear is formed are provided, and the rack member is provided with a displacement member. Therefore, when the displacement of the displacement member is started from the first position, not only the weight of the rack member but also the weight of the rack member is one side of the base member (the base member is relative to the base member). It can be kept close to the fulcrum when rattling). As a result, it is possible to easily suppress the rattling of the base member when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state.

The gaming machine D7 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine D6, the displacement direction when the displacement member starts displacement from the first position is a direction away from one side of the base member.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D6, the displacement direction when the displacement member starts displacement from the first position is a direction away from one side of the base member, so that the displacement member is in the first position. In the state of being arranged in, the rack member can be brought closer to one side of the base member. That is, in order for the displacement member (rack member) to be displaced in a direction away from one side of the base member, the rack member is based on the portion on the rack gear side to which the pinion gear is meshed after the displacement of the displacement member is started. It will be directed to one side of the member. Therefore, the weight of the rack member can be kept closer to one side of the base member (the fulcrum when the base member rattles with respect to the base member), and as a result, when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state. It is possible to easily suppress the rattling of the base member.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the base member is provided with a support structure that supports one side of the base member in a displaceable manner and a drive mechanism that drives the base member supported by the support structure. The displacement member is formed so as to be able to hold and eject the game ball, and the drive mechanism is a regulatory means for regulating the displacement of the base member in the direction of reaction when the game ball is ejected from the displacement member. A gaming machine D8 characterized by being provided with.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D7, a support structure that displaceably supports one side of the base member to the base member and a base member supported by the support structure are driven. The displacement member is formed so as to be able to hold and eject the game ball, and the drive mechanism is such that the base member is displaced in the direction of reaction when the game ball is ejected from the displacement member. Since the regulating means for regulating is provided, it is possible to prevent the base member from being displaced with respect to the base member due to the reaction. As a result, the occurrence of rattling of the base member can be suppressed.

<Concept of the invention using the rotating unit 700 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a rotating body member that is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is visibly arranged by a player, a displacement member that is rotatably arranged on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member is provided. The featured gaming machine E1.

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a rotating cylinder member which is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is visibly arranged by a player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-119140). In this gaming machine, the rotating body member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the display (design) on the outer peripheral surface thereof is visually recognized by the player while rotating the rotating body member or stopping the rotating body member. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since it is only possible to form an effect mode in which the display of the outer peripheral surface is visually recognized by the player as the rotating body member rotates or stops, the effect of the effect is small. There was a problem that was insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the displacement member displaceably arranged on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member is provided, the display of the outer peripheral surface is displayed to the player as the rotating cylinder member rotates or stops. Since it is possible to form an effect mode in which the displacement member is displaced in addition to the effect mode to be visually recognized, it is possible to give a change to the effect mode and enhance the effect.

The rotating cylinder member does not have to have a circular cross-sectional shape cut in a plane perpendicular to its rotation axis, and may have a polygonal shape, an elliptical shape, or a combination thereof. Therefore, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member does not have to be a peripheral surface, but may be a flat surface, a curved surface, or a combination thereof.

In the gaming machine E1, the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable between at least the first position and the second position, and at the first position, a part of the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member is formed by the displacement member. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that at least a part of the displacement member is projected outward in the radial direction of the rotating body member at the second position.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, a part of the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member is formed by the displacement member. The outer shape can be reduced, and the space required for the rotating cylinder member to rotate can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, at least a part of the displacement member is projected outward in the radial direction of the rotating cylinder member, so that the displacement of the displacement member can be easily visually recognized by the player, which has an effect. Can be enhanced. Further, for example, the rotating body member is rotated with the displacement member arranged at the first position, and the displacement member is arranged (displaced) at the second position when the rotation of the rotating body member is stopped. The portion (displacement member) that was visually recognized as the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member can be formed so as to project outward in the radial direction of the rotating cylinder member, and the interest can be enhanced.

The gaming machine E2 includes a light emitting means that emits light, the rotating body member is formed having an internal space, the light emitting means is arranged in the internal space, and the displacement member is the second.
The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that when it is displaced to a position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member is opened and the internal space is communicated with the outside.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, a light emitting means for emitting light is provided.
The rotating body member is formed to have an internal space, and a light emitting means is arranged in the internal space.
When the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member is opened and the internal space is communicated to the outside, so that the light emitted by the light emitting means can be emitted to the outside and the displacement member is second. By being displaced to one position, it is possible to block the emission to the outside. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

The gaming machine E4 is characterized in that any of the gaming machines E1 to E3 includes a driving means for generating a driving force and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving force to the rotating cylinder member and the displacement member. ..

Here, in order to form the rotating cylinder member rotatably and to displace the displacement member on the rotating cylinder member, a driving means is required for each of the rotating cylinder member and the displacement member, which increases the product cost. Bulky. Further, when the driving means for displacing the displacement member is mounted on the rotating cylinder member, the weight of the rotating cylinder member increases, so that it becomes difficult to smoothly start or stop the rotation of the rotating cylinder member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the driving means for generating the driving force and the driving force of the driving means are applied to the rotating body member and the displacement member. Since the transmission means for transmitting is provided, it is possible to rotate the rotating cylinder member and displace the displacement member by also using the driving means of 1. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced. Further, since it is not necessary to mount the driving means for displacing the displacement member on the rotating cylinder member, the weight of the rotating cylinder member can be reduced, and the rotation of the rotating cylinder member can be smoothly started or stopped.

In the game machine E4, the driving means is formed so as to be able to generate a rotational driving force, and the transmitting means includes a rotating side transmitting means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the rotating body member and the driving means. The displacement side transmitting means for transmitting the rotation driving force to the displacement member and the rotation driving force are transmitted to one of the rotation side transmitting means and the displacement side transmitting means according to the rotation direction of the rotation driving force of the driving means. The gaming machine E5 is provided with a one-way clutch mechanism that cuts off transmission to the other side.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of the game machine E4, the drive means is formed so as to be able to generate a rotary drive force, and the transmission means is a rotary side transmission for transmitting the rotary drive force of the drive means to the rotating body member. The means, the displacement side transmitting means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and the rotational driving force to be transmitted to either the rotating side transmitting means or the displacement side transmitting means according to the rotation direction of the rotational driving force of the driving means. Since it is provided with a one-way clutch mechanism that cuts off transmission to the other, it is possible to switch the drive target (rotating body member or displacement member) driven by the rotational driving force only by switching the rotational direction of the driving means. That is, it is possible to switch between the rotation of the rotating cylinder member and the stop of the rotation and the displacement of the displacement member and the stop of the displacement according to the rotation direction of the drive means, and the structure can be formed while forming a plurality of modes. Can be simplified.

In the game machine E5, the rotary side transmission means is a gear train forming a part or all of a transmission path for transmitting the rotary drive force of the drive means to the rotary cylinder member, and a gear of one of the gear trains. A gaming machine E6 characterized by being provided with a load gear to be meshed with each other.

Here, in a structure in which the drive target (rotating body member or displacement member) is switched according to the rotation direction of the drive means by using the one-way clutch mechanism, when the transmission of the drive force from the drive means is cut off, It becomes a state in which it can freely rotate or displace in the direction driven by the driving force. Therefore, for example, when the drive target of the drive means is switched from the rotating body member to the displacement member and the transmission of the driving force is cut off, the rotating body member becomes a rotatable state and continues to rotate due to the inertial force (rotation). There is a risk of being

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E5, the rotary side transmitting means is a gear train forming a part or all of the transmission path for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the rotating cylinder member. And a load gear meshed with one of the gears in the gear train, so even if the transmission of the rotational driving force from the drive means is interrupted, the load (resistance) when rotating the load gear is provided. ) Can be used to prevent the rotating body member from continuing to rotate.

The gaming machine E5 or E6 is characterized by comprising a reverse rotation regulating means for restricting the rotation of the rotating cylinder member in a direction opposite to the direction of rotation by the rotational driving force of the driving means. ..

According to the game machine E7, in addition to the effect of the game machine E5 or E6, the reverse rotation regulating means for restricting the rotation of the rotating body member in the direction opposite to the direction of rotation by the rotational driving force of the driving means is provided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the rotating body member from rotating in the reverse direction due to, for example, an deviation in the position of the center of gravity of the rotating body member or a collision of a game ball.

In the gaming machine E2 or E3, the rotating body member is formed to have an internal space, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member is opened and the internal space is opened. The gaming machine E8, which is characterized in that the is communicated to the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2 or E3, the rotating body member is formed to have an internal space, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member is formed. Is released,
Since the internal space is communicated with the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be made to flow into the internal space of the rotating body member, or the game ball in the internal space of the rotating body member can be made to flow out to the game area. .. Further, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member is closed, so that the inflow and outflow of the game ball between the internal space and the game area can be blocked. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine E8, one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the rotating body member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the other side opposite to the one side is the game. A gaming machine E9 characterized by being overhanging to an area.

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E8, one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the rotating body member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the opposite side to the one side. Since the other side is projected to the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received by the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the flow of the game ball flowing down the game area into the internal space of the rotating body member by using the displacement member.

In the gaming machine E9, the displacement member is tilted downward from the other side toward the one side when the displacement member is displaced to the second position.

According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E9, when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the upper surface thereof is tilted downward from the other side toward one side, so that the gaming area is covered. After the flowed game ball is received by the upper surface of the displacement member, the received game ball can be guided (rolled) to the internal space of the rotating body member along the downward inclination of the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the flow of the game ball flowing down the game area into the internal space of the rotating body member by using the displacement member.

The gaming machine E11 is characterized in that the gaming machine E9 or E10 is provided with a displacement setting means for regulating or allowing the displacement of the displacement member according to the rotation position of the rotating body member.

According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E9 or E10, the overhanging displacement member is provided with a displacement setting means for regulating or allowing the displacement of the displacement member according to the rotation position of the rotating body member. It is possible to suppress interference with other members around the rotating cylinder member.

In any of the game machines E9 to E11, a rotation regulating means for restricting the rotation of the rotating body member is provided, and the rotation regulating member is such that the displacement member is displaced to the second position and the other side of the displacement member is the said. A gaming machine E12 characterized by restricting the rotation of the rotating cylinder member when overhanging to the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E9 to E11, a rotation regulating means for regulating the rotation of the rotating body member is provided, and the displacement member is displaced to the second position in the rotation regulating member. , When the other side of the displacement member is overhanging to the game area, the rotation of the rotating body member is restricted. Therefore, the rotating body member is rotated with the displacement member overhanging and is located on the rotation locus. It is possible to prevent the displacement member from interfering with other members. Further, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the rotating body member due to the load acting when the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

<Concept of the invention using the rotating unit 700 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a rotating body member that is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is visibly arranged by a player, the rotating body member externally forms an internal space formed inside the machine and the internal space thereof. The gaming machine F1 is characterized by having a communication port formed so that the gaming ball can pass therethrough.

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a rotating cylinder member which is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is visibly arranged by a player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-119140). According to this gaming machine, the rotating body member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the display (design) on the outer peripheral surface thereof is visually recognized by the player while rotating the rotating body member or stopping the rotating body member. be able to. However,
The above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the rotation body member is insufficiently utilized because it is only used as a member for holding a display for the player to visually recognize on the outer peripheral surface thereof.
That is, since the rotating body member needs to hold a display that can be visually recognized by the player, it is formed to be relatively large. Therefore, while the space occupied by the rotating cylinder member is large, the portion other than the outer peripheral surface thereof is not utilized.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the rotating body member includes an internal space formed inside the body member and a communication port formed so that the internal space can be communicated to the outside and the game ball can pass therethrough. , The game ball flowing down the game area can flow into or out of the internal space through the communication port. Therefore, the internal space of the rotating body member, which is regarded as a dead space, can function as a storage space or a throwing passage for the game ball, and the rotating body member can be utilized accordingly.

The communication port may be formed at only one place of the rotating cylinder member, or may be formed at two or more places. When the communication port is formed at only one place, the communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member. As a result, the position of the communication port can be moved up and down according to the rotation position of the rotating cylinder member, so that the game ball flows into or out of the internal space through the communication port (the communication port faces upward). At the same time, the game ball can flow into the internal space, and when the communication port faces downward, the game ball in the internal space can flow out).

Further, the rotating cylinder member does not have to have a circular cross-sectional shape cut in a plane perpendicular to its rotation axis, and may have a polygonal shape, an elliptical shape, or a shape in which they are combined. Therefore, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member does not have to be a peripheral surface, but may be a flat surface, a curved surface, or a combination thereof.

The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the communication port includes a first communication port and a second communication port formed at a position different from the first communication port.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, the communication port includes a first communication port and a second communication port formed at a position different from the first communication port. One of the communication port or the second communication port is an inlet for the game ball to flow in from the outside to the internal space, and the other of the first communication port or the second communication port is an outlet for the game ball to flow out from the internal space to the outside. Can be. That is, the rotating body member can be utilized as a throwing passage for a game ball without rotating the rotating body member (while maintaining the stopped state). In the state where the rotating body member is rotated, the rotating body member may be utilized as a throwing passage.

In the gaming machine F2, the first communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member, and is formed as an inflow port for flowing a game ball flowing down the game area into the internal space, and the second communication port is formed. The gaming machine F3 is formed on an end surface of the rotating cylinder member in the direction of the rotation axis, and is formed as an outlet for flowing out a gaming ball from the internal space to the gaming region.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2, the first communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member and is formed as an inflow port for the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area to flow into the internal space. The second communication port is formed on the end surface of the rotating cylinder member in the rotation axis direction, and is formed as an outlet for flowing out the gaming ball from the internal space to the gaming area. The inflow can be easily visually recognized by the player, and the game ball can be discharged while the rotating body member is maintained in the stopped state.

That is, where the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member is arranged so as to be visible to the player, the outer peripheral surface thereof is.
Since the first communication port (inflow port) is formed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the inflow of the game ball. On the other hand, when the second communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member, when the rotating body member is displaced to the rotation position where the communication port is upward, the game ball cannot flow out from the internal space. Since the second communication port (outlet) is formed on the end surface of the rotating cylinder member in the rotation axis direction, it is possible to form a state in which the game ball can flow out from the internal space regardless of the rotation position of the rotating cylinder member.

In any of the game machines F1 to F3, a displacement member displaceable on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member is provided, and when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the communication port is displaced. The gaming machine F4 is shielded by a member, and when the displacement member is displaced to a second position, the communication port is opened.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F3, a displacement member displaceably arranged on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member is provided, and the displacement member is displaced to the first position. Then, the communication port is shielded by the displacement member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the communication port is opened, so that the inflow and outflow of the game ball through the communication port is blocked and allowed. You can switch.

In the gaming machine F4, the communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member, one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the rotating cylinder member, and the displacement member is positioned at the second position. The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that when it is displaced, the other side opposite to the one side is projected to the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E4, one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the rotating body member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the opposite side to the one side. Since the other side is projected to the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received by the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, for example, when the communication port is formed as an inflow port, the game ball flowing down the game area can be easily flowed into the internal space of the rotating body member by using the displacement member.

In the gaming machine F5, the displacement member is characterized in that one side thereof is located on the front side in the rotation direction of the rotating cylinder member with respect to the other side.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F5, since one side of the displacement member is located on the front side in the rotation direction of the rotating body member with respect to the other side, when the rotating body member is rotated. Even if the displacement member interferes with the member arranged around the rotating body member, the force generated by the interference can be applied in the direction of closing (displace to the first position) the displacement member. That is, when the rotating cylinder member rotates, the displacement member interferes with other members and overhangs (displaces to the second position).
Can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from engaging with other members and hindering the rotation of the rotating cylinder member.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the rotating body member is rotatably arranged, and the rotating body member is supported by the base member and is arranged in the internal space of the rotating body member. On the other hand, the gaming machine F7 is provided with a fixing member that is not rotated.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the base member in which the rotating body member is rotatably arranged, and the internal space of the rotating body member while being supported by the base member. Since it is provided with a fixing member that is arranged in the center and is non-rotating with respect to the rotating body member, the gaming ball that has flowed into the internal space is held by the fixing member or rolled on the fixing member toward the outlet. ,
With the rotation of the rotating body member, it is possible to prevent the game ball from rampaging in the internal space or hindering the rolling of the game ball and staying in the internal space.

The gaming machine F8 is characterized in that any one of the gaming machines F4 to F6 is provided with a displacement setting means for regulating or allowing the displacement of the displacement member according to the rotation position of the rotating body member.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F4 to F6, a displacement setting means for regulating or allowing the displacement of the displacement member according to the rotation position of the rotating body member is provided.
It is possible to prevent the displacement member displaced to the position from interfering with other members around the rotating cylinder member.

In the game machine F5 or F6, a rotation regulating means for restricting the rotation of the rotating body member is provided, in which the displacement member is displaced to the second position and the other side of the displacement member moves to the gaming area. A gaming machine F9 characterized by restricting the rotation of the rotating cylinder member when overhanging.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effect of the game machine F5 or F6, a rotation regulating means for restricting the rotation of the rotating body member is provided, and the displacement member is displaced to the second position and the displacement member is displaced. When the other side is overhanging to the game area, the rotation of the rotating body member is restricted. Therefore, the rotating body member is rotated with the displacement member overhanging, and the other member located on the rotation locus thereof. It is possible to prevent the displacement member from interfering with the displacement member. Further, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the rotating body member due to the load acting when the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

In the game machine F3, the light emitting means formed so as to be able to emit light and arranged in the internal space of the rotating cylinder member, and the second communication port formed on the end face in the rotation axis direction of the rotating cylinder member. The gaming machine F10 is provided with an opening formed on the end surface opposite to the end surface to be formed, and an electrical connection line of the light emitting means is wired through the opening.

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effect of the game machine F3, an opening is formed at the end face in the rotation axis direction of the rotating cylinder member and opposite to the end face on which the second communication port is formed. Since the electrical connection line of the light emitting means is wired through the opening, it is possible to easily secure the space that can be used for each of the second communication port and the opening. As a result, the outflow of the game ball can be smoothly performed through the second communication port, and the wiring work to the opening of the electrical connection line can be easily performed. In addition, since the second communication port and the opening can be separated as much as possible, the internal space can be seconded.
It is possible to easily suppress the interference between the game ball that rolls to the communication port and the electrical connection line.

<Concept of the invention using the rotating unit 700 as an example>
From the lining position in which the first member and the second member are displaceably formed and the first member invisiblely covers at least a part of the second member, and the state in which the first member is arranged at the lining position. In a gaming machine formed so as to be displaceable from a retractable position that reduces an area that invisiblely covers the second member, the first member is displaced to the retracted position and the second member is displaced. The gaming machine G1 characterized in that the displacement of the machine is regulateably formed.

Here, a state in which the first member and the second member formed so as to be displaceable are provided, and the first member is arranged at an lining position that invisiblely covers at least a part of the second member and a lining position thereof. There is known a gaming machine formed so as to be displaceable from a retracted position that reduces an area that invisiblely covers the second member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-029849). According to this gaming machine, the first
By arranging the member in the lining position and displacing the first member to the retracted position from the state where the second member is invisible to the player, the second member is exposed and the player can visually recognize the second member. be able to.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the second member is formed so as to be displaceable, the first member is displaced to the retracted position, and when the second member is exposed, the second member is displaced. There is a risk of Therefore, there is a problem that the player cannot visually recognize the second member in an appropriate state, and the effect of the effect is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the first member is in a state of being displaced to the retracted position.
Since the displacement of the second member is regulateably formed, the player can visually recognize the second member in an appropriate state, and the effect of production can be ensured. That is, when the effect of moving the first member to the retracted position and exposing the second member is performed, the displacement of the first member to the retracted position, which must be performed for the effect, is applied to the second member. It is used as a means to regulate displacement. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide or control a mechanism for regulating the displacement of the second member, and the structure can be simplified accordingly.

The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that the second member is rotatably formed and the position of the center of gravity thereof is eccentric from the center of rotation.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1, the second member is rotatably formed and the position of the center of gravity thereof is eccentric from the center of rotation. Can be enhanced. That is, it is not necessary for the second member to have a shape in which the position of the center of gravity thereof is located at the center of rotation, and for example, a shape asymmetrical with respect to the rotation axis can be adopted, so that the effect of the second member can be enhanced. .. On the other hand, if the position of the center of gravity of the second member is eccentric in this way, the second member may rotate (rotate) around the center of rotation due to its own weight. Therefore, it is particularly effective that the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed so that the displacement of the second member can be regulated, whereby the second member can be visually recognized by the player in an appropriate state. It can be done and the production effect can be secured.

In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the second member is provided with a displacement member displaceably arranged.
The gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable at least in a state where the first member is displaced to the retracted position.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1 or G2, a displacement member displaceably arranged in the second member is provided, and at least the first member is displaced to the retracted position. Since it is formed so that it can be displaced in the state, when the effect of displacement the first member to the retracted position and exposing the second member is performed, the effect of the effect is further enhanced by further displacing the displaced member. Can be done. On the other hand, if the displacement member is displaced when the second member is exposed, the position of the center of gravity may move with the displacement, and the second member may rotate (rotate). Therefore, it is particularly effective that the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed so that the displacement of the second member can be regulated, whereby the second member can be visually recognized by the player in an appropriate state. It can be done and the production effect can be secured.

In the gaming machine G3, the outer peripheral surface of the second member is visibly arranged by the player, and one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported on the outer peripheral surface of the second member, and the one side thereof. The gaming machine G4 is characterized in that the other side opposite to the above side is formed so as to be able to project into the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G3, the outer peripheral surface of the second member is arranged so as to be visible to the player, and the displacement member can rotate on one side to the outer peripheral surface of the second member. Axis-supported by
Since the other side opposite to one side is formed so as to be able to project to the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received by the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, for example, when the inflow port of the game ball is formed in the second member, the game ball flowing down the game area can be easily flowed into the inflow port by using the displacement member. .. In this case, if the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area, the second member may be rotated due to the load acting at that time or the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, it is particularly effective that the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed so that the displacement of the second member can be regulated, whereby the displaced member is projected to a predetermined position in the game area. Can be easily maintained.

In the gaming machine G4, the first member is arranged in the gaming area while facing the outer peripheral surface of the second member at the lining position, and outside the area of the gaming area at the retracting position. A gaming machine G5 characterized by being arranged.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G4, the first member is arranged in the gaming area while facing the outer peripheral surface of the second member at the lining position, so that the game flows down the gaming area. It is possible to prevent the sphere from colliding with the second member and causing the second member to rotate. In particular, when the rotation position of the second member is the rotation position at which the displacement member faces the game area side, the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the displacement member, and the displacement member is released (tension). Can be suppressed.

Further, since the first member is arranged outside the area of the game area at the retracted position, it is possible to secure a space for the displaced member to project to the game area due to the displacement of the first member to the retracted position. .. Therefore, the outer peripheral surface of the second member can be brought closer to the game area side (player side) by that amount, and the displacement member can be easily visually recognized by the player.

In the gaming machine G5, the first member is rotatably formed around a rotation axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the second member, and is formed in a plate shape curved along the outer peripheral surface of the second member. A gaming machine G6 characterized by being played.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect of the game machine G5, the first member is rotatably formed around a rotation axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the second member, and the outer peripheral surface of the second member is formed. Since it is formed in a plate shape that curves along the above, the space required for displacement between the lining position and the retracting position can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to secure a space for arranging other members by that amount.
Further, by forming the first member in a curved shape in this way, the game ball flowing down the game area can be formed.
It is possible to suppress the anchoring on the first member arranged at the lining position and allow the flow to flow smoothly.

In any of the gaming machines G3 to G6, the gaming machine G7 is provided with a driving means for generating a driving force and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving force to the second member and the displacement member. ..

Here, in order to form the second member rotatably and to displace the displacement member on the second member, a drive means is required for each of the second member and the displacement member, which increases the product cost. Bulky. Further, when the driving means for displacementing the displacement member is mounted on the second member, the second member is mounted.
Since the weight of the member increases, it becomes difficult to smoothly start or stop the rotation of the second member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G3 to G6, the driving means for generating the driving force and the driving force of the driving means are transferred to the second member and the displacement member. Since the transmission means for transmitting is provided, it is possible to rotate the second member and displace the displacement member by also using the driving means of 1. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced. Further, since it is not necessary to mount the driving means for displacing the displacement member on the second member, the weight of the second member can be reduced, and the rotation of the second member can be smoothly started or stopped.

The gaming machine G7 is characterized by comprising a connecting means for connecting the first member and the displacement member and interlocking the displacement of the displacement member with the displacement of the first member.

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G7, a connecting means for connecting the first member and the displacement member and interlocking the displacement of the first member with the displacement of the displacement member is provided, so that the displacement member is displaced. The driving means for causing the displacement can also be used as the driving means for displacementing the first displacement member.
In this case, when the displacement member and the first member are displaced by the driving forces of different driving means,
When a control failure occurs, the displacement member and the first member may interfere with each other. Since the displacement member and the first member can be mechanically connected and their displacements can be synchronized, the displacement member and the first member can be synchronized. Interference with one member can be reliably suppressed.

<Concept of the invention using the rotating unit 700 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a driving means for generating a driving force, a displacement member displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, the transmitting means is used. , The first member, the second member located closer to the displacement member in the driving force transmission path than the first member, and the engaging member disposed between the first member and the second member. When the first member is displaced in one direction with respect to the second member, the engaging member engages with the first member and the second member, and the driving force is transmitted. The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that, in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member, the second member is displaced in advance of the first member in the one direction.

Here, a gaming machine including a driving means for generating a driving force, a displacement member displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member is known. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-029849). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the transmission state of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is always constant, so that when the driving means is driven at a constant driving speed, the displacement member is also constant. It is displaced at the displacement speed, and it is not possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member. Therefore, there is a problem that the effect of the effect due to the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient.

Although the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed by increasing or decreasing the drive speed of the drive means, the displacement speed in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member is different from the displacement speed in other sections. In order to increase the speed, it is necessary to arrange a sensor device that detects the position of the displacement member and control to increase or decrease the output of the drive means according to the detection result of the sensor device, which leads to an increase in product cost and control cost. .. In addition, the structure and control become complicated, resulting in a decrease in reliability.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, the transmission means includes the first member, the second member located closer to the displacement member in the transmission path of the driving force than the first member, and the first member and the second member thereof. It is provided with an engaging member disposed between the members, and when the first member is displaced in one direction with respect to the second member, the engaging member engages with the first member and the second member. As the driving force is transmitted, the transmission of the driving force is cut off, and in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member, the second member is displaced in advance of the first member in one direction. Therefore, regardless of the driving state of the driving means, the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in the other section. Therefore, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the effect of the effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

Further, according to the gaming machine H1, the second member can be advanced in one direction with respect to the first member regardless of the driving state of the driving means. Therefore, for example, in the entire section of the displacement section of the displacement member, The driving means can be driven at a constant driving speed, and in the middle of the displacement section of the displacement member (that is,
It is not necessary to increase or decrease the drive speed of the drive means (depending on the predetermined section or another section). As a result, control can be simplified, control costs can be reduced, and operational reliability can be improved. Alternatively, the driving of the driving means can be stopped in a predetermined section, and in this case, the energy consumption can be suppressed.

Further, according to the gaming machine H1, in the driving state in which the first member is displaced in the other direction with respect to the two members, the engaging member is disengaged and the transmission of the driving force is cut off. The displacement member can be put into a stopped state (non-driving state), and the driving force of the driving means in such a driving state can be set.
It can be used as a driving force for driving other members. That is, by switching the driving direction of the driving means, the two members, the displacement member and the other member, can be displaced respectively.

The transmitting means is formed so that when the first member is displaced in the other direction with respect to the two members, the engaging member is disengaged and the transmission of the driving force is cut off. It may be something that is done.

In the game machine H1, the displacement member is rotatably formed and its center of gravity is eccentric from the center of rotation. In the predetermined section, the weight of the displacement member causes the second member to move in one direction. The gaming machine H2 characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to act in the direction of displacement.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1, the displacement member is rotatably formed and the position of the center of gravity thereof is eccentric from the center of rotation. Since the two members are operably formed in a direction that displaces them in one direction, the weight of the displaced members can be used to displace the second member in advance of the first member in one direction. .. That is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the effect of the effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

For example, when the displacement member is repeatedly formed to rotate 360 degrees around its rotation axis, the displacement speed (rotational speed) of the displacement member in a predetermined section is the displacement speed (rotational speed) of the displacement member in other sections. A mode in which the rotation speed is faster than the displacement speed (rotational speed), that is, a rotation mode in which the rotation speed is increased or decreased during one rotation can be repeatedly performed.

In the gaming machine H2, the transmission means includes a main body portion that is rotationally driven by the second member, a crank member that is projected from the main body portion and has a pin portion that is eccentrically located from the rotation center of the main body portion. A sliding groove into which a pin portion of the crank member is slidably inserted is formed on one end side, and an arm member whose intermediate portion is rotatably supported is provided, and the other end side of the arm member is displaced. A gaming machine H3 characterized by being connected to a member.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H2, the transmission means is projected from the main body portion rotationally driven by the second member and the main body portion thereof, and is positioned eccentrically from the rotation center of the main body portion. Since a crank member having a pin portion and an arm member in which a sliding groove into which the pin portion of the crank member is slidably inserted is formed on one end side and an intermediate portion is rotatably supported, the arm member is provided. By rotationally driving the crank member by the second member and sliding the pin member along the sliding groove, the other end side of the arm member can be reciprocated. In this case, since the other end side of the arm member is connected to the displacement member, the displacement member can be reciprocated between the first position and the second position in accordance with the reciprocating operation of the other end side of the arm member. .. That is,
The displacement direction of the displacement member can be switched without switching the drive direction of the drive means.

In the gaming machine H3, the displacement member moves with the reciprocating motion of the other end side of the arm member.
In the middle of the reciprocating operation between the first position and the second position and the displacement from the first position to the second position and the displacement from the second position to the first position. The direction in which the weight of the displacement member is applied to the second member is changed from the direction in which the second member is displaced in the other direction to the direction in which the second member is displaced in the one direction. Characteristic gaming machine H4.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H3, the displacement member is reciprocated between the first position and the second position with the reciprocating operation of the other end side of the arm member, and the first position. From the second
The direction in which the weight of the displacement member is applied to the second member in the middle of the displacement to the position and the displacement from the second position to the first position causes the second member to move in the other direction. Since the direction of displacement is changed to the direction of displacement of the second member in one direction, when the displacement member is reciprocated, the displacement member is displaced from the middle of the displacement regardless of which direction the displacement member is displaced. The displacement speed can be increased. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the effect of the effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

For example, the displacement member reciprocates between the overhanging position (first position), which is a position where the displacement member is visibly extended from the player, and the retracting position (second position), which is the overhanging position or retracted position. In the case of operation, when the displacement member is extended from the retracted position to the overhanging position, the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed until the middle, and the displacement speed of the displacement member is increased from the middle to vigorously move the displacement member. It is possible to overhang to the overhanging position, and when retracting the displacement member from the overhanging position to the overhanging position, the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed until the middle, and the displacement speed of the displacement member is increased from the middle. Then, the displacement member can be immediately retracted to the retracted position.

In the gaming machine H1, the displacement member is formed so as to be slidable, and in the predetermined section, the displacement member is tilted downward in the direction of the slide displacement, so that the weight of the displacement member makes the second member. The gaming machine H5 is characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to act in a direction of displacement in one direction.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1, the displacement member is formed so as to be slidable and is tilted downward in a predetermined section in the direction of the slide displacement, whereby the weight of the displacement member is increased. Since the sill is formed so as to be able to act in a direction that displaces the second member in one direction, the weight of the displaced member is used to displace the second member in advance of the first member in one direction. be able to. That is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the effect of the effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

A gaming machine H6, wherein in any of the gaming machines H2 to H5, the displacement member is formed so as to be able to hold the gaming ball at least in the predetermined section.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines H2 to H5, the displacement member is formed so as to be able to hold the game ball at least in a predetermined section, so that the displacement member holds the game ball. In the state, the weight of the displacement member as a whole can be increased by the weight of the game ball, and the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section can be further increased. Further, the weight of the displacement member as a whole is made different depending on whether the game ball is held by the displacement member, when the game ball is not held, or depending on the number of the game balls held. be able to. Thereby, in each case, the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the effect of the effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

In any of the gaming machines H2 to H6, the displacement member includes a receiving portion for receiving the game ball flowing down in the gaming area, and at least in the predetermined section, when the receiving portion receives the gaming ball, the gaming ball is provided. The gaming machine H7 is characterized in that a force applied to the displacement member is operably formed in a direction in which the second member is displaced in one direction.

According to the game machine H7, in any of the game machines H2 to H6, the displacement member includes a receiving portion for receiving the game ball flowing down the game area, and when the receiving portion receives the game ball at least in a predetermined section. Since the force applied to the displacement member from the game ball is formed so as to be able to act in the direction of displacement of the second member in one direction, the kinetic energy of the game ball when the receiving portion receives the game ball. Can be used to increase the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section. In addition, the force applied to the displacement member differs depending on whether the receiving portion receives the game ball, does not receive it, or receives the game ball according to the flow speed (magnitude of kinetic energy) of the game ball. be able to. Thereby, in each case, the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the effect of the effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

The game ball flowing down the game area is not limited to the game ball that moves in the front surface of the game board along the direction of gravity, but also includes the game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity. As a game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity, for example, a game ball that collides with a nail, a tulip, an object, etc. and moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity, or a game ball that rolls a stage and then jumps out of the stage. An example is a game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity.

In the gaming machine H6 or H7, the transmission means includes a gear train forming a part or all of the driving force transmission path, and a load gear meshed with one gear in the gear train. A game machine H8 characterized by.

According to the game machine H8, in addition to the effect of the game machine H6 or H7, the transmission means meshes with a gear train forming a part or all of the transmission path of the driving force and one of the gear trains. Since the load gear is provided, when the game ball is held by the displacement member or the game ball is received by the receiving portion in a predetermined section, the weight or kinetic energy of the game ball is used. The second member is displaced ahead of the first member in one direction (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section is made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in the other section). If the game ball is not held by the displacement member or the game ball is not received by the receiving portion, the load (resistance) when rotating the load gear is used to move the second member to the first member. It is possible to suppress the displacement in advance in one direction (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section is increased).

That is, when the game ball is not held by the displacement member or the receiving portion does not receive the game ball, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section becomes faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections. Only when the game ball is held by the displacement member or the receiving portion receives the game ball, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section is higher than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections. It is possible to easily form the aspect of speeding up.

<Concept of the invention using the back case 300 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a game board, a back member arranged on the back side of the game board, and a fixing member arranged on the back member, the game board is arranged between the game board and the back member facing each other. A displacement member that is provided and can be operated from the outside of the facing space between the game board and the back member, which is on the back side of the game board, is provided, and the fixing member has a protruding portion that engages with the displacement member. The gaming machine I1 is provided, wherein the protruding portion thereof is engaged with the displacement member, and the fixing member is arranged on the back surface member.

Conventionally, a gaming machine including a gaming board, a back member arranged on the back side of the gaming board, and a fixing member arranged on the back side of the backing member has been known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004). -3360
No. 3 publication). According to this gaming machine, the fixing member is fastened to the back member by a screw inserted from the front side of the back member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fixing member from being removed from the back surface side of the game board.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the process of arranging the fixing member on the back surface member is the process of arranging the fixing member on the back surface member, and the process of fastening the fixing member to the back surface member is the operation from the back surface side of the back surface member. And the work from the front side of the back member is the work from the opposite direction. for that,
There is a problem that the number of work steps for arranging the fixing member on the back member increases.

On the other hand, according to the game machine I1, a displacement member which is arranged between the game board and the facing surface of the back surface member and can be operated from the outside of the facing space between the game board and the back surface member on the back surface side of the game board. (Displacement member 310), the fixing member includes a protrusion (engaged portion 322) that engages with the displacement member, the protrusion and the displacement member engage, and the fixing member is arranged on the back surface member. Since it is installed, the fixing member can be arranged on the back case by working in one direction from the back side. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the step of wrapping around to the front side or reversing the back member after working from the back side. As a result, the number of work steps for arranging the fixing member on the back surface member can be reduced.

The gaming machine I1 includes a first member arranged between the gaming board and the back surface member, and the displacement member is arranged on the back surface side of the first member. I2
..

Here, in recent gaming machines, a first member (1st member) arranged between facing each other from the gaming board to the back surface member (
There is a tendency for the size of the accessory device, etc.) to increase. Therefore, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the enlarged first member is arranged in front of the fixing member or at a position close to the fixing member, the fixing member is fastened from the front side of the back member. At that time, the first member becomes an obstacle. Therefore, it has been difficult to fasten the fixing member with a screw inserted from the front side of the back member to dispose the fixing member on the back member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, the first pachinko machine is arranged between the gaming board and the back member.
Since the member is provided and the displacement member is arranged on the back surface side of the first member, the displacement member is arranged between the game board and the back member while the first member is arranged between the game board and the back member. The displacement member can be operated from the outside of the displacement member to engage the displacement member and the fixing member. Therefore, the fixing member can be arranged on the back surface member without being disturbed by the first member arranged between the gaming board and the back surface member.

Further, since the displacement member is arranged between the back surface member and the first member facing each other, the engaging portion between the displacement member and the fixing member can be arranged between the back surface member and the first member facing each other. Therefore, it is possible to suppress access to the engaging portion between the displacement member and the fixing member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being illegally disengaged from the fixing member and the fixing member from being illegally replaced (for example, being replaced with an illegal fixing member).

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the displacement member is slidably displaced on a plane parallel to the facing surface of the back surface member and the gaming board.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1 or I2, the displacement member is slid and displaced on a plane parallel to the facing surface between the back surface member and the gaming board, so that when the displacement member is displaced, the displacement member is displaced. The amount of displacement of the back member and the gaming board in the facing direction can be set to 0. As a result, it is possible to secure a space for arranging the first member between the displacement member and the game board facing each other. resulting in,
The outer shape of the first member in the direction opposite to the back member and the game board can be increased, and the degree of freedom in designing the first member can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the back member is a box including a bottom wall portion facing the gaming board and a side wall portion erected from the edge portion of the bottom wall portion toward the gaming board. An operator is formed in a shape, an opening is formed in either the bottom wall portion or the side wall portion, and the displacement member is inserted through the opening and protrudes from the inside of the back surface member to the outside. A gaming machine I4 characterized by being provided.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the back member is erected on the gaming board side from the bottom wall portion facing the gaming board and the edge portion of the bottom wall portion. The displacement member is formed in a box shape and has an opening formed in either the bottom wall portion or the side wall portion, and the displacement member is inserted through the opening portion from the inside to the outside of the back surface member. Since it is equipped with a protruding operator, the operator can be operated from the outside of the back member (outside the facing space from the game board to the back member).
The displacement member can be displaced. Therefore, even if the first member is disposed inside the back member (between the facing between the game board and the back member), the displacement member can be displaced without being disturbed by the first member. ..

The gaming machine I4 is characterized by comprising an urging means for urging the displacement member in a direction in which the displacement member is disengaged from the fixing member in a state where the displacement member and the fixing member are disengaged. The gaming machine I5.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effect of the game machine I4, when the displacement member and the fixing member are disengaged, the displacement member is urged in the direction of disengaging the fixing member. Since it is equipped with a force means, if the displacement member and the fixing member are forgotten to be engaged, or if the displacement member and the fixing member are incompletely engaged, the displacement member is engaged with the fixing member. It can be displaced in the direction of release. Therefore, the operator can determine whether or not the displacement member and the fixing member are properly engaged at the position where the operator projecting to the outside of the back surface member is arranged. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being forgotten to be engaged with the fixing member.

The urging means includes a form in which a spring, rubber, or the like is arranged between the displacement member and the back surface member to urge the displacement member in the direction of disengagement from the fixing member, or the weight of the displacement member itself. An example is a form in which the displacement member acts in the direction of disengaging the engagement with the fixing member.

The gaming machine I4 or I5 includes an outer frame formed in a frame shape capable of accommodating the gaming board and the back member, and the inner shape of the outer frame is the outer shape of the gaming board and the back member in front view. A gaming machine that is formed substantially in the same shape and in a state in which the displacement member and the fixing member are not engaged, the operator is arranged outside the facing space between the gaming board and the back surface member. I6.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I4 or I5, an outer frame formed in a frame shape capable of accommodating the gaming board and the back member is provided, and the inner shape of the outer frame is the gaming board and the back member. In the state where the displacement member and the fixing member are not engaged, they are formed to be substantially the same as the outer outer shape in the front view of.
Since the operator is placed on the outside of the facing space from the game board to the back member, if the displacement member and the fixing member are not engaged and the game board and the back member are housed in the outer frame, the outer frame is placed. The operator can be brought into contact with the. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game board and the back member from being housed in the outer frame. Therefore, when the fixing member is forgotten to be arranged on the back surface member, or when the displacement member and the fixing member are forgotten to engage with each other, the operator can be made aware of the forgetting (abnormality). As a result, it is possible to prevent the game board from being accommodated in the outer frame in a state where the fixing member is forgotten to be arranged on the back surface member or the displacement member and the fixing member are forgotten to be engaged.

In any of the gaming machines I4 to I6, the gaming machine I7 is provided with a suppressing means for suppressing the operation of the operator in the direction of disengaging the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member. ..

According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines I4 to I6, a suppressing means for suppressing the operation of the operator in the direction of disengaging the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member is provided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being displaced in the direction of disengagement from the fixing member by operating the operator. As a result, the operator can be used to prevent the displacement member from being disengaged from the fixing member.

As a means for suppressing the operation of the operator in the direction of disengaging the displacement member and the fixing member, the operator is pivotally supported in the direction of disengagement. , A form in which the protruding tip of the operator projects on an inclined surface in a direction in which the displacement member and the fixing member are disengaged, and a form in which the actuator is arranged between the displacement member and the fixing member. Etc. are exemplified.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I7, the displacement member includes an elastic piece that can be elastically deformed and an elastic piece.
The fixing member includes a first protrusion projecting from the elastic piece, and the fixing member includes an accommodating portion that opens in the displacement region of the displacement member and is recessed in the displacement direction of the displacement member. The accommodating portion includes a second protrusion that protrudes into the displacement region of the first protrusion, and the second protrusion is the same as the first protrusion because the displacement member is displaced in one direction. It is characterized in that the elastic piece is displaced by abutting and the displacement member is displaced in the other direction, so that the displacement member and the fixing member can be engaged with each other by abutting with the first member. The game machine I8.

According to the game machine I8, in addition to the effects of the game machines I1 to I7, the displacement member includes an elastic piece that can be elastically deformed and a first protrusion projecting from the elastic piece, and the fixing member is a fixing member. The housing portion is provided with a housing portion that is open to the displacement region of the displacement member and is recessed in the displacement direction of the displacement member, and the housing portion is provided with a second protrusion portion that is projected into the displacement region of the first protrusion portion. When the displacement member is displaced in one direction, the two protrusions come into contact with the first protrusion to displace the elastic piece, and when the displacement member is displaced in the other direction, the two protrusions are in contact with the first member. Since the displacement member and the fixing member can be engaged with each other in contact with each other, the second protrusion can allow the displacement member to be displaced in one direction and can regulate the displacement of the displacement member in the other direction. Thereby, it is possible to regulate the displacement of the displacement member in both the engagement direction with the fixing member and the detachment direction.

In the gaming machine I8, the accommodating portion is set to a size capable of accommodating the elastic piece, and when the first protrusion and the second protrusion are engaged with the accommodating portion, the elastic piece is placed in the accommodating portion. The gaming machine I9, characterized in that the machine is accommodated.

According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I8, the accommodating portion is set to a size capable of accommodating the elastic piece, and when the first protrusion and the second protrusion are engaged with each other, the accommodating portion is set to a size that can accommodate the elastic piece. Since the elastic piece is accommodated in the accommodating portion, it is possible to make it difficult to operate the elastic piece from the outside of the accommodating portion in a state where the displacement member and the fixing member are engaged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the elastic piece from being elastically deformed by being operated from the outside of the accommodating portion. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement member and the fixing member from being illegally disengaged. In this case, the fixing member can be removed from the back surface member by cutting the displacement member (base end portion of the accommodating portion) located outside the accommodating portion.

In the gaming machine I9, the displacement member includes a plurality of the elastic pieces that can be accommodated in the accommodating portion, and the accommodating portion is set to a size that can accommodate a plurality of the elastic pieces. Machine I10.

According to the game machine I10, in addition to the effect of the game machine I9, the displacement member is provided with a plurality of elastic pieces that can be accommodated in the accommodating portion, and the accommodating portion is set in a space having a size capable of accommodating a plurality of elastic pieces. Therefore, when the displacement member (the base end portion of the elastic piece) located outside the accommodating portion is cut and the fixing member is removed from the back surface member, the cut displacement member (elastic piece) is placed inside the accommodating portion. The displacement member (elastic piece) that has not been cut in that state can be accommodated inside the accommodating portion. Therefore, since the displacement member (elastic piece) cut inside the accommodating portion can be accommodated and left, the number of the displacement members accommodated in the accommodating portion and the number of cut elastic pieces of the displacement member are compared. Therefore, when the fixing member is illegally removed and changed to an illegal fixing member, the number of the fixing member is different, so that the operator can be notified that the gaming machine has been illegally used.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I10, the first member regulates the displacement of the displacement member in the direction of disengaging the engagement with the fixing member when the displacement member engages with the fixing member. The gaming machine I11, characterized in that it is provided with a regulatory means for performing a displacement.

According to the game machine I11, in addition to the effects of the game machines I1 to I10, when the displacement member engages with the fixing member, the regulation that regulates the displacement of the displacement member in the direction of disengagement from the fixing member. Since the means is provided, it is possible to regulate the displacement of the displacement member when a force acts in the direction of disengaging the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member due to fraud. Therefore, when a force acts in the direction of disengaging the displacement member from engaging with the fixing member due to fraud, it is possible to suppress the concentration of the force on the engaging portion between the displacement member and the fixing member, which is fraudulent. It is possible to prevent the displacement member or the fixing member from being damaged by the force input by.

Further, since the first member is provided with the regulating means, when the fixing member is removed from the back member, it is necessary to remove the fixing member from the back member.
By removing the first member from the back member, the restriction on the displacement of the displacement member by the regulating means can be released. In this case, by removing the first member, the engaging portion between the displacement member and the fixing member can be accessed, so that the work efficiency when removing the fixing member from the back surface member can be improved.

Examples of the regulating means for regulating the displacement of the displacement member include a form in which a protrusion is arranged inside the engaging recess to regulate the elastic deformation of the displacement member, a form in which the protrusion is engaged with the displacement member, and the like.

<Concept of the invention using the general winning opening unit 150 as an example>
A base member having a game area on the front side, and a first decoration forming a decoration on the front surface of the base member.
In a gaming machine including a decorative means and a second decorative means for forming a decoration continuous with the decoration of the first decorative means in the front view, the first decorative means and the second decorative means are in the front-rear direction in the front view. A gaming machine J1 characterized in that it is arranged at a position adjacent to the pachinko machine J1.

Conventionally, a base member having a gaming area on the front side, a first decorative means arranged on the front surface of the base member and a decoration formed on the front surface, and a first decorative means arranged on the front surface of the first decorative means. A gaming machine is known that includes one member and a second decorative means that is arranged in front of the first member and forms a continuous decoration with the decoration of the first decorative means in a front view (for example,). JP 2007
-000195 (Ab.). According to this gaming machine, the design of the base member can be ensured by making the player visually recognize the decorations of the first decorative means and the second decorative means as one decoration.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the second decorative means is arranged in front of the first member, the second decorative means is separated from the first decorative means by the thickness of the first member. It is placed in a distant position. Therefore, the decoration of the first decorative means and the decoration of the second decorative means are visually recognized offset by the thickness of the first member depending on the position (direction of the line of sight) in which the player visually recognizes the base member, and the base. There was a problem that the design of the member was deteriorated.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, the first decorative means and the second decorative means are arranged at positions adjacent to each other in the front-rear direction in the front view, so that the first decorative means and the second decorative means are used. The distance between the front and back can be reduced. As a result, when the first decorative means and the second decorative means are visually recognized from an angle inclined with respect to the front view of the first decorative means or the second decorative means, the decoration of the first decorative means and the decoration of the second decorative means It is possible to prevent the image from being misaligned and visually recognized. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the decoration of the first decorative means and the decoration of the second decorative means as the decoration of 1, and the design of the base member can be improved.

Further, the first decorative means may be any as long as the decoration is formed. For example, a sticker member having the decoration printed on the plate-shaped member is attached to the front surface of the base member, or the decoration is performed on the front surface of the base member. Is to be printed.

When the second decorative means is attached (adhered) to the front of the first decorative means, the operator may attach (adhere) the second decorative means while visually recognizing the decoration of the first decorative means. can. Therefore, the worker can easily attach the second decorative means to the first decorative means at a position where the decoration of the first decorative means and the decoration of the second decorative means are continuous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the worker who attaches the second decorative means to the first decorative means.

In the gaming machine J1, the front member is provided with a front member formed of a light-transmitting material, formed in an outer shape larger than the outer shape in the front view of the second decorative means, and arranged in front of the second decorative means. The member is provided with a recess that is recessed in a shape larger than the outer shape of the second decorative means on the surface facing the second decorative means, and the recessed dimension of the recess is larger than the thickness dimension of the second decorative means. The gaming machine J2, which is characterized by being set to a large value.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1, the outer shape is formed from a light-transmitting material and has a larger outer shape than the outer shape in the front view of the second decorative means, and is arranged in front of the second decorative means. The front member is provided with a recess that is recessed in a shape larger than the outer shape of the second decorative means on the surface facing the second decorative means, and the recessed dimension of the recess is the second decorative means. Since the value is set to be larger than the thickness dimension of the above, the front member can be arranged on the base member with the second decorative means housed in the recess. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the second decorative means from falling off from between the base member and the front member.

Further, since the recessed dimension of the recess is set to a value larger than the thickness dimension of the second decorative means,
It is possible to prevent the formation of a gap between the front member and the first decorative means. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust and dirt from being caught between the front member and the first decorative means, making it difficult to visually recognize the decoration of the first decorative means.

The gaming machine J2 is characterized in that the inner surface of the recess is formed along the outer shape of the second decorative means, and the second decorative means is arranged so as to be adhered to the recessed bottom surface of the recess. Amusement machine J3 to play.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J2, the inner side surface of the recess is formed along the outer shape of the second decorative means, and the second decorative means is adhered to the concave bottom surface of the recess. Because it will be set up
By disposing the second decorative means along the recess of the front member, the second decorative means can be positioned and arranged with respect to the front member. Thereby, when the front member is arranged in front of the first decorative means, it is possible to prevent the second decorative means from being sandwiched between the edge portion of the front member and the facing of the first decorative means. As a result, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the first decorative means and the front member, and dust or dirt is caught between the front member and the first decorative means to visually recognize the decoration of the first decorative means. It can be suppressed that it becomes difficult.

In the gaming machine J3, the front member includes a protrusion that projects from the surface facing the base member toward the base member, and the base member has an opening that opens at a position corresponding to the protrusion. The gaming machine J4 is characterized in that the front member is positioned with respect to the base member by being inserted into the opening.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J3, the front member is provided with a protrusion protruding from the surface facing the base member toward the base member, and the base member is an opening that opens at a position corresponding to the protrusion. Since the front member is positioned with respect to the base member by providing the portion and the protrusion being inserted into the opening, it is possible to prevent the front member from being displaced with respect to the first decorative means. Further, the second decorative means is positioned with respect to the front member by the recess of the front member. Therefore,
By positioning the front member with respect to the first decorative means, it is possible to prevent the first decorative means and the second decorative means from being displaced from each other. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means as one decoration.

In the gaming machine J4, the protrusion is formed on the concave bottom surface of the recess, and the second decorative means is formed with a through hole penetrating at a position corresponding to the protrusion, and the protrusion is inserted into the through hole. A gaming machine J5 characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J4, the protrusion is formed on the concave bottom surface of the recess, and the second decorative means is formed with a through hole penetrating at a position corresponding to the protrusion. Since the protrusion is inserted into the hole, the arrangement of the second decorative means with respect to the front member can be simplified.
That is, if the second decorative means is simply arranged inside the concave portion of the front member, it is necessary to arrange the edge portion of the second decorative means along the concave portion, whereas the protrusion is provided on the second decorative means. By forming the through hole to be inserted, the arrangement of the second decorative means with respect to the front member can be determined only by inserting the protrusion into the through hole. As a result, the arrangement of the second decorative means with respect to the front member can be simplified.

Further, since the protrusion for positioning the front member is inserted into the through hole of the second decorative means with respect to the first decorative means, the second decorative means and the first decorative means are positioned at the same portion (projection). Therefore, the accuracy of positioning between the decorative member and the first decorative means can be improved. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means as one decoration.

In any of the gaming machines J2 to J5, the front member includes an inclined portion that inclines toward the first decorative means side toward the outer edge in front view, and the second portion is on the back side of the inclined portion.
A gaming machine J6 characterized in that an edge portion of a decorative means is arranged.

Here, in order to make it easier for the player to visually recognize both the decoration of the first decorative means and the decoration of the second decorative means as the decoration of 1, it is necessary to suppress the misalignment of the two decorations. However, when the first decorative means and the second decorative means are overlapped in the front-rear direction, the positions of the decorations of both are displaced in the front-rear direction by the thickness of the second decorative means, so that the first decorative means or the first decorative means or the first. 2 There is a problem that when the first decorative means and the second decorative means are visually recognized from an angle inclined with respect to the front view of the decorative means, the front-rear positional deviation may be recognized.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines J2 to J5, the front member is provided with an inclined portion that is inclined toward the first decorative means toward the outer edge in the front view, and is inclined. Since the edge portion of the second decorative means is arranged on the back side of the portion, the misalignment of the decoration due to the difference in the arrangement in the front-rear direction between the second decorative means and the first decorative means is caused by the inclined portion of the front member. The refraction of light can make it difficult for the player to recognize.

More specifically, the light that is reflected by the decoration of the first decorative means or the second decorative means, passes through the inside of the front member, and is emitted from the inclined portion is inclined in the passing direction with respect to the front surface of the base member. When the angle is made smaller than the tilt angle in the direction orthogonal to the tilt plane of the tilted portion with respect to the front surface of the base member, the tilt angle in the light emission direction from the tilted portion with respect to the front surface of the base member is the base. It is made smaller than the tilt angle in the light passing direction with respect to the front surface of the member. Therefore, the connecting portion between the first decorative means and the second decorative means from the direction of the crossing angle smaller than the inclination angle in the direction orthogonal to the inclined surface of the inclined portion with respect to the front surface of the base member. The passing direction of the light visually recognized by the player can be brought closer to the overlapping direction of the first decorative means and the second decorative means. As a result, when the player visually recognizes the first decorative means and the second decorative means, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the front-back positional deviation.

In the gaming machine J6, the second decorative means includes an adhesive surface bonded to the front member and a non-adhesive surface not adhered to the front member, and the inclined portion and the second decorative means are at least. A gaming machine J7 characterized in that the non-adhesive surface is provided at a position facing each other.

Here, when the player visually recognizes the connecting portion of the decoration between the first decorative means and the second decorative means from the direction orthogonal to the inclination of the inclined portion, the front and back of the first decorative means and the second decorative means. There is a risk that the player will recognize the misalignment of the decoration in the direction.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J6, the second decorative means is
It has an adhesive surface that is adhered to the front member and a non-adhesive surface that is not adhered to the front member, and has an inclined portion and a second.
Since the non-adhesive surface is provided at least at a position facing the decorative means, a gap is formed between the second decorative means and the front member (inclined portion) on the non-adhesive surface, and the non-adhesive surface of the front member is passed through. It is possible to totally reflect the light. Thereby, when the player visually recognizes the second decorative means from the direction orthogonal to the inclination of the inclined portion, the player can not visually recognize the decoration of the end portion of the second decorative means. .. As a result, when the player visually recognizes the first decorative means and the second decorative means from the direction orthogonal to the inclination of the inclined portion, the decoration of the second decorative means is made difficult to recognize. , It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the misalignment of the decorations in the front-rear direction between the first decorative means and the second decorative means.

In the gaming machine J6 or J7, the inclined portion is formed in an arc shape in which the outer edge of the cross section in the direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the outer edge of the front member in front view curves convexly toward the outer edge of the front member. The gaming machine is characterized in that the end portion of the second decorative means is arranged on the center side of the front member in a front view rather than a substantially intermediate position of a straight line connecting the ends of the inclined portions. J8.

According to the game machine J8, in addition to the effect of the game machine J6 or J7, the inclined portion has an outer edge of a cross section in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the outer edge of the front member in a front view, and is convex toward the outer edge of the front member. Since the end of the second decorative means is arranged on the center side of the front member in the front view, rather than the substantially intermediate position of the straight line connecting the ends of the inclined portions, which are formed in an arc shape curved in a shape. When the first decorative means and the second decorative means are visually recognized from an angle inclined with respect to the front view of the first decorative means or the second decorative means, the refraction of light due to the curvature of the inclined portion causes the center of the front member. The direction of the light passing through the side can be brought closer to the direction in which the first decorative means and the second decorative means overlap. Further, the second portion is located on the center side of the front member from a substantially intermediate position of a straight line connecting the ends of the inclined portions.
Since the end portion of the decorative means is arranged, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the positional deviation between the first decorative means and the second decorative means in the front-rear direction. As a result, the decoration of the first decorative means and the second
It is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the decoration of the decoration means as the decoration of 1.

In any of the gaming machines J2 to J8, the inner surface of the recess is formed with a second inclined portion that is inclined outward in front view toward the first decorative means side, and the second inclined portion is the base. The gaming machine J9 is characterized in that the inclination angle with respect to the front surface of the member is set to be smaller than the inclination angle of the inclined portion with respect to the front surface of the base member.

According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines J2 to J8, the inner surface of the recess is the first.
A second inclined portion is formed that inclines outward in the front view toward the decorative means side, and the inclination angle of the second inclined portion with respect to the front surface of the base member is set to be smaller than the inclination angle of the inclined portion with respect to the front surface of the base member. Therefore, the position of the decoration (virtual image) of the first decorative means visually recognized through the inclined portion and the second inclined portion is visually recognized without the inclined portion and the second inclined portion. It can be brought closer to the position of (real image). As a result, when the first decorative means is visually recognized through the front member, it is possible to prevent the decoration of the first decorative means from becoming difficult to be visually recognized due to the refraction of light due to the front member.

<Concept of the invention using the special winning device 550 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a gaming board having a gaming area on the front side and a path unit arranged on the gaming board and having a path for guiding the throwing of a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area, the path unit is a path unit. The first path for throwing the game ball to one side in the horizontal direction with respect to the game board in the front view, and the game ball thrown from the first path in the horizontal direction opposite to the guiding direction of the first path. A second path for throwing a ball to the other side and a third path for connecting one side of the first path and the second path are provided, and the third path is on the front side or the back side with respect to the game board. The gaming machine K1 is characterized in that a guiding means for throwing a gaming ball to at least one of the above is provided on at least one inner wall on the front side or the back side of the gaming board.

Conventionally, a gaming machine including a gaming board having a gaming area on the front side and a path unit arranged on the gaming board and having a path for guiding the throwing of a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area has been known. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-131046). According to this gaming machine, a gaming ball that has flowed into a guiding path formed in a path unit is guided (rolled) along the path of the guiding path, thereby making the gaming ball roll (flow). Can be given.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, in order to secure the throwing distance of the gaming ball at a predetermined distance inside the path unit, the first path for throwing the gaming ball to one side with respect to the gaming board and the first path thereof. When a second path for throwing a game ball thrown from one path to the other side of the game board and a third path for connecting one side of the first path and the second path are formed, the first path is formed. Since the speed of the gaming ball rolling around is maximized at the portion communicating with the third path (the downstream end of the first path), the gaming ball is placed on the inner wall of the third path where the direction of throwing is changed. It collides and becomes easy to bounce. Therefore,
There was a risk that the game ball that collided with the inner wall of the third path would return to the first path, or sway (shake) in the throwing direction (horizontal direction in front view) of the first path inside the third path. Therefore, the first
Since the game ball thrown from the path to the third path sways in the third path, the player's line of sight cannot follow the game ball thrown in the third path in a certain direction, and the ball is thrown to the third path. There was a problem that it was difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball.

In this case, by lengthening the path of the third path, the throwing direction of the game ball thrown from the first path is smoothly switched to the rolling direction of the second path, and the game ball passing through the third path. However, since the third path is formed to be long, the size of the entire path unit becomes large by that amount, and it becomes impossible to secure a space for arranging the path unit on the game board.

On the other hand, according to the game machine K1, the path unit has a first path for throwing a game ball to one side in the horizontal direction with respect to the game board in front view, and a game ball thrown from the first path. 1st
The second path, the first path and the second path, which throw the ball to the other side in the horizontal direction opposite to the guiding direction of the route.
A third route connecting one side of the route to each other is provided, and the third route provides a guiding means for throwing a game ball to at least one of the front side and the back side of the game board on the front side of the game board. Alternatively, since it is provided on at least one inner wall on the back side, the game ball passing through the third path can be moved to the front side or the back side (the front-back direction of the game board in the front view). By moving the game ball on the front side or the back side, the game ball that has rolled and accelerated on the first path can be slowed down on the third path, and the game ball that collides with the inner wall of the third path is the third. It is possible to prevent the ball from returning to the first path or swinging (shaking) in the throwing direction (horizontal direction in front view) of the first path in the third path. As a result, the line of sight of the player can follow the game ball thrown from the third path in a certain direction. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball sent to the third path.

In addition, since it is possible to suppress the game ball from swinging (shaking) in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in the front view) with respect to the game board in the front view, the third path connecting the first path and the second path can be suppressed accordingly. It is not necessary to lengthen the path to suppress the swinging of the game ball, and the path of the third path can be shortened. As a result, the path unit can be housed in a predetermined area with respect to the game board, and a space for arranging the path unit with respect to the game board can be secured.

As the guiding means for guiding the game ball, the rolling direction of the game ball is switched due to unevenness, or a displacement member is arranged at the switching portion of the path, and the game ball is guided to the second path by the displacement of the displacement member. The method of doing is exemplified.

In the gaming machine K1, the guiding means is composed of a concave portion recessed in the inner wall of either the front side or the back side and a convex portion protruding in the inner wall of either the front side or the back side. The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the concave portion and the convex portion are formed at positions facing each other.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, the guiding means is a recess recessed in the inner wall of either the front side or the back side and an inner wall of either the front side or the back side. Since the concave portion and the convex portion are formed at positions facing each other, the gaming ball is partially displaced in the middle of the path of the third path to form the gaming ball. The throwing speed of the ball can be slowed down. Therefore, the route of the third route can be shortened. As a result, the route unit can be easily accommodated in a predetermined area with respect to the game board, and a space for arranging the route unit with respect to the game board can be secured.

The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the horizontal separation dimension from the protruding tip of the convex portion to the inner wall of one of the third paths is set to be smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K2, the horizontal separation dimension from the protruding tip of the convex portion to one inner wall of the third path is set to be smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball. , The gaming ball that flows down the third path and is thrown to the guiding means can be easily brought into contact with the convex portion of the guiding means. As a result, the game ball flowing down the first path and being thrown to the third path can be brought into contact with the convex portion, and its rolling speed can be easily slowed down. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has collided with the inner wall of the third path from returning to the first path or swinging in the third path in a direction different from the throwing direction of the third path. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the third path.

In the gaming machine K2 or K3, the convex portion is formed on the inner wall on the front side with respect to the game board, and the concave portion is formed on the inner wall on the back side with respect to the game board. Machine K4.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K2 or K3, a convex portion is formed on the inner wall on the front side with respect to the gaming board, and a concave portion is formed on the inner wall on the back side with respect to the gaming board. Therefore, the plate thickness on the front side of the path unit can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to see the inside of the route unit through the front of the route unit, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to see the game ball thrown inside the route unit. Further, since the concave portion is formed on the inner wall on the front side of the route unit, it is possible to prevent the guiding means from protruding to the front of the route unit. Therefore, the route unit is arranged on the player side accordingly. It is possible to make it easier for the player to see the game ball passing through the path unit.

More specifically, when the recess is formed on the inner surface on the front side, the plate thickness on the front side of the path unit needs to be larger than the recessed depth of the recess. Therefore, as the plate thickness on the front side of the path unit increases, it becomes difficult for the player to see the game ball thrown on the back side thereof. Further, when the concave portion is formed on the inner surface on the front side, it is conceivable to bend the plate on the front side of the path unit along the shape of the concave portion. It is necessary to have a space from the glass plate forming the front surface of the area, and it is necessary to arrange the entire game board on the back side. Therefore, as the distance from the player to the back side, it becomes difficult for the player to see the game ball to which the path unit is thrown.

Further, when the recess is formed on the inner surface on the front side, it is conceivable to open the portion where the recess is formed, but in this case, the rigidity of the path unit is lowered by the amount of the opening.
The route unit is easily damaged. Further, if an opening is formed in front of the path unit, there is a risk that the opening may be passed through and fraudulent.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine K4, since the concave portion is formed on the back surface side of the path unit and the convex portion is formed on the front side of the path unit, it is possible to suppress the thickening of the entire front side of the path unit. The game ball passing through the inside of the path unit can be easily visually recognized, and the path unit is arranged on the front side of the gaming machine by suppressing partial protrusion to the front side of the path unit so that the inside of the path unit can be easily seen. It is possible to make it easier to see the game ball passing through.

In the gaming machine K3 or K4, the convex portion and the concave portion are formed in an arc shape in a cross section in the direction of gravity in a front view, and the axis of the arc is set coaxially.

According to the gaming machine K5, in the gaming machine K3 or K4, the convex portion and the concave portion are formed in an arc shape in a cross section in the direction of gravity, and the axis of the arc is set coaxially. The separation distance can be made constant. As a result, it is possible to prevent the distance between the convex portion and the concave portion from being partially smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and it is possible to prevent the game ball passing through the inside of the path unit from being sandwiched between the convex portion and the inner wall. can.

In the gaming machine K5, the upper end of the recess is formed at a position along an extension of the rolling locus of the center of the gaming ball rolling on the first path in front view.

According to the gaming machine K6, since the upper end of the concave portion is formed at a position along the extension line of the rolling locus of the center of the gaming ball that rolls on the first path in the front view, the game that rolls on the first path. Even when the rolling speed of the ball is high, it is possible to prevent the center of the game ball thrown from the first path to the third path from being thrown above the upper end of the recess. As a result, the game ball thrown from the first path to the third path can be thrown inside the recess.

In any of the gaming machines K2 to K6, the recess is formed at a position separated from both side surfaces in the horizontal direction of the third path in the front view by a position separated from the radial dimension of the gaming ball. ..

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K2 to K6, the recess is formed at a position separated from both sides in the horizontal direction in the front view of the third path from the radial dimension of the gaming ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball flowing down along the inner wall of the recess from colliding with both sides in the horizontal direction in the front view of the path unit and swaying inside the recess. As a result, the game ball thrown along the inside of the recess can be smoothly thrown to the second path.

In any of the gaming machines K3 to K7, the recess is formed so that the cross section of the first path in the front view in the throwing direction is formed in an arc shape centered on the central portion in the horizontal direction of the third path. The game K8 is characterized in that the convex portion has a rectangular cross section in the throwing direction of the first path in front view.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K3 to K7, the concave portion has a cross section in the throwing direction of the first path in the front view recessed in an arcuate cross section, and the convex portion is the front surface. Since the cross section of the first path in the visual direction in the throwing direction is projected in a rectangular shape, the guiding means is
The distance between the concave portion and the convex portion facing each other is narrowed toward both ends in the throwing direction of the first path. Therefore, the game ball thrown inside the recess can be made less likely to swing in the throwing direction of the first path. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball sent to the third path.

In the gaming machine K8, the convex portion is extended so as to be inclined downward to one side in a direction opposite to the throwing direction of the gaming ball of the second path in a front view.

According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K8, the convex portion is extended so as to be inclined downward to one side in the direction opposite to the throwing direction of the gaming ball on the second path in the front view. The game ball that comes into contact with the convex portion when flowing down the three paths can be guided in the inclined direction of the convex portion. As a result, the game ball in contact with the convex portion can be guided along the inner wall of the concave portion on the side away from the second path.
As a result, the game ball flowing from the third path to the second path can be rolled in the throwing direction of the game ball of the second path, and the game ball can be smoothly flowed from the third path to the second path. can.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K9, the first path includes a second guiding means at a portion connected to the third path, and the second guiding means causes the gaming ball to be thrown from the first path. The gaming machine K10 characterized in that it can be guided to the guiding means.

According to the gaming machine K10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K1 to K9, the first path is provided with a second guiding means at the connecting portion with the third path, and the first path is more than the second guiding means. Since the gaming ball thrown from the route can be guided to the guiding means, it is possible to easily send the gaming ball thrown from the first route to the third route to the guiding means of the third route. This makes it possible to smoothly throw the game ball from the first path to the third path. Therefore, since the game ball thrown from the first path can be easily thrown to the guiding means, the inflow of the game ball from the third path to the second path can be smoothed. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of the game ball of the entire path unit.

In the gaming machine K10, the second guiding means is recessed at a position facing the second convex portion and the second convex portion projecting from either the front side or the back side of the first path. The second recess is composed of two recesses, and the second recess is characterized in that the width dimension in the direction orthogonal to the flow direction of the game ball is set large toward the upstream side of the first path in front view. K11.

According to the gaming machine K11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K10, the second guiding means includes a second convex portion projecting from either the front side or the back side of the first path, and the second convex portion thereof. It is composed of a second recess recessed at an opposite position, and the second recess has a large width dimension in a direction orthogonal to the flow direction of the gaming ball toward the upstream side of the first path in front view. Therefore, it is possible to easily accept the game ball sent through the first path into the second recess. This makes it possible to smoothly throw the game ball from the first path to the third path. Therefore, since the game ball thrown from the first path can be easily thrown to the guiding means, the inflow of the game ball from the third path to the second path can be smoothed. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of the game ball of the entire path unit.

In the gaming machine K10 or K11, the second recess is characterized in that the end portion in the downstream direction of the first path is located downstream of the rolling surface of the gaming ball of the first path. ..

According to the gaming machine K12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K10 or K11, the second recess is
Since the downstream end of the first path is located downstream of the rolling surface of the game ball of the first path, the game ball flowing into the third path from the first path along the inner wall of the second recess is , It can flow into the third path on the far side from the first path. As a result, the game ball flowing from the first path to the third path can be easily sent to the inside of the recess, and the inflow of the game ball from the third path to the second path can be facilitated.

<Concept of the invention using the special winning device 550 as an example>
The flow direction changing means in a gaming machine including a game board having a game area on the front side and a flow direction changing means for changing the flow direction of a game ball arranged in front of the game board and flowing down the game area. Is a first member arranged on the front surface of the gaming board, a second member arranged on the front side of the first member at a predetermined interval, and at least one of the first member or the second member. A gaming ball provided with an adjusting means for displacing one of them, and the adjusting means changes the distance between the facing portions of the first member and the second member to flow down between the facing portions of the first member and the second member. The gaming machine L1 characterized in that the flow direction of the machine can be adjusted.

Conventionally, a gaming machine including a gaming board having a gaming area on the front side and a nail to be struck on the front surface of the gaming board has been known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197311). According to this gaming machine, it is possible to adjust the angle of the nails struck on the gaming board (bending the nails) to adjust the flowing direction of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area. However, if the angle of the nail is changed to change the flow direction of the game ball, the angle of the nail is visually recognized by the player, which is disadvantageous to the player (it is difficult for the game ball to flow down into an advantageous flow path). There is a problem that when the player recognizes the angle of the nail), the player does not play with the gaming machine judged to be disadvantageous, and the operating rate of the gaming machine decreases.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, the flow direction changing means is arranged on the front side of the game board and the front side of the first member at a predetermined interval. It is provided with two members and an adjusting means for displacing at least one of the first member or the second member, and the adjusting means changes the distance between the facing surfaces of the first member and the second member to change the distance between the first member and the second member. Since the flow direction of the game ball flowing down between the two members can be adjusted, the flow direction of the game ball can be changed (adjusted) by the distance in the front-rear direction with respect to the front view of the game board. Therefore, it suppresses the player from visually recognizing the flow direction changing means and judging that it is disadvantageous or advantageous, rather than a nail that changes the flow direction of the game ball at a horizontal separation distance with respect to the front view of the game board. can. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the gaming machine L1, the second member is fixed to the gaming board and is fixed to the gaming board by the adjusting means.
The gaming machine L2, characterized in that the position of the first member is displaced.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L1, the second member is fixed to the gaming board, and the position of the first member is displaced by the adjusting means, so that the second member is arranged on the front side. At least a part of the first member arranged on the back surface side can be hidden by the two members, and the position of the first member can be made difficult to see from the player. Therefore, when the position of the first member is displaced, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the displacement of the position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the distance between the first member and the second member facing each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from not playing the game on the gaming machine because the player determines that it is disadvantageous from the distance between the first member and the second member facing each other, so that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the gaming machine L2, the gaming board is provided with a first opening that opens at a position corresponding to the first member, and the first member is a fastening member that inserts the first opening from the back side of the gaming board. The gaming machine L3, characterized in that the first member is arranged on the gaming board by fastening to.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L2, the gaming board is provided with a first opening that opens at a position corresponding to the first member, and the first opening is inserted from the back side of the gaming board. By fastening the fastening member to the first member, the first member is arranged on the gaming board, so that it is not necessary to form the fastening portion for fastening the first member on the front side of the gaming board. The outer shape of the first member in the visual sense can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space for arranging other members in front of the game board.

Further, since the fastening member is fastened from the back side of the game board, it is possible to make it difficult to access the fastening member from the front side of the game board when the flow direction changing means and the game board are assembled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fastening member from being illegally operated and the position of the first member being illegally changed.

In the gaming machine L3, the first member is provided with a protruding portion that protrudes toward the game board and is inserted into the first opening, and the fastening member is fastened to the tip of the protruding portion. 1st
The gaming machine L4, wherein the member is arranged on the gaming board.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L3, the first member is provided with a protruding portion that protrudes toward the game board and is inserted into the first opening, and the fastening member is fastened to the tip of the protruding portion. By doing so, the first member is arranged on the gaming board, so that the fastening portion of the fastening member can be accommodated inside the first opening. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the fastening portion with the fastening member from projecting to the front side of the first member, it is possible to secure a space between the first member and the second member facing each other.

In the gaming machine L4, the first member can be slidably displaced on a plane parallel to the front surface of the gaming board by the adjusting means, and the first opening has the same size as the displacement region of the protruding portion. A gaming machine L5 characterized by being opened in parallel.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L4, the first opening is opened to the same size as the displacement region of the protruding portion, so that the first member is projected when the position of the first member is displaced. The portion can be displaced along the first opening. Therefore, when the position of the first member is displaced, the first
It is possible to prevent the member from being displaced in a direction other than the displacement direction (direction displaced by the adjusting means). As a result, the work when the worker adjusts the position of the first member can be simplified.

In any of the gaming machines L3 to L5, the gaming machine L6 is characterized in that the gaming board includes a second opening that opens at a position different from that of the first opening.

According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L3 to L5, the gaming board is
Since the second opening that opens at a position different from that of the first opening is provided, the fastening member fastened to the back surface side of the game board can be operated via the second opening. As a result, the work process when the operator operates the adjusting means can be simplified.

That is, since the accessory device and the case member for accommodating the accessory device are arranged on the back side of the game board, when the fastening member is operated from the back side of the game board, the accessory device and its Where it is necessary to remove the case member accommodating the accessory device from the game board, the fastening member can be operated from the front side of the game board by the second opening, so that the operator can operate the fastening member on the back side of the game board. Since it is not necessary to remove the arranged accessory device and the case member accommodating the accessory device, the work process of the operator can be simplified.

In the gaming machine L1, the gaming machine L7 is characterized in that the position of the second member with respect to the first member is changed in the front-rear direction in front view by the adjusting means.

According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L1, the position of the second member with respect to the first member is changed in the front-rear direction in the front view, so that the second member with respect to the first member It is possible to suppress the change in the position of the second member in the front view as compared with the case where the position is changed in the left-right or up-down direction in the front view. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from determining that the position of the second member is advantageous or disadvantageous due to the change in the position of the second member in the front view. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines L2 to L7, the second member is formed of a non-light transmitting material, and the outer shape in front view is formed larger than that of the first member, and the first member is said in front view. A gaming machine L8 characterized in that it is covered with a second member.

According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L2 to L7, the second member is formed of a non-light transmitting material, and the outer shape in front view is formed larger than that of the first member.
Since the first member is overlaid on the second member in the front view, the first member is seconded in the front view.
It can be hidden by a member, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the first member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the distance between the first member and the second member facing each other, and it is possible to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L8, the second member is formed of a non-light transmitting material, and at least one of the first member or the second member projects to the other of the first member or the second member. A gaming machine L9 characterized by having a protruding portion.

According to the gaming machine L9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L1 to L8, the second member is formed of a non-light transmitting material, and at least one of the first member or the second member is the first member. Alternatively, since a protruding portion protruding from the other side of the second member is provided, it is possible to bring the game ball thrown between the facing portions of the first member and the second member into contact with the protruding portion to change the throwing direction. can. Therefore, by recognizing the distance between the first member and the second member facing each other, it is possible to suppress the player from determining that the first member is advantageous or disadvantageous. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L9, the adjusting means can adjust the position of the other of the first member or the second member stepwise with respect to one of the first member or the second member. A gaming machine L10 characterized by being provided with means.

According to the gaming machine L10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L1 to L9, the adjusting means positions the other of the first member or the second member with respect to one of the first member or the second member. Since the step adjusting means that can be adjusted stepwise is provided, the operator who changes the position of the first member or the second member can adjust the change of the position step by step. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an error in the adjustment position of the first member or the second member. Therefore, the position adjustment of the first member or the second member can be simplified.

As a means for adjusting the positions of the first member and the second member step by step, the first member or the second member may be provided with a plurality of grooves recessed in one of the first member or the second member. The first is a form in which the position of the first member or the second member is changed by changing the insertion position of the convex portion to be projected, or a plurality of grooves recessed in one of the first member or the game board. An example is a mode in which the position of the first member is changed by changing the insertion position of the convex portion projecting from the other side of the member or the game board.

<Concept of the invention using the special winning device 550 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a gaming area in which a gaming ball flows down and a path unit having a plurality of guidance paths for guiding the throwing of the gaming ball flowing down in the gaming area and arranged in the gaming area.
The path unit has a first guide path formed of a material capable of transmitting light and arranged on the front side of the gaming region, and a second guide path arranged on the back side of the first guide path. The first guide path is provided with a guide path, the first guide path is provided with a first winning opening capable of entering a game ball, and the second guide path is provided with a second winning opening capable of entering a game ball. The gaming machine M1 is characterized in that a gaming ball entering the first winning opening is given a higher gaming value than a gaming ball entering the second winning opening.

Conventionally, a gaming machine in which a path unit having a plurality of guide paths for flowing down a gaming ball is arranged in a gaming area and the gaming ball flowing down inside the unit is visually recognized by the player to improve the interest of the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-131046).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to make the player visually recognize the game ball flowing down the guide path and improve the interest of the player, the handling of each guide path tends to be complicatedly formed. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to determine which of the guide routes the game ball is flowing down. Therefore, when the game value of the game ball flowing down the guide route is different,
It becomes difficult for the player to judge whether the route is advantageous (high game value is given) or disadvantageous (low game value is given), and the player's interest is due to the game ball flowing down the route unit. There was a problem that it could not be sufficiently improved.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, the path unit is formed of a material capable of transmitting light and is arranged on the front side of the gaming area, and the back surface of the first guiding path. A second guide path arranged on the side is provided, the first guide path is provided with a first winning opening capable of entering a game ball, and the second guide path is provided with a game ball. Since a gaming ball having a possible second winning opening and entering the first winning opening is given a higher game value than a gaming ball entering the second winning opening.
It is possible to make it easier for the player to gaze at the game ball flowing down the first guide path. Further, when the game ball is flowed down to the first and second guide paths at the same timing, the second guide path provided with the second winning opening having a low game value is on the back side of the first guide path. Since it is formed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the first guide path provided with the first winning opening having a high game value. As a result, since the game ball to which a high game value is given can be visually recognized by the player, it is possible to easily improve the interest of the player.

The predetermined game value means, for example, a game ball that is paid out to the player as a privilege when the game ball is inserted into the first or second winning opening.

In the game machine M1, the first guide path is a first path for throwing a game ball to one side in the horizontal direction in a front view, and a game ball thrown from the first path is a game ball in the first path. A second path for throwing a game ball to the other side in the horizontal direction opposite to the guide direction of the above, and a connection path for connecting one side of the first path and the second path in the gravity direction, and said connection. The gaming machine M2 is characterized in that the path is formed by being curved in a semi-arc shape toward the back surface side of the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1, the first guide path is a first path for throwing the game ball to one side in the horizontal direction in the front view, and the ball is thrown from the first path. The second path for throwing the game ball to the other side in the horizontal direction opposite to the guiding direction of the game ball in the first path, and one side of the first path and the second path in the direction of gravity. The connecting path is provided with a connecting path to be connected, and the connecting path is formed by being curved in a semi-arc shape toward the back surface side of the gaming area, so that the first path and the second path are directly connected at the shortest distance. It is possible to increase the number of curved portions of the throwing path as compared with the case where the ball is thrown. As a result, the flow speed of the game ball can be gradually reduced at the curved portion, and the game ball can be prevented from colliding with the inner wall of the connecting path and swinging (shaking) in the connecting path. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed from the first path to the second path, so that the player can easily visually recognize the throwing of the game ball from the first path to the second path.

In addition, in order to prevent the game ball from colliding with the inner wall of the connecting path and swinging (shaking),
It is conceivable to increase the internal space of the connecting path in the throwing direction of the first path to prevent the game ball from repeatedly colliding with the inner wall of the connecting path. In this case, the internal space of the connecting path is the first. The connecting path is projected in the horizontal direction in the front view by the amount increased in the throwing direction of one path. Therefore, since the path unit in the front view is enlarged in the horizontal direction, it is difficult to keep the path unit within a predetermined range in the front view.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine M2, since the connecting path is curved in a semicircular shape toward the back surface side, the outer shape of the path unit in front view can be kept within a predetermined range. Therefore,
When the player visually recognizes the game ball flowing down the first guide path, the range visually recognized by the player can be contained within a predetermined range (outer shape of the route unit). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the path unit.

In the gaming machine M2, the path unit is arranged on the other side in the horizontal direction of the gaming area in the front view, and the connecting path is formed on one side in the horizontal direction of the path unit in the front view. Characterized gaming machine M3.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M2, the path unit is arranged on the other side in the horizontal direction of the gaming area in the front view, and the connecting path is one in the horizontal direction of the path unit in the front view. Since it is formed on the side, the connecting path can be formed at a position close to the player located in front of the gaming board. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the connecting path. As a result, even if the game ball is thrown to the back side by the connecting path, it is possible to make it easier for the player to see the game ball passing through the connecting path.

In the gaming machine M2 or M3, the gaming machine M4 is characterized in that the first winning opening is arranged between the first path and the second path in a front view.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M2 or M3, the first winning opening is
Since it is arranged between the first path and the second path in the front view, the first winning opening is formed in the first guide path by utilizing the dead space forming the first path and the second path. can. As a result, it is possible to prevent the outer shape of the path unit from becoming large in front view. resulting in,
The range in which the player can see the route unit can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the path unit.

In any of the gaming machines M2 to the gaming machine M4, the connecting path is a third winning opening capable of entering a game ball into two places of a connecting portion between the first path and the second path, and a third of them. The gaming ball is provided with a displacement member that can be displaced to a position where the winning opening is closed or opened, and the gaming ball entered into the third winning opening is the same as the gaming ball entering the first winning opening. A gaming machine M5 characterized in that a gaming value is given.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines M2 to M4, the connecting path is a third winning opening in which the gaming ball can be inserted into two places of the connecting portion with the first path and the second path. , Those third
The game ball is provided with a displacement member that can be displaced to a position where the winning opening is closed or opened, and the game ball entered into the third winning opening has the same game value as the game ball entering the first winning opening. Is given, so
It is possible to make it easier for the game ball thrown from the first path to the connecting path to enter either of the two third winning openings, and the game ball flowing down the connecting path gives the player a hobby. It can be easy.

That is, between the third winning opening on the upstream side formed in the connecting portion of the connecting path and the first path and the third winning opening on the downstream side formed in the connecting portion of the connecting path and the second path. The third winning opening is closed by the displacement member when the displacement member is repeatedly operated at a predetermined timing at a position where the displacement member closes or opens the third winning opening. At that time, the game ball thrown from the first path to the connecting path is allowed to flow down the connecting path curved to the back side to secure a time until the third winning opening is released, and the third on the downstream side. It can be made to flow into the winning opening. As a result, the game ball sent to the connecting path can be easily flowed into the third winning opening, so that the game ball flowing down the connecting path can easily give the player a hobby.

Further, since the two third winning openings are formed at the upstream and downstream ends of the connecting path (the connecting portion between the first path and the second path), respectively, the third winning opening is entered. It is possible to lengthen the time that the ball can be played. Therefore, it is possible to prolong the time for giving the player a hobby, and it is possible to easily enhance the player's hobby.

A gaming machine M6, wherein in any of the gaming machines M2 to M5, a detection means for detecting the passage of a gaming ball is provided outside the connecting path.

According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines M2 to the gaming machine M5, a detection means for detecting the passage of the gaming ball is provided in the connecting path, so that the gaming ball is clogged in the connecting path. In that case, the detection of the detection means is continued, so that the gaming machine can detect the error. Further, since the detecting means is arranged outside the connecting path, it is possible to suppress the game ball from being caught by the detecting means as compared with the case where the detecting means is arranged in the connecting path, and the game can be suppressed accordingly. It is possible to prevent the sphere from being clogged in the connecting path.

Further, since the detecting means is arranged outside the connecting path in which the rolling of the gaming ball is delayed, it is possible to easily accurately detect the number of gaming balls passing through the connecting path. Therefore, when the number of balls detected by the detecting means is larger than the number of balls winning in the first winning opening or the third winning opening, it is possible to make the gaming machine recognize that the fraud has been performed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the continuation of fraud by notifying that fraud has been performed by a warning sound, abnormal lighting, or the like.

In the gaming machine M6, in the connecting path, the dimension between the facing surfaces of the inner walls in the front view is set to be larger than the diameter of the gaming ball, and the facing of the inner walls of the first path in the direction orthogonal to the throwing direction of the gaming ball. The gaming machine M7 characterized in that it is set smaller than the interdimensional dimension.

According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M6, the connecting path is set so that the opposite dimension of the inner walls in the front view is larger than the diameter of the gaming ball and is orthogonal to the throwing direction of the gaming ball. Since it is set smaller than the opposite dimension of the inner wall of the first path in the direction, when a game ball having a diameter larger than a predetermined size (diameter larger than the specified value) is thrown, the game ball stays in the connecting path. It can be made (clogged). As a result, it is possible to prevent a game ball having a diameter larger than the specified value from flowing down the path unit.

Further, since a detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball is provided in the connecting path, when a game ball having a diameter larger than the specified value stays (clogs) in the connecting path, the detecting means causes the gaming machine. Can detect an error.

In the gaming machine M6 or M7, in the connecting path, an opening is formed on the radially outer side wall of the path that curves in a semicircular shape toward the back surface side so as to open at a predetermined value smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball. A gaming machine M7 characterized by the fact that.

According to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M6 or M7, the connecting path is predetermined to be smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball on the radial outer side wall of the path curved in a semicircular shape toward the back surface side. Since an opening having an opening is formed at the value of, when a gaming ball having a diameter smaller than a predetermined size (diameter smaller than the specified diameter) is thrown, the gaming ball is moved from the opening of the opening to the outside of the connecting path. Can be discharged. As a result, it is possible to prevent a game ball having a diameter smaller than the specified value from flowing down the path unit.

Since the opening is formed on the radial outer side wall of the connecting path, which is the rolling surface of the gaming ball flowing down the connecting path, the opening is formed when the diameter of the gaming ball flowing down the connecting path is smaller than the specified diameter. It is possible to easily eject the game ball.

The gaming machine M8 includes a box-shaped accommodating portion that protrudes from the radial outside of the connecting path and communicates with the opening, and the accommodating portion is set to a size capable of accommodating a gaming ball. ,
The gaming machine M9, characterized in that it is formed in the detection range of the detection means.

According to the gaming machine M9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M8, the accommodating portion is provided with a box-shaped accommodating portion that protrudes from the radial outside of the connecting path and communicates with the opening. Since the ball is formed in a size that can accommodate the ball and is formed in the detection range of the detection means, the game has a diameter (smaller than the specified diameter) of a predetermined size or less discharged from the opening of the opening to the outside of the connecting path. The sphere can be stored inside the containment. Further, since the accommodating portion is formed in the detection range of the detecting means, the gaming ball stored inside the accommodating portion can be detected by the detecting means. As a result, when the gaming ball is stored inside the accommodating portion, the detecting means can cause the gaming machine to detect an error.

In any of the game machines M1 to the game machine M9, the inflow port of the game ball of the first guide path and the inflow port of the game ball of the second guide path are adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction in the front view. A gaming machine M10 characterized in that it is formed in.

According to the gaming machine M10, in addition to the effect of either the gaming machine M1 to the gaming machine M9, the inflow port of the gaming ball in the first guide path and the inflow port of the gaming ball in the second guide path are Since it is formed at positions adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction in the front view, the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board is the first.
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the inflow is to the guide route of the above or the second guide route until just before the inflow. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the game ball that flows down the game area and is sent to the path unit. As a result, it is possible to easily give the player a hobby.

<Concept of the invention using the lower displacement unit 400 as an example>
It includes a base member having a game area on the front side, and a first member having a throwing path arranged on the front side of the base member and formed as a space in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be thrown. In a gaming machine, the first member is disposed on the base member in a state of being urged to the back side with respect to the base member by a fixing means fastened from the back side of the base member. Gaming machine N1 to play.

Conventionally, a base member having a game area on the front side and a first ball path arranged on the front side of the base member and formed as a space in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be thrown.
There is a gaming machine provided with a member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-131046). According to this gaming machine, the first member is provided with an extension portion extending on a plane parallel to the front surface of the base member on the side surface (contact portion with the base member) on the base member side, and the extension portion thereof. By screwing the screw inserted into the opening formed in the base member into the base member, the screw is arranged in close contact with the front surface of the base member.

However, in a conventional gaming machine, in order to dispose the first member in close contact with the front surface of the base member, it is essential to fasten a screw inserted from the front side of the first member to the base member. It is necessary to form an opening in the first member for inserting the. Here, in order to form the opening at a position that does not interfere with the throwing of the game ball, it is necessary to form the opening outside the throwing space of the game ball, and the extension portion where the opening is formed is outside the throwing space. Need to form. Therefore, since the extending portion is formed on the outer edge of the first member, the area that can be used as the throwing path becomes smaller than the outer shape of the first member, and the throwing path of the first member cannot be sufficiently increased. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, the first member is arranged on the base member in a state of being urged to the back side with respect to the base member by the fixing means fastened from the back side of the base member. The first member and the base member can be arranged in close contact with each other due to the urging force acting on the first member on the back surface side. Further, since the first member is arranged on the base member by the fixing means inserted from the back surface side of the base member, a fastening allowance (an opening through which the fixing means is inserted) with the base member is provided on the front side of the first member. There is no need to form an extension) to be formed. Therefore, the entire area can be used as a throwing path with respect to the outer shape of the first member in the front view. As a result, the throwing path of the first member can be increased.

Further, since the fastening portion between the base member and the first member is not exposed on the front side, it is possible to prevent the fastening portion between the base member and the first member from being illegally removed, and the fastening portion is visible to the player. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating.

In the gaming machine N1, a second arranged on the back side of the first member via the base member.
The second member is provided with a member, and the second member is fixed to the first member by the fixing means inserted from the back surface side of the second member to the first member side and fixed to the first member, and the first member is provided. A gaming machine N2, characterized in that it is disposed on the base member with a predetermined gap from the member.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1, a second member is provided on the back side of the first member via a base member, and the second member is on the back side of the second member. The first member is fixed to the first member by a fixing means inserted into the first member side and fixed to the first member, and is arranged on the base member with a predetermined gap from the first member. When fastening the second member to the second member, a force urged on the back surface side can be applied to the first member by the predetermined gap.
Further, since the force urged to the front side can be applied to the second member, the base member can be sandwiched between the first member and the second member. Therefore, the first member and the second member are less likely to be displaced from the base member due to the pinching force between the first member and the second member.
It is not necessary to fasten the member or the second member to the base member, and the fastening of the second member can be simplified accordingly.

The predetermined gap between the first member and the second member is set to a value larger than 0 and smaller than the width dimension in the front-rear direction of the base member in the front view. As a result, when the first member and the second member are fastened, a force that attracts each other can be applied to both the first member and the second member by the gap.

In the gaming machine N1 or N2, the base member includes a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the first member is a protrusion protruding inward of the first opening. The gaming machine N3 is characterized in that the first member is arranged on the base member by fastening the fixing means to the tip of the protruding portion thereof.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1 or N2, the base member is the first.
A first opening is provided at a position facing the member, and the first member is provided with a protrusion protruding inward of the first opening, and a fixing means is fastened to the tip of the protrusion. Since the first member is arranged on the base member, the fastening portion of the fixing means can be arranged inside the first opening. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fastening portion of the fixing means from being arranged on the front side of the base member, and it is possible to prevent the fastening portion of the fixing means from being formed in the throwing space of the first member. As a result, the first
It is possible to secure the size of the throwing space of the member.

Further, since the fastening allowance (insertion depth) of the fixing means can be secured by the protruding portion, it is possible to prevent the fixing means from being fastened from the first member. As a result, it is possible to easily increase the urging force on the back surface side acting on the first member.

In the gaming machine N1, a second arranged on the back side of the first member via the base member.
A first opening including a member and a third member arranged between the first member and the second member facing each other, and the base member is formed at a position facing the first member. The third member is provided with a portion, and the front-rear dimension in the front view is set to be smaller than the front-rear dimension in the front view of the base member, and the third member is arranged inside the first opening. The members are arranged in close contact with the front side of the third member, and the second member has a predetermined gap with the third member by the fixing means inserted from the back surface side of the base member. A gaming machine N4 characterized in that it is fastened to the back surface side of the third member in a state.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1, the second member arranged on the back surface side of the first member via the base member is arranged between the first member and the second member facing each other. A third member to be provided, and the base member includes a first opening formed at a position facing the first member.
The front-rear dimension of the third member is set to be smaller than the front-rear dimension of the base member in the front view, and the third member is arranged inside the first opening, and the first member is the front surface of the third member. The second member is arranged in close contact with the side, and the second member is fastened to the back side of the third member with a predetermined gap from the third member by a fixing means inserted from the back side of the base member. , The urging force to the back surface side can be applied to the first member via the third member. Therefore, the urging force on the back surface side that acts when the second member and the third member are fastened by the fixing means can also be applied to the third member. As a result, the urging force acting on the contact portion of the first member with the base member can be reduced, and damage to the first member can be suppressed.

Further, by bringing the third member into close contact with the back surface side of the first member, the rigidity of the entire first member can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the entire first member from being elastically deformed by the urging force acting on the first member toward the back surface, and the throwing path of the game ball formed on the first member from being deformed. As a result, the game ball of the first member can be stably thrown.

In the gaming machine N4, the third member is a part of a frame-shaped member arranged on the front side of the base member along the second opening formed in the base member. Pachinko machine N5.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N4, the third member is a part of the frame-shaped member arranged on the front side of the base member along the second opening opened in the base member. Because it is
The urging force acting on the third member can be used as the urging force to urge the frame-shaped member to the back side. Therefore,
The frame-shaped member can be easily arranged in a state of being in close contact with the base member.

Further, the urging force acting on the back surface side when the second member and the third member are fastened by the fixing means is applied.
Since it can act on the contact surface between the frame-shaped member and the base member, the force acting on the contact portion of the first member with the base member can be reduced, and damage to the first member can be suppressed. can.

In the gaming machine N4 or N5, the first member is a displacement member that can displace the throwing space of the game ball of the first member, and a drive that is arranged on the back surface side of the first member to drive the displacement member. The third member includes a means, and the third member includes a third opening that is opened to a size that allows the driving means to be inserted, and the driving means is inserted inside the third opening. A gaming machine characterized in that it is arranged on the back side of one member.

According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N4 or N5, the first member is arranged on the back side of the first member and a displacement member that can displace the throwing space of the gaming ball of the first member. The third member is provided with a third opening that is opened to a size that allows the driving means to be inserted, and the driving means is inserted inside the third opening. Since it is arranged on the back surface side of the first member in this state, the driving means can be covered with the third member. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized objects such as wires and piano wires inserted from the outside of the gaming machine from being accessed by the driving means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being fraudulent.

In the gaming machine N6, the second member is projected toward the first member, and the gaming ball that communicates with the throwing space of the first member and is thrown into the throwing space of the first member is used as the second member. The gaming machine N7 is provided with a communicating portion capable of throwing balls, and the communicating portion is arranged outside the third opening.

According to the gaming machine N7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N6, the second member is projected toward the first member side, communicates with the throwing space of the first member, and is thrown into the throwing space of the first member. Since the communication portion capable of sending the ball to the second member is provided and the communication portion is arranged outside the third opening, the third member can be arranged between the communication portion and the driving means. can. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the magnetic force generated by driving the driving means to act on the communicating portion. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball sent to the communicating portion from slowing down in passing through the communicating portion or stopping at the communicating portion due to the influence of the magnetic force of the driving means, and the first member to the second member can be prevented from stopping. It is possible to stabilize the throwing of the game ball to the member.

In the gaming machine N1, the base member includes a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the first member projects from at least two positions on the back surface side of the first member. The protrusion is provided with a first piece that protrudes from the back surface of the first member and inserts the first opening, and is bent at the end of the first piece to the outside of the first opening. The second piece is provided with a second piece extending toward the surface and a raised portion on the front side of the second piece that overlaps with the base member in the front view, and the first piece is in the front view of the base member. The protrusion dimension is set to a value larger than the width dimension in the front-rear direction, and the dimension between the raised portion and the back surface of the first member is the same as or the width dimension in the front-rear direction in the front view of the base member. It is set small, and the bent tip of the second piece is fastened to the base member by the fixing means.
The gaming machine N8, wherein the first member is arranged in a state of being urged to the back side with respect to the base member.

According to the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1, the base member includes a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the first member is the back surface of the first member. A first piece that protrudes from at least two points on the side and protrudes from the back surface of the first member to insert the first opening, and a first piece that is bent at the end of the first piece and first. It includes a second piece extending outward of the opening and a raised portion on the front side of the second piece that overlaps the base member in front view, and the first piece is in front view of the base member. The protrusion dimension is set to a value larger than the width dimension in the front-rear direction, and the dimension between the raised portion and the back surface of the first member is set to be the same as or smaller than the width dimension in the front-rear direction in the front view of the base member. , The bent tip of the second piece is fastened to the base member by the fixing means, so that the first member is arranged in a state of being urged to the back surface side with respect to the base member, so that the back surface of the first member is arranged. It is not necessary to provide a portion for fastening the fixing means (for example, a screw) on the side, and it is possible to secure a throwing space for the game ball formed on the first member. As a result, since the throwing space can be increased, it is possible to change the throwing direction of the game ball thrown to the first member and make the throwing interesting.

Further, since the screwed portion of the fixing means can be used as the base member, it is possible to prevent the throwing space of the first member from being elastically deformed by the urging force acting on the screwed portion of the fixing means. resulting in,
It is possible to prevent the first member from being elastically deformed and slowing down the speed of the game ball thrown from the throwing path of the first member.

In the gaming machine N8, the base member includes a second opening formed with an opening in the front-rear direction in a front view, and a frame-shaped member arranged on the front side of the base member along the second opening. The gaming machine N9 is characterized in that the first opening and the second opening communicate with each other.

According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N8, the base member has a second opening formed in the front-rear direction in the front view and the front side of the base member along the second opening. Since the frame-shaped member to be disposed is provided and the first opening and the second opening communicate with each other, the projecting portion is arranged inside the first opening by utilizing the opening of the second opening. Can be set up. Therefore, the work of arranging the first unit on the base member can be simplified, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

<Concept of the invention using the lower displacement unit 400 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a base member, a displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member, and a driven member connected to the displacement member and driven to the displacement of the displacement member, the driven direction of the driven member. The displacement member is displaced between the first position and the second position, and the displacement member is displaced between the first position and the second position, and the position is intermediate between the first position and the second position. The driven member has a first displacement region that displaces the third position of the above, and a second displacement region that displaces the second position from the third position, and the driven member has the displacement member from the first position. By being displaced to the second position, the first driven position is driven to the second driven position, and the third driven position, which is an intermediate position between the first driven position and the second driven position, is displaced from the first driven position. It has a first driven region and a second driven region that displaces the second driven position from the third driven position, and at least a part of the second displacement region and the first driven region is the same. The gaming machine O1 is set in a region, and when the displacement member is displaced in the second displacement region, the restricting means regulates the swing of the displacement member in a direction other than the displacement direction.

Conventionally, a base member, a displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member, and a driven member connected to the displacement member and driven by the displacement of the displacement member are provided, and the displacement member is driven by the displacement of the displacement member. A gaming machine that displaces a member is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-02984).
No. 9). However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to regulate the displacement of the displacement member and the driven member and the swing other than the driven direction, if a regulating means for regulating the swing of both the displacement member and the driven member is formed, the regulating means is provided. It is necessary to form it in two places, which causes a problem that the shape becomes complicated and the manufacturing cost increases.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine O1, the displacement member is provided with a regulating means for restricting the swing of the driven member in a direction other than the driven direction, and the displacement member is displaced between the first position and the second position. The driven member has a first displacement region that displaces the third position between the first position and the intermediate position between the first position and the second position, and a second displacement region that displaces the second position from the third position. When the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, it is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, and from the first driven position to the intermediate position between the first driven position and the second driven position. It has a first driven area that displaces the third driven position and a second driven area that displaces the second driven position from the third driven position, and at least a part of the second displacement area and the first driven area is Since it is set in the same region and the displacement member is displaced in the second displacement region, the restricting means regulates the swing of the displacement member in a direction other than the displacement direction.
The same part of the regulating means can be used to regulate the swing of the driven member and the displacement member. Therefore, since it is sufficient to form the regulating means at one place, the shape can be simplified and the manufacturing cost can be suppressed accordingly.

Further, since the swing of the driven member and the displacement member can be regulated by using the same portion of the regulating means, it is not necessary to form the driven member, the displacement member and the regulating portion of one regulating means, respectively. The regulatory means can be reduced accordingly.

In the gaming machine O1, the regulating means is configured as a wall portion projecting from the base member to the driven member side, and the driven member is positioned so as to overlap at least a part of the base member in a front view. It is characterized in that it can be slidably displaced on a plane parallel to the member, and the region overlapping with the base member in front view is gradually reduced as the driven position moves from the first driven position to the second driven position. Game machine O2.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O1, the regulating means is configured as a wall portion projecting from the base member to the driven member side, and the driven member is at least one of the base members in a front view. It is possible to slide and displace on a plane parallel to the base member at the position where it overlaps with the part.
As the driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, the area overlapping the base member in the front view is gradually reduced. Therefore, in the second driven position, the driven member projects to the outside of the base member in the front view. The area is made larger than the first driven position. Therefore, it is difficult to regulate the swing of the driven member by the regulating means arranged on the base member because the driven member projects to the outside of the base member. Therefore, the driven member is more likely to swing toward the base member side as it is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position. However, by regulating the swing of the displacement member connected to the driven member, the regulation means is used. It is possible to increase the number of restricted points to prevent the driven member from swinging. As a result, it is possible to suppress swinging when the driven member is arranged in the second driven region.

In the gaming machine O2, the driven member is formed in a rectangular shape having a long side when viewed from the front.
It has a rotatable axis on one side in the longitudinal direction and is rotatably arranged on the base member. At the first driven position, the longitudinal direction of the driven member is substantially parallel to the horizontal direction. When the driven member is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, the driven member rotates about the rotation axis, and the driven member rotates about the rotation axis.
The gaming machine O3 is characterized in that the other side of the driven member is arranged on the upper side in the direction of gravity with respect to the rotation axis.

According to the game machine O3, in addition to the effect of the game machine O2, the driven member is formed in a rectangular shape having a long side in the front view, has a rotatable axis on one side in the longitudinal direction, and is used as a base member. It is rotatably arranged, and in the first driven position, the longitudinal direction of the driven member is substantially parallel to the horizontal direction.
When the driven member is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, the driven member rotates about the rotation axis, and the other side of the driven member is arranged on the upper side in the gravity direction with respect to the rotation axis. When it is driven from the 1 driven position to the 2nd driven position, it rotates and the longitudinal side stands up. Therefore, as the driven member stands up, the load of the driven member tends to act toward the rotation axis, and the load acts on the driven member in the swinging direction of the driven member, so that the driven member tends to swing.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by restricting the swing of the displacement member connected to the driven member, it is possible to increase the number of regulated points by the regulating means and make it difficult for the driven member to swing. As a result, it is possible to suppress swinging when the driven member is arranged in the second driven region.

Further, when the driven member is driven in the first driven region where a force for lifting the other end side of the driven member is required, the regulation of the displacement member is released from the first position to the third position (first displacement region). However, since the regulation of the displacement member is released by the regulating means in the first displacement region, it is possible to prevent the operation of the displacement member from being delayed by the regulating means. Therefore,
When the displacement force of the driven member is required, the displacement force of the driven member can be secured.

In the gaming machine O2 or O3, the driven member includes a protruding portion that is projected at a position facing the wall portion, and the tip of the protruding portion is brought into contact with the wall portion to displace the driven member. Is restricted, the displacement member is set so that the space between the driven member and the wall portion facing each other can be displaced in the second displacement region, and the displacement member is set in the facing direction between the driven member and the wall portion. The gaming machine O3, characterized in that at least a part of the above overlaps with the driven member.

According to the game machine O3, in addition to the effect of the game machine O2, the driven member is provided with a projecting portion projecting at a position facing the wall portion, and the tip of the projecting portion is brought into contact with the wall portion. The displacement of the driven member is regulated, the displacement member is set so that the space between the driven member and the wall portion facing each other can be displaced in the displacement region at the end, and at least the displacement member is set in the facing direction between the driven member and the wall portion. Since a part of the displacement member overlaps with the driven member, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from tilting to the side opposite to the wall portion. As a result, the displacement of the displacement member in both axial directions can be regulated by the driven member and the wall portion, and swinging can be suppressed when the displacement member is displaced.

In the gaming machine O4, the gaming machine O5 is characterized in that the side surface of the displacement member is in contact with the projecting portion of the driven member at the second driven position.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O4, the side surface of the displacement member is in contact with the projecting portion of the driven member at the second driven position, so that the displacement member is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position. When displaced to a position, the outer edge can be brought into contact with the projecting portion of the displacement member to stop. Therefore, it is possible to make the protruding portion abut on the wall portion to regulate the displacement of the driven member and to assist the stopping operation of the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to secure a displaceable space for the displacement member and the driven member.

In the gaming machine O5, when one end of the driven member is pivotally supported by the base member and the displacement member is arranged at the second driven position, the displacement direction of the connecting portion of the driven member with the displacement member. Is set in the direction toward the axis of the displacement member, the gaming machine O6.
..

According to the game machine O6, in addition to the effect of the game machine O5, when one end of the driven member is pivotally supported by the base member and the displacement member is arranged at the second driven position, the driven member is connected to the displacement member. Since the displacement direction of the portion is set toward the axial center of the displacement member, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being displaced by the load of the driven member when the load of the driven member acts on the displaced member. That is, when the displacement member is arranged at the second driven position, the relationship between the driven member and the displacement member can be set to the dead center relationship, so that the displacement of the displacement member can be suppressed. As a result, the second
It is possible to prevent the displacement member from being displaced by an external force other than the driving means at the driven position.

In the gaming machine O5, when one end of the driven member is pivotally supported by the base portion and the displacement member is arranged at the second driven position, the displacement direction of the connecting portion of the driven member with the displacement member The gaming machine O7 is characterized in that the combined direction of the direction in which the reaction force due to the contact between the projecting portion and the displacement member acts is set to the direction toward the axial center of the displacement member.

According to the game machine O7, in addition to the effect of the game machine O5, the driven member is in contact with the displacement member of the driven member when one end is pivotally supported by the base member and the displacement member is arranged at the second driven position. Since the combined direction of the displacement direction of the connecting portion and the direction in which the reaction force due to the contact between the projecting portion and the displacement member acts is set toward the axial center of the displacement member, the load of the driven member is set. When acting on the displacement member, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being displaced by the load of the driven member. That is, when the displacement member is arranged at the second driven position, the direction of the force acting on the displacement member from the driven member is directed toward the axis of the displacement member, so that the displacement member rotates about the shaft support portion. It is possible to suppress the generation of force. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being displaced by an external force other than the driving means at the second driven position.

In the gaming machines O1 to O7, the projecting portion is arranged with a predetermined gap from the wall portion, and the displacement member abuts on the wall portion to abut the wall portion. Machine O8.

Here, if the projecting portion and the wall portion of the driven member are constantly in contact with each other, there is a risk that it becomes a resistance when the displacement member is displaced by the driving means, and it becomes difficult to stably displace the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine O8, the projecting portion is arranged with a predetermined gap from the wall portion, and when the displacement member comes into contact with the wall portion, the displacement member comes into contact with the wall portion, so that the displacement member is in the second driven position. When displaced, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from swinging and to prevent the protrusion and the bulging portion from becoming resistance during the displacement.

<Concept of the invention using the lower displacement member 440 as an example>
In front view, at least a part of the decorative member is formed of a light-transmitting material capable of transmitting light on the back side, and the decorative member is arranged on the back side of the decorative member in a displaceable state on a plane parallel to the front side.
In a gaming machine including a receiving portion capable of receiving and holding a game ball, the light emitting means provided on the back surface side of the decorative member and capable of emitting light toward a displacement region of the receiving portion is provided. The means is arranged on the back surface side of the receiving portion or between the decorative member and the receiving portion, and the light emitted from the light emitting means by the gaming ball received by the receiving portion or the receiving portion is emitted. A gaming machine P1 characterized in that the amount of light emitted from the decorative member is partially different by blocking or reflecting.

Conventionally, a decorative member formed of a light-transmitting material capable of transmitting at least a part of light on the back side in front view and a displaceable state on a plane parallel to the front side on the back side of the decorative member. A gaming machine provided with a receiving portion capable of receiving and holding a gaming ball is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-166997). According to this gaming machine, by receiving and holding the game ball in the receiving section and then moving the receiving section, it is possible to perform an effect of moving the game ball with the movement of the receiving section.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the receiving portion is arranged on the back side of the decorative member, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the positions of the receiving portion and the gaming ball received by the receiving portion. Therefore, when the receiving part moves after the game ball is received (held) by the receiving part,
It is difficult for the player to grasp in which direction the receiving section and the gaming ball accepted (held) by the receiving section have moved, and it is difficult for the player to grasp the position of the gaming ball accepted by the receiving section. There was a problem.

On the other hand, the gaming machine P1 is provided with light emitting means which is arranged on the back side of the decorative member and can emit light toward the displacement region of the receiving portion, and the light emitting means is on the back side of the receiving portion or decoration. A game ball disposed between the member and the receiving portion and received by the receiving portion or the receiving portion blocks or reflects the light emitted from the light emitting means, and determines the amount of light emitted from the decorative member. The amount of light emitted from the decorative member located on the front side of the receiving portion or the game ball received by the receiving portion and the amount of light emitted from the decorative member at other positions are different from each other. By making them different, it is possible to make the player recognize that the receiving portion or the game ball accepted by the receiving portion is located on the back side of the portion having a different amount of light.

More specifically, when the light emitting means is arranged on the back side of the receiving part, the light emitted from the light emitting means is blocked by the receiving part or the game ball received by the receiving part, so that the receiving part or the receiving part is blocked. The amount of light emitted from the decorative member on the front side of the game ball received in can be made darker than the other parts of the decorative member. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the decorative member is small (
It is possible to make the player recognize that the receiving portion or the gaming ball received by the receiving portion is located on the back side of the (dark) portion.

On the other hand, when the light emitting means is arranged between the decorative member and the receiving part, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the receiving part or the game ball received by the receiving part, so that the receiving part or the receiving part or the receiving part or the receiving part or the receiving part or the receiving part or the receiving part or the receiving part. The amount of light emitted from the decorative member on the front side of the game ball received by the receiving portion can be made brighter than the other parts of the decorative member. As a result, a large amount of light is emitted from the decorative member (
It is possible to make the player recognize that the receiving portion or the gaming ball received by the receiving portion is located on the back side of the (bright) portion.

In the gaming machine P1, the receiving portion is formed below the center of the gaming ball held by the receiving portion in the direction of gravity, and the light emitting means is substantially the same as the center of the gaming ball held by the receiving portion. The gaming machine P2 is characterized in that a light emitting portion is arranged at the height of the above, and a light transmitting portion of the decorative member is formed at a position higher than the light emitting portion of the light emitting means.

Here, in the structure in which the light emitted from the light emitting means is transmitted through the decorative member and the light is reflected or blocked by the game ball received by the receiving portion or the receiving portion, the light emitted from the light emitting means is the game ball. Not only that, but also the receiving portion is irradiated, so that the light is easily reflected or blocked by the receiving portion. Therefore, the light and darkness formed by the difference in the amount of light emitted from the decorative member is affected by the receiving portion, so that the shape of the light and darkness is different from the outer shape of the game ball, and the amount of light is given to the player. There was a risk that it would be difficult to recognize that the game ball was placed on the back side of the different parts of the.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P1, the receiving portion is formed below the center of the gaming ball held by the receiving portion in the direction of gravity, and the light emitting means is provided in the receiving portion. The light emitting part is arranged at substantially the same height as the center of the held game ball, and the light transmitting part of the decorative member is
Since it is formed at a position higher than the light emitting portion of the light emitting means, the light and shade formed by being emitted from the light emitting means and blocked or reflected by the receiving portion is transmitted through the light transmitting portion of the decorative member. It is possible to suppress the formation on the front side of the decorative member. As a result, the shape of the light and shade formed by passing through the light transmitting portion of the decorative member can be made closer to the outer shape (circular shape) of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the game ball is arranged in the portion where the amount of light is different.

A gaming machine P3, wherein in the gaming machine P1 or P2, the receiving portion is formed of a light-transmitting material.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P1 or P2, since the receiving portion is formed of a light transmitting material, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected or blocked by the receiving portion. Can be suppressed. As a result, when the game ball is not received in the receiving portion, it is possible to suppress the formation of a portion having a different amount of light in the light transmitting portion of the decorative member. Therefore, when the game ball is not accepted by the receiving unit, the positioning operation and the returning operation of the receiving unit can be performed without being noticed by the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from gazing at the decorative member in the positioning operation or the returning operation of the receiving portion, and to make the player gaze only at the displacement operation of the receiving portion when he / she wants to gaze.

In the game machine P2 or P3, a connecting member formed of a non-light transmitting material and connected to one side in the displacement direction of the receiving portion is provided, and the light emitting means is provided on the back side of the displacement region of the receiving portion. The connecting member is arranged so that the dimension in the displacement direction of the receiving portion is set larger than the displacement distance of the receiving portion, and the connecting member is arranged on the back surface side of the light transmitting portion of the decorative member, and the displacement of the receiving portion is set. A gaming machine P4, characterized in that the light emitting means and the decorative member face each other with each other, and the light emitting means is projected or retracted.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P2 or P3, a connecting member formed of a non-light transmitting material and connected to one side in the displacement direction of the receiving portion is provided, and the light emitting means receives. The connecting member is arranged on the back side of the displacement region of the portion, the dimension of the connecting member in the displacement direction of the receiving portion is set larger than the displacement distance of the receiving portion, and the connecting member is arranged on the back side of the light transmitting portion of the decorative member. With the displacement of, the light emitting means and the decorative member are projected from each other or retracted, so that the area of light emitted from the decorative member can be changed with the displacement of the receiving portion. That is, the light emitted from the light emitting means to the decorative member can be blocked by the connecting member, and the area for blocking the light can be changed according to the displacement of the receiving portion. As a result, the receiving portion and the connecting member are overhanging and displaced between the light emitting means and the decorative member, so that the emission area of the light emitted from the decorative member can be reduced. As a result, the light emitting surface of the decorative member is reduced, so that the player can easily recognize the portion where the amount of light emitted from the decorative member is small by the receiving portion or the game ball received by the receiving portion.

In the gaming machine P4, the gaming machine P5 is characterized in that the connecting member is a part of a driving means for driving the receiving portion.

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P4, since the connecting member is a part of the driving means for driving the receiving portion, it has a role of transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the receiving portion and a light emitting means. The connecting member can also have the role of blocking the light emitted from the slingshot. As a result, it is possible to secure a space for arranging the drive means for driving the receiving portion.

In the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is arranged on the back surface side of the displacement region of the receiving portion, and the receiving portion includes a displacement member displaceable from the game ball accepted by the receiving portion, and the displacement The member is made of a non-light transmissive material and is displaceable at a position where it protrudes or retracts between the light emitting means and the decorative member, and the gaming ball is received by the receiving portion. A gaming machine P6 characterized in that it projects between the light emitting means and the decorative member facing each other.

According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is arranged on the back side of the displacement region of the receiving portion, and the receiving portion is a gaming ball accepted by the receiving portion. A more displaceable displacement member is provided, the displacement member is formed of a non-light transmissive material, and is displaceable at a position where it protrudes or retracts between the light emitting means and the decorative member, and a gaming ball is provided in the receiving portion. Is accepted and protrudes between the light emitting means and the decorative member. Therefore, only when the game ball is held in the receiving portion, the displacement member and the game ball block the light emitted from the light emitting means. Therefore, the position of the game ball can be recognized by the player by the shadow (dark portion) formed on the decorative member. Therefore, when the game ball is not accepted by the receiving unit, the positioning operation and the returning operation of the receiving unit can be performed without being noticed by the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from gazing at the decorative member at the wrong timing, and the player can concentrate on playing the game.

In the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is arranged on the front side of the displacement region of the receiving portion, and the receiving portion includes a displacement member displaceable from the game ball accepted by the receiving portion, and the displacement The member is made of a non-light transmissive material and is displaceable at a position where it protrudes or retracts between the light emitting means and the decorative member, and the gaming ball is received by the receiving portion. A gaming machine P7 characterized in that it projects between the light emitting means and the gaming ball.
..

According to the gaming machine P7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is arranged on the front side of the displacement region of the receiving portion, and the receiving portion is a gaming ball accepted by the receiving portion. A more displaceable displacement member is provided, the displacement member is formed of a non-light transmissive material, and is displaceable at a position where it protrudes or retracts between the light emitting means and the decorative member, and a game ball is provided in the receiving portion. Is accepted and protrudes between the light emitting means and the game ball. Therefore, only when the game ball is held by the receiving portion, the displacement member and the game ball reflect the light emitted from the light emitting means. Therefore, the position of the game ball can be recognized by the player in the bright portion (the portion having a larger amount of light than the others) formed on the decorative member. Therefore, when the game ball is not accepted by the receiving unit, the positioning operation and the returning operation of the receiving unit can be performed without being noticed by the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from gazing at the decorative member at the wrong timing, and the player can concentrate on playing the game.

In this case, it is preferable that the displacement member is generally made of a metal material having a higher light reflectance than the resin material, or the outer surface is coated with metal. As a result, the light emitted to the displacement member can be easily reflected, and the difference in the amount of light emitted from the decorative member can be clarified.
It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the position of the game ball.

The gaming machine P8 is characterized in that the displacement member is formed in a concave curved shape recessed on the back surface side in the gaming machine P7.

According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P7, the displacement member is formed in a concave curved shape recessed on the back surface side, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means to the displacement member is reflected to the decorative member side. At that time, the reflected light can be made difficult to be diffused (light can be easily collected). Therefore, by collecting the light reflected by the displacement member and emitted from the decorative member, it is possible to clarify the difference in the amount of light and make it easier for the player to recognize the position of the game ball.

In the gaming machines P1 to P8, the gaming machine P9 is characterized in that the decorative member is formed by bulging convexly in the irradiation direction of the light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine P9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines P1 to P8, the decorative member is formed by bulging convexly in the irradiation direction of the light emitting means, so that the light of the light emitting means transmitted from the decorative member is emitted. It can be easily diffused. As a result, the portion where the amount of light formed by the game ball accepted by the receiving unit is different can be enlarged and recognized by the player, so that the player can recognize the position of the game ball accepted by the receiving unit. It can be done easily.

In the gaming machines 01 to P9, the gaming machine P10 is characterized in that the light emitting means can emit at least two or more colors.

According to the gaming machine P10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines P1 to P9, the light emitting means can emit at least two or more colors. Can be changed.

For example, it is better to divide the light emission between the first region of the first emission color and the second region of the second emission color and arrange the receiving portion in the first region to obtain the expectation of a big hit. Make it high. resulting in,
It is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the position of the game ball held in the receiving portion.

In this case, the range of the first region and the range of the second region can be changed only by changing the emission color. Therefore, by changing the emission range, a plurality of forms of the effect are formed. It is possible to make it easier for the player to enjoy the game.

<Characteristic Q group> (Be sure to take the firing sensor when descending by fanning up and down)
A movable means configured to be movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position, a movable control means capable of movablely controlling the movable means, and the movable means in the first position. In a gaming machine having a first position detecting means capable of detecting a position, when the movable control means is moved from the first position to the second position, the movable control means is moved from the first position to the second position. The movable means is stopped after the movable means is moved based on predetermined movable data for moving to the second position, and when the movable means is moved from the second position to the first position. Moves the movable means based on the movable data for moving from the second position to the first position direction, and stops the movable means when the movable means is detected by the first position detecting means. A gaming machine Q1 characterized by being a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, the effect of notifying the player of the lottery result after the design or the like is variablely displayed for a certain period is executed, and the effect of moving the movable object or the like is executed within the period in which the effect is executed. As a result, a gaming machine that informs a player of various production modes has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-130802). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine executes stop control for stopping a movable object at a predetermined stop position, but may stop at a predetermined stop position when the movable object is stopped. There was a problem that the stop position was scattered without being able to do it. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of stably controlling a movable object in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine Q1, when moving from the first position to the second position, by moving based on the movable data, the control load is smaller than when moving while detecting the movable position at any time. Although the configuration can be controlled, when moving from the second position to the first position, the movable means is stopped and controlled based on the result detected by the detecting means, so that the movable means moved to the first position is controlled. Even if there is a variation in the position of, it is possible to stop and control it at a more accurate first position, and the variation when moved to the first position increases depending on the number of movements. It has the effect of being able to prevent this and stably control moving objects.

In the gaming machine Q1, the movable means has a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball, and the launching means launches a gaming ball while being moved to the first position. Pachinko machine Q2.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1, the gaming ball is launched in a state of being moved to the first position, so that the firing accuracy of the gaming ball varies by accurately moving to the first position. There is an effect that the trouble that occurs can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the movable means has a base member that movably fixes the movable means, and the movable means has a shaft portion that is rotatably supported on one end side of the base member and the one end side. The movable means has at least a moving means for moving the game ball to the other end side and an opening for launching the game ball by the launching means on the other end side, and the movable means is the first from the origin position. It is movable to the first position set at the position rotated in the first direction with respect to the shaft portion by the momentum, and the shaft portion is rotated from the first position to the second rotation amount. The gaming machine Q3 is configured to be movable from the origin position to the second position set at the position rotated in the first direction.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the movement of the gaming ball by the moving means changes the center of gravity of the movable means, which makes stop control difficult. Since the configuration can be stopped accurately by the first position, there is an effect that a defect due to the stop control of the movable means can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine Q3, the moving means starts moving the game ball from the shaft portion to the other end side after the movable means starts the movable control from the origin position to the first position. A gaming machine Q4 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q3, the game ball moves to the other end side before rotating to the first position, so that the weight on the other end side becomes heavier and the movable load increases. It has the effect of suppressing the problems that occur. Further, by moving the movable means to the first position after the start of the movable control, there is an effect that the game ball can be moved to the other end side at the timing when the movable means is moved to the first position. be.

<Characteristic R group> (Sensor detection of power recovery)
An entry means in which a game ball can enter, a movable means capable of moving to a first position and a second position different from the first position, and a game ball entered into the entry means to the movable means. The movable means has an opening means into which the gaming ball guided by the guiding means can enter, and a gaming ball entered from the opening means. The gaming machine has a holding means capable of being able to move, and a moving means capable of moving the gaming ball held by the holding means, and the gaming machine moves the gaming ball entered from the opening means into the movable means. The gaming machine R1 is characterized by having a discharge control means capable of executing a discharge operation capable of discharging to the outside by the moving means.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a novel impression on the player by moving a movable object to a position where the player can see it, as one of the effects for notifying the hit / fail judgment result. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-130802) has been proposed which can prevent a player from getting tired of playing a game at an early stage. By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is a problem that a problem occurs due to the movement. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing defects in the above-mentioned gaming machines.

According to the gaming machine R1, even if the movable means is configured to allow the gaming ball to enter and the inserted gaming ball is moved, the gaming ball entered into the movable means is discharged to the outside by the discharging operation. Since it is configured so that it can be operated, even if the game ball enters the movable means excessively, the game ball can be discharged and operated normally, and there is an effect that a defect can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine R1, a main control means capable of executing game control, a slave control means capable of executing game control based on a control signal output from the main control means, and the ball entry means. It has a ball entry detecting means capable of detecting that a game ball has entered, and the main control means has detected that the game ball has entered by the ball entry detecting means. Based on this, the slave control means has an output means for outputting a ball entry signal to the slave control means, and the slave control means includes an opening detection means capable of detecting that a game ball has entered from the opening means and the movable. Movable control means capable of movably controlling the means, and initial operation control means for causing the movable control means to execute a predetermined initial operation for the movable means when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. When the ball entry signal is received during the period during which the initial operation is being executed, it is detected by the opening detection means that the game ball has entered the ball at least until the initial operation is completed. The gaming machine R2 is characterized by having an initial discharge operation control means for executing the discharge operation by the discharge control means based on the above.

According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R1, if there is a possibility that the gaming ball enters the movable means during the initial operation, monitoring by the opening detecting means is executed. By entering the ball, the ejection operation is executed after the end of the initial operation, so that there is an effect that a defect in the initial operation execution can be suppressed.

The gaming machine R2 is characterized in that the holding means is configured to be able to hold a game ball that has entered from the opening means when the moving means has moved the ball to a predetermined position. R3.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R2, the holding means is configured to be able to hold the gaming ball that has entered from the opening means by being moved to a predetermined position by the moving means. There is an effect that the acceptance of the game ball can be controlled by limiting the timing at which the holding means can hold the ball.

When the ball entry signal is received in the gaming machine R2 or R3 during the period during which the initial operation is being executed, the opening detecting means is used for a period until a predetermined period elapses after the initial operation is completed. The gaming machine R3 is characterized by having a determination control executing means for executing a determination control for determining whether or not a gaming ball is detected.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R2 or R3, when the entry signal is received during the period during which the initial operation is being executed, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball is detected by the opening detecting means. Therefore, in a state where the gaming ball cannot enter the movable means, the detection process can be omitted, and there is an effect that the control load can be reduced.

The gaming machine R3 is characterized in that the predetermined period is a period from receiving a specific control signal from the main control means until a predetermined number of seconds elapses.

According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R3, by executing after outputting a specific control signal, the timing at which the ejection operation is executed can be made constant, and the ejection operation can be executed at an appropriate timing. It has the effect of being able to perform actions.

In any of the gaming machines R1 to R4, the main control means includes a determination means capable of executing a determination and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means on the display means. , The dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information executed by the dynamic display means, and the identification information for showing the specific determination result to the display means are stopped and displayed. The gaming machine R5 is characterized by having a special state setting means capable of changing the ball entry means to a special state in which a gaming ball can easily enter the ball.

According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines R1 to R4, when the determination result is a specific determination result, the gaming ball can easily enter the ball entering means, so that the gaming ball can be moved to the movable means. It has the effect of giving the player an opportunity to enter the ball and providing the player with a novel effect.

The gaming machine R6 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine R5, the specific slave control signal is a signal output based on the end of the special state.

According to the gaming machine R6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R5, the ejection operation can be performed after the end of the special state, so that the ejection operation is performed after the gaming ball is difficult to enter into the movable means. This has the effect of suppressing problems.

<Characteristic S group> (Sound effect when winning a special electric accessory)
A game ball has entered by a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a first detection means capable of detecting that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, and the first detection means thereof. One of the first signal output means for outputting the first signal, the first flow path through which the game ball entering the first ball entry means can pass, and the first flow path thereof when it is detected. In a gaming machine having a visual recognition unit that makes it possible to visually recognize a game ball passing through the unit, a second ball entry means that allows a game ball that has not entered the first ball entry means to enter the ball. A second detection means capable of detecting that a game ball has entered the second ball entry means and a second signal are output when the second detection means detects that the game ball has entered the ball. The second signal output means, the first flow path guiding means for guiding the gaming ball that has entered the second ball entry means to the first flow path, and the first period after receiving the first signal. The first effect executing means for executing the first effect based on the elapse, and the second effect execution for executing the second effect based on the elapse of the second period after receiving the second signal. A gaming machine S1 characterized by having means and means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that the gaming becomes monotonous during the privileged gaming. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a problem that a player gets tired of playing a game at an early stage.

According to the game machine S1, the second effect is executed at the timing when the game ball that has entered the second ball entry means without entering the first ball entry means also passes through the visual recognition portion, so that the ball entry means can be used. It is possible to diversify the production together with the first production due to entering the ball, and there is an effect that the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine S1, based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the first ball entry means, the display means for displaying the information corresponding to the entry and the information displayed on the display means are displayed on the first. (1) The updating means includes an updating means for updating in response to a game ball that has entered the ball entering means, and the updating means updates the information at least at the timing when the second effect is executed. The gaming machine S2 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine S1, it is possible to make the game ball that did not enter the first entry means seem to have updated information, and the second entry. There is an effect that the player can be made to think as if he / she has entered the ball entry means including the game ball that has entered the ball means.

In the gaming machine S1 or 2, a third guiding means for guiding a gaming ball that has not entered the first entering means and the second entering means to the first taxiway, and the third guiding means. The gaming machine S3 is characterized by having a third effect executing means capable of executing a third effect at a timing when the game ball guided by the above reaches the visual recognition portion.

According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine S1 or S2, the gaming ball guided by the third guiding means is also guided to the visual recognition unit to execute the third effect, so that the gaming ball is used as the ball entry means. It is possible to make the player think that the game ball that has entered the ball passes through the visual recognition part, and it is possible to make the player think that many game balls are entering the ball entry means. be.

In the gaming machine S3, the updating means is characterized in that the information is updated at least at the timing when the third effect is executed.

According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine S3, the information is updated according to the timing when the third effect is executed, so that the game is not entered into the first and second ball entry means. It is possible to make the ball feel as if it is entering the first ball entry means, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines S1 to S4, the first period is set to be longer than the first flow period required for the gaming ball that has entered the first ball entry means to reach the visual recognition unit. The second period is set to be longer than the second flow period required for the gaming ball that has entered the second entry means to reach the visual recognition unit. S5.

According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines S1 to S4, the effect is produced according to the timing when the viewing portion is reached, so that the viewing portion seems to be a means of entering the ball. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the gaming machines S1 to S5, an opening through which a game ball can enter is formed as a part of the first flow path in the first flow path in the visual recognition portion, and the opening is formed in the opening. The gaming machine S6 is characterized in that the entering gaming ball is configured to be visible.

According to the gaming machine S6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines S1 to S5, the opening formed in the visual recognition portion can be made to look like a ball entry means, and more gaming balls can enter the ball entry means. It has the effect of making you feel as if you are playing a ball.

<Characteristic T group> (Pseudo jackpot production during latent state)
A discrimination means that executes a predetermined discrimination when the discrimination condition is satisfied, a display means that displays identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the identification information that shows the first discrimination result on the display means. When is displayed, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game that is advantageous to the player, and the first game state and the first game state after the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is completed. A game state setting means that can set a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the game state, and a privilege game effect that can execute the privilege game effect when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. It is characterized by having an execution means and a pseudo privilege game effect execution means capable of pseudo-execution of the privilege game effect when the second game state is set by the game state setting means. Pachinko machine T1.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There was a special game in which many prize balls could be awarded. Further, a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state can be set as the gaming state in which the above-mentioned lottery is executed, and the second gaming state is set. In this case, a gaming machine has been proposed that facilitates the execution of a special game in which a prize ball can be given to a player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-226399). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine can improve the interest of the game because it is possible to give the player a prize ball by the privilege game and the special game, but the aim is the privilege game. Since it is necessary to execute a game and a game aiming at a special game, there is a problem that the playability becomes complicated and the player's motivation to play is reduced. In the above-mentioned gaming machines, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that suppresses a decrease in motivation to play and improves the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine T1, when a gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set, a pseudo-privilege gaming effect is executed, so that the content of the effect that is executed in the state that is advantageous to the player is unified. be able to. Therefore, by performing an effect that is easy for the player to understand, there is an effect that the decrease in the motivation for the game can be suppressed and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, since the privilege game effect can be simulated in addition to the case where the privilege game is executed, it is possible to make the player think that many privilege games are being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine T1, a variable ball-entry means that can be changed into a first state in which a ball can enter and a second state in which a ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and at least the variable ball-entry means. Pseudo-ball-entry means on which a ball can be entered, and variable control means for changing the variable-entry means to the first state when the privilege game is executed by the privilege-game executing means. The gaming machine T2 is characterized in that the pseudo-privilege gaming means is such that a gaming ball is inserted when the pseudo-privilege gaming effect is executed by the pseudo-privilege gaming effect executing means.

According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine T1, when the pseudo-privilege gaming effect is executed, the effect of inserting the game ball into the pseudo-ball entry means is executed, so that a realistic simulated effect is achieved. It has the effect of being able to be executed.

In the gaming machine T1 or T2, when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the gaming machine T1 or T2 has an effect condition determining means for determining whether a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and the pseudo privileged gaming effect. The gaming machine T3 is characterized in that the execution means executes the pseudo-privilege gaming effect when it is determined by the effect condition determination means that the predetermined effect condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines T1 or T2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, if the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the pseudo privilege game effect is not executed even during the second game state. By configuring in this way, for example, when the period in which the second game state is set is short (when it is shorter than the execution period of one privilege game), it is possible to suppress the execution of the pseudo privilege game effect. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of the effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort, and thus there is an effect that the effect of the effect to be executed can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine T3, the second gaming state is continuously set by the upper limit value setting means for setting the upper limit value of the number of times the second gaming state is continuously set after the end of the jackpot game, and the gaming state setting means. It has a set number of times measuring means for measuring the set number of times, and the effect condition determining means determines that the number of times measured by the set number of times measuring means is less than a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine T4, which is characterized in that it is determined that is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine T4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T3. That is, the upper limit number of times that the second game state can be continuously set is set, and it is determined how many times the second game effect is currently set continuously. Then, when the number of consecutively set times in the second gaming state is less than the predetermined number of times, the effect condition is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to execute a stable pseudo-privilege game effect while securing a period in which the second game state is set, so that there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

When the game machine T4 determines that the number of times measured by the set number of times measuring means is greater than the predetermined number of times by the effect condition determining means, a second gaming state effect different from the pseudo privileged game effect is executed. The gaming machine T5, characterized in that it has a possible second gaming state effect executing means.

According to the gaming machine T5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T4. That is, when the number of consecutive settings of the second game state is more than a predetermined number, the specific second game state effect is executed without executing the pseudo privilege game effect, so that the player can easily understand the effect. It has the effect of being able to be executed.

<Characteristic U group> (Point consumption production)
Displays identification means for indicating a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a determination means capable of performing a determination based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means, and a determination result by the determination means. A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the means, a dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and a determination result specific to the display means. In a gaming machine having a privileged game execution means capable of executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the above is stopped and displayed, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. A numerical effect executing means capable of executing a numerical effect that gives numerical information to a player, and a numerical information storage means capable of accumulating and storing the numerical information of the numerical effect executed by the numerical effect executing means. , At least one of the operating means that can be operated by the player and the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means corresponding to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means. The gaming machine U1 is characterized by having a dynamic display mode determining control means capable of causing a player to determine the mode of the unit by operating the operating means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. As an effect for displaying the lottery result, a plurality of symbols for notifying the lottery result are displayed in a variable manner, and the lottery result is notified by a combination in which the symbols are stopped and displayed. As an effect other than the symbol, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a notice effect is executed to notify the player of the lottery result before the symbol stops. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that the player gets tired of the production performed until the lottery result is won. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a problem that a player gets tired of playing a game at an early stage.

According to the gaming machine U1, since the content of the dynamic display mode related to the notification of the determination result can be changed by the numerical information accumulated by the executed numerical effect, the numerical effect is executed and the numerical information is stored. It has the effect of making people interested in going and preventing them from getting bored of the game machines at an early stage.

In the game machine U1, when the partial mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination control means, the corresponding numerical information is subtracted from the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means. The gaming machine U2, which is characterized in that it is updated and stored as described above.

According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U1, the accumulated numerical information is subtracted by determining the dynamic display mode corresponding to the numerical information, so that the compensation using the numerical information is used. It is possible to execute an effect of providing a dynamic display mode, and there is an effect that the player's interest can be improved.

The gaming machine U3 is characterized in that the gaming machine U1 or U2 has a notifying means for notifying information corresponding to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machines U1 or U2, the information corresponding to the stored numerical information is notified by the gaming machine U3, so that the player can easily recognize the state of the numerical information stored. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the game machines U1 to U3, the numerical information determining means for determining the numerical information given to the player by the numerical effect executed by the numerical effect executing means is provided, and the numerical information determining means has a numerical information determining means. The gaming machine U4 is characterized in that it is configured so that numerical information corresponding to the numerical information stored by the numerical information storage means can be determined.

According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines U1 to U3, the numerical information given by the numerical effect can be determined corresponding to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the numerical information can be added according to the numerical information possessed by the player.

<Feature V group> (Common acquisition process for button press timing)
An operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation effect execution means that executes a predetermined operation effect based on the operation of the operation means, and an effective period for effectively discriminating the operation on the operation means are set. A gaming machine having a valid period setting means for setting an effect and an effect setting means for setting an effect mode for a predetermined period including the effective period set by the effective period setting means, and the operating means during the effective period. Is operated by the calculation means for calculating the operation timing based on the validity period set by the validity period setting means, and the operation effect executing means based on the operation timing calculated by the calculation means. A gaming machine V1 comprising: an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode of the operation effect to be executed.

Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines perform a winning lottery and perform a variable display effect for showing the lottery result on a display device. Further, a gaming machine that provides a plurality of suggestion effects for suggesting the lottery result and executes a specific suggestion effect based on the operation result to the operation means that the player can operate as a part of the plurality of suggestion effects. It has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-283442). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since a specific suggestion effect is executed regardless of the timing at which the operating means is operated, the motivation of the player to operate the operating means is reduced, and the player is early. There was a problem that the problem of getting tired of playing games occurred.

According to the gaming machine V1, since it is possible to set the effect mode of the operation effect based on the operation timing of the operation means during the valid period, it is possible to provide the player with various effects. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the gaming machine at an early stage.

The gaming machine V1 is characterized in that the calculation means calculates the ratio between the valid period and the remaining period of the valid period at the timing when the operating means is operated.

According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the effect mode of the operation effect is set based on the ratio between the effective period and the remaining period of the effective period calculated by the timing when the operating means is operated. As a result, since the operation effect is set based on the length of the set valid period and the operation timing of the operation means, it is possible to set various operation effects and enhance the effect. There is.

When the configuration of the gaming machine V2 is used, it is preferable to configure it so that different valid periods are set for the same effect mode set by the effect setting means. With this configuration, even if the operation means are operated at the same timing for the effect mode being executed, the calculation result of the calculation means may be different by changing the set valid period. It is possible to change the effect mode of the operation effect.

The gaming machine V1 or V2 has a display means capable of displaying a predetermined effect and a movable means capable of executing a predetermined movable effect, and the effect setting means is the effect mode executed by the display means. The gaming machine V3 is characterized in that the operation effect executing means is for executing the operation effect using the movable means.

According to the gaming machine V3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines V1 or V2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, if the effect operating means is operated while the effect displayed on the display means is being executed, the operation effect for moving the movable means is executed, so that the operation means is operated at any timing within the valid period. Even if the operation is performed, the operation effect can be executed without changing the effect content displayed on the display means. Therefore, there is an effect that the control for executing the operation effect can be simplified and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

The gaming machine V4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine V2 or 3, the valid period setting means can set different valid periods when the same effect setting mode is set by the effect setting means.

According to the gaming machine V4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V2 or 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, even when the operation means are operated at the same timing with respect to the effect mode being executed, the calculation result of the calculation means is different by changing the set valid period, and the effect of the operation effect is produced. The aspect can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety of operation effects to the player who always operates the operation means at a fixed timing, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

In any of the gaming machines V2 to V4, the first classification means for classifying the ratio calculated by the calculation means according to the first condition and the second classification means for classifying the ratio according to the second condition different from the first condition. The first division means and the division determination means for determining whether to divide the ratio by any of the second division means, and the effect mode setting means is determined by the division determination means. The gaming machine V5, characterized in that the effect mode of the operation effect is set based on the content.

According to the gaming machine V5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines V2 to V4, the following effects are played. That is, the ratios calculated by the calculation means are divided under different conditions, and the effect mode of the operation effect is set based on the divided contents. Therefore, even if the calculation results of the calculation means are the same, different operations are performed. The production can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety of operation effects to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

<Characteristic W group> (Notification of pre-reading result of jackpot)
A ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means, and a storage in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored. Means, a determination means capable of performing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means on the display means. When the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means capable of executing the privilege game advantageous to the player and the privilege game execution means. In the game machine having the privilege game type determination means for determining the type of the privilege game executed based on the information stored in the storage means, the said determination means is preceded by the determination means. Based on the information stored in the storage means, the pre-determination means for executing the pre-determination and the pre-determination for showing the result of the pre-determination by the pre-determination means correspond to the pre-determined information. The advance notification means for notifying before the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the determination result is started, and the privilege game type determination means when the determination means determines a specific determination result. The privilege game type pre-determination means for preliminarily determining the type of the privilege game to be performed with respect to the information stored in the storage means before the determination means is determined, and the determination by the privilege game type pre-determination means. It has a pre-privilege game type notification means for notifying before the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the determination result of the information for which the pre-game information for showing the result has been determined is started. A game machine W1 characterized by.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Different types of benefits that can be obtained by multiple types of players are set for the privileged games to be executed, and if a hit is made, one privileged game type is determined. A gaming machine has been proposed in which a player's interests differ depending on the type of privileged game being executed even when a hit is made (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machines are required to improve not only the effect of improving the interest in hitting and losing, but also the interest in the type of privileged game. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with further improved interest in gaming.

According to the game machine W1, the advance game information corresponding to the type of the privileged game to be executed in the case of a hit is also notified, so that it is possible to provide the player with an effect combined with the notification result by the advance determination. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

The gaming machine W1 has a symbol display means for displaying a symbol corresponding to the information stored in the storage means before being determined by the determination means on the display means, and the advance notification means has the symbol. The gaming machine W2 is characterized in that it is notified by changing the display mode of the symbol displayed by the display means.

According to the gaming machine W2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine W1, the information related to the determination result can be identified by the symbol in the state of being stored in the storage means before the identification information is dynamically displayed. It is possible to be interested not only in the judgment result of the dynamically displayed identification information but also in the judgment result stored in the storage means, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage. effective.

In the gaming machines W1 or W2, the effect means for executing the effect when the privilege game is executed and the advance privilege game type notification means are characterized in that the specific effect is executed by the effect means. Game machine W3 to play.

According to the gaming machine W3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine W1 or W2, the effect of executing the effect when the privileged game is executed causes the notification of the privileged game type to be executed at an early stage. There is an effect that it is possible to easily identify that the notification is related to.

The gaming machine W3 is characterized in that the advance privilege game type notification means performs notification in response to execution of notification for indicating the advance determination by the advance notification means. Machine W4.

According to the gaming machine W4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine W3, the bonus game type is also notified in advance in response to the execution of the advance notification related to the determination result, so that the player is notified of the determination result. There is an effect that advance notification can be performed in combination with the notification content.

<Characteristic X group> (Notification of small hits and charge design)
Information can be acquired based on the entry means in which the game ball can enter, the acquisition means in which the game ball enters the entry means, and the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored. The storage means, the first determination means for executing the first determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the identification information for showing the first determination result by the first determination means are dynamically displayed in the display means. A dynamic display means for displaying and a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating a specific first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. , When the second determination means capable of executing the second determination based on the establishment of the determination condition and the second determination result by the second determination means are the specific second determination results, the game is played in the ball entry means. In a gaming machine having a variable means that can be changed so that the ball can easily enter the ball, the variable means is changed to the easy entry state according to the specific second determination result. A first determination type and a second determination type in which the variable means is set to a special easy entry state are set so that the game ball can easily enter the ball entry means rather than the first determination means. The privilege game execution means can execute a special game different from the privilege game when the determination means determines that the special first determination result is different from the specific determination result, and the identification information Is displayed as the special identification information as a stop display mode for showing the special first determination result, and the specific second determination corresponding to the second determination type is displayed during the dynamic display of the identification information. When a special game determined to be the result is executed, the identification information being dynamically displayed is switched to the special identification information and temporarily stopped and displayed before the execution of the special game. Game machine X1 to play.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. As an effect for displaying the lottery result, a plurality of symbols for notifying the lottery result are displayed in a variable manner, and the lottery result is notified by a combination in which the symbols are stopped and displayed. As an effect other than the symbol, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a notice effect is executed to notify the player of the lottery result before the symbol stops. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that the player gets tired of the production performed until the lottery result is won. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a problem that a player gets tired of playing a game at an early stage.

According to the gaming machine X1, the frequency of displaying the special identification information can be increased, and the problem that the special identification information is displayed causes the player to get tired of the game during the period until the specific determination result is notified. It has the effect of being able to suppress it.

The gaming machine X1 has a dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information when the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display mode determining means is dynamic. The gaming machine X2 is characterized in that it determines whether or not the special game is executed during the target display, and determines a dynamic display mode based on the determination result.

According to the gaming machine X2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine X1, there is an effect that the special identification information can be easily set by discriminating the execution of the special game before the dynamic display.

<Characteristic Y group> (Notify the end of the effective time at the same timing with multiple button effects)
Corresponding to the operation means that can be operated by the player, the operation effect setting means that sets the operation effect to be executed corresponding to the operation of the operation means, and the operation effect set by the operation effect setting means. In a gaming machine having a valid period setting means for setting a valid period determined to be valid when the operating means is operated, the operation effect setting means can set a plurality of the operation effects. The valid period setting means determines the valid period of 1 for the plurality of operation effects set by the operation effect setting means, and the plurality of operation effects are set to 1 within the valid period. Based on the operation being executed by the player, the operation effect 1 is executed in a predetermined order, and the notification means individually responds to the plurality of operation effects. The gaming machine Y1 is characterized in that it notifies the identification information for indicating the individual valid period corresponding to the set valid period.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. When the lottery result is notified, after the symbols for notifying the lottery result are variablely displayed in the variable time determined by the lottery, the lottery result is stopped and displayed by the combination of the symbols indicating the lottery result. During the period when the variable display is executed, a gaming machine has been proposed in which an effect of displaying a notice display or the like regarding the lottery result to be notified is executed by operating an operation unit that can be operated by the player ( For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine has been required to further improve the gaming interest by appropriately performing various productions using operating means. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with further improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine Y1, even when a plurality of operation effects are set, the operation validity period is notified for each, so that the period during which the operation means can be operated can be recognized as an individual operation effect, which is a hobby of the game. Has the effect of improving.

The gaming machine Y1 is characterized in that the identification information is notified by varying the individual valid period in order corresponding to the predetermined order in response to the decrease in the valid period. Machine Y2.

According to the gaming machine Y2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Y1, the identification information indicating the individual validity period is variably displayed in the order in which the operation effects are executed, so that the player can execute a plurality of operation effects. It has the effect of being able to identify the order.

In the gaming machine Y2, when the valid period elapses in a state where the plurality of operation effects are set, each of the notified identification information is notified that the valid period has elapsed at the same timing. The gaming machine Y3, which is characterized in that it is variable so as to be.

According to the gaming machine Y3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Y2, it is possible to notify the player that the individual valid period will elapse according to the elapse of the valid period, and the effect that the elapse of the valid time can be correctly notified. There is.

From the gaming machine Y1 to the gaming machine Y3, when the identification information is variable in response to the decrease in the valid period, the identification information is updated and varied after blinking. Game machine Y4.

According to the gaming machine Y4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines Y1 to Y3, the identification information is changed after blinking, so that it is difficult to understand even if the speed at which the identification information is changed is not constant, which is effective. It has the effect of facilitating control to notify the time.

<Characteristic Z group> (automatic pressing of button effect)
When the operation effect is set by the operation means that can be operated by the player, the operation effect setting means that sets the operation effect to be executed when the operation means is operated, and the operation effect setting means. When the valid period setting means for setting the valid period for which the operation by the operating means is determined to be valid and the valid period setting means set the valid period, the identification information corresponding to the set valid period is notified. The gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that, in a gaming machine having the notification means, the notification means notifies a specific notification mode based on the fact that the valid period is equal to or less than a predetermined period.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. When the lottery result is notified, after the symbols for notifying the lottery result are variablely displayed in the variable time determined by the lottery, the lottery result is stopped and displayed by the combination of the symbols indicating the lottery result. During the period when the variable display is executed, a gaming machine has been proposed in which an effect of displaying a notice display or the like regarding the lottery result to be notified is executed by operating an operation unit that can be operated by the player ( For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine has been required to further improve the gaming interest by appropriately performing various productions using operating means. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with further improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine Z1, when the valid period reaches a predetermined period, the specific notification mode is notified, so that the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the specific period has been reached, and the interest of the game is improved. It has the effect of being able to do it.

The gaming machine Z1 has a suggestion mode display means for causing the display means to display a suggestion mode suggesting to the player that the operation means is operated during the period in which the validity period is set, and the suggestion mode display. The means is to change and display the suggestion mode to an operated suggestion mode indicating that the operation means has been operated based on the operation of the operation means, and the valid period is a predetermined period or less. However, based on the fact that the operating means is not operated, a pseudo operating mode indicating that the operating means has been pseudo-operated is displayed in a mode different from the operated suggestion mode. Game machine Z2 to play.

According to the gaming machine Z2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Z1, the pseudo operation mode is displayed, so that the valid period has elapsed even if the operation effect is automatically executed with the passage of the valid period. Has the effect of being able to recognize.

In the gaming machine Z2, the suggestion mode is configured by a symbol imitating the shape of the operating means, and the pseudo operation mode is configured by an effect mode in which the symbol is operated. The gaming machine Z3 featuring.

According to the gaming machine Z3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Z2, there is an effect that it is possible to clearly notify that the operation effect has been executed after the lapse of the valid period.

In any of the gaming machines Z1 to Z3, when the operating means is operated at the timing when the specific notification mode is displayed, the special notification mode is notified in addition to the specific notification mode. The gaming machine Z4.

According to the gaming machine Z4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines Z1 to Z3, when the operating means is operated at the timing when the specific notification mode is displayed, the special notification mode is notified, so that the game is played. There is an effect that it is possible to realize that the production has been executed by the operation of the person.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine γ1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine γ2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. The identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time, provided that the prize is won (or passed through the operating port). Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine γ3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine that adjusts the flow direction of a gaming ball flowing down in a gaming area is known (Patent Document 1) .

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 11-197311

However, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that the operating rate of the gaming machine is lowered.
The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the operating rate of the gaming machine.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a gaming board having a gaming area on the front side, a first member for disposing on the front side of the gaming board, and a front surface of the first member. It is provided with a second member, which is arranged on the side at a predetermined interval and allows a game ball to flow down while facing the first member, and is at least one of the first member or the second member. A changing means for changing the facing distance between the predetermined portion disposed on one side and the other of the first member or the second member is provided, and the first state and the first state thereof are referred to by the changing means. It is possible to form a second state in which the flow direction of the gaming ball flowing down between the facing portions of the first member and the second member is different .

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1 , a gaming board having a gaming area on the front side, a first member for being arranged on the front side of the game board, and a predetermined interval on the front side of the first member. It is provided with a second member which is disposed so as to allow the game ball to flow down while facing the first member, and is disposed on at least one of the first member or the second member. A changing means for changing the facing distance between the predetermined portion and the other of the first member or the second member is provided, and the first state and the first state thereof are referred to as the first member and the second member by the changing means. Since it is possible to form a second state in which the flowing directions of the gaming balls flowing down between the facing members are different, it is possible to suppress the player from recognizing that it is disadvantageous, and it is possible to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine. There is .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective front view of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective front view of an operation unit and a game board. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a game board. (A) is a front view of the general winning opening unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the general winning opening unit in the line XIIb-XIIB of FIG. 12 (a). It is sectional drawing of the game board in the XIII-XIII line of FIG. It is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board in the range XIV of FIG. It is a rear view of a general winning opening unit. It is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board in the range XIV of FIG. It is an exploded perspective front view of a center frame. (A) is a front view of the first unit, (b) is a side view of the first unit, and (c) is a rear view of the first unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of the 1st unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the 1st unit. It is sectional drawing of the 1st unit in the XXI-XXI line of FIG. 18B. FIG. 21 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit shown in FIG. FIG. 18 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit on the line XXIII-XXIII. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit in the line XXIVa-XXIVa of FIG. 21, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit in the line XXIVb-XXIVb of FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view of the first unit in line 21 XXIVc-XXIVc. (A) is a partially enlarged view of the first unit in the range XXVa of FIG. 21, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit in the line XXIVb-XXIVb of FIG. 25 (a). (A) is a partially enlarged view of the first unit in the range XXVa of FIG. 21, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit in the line XXIVb-XXIVb of FIG. 26 (a). (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the line XXVIIa-XXVIIa of FIG. 25 (a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the line XXVIIb-XXVIIb of FIG. 25 (a). Yes, (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the XXVIIc-XXVIIc line of FIG. 25 (a). (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the line XXVb-XXVb of FIG. 25 (a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the line XXVIIIb-XXVIIIb of FIG. 25 (a). be. (A) is a front view of the second unit, and (b) is a rear view of the second unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of the 2nd unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the 2nd unit. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd unit in the XXXII-XXXII line of FIG. (A) is a front view of the center frame, and (b) is a side view of the center frame. (A) is a perspective front view of the center frame, and (b) is a perspective rear view of the center frame. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a center frame. It is sectional drawing of the center frame in the XXXVI-XXXVI line of FIG. 33. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a game board, and (b) is a schematic disassembled cross-sectional view of a game board. (A) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case. (A) is an exploded perspective front view of the rear case, and (b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear case. (A) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case. (A) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case. (A) is a perspective rear view of the rear case and the board box, and (b) is a rear view of the back case and the board box. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit. It is a rear view of the lower displacement unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement unit. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit in the retracted state. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit in the 1st overhanging state. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit in the 2nd overhanging state. It is a rear view of the lower displacement unit in the retracted state. It is a rear view of the lower displacement unit in the 1st overhanging state. It is a rear view of the lower displacement unit in the 2nd overhanging state. (A) is a rear view of the first link member and the cam member in the retracted state, (b) in the first overhanging state, and (c) in the second overhanging state. It is sectional drawing of the lower displacement unit in the LIVa-LIVA line of FIG. 50, and (b) is the sectional schematic diagram of the lower displacement unit in the LIVb-LIVA line of FIG. 51. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit in the LVa-LVa line of FIG. 50, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit in the LVb-LVb line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the lower displacement unit in the LVc-LVc line of 52. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit in the LVIa-LVIa line of FIG. 52, and (b) is a front view of a first link member and a cam member of the lower displacement unit in the second overhanging state. (A) is a front view of the lower displacement member, and (b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member. It is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member. (A) and (b) are front views of the lower displacement member. It is a front view of the lower displacement member in a 1st position. It is a front view of the lower displacement member in a 2nd position. It is a front view of the lower displacement member in the 3rd position. (A) to (c) are partially enlarged views of the lower displacement member. (A) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member. (A) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member. (A) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member. (A) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member. (A) is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member in the range LXIXa of FIG. 68 (b), and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member in the range LXIXb of FIG. 68 (a). (A) is a top view of the sorting unit, and (b) is a rear view of the sorting unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a sorting unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a sorting unit. It is sectional drawing of the distribution unit in the LXXIII-LXXIII line of FIG. 70A. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit in the range LXXIV of FIG. 73. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit. It is a front view of the distribution unit and the lower displacement unit. It is a top view of the distribution unit and the lower displacement unit. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit. It is sectional drawing of the distribution unit. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit. It is sectional drawing of the distribution unit. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit. It is sectional drawing of the distribution unit. It is a front view of a rotating unit. It is a rear view of a rotating unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a rotating unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rotating unit. It is a front view of a decorative unit. (A) is a side view of the decorative unit in the direction of arrow XCIIa of FIG. 91, and (b) is a side view of the decorative unit in the direction of arrow XCIIb of FIG. 91. It is an exploded perspective front view of a decorative unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a decorative unit. It is a rotation unit in the direction view of the arrow XCVa of FIG. 89, and (b) is a rotation unit in the arrow XCVb of FIG. It is a rotation unit in the direction view of the arrow XCVa of FIG. 89, and (b) is a rotation unit in the arrow XCVb of FIG. (A) is a closed state, (b) is an intermediate state, and (c) is an open state, each of which is a side view of a decorative unit and a right transmission member. (A) is an open state, (b) is an intermediate state, and (c) is a side view of a decorative unit and a right transmission member in a closed state, respectively. (A) is a side view of the decorative unit in the closed state, and (b) is a side view of the decorative unit in the open state. (A) is a front view of a rotating body, (b) is a side view of the rotating body in the direction of arrow Cb of FIG. 100 (a), and (c) is an arrow Cc of FIG. 100 (a). It is a side view of a rotating body in a directional view. It is an exploded perspective front view of a rotating body. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a rotating body. (A) is a side view of the rotating body when the opening / closing member is closed, and (b) is a side view of the rotating body when the opening / closing member is open. (A) and (b) are side views of the decorative unit. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit and a rotation unit. It is a top view of the lower displacement unit in the arrow CVI direction view of FIG. 105. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit and a rotation unit. (A) is a top view of the ball pedestal, (b) is a front view of the ball pedestal, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the ball pedestal in the CVIIIc-CVIIIc line of FIG. 108 (a). Is. It is an exploded perspective view of a ball cradle. (A) and (b) are sectional views of a ball cradle. (A) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of a rotating unit in the CXI-CXI line of FIG. 87. It is a front view of the upper displacement unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of the upper displacement unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the upper displacement unit. It is a front view of the upper displacement unit in the state which the upper displacement member is arranged in the retracted position. It is a front view of the upper displacement unit in the state which the upper displacement member is arranged in the intermediate position. It is a front view of the upper displacement unit in the state which the upper displacement member is arranged in the overhanging position. (A) is a front view of the variable portion, and (b) is a rear view of the variable portion. It is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the lower displacement member. It is a front view of the lower displacement member in the 3rd position. (A) is a front view of the lower displacement member in the third embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member. It is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member. (A) and (b) are front views of the lower displacement member. (A) is a front view of the lower displacement member at the first position, and (b) is a front view of the lower displacement member at the second position. (A) is a front view of the lower displacement member at the third position, and (b) is a front view of the lower displacement member at the second position. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit. (A) is a top view of the distribution unit according to the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the distribution unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a sorting unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a sorting unit. It is sectional drawing of the distribution unit in the CXXXIV-CXXXIV line of FIG. 131 (a). (A) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit in the range CXXXV of FIG. 134. It is a front view of the rotating unit in 6th Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective front view of a rotating unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a sorting unit. (A) to (c) are side views of the decorative unit in the arrow CXXXIX directional view of FIG. 138. (A) to (c) are side views of the decorative unit in the arrow CXXXIX directional view of FIG. 138. It is a side schematic diagram of the displacement unit in 7th Embodiment. It is a side view of the displacement unit. It is a side view of the displacement unit when the game ball is held by the displacement member. It is a side view of the displacement unit when the game ball is held by the displacement member. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 8th embodiment. It is an exploded perspective front view of a rotation operation unit. It is sectional drawing of the pachinko machine in the CXLVII-CXLVII line of FIG. 145. It is sectional drawing of the pachinko machine. 9 is a perspective front view of the first link member in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 9B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit. It is sectional drawing of the game board in 10th Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member in eleventh embodiment. (A) and (b) are front views of the lower displacement member. (A) is a front view of the lower displacement member, (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member in the CLIIIb-CLIIIb line of FIG. 153 (a), and (c) is a sectional view of FIG. 153 (a). It is sectional drawing of the lower displacement member in the CLIIIc-CLIIIc line of. (A) is an exploded perspective front view of the ball receiving portion in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a front view of the ball receiving portion. (A) and (b) are front views of the lower displacement member, and (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member in the CLVc-CLVc line of FIG. 155 (b). (A) is a front view of the special winning device according to the thirteenth embodiment, (b) is a perspective front view of the special winning device, and (c) is the CLVIc-CLVIc line of FIG. 156 (a). It is sectional drawing of the special prize-winning apparatus. It is an exploded perspective front view of a special winning device. (A) is a top view of the special winning device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device in the CLVIIIb-CLVIIIb line of FIG. 158 (a). (A) is a rear view of the rear case in the 14th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case in the CLIXb-CLIXb line of FIG. 159 (a). (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case in the sixteenth embodiment. (A) is a rear view of the rear case in the 17th embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the rear case in the CLXIb-CLXIb line of FIG. 161 (a). (A) is a front view of the rear case according to the eighteenth embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case. (A) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case. (A) is a schematic top view of the game board, and (b) is a schematic top view of the pachinko machine 10. It is an exploded perspective front view of the engaging member in 19th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a one-way sectional view taken along the line CLXVIb-CLXVIb of FIG. 165. It is an exploded perspective view of the back case and the rotating unit in 20th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the engaging member, and (b) is a rear view of the rotating unit and the engaging member. (A) is a rear view of the rotating unit and the engaging member, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case 20300. FIG. 170 is an exploded perspective view of the rear case and the rotating unit according to the 21st embodiment. (A) is a rear view of a rotating unit and an engaging member, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rotating unit in the CLXXIb-CLXXIb line of FIG. 171 (a). (A) is a rear view of a rotating unit and an engaging member, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a rear case and a rotating unit. (A) is a rear view of a rotating unit and an engaging member, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a rear case and a rotating unit. It is a perspective front view of an engaging member and a fixing member. (A) and (b) are front views of the rear case. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a rear case in the CLXXVIa-CLXXVIa line of FIG. 175 (b). It is a front view of the back case in 24th Embodiment, and FIG. 177 (b) is a sectional view of the back case in line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb of FIG. 177 (a). It is sectional drawing of the back case in the CLXXVIII-CLXXVIII line of FIG. 177 (b). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the game board in the 25th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the game board in the 26th embodiment. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the game board in 27th Embodiment. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the 28th embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the 29th embodiment. (A) is a sectional view of a general winning opening unit in the thirtieth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of a general winning opening unit in the thirty-first embodiment. It is an exploded perspective front view of the special prize apparatus in 32nd Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the special winning device, (b) is a top view of the special winning device, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device in the CLXXXVc-CLXXXVc line of FIG. 185 (a). Is. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a special winning device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device in the CLXXXVIb-CLXXXVIb line of FIG. 186 (a). (A) is an exploded perspective front view of the first path member in the 33rd embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of a special winning device. (A) is a front view of the game board in the 34th embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the game board in the CLXXXVIIIb-CLXXXVIIIb line of FIG. 188 (a). It is an exploded perspective front view of a game board. It is sectional drawing of the pachinko machine in the CXC-CXC line of FIG. 188. (A) is a front view of the game board in the 35th embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the game board in the CXCIb-CXCIb line of (a). It is an exploded perspective view of a special winning device. (A) to (c) are sectional views of the game board 13 in the CXCIII-CXCIII line of FIG. 191 (b). (A) is an exploded perspective front view schematically showing the game board in the 36th embodiment, and (b) is a sectional schematic view of the game board. (A) is an exploded perspective front view schematically showing the game board in the 37th embodiment, and (b) is a sectional schematic view of the game board. It is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member in 38th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the lower displacement member, (b) is a sectional view of the lower displacement member in the CXCVIIb-CXCVIIb line of FIG. 197 (a), and (c) is a sectional view of the lower displacement member of FIG. 197 (a). It is sectional drawing of the lower displacement member in the CXCVIIc-CXCVIIc line. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member in 39th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the lower displacement member, and FIGS. 199 (b) and 199 (c) are cross-sectional views of the lower displacement member. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the 40th embodiment, and FIG. 200 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the CCb-CCb line of FIG. 200 (a). (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the 41st embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the CCIb-CCIb line of FIG. 201 (a). (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the line CCIIa-CCIIa of FIG. 201 (a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the line CCIIb-CCIIb of FIG. 201 (a). be. It is an exploded perspective front view of the rear case in 42nd Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case in the CCIVb-CCIVb line of FIG. 204 (a). (A) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case in the CCVb-CCVb line of FIG. 205 (a). (A) is a rear view of the game board, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the CCVIb-CCVIb line of FIG. 206 (a). It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the internal structure of the special prize-winning apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display content which showed the fluctuation of a 16R probability variation jackpot in the 1st control example, and (b) is an example of the display mode of the rotation unit at the time of the 16R probability variation jackpot fluctuation. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display content which showed the fluctuation of the 6R probability variation jackpot in the first control example, and (b) is an example of the display mode of the rotating unit at the time of the 6R probability variation jackpot fluctuation. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display content showing the fluctuation during the CHARGE effect in the first control example, and (b) is the display content showing the change stop during the CHARGE effect in the first control example. It is a figure which showed an example. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display content showing the roulette effect after the special symbol is stopped in the first control example, and (b) is the display content showing the result of the roulette effect in the first control example. It is a figure which showed an example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content in which the button press valid period occurs in the first control example, and (b) is the display content when the button press valid period in the first control example elapses for a certain period. It is a figure which showed an example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents during button pressing in the first control example, and (b) is a fusion of button effects after the display of each button pressing effective period in the first control example matches. It is a figure which showed an example of the case. It is a timing chart which showed the period during the button pressing effect in the 1st control example. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display content of the button automatic pressing effect 1 in the first control example, and (b) shows an example of the display content of the button automatic pressing effect 2 in the first control example. It is a figure. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content of the button automatic pressing effect 3 in the 1st control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents when the attacker wins during the jackpot game in the first control example, and (b) is the case where the pseudo attacker wins during the jackpot game in the first control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content of. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the main controller in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows the RAM configuration of the main controller in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special symbol big hit random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a small hit random number table, and (c) is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the ordinary hit random number table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table, (c). Is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of the variation pattern selection table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table for normal / latent probability schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the variation pattern selection table for probability variation schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram shown in. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hold rank selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hold mode selection table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the treasure box mode selection table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the effect counter group schematically. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the display control device in 1st control example. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surfaces B to D. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the back surface E. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through-gate passage processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the general drawing look-ahead process which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the other winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern reception process which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the prize information-related processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the hold mode selection process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the treasure box mode selection process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-related processing which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the right attacker jackpot related processing executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pseudo-attacker effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the stop process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation effect setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the operation effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the charge effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the liquid crystal display execution management process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the operation effect management process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (A) is a flowchart showing the advance notice effect display process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the variable replacement switching process executed by the MPU in the display control device. Is. (A) is a flowchart showing the operation effect command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the button fusion display process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo winning display process executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control device. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the start of the point acquisition effect in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content indicating the end of the point acquisition effect. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the point acquisition effect on the reserved ball in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content showing the reach selection variation pattern. be. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the pseudo-variation in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content showing the point consumption re-variation. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the symbol HOLD selection screen in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the symbol HOLD screen in the second control example. .. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram shown in. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the point selection table with hold in the 2nd control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the point selection table without hold in the 2nd control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation point selection table in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the display position in the second control example. be. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit consumption point selection table in the second control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the deviated consumption point selection table in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern reception process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the point selection process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the advance notice setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special point selection process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the consumption reach selection process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the V interrupt process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 2nd control example. (A) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member in the third control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the third control example. It is a schematic diagram shown in. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content of the initial operation data in the 3rd control example schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the launch operation data in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the origin operation data in the third control example. be. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first operation data in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic showing the contents of the second operation data in the third control example schematically. It is a figure. It is a flowchart which showed the initial operation setting process which is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the initial discharge operation setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the operation control processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st operation setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge operation setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd operation setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the firing operation setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 4th control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the internal structure of the special prize-winning apparatus in the 4th control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine in the 4th control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of the effect executed corresponding to the game state in the 4th control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of display contents showing the effect in the latent effect A mode in the fourth control example, and (b) is the effect in the latent effect B mode in the fourth control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content which showed. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol per random number 4 table in the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small hit random number 4 table in the fourth control example schematically. It is a schematic diagram shown, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ordinary random number 4 table in the fourth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 table in the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table in the fourth control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents schematically. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection 4 table in the 4th control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the 4 tables for probability variation in the 4th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the latent accuracy 4 tables in the 4th control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the time saving 4 tables in the 4th control example. It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the RAM of the main control device in the 4th control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol change start processing 4 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol variation execution process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol change start processing 4 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process 4 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special figure 2 deviation variation processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol variation execution process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the ordinary symbol variation process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot end processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process 4 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the state command processing 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the pseudo-effect setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of the 1st control example.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 111, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following description, the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1 will be described with the front side of the paper as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper as the rear (back) side. Further, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left side (left). ) Side will be explained respectively. Further, the arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 4 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. The outer frame 11 has a front view (in order to support the inner frame 4).
(See FIG. 1) Metal hinges 18 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side, and the inner frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side with the side on which the hinge 18 is provided as an opening / closing axis.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to perform a ball game. In the inner frame 4, a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a are mounted on the game board 1.
A launch rail (not shown) or the like that guides the vehicle to the front region of 3 is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof.
And are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front door 5 and the lower plate unit 15. 5 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 4 and the lock of the front door 5 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyway 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 5c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses 8 is arranged on the back surface side of the front door 5, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, on the upper surface of the upper plate 17, the frame button 2
2 is provided. The frame button 22 is, for example, a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).
It is operated by the player when changing the stage of the effect displayed in, or changing the effect content of the super reach.

The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door 5 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 5c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. 2)
The certificate stamp or the like attached to the pachinko machine 10 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

Below the window portion 5c, a ball lending operation portion 40 is arranged. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. Pachinko machine 10
When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the banknote, the ball is lent out according to the operation. Will be.
Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium).
As long as there is a balance on the card or the like, the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17. Return button 43
Is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. The pachinko machine, a so-called cash machine, in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. Lower plate 5
On the right side of 0, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launching unit 112a, and a launch stop switch 51 for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period.
It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 by the change of electric resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 is formed on a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view.
In addition to a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills for ball guidance, rails 76, 77, general winning openings 63, 1st
The winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled and configured, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). Be done. The base plate 60 is made of wood made by laminating thin plate materials, and is formed so that the player cannot see various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof.
The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in the through hole of the game board 13. It is fixed from the front side with tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape on the front surface of the game board 13.
Is planted, and an arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed of a strip-shaped metal plate is planted at the inner position of the outer rail 77, similarly to the outer rail 77. The inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area (a winning opening or the like is arranged) on the front surface of the game board 13 which is partitioned by two rails 76, 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails.
The area where the fired ball flows down).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. The tip of the inner rail 76 (Fig. 2)
A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the upper left portion of the game board 13 to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. 1st
The symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first one. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable change jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or an off symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. In addition, a plurality of L
The ED is configured so that the emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED is different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is given to either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. The jackpot type determined here is the 15R probability variation jackpot,
4R probability variation jackpot and 15R normal jackpot are available. 1st symbol display device 37A, 3
In 7B, not only whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit is shown as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the big hit type is shown.

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high-probability state after. In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds.
It is a big hit that shifts to a low-probability state and shortens the time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations).

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a big hit is increased as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" means a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In the "low probability state", the time saving state (during the time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game that is neither probable nor shortened (
Neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol has increased).

During probabilistic change or shortening of time, not only the probability of winning the second symbol increases, but also the second winning opening 64
The time for opening the first electric accessory 640a accompanying 0 is also changed, and a longer time is set as compared with the normal time. When the first electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the second winning opening 640 is compared with the case where the first electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). The ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit. The change may be made so that the number of times that the first electric accessory 640a is opened is increased more than in the normal state. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the time when the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the first electric accessory per hit. At least one of the number of times the 640a is opened may be changed. In addition, the time during which the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the number of times the first electric accessory 640a is opened at one time are not changed during the probability change or the time reduction. It may be changed so that only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased as compared with the normal medium.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 has a first winning opening 64 and a second winning opening 64.
The first symbol display device 37A, triggered by any winning (starting winning) of any of the winning openings 640,
Passing of a ball of a first through gate 66 and a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays fluctuations of the third symbol while synchronizing with the fluctuation display in 37B. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of an LED that variablely displays the second symbol is provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three. Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device displays a symbol each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 66 (second symbol (second symbol).
(Not shown)), a variable display is performed in which the "○" symbol and the "×" symbol are alternately lit for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. In addition, if the result of the winning lottery is not correct, the second symbol display device will display the change of the third symbol and then "
The symbol of "x" is stopped and displayed.

The pachinko machine 10 is a first electric accessory 64 attached to the second winning opening 640 when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”).
It is configured so that 0a is in the operating state (opened) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the normal time.
Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the first electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the first one for each hit that increases the hit probability.
If the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or the shortening of the time by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a, the variation display of the second symbol is displayed. The time may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. 1st to
The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board can pass through the balls flowing down the game board. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, the second through gate 66
A lottery will be held to win the design. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and
If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.
If the result of the winning lottery is wrong, the symbol of "x" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the first through gate 66 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). ) Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol hold lamps are provided for the maximum number of hold lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37A,
It may be performed by using a part of 37B and the third symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. again,
The maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the first through gate 66 is not limited to four times.
It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins in the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 (not shown) is turned on due to the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In this embodiment, the first
The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same, but the ball wins in the first winning opening 64. The number of prize balls paid out when the ball is won and the number of prize balls paid out when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball is won in the first winning opening 64. To 3 pieces
The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins a prize in the second prize opening 640 may be configured as five.

Further, on the left side of the front view of the first winning opening 64, a third winning opening 82 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins, the third winning opening 82 can throw the winning ball to the first opening 511 of the distribution unit 500, which will be described later, via the throwing unit 600. That is, the third winning opening 82 is arranged in a state of communicating with the first opening 511, which will be described later.

A third electric accessory 82a is attached to the third winning opening 82. The third electric accessory 82a is configured to be rotationally displaced with respect to the game board 13 so as to be openable and closable, and is normally configured to be openable and closable.
a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win a prize in the third winning opening 82.
On the other hand, when a big hit is determined triggered by the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, the third electric accessory 82a is opened (expanded) for a predetermined time before, after, or during the big hit. The state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the third winning opening 82. In addition, the third winning opening 82
A sensor device SE1 that detects a passing ball is mounted on the downstream side of the above.

The timing of opening the third electric accessory 82a is the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 56.
It does not have to be performed with the winning of 40 as a trigger, and as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed with the passage of the ball of the first through gate 66 sleeping, the symbol of "○" is displayed with the second symbol. When displayed on the device, it may be open.

A first electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. This first electric accessory 64
0a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state).
Therefore, it is difficult for the ball to win the second prize opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 640a is displayed. It becomes an open state (enlarged state), and it becomes easy for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the probabilistic change and during the time reduction than during the normal period.
In addition, since the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, "○" is displayed in the variable display of the second symbol.
The symbol of is easily displayed, and the number of times that the first electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the first electric accessory 640a is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 640 is compared with the normal time.
It is possible to create a state in which the ball is easy to win.

Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first electric accessory 640a as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed").
), It is advantageous for the player to get many chances of a big hit lottery by winning a prize in the first winning opening 64 and aim to become a big hit.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning opening 640 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is launched toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the first through gate 66. It is advantageous for the player to open the first electric accessory 640a and aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). How to do "
It can be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because the way of hitting the ball can be changed.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10,
When the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a jackpot, the first winning symbol is set so that the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is set for a predetermined time (for example, 30).
It will be released until the lapse of seconds or until 10 balls are won.

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis.
And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64, for example. It may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

In the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82, is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. NS. The first out opening 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 1.
16 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. Board box 100 ~
The 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). again,
A sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal,
It is possible to know whether or not the board boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is equipped with a case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispenses balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the launch control device 11 is provided.
No. 2 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A RAM 203
In addition, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 3 are used by the MPU 201.
7A, 37B, the display setting in the third symbol display device 81, the lottery of the display result in the second symbol display device, and the like, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. Work area where values are stored (
It has a work area). The RAM 203 retains data by supplying a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off (backup).
All the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, and first symbol display devices 37A and 37B.
A solenoid consisting of a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a as an axis, and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory. 209 is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 and a power supply device 1 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and the like.
A RAM erase switch circuit 253, which will be described later, is connected to the MPU 201, and the MPU 201 has signals output from various switches 208 and R output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.
Various processes are executed based on the AM erasure signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is M, similarly to the RAM 203 of the main control device 110.
A stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the PU211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU211 are stored, and a work area (work area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I / O, etc. are stored. have. RAM 213 is a pachinko machine 10
Even after the power supply is cut off, the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) the data, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 also has a power failure signal SG from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like.
1 is configured to be input, and when the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as a power failure processing is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 is a ball launch unit 112 so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51.
It controls a. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off ().
The firing solenoid is excited according to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 on the condition that it is not operated), and the ball is launched with the strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51. ..

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). Display control device 114 such as display) and notice effect
It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed in 1. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. I / O port 2
A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to 25, respectively. The other device 228 includes drive motors KM1, KM2, and KM3.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22.
The display control device 114 is instructed to change the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81 or change the effect content at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113,
Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226 according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81, and the display content is made to correspond to the display content. Controls the lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and the third symbol display device 8 is based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113.
It controls the display such as the variation effect of the third symbol in 1. In addition, the display control device 1
14 appropriately transmits a display command notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are combined. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (FIG. 3).
It has a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with (see). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 is an alternating current 2 supplied from the outside.
Various switches such as various switches 208 and solenoid 20 that take in a voltage of 4 volts.
Generates 12 volt voltage for driving solenoids such as 9, motor, etc., 5 volt voltage for logic, backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage and backup voltage are generated. The required voltage is supplied to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 uses the MPU of the main controller 110 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like.
This is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 211 of the 201 and the payout control device 111. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Power supply unit 2
In 51, even after the DC stable 24 volt voltage becomes less than 22 volt, the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, is returned to the normal value for a sufficient time for executing the NMI interruption process. It is configured to maintain. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operating unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 10. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective front view of the operating unit 200 and the gaming board 13. 7 to 10 are front views of the operating unit 200.

In FIG. 7, the upper displacement member 940 is retracted upward and the lower displacement member 440 is retracted downward. In FIG. 8, the upper displacement member 940 rotates downward from the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 9, the displaced state is the state in which the lower displacement member 440 is projected from the state shown in FIG. 7 to the first overhang position described later, and in FIG. 10, the lower displacement member 440 is the maximum overhang. The states displaced to the second overhanging position, which is the position, are shown in the figure.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operation unit 200 is a back case 30 formed in a box shape.
Distribution unit 5A 00, which is provided with 0 and is attached to the back surface of the upper displacement unit 900, the lower displacement unit 400, the rotation unit 700, and the game board 13 in the internal space of the rear case 300.
And the throwing unit 600 are accommodated.

The rear case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front, and the wall portions 301 and 302 respectively. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. A front-view rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 can be visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

The upper displacement unit 900 is slidably arranged on a horizontally long base member 910 in front view rectangular arranged in the upper portion of the opening 301a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and the base member 910 thereof. With the upper displacement member 940, the opening 301a of the rear case 300 (that is, that is,
On the front side of the third symbol display device 81), an effect of rotationally displacing the upper displacement member 940 while sliding it is executably formed. A detailed description of the upper displacement unit 900 will be described later.

The lower displacement unit 400 is slidably arranged on a horizontally long base member 410 with a rectangular front view arranged in the lower portion of the opening 301a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and the base member 410 thereof. The lower displacement member 440 is provided, and the lower displacement member 440 is slidably and rotationally displaced on the front side of the opening 301a (that is, the third symbol display device 81) of the rear case. A detailed description of the lower displacement unit 400 will be described later.

The rotating unit 700 has a rear base 720 having a substantially rectangular front view arranged on the right side (arrow) of the front view of the lower portion of the opening 301a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and the front of the back base 720. The rotating body 800 is provided in the above, and the effect of rotationally displacing the rotating body 800 via a transparent plate portion formed on the lower right side of the front view of the game board 13 is visible to the player. A detailed description of the rotating unit 700 will be described later.

The throwing unit 600 is attached to the back side of the game board 13, and is the third winning opening 82 of the game board 13.
A path for throwing the game ball thrown from the back side of the game board 13 to the first opening 511 of the distribution unit 500, which will be described later, is formed.

The distribution unit 500 includes a path forming member 510 attached to the back surface side of the game board 13 and a base plate 520 arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed so as to face the path forming member 510.
It is provided with a distribution member 540 that distributes a game ball attached to the base plate 520 and flowing down between the path forming member 510 and the base plate 520 to each throwing path (second throwing path KR2 or third throwing path KR3). .. The game ball distributed to the distribution member 540 is sent to the lower displacement unit 400. A detailed description of the distribution unit 500 will be described later.

<The first decorative body and the second decorative body are arranged adjacent to each other in the front-rear direction>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16, the general winning opening unit 1 arranged on the game board 13
50 will be described.

First, the general winning opening unit 150 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12.
11 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13, and FIG. 12A is a general winning opening unit 1.
50 is a front view, FIG. 12 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the general winning opening unit 150 in line XIIb-XIIb of FIG. 12 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a center frame 86 arranged in an opening portion formed in the base plate 60. And a general winning opening unit 150.

The base plate 60 includes a first opening 60a that is opened in the central portion in a front view, and a second opening 60b that is opened downward in the gravity direction of the game region formed by the rail members 76 and 77. .. A center frame 86 is arranged in the first opening 60a, and the second opening 60 is provided.
A general winning opening unit 150 is arranged in b. Further, a sticker having a decoration (pattern, pattern, etc.) formed on the front side (arrow F direction side) is attached to the base plate 60 so that the player can visually recognize the decoration. The decoration on the front side of the base plate 60 is not limited to the sticker, and the decoration may be printed (painted) on the front surface of the base plate 60.

The general winning opening unit 150 is arranged in the game area (front of the base plate 60) of the game board 13, and the route of the game ball flowing down the game area can be changed. In addition, the general winning opening unit 1
50 is arranged at a position along the lower end in the gravity direction (arrow D direction side) in the front view (arrow B direction view) with respect to the game area formed by being surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77. Will be done. In addition, in FIGS. 13 to 16, the seal arranged on the base plate 60 is illustrated with the reference numeral of the decorative member 60c. Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative member 60c has a character (person).
Is drawn.

The general winning opening unit 150 has a main body portion 151 formed in a crescent shape when viewed from the front, and a main body portion 151.
The first standing portion 152, which is erected on the front side (arrow F direction side) from the end portion of the main body portion 151,
Arranged on the back side of the main body portion 151 and the second standing portion 153 extending from the end portion of the first standing portion 152 on the upper side in the gravity direction (arrow U direction side) toward the center side of the game area. Decorative member 15 to be
4 and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) general winning openings 63 formed on the front side of the main body portion 151.
And mainly prepare.

The main body portion 151 is set to have an outer shape slightly larger than the opening shape of the second opening 60b opened in the plate thickness direction of the base plate 60, and is covered with the opening of the second opening 60b.
It is arranged on the front side of 0. Further, the second opening 60b allows the game ball flowing into the general winning opening 63 arranged in the main body portion 151 to be thrown to the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60). Further, the main body portion 151 has a base plate 6 toward the outer end portion from the inner portion in the front view.
An inclined surface 151a inclined to the 0 side, a recess 151b recessed in the back surface on the base plate 60 side (arrow B direction side), and a back surface portion 151 forming the back surface of the main body portion 151 excluding the recessed portion 151b.
It is formed mainly with d and.

The inclined surface 151a is formed so as to be inclined by about 30 degrees with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 can be brought into contact with the inclined surface 151a and flowed down along the inclination of the inclined surface 151a, and can be moved to the front side of the main body portion 151.

Here, the inclined surface 151a is not formed at the end portion of the main body portion 151, and the side surface of the main body portion 151 is formed.
When formed perpendicular to the front surface of the base plate 60, the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 abuts (collides) with the side surface of the main body 151 from a direction orthogonal to the side surface of the main body 151. There is a risk that the abutting game ball will bounce in the direction opposite to the flow direction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the game ball abutting on the side surface of the main body portion 151 can be moved to the front side of the main body portion by the inclined surface 151a, the flow of the game ball flowing down the game area is temporary. It is possible to suppress the stagnation. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down from the front side of the base plate 60 to the front of the main body portion 151 of the general winning opening unit 150.

As described above, the back surface portion 151d is the back surface of the main body portion 151, and the recess 1 in the rear view
It is formed with a constant width around 51b. Further, the back portion 151d is a general winning opening unit 1.
In a state where the 50 is arranged on the base plate 60, it is arranged in contact with the front surface of the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c).

The recess 151b is recessed toward the front side (the side in the direction of arrow F). In addition, the recess 151b
Has a recessed bottom surface 151b2 which is a bottom surface in the recessed direction, and an inner side surface 151b3 which is erected from the outer edge of the recessed bottom surface 151b2 toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side).

The recessed bottom surface 151b2 is an adhesive surface of the decorative member 154 described later, and is formed as a flat surface parallel to the front surface of the main body portion 151. As a result, when the decoration of the decorative member 154 is visually recognized through the main body portion 151, the decoration of the decorative member 154 can be uniformly visually recognized.

The inner side surface 151b3 extends in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) in the front view. Further, the shape of the inner side surface 151b3 in the front view is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the decorative member 154 described later. As a result, when the decorative member 154 is arranged in the recess 151b, the decorative member 1
It is possible to prevent the 54 from protruding to the outside of the recess 151b. Therefore, the general winning opening unit 1
When the 50 is arranged on the base plate 60, the decorative member 154 is sandwiched between the back surface portion 151d and the base plate 60, so that a gap is formed between the back surface portion 151d of the main body portion 151 and the base plate 60. It can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the main body portion 151 from projecting to the front side of the base plate 60 from the normal arrangement position. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down from the front side of the base plate 60 to the front of the main body portion 151 of the general winning opening unit 150.

The recess 151b is a recess for accommodating the decorative member 154 described later in the recessed space, and the recessed depth (the recessed distance to the front side (arrow F direction side)) is larger than the thickness dimension of the decorative member 154. It is set large. Further, the recess 151b is formed from the end portion of the main body portion 151 in the front view to the main body portion 1.
It is recessed inside the 51 along the shape of the end portion of the main body portion 151 at a position separated by a certain distance.

Therefore, when the decorative member 154 is arranged inside the recess 151b, it is possible to prevent the back surface of the decorative member 154 from projecting toward the back surface side of the main body portion 151. Therefore, when the general winning opening unit 150 is arranged on the base plate 60, the decorative member 154 is sandwiched between the recessed bottom surface 151b2 and the base plate 60, so that the back surface portion 151d of the main body portion 151 and the base plate 60 are combined. It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two. As a result, it is possible to prevent the main body portion 151 from projecting to the front side of the base plate 60 from the normal arrangement position. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down from above the gravity direction (arrow U direction) of the main body portion 151 to the front of the main body portion 151 of the general winning opening unit 150.

The first upright portion 152 is erected on the front side (arrow F direction side) from the end portion of the main body portion 151 on the end portion side (inner rail 76 side) of the game area. The erection dimension of the first erection portion 152 is set to be substantially the same as the width dimension of the inner rail 76 planted in front of the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c) in the planting direction. Further, in the first standing portion 152, the distance between the front door 5 covering the front side of the game board 13 facing the glass unit 16 is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball flowing down the front side of the main body portion 151 is moved to the first standing portion 1 at the lower end portion in the gravity direction of the game region.
It can collide with 52. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the front side of the main body portion 151 from colliding with the inner rail 76, and it is possible to prevent the inner rail 76 from colliding with the game ball and being bent.

Here, the space between the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 facing each other is a space for guiding the game ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13, and the inner rail 7
The space for disposing reinforcement or the like between the facing 6 and the outer rail 77 is limited. Therefore, it is difficult to dispose the reinforcement for the purpose of preventing the inner rail 76 from bending, and there is a risk that the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the inner rail 76 and the inner rail 76 bends.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the general winning opening unit 150 arranged in the game area (
The first upright portion 152) makes it difficult for the game ball flowing down the game area to collide with the inner rail 76. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the distance between the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 from being changed by bending the inner rail 76. As a result, the game ball can be stably launched into the game area.

The second erection portion 153 extends downwardly and inclined toward the center of the game area (first winning opening 64) from the end portion of the first erection portion 152 on the upper side in the gravity direction (arrow U direction side) in the front view. It is installed (see Fig. 2). As a result, the game ball flowing down between the inner rail 76 and the center frame 83 facing each other (see FIG. 2) is placed on the upper surface (the surface on the arrow U direction side) of the downwardly inclined extending portion of the second standing portion 153. When the ball is thrown, the game ball can be rolled along the downward inclination of the second standing portion 153 and thrown toward the center of the game area. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area on the side opposite to each other (arrow L direction side) between the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 is won (inflow) into the first winning opening 64 arranged in the center of the game area. It can be made easy.

The decorative member 154 is formed in a plate shape and is adhered to the back surface side of the main body portion 151. Further, in the decorative member 154, a decoration formed on the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and a decoration continuous with the front view are formed on the front surface on the main body portion 151 side. As a result, the decoration formed on the base plate 60 can be visually recognized as the decoration of 1 together with the decoration of the decorative member 154. note that,
In the present embodiment, a part of the character (person) is drawn on the decorative member 154, and the character of the decorative member 60c and the character of the decorative member 154 can be visually recognized as one character.

Further, the decorative member 154 is formed of a light transmitting material. As a result, the light passing through the second opening 60b from the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 60 is incident from the back surface of the decorative member 154 and emitted from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the decorative member 154. Can be made to. Therefore, the decoration formed on the front surface of the decorative member 154 can be brightened so that the player can see it, and the player can easily see the decoration of the decorative member 154.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the base plate 60 and the general winning opening unit 150 will be described. FIG. 13 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in line XIII-XIII of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 13, the decorative member 154 is formed to have a larger outer shape than the opening shape of the second opening 60b of the base plate 60 in the front view. As a result, the general winning opening unit 150
Is disposed on the base plate 60, the end portion of the decorative member 154 is a recess 151b of the main body portion 151.
Is arranged between the recessed bottom surface 151b2 and the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c). Therefore,
When the adhesion between the main body portion 151 and the decorative member 154 is peeled off due to aged deterioration or the like, the decorative member 1
It is possible to prevent 54 from falling off from the game board 13.

Further, the decorative member 154 has a width dimension that overlaps with the base plate 60 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and has a circular shape of the base plate 60 into which a protrusion 155 projecting from the back surface of the main body portion 151 to be described later is inserted. It is set larger than the diameter of the opening 60 g (see FIG. 11). This will result in
It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the decoration of the decoration member 154 and the decoration member 60c in the front view due to the misalignment of the arrangement of the decoration member 154 with respect to the main body portion 151 or the misalignment of the position where the decoration member 60c is formed. .. As a result, the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decorative member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

Further, the three general winning openings 63 arranged in the main body 151 are connected to openings 514 to 516 of the distribution unit 500 (see FIG. 71) arranged on the back side of the game board 13.
The game ball that has won a prize in the general winning opening 63 is thrown to the fourth throwing path KR4 of the distribution unit 500. A detailed description of the distribution unit 500 will be described later.

Further, in the distribution unit 500, a substrate (not shown) having a light source capable of irradiating light on the front side is arranged on a base plate 520 (see FIG. 71), and the light emitted from the substrate is arranged on the base plate. The back surface of the general winning opening unit 150 is irradiated through the second opening 60b of 60.

Therefore, the second opening 60b is used as a space for irradiating the path of the game ball winning from the general winning opening 63 of the general winning opening unit 150 and the back surface of the general winning opening unit 150 with light. This eliminates the need to separately form an opening for throwing a game ball, an opening for passing light, and two openings, so that the entire back surface of the general winning opening unit 150 is irradiated with light. It can be made easier, and the main body 151 of the general winning opening unit 150
General winning openings 63 can be arranged in the entire area of. As a result, the general winning opening unit 150
In addition to being able to improve the degree of freedom in designing the above, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the decoration (decorative member 154) of the general winning opening unit 150 by emitting light from the entire area of the general winning opening unit 150.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, the decorative decorative member 154 connected to the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is a main body portion arranged along the front surface of the base plate 60. Since it is arranged on the back surface of 151, the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decorative member 154 can be arranged at positions adjacent to each other (approaching) in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).
As a result, the decorative member 60 is tilted from an angle inclined with respect to the front view of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as the upper end in the gravity direction of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1)).
When c and the decorative member 154 are visually recognized, the decorations of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 are visually recognized in a shifted manner as compared with the case where the decoration of the general winning opening unit is arranged in front of the general winning opening unit. Can be suppressed. As a result, the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 of the base plate 60
The connecting portion with the decoration of the above can be visually recognized by the player in the same positional relationship regardless of the viewpoint of the player, and the design of the game board 13 can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the connection between the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 will be described in detail. FIG. 14 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the gaming board 13 in the range XIV of FIG. In FIG. 14, the light path visually recognized by the player is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As described above, the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decorative member 154 are visually recognized by the player as one decoration in total. Therefore, in order for the player to visually recognize the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decorative member 154 as one decoration (pattern), it is necessary to suppress the positional deviation between the two decorations. However, when forming the decoration on the base plate 60 or when arranging the decorative member 154 on the main body portion 151, it is difficult to arrange the decoration in an accurate position (the same position each time). Therefore, when the general winning opening unit 150 is arranged on the base plate 60, the decorative member 154 is arranged so as to be displaced from the position of the decorative member 154 with respect to the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60, so that the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 are arranged. There is a problem that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decoration of 1 as a decoration of 1.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the end portion of the decorative member 154 is arranged on the back surface side of the inclined surface 151a. As a result, the decoration of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60 of the base plate 60
The connection portion with the decoration of c can be made difficult to be accurately recognized by the player (the connection portion is blurred and made visible to the player). Therefore, the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 can be recognized by the player as the decoration of 1.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, the connecting portion between the decoration of the decorative member 154 and the decoration of the decorative member 60c (hereinafter referred to as “boundary P1” (see FIG. 14)) is the inclined surface 1 of the main body portion 151.
It is located on the back side of 51a. Therefore, the light emitted from the boundary P1 toward the player's viewpoint and the connecting portion between the front surface of the main body 151 and the inclined surface 151a (hereinafter referred to as “boundary P2” (see FIG. 14)) of the player The light emitted toward the viewpoint can be the light reflected at different positions of the decorative member 60c or the decorative member 154 (that is, on the path of the light emitted from the boundary P1 toward the player's viewpoint). In addition, it is possible to suppress the formation of the boundary P2).

Therefore, at the boundary P1, the misalignment of the decorative member 60c with respect to the decorative member 154 is easily recognized by the player as the misalignment of the decoration, and at the boundary P2, the misalignment of the decoration due to the difference in the refraction direction of the light is easily recognized by the player. Since the decorations visually recognized by the player from the respective positions of the boundary P1 and the boundary P2 can be the decorations at different positions, the misalignment of the decorations at the boundary P1 and the boundary P2 is the same at the same position. It can be suppressed from being visually recognized by the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being recognized by the player because the misalignment of the decoration at the boundary P1 and the misalignment of the decoration at the boundary P2 are combined to increase the amount of the misalignment of the decoration. As a result, the decoration of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as the decoration of 1, and the design of the game board 13 can be improved.

Further, by arranging the boundary P1 on the back side of the inclined surface 151a, from the player's point of view, the connecting portion between the decorative member 60c and the main body portion 151 (hereinafter referred to as "boundary P3" (see FIG. 14)) and The boundary P1 can be arranged between the boundary P2 and the boundary P2. Therefore, during the position shift position (boundary P2, P3) of the decoration due to the refraction of the light when the light is emitted from the main body portion 151,
The boundary P1 can be arranged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the area to be recognized as being displaced from the position of the decoration from being extended. That is, it is possible to limit the area where the decoration is visually recognized out of position with respect to the front surface of the game board 13. As a result, the misaligned area of the decoration can be reduced with respect to the game area of the game board 13, so that the decoration of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as the decoration of 1.

In this embodiment, the face of the character is decorated on the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60.
The body of the character decorated on the decorative member 60c is decorated on the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 150. That is, the outline of the decoration is positioned at the connecting portion of the decoration between the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the positional deviation of the connecting portion between the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 is the contour line of the decoration. As a result, the decorative member 6
The decoration of 0c and the decorative member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as the decoration of 1.

Further, in this embodiment, the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 is decorated up to the neck of the character's face, the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 150, the decorative member 154, and the decorative member 6
The clothes worn by the body of the character decorated in 0c are decorated, and the color of the character's face (neck) and the clothes are different (in this embodiment, the face is flesh-colored and the clothes are black). As a result, by setting the misalignment of the connecting portion between the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 as a portion having a different hue, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 are separated. Can be done. As a result, the decoration of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as the decoration of 1.

As described above, the main body portion 151 is provided with a recess 151b on the back surface side, and a decorative member 154 is disposed inside the recess 151b. Further, the shape of the inner side surface (inner side surface 151b3) of the recess 151b is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the decorative member 154 in the front view. Thereby, when the decorative member 154 is arranged in the main body portion 151, the inner side surface 151b3 of the recess 151b can be used as a guide (positioning). As a result, when the decorative member 154 is attached to the main body portion 151, it is possible to prevent the arrangement of the decorative member 154 from being displaced with respect to the main body portion 151.

Further, on the back surface side of the main body portion 151, protrusions 155 (see FIG. 15) protruding in a columnar shape are formed at a plurality of positions (three places (see FIG. 15) in the present embodiment). The protrusion 155 is a positioning protrusion that positions the general winning opening unit 150 with the base plate 60 when the general winning opening unit 150 is arranged in the base plate 60, and is inserted into the recess 60d recessed in the base plate 60. Also, the protrusion 155
At least one place (one place in this embodiment) is the recessed bottom surface 151b2 of the recess 151b.
It is projected from and inserted into an opening formed in the decorative member 154. Therefore, the protrusion 155 can be used for positioning when the decorative member 154 is arranged on the main body portion 151.

Therefore, the protrusion 155 can be used for positioning when the general winning opening unit 150 is arranged on the base plate 60, and can be positioned when the decorative member 154 is arranged on the main body portion 151. Therefore, since the positioning portion when arranging the decorative member 154 on the front side of the decorative member 60c can be the same portion, the decoration of the decorative member 60c and the decoration of the decorative member 154 are misaligned. Can be suppressed. As a result, the decoration of the decorative member 60c and the decoration of the decorative member 154 can be combined and easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

Further, the protrusion 155 projecting from the recessed bottom surface 151b2 has a range E1 described later (FIG. 15).
It is formed in the area of (see) (the area to which the adhesive tape 154a is attached). As a result, the main body 15
When arranging the decorative member 154 in 1, with the protrusion 155 inserted in the opening of the decorative member 154, one part of the edge portion of the decorative member 154 is arranged so as to be aligned with the inner side surface 151b3 of the recess 151b. This makes it possible to position the decorative member 154 at two locations with respect to the main body portion 151. Therefore, it is not necessary to align the edges of the decorative member 154 at two positions on the inner side surface 151b3 of the recess 151b and dispose the decorative member 154 on the main body portion 151. As a result, the work of arranging the decorative member 154 on the main body portion 151 can be simplified.

Next, the adhesion between the main body portion 151 and the decorative member 154 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16. FIG. 15 is a rear view of the general winning opening unit 150, and FIG. 16 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the range XIV of FIG. In addition, in FIG. 15, the decorative member 1
The range of the adhesive tape 154a attached to the 54 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line with the reference numeral E1. Further, in FIG. 14, the light path visually recognized by the player is illustrated by a two-dot chain line. In the present embodiment, the adhesive tape 154a is formed of the light-transmitting double-sided tape, and the range E is formed.
It is affixed to 1.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the adhesive tape 154a for adhering the decorative member 154 and the main body portion 151 is attached along the end portion of the decorative member 154 with a constant width. As a result, in the area where the adhesive tape 154a is not attached (the part other than the range E1), the adhesive tape 154
A gap (space) having a predetermined width is formed between the main body portion 151 (concave bottom surface 151b2) and the decorative member 154 (front surface of the decorative member) by the thickness of a.

Further, the adhesive tape 154a passes through the boundary P3 from the end of the decorative member 154 and passes through the inclined surface 1
It is adhered to the region beyond the virtual line PK1 (see FIG. 14) orthogonal to 51a. This will result in
The range E1 (the end of the decorative member 154) to which the adhesive tape 154a is attached to the portion where the light emitted from the inclined surface 151a passing through the main body portion 151 is affected by the decoration of the decorative member 154 (the portion where the wavelength is changed) is attached. Department) can be. As a result, even when the player visually recognizes the general winning opening unit 150 from an angle equal to or higher than a predetermined angle, the decorative member 60c and the decoration of the decorative member 154 can be easily visually recognized by the player as one decoration.

Here, when the player visually recognizes the game board 13 from a position higher than usual (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as the upper end in the gravity direction of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1)), FIG. As shown, the light L exiting from the inclined surface 151a toward the player's line of sight repeatedly reflects the front and back surfaces of the main body portion 151 and passes through the inside of the main body portion 151. In this case, the decorative member 15
If the entire front surface of 4 is in contact with the main body portion 151 via the adhesive tape 154a, the wavelength of light is changed by the decoration of the decorative member 154 each time it is reflected on the decorative member 154 side. Therefore, the light that passes through the inside of the main body portion 151 and is emitted from the inclined surface 151a is the decorative member 15.
It cannot be reflected only by the change of wavelength due to the decoration of the end of 4. Therefore, the inclined surface 151
Since the decoration recognized by the player from a is different from the wavelength of the decoration visually recognized by the player from the front of the main body 151, there is a problem that the decorations are not connected between the main body 151 and the inclined surface 151a. rice field.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the range E1 is the adhesive portion of the decorative member 154 to the main body portion 151.
By doing so, it is possible to prevent the light L that reflects and passes through the inside of the main body portion 151 from being affected by the decoration of the decorative member 154 (so that the wavelength of the light is not changed). As a result, as shown in FIG. 16, the light emitted from the inclined surface 151a passing through the main body portion 151 attaches the adhesive tape 154a to the portion affected by the decoration of the decorative member 154 (the portion where the wavelength is changed).
Can be set to the range E1 (the end of the decorative member 154) to which the above is affixed, and can be easily seen by the player as being connected to the decoration of the inclined surface 151a which is visible to the player and the decoration adjacent to the decoration. As a result, the design of the game board 13 can be improved.

Next, the special winning device 550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 36. First, a method of arranging the special winning device 550 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective front view of the center frame 86.

As shown in FIG. 17, the center frame 86 has a base frame 86a formed in a substantially circular frame shape surrounding the central opening of the base plate 60, and a projecting portion protruding outward in the radial direction of the base frame 86a. It is configured to include 86b.

The base frame 86a has a shape along the central opening of the base plate 60, a part of the base frame 86a is inserted inside the central opening, and a portion excluding a part of the base frame 86a is the base plate 60. It is arranged on the base plate 60 in a state of projecting to the front side of the above.

The projecting portion 86b is projected on the right side of the front view (the side in the direction of the arrow R) with respect to the game area of the game board 13. As a result, the special winning device 550 arranged in the projecting portion 86b can be arranged on the right side of the front view (on the side in the direction of the arrow R) with respect to the game area, and when hitting right in the special game state. A part of the throwing path of the game ball can be configured by the special winning device 550.

Further, the projecting portion 86b is located above the opening 86b1 that opens in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) and above the opening 86b1 (arrow U direction) and toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side). It mainly includes a recess 86b2 to be recessed.

A part of the first unit 551 of the special winning device 550, which will be described later, is inserted into the opening 86b1. As a result, the first unit 551 can be connected to the second unit 552 of the special winning device 550 arranged on the back surface side of the projecting portion 86b via the opening 86b1.

The recess 86b2 is capable of accommodating a part of the first unit 551 of the special winning device 550, which will be described later, inside. Further, in the recess 86b2, a detection device 86b3 capable of detecting the passage of a game ball is provided.
Is arranged. Thereby, the game ball passing through the portion accommodated inside the recess 86b2 of the first unit 551 can be detected.

The special winning device 550 is arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the projecting portion 86b of the center frame 86 and the back side (arrow B direction side) of the projecting portion 86b. The second unit 552 is mainly provided with the second unit 552.

The first unit 551 is provided with a space (path) through which the game ball can flow, and a part of the first unit 551 is arranged in the game area of the game board 13. Further, the first unit 551 is arranged on the center frame 86 by a screw inserted through the second unit 552. A detailed description of the arrangement method of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 will be described later.

Next, the configuration of the first unit 551 of the special winning device 550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 20. 18 (a) is a front view of the first unit 551, and FIG. 18 (b) is a front view.
) Is a side view of the first unit 551, and FIG. 18 (c) is a rear view of the first unit 551. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective front view of the first unit 551, and FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective rear view of the first unit 551.

As shown in FIGS. 18 to 20, the first unit 551 includes a first path member 560 arranged on the front side and a second path member 570 arranged on the back side of the first path member 560. , A third path member 580 arranged on the back surface of the second path member 570, and the third path member 580 are mainly provided.

The first path member 560 is formed with a front plate 564 formed in a plate shape along the front surface of the game area of the game board 13 and a substantially U-shaped cross section opened on the upper side (arrow U direction side). The first receiving section 561, the second receiving section 562, and the third receiving section 563 projecting from the upper end to the back side of the face plate 564, and the first receiving section 561, the second receiving section 562, and the third receiving section 563 thereof. A first wall portion 565 formed in a row on the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the portion 563 and extending along a partial end portion of the front plate 564, and a lower portion of the first wall portion 565 thereof. It mainly comprises two sets of second wall portions 566 and third wall portions 567, which are formed in the above and are projected from two places separated by a predetermined interval.

The front plate 564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side of the flow path of the game ball formed between the second path member 570 or the third path member 580, which will be described later, and is formed of a light transmitting member. NS. As a result, the player can move the game ball flowing down inside the first unit 551 to the front plate 564.
It can be visually recognized through (through).

Further, the front plate 564 includes a guide portion 564a projecting from the second path member 570 side (back surface side (arrow B direction side)).

The guide portion 564a is provided with a front plate 564 by a game ball flowing down inside the first unit 551.
It is a wall portion that suppresses the entire wall surface of the wall surface from becoming dirty, and is a second path member 570 or a third path member described later.
It is extended along the flow path of the game ball flowing down between the paths facing the path member 580. Further, the guide portion 564a is projected at a position where the radius of the game ball is separated from the rolling surface of the game ball flowing down the first unit 551. In other words, the guide portion 564a is projected at a position substantially the same as the center position of the game ball flowing down the first path member 560. As a result, the portion where the front plate 564 and the game ball come into contact with each other can be limited to the protruding tip portion of the guide portion 564a. Therefore, the front plate 5
It is possible to suppress the occurrence of scratches and the transfer of dirt adhering to the game ball by contacting the entire area of 64 with the game ball. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down inside the first path member 560 via the front plate 564.

The first receiving unit 561, the second receiving unit 562, and the third receiving unit 563 are portions that receive the game ball flowing down from the gaming area above the first unit 551 (in the direction of arrow U) into the inside of the first unit 551. , The upper opening is set to a size larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562, and the third receiving portion 563 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) at the end portion on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the front plate 564. NS.

The first receiving unit 561 is set to have a larger receiving width (width dimension in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction)) of the game ball than the second receiving unit 562 and the third receiving unit 563. As a result, the game ball flowing into the special winning device 550 is more likely to flow into the first receiving unit 561 than the second receiving unit 562 or the third receiving unit 563.

Further, the first receiving portion 561 is communicated with a flow path formed inside the first unit 551. As a result, the game ball received by the first receiving unit 561 is flowed down inside the first unit 551. The flow path of the game ball of the first unit 551 will be described later.

The second receiving section 562 and the third receiving section 563 are communicated with a flow path formed inside the second unit 552, which will be described later. As a result, the game ball received by the second receiving unit 562 and the third receiving unit 563 is flowed down inside the second unit 552. The second unit 55
The flow path of No. 2 will be described later.

The first wall portion 565 is an inner wall that forms a space for throwing a game ball between facing the fourth wall portion 573 formed on the second path member 570, which will be described later. One end of the first wall portion 565 is connected to the lower side of the first receiving portion 561 described above, and the other end side extends in the left-right direction (arrow LR) over the lower side of the second receiving portion 562 and the third receiving portion 563. It is mainly composed of an upper side wall portion 565a extending in the direction) and a curved wall portion 565b formed by being curved in a substantially C shape in the rear view and connected to the upper side wall portion 565a.

The upper side wall portion 565a is an inner wall that covers the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573 (the surface on the arrow U direction side), which will be described later, above the rolling surface when the game ball rolls, and is the fourth wall portion 573. It is formed at a position separated from the diameter of the game ball on the upper side (arrow U direction side) in the direction orthogonal to the upper surface of the game ball.

The curved wall portion 565b is an inner wall that changes the rolling direction of the game ball that rolls on the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573, which will be described later, and is formed at a position facing the rolling side end portion of the fourth wall portion 573. NS. Further, the curved wall portion 565b is formed in a semicircular shape centered on the rolling side end portion of the fourth wall portion 573. As a result, the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573 can be guided to the lower surface side of the fourth wall portion 573 by flowing down along the inner wall of the curved wall portion 565b, and the rolling thereof can be performed. The moving direction can be opposite to the rolling direction of the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573.

The second wall portion 566 is an inner wall forming a space of a path branching from the main flow path of the game ball flowing down inside the first unit 551, and is a pair of wall portions projecting from the back surface of the front plate 564. The distance between the two is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. This makes it possible to increase the number of routes flowing down the first unit 551.

The third wall portion 567 is a wall portion forming an inner surface of a path branching from the main throwing path (main path SK3) of the game ball flowing down the inside of the first unit 551, and protrudes from the back surface of the front plate 564. The distance between the pair of wall portions facing each other is set to a dimension slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to increase the path of the game ball flowing down the first unit 551.

Further, the second wall portion 566 and the third wall portion 567 each have a downstream end as the first unit 5.
It is arranged on the opposite side of the 51 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). As a result, the game ball can be thrown to both sides of the first unit 551 in the left-right direction from the branch passage described later.

The second path member 570 includes a plate-shaped base plate 571 facing the front plate 564 of the first path member 560, and a fourth wall portion 5 projecting from the front surface of the base plate 571 toward the first path member 560.
73, a fifth wall portion 574 projecting downward from the fourth wall portion 573 at a predetermined distance, and a fifth wall portion 574 projecting downward from the fifth wall portion 574 at a predetermined distance. The sixth wall portion 575 to be formed is mainly provided.

The base plate 571 is arranged at a position slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball from the front plate 564 of the first path member 560. As a result, the game ball can flow down between the front plate 564 and the base plate 571. Further, the base plate 571 has a first opening portion 571 that opens at a position corresponding to each of the first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562, and the third receiving portion 563.
a, the second opening 571b and the third opening 571c, the fourth opening 571d opening below the first opening 571a, and opening above each of the fifth wall portion 574 and the sixth wall portion 575. 5th opening 571e and 6th opening 571f, 5th wall 574 and 6th wall 575
It is provided with a recessed portion 571 g, which is located between the two and is recessed on the back surface side.

The first opening 571a, the second opening 571b, and the third opening 571c provide game balls that flow into the first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562, and the third receiving portion 563 of the first path member 560 described above. It is an opening through which the base plate 571 is passed to the back surface side.

Further, the base plate 571 has a first opening 571a, a second opening 571b, and a third opening 5.
A first rolling portion 576, a second rolling portion 577, and a third rolling portion 578 projecting from the lower end portion of the 71c to the back surface side are provided. As a result, the game ball that passes through the first opening 571a is attached to the third path member 580, which will be described later, and the game ball that passes through the second opening 571b or the third opening 571c is attached to the third path member 580, which will be described later.
The ball is thrown to the second unit 552, which will be described later.

The first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d have a third path member 580, which will be described later, on the back surface side.
Part of is overturned. As a result, the game ball passing through the first opening 571a is thrown from the fourth opening 571d to the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 571.

The fourth wall portion 573 projects from the base plate 571 along the lower end portion of the fourth opening 571d, and extends in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). Further, the fourth wall portion 573 is formed so that the upper surface is inclined downward from the side of the fourth opening 571d opened on the left side of the front view of the base plate 571 toward the right side of the front view (the side in the direction of arrow R). .. As a result, the game ball that passes through the fourth opening 571d and is thrown to the front side of the base plate 571 is placed on the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573, and the base plate 571 is tilted by the inclination of the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573. You can throw the ball to the right side of (arrow R direction side).

The fifth wall portion 574 is a portion serving as a rolling surface of the game ball thrown from the curved wall portion 565b of the first wall portion 565 described above, and is a portion of the game ball in a direction orthogonal to the lower surface of the fourth wall portion 573. It is projected at a position separated below the diameter, and is extended in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) of the base plate 571. Further, the upper surface (the surface on the arrow U direction side) of the fifth wall portion is inclined downward as it goes from the curved wall portion 565b side (arrow R direction side) to the recessed portion 574g side (arrow L direction side) described later. Is formed. As a result, the game ball thrown from the curved wall portion 565b to the upper surface of the fifth wall portion 574 can be rolled to the recessed portion 574g side. Further, the fifth wall portion 574 includes a first receiving recess 574a and a second receiving recess 574b that are recessed downward on the rolling surface of the game ball.

The first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b are arranged side by side in the extending direction of the fifth wall portion 574. Further, the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b are set so that the recessed width and the recessed depth are larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, a fifth opening 571e that opens into the base plate 571 is formed inside the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b. As a result, the game ball flowing into the first receiving recess 574a or the second receiving recess 574b passes through the fifth opening 571e and is sent to the back surface side of the base plate 571.

The recessed portion 574g is formed above the downstream end portion (the end portion on the arrow L direction side) of the fifth wall portion 574, and a gaming ball that rolls on the upper surface of the fifth wall portion 574 is recessed. The ball can flow into the inside of the 574 g and be thrown to the upper part of the sixth wall portion 575 formed below the recessed portion 574 g (in the direction of arrow D).

The sixth wall portion 575 is a portion that becomes a rolling surface of a game ball that rolls on the fifth wall portion 574 and is thrown to the recessed portion 574 g, and is a game ball downward from the lower surface of the fifth wall portion 574. It is projected from the base plate 571 at a position separated from the diameter of the base plate 571, and extends in the left-right direction (arrow LR) of the base plate 571. Further, the sixth wall portion 575 is formed with its upper surface inclined downward from the recessed portion 574 g side (arrow L direction side) toward the above-mentioned third wall portion 567 side. As a result, the recessed portion 574
The game ball thrown from g to the upper surface of the sixth wall portion 575 can be rolled toward the throwing path side formed by the third wall portion 567. Further, the sixth wall portion 575 includes a third receiving recess 575a and a fourth receiving recess 575b that are recessed downward on the rolling surface of the game ball.

The third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b are arranged side by side in the extending direction of the sixth wall portion 575. Further, the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b are set so that the recessed width and the recessed depth are larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, a sixth opening 571f that opens into the base plate 571 is formed inside the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b. As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b passes through the sixth opening 571f and is sent to the back surface side of the base plate 571.

The third path member 580 includes a first lining member 581 arranged on the back surface of the second path member 570 on the upper side in the gravity direction (arrow U direction side) and a lower side in the gravity direction of the second path member 570 (arrow). The second lining member 582 arranged on the back surface of the D direction side), the first lining member 581, and the second lining member 5
A first drive unit 583 arranged between 82 and a second drive unit 584 arranged on the back surface of the second lining member 582 are mainly provided.

The first covering member 581 includes a curved portion 581a arranged on the back surface side of the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d described above, and a plate-shaped mounting portion 58 connected to the lower side of the curved portion 581a.
Mainly includes 1b.

The curved portion 581a includes a first opening 571a and a fourth opening 571d (second path member 570).
) Is curved in a U-shaped cross section with the side open, and the first rolling portion 576 is disposed inside the curved portion (see FIG. 24 (a)). Further, the curved inner wall surface of the curved portion 581a and the first rolling portion 576.
The distance from the tip of the protrusion is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the first
A game ball that rolls the rolling portion 576 can be made to flow down along the inner wall of the curved portion 581a and thrown to the lower side of the first rolling portion 581a. Therefore, by throwing the game ball to the curved portion 581a that curves toward the back side, the rolling time of the game ball can be lengthened. As a result, even when the rolling surface of the game ball cannot be secured on a plane parallel to the game area of the game board 13, the rolling speed of the game ball can be slowed down.

Further, the curved portion 581a is arranged at a position where the lower end portion is slightly higher than the lower inner edge of the fourth opening portion 571d. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has flowed down from the first rolling portion 576 along the inner wall of the curved portion 581a and has been thrown into the fourth opening 571d to flow back and flow into the inside of the curved portion 581a.

The mounting portion 581b is formed with through holes 581b1 through which screws for fastening the first lining member 581 to the back surface of the second path member 570 are inserted. Further, the mounting portion 581b has a mounting portion 581b.
A columnar body 551a is provided so as to project in a columnar shape toward the back surface side. The columnar body 551a is provided with a screw hole at the tip thereof for fastening the second unit 552, which will be described later, to the first unit 551. As a result, the screw inserted from the back surface side of the second unit 552 can be screwed into the columnar body 551a to fasten the first unit 551 and the second unit 552.

The second covering member 582 is a second curved portion 582a arranged on the back surface side of the sixth opening 571f.
And the back side wall portion 58 arranged on the back side of the first receiving recess 574a to the fourth receiving recess 575b.
Mainly equipped with 2b.

The second curved portion 582a is formed by being curved in a U-shaped cross section in which the sixth opening 571f (second path member 570) side is opened (see FIG. 24 (c)). Further, the second curved portion 582a is provided with an erection wall 582a1 erected from the front side to the back side inside the U-shape. Erecting wall 5
Due to 82a1, the internal space of the second curved portion 582a is the first on the left side (arrow L direction side) when viewed from the front.
It is divided into a space 582a2 and a second space 582a3 formed next to the first space 582a2 with the erection wall 582a1 in between.

The first space 582a2 and the second space 582a3 are spaces larger than the diameter of the game ball, and are formed from the front side to the back side. In addition, the first space 582a2 and the second space 58
2a3 is connected on the back side. Further, the inner surface of the first space 582a2 is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the back surface side, and the inner surface of the second space 582a3 is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the front side. As a result, the game ball thrown from the recessed portion 571g to the second curved portion 582a is rolled to the back side due to the inclination of the first space 582a2 and is second at the end portion on the back side.
The ball is thrown into the second space 582a3 by the bending of the curved portion 582a, rolled to the front side by the inclination of the second space 582a3, passes through the opening of the sixth opening 571f, and is thrown to the front side of the base plate 571. ..

The back side wall portion 582b is thrown into the first receiving recess 574a to the fourth receiving recess 575b, and the ball is thrown into the first receiving recess 574a to the fourth receiving recess 575b.
It is a wall portion on the back side of the throwing path that guides the game ball passing through the fifth opening 571e and the sixth opening 571f to the lower side of the special winning device 550. As a result, the first receiving recesses 574a to the fourth
The game ball thrown into the receiving recess 575b can be collected. Therefore, the first receiving recess 5
The ball thrown into the 74a to the fourth receiving recess 575b, passes through the detection devices SE3 to SE6 described later, and gives the player a game value. The game ball flows down the game area again, and the game value is given to the player again. It can be prevented from being done.

The first drive unit 583 includes a first solenoid 583a having an axis that is displaced in the front-rear direction by electric power, a first variable plate 583b connected to the axis of the first solenoid 583a, and a first.
It mainly includes a first protective member 583c that surrounds the solenoid 583a and the first variable plate 583b.

The first variable plate 583b is a rectangular plate member long in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction), and is displaced in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) according to the displacement of the axis of the first solenoid 583a. ..
Further, in a state where the first variable plate 583b is projected to the front side, the tip of the first variable plate 583b is inserted into the above-mentioned fifth opening 571e, and the first receiving recesses 574a and the second are received.
It is arranged above the receiving recess 574b. As a result, when the first variable plate 583b is projected to the front side, the first variable plate 583b can prevent the game ball from flowing into the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b.

The first protective member 583c is formed in a box shape in which the second path member 570 side is open, and a mechanism for connecting the shaft of the first solenoid 583a and the first variable plate 583b is arranged inside the first protective member 583c. Further, the first protective member 583c includes a plurality of through holes 583c1 that penetrate in the front-rear direction.

The through hole 583c1 is a portion through which a screw for fastening the first drive unit 583 to the second path member 570 is inserted. The screw inserted through the through hole 583c1 is the first covering member 581.
Through the through hole 581b1 or the through hole 582b1 of the second covering member 582, the second through hole 581b1 is inserted.
It is screwed into a hole formed in the path member 570. Therefore, by arranging the first drive unit 583 in the second path member 570, the first lining member 581 and the second lining member 582 can be arranged in the second path member 570. As a result, the number of screw fastening portions of the first lining member 581 and the second lining member 582 can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Further, since the first lining member 581 or the second lining member 582 can be sandwiched between the second path member 570 and the first drive unit 583, the first drive unit 583 can be placed in a state of being sandwiched between the second path member 570 and the first drive unit 583.
When forcibly removed from the special winning device 550, the first lining member 581 or the second lining member 5
It is easy to make the fastening between the 82 and the second path member 570 incomplete so that the game ball cannot pass through the first lining member 581 or the second lining member 582. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued in a state of being cheated.

Like the first drive unit 583, the second drive unit 584 includes a second solenoid 584a having an axis that is displaced in the front-rear direction by electric power, and a second variable plate 584b connected to the axis of the second solenoid 584a. It mainly includes a second protective member 584c that covers the periphery of the second solenoid 584a and the second variable plate 584b.

The second variable plate 584b is formed of a plate-like body that is long in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) and is formed by being bent like a crank in a front view. Further, in a state where the second variable plate 584b is projected to the front side, the tip of the second variable plate 584b is the sixth opening 57 described above.
It is inserted into 1f and is arranged above the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b. As a result, when the second variable plate 584b is projected to the front side, the second variable plate 584b can prevent the game ball from flowing into the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b.

The second protective member 584c is formed in a box shape in which the second path member 570 side is open, and a mechanism for connecting the shaft of the second solenoid 584a and the second variable plate 584b is arranged inside the second protective member 584c. Further, the second protective member 584c includes a back side wall portion 584c1 that covers the back side of the throwing path formed by the second wall portion 566 of the first path member 560. As a result, the back side wall portion 584c
Not only can the throwing path be formed between 1 and the second wall portion 566, but also the back side wall portion 584c1 and the second wall portion
The wall portion 566 can cover the second path member 570. As a result, the first unit 55
Detection device SE3 to which an illegal member is inserted from the side surface of 1 and is arranged in the second path member 570.
It is possible to easily suppress fraudulent activities in SE6.

Next, the throwing path of the game ball flowing into the inside of the first unit 551 from the first receiving unit 561 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 24. 21 is an XXI-XX of FIG. 18 (b).
It is sectional drawing of the 1st unit 551 in line I. FIG. 22 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 shown in FIG. 21. FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 on the line XXIII-XXIII of FIG. 18B. FIG. 24 (a) shows XXIVa-XXIV of FIG.
It is sectional drawing of the 1st unit 551 in line a, and FIG. 24 (b) is XXIVb of FIG.
It is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 in the −XXIVb line, and FIG. 24 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 in the XXIVc-XXIVc line of FIG.

The game ball flowing into the first unit flows down the main path SK1 to SK6 of the game ball in the order of main path SK1, main path SK2, main path SK3, main path SK4, main path SK5, and main path SK6. Alternatively, the main route SK from the main route SK3 on the way down the main routes SK1 to SK6.
It flows into the sub-path HK1 communicating with 3 and flows down the sub-path HK1. Or the main route SK
1-A sub-route HK communicating from the main route SK5 in the middle of flowing down the main route SK6 to the main route SK5
It flows into either 2 or the sub-path HK3 and flows down either the sub-path HK2 or the sub-path HK3.

Further, the sub-pathways HK1 to HK3 are provided with detection devices SE3 to SE6 for detecting the passage of the game ball, and the detection of the game ball by the detection devices SE3 to SE6 gives the player a predetermined game value. Granted. In the present embodiment, a player is given a game value by a predetermined number of prize balls.

As shown in FIGS. 21 to 24, the main path SK1 is a curved portion 581 of the first lining member 581.
It is a space formed by a and the first rolling portion 576 (see FIG. 24 (a)) of the second path member 570, and communicates the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d. As described above, the curved portion 581a is formed by being curved in a U-shaped cross section in which the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d (second path member 570) side are opened, and the game passes through the main path SK1. The ball can be diverted to the back side. As a result, when the game ball passes through the space where the area in the front view is limited (the inside of the first opening 571a or the fourth opening 571d, the amount of movement of the game ball in the left-right direction can be reduced. It is possible to make it easier for the player to see the game ball passing through the main route SK1. This makes it easier for the player to see the game ball passing through the first unit 551 and enhances the interest of the player. can.

Further, as will be described later, since the game ball flowing into the main route SK1 is given a predetermined game value to the player, the game is to roll the game ball which may be given the game value to the player. It can be made easier for people to see. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to enjoy the hobby. The main route SK1 is communicated with the main route SK2, which will be described later, and a game ball passing through the main route SK1 can flow into the main route SK2.

Further, the curved portion 581a of the main path SK1 is the recess 86b of the center frame 86 described above.
2 (see FIG. 17) is housed and arranged. As a result, when the game ball is clogged in the main path SK1 (the flow is slow), the defect can be detected by the detection device 86b3 (see FIG. 17) and an error can be notified.

Further, the passage width of the main path SK1 is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and is also set.
It is set smaller than the opening through which the game balls of the detection devices SE3 to SE7 (see FIG. 23) pass. As a result, a game ball (illegal game ball) having a diameter larger than the diameter of the standard game ball (11 mm) is manufactured, and when the ball is illegal (game), the ball is used as the main path. S
Can be fastened to the inside of K1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the illegal game ball from flowing down to the detection devices SE3 to SE7 arranged on the downstream side of the main path SK1 and being illegally performed. Further, by keeping the illegal game ball on the main path SK1, it is possible to detect it by the detection device 86b3 (see FIG. 17) and notify the error (illegal). The fraud in this case is the detection device S.
An illegal game ball is fitted in any of the openings of E3 to SE7, and detection is continued by the detection devices SE3 to SE7 to obtain an illegal game ball payout (game value).

The main path SK2 includes a first wall portion 565 of the first path member 560 and a fourth of the second path member 570.
It is a space formed between the wall portion 573 and the wall portion 573. The game ball flowing into the main path SK2 rolls on the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573 and flows down. As described above, the fourth wall portion 573 is in the left-right direction (
It extends in the direction of the arrow LR) and is formed so as to be inclined downward as it is separated from the fourth opening 571d.

Therefore, since the above-mentioned curved portion 581a (curved path to the back surface side) is formed in the switching portion of the throwing direction of the game ball (the connecting portion between the main path SK1 and the main path SK2), the player can take the main path. It is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the SK1 from being lost. That is, when a path curved to the back side is formed in the middle of a linear throwing path extending in the left-right direction (for example, the main path SK2), the gaming ball rolling at a constant acceleration along the curved path. Since the acceleration is changed (decreased), the line of sight chasing the game ball may precede the game ball, and the player may lose sight of the game ball.

On the other hand, since the curved path to the back side is formed in the portion where the rolling direction of the game ball is switched and the rolling speed of the game ball is originally slowed down, the player's line of sight must precede the game ball. Can be suppressed to prevent the player from losing sight of the game ball.

Further, the curved portion 581a, which is the inner wall of the main path SK1, is arranged on the left side (arrow L direction) of the first unit 551 slightly to the right (arrow R direction) with respect to the left-right central portion of the game board 13. Formed at the side end). Therefore, a curved path (main path SK1) to the back side is formed on the side where the first unit 551 is easily visible from the player located in front of the game board 13, so that the player can easily see the first unit 551 from the main path SK1. It is possible to easily suppress losing sight of the game ball passing through SK2.

Further, the main path SK2 is communicated with the curved path WK1 and is communicated with the curved path WK1 via the curved path WK1.
It communicates with the main route SK3, which will be described later. As a result, the game ball passing through the main path SK2 flows into the main path SK3 via the curved path WK1. A detailed description of the curved path WK1 will be described later.

The main path SK3 is a space formed between the fourth wall portion 573 and the fifth wall portion 574 of the second path member 570. The game ball flowing into the main path SK3 rolls on the upper surface of the fifth wall portion 574 and flows down. Further, in the main path SK3, the first variable plate 583b of the first drive unit 583 described above is projected onto the main path SK3 at the time of overhanging. The first variable plate 5 on this main path SK3
In the state where the 83b is projected, the game ball rolling on the upper part of the fifth wall portion 574 is the first variable plate 58.
The ball is rolled on the upper surface of 3b and thrown into the main path SK4.

On the other hand, in a state where the first variable plate 583b is retracted from the main path SK3, the sub-path HK1 of the space formed inside the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b formed in the fifth wall portion 574. Game balls are flowed in. The secondary path HK1 is sent to the recovery path formed by the back side wall portion 582b via the fifth opening 571e.

As described above, the first unit 551 includes a first variable plate 583b that overhangs the throwing path of the game ball or retracts from the throwing path, and due to the displacement of the first variable plate 583b, the main unit 551 is main. When the game ball flowing down the route SK3 is guided to the secondary route HK1 and when the main route S
Since it can be changed between the case of being guided by K4 and the case of being guided by K4, it is possible to give a change in the flow direction of the game ball flowing down the first unit 551.

In this case, since the game ball flowing into the sub-path HK1 is given a predetermined game value to the player, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the game ball has flowed into the sub-path HK1. Further, since the first variable plate 583b is arranged in the middle of the throwing path formed in the first unit 551 and is displaced in the viewing direction of the player (arrow FB direction), the first variable plate from the player 583
It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the displacement of b. As a result, it is possible to pay attention to the flowing game ball of the first unit 551, and it is possible to easily give the player a hobby due to the flowing game ball.

Further, the sub-path HK1 is located below the main path SK3 that throws the game ball from the right side (arrow R direction side) to the left side (arrow L direction side) and the game ball from the left side in the front view. It is formed on the fifth wall portion 574 forming between the main path SK6 for throwing a ball on the right side. Therefore,
Since the sub-path HK1 is formed by utilizing the space between the game balls being thrown to the left and right, it is possible to prevent the outer shape of the first unit 551 from becoming large in the vertical direction. As a result, by reducing the outer shape of the first unit 551, the range in which the player can visually follow the game ball can be narrowed.
It is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the first unit 551.

The main path SK4 is a space formed by the recessed portion 571 g and the protrusion 568 of the first path member 560. The game ball flowing into the main path SK4 abuts on the protrusion 568 and has a recessed portion 571 g.
After the ball is thrown to the inside (back side) of the recessed portion, the ball is rolled around the protrusion 568 along the inner surface of the recessed portion and thrown to the outside (front side) of the recessed portion. That is, the game ball is rolled so as to bypass the protrusion 568. Further, the main route SK4 is communicated with the main route SK5, and a game ball passing through the main route SK4 can flow into the main route SK5.

The main path SK5 is the first space 582 of the second covering member 582 of the third path member 580 described above.
It is a space formed by a2 and the second space 582a3. The game ball flowing into the main path SK5 rolls inside the first space 582a2 to the back side as described above, and then the second space 5
The inside of 82a3 is rolled to the front side. Further, in the main path SK5, the second variable plate 584b of the second drive unit 584 described above projects onto the main path SK5 at the time of overhanging. This main route SK
In the state where the second variable plate 584b protrudes above 5, the game ball rolling inside the second curved portion 582a is sent to the main path SK6.

On the other hand, when the second variable plate 584b is retracted from the main path SK5, the sub-path HK2 of the space formed inside the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b formed in the sixth wall portion 575 The game ball is evacuated. The secondary path HK2 is sent to the recovery path formed by the back side wall portion 582b via the sixth opening 571f.

Further, the second curved portion 582a constituting the main path SK5 is formed so as to be curved toward the back side as described above, and the game ball passing through the main path SK5 can be diverted to the back side.
As a result, even when the area in the front view is set to a predetermined limited space, the distance that the game ball can roll can be increased.

Further, the second variable plate 584b is configured so that a part of the upstream side of the main path SK5 and a part of the downstream side of the main path SK5 are overhanging or retracted, and the main path SK5 is displaced. Since a curved path to the back side is formed between the upstream side of the main path SK5 and the downstream side of the main path SK5, the main path S
It is possible to prolong the time in which the game value may be given to the player by the game ball passing through K5. As a result, it is possible to prolong the time for giving the player an interest.

The sub-route HK3 is communicated with the communication portion between the main route SK4 and the main route SK5. Secondary route H
K3 has a second wall portion 566 of the first path member 560 and a back side wall portion 58 of the third path member 580.
It is a space formed between facing 4c1.

The sub-path HK3 is in a direction different from the flow direction of the game ball when the game ball flows from the main path SK4 to the main path SK5 (front view right direction (arrow R direction) (front view left direction (arrow L direction)). The sub-path HK3 is opened. The lower inner edge of the inflow port of the sub-path HK3 is set below the second variable plate 584b (in the direction of arrow D).

Here, when the game ball normally flows down from the main path SK4 to the main path SK5 (in a state where an external force other than gravity does not act), the game ball flows from the main path SK4 into the main path SK5 or the sub-path HK2. NS. On the other hand, at the timing when the game ball flows from the main path SK4 into the sub-path HK2, the second variable plate 584b is extended and the tip surface of the second variable plate 584b comes into contact with the game ball, and an external force other than gravity is applied to the game ball. Is acted on, the game ball is pushed out to the inflow port of the sub-path HK3 by the second variable plate 584b and flows into the sub-path HK3.

Therefore, the first unit 551 includes a second variable plate 584b that overhangs the throwing path of the game ball or retracts from the throwing path, and due to the displacement of the second variable plate 584b, the main path SK4 of the first unit 551. Alternatively, the game ball flowing down the main route SK5 is the main route SK5 and the sub-path HK2.
Alternatively, since it is guided to either of the sub-path HK3, it is possible to give a change in the flow direction of the game ball flowing down the first unit 551.

In this case, since the game ball flowing into the sub-path HK2 or the sub-path HK3 gives the player a predetermined game value, the player is closely watched whether the game ball has flowed into the sub-path HK2 or the sub-path HK3. Can be made to. Further, since the second variable plate 584b is arranged in the middle of the throwing path formed in the first unit 551, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the displacement of the plate member 584b2. As a result, the first unit 551 can be made to pay attention to the flowing game ball, and it is possible to easily give the player a hobby due to the flowing game ball.

Further, as described above, on the upstream side of the main path SK4, the path through which the game ball flows is switched by the first variable plate 583b. Therefore, the game ball that does not flow into the sub-path HK1 on the upstream side and is not given the game value to the player is allowed to flow further downstream to the sub-path HK2 or H.
It can flow into K3. Therefore, by passing the game ball, which may be given the game value to the player once, through the switching portion of the flow path, the game ball becomes the sub-paths HK2 and H.
The player can regain the desire to flow into K3.

Further, a main path SK4 curved on the back surface side is arranged between the main path SK3 and the main path SK5 on which the path through which the game ball flows is switched. Therefore, the game ball can be rolled within a predetermined range in the front view, and the position of the game ball can be easily recognized by the player. That is, after flowing down the main path SK3, the player is made to recognize the position of the game ball through the main path SK4, so that the player pays attention to the game ball rolling on the main path SK5 connected to the downstream of the main path SK4. It can be made easy. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball in which the game ball flows into the secondary paths HK2 and HK3, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Further, on the left and right ends of the second variable 584b on the front side, inclined surfaces 584b1 (see FIG. 24C) that incline toward the back side toward the ends in the left-right direction are formed. This will result in
When the second variable plate 584b is extended at the timing when the game ball flows from the main path SK4 into the sub-path HK2 and the tip surface of the second variable plate 584b comes into contact with the game ball, the game ball is brought into contact with the inclined surface 584b1. Can be pushed out to the inlet side of the sub-path HK3. Therefore, the inclined surface 584b1
And the sub-path HK2 can prevent the game ball from being pinched between the second variable plate 584b and the first path member 560, and a path in which the flow direction is switched depending on the timing at which the game ball is flowed down. A plurality of (three routes in this embodiment) can be formed.

The main path SK6 is a space surrounded by the third wall portion 567 of the first path member 560. The game ball flowing down the main path SK6 is sent to the game area of the game board 13. Therefore, the first receiving unit 5
If the game ball that has flowed into the 61 is not flowed into the first receiving recesses 574a to the fourth receiving recesses 575b, the game value is not given to the player, and the ball is thrown from the main path SK6 to the game area of the game board 13. , Collected from the out port 71 formed in the game board 13.

<Guide means to displace the game ball in the front-back direction>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 28, the flow of the game ball from the main path SK2 to the main path SK3 will be described. 25 (a) and 26 (a) are partially enlarged views of the first unit 551 in the range XXVa of FIG. 21, and FIGS. 25 (b) and 26 (b) are FIGS. 25 (a).
) Is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 in the line XXVb-XXVb. 27 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 in the line XXVIIa-XXVIIa of FIG. 25 (a), and FIG. 27 (b) is the first in the line XXVIIb-XXVIIb of FIG. 25 (a).
FIG. 27 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the unit 551, FIG. 27 (c) is XXVIIc-X of FIG. 25 (a).
It is a schematic cross-sectional view of the 1st unit 551 in the XVIIc line. 28 (a) is FIG. 25.
FIG. 28 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 in the line XXVb-XXVb of (a).
(B) is the first unit 55 in the XXVIIIb-XXVIIIb line of FIG. 25 (a).
1 is a schematic cross-sectional view of 1. Note that FIG. 26 shows a game ball flowing down the curved path WK1.

As shown in FIGS. 25 to 28, the main path SK2, the main path SK3, and the curved path WK1 are
The first is recessed in the base plate 571 of the second path member 570 in an arc shape in cross section toward the back surface side.
A recess 571h, a second recess 571i and a third recess 571j, a first step portion 571k projecting stepwise from the inner wall on the main path SK2 to the front side, and a second step projecting from the inner wall on the main path SK3. It is provided with a step portion 571 m.

The front plate 564 of the first path member 560 has a first recess 571h, a second recess 571i, and a third recess.
First convex portion 564b, second convex portion 564c and third, respectively, at positions facing the concave portion 571j.
The convex portion 564d is projected.

The dimension L11 between the second concave portion 571i and the second convex portion 564c facing each other (see FIG. 28A) is
It is set to a value larger than the diameter of the game ball and set to a value smaller than the distance dimension L12 (see FIG. 28A) between the front plate 564 and the base plate 571 facing each other. This will result in
First concave portion 571h, second concave portion 571i, third concave portion 571j, first convex portion 564b, second
The game ball thrown between the convex portion 564c and the third convex portion 564d facing the first concave portion 571h,
The rolling (flowing) speed of the game ball can be slowed down by abutting the second concave portion 571i and the third concave portion 571j on the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d.

Further, the facing distance between the first concave portion 571h and the first convex portion 564b and the facing distance between the third concave portion 571j and the third convex portion 564d are the facing distance dimensions between the second concave portion 571i and the second convex portion 564c. It is set to substantially the same distance as L11.

Further, a projecting tip surface of the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d, and
The distance dimension L13 (see FIG. 28A) between the front surface of the base plate 571 excluding the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, the third recess 571j, and the first recess
A game ball thrown between the convex portions 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d can be made to collide with the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d.
As a result, the rolling (flowing) speed of the game ball can be slowed down.

Further, in this case, the game ball in contact with the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d is flowed down inside the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571j. .. Therefore, the flowing game ball is moved into the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 57.
It can be guided in the concave direction of 1j.

The step portion 571k is projected toward the front side from the inner wall on the back side of the main path SK2. In addition, the step portion 5
71k is formed on the downstream side in the main route SK2. The step portion 571k is set at a position where the upstream end of the main path SK2 protrudes from the front of the base plate 571 to the front side, and the downstream end is at the same position as the back surface of the curved path WK1. Set. This will result in
The game ball flowing down the main path SK2 can be brought into contact with the step portion 571k and moved to the front side.

Further, the step portion 571k is formed as an inclined surface whose upstream end portion projects from the upstream side to the downstream side toward the front side. As a result, the game ball that flows down the main path SK2 and comes into contact with the upstream end of the step portion 571k can be guided to the front side and flowed down to the downstream side.

Further, the step portion 571k has a first convex portion 564 whose upstream end is formed on the front plate 564.
It is formed on the upstream side of the main path SK2 with respect to b. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball that comes into contact with the step portion 571k and is guided to the front side to come into contact with the first convex portion 564b.

The first recess 571h is recessed in the base plate 571 constituting the main path SK2, and is formed in an elliptical shape long in the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction) in the front view. Further, the first recess 571h is formed in the base plate 571 at a position protruding to the front side by the step portion 571k. The depth of the recess toward the back surface at the center of the first recess 571h in the vertical direction is the step portion 571.
It is set to be substantially the same as the height dimension L22 (see FIG. 27B) to the front side of k. As a result, the game ball to which the main path SK2 is thrown without violence flows into the inside of the first recess 571h without being displaced in the recessing direction of the first recess 571h (the back side (arrow B direction side)). be able to.

On the other hand, the game ball to which the main path SK2 is thrown in a violent state is brought into contact with the upstream end of the step portion 571k and guided to the front side of the main path SK2, and the first convex of the front plate 564. It is brought into contact with the portion 564b. As a result, the game ball can be thrown inside the first recess 571h while suppressing the rampage of the game ball.

Further, the first recess 571h has a height dimension Y8 (the height dimension Y8) from the rolling surface of the game ball on the upstream side of the main path SK2 (the surface on the arrow U direction side of the fourth wall portion 573) to the recessed bottom surface in the direction orthogonal to the first recess 571h. FIG. 25
(See (a)) is set to the radius of the game ball, and the concave bottom surface in the direction orthogonal to the rolling surface of the game ball (the surface on the arrow U direction side of the fourth wall portion 573) on the downstream side of the main path SK2. Height dimension up to Y
9 (see FIG. 25 (a)) is set higher than the radius of the game ball. As a result, the main route S
When the game ball flowing down K2 is thrown along the first recess 571h, it is on the upper side in the direction of gravity (arrow U).
The rolling speed of the game ball can be reduced by applying the resistance in the direction of lifting to the direction side) to the game ball. As a result, the rolling speed of the game ball flowing into the curved path WK1 can be sufficiently reduced, and the game ball can be easily flowed down smoothly.

The radius X11 (see FIG. 27B) in the cross section of the first recess 571h is set to a value larger than the radius of the game ball, and when the game ball is thrown inside the first recess 571h, the radius X11 is set to a value larger than the radius of the game ball. The game ball can be brought into contact with the inner wall. As a result, it is possible to suppress the number of contact portions of the game ball in contact with the first recess 571h from being two, and to prevent the resistance to rolling of the game ball from increasing due to the increase in the contact portions. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from stopping on the main path SK2.

The first convex portion 564b formed at a position facing the first concave portion 571h is a first concave portion 571h.
It is formed at a position separated from the upstream end of the main path SK2 in the throwing direction (arrow R direction in FIG. 27 (b)), and the separated value is set to a dimension smaller than the radius of the game ball. Will be done.
As a result, the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 is brought into contact with the first convex portion 564b, and the first concave portion 5 is brought into contact with the first convex portion 564b.
It can be easily thrown inside 71h.

The second recess 571i is recessed in the base plate 571 of the curved path WK1 and is formed in an elliptical shape whose outer shape in front view is long in the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction). In addition, the second recess 5
In the 71i, the central position in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) in the front view is set to the intermediate position of the curved path WK1. Further, the second recess 571i is formed at the center position in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) in the front view in the direction orthogonal to the throwing direction of the curved path WK1.

The main path SK1, the curved path WK1, and the main path SK2 are all set to have the same width dimension L18 (see FIG. 25 (a)) orthogonal to the throwing direction of the game ball in the front view. The width dimension L18 is set to be approximately 1.1 times the diameter of the game ball.

Further, in the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i and the third recess 571j, the maximum width dimension in the lateral direction in the front view is set to approximately ½ of the above-mentioned width dimension L18. As a result, the center of the game ball passing through each path (main path SK1, curved path WK1 and main path SK2) can be passed through the front side of the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i and the third recess 571j. , The game ball can be easily thrown inside the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j.

The step portion 571m is projected toward the front side from the inner wall on the back side of the main path SK3. In addition, the step portion 5
71m is formed on the upstream side in the main route SK3. The step portion 571m is set at a position where the downstream end portion of the main path SK3 projects toward the front side of the base plate 571, and the step portion 571m is set at a position where the end portion is projected toward the front side of the base plate 571.
The upstream end is set at the same position as the back surface of the curved path WK1. As a result, the main route S
It is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the K3 from flowing backward (rebounding) beyond the step portion 571m to the upstream side after being thrown to the downstream side of the step portion 571m.

The third recess 571j is formed in the base plate 571 constituting the inner wall of the main path SK3, and is formed in an elliptical shape long in the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction) in the front view. Further, the third recess 571j is a base plate 571 at a position where the third recess 571j is projected to the front side by the stepped portion 571m.
Is formed in. The depth of the recess toward the back surface at the center of the third recess 571j in the vertical direction is set to be substantially the same as the height dimension L23 (see FIG. 27 (c)) of the step portion 571 m toward the front surface. As a result, the game ball to which the main path KR3 is thrown can be easily discharged from the inside to the outside of the third recess 571j.

Further, the end of the third recess 571j on the downstream side of the main path SK3 is a sub-path H described later.
It is arranged above the gravity direction (arrow U direction) of the end portion (end portion on the arrow R direction side) on the upstream side of the main path SK3 of the first variable plate 583b that switches the path flowing down to K1. As a result, when the stop position of the first variable plate 583b shifts upward in the direction of gravity due to its displacement (variable plate 583).
(When b is arranged above the downstream end of the curved wall portion 565b), a game ball passing through the main path SK3 is thrown along the inner surface of the third recess 571j to cause a first variable plate. 583b
You can throw the ball without getting caught in. As a result, it is not necessary to arrange the first variable plate 583b downward in the portion where the first wall portion 565 and the first variable plate 583b are adjacent to each other, and it is possible to prevent the vertical dimension of the first unit 551 from becoming large. ..

Further, in this case, the longitudinal direction of the third recess 571j in the front view is the horizontal direction (arrow L).
Since it is formed in the −R direction) and is separated upward from the game ball flowing down the main path SK3, it is upward with respect to the game ball thrown from the first wall portion 565 to the first variable plate 583b. A resistance in the direction of lifting to the side can be applied. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball thrown from the first wall portion 565 to the first variable plate 583b from being caught by the first variable plate 583b.

Further, the first unit 551 is located on one side in the horizontal direction with respect to the game board 13 in the front view.
The main path SK2 that throws the game ball in the direction of the arrow R), and the main path SK3 that throws the game ball thrown from the main path SK2 to the other side in the horizontal direction opposite to the guidance direction of the main path SK2.
A curved path WK1 that connects one side of the main path SK2 and the main path SK3 is provided, and the curved path WK1 is a guiding means (first) for sending a game ball to at least one of the front side and the back side of the game board. Since the two convex portions 564c and the second concave portion 571i) are provided on the inner walls on the front side and the back side of the game board, the game ball passing through the curved path WK1 can be placed on the front side or the back side (front and back of the game board 13 in the front view). Can be moved in the direction).

Therefore, the flow of the game ball accelerated by rolling on the main path SK2 (first path) rather than when the throwing path of the game ball passing through the curved path WK1 is formed on the same plane in the front-rear direction in the front view. You can slow it down. Therefore, the game ball that collides with the inner wall of the curved path WK1 returns to the main path SK2 by the amount that the flow speed of the game ball can be slowed down, or the throwing direction of the main path SK2 inside the curved path WK1 (horizontal direction in front view (horizontal direction in front view). It is possible to suppress shaking (shaking) in the direction of the arrow LR)). As a result, the line of sight of the player can follow the game ball passing through the curved path WK1 in a certain direction. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball sent to the curved path WK1.

In addition, since it is possible to suppress the game ball from swinging (shaking) in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in the front view) with respect to the game board 13 in the front view, the curved path WK1 connecting the main path SK2 and the main path SK3 by that amount. It is no longer necessary to lengthen the path to prevent the game ball from swinging.
The path of the curved path WK1 can be shortened. As a result, the first unit 551 can be accommodated in a predetermined area with respect to the game board 13, and the first unit 551 with respect to the game board 13 can be accommodated.
It is possible to secure the arrangement space of.

Further, the recess width of the first recess 571h is increased toward the upstream side of the main path SK2 in a direction orthogonal to the flow direction of the main path SK2 (arrow UD direction). As a result, the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 can be easily received in the first recess 571h. Further, since the recessed width of the first recess 571h is set to be smaller toward the downstream side of the main path SK2, it is easy for the game ball received in the first recess 571h to come out from the same position. That is, the first recess 5
The 71h can easily accept the game ball on the upstream side of the main path SK2, and can easily let the game ball escape from the same position on the downstream side of the main path SK2. As a result, the game ball can be easily thrown into the second recess 571i of the curved path WK1 that communicates downstream of the main path SK2.

In this case, the concave end portion of the first recess 571h in the flow direction (arrow R direction) of the main path SK2 is the rolling surface of the main path SK2 (fourth) in the rolling direction of the game ball to which the main path SK2 is sent.
It is formed at a position exceeding the upper surface of the wall portion 573). Therefore, it is possible to make the game ball that escapes from the first recess 571h less susceptible to the influence of the rolling surface of the main path SK2. As a result, the game ball that has escaped from the first recess 571h can be easily sent to the second recess 571i of the curved path WK1.

Further, the main path SK2 is inside the path from the fourth opening 571d side toward the curved wall portion 565b side (that is, from the front left side (arrow L direction side) to the front view right side (arrow R direction side)). The space is formed so as to be inclined toward the front plate 564 side (front side (arrow F direction side)). In addition, the main route S
The K2 is formed with its rolling surface (the surface on the upper side of the fourth wall portion 573 in the direction of gravity) inclined downward toward the front side. As a result, the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 can be easily rolled on the front plate 564 side, and the game ball can be easily brought into contact with the first convex portion 564b formed on the front plate 564. As a result, the rolling speed of the game ball can be easily slowed down by the first convex portion 564b, and the reaction force of the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 collides with the curved wall portion 565b to make the main path SK2.
Can be suppressed from flowing back. As a result, the game ball can be stably flowed down at the position where the throwing direction of the game ball is changed.

The upper end portion (end portion in the arrow U direction) of the second recess 571i is drawn linearly along the rolling locus of the center of the game ball rolling on the main path SK2 (fourth wall portion 573). It is formed at a position in contact with the virtual line IL3 (see FIG. 25 (a)). As a result, the game ball that is thrown from the main path SK2 at a relatively high speed and flows into the curved path WK1 can be easily received by the second recess 571i.

A second concave portion 571i and a second convex portion 564c are formed at a portion where the throwing direction of the game ball is changed (curved path WK1). As described above, the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c and the third
The protruding tip surface of the convex portion 564d, the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571.
Since the distance dimension L13 (see FIG. 28 (a)) between the front surface of the base plate 571 excluding j is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball, it is between the second concave portion 571i and the second convex portion 564c. The game ball flowing down the ball can be brought into contact with the second convex portion 564c and pushed into the inside of the second concave portion 571i. Therefore, it flows into the main path SK3 (second concave portion 571i and second convex portion 564c).
A game ball (which escapes from between) can flow down along an arc on the inner surface of the second recess 571i.

Here, the game ball thrown from the main path SK2 to the curved path WK1 tends to flow down a position closer to the rolling direction of the game ball on the main path SK2. Therefore, the game ball flowing down inside the second recess 571i comes into contact with the inner surface of the region on the right side of the front view (on the side in the direction of arrow R) of the second recess 571i and flows down. Therefore, the throwing direction of the game ball flowing into the main path SK3 can be easily directed to the flow direction of the main path SK3 (from the curved wall portion 565b side to the recessed portion 571g (see FIG. 21) side). As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from colliding with the curved wall portion 565b and temporarily stopping the flow at the position where the throwing direction of the game ball is changed (see FIG. 28).

Further, the throwing direction of the game ball thrown from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK3 is set to the main path SK.
Since it can be directed in the direction toward the flow down of 3, the force with which the game ball collides with the curved wall portion 565b can be reduced. As a result, damage to the curved wall portion 565b due to repeated collisions of the game ball with the curved wall portion 565b can be suppressed.

Further, the first convex portion 564b is formed on the first path member 560 arranged on the front side, and is the first.
The recess 571h is formed in the second path member 570 arranged on the back surface side.

Here, a recess (second path member 570) recessed in the first path member 560 toward the front side.
When the concave portion corresponding to the first concave portion 571h of the above is formed, the concave portion is recessed and the first path member 56 is formed.
It is necessary to increase the plate thickness of 0. Therefore, as the plate thickness of the first path member 560 increases, the transparency of the first path member 560 deteriorates, and it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the first unit 551.

Further, when a concave portion is formed on the back surface of the bulging portion that partially bulges in front of the first path member 560, the bulging portion bulges toward the front side of the first path member 560, and the game board 13 It is necessary to increase the gap between the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) arranged on the front side of the glass unit. Therefore, since the first path member 560 is separated from the glass unit 16, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the inside of the first path member 560.

On the other hand, the first convex portion 564b is formed on the first path member 560 arranged on the front side, and the first concave portion 571h is formed on the second path member 570 arranged on the back side. The thickness of the first path member 560 arranged on the front side can be reduced. Further, since the portion that partially protrudes from the front side of the first path member 560 is not formed, the first path member 560 can be arranged close to the glass unit 16. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the inside of the first path member 560.

The second convex portion 564c is located below the main path SK2 (upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573) in the direction of gravity (arrow D direction), and descends in substantially the same direction as the rolling direction of the main path SK2 in front view. Formed at an angle. As a result, the game ball flowing down between the second convex portion 564c and the second concave portion 571i is guided to the region on the right side of the front view (arrow R direction side) of the second concave portion 571i by the inclination of the second convex portion 564c. can do. As described above, since the recessed surface of the second recess 571i is formed to be curved, a game ball that abuts on the inside of the region on the right side (arrow R direction side) of the second recess 571i and flows down is moved. The ball can be thrown in the flow direction of the main path SK3 (from the curved wall portion 565b side to the recessed portion 571g (see FIG. 21) side). As a result, the curved path WK
The inflow of the game ball from 1 to the main route SK3 can be made smooth.

Further, in the second recess 571i, the end portion on the lower side (arrow D direction side) in the front view is the main path S.
Virtual line IL4 drawn linearly along the rolling trajectory of the center of the game ball rolling on K3 (FIG. 25)
It is formed at a position in contact with (a)). Thereby, the height of the center of the game ball discharged from the downstream end of the second recess 571i can be set on the virtual line IL4. As described above, in the present embodiment, the game ball discharged from the second recess 571i is thrown toward the flow direction of the main path SK3 (from the curved wall portion 565b side to the recessed portion 571g (see FIG. 21) side). Therefore, the game ball discharged from the second recess 571i can be the main path SK3 or the curved path WK.
It is possible to prevent a game ball that comes into contact with the inner surface of 1 and is thrown into the main path SK3 from colliding with the inner wall of the curved path WK1 and staying inside those paths.

The flow direction of the game ball flowing into the main path SK3 can be directed to the throwing direction of the main path SK3 at a position close to the rolling surface of the main path SK3. As a result, the curved path WK1 to the main path S
It is possible to prevent the game ball flowing into K3 from being thrown in a direction orthogonal to the throwing direction of the game ball on the curved path WK1. As a result, the game ball sent to the main path SK3 has a curved path W.
It is possible to prevent the vehicle from colliding with the inner wall of K1 and becoming stagnant.

<Place the first member to which high game value is given on the front side>
Next, the configuration of the second unit 552 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. 29 (a) is a front view of the second unit 552, and FIG. 29 (b) is the second unit 55.
It is a rear view of 2. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective front view of the second unit 552, and FIG. 31 is a view.
It is an exploded perspective rear view of the 2nd unit 552.

As shown in FIGS. 29 to 31, the second unit 552 is a fourth path member 610 arranged on the first unit 551 side (front side (arrow F direction side)) and a fourth path member 610 thereof. A game ball throwing path is formed between the fifth path member 620 arranged on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) and the fifth path member 620 arranged on the back surface side of the fifth path member 620. A sixth path member 630 and a decorative member 650 arranged on the side surface of the second unit 552 are mainly provided.

The fourth path member 610 is the first unit 551 via the center frame 86 described above.
It is attached to the back side (arrow B direction side) of. Further, the fourth path member 610 stands on the mounting plate 611 formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular plate in front view and on the first unit 551 side (front side (arrow F direction side)) from the end of the mounting plate 611. It is provided with a side wall portion 612 to be provided, and a first continuous passage 615 and a second continuous passage 616 through which an internal space is communicated to a second rolling portion 577 and a third rolling portion 578 of the first unit 551.

The mounting plate 611 is recessed in a circular shape on the first unit 551 side (front side (arrow F direction side)), and the insertion portion 617 in which a through hole is formed in the recessed bottom surface, and the fifth path member 620. side(
The path side fastening portion 618 and the decorative side fastening portion 619, and the mounting plate 611, which are projected in a circular shape on the back side (arrow B direction side) and have holes for screwing screws on the protruding tip surface. A second insertion portion 614 opened to the outside of the opening 613 and an opening 613 opened in the center of the opening 613.

The insertion portion 617 is a portion through which the tip of a screw for fastening the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is inserted, and is formed at a plurality of locations (three locations in the present embodiment) of the mounting plate 611.

The path-side fastening portion 618 is a portion to which a screw to be inserted into the insertion hole 632 of the sixth path member 630, which will be described later, is screwed, and is formed at a position facing the insertion hole 632. As a result, the sixth
The path member 630 can be fastened to the fourth path member 610.

The decorative side fastening portion 619 is a portion to which a screw inserted into the fastening hole 652 formed in the decorative member 650 described later is screwed, and is formed at a position facing the fastening hole 652. As a result, the decorative member 650 can be fastened to the fourth path member 610.

The opening 613 is formed at a position facing the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a arranged in the first unit 551. As a result, when the fourth path member 610 is arranged on the back surface of the first unit 551, the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be arranged inside the opening 613. Therefore, when the fourth path member 610 is arranged on the back surface of the first unit 551, it is possible to suppress the fourth path member 610 from becoming large in the front-rear direction, and the circumference of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be suppressed. Fourth
It can be surrounded by a path member 610.

The first passage 615 and the second passage 616 are formed in a U shape in which the upper side (arrow U direction side) is open in the front view, and are extended in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). .. again,
In the first-passage passage 615 and the second-passage passage 616, the end portion on the front side is in contact with the back side of the second rolling portion 577 and the third rolling portion 578 of the first unit 551, and the rear side is abutted. The end portion abuts on the front side of the end portion of the first inflow port 625 and the second inflow port 626 of the fifth path member 620 described later. Further, the first continuous passage 615 and the second continuous passage 616 are the fifth from the first unit 551 side.
It is formed so as to incline downward toward the path member 620. As a result, the game ball thrown from the second rolling section 577 and the third rolling section 578 of the first unit 551 to the first continuous passage 615 and the second continuous passage 616 is transferred to the first continuous passage 615 and the second passage. The communication passage 616 can be rolled and flowed into the first inflow port 625 and the second inflow port 626 of the fifth path member 620.

The second insertion portion 614 is a hole for inserting a screw to be screwed into the screw hole 86b4 of the protrusion portion 86b when the fourth path member 610 is fastened to the protrusion portion 86b of the center frame 86. It is formed at a position corresponding to the screw hole 86b4 (see FIG. 35) formed in 86b. As a result, the fourth path member 610 can be arranged on the back surface of the projecting portion 86b of the center frame 86.

The side wall portion 612 is the side surface of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a arranged on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the first unit 551 when the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are fastened. It is a plate member that covers the side surface of the mounting plate 611, and is erected on the first unit 551 side (front side (arrow F direction side)) from the entire end portion of the mounting plate 611. The vertical dimension of the side wall portion 612 on the front side (first unit 551 side) is set to a length that abuts on the protruding portion 86b of the center frame 86. As a result, since the side wall portion 612 is arranged between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552. As a result, it is possible to prevent an illegal object from being inserted between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552.

The fifth path member 620 includes a plate member 621 formed of a plate having a substantially rectangular front view, a first inflow port 625 and a second inflow port 626 opened in the plate member 621, and a periphery of the second inflow port 626. 6th path member 630 side (back side (arrow B direction side)) from to below the 2nd inflow port 626
The second erection wall 623 erected in the west, and the first erection wall 624 erected on the sixth path member 630 side from the periphery of the first inflow port 625 to the lower part of the first inflow port 625. Plate member 621 to 6th
Mainly includes a fastened portion 627 projecting from the path member 630 side.

The plate member 621 is formed in an outer shape smaller than the outer shape in the front view of the fourth path member 610, and is arranged on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the fourth path member 610. Further, the plate member 621 includes a central opening portion 622 which is opened at the central portion in the front view. The central opening 622 is formed larger than the outer shape of the second solenoid 584a in the rear view, and is formed at a position corresponding to the second solenoid 584a. As a result, the plate member 621 (
When the fifth path member 620) is arranged on the back surface side of the fourth path member 610, the fourth path member 61
A second solenoid 584a inserted through the inside of the opening 613 of 0 can be arranged inside the central opening 622.

The first inflow port 625 and the second inflow port 626 are the first of the fourth path member 610 as described above.
It is a portion (opening for flowing in) for receiving a game ball interlocking the continuous passage 615 and the second continuous passage 616 between the facing portions of the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630.

The fastened portion 627 is a portion for screwing the tip of the screw inserted through the fastening hole 633 formed in the sixth path member 630, which will be described later, and is formed at a position corresponding to the fastening hole 633. As a result, the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630 are fastened. In addition, the fastened portion 62
The protrusion dimension of 7 toward the 6th path member 630 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, a gap is formed between the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630 so that the game ball can flow down.

The first erection wall 624 has a fifth path member 620 and a sixth path member 63 from the first inflow port 625.
It is a wall that guides the game ball that flows in between the opposite sides of 0, and is extended downward and connected to the second standing wall 623. The second upright wall 623 is a wall that guides the game ball that has flowed into the fifth path member 620 from the second inflow port, and extends in the vertical direction of the plate member 621. note that,
A description of the throwing path formed by the first erection wall 624 and the second erection wall 623 will be described later.

The sixth path member 630 is a second central opening 634 opened to a base plate 631 formed of a plate having a substantially rectangular front view and a base plate 631 at a position facing the central opening 622 of the fifth path member 620. And the insertion hole 6 formed through the circumference of the second central opening 634 of the base plate 631.
32 and a fastening hole 633.

The second central opening 634 is formed to have substantially the same size as the central opening 622 of the fifth path member 620 in front view, and when the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630 are combined, the second central opening 634 is formed to have substantially the same size as the central opening 622. It communicates with the central opening 622 of the fifth path member 620. Thereby, when the second unit 552 is arranged on the back surface side of the first unit 551, the first solenoid 583a of the first unit 551 can be arranged inside the second central opening 634.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the throwing path formed by the fifth path member 620 will be described. FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view of the second unit 552 on the XXXII-XXXII line of FIG. 29.

As shown in FIG. 32, the second unit 552 is the first standing wall 624 of the fifth path member 620.
Subpath HK4 formed by being surrounded by, and subpath H formed by being surrounded by the second erection wall 623.
It is equipped with K5.

The sub-path HK4 extends downward from the first inflow port 625, and then is bent toward the sub-path HK5, which will be described later, and communicates with the sub-path HK5. Further, in the sub-path HK4, a detection device SE7 for detecting the passage of a game ball is arranged in a downwardly extending portion. This makes it possible to detect that the game ball has passed through the sub-path HK4. Further, when the detection device SE7 detects the passage of the game ball,
A predetermined game value is given to the player (in this embodiment, a prize ball of the game ball).

In the present embodiment, the number of game balls (for example, 3) awarded to the player as the game balls pass through the detection device SE7 is the detection device SE3 arranged in the first unit 551. ~
The number of game balls (for example, 15) that are awarded to the player as the game balls pass through SE6.
Less than. That is, the game value given to the player by passing through the detection device SE7 is given to the player as the game ball passes through the detection devices SE3 to SE6 arranged in the first unit 551. It is set higher than the game value to be played. This makes it easier to draw attention to the game ball passing through the first unit 551. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to enjoy the hobby.

The sub-path HK5 extends downward from the second inflow port 626 and the second unit 552.
Below the pachinko machine 10, it is communicated with the recovery path of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the sub-path HK5 is collected without giving the player a game value. Further, the game ball that has flowed down the sub-path HK4 and is detected by the detection device SE7 is sent to the sub-path HK5 and collected by the pachinko machine 10.

Further, the special winning device 550 is a first unit 551 formed of a material capable of transmitting light and arranged on the front side of the game area, and a second unit arranged on the back side of the first unit 551. The first unit 551 is provided with 552, and the first unit 551 is a first receiving unit 561 capable of entering a game ball.
The second unit 552 includes a second receiving unit 562 and a third receiving unit 5 capable of entering a game ball.
A game ball having 63 and entering the first receiving unit 561 has a higher game value to the player than a game ball entering the second receiving unit 562 and the third receiving unit 563 (payout of the game ball). Is given.

Therefore, the handling of the throwing path of the game ball of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is complicatedly formed (for example, the throwing path of the first unit 551 and the throwing path of the second unit 552 are in the front-rear direction in the front view. It is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 when the game ball is flowed down to the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 at the same timing as compared with the case of crossing the first unit 551. Therefore, the first receiving unit 5 having a high game value
It is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 provided with the 61. As a result, the player can visually recognize the game ball passing through the route that gives the player a high game value, so that the player's interest can be easily improved.

In addition, the inflow port of the throwing path for throwing the game ball to the first unit 551 (first receiving section 561).
And, since the inlets (second receiving section 562 and third receiving section 563) of the throwing path for throwing the game ball to the second unit 552 are formed at adjacent positions, the first one to which high gaming value is given. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the ball flows into the unit 551 or the second unit 552 to which a low game value is given, or until the game ball flows in. As a result, it is possible to easily give the player an interest until just before the game ball flows into the special winning device 550.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 33 to 37, the special winning device 550 for the center frame 86
The arrangement state of the above will be described. FIG. 33A is a front view of the center frame 86.
FIG. 33B is a side view of the center frame 86. 34 (a) is a perspective front view of the center frame 86, and FIG. 34 (b) is a perspective rear view of the center frame 86. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective rear view of the center frame 86. 36 is XX of FIG. 33.
It is sectional drawing of the center frame 86 in the XVI-XXXVI line. FIG. 37 (a) shows.
It is a schematic sectional view of the game board 13, and FIG. 37 (b) is a schematic disassembled sectional view of the game board 13.
Note that FIGS. 37 (a) and 37 (b) correspond to the cross section of FIG. 36.

<Fixing means for urging the first member to the base member side>
As shown in FIGS. 33 to 37, the special winning device 550 has a first unit 551 that can be removed on the front side of the center frame 86 and a removable first unit 551 on the back side of the center frame 86 with the center frame 86 in between. It consists of a possible second unit.

The first unit 551 has a first solenoid 583a and a second solenoid 584a arranged on the back side of the first unit 551 inserted into the opening 86b1 of the center frame 86, and the front side of the projecting portion 86b. Is arranged in. Further, the first unit 551 includes a columnar body 551a projecting in a columnar shape on the second unit 552 side.

The columnar body 551a is an insertion portion 61 formed in the fourth path member 610 of the second unit 552.
The tip is provided with a hole formed at a position facing the 7 and into which a screw through which the insertion portion 617 is inserted is screwed.

The first unit 551 is fixed to the center frame 86 by a screw inserted into the insertion portion 617 and the second insertion portion 614 formed in the fourth path member 610 of the second unit 552. More specifically, the first unit 551 is disposed between the first unit 551 and the fourth path member 610 disposed on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) via the projecting portion 86b of the center frame 86. Further, the first unit 551 is fastened to the second unit 552 by screwing a screw inserted from the insertion portion 617 of the fourth path member 610 into the columnar body 551a.

Further, with the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 fastened, the screw inserted into the second insertion portion 614 formed in the second unit 552 is recessed in the protrusion 86b (screw hole 86b4). By screwing it into (see FIG. 35), the projecting portion 86b and the fourth path member 610 can be fastened. As described above, since the fourth path member 610 and the first unit 551 are fastened and fixed, the first unit 551 is fastened to the projecting portion 86b by the fourth path member 610.
Is fastened to the projecting portion 86b.

Further, as shown in FIG. 37, the opening dimension Y1 (see FIG. 37 (b)) in the vertical direction of the first opening 60a of the base plate 60 is the vertical dimension of the first unit 551 (second path member 570). It is set slightly smaller than Y2 (see FIG. 37 (b)). In addition, the first unit 55
The distance dimension Y4 (see FIG. 37 (b)) from the contact surface with the front surface of the base plate 60 of 1 to the contact surface of the second unit 552 with the base plate 60 is the first unit 551 and the second unit. 552
Is set to be slightly smaller than the thickness dimension Y3 of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 37 (b)) when the two are fastened.

As a result, when the first unit 551, the second unit, and 552 are fastened, the first unit 551 can be urged to the base plate 60 side (back side). Therefore, the base plate 6
It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the front surface of 0 and the first unit 551. Therefore, it is not necessary to fasten the first unit 551 from the front side of the base plate 60 with screws, and the amount is increased accordingly.
Since the screw fastening allowance is not required in front of the first unit 551, the area on the front side of the first unit 551 can be used as a throwing space for the game ball. As a result, the first
It is possible to secure a throwing space for the game ball formed in the unit 551.

Further, the fastening portion (columnar body 551a) between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is
Since it is formed so as to project on the back side of the first unit 551, it is possible to secure a throwing space for the game ball formed on the first unit 551 as compared with the case where the fastening portion is formed on the front side of the base plate 60. can.

Further, since the second unit 552 can be urged to the base plate 60 (front side), it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the second unit 552 and the base plate 60. Therefore,
It is possible to prevent an illegal object such as a wire or a piano wire from being inserted from between the second unit 552 and the base plate 60 facing each other and being illegally inserted into the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a of the first unit 551.

Further, since the first unit 551 is arranged on the base plate 60 by a screw inserted from the back surface side of the base plate 60, a fastening allowance (screw is inserted) with the base plate 60 on the front side of the first unit 551. It is not necessary to form an extended portion) in which an opening is formed. As a result, the entire area can be used as a throwing path with respect to the outer shape of the first unit 551 in the front view, and the throwing path of the first unit 551 can be increased.

Further, since the fastening portion between the base plate 60 and the first unit 551 is on the back side of the base plate 60, the fastening portion between the base plate 60 and the first unit 551 is outside due to fraud from the front side of the game board 13. It can be suppressed. As a result, fraud to the first unit 551 can be suppressed. Further, since the fastening portion between the base plate 60 and the first unit 551 is on the back side of the base plate 60, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the head of the screw. As a result, the first
By the player recognizing the configuration for fixing the unit 551 to the base plate 60,
It is possible to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating.

Further, the first unit 551 is a fixing means (screw) fastened from the back surface side of the base plate 60.
Therefore, it is arranged on the base plate 60 in a state of being urged to the back side with respect to the base plate 60.
Due to the urging force acting on the first unit 551 on the back surface side, the first unit 551 and the base plate 60 can be arranged in close contact with each other.

Further, since the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are arranged on the center frame 86 in a state where a throwing path capable of throwing a game ball is formed in each of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, the first unit 5
It is possible to prevent the throwing path of 51 and the throwing path of the second unit 552 from being displaced during assembly of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552. As a result, the game balls flowing down inside the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are the first unit 551 and the second unit 55.
It is possible to suppress stopping at the throwing path of 2.

Further, the first unit 551 includes a rolling surface (second rolling section 577 and third rolling section 578) for flowing the game ball thrown into the first unit 551 into the second unit 552.
Therefore, each of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is the center frame 8.
If it is fastened to the projecting portion 86b of No. 6, an error in assembling the first unit 551 to the center frame 86 occurs, and the game ball is smoothly thrown from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552. There was a risk that it would not be lost.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first unit 551 is the second unit 5.
Since it is fastened to 52, the error at the time of fastening the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 can be minimized (the place where an error is generated at the time of fastening is the minimum). As a result, the game ball can be smoothly thrown from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552.

The fifth and sixth path members 620 and 630 to be fastened to the fourth path member 610 are arranged at positions overlapping with at least a part of the insertion portion 617 and the second insertion portion 614 of the fourth path member 610 in the rear view. .. As a result, the first unit 551 can be removed from the center frame 86 only after the fifth and sixth path members 620 and 630 fastened to the fourth path member 610 are removed. As a result, the first unit 55 forming the main paths SK1 to SK6
It is possible to prevent 1 from being removed from the center frame 86 and fraudulently performed on the main routes SK1 to SK6.

Further, the projecting portion 86b includes an upright portion 86b5 that stands (folds back) on the side of the second unit 552 at the end (see FIG. 33 (b)). As a result, in a state where the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are arranged on the center frame 86 with the projecting portion 86b of the center frame 86 interposed therebetween, the upright portion 86b5 is the first unit 551. It is in a state of surrounding the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a arranged on the back side.

Therefore, with the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 arranged on the center frame 86, an illegal object such as a wire or a piano wire may be inserted between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 facing each other. Can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a of the first unit 551 from being illegally performed while the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are arranged on the center frame 86.

Further, between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, the first solenoid 583a
A part of the front side of the second solenoid 584a is arranged, and an upright portion 86b5 is interposed. Therefore, the first solenoid 583a is used in the space where the upright portion 86b5 is arranged.
And a part of the front side of the second solenoid 584a can be arranged. Therefore, a part of the front side of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a is accommodated between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, so that the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 5 are accommodated.
It is possible to prevent the 84a from protruding toward the back surface side. As a result, the circumference of the back side of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be easily surrounded by the second unit 552, and the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be fraudulently performed from the back side. It can be suppressed by 2 units 552.

Further, between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, the first solenoid 583
Since a part of the front side of the a and the second solenoid 584a is arranged, the game ball flowing down the second unit 552 is hidden by the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a to make it difficult for the player to see. Can be done. As a result, even if the flow line of the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 and the flow line of the game ball flowing down the second unit 552 overlap in the front view, the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 can be moved. It can be easily made visible to the player. As a result, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the game ball flowing down the first unit 551, which is given to the player a game value higher than the game value given to the player by the game ball flowing down the second unit 552. Because it can be done, it can be easily given to the player.

Further, in the state where the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are arranged on the center frame 86, the decorative member 650 is arranged so as to cover the inner side surface of the base frame 86a of the center frame 86. As a result, it is possible to prevent an illegal object such as a wire or a piano wire from being inserted into the special winning device 550 through (inserting) the opening of the base frame 86a of the center frame 86.

As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the first solenoid 58 disposed in the first unit 551.
3a is inserted inside the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634 whose back surface side is formed in the fourth path member 610 and the fifth path member 620 of the second unit 552. This will result in
The second unit 552 can be prevented from bulging toward the back side (arrow B direction side), and the first unit can be prevented from bulging.
It is possible to prevent unauthorized objects such as wires and piano wires from being accessed by the solenoid 583a.

Further, since the load of the first solenoid 583a can be supported by the second unit 552, the second path member 570 of the first unit 551 in which the first solenoid 583a is arranged can be supported.
Can be suppressed from bending. As a result, the passage of the game ball of the first unit 551 can be stabilized.

Further, as described above, the opening 8 of the projecting portion 86b formed in the center frame 86
Since the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a are surrounded by 6b1, the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a having a relatively large load (heavy) are supported by the opening 86b1 (protruding portion 86b). can do. As a result, the projecting portion 86b can be prevented from bending due to the load of the special winning device 550.

Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the center frame 86 arranged on the base plate 60 from bending (bending), the arrangement of the first unit 551 arranged on the center frame 86 is the arrangement of the base plate 60.
It is possible to suppress the displacement with respect to the position. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed from the game area of the game board 13 into the first unit 551 (special winning device 550).

In addition, the second rolling unit 57 that throws a game ball from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552.
The 7 and the third rolling portion 578 are formed on the outside of the opening 86b1 of the projecting portion 86b. As a result, the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 5 arranged inside the opening 86b1
Due to the electromagnetic force generated by the drive of 84a, the first unit 551 to the second unit 552
It is possible to prevent the rolling of the game ball thrown into the ball from being hindered. In other words, the protrusion 86b can suppress the electromagnetic force generated by driving the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a from acting on the outside of the protrusion 86b. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of the game ball from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552.

As described above, the first solenoid 583a is arranged so that the back surface side is inserted into the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634 of the second unit 552. As a result, the wiring of the detection devices SE3 to 6 of the first unit 551 and the first solenoid 583a can be arranged by inserting the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634. Further, since the wiring can be arranged along the first solenoid 583a, it is possible to suppress the wiring from being entangled.

Further, since the load of the first solenoid 583a can be supported by the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634 of the second unit 552, the projecting portion 86b on which the first unit 551 is arranged bends. Can be suppressed. Therefore, since the center frame 86 arranged on the base plate 60 can be prevented from bending (bending), the arrangement of the first unit 551 arranged on the center frame 86 can be prevented from being displaced with respect to the base plate 60. Can be suppressed. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed from the game area of the game board 13 into the first unit 551 (special winning device 550).

<Displacement member that arranges the fixing member of the board unit on the back member>
Next, the connection structure of the back case 300 and the substrate unit 110 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 38 to 42. First, with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39, the rear case 30
The structure of 0 will be described.

38 (a) is a front view of the rear case 300, and FIG. 38 (b) is a rear case 30.
It is a rear view of 0. FIG. 39 (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the rear case 300, which is FIG. 39.
(B) is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear case 300.

As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the back case 300 has an engaging member 310 arranged on the front side (open side (arrow F direction side) formed in a box shape) of the bottom wall portion 301 and a back surface. Case 300
The board box 100 (main control device 110) described above is arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the above-mentioned board box 100.
) Is mainly provided with a fixing member 320 for fixing.

Further, the rear case 300 is a projecting portion 30 projecting from two locations on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301.
1b, a first opening 301c that opens at a position facing the fixing member 320, and an engaging member 31.
A second opening 301d that opens at a position facing 0 is provided.

The projecting portion 301b is a shaft for holding the engaging member 310 in a slidable state.
It is inserted inside the sliding groove 314 that opens in the engaging member 310 described later. In addition, the projecting portion 30
1b is projected in an annular shape, and a screw can be screwed into the annular shape. Therefore, after the projecting portion 301b is inserted inside the sliding groove 314, a screw having a head having a diameter larger than the groove width of the sliding groove 314 is screwed into the projecting portion 301b to engage the engaging member. 310 on the back case 3
It can be arranged at 00.

The first opening 301c is an opening for inserting a part of the fixing member 320 (engaged portion with the engaging member 310) described later, and the engaging portion of the fixing member 320 (engaged portion 332 described later). )
Is formed into a shape that can be inserted. As a result, the fixing member 320 arranged on the back side of the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301) is engaged with the engaging member 310 arranged on the front side of the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301). be able to.

Further, the first opening 301c is a protrusion 301c1 projecting toward the back surface at an end portion on the opposite side (arrow R direction side) of the engaging member 320 and the engaging member 310 on the engaging side (arrow L direction side). To prepare for. The protrusion 301c1 is formed in a hook shape in which the tip of the protrusion on the back surface side bends by approximately 90 degrees, and the bending direction is set in a direction away from the first opening 301c (arrow R direction).

The protruding wall 301c1 is inserted into the locking portion 331 of the fixing member 320 whose tip is described later. Thereby, the opposite side (the arrow R direction side) of the engaging portion between the fixing member 320 and the engaging member 310 can be locked. As a result, the fixing member 320 arranged on the rear case 300 is moved to the left and right (
It can be supported (engaged) at both ends in the direction of the arrow LR), and the fixing member 320 and the engaging member can be suppressed from concentrating the force on the engaging portion between the fixing member 320 and the engaging member 310. 310
Can be prevented from being damaged. A detailed description of the arrangement of the fixing member 320 in the first opening 301c will be described later.

The second opening 301d is an opening for inserting a part (operator 315) of the engaging member 310 described later into the back side of the back case 300, whereby the engaging member 310 is inserted into the back side of the back case. It can be operated from. Therefore, as described above, after the fixing member 320 is arranged on the back surface of the back case 300, the engaging member 310 is operated from the back side of the back case 300 to attach the fixing member 320 and the engaging member to the back case 300 ( It can be engaged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301).

The engaging member 310 has a crank-like outer shape in a front view, and extends in a direction parallel to each other, the first piece 311 and the second piece 312, and the first piece 311 and the second piece 3 thereof.
It is composed of a third piece 313 that connects the ends of the 12 pieces in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 311 and the second piece 312.

The above-mentioned 2 sliding grooves 314 are formed in the first piece 311 and the second piece 312, respectively, and are long in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the first piece 311 and the second piece 312. It is opened like a long hole. As a result, the engaging member 310 is slidable in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the first piece 311 and the second piece 312.

In the first piece 311, the end portion on one side (arrow R direction side) opposite to the other side (arrow L direction side) to which the third piece 313 is connected serves as an engaging portion with the fixing member 320 described later. An engaging portion 316 that is formed and projects outward on both sides in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), which is a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 311, and the engaging portions 316 at the two locations. From the substantially intermediate position toward the recess 317 recessed in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the first piece 311 and the bottom wall portion 301 side (back side (arrow B direction side)) of the back case 300. It is provided with a protruding operator 315.

The engaging portion 316 has a substantially triangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and is on one side (the side in the R direction of the arrow).
The outer surface of the first piece 311 is formed as an inclined surface protruding outward from the end of the first piece 311 toward the other side (arrow L direction side), while the outer surface of the other side is the first piece 311. Extension direction (arrow LR
It is extended in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), which is a direction substantially orthogonal to the direction).

The recess 317 is formed by notching in the thickness direction of the first piece 311 and the first piece 311.
It is recessed from one side (arrow R direction side) end toward the other side (arrow L direction side). Therefore,
One side of the first piece 311 is bifurcated. As a result, the rigidity of one side of the first piece 311 can be made lower than that of the other side. As a result, one side of the first piece 311 can be easily elastically deformed, and the engaging member 310 can be easily engaged with the fixing member 320. A detailed description of the engagement between the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 will be described later.

The operator 315 is an operation portion for operating the engaging member 310, and is formed at the other end of the first piece 311. The protruding dimension thereof is larger than the plate thickness of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300. It is set to a value and is projected toward the back side of the back case 300 by at least a size that can be grasped by an operator with a finger. As a result, the operator 315 can be projected from the second opening 301d of the bottom wall portion 301, and the protruding portion (the tip of the operator 315) can be grasped and operated.

The second piece 312 is provided with a fastening hole 318 recessed in a circle on the front side. The fastening hole 318 is
This is a portion for screwing a screw to be inserted into a hole (see FIG. 89) penetrated through the rear base 720 of the rotating unit 700, which will be described later. As a result, the inside of the rear case 300 (bottom wall portion 301)
After arranging the rotating unit 700 on the front side of the rotating unit 700, the engaging member 310 arranged on the back side of the rotating unit 700 is operated to place the engaging member 310 in a specified position (engagement with the fixing member 320 described later). It can be operated to the mating position), and the engaging member 31 is screwed into the fastening hole 318.
0 can be fastened to the rotating unit 700 (rear base 720). Therefore, the operator 315 that projects the engaging member 310 arranged at the specified position from the back side of the back case 300.
It can be disabled only by the operation of. As a result, with the pachinko machine 10 assembled, the actuator 315 is illegally operated, and the fixing member 320 and the board box 100 (
It is possible to prevent the main control device 110) from being easily replaced with an unauthorized board box.

In this case, the fastening hole 318 is inserted through the hole of the back base 720 of the rotating unit 700.
The screw to be fastened to may be operable from the hole from which the first winning opening 64 arranged in the game board 13 is removed. In this case, since it is not necessary to release the fastening between the game board 13 and the rear case 300, it is possible to suppress the complicated replacement work with the normal board box 100. As a result, the normal replacement work of the board box 100 can be simplified.

The fixing member 320 is composed of a rear case 300 and a separate member. As a result, the substrate box 100 can be caulked and fixed to the fixing member 320 having a smaller outer shape than the rear case 300. Therefore, the substrate box 100 can be fixed as compared with the case where the fixing member 320 is integrally formed with the rear case 300. It can be easily arranged. As a result, the board box 100 can be easily arranged in the back case 300 in a state where the board box 100 is difficult to be removed from the fixing member 320.

Further, the rear case 300 can be diverted as a component having the same shape in each pachinko machine model, but the board box 100 has a different shape and size depending on the model of each pachinko machine 10, so that the board box 100 The fixing member 320 on which the slingshot is arranged cannot be used as a diversion with another pachinko machine. Therefore, as compared with the case where the fixing member 320 is integrally formed with the back case 300, the mold at the time of molding the back case 300 can be the same mold as another pachinko machine. As a result, it is only necessary to form a mold for the fixing member 320 having a smaller outer shape than the rear case 300, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

The fixing member 320 is composed of an intermediate member 330 that engages with the above-mentioned engaging member 310, and a shaft support member 340 that is fastened to the intermediate member 330. As a result, the shaft support member 340 can be used as a diversion item having the same shape as the fixing member of another gaming machine.

The interposition member 330 is formed in a box shape in which the front side (arrow F direction side) is open, and the other side (arrow L).
A locking portion 331 projecting from the side surface on the side (direction side) and an engaged portion 332 formed in a frame shape protruding from the side surface on the other side (arrow L direction side) toward the rear case 300 side (front side). Mainly includes an insertion hole 333 that opens in a circular shape on the bottom surface of the box shape, and a protrusion 334 that protrudes from the back surface toward the shaft support member 340.

The locking portion 331 is provided with an opening for engaging the other side (arrow L direction side) of the fixing member 320 with the bottom wall portion 301, and the opening has an L-shaped cross section from the periphery of the first opening 301c described above. By inserting the protruding wall 301c1 projecting into the bottom wall portion 301, the wall portion 301 is engaged with the bottom wall portion 301. As a result, when the intermediate member 330 (fixing member 320) is arranged in the rear case 300, the protrusion 301c1 is inserted through the locking portion 331 of the intermediate member 330 and one side of the intermediate member 330 (arrow R). The directional side) can be locked to the rear case 300.

The engaged portion 332 is a portion that engages with the engaging member 310, and the protrusion dimension toward the rear case 300 side (arrow F direction side) exceeds the engaging member 310 arranged in the rear case 300. The distance dimension from the inner surface of the front side (arrow F direction side) of the enclosed space to the front of the bottom wall portion 301 is larger than the distance from the front of the engaging member 310 to the front of the bottom wall portion 301. Set. As a result, the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 and the engaging member 310 are arranged at overlapping positions in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

The insertion hole 333 is a through hole through which a screw for fastening the intermediate member 330 to the shaft support member 340 described later is inserted, and is set coaxially with the fastening hole 343 of the shaft support member 340.

The protrusion 334 is formed in a substantially L-shaped cross section, and the distance between the tip end portion on the bent side and the bottom surface of the intermediate member 330 is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the insertion portion 344 of the shaft support member 340 described later. Will be done.
As a result, the insertion portion 3 is between the tip of the protrusion 334 on the bent side and the bottom surface of the interposing member 330 facing each other.
44 can be inserted and arranged.

The shaft support member 340 has a box-shaped main body portion 341 that is open on the back case 300 side (arrow F direction side) and a substantially U-shaped cross section from the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the main body portion 341. It is mainly provided with a support portion 342 that bulges out.

The main body portion 341 is an insertion portion 3 projecting upward from the side surface on the upper side (arrow U direction side).
44 is mainly provided with a fastening hole 343 recessed from the bottom surface side (arrow D direction side) to the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the main body portion 341 formed in a box shape.

As described above, the insertion portion 344 is a plate member inserted between the tip end portion of the protrusion 334 on the bent side and the bottom surface of the interposition member 330 facing each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent the upper side of the shaft support member 340 from tilting toward the back side of the back case 300.

The fastening hole 343 is arranged on the lower side (the side in the direction of arrow D) that is biased toward the end on the opposite side of the insertion portion 344. Further, as described above, the fastening hole 343 is the insertion hole 333 of the interposing member 330 (FIG. 39).
It is a hole for fastening a screw through which (b) is inserted. Therefore, the shaft support member 340 is on the upper side (
The insertion portion 344 (on the side in the direction of arrow U) is inserted into the protrusion 334 of the intermediate member 330, and the lower side is fastened and fixed to the intermediate member 330. Therefore, since the shaft support member 340 is fixed to the intermediate member 330 only by fastening the screw on the lower side, the number of fastening portions can be reduced and the manufacturing process can be simplified.

The support portion 342 is a portion to be caulked and fastened to the bearing portion 117 of the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) described above, and is formed in a hollow shape in which a caulking metal fitting can be arranged. The board box 100 is held in a rotatable state with respect to the shaft support member 340 by fastening with a caulking metal fitting.

Then, referring to FIGS. 40 (a) to 41 (b), the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320
The engagement with is described. 40 (a) is a front view of the rear case 300 in a state before engaging the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320, and FIG. 40 (b) is a front view of the rear case 300 before engaging the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320. It is a rear view of the rear case 300 in the state of. FIG. 41 (a)
) Is a front view of the rear case 300 in the state after the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged, and FIG. 41 (b) is the rear surface in the state after the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged. It is a rear view of the case 300. In FIGS. 40 (b) and 41 (b), a part of the outer shape of the engaging member 310 that overlaps with the back case 300 is shown by a chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b), before engaging the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320, the interposing member 330 and the shaft support member 340 are placed on the interposing member 330 side (front side (arrow). It is fastened and combined with screws inserted from the F direction side)). As a result, the interposition member 330
Further, it is possible to prevent the shaft support member 340 from being illegally disassembled (the fastened screw is removed) from the back side of the back case 300. As a result, it is possible to prevent the board box 100 caulked and fixed to the shaft support member 340 from being replaced with an illegal board box.

As described above, the interposing member 330 and the shaft support member 340 (fixing member 320) in the fastened state have a protrusion 30 formed in the first opening 301c inside the locking portion 331 of the interposing member 330.
1c1 is inserted. In this case, the intervening member 330 and the shaft support member 340 in the fastened state (
The fixing member 320) has a first opening 301c from the bent side (arrow R direction side) of the protruding wall 301c1.
Is arranged in.

When the fixing member 320 is arranged in the rear case 300, the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 is arranged at a position facing one side (engaging portion 316 side) end portion of the engaging member 310. As a result, by sliding-displace the engaging member 310, one side (arrow R direction side) end portion of the engaging member 310 can be inserted into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332.

Here, the outer dimensions of the two engaging portions 316 of the engaging member 310 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) are the openings in the vertical direction of the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 described above. It is set larger than the dimensions. Therefore, there is a problem that the engaging member 310 cannot be arranged in the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332.

On the other hand, as described above, the engaging member 310 can easily elastically deform the first piece 311 by the recess 317 recessed on one side (arrow R direction side) of the first piece 311 and is engaged. Due to the triangular shape of the joining portion 316, the force when the engaging member 310 is slidably displaced and comes into contact with the inner edge of the engaged portion 332 can be applied to the concave portion 317 side of the engaging member 310. As a result, the first piece 311 formed in the fork can be elastically deformed and inserted into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332.

As shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b), the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are
The engaging member 310 is slidably displaced, and the first piece 311 of the engaging member 310 is replaced with the interposing member 33.
When inserted into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 of 0, the elastically deformed first piece 311 is returned to the shape before deformation. As described above, the engaging portion 316 has the first piece 311 on the other side surface.
It is extended in a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of. Therefore, the force that elastically deforms the first piece 311 toward the recess 317 is not applied only by the force that slides and displaces the engaging member 310 in the opposite direction. That is, the first piece 311 is engaged with the engaged portion 332 by the inclined surface and the recess 317 of the engaging portion 316.
It can be easily inserted into the space surrounded by, and the other side of the engaging part 316 (arrow L direction side).
The first piece 311 inserted into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 can be made difficult to come off by the side surface of the above. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fixing member 320 from being removed from the back side of the back case 300 due to an illegal act by the player, and the board box 100 (main control device 110) caulked and fastened to the fixing member 320 is an illegal board box. It can be suppressed from being exchanged for.

Further, the back case 300 is arranged between the base plate 60 and the back case 300, and is the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 60, and is the base plate 60 and the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301). The fixing member 320 includes an engaging member 310 that can be operated from the outside between the facing portions of the fixed member 320.
An engaged portion 332 projecting to the front side (arrow F direction side) of the rear case 300 is provided, and the engaged portion 332 and the engaging member 310 are engaged with each other and are arranged on the rear case 300. The engaging member 310 is operated from the outside between the base plate 60 and the back case 300 with the accessory device (rotating unit 700 in this example) disposed between the base plate 60 and the back case 300. , The engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 can be engaged.

Therefore, the fixing member 320 can be arranged on the back case 300 without being disturbed by the accessory device arranged between the base plate 60 and the back case 300 facing each other. As a result, the fixing member 320 can be easily arranged on the back case 300.

Further, since the engaging member 310 is engaged with the engaged portion 332 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the rear case 300, the engaging portion between the rear case 300 and the fixing member 320 is used as the base plate. It can be arranged between the 60 and the rear case 300 facing each other. As a result, the base plate 6
It is difficult to access the engaging portion between the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 from the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of 0. As a result, the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 3 are viewed from the back surface side of the base plate 60.
It is possible to prevent the fixing member 320 from being illegally (for example, replaced with an illegal fixing member) by being disengaged from the 20.

Further, the rear case 300 includes a first opening 301c opened in a portion where the fixing member 320 is arranged, and a second opening 301d opened in the portion where the engaging member 310 is arranged. The engaging member 310 is arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the back case 300 and from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 300 via the second opening 301d (passing through). The fixing member 320 is operable, and since the engaged portion 332 that has passed through the first opening 301c is arranged on the front side of the rear case 300, the engaged portion 332 of the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 is arranged. It is possible to make it difficult to access the engaging portion with the rear case 300 from the rear side. resulting in,
The fixing member 320 can be fixed to the back case 300 regardless of the size of the accessory device arranged in the back case 300, and is operated from the back side of the game board 13 to be replaced with an illegal board box. Can be prevented.

Further, since the engaging member 310 includes an operator 315 that penetrates the second opening 301d and projects to the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 300, the front side of the back case 300 (arrow F direction side). ), The engaging member 310 can be easily operated in the state where the engaging member 310 is arranged.
As a result, it is possible to facilitate the engagement operation between the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320.

Further, since the engaging member 310 can be slidably displaced on a plane parallel to the front side of the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301), the engaging member 310 can be displaced in the front-rear direction (arrow) with respect to the back case 300. Since it is not displaced in the FB direction, the front side (arrow F direction side) of the engaging member 310 can be easily used as an arrangement space for the accessory device arranged in the rear case 300. As a result, the area on the front side of the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301) can be easily used as a space for arranging the accessory device.

Next, an operation when the fixing member 320 is removed from the rear case 300 from the state shown in FIG. 41 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 41, the first opening 301c is opened in a substantially L-shape in front view, and the recess 317 of the engaging member 310 in the engaged state with the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 is the first. It can be operated from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 300 through the opening 301c.

Therefore, by elastically deforming the outer portion of the concave portion 317 of the engaging member 310 to the concave side of the concave portion 317 with a dedicated tool or the like, the engagement portion 316 of the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 are engaged with each other. The match is canceled. In the disengaged state, the engaging member 310 is displaced in the direction of pulling out from the internal space engaged by the engaged portion 332 (direction of arrow L), and then the deformation of the engaging member 310 is returned. , The engagement between the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 can be released.

It is preferable that the gap between the outer portion of the recess 317 of the engaging member 310 and the first opening 301c is formed as small as possible. According to this, the fixing member 3 from the rear case 300
The finger of the person who removes the 20 can be made uninsertable, and a special tool can be inserted.
As a result, the board box 100 (main control device 110) can be replaced only by an operator having a dedicated tool, and it is possible to prevent the board box 100 from being replaced by an unauthorized board box 100.

Next, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) caulked and fastened to the shaft support member 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b). 42 (a) is a perspective rear view of the rear case 300 and the board box 100 (main control device 110), and is shown in FIG. 42 (a).
b) is a rear view of the rear case 300 and the board box 100 (main control device 110). In FIG. 42B, the outer shape of the engaging member 310 overlapping with the substrate box 100 is shown by a chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b), the substrate box 100 has one end side (arrow R).
A bearing portion 117 protruding from the end portion (on the directional side) is provided. The bearing portion 117 is in the vertical direction (arrow U).
A pair is arranged at a predetermined interval (in the −D direction). As described above, the pair of bearing portions 117 are portions that are caulked and fastened to the support portion 342 of the shaft support member 340, and the dimensions of the support portion 342 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) and the distance between the facing portions are substantially equal to each other. Set to the same. As a result, the substrate box 100 is fastened to the shaft support member 340 by disposing the support portion 342 between the pair of bearing portions 117 facing each other and inserting a caulking pin from above the bearing portion 117 to caulking and fixing the board box 100. Will be done.

According to the board box 100 configured as described above, the board box 100 is rotatably held with respect to the shaft support member 340 and is arranged on the back surface side of the engaging member 310, as described above. As described above, when the operating element 315 is operated to engage the engaging member 310 with the fixing member 320, the operating element 315 can be easily operated by rotating the board box 100. Further, after the engaging member 310 is engaged with the fixing member 320, the board box 10 is used.
By arranging 0 on the back side of the engaging member 310, it is possible to make it difficult to operate the actuator 315 from the back side of the back case 300. As a result, after the pachinko machine 10 is assembled, the operator 3
It is possible to prevent 15 from being operated and replaced with an illegal board box.

The other end side (arrow L direction side) of the board box 100 is the bottom wall portion 3 of the rear case 300.
It is inserted from the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the board box 100 toward 01 and fixed by a screw fastened to the back surface case 300. As a result, the board box 100 is arranged on the back side of the back case 300 in a non-rotatable (operable) state.

Next, a detailed configuration of the lower displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 69. First, a structure for displacing the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46.

FIG. 43 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIG. 44 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400. FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement unit 400. It should be noted that FIGS. 43 to 14 show a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at the retracted position (the position arranged at the lowermost position with respect to the base member 410).

As shown in FIGS. 43 to 46, the lower displacement unit 400 includes a base member 410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300 and a transmission member disposed on the base member 410. The 420, the link member 430 connected to the base member 410 and displaced with the displacement of the transmission member 420, one end slidably connected to the base member 410 and the other end connected to the link member 430. It is mainly provided with a lower displacement member 440 that is displaced by transmitting a driving force from the link member 430.

The base member 410 is formed by combining two horizontally long plate members having a rectangular front view in the front-rear direction, and includes a front base 411 arranged on the front side and a back base 412 arranged on the back side. A transmission member 420 and a link member 430 are arranged between the front base 411 and the back base 412 facing each other.

The front base 411 has two sliding grooves 411 penetrating in the front-rear direction (the depth direction of the paper in FIG. 43).
It is mainly provided with a, 411b, two columnar shaft support pins 411c, 411d protruding toward the back surface side, and a curved wall portion 411e protruding in an arc shape with the shaft support pin 411d as an axis. ..

The sliding grooves 411a and 411b have two protrusions 47 protruding from the back surface side of the lower displacement member 440.
Holes 2, 473 are inserted into the holes, respectively. The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are formed so as to extend long in the left-right direction, respectively. Therefore, the protrusion 47 inserted into the sliding grooves 411a and 411b
By displacing 2,473 along the sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the lower displacement member 440 can be slid in the left-right direction.

Further, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are formed by being curved in an arc shape, respectively, and are upward (FIG. 4) from the left end (left side in FIG. 43) to the right end (right side in FIG. 43) of the front base 411.
3 Opened in the upward direction). Further, in the sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the axes of the respective arcs are arranged at different positions, and the gap between the facing portions in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 43) is narrowed from the left end portion to the right end portion.

Since the distance between the protrusions 472 and 473 of the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440, which will be described later, does not change, the lower displacement member 440 rotates when the lower displacement member 440 is slid along the sliding groove. It can be displaced while being displaced. That is, the two sliding grooves 411a and 411b
By changing the distance between them, the lower displacement member 440 can be rotated along with the sliding without applying a rotational driving force to the lower displacement member 440. The details of the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 will be described later.

The shaft support pin 411c is a protrusion inserted into the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 of the transmission member 420 described later, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft portion 422a. again,
The shaft support pin 411c is formed of a metal rod and is fitted onto the front base 411. Therefore, when a force acts on the cam member 422 from the outer peripheral surface thereof in the axial direction, the shaft support pin 4
It is possible to prevent the 11c from breaking (breaking).

The shaft support pin 411d is a through hole 431 formed at one end of the first link member 431, which will be described later.
It is a protrusion inserted into a and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 431a. Further, the shaft support pin 411d is formed of a metallic rod-like body and is externally fitted to the front base 411. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the shaft support pin 411d from breaking (damaging) when a force is applied to the first link member 431 toward the through hole 431a.

The curved wall portion 411e protrudes from the back surface side of the front base 411 and also has a shaft support pin 411.
It is formed by bending around the axis of d. The protruding distance of the curved wall portion 411e is set to a distance that abuts on the protruding tip surface of the plate-shaped protrusion 431b of the first link member 431, which will be described later. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first link member 431 from being displaced forward. In addition, the curved wall portion 411e
Is formed so as to be curved around the axis of the shaft support pin 411d, so that even when the first link member 431 is rotated around the axis of the shaft support pin 411d, the plate-shaped protrusion 431 of the first link member 431
b can be brought into contact with the protruding tip surface of the curved wall portion 411e.

The collection port 411f is an opening for allowing the ball ejected from the exit opening 471 to flow into the collection port 411f and collect it by moving the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440, which will be described later. The downstream side of the collection port 411f is connected to the collection path of the ball. The collection port 411f is a front base 41.
It is a hole formed protruding from the right end of No. 1, and its opening surface is a surface facing the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state and below the gravitational direction of the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 in the first overhanging state. It is considered to be a surface located on the side.

Further, the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state is arranged above the recovery port 411f. Therefore, the ball emitted from the emission opening 471 can be received in the collection port 411f and quickly collected.

The back base 412 has groove portions 412a and 412b recessed from the front side (front side of the paper in FIG. 44) toward the back side, and a locking portion 412c formed so as to project toward the front side in the vicinity of the groove portion 412b. Formed primarily in preparation.

The groove portion 412a is a hole for inserting the tip end side of the shaft support pin 411c of the front base 411 described above, is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft support pin 411c, and faces the shaft support pin 411c. It is recessed in the position. Therefore, the cam member 422 is held in a non-detachable manner from the base member 410 by combining the front base 411 and the rear base 412 after inserting the shaft support pin 411c into the shaft portion 422a. Further, since the rear base 412 can hold the tip end portion of the shaft support pin 411c, the shaft support pin 411c and the front base 411 when a force is applied to the cam member 422 in the axial direction from the outer peripheral surface thereof. It is possible to prevent bending and breaking from the connecting portion.

The groove portion 412b is a hole for inserting the tip end side of the shaft support pin 411d of the front base 411 described above, is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft support pin 411d, and faces the shaft support pin 411d. It is recessed in the position. Therefore, the first link member 431 has a through hole 431.
After the shaft support pin 411d is inserted through a, the front base 411 and the back base 412 are combined so as to be held in a non-removable manner from the base member 410. Also, the back base 412
However, since the tip of the shaft support pin 411d can be held, when a force is applied to the first link member 431 in the direction of the through hole 431a, the shaft support pin 411d bends from the connecting portion with the front base 411. It can be prevented from breaking.

The locking portion 412c is a plate for locking one end side of the urging spring SP1 described later, and the urging spring S
It is formed on the outside of P1. As a result, one end side of the urging spring SP1 can be locked. A detailed description of the urging spring SP1 will be described later.

The transmission member 420 has a transmission gear 421 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM1 attached to the front side of the front base 411, and a cam meshed with the transmission gear 421 and rotated by driving the transmission gear 421. It is mainly provided with a member 422.

The transmission gear 421 is a gear having a toothed surface over the entire outer peripheral surface, and is externally fitted to the shaft portion of the drive motor KM1. Therefore, when electric power is applied to the drive motor KM1 and the shaft portion is rotated, the transmission gear 421 is also rotated in the same manner.

The cam member 422 is formed in a shape in which one ends of two semicircles having different outer shapes in a front view are combined, and is formed of a plate-like body having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The small semicircular portion of the outer shape of the cam member 422 has a tooth surface 4 that meshes with the transmission gear 421 on the outer peripheral surface.
22b is engraved, and a shaft portion 422a is formed through the center of the semicircle. Cam member 42
A sliding groove 422c recessed on the back surface side facing the link member 430, which will be described later, is formed in the semicircular portion having a large outer shape of 2.

The shaft portion 422a is a hole through which the shaft support pin 411c is inserted as described above, and the shaft support pin 41
By rotatably supporting the shaft portion 422a to 1c, the cam member 422 is supported by the shaft support pin 411c.
It is held rotatably around the axis of.

The cam member 422 is a base member 410 in a state where the tooth surface 422b is in mesh with the transmission gear 421.
When the transmission gear 421 is rotated, the cam member 422 can rotate about the axis of the shaft portion 422a.

The sliding groove 422c is recessed along the outer peripheral portion of the semicircular portion having a large radius of the cam member 422. Therefore, the distance from the shaft portion 422a increases from one end side to the other end side. Further, the sliding groove 422c is a stepped portion 422c1 extending downward from the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 in the direction of the through hole 431a when the lower displacement member 440 is located in the retracted state described later. When the member 440 is located in the second overhanging state described later, the step portion 422c3 extending from the sliding projection 431d in the direction of the through hole 431a, and the lower displacement member 440 are in the retracted state and the second overhanging state. It is provided with a step portion 422c2 extending in the direction of the through hole 431a from the sliding projection 431d when it is located in the first overhanging state in the intermediate state.

The link member 430 is formed of two link members, a first link member 431 and a second link member 432. Further, the link member 430 is formed by rotatably connecting the ends of the first link member 431 and the second link member 432.

The first link member 431 is formed by being bent into a dogleg shape in front view, and is formed into a plate shape having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The first link member 431 is a link that is displaced with the displacement of the cam member 422, and has a through hole 431a that penetrates in the front-rear direction on one end side and a columnar connecting projection 431c that protrudes on the back side on the other end side. , A plate-shaped protrusion 431b protruding at a position facing the curved wall portion 411e described above, and a columnar sliding protrusion 4 protruding toward the front side of the bent portion.
It is formed mainly with 31d.

The through hole 431a is a through hole into which the shaft support pin 411d is inserted as described above. 1st
The link member 431 is rotatably held with respect to the base member 410 by combining the front base 411 and the back base 412 with the shaft support pin 411d inserted into the through hole 431a.

The plate-shaped protrusion 431b is a protrusion that suppresses the position shift of the first link member 431 in the front-rear direction and prevents the first link member 431 from colliding with the cam member 422 arranged in the front, and penetrates through the plate-shaped protrusion 431b. It is formed in a plate-like body that protrudes in a curved shape about the hole 431a, and the protruding length thereof is set to be larger than the thickness of the cam member 422 in the front-rear direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the back surface of the cam member 422 from colliding with the front surface of the first link member 431.

Further, the protruding dimension of the plate-shaped protrusion 9431b is set to be larger than the thickness (dimension in the arrow FB direction) of the cam member 422. Further, there is a slight gap (distance X14 (see FIG. 55A)) with the base member 410 (curved wall portion 411e) facing the protruding tip surface of the plate-shaped protrusion 431b.
) Are placed apart.

The cam member 422 is arranged in a displaceable state between the front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-shaped projection 431b and the facing surface (rear surface) of the curved wall portion 411e. Further, the dimensions of the two gaps including the gap between the cam member 422 and the first link member 431 facing each other and the gap between the cam member 422 and the base member 410 facing each other are the above-mentioned distance X1.
It is set to be larger than 4.

As a result, the first link member 9 is in the direction in which the above-mentioned distance X14 becomes smaller (arrow F direction).
When the 431 bends, the protruding tip surface of the plate-shaped protrusion 431b can be brought into contact with the facing base member 410 (curved wall portion 411e). Therefore, the cam member 422 is located between the front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-shaped protrusion 9431b and the projecting surface (rear surface) of the curved wall portion 411e.
It is possible to prevent the displacement from being regulated by being pinched.

The connecting protrusion 431c is a shaft portion connected to the second link member 432, which will be described later, and is inserted into the through hole 432a of the second link member 432, and the outer diameter of the head is the through hole 4 from the back surface side.
Screws or the like larger than 32a are fastened. As a result, the first link member 431 and the second link member 432 are rotatably connected.

A wall portion 431f projecting to the back surface side is formed at the edge portion of the through hole 431a. Wall 431
reference numeral f is a wall surface for fitting and holding the urging spring SP1 described later on the outer peripheral surface thereof.

The link-side engaging portion 431e is a protrusion that locks the other end side of the urging spring SP1 fitted to the wall portion 431f, and is formed so as to project like a hook on the back surface side of one end side of the first link member 431. ..
Therefore, one end of the urging spring SP1 is engaged with the locking portion 412c of the rear base 412, and the other end of the urging spring SP1 is engaged with the link-side engaging portion 431e of the first link member 431. NS. Therefore, the urging force of the urging spring SP1 can be applied in the direction of rotating the other end side of the first link member 431 upward with respect to the base member 410. As a result, when the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced, the urging force of the urging spring SP1 acts, so that the drive motor K
The energy consumption of M1 can be suppressed.

The sliding projection 431d is formed at a position separated from the through hole 431a at a distance substantially the same as the separation distance from the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 from the through hole 431a. Further, the tip portion of the sliding protrusion 431d is inserted inside the sliding groove 422c. That is, the size of the outer diameter of the sliding protrusion 431d is formed to be smaller than the width dimension between the sliding grooves 422c facing each other.

By arranging the sliding projection 431d inside the sliding groove 422c, the sliding projection 431d slides and is displaced inside the sliding groove 422c with the rotational displacement of the cam member 422. That is, when the cam member 422 is displaced, the first link member 431 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 431a. A detailed description of the displacement of the first link member 431 will be described later.

Further, since the sliding protrusion 431d and the plate-shaped protrusion 431b are formed at positions close to each other, the plate-shaped protrusion 431b suppresses the displacement of the first link member 431 to the front. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the sliding protrusion 431d from pushing the cam member 422 forward. As a result, it is no longer necessary to increase the recessed depth of the sliding groove 422c recessed in the cam member 422, and the cam member 42
The rigidity of 2 can be ensured without increasing the thickness in the front-rear direction.

One of the second link members 432 is formed into a long front view rectangle, and is formed into a plate shape having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The second link member 432 is mainly provided with a through hole 432a formed through the one end side in the front-rear direction and a through hole 432b formed through the other end side in the front-rear direction.

The through hole 432a is a hole for being connected to the first link member 431 as described above, and the connecting protrusion 431c is inserted therein. As a result, the second link member 432 is rotatably connected to the first link member 431.

The through hole 432b is connected to the lower displacement member 440 described later and can transmit the displacement of the link member 430 to the lower displacement member 440. The through hole 432b is a protrusion 48 of the rear case 482, which will be described later.
It is a hole into which 2a is inserted, and its inner diameter is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 482a. Therefore, by inserting the protrusion 482a into the through hole 432b and fastening a screw or the like having a head larger than the inner diameter of the through hole 432b to the tip of the protrusion 482a, the lower displacement member 440 becomes the second link member 432. It is held rotatably against. Therefore, in the drive of the lower displacement member 440, when the cam member 422 is rotationally displaced, the displacement is transmitted via the link member 430.

Next, the displacement operation of the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 52. 47 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state, FIG. 48 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first overhanging state, and FIG. 49 is a lower displacement unit in the second overhanging state. It is a front view of 400. FIG. 50 shows the lower displacement unit 40 in the retracted state.
0 is a rear view, FIG. 51 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first overhang state, and FIG. 52 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the second overhang state. In addition, FIG. 5
0 to 52 show a transparent view of the back base 412. Further, in FIGS. 50 to 52, a part of the plate-shaped protrusion 431b and the curved wall portion 411e of the first link member 431 is shown by a chain line.

Further, in the retracted state, the sliding projection 431d arranged inside the sliding groove 422c is the stepped portion 4.
It is in a state where the lower displacement member 440 is arranged on the lower side while being arranged between the facing portions of the 42c1. In the second overhanging state, the sliding protrusions 431d are arranged between the facing portions of the step portions 442c3, and the lower displacement member 440 is provided.
The tip side of is placed at the top. The first overhanging state is a state in which the sliding projections 431d are arranged between the facing portions of the step portions 442c2, and the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in an intermediate state between the retracted state and the second overhanging state.

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 50, in the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state, the cam member 422 at the first position is rotated by the transmission gear 421 and the other end side of the sliding groove 422c (step portion 422).
The c3 side) is positioned on the right side (right side in FIG. 50) of the shaft portion 422a when viewed from the rear. In this case, the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 is guided along the inner wall of the sliding groove 422c and is positioned at the step portion 422c1. Therefore, the first link member 431 is in a state where the other end side (connecting projection 431c side) is located on the right side (right side in FIG. 50) of the through hole 431a on one end side when viewed from the rear (rotating around the through hole 431a). It is in a state where the end side is positioned at the lower end of the rotatable range (first driven position).

Since the second link member 432 is connected to the first link member 431, the first link member 4
One end side (through hole 432a side) connected to 31 is located on the right side of the rear view (right side of FIG. 50). As a result, the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432 is the front base 4.
The protrusions 472 and 473 connected to 11 are on the right side of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b when viewed from the rear (FIG. 5).
It is considered to be located on the right side of 0). As described above, the distance between the sliding grooves 411a and 411b in the vertical direction is larger on the right side in the rear view than on the left side, so that the lower displacement member 44
0 is arranged in a state where the longitudinal direction is substantially parallel to the left-right direction. That is, it is in a state of being arranged in front of the front base 411.

The displacement from the retracted state shown in FIGS. 47 and 50 to the first overhanging state shown in FIGS. 46 and 51 is performed by displacing the cam member 422.

In the first overhanging state, the transmission gear 421 is rotated by the driving force of the driving motor KM1, and the cam member 422 is rotated by approximately 90 degrees from the retracted position and displaced to the third position. As a result, the other end side (step portion 422c3 side) of the cam member 422 is positioned above the shaft portion 422a. The first link member 43 guided to the inner wall of the sliding groove 422c by this rotational displacement.
The sliding projection 431d of No. 1 is displaced with the displacement of the sliding groove 422c and is arranged at the third driven position. In the first overhanging state, the sliding projection 431d is the stepped portion 422c of the sliding groove 422c.
Guided between the two inner walls facing each other.

Therefore, the first link member 431 is rotated approximately 30 degrees around the through hole 431a due to the displacement of the sliding projection 431d, and the other end side (connecting projection 431c side) is from the retracted position to the upper left of the rear view (FIG. 51). It is displaced to the upper left).

Due to the rotational displacement of the first link member 431, the second link member 432 connected to the first link member 431 is displaced, and the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432 is displaced. In this case, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced along the shape of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b because the protrusions 472 and 473 are slidably connected to the sliding grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411. As described above, the distance between the sliding grooves 411a and 411b in the vertical direction is narrowed from the right side in the rear view to the left side, so that the lower displacement member 440 slides to the right side in the front view (right side in FIG. 48). While being displaced, the tip side is rotationally displaced upward.

Further, in the first overhanging state, the collection port 411f is located on the lower side in the gravity direction on the tip side. That is, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced from the retracted state to the first overhanging state, the tip side of the lower displacement member 440 is overhanging to the right side of the front view of the base member 410 by rotationally displacing the lower displacement member 440. It can be displaced without causing it. As a result, it is possible to easily form a displacement region different from the variable region of other displacement accessories. It is possible to suppress collision with other displacement accessories.

Further, since the recovery port 411f is located below one end side of the lower displacement member 440 (the side opposite to the protrusions 472 and 473 sides connected to the front base 411), the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440, which will be described later, is located. When the ball is launched and falls downward from the exit opening 471 as it is, the ball can be thrown to the collection port 411f.

The displacement from the first overhanging state shown in FIGS. 48 and 51 to the second overhanging state shown in FIGS. 49 and 52 is performed by further displacing the cam member 422 from the first overhanging state.

In the second overhanging state, the transmission gear 42 is driven by the driving force of the driving motor KM1 from the first overhanging state.
1 is rotated, and the cam member 422 is arranged at a second position rotated by approximately 90 degrees from the position in the first overhanging state (third position). Therefore, the other end side of the cam member 422 (the step portion 422c3 side is positioned above the shaft portion 422a. Further, the sliding of the first link member 431 guided to the inner wall of the sliding groove 422c by this rotational displacement. The moving protrusion 431d is displaced along with the displacement of the sliding groove 422c and is arranged at the second driven position. In the second overhanging state, the sliding protrusion 431d
Is guided between the facings of the inner walls of the stepped portion 422c1 of the sliding groove 422c.

Therefore, the first link member 431 is rotated approximately 30 degrees around the through hole 431a due to the displacement of the sliding projection 431d, and the other end side (connecting projection 431c side) is seen from the position in the first overhanging state. It is displaced to the upper left (upper left of FIG. 52).

Due to the rotational displacement of the first link member 431, the second link member 432 connected to the first link member 431 is displaced, and the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432 is displaced. In this case, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced along the shape of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b because the protrusions 472 and 473 are slidably connected to the sliding grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411. As described above, the distance between the sliding grooves 411a and 411b in the vertical direction is narrowed from the right side in the rear view to the left side, so that the lower displacement member 440 slides to the right side in the front view (right side in FIG. 49). While being displaced, the tip side is rotationally displaced upward.

Further, as in the first overhanging state, in the second overhanging state, the collection port 41 is on the lower side in the gravity direction on the tip side.
It is assumed that 1f is positioned. That is, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced from the retracted state to the second overhanging state, the tip side of the lower displacement member 440 is overhanging to the right side of the front view of the base member 410 by rotationally displacing the lower displacement member 440. It can be displaced without causing it. As a result, it is possible to easily form a displacement region different from the variable region of the other displacement accessory, and it is possible to suppress collision with the other displacement accessory.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the positional relationship between the first link member 431 and the cam member 422 in each state will be described. FIG. 53 (a) shows the first link member 431 and the cam member 42 in the retracted state, FIG. 53 (b) shows the first overhanging state, and FIG. 53 (c) shows the second overhanging state.
It is a rear view with 2. In FIGS. 53 (a) to 53 (c), the first cam member 422 is shown.
The portion overlapping with the link member 431 is shown by a chain line.

As shown in FIG. 53 (a), in the retracted state, the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431d.
Is arranged between the facings of the inner walls of the stepped portion 422c1 of the sliding groove 422c. Further, as described above, the sliding projection 431d is formed at a position substantially the same as the distance between the through hole 431a and the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422, and at a position separated from the through hole 431a. Therefore, when a force rotating around the axis of the through hole 431a acts on the first link member 431 located in the retracted state,
The force can be applied to the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 from the sliding projection 431d. Therefore, the rotational force of the first link member 431 can prevent the cam member 422 from rotating. As a result, in the retracted state, the first link member 431 via the second link member 432
It is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 440 connected to the displacement member 440 from being displaced.

As shown in FIG. 53 (b), in the first overhanging state, the sliding projection 43 of the first link member 431
1d, it is arranged between the facings of the inner walls of the stepped portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c. Therefore, as in the retracted state, when a force rotating around the through hole 431a acts on the first link member 431 located in the first overhanging state, the force is applied from the sliding projection 431d to the cam member 422. Shaft 422a
Can act on. Therefore, with the rotational force of the first link member 431, the cam member 422
Can be suppressed from rotating. As a result, in the first overhanging state, the second link member 432
It is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 440 connected to the first link member 431 from being displaced.

Here, in the first overhanging position, the drive motor KM1 needs to be maintained in the stopped state in order to maintain the stopped state because it is in the intermediate position of the displacement of the lower displacement member 440. Therefore, there is a problem that energy consumption increases when the lower displacement member 440 is stopped at the first overhanging position (intermediate position of displacement).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the first overhanging state, the sliding protrusion 4 of the first link member 431
Since the 31d is arranged between the inner walls of the stepped portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c facing each other, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 as described above. Therefore, even if the power of the drive motor KM1 is stopped when the lower displacement member 440 is stopped at a position in the middle of the displacement, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the lower displacement member 440. As a result, it is possible to prevent the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 from increasing when the lower displacement member 440 is stopped in the middle of displacement.

As shown in FIG. 53 (c), in the second overhanging state, the sliding projection 43 of the first link member 431
1d, it is arranged between the facings of the inner walls of the stepped portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c. Therefore, as in the retracted state and the first overhanging state, the through hole 4 is provided in the first link member 431 located in the second overhanging state.
When a force rotating about the axis of 31a acts, the force can be applied to the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 from the sliding projection 431d. Therefore, the rotational force of the first link member 431 can prevent the cam member 422 from rotating. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 440 connected to the first link member 431 via the second link member 432 from being displaced in the second overhanging state.

Further, each step portion 422c1, 422c2, 422c3 has a sliding protrusion 431d and a through hole 43.
Since it is extended in the direction connecting to 1a, the width dimension of the sliding groove 422c in the direction in which the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 is displaced can be reduced. Therefore, the gap between the sliding groove 422c and the sliding protrusion 431d at which the first link member 431 can be rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 431a at the retracted position, the first overhanging position, and the second overhanging position is made small. can. Therefore, the first link member 431 in each state can reduce the clearance that can be rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 431a. As a result, the width in which the lower displacement member 440 in each state sways due to vibration or inertial force when the displacement is stopped can be reduced, and the player can easily visually recognize the stopped state.

Therefore, the transmission member 420 and the link member 430 (drive mechanism) that drive the lower displacement member 440 regulate that the lower displacement member 440 is displaced in the direction of reaction when the game ball is ejected from the ball receiving portion 467. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 440 from being displaced with respect to the base member 410 due to the reaction. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the relationship between the link member 430 and the cam member 422 in the front-rear direction will be described. FIG. 54 (a) shows the lower displacement unit 4 in the LIVA-LIVA line of FIG. 50.
FIG. 54 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of 00, which is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the LIVb-LIVb line of FIG. 51. In addition, in FIG. 51 and FIG. 52, the back base 412
Is shown transparently, but in FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b), a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 in a non-transparent state is shown.

As shown in FIG. 54 (a), the link member 43 of the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state.
0 is arranged between the back base 412 and the cam member 422. Therefore, the lower displacement member 44
It is possible to suppress 0 from swinging in the front-back direction. That is, since the other end side of the first link member 431 is connected to the lower displacement member 440 configured by combining a plurality of equipments via the second link member 432, the load of the lower displacement member 440 causes the front-back direction. Since the cam member 422 is arranged forward where there is a risk of bending, it is possible to prevent the first link member 431 from bending forward. As a result, it is possible to suppress the movement of the first link member 431 forward, so that the lower displacement member 44
It is possible to suppress 0 from swinging in the front-back direction.

As shown in FIG. 54 (b), the link member 430 of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first overhanging state is arranged between the back surface base 412 and the cam member 422 as in the case of the retracted state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the downward displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction.

Further, in the retracted state and the first overhanging state, the cam member 422 is arranged on the front side of the connecting portion between the first link member 431 and the second link member 432 of the link member 430. Therefore, when the link member 430 is formed of the two members, it is necessary to make the connecting portion rotatable, so that the rigidity of the link member 430 is weaker than that of the other portions due to the gap, and the link member 430 is easily bent. Since the member 422 is arranged, it is possible to prevent the connecting portion of the link member 430 from bending. As a result, it is possible to suppress the downward displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction.

<Regulate the displacement of the displacement member by the regulatory means that regulates the displacement of the driven member>
Next, the relationship between the cam member 422 and the curved wall portion 411e will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55 (a) shows the lower displacement unit 4 in the LVa-LVa line of FIG. 50.
00 is a cross-sectional view, FIG. 55 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the LVb-LVb line of FIG. 51, and FIG. 55 (c) is a lower displacement unit in the LVc-LVc line of FIG. 52. It is sectional drawing of 400.

As shown in FIG. 55 (a), when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the retracted state (first position), the cam member 422 and the curved wall portion 411e are in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). Placed in different positions. Therefore, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the retracted state (first position) to the first overhanging state (third position), it is possible to suppress an increase in resistance acting on the cam member 422. As a result, the displacement start of the lower displacement member 440 can be stabilized.

As shown in FIGS. 55 (b) and 55 (c), the lower displacement unit 400 is in the first overhanging state (
In the case of the third position), a part of the cam member 422 is arranged at a position separating a predetermined gap on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the curved wall portion 411e. As a result, when the cam member 422 is displaced in the front direction, the axial side surface of the cam member 422 is brought into contact with the curved wall portion 411e, and the cam member 422 can be prevented from being displaced to the front side.

The surface of the cam member 422 on the front base 411 side (arrow F direction side) is the front base 41.
It is formed on a flat surface parallel to the back surface of No. 1 (see FIG. 45). As a result, when the cam member 422 is displaced toward the curved wall portion 411e, the flat surface of the cam member 422 can be brought into contact with the curved wall portion 411e. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cam member 422 from partially contacting the curved wall portion 411e and to prevent the force from being concentrated on a part of the cam member 422. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cam member 422 from being damaged.

Here, as described above, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced from the retracted state (first position) to the first overhanging state (third position), the protrusion 473 connected to the tip side (front base 411). And the opposite side in the longitudinal direction) is rotationally displaced upward (in the direction of arrow U). Therefore, as the longitudinal direction component of the lower displacement member 440 approaches the direction of gravity, the force component at which the lower displacement member 440 tilts in the front-rear direction is increased. Therefore, in the case of the first overhanging state (third position), the force in the front-rear direction acting on the link member 430 supporting the lower displacement member 440 is higher than in the case of the retracted state (first position). Be enlarged. As a result, the cam member 422 connected to the link member 430 is likely to be displaced in the front-rear direction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower displacement unit 400 is first from the retracted state (first position).
A part of the cam member 422 is a curved wall portion 41 when the cam member 422 is displaced beyond the overhanging state (third position).
Since it is arranged on the front side of 1e, it is possible to regulate the displacement of the cam member 422 toward the front side. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction between the first overhang state (third position) and the second overhang state (second position), and the player can displace the lower displacement member 440. Can be easily seen.

The displacement of the link member 430 toward the back surface can be regulated by disposing the link member 430 between the back surface base 412 and the cam member 422 as described above. That is, when the link member 430 swings toward the back surface, the link member 430 can be brought into contact with the back surface base 412 to regulate the displacement of the link member 430. As a result, it is possible to suppress the downward displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction.

Further, the front base 411 is provided with a regulating means (curved wall portion 411e) for restricting the swing of the link member 430 in a direction other than the driven direction, and the cam member 422 is displaced between the first position and the second position. The first displacement region that displaces the third position between the first position and the intermediate position between the first position and the second position and the second displacement region that displaces the second position from the third position can be displaced. The link member 430 is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position by the displacement of the cam member 422 from the first position to the second position, and the link member 430 is driven from the first driven position to the first driven position and the second driven position. The first driven area that displaces the third driven position at the intermediate position with and the second driven area that displaces the second driven position from the third driven position can be displaced, and the second displacement area and the first driven area can be displaced. When a part of and is set in the same area and the cam member 422 is displaced in the second displacement area, the regulating means (curved wall portion 4)
Since the swing of the cam member 422 in a direction other than the displacement direction is regulated by 11e), the swing of the link member 430 and the cam member 422 is regulated by using the same portion of the regulating means (curved wall portion 411e). be able to.

Therefore, since it is sufficient to form the regulating means (curved wall portion 411e) at one place, the cam member 42
Compared with the case where the regulating means for regulating the displacement is formed in each of the 2 and the link member 430, the shape of the regulating means can be simplified and the manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Further, the means for regulating the swing of the link member 430 and the cam member 422 (curved wall portion 411e).
Since it can be regulated by using the same part of 1 (curved wall portion 411e)
Since it is not necessary to form the link member 430, the cam member 422, and the regulation portion, respectively, the regulation means (curved wall portion 411e) can be reduced accordingly.

Further, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the retracted state to the second overhanging state, the protrusions 472 and 473 of the lower displacement member 440 inserted into the sliding grooves 411a and 411b formed in the front base 411. (Color C arranged on the protrusions 472 and 473 (see FIG. 14)) is on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the other end side (step portion 422c3 side) of the cam member 422 as the cam member 422 is displaced. (See FIGS. 50 to 52). As a result, when the other end side (step portion 422c3 side) of the cam member 422 is pushed out to the back surface side by the protrusions 472 and 473 (color C arranged on the protrusions 472 and 473), the cam member 422 is pushed to the back surface side. There is a risk that it will be rotationally displaced in the front-rear direction around 422a and come into contact with the link member 430.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the displacement of the cam member 422 toward the front side can be regulated by abutting against the curved wall portion 411e, so that the cam member 422 can be regulated by the shaft portion 422a.
It is possible to suppress rotational displacement in the front-back direction around the center. As a result, it is possible to prevent the link member 430 and the cam member 422 from coming into contact with each other.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the cam member 422 is displaced beyond the first overhanging state (third position), the displacement is restricted by the curved wall portion 411e, so that the cam member 422 is curved during the initial operation. It is possible to prevent the frictional resistance from increasing due to contact with the wall portion 411e. As a result, the initial operation of the cam member 422 can be stabilized.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the cam member 422 and the first link member 431 when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state will be described. 56 (a) is L of FIG. 52.
It is sectional drawing of the lower displacement unit 400 in the VIa-LVIa line, and FIG. Is. In FIG. 56B, the outer shape of the base member 410 is shown by a chain line.

As shown in FIG. 56, when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state, the end portion of the cam member 422 comes into contact with the plate-shaped protrusion 431b of the first link member 431. This makes it possible to regulate the rotational displacement of the cam member 422 in the direction in which the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the retracted state (first position) to the second displacement state. As a result, the operation of stopping the rotational displacement of the cam member 422 can be dispersed between the meshing portion of the transmission gear 421 and the tooth surface 422b and the contact portion of the cam member 422 and the first link member 431, and transmission is possible. Gear 421 and tooth surface 42
It is possible to prevent the tooth surface of 2b from being damaged.

Further, when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state, the first link member 431
The contact surface between the plate-shaped projection 431b and the cam member 422 is set in a direction orthogonal to the virtual line KS1 passing through the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 and the contact portion thereof. As a result, when a force that displaces from the second displacement state to the retracted state (first position) acts around the axis of the first link member 431, the force is applied to the shaft of the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422. It is possible to suppress the action in the direction of rotating around. As a result, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the cam member 422 by the force acting on the first link member 431.

Here, as described above, the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced upward (in the direction of arrow U) on the tip end side (the side opposite to the protrusion 473 connected to the front base 411 in the longitudinal direction). Therefore, the first that supports the lower displacement member 440 by the amount that the directional component in the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 approaches the direction of gravity.
When the force in the rotational direction acting around the axis of the through hole 431a of the link member 431 is maximized, the transmission of the force from the first link member 431 to the cam member 422 is suppressed, so that the lower displacement member 440 is seconded. It can be easily maintained in the displaced position.

Further, when the cam member 422 is arranged at the position of the second displacement state, the lower displacement member 440
A force that rotates around the axis of the through hole 431a of the first link member 431 is applied by the load of. In this case, the force PW1 (see FIG. 56B) in the direction in which the end portion of the cam member 422 is pushed out by the plate-shaped protrusion 431b and the cam member 422 rotates around the axis of the shaft portion 422a, and the cam member 42.
The inner wall of the sliding groove 422c of 2 is pushed out from the sliding projection 431d, and the cam member 422 is the shaft portion 4.
The force PW2 (see FIG. 56B) in the direction of rotation around the axis of 22a acts in a direction in which they cancel each other out. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cam member 422 from rotating due to the force acted on by the first link member 431.

Next, the configuration of the lower displacement member 440 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. 57 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440, and FIG. 57 (b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member 440. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 440, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 440. 60 (a) and 60 (b) show the lower displacement member 4
It is a front view of 40.

Note that FIG. 60 (a) shows a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 is transparently viewed, and FIG. 60 (b) shows the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 transparently. The state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 57 to 60, the lower displacement member 440 includes a base member 470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 that covers the front and rear of the base member 470, and a case member 480 and a base member 470. It is mainly provided with a transmission mechanism 460 displaceably arranged between them and a decorative member 450 formed so as to cover the front and back of the case member 480.

The base member 470 is a plate member formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, and has a protrusion 472 and 473 protruding to the back side on one end side and an erection wall 471a standing on the front side from the edge on the other end side. , Left-right direction (FIG. 57 left-right direction) A projecting wall 477 that protrudes vertically from the upper end of the central portion to the front side in an up-down U-shape, and a projecting wall 477 engraved on the upper end of the base member 470 from the end of the projecting wall 477 to one end. A rack gear 476 to be installed, a shaft portion 474, 475 protruding to the front side, a rectangular wiring locking portion 478 attached to the back surface on one end side of the base member 470, and a vertical center portion of the base member 470. It is mainly provided with an opening 479 that extends from one end side to the other end side and is recessed.

As described above, the protrusions 472 and 473 have sliding grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411.
It is a connecting portion that is inserted into and connects the lower displacement member 440 and the front base 411. Therefore, it is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the dimension between the facings of the inner walls of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b.

The erection wall 471a is a wall portion for forming a gap between the front case 481 and the base member 470 facing each other when the front case 481, which will be described later, is attached to the base member 470.
It is set to an upright dimension that is larger than the diameter of the sphere.

The shaft portions 474 and 475 are protrusions that are inserted into the shafts of the transmission gears 462 and 463 of the transmission mechanism 460, which will be described later, to rotatably hold the transmission gears 462 and 463, and the transmission gears 462 and 463.
It is formed in a columnar shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole.

The rack gear 476 is engraved with a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 465 described later. As a result, the movable rack 464, which will be described later, slides and displaces with respect to the base member 470.
The transmission gear 465 can be rotated.

When the ball thrown from the ball throwing unit 600, which will be described later, is received in front of the base member 470 through the opening 451a of the decorative member 450, the projecting wall 477 causes the ball to be displaced downward.
It is a wall surface for suppressing falling to the outside of the sphere, and the space between the facing wall portions formed in a substantially U shape is formed larger than the diameter of the sphere.

The wiring locking portion 478 is a member for locking the flexible wiring (not shown) to the control board arranged on the back side of the base member 470, and is one end of the flexible wiring between the wiring locking portion 478 and the base member 470. It is attached to the back surface side of the base member 470 in a state of being via the base member 470. As a result, even if the lower displacement member 440 is displaceably arranged with respect to the base member 410, it is possible to prevent the flexible wiring from being entangled.

Further, the wiring locking portion 478 is provided with a protrusion 478a projecting in a columnar shape on the back surface side. The protrusion distance of the protrusion 478a is set to a distance that protrudes toward the back surface side of the link member 430 connected to the back surface side, and is set to a distance that allows contact with the front surface of the back surface base 412. As a result, the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed from swinging backward, and the link member 430 can be prevented from swinging backward.
Can be prevented from colliding with the back base 412.

The opening 469 is an opening that defines the slide displacement direction of the movable rack 464 arranged on the front side, and the guide plate 464d of the movable rack 464 described later is inserted inside.

The transmission mechanism 460 is a member arranged in front of the base member 470, and is a transmission gear 461.
, 462, 463, a drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461, and a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463, and is movable so as to be slidably displaceable in front of the base member 470. The movable rack 464 has a transmission gear 465 that is rotatably arranged on the rack 464 and its movable rack 464 and is in a state of being meshed with the rack gear 476, and a tooth surface meshed with the transmission gear 465. The rack 466, which is arranged so that it can be slid and displaced in the front,
It is mainly provided with a ball receiving portion 467 rotatably arranged on one end side of the rack 466.

The transmission gear 461 is a gear in which the shaft portion of the drive motor KM2 is fitted in the shaft hole, and the drive motor KM2 is attached to the base member 470 in a state of being connected to the drive motor KM2, whereby the base member 470 is attached. Arranged in.

As described above, the transmission gears 462 and 463 have the shaft portion 474 of the base member 470 in the shaft hole.
The 475 is inserted and rotatably held by the base member. Also, transmission gears 461 to 46
Reference numeral 3 is an meshed gear train, and the transmission gear 461 is rotated by the drive motor KM2 to rotate the terminal transmission gear 463.

The movable rack 464 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular plate in a front view, and has a rack gear 464a engraved on the lower end surface, a shaft portion 464b projecting in a columnar shape from the front side, and projecting upward from one end side of the upper end surface. A contact plate 464c, a guide plate 464d projecting from one end to the other end at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and a rack guide portion 464e projecting to the front side opposite to the guide plate 464d.
It is mainly provided with a collision portion 464f protruding from the lower end.

The rack gear 464a is a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463. Therefore, the base member 4
By arranging the rack gear 464a and the transmission gear 463 in the toothed state on the 70, the movable rack 464 can be displaced by the drive of the drive motor KM2.

The shaft portion 464b is a shaft portion in which the transmission gear 465 is rotatably held, and the transmission gear 46
It is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than that of the shaft hole of 5.

The contact plate 464c is a contact portion that abuts on the distribution member 540 of the distribution unit 500, which will be described later, to displace the distribution member 540. That is, the distribution member 540 can be displaced by the displacement of the movable rack 464. The mode of contact between the contact plate 464c and the distribution member 540 will be described later.

As described above, the guide plate 464d is a plate-shaped body inserted inside the opening 479 of the base member 470, and can define the displacement direction of the movable rack 464 displaced by the drive of the drive motor KM2. That is, the movable rack 4 that is displaced by the drive of the drive motor KM2.
64 can be displaced along the extension direction of the opening 479. In this embodiment, it should be noted that
Since the opening 479 extends in the left-right direction, the movable rack 464 can be slid and displaced in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470.

The rack guide portion 464e is a protrusion for regulating the displacement direction of the rack 466, which will be described later, and is projected from one end to the other end in the left-right direction.

The collision portion 464f comes into contact with the protrusion 492b of the displacement member 492, which will be described later, and the displacement member 492
It is a wall portion for displacing and is formed so as to project from the lower end of the movable rack 464. Further, the collision portion 464f is formed so that the other end side is inclined. As a result, the protrusion 4 of the displacement member 492
The 92b can be displaced by sliding along its inclined surface.

The rack 466 is formed of a horizontally long rod-shaped body having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a rack gear 466a engraved on the upper end surface, a shaft portion 466b which protrudes in a columnar shape from the other end to the back side, and a shaft portion 466b which protrudes to the front side. Two sliding plates 466c and a recessed portion 466 recessed from one end to the other on the back side.
It is formed mainly with d.

The rack gear 466a is meshed with a transmission gear 465 attached to the movable rack 464.
As a result, when the rack 466 is arranged in front of the movable rack 464, the movable rack 464 slides and displaces, so that the transmission gear 465 is rotated along with the slide displacement, and the driving force is transmitted to the rack 466. .. Therefore, the rack 466 can be displaced with respect to the movable rack 464.

The shaft portion 466b is a protrusion inserted into the shaft hole 467b of the ball receiving portion 467, which will be described later, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 can be held rotatably.

The sliding plate 466c is a protrusion inserted into the opening 481a of the front case 481 described later, and is formed of a plate-shaped body having a predetermined thickness. As a result, the transmission gear 46 is attached to the rack 466.
When the driving force is transmitted from 5 and the rack 466 is displaced with respect to the movable rack 464,
The displacement direction of the rack 466 can be defined as the extending direction of the opening 481a.

The recessed portion 466d is in a state where the rack guide portion 464e is arranged inside when the rack 466 is arranged in front of the movable rack 464. As a result, the transmission gear 4 is attached to the rack 466.
When the driving force is transmitted from 65 and the rack 466 is displaced with respect to the movable rack 464, the displacement direction of the rack 466 can be defined as the extension direction of the rack guide portion 464e.

Here, in order to regulate the displacement direction of the rack 466, if the recessed portion 466d and the rack guide portion 464e are formed, the displacement direction of the rack 466 can be defined as the extension direction of the rack guide portion 464e. However, since the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced while being slid and displaced in the left-right direction, the meshing state of the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 changes due to its own weight depending on the displacement state of the lower displacement member 440, and transmission occurs. Gear 465 to rack 46
There was a risk that the driving force would not be transmitted well to 6.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the position that defines the displacement direction of the rack 466 is the sliding plate 46.
Since the 6c and the opening 481a, the recessed portion 466d, and the rack guide portion 464e are formed at two locations, the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 are formed when the displacement state of the lower displacement member 440 is changed.
It is possible to suppress the change in the tooth alignment state of. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transmission of the drive from the transmission gear 465 to the rack 466 to be hindered.

Further, the sliding plate 466c is formed so as to project from two positions in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 57 (a)) of the rack 466, and the sliding plate 466c on the other end side (opposite side of the shaft portion 466b) is formed. It is arranged below the transmission gear 465 (lower side in FIG. 57) at the displacement end position of the rack (the position where the rack 466 most overhangs the movable rack 464).

Here, at the displacement end position, the ball receiving portion 467 arranged on the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466 performs a firing operation (rotational displacement) as described later, so that the ball receiving portion arranged on one end side of the rack 466 is arranged. The other end side of the rack is likely to be displaced due to the inertial force due to the displacement of the portion 467. Therefore, a load is likely to be applied to the tooth mating surfaces of the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466, and the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 are likely to be loaded.
Was in danger of being damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the sliding plate 466c on the other end side (opposite side of the shaft portion 466b) is
At the displacement end position of the rack (the position where the rack 466 is most overhanging with respect to the movable rack 464), the ball receiving portion 467 is launched (because it is arranged below the transmission gear 465 (lower side in FIG. 57)). It is possible to prevent the rack 466 from being displaced at the position where it meshes with the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 when the rotation operation is performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 from being damaged.

The ball receiving portion 467 is a portion that holds the game ball, is formed in a substantially U-shape in front view, and is formed so that the ball can be received in the inner portion of the U-shape. That is, the inside of the U-shape of the ball receiving portion 467 is formed slightly larger than the outer shape of the ball. As a result, one ball can be formed in the inner portion of the ball receiving portion 467. Further, the ball receiving portion 467 has a shaft hole 467b penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower end position of the U-shape, and
It is mainly provided with a leg portion 467a projecting downward from the lower outer peripheral surface.

As described above, the shaft hole 467b is a shaft hole for holding the ball receiving portion 467 in the rack 466 in a rotatable state, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 can be rotatably held by inserting the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466 into the shaft hole 467b. Further, after the shaft portion 466b is inserted into the shaft hole 467b, the urging spring SP2 is arranged around the shaft portion 466b, and a screw or the like having a head larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b is fastened to the shaft portion 466b. NS. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged in the rack 466 in a state of being urged around the right side of the front view. A detailed description of the aspect of the ball receiving portion 467 will be described later.

The leg portion 467a is a protrusion that urges the ball receiving portion 467 to be rotated by the urging spring SP2, and the front end thereof is described later with the U-shaped open portion of the ball receiving portion 467 facing upward. It is set at a position where it abuts on the bottom wall portion 481b of the case 481. Thereby, it is possible to regulate the rotation of the ball receiving portion 467.

The case member 480 is a member that covers the front and rear of the base member 470, and is a base member 47.
It mainly includes a front case 481 arranged on the front side of 0 and a back case 482 arranged on the back side.

The front case 481 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular plate in the front view, and has an opening 481a that extends in the left-right direction at a position substantially intermediate in the direction of gravity, a bottom wall portion 481b that is formed so as to protrude from the lower end surface on the back side, and a lower edge portion. It is mainly provided with a shaft hole 481c penetrating in the front-rear direction.

The opening 481a is formed through in the front-rear direction, and as described above, the base member 470a is formed.
When the front case 481 is arranged in the rack, the sliding plate 466c of the rack is inserted inside.

The bottom wall portion 481b is formed so as to project from the lower end portion of the front case 481 toward the back surface side, and extends in the left-right direction. Further, the bottom wall portion 481b is in a state where the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is in contact with the upper surface of the front case 481 in a state where the front case 481 is arranged on the base member 470.

The back case 482 is a plate member for arranging the control board 491 on the back side of the base member 470, and the outer shape in the front view is formed in a rectangular horizontal shape smaller than the outer shape of the base member 470. Further, the back case 482 includes a protrusion 482a protruding toward the back side.

As described above, the protrusion 482a is a connecting portion connected to the through hole 432b of the second link member 432, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 432b. Therefore, after inserting the protrusion 482a into the through hole 432b, the through hole 432b is inserted into the tip of the protrusion 482a.
By fastening a screw or the like having a head larger than the inner diameter of the rear case 482, the rear case 482 and the second link member 432 can be connected in a rotatable state.

The decorative member 450 is formed in an outer shape imitating a pattern or a character, and the pattern or a picture of the character is drawn on the surface of the decorative member 450. The decorative member 450 includes a front side decorative portion 451 arranged on the front side of the front case 481 and a back side decorative portion 452 arranged on the back side of the back case 482.
It is formed mainly with and. In this embodiment, a shark pattern (character) is drawn on the decorative member 450.

The front side decorative portion 451 is formed to have an outer diameter larger than the outer diameter of the front case 481 in the front view, and is attached to the front case 481. As a result, the members (case member 480, base member 470, etc.) arranged on the back side of the front side decorative portion can be made invisible to the player.

The back side decorative portion 452 is arranged behind the upper end of the front side decorative portion 451. As a result, the member arranged on the back side of the front side decoration portion 451 from above the back side decoration portion 452 can be made invisible to the player.

Further, the displacement member 492 is arranged on the same plane as the front decorative portion 451 in the front-rear direction. The displacement member 492 is mainly provided with a shaft portion 492a projecting to the back surface side and a protrusion 492b.

The shaft portion 492a is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 481c of the front case 481. Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 492a into the shaft hole 481c, the displacement member 492 can be connected to the front case in a rotatable state. Further, the shaft portion 492 into which the shaft hole 481c is inserted
An urging spring SP3 is arranged on the tip end side of a. As a result, the displacement member 492 can be arranged in an urged state. A detailed description of the displacement of the displacement member 492 will be described later.

The shaft portion 492a can transmit a driving force that rotates about the axis of the shaft portion 492a to the displacement member 492 by colliding with the collision portion 464f of the movable rack 464 described above. That is, the movable rack 464 can rotationally displace the displacement member 492 according to its displacement.

Therefore, the lower displacement member 440 includes a displacement member 492 (arrangement member) displaceably disposed on the lower displacement member 440 (base member), and the ball receiving portion 467 (displacement member) can hold the game ball. Moreover, since the displacement member 492 is formed so as to be injectable and can be displaced when the game ball is ejected from the ball receiving portion 467, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the lower displacement member 440.

That is, when the game ball is launched from the ball receiving portion 467, the lower displacement member 440 is equal to the weight of the game ball.
Where the position of the center of gravity is changed, for example, when a configuration is adopted in which the displacement member 492 is displaced in a direction that cancels the change in the position of the center of gravity due to the launch of the game ball, the lower displacement member 440 due to the change in the position of the center of gravity is adopted. The occurrence of rattling can be suppressed. Further, when the game ball is launched from the ball receiving portion 467, the lower displacement member 440 receives a reaction due to the launch of the game ball, for example, the displacement member 492 is provided in a direction that cancels the reaction caused by the launch of the game ball. When the displaceable configuration is adopted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the lower displacement member 440 due to the reaction.

Further, as described above, when the cam member 422 is arranged at the position of the second displacement state, the force PW1 in the direction in which the cam member 422 rotates around the axis of the shaft portion 422a (see FIG. 56 (b)). And the force PW2 (see FIG. 56B) in the direction in which the cam member 422 rotates around the axis of the shaft portion 422a acts in a direction in which they cancel each other out, and the cam member 422 is acted on from the first link member 431. Rotation by force can be suppressed. Therefore, in the second displacement state, the cam member 422 and the link member 430 can be arranged in a stable state. Therefore, when the game ball is launched from the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 at the position of the second displacement state, the first link member 431 or the cam member 422 swings due to the inertial force generated by the launch of the game ball. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the displacement of the displacement member 492 is performed by the collision portion 464f colliding with the shaft portion 492a due to the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for displacing the displacement member 492. .. That is, the drive motor KM2 for displacing the ball receiving portion 467 is
It can also be used as a driving means for displacing the displacement member 492. Therefore, the weight of the lower displacement member 440 can be reduced by that amount, and the rattling can be easily suppressed.

Further, since the displacement member 492 can be displaced mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, for example, the position of the ball receiving portion 467 is detected by the sensor device, and the displacement member 492 is detected according to the detection result. It is possible to eliminate the need for control of driving the displacement member 492 with the driving means, thereby reducing the product cost and ensuring the reliability of the displacement operation of the displacement member 492 with respect to the ball receiving portion 467.

Next, the transition of the transmission mechanism 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 64. Figure 6
1 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the first position, FIG. 62 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the second position, and FIG. 63 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the third position. Is. 64 (a) to 64 (c) are partially enlarged views of the lower displacement member 440.

The first position is a position where the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at a substantially central position in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 61) with respect to the base member 470. The second position is the position where the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged on the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 62) of the projecting wall 477. The third position is the position where the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the right end in the left-right direction of the base member 470.

Further, in FIGS. 61 to 64, the decorative member 450 and the front case 48 of the lower displacement member 440 are shown.
1 is viewed transparently, and the outer shape of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown by a chain line. Further, in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), the transition state immediately before the displacement to the third position is shown in order, and in FIG. 64 (c), the lower displacement member 440 at the third position is shown.

As shown in FIG. 61, the lower displacement member 440 at the first position is in a state where the movable rack 464 is located at the left end in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470. Further, in the first position, the rack 466 is arranged in front of the movable rack 464, and the rack 466 and the movable rack 464 are overlapped in the front-rear direction. That is, the rack 466 is also positioned at the left end in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470, like the movable rack 464. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 connected to the rack 466 is arranged at a substantially central position in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470.

In the first position, as described above, the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are the base member 470.
It is said that they are collected at the left end in the left-right direction. Here, since the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced while being slid and displaced (displaced from the retracted state to the first and second overhanging states), the position of the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the vicinity of the rotating axis. It is desirable to make it in the state of being displaced.

According to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism 460 that displaces the ball receiving portion 467 is in a state in which the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are superposed on the front and back (two-stage rack), so that the position of the center of gravity thereof is slid on the front base 411. It can be brought closer to the grooves 411a and 411b side (rotating shaft side of the lower displacement member 440).

Therefore, as described above, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced from the retracted position to the first and second overhanging positions, the lower displacement member 440 is set to the first position so that the lower displacement member 44 can be displaced.
The driving force when 0 is rotationally displaced can be reduced. Therefore, the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 that displaces the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

The displacement from the first position shown in FIG. 61 to the second position shown in FIG. 62 is performed by driving the drive motor KM2.

When the drive motor KM2 is driven from the first position, the transmission gear 461 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2 is rotated. As a result, the transmission gear 462 and the transmission gear 463 are rotated. When the transmission gear 463 is rotated, a driving force is transmitted from the rack gear 464a meshing with the transmission gear 463 to the movable rack 464, and the movable rack 464 is slid and displaced to the right with respect to the base member 470.

When the movable rack 464 is slide-displaced, the movable rack 46 is accompanied by the slide displacement.
The transmission gear 465 arranged in 4 is rotated by the rack gear 476 of the base member 470. As a result, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 466 by the rack gear 466a meshed with the transmission gear 465. As a result, the rack 466 is slid and displaced to the right in the left-right direction with respect to the movable rack 464, and the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the second position.

The displacement from the second position shown in FIG. 62 to the third position shown in FIG. 63 is performed by driving the drive motor KM2 in the same manner as the displacement from the first position to the second position. Since the transmission of the drive from the drive motor KM2 to the rack 466 is the same as the displacement from the first position to the second position, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the ball receiving portion 46
The contact state between the leg portion 467a and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is released, and the 7 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 467b by the urging force of the urging spring SP2 arranged on the shaft portion 466b. ..

More specifically, in the first and second positions (the state where the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged on the left side of the ball receiving portion 467 in the front view from the ball receiving portion 467 in the third position), the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is in front. It is in a state of being in contact with the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b of the case 481, and the rotation clockwise around the shaft hole 467b due to the urging force of the urging spring SP2 is restricted.

On the other hand, when the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the bottom wall portion 48
Arranged on the right side of the front view from the end of 1b, the bottom wall portion 481b and the standing wall 4 of the base member 470
It is arranged inside the recess 481b1 formed between the faces of 71a. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 46
7 is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 467b by the urging force of the urging spring SP2. When the ball receiving portion 467 is rotated at the third position, the tip of the leg portion 467a comes into contact with the end surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, and the rotation of the ball receiving portion 467 around the shaft hole 467b is restricted. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 is stopped at a position rotated about 40 degrees around the shaft hole 467b. In the following, the rotational displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 at the third position will be referred to as a firing operation.

Further, the ball receiving portion 467 is provided with a recess 481b1 recessed in the track region when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the first position to the third position direction (first direction), and the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced in the first direction. In the recess 4
Since the leg portion 467a to be engaged with the 81b1 is provided and the posture is variably formed by engaging the leg portion 467a with the recess 481b1, the structure for changing the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 is simplified. Can be changed.

Further, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the second position to the third position, the collision portion 464f is slid and displaced to the right side in the front view due to the displacement of the movable rack 464, and the protrusion 492 of the displacement member 492 is displaced.
Collision with b. As a result, the displacement member 492 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft portion 492a.

That is, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the ball receiving portion 467 is rotationally displaced and the displacement member 492 is rotationally displaced. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 launches and the ball is discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, and the lower displacement member 440 becomes lighter, so that the lower displacement member 440 becomes lighter.
The swaying force and the inertial force in which the displacement member 492 is rotationally displaced can be applied in opposite directions. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging when the sphere is discharged from the inside of the lower displacement member 440.

Next, the operation of receiving the ball into the ball receiving portion 467 will be described with reference to FIG. 65. FIG. 65
(A) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member 440. It should be noted that FIGS. 65 (a) to (c)
Then, the transition states in which the ball is received by the ball receiving unit 467 are shown in order.

Further, in FIGS. 65 (a) to 65 (c), the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are transparently viewed, and the outer shape of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown by a chain line.

Further, in FIGS. 65 (a) to 65 (c), the horizontal direction of the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state is illustrated by a two-dot chain line with a reference numeral of the virtual line H1, and the lower displacement member 440 is first stretched. The horizontal direction in the output state is illustrated with the reference numeral of the virtual line H2. Further, the angle at which the lower displacement member 440 is rotated from the position in the retracted state to the position in the first overhanging state is shown with a reference numeral of angle θ. The virtual line H1, the virtual line H2, and the angle θ are also shown in the figures after FIG. 65.

As shown in FIG. 65 (a), in the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state (the state in which the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is parallel to the virtual line H1), the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is positioned at the first position. The game ball T1 is thrown from the distribution unit 500, which will be described later, to the opening 451a formed in the front side decorative portion 451 of the lower displacement member 440. The game ball T1 thrown into the opening 451a is thrown inside the projecting wall 477 and thrown inside the lower displacement member 440.

As shown in FIG. 65 (b), when the game ball T1 is thrown into the opening 451a, the lower displacement member 44
0 is displaced to the second position. Therefore, as described above, in the second position, the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged below the projecting wall 477, so that the game ball T1 thrown inside the projecting wall 477 is placed inside the ball receiving portion 467. You can throw a ball. By accepting the game ball T1 in the ball receiving portion 467, the game ball T1 can be displaced according to the operation of the ball receiving portion 467.

As shown in FIG. 65 (c), when the game ball T1 is thrown to the ball receiving portion, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the first position. As a result, the first ball is placed in the ball receiving portion 467 with the game ball T1.
The ball receiving portion 467 can be arranged at the position.

Here, a gaming machine including a base member, a base member displaceable on one side of the base member, and a displaceable member displaceable on the base member is known. According to this gaming machine, in addition to the effect of being displaced between the overhanging position where the base member is extended to the game area and made visible to the player and the retracted position where the base member is retracted from the game area, the base member is provided. It is possible to perform an effect of displacing the displacement member in the state of being arranged at the overhanging position.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, one side of the base member is displaceably arranged on the base member. Therefore, when the displacement member is displaced, the base member rattles with respect to the base member with one side as a dead center. There was a problem that sticking was likely to occur. In particular, when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state, the change in acceleration is maximized, so that the base member tends to rattle due to the influence of inertial force.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 starts the displacement from the second position.
It is formed so that the displacement can be started from the first position closer to one side of the lower displacement member 440 (base member) than the first position, and at least the lower displacement member 440 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the base member 410. In the arranged state (for example, the first overhanging state in which the lower displacement member 440 overhangs to the game area and is visible to the player), the displacement starts from the first position, so that the lower displacement member 440 of the base member It is possible to suppress rattling. That is, the first position is more than the second position.
Since the position is close to one side of the lower displacement member, by setting such a first position as the displacement start position of the ball receiving portion 467, the weight of the ball receiving portion 467 is transferred to the base member 410 by the lower displacement member 440. On the other hand, the dead center can be kept close to the dead center when rattling, and the influence of the inertial force when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the stopped state can be made less likely to act on the lower displacement member 440. As a result, it is possible to easily suppress the rattling of the lower displacement member 440.

Further, as described above, the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced (displaced from the retracted state to the first and second overhanging states) while being slidably displaced. Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced while the game ball T1 is arranged far away from the rotation axis, centrifugal force is likely to be generated in the game ball T1, and the game ball T1 moves to move the inner wall of the ball receiving portion 467. A collision sound is generated due to the collision between the ball and the game ball T1.
Alternatively, there is a problem that the ball receiving portion 467 is damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after the game ball T1 is received by the ball receiving portion 467, the lower displacement member 440 can be displaced to the first position, so that the game ball T1 can be displaced to the first position. It can be placed (close) in the vicinity. Therefore, the game ball T is attached to the lower displacement member 440.
When the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced (displaced from the retracted state to the first and second overhanging states) in the state of accepting 1, it is possible to suppress the generation of centrifugal force on the game ball T1. As a result, it is possible to prevent a collision sound from being generated when the game ball T1 and the ball receiving portion 467 collide with each other, or to prevent the ball receiving portion 467 from being damaged.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lower displacement member 440 is a transmission mechanism 4 that operates the ball receiving portion 467.
Since 60 is formed of a movable rack 464, a transmission gear 465 (pinion gear) and a rack 466 (rack member), and a ball receiving portion 467 is arranged on the rack 466, the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 is started from the first position. In that case, not only the weight of the rack 466 but also the weights of the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 should be close to one side of the lower displacement member 440 (the fulcrum when the lower displacement member 440 rattles with respect to the base member 410). Can be done. As a result, it is possible to easily suppress the rattling of the lower displacement member 440 when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the stopped state.

Further, in the state where the game ball T1 is received by the ball receiving portion 467, the load of the lower displacement member 440 is increased by the load of the game ball T1. Therefore, as described above, by setting the lower displacement member 440 to the first position, the position of the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 is set to the sliding groove 4 of the front base 411.
It can be easily moved to the 11a, 411b side (the rotation axis side of the lower displacement member 440). Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced from the retracted position to the first and second overhanging positions,
By setting the lower displacement member 440 as the first position, the driving force when the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced can be reduced. Therefore, the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 that displaces the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

Next, the payout operation of the ball will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIGS. 66 (a) to (c)
Is a front view of the lower displacement member 440. In addition, in FIGS. 66A to 66C, the transition state of the lower displacement member 440 in the payout operation of the sphere is shown in order. Further, from FIGS. 66 (a) to (c).
), The decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are transparently viewed, and the outer shape of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown by a chain line. Further, the ball payout operation is an operation of paying out the game ball T1 received by the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 from the ejection opening 471 to the outside of the lower displacement member 440.

As shown in FIGS. 66A to 66C, the payout operation of paying out the ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 displaces the lower displacement member 440 from the first position to the third position in order. It is done by.

That is, by receiving the game ball T1 inside the ball receiving portion 467 in the receiving operation and displacing the lower displacement member 440 arranged at the first position to the third position, the game ball T1 is placed on the ball receiving portion 467. With the displacement, it is carried to the exit opening 471 side. The game ball T1 moved to the exit opening 471 side is given an inertial force to the exit opening 471 side by the slide displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 and the firing operation of the ball receiving portion 467 at the third position, and the ball receiving portion 471 is applied. It pops out from the inside of the part 467. As a result, the sphere can be discharged from the inside of the lower displacement member 440.

Here, since the displacement direction when the ball receiving portion 467 (displacement member) starts the displacement from the first position is the direction away from the position side of the lower displacement member 440, the ball receiving portion 467 is set to the first position. In the arranged state, the rack 466 (rack member) can be brought closer to the base member 410 from one side of the lower displacement member 440. That is, in order for the ball receiving portion 467 (rack 466) to be displaced in the direction away from one side of the lower displacement member 440, the rack 466 is subjected to the transmission gear 465 (the transmission gear 465) after the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 is started. Rack gear 466a to which the pinion gear) is engaged
The side portion will be directed to one side of the lower displacement member 440. Therefore, the weight of the rack 466 can be kept closer to one side of the lower displacement member 440 (the fulcrum when the lower displacement member 440 rattles with respect to the base member 410), and as a result, the ball receiving portion 467 can be moved closer. It is possible to easily suppress the rattling of the lower displacement member 440 when it is displaced from the stopped state.

The ball receiving portion 467 is displaced in the third position direction (first direction), and when the third position is reached, the posture can be changed. Therefore, up to the third position, one game ball T1 is received. While it is possible to easily maintain the state held by the portion 467 and prevent the game ball T1 from falling off from the ball receiving portion 467, the second
When the position is reached, the game ball T1 is transferred to the ball receiving portion 467 by utilizing the change in the posture of the ball receiving portion 467.
It can be easily paid out from the inside of.

It should be noted that the ball receiving portion 467 shown in FIGS. 66 (a) to 66 (c) is paid out at the position where the lower displacement member 440 is retracted (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged horizontally with the virtual line H1). When performing the operation, the game ball discharged to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 is thrown into the inside of the collection port 411f.

On the other hand, when the lower displacement member 440 performs the payout operation of the ball receiving portion 467 at the position in the first overhanging state (the state in which the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is rotated by an angle θ from the virtual line H1), the lower displacement member 4
The game ball paid out to the outside of the 40 is thrown to the upper part of the ball cradle 710 of the rotating unit 700.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68, the ejection operation when two or more balls are thrown inside the lower displacement member 440 will be described. FIGS. 67 (a) to (c) and FIGS. 68 (a) to (c)
) Is a front view of the lower displacement member 440.

In addition, in FIGS. 43 (a) to (c) and FIGS. 44 (a) to (c), the transition state of the discharge operation is shown in order. Further, in FIGS. 43 (a) to (c) and FIGS. 44 (a) to (c), the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 440 are transparently viewed, and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is seen transparently. The outer shape of is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 67A to 67C, when two or more balls are continuously thrown from the distribution unit 500 described later, the lower displacement member 440 is operated to receive the second ball. The game ball T2 can be dropped on the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467.

That is, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced from the first position to the second position to throw the first game ball T1 inside the ball receiving portion 467, and the second game ball T2 can be the first ball. It can be brought into contact with the game ball T1 and fastened to the inside of the projecting wall 477 (see FIG. 67 (b)). By displacing the ball receiving portion 467 to the first position after receiving the first game ball T1 at the second position, the ball receiving portion is in a state where the first ball receiving portion T1 is received by the ball receiving portion 467. The 467 can be displaced to the first position, and the second game ball T2 can be dropped onto the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467.

Here, in a gaming machine that displaces a ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 at the second position to the third position due to the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, a malfunction occurs in the displacement of the distribution member 540 of the distribution unit 500, which will be described later. There is a possibility that more than a specified number of game balls are thrown into the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467, and in this case, there is a problem that a problem may occur due to the number of game balls exceeding the specified number. For example, a transmission mechanism 4 in which a game ball exceeding a specified number drives a ball receiving portion 467.
There was a risk of damage by entering the 60 and being bitten by the moving part. Alternatively, the number of game balls exceeding the specified number is outside the game area (for example, the back side of the game board 13 or the back case 3).
There was a risk of leaking to the inside of 00).

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 is formed so as to be displaceable from the second position to the first position opposite to the throwing direction of the ball. The orbital region can be expanded. Therefore, for example, even if a malfunction occurs in the distribution member 540 and a specified number or more of game balls are thrown, the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 is expanded, and the number of game balls exceeding the specified number is increased. Can be accepted in the orbital region. As a result, the number of game balls that exceeds the specified number
It can be moved with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 to the third position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding the specified number from entering the transmission mechanism 460 that drives the ball receiving portion 467 and flowing out of the game area, and as a result, the games exceeding the specified number. It is possible to prevent problems caused by balls.

Further, the ball receiving portion 467 can receive and hold one game ball T1 thrown from the distribution unit 500 described later at the second position, and can hold the ball in the direction from the second position to the first position (second direction). ) At least because it is formed so that it can be displaced by a distance exceeding the diameter of the game ball.
After receiving one game ball at the second position, the ball receiving portion 467 is moved from the second position to the third direction (
By displacing in the first direction), the number of game balls exceeding the specified number is displaced to the orbital region (orbital region) of the ball receiving portion 467.
The ball can be thrown to a region in the first direction from 467 of the ball receiving portion). Therefore, the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be moved along with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 in the third position direction (first direction).

In this case, since the ball receiving portion 467 holds the first game ball T1 and the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be sent to the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467, the first game balls T1 and 2 Game ball T after the ball
2 can be separated. Therefore, for example, by displacing the ball receiving portion 467 in the third position direction (first direction), while maintaining the state in which the ball receiving member holds the first game ball T1, 2
It is possible to discharge only the game ball T2 after the ball from the orbital region.

Further, in the case where the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the second position to receive the first ball and then the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position to eject the game ball T1 from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the second ball is used. Game ball T2
Drops onto the top of the rack 466, and the second game ball T2 has a ball receiving portion 467 and a transmission gear 465.
There is a possibility that the second game ball T2 cannot be discharged to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 due to being thrown between the ball and the ball.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the receiving operation of receiving the ball in the ball receiving portion 467 is performed, and after receiving the game ball T1 inside the ball receiving portion 467 at the second position, the first position opposite to the exit opening 471 is performed. Since it can be displaced to, it is possible to prevent the second game ball T2 from being unable to be discharged to the outside of the lower displacement member 440.

In other words, in a gaming machine provided with a bonus machine that ejects a game ball thrown into the accessory, a position for receiving the ball is performed by a member that ejects the ball (ball receiving portion 467 in this embodiment). If only the ball is displaced to the (second position) and the position where the ball is ejected (third position), when two or more game balls are thrown into the accessory, the ball is ejected to the member that ejects the ball. Exit (exit opening 471)
In the present embodiment, after receiving the first game ball T1, the ball receiving portion 467 is ejected from the first ball receiving portion 471 on the opposite side to the exit opening 471. By displacing the ball to the position, the second game ball T2 can be thrown between the ball receiving portion 467 and the exit opening 471.

As shown in FIGS. 68 (a) to 68 (c), after the second game ball T2 is thrown onto the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467, the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position before the firing operation. By letting it, 2
The game ball T2 of the ball can be rolled toward the exit opening 471 in a state of being in contact with the ball receiving portion 467. As a result, the second game ball T2 can be discharged from the exit opening 471.

In this case, the lower end surface of the U-shaped portion of the ball receiving portion 467 is above the center position of the second game ball T2 in which the lower end surface of the U-shaped portion is thrown on the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467 (above FIG. 68 (a)). Is placed in. Further, in a state where the leg portion 467a is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, the leg portion 467a is arranged in a state of being tilted by approximately 45 degrees with respect to the contact surface with the bottom wall portion 481b. Further, since the side surface of the right side of the U-shape (right side of FIG. 68 (a)) of the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the same position in the vertical direction as the right end portion of the leg portion 467a, the second ball is played. The outer surface of T2 can be brought into contact with the leg portion 467a.

Further, since the leg portion 467a is in a state of being tilted by approximately 45 degrees with respect to the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, the leg portion 467a and the outer surface of the lower hemisphere of the second game ball T2 (lower hemisphere on the bottom wall portion 481b side). Be abutted.
As a result, when the second game ball T2 is rolled toward the exit opening 471, a force for lifting the second game ball T2 upward can be generated on the inclined surface of the leg portion 467a. Therefore,
The frictional force between the second game ball T2 and the bottom wall portion 481b when the second game ball T2 rolls on the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball receiving portion 467 from being stopped when the second game ball T2 is rolled toward the exit opening 471.

In other words, the leg portion 467a is projected from the ball receiving portion 467 in the direction from the first position to the third position (first direction), and the protruding tip thereof is the trajectory of the ball receiving portion 467. Since the ball receiving portion 467 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower half surface of the game ball (that is, the game ball T2 after the second ball) sent to the region, the ball receiving portion 467 is in the direction from the first position to the third position (first direction). When displaced to, the game ball can be moved while pushing its lower half surface with the leg portion 467a. As a result, the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily discharged from the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467.

Further, a leg portion 467a is provided between the first game ball T1 held by the ball receiving portion 467 and the game ball sent to the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 (the second and subsequent game balls T2). By interposing, the distance between the first game ball T1 and the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be secured by the protrusion length of the leg portion 467a. Therefore, while maintaining the state in which the ball receiving portion 467 holds the first game ball T1, only the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily discharged from the orbital region.

Further, since the leg portion 467a has a role of changing the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 and a role of moving the game ball while pushing the lower half surface thereof by engaging with the recess 481b1, the number of parts can be increased accordingly. It can be reduced to reduce the product cost.

Further, since the size of the recess 481b1 in the direction from the first position to the third position (first direction) is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball sent to the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 (that is, that is). When the second and subsequent game balls T2) are moved with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 in the first direction, they can easily pass through the recess 481b1. As a result, the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily discharged from the orbital region.

As described above, when the lower displacement unit 400 is arranged in the retracted state, the lower displacement member 440
It is assumed that the collection port 411f is arranged below the emission opening 471. Therefore, the game ball T2 discharged in the retracted state is sent to the collection port 411f.

On the other hand, when the lower displacement unit 400 is arranged in the first overhanging state, the recovery port 411f is in a state of being located below the exit opening 471. Further, the opening of the collection port 411f is opened on the upper side. Therefore, the ejected game ball T2 is sent to the collection port 411f.

That is, the recovery port 411f is on the first direction side (standing wall 471a side) of the base member 470.
Since it is arranged vertically below the end of the ball and has an opening in the vertical direction, the ball receiving portion 467.
The opening of the collection port 411f for the game ball (that is, the game ball T2 after the second ball) that is moved along with the movement in the third position direction (first direction) and discharged from the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467. Can be accepted and collected from.

Further, the opening of the recovery port 411f is vertical at the end of the base member 470 on the first direction side (standing wall 471a side) at least in the retracted state, the first overhanging state, and the second overhanging state. It is arranged downward in the direction. As a result, the game ball (that is, the second ball) discharged from the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 regardless of whether the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced to the retracted position, the first overhanging state, or the second overhanging state. Subsequent game balls T2) can be received and collected from the opening of the collection member.

It should be noted that FIGS. 67 (a) to (c) and FIGS. 68 (a) to (c) are in the position where the lower displacement member 440 is retracted (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged horizontally with the virtual line H1). When the ball receiving portion 467 is ejected as shown in the above, the game ball discharged to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 is
The ball is thrown inside the collection port 411f. Further, when the ball receiving portion 467 is discharged at the position where the lower displacement member 440 is in the first overhanging state (the state in which the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is rotated by an angle θ from the virtual line H1), the lower displacement member 440 is discharged. The game ball paid out to the outside of the 440 is thrown to the collection port 411f as described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the configuration when the second game ball T2 is discharged from the exit opening 471 will be described. 69 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member 440 in the range LXIXa of FIG. 68 (b), and FIG. 69 (b) is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member 440 in the range LXIX b of FIG. 68 (a). It is a figure.

As shown in FIG. 69, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position immediately before the firing operation, the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the side surface of the ball receiving portion 467 on the erection wall 471a side to open the exit. It can be pushed out of the downward displacement member 440 from 471.

In this case, the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is inserted between the bottom wall portion 481b and the standing wall 471a, and when the ball receiving portion 467 rotates, the game ball T2 and the ball receiving portion 467 come into contact with each other. By doing so, the rotational force of the ball receiving portion 467 can be transmitted to the game ball T2. As a result, the game ball T2 can be easily discharged from the exit opening 471. Further, the ball receiving portion 467 can be returned to the state before the rotational operation by utilizing the repulsive force when the ball receiving portion 467 is in contact with the game ball T2. Therefore, when the game ball T2 thrown into the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 is discharged, the ball receiving portion 46
It is possible to prevent the first game ball T1 held in 7 from falling off.

Further, in the lower displacement member 440, the ball receiving portion 467 is in the second position to the third position direction (first direction).
It is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball in the orbital region when it is displaced to, and the recess 481b.
A standing wall 471a located on the first direction side of 1 is provided, and the second and subsequent game balls thrown into the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 accompany the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 in the first direction. When the ball T2 is moved, the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the erection wall 471a and the ball receiving portion 467, and the posture change of the ball receiving portion 467 is regulateably formed. While maintaining the state held by the ball receiving portion 467, it is possible to easily eject only the second and subsequent game balls from the orbital region.

That is, since the height of the standing wall 471a from the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b to the tip of the standing wall is lower than the radius of the game ball, the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced in the first direction. When the game ball T2 is moved by being pushed by the legs, the lower half surface of the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the erection wall 471a.
The game ball can easily get over the standing wall 471a. In this case, the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the ball receiving portion 467 (that is, the game ball T2 is interposed between the ball receiving portion 467 and the standing wall 471a).
Since a reaction force can be applied from the game ball T2 to the ball receiving portion 467, the posture change of the ball receiving portion can be regulated, and the first game ball held by the ball receiving portion 467 may fall off. Can be suppressed.
As a result, while maintaining the state in which the ball receiving portion 467 holds the first game ball, only the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily discharged from the game area.

On the other hand, when the second and subsequent game balls T2 are not thrown into the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467, the game ball is not interposed between the standing wall 471a and the ball receiving portion 467, so that the leg Part 467a
Is engaged with 481b1 in the recess, so that the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 can be changed. As a result, the first game ball T1 (that is, the ball receiving portion 4) is utilized by utilizing the change in the posture of the ball receiving portion 467.
The game ball held in 67) can be easily discharged from the ball receiving portion 467.

Next, the distribution unit 500 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72. 70 (a) is a top view of the distribution unit 500, and FIG. 70 (b) is a rear view of the distribution unit 500. FIG. 71 is an exploded front perspective view of the distribution unit 500, and FIG. 72 is an exploded rear perspective view of the distribution unit 500.

As shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, the distribution unit 500 is attached to the base plate 520 formed in a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and is attached to the front side of the base plate 520 to face the base plate 520. A path forming member 510 that forms a plurality of flow paths through which a sphere can flow, and a base plate 52.
A distribution member 540 rotatably attached to the back side of 0 and an extension extending the flow path of a sphere attached to the end surface of the base plate 520 and formed between the base plate 520 and the path forming member 510 facing each other. It is mainly provided with a path member 530.

The base plate 520 has a columnar shaft portion 523 projecting to the back surface side, a first opening 521 formed through an arc shape centered on the axis of the shaft portion 523, and a radius larger than the first opening 521. A second opening 522 that is formed through a large arc, a rolling portion 525 that has a U-shaped cross section that opens on the upper end side and extends in the left-right direction, and a hook-like protrusion on the back side. It is mainly provided with a locking portion 524 to be formed.

The shaft portion 523 is inserted into the shaft hole 545 of the distribution member 540 described later, and the distribution member 54 is inserted.
It is a shaft that attaches 0 to the base member in a rotatable state, and is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 545.

The first opening 521 and the second opening 522 are openings through which the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 of the distribution member 540, which will be described later, are inserted, and the opening has a width larger than the thickness of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542. It is formed. Further, the distribution member 540 is a base plate 5 in a rotatable state.
Since it is attached to 20, the length of the arc of the first opening 521 and the second opening 522 is formed to be larger than the circumferential dimension of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 in the front view.

The locking portion 524 is an engaging portion for engaging the urging spring SP4 with the locking portion 544 formed on the distribution member 540, and one end of the urging spring SP4 is locked.

The rolling portion 525 is a bottom surface on which the sphere rolls, and has a curved shape formed in a U shape while being inclined downward toward one end on the left side of the rear view (left side in FIG. 70 (b)). It is formed larger than the outer shape of the sphere. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 from stopping at the rolling portion and to roll the ball to one end side.

Further, the rolling portion 525 has a plurality of protrusions 525 protruding inward of the U-shape from the front and rear side surfaces.
b is provided with an opening 525a that opens to the back side at one end.

The protrusions 525b are formed on the front and rear side surfaces at regular intervals, and the protrusions 525b formed on the front side and the protrusions 525b formed on the back side are formed at positions where they are staggered in front view. Therefore, since the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 can collide with the protrusion 525b, the rolling speed of the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 can be slowed down.

Here, as described above, the ball is thrown to the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement unit 400 in a state where the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the first position (FIGS. 65 (a) and 65 (b). )reference).
Therefore, when the throwing speed of the game ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 of the third throwing path KR3 is increased, the game ball is thrown into the lower displacement member 440 before moving the ball receiving portion 467 to the second position. There is a risk of being struck.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a plurality of protrusions 525b are formed so as to project from the inner surface of the rolling portion 525 of the third throwing path KR3, and the gaming ball passes through the rolling portion 525 of the third throwing path KR3. Since resistance can be applied, the speed of the game ball passing through the third throwing path KR3 can be slowed down. Therefore, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the switching position (first position) to the receiving position (second position), the time required can be increased by that amount, so that the ball receiving portion 46 can be extended.
7 can surely receive the game ball. Further, the output of the displacement speed of the drive motor KM2 can be reduced by the amount that the displacement speed required for the ball receiving portion 467 can be slowed down, so that the product cost can be reduced.

The opening 525a is formed so as to be open to the back surface side of one end of the rolling portion 525, and the outer shape in the rear view thereof is formed to be larger than the size of the sphere. Therefore, the sphere that rolls the rolling portion 525 toward one end is discharged from the opening 525a.

The path forming member 510 is formed in the shape of a rectangular vertically long plate having a width smaller in the left-right direction than the base plate 520, and a plurality of walls larger than the outer diameter of the game ball are formed on the back side thereof. By forming the space between the two facing each other larger than the outer diameter of the sphere, a flow path of a plurality of spheres is formed inside the sphere.

The path forming member 510 includes a first opening 511 that opens on the upper end surface, a first throwing path KR1 formed between the side walls of the first opening 511, and a second throwing path connected to the first throwing path KR1. KR2 and the third throwing path KR3, and the second opening 512 and the third opening 513 opening on the side surface of the path forming member 510 at the ends of the second throwing path KR2 and the third throwing path KR3 are formed through in the front-rear direction. Multiple openings 514,515,516 and openings 514,515,5
It is mainly provided with a fourth throwing path KR4 formed on the wall on the back surface side of 16 and a fourth opening 517 opening on the side surface of the path forming member 510 at the end of the fourth throwing path KR4.

The first opening 511 is an opening for allowing a ball thrown from the ball throwing unit 600, which will be described later, to flow into the inside of the distribution unit, and is formed on the side surface of the upper end of the path forming member 510 and has an outer shape larger than the ball. It is formed large. Further, the first opening 511 is a ball throwing unit 60.
It is connected to 0 and the ball thrown from the throwing unit 600 can flow in.

The first throwing path KR1 is a path through which a ball flowing in from the first opening 511 flows down between the base plate 520 and the path forming member 510 facing each other, and is formed by extending downward. Further, the fourth throwing path KR4 is formed so as to extend to about one-third of the path forming member 510 in the vertical direction, and the downstream end is connected to the second throwing path KR2 and the third throwing path KR3. Will be done. That is,
A ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 is formed so as to be able to flow down the second throwing path KR2 or the third throwing path KR3.

As described above, the second throwing path KR2 is a path formed by being connected to the first throwing path KR1, and the downstream end is connected to the second opening 512. That is, when a ball flowing down from the first opening 511 and flowing down the first throwing path KR1 flows down to the second throwing path KR2, the second opening 5
It is discharged from 12 to the outside of the distribution unit 500.

The second opening 512 is connected to a recovery path (not shown) for collecting the sphere. Therefore, the ball discharged from the second opening is collected by the collection route. Also, inside the second opening 512 (second)
A sensor device SE2 for detecting the passage of a game ball is arranged at the downstream end of the throwing path KR2). Therefore, the sensor device SE1 detects the number of game balls passing through the third winning opening 82, and the sensor device SE2 detects the number of game balls passing through the second throwing path KR2. It is possible to detect the number of game balls passing through the path KR3.

That is, it is possible to detect whether or not a predetermined number of game balls (1 ball) are stored upstream of the regulation plate 541, which will be described later, by the difference between the sensor device SE1 and the sensor device SE1. For example, when the third electric accessory 82a is opened once, the number of balls passing through the third winning opening 82 (sensor device SE1) is eight, and the balls passing through the second throwing path KR2 (sensor device SE2). If the number is 7,
It can be detected that one game ball is flowing (reserved) in the third throwing path KR3.

As described above, the third throwing path KR3 is a path formed by being connected to the first throwing path KR1, and the downstream end is connected to the third opening 513. That is, when a ball flowing down from the first opening 511 and flowing down the first throwing path KR1 flows down to the third throwing path KR3, the third opening 5
It is discharged from 13.

The third opening 513 is formed above the other end side (opposite end side of the opening 525a) of the rolling portion 525 of the base plate 520. Therefore, the ball discharged from the third opening 513 is the rolling portion 525.
The ball is thrown inside. That is, the ball thrown to the third throwing path KR3 is thrown to the rolling portion 525 through the third opening 513.

The openings 514 to 516 are formed on the back side of the third winning opening 82 formed in the game board 13, respectively, and the ball winning in the third winning opening 82 is thrown. That is, when a ball flowing down the game area on the front side of the game board 13 wins in the third winning opening 82, the ball is thrown into the distribution unit 500 from the openings 514 to 516.

The fourth throwing path KR4 is formed by connecting to openings 514 to 516, and is 1 on the downstream side.
It is connected to one path and is connected to a fourth opening formed on the lower end surface of the path forming member 510. The fourth opening is connected to a recovery path (not shown) for collecting the sphere. Therefore, the ball winning in the third winning opening 82 of the game board 13 is thrown into the fourth throwing path KR4 of the distribution unit 500, and then discharged from the fourth opening 517 and collected.

The extension path member 530 is formed in a U-shaped cross section with the lower side open, and is extended in the left-right direction. Further, the extension path member 530 is formed so that the inner diameter of the U-shape is larger than the outer diameter of the sphere. Therefore, by disposing it on the upper part of the rolling portion 525 of the base plate 520, the ball thrown on the upper part of the rolling portion 525 can be thrown inside the rolling portion 525 and the extension path member 530. , The ball rolling on the rolling portion can be prevented from falling from the rolling portion 525.

Further, the extension path member 530 is formed with protrusions 531 formed at regular intervals at the same positions in the left-right direction as the protrusions 525b formed on the rolling portion 525. As a result, the rolling speed of the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 can be slowed down as in the case of the protrusion 525b.

The distribution member 540 is formed in a rectangular shape in front view, one of which is long, and has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The distribution member 540 is a regulation plate 541 projecting from the front side as a plate-like body.
A storage plate 542, a shaft hole 545 formed through the upper one end side, and a hook-shaped locking portion 544 formed on the back surface side are mainly provided.

As described above, the shaft hole 545 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 523 of the base plate 520 is inserted, and is formed through the shaft hole 545 in the front-rear direction. The distribution member 540 is a shaft portion 523 of the base plate 520.
Is inserted into the shaft hole 545, and a screw or the like having a head larger than the shaft hole is inserted from the back side of the shaft portion 523.
By fastening to, it is attached to the base plate 520 in a rotatable state.

The regulation plate 541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2 via the first opening 521, and the ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 flows into the second throwing path KR2. It is a plate member that regulates the above, and is formed so as to project toward the front side from the end surface on the front side of the shaft hole 545, and the protrusion distance from the base plate 520 to the front side is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere.

Further, the regulation plate 541 is formed by being curved in an arc shape centered on the axis of the shaft hole 545. As a result, when the distribution member 540 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 545, the regulation plate 54
The displacement region of 1 can be minimized.

The storage plate 542 is a plate member that is arranged on the second throwing path KR2 via the second opening 522 and stores the ball flowing down the second throwing path KR2 on the upstream side of the storage plate 542, and is a plate member of the shaft hole 545. It is formed so as to project to the front side from the end surface on the front side, and the protrusion distance from the base plate 520 to the front side is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere.

Further, the storage plate 542 is formed to be curved in an arc shape centered on the axis of the shaft hole 545, and the radius of the arc is formed to be larger than the radius of the curved portion of the regulation plate 541. Therefore,
The storage plate 542 is formed at a position separated from the shaft hole 545 from the regulation plate 541. As a result, the regulation plate 541 can be projected to the connecting portion between the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2, and the storage plate 542 can be arranged on the second throwing path KR2.
Further, the displacement region when the distribution member 540 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 545 can be minimized.

The protrusion 543 is a drive transmission member that exerts a rotational driving force on the distribution member 540 by colliding with the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 described above, and projects to the other end side of the distribution member 540. It is formed. That is, a protrusion 543 to which the driving force is transmitted is formed on the side opposite to the one end side where the shaft hole 545 which is the rotation axis of the distribution member 540 is formed. As a result, the collision force of the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 can be reduced.

Therefore, since the driving force of the drive motor KM3 that displaces the contact plate 464c can be reduced, the energy consumption of the drive motor KM3 can be reduced. Further, since the energy when the contact plate 464c collides with the protrusion 543 during driving can be reduced, the collision noise can be reduced when the contact plate 464c and the protrusion 543 collide with each other. note that,
A detailed embodiment of the collision between the contact plate 464c and the protrusion 543 will be described later.

Further, a bulging portion 543a that bulges in a circular shape is formed at the contact portion of the protruding portion 543 with the contact plate 464c at the protruding end. By bringing the contact plate 464c into contact with the bulging portion 543a, the contact area between the contact plate and the distribution member 540 can be reduced. Therefore, the distribution member 5
When the 40 is rotationally displaced, the frictional resistance between the protrusion 543 (bulging portion 543a) and the contact plate 464c can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in energy consumption of the drive motor KM3.

As described above, the locking portion 544 is the urging spring SP between the locking portion 524 and the locking portion 524 of the base plate 520.
It is a part that locks 4. Therefore, since the other end side of the distribution member 540 can always apply a force to rotate to the locking portion 524 side, it is possible to suppress the distribution member 540 from shaking due to the vibration of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the flow path of the ball of the distribution unit 500 will be described in detail. FIG. 73 is a cross-sectional view of the distribution unit 500 in the line LXXIII-LXXIII of FIG. 70 (a). In FIG. 73, the distribution member 540 is shown by a chain line. Further, in FIG. 73, a state in which the distribution member 540 is arranged at the storage position is shown.

Here, the state in which the distribution member 540 is arranged at the storage position is a state in which the distribution member 540 is rotated by the urging force of the urging spring SP4 and the storage plate 542 is arranged on the second throwing path KR2. ..

As shown in FIG. 73, in the first throwing path KR1, the lower end side of the flow path is the base plate 52.
It is tilted toward the central portion of 0 in the left-right direction (left-right direction of FIG. 73), and the tilted portion is formed by being curved in a gentle S-shape. Further, the tip portion curved in an S shape is connected to the third throwing path KR3, and the second throwing path KR2 tilts toward the end of the first throwing path KR1 in the direction opposite to the tilting direction of the first throwing path KR1. It is connected in the same state.

As a result, the ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 collides with the lower surface of the tilted portion, thereby causing the ball to collide with the lower surface of the tilted portion.
The flow direction of the sphere can be directed from the direction of gravity to the direction in which the first throwing path KR1 is tilted.
Therefore, the ball can flow down toward the entrance of the third throwing path KR3 (the connecting portion between the first throwing path KR1 and the third throwing path KR3). Therefore, in the state where the distribution member 540 is not arranged, the ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 can be thrown to the third throwing path KR3.

Here, the flow path through which the game ball flows down, the first branch passage and the second branch passage branched from the flow path, and the game ball flowing down the flow path to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage. A game machine for sorting is known.

However, since the conventional gaming machine has a structure in which the game balls flowing down the flow passage are alternately distributed to the first branch passage and the second branch passage one by one, the game balls flowing down the flow passage are the first branch. It is evenly distributed (that is, half each) to the aisle and the second branch aisle. That is, there is a problem that the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage cannot be changed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 which is formed so as to be displaceable and receives the game ball from the third throwing path KR3 is provided, and the contact plate 464c interlocking with the ball receiving portion 467 hits the distribution member 540. Since the distribution member 540 is displaced by being displaced in contact with the ball receiving portion 46
Depending on the displacement of 7, the number of game balls to be distributed to the third throwing path KR3 or the second throwing path can be changed. That is, the number of game balls distributed to the third throwing path KR3 can be changed.

For the displacement of the distribution member 540, the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 is used to determine the distribution member 540.
Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a drive means or a transmission mechanism for displacing the distribution member 540. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced by that amount, and the product cost can be reduced.

Further, for example, in a structure in which the displacement of the distribution member 540 is controlled by using the position detection by the sensor device or the drive by the drive means, the reliability of the distribution operation of the distribution member is lowered due to the malfunction due to the detection failure or the control failure. However, according to the present embodiment, the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 can be switched mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, so that the reliability of the distribution operation can be improved.

In particular, since the ball receiving portion 467 is a member that receives the game ball from the rolling portion 525 of the third throwing path KR3, the distribution destination of the distribution member 540 is set to the third distribution destination in synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467.
By switching to the throwing path, the displacement member can surely receive the game ball distributed to the third throwing path KR3.

Further, in the conventional gaming machine, since the game ball flowing down the flow path is only distributed to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, it is insufficient to give the player an interest.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the distribution destination by the regulation plate 541 (distribution means) is the third.
In the state where the throwing path KR3 (first branch passage) is set, the flow of the game ball in the third is restricted, and when the distribution destination by the sorting member 540 is set to the second throwing path KR2 (second branch passage). Since the storage plate 542 (means for changing the flow state) that allows the flow of the game ball in the third throwing path KR3 is provided, it is possible to give the player an interest.

That is, if the distribution destination by the regulation plate 541 is the third throwing path, the third throwing path KR3
When the flow of the game balls distributed to is restricted and the game balls are stored in the third throwing path KR3, and the distribution destination by the regulation plate 541 is the second throwing path KR2, the third throwing path KR3
It is possible to allow the game ball to flow down (open) in the third throwing path KR3. As a result, in addition to the operation of distributing the game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 (flowing path) to one of the third throwing path KR3 or the second throwing path KR2,
It is possible to form an action of flowing (opening) the game ball distributed to the third throwing path KR3. Further, these storage and opening operations can be alternately formed in conjunction with the distribution operation. As a result, the player can be given a hobby.

Further, since the distribution member 540 (integrated member) in which the regulation plate 541 (distribution means) and the storage plate 542 (flow state changing means) are integrally formed is provided, the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 are provided.
It is possible to simplify the structure for operating and improve the reliability of operation, that is, when the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 are formed separately, they are two parts. 2 The structure for operating the parts becomes complicated and the reliability of the operation is lowered.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 can be formed as one component, the structure can be simplified by that amount, the product cost can be reduced, and the reliability of operation can be improved. be able to.

Further, the distribution member 540 has a storage position (first state position) and a regulation position (second state position).
In a state where the distribution member 540 is displaced to the storage position, the regulation plate 5 is formed so as to be displaceable.
41 is arranged at a position where the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage) is the distribution destination, and the storage plate 542 is arranged at a position where the flow of the game ball in the third throwing path KR3 is restricted, and the distribution member 540 is regulated. In the state of being displaced to the position, the regulation plate 541 is arranged at the position where the second throwing path KR2 is the distribution destination, and the storage plate 542 is arranged at the position where the flow of the game ball in the third throwing path is allowed. By displacing the distribution member 540 at two positions (reservoir position and restricted position), the game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 (flowing path) is moved to the third throwing path KR3.
Alternatively, in addition to the operation of distributing to one of the second throwing paths, the operation of temporarily stopping (storing) the flow of the game ball distributed to the third throwing path KR3 and the operation of causing the stopped (stored) game ball to flow down. It is possible to form an operation of making (opening), and it is possible to form these storage and opening operations alternately in conjunction with the distribution operation. That is, the structure can be simplified to reduce the product cost and improve the reliability of operation.

The distribution member 540 (integrated member) is rotatably formed, and the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage), and the third throwing path. By projecting to KR3, the flow of the game ball is restricted, and the shape is curved in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the distribution member 540. The area of the hole (recess 519) opened in the inner wall of the can be reduced.

Since the storage plate 542 (means for changing the flow state) is arranged in such a posture that the side facing the upstream of the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage) is concave, the storage plate 542 to the third throwing path KR3 protrudes. In the initial state (that is, only the tip side of the flow state changing means is projected into the passage), the shape of the tip side of the storage plate 542 can be arranged in an direction that easily regulates the flow of the game ball. It is possible to easily regulate the flow of the game balls distributed to the third throwing path KR3.

Further, in a state where the storage plate 542 is projected to the maximum to the third throwing path to restrict the flow of the game ball, the concave portion of the storage plate 542 can stably hold the game ball, so that the game ball can be suppressed from going wild.

The distribution unit 500 applies an urging force to the distribution member 540 (integrated member) to urge the regulation plate 541 in the direction of projecting to the third throwing path (first branch passage). ), And the distance from the regulation plate 541 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540 is the regulation plate 541.
Since the distance from the distribution member 540 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540 is made larger than the distance from the distribution member 540 to the rotation axis, the posture in which the storage plate 542 projects the distribution member 540 into the third emergency path (that is, the storage position) by utilizing the urging force of the urging spring SP4. ) Can be easily maintained.

In this case, the distance from the storage plate 542 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540 is made larger than the distance from the regulation plate 541 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540. Due to the large distance from, even if the same impact force is applied, the storage plate 542
In the place where it is easy to immerse, the urging direction of the urging spring SP4 is that the storage plate 542 is the third throwing path KR.
By setting the direction of protrusion to 3, it is possible to prevent the storage plate 542 from being immersed in the recess 519 by the amount of the urging force.

Further, since the distribution member 540 (integrated member) is rotated in the direction in which the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) protrudes into the third throwing path (first branch passage) due to its own weight, the own weight is used. The distribution member 540 can be easily maintained in a posture (that is, a storage position) in which the storage plate 542 projects to the third throwing path KR3. Therefore, when the game ball collides, it is possible to prevent the storage plate 542 from being immersed in the recess 519 by the amount of its own weight.

Further, even if the urging spring SP4 (the urging means) is dropped, the distribution member 540 is maintained in a posture in which the regulation plate 541 protrudes to the third throwing path KR3 due to its own weight, and the game is played to the third throwing path. It is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down.

Further, it is provided with an urging spring SP4 that applies an urging force to the distribution member 540 to maintain the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 on either the third throw path KR3 or the second throw path KR2, and the ball receiving portion 467 is a distribution member. By displacing the 540 in a direction opposite to the direction of the urging spring SP4, the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is switched to the other of the third throw path KR3 or the second throw path KR2, and the urging force of the urging spring causes the distribution destination. , The distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is returned to either the third throw path KR3 or the second throw path KR2.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 from being inadvertently switched. In this case, after the distribution member 540 is displaced with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 and the distribution destination is switched, the return to the distribution destination before the switching can be performed by the urging force of the urging spring SP4. Therefore, the contact plate 464c interlocked with the ball receiving portion 467 is the distribution member 540.
It can be unnecessary to be in contact with. That is, the contact plate 464c interlocked with the ball receiving portion 467 can be separated from the distribution member 540. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the movable range of the ball receiving portion 467 can be increased.

Next, the displacement of the distribution member 540 will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 (a)
And (b) are a partially enlarged view of the distribution unit 500 in the range LXXIV of FIG. 73. In addition, in FIG. 74 (a), the state where the distribution member 540 is located at the storage position is shown in FIG. 74 (b).
) Shows the state in which the distribution member 540 is located at the regulated position. Further, in the state where the distribution member 540 is arranged at the regulated position, the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 collides with the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540, and the distribution member 540 is centered on the axis of the shaft hole 545. It is a state in which the regulation plate 541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first throwing path KR1 and the third throwing path KR3 after being rotated.

As shown in FIG. 74 (a), in the state where the distribution member 540 is arranged at the storage position, the storage plate 542 is arranged on the third throwing path KR3, and the regulation plate 541 is the path forming member 51.
It is arranged inside the recess 518 formed in the wall on the back side of 0.

In this case, the distance dimension L1 between the end of the tip protruding inward of the third throw path KR3 of the storage plate 542 and the inner wall of the third throw path KR3 facing the tip is made smaller than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, the ball thrown from the upstream of the third throwing path KR3 (the first throwing path KR1) is stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 542.

Further, from the inside of the curved portion of the storage plate 542, the first throwing path KR1 and the third throwing path KR
The distance dimension L2 to the connecting portion with 3 is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere and smaller than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the number of balls stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 542 is set to 1.
It can be a sphere. In the following, the state of the distribution unit 500 in which one ball is stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 542 is referred to as a storage state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), in the state where the distribution member 540 is arranged at the regulation position, the regulation plate 541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first throw path KR1 and the third throw path KR3. , The storage plate 542 is arranged inside the recess 519 formed in the wall portion on the back surface side of the path forming member 510.

In this case, the distance dimension L3 from the end of the tip protruding inward of the first throwing path KR1 of the regulation plate 541 to the inner wall of the entrance of the third throwing path KR3 is made smaller than the diameter of the ball. Therefore,
The ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 collides with the regulation plate 541 and is thrown to the second throwing path KR2.

That is, by switching the distribution member 540 between the regulated position and the storage position, the first throwing path K
A state in which the ball to which R1 is thrown is thrown to the third throwing path KR3 and stopped on the third throwing path KR3, and a ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 cannot flow into the third throwing path KR3. 2 It is possible to form a state in which a ball is thrown to the ball throwing path KR2.

Therefore, by displacing one distribution member 540, when the flow path of 1 is divided into the flow path of 2, the flow path of the sphere can be reliably switched to either of them.

Further, the urging spring SP4 applies an urging force to the distribution member 540 to maintain the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 in the second throwing path KR2, so that the ball receiving portion 467 cannot receive the game ball. It is possible to prevent the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 from being switched to the third throwing path.

Further, the regulation plate 541 (distribution means) is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the first throwing path KR1 (flow passage) or the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage), and the appearance position thereof is set.
Since it is an inner wall on an extension line in the flow direction at the downstream end of the first throw path KR1, the regulation plate 541 can be projected at a position close to the game ball flowing down from the lower end side of the first throw path KR1. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required from the start of projecting the regulation plate 541 to the flow-down passage or the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage) until the game ball can be distributed. As a result, the distribution destination can be reliably switched by the regulation plate 541.

Further, the regulation plate 541 (distribution means) projects from the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage) to allow the game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 (flowing passage) to the second throwing path (the second throwing path). It is distributed to the second branch passage), and the protruding direction of the regulation plate 541 is set to the direction toward the upstream end of the second throwing path KR2, so that the game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 is projected. When it comes into contact with the regulation plate in the middle of the above, the game ball can be pushed into the second throwing path KR with the protruding operation of the regulation plate. As a result, distribution to the second throwing path KR2 can be performed more reliably.

In the present embodiment, the regulation plate 541 of the distribution member 540 is arranged at a position closer to the shaft hole 545 than the storage plate 542, but the regulation plate 541 is located at a position farther from the shaft hole 545 than the regulation plate 541. May be placed in. That is, the shaft hole 545 of the distribution member 540 is shown in FIG. 74 (a).
And the axis of the distribution member 540 may be arranged at the position of the point P on the back surface on the downstream side of the third throwing path KR3 shown in FIG. 74 (b). In this case, the regulation plate 54 formed on the distribution member 540
1 and the storage plate 542 are arranged at the same positions as in the present embodiment.

In the state where the shaft hole 545 is arranged at the point P, the displacement speed of the regulation plate 541 when the distribution member 540 is rotationally displaced can be made faster than that of the storage plate 542. Therefore, when the distribution member 540 is displaced from the storage position to the regulation position as described later, the regulation plate 541 can be quickly projected onto the flow path. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 from flowing into the third throwing path KR3 at the timing when the distribution member 540 is switched from the regulated position to the storage position.

Further, in this case, the shape of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 in the front view is the point P.
It is formed in an arc shape centered on. Thereby, when the distribution member 540 is displaced from the regulation position to the storage position (or opposite), the displacement region of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 can be minimized. Further, the recesses 518 and 519 that receive the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 on the outside of the third throwing path KR3 have a concave shape along the displacement locus of the regulation plate 541 and the regulation plate 541.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76, a case where two or more balls are thrown from the throwing path when the sorting member 540 is arranged at the storage position will be described. 75 (a) and 75 (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit 500. FIGS. 76A and 76B are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit 500.

Note that FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b) correspond to a partially enlarged view of the distribution unit 500 of FIG. 74 (a). Further, from FIGS. 75 (a) to 76 (b), the transition states of the spheres when the spheres flow in are shown in order. Further, in FIGS. 75 (a) to 76 (b), the distribution member 540 is in a state of being arranged at the storage position.

As shown in FIGS. 75A and 75B, when the first game ball T1 is thrown to the first throwing path KR1 in a state where the distribution member 540 is arranged at the storage position, as described above. , The game ball T1 is thrown into the third throwing path KR3 and stopped above the storage plate 542.

In this case, since the storage plate 542 is located on the downstream side of the distance between the radius and the diameter of the sphere from the upper end of the third throwing path KR3, a part of the sphere stopped at the upper part of the storage plate 542. but,
It is in a state of being projected toward the KR1 side of the first throwing path (see FIG. 75).

Therefore, as described above, the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage) is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream, and the game ball is formed so as to be able to roll on the inner wall on the gravity direction side thereof. Since the storage plate 542 (means for changing the flow state) is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear from the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity into the third throwing path KR3, the game ball is started after the storage plate 542 starts to protrude into the third throwing path KR3. It is possible to shorten the time required to reach a state where the flow of gravity can be regulated. resulting in,
The distribution destination of the regulation plate 541 is from the second throwing path KR2 (second branch passage) to the third throwing path KR.
When the game ball is distributed to the third throwing path KR3 by being switched to 3, it is possible to easily make the protrusion of the storage plate 542 in time for the regulation of the flow of the game ball.

Further, the regulation plate 541 is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the third throwing path KR3, and in a state of being maximally protruding from the third throwing path KR3, a force component in the protruding direction is acted on from the game ball to the storage plate 542. Therefore, when the flow of the game ball distributed to the third throwing path KR3 is restricted, it is possible to prevent the storage plate 542 from immersing in the recess 519 due to the impact when the game ball collides.
Therefore, it is possible to easily regulate the flow of the game ball.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 76A and 76B, when the second game ball T2 is thrown to the first throwing path KR1 when the distribution unit 500 is in the stored state, the game ball T2 becomes a ball. The ball is thrown in the direction from the first throwing path KR1 to the upper end of the third throwing path KR3. Since the game ball T1 is stopped at the upper end of the third throwing path KR3, the game ball T2 collides with the game ball T1 and is thrown to the second throwing path KR2.

In this case, as described above, since the game ball T1 is in a state of protruding toward the first throwing path KR1, the second throwing path KR without throwing the game ball T2 inside the third throwing path KR3.
Since it can be guided to 2, the game ball T2 can be thrown to the second throwing path KR2 without staying inside the third throwing path KR3. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2.

That is, the second throwing path KR2 (second branch passage) in the first throwing path KR1 (flow passage).
The inner wall on the side where the ball is desired is a game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 and the third throwing path KR3 (first).
Of the specified number (1 ball) of game balls stored in the branch passage), the last game ball is used as the third throwing path K.
Since it is formed so as to be able to guide to the side surface of R3, the game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 is made to collide with the last game ball out of the specified number of game balls, and then flowed down to the second throwing path KR2. It can be done easily.

Of the specified number of game balls, the last game ball means a game ball located on the upstream side (the side opposite to the regulation plate 541). Further, in the present embodiment, the specified number is set to one ball. In this case, the game ball at the end means the game ball itself stored in the third throwing path KR3.

Further, as described above, in the first throwing path KR1 (flow passage), the lower end side of the flow path is tilted toward the central portion of the base plate 520 in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 73), and the lower end side thereof is tilted. The portion is formed by being curved in a gentle S shape. That is, since the flow direction of the downstream end of the first throw path KR1 (flow passage) is formed in the flow direction of the upstream end of the third throw path KR3, the game ball flowing down the first throw path KR1 is the third. If the direction of the repulsive force applied to the last game ball when it collides with the last game ball among the specified number of game balls stored in the throw path is different from the flow direction at the upstream end of the third throw path KR3. Can be made. As a result, due to the repulsive force at the time of collision, the trailing game ball jumps out from the upstream end of the third throwing path KR3, and the second throwing path KR2.
It is possible to suppress the inflow to.

Further, since the upper end portion of the third throwing path KR3 is formed so as to be inclined in the inclined direction of the lower end portion of the first throwing path KR1, the position where the game ball T2 collides with the game ball T1 is the upper hemisphere of the game ball T1. At the same time, it can be set to the second throwing path KR2 side. Therefore, the bounce direction of the game ball T2 that has collided with the game ball T1 can be set to the entrance (upper end) side of the second throwing path KR2. Therefore, the game ball T2 that collides with the game ball T1 can be easily thrown to the second throwing path KR2. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from staying in the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2.

Further, the distribution destination by the regulation plate 541 is set to the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage), and the flow of the game ball in the third throwing path KR3 is the storage plate 542 (means for changing the flow state).
In the state where the specified number (1 ball) of game balls is stored in the 3rd throwing path KR3.
Since the game balls flowing down the first throwing path KR1 (flowing passage) are formed so as to be able to flow down to the second throwing path KR2 (second branch passage), when a specified number or more of game balls flow down the flowing passage, It is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding the specified number (the second and subsequent game balls T2) from staying in the first throwing path KR1. Therefore, the displacement of the regulation plate 541 (operation in which the distribution destination is the second throwing path KR2).
However, it is possible to suppress the inhibition by the game ball stagnating in the first throwing path KR1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, a case where a ball is thrown into the throwing path when the sorting member 540 is arranged at the restricted position will be described. 77 (a) and 77 (b) show the distribution unit 500.
It is a partially enlarged view of.

Note that FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b) correspond to a partially enlarged view of the distribution unit 500 of FIG. 74 (a). Further, FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b) show the transition states of the spheres when the spheres flow in, respectively. Further, in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), the distribution member 540 is in a state of being arranged at the regulated position.

As shown in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), when a ball is thrown into the first throwing path KR1 with the distribution member 540 arranged at the regulated position, the thrown game ball T1 becomes the first thrown ball. Route KR
It collides with the regulation plate 541 at the lower end of 1. As a result, the game ball T1 is guided by the second throwing path KR2 and flows down the second throwing path KR2.

Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the operation when the ball is made to flow down to the downstream side of the third throwing path KR3 will be described. 78 (a) and 78 (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit 500.

Note that FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b) correspond to a partially enlarged view of the distribution unit 500 of FIG. 74 (a). Further, FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b) show the transition states of the spheres when the spheres flow in, respectively. Further, FIG. 78 (a) shows a state in which the distribution member 540 is arranged at the storage position, and FIG. 78 (b) shows a state in which the distribution member 540 is arranged at the restricted position.

As shown in FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b), the distribution unit 500 is in a stored state (FIG. 78 (a)).
), When the distribution member 540 is displaced and placed in the regulated position,
The game ball T1 stagnated above the storage plate 542 is flowed down to the downstream side of the third throwing path KR3.

That is, the flow of the ball into the third throwing path KR3 is limited to the ball stagnated above the storage plate 542. Further, as described above, the sphere stagnating above the storage plate 542 is set to 1, so that it is the third.
The ball can flow down to the throwing path KR3 one by one. Therefore, the third throwing route KR3
Since the number of balls flowing down to the downstream side of the ball can be stabilized, it is possible to prevent an unintended number of balls from flowing down in the third throwing path KR3.

Therefore, the sorting member 540 (sorting means) becomes a third with the displacement of the sorting member 540.
A regulation plate 541 (first infestation portion) and a storage plate (second infestation portion) formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the throwing path (first branch passage) are provided, and the regulation plate 541 projects into the third throwing path. By that, the first
A game ball flowing down the throwing path KR1 (flowing passage) is formed so as to be able to be distributed to the second throwing path KR2 (second branch passage), and the storage plate 542 is located downstream of the third throwing path KR3 from the regulation plate 541. By being located and projecting to the third throwing path KR3, the flow of the game balls distributed to the third throwing path KR3 can be regulated, and the regulating plate 541 and the storage plate 542 are formed.
In a state where one protrudes into the passage of the third throwing path KR3, the other is retracted to the outside of the passage of the third throwing path KR3 (inside the recesses 518 and 519), so that the ball receiving portion 467 (displacement member) By displacing the distribution member 540 according to the displacement, only a specified number (1 ball) of game balls can be distributed to the third throwing path KR3 and received by the ball receiving unit 467.

That is, the first state in which the regulation plate 541 projects to distribute the game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 to the second throwing path, and the regulation plate 541 retracts to the first throwing path KR1.
The second state of distributing the game ball flowing down to the third throwing path and the second infestation portion projecting to regulate the flow of the game ball distributed to the third throwing path KR3 (storing the game ball). Third
And by retracting the second haunting part, it is possible to form a fourth state in which the game ball stored in the third throwing path is allowed to flow down and be received by the ball receiving part. By combining the above, only the specified number (1 ball) of game balls is distributed to the third throwing path KR3, and the ball receiving unit 46
Can be received by 7.

Further, since the distribution member 540 includes the regulation plates 541 and 542, that is, is formed as a component of 1, the structure of the distribution member 540 (the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 are operated.
The structure for exerting those functions) can be simplified. Further, when one of the regulating plate 541 and the storage plate 542 protrudes into the passage of the third throwing path KR3, the other is retracted out of the passage of the third throwing path KR3, so that there are two ball receiving portions 467. It suffices if the distribution member 540 is also formed so as to be displaceable at two positions according to the positions (first position and second position). That is, by displacing the distribution member 540 at two positions, the above-mentioned first to fourth states can be formed. Therefore, with the structure of the distribution member 540 and the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, the distribution member 54
The structure for displacing 0 can be simplified, and the reliability of the game ball distribution operation can be improved accordingly.

Then, referring to FIGS. 79 to 80, the distribution unit 500 and the lower displacement unit 40
0 will be described. FIG. 79 is a front view of the distribution unit 500 and the lower displacement unit 400. FIG. 80 is a top view of the distribution unit 500 and the lower displacement unit 400.
The state in which the lower displacement unit 400 is arranged at the retracted position is shown in the figure.

As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, the distribution unit 500 is arranged on the front side (lower side of FIG. 80) of the lower displacement unit 400. In this case, the opening 525a formed in the rolling portion 525 of the distribution unit 500 and the opening 451a formed in the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440.
Is placed at a position where and overlap in the front-back direction. Therefore, the ball rolled on the rolling portion 525 is thrown into the lower displacement member 440 via the opening 525a and the opening 451a.

In other words, the ball is thrown to the lower displacement member 440 from the third winning opening 82 formed in the game board 13 via the ball throwing unit 600 and the distribution unit 500. Is done.

Therefore, the distribution unit 500 is a rolling unit 525 that communicates with the orbital region of the ball receiving unit 467.
Since the distribution member 540 regulates the passage of the game ball in the rolling portion 525, for example, even if the distribution member 540 malfunctions and the second and subsequent game balls T2 are thrown, two balls The game ball T2 after the eyes can be reliably sent to the orbital region of the distribution member 540 via the rolling unit 525. As a result, it is possible to prevent problems caused by the second and subsequent game balls T2.

Next, the relationship between the distribution member 540 and the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 86. 81, 83 and 85 are front views of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 82, 84 and 86 are cross-sectional views of the distribution unit 500. In addition, FIG. 81,
In FIGS. 83 and 85, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are transparently viewed, and only the distribution member 540 of the distribution unit 500 arranged on the front side is shown. Further, in FIGS. 82, 84 and 86, the distribution member 540 is shown by a chain line, and the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 arranged on the back surface side is shown by a chain line.

Further, in FIGS. 81 and 82, a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at the first position and the distribution member 540 is arranged at the regulated position is shown, and the lower displacement member 44 is shown.
The state in which 0 is located in the retracted state is illustrated. In FIGS. 83 and 84, a mode in which the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at the second position and the distribution member 540 is arranged at the storage position is shown, and the lower displacement member 440 is located in the retracted state. The state is illustrated. In FIGS. 85 and 86, a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at the first position and the distribution member 540 are arranged at the storage position is shown, and the lower displacement member 440 is in the first overhanging state. The state located in is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, when the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the first position, the ball receiving portion is as described above. The rack 466 that drives the 467 is arranged on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440 (the left side of the lower displacement member 440 when viewed from the front), and the movable rack 464 is arranged on the back side so as to overlap in the front-rear direction.

That is, the movable rack 464 is in a state of being arranged on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440 (the left side of the lower displacement member 440 when viewed from the front), similarly to the rack 466. Therefore, the contact plate 464c formed on the movable rack 464 is located on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440. In this case, the side surface on the other end side (the surface on the left side when viewed from the front) of the contact plate 464c is in contact with the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540. As a result, the distribution member 540 is displaced to a position (regulation position) where the regulation plate 541 is projected to the first throwing path KR1 by the driving force of rotation around the axis of the shaft hole 545.

Therefore, in the state where the lower displacement member 440 is retracted and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the first position, the ball thrown to the first throwing path KR1 of the distribution unit 500 is the third throwing path KR3. The ball is thrown to the second throwing path KR2 without flowing down. Also, as mentioned above,
By displacing the distribution member 540 from the stored state in which the ball is stored above the storage plate 542 to the regulated position, the game ball can be thrown to the downstream side of the third throwing path KR3 (downstream side of the storage plate 542). At this time, by operating the ball receiving portion 467 to receive the ball, the game ball can be thrown inside the ball receiving portion 467.

The third electric accessory 82a for storing the game ball in the distribution unit 500.
The opening operation is performed before the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the first position, and when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the first position, the third electric accessory 82a is in a closed state. .. As a result, when the distribution member 540 is displaced from the storage position to the regulation position, the game ball passing through the first throwing path KR1 is not restricted from flowing down by the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542, and the unintended game ball is the first. 3
It is possible to suppress the ball being thrown to the downstream side of the ball throwing path KR3.

Further, since the distribution member 540 is formed so as to be operable in conjunction with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, the throwing of the game ball to the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 is restricted according to the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467. Or acceptable. That is, since the regulation or allowance for throwing the game ball can be switched mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, for example, the sorting member can be switched according to the detection result of the sensor that detects the position of the sorting member 540. It is possible to eliminate the need to control the driving means for driving the 540 or each of these means, thereby reducing the product cost and improving the reliability of the operation.

Further, in the distribution member 540, the ball receiving portion 467 is in the first position direction (second direction) from the second position.
Since it is allowed to send the game ball T2 to the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 in conjunction with the displacement to, it is the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 and is in the first direction from the ball receiving portion 467. The game ball can be reliably thrown into the area on the side.

Further, the ball receiving portion 467 is formed so as to be displaceable at a switching position for switching the distribution member 540 and a receiving position (second position) set at a position different from the switching position (first position). In the state where the portion 467 is displaced to the switching position, the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is switched to the third throwing path KR3, and in the state where the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the receiving position, the ball receiving portion is transferred from the third throwing path. 467 will be able to receive the game ball, and at the same time
Since the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is switched to the second throw path KR2, the game balls exceeding the specified number (1 ball in this embodiment) that the ball receiving unit 467 can receive the balls are distributed to the third throw path KR3. It can be suppressed.

That is, when the switching position and the receiving position are set to the same position, the distribution member 5
Since the ball receiving section 467 receives the game ball while the distribution destination by 40 is switched to the third throwing path, the game ball exceeds the specified number that can be received by the ball receiving section 467 and the game ball receives the third throwing path KR3. There is a risk of being distributed to. If a means for regulating the inflow of the game ball into the third throwing path KR3 is separately provided, the structure becomes complicated, the reliability is lowered, and the product cost is increased.

On the other hand, in the embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the switching position, and a specified number of game balls (1 ball in the present embodiment) are distributed to the third throwing path KR3, and then the distribution member 540.
When is displaced to the receiving position, the distribution destination is switched to the second throwing path KR2, so that the game ball exceeding one ball can be prevented from flowing down to the third throwing path. Therefore,
The ball receiving unit 467 can prevent the game balls exceeding the receivable specified number (1 ball) from being distributed to the third throwing path KR3. Further, since it is not necessary to separately provide the above-mentioned means (means for restricting the inflow of the game ball into the third throwing path KR3), it is possible to improve the reliability and reduce the product cost.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 starts from a position where each operating unit is turned off (turned off) when the power is turned on (on). Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, only the control thereof may be reset. In that case, if the distribution member 540 is provided with a drive means, when the power is turned on, the distribution unit 500 in the stored state operates during the initial operation to cause the game ball to flow down to the third throw path KR3. There is a risk that the game ball will be thrown to the retracted side (first position side) of the ball receiving portion 467 arranged at the third position.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the displacement of the distribution member 540 and the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 are synchronized, so that even if the pachinko machine 10 is not positioned at a predetermined reference position and the power is turned off, the pachinko machine is turned off. It is possible to prevent an unintended gaming ball from being thrown into the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 when the power of the machine 10 is turned on. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being clogged inside the lower displacement member 440.

Further, when the power is turned off while the game ball is left in the orbital region of the lower displacement member 440, the ball receiving portion 467 is left in the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 by causing the ball receiving portion 467 to perform the discharge operation described above. The game ball can be discharged to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 and collected from the collection port 411f.

Next, it will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 and 84. As shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, the state in which the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 are second.
In the state of being arranged at the position or the third position (position other than the first position), as described above, the rack 466 for driving the ball receiving portion 467 is substantially centered in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 83) of the lower displacement member 440. The movable rack 464 is arranged at a position movable from the end of the lower displacement member 440 on the other end side (left side in the left-right direction in FIG. 83) to one end side.

Therefore, the contact plate 464c formed on the movable rack 464 is arranged at a position separated from the other end of the lower displacement member 4440 to one end. In this case, the surface on the other end side of the contact plate 464c (the surface on the left side when viewed from the front) is separated from the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540. As a result, the distribution member 540 is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 545 by the urging force of the urging spring SP4 interposed between the distribution member 540 and the base plate 520, and the storage plate 542 is third.
It is displaced to a position (storage position) protruding from the throwing path KR3.

Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is retracted and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the second position or the third position (position other than the first position), the first distribution unit 500 is placed.
The ball thrown to the throwing path KR1 is in a state of being stopped above the storage plate 542. again,
As described above, when the distribution unit 500 is in the stored state, the ball thrown into the first throwing path KR1 collides with the ball stopped above the storage plate 542 and is thrown into the second throwing path KR2.

Next, it will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. As shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, when the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the first overhanging state or the second overhanging state, the lower displacement member 440 slides with respect to the front base 411 as described above. It is displaced and rotationally displaced. Therefore, the contact plate 464c formed on the movable rack 464 is displaced with the displacement of the lower displacement member 440, and is in a state of being separated from the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540. As a result, the distribution member 540 is rotated around the axis of the shaft hole 545 by the urging force of the urging spring SP4 interposed between the distribution member 540 and the base plate 520, and the storage plate 542 is thrown into the third ball. It is displaced to a position (storage position) protruding from the path KR3.

Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the first overhanging state or the second overhanging state, the ball thrown into the first throwing path KR1 of the distribution unit 500 is stopped above the storage plate 542. Will be done. Further, as described above, when the distribution unit 500 is in the stored state, the ball thrown to the first throwing path KR1 collides with the ball stopped above the storage plate 542 and is thrown to the second throwing path KR2. ..

That is, the lower displacement member 440 is in the first overhanging state and the second overhanging state (states other than the retracted state).
In this case, the position of the opening 451a of the decorative member 450 is displaced with the displacement of the lower displacement member 440, so that the communication state between the opening 451a and the opening 525a of the distribution unit 500 is released. .. Therefore, if the ball flows down into the third throwing path KR3, the ball may be discharged into the rear case 300 from the opening 451a. However, in the present embodiment, the third throwing member is set as the storage position. It is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down to the downstream side of the path KR3. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball of the rear case 300 from being discharged inside.

In other words, the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 is formed so as to be displaceable in the retracted state, the first overhanging state, and the second overhanging state, and when the lower displacement member 440 is positioned in the retracted state, the lower displacement member 440 is formed. Since the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged on the lower displacement member 440, a mode in which the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced while the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the retracted state and a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged in the first or second overhanging state. It is possible to form a mode in which the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

In this case, in the state where the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the first or second overhanging state, the ball receiving portion 4
67 cannot receive the game ball from the rolling portion 525 of the third throwing path KR3 (third throwing path KR).
In such a state where the rolling portion 525 of 3 and the opening 451a of the lower displacement member 440 are not in communication), the contact plate 464c interlocking with the ball receiving portion 467 is made unable to contact the distribution member 540. Therefore, in a state where the ball receiving portion 467 cannot receive the game ball (a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the first overhanging state or the second overhanging state), the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is the third throwing ball. It is possible to suppress switching to the route KR3.

Further, since the distribution member 540 is arranged on the base plate 520 of the distribution unit 500 formed as a separate member from the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440, the lower displacement member 4 is correspondingly arranged.
It is possible to suppress the increase in size of the base member 470 of 40.

Here, since the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 from the first overhanging state to the retracted state is not only rotational displacement in the left-right direction but also rotational displacement, the contact plate 464c in the tilted state is subjected to the rotational displacement. , The protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540 abuts on the upper surface of the contact plate 464c, and the distribution member 540
May not be rotationally displaced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the state of being displaced to the first overhanging position shown in FIG. 85 to the retracted state, the ball receiving portion 467 is placed at a position other than the first position. ((
It is in a state of being displaced to the second position or the third position). As a result, it is possible to prevent the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 displaced in the retracted state from colliding with the protrusion 543. As a result, the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540 comes into contact with the upper surface of the contact plate 464c, and the distribution member 5
It is possible to prevent the 40 from being unable to be rotationally displaced.

Further, since the swelling portion 543a is formed in the distribution member 540 as described above, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the first overhanging state to the retracted state due to poor control or the like, the contact plate 464c is formed. Even when the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540 abuts on the upper surface, the distribution member 5
40 can be rotationally displaced.

That is, since the contact area with the contact plate 464c can be reduced by the bulging portion 543a, the bulging portion 543a can be easily slid along the surface when the contact plate 464c comes into contact with the contact plate 464c. Therefore, the distribution member 540 can be easily rotationally displaced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540 from coming into contact with the upper surface of the contact plate 464c and the distribution member 540 from being unable to be rotationally displaced.

Next, the configuration of the drive transmission portion of the rotating unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90. 87 is a front view of the rotating unit 700, FIG. 88 is a rear view of the rotating unit 700, and FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotating unit 700, FIG. 90.
Is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating unit 700.

As shown in FIGS. 87 to 90, the rotating unit 700 includes a decorative unit 750 composed of a plurality of displacement members and a ball cradle 71 arranged on the upper side of the decorative unit 750 in the direction of gravity.
0 and the back base 720 arranged on the back side of the ball cradle 710 and the decorative unit 750.
A left-side transmission member 730 arranged on the left side of the front view of the decoration unit 750, and a right-side transmission member 740 arranged on the right side of the front view of the decoration unit 750 are mainly provided.

The ball pedestal 710 is a member for dropping a game ball emitted from the emission opening 471 on one side of the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 described above. As a result, the ball thrown inside the lower displacement member 440 can be thrown to the rotating unit 700. The ball cradle 71
The detailed configuration of 0 will be described later.

The decoration unit 750 is a substantially D-shaped block body in which a curved portion is arranged upward in a side view, and a character or a pattern is decorated on the front side. Further, the decorative unit 750 is composed of a plurality of members, and is configured to be displaceable by transmission of a drive described later. The configuration of the decorative unit 750 will be described later.

The back base 720 is a plate member that connects the back side of the ball cradle 710 and the back side of the decorative unit 750, and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view. As mentioned above, the decorative unit 750
Since the fastening portion is limited because it is composed of a plurality of movable members, the decorative unit is connected by connecting the decorative unit 750 and the ball cradle 710 on the back side at a position invisible to the player. The decorative unit 750 and the ball cradle 710 can be assembled as one unit while ensuring the range of motion of the 750.

The left transmission member 730 is attached with a drive motor KM4 arranged on the left side surface (left side in FIG. 87) of the decorative unit 750, a transmission member 730 for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor KM4, and a drive motor KM4. Gear cover 7 that covers the motor base 732 and the transmission member 730
33 is mainly provided with a throwing path cover 734 which is attached to the gear cover 733 and forms a predetermined gap between the gear cover 733 and the gear cover 733.

The drive motor KM4 is a drive source for moving each member of the decorative unit 750, which will be described later. The drive of the drive motor KM4 is transmitted by a transmission member 730, which will be described later.

The transmission member 730 includes a transmission gear 731a attached to the shaft of the drive motor KM4, a transmission gear 731b meshing with the transmission gear 731a, a transmission gear 731c meshing with the transmission gear 731b, and a transmission gear 731c thereof. The transmission gear 731d is arranged adjacent to and coaxially arranged by the shaft 735, and the load gear 731e meshed with the transmission gear 731d is mainly provided.

The transmission gear 731a is attached to the drive motor KM4 as described above, and rotates when the drive motor KM4 is rotationally driven.

The transmission gear 731b is provided with a one-way clutch OW1 inside, and the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is connected to a shaft portion JB1 that transmits a rotational driving force to a right-side transmission member 740 on the right side of the decorative unit 750.

The one-way clutch OW1 includes an inner ring arranged inside and a cam surface formed on the outer peripheral surface, an outer ring arranged outside the inner ring, and a plurality of springs and rollers between the inner ring and the outer ring. When the outer ring tries to rotate in one direction with respect to the inner ring, the contact surface pressure between the cam surface and the roller increases, which becomes resistance and transmits power to the inner ring, and the outer ring moves in the other direction with respect to the inner ring. When rotated to, the contact surface pressure between the cam surface and the roller decreases, and the clutch slips and disconnects the power transmission.

Therefore, when the drive force in one direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4 to the transmission gear 731b,
When the driving force of rotation can be transmitted to the shaft portion JB1 and the driving force in the other direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, the outer ring slides with respect to the inner ring and the transmission of the driving force to the shaft portion JB1 is cut off.

Similar to the transmission gear 731b, the transmission gear 731c is provided with a one-way clutch OW1 inside. Further, a shaft 735 is arranged inside the one-way clutch OW1 of the transmission gear 731c.

Therefore, when the drive force in one direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4 to the transmission gear 731c,
When the driving force of rotation can be transmitted to the shaft 735 and the driving force in the other direction is transmitted from the driving motor KM4, the outer ring slides with respect to the inner ring and the transmission of the driving force to the shaft 735 is cut off. again,
The transmission gear 731c is meshed with the transmission gear 731b, and the directions of rotation are opposite to each other. Therefore, when the transmission gear 731b is rotated in one direction, the transmission gear 731c
Is the rotation in the other direction. On the other hand, when the transmission gear 731b is rotated in the other direction, the transmission gear 731b is rotated in one direction. That is, by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor KM4, it is switched to a mode in which the shaft portion JB1 rotates or a mode in which the shaft 735 rotates.

The transmission gear 731d is attached to the shaft 735. As described above, the shaft 735 is the transmission gear 7.
It is rotated only when 31c is rotated in one direction. Therefore, the transmission gear 731c rotates in one direction only when the transmission gear 731c is rotated in one direction, and rotation in the other direction is non-rotational.

The load gear 731e has a shaft portion 791a of a resistance member 791 whose shaft hole is attached to the box member 760.
Is linked to. The resistance member 791 is formed to include a shaft portion 791a that is rotatable with respect to a base portion fastened to the box member 760. The resistance member 791 is formed so that a predetermined amount of resistance acts when the shaft portion 791a rotates with respect to the base portion. That is, since a predetermined amount of force is required to rotate the shaft portion 791a, the load gear 73 connected to the shaft portion 791a
Similarly, the force for rotating 1e is required to be a predetermined amount or more.

As a result, when the rotating body 800 meshed with the transmission gear 731d is rotated and stopped by the rotation of the transmission gear 731d, it is possible to suppress the rotation due to the inertial force thereof. That is,
The resistance when the shaft portion 791a rotates with respect to the base portion is set to be larger than the inertial force acting around the axis of the rotating body 800 when the rotation of the rotating body 800 is stopped.

Further, the load gear 731e is connected to a transmission gear 731d coaxially arranged with the transmission gear 731c. Therefore, the resistance of the load gear 731e applied to the drive motor KM4 is reduced to the transmission gear 7.
It can only rotate in one direction to rotate 31d. That is, the transmission gear 731c is
When rotated in the other direction, the transmission of the drive between the transmission gear 731c and the transmission gear 731d is cut off, so that the resistance of the load gear 731e can be suppressed from acting. As a result, when the transmission gear 731b is rotated in one direction, it is possible to suppress the action of the resistance of the load gear 731e.

The motor base 732 is formed in a box shape in which the decorative unit 750 side is open, and the drive motor KM4 is arranged on the outside of the bottom portion of the box (left side in FIG. 87) with the shaft inserted inside the box. As a result, the transmission gear 731a connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM4 is connected to the motor base 73.
It can be arranged inside 2. That is, the depth dimension of the box of the motor base 732 is the transmission gear 731a.
It is set larger than the width dimension of. As a result, the drive motor KM4 and the transmission gear 731a can be arranged in the decorative unit 750 in a state of being attached to the motor base 732, and the transmission gear 731a can be prevented from colliding with the decorative unit 750.

The gear cover 733 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the rear, and is fastened to the decorative unit 750 with the left transmission member 730 arranged between them. Further, in the decorative unit 750, a through hole 733a is formed through the decorative unit 750 at a position facing the shaft hole of the rotating body 800 described later. As a result, the ball rolling inside the rotating body 800 can be discharged to the outside through the through hole 733a. A description of the ball thrown to the rotating body 800 will be described later.

The ball throwing path cover 734 is a member arranged on the outside of the gear cover 733 (left side in FIG. 87), is formed of a plate-like body, and has a wall portion protruding from the edge portion thereof toward the gear cover 733. As a result, a gap can be formed between the gear cover 733 and the ball throwing path cover 734 facing each other, and the ball inserted through the through hole 733a of the gear cover 733 is inserted through the gap and discharged to the outside of the rotating unit 700. Can be done. The ball discharged from the gap between the gear cover 733 and the ball throwing path cover facing each other is thrown to a recovery path (not shown) and collected.

The right transmission member 740 includes a rotating member 741 connected to the other end side of the shaft portion JB1 described above and a rotating member 741.
It is mainly provided with an arm member 742 having one end connected to the rotating member 741 and a crank cover 743 arranged on the decorative unit 750 with the rotating member 741 and the arm member 742 covered.

The rotating member 741 has a main body portion 741b formed in the shape of a disk and a main body portion 741b thereof.
One-way clutch OW1 fitted to the shaft of and the opposite side of the decorative unit 750 (Fig. 87)
It is mainly provided with a columnar protrusion 741a protruding from the right side).

In the one-way clutch OW1 attached to the rotating member 741, the shaft hole of the inner ring is inserted into the other end side of the shaft portion JB. Further, the one-way clutch OW1 is arranged so that the inner ring and the outer ring are not transmitted when a rotation opposite to the rotation direction of the shaft portion JB1 is input to the inner ring.

As a result, when a driving force having a rotation speed higher than the rotation speed transmitted from the shaft portion JB1 to the rotation member 741 is input to the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1, only the outer ring is rotated to drive the rotation member 741 of the drive motor KM4. It can be rotated by a driving force other than driving. As a result, the rotating member 741 can be rotated at two or more different speeds.

The arm member 742 has a shape that is a combination of a C-shape and an I-shape in a side view, and has an I at one end of the C-shape.
The other end of the character is connected and formed. Further, the arm member 742 includes a shaft hole 742a penetrating the connecting portion between the C-shaped portion and the I-shaped portion, an elliptical first sliding groove 742b penetrating the one end of the I-shaped portion, and C. It is mainly provided with an elliptical second sliding groove 742c formed through the other end of the character portion.

The shaft hole 742a is a shaft portion 764a formed in the right side surface plate 764 of the box member 760, which will be described later.
Is a hole into which a shaft portion 764a is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 764a. Therefore, the arm member 742 is rotatable with respect to the decorative unit 750 because the shaft portion 764a is inserted into the shaft hole 742a and arranged in the decorative unit 750.

The first sliding groove 742b is a hole into which the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is inserted, and the width dimension in the lateral direction formed in the ellipse is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 741a. Therefore,
The protrusion 741a can be inserted inside the first sliding groove 742b, and the arm member 742 can be rotationally displaced by the rotation of the rotating member 741.

Further, the rotating member 741 is formed so that the outer diameter is smaller than the longitudinal dimension of the I-shaped portion of the arm member 742, and the shaft is half the distance from the shaft hole 742a of the arm member 742 to the longitudinal dimension of the I-shaped portion. It is placed at a position farther away than. As a result, by rotating the rotating member 741, the arm member 742 can be reciprocated to rotate around the axis of the shaft hole 742a.

The second sliding groove 742c is a hole into which the protrusion 773a of the right side lid portion 773, which will be described later, is inserted, and the width dimension in the lateral direction formed in the ellipse is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 773a.
Therefore, the protrusion 773a can be inserted inside the second sliding groove 742c. In addition, the right side lid 773
Is formed so as to be rotatable and displaceable with respect to the box member 760. Therefore, as described above, the rotating member 741 is rotated, and the arm member 742 reciprocates in rotation to rotate the right lid portion 773 connected to the other end of the arm member 742 with respect to the box member 760. be able to.

The crank cover 743 is mainly provided with an elliptical portion 743a formed in a rear view ellipse and a ball throwing portion 743b formed so as to be connected to the back surface side of the elliptical portion 743a.

The elliptical portion 743a is a cover that covers the arm member 742, and the outer shape in the side view is formed to be larger than the displacement region of the arm member 742 and the arm member 742, and the arm member 742 is formed from the edge portion to the decorative unit 750 side. A wall portion is formed that protrudes larger than the thickness of the wall. Thereby, when the crank cover 743 is arranged in the decorative unit 750, the arm member 742 can be arranged between the crank cover 743 and the decorative unit 750 facing each other.

The ball throwing unit 743b is a path member for throwing the ball to the recovery path when the ball flowing down in the flow area in front of the game board 13 is collected from a predetermined collection port, and has a predetermined size inside. It is formed in the shape of a rod with a space of sword. Further, the upper end side of the ball throwing portion 743b is opened and connected to the collection port of the game board 13, and the lower end side is connected to the opening formed in the decorative unit 750. As a result, the ball collected on the game board 13 can be passed through the inside of the decorative unit 750 via the ball throwing unit 743b and guided to a collection path (not shown).

Next, the decorative unit 750 will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 95. FIG. 91 is a front view of the decorative unit 750. 92 (a) is a side view of the decorative unit 750 in the direction of arrow XCIIa of FIG. 91, and FIG. 92 (b) is a side view of the arrow XCIIb of FIG. 91.
It is a side view of the decorative unit 750 in a directional view. FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective front view of the decorative unit 750, and FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective rear view of the decorative unit 750. In addition, in FIG. 91 (b) and FIG. 91 (c), the right side surface plate 764 and the left side side plate 76 of the box member 760.
The state in which 5 is transparently viewed is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 91 to 94, the decorative unit 750 has a lid arranged on the upper side (upper side in FIG. 91 (a)) of the box member 760 and the box member 760, which are the outer decorative portions of the decorative unit 750. The rotating body 80 disposed inside the member 770, the box member 760, and the lid member 770.
It is formed mainly with 0.

The box member 760 includes a base member 762 arranged below the rotating body 800, a front plate 761 arranged in front of the base member 762, and a lower surface plate 763 arranged on the bottom surface of the base member 762. It is mainly provided with a right side side plate 764 arranged on the right side of the front view of the base member 762 and a left side side plate 765 arranged on the left side of the front view of the base member 762.

The base member 762 is formed in a rectangular shape that is larger than the rotating body 800 in the top view, and has a thickness larger than the outer diameter of the sphere in the direction of gravity. The upper surface of the base member 762 is formed on a curved surface coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800. Thereby, when the base member 762 is arranged in the vicinity of the rotating body 800, the collision between the base member 762 and the rotating body 800 can be suppressed.

The base member 762 is mainly provided with a recess 762a recessed downward in the left-right direction on the upper surface and a ball throwing portion 762b recessed in a substantially L shape on the bottom surface.

The recess 762a is a groove in which the shaft portion JB1 described above is arranged inside, and is a decorative unit 75.
It is recessed on the shaft of the transmission gear 731b arranged on the side surface of 0. Thereby, the driving force of the driving motor KM4 can be transmitted via the shaft portion JB1.

The ball throwing portion 762b is bent and recessed in an L shape on the bottom surface, and one end side is a right side plate 7
It is connected to the opening 764b of 64, and the other end side is connected to the back side of the winning opening 761a of the front plate 761. Further, the recessed width of the ball throwing portion 762b is formed to be larger than the diameter of the ball. As a result, by disposing the lower surface plate 763 on the lower side, it is possible to throw the ball inside the box member 760.

The front plate 761 is formed so as to be horizontally long in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a predetermined thickness on the back side. Further, the front plate 761 is formed with a winning opening 761a having a size capable of inserting a ball on the front side. The winning opening 761a is connected to the ball throwing portion 762b of the base member 762 arranged on the back surface side as described above. Therefore, the ball thrown inside the winning opening 761a is thrown to the ball throwing portion 762b of the base member 762.

The right side plate 764 is formed in a D shape whose outer shape is curved upward in the side view. Further, the right side plate 764 has a shaft portion 764a projecting to the outside of the decorative unit 750, a bearing portion 764c formed through below the shaft portion 764a, and a curved shape having the same shaft as the rotating shaft of the rotating body 800. The curved opening 764d formed in the opening and the ball throwing portion 762b of the crank cover 743.
764b, which opens at a position facing the lower end of the rotating body 800, and an engaging portion 764e, which is formed through a semicircular side view on the axis of the rotating shaft of the rotating body 800, are mainly formed.

The opening 764b uses a ball thrown from the ball throwing portion of the crank cover 743 as a base member 76.
It is a hole for allowing the ball to be thrown to 2, and is formed larger than the outer diameter of the ball. As a result, the ball thrown to the crank cover 743 can be thrown to the base member 762.

The bearing portion 764c is a hole into which the shaft portion JB1 described above is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion JB1. As a result, the driving force can be transmitted to the above-mentioned right side transmission member 740.

The curved opening 764d is an opening through which the protrusion 773a projecting from the right lid portion 773 is inserted into the inside. Further, the curved opening 764d has the lid member 770 because the lid member 770 is rotationally displaced.
It is formed in an arc shape coaxial with the rotation axis of. As a result, when the lid member 770 is rotationally displaced, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 773a from colliding with the curved opening 764d.

The engaging portion 764e is a member that engages with the end portion on the right side of the front view of the base plate 810 arranged inside the rotating body 800 to hold the base plate 810 non-rotatably. That is, the tip portion 811a of the right end portion 811 of the base plate 810 is inserted into the engaging portion 764e and arranged. This will result in
The base plate 810 is non-rotatable.

The left side surface plate 765 is formed so that the outer shape in the side view is substantially the same as that of the right side surface plate 764.
Further, the left side surface plate 765 has a through hole 765a formed through the shaft of the rotating body 800, a shaft portion 765b protruding toward the rotating body 800 side, and a penetrating portion 791a into which the shaft portion 791a of the resistance member 791 is inserted. It is mainly provided with a hole 765c.

The through hole 765a is an opening for inserting the ball discharged from the opening on the left side of the front view of the rotating body 800 into the through hole 733a of the motor base 732 described above. That is, the through hole 7
The 65a is formed on the axis of the rotating body 800, and the size of the inner diameter thereof is set to be the same as the inner diameter of the opening on the left side of the front view of the rotating body 800.

The shaft portion 765b is inserted into a shaft hole 781 formed in the rotation restricting member 780 described later, and the shaft portion 765b is inserted into the shaft hole 781.
The rotation restricting member 780 can be held in a rotatable state. The displacement of the rotation restricting member 780 will be described later.

As described above, the through hole 765c is a hole through which the shaft portion 791a of the resistance member 791 is inserted, and is formed at a position facing the side surface of the load gear 731e described above.

The lower surface plate 763 is a plate member that is disposed on the lower surface of the base member 762 to form a ball throwing path through which the ball can pass through the ball throwing portion 762b and the lower surface plate 763 of the base member 762.
Further, the lower surface plate 763 is formed with an opening 763a penetrating in the vertical direction. Aperture 763a
Is an opening for throwing a ball thrown inside the ball throwing unit 762b into a recovery path (not shown). Therefore, the ball won in the winning opening 761a of the front plate 761 and the ball is thrown from the game area to the ball throwing portion 743b of the right side transmission member 740, and the ball can be discharged from the inside of the decorative unit 750.

The lid member 770 has a curved lid portion 771 formed in a curved shape coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800, a right lid portion 773 fastened to the right side surface of the curved lid portion 771 in front view, and a curved lid portion 771. It is mainly provided with a left side lid portion 772 to be fastened to the left side surface of the front view.

As described above, the curved lid portion 771 has an outer shape in a side view formed in a curved shape coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800, and is formed with a radius larger than that of the rotating body 800. The curved lid portion 771 includes a transparent portion 771a formed of a transparent plate in a part on the front side.

The transparent portion 771a is a plate that allows the player to visually recognize a pattern, a character, or the like drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 from the player. That is, in the player, the rotating body 800 is the lid member 770.
Even in the embodiment in which the upper end side is covered, the display of the rotating body 800 can be visually recognized via the transparent portion 771a.

The right side lid portion 773 is formed in an annular shape in a side view, and the radius on the outer side of the annulus is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the curved lid portion 771. Further, the inner diameter of the right lid portion 773 is formed to be larger than the size of the outer diameter in the side view of the right end portion 811 of the rotating body 800. As a result, the right lid portion 773 becomes
It is arranged in a state where the right end portion 811 of the rotating body 800 is inserted through the inner portion of the annular shape.

Further, the right side lid portion 773 is formed mainly provided with a protrusion 773a projecting to the outside (right side in the front view) of the decorative unit 750 and a recess 773b recessed in the outer peripheral edge portion in the radial direction. .. As described above, the protrusion 773a is a protrusion inserted into the second sliding groove 742c of the arm member 742.

The opening / closing member 870 can be rotated by inserting the protrusion 871 of the opening / closing member 870, which will be described later, into the recess 773b. Therefore, the recessed width of the recess 773b is set to be larger than the outer shape of the protrusion 871. Further, the recess 773b is formed at a position substantially opposite to the edge portion of the right side lid portion 773 in which the curved lid portion 771 is arranged.

The left side lid portion 772 is formed in an annular shape in a side view, and the radius on the outer side of the annular shape is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the curved lid portion 771. Further, the inner diameter of the left side lid portion 772 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the tooth surface 881a of the left rotation portion 880, which will be described later. As a result, the left side lid portion 772 is arranged in a state where the left rotation portion 880 of the rotating body 800 is inserted through the inner portion of the annular shape.

Further, the left side lid portion 772 is formed with a plate-shaped sensor plate 772a projecting to the outside (left side when viewed from the front) of the decorative unit 750. The sensor plate 772a can detect the position of the left side lid portion 772 by arranging the sensor plate 772a between facing the bifurcated sensors (not shown).

Here, the lid member 770 for the rotating body 800 will be described. The arrangement of the lid member 770 in the assembled state of the rotating body 800 is the state in which the left and right ends of the rotating body 800 are inserted inside the right side lid portion 773 and the left side lid portion 772 before assembly (separate member). do. after that,
By assembling the right side lid portion 773, the left side lid portion 772, and the curved lid portion 771, the rotating body 800 and the lid member 770 are connected. Therefore, the lid member 770 is rotatable with respect to the rotating body about the axis of the rotating body 800.

The rotation restricting member 780 is formed by bending in a substantially L-shape in a side view. The rotation restricting member 780 is mainly provided with a shaft hole 781 penetrating the bent portion, a protrusion 782 protruding in the bending direction on one end side, and a contact surface 783 formed flat on the tip on the other end side. Will be done.

As described above, the shaft portion 765b of the left side surface plate 765 is inserted into the shaft hole 781. As a result, the rotation restricting member 780 is rotatably held with respect to the left side surface plate 765. Further, the urging spring SP5 is inserted into the shaft portion. As a result, a rotational force in one direction is applied to the rotation restricting member 780.

The protrusion 782 engages with the engaging protrusion 882 of the left-handed rotating portion 880, which will be described later, so that the rotating body 8
The rotational displacement of 00 can be regulated. The contact surface 783 is a surface to which the end portion on the back surface side of the above-mentioned lid member 770 abuts, and the rotation restricting member 780 can be rotated by abutting the lid member 770. The mode of regulation between the rotation restricting member 780 and the rotating body 800 will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 95 to 96, the transmission path of the driving force when the driving motor KM4 is rotated will be described. 95 (a) and 96 (a) are the rotating units 700 in the direction of arrow XCVa of FIG. 89, and FIGS. 95 (b) and 96 (b) are the arrow XC of FIG. 89.
It is a rotation unit 700 in Vb.

In FIG. 95, the displacement direction of each member when the axis of the drive motor KM4 is rotated in the positive direction (clockwise) is shown by a two-dot chain line. In FIG. 96, the displacement direction of each member is shown by a two-dot chain line when the axis of the drive motor KM4 is rotated in the negative direction (counterclockwise).

As shown in FIGS. 95A and 95B, when the drive motor KM4 is driven in the positive direction, the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the positive direction. When the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the positive direction, the transmission gear 731b is rotated in the negative direction and the transmission gear 731c is rotated in the positive direction.

In this case, the one-way clutch OW1 disposed on the transmission gear 731b does not transmit the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft portion JB1 does not rotate. Therefore, the driving force is not transmitted to the rotating member 741 connected to the shaft portion JB1, and the arm member 742 is stopped.

On the other hand, the one-way clutch OW1 disposed on the transmission gear 731 is in a state of transmitting the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft 735 is rotated. Therefore, the transmission gear 7 connected to the shaft 735
31d is rotated. As a result, the load gear 731e meshed with the transmission gear 731d and the tooth surface 881a of the rotating body 800 are rotated. That is, when the drive motor KM4 rotates in the forward direction, the driving force to the lid member 770 is not transmitted, and the driving force to the rotating body 800 is in the transmitted state.

As shown in FIGS. 96A and 96B, when the drive motor KM4 is driven in the negative direction, the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the negative direction. When the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the negative direction, the transmission gear 731b is rotated in the positive direction and the transmission gear 731c is rotated in the negative direction.

In this case, the one-way clutch OW1 disposed on the transmission gear 731b is in a state of transmitting the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft portion JB1 is rotated. Therefore, the driving force is transmitted to the rotating member 741 connected to the shaft portion JB1, and the rotating member 741 is rotated. As a result, the arm member 742 rotates and reciprocates around the axis of the shaft hole 742a, and the lid member 770 is displaced.

On the other hand, in the one-way clutch OW1 disposed on the transmission gear 731, the rotation of the outer ring is not transmitted to the inner ring, and the shaft 735 is not rotated. Therefore, the transmission gear 73 connected to the shaft 735
The driving force is not transmitted to 1d, and the rotating body 800 and the load gear 731e are in a non-rotating state. That is, when the drive motor KM4 makes a negative rotation, the driving force to the lid member 770 is in a transmitted state, and the driving force to the rotating body 800 is not transmitted.

Therefore, the transmission gear 731c that transmits the driving force from the driving motor KM4 to the rotating body 800.
By disposing the one-way clutch OW1 on the (rotational side drive means) and the transmission gear 731b (displacement side transmission means) transmitted to the opening / closing member 870 described later via the lid member 770, the drive motor KM4 can be rotated in the rotational direction. Depending on the rotational force, the transmission gear 731c or the transmission gear 731b
It is possible to transmit to one and block the transmission to the other. As a result, the drive motor K
By simply switching the rotation direction of the M4, the drive target driven by the rotation driving force can be switched, that is, the rotation of the rotating body 800, the stop of the rotation, and the opening / closing member are changed according to the rotation direction of the drive motor KM4. You can switch between 870 displacement and its stop,
The structure can be simplified while allowing the formation of multiple embodiments.

Here, in a structure in which the drive target (rotating body 800 or opening / closing member 870 (lid member 770)) is switched according to the rotation direction of the drive means using the one-way clutch OW1, the drive force is transmitted from the drive motor KM4. When it is cut off, it becomes a state in which it can freely rotate or displace in the direction driven by the driving force. Therefore, for example, the driving target of the driving means is the rotating body 8.
When the opening / closing member 870 (cover member 770) is switched from 00 and the transmission of the driving force is cut off, the rotating body 800 becomes in a rotatable state, and there is a possibility that the rotating body 800 will continue to rotate (rotate) due to the inertial force.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the load gear 731e (load gear) meshed with the transmission gear 731d driven by the transmission gear 731c is provided, the transmission of the rotational driving force from the drive motor KM4 is cut off. However, the load (resistance) when rotating the load gear 731e can be used to prevent the rotating body 800 from continuing to rotate.

Next, the displacement of the lid member 770 will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. Figure 97
(A) and FIG. 98 (c) are in the closed state, FIGS. 97 (b) and 98 (b) are in the intermediate state, and FIGS. 97 (c) and 98 (a) are in the open state. It is a side view of 750 and the right side transmission member 740.

In addition, in FIGS. 97 (a) to 97 (c) and 98 (a) to 98 (c), the state in which the crank cover 743 of the right side transmission member 740 is removed is shown. Further, the closed state of the decorative unit 750 is a state in which the lid member 770 is arranged so as to cover the upper half surface (upper side of FIG. 97 (a)) of the rotating body 800, and the open state is a state in which the lid member 770 rotates. It is in a state of being displaced and arranged on the back surface side (right side of FIG. 97 (c)) of the rotating body 800. The intermediate state is a state in which the lid member 770 is arranged at a position between the closed state and the open state.

Further, in FIGS. 97 (a) to 97 (c), the states of being displaced from the closed state to the open state are sequentially illustrated, and in FIGS. 98 (a) to 98 (c), the displacement from the open state to the closed state is shown. The states to be displacement are shown in order.

First, with reference to FIG. 97, the displacement of the lid member 770 when displaced from the closed state to the open state will be described. The transmission of the driving force to the arm member 742 is performed by the driving motor K as described above.
This is done by rotating M4 in the negative direction.

In the closed state, the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is arranged on the back surface side (right side of FIG. 97A) of the shaft hole 742a of the arm member 742. Therefore, the arm member 742
The first sliding groove 742b into which the protrusion 741a is inserted is arranged on the back surface side of the shaft hole 742a.

The shaft hole 742a, the first sliding groove 742b, and the second sliding groove 742c of the arm member 742 are formed on substantially the same straight line. Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the opposite end of the first sliding groove 742b is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 97 (a)) of the shaft hole 742a. As a result, the protrusion 773a protruding from the right side surface of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is arranged above the rotating body 800.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (b), the rotating member 741 is rotated by approximately 90 degrees, and the protrusion 741
When a is positioned below the axis of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742b of the arm member 742
Is displaced to the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 97 (b)) of the shaft hole 742a with the displacement of the protrusion 741a.

Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the opposite end of the first sliding groove 742b is arranged on the upper side in the gravity direction (upper side of FIG. 97B) of the shaft hole 742a. As a result, the protrusion 773a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is placed at a position where it is rotationally displaced toward the back surface side of the rotating body 800. ..

In this case, the position of the center of gravity of the lid member 770 is arranged on the back surface side of the rotation axis of the lid member 770 (the center position of the rotating body 800 formed in a columnar shape). Therefore, due to the load of the lid member 770, a rotational force is applied in the direction of displacing the lid member 770 from the closed state to the open state. As described above, the rotating member 741 is provided with the one-way clutch OW1 so that the outer ring can rotate in advance of the inner ring. Therefore, the drive motor KM is configured by the load of the lid member 770.
The drive of 4 can be stopped and the lid member 770 can be continuously rotated.

As shown in FIG. 97 (c), when the lid member 770 is displaced to the back surface side of the rotating body, the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is stopped at a position rotated by approximately 90 degrees from the position in the intermediate state.
That is, it is the leftmost end (left side in FIG. 97) of the displacement region of the protrusion 741a. Therefore, the rotation of the arm member 742 is restricted, and the rotation of the lid member 770 is stopped.

That is, the displacement of the lid member 770 from the closed state to the open state is performed by the operation of driving the drive motor KM4 to displace it to the intermediate state and the operation of loading and dropping the lid member 770.

As a result, when the lid member 770 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the drive motor KM
Since the section for driving 4 can be halved from the entire section, the energy consumption of the drive motor KM4 can be reduced.

Further, the displacement speed from the closed state to the intermediate state can be set to follow the rotational speed of the drive motor KM4, and the displacement speed from the intermediate state to the open state can be set to follow the load of the lid member 770. The displacement speed from the closed state to the open state can be changed in two stages. Therefore, since the displacement speed of the lid member 770 can be changed without changing the displacement speed of the drive motor KM4, it is not necessary to complicate the control. As a result, control can be simplified and control failure can be suppressed.

The displacement section in which the lid member 770 follows the rotation speed of the drive motor KM4 is referred to as a first section.
The displacement section in which the lid member 770 follows the load of the lid member 770 is referred to as a second section, and in the first section, D is used.
The reference numeral of K1 will be described by adding the reference numeral of DK2 to the second section.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the displacement of the lid member 770 when displaced from the open state to the closed state will be described.

As described above, in the open state, the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is the arm member 742.
The lid member 77 is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 98 (a)) of the shaft hole 742a of the above.
It is assumed that the curved lid portion 771 of 0 is arranged on the back surface side of the rotating body 800.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), the rotating member 741 is rotated by approximately 90 degrees, and the protrusion 741
When a is positioned above the axis of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742b of the arm member 742 is placed.
Is displaced to the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 98B) of the shaft hole 742a with the displacement of the protrusion 741a.

Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the opposite end of the first sliding groove 742b is arranged on the upper side in the gravity direction (upper side of FIG. 98B) of the shaft hole 742a. As a result, the protrusion 773a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is rotationally displaced upward by approximately 45 degrees from the state where the curved lid portion 771 is positioned on the back surface side of the rotating body 800. It is said that it is placed in the position where it was made.

Further, the lid member 770 displaced to the closed position (position in FIG. 97 (a)) is arranged in the game area (front side of the game board 13) and is located in the open position (FIG. 97 (c)). The lid member 770 displaced to the position of) is arranged outside the area of the game area (on the back side of the game board 13). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the game area from colliding with the rotating body 800 and rotating the rotating body 800. In particular, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the rotating body 800 is provided with an opening / closing member 870 that is displaced toward the game area side, so that the gaming machine flowing down the gaming area collides with the opening / closing member 870. It is possible to prevent the opening / closing member 870 from being opened (overhanging).

Further, since the lid member 770 is arranged outside the area of the game area in the open position, the displacement of the lid member 770 to the open position provides a space for the opening / closing member 870 to project to the game area. Can be secured. Therefore, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 can be brought closer to the game area side by that amount, and the opening / closing member 870 can be easily visually recognized by the player.

Further, the lid member 770 is rotatably formed around an axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the rotating body 800, and is formed in a curved plate shape along the outer surface of the rotating body 800, so that it is in a closed state. The space required for displacement between the position (embossed position) and the open position (retracted position) can be suppressed, and therefore the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly. Further, by forming the lid member 770 in a curved shape in this way, the game ball flowing down the game area can be formed.
It can be prevented from being stopped on the lid member 770 arranged in the closed position, and can be smoothly flowed down.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (c), the rotating member 741 is further rotated by approximately 90 degrees, and the protrusion 7 is further rotated.
When 1a is displaced to the right side of the axis of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742 of the arm member 742 is displaced.
b is displaced to the back surface side (right side of FIG. 98 (c)) of the shaft hole 742a with the displacement of the protrusion 741a.

Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the opposite end of the first sliding groove 742b is arranged on the front side (left side of FIG. 98C) with respect to the shaft hole 742a. As a result, the protrusion 773a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is placed above the rotating body 800.

In this case, the position of the center of gravity of the lid member 770 is displaced to the front side of the rotation axis of the lid member 770 with the displacement of the lid member 770. Therefore, the lid member 77 is in the middle of the closed state from the intermediate state.
Due to the load of 0, a rotational force is applied in the direction of displacing the lid member 770 from the open state to the closed state. Therefore, even when the drive of the drive motor KM4 is stopped, the lid member 770 can be continuously rotated by the load of the lid member 770.

Therefore, the lid member 770 can be closed by the load of the lid member 770.
The lid member 770 can be reliably closed.

Here, if the rotational displacement of the lid member 770 is displaced only by the drive motor KM4, there is a possibility that the lid member 770 cannot be stopped at a normal position when the drive stop operation of the drive motor KM4 is deviated. Further, as in the present embodiment, when the rotation member 741 has one rotation direction and the stop operation of the drive motor KM4 is delayed, one rotation is required to return to the normal position.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the position where the lid member 770 is stopped can be mechanically stopped by using the load of the lid member 770, so that it is possible to suppress the stop position of the lid member 770 from shifting. can.

Here, a gaming machine including a driving means for generating a driving force, a displacement member displaced by the driving force of the driving force, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force to the displacement member is known. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the transmission state of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is always constant, so that when the driving means is driven at a constant driving speed, the displacement member is also constant. It is displaced at a speed, and it is not possible to give a change to the displacement mode of such a displacement member. Therefore, there is a problem that the effect of the effect due to the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient.

Although the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed by increasing or decreasing the drive speed of the drive means, the displacement speed in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member is different from the displacement speed in other sections. In order to obtain the speed, it is necessary to arrange a sensor device that detects the position of the displacement member and control to increase or decrease the output of the drive means according to the detection result of the sensor device.
It leads to an increase in product cost and control cost. In addition, the structure and control become complicated, resulting in a decrease in reliability.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the transmission means (rotating member 741 and arm member 742) is
When the one-way clutch OW1 is provided and the inner ring (first member) of the one-way clutch OW1 is displaced in one direction with respect to the outer ring (second member) of the one-way clutch OW1, the roller engages with the inner ring and the outer ring. When the driving force is transmitted and the inner ring is displaced in the other direction with respect to the outer ring, the roller is disengaged from the inner ring and the outer ring, the transmission of the driving force is cut off, and the lid member. In the second section DK2 (predetermined section) of the displacement section of the 770 (displacement member), the outer ring is displaced in one direction with respect to the inner ring, so that the second section is irrespective of the driving state of the rotating member 741. The displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the other sections. Therefore, it is possible to give a change to the lid member 770 and enhance the effect of the displacement of the lid member 770.

Further, regardless of the drive state of the drive motor KM4, the outer ring can be preceded by the inner ring in one direction. Therefore, for example, the drive motor KM4 can be driven at a constant drive speed in the entire section of the displacement section of the lid member 770. It can be driven, and it is not necessary to increase or decrease the drive speed of the drive motor KM4 in the middle of the displacement section of the lid member 770 (that is, depending on whether it is the first section DK1 or the second section DK2). As a result, the control can be simplified, the control cost can be reduced, and the reliability of the operation can be improved. Alternatively, in the second section DK2, the operation of the driving means can be stopped, and in this case, energy consumption can be suppressed.

Further, in the driving state in which the inner ring is displaced in the other direction with respect to the outer ring, the roller is disengaged and the transmission of the driving force is cut off, so that the displacement member is in the stopped state (driven state). The driving force of the driving means (driving motor KM4) in such a driving state can be applied to the rotating body 8
It can be used as a driving force for driving 00. That is, the two members, the lid member 770 and the rotating body 800, can be displaced by switching the drive direction of the drive means (drive motor KM4).

Further, the lid member 770 is rotatably formed and its center of gravity is arranged at a position eccentric from the center of rotation. In the second section DK2, the weight of the lid member 770 displaces the outer ring in one direction. Since it is formed so as to be able to act in the direction, the outer ring can be displaced in advance in one direction with respect to the inner ring by utilizing the weight of the lid member 770. That is, the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the second section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the section of the first section DK1. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the lid member 770 and enhance the effect of the displacement of the displacement member.

Further, the transmission of the driving force is performed by the main body 741 to which the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is attached.
Since it is performed by the rotating member 741 (crank member) having the protrusion 741a (pin portion) protruding from b and its main body portion 741b and displaced from the rotation center of the main body portion 741c, and the arm member 742. The rotating member 741 is rotated by the outer ring, and the protrusion 741a
Is slid along the first sliding groove 742b, so that the other end side (second sliding groove 742c side) of the rotating member 741 can be reciprocated. In this case, the other end side of the arm member 742 can reciprocate the lid member 770 between the open position and the closed position as the lid member 770 reciprocates. That is, the displacement direction of the lid member 770 can be switched without switching the drive direction of the drive motor KM4.

Further, in this case, since the section of the second section DK can be formed in both reciprocating movements, when the lid member 770 is reciprocated, even when it is displaced in any direction, it starts from the middle of the displacement. The displacement speed of the lid member 770 can be increased, and as a result, the displacement mode of the lid member 770 can be changed, and the effect of the displacement of the lid member can be enhanced.

Next, the displacement of the rotation restricting member 780 will be described with reference to FIG. 99. FIG. 99 (a)
) Is a side view of the decorative unit 750 in the closed state, and FIG. 99 (b) is a side view of the decorative unit 750 in the open state. Note that FIGS. 99 (a) and 99 (b) show a transparent view of the left side surface plate 765 of the box member 760.

As shown in FIG. 99A, when the lid member 770 is in the closed state, the rotation restricting member 780 is in a state where the protrusion 782 side is pushed downward by the urging force of the urging spring SP5.
In FIG. 99A, the state is rotated clockwise about the axis of the shaft hole 781).

Therefore, the distance dimension L4 from the rotation axis of the rotating body 800 to the outside of the engaging protrusion 882 is smaller than the distance dimension L5 from the rotating shaft of the rotating body 800 to the tip of the protrusion 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 (L4). <L5).

Therefore, the rotating body 800 and the rotation restricting member 780 are not engaged with each other, and the rotating body 800 is made rotatable.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 99B, when the lid member 770 is in the open state, the rotation restricting member 780 has a lid member 770 in which the contact surface 783 is displaced to the back surface side of the rotating body 800. The contact surface 783 is in contact with the contact surface and is pushed downward (in FIG. 99 (b), the contact surface is rotated counterclockwise around the axis of the shaft hole 781).

Therefore, the distance dimension L4 from the rotation axis of the rotating body 800 to the outside of the engaging protrusion 882 is larger than the distance dimension L6 from the rotating shaft of the rotating body 800 to the tip of the protrusion 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 (L6). <L4).

As a result, in the rotating body 800 in which the engaging protrusion 882 of the left rotating portion 880 is arranged at the lowermost position in the direction of gravity, the protrusion 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 can be inserted inside the engaging protrusion 882. That is, since the rotating body 800 and the rotation restricting member 780 are engaged with each other, the rotating body 8
00 is considered non-rotatable. In the present embodiment, the position where the rotating body 800 cannot be rotated (the position where the protrusion 782 is inserted inside the engaging protrusion 882) is the position where the opening / closing member 870 of the rotating body 800, which will be described later, is in the open state. Is set to.

That is, in the rotation regulating member 780 (rotation regulating means) that regulates the rotation of the rotating body 800, the opening / closing member 870 (displacement member) is displaced to the open position (second position), and the other side of the displacement member is stretched in the game area. Since the rotation of the rotating body 800 is restricted when it is taken out, the rotating body 800 is rotated with the opening / closing member 870 overhanging, and the opening / closing member 87 is attached to another member located on the rotation locus.
It is possible to suppress the interference of 0. Further, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the rotating body 800 due to the load acting when the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

Here, a state in which the first member and the second member formed so as to be displaceable are provided, and the first member is arranged at an lining position that invisiblely covers at least a part of the second member and a lining position thereof. There is known a gaming machine formed so as to be displaceable from a retracted position that reduces an area that invisiblely covers the second member. According to this gaming machine, the second member is exposed by arranging the first member in the lining position and displacing the first member to the retracted position from the state where the second member is invisible to the player. It is possible to make the player visually recognize it.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the second member is formed so as to be displaceable, there is a possibility that the second member will be displaced when the second member is exposed. Therefore, there is a problem that the player cannot visually recognize the second member in an appropriate state, and the effect of the effect is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the displacement of the rotating body 800 (second member) can be regulated when the lid member 770 (first member) is displaced to the open position (retracted position). Since it is formed, the rotating body 800 can be visually recognized by the player in an appropriate state, and the effect of production can be ensured. That is, when the lid member 770 is displaced to the open position to expose the rotating body 800, the displacement of the lid member 770 to the open position, which must be performed for the effect, is rotated. It is used as a means to regulate the displacement of the body 800. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide or control a mechanism for regulating the displacement of the rotating body 800, and the amount is increased accordingly.
The structure can be simplified.

Further, as will be described later, the shape of the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 is formed asymmetrically from the center of rotation (see FIG. 101). Therefore, the rotating body 800 is rotatably formed and its center of gravity is eccentric from the center of rotation, so that the degree of freedom in designing the rotating body 800 can be increased. That is, it is not necessary for the rotating body 800 to have a shape in which the center of gravity of the rotating body 800 is located at the center of rotation, and a shape asymmetrical with respect to the rotation axis can be adopted, so that the effect of the rotating body 800 can be enhanced. On the other hand, when the position of the center of gravity of the rotating body 800 is eccentric in this way, the rotating body 800 is displaced to the closed position by the gravity of the rotating body 800 due to rotation (may be rotated) around the center of rotation. A configuration in which the lid member 770 is formed so that the displacement of the rotating body 800 can be regulated is particularly effective, whereby the rotating body 800 can be visually recognized by the player in an appropriate state, and the effect of effect can be ensured.

The rotating body 800 may be formed symmetrically with respect to the axis. In this case, the rotating body 8
By forming 00 from two or more members having different specific gravities, the position of the center of gravity thereof can be arranged at a position different from the rotation axis. For example, by forming one half surface from a metal material and the other half surface from a flexible material, the center of gravity can be generally positioned on the metal material side having a larger specific gravity than the flexible material.

Next, the configuration of the rotating body 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 102. Figure 1
00 (a) is a front view of the rotating body 800, FIG. 100 (b) is a side view of the rotating body 800 in the direction of arrow Cb of FIG. 100 (a), and FIG. 100 (c) is a view. It is a side view of the rotating body 800 in the direction view of the arrow Cc of 100 (a). FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotating body 800, and FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rotating body 800.

As shown in FIGS. 100 to 102, the rotating body 800 is formed into a columnar shape by combining a plurality of members. The rotating body 800 has a base plate 810 arranged on a shaft portion, and a first display unit 830, a second display unit 840, a third display unit 850, and a fourth display unit 830 arranged so as to surround the base plate 810 and combined in an annular shape. A display unit 860, a right-handed rotating unit 89 disposed at one end in the axial direction, a left-handed rotating unit 880 disposed at the other end in the axial direction, and an opening / closing member arranged inside the first display unit 830. It is formed mainly with 870.

The base plate 810 has a substantially L-shaped cross section in the axial direction and is formed in a shape extending in the axial direction. The base plate 810 is formed to include a right end portion 811 and a left end portion 812 that project outward from both left and right ends.

The right end portion 811 is formed so as to project in an annular shape from the right side of the base plate 810 when viewed from the front (right side in FIG. 100A). The right end portion 811 is formed mainly provided with a tip portion 811a that partially protrudes from the protruding tip of the right end portion 811 and a communication hole 811b that is an inner portion of the annular shape.

The tip portion 811a is further projected in the axial direction from the tip portion of the right end portion 811 and is further projected.
The protruding region in the right side view (direction view in FIG. 100 (c)) is the engaging portion 7 of the right side plate 764.
It is set smaller than the area inside 64e. The tip portion 811a is inserted inside the engaging portion 764e of the right side surface plate 764 as described above. As a result, the base plate 810 and the right side surface plate 764 (cover member 770) are brought into an engaged state. As a result, the base plate 810 can be stopped with respect to the rotational displacement of each display surface (first display unit 830, second display unit 840, third display unit 850, and fourth display unit 860) described later.

The communication hole 811b is an opening through which wiring (not shown) connected to the LED board 820, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed through the side surface on the right side of the front view of the base plate 810. This makes it possible to insert the wiring.

The left end portion 812 is formed so as to project in an annular shape from the left side of the base plate 810 when viewed from the front (left side in FIG. 100A). The left end portion 812 is a tip portion 8 protruding from the lower semicircle of the left end portion 812.
It is mainly provided with 12a and a communication hole 812b in the inner portion of the annular shape.

The tip portion 812a is further projected in the axial direction from the tip portion of the left end portion 812, and is further projected.
The protruding shape in the left side view (direction view in FIG. 100 (b)) is an annular lower semicircle.

The communication hole 812b is a path for discharging the ball thrown into the inside of the rotating body 800 by the opening / closing member 870 described later to the outside of the rotating body 800. The inner diameter of the communication hole 812b is set to be larger than that of the sphere, and is set to be substantially the same as the through hole 733a formed in the gear cover 733.

Further, the communication hole 812b is an opening connected to the through hole 733a of the gear cover 733, and the protruding distance of the left end portion 812 is set to the distance of contact with the through hole 733a. Further, a protrusion 733b is formed on the upper hemisphere of the end surface of the through hole 733a. The protrusion distance of the protrusion 733b is set to be substantially the same as the protrusion distance of the tip portion 812a. As a result, the base plate 810 and the gear cover 733 (left side transmission member 730) are brought into an engaged state. As a result, the base plate 810 can be stopped with respect to the rotational displacement of each display surface (first display unit 830, second display unit 840, third display unit 850, and fourth display unit 860) described later.

A reverse rotation prevention member 813 is arranged on the bottom surface of the base plate 810 in a rotatable state. The reverse rotation prevention member 813 is formed in a substantially circular shape when viewed from above, and has a protrusion 813a inclined toward one end.
Is formed. Further, the reverse rotation prevention member 813 is placed between the urging spring SP6 and the base plate 810.
Is arranged so that the protrusion 813a is always on the left side when viewed from the front (left side in FIG. 100 (a)).
It is said that it is in a state of being urged.

The right-handed rotating portion 890 is formed in the shape of a plate having a predetermined thickness and is formed in an annular shape in a side view. The right-handed rotating portion 890 is formed so that the inner diameter inside the annulus is larger than the size of the right end portion 811 of the base plate 810. As a result, the right end portion 811 of the base plate 810 is inside the right rotation portion 890.
Can be inserted. Further, the right-handed rotating portion 890 has a shaft hole 891 penetrating in the left-right direction and the shaft hole 8 thereof.
It is mainly provided with a sliding groove 892 that is curved and opened around 91.

The shaft hole 891 is a hole into which the shaft portion 872 of the opening / closing member 870 described later is inserted, and the shaft portion 87 is inserted.
It is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of 2. As a result, it is possible to prevent the shaft portion 872 of the opening / closing member 870 from being displaced with respect to the first display portion 830.

The sliding groove 892 is formed in a curved shape centered on the shaft hole 891, and its radius is set to be the same as the separation distance to the protrusion 871 and the shaft portion 872 of the opening / closing member 870. As a result, by inserting the protrusion 871 of the opening / closing member 870 into the sliding groove 892, the protrusion 871 can be slid inside the sliding groove 892 when the opening / closing member 870 is displaced.

The counterclockwise rotation portion 880 is formed in the shape of a plate having a predetermined thickness and is formed in an annular shape in a side view. The counterclockwise rotation portion 880 is formed so that the inner diameter inside the annulus is larger than the size of the left end portion 812 of the base plate 810. As a result, the left end portion 81 of the base plate 810 is inside the counterclockwise rotating portion 880.
2 can be inserted. Further, the counterclockwise rotating portion 880 mainly includes a wall portion 881 protruding from the inner edge portion in an annular shape, an engaging protrusion 882 protruding from the side wall, and a locking portion 883 in which inclined surfaces are continuously arranged on the inner edge portion. Formed in preparation.

The wall portion 881 is formed so as to project to the left side of the front view of the rotating body 800. The wall portion 881 has a gear tooth surface 881a engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the protruding tip, and a communication hole 881b that opens inward.
To prepare for. The tooth surface 881a is meshed with the transmission gear 881d as described above. As a result, the driving force of the driving motor KM4 can be transmitted to the rotating body 800.

The communication hole 881b is an opening that communicates the internal space and the external space of the rotating body 800, and the ball thrown into the rotating body 800 can be discharged by opening the opening / closing member 870 described later.

As described above, the engaging protrusion 882 is a protrusion to which the rotation restricting member 780 is engaged. The engaging protrusion 882 is formed so as to project from the side surface on the left side of the front view of the counterclockwise rotating portion 880. Further, two engaging protrusions 882 are formed at positions separated by a predetermined distance, and a protrusion 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 is formed so as to be insertable between them.

The cross section of the locking portion 883 is formed in a serrated shape. The counterclockwise rotation unit 880 is a base plate 810.
When arranged in, the tip of the protrusion 813a of the reverse rotation prevention member 813 described above is in contact with the locking portion 883. As a result, when a rotational force that rotates the left-handed rotating portion 880 in one direction acts, the protrusion 813a is slid along the inclined surface of the locking portion 883 to slide the left-handed rotating portion 880.
However, when a rotational force that rotates the left rotating portion 880 in the other direction acts, the surface of the locking portion 883 is caught by the protrusion 813a and the rotation is suppressed.

As a result, it is possible to regulate that the rotating body 800 is rotated in the direction opposite to the direction of rotation by the rotational driving force of the drive motor KM4. Therefore, for example, the position of the center of gravity of the rotating body 800 is biased or the game ball. It is possible to prevent the rotating body from rotating in the reverse direction due to a collision or the like.

Each of the first display unit 830 to the fourth display unit 860 is formed in the same curved shape, and by connecting the end faces of each other, it can be formed into one annular shape. Further, the inner diameters of the first display unit 830 to the fourth display unit 860 formed into one ring are set to be substantially the same as the outer diameters of the left and right rotating units 880 and 890. As a result, each display unit 830 to 860 is converted to the left and right rotating units 880 and 89.
By disposing it at 0, the first display unit 830 to the fourth display unit 860 can be formed into one columnar shape.

In addition, characters and patterns are drawn on the first display unit 830 to the fourth display unit 860, respectively, and as described above, the driving force is transmitted from the left rotation unit 880 to rotate the characters. And patterns can be visually recognized by the player.

The first display portion 830 is mainly provided with an opening 831 opened on the curved surface thereof and a bearing portion 832 which is open to the shaft side and is formed so as to project in a U shape.

The opening 831 is an opening in which an opening / closing member 870, which will be described later, is arranged, and is an opening / closing member 870.
It is formed in an opening with an inner diameter that is substantially the same as the outer shape of. The bearing portion 832 is formed in a size such that the shaft portion 872 of the opening / closing member 870 can be inserted into the open U-shaped portion. Therefore, by inserting the opening / closing member 870 into the opening 831 and inserting the shaft portion 872 of the opening / closing member 870 into the bearing portion 832, the opening / closing member 870 can be rotationally displaced with respect to the first display portion 830. The displacement mode of the opening / closing member 870 will be described later.

The LED board 820 is supplied with electric power, so that the LEDs mounted on the LED board 820 are mounted on the LED board 820.
The light can be emitted. Further, the LED board 820 is attached to the back surface side of the base plate 810.

Next, opening and closing of the opening / closing member 870 will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 (a)
) Is a side view of the rotating body 800 in the closed state of the opening / closing member 870. FIG. 103 (b)
Is a side view of the rotating body 800 in the open state of the opening / closing member 870. In FIG. 103, when the opening / closing member 870 overlaps with another member, its outer diameter is shown by a chain line.

Further, the closed state of the opening / closing member 870 means that the outer peripheral surface of the opening / closing member 870 is the first display unit 830.
It is in a state of being arranged substantially parallel to the outer peripheral surface of. On the other hand, the open state of the opening / closing member 870 is a state in which the outer peripheral surface of the opening / closing member 870 is arranged so as to intersect the outer peripheral surface of the first display unit 830.

As shown in FIG. 103A, in the rotating body 800 in the closed state of the opening / closing member 870, the protrusion 871 of the opening / closing member 870 is on one end side of the sliding groove 892 of the right rotating portion 890 (FIG. 103A).
Is located on the lower side of the shaft portion 872).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 103 (b), the rotating body 800 in the open state of the opening / closing member 870
The protrusion 871 of the opening / closing member 870 is located on the other end side of the sliding groove 892 of the right-handed rotating portion 890. That is, the displacement of the opening / closing member 870 is performed by the protrusion 871 sliding inside the sliding groove 892 of the right-handed rotating portion 890.

Next, the displacement of the protrusion 871 will be described with reference to FIG. 104. 104 (a) and 104 (b) are side views of the decorative unit 750. In addition, FIG. 104 (a) and FIG. 104 (
In b), the right side surface plate 764 of the box member 760 is shown in a transparent state.

Further, in FIG. 104 (a), a state in which the decorative unit 750 is in the closed state and the opening / closing member 870 is in the closed state is shown. FIG. 104 (b) shows a state in which the decorative unit 750 is in the open state and the opening / closing member 870 is in the open state.

As shown in FIG. 104 (a), when the decorative unit 750 is closed, the right lid portion 7
The outer edge of 73 is in contact with the protrusion 871. When the decorative unit 750 is closed, the outer diameter L7 from the rotation axis on the lower half surface of the right lid portion 773 is smaller than the distance L8 from the axis of the right rotation portion 890 to one end side of the sliding groove 892 (L7). <L8).

Further, the difference in dimensions between L7 and L8 is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the protrusion 871. Therefore,
When the outer edge of the right lid 773 is in contact with the protrusion 871, the protrusion 871 is displaced toward one end of the sliding groove 892. As a result, the opening / closing member 870 is closed. That is, when the decorative unit 750 is closed, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing member 870 from being displaced to the open state.

As shown in FIG. 104 (b), when the decorative unit 750 is in the open state, the right lid portion 7
With the displacement of 73, the recess 773b formed in the outer edge portion is displaced. In this case, recess 773
The protrusion 871 is inserted inside b. As a result, the protrusion 871 can displace the sliding groove 892 to the other side. As a result, the opening / closing member 870 is opened by the urging force of the urging spring SP7 arranged between the shaft portion 872 and the first display portion 830.

As described above, the displacement of the opening / closing member 870 to the open state can be performed according to the displacement of the lid member 770. Therefore, since it is not necessary to dispose the drive source for driving the opening / closing member 870 on the rotating body 800, the rotating body 800 can be formed small.

Further, the drive motor KM4 for displacing the opening / closing member 870 can also be used as a driving means for displacing the lid member 770. In this case, when the opening / closing member 870 and the lid member 770 are displaced by the driving force of different driving means, the opening / closing member 870 and the lid member 770 may interfere with each other if a control failure occurs. And the lid member 770 can be mechanically connected to synchronize their displacements, so that the opening / closing member 870 and the lid member 770 can be synchronized.
Can be suppressed from interfering with.

As shown in FIG. 104 (b), when the opening / closing member 870 is opened, the tip end side of the rotation is arranged above the winning opening 761a of the box member 760. As a result, the ball thrown from the throwing portion 711c of the ball cradle 710, which will be described later, can be dropped onto the upper surface of the opening / closing member 870.

In this case, the rotation tip side of the opening / closing member 870 is arranged above the shaft portion 872. Therefore, the sphere that falls on the upper surface can be rolled toward the inside of the rotating body 800. Rotating body 80
The game ball that is rolled inward of 0 is rolled on the upper surface of the base plate 810 arranged inside the rotating body 800. Further, since the base plate 810 is in a state of being inclined downward toward the left end portion 812 side, the sphere rolled on the upper surface of the base plate 810 is rolled toward the left end portion 812 side and rotated from the inside thereof. It can be discharged to the outside of the body 800. That is, the inside of the rotating body 800 can be used as a ball throwing path.

Further, as described above, the rotating body 800 is provided with the rotation restricting member 780 that regulates the rotation of the rotating body 800, so that the lid member 770 is displaced to the open position to expose the rotating body 800. When performing the effect, the effect of the effect can be further enhanced by further displacing the opening / closing member 870. On the other hand, the rotating body 800 may rotate (rotate). Therefore, it is particularly effective to configure the lid member 770 displaced to the open position so that the displacement of the rotating body 800 can be regulated, whereby the rotating body 800 can be visually recognized by the player in an appropriate state. And the production effect can be secured.

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a rotating member which is rotatably formed and whose outer surface around a rotation axis is arranged so as to be visible to a player. According to this gaming machine, the rotating member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the display (design) on the outer peripheral surface thereof can be visually recognized by the player while rotating the rotating member or stopping the rotating member. However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the rotation member is insufficiently utilized because it is only used as a member for holding a display for the player to visually recognize on the outer surface thereof. .. That is, the rotating member is formed to be relatively large because it is necessary to maintain a display that can be visually recognized by the player. Therefore, while the occupied space is large, the part other than the outer surface is not utilized.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the rotating body 800 (rotating member) communicates the internal space formed inside the rotating body 800 to the outside, and also has an opening 831 and a communication hole 881b formed so that the game ball can pass through. (Communication port) is provided, so that the game ball flowing down the game area can flow into or out of the internal space through the opening 831 and the communication hole 881b. Therefore, the internal space of the rotating body 800, which is regarded as a dead space, can function as a storage space or a throwing passage for the game ball, and the rotating body 800 can be utilized accordingly.

Further, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since it is only possible to form an effect mode in which the display of the outer peripheral surface is visually recognized by the player when the rotating member is stopped, there is little change in the effect mode and the effect is insufficient. There was a problem that it was.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the opening / closing member 870 (displacement member) displaceably arranged on the outer surface of the rotating body 800 (rotating member) is provided, the outer surface is formed as the rotating body 800 rotates or stops. In addition to the effect mode in which the display of the above is visually recognized by the player, an effect mode in which the opening / closing member 870 is displaced can be formed, so that the effect mode can be changed accordingly and the effect effect can be enhanced.

When the lid member 770 (displacement member) is displaced to the closed position (first position), the rotating body 800 (displacement member)
Since a part of the outer surface of the rotating member) is formed by the opening / closing member 870, the outer shape of the rotating body 800 can be reduced, and the space required for the rotating body 800 to rotate can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 870 is displaced to the open position (second position), the opening / closing member 870 is projected outward in the radial direction of the rotating body 800, so that the displacement of the opening / closing member 870 can be easily visually recognized by the player. It can be done and the effect of production can be enhanced. Further, the rotating body 800 is rotated with the opening / closing member 870 arranged at the closed position, and the opening / closing member 870 is arranged (displaced) at the open position when the rotation is stopped, so that the rotating body 800 can be used as an outer surface. The portion (opening / closing member 870) that has been visually recognized can form a mode in which the rotating body 800 protrudes outward in the radial direction, and the interest can be enhanced.

Further, an LED board 820 that emits light to the base plate 810 is arranged in the internal space of the rotating body 800. Therefore, when the opening / closing member 870 is set to the open position, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 is opened and the internal space is communicated with the outside, so that the light emitted from the LED board 820 can be emitted to the outside. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 870 is placed in the closed position, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 is closed, and the light emitted from the LED board 820 can be blocked from being emitted to the outside. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Here, in order to make the rotating body 800 rotatable and to displace the opening / closing member 870 on the rotating body 800, a drive means is required for each of the rotating body 800 and the opening / closing member 870, and the product cost. Is bulky. Further, if the driving means for displacing the opening / closing member 870 is mounted on the rotating body 800, the weight of the rotating body 800 increases, so that it becomes difficult to smoothly start or stop the rotation of the rotating body 800.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the opening / closing member 870 is displaced according to the displacement of the lid member 770, and the lid member 770 and the rotating body 800 are displaced by the same drive motor KM4. The rotating body 800 can be rotated and the opening / closing member 870 can be displaced by using the KM4 in combination. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced. Further, since it is not necessary to mount the driving means for displacing the opening / closing member on the rotating body 800, the weight of the rotating body 800 can be reduced, and the rotation of the rotating body 800 can be smoothly started or stopped.

Further, since the opening 831 (first communication port) and the communication hole 881b (second communication port) are formed at different positions, the opening 831 is used as an inflow port for the game ball to flow into the internal space from the outside, and the communication hole 881b is used. Can be used as an outlet for the game ball to flow out from the internal space to the outside. That is,
Even if the rotating body 800 (rotating member) is not rotated (while being kept in a stopped state), the rotating body 8
00 can be used as a throwing passage for a game ball.

Further, since the opening 831 is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 and the communication hole 881b is formed on the axial end surface of the rotating body 800, the gaming ball into the internal space of the rotating body 800 (rotating member) can be formed. The inflow can be easily seen by the player, and the game ball can be discharged while the rotating body 800 is kept in the stopped state.

That is, where the outer surface of the rotating body 800 is arranged so as to be visible to the player, the rotating body 800 has an outer surface thereof.
Since the opening 831 (inflow port) is formed, the inflow of the game ball can be easily visually recognized by the player. On the other hand, when the communication hole 881b is formed on the outer surface of the rotating body 800, when the rotating body 800 is arranged at the rotation position where the communication hole 881b is above, the game ball cannot flow out from the internal space. Since the communication hole 881b (outlet) is formed on the end face of the rotating body 800 in the rotation axis direction, it is possible to form a state in which the game ball can flow out from the internal space regardless of the rotation position of the rotating body 800.

Further, inside the opening 831 (first communication port), a displaceable opening / closing member 870 (displacement member)
When the opening / closing member 870 is displaced to the closed position (first position), the opening 831 is shielded by the opening / closing member 870, and when the opening / closing member 870 is displaced to the open position (second position).
Since the opening 831 is opened, the inflow of the game ball through the opening 831 can be switched between a shielded state and an allowable state.

Further, one side of the opening / closing member 870 (displacement member) is rotatably supported by the rotating body 800 (rotating member), and when the opening / closing member 870 is displaced to the open position (second position), the side opposite to the one side. Since the other side is projected to the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received by the upper surface of the opening / closing member 870. Therefore, when the opening 831 is formed as an inflow port,
A game ball flowing down the game area can be easily flowed into the internal space of the rotating body 800 by using the opening / closing member 870.

In addition, the game ball flowing down the game area can be easily stopped on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 870. Therefore, for example, when the inflow port of the game ball is formed in the rotating body 800, the game ball flowing down the game area can be easily flowed into the inflow port by using the opening / closing member 870. In this case, if the opening / closing member 870 receives the game ball flowing down the game area, the rotating body 800 may be rotated due to the load acting at that time or the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member. .. Therefore, the lid member 770 displaced to the open position is the rotation restricting member 78.
A configuration in which the displacement of the rotating body 800 is regulateably formed by displacing 0 is particularly effective, and this makes it easy to maintain a state in which the opening / closing member 870 is projected to a predetermined position in the game area.

The shaft portion 872 of the opening / closing member 870 is arranged on the rotation direction side of the rotating body 800. In other words, one side of the opening / closing member 870 (displacement member) is located on the front side in the rotation direction of the rotating body 800 (rotating member) with respect to the other side. Therefore, when the rotating body 800 is rotated, even if the opening / closing member 870 interferes with the member arranged around the rotating member, the force generated by the interference closes the opening / closing member 870 (displacement to the closed position). Can act in the direction of).
That is, when the rotating body 800 rotates, the opening / closing member 870 interferes with other members and overhangs (second).
It is possible to suppress the displacement to the position). Further, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing member 870 from engaging with other members and hindering the rotation of the rotating body 800.

Further, the base plate 810 (fixing member) arranged in the internal space of the rotating body 800 is the rotating body 8.
Since 00 is non-rotating with respect to the box member 760 (base member) that is rotatably arranged,
By rolling the game ball that has flowed into the internal space of the rotating body 800 from the opening 831 toward the communication hole 881b on the upper surface of the base plate 810, the game ball rampages in the internal space as the rotating body 800 rotates. Alternatively, it is possible to prevent the game ball from rolling and staying in the internal space.

As described above, since the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 870 is regulated by the displacement of the lid member 770, the opening / closing member 870 displaced to the open state (second position) interferes with the members around the rotating body 800. Can be suppressed.

As described above, the rotating body 800 has a communication hole 811b through which the wiring to the LED board 820 attached to the back surface side of the base plate 810 is inserted, and the rotating body 80 in which the communication hole 881b is formed.
It is formed on the end face opposite to the end face of 0. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space that can be used for each of the communication hole 881b and the communication hole 811b.

That is, when electrical wiring is made to the LED board arranged inside the rotating body 800, the rotating body 8 is used.
When the wiring is inserted from the outer peripheral surface of 00, the wiring is entangled by the rotation of the rotating body 800. Therefore, it is preferable to wire from the axial end surface of the rotating body. If it forms an opening through which the game ball flows out, it becomes difficult to secure a space for inserting the wiring.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the inlet of the game ball of the rotating body 800 can be the outer peripheral surface thereof, one of the axial end faces of the rotating body 800 is used as the outlet of the game ball, and the other is the insertion of wiring. Since it can be used as a mouth, it is easy to secure a space for inserting the wiring.

As a result, the game ball can be smoothly discharged through the communication hole 881b, and the wiring work to the opening of the electrical connection line (wiring to the LED board 820) can be easily performed. Further, since the communication hole 881b and the communication hole 811b can be separated as much as possible, it is possible to easily suppress the interference between the game ball rolling in the internal space of the rotating body 800 to the communication hole 881b and the electrical connection line.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106, the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotary unit 7
00 will be described. FIG. 105 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700, and FIG. 106 is a top view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the direction of arrow CVI of FIG. 105. In addition, in FIGS. 105 and 106, the lower displacement unit 40 in the retracted state
0 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700 are arranged at positions adjacent to each other in the left-right direction. Further, in the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700 in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 106), the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at a substantially central position in the front-rear direction of the ball cradle 710.

Next, with reference to FIG. 107, a mode of throwing a ball from the lower displacement unit 400 to the rotating unit 700 will be described. FIG. 107 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotary unit 700. Note that FIG. 107 shows a state in which the lower displacement unit 400 is arranged in the first overhanging state.

As shown in FIG. 107, the lower displacement unit 400 is in the first overhanging state, and the lower displacement member 4 is set.
When the ball receiving portion 467 arranged inside the 40 receives the ball inside (the state in which the ball receiving operation is performed), the ball receiving operation is performed, and as described above, the ball receiving portion 471 of the lower displacement member 440 receives the ball. The sphere arranged inside the portion 467 is discharged to the outside of the lower displacement member 440.

The ball discharged from the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 freely falls and falls on the ball cradle 710 of the rotating unit 700 arranged on the right side in the front view. As a result, the ball can be thrown from the lower displacement unit 400 to the rotating body 800.

Next, the configuration of the ball cradle 710 will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. 108 (a) is a top view of the ball cradle 710, FIG. 108 (b) is a front view of the ball cradle 710, and FIG. 108 (c) is the CVIIIc-CVIIIc of FIG. 108 (a). It is sectional drawing of the ball cradle 710 in line. FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective view of the ball cradle 710.

As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the ball cradle 710 has a dish receiving portion 711 formed in a box shape.
A solenoid 712 disposed inside the dish receiving portion 711, a displacement member 713 connected to the solenoid 712, and a cover member 714 covering the solenoid 712 are mainly provided.

The dish receiving portion 711 includes a bottom plate 711a forming a bottom surface, an upright portion 711b erected on the edge of the bottom plate 711a, a ball throwing portion 711c protruding from a part of the outer edge of the bottom plate 711a, and a ball throwing portion 711c. It is mainly provided with a shaft hole 711d formed through the erection portion 711b erected at the edge portion of the above.

The bottom plate 711a is formed in a shape that bends downward toward the throwing portion 711c, which will be described later. As a result, the ball thrown to the upper part of the bottom plate 711a is bent (inclined) to the thrown portion 711c.
Can be rolled to the side.

Further, the bottom plate 711a is formed of a flexible material and the lower surface of the bottom plate 711a (FIG. 10).
8 (c) The lower surface) is textured to form fine irregularities on the surface. This will result in
When the bottom plate 711a is molded, the ratio of heat shrinkage can be made different between the upper surface and the bottom surface to facilitate bending toward the bottom surface side. That is, it becomes difficult for a force to act on the bottom surface to which the textured surface is applied in a direction in which the bottom plate side is convexly curved when heat shrinks due to unevenness. On the other hand, since the upper surface side is formed on a flat surface, a pulling force in the horizontal direction acts when the heat shrinks, and the end portion tends to change upward (the upper surface side tends to form a concave curve). Therefore, when the sphere is thermally shrunk, it can be easily bent in a direction in which the sphere is likely to roll. As a result, it is possible to prevent the bottom plate 711a from becoming a defective product when it is molded.

The upright portion 711b is on the upper side in the direction of gravity from the outer edge portion of the ball throwing portion 711c (upper side in FIG. 108 (c)).
It is a wall part that is erected in. The standing distance of the standing portion 711b is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the sphere. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball thrown to the upper part of the bottom plate 711a from falling downward from the edge thereof. In this embodiment, the vertical dimension of the vertical portion 711b is approximately 1.5 of the diameter of the sphere.
Set to double.

Further, the upright portion 711b is a central upright portion 711b1 that divides the region of the bottom plate 711a into two.
Is formed by connecting to the erection portion 711b. The central standing portion 711b1 divides the upper region of the bottom plate 711a into a region where a ball is thrown on one side and a region where a solenoid 712, which will be described later, is arranged on the other side.

The ball throwing portion 711c is formed on the front side of the bottom plate 711a. Further, in the left-right direction (FIG. 108 (FIG. 108)
a) The position (in the left-right direction) is arranged on the right side (right side in FIG. 108) of the substantially center position of the bottom plate 711a. Further, the throwing portion 711c protrudes from the bottom plate and is therefore curved downward. As a result, the ball thrown from the bottom plate 711a can be dropped downward via the throwing portion 711c. A winning opening 761a of the lid member 770 is disposed below the ball throwing section 711c (see FIG. 106), and a ball falling from the throwing section 711c can be thrown into the winning opening 761a.

The shaft portion 713a of the displacement member 713, which will be described later, is inserted into the shaft hole 711d. This will result in
The displacement member 713 can be rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 711d.

When electric power is applied to the solenoid 712, the shaft inserted inside the solenoid 712 can be displaced by the piston. A transmission member 712a is attached to the shaft of the solenoid 712. The transmission member 712a is a member that transmits the driving force of the solenoid 712 to the displacement member 713 described later, and the communication hole 712a1 is formed through the tip thereof.

The displacement member 713 is formed in a C-shaped cross section, and a protrusion 71 projecting to the outside of the C-shape at one end thereof.
It is mainly provided with 3b and a shaft portion 713a projecting inward in a C shape at both ends.

The protrusion 713b is a protrusion inserted into the communication hole 712a1 of the solenoid 712, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the communication hole 712a1. As a result, the solenoid 7
The displacement of 12 is transmitted to the displacement member 713 via the transmission member 712a.

The shaft portion 713a is a shaft inserted into the shaft hole 711d. By inserting the shaft portion 713a into the shaft hole 711d, the displacement member 713 can rotate about the axis of the shaft portion 713a. That is, the displacement member 713 is driven by the displacement of the solenoid 712.

The cover member 714 is formed to have an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the solenoid 712, is arranged above the solenoid 712 arranged on the upper part of the bottom plate 711a, and has a dish receiving portion 71.
It is fastened and fixed to 1. As a result, the solenoid 712 can be fixed.

Next, a ball falling on the ball cradle 710 will be described with reference to FIG. 110. FIG. 110 (
a) and FIG. 110 (b) are cross-sectional views of the ball cradle 710. It should be noted that FIGS. 110 (a) and 110 (b) correspond to the cross section of the ball cradle 710 of FIG. 108 (c).

As shown in FIG. 110, the ball thrown from the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 freely falls in the direction of gravity, and the rotation unit 700 side (right side in FIG. 110 (a)) due to the firing operation of the ball receiving portion 467. ). That is, the ball cradle 710 is dropped in the lower right direction in the front view with respect to the bottom plate 711a.

In this case, as described above, the bottom plate 711a is formed by bending downward toward the ball throwing portion 711c side, and the ball throwing portion 711c is formed on the right side with respect to the bottom plate 711a, so that the upper surface of the bottom plate 711a on which the ball falls is formed. Can be an inclined surface that inclines downward toward the right side. Therefore, the displacement direction of the sphere and the inclination direction of the bottom plate 711a on which the sphere falls can be brought close to each other in parallel.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 110 (b), the sphere that has fallen on the bottom plate 711a moves upward (FIG. 1).
10 (b) Upward) can be suppressed from bouncing. Therefore, the ball thrown from the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 to the ball pedestal 710 of the rotating unit 700 is the ball pedestal 71.
It is possible to suppress the fall from 0.

Further, the ball that has fallen on the bottom plate 711a can be rolled to the throwing portion 711c side by the momentum of the falling. Therefore, the rolling time of the ball up to the throwing unit 711c can be shortened.
As a result, the ball thrown from the lower displacement member 440 to the ball cradle 710 can be smoothly thrown.

Next, the light emission of the ball cradle 710 will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111 (a)
And (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the rotating unit 700 in the CXI-CXI line of FIG. In FIG. 111 (a), the decorative unit 750 is in the closed state, and in FIG. 111 (b), the decorative unit 750 is in the closed state.
The state in which the decorative units 750 are arranged in the open state is shown in the figure.

As shown in FIG. 111 (a), the light emission to the ball cradle 710 in the state where the decorative unit 750 is arranged in the closed state is performed by the LED board 721 arranged on the back side of the rear base 720. ..

More specifically, the light emitted from the LED 721a of the LED board 721 is emitted from the lid member 77.
By reflecting it on the back side of 0, it is incident on the bottom plate 711a of the ball cradle 710. Further, as described above, since the bottom surface of the bottom plate 711a is textured, it is possible to diffusely reflect the incident light due to the unevenness of the textured processing. As a result, the entire bottom surface of the ball cradle 710 can be made to emit light.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 111B, when the decorative unit 750 is arranged in the open state, the transparent portion 771a is formed on the lid member 770 as described above, so that the LED board 7
The LED 721a of 21 is transmitted through the lid member 770 without being reflected. Since the rotating body 800 is formed inside the lid member 770, it can be reflected by the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 and incident on the ball cradle 710.

Further, in this case, by rotating the third display unit 850 of the rotating body 800 toward the ball cradle 710 side (upper side in FIG. 111B), the LE of the LED board 820 arranged on the back side of the base plate 810
The light emitted from D821 can be reflected on the inner wall of the rotating body 800 and emitted from the third display unit 850.

As described above, the inner wall of the third display unit 850 is textured, and a plurality of irregularities are formed on the surface. Therefore, the third display unit 850 can easily emit light to the outside of the rotating body 800 than the other display units. Therefore, it is preferable to arrange the third display unit 850 on the ball cradle 710 side.

Next, a detailed configuration of the upper displacement unit 900 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 118. First, a structure for displacing the upper displacement member 940 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114.

FIG. 112 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900. FIG. 113 shows the upper displacement unit 90.
It is an exploded perspective front view of 0. FIG. 114 is an exploded rear perspective of the upper displacement unit 900.
It should be noted that FIGS. 112 to 114 show a state in which the upper displacement member 940 is arranged at the retracted position (the position arranged at the uppermost position with respect to the base member 910).

As shown in FIGS. 112 to 114, the upper displacement unit 900 is disposed inside the base member 910 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300 and the base member 910 thereof. The transmission member 920, the rotary member 930 rotatably connected to the base member 910 and displaced due to the displacement of the transmission member 920, and one end slidably and displaceably connected to the base member 410 and the rotary member 930. It is mainly provided with an upper displacement member 940 that is connected to and displaced by transmitting a driving force from the rotating member 930.

The base member 910 is formed by combining two horizontally long plate members having a rectangular front view in the front-rear direction, and includes a front base 911 arranged on the front side and a back base 912 arranged on the back side. A transmission member 920 and a rotating member 930 are arranged between the front base 911 and the back base 912.

The front base 911 has three sliding grooves 91 penetrating in the front-rear direction (the depth direction of the page 112 in FIG. 112).
1c, 911d, 911e, a shaft support pin 911b protruding to the back side at the center position in the circumferential direction, and
It is mainly provided with a shaft portion 911f projecting to the front on one end side (left side in front view) of the front base and an opening 911a penetrating in the front-rear direction on the one end side.

The opening 911a is an opening for inserting the shaft of the drive motor KM5 arranged in the front base 911 to the back surface side. As a result, the shaft of the drive motor KM5 arranged on the front side of the front base 911 can be inserted into the back side of the front base 911.

The shaft support pins 911g and 911b are inserted into the shaft holes of the transmission gear 922 and the transmission gear 923 described later, and can rotatably hold the transmission gear 922 and the transmission gear 923. That is, the shaft support pins 911g and 911b are formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft holes of the transmission gear 922 and the transmission gear 923.

The sliding groove 911c is formed through the axis of the shaft support pin 911b in an arc shape. The sliding groove 911c is an opening through which the shaft support pin 923a of the transmission gear 923 described later is inserted, and the radius of the arc thereof is substantially the same as the distance from the shaft hole of the transmission gear 923 described later to the shaft support pin 923a. Set. As a result, when the transmission gear 923 is rotated with the shaft support pin 923a inserted inside the sliding groove 911c, it is possible to prevent the shaft support pin from colliding with the inner wall of the sliding groove 911c.

The sliding grooves 911d and 911e are grooves into which the shaft support pins 951 and 952 of the upper displacement member 940, which will be described later, are inserted, and the width dimension in the lateral direction thereof is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the shaft support pins 951 and 952. Will be done.

The sliding groove 911e is formed linearly in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in the front view) of the front base 911. On the other hand, the sliding groove 911d is formed in an arc shape centered on the lower side of the front base 911. That is, the sliding groove 911e and the sliding groove 911d are formed in a non-parallel manner. Therefore, at different positions in the left-right direction, the distance dimensions between the two sliding grooves 911e and 911d facing each other in the vertical direction are different. As a result, the shaft support pin 9 is inside the sliding grooves 911e and 911d.
When the 51 and 952 are slid, the upper displacement member 940 is slid while rotating due to the difference in the distance dimension between the facings in the vertical direction.

The shaft portion 911f is formed so as to project in a columnar shape on the front side. The shaft portion 911f can be inserted into a through hole 931 formed at one end of the rotating member 930, which will be described later, to hold the rotating member 930 in a rotatable state. That is, the shaft portion 911f is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 931 of the rotating member 930.

The back base 912 is a plate member attached to the back side of the front base 911 at predetermined intervals. The back base 912 is made of a metallic material. As a result, the base member 91
The overall rigidity of 0 can be improved. As a result, the base member 9 formed into a horizontally long rectangle
When the relatively heavy upper displacement member 940 is disposed on the 10, the base member 910 can be prevented from twisting.

The transmission member 920 is arranged between the front base 911 and the back base 912 facing each other. The transmission member 920 includes a transmission gear 921 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM5 and a transmission gear 9 thereof.
It is mainly provided with a transmission gear 922 meshed with 21 and a transmission gear 923 meshed with the transmission gear 922.

As described above, the transmission gear 921 is connected to the drive motor KM5 by inserting the shaft of the drive motor KM5 arranged on the front side of the front base 911 into the shaft hole. As a result, the transmission gear 9
21 can be rotationally displaced by the driving force of the driving motor KM5.

The transmission gear 922 is meshed with the transmission gear 921 and the transmission gear 923 as described above.
Thereby, the driving force of the rotation of the transmission gear 921 can be transmitted to the transmission gear 923.

The transmission gear 923 is formed so as to have a shaft support pin 923a projecting to the front side on the outer peripheral edge portion thereof. Therefore, when the transmission gear 923 is rotated, the shaft support pin 923a is rotationally displaced around the axis of the transmission gear 923.

The rotating member 930 mainly includes a through hole 931 formed in the shape of a long rod on one side and penetrating in the front-rear direction at one end, and an opening 932 extending in the longitudinal direction at a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction. Formed in preparation.

As described above, the through hole 931 is an opening into which the shaft portion 911f of the front base 911 is inserted, and the rotating member 930 can be rotated with respect to the front base 911 by inserting the shaft portion 911f. Can be retained. Further, at the tip of the shaft portion 911f, an urging spring SP
8 is arranged. As a result, the rotating member 930 is urged in the direction of lifting the other end side upward with respect to the front base 911.

The opening 923 is a groove into which the shaft support pin 923a of the transmission gear 923 is inserted, and the shaft support pin 923a is slidably formed inside. As described above, when the transmission gear 923 is rotationally displaced and the arrangement of the shaft support pin 923a is displaced, the shaft support pin 923a is displaced inside the opening 923. Therefore, since the rotating member 930 is arranged in a state where one end is rotatably supported by the shaft,
Due to the displacement of the shaft support pin 923a, one end is rotated around the shaft.

Further, on the other end side of the rotating member 930, an annular member 933 formed in a front view annular shape and formed in a plate shape having a predetermined thickness is arranged on the back surface side.

The front side of the annulus member 933 is formed with two sliding grooves 933a recessed at symmetrical positions along the outer peripheral edge thereof. The annular member 933 is a portion connected to the upper displacement member 940, which will be described later, and the shaft portion 953 of the upper displacement member 940 is inserted inside. Further, the annular member 933 and the upper displacement member 940 are rotatably connected to each other, and the upper displacement member 940 can be displaced as the rotary member 930 is rotationally displaced.

The protrusion 961 of the upper displacement member 940 is inserted inside the sliding groove 933a, and the protrusion 961 slides inside the sliding groove 933a due to the rotational displacement of the upper displacement member 940 with respect to the rotating member. can.

Further, the arc axis of the sliding groove 933a is arranged at a position different from the rotation axis of the upper displacement member 940 with respect to the rotation member 930. As a result, when the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the rotating member 930, the first open portion 960 can be displaced. A detailed description of the first opening portion 960 will be described later.

On one end side (rotating shaft side) of the rotating member 930, a shaft portion cover 913 and a deformation restricting cover 914 formed from a plate-shaped body are arranged in front of the rotating member 930. The shaft cover 913 has a rotating member 93.
It is arranged in front of the rotation shaft portion of 0, and the rotating member 930 is suppressed from rattling in the front-rear direction. The deformation control cover 914 is arranged at a position separated from the rotation axis by a predetermined distance, and it is possible to suppress the rotation member 930 from being deformed in the front-rear direction by the weight of the upper displacement member 940 arranged on the other end side.

The upper displacement member 940 is a base body 95 connected to the front base 911 and the rotating member 930.
0, two first open portions 960 rotatably arranged on the back side of the base body 950, and
It is mainly provided with two second open portions 970 rotatably arranged on the front side of the base body 950 and a variable portion 980 arranged on one end side.

The base body 950 has two shaft support pins 951,952 formed so as to project on the back surface on one end side, and
It is mainly provided with a shaft portion 953 that is formed so as to project from the back surface on the other end side.

As described above, the shaft support pins 951 and 952 have sliding grooves 911e and 91 of the front base 911.
It is a protrusion inserted in 1d. Therefore, when the upper displacement member 940 is driven by the rotating member 930, the shaft support pins 951 and 952 slide along the sliding grooves 911e and 911d, so that the upper displacement member 940 is slid and displaced in the left-right direction. At the same time, the other end side can be rotationally displaced downward.

As described above, the shaft portion 953 is a protrusion that is inserted into the annular member 933 and connected to the rotating member 930, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the annular member 933. As a result, the upper displacement member 940 can be rotatably connected to the rotating member 930. Therefore, the rotating member 9
When 30 is rotationally displaced about one end by the driving force of the driving motor KM5, the annulus member 933
The driving force is transmitted to the upper displacement member 940 by the displacement of. As a result, the upper displacement member 940 can be displaced along the sliding grooves 911e and 911d.

The first open portion 960 is a plate member having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, and two pieces are arranged on the back surface side of the base body 950. The first open portion 960 is rotatably pivotally supported and arranged on the other end side of the base body 950. Further, the first open portion 960 protrudes to the back surface side and the annulus member 9 is formed.
A protrusion 961 disposed inside the sliding groove 933a of 33 is provided. As a result, when the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the rotating member 930 due to the displacement of the rotating member 930, the protrusion 9
61 can be slid inside the sliding groove 933a.

In this case, as described above, the curved shaft of the sliding groove 933a is arranged at a position different from the rotating shaft of the upper displacement member 940 with respect to the rotating member 930, so that the protrusion 961 slides inside the sliding groove 933a. Along with this, the first open portion 960 pivotally supported by the base body 950 can be rotationally displaced.

The second opening portion 970 is a plate member having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, and two pieces are arranged on the front side of the base body 950. The second open portion 970 is rotatably pivotally supported and arranged on the other end side of the base body 950. Also. The second open portion 970 is formed to include an engaging projection (not shown) with which the first open portion 960 engages when a predetermined displacement is made. As a result, as described above, when the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced around the shaft support portion when the upper displacement member 940 is subjected to a predetermined rotational displacement, the first open portion 960 engages with the second open portion 970. The second open portion 970 can be rotationally displaced.

Next, the displacement of the upper displacement member 940 will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 117. FIG. 115 shows the upper displacement unit 9 in a state where the upper displacement member 940 is arranged at the retracted position.
It is a front view of 00. FIG. 116 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900 in a state where the upper displacement member 940 is arranged at an intermediate position. FIG. 117 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900 in a state where the upper displacement member 940 is arranged at the overhanging position.

The retracted position of the upper displacement member 940 is such that the shaft support pins 951 and 952 are the front base 91.
It is a position in a state of being arranged on the other end side of the sliding grooves 911d and 911e of No. 1 (on the right side of the front view of the front base 911). In addition, the overhanging position is that the shaft support pins 951 and 952 are the front base 911.
It is the position of the sliding grooves 911d and 911e arranged on one end side (the left side of the front view of the front base 911). Further, the intermediate position is a position in which the upper displacement member 940 is displaced to a position intermediate between the retracted position and the overhanging position.

As shown in FIGS. 115 to 117, when the upper displacement member 940 is displaced with respect to the front base 911, the upper displacement member 940 changes its longitudinal direction from a substantially horizontal direction (FIG. 115 left-right direction) to a substantially vertical direction (FIG. 115 left-right direction). It is rotationally displaced in the vertical direction of FIG. 117).

Further, with the rotational displacement, the position on one end side of the upper displacement member 940 is set to the front base 911.
It is displaced from the position of the right end of the front view to the substantially center position of the front view. That is, when the rotating member 930 is rotated by the driving force of the driving motor KM5 as described above, the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced while being slidably displaced.

Further, when the displacement is performed from the intermediate position shown in FIG. 116 to the overhanging position shown in FIG. 117, the first open portion 960 arranged in the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the base body 950. The second open portion 970, which engages with and displaces the rotational displacement of the first open portion 960, is also rotationally displaced with respect to the base body 950. Therefore, in the overhanging position, the longitudinal direction of the upper displacement member 940 is directed to the vertical direction, and the first open portion 960 and the second open portion 970 are displaced.

In the present embodiment, the upper displacement member 940 is formed in a shape imitating the shape of a human arm (including a hand). Therefore, it is displaced from the first position to the third position, and the first opening portion 960 and the second position are displaced.
By displacing the opening portion 970, the player can visually recognize the displacement that makes the human arm thicker.

Next, the variable portion 980 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 118. FIG. 118 (a) shows.
It is a front view of the variable portion 980, and FIG. 118 (b) is a rear view of the variable portion 980.

As shown in FIGS. 118 (a) and 118 (b), the variable portion 980 is formed in a shape imitating a human hand, and the main body portion 981 and the main body portion 981 forming the rear portion of the hand are formed. It is mainly provided with finger portions 982 to 986 which are connected to form a finger portion of the hand.

A drive motor (not shown) is arranged inside the main body 981, and the variable plate (not shown) arranged inside can be displaced in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 118 (a)). Will be done.

The finger portion 982 is a portion corresponding to the thumb, and the base portion side is connected to the variable plate of the main body portion 981. As a result, the finger portion 982 can be displaced by the piston movement of the variable plate.

The finger portions 983 to 986 are formed mainly including a first link RB1 disposed on the base side and a second link RB2 disposed on the distal end side inside the finger portions 983 to 986.

The first link RB1 is connected to the second link RB2 in a rotatable state on the tip side, and the base side is connected to the variable plate of the main body portion 981. Therefore, when the variable plate of the main body 981 is moved by the piston, the second link RB is passed through the first link RB1 and the first link RB1.
2 can be displaced. As a result, the fingers 983 to 986 can be displaced. In this embodiment, by displacing the finger portions 982 to 986, the player can visually recognize the operation of opening and closing the fingers of the hand.

The front base 411 has two sliding grooves 411 penetrating in the front-rear direction (the depth direction of the paper in FIG. 43).
It is mainly provided with a, 411b, two columnar shaft support pins 411c, 411d protruding toward the back surface side, and a curved wall portion 411e protruding in an arc shape with the shaft support pin 411d as an axis. ..

The sliding grooves 411a and 411b have two protrusions 47 protruding from the back surface side of the lower displacement member 440.
Holes 2, 473 are inserted into the holes, respectively. The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are formed so as to extend long in the left-right direction, respectively. Therefore, the protrusion 47 inserted into the sliding grooves 411a and 411b
By displacing 2,473 along the sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the lower displacement member 440 can be slid in the left-right direction.

Further, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are formed by being curved in an arc shape, respectively, and are upward (FIG. 4) from the left end (left side in FIG. 43) to the right end (right side in FIG. 43) of the front base 411.
3 Opened in the upward direction). Further, in the sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the axes of the respective arcs are arranged at different positions, and the gap between the facing portions in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 43) is narrowed from the left end portion to the right end portion.

Since the distance between the protrusions 472 and 473 of the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440 does not change, when the lower displacement member 440 is slid along the sliding groove, the lower displacement member 440 is rotated. It can be displaced. That is, by changing the distance between the two sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the lower displacement member 44 does not give a rotational driving force to the lower displacement member 440.
0 can be rotated along with sliding.

The shaft support pin 411c is a protrusion inserted into the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 of the transmission member 420 described later, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft portion 422a. again,
The shaft support pin 411c is formed of a metal rod and is fitted onto the front base 411. Therefore, when a force acts on the cam member 422 from the outer peripheral surface thereof in the axial direction, the shaft support pin 4
It is possible to prevent the 11c from breaking (breaking).

Then, with reference to FIGS. 119 to 121, the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment.
Will be explained. In the first embodiment, the case where the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are displaced in the same direction by the driving force of the drive motor KM2 has been described, but the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment includes the movable rack 2464 and the rack 466. It is displaced in the opposite direction by the driving force of the driving motor KM2. The same parts as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120. FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 2440 according to the second embodiment. FIG. 120 is a front view of the lower displacement member 2440. In addition, FIG. 120
Then, the state in which the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 2440 are transparently viewed is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment includes a base member 2470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 covering the front and rear of the base member 2470, and a case member 480. A transmission mechanism 2460 displaceably arranged between the base member 2470 and a decorative member 4 formed so as to cover the front and back of the case member 480.
It is formed mainly with 50.

The base member 2470 is a plate member formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, and includes protrusions 472 and 473 protruding from the back surface on one end side, and an erection wall 471a erected on the front surface from the edge on the other end side. Left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 120) A protruding wall 477 that protrudes in a U-shape opposite to the vertical direction from the upper end of the central portion to the front side, a shaft portion 474, 475 protruding from the front side, and a shaft portion 474. It is mainly provided with shaft portions 2470a and 2470b projecting above 475.

The shaft portion 2470a is a shaft member rotatably supported by the transmission gear 2468a described later, and is formed smaller than the shaft hole of the transmission gear 2468a.

The shaft portion 2470b is a shaft member to which a transmission gear 2468b, which will be described later, is rotatably supported, and is formed smaller than the shaft hole of the transmission gear 2468b. Transmission gear 246, as described below.
The 8a and the shaft portion 2470a are arranged in a state where the gear tooth surfaces engraved on the outer peripheral surface thereof are meshed with each other. That is, the distance between the shaft portion 2470a and the shaft portion 2470b in the front view is the transmission gear 2.
The distance is set to the radius of 468a and the transmission gear 2468b.

The transmission mechanism 2460 is arranged in front of the base member 470, and the transmission gears 461 and 4 are arranged.
A movable rack that has a tooth surface that meshes with 62, 463, a drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461, and a transmission gear 463, and is slidably displaceable in front of the base member 470. The 2464, the transmission gear 2468a meshing with the movable rack 2464, the transmission gear 2468b meshing with the transmission gear 2468a, the rack 46 meshing with the transmission gear 2468b, and the rack 46 meshing with the transmission gear 2468b can be rotated to one end side of the rack 466. It is mainly provided with a ball receiving portion 467 disposed in the above.

The movable rack 2464 is formed in a horizontally long plate-like body having a rectangular front view, and has a rack gear 464a engraved on the lower end surface, a rack gear 2464g engraved on the upper end surface, and a collision portion 464f protruding from the lower end surface. Is mainly formed.

The rack gear 2464 g is meshed with a transmission gear 2468a described later. As a result, when the drive is transmitted from the drive motor KM4 and the rack 466 is displaced, the transmission gear 2468a can be rotated according to the displacement.

The transmission gears 2468a and 2468b are pivotally supported by the shaft portions 2470a and 2470b of the base member 2470 in a state of being in mesh with each other as described above. As a result, the transmission gear 2
When the 468a is rotated, the transmission gear 2468b is rotated. In addition, the transmission gear 2468b
Is meshed with the rack gear 466a of the rack 466, and when the transmission gear 2468b is rotated, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 466 and the rack 466 is displaced.

That is, the rack 466 can be driven by the driving force of the drive motor KM4. The transmission gears 2468a and 2468b are arranged at positions partially displaced in the front-rear direction, so that the transmission gear 2468a is prevented from colliding with the rack 466 and the transmission gear 2468b is suppressed from colliding with the movable rack 2464.

Next, the displacement of the lower displacement member 2440 will be described with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121
Is a front view of the lower displacement member 2440. Note that, in FIG. 121, similarly to FIG. 120, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 2440 and the front case 481 are shown in a transparent state.

As shown in FIG. 121, electric power is applied to the drive motor KM2, and the transmission mechanism 24 described above is applied.
When the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the launch position by 60, the movable rack 464 and the rack 46
6 are displaced in different directions.

More specifically, when the drive motor KM4 is rotated, the movable rack 464 is displaced to the other end side (left side in FIG. 121) of the lower displacement member 440. With this displacement, the transmission gear 24
68a and 2468b are rotated to displace the rack 466 to one end side (right side in FIG. 3). As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced to the third position.

Therefore, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the first position, a displacement component that is in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the ball receiving portion 467 can be formed. The change in the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member 2440 can be reduced by the displacement of the movable rack 464. As a result, it is possible to suppress the rattling of the lower displacement member 2440 due to the change in the position of the center of gravity.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 122 to 127, the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment.
Will be explained. In the first embodiment, the case where the ball receiving portion 467 is slidly displaced by the rack and pinion mechanism has been described, but in the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 is slidly displaced by the link mechanism. In the same part as each of the above embodiments,
The same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 125. FIG. 122A shows the lower displacement member 344 in the third embodiment.
0 is a front view, and FIG. 122 (b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member 3440. FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 3440, and FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 3440. 125 (a) and 91 (b) are front views of the lower displacement member 3440.

Note that FIG. 125 (a) shows a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 3440 is transparently viewed, and FIG. 125 (b) shows the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 3440 and the front case 3481 transparently. The state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 122 to 125, the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment includes a base member 3470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 that covers the front and rear of the base member 3470, and a case member 480 and a base. A transmission mechanism 3460 displaceably arranged between the member 3470 and a decorative member 45 formed so as to cover the front and back of the case member 480.
It is formed mainly with 0.

The base member 3470 is a plate member formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, and includes protrusions 472 and 473 protruding from the back surface on one end side, and an erection wall 471a erected on the front surface from the edge on the other end side. The sliding wall 3470c, which is formed continuously from the base end side of the erection wall 471a and is erected on the lower edge of the base member 3470, and the upper end of the central portion in the left-right direction (FIG. 122 (a) left-right direction). Mainly provided with a protruding wall 477 that protrudes in a U-shape opposite to the vertical direction from the front side, and an opening 479 that is recessed in the central portion of the base member 470 in the vertical direction while extending from one end side to the other end side. It is formed.

The sliding wall 3470c is a wall portion for abutting with the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 and regulating the position (aspect) of the ball receiving portion 467. That is, it is formed so as to project to a position below the ball receiving portion 467. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 can be held in a state where the opening of the U-shaped portion faces upward.

Further, the sliding wall 3470c is a recess 3470 recessed below the end portion on the standing wall 471a side.
c1 is formed. The recess 3470c1 is a groove for receiving the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 into the recess 3470c1. As a result, when the ball receiving portion 467 is slid toward the upright portion by the transmission mechanism 3460 described later, the ball receiving portion 467 can be received in the recess and the ball receiving portion 467 can be rotated. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 can be made to perform a firing operation (an operation of discharging the ball held inside the U-shape to the outside of the lower displacement member 3440).

The transmission mechanism 3460 includes a drive motor KM2 attached to the front case 3480, which will be described later, and the transmission mechanism 3460.
A first link member 3468 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2 and rotatably arranged, a second link member 3469 connected to the first link member 3468 in a rotatable state, and a second link member thereof. It is mainly provided with a ball receiving portion 467 connected to one end side of the 3469.

The first link member 3468 is formed from a rectangular oblong plate-like body, has a shaft hole 3468b formed through one end side, a connecting hole 3468a connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2, and bulges toward the other end side. It is mainly provided with a load portion 3468c to be formed.

The shaft hole 3468b is a through hole through which the rotation shaft 3469a of the second link member 3469, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed through in the front-rear direction with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the rotation shaft 3469a.

The connecting hole 3468a is a hole fastened to the shaft of the drive motor KM2 as described above, and is formed to have an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the shaft of the drive motor KM2. The shaft of the drive motor KM2 is internally fitted into the connecting hole 3468a and fastened, so that the first link member 3468 is connected to the drive motor KM.
It can rotate with a driving force of 2.

The load portion 3468c is formed so as to bulge toward the other end side of the connecting hole 3468a. Load part 3
Reference numeral 46c is a member for applying a load for positioning the center of gravity of the first link member 3468 on the other end side of the connecting hole 3468a, and is formed so as to bulge outward from one end side.

The second link member 3469 is formed in a rectangular oblong state, and the first link member 34 is formed.
It is arranged on the back side of 68. The second link member 3469 has a rotating shaft 3469a projecting in a columnar shape from the other end side toward the front surface and a through hole 3469b formed through the one end side in the front-rear direction.
It is formed mainly with and.

As described above, the rotating shaft 3469a is inserted into the shaft hole 3468b of the first link member 3468. As a result, the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 can be connected in a rotatable state.

The through hole 3469b is an opening for connecting the ball receiving portion 467 to the second link member 3469. Further, the through hole 3469b is formed to be smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b of the ball receiving portion 467. Therefore, the shaft hole 467b and the through hole 3469b of the ball receiving portion 467 are arranged coaxially, and a screw having a head larger than the width in the lateral direction of the opening 469 is inserted into the opening 479 and the shaft hole 467b from the back side of the base member 3470. Is inserted and fastened to the through hole 3469b, so that the ball receiving portion 4
The 67 is rotatably connected to the second link member.

The case member 480 is a member that covers the front and rear of the base member 470, and is a base member 47.
It mainly includes a front case 3481 arranged on the front side of 0 and a back case 482 arranged on the back side.

The front case 3481 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular plate in front view, has an opening 3481d penetrating at a position facing the drive motor KM2, and a bottom wall portion 481b formed so as to project from the lower end surface on the back side.
And a shaft hole 481c that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the lower edge portion is mainly provided.

The opening 3481d is a hole for inserting the shaft of the drive motor KM2 arranged on the front side of the front case 3481 to the back side, and is formed to have an outer diameter larger than the shaft of the drive motor KM2. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor KM2 arranged on the front side of the front case 3481 can be transmitted to the first link member 3468 arranged on the back side.

Next, the displacement of the lower displacement member 3440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127. FIG. 126 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the first position, and is shown in FIG. 126 (a).
b) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the second position. FIG. 127 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the third position, and FIG. 127 (b) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the second position.

From FIG. 126 (a) to FIG. 127 (b), the transition states of the lower displacement member 440 are shown in order. In addition, FIGS. 126 (a) and 126 (b) or 127 (a) and FIG. 12
7 (b) shows a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 3440 and the front case 481 are transparently viewed.

As shown in FIGS. 126 and 127, in the downward displacement member 440 at the first position, the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 are in the longitudinal direction thereof (FIG. 126 (a) left-right direction).
Is placed substantially parallel to the longitudinal direction of the base member 3470 (left-right direction in FIG. 126 (a)), and the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 are arranged so as to overlap each other in the front-rear direction.

That is, the connecting portion with the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 is arranged on one end side (left side in FIG. 126 (a)) of the base member 3470. As a result, the second link member 3469 is arranged on one end side. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the first position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (b), when the drive motor KM2 is rotated from the state of the first position and the first link member 3468 is rotationally displaced, one end side of the first link member 3468 is the base member 3470. Displaced with respect to. As a result, the second link member 3469 connected to one end side of the first link member 3468 is displaced. In this case, the second link member 346
Since one end side of 9 is connected to the ball receiving portion 467 and slidable along the opening 479 of the base member 3470, one end side of the second link member 3469 is pushed out to the other end side of the base member 3470. .. As a result, the ball receiving portion 46 connected to the other end side of the second link member 3469.
7 can be displaced to the second position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (a), when the drive motor KM2 is further rotationally displaced from the state of the second position and the first link member 3468 is rotated by approximately 180 degrees from the state of the first position. , The connecting portion between the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 is arranged on the other end side of the base member 3470 with respect to the rotation axis. Therefore, the second link member 34
One end side of 69 is further pushed out to the other end side of the base member 3470, and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the third position.

In this case, the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged inside the recess 3470c1, so that the ball receiving portion 467 is rotated by the urging spring SP2 and fired.

Further, the load portion 3468c of the first link member 3468 is displaced to one end side of the base member 3470. As a result, it is possible to prevent the position of the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 3440 from being changed when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced with respect to the base member. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 3440 can be suppressed.

That is, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the first position, a displacement component that is in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the ball receiving portion 467 can be formed. The change in the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member 3440 can be reduced by the displacement of the load portion 3468c. As a result, it is possible to suppress the rattling of the lower displacement member 440 due to the change in the position of the center of gravity.

Further, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 127 (b), the ball receiving portion 467 can be retracted to the second position and the first position by continuing the rotation of the first link member 3468. Therefore, it is not necessary to switch the control of the drive motor KM2, and the displacement to the second position or the first position can be performed quickly.

Therefore, when the game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the position of the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 changes, so that the lower displacement member 3440 tends to rattle, and the ball receiving portion 467 is quickly retracted. Therefore, the rattling of the lower displacement member 3440 can be suppressed by quickly bringing the position of the center of gravity closer to the rotation axis of the lower displacement member 440.

Further, by immediately displacementing the ball receiving portion 467, it is possible to suppress the wobbling of the lower displacement member 3440 due to the reaction of the ejection operation when the game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467.

That is, when the game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the load of the lower displacement member 440 is reduced by the amount of the ejected game ball, and the lower displacement member 3440 is likely to be displaced upward due to the reaction. By immediately displacing the ball receiving portion 467, a force that displaces the base member 470 downward by the reaction due to the rotational displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 is applied to cancel the reaction when the ball is ejected from the lower displacement member 3440. be able to.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 128 to 130, the lower displacement unit 44 in the fourth embodiment.
00 will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the lower displacement member 440 arranged in the retracted state is formed so as to be capable of launching has been described, but the lower displacement unit 440 in the fourth embodiment has been described.
0 regulates the firing operation of the lower displacement member 440 arranged in the retracted state. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 4400 according to the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 128, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are shown transparently, and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown by a chain line. Further, in FIG. 128, a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged in the first position is shown.

As shown in FIG. 128, the lower displacement unit 4400 according to the fourth embodiment has an opening opened in the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440 between the standing wall 471a and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481. 4471b is formed.

The tip portion 4411g1 of the engagement wall 4411g, which will be described later, is inserted into the opening 4471b. That is, the opening 4471b is opened larger than the tip portion 4411g1.

On the front base 411, an engaging wall 4411g formed in a substantially L shape continuous with the bottom surface of the collection port 411f is formed.

The engaging wall 4411g can regulate that the ball receiving portion 467 is rotated at the third position (launching operation) by inserting the tip portion 4411g1 bent into a substantially L shape into the opening 4471b. .. That is, the tip position of the tip portion 4411g1 is set to be substantially the same as the height of the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b of the lower displacement member 440 located in the retracted state.

Next, a state in which each member of the lower displacement unit 4400 is displaced will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130. 129 and 130 are front views of the lower displacement unit 4400. In addition, in FIGS. 129 and 130, a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are transparently viewed is shown as in FIG. 128, and the front case 48 is shown.
The bottom wall portion 481b of 1 is illustrated by a chain line.

Further, in FIG. 129, a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the third position is shown. Further, in FIG. 130, a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is in the first overhanging state and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged in the first position is shown.

As shown in FIG. 129, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 comes into contact with the upper surface of the tip portion 4411g1 of the engaging wall 4411g and the recess 481.
Intrusion into b1 or opening 4471b is restricted. As a result, the rotation of the ball receiving portion 467 is restricted.

Therefore, when the ball thrown on the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 is discharged to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 by the ball receiving portion 467, the ball receiving portion 467 is at the third position. Rotates,
It is possible to prevent the game ball held inside the ball receiving portion 467 from being discharged.

That is, with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 to the third position, the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 is changed when the game balls exceeding the specified number (1 ball) are discharged from the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467. Can be regulated. Therefore, it is possible to easily eject only the game balls exceeding the specified number from the orbital region.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 130, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the position in the first overhanging state (the position other than the position in the retracted state), the lower displacement member 440 is displaced with respect to the base member 470. Therefore, the opening 4471b of the lower displacement member 440 and the engaging wall 4411g are separated from each other. Therefore, in the first overhanging state, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced to the third position to perform the firing operation.

That is, when the number of game balls exceeding the specified number (1 ball) is discharged from the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 due to the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 to the third position, the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 is changed. It is possible to suppress the change and make it easier to maintain the state in which the ball receiving portion 467 holds a specified number of game balls, while engaging when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the first and second overhanging positions. Wall 4411g has an opening 4471b
Since it is separated from the internal space of the leg portion 467a as the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position.
Is engaged with the opening 4471b, the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 can be changed, and a predetermined number of game balls can be easily discharged from the ball receiving portion 467.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 131 to 135, the distribution unit 55 in the fifth embodiment
00 will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the distribution member 540 rotates to form the storage state and the regulated state has been described, but the distribution member 540 in the fifth embodiment slides and displaces to form the storage state and the regulated state. do. The same parts as those of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the distribution unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134. FIG. 131 (a) is a top view of the distribution unit 5500 according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 131 (b) is a rear view of the distribution unit 5500.
FIG. 132 is an exploded perspective front view of the distribution unit 5500, and FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective rear view of the distribution unit 5500. FIG. 134 shows the CXXXIV-C of FIG. 131 (a).
It is sectional drawing of the distribution unit 5500 in XXXIV line. In FIG. 134, the outer shape of the distribution member 540 is shown by a chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 131 to 133, the distribution unit 5500 according to the fifth embodiment has a base plate 5520 formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and is attached to the front side of the base plate 5520 and faces the base plate 5520. A path forming member 510 that forms a plurality of flow paths through which a ball can flow, and a distribution member 5540 that is slidably attached to the back side of the base plate 5520.
And an extension path member 530 that is attached to the end surface of the base plate 5520 and extends the flow path of the sphere formed between the base plate 5520 and the path forming member 510 facing each other.

The base plate 5520 has two cylindrical shaft portions 5526 protruding to the back surface side, a first opening 5521 and a second opening 5522 formed through the shape of a rectangle, and a U-shaped cross section in which the upper end side is open to the side surface of the upper end. It is mainly provided with a rolling portion 525 that is formed in a shape and extends in the left-right direction, and a locking portion 524 that protrudes like a hook on the back surface side.

The shaft portion 5526 is formed so as to project two on the back surface side, and is inserted into each of the two sliding grooves 5546 described later.

The first opening 5521 and the second opening 5522 are the regulation plates 54 of the distribution member 5540, which will be described later.
1 and an opening through which the storage plate 5542 is inserted, and is formed in an opening having a width larger than the thickness of the regulation plate 5541 and the storage plate 5542. Further, since the distribution member 5540 is attached to the base plate 5520 in a slidable state, the first opening 5521 and the second opening 5522 are larger in the slide direction of the distribution member 5540 than the regulation plate 5541 and the storage plate 5542. Formed in the opening.

The distribution member 5540 is formed in a rectangular shape in front view, one of which is long, and has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The distribution member 5540 is a regulation plate 55 projecting in a plate shape on the front side.
41 and the storage plate 5542, a sliding groove 5546 formed in a long hole substantially in the same direction as the extension direction of the regulation plate 5541 and the storage plate 5542, and a hook-shaped locking portion 544 formed on the back surface side.
It is formed mainly with and.

The regulation plate 5541 passes through the first opening 5521 and the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path K.
The game ball disposed in the connecting portion with R2 and flowing down the first throwing path KR1 is the second throwing path K.
It is a plate member that regulates the inflow to R2, and the distance protruding from the first opening 5521 is set to a distance larger than the radius of the game ball.

Further, the regulation plate 5541 is formed in a straight line in front view, and the extending direction thereof is set to be substantially the same as the slide direction of the distribution member 540. As a result, when the distribution member 5540 is slide-displaced, the displacement region of the regulation plate 5541 can be minimized. resulting in,
The opening region of the first opening 5521 can be minimized, and the rigidity of the base plate 5520 can be ensured.

The storage plate 5542 is a plate member that is arranged on the second throwing path KR2 via the second opening 5522 and causes a game ball flowing down the second throwing path KR2 to flow down to the upstream side of the storage plate 5542.
The distance projected from the second opening 5522 is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball.

Further, the storage plate 5542 is formed in a straight line in front view, and the extending direction thereof is set to be substantially the same as the slide direction of the distribution member 540. As a result, when the distribution member 5540 is slide-displaced, the displacement region of the storage plate 5542 can be minimized. resulting in,
The opening region of the second opening 5522 can be minimized, and the rigidity of the base plate 5520 can be ensured.

The sliding groove 5546 is an elongated hole formed through in the front-rear direction. The shaft portion 5526 of the base plate 5520 is inserted into the sliding groove 5546. Therefore, the shaft portion 5526 is provided with the sliding groove 55.
By inserting it into the 46 and fastening a screw or the like to the tip of the shaft portion 5526 from the back surface side, the distribution member 5540 can be held in a state where it can be slidably displaced with respect to the base plate 5520.

The sliding grooves 5546 are formed at two locations, and their respective longitudinal directions are formed in parallel. As a result, the distribution member 5540 can be slidably displaced while suppressing the rotational displacement of the distribution member 5540.

Next, the displacement of the distribution member 5540 will be described with reference to FIG. 135. Figure 135
(A) and FIG. 135 (b) show the distribution unit 550 in the range CXXXV of FIG. 134.
It is a partially enlarged view of 0. Note that FIG. 135 (a) shows a state in which the distribution member 5540 is arranged at the storage position, and FIG. 135 (b) shows a state in which the distribution member 5540 is arranged at the restricted position.

As shown in FIG. 135 (a), in the state where the distribution member 5540 is arranged at the regulated position, the storage plate 5542 is arranged in the shape of the third throwing path KR3, and the regulation plate 5541 is on the back side of the path forming member 510. It is arranged inside the recess 518 formed in the wall.

In this case, the distance dimension L9 between the tip protruding inward of the third throw path KR3 of the storage plate 5542 and the inner wall of the third throw path facing the tip is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the ball thrown from the upstream of the third throwing path KR3 (the first throwing path KR1) is the storage plate 55.
It is stopped on the upstream side of 42.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 135 (b), in the state where the distribution member 5540 is arranged at the regulation position, the regulation plate 5541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first throw path KR1 and the third throw path KR3. , The regulation plate 5541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first throwing path KR1 and the third throwing path KR3, and the storage plate 5542 is formed in the recess 5 formed in the wall portion on the back surface side of the path forming member 510.
It is placed inside 19.

In this case, the distance dimension L10 between the end of the tip protruding inward of the first throwing path KR1 of the regulation plate 5541 and the inner wall of the entrance of the third throwing path KR3 is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 collides with the regulation plate 5541 and is thrown to the second throwing path KR2.

That is, by switching the distribution member 5540 between the regulated position and the storage position, the ball thrown in the first throwing path KR1 is thrown into the third throwing path KR3 and stopped on the third throwing path KR3. Assuming that the ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 cannot flow into the third throwing path KR3,
It is possible to form a state in which the ball is thrown to the second throwing path KR2.

Therefore, by sliding-displaceting one distribution member 5540, it is possible to reliably switch the flow path of the sphere to either of the flow paths when the flow path is divided into the flow path of 1 and the flow path of 2.

Further, the regulation plate 5541 (distribution means) is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the first throwing path KR1 (flow passage) or the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage), and the appearance position thereof is set.
It is an inner wall on an extension line in the flow direction at the downstream end of the first throwing path KR1. Therefore, the regulation plate 5541 can be projected at a position close to the game ball flowing down from the lower end side of the first throwing path KR1. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required from the start of projecting the regulation plate 5541 to the flow-down passage or the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage) until the game ball can be distributed. As a result, the distribution destination can be reliably switched by the regulation plate 5541.

Further, the regulation plate 5541 (distribution means) projects from the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage) to allow the game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 (flowing passage) to the second throwing path (the second throwing path). It is distributed to the second branch passage), and the protruding direction of the regulation plate 5541 is set to the direction toward the upstream end of the second throwing path KR2, so that the game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 is projected. When it comes into contact with the regulation plate in the middle of, the game ball is moved to the second regulation plate as the regulation plate protrudes.
It can be pushed into the throwing path KR. As a result, distribution to the second throwing path KR2 can be performed more reliably.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 140, the rotary unit 670 in the sixth embodiment
0 will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the load gear 731e is connected to the drive of the rotating body 800 and the rotating body 800 is restricted from operating by the inertial force has been described. However, the rotating body 800 in the sixth embodiment has a load. The gear 731e is removed. The same parts as those of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the rotating unit 6700 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 138. 136 is a front view of the rotating unit 6700 according to the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 137 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotating unit 6700. FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective rear view of the distribution unit 6500.

As shown in FIGS. 136 to 138, the rotating unit 6700 is a rotating body 8 that is rotationally displaced.
A decorative unit 6750 provided with 00, a ball pedestal 710 arranged on the upper side of the decorative unit 6750 in the direction of gravity, a rear base 720 arranged on the back side of the ball pedestal 710 and the decorative unit 6750, and a decorative unit 6750. Left side transmission member 7 arranged on the left side of the front view of
30 and a crank cover 743 arranged on the right side of the front view of the decorative unit 6750 are mainly provided.

The decorative unit 6750 is a box member 760 formed in a box shape in which the upper side in the direction of gravity is opened.
And a rotating body 800 rotatably arranged inside the box member.
That is, in the first embodiment, the decorative unit 750 is formed in a state where the rotating body 800 is arranged inside the box member 760 and the lid member 770, but in the sixth embodiment, the lid member 770 is removed. NS.

The left side transmission member 730 is attached with a drive motor KM4 arranged on the left side surface (left side in FIG. 136) of the decorative unit 750, a transmission member 6731 for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor KM4, and a drive motor KM4. Mainly, the motor base 732, the gear cover 733 that covers the transmission member 6731, and the throwing path cover 734 that is attached to the gear cover 733 and is formed with a predetermined gap between the gear cover 733 and the gear cover 733. Formed in preparation.

The transmission member 6731 includes a transmission gear 731a attached to the shaft of the drive motor KM4, a transmission gear 6731b meshing with the transmission gear 731a, a transmission gear 731c meshing with the transmission gear 6731b, and a transmission gear 731c thereof. It is mainly provided with a transmission gear 731d which is arranged adjacent to and coaxially arranged by a shaft 735.

The transmission gear 6731b is a gear that transmits a driving force to the transmission gear 731c. The first
In the embodiment, the one-way clutch OW1 is attached to the inside of the transmission gear 731b, but the one-way clutch OW1 is removed from the transmission gear 6731b of the sixth embodiment. Further, since the transmission gear 731c and the transmission gear 731d are the same as those in the first embodiment,
The detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Therefore, when the driving force in one direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, the driving force for rotation can be transmitted to the shaft 735, and when the driving force in the other direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, the driving force in the other direction is transmitted to the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1. The outer ring slips (spins) and the transmission of the driving force to the shaft 735 is cut off.

Next, the rotation of the rotating body 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 and 140. 139 (a) to 139 (c) are side views of the decorative unit 6750 in the arrow CXXX direction view of FIG. 138, and FIGS. 140 (a) to 140 (c) are views of the arrow CXXXIX direction of FIG. 138. It is a side view of the decoration unit 6750 in.

In addition, in FIG. 139 and FIG. 140, the state in which the left side surface plate 765 of the box member 760 is transparently shown is shown. Further, in FIGS. 139 (a) to 139 (c), the center of gravity G of the rotating body 800 is shown.
The mode in which the second section DK2 is displaced is shown in order, and in FIGS. 140 (a) to 140 (c), the mode in which the center of gravity G of the rotating body 800 displaces the first section DK1 is shown in order.

As shown in FIG. 139, when the driving force in one direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, the rotating body 800 is rotationally displaced clockwise (clockwise) when viewed in the left direction (viewing in the 139 direction in FIG. 139).

As described above, the rotating body 800 is formed asymmetrically around the rotation axis, and the center of gravity G is arranged at a position different from the rotation axis. Therefore, the rotating body 800 is rotated from the state where the center of gravity G shown in FIG. 140 (a) is arranged above the rotation axis, and the center of gravity G shown in FIG. 140 (b) is displaced to a position substantially horizontal to the rotation axis. When started, the load exerts a force that rotates in the direction of rotation.

Therefore, the engagement of the roller interposed between the outer ring and the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1 arranged in the transmission gear 731c is released, and the outer ring (rotating body 800 side) precedes the inner ring (drive motor side). It is in a state of being driven. That is, in the second section, the rotation speed of the rotating body 800 can be made faster than the rotation speed of the drive motor KM4.

The rotating body 800 that rotates the second section DK2 under the load is shown in FIG. 13 due to the load.
The center of gravity G shown in 9 (c) is rotated to a position located below the rotation axis.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 140, when the center of gravity G of the rotating body 800 is displaced in the first section DK1, the load of the rotating body 800 acts in the direction opposite to the direction of rotation. Therefore, the rotating body 800 is rotated according to the rotation speed of the drive motor KM4.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, the displacement speed of the rotating body 800 in the second section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the rotating body 800 in the first section DK1. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the rotating body 800 and enhance the effect of the effect according to the displacement of the rotating body 800.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 144. In the first embodiment described above, the case where the lid member 770 causes the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 to precede the inner ring (that is, the displacement speed of the lid member 770 is increased) by its own weight has been described. The displacement member 7710 in the embodiment uses the weight of the game ball to lead the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 to the inner ring (that is, to increase the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710). The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

141 and 142 are schematic side views of the displacement unit 7700 according to the seventh embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 141, the state in which the displacement member 7710 is arranged in the ascending position is shown in FIG. 142.
Then, the state in which the displacement member 7710 is arranged in the descending position is schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, the displacement unit 7700 transmits the rotational driving force of a driving means (not shown, for example, an electric motor) to the displacement member 7710 formed so as to be slidable and the displacement member 7710. The transmission member 7720 and the load gear 7730 rotated with the slide displacement of the displacement member 7710 are mainly provided.

The displacement member 7710 is a member that is supported by a support mechanism (not shown) so as to be linearly displaceable along the virtual line L1, and the driven pin 7711 projecting from the side surface of the displacement member 7710.
A rack gear 7712 is mainly provided on the lower surface of the displacement member 7710 along the virtual line L1, and a ball receiving member 7713 rotatably supported at the tip of the displacement member 7710.

The virtual line L1 is set as a straight line that inclines downward from the ascending position shown in FIG. 141 toward the descending position shown in FIG. 142. That is, in the ascending position, the displacement member 7710 is positioned above the descending position in the direction of gravity.

The driven pin 7711 is a drive groove 772 in the arm member 7723 of the transmission member 7720.
It is a member slidably inserted into 3b, and is formed as a columnar body having an outer shape slightly smaller than the groove width of the drive groove 7723b. A load gear 7730 is meshed with the rack gear 7712, and the load gear 7730 is rotated with the slide displacement of the displacement member 7710.

The ball receiving member 7713 is a member for holding the game ball on the upper surface of the displacement member 7710, and by being rotated around the rotation shaft 7713a, the upright state shown in FIG. 141 and the tilted state shown in FIG. 142 can be obtained. It can be formed. In the upright state, one end side is projected from the upper surface of the displacement member 7710 so that the game ball can be held (see FIG. 143). On the other hand, in the tilted state, the one end side is positioned below the upper surface of the displacement member 7710, so that the game ball can be ejected from the upper surface of the displacement member 7710 (see FIG. 144).

The ball receiving member 7713 is maintained in an upright state by an urging force acting from an urging spring (for example, a torsion spring) (not shown). An engagement pin 7740 is fixed on the track of the displacement member 7710 (ball receiving member 7713), and when the displacement member 7710 is slid and displaced to the descending position, the engaging pin is on the other end side of the ball receiving member 7713. When the 7740 is engaged, the ball receiving member 7713 is rotated and put into a tilted state. On the other hand, when the displacement member 7710 is slid and displaced to the ascending position, the ball receiving member 7713 is rotated by the elastic recovery force of the urging spring, and the ball receiving member 7713 is rotated.
Return to the tilted state.

The transmission member 7720 is a disk-shaped rotating member 7721 that is rotationally driven by a driving means (not shown) described above, and the rotating member 772 is projected from the axial end surface of the rotating member 7721 and is projected from the axial end surface of the rotating member 7721.
A columnar drive pin 7722 located eccentrically from the center of rotation of 21 and its drive pin 772.
Arm member 77 in which a driven groove 7723a through which 2 is slidably inserted toward one end is formed.
Mainly equipped with 23.

A one-way clutch OW1 is interposed between the rotating member 7721 and the driving means. Specifically, in the one-way clutch OW1, when the inner ring is connected to the drive means, the outer ring is connected to the rotating member 7721, and the inner ring is rotationally driven by the drive means in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141). When the rotational driving force is transmitted to the outer ring (that is, the rotating member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A), while the inner ring is rotationally driven by the driving means in the direction opposite to the direction of arrow A (counterclockwise in FIG. 141). , The power transmission to the outer ring (rotating member 7721) is cut off.

The arm member 7723 has a drive groove 77 into which the driven pin 7711 of the displacement member 7710 is slidably inserted into the other end side opposite to the one end side on which the driven groove 7723a is formed.
23b is formed as an opening, and between the driven groove 7723a and the driving groove 7723b (
The intermediate portion) is rotatably supported by the rotating shaft 7723c.

The drive pin 7722 is formed as a columnar body having an outer shape slightly smaller than the groove width of the driven groove 7723a. Further, the driven groove 7723a and the drive groove 7723b are the arm member 7.
It is formed as a linear groove along the longitudinal direction of the 723.

According to the displacement unit 7700 formed as described above, the displacement member 7710 is shown in FIG. 141.
When the rotating member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141) from the state of being arranged in the ascending position shown in the above, the drive pin 7722 acts on the inner wall surface of the driven groove 7723a, and the arm member 7723 Is rotated clockwise in FIG. 141 about the rotation axis 7723c. Along with the clockwise rotation of the arm member 7723, the inner wall surface of the drive groove 7723b acts in the direction of pushing down the driven pin 7711, so that the displacement member 7710 is slidably displaced along the virtual line L1 and is shown in FIG. 142. It is placed in the descending position shown in.

On the other hand, from the state where the displacement member 7710 is arranged at the descending position shown in FIG. 142, the rotating member 7
When the 721 is further rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141), the drive pin 7722 acts on the inner wall surface of the driven groove 7723a, and the arm member 7723 is centered on the rotation shaft 7723c in the counterclockwise direction of FIG. 141. Is rotated to. As the arm member 7723 rotates counterclockwise, the inner wall surface of the drive groove 7723b acts in the direction of pushing up the driven pin 7711, so that the displacement member 7710 is slid and displaced along the virtual line L1. It is arranged in the ascending position shown in 141.

Here, the load gear 7730 is formed so as to generate a predetermined amount of resistance when rotating, similar to the load gear 731e in the first embodiment. As a result, the weight (self-weight) of the displacement member 7710 acts on the arm member 7723, and the rotating member 7721 is directed in the direction of arrow A (FIG. 141).
By rotating the one-way clutch OW1 clockwise), it is possible to prevent the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 from leading in one direction (arrow A direction) with respect to the inner ring. That is, in the state where the game ball is not held, it is possible to suppress that the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 when going from the ascending position to the descending position is increased.

That is, due to the rotational driving force of the driving means, the rotating member 7721 is moved in the direction of arrow A (FIGS. 141 and 1).
While being rotated clockwise (42), the displacement member 7710 is reciprocally displaced (slide displacement) between the ascending position and the descending position at a sliding speed corresponding to the rotational driving speed of the rotational driving means.
Will be done.

143 and 144 are schematic side views of the displacement unit 7700 when the game ball is held by the displacement member 7710. In FIG. 143, the displacement member 7710 is arranged in the ascending position, and in FIG. 144, the displacement member 7710 is arranged in the descending position.
Each is schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, the displacement member 7710 is formed on the upper surface thereof so as to be able to hold the game ball. That is, in the present embodiment, the displacement unit 7700 is arranged in the area where the game ball flows down in the game area, and the displacement member 7710 is formed so as to be able to receive the flowing game ball on the upper surface thereof. In FIG. 143, the four game balls indicated by reference numeral T are the displacement members 7.
The state held on the upper surface of the 710 is exemplified.

In this case, in the state where the displacement member 7710 holds the game ball, the weight of the displacement member 7710 as a whole is increased (heavier) by the weight of the game ball to exceed the resistance due to the rotation of the load gear 7730. Can be made to. That is, the weight of the entire displacement member 7710 (weight including the game ball) is applied to the arm member 7723, and the rotating member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 143) to rotate the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1. Can be preceded in one direction (arrow A direction) with respect to the inner ring. As a result, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 when going from the ascending position to the descending position can be made faster than the displacement speed when the game ball is not held (see FIG. 141).

Further, the weight of the displacement member 7710 as a whole can be made different according to the number of game balls held. As a result, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be changed (changed) not only depending on whether or not the game ball is held by the displacement member 7710, but also depending on the number of the game balls held. As a result, the variation of the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be increased, and the effect of the effect associated with the displacement of the displacement member 7710 can be enhanced accordingly.

As described above, the displacement member 7710 is provided with a ball receiving member 7713 at its tip (end on the downwardly inclined side). Therefore, when the displacement member 7710 (the upper surface thereof or the ball receiving member 7713) receives the game ball flowing down the game area, the displacement member 7710 is removed from the game ball.
The force acting on the can be acted as a force for sliding displacement toward the descending position. That is, the applied force can be applied to the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 in one direction (arrow A direction) with respect to the inner ring via the arm member 7723 and the rotating member 7721.

As a result, the flowing game ball is displaced by the displacement member 7710 (the upper surface thereof or the ball receiving member 771).
When 3) receives it, the kinetic energy of the game ball can be used to increase the displacement speed of the slide displacement in the direction toward the descending position of the displacement member 7710.

In this case, the flowing game balls have different flow directions and flow speeds. for that reason,
The force (magnitude of kinetic energy) applied to the displacement member 7710 can be made different according to the difference in the flow state (flow direction and flow speed) of the game ball to be received. As a result, not only whether or not the game ball is held by the displacement member 7710 and the number of the game ball held, as well as
The displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 is different (changed) depending on the flow state of the game ball.
be able to. As a result, the variation of the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be increased, and the effect of the effect associated with the displacement of the displacement member 7710 can be enhanced accordingly.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, since the rotation direction of the rotating member 7721 is unidirectional, it is not necessary to switch the driving direction of the driving means. In other words, the displacement member 7710 can be reciprocally displaced by continuously rotating the rotating means in one direction. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the time for switching the drive direction of the drive means. As a result, the displacement member 7710 can be immediately displaced by the amount that the switching of the driving means is not required.

In this case, by immediately displacementing the displacement member 7710, the ball receiving member 7713 is rotationally displaced due to the reaction when the displacement member 7710 (the upper surface thereof or the ball receiving member 7713) drops the game ball received by the displacement member 7710. It is possible to suppress the rattling of the displacement member 7710.

That is, when the game ball is dropped from the displacement member 7710 (ball receiving member 7713), the load of the displacement member 7710 is reduced by the amount of the dropped game ball, and the displacement member 7710 is likely to be displaced upward due to the reaction. However, by immediately displacing the displacement member 7710, the ball receiving member 77
By the reaction due to the displacement of 13, a force that displaces the displacement member 7710 downward can be applied to cancel the reaction when the sphere is dropped from the displacement member 7710.

The game ball flowing down the game area is not limited to the game ball that moves along the front surface (front surface) of the game board 13, but also includes the game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity. As a game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity, for example, a game ball that collides with a nail, a tulip, an object, etc. and moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity, or a game ball that rolls a stage and then jumps out of the stage. An example is a game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity.

Here, in the present embodiment, by providing the load gear 7730, when the displacement member 7710 is not holding the game ball (see FIG. 141), the displacement member 7710 is slid and displaced toward the descending position. , The outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is unidirectional with respect to the inner ring (arrow A)
It is configured so as not to precede the direction (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 does not increase).

On the other hand, when the load gear 7730 is omitted or the resistance of the load gear 7730 is set to a small value and the displacement member 7710 is slid and displaced toward the descending position, the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is displaced with respect to the inner ring. It may be configured to precede in one direction (direction of arrow A) (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 becomes faster). That is, only the weight (self-weight) of the displacement member 7710 is applied to the arm member 7723, and the rotating member 7721 is directed in the direction of arrow A (FIG. 1).
Even when the clutch is rotated clockwise (41), the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 may precede the inner ring.

Next, the upper plate 8017 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 to 148. On the upper plate 8017 in the eighth embodiment, the rotation operation unit 8650 is arranged at a substantially central position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The same parts as those of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, regarding the overall configuration of the rotation operation unit 8650 in the eighth embodiment, FIG. 145.
Will be described with reference to FIG. 147. FIG. 145 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotation operation unit 8650. FIG. 14
7 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 in the CXLVII-CXLVII line of FIG. 145.

As shown in FIGS. 145 to 147, the rotation operation unit 8650 is arranged in the internal space of the upper plate 8017 of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation unit 8654 described later protrudes outward of the upper plate 8017. It is arranged in the state of being.

The rotation operation unit 8650 includes a drive motor KM6, a transmission gear 8651 connected to the shaft portion of the drive motor KM6, and a transmission gear 86 meshed with the outer peripheral surface of the transmission gear 8651.
52, a shaft portion 8653 that is internally fitted in the shaft hole of the transmission gear 8652, a one-way clutch OW1 in which an inner ring is externally fitted in the shaft portion 8653, and a rotation operation unit 8654 in which an outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is internally fitted. It is formed mainly with and.

The transmission gear 8651 is connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM6. Therefore, the drive motor KM6
The transmission gear 8651 can be rotated by applying a rotational driving force to the gear. As mentioned above
The transmission gear 8652 is arranged in a meshed state with the transmission gear 8652. Therefore, when the driving force for rotation is applied to the drive motor KM6, the transmission gear 865 is transmitted via the transmission gear 8651.
2 can be rotated.

The shaft portion 8653 is a rod member formed in a columnar shape, and its axial length is the rotation operation portion 86.
It is formed longer than the width dimension in the left-right direction of 54. As described above, one of the shaft portions 8653 is internally fitted into the shaft hole of the transmission gear 8652, and the other is inserted into the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1. As a result, the driving force when the transmission gear 8652 is rotated can be transmitted to the one-way clutch OW1.

As described above, the one-way clutch OW1 is formed of an inner ring, an outer ring, and a roller engaged between them. When the inner ring is rotated in one direction, the rotation of the inner ring can be transmitted to the outer ring and the inner ring is moved in the other direction. When rotated, the rotation of the inner ring can be non-transmitted to the outer ring.

The rotation operation unit 8654 is formed in an annular shape, and is arranged in a state in which a part of the outer peripheral surface thereof protrudes from the upper plate 8017. Further, the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is internally fitted in the inner circle portion of the rotation operation portion 8654. That is, the inward tilt of the rotation operation unit 8654 is formed to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the one-way clutch OW1. Therefore, the rotation of the rotation operation unit 8654 is transmitted by rotating the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1.

As a result, when the drive motor KM6 is driven and rotated in one direction, the rotation is transmitted to the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 via the transmission gears 8651, 8652 and the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1, and the rotation operation unit 8654. Is rotated. On the other hand, the drive motor KM6
Is driven and rotated in the other direction, the inner ring and the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 are not transmitted, and the transmission of the rotation drive to the rotation operation unit 8654 is cut off.

Next, a case where the player operates the rotation operation unit 8654 will be described with reference to FIG. 148. FIG. 148 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10. The cross section of FIG. 148 is shown in FIG. 147.
Corresponds to.

As described above, the rotation operation unit 8654 rotates the rotation operation unit 8654 by rotating the drive motor KM6 to rotate the rotation operation unit 8654 and by making the rotation of the drive motor KM6 non-rotational. It is possible to form an embodiment in which the displacement is stopped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 148, the drive motor KM6 is rotated in one direction, and the rotation operation unit 8 is rotated.
When the 654 is rotated in the A direction, the player operates the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation unit 8654 to generate a rotational force in the rotation operation unit 8654 in the same direction as the rotation A direction.
The outer peripheral surface of W1 and the rotation operation unit 8654 are rotated in advance. That is, the rotation operation unit 865
4 can be operated at a speed higher than the rotation speed of the drive motor KM6 by the operation of the player.

Further, when the rotation operation unit 8654 is set to be non-rotational (the drive motor KM6 is non-rotational), the player applies a driving force to the rotation operation unit 8654 in the rotation A direction to rotationally displace the rotation operation unit 8654. be able to.

Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, not only the rotation operation unit 8654 forms a non-rotational or rotation state by driving the drive motor KM6, but also the rotation operation unit 8654 rotates from the stopped state by the operation of the player. And the rotation operation unit 8654 can be formed in a mode in which the rotation operation unit 8654 is rotated at a higher speed from the rotation state by the operation of the player.

As a result, it is possible to form a plurality of modes in which the player can visually recognize the displacement mode of the rotation operation unit 8654, which can give the player an interest. Further, by forming a plurality of rotation modes of the rotation operation unit 8654, it is possible to form a plurality of production modes of the pachinko machine 10, so that the effect can be increased and the player can be given a hobby.

A sensor device or the like for measuring the number of rotations is arranged on the side surface of the rotation operation unit 8654, and it is possible to perform an effect that is changed based on the rotation speed and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 8654.

Next, the first link member 9431 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 149. The plate-shaped projection 9431b of the first link member 9431 in the ninth embodiment includes an inclined surface 9431b1 formed by inclining the contact surface with the cam member 422. The same parts as those of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 149 (a) is a perspective front view of the first link member 9431 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 149 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400. In addition, FIG. 149 (b)
Corresponds to the schematic cross-sectional view of FIG. 56 (a).

The lower displacement unit 400 in the ninth embodiment is the same as the lower displacement unit 400 in the first embodiment, the base member 410 arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and the base member 410 thereof. A transmission member 420 disposed on the base member 410 and a transmission member 4 thereof.
A lower displacement member 440 (see FIG. 45) that is displaced by transmitting a driving force from 20 is provided. Further, the lower displacement unit 400 in the ninth embodiment is connected to the base member 410 and the lower displacement member 440, and the link member 94 is displaced by driving the transmission member 420.
30 is provided, and the lower displacement member 440 is displaced by the displacement of the link member 9430.

As shown in FIG. 149, the first link member 9431 in the ninth embodiment is formed by being bent into a dogleg shape in front view, and is formed into a plate shape having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The first link member 9431 has a through hole 431a penetrating in the front-rear direction on one end side (the side in the direction of arrow D in FIG. A columnar connecting projection 431c (see FIG. 46), a plate-shaped projection 9431b projecting at a position facing the curved wall portion 411e of the base member 410, and a columnar sliding projection 431d projecting to the front side of the bent portion. And prepare.

The plate-shaped protrusion 9431b is extended in a curved shape about the axis of the through hole 431a, and is projected toward the front side (front base 411 side (arrow F direction side)). In addition, the plate-shaped protrusion 94
The protrusion dimension of 31b is set to be larger than the thickness (arrow FB direction dimension) dimension of the cam member 422. Further, the base member 410 (curved wall portion 411e) facing the protruding tip surface of the plate-shaped protrusion 9431b is arranged with a slight gap (distance X14 (see FIG. 149 (b))).

The cam member 422 is arranged in a displaceable state between the front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-shaped projection 9431b and the projecting surface (rear surface) of the curved wall portion 411e facing each other. Further, the dimensions of the two gaps including the gap between the cam member 422 and the first link member 9431 facing each other and the gap between the cam member 422 and the base member 410 facing each other are larger than the above-mentioned distance X14. It is set large.

As a result, the first link member 9 is in the direction in which the above-mentioned distance X14 becomes smaller (arrow F direction).
When the 431 bends, the protruding tip surface of the plate-shaped protrusion 9431b can be brought into contact with the facing base member 410 (curved wall portion 411e). Therefore, the cam member 42 is located between the front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-shaped protrusion 9431b and the projecting surface (rear surface) of the curved wall portion 411e.
It is possible to prevent the displacement from being regulated by being pinched by 2.

Further, the plate-shaped projection 9431b is provided with an inclined surface 9431b1 that projects toward the front side toward the cam member 422 on the side surface in the circumferential direction of the cam member 422 side (the side in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 149 (b)). As shown in FIG. 149 (b), the inclined surface 9431b1 has a protruding side (arrow F direction side).
It is formed with an inclination of approximately 45 degrees toward.

As a result, when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state and the end portion of the cam member 422 comes into contact with the plate-shaped protrusion 9431b, the cam member 422 is placed on the back surface of the first link member 9431 (on the side in the arrow F direction). It can be pressed (displaced) against the surface), and the first link member 94
The protruding tip surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow F) of the plate-shaped protrusion 9431b of 31 can be pressed against the curved wall portion 411e. As a result, it is possible to suppress the cam member 422 and the first link member 9431 from swinging in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and it is possible to easily maintain the lower displacement member 440 in the position of the second displacement state.

In this case, it is preferable that a flat surface parallel to the inclined surface 9431b1 is formed at the end portion of the cam member 422 at the contact portion with the inclined surface 9431b1. As a result, the cam member 422
When the inclined surface 9431b1 and the inclined surface 9431b1 come into contact with each other, the cam member 422 can be easily displaced toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side).

Then, with reference to FIG. 150, the general winning opening unit 10150 in the tenth embodiment.
Will be explained. In the first embodiment, the general winning opening unit 150 is the adhesive tape 1.
Although the case where the 54a is attached to the end portion of the decorative member 154 has been described, in the tenth embodiment, the adhesive tape 10154a is attached to the inside separated from the end portion of the decorative member 10154 by a predetermined width. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 150 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 according to the tenth embodiment. In addition, FIG. 150 is shown in FIG.
Corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. In addition, the general winning opening unit 1015 in the tenth embodiment
0 is arranged in the game area (front of the base plate 60) of the game board 13 like the general winning opening unit 150 in the first embodiment, and the route of the game ball flowing down the game area can be changed. .. Further, the general winning opening unit 10150 is the end on the lower side (arrow D direction side) in the gravity direction in the front view (arrow B direction view) with respect to the game area formed by being surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77. It is placed along the part.

Further, the general winning opening unit 10150 has a main body portion 151 formed in a crescent shape in front view, and a first standing portion 152 erected on the front side (arrow F direction side) from the end portion of the main body portion 151. (See FIG. 12) and the second erection portion 153 extending from the end of the first erection portion 152 on the upper side in the gravity direction (arrow U direction side) toward the center side of the game area (FIG. 12 (FIG. 12). a)) and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) general winning openings 63 (see FIG. 12A) formed on the front side of the main body portion 151.

As shown in FIG. 150, the general winning opening unit 10150 in the tenth embodiment includes a decorative member 10154 arranged on the back surface of the main body portion 10151. In the decorative member 10154, the adhesive tape 10154a to be adhered to the main body portion 151 is attached to the inside of the decorative member 10154 so as to be separated from the end portion by a predetermined width. As a result, the thickness of the adhesive tape 10154a is reduced.
A predetermined gap (space) is formed at the end of the decorative member 10154 between the main body portion 151 and the decorative member 10154. As a result, the player has an angle equal to or greater than a predetermined angle (for example, the pachinko machine 10 (FIG. 1).
When the general winning opening unit 10150 is visually recognized from the viewpoint of the same height as the upper end in the gravity direction of the reference), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the boundary between the decorative member 60c and the decoration of the decorative member 10154. ..

More specifically, by forming an air layer between the decorative member 10154 and the main body 151, the inside of the main body 151 is reflected and the player side is seen from the end (inclined surface 151a) of the main body 151. It is possible to prevent the light L emitted from the light L from being affected by the decoration at the end portion of the decorative member 10154 (making it difficult for the wavelength of the light L to be changed). Further, the light that has passed through the inside of the adhesive tape 10154a and is affected by the decoration of the decorative member 10154 is repeatedly reflected inside the main body portion 151 and is emitted to the outside of the main body portion 151. The influence of the decoration of the decorative member 10154 can be reduced when the light is reflected toward the viewpoint.

Therefore, it is possible to reduce the change in the wavelength of the light L emitted to the player, and when the player visually recognizes the general winning opening unit 10150 from a predetermined angle or more, the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 10154 are decorated. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize the boundary of. As a result, the decorative member 60c is viewed from a normal angle (for example, a viewpoint having a height substantially equal to the position substantially intermediate in the gravity direction of the game board 13).
When the player visually recognizes the decoration of the decorative member 10154, the decorative member 60c of the base plate and the decoration of the decorative member 10154 can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration, and at a predetermined angle (for example, pachinko). A viewpoint at the same height as the upper end of the machine 10 (see Fig. 1) in the direction of gravity)
When visually recognizing from, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the decoration at the boundary portion and to make it difficult for the player to understand that the decoration is divided.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 151 to 153, the lower displacement member 114 in the eleventh embodiment.
40 will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the decorative member 450 is irradiated with light by the control board 491 arranged on the back surface side of the lower displacement member 440 has been described, but the lower displacement member 11440 of the eleventh embodiment is the control board. The position of the game ball inside can be recognized by the player by the light emitted from 491. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 151 and 152, the lower displacement member 114 in the eleventh embodiment.
The overall configuration of 40 will be described. FIG. 151 shows the lower displacement member 11 in the eleventh embodiment.
It is an exploded perspective front view of 440. FIGS. 152 (a) and 152 (b) show the lower displacement member 11.
It is a front view of 440. In FIG. 152 (a), the outer shape of the light emitting body 11491a arranged on the control board 491 is shown by a chain line, and in FIG. 152 (b), the state in which the decorative member 11450 is removed is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 152 (a) and 152 (b), the lower displacement member 11440 in the eleventh embodiment is the base member 470 connected to the front base 411 (see FIG. 45) and the front and rear of the base member 470. Case member 480, case member 480 and base member 4
It is mainly provided with a transmission mechanism 11460 displaceably arranged between the 70s, and a decorative member 11450 formed so as to cover the front and rear (arrow FB direction) of the case member 480.

The decorative member 11450 is formed in an outer shape imitating a pattern or a character, and a picture of the pattern or the character is drawn on the surface thereof. The decorative member 11450 has a front side decorative portion 11451 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the front case 481 and a back side decorative portion 11451 arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 482. It is formed mainly with 452. In this embodiment, a shark pattern (character) is drawn on the decorative member 11450.

The front side decorative portion 11451 is formed in an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the front case 481 in the front view, and is attached to the front case 481. As a result, the members (case member 480, base member 470, etc.) arranged on the back side of the front side decorative portion 11451 can be made invisible to the player. Further, the front-side decorative portion 11451 includes a transmission portion 11451b formed of a light-transmitting material inside in front view.

The transmission unit 11451b is a plurality of light emitters 11491 arranged on a control board 491 to be described later.
It is formed in the entire area of the position facing a, and can guide the light emitted from the plurality of light emitters 11491a to the player side. Further, the transmission portion 11451b is on the front side (arrow F direction side).
Is formed so as to be curved toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side) toward the outer end portion in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). As a result, the light incident from the back surface side of the transmitting portion 11451b is transmitted through the transmitting portion 11.
When it passes through the inside of 451b and is emitted from the front side, it is easily diffused.

The transmission mechanism 11460 is a member arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member 470, and includes a transmission gear 461, 462, 463, a drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461, and a drive motor KM2. A movable rack 464 having a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463 and rotatably arranged on the front side of the base member 470 so as to be slidable, a transmission gear 465 rotatably arranged on the movable rack 464, and a base. A movable rack 46 having a tooth surface rack gear 476 formed on the member 470 and meshed with the transmission gear 465 and a tooth surface meshed with the transmission gear 465.
Rack 11466 and its rack 11466 are arranged so that the front side of 4 can be slidably displaced.
Mainly includes a ball receiving portion 467 which is rotatably arranged on one end side of the above.

The rack 11466 is formed of a horizontally long rod-shaped body having a rectangular front view, and has a rack gear 466a engraved on the upper end surface and a rear end side (arrow B direction side) from the other end side (arrow L direction side) in the longitudinal direction. A shaft portion 466b projecting in a columnar shape, two sliding plates 466c projecting toward the front side (arrow F direction side), and a recess in the back surface from one end in the longitudinal direction (arrow R direction side) to the other end. A recessed portion 466d (see FIG. 59) to be provided, and a shielding plate 11466e projecting upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the front side of the rack gear 466a are provided.

The shielding plate 11466e is made of a non-light transmissive material, and can block the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a. Further, the shielding plate 11466e has an upward protrusion height (
The height in the arrow U direction) is set to a position higher than the light emitter 11491a arranged on the back surface side (the position on the arrow U direction side). As a result, with the displacement of the rack 11466, the shielding plate 1146
The light emitted from the light emitter 11491a can be blocked by displacing 6e in the front-back direction (arrow FB direction).

The control board 491 is arranged on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the base member 470, and includes a plurality of light emitting bodies 11491a capable of irradiating light on the front surface side. The plurality of light emitters 11491a are arranged side by side in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the lower displacement member 11440, and are arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) via the base member 470. It is arranged above 467 (in the direction of arrow U). As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball receiving unit 467 from blocking the light emitted from the light emitting unit 11491a.

Next, a state in which the game ball is thrown inside the ball receiving portion 467 will be described with reference to FIG. 153. 153 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 11440, and FIG. 153 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 11440 in the CLIIIb-CLIIIb line of FIG. 153 (a). ) Is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 11440 in the CLIIIc-CLIIIc line of FIG. 153 (a).

As shown in FIG. 153, when the game ball is received by the ball receiving portion 467, the accepted game ball is arranged at a position overlapping the front side (arrow F direction side) of the light emitting body 11491a. As a result, the game ball received by the ball receiving unit 467 can block the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a to the player side. As a result, the position of the game ball thrown inside the lower displacement member 11440 can be recognized by the player by the shadow formed by blocking the light.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the control board 491 is provided on the back surface side of the decorative member 11450 and can emit light toward the displacement region of the ball receiving portion 467, and the control board 491 is the ball receiving portion 46.
The light emitted from the control board 491 is blocked by the game ball arranged on the back surface side of the 7 and received by the ball receiving portion 467 or the ball receiving portion 467, and the amount of light emitted from the decorative member 11450 is reduced. Since they are partially different, the amount of light emitted from the decorative member 11450 located on the front side of the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 or the ball receiving portion 467 and the light emitted from the decorative member 11450 at other positions are emitted. By making the amount of light different from that of the light (darkening to form a shadow), the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 or the ball receiving portion 467 is located on the back side of the portion having the different light amount. It can be recognized by the player.

More specifically, when the control board 491 is arranged on the back side of the ball receiving portion 467, the light emitted from the control board 491 is blocked by the ball receiving portion 467 or the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the decorative member 11450 on the front side of the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 or the ball receiving portion 467 can be made darker than the other parts of the decorative member 11450. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 or the ball receiving portion 467 is located on the back side of the portion where the amount of light emitted from the decorative member 11450 is small (dark).

Further, the ball receiving portion 467 is formed in a shape that receives the lower hemisphere of the game ball, and is a light emitter 1149.
Since 1a is arranged at a position higher than the center of the game ball accepted by the ball receiving portion 467,
It is possible to make it difficult for the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a to be applied to the ball receiving portion 467. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 46 that receives the game ball by the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a.
7 and the outer shape of the rack 11466 that slide-displaces the ball receiving portion 467 become a shadow, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a shadow on the transmission portion 11451b. As a result, since the shadow can be formed on the transmission portion 11451b only by the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467, the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced while the game ball is not received by the ball receiving portion 467. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player's line of sight from paying attention to the ball receiving portion 467.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155, the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment.
Will be explained. In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a by the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 is blocked has been described, but in the twelfth embodiment, the second embodiment is arranged in the ball receiving portion 12467. The light emitted from the illuminant 11491a is shielded by the three pieces 12467e. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 154. FIG. 154 (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 154 (b) is a front view of the ball receiving portion 12467. In addition, FIG. 154 (a)
), A part of the ball receiving portion 12467 is shown by a chain line.

The lower displacement member 12440 in the twelfth embodiment is the base member 470 connected to the front base 411 (see FIG. 45) and the front and rear of the base member 470, similarly to the lower displacement member 11440 in the eleventh embodiment. Case member 480 that covers the case member and case member 480
The decorative member 11450, which is formed so as to cover the front and back (direction of the arrow FB) of the above, is mainly provided. Further, the lower displacement member 12440 in the twelfth embodiment is a case member 480.
And a transmission mechanism 12460 having a ball receiving portion 12467c displaceably disposed between the base members 470 and deformable by receiving a game ball.

As shown in FIG. 154, the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment includes a first piece 12467c formed by bending in a substantially L-shape in front view and a second piece 12467d connected to the first piece 12467c. , A third piece 12467e connected to the second piece 12467d and disposed on the back side of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d.

The first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d are portions for holding the game ball thrown inside the lower displacement member 12440 from the opening 451a (see FIG. 57), and the first piece 12467c.
And when the game ball is thrown between the opposite pieces of the second piece 12467d, the second piece 12467d is displaced in the direction away from the first piece 12467c, and a part of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12
The 467d and the 467d are arranged in a U shape in front view, and the game ball can be held in the inner portion of the U shape.

The first piece 12467c includes a receiving piece 12467c4 forming an L-shape in a front view, a leg portion 467a forming the other extending side, and a receiving piece 12467c4 and a leg portion 467a. An annular bent portion 12467c5 in which a shaft hole 467b penetrating in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) is formed in the connecting portion (bending portion), and a connecting portion 12467c1 projecting to the opposite side with the bent portion 12467c5 in between. And prepare.

The receiving piece 12467c4 is a portion forming the side surface of the other side (arrow R direction side) formed in a U shape in front view by the 1 piece 12467c and the 2nd piece 12467d, and is formed in a crescent shape in the front. It is formed in a curved shape that is concave in the direction away from the second piece 12467d.

The connecting portion 12467c1 is projected from two positions at a predetermined interval in the axial direction (arrow FB direction) of the bent portion 12467c5. Further, the connecting portion 12467c1 is a second piece 1 described later.
It is a portion that connects 2467d and the third piece 12467e, and includes a connecting hole 12467c2 that extends along the axial direction of the shaft hole 467b and is opened in a circular cross section.

The connecting hole 12467c2 is a shaft portion 12467e projecting from a third piece 12467e, which will be described later.
The opening into which 3 is inserted. In the connecting hole 12467c2, the shaft portion 12467e3 inserted into the insertion hole 12467d3 formed in the second piece 12467d, which will be described later, is on the back side (arrow B direction side).
Is inserted from. Further, the shaft portion 12467e3 is fastened by a screw inserted from the side opposite to the insertion side (front side (arrow F direction side)) of the connecting hole 12467c2. Thereby, the second piece 12467d and the third piece 12467e can be fastened to the first piece 12467c.

Further, the first piece 12467c is provided with a recess 12467c3 that is recessed downward in the gravity direction (side in the arrow D direction) on the projecting base end side of the connecting portion 12467c1. The concave bottom surface of the recess 12467c3 is formed at the lowest position (bottom) of the bottom surface where the game ball is held by the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d. As a result, the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d
The game ball held in the recess 12467c3 is rolled inward.

The second piece 12467d is a receiving piece 12467c4 and a second piece 124 of the first piece 12467c.
It is a portion forming the side surface of the other side (arrow L direction side) formed by 67d in a U shape in front view, is formed in a crescent shape in front view, and is concave in a direction away from the receiving piece 12467c4. It is formed in a curved shape. In addition, the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d
An insertion hole 12467d3 that opens in a circular shape in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) in the connecting portion of
It mainly includes a recessed portion 12467d2 that is recessed in a circular cross section from the back surface side (arrow B direction side) to the front side (arrow F direction side).

The second piece 12467d has a shaft portion 1246 of the third piece 12467e in the insertion hole 12467d3.
7e3 is inserted, and the connecting shaft 12467e of the third piece 12467e is inserted into the recessed portion 12467d2.
4 is inserted. Therefore, when the second piece 12567d is displaced, the third piece 12467e is also displaced as well. Therefore, when the second piece 12567d is rotationally displaced with respect to the first piece 12467c, the third piece 12567e is also rotationally displaced with respect to the first piece 12467c.

Further, the second piece 12467d is a connecting portion 12 projecting from two places of the first piece 12467c.
It is disposed between the opposite sides of 467c1 and is connected to the first piece 12467c. As a result, the second
When the piece 12467d is twisted in the axial direction of the insertion hole 12467d3, the connecting portion 12467c
It is possible to prevent the shaft portion 12467e3 from breaking by bringing the second piece 12467d into contact with the side surface on the opposite side of 1.

The recessed portion 12467d2 is a hole for inserting the connecting shaft 12467e4 of the third piece 12467e, which will be described later, and is recessed in substantially the same shape as the connecting shaft 12467e4.

The third piece 12467e includes a shielding plate 12467e1 formed in a substantially semicircular front view and a shielding plate 12467e1.
Shaft portion 124 projecting from the shielding plate 12467e1 toward the front side (arrow F direction side)
It includes 67e3 and a connecting shaft 12467e4.

The shield plate 12467e1 is formed of a non-light transmissive material and is a light emitter 11491a.
When arranged on the front side of the light emitter, the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a can be shielded. The light shielding of the light emitter 11491a by the shielding plate 12467e1 will be described later.

As described above, the shaft portion 12467e3 is a cylindrical body inserted into the connecting hole 12467c2 of the first piece 12467c and the insertion hole 12467d3 of the second piece 12467d. In addition, the shaft portion 1
In the protruding tip surface of 2467e3, a connecting hole 124 is provided from the side opposite to the insertion side of the shaft portion 12467e3.
A hole is formed in which the screw to be inserted into 67c2 can be screwed. Therefore, with the shaft portion 12467e3 inserted into the connecting hole 12467c2 and the insertion hole 12467d3, the shaft portion 12467e3
By fastening a screw to the insertion tip surface of, the first piece 12467c, the second piece 12467d and the third piece 12467e can be connected, and the third piece 12467e can be connected to the first piece 1246.
It can be made rotatable with respect to 7c.

As described above, the connecting shaft 12467e4 has a recessed portion 12467d of the second piece 12467d.
It is inserted in 2. As a result, the second piece 12467d has the shaft portion 1 with respect to the first piece 12467c.
When rotationally displaced around 2467e3, the connecting shaft 12467e4 can be displaced along with the displacement of the second piece 12467d. Therefore, the third piece 12467e is replaced with the second piece 12467.
It can be displaced with the displacement of d.

Next, with reference to FIG. 155, the displacement of the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment will be described in detail. 155 (a) and 155 (b) are front views of the lower displacement member 12440, and FIG. 155 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 12440 in the CLVc-CLVc line of FIG. 155 (b). be. In FIGS. 155 (a) and 155 (b), a part of the lower displacement member 12440 and the light emitting body 11491a are shown by a chain line. Also, FIG. 155.
In (a), the state before the game ball is received (held) by the ball receiving portion 12467 is illustrated, and in FIG. 155 (b), the game ball is received (held) by the ball receiving portion 12467. rice field)
The state is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 155, in the ball receiving portion 12467, in the state before the game ball is received between the opposite pieces of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d, the second piece 12467d is the first due to the load of the third piece 12467e. It is considered to be in a state of approaching the piece 12467c side, and the third piece 12467e
Is located below the illuminant 11491a disposed on the back surface side of the ball receiving portion 12467. Therefore, before the game ball is received by the ball receiving unit 12467, the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a can be emitted to the player side.

On the other hand, when the game ball is received between the opposite pieces of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d, the accepted game ball is formed on the receiving surface (front view U-shape) of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d. The concave portion 12 located at the lowermost end of the receiving surface by rolling the inner side surface)
You will be guided to 467c3. As a result, the second piece 12467d is attached to the shaft portion 124 on the outer surface of the game ball.
It can be rotated around 67e3 in a direction away from the first piece 12467c. As a result, the third piece 12467e, which moves with the displacement of the second piece 12467d, is moved to the ball receiving portion 1246.
It can be arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the light emitting body 11491a arranged on the back side of 7.

Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a is emitted from the shielding plate 1246 of the third piece 12467e.
It can be shielded by 7e1. As a result, the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a can be easily shielded only when the game ball is received by the ball receiving portion 12467. Therefore, the position of the game ball received by the lower displacement member 12440 can be determined by the light emitting body 11491a. The player can be made to recognize the position of the shadow that blocks the light.

Further, in the second piece 12467d, the connecting shaft 12467e4 is inserted into the recessed portion 12467d2, and the load of the third piece 12467e is always applied. Center of gravity G of the third piece 12467e (FIG. 1)
54 (b)) is set on the opposite side of the connecting portion with the second piece 12567d and the third piece 12567e with the shaft portion 12467e3 interposed therebetween. As a result, in a state where no force other than gravity acts on the second piece 12467d and the third piece 12467de, the load of the third piece 12467e can rotate the second piece 12467d to the first piece 12467c4 side. ..

Therefore, when the game ball is ejected (taken out) from the ball receiving portion 12467, the third piece 124
The load of 67e can displace the second piece 12467d to the ball receiving piece 12467c4 side of the first piece 12467c.

Further, the ball receiving portion 12467 is rotated around the shaft hole 12467b by the operation of sliding displacement inside the lower displacement member 12440, similarly to the ball receiving portion 467 in the first embodiment, and the lower displacement member 12440 is emitted. The game ball received from the opening 471 (see FIG. 66) is discharged to the outside.

Here, as a structure for discharging the game ball received by the ball receiving unit 12467, the ball receiving unit 12
In the structure in which the ball receiving portion 12467 is rotated around the shaft hole 467b with the slide movement of the 467, the ball receiving portion 12 centering on the shaft hole 467b is caused by the sliding speed of the ball receiving portion 12467.
The rotation speed of 467 is changed. Therefore, since the rotation speed depends only on the slide speed of the ball receiving portion 12467, there is a problem that the discharging speed of the game ball from the ball receiving portion 12467 is not stable.

On the other hand, in the twelfth embodiment, the load of the third piece 12467e causes the second piece 12467.
Since the direction in which d rotates and the rotation direction of the ball receiving portion 12467 about the shaft hole 467b when the game ball is ejected are set in substantially the same direction, the gaming ball emitted from the exit opening 471 is set to substantially the same direction. A driving force can be applied when the second piece 12467d is displaced. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 124
Even if the force acting on the game ball from the ball receiving portion 12467 when the game ball is ejected from the exit opening 471 by displacing the 67 is reduced, the speed of the game ball to be emitted can be maintained. As a result, the ejection speed of the game ball emitted from the ball receiving portion 12467 can be stabilized.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 156 to 158, the special winning device 13 according to the thirteenth embodiment.
550 will be described. In the first embodiment, the first unit 5 of the special winning device 550
The case where the throwing path of the game ball flowing into the inside of the 51 is switched by the first and second drive units 583 and 584 of the third path member 580 has been described, but in the thirteenth embodiment, the throwing path of the special winning device 13550 By changing the facing interval, the flow path of the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 is adjusted. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 156 and 157, the special winning device 13 according to the thirteenth embodiment.
The overall configuration of the 550 will be described. 156 (a) is a front view of the special winning device 13550 according to the thirteenth embodiment, FIG. 156 (b) is a perspective front view of the special winning device 13550, and FIG. 156 (c) is FIG. 156 (c). It is sectional drawing of the special winning apparatus 13550 in the CLVIc-CLVIc line of a). FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective front view of the special winning device 13550.

As shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, the special winning device 13550 according to the thirteenth embodiment.
Includes a first path member 13560 disposed on the front side and a second path member 13570 disposed on the back side of the first path member 13560.

The first path member 13560 is a front plate 13564 formed in a plate shape along the front of the game area of the game board 13, and projects from the left and right ends of the front plate 13564 to the back side (base plate 60 side). The first wall portion 13565 to be formed is mainly provided.

The front plate 13564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side of the flow path of the game ball formed between facing the second path member 13570, which will be described later, and is formed of a light transmitting member. As a result, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 via the front plate 13564. Further, the front plate 13564 has a first convex portion 13564b and a second convex portion 13564c protruding toward the second path member 13570 side, and the first convex portion 13564b and the second.
The third convex portion 135 located below the convex portion 13564c and projecting toward the second path member 13570 side.
64d and.

The first convex portion 13564b and the second convex portion 13564c are protrusions for guiding the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550, and are outside of the front plate 13564 in the left-right direction (arrow L).
It is formed by inclining downward from the outer side in the −R direction toward the center side in the left-right direction of the front plate 13564.

The third convex portion 13564d is located at the center of the front plate 13564 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) and extends in the gravity direction (arrow UD direction). In the thirteenth embodiment, in the game area of the game board 13, the throwing path of the game ball flowing down from the special prize device 13550 is different on the left and right at the substantially center position in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) of the special prize device 13550. , Special winning device 1
The game ball flowing down from the left side of the front view of the 3550 is thrown to the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 2).
The thrown game ball gives the player a specific game value (a predetermined number of game balls are paid out). On the other hand, the game ball flowing down from the right side of the front view of the special winning device 13550 is sent to the out port 71 of the game board 13 and collected by the pachinko machine 10.

In the thirteenth embodiment, it is below the left side (arrow L direction side) of the special winning device 13550 (the arrow L direction side).
The first winning opening 64 is arranged on the side in the direction of the arrow D. As a result, the game ball flowing down from the left side of the front view of the special winning device 13550 can flow into the first winning opening 64.

The first wall portion 13565 is a portion that connects the base plate 60 of the game board 13 and the special winning device 13550, and the connecting plates 13565a projecting outward to the left and right at the tip of the protrusion are connected to the left and right first wall portions 13565, respectively. Prepare two places each.

The connecting plate 13565a is formed through a through hole 13565a1 for inserting a screw for fastening the special winning device 13550 to the base plate 60 of the game board 13. This through hole 13
The special winning device 13550 can be fastened to the base plate 60 by the screw inserted through the 565a1.

The second path member 13570 is a plate-shaped base plate 13571 facing the front plate 13564 of the first path member 13560, and the first path member 13560 from the left and right (arrow LR direction) ends of the base plate 13571. A fourth wall portion 13573, which is projected on the front plate 13564 side, is provided.

The base plate 13571 is a member that forms a throwing path for a game ball in a gap between the first path member 13560 facing the front plate 13564, and the outer shape in front view is formed smaller than the outer shape of the front plate 13564. As a result, the front side of the base plate 1356 is set to the front plate 1356.
Since it can be covered with 4, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the base plate 13571.

Further, the base plate 13571 has a fourth convex portion 1357 protruding toward the first path member 13560.
1b, the fifth convex portion 13571c, and the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c.
A sixth convex portion 13571d, which is located below the front plate and protrudes to the front plate 13564 side, is mainly provided.

The fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c are protrusions for guiding the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550, and are from the left-right direction outer side (arrow (LR direction outer side)) of the base plate 13571. It is formed by inclining downward toward the center side of the base plate 13571.

The sixth convex portion 13571d is formed at a position facing the third convex portion 13564d described above, and is formed to have a length having a predetermined gap from the tip of the third convex portion 13564d. The third
The gap between the convex portion 13564d and the sixth convex portion 13571d facing each other is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

In the fourth wall portion 13573, two fastening holes 13573a for fastening the screw inserted through the first path member 13560 are bored in each of the left and right fourth wall portions 13573. As a result, the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 are fastened and fixed.

Further, around the fastening hole 13573a of the fourth wall portion 13573, the first path member 13560
A shim member SI for adjusting the gap between the surface and the second path member 13570 is arranged.

The shim member SI is made of a thin plate-shaped transparent material, which makes it difficult for the player to see. Further, in the present embodiment, the shim member SI is arranged at the end on the left side of the front view, and the distance between the front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 on the left side of the front view is increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 158, a game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 158 (a) is a top view of the special winning device 13550, and FIG. 158 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device 13550 in the CLVIIIb-CLVIIIb line of FIG. 158 (a).

As shown in FIG. 158, the special winning device 13550 has a shim member SI at the left end when viewed from the front.
Is arranged, and the distance L14 between the front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 158 (a)) is the front plate 13564 and the base plate 1 on the right side of the front view.
It is set to be larger than the distance L15 between facing each other (see FIG. 158 (a)) (L1).
4> L15).

The distance L14 is the distance between the left end (side in the direction of arrow L) at the position where the front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 face each other. Further, the distance L15 is the distance between the right end (side in the direction of the arrow R) at the position where the front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 face each other. Further, the interval L15 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the special winning device 1355
A game ball flowing down from above 0 can flow into the inside of the special winning device 13550 from any position in the left-right direction (L14>L15> diameter of the game ball).

Further, the special winning device 13550 is divided into left and right on the downstream side by the third convex portion 13564d and the sixth convex portion 13571d. As a result, the game ball flowing down the main path SK1 (see FIG. 158 (b)) on the upstream side of the special winning device 13550 is on the main path SK2 formed on the left side of the front view of the special winning device 13550 and on the right side of the front view. It flows into either one of the formed sub-pathways HK1. As described above, the gaming area on the downstream side of the special winning device 13550 is
The throwing path is formed differently at the substantially center position in the left-right direction of the special winning device 13550.
Therefore, the game ball thrown from the main path SK2 to the game area is thrown to a specific winning opening, and the game ball thrown from the sub-path HK1 to the game area is sent to the out port 71 of the game board 13.

Further, the first convex portion 13564b and the second convex portion 13564c of the above-mentioned front plate 13564
And the protrusion dimensions of the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c of the base plate 13571 are set to be substantially the same. That is, the protruding dimensions of the first convex portion 13565b and the second convex portion 13564c protruding from the front plate 13564 toward the back surface side are set to be the same. again,
The fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13 projecting from the base plate 13571 toward the front side.
The protrusion dimension is set to be the same as that of 571c. Further, the first convex portion 13565b and the fourth
The protruding dimension is set to be the same as that of the convex portion 13571b.

Further, the first convex portion 13564b and the second convex portion 13564c and the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c are arranged at positions having different heights in the vertical direction. That is, the front plate 13
The first convex portion 13565b and the second convex portion 13564c protruding from 564 toward the back surface side are projected from the same height. Further, the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c protruding from the base plate 13571 toward the front side are projected from the same height. Further, the first convex portion 13565b and the fourth convex portion 13571b are arranged at different heights, and the fourth convex portion 13571b is arranged below the first convex portion 13565b. Further, a lower side of the first convex portion 13565b projecting from two points in the gravity direction is arranged at an intermediate position of the fourth convex portion 13571b projecting from two points in the gravity direction.

As a result, the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 is moved to the first convex portion 13564b.
And the fourth convex portion 13571b or the second convex portion 13564c and the fifth convex portion 13571c can be made to flow down while colliding in order. As a result, the game ball is placed on the first convex portion 13564b and the second convex portion.
It can flow down along the extending direction of the convex portion 13564c, the fourth convex portion 13571b, and the fifth convex portion 13571c.

The front plate 13564 and the fourth convex portion 1357 on the left side of the front view of the special winning device 13550.
The distance dimension L16 (see FIG. 158 (a)) between the facing of the base plate 13571 or the first convex portion 13564b is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball by the shim member SI, and the special winning device 13550. Front plate 13564 and fifth convex portion 1357 on the right side of the front view
The distance dimension L17 between the facing 1c or the base plate 13571 and the second convex portion 13564c is
It is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

The interval L16 is the fifth convex portion 13 of the fourth convex portion 13571b and the first convex portion 13564b.
Front plate 13564 at the ends of 571c and the second convex portion 13564c side (arrow R direction side)
Alternatively, it is a distance dimension between facing the base plate 13571. Further, the interval L17 is the fifth convex portion 1
The fourth convex portion 13571b and the first convex portion 13564b of the 3571c and the second convex portion 13564c
It is a distance dimension between facing the front plate 13564 or the base plate 13571 at the end on the side (arrow L direction side).

Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, the first winning opening 64 is arranged below the left side (arrow L direction side) of the special winning device 13550 (the first winning opening 64 is arranged on the arrow D direction side), whereby the special winning device 13550 is viewed from the front left side. The flowing game ball can flow into the first winning opening 64.

Therefore, the special winning device 13 is viewed from the right side of the front view (the side in the direction of arrow R) of the special winning device 13550.
The game balls flowing into the main path SK1 of the 550 are the second convex portion 13564c and the fifth convex portion 135.
It is easy to come into contact with the 71c, and it is easy to flow down along the extending direction of the second convex portion 13564c and the fifth convex portion 13571c and to be easily guided to the sub-path HK1 side. On the other hand, the special prize device 1355
The game ball flowing into the main path SK1 of the special winning device 13550 from the left side of the front view of 0 (arrow L direction side) is made difficult to collide with the first convex portion 13564b and the fourth convex portion 13571b, and directly enters the sub path HK1. It becomes easier to throw a ball. As a result, the flow direction of the game ball that has flowed into the special winning device 13550 can be changed.

In this embodiment, the first convex portion 13564b, the second convex portion 13564c, and the fourth convex portion 13
571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c are the sixth convex portion 13571d and the third convex portion 13564d.
It is formed above (in the direction of arrow U) above (the inlet of the game ball between the main path HK1 and the sub-path SK6). Therefore, most of the game balls flowing down the main path SK1 can be caused to flow down to the sub-path HK1, and a relatively smaller number of game balls than the sub-path HK1 can be made to flow down to the main path SK6.

Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, the distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 facing each other is adjusted by the shim member SI and is made non-parallel, so that the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13560 and the second path member 13560 are not parallel to each other.
It is possible to adjust the position (direction in which the game ball flows down) of the game ball flowing down between the paths facing the path member 13570.

Therefore, compared to the case where the angle of the nail struck on the front surface of the base plate 60 with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 is changed to adjust the direction in which the game ball is likely to flow down, the special winning device 13550
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the direction in which the inside of the is likely to flow down. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the game is disadvantageous before playing the game on the gaming machine, and it is possible to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Further, only by changing the two directions (front-back direction (arrow FB direction)) of the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 in the opposite direction, the flow of the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 Since the direction can be changed, the adjustment can be made easier than the nail that can be adjusted in all directions with respect to the front surface of the game board 13 (base plate 60). As a result, the game ball can be easily flowed down in the direction intended by the adjuster.

The direction intended by the adjuster is, for example, the direction between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 on the sub-path HK1 side (arrow L direction side) on the main path SK6 side (arrow R direction side). A game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550, which is larger than the space between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570, flows down to the sub-path HK1 or the main path SK6 side (arrow R direction side). ), The first path member 13560 and the second path member 135 on the secondary route HK1 side (arrow L direction side) between the opposites of the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570.
The game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 is made larger than the opposite space of 70, and flows down to the main path SK6.

Further, the second path member 13570 arranged on the back side is moved in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) by sandwiching the shim member SI with respect to the first path member 13560 arranged on the front side. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 facing each other. That is, since the second path member 13570 arranged on the far side from the player is moved in the front-rear direction, the first path member 13560 and the first path member 13560 are displaced as compared with the case where the first path member 13560 close to the player is displaced. Second path member 1357
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the distance between the opposite sides of 0. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

Next, the engaging member 14310 according to the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 159. In the first embodiment, the case where the operator 315 of the engaging member 310 is formed so as to project toward the bottom wall portion 301 side (back side (arrow B direction side)) of the back case 300 has been described. The actuator 14315 in the 14th embodiment is formed so that the protruding tip surface is inclined toward the proximal end side. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 159 (a) is a rear view of the rear case 300 in the 14th embodiment, FIG. 15
9 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case 300 in the CLIXb-CLIXb line of FIG. 159 (a).

The rear case 14300 in the 14th embodiment is the same as the rear case 300 in the 1st embodiment, from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular front view and the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is provided with an erected outer wall portion 302, and is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open by each of the wall portions 301 and 302. A front-view rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 can be visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

Further, the rear case 14300 in the 14th embodiment includes an engaging member 14310 arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 (open side formed in a box shape (arrow F direction side)) and the rear case 14300. Arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side), the board box 100 (main control device 11)
It mainly includes a fixing member 320 for fixing 0).

As shown in FIG. 159, the engaging member 14310 according to the 14th embodiment has a crank-like outer shape in a front view, and is a first piece 143 extending in a direction parallel to each other.
11 and the second piece 312, and the ends of the first piece 14311 and the second piece 312 are connected to each other in the first piece 1
It is composed of 4311 and a third piece 313 connected in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the second piece 312.

The first piece 14311 is one side opposite to the other side to which the third piece 313 is connected (the side in the direction of arrow R).
The end portion of the fixing member 320 is formed as an engaging portion with the engaged portion 332 (see FIG. 41 (a)) of the fixing member 320, and is in the vertical direction which is substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 14311. (Arrow U-
A recess 317 recessed in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the first piece 14311 from a substantially intermediate position between the engaging portion 316 protruding to both outer sides in the D direction) and the two engaging portions 316. And the operator 143 that protrudes toward the bottom wall portion 301 side (back side (arrow B direction side)) of the back case 300.
15 and.

The operator 14315 is formed at the other end (arrow L direction side) of the first piece 14311, and its protruding dimension is set to a value larger than the plate thickness of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and at least. It is projected toward the back side of the back case 14300 (bottom wall portion 301) by a size that can be grasped by an operator with a finger. As a result, the operator 14315 can be projected from the second opening 301d of the bottom wall portion 301, and the protruding portion (the tip of the operator 14315) can be grasped and operated.

Further, the protruding tip surface of the actuator 14315 is on the engaging portion 316 side (the other side of the first piece 14311 ((1)).
It is formed as an inclined surface 14315a that approaches the proximal end side of the actuator 14315 toward the side of the arrow L). As a result, when the operator operates the actuator 14315 in the direction of disengaging the engaging member 14310 and the fixing member 320 (arrow L direction side), the engaging member 14310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged with each other. It is possible to reduce the force acting in the direction of releasing.

That is, the inclined surface 14315a can disperse the force operated by the operator on the operator 14315. As a result, it is possible to operate the actuator 14315 from the back side of the back case 300 to make it difficult to disengage the engaging member 14310 and the fixing member 320. resulting in,
It is possible to prevent an operator who intends to illegally replace the board box 100 disposed on the fixing member 320 from operating the actuator 14315 from the back side of the back case 300 to remove the fixing member 320 from the back case 300. ..

Further, the end portion of the inclined surface 14315a on the engaging portion 316 side is the bottom wall portion 30 of the rear case 300.
It is arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the back surface of 1. As a result, the engaging member 14310
The operator's hand operating the actuator 14315 can be brought into contact with the inclined surface 14315a for the purpose of disengaging the fixing member 320. As a result, an operator who makes it difficult to operate the operator 14315 and tries to illegally replace the board box 100 disposed on the fixing member 320 operates the operator 14315 from the back side of the rear case 300. It is possible to prevent the fixing member 320 from being removed from the rear case 300.

Next, the engaging member 15310 according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 160 (a). In the first embodiment, the operator 315 of the engaging member 310 is the rear case 3.
Although the case where the operator is formed so as to project toward the bottom wall portion 301 side (back surface side (arrow B direction side)) of 00 has been described, the operator 15315 in the fifteenth embodiment is the first piece 15311 of the engaging member 15310. Is supported by. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 160A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case 300 according to the fifteenth embodiment. The cross section of FIG. 160 (a) corresponds to the cross section of FIG. 159 (b).

The rear case 15300 in the fifteenth embodiment is the same as the rear case 300 in the first embodiment, from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular front view and the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is provided with an erected outer wall portion 302, and is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open by each of the wall portions 301 and 302. A front-view rectangular opening 301a (see FIG. 5) is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and the bottom wall portion 30 is formed through the opening 301a.
The third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of No. 1 is visible.

Further, the back case 15300 in the fifteenth embodiment includes an engaging member 15310 arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 (open side formed in a box shape (arrow F direction side)) and the back case 15300. Arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side), the board box 100 (main control device 11)
It mainly includes a fixing member 320 (see FIG. 41) for fixing 0).

As shown in FIG. 160 (a), the engaging member 15310 in the fifteenth embodiment has a crank-shaped outer shape in a front view, and the first piece 15311 and the first piece 15311 extending in a direction parallel to each other. Two pieces 312 (see FIG. 41), the first piece 14311 and the second piece 312.
It is composed of a third piece 313 (see FIG. 41) that connects the ends of the first piece 15311 and the second piece 312 in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the second piece 312.

In the first piece 15311, the end portion on the one side (arrow R direction side) opposite to the other side (arrow L direction side) to which the third piece 313 is connected is the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 (FIG. It is formed as an engaging portion with 41 (a)), and is an engaging portion protruding outward on both sides in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), which is a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 15311. 316 (see FIG. 41) and a recess 317 (see FIG. 41) recessed in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the first piece 1531 from a substantially intermediate position between the two engaging portions 316. It mainly includes an operator 15315 inserted through the second opening 301d of the rear case 300, and a bearing portion 15319 to which the operator 15315 is pivotally supported.

The bearing portion 15319 is projected from the first piece 15311 on the other side (the side in the direction of arrow L) to which the third piece 313 of the first piece 1531 is connected. Further, the bearing portion 15319 has an actuator 1 described later.
A recess is formed in which the columnar shaft member 15315c inserted through the 5315 in the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction) is inserted.

The operator 15315 is formed in a rod shape, and has a through hole 15315b penetrating in the direction of gravity at the end on the first piece 15311 side and a shaft member 1531 inserted into the through hole 15315b.
5c and.

Therefore, the actuator 15315 is held in a state in which the shaft member 15315c inserted into the through hole 15315b can be rotationally displaced with respect to the first piece 15311 by being inserted into the recess of the bearing portion 15319. Further, the rotation shaft (shaft member 15315c) of the actuator 15315 is the first.
It is arranged on the front side of the piece 15311. As a result, the rotation of the operator 15315 in the state shown in FIG. 160 (a) in the upward direction (clockwise) can be restricted by being brought into contact with the other end of the first piece 1531. It is possible to allow rotation to the left (counterclockwise).

Therefore, when the operator operates the operator 15315 in the direction of disengaging the engaging member 15310 and the fixing member 320 (in the direction of the arrow L) (the operator 153 in the state shown in FIG. 160A).
When the 15 is rotated counterclockwise), the force acting in the direction of disengaging the engaging member 15310 and the fixing member 320 (in the direction of arrow L) can be reduced. As a result, the actuator 15315 is operated from the back side of the rear case 300 to operate the engaging member 15310 and the fixing member 3.
It is possible to make it difficult to disengage the engagement with 20. As a result, a player who attempts to illegally replace the board box 100 arranged on the fixing member 320 operates the actuator 15315 from the back side of the back case 300 to remove the fixing member 320 from the back case 300. Can be suppressed.

Next, the engaging member 15310 according to the sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 160 (b). In the first embodiment, the case where the slide operation of the engaging member 310 is performed by the actuator 315 has been described, but in the sixteenth embodiment, the first of the engaging member 16310 is described.
This is done by manipulating the ends of the piece 16311. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 160B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case 300 according to the 16th embodiment. The cross section of FIG. 160 (b) corresponds to the cross section of FIG. 160 (a). Further, the rear case 16300 in the 16th embodiment is the same as the rear case 300 in the 1st embodiment, from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular front view and the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is provided with an erected outer wall portion 302, and is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open by each of the wall portions 301 and 302. The bottom wall portion 301 has a rectangular opening 301a in the center thereof (FIG. 5).
(See FIG. 2) is formed, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 can be visually recognized through the opening 301a.

Further, the rear case 16300 in the 16th embodiment includes an engaging member 16310 disposed on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 (open side formed in a box shape (arrow F direction side)) and the rear case 16300. Arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side), the board box 100 (main control device 1)
It mainly includes a fixing member 320 (see FIG. 41) for fixing 10).

As shown in FIG. 160 (b), the engaging member 16310 according to the sixteenth embodiment has a crank-shaped outer shape in a front view, and the first piece 16311 and the first piece 16311 extending in a direction parallel to each other. Two pieces 312 (see FIG. 41), the first piece 16311 and the second piece 312.
It is composed of a third piece 313 (see FIG. 41) that connects the ends of the first piece 16311 and the second piece 312 in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the second piece 312. Further, the engaging member 1 in the 16th embodiment
The 6310 can be slidably displaced by a finger inserted from the back side into the second opening 301d formed in the back case 300.

In the first piece 16311, the end portion on the one side (arrow R direction side) opposite to the other side (arrow L direction side) to which the third piece 313 is connected is the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 (FIG. The engaging portion 316 (see FIG. 41) is formed as an engaging portion with (see 41) and protrudes to both outer sides in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), which is a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 311. 41) and the recess 317 (see FIG. 41) recessed in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the first piece 16311 from the substantially intermediate position of the two engaging portions 316. Be prepared.

As shown in FIG. 160 (b), in a state where the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 16310 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 are engaged, the other side (arrow L direction side) of the first piece 16311. Is arranged horizontally outward with respect to the opening of the second opening 301d. Therefore, the engaging member 16
The operator moves the engaging member 1 in the direction of disengaging the engagement between the 310 and the fixing member 320 (on the side of the arrow L).
When operating the 6310, use a finger inserted through the second opening 301d of the rear case 300.
It is possible to make it difficult to displace the engaging member 16310 in the direction of disengaging the engaging member 16310 and the fixing member 320. As a result, the substrate box 1 disposed on the fixing member 320
An operator trying to replace 00 is an engaging member 1631 from the back side of the back case 300.
It is possible to prevent the fixing member 320 from being removed from the rear case 300 by illegally manipulating 0.

Next, the back case 17300 according to the 17th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 161. In the first embodiment, the case where the operator 315 of the engaging member 310 protrudes from the second opening 301d of the rear case 300 has been described, but in the seventeenth embodiment, the second opening 301d of the rear case 17300 has been described. The operator 315 protruding from the rear case is covered with a part of the rear case at a predetermined position. The same parts as those of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 161 (a) is a rear view of the rear case 17300 in the 17th embodiment, and FIG. 161 (b) is a rear case 173 in the CLXIb-CLXIb line of FIG. 161 (a).
It is sectional drawing of 00.

As shown in FIG. 161 of the 17th embodiment, the rear case 17300 has a bottom wall portion 17301 having a substantially rectangular front view and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 17301 toward the front. And each of these wall portions 17301 and 302 forms a box shape with one side (front side) open. The bottom wall portion 17301 has a rectangular opening 301 in the center thereof.
An opening is formed, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 17301 can be visually recognized through the opening 301a.

Further, the rear case 17300 includes a protruding portion 301b projecting from two locations on the front side of the bottom wall portion 17301, a first opening 301c opening at a position facing the fixing member 320, and an engaging member 310. It includes a second opening 301d that opens at a position facing each other, and an lining portion 17301e that covers the back surface of the second opening 301d on the side of the first opening 301c (on the side in the direction of arrow R).

The lining portion 17301e is on the first opening 301c side (arrow R direction side) of the second opening 301d.
It is erected from the end of the to the back side (the side in the direction of arrow B). Further, the lining portion 17301e includes a bent portion 17301e1 in which the erected tip portion bends toward the inside of the opening of the second opening 301d in the rear view. As a result, the lining portion 17301e is on the side of the first opening 301c (
It is formed in a box shape with an opening on the side opposite to the arrow R direction side (arrow L direction side).

Further, the standing distance of the lining portion 17301e (from the back surface of the bottom wall portion 17301c to the bent portion 1730).
The distance from the front surface of 1e1) is set to be larger than the protruding dimension of the operator 315 protruding from the bottom wall portion 17301c. Further, the inverted portion 17301e is a bent portion 17 in the rear view.
The dimension of the 301e1 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) is set to be larger than the dimension of the operator 315 in the rear view in the left-right direction.

As a result, when the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 are engaged with each other, the operator 315 is inside the covering member 17301e as shown in FIG. 161 (b). Is placed in. Therefore, the direction in which the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are disengaged (
When the operator operates the engaging member 310 in the direction of the arrow L), it is possible to make it difficult to grip the actuator 315 from the back side of the back case 17300. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engaging member 310 from being displaced in the direction in which the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are disengaged (in the direction of the arrow L). As a result, a worker (player) who tries to illegally replace the board box 100 arranged on the fixing member 320 is asked to engage member 31 from the back side of the back case 17300.
0 can be operated to prevent the fixing member 320 from being removed from the rear case 17300.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 162 to 164, the back case 183 in the 18th embodiment.
00 will be described. In the first embodiment, the engaging member 310 is in the linear direction (arrow L-).
Although the case of slide displacement in the R direction) has been described, the engaging member 18310 in the eighteenth embodiment is rotationally displaced with respect to the rear case 18300. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163, the back case 183 in the eighteenth embodiment.
The configuration of 00 and the operation of the engaging member 18310 will be described. 162 (a) and 1
63 (a) is a front view of the rear case 18300 in the eighteenth embodiment, FIG. 162.
(B) and FIG. 163 (b) are rear views of the rear case 18300. In addition, FIG. 162 (
In a) and FIG. 162 (b), the state in which the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are engaged is illustrated, and in FIGS. 163 (a) and 163 (b), the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are shown. The state in which the engagement is disengaged is shown in the figure.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the rear case 18300 in the eighteenth embodiment is erected from the outer edges of the bottom wall portion 18301 having a substantially rectangular front view and the four sides of the bottom wall portion 18301 toward the front. It is provided with an outer wall portion 18302, and is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open by each of the wall portions 18301 and 18302. Further, the rear case 18300 is arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 18301 (the box-shaped open side (arrow F direction side)) and the engaging member 18310 on the back side of the back case 18300. It is provided with a fixing member 18320 for fixing the board box 100 (main control device 110).

A front view rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 18301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 18301 can be visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is said that. Further, the bottom wall portion 18301 is located below the first opening 18301c that opens at a position facing the fixing member 18320 and the first opening 18301c (in the direction of arrow D), and is a projecting portion that protrudes to the front side. 18301b and.

The first opening 18301c is an opening for inserting the engaged portion 18332 of the fixing member 18320, which will be described later, and is formed in a shape larger than the engaged portion 18332 in the front view. As a result, after the accessory device (rotating unit 700) is arranged inside the back case 18300, the engaging portion of the fixing member 18320 can be arranged from the back side of the back case 18300 to the front side of the back case 18300. can.

The projecting portion 18301b is a member that pivotally supports the engaging member 18310 described later, and the bottom wall portion 1
It is projected in a columnar shape from the front of 8301b. Further, a hole for screwing a screw is recessed in the protruding tip surface of the protruding portion 18301b. As a result, the engaging member 18310 is placed on the back case 183.
By screwing a screw into the projecting portion 18301b in the state of being arranged at 00, the engaging member 1831
It is possible to restrict 0 from coming out of the protrusion 18301b.

The outer wall portion 18302 is located on the side surface on the right side (arrow R direction side) in the front view in the left-right direction (arrow L).
It is provided with an opening 18302a that opens in the −R direction). The opening 18302a is formed on the rotation locus of the engaging member 18310 described later. Thereby, after the engaging member 18310 is arranged inside the back case 18300, the engaging member 18310 can be projected to the outside of the back case 18300 by rotating the engaging member 18310.

The fixing member 18320 is composed of an interposing member 18330 that engages with the engaging member 18310 described later, and a shaft support member 340 that is fastened to the interposing member 18330.

The interposition member 18330 is formed in a box shape with the front side open, and has a locking portion 18331 projecting from the side surface on the other side (arrow L direction side) and a rear case from the side surface on one side (arrow R direction side). 300
An engaged portion 18332 that protrudes to the side and is formed in a frame shape, an insertion hole 333 that opens in a circular shape on the bottom surface of the box (side surface in the direction of arrow B) (see FIG. 39 (b)), and from the back surface. Protruding protrusion 33
4 and are mainly prepared.

The locking portion 18331 is provided with an opening for engaging the other side (arrow L direction side) of the fixing member 320 with the bottom wall portion 18301, and the opening has an L-shaped cross section from the periphery of the first opening 18301c described above. By inserting the protruding wall 18301c1 projecting into the bottom wall portion 18301, the wall portion 18301 is engaged with the bottom wall portion 18301.

As a result, when the intermediate member 18330 (fixing member 18320) is arranged in the rear case 18300, the protrusion 18301c1 is inserted through the locking portion 18331 of the intermediate member 18330, and the other side of the intermediate member 18330 (arrow L). The directional side) can be locked to the rear case 18300.

The engaged portion 18332 is a portion that engages with the engaging member 18310, and is a rear case 183.
The engaging member 1 whose protrusion dimension toward the 00 side (arrow F direction side) is arranged on the rear case 18300.
The dimension is set to exceed 8310, and the distance dimension from the inner surface of the front side (arrow F direction side) of the enclosed space to the front of the bottom wall portion 18301 is from the front of the engaging member 18310 to the bottom wall portion 1830.
It is set larger than the distance to the front of 1. As a result, the space surrounded by the engaged portion 18332 and the engaging member 18310 are arranged at overlapping positions in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

The engaging member 18310 is formed in a substantially L-shape in front view, and is bent from one end of a second piece 18312 pivotally supported by a projecting portion 18301b of the rear case 18300 and the second piece 18312. It is composed of the first piece 18311 formed by the above.

The second piece 18312 is provided with a shaft support hole 18312a that is opened in a circular shape in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) at the end on the side opposite to the side on which the first piece 18311 is formed. Shaft hole 18312a
Is a hole into which the projecting portion 18301b of the rear case 18300 described above is inserted, whereby the engaging member 18310 can be arranged in a state of being pivotally supported inside the rear case 18300.

The first piece 18311 extends in an arc shape about the axis of the shaft support hole 18312a described above. As a result, the displacement region of the first piece 18311 can be minimized when the engaging member 18310 is rotated about the axis of the shaft support hole 18312a. Further, the first piece 18311 has an engaging portion 18316 protruding from the shaft support hole 18312a on both sides in the radial direction at an end opposite to the connecting side with the second piece 18312, and the engaging portions 316 at the two locations. The first piece 18 from the approximately intermediate position of
It is provided with a recess 18317 which is recessed in the extending direction of 311.

The outer shape of the two engaging portions 18316 is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front. again,
One of the engaging portions 18316 of the two engaging portions 18316 has a diameter of the first piece 18311 so as to go from the end opposite to the connecting portion with the second piece 18312 toward the connecting portion side with the second piece 18312. It is formed in an outer shape that protrudes outward in the direction. The other engaging part 18316 of the two engaging parts 18316
Is formed in an outer shape that projects inward in the radial direction of the first piece 18311 from the end opposite to the connecting portion with the second piece 18312 toward the connecting portion side with the second piece 18312.

The recess 18317 is formed by notching in the thickness direction of the first piece 18311, and the first piece is formed.
It is recessed from the end of the piece 18311 on the side opposite to the connecting side with the second piece 18312 toward the connecting side with the second piece 18312 along the extending direction of the first piece 18311. Therefore, the first piece 18
The end of 311 is bifurcated. As a result, the end portion of the first piece 18311 on the side opposite to the connecting side with the second piece 18312 is more easily elastically deformed than the connecting side with the second piece 18312, and the engaging member 18310 is attached to the fixing member 18320. Can be easily engaged.

Next, the engagement between the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 will be described. FIG. 16
As shown in 3, the interposing member 18330 and the shaft support member 340 are fastened and combined by a screw inserted from the interposing member 18330 side before engaging with the engaging member 18310.

Further, as described above, the engaging member 18310 is a projecting portion 1830 of the rear case 18300.
It is arranged in a state of being pivotally supported by 1b, and the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 is formed.
It is arranged so as to project from the opening 18302a of the rear case 18300.

The center of gravity of the engaging member 18310 pivotally supported by the rear case 18300 is the rear case 1.
It is located on the opening 18302a side of the projecting portion 18301b of the 8300, and in a state where no external force is applied, the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 is the opening of the rear case 18300 due to gravity. A force rotated in a direction protruding from the portion 18302a is applied to the engaging member 18310. As a result, when the engagement between the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 is incomplete, the engaging member 18310 is projected to the outside of the rear case 18300, and the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are engaged with each other. It is possible to prevent forgetting the match.

The intervening member 18330 and the shaft support member 340 (fixing member 18320) in the fastened state are
A protrusion 18301c1 projecting from the periphery of the first opening 18301c is inserted into the locking portion 18331 of the intermediate member 18330, and the left side (arrow L direction side) of the fixing member 18320 is locked to the rear case 18300. Will be done. In this case, the engaged portion 1833 of the fixing member 18320
2 is inserted inside the first opening 18301c, and the space surrounded by the engaged portion 18332 is arranged at a position facing the tip of the first piece 18311 of the engaging member 18310.

Next, the worker who engages the engaging member 18310 with the fixing member 18320 is the rear case 1.
The engaging member 18310 (connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312) protruding from the opening 18302a of the 8300 is pushed inside the rear case 18300 (on the side in the direction of arrow R1) (see FIG. 163). The joint member 18310 is rotated around the projecting portion 18301b.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 162, the tip of the engaging member 18310 is brought into contact with the engaged portion 1833.
It can be inserted into the internal space of 2. In this case, the distance between the outer ends of the two engaging portions 18316 is set to be larger than the vertical opening dimension of the internal space of the engaged portion 18332, but the recess 18317 of the engaging member 18310 Since the first piece 18311 is easily elastically deformed, the end portion of the first piece 18311 is elastically deformed inward of the recess 18317 so that the distance between the outer ends of the two engaging portions 18316 is covered. The end portion of the first piece 18311 can be inserted inside the engaged portion 18332 so as to be smaller than the vertical opening size of the internal space of the engaging portion 18332.

Further, since the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 of the engaging member 18310 is inserted inside the opening 18302a of the rear case 18300, the engaging member 18310
However, it is possible to prevent the engaging member 18310 from being operated from the outside of the rear case 18300 in the engaged state. As a result, the engaging member 18310 is illegally operated, and the fixing member 183 is operated.
It is possible to prevent the board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to 20 from being replaced with an unauthorized board.

Next, the disengagement of the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 in the eighteenth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 163 (a), the first opening 18301c is opened in a substantially L-shape in front view, and is recessed 18317 of the engaging member 18310 in an engaged state with the engaged portion 18332 of the fixing member 18320. However, it can be operated from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 1300 via the first opening 18301c.

Therefore, the outer portion of the concave portion 18317 of the engaging member 18310 is formed in the concave portion 18 with a special tool or the like.
By elastically deforming to the concave side of 317, the engagement between the engaging portion 18316 of the engaging member 18310 and the engaged portion 18332 is released. With this disengaged state, the engaging member 18310
Is displaced in the direction of pulling out from the internal space engaged by the engaged portion 18332 (direction of arrow L), and then the deformation of the engaging member 310 is returned to cause the engaging member 18310 and the engaged portion 1833.
The engagement with 2 can be released.

It is preferable that the gap between the outer portion of the recess 18317 of the engaging member 18310 and the first opening 18301c is formed as small as possible. According to this, the finger of the person who removes the fixing member 18320 from the rear case 300 can be made impossible to insert, and a special tool can be inserted. As a result, the board box 100 (main control device 110) can be replaced only by an operator having a dedicated tool, and it is possible to prevent the board box 100 from being replaced by an unauthorized board box 100.

Next, a case where the engaging member 18310 is forgotten to be engaged with the fixing member 18320 will be described with reference to FIG. 164. FIG. 164 (a) is a schematic top view of the game board 13, and FIG. 1
64 (b) is a schematic top view of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, FIG. 164 (a) and FIG. 164
In (b), a state in which the engaging member 18310 is forgotten to be engaged with the engaged portion 18332 is shown. Further, in FIGS. 164 (a) and 164 (b), a state in which a piece on the upper side of the outer frame 11 formed in a frame shape in a front view is removed is shown.

As described above, when the engaging member 18310 and the engaged portion 18332 are incompletely engaged, the engaging member 18310 can be projected to the outside of the rear case 18300 by gravity. In this case, the engaging member 183 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) of the game board 13
Distance dimension LR from the end of 10 to the right end (arrow R direction side) of the rear case 18300
1 (see FIG. 164 (a)) is set to be larger than the inner left-right direction dimension LR2 (see FIG. 164 (b)) in the left-right direction of the outer frame 11 on which the game board 13 is arranged. As a result, when the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are not engaged and the game board 13 is to be inserted inside the outer frame 11, the back side of the engaging member 18310 is in contact with the front surface of the outer frame 11. Can be touched. As a result, when the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are not engaged,
The engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18 are suppressed from being arranged on the outer frame 11.
It is possible to suppress forgetting to engage with the 320.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 165 and 166, the engaging member 1931 according to the 19th embodiment.
0 will be described. In the 18th embodiment, the engaging member 18310 is arranged inside the outer frame 11 to prevent the engaging member 18310 from being illegally operated, but in the 19th embodiment, the engaging member 19310 is released. The rotation to is restricted to prevent the engaging member 18310 from being tampered with. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 165 is an exploded perspective front view of the engaging member 19310 according to the 19th embodiment. FIG. 166 (a) is a front view of the rear case 18300, and FIG. 166 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the one-way 19350 in the CLXVIb-CLXVIb line of FIG. 165.

As shown in FIG. 165, the engaging member 19310 in the 19th embodiment is formed in a substantially L-shape in front view, and has a second piece 19312 having a rotation axis with respect to the rear case 19300 and a second piece thereof. It is composed of a first piece 18311 formed by bending from one end of 19312.

The second piece 19312 is provided with a fitting hole 19312b that opens in a circular shape in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) at the end on the side opposite to the side on which the first piece 18311 is formed. The fitting hole 19312b is a hole into which the one-way 19350 described later is fitted, and is the outer ring 1 of the one-way 19350.
It is formed to have substantially the same inner diameter as 9351.

The one-way 19350 has an inner ring 19352 having a cam surface formed on the outer peripheral surface and an inner ring 1 thereof.
An outer ring 19351 formed in an annular shape surrounding the outer side of the 9352, and a plurality of springs 19353 and rollers 19354 disposed between the outer ring 19351 and the inner ring 19352 are provided (see FIG. 166 (b)), and the outer ring is provided. When the inner ring 19352 tries to rotate in one direction with respect to 19351, the contact surface pressure between the cam surface and the roller 19354 becomes high, which becomes resistance and transmits power to the outer ring, and the inner ring moves in the other direction with respect to the outer ring 19351. When rotated, the contact surface pressure between the cam surface and the roller 10354 becomes low, and the clutch slips to disconnect the power transmission.
A detailed description of the one-way 19350 will be described later.

Further, the operator 19360 is inserted in the center of the inner ring 19352 of the one-way 19350. The operator 19360 has an operation unit 19361 arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the rear case 19300, and an insertion portion 19362 projecting from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the operation unit 19361. Mainly prepare.

The operation unit 19361 is a portion in which the operator operates the actuator 19360 from the back side of the rear case 19300, and is formed in a circular shape, and the outer shape thereof is formed to be larger than the opening through which the insertion portion 19362 described later is inserted. .. As a result, the operator 19360 is placed in the rear case 1930.
When arranged from the back side of 0, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 19361 from coming out to the front side (arrow F direction side) of the back case 19300.

The insertion portion 19362 is formed in a columnar shape coaxial with the axis of the operation portion 19361, and is projected on the front side (arrow F direction side). Further, the insertion portion 19362 includes a protrusion 19362a projecting radially from the outer peripheral surface thereof.

The ridge wall 19362a is an inner ring 1935 of the one-way 19350 with respect to the insertion portion 19362.
A recess 1935 formed in the inner ring 19352, which is an engaging portion for preventing the 2 from idling.
It is inserted in 2a. This makes it possible to prevent the rotational force acting on the actuator 19360 from being non-transmitted to the inner ring 19352.

Further, a concave portion recessed in a circular shape in the front view is formed on the protruding tip surface of the insertion portion 19362, and a screw is screwed into the concave portion from the front side to the back side to form a one-way 19350. The operator 19360 can be connected to the device.

Next, the arrangement state of the back case 19300 and the engaging member 19310 will be described with reference to FIG. 166. The rear case 19300 includes a bottom wall portion 19301 having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 19301 toward the front, and these wall portions 19301 and 302 are provided. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open.
Further, the rear case 19300 is on the front side (box-shaped open side (open side) of the bottom wall portion 19301.
An engaging member 19310 arranged on the side in the direction of arrow F), a fixing member 18320 arranged on the back side of the rear case 19300 and fixing the board box 100 (main control device 110), and the like.
To prepare for.

A front view rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 19301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 19301 can be visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is said that. Further, in the bottom wall portion 19301, a first opening 18301c that opens at a position facing the fixing member 18320 and a lower portion of the first opening 18301c (arrow D).
(Direction), it opens in the front-back direction, and the insertion part 1936 of the operator 19360 described above is inside.
It comprises an opening (not shown) into which the 2 is inserted.

In the above-mentioned engaging member 19310, after the engaging member 19310 with the one-way 19350 introspected inside the fitting hole 19312b is arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 10301, the operator 19360 is placed from the back side of the back case 19300. Insertion part 19362 in the back case 1930
It is arranged in the bottom wall portion 19301 by inserting it into the inner ring 19352 of the one-way 19350 through the opening of 0.

Next, the operation of the one-way 19350 will be described. One way 1 as mentioned above
The 9350 is switched between a case where power transmission to the outer ring 19351 is permitted and a case where power transmission is cut off in the rotation direction of the inner ring 19352 in one direction and the other direction.

First, a case where the power of the inner ring 19352 is transmitted to the outer ring will be described. Figure 166 (
As shown in b), when the inner ring 19352 is rotated in one direction (arrow LK direction (see FIG. 166 (b))), the roller 193 is located between the cam surface of the inner ring 19352 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer ring 19351.
54 is pinched, the contact of the roller 19354 becomes a resistance, and the power of the inner ring 19352 becomes the outer ring 1
It is transmitted to 9351. In this case, the rotation direction in one direction is set to the direction in which the engaging member 19310 is engaged with the fixing member 18320.

Next, a case where the power of the inner ring 19352 is cut off will be described. When the inner ring 19352 is rotated in the other direction (arrow RK direction (see FIG. 166 (b))), the roller 19354 is displaced inward in the radial direction due to the resistance of contact with the inner peripheral surface of the outer ring 19351. As a result, the contact surface pressure between the inner peripheral surface of the outer ring 19351 and the roller 19354 becomes low, and the roller 19354 slides against the outer ring 19351 to cut off power transmission. In this case, the rotation direction in the other direction is set to the direction in which the engaging member 19310 is disengaged from the fixing member 18320.

As a result, the operator 1 has the engaging member 19310 arranged in the rear case 19300.
The 9360 can be rotated to engage the engaging member 19310 with the fixing member 18320. Further, from the state where the engaging member 19310 and the fixing member 18320 are engaged, the operator 19
It is regulated to rotate 360 to disengage the engaging member 19310 and the fixing member 18320. As a result, the engaging member 19310 (operator 19360) is illegally operated, and the engagement member 19310 (operator 19360) is illegally operated.
It is possible to prevent the board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 18320 from being replaced with an unauthorized board.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 167 to 169, the engaging member 2031 in the 20th embodiment
0 will be described. In the first embodiment, the movement of the engaging member 310 is the rotation unit 70.
The case where it is regulated by the screw inserted into the rear base 720 of 0 has been described, but the second
In 0 embodiment, when the engaging member 20310 is engaged with the fixing member 320, the engaging member 20
The engaging portion 20 in which the movement of 310 is formed on the back base 20720 of the rotating unit 20700.
It is regulated by being engaged with 724a. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 167 and 168, the engaging member 2031 in the 20th embodiment.
0 and the rotary unit 20700 will be described. FIG. 167 is an exploded perspective view of the rear case 20300 and the rotating unit 20700 according to the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 168 (a)
Is a front view of the engaging member 20310, and FIG. 168 (b) is a rear view of the rotating unit 20700 and the engaging member 20310.

The rear case 20300 in the twentieth embodiment is the same as the rear case 300 in the first embodiment, from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular front view and the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is provided with an erected outer wall portion 302, and is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open by each of the wall portions 301 and 302. A front-view rectangular opening 301a (see FIG. 5) is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and the bottom wall portion 30 is formed through the opening 301a.
The third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of No. 1 is visible.

Further, the back case 20300 in the 20th embodiment includes an engaging member 20310 arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 (the open side formed in a box shape (arrow F direction side)) and the back case 20300. Arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side), the board box 100 (main control device 11)
It mainly includes a fixing member 320 for fixing 0). Further, in the back case 20300 according to the twentieth embodiment, the rotating unit 20700 is arranged in front of the bottom wall portion 301.

As shown in FIGS. 167 and 168, the engaging member 20310 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 20300 in the 20th embodiment has a crank shape in the front view. The first piece 31 which is formed in the above direction and extends in a direction parallel to each other.
1 and 2nd piece 20312 and 3rd piece 313 connecting the ends of the 1st piece 311 and the 2nd piece 20312 in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the 1st piece 311 and the 2nd piece 20312. Will be done.

The first piece 311 and the second piece 20312 are each formed with a sliding groove 314 having a long hole long in the extending direction, whereby the engaging member 20310 is the first piece 311 and the second piece 2.
It is slidable in the extension direction of 0312 (arrow LR direction).

Further, the second piece 20312 is provided with a recess 20312c recessed in a side surface parallel to the sliding direction of the engaging member 20310. The recess 20312c is a recess into which the tip of the engaging portion 20724a of the rear base 20720 of the rotation unit 20700, which will be described later, is inserted, and the engaging portion 207 is inserted.
It is formed in substantially the same shape as the outer shape of 24a.

More specifically, the recess 20312c has a dimension SH1 (see FIG. 168 (a)) up to the end on the side opposite to the connecting side (arrow L direction side) of the second piece 20312 with the third piece 313. Dimensions SH2 (FIG. 168 (FIG. 168)) in which the projecting portion 301b can slide inside the sliding groove 314 of 20310.
b) It is set to be substantially the same as (see). Further, the recess 20312c is recessed in a triangle having a right angle in front view, and the right-angled portion is set on the connecting side (arrow R direction side) of the second piece 20312 with the third piece 313.

The rotating unit 20700 has an opening 301 in the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 20300.
The right side of the lower part of a (front view rectangular back base 20720 arranged on the side in the direction of arrow R) and the rotating body 800 arranged on the front side (side in the direction of arrow F) of the back base 20720 (FIG. 9
3), and the effect of rotationally displacing the rotating body 800 via the light-transmitting center frame 86 arranged on the game board 13 can be visually recognized by the player.

The back base 20720 is a plate member that connects the back surface of the ball cradle 710 and the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the decoration unit 750, and is arranged on the back surface side of the ball cradle 710 and the decoration unit 750. Further, the back base 20720 includes an erection wall 20724 erected from the back.

The erection wall 20724 extends so as to surround the outer edge of the engaging member 20310 arranged in the back case 20300. Further, the erection wall 20724 has a recess 20 of the engaging member 20310.
It is provided with an engaging portion 20724a formed at a position facing the 312c and having a tip inserted inside the recess 20312c.

The engaging portion 20724a is projected from the erection wall 20724 in the direction in which the engaging member 20310 is engaged with the fixing member 320 (arrow R direction), and is erected in a direction orthogonal to the sliding direction of the engaging member 20310. It is formed with a predetermined gap from the wall 20724. As a result, the engaging portion 2
The rigidity of 0724a can be lowered to facilitate elastic deformation of the engaging portion 20724a. again,
A region where the engaging portion 20724a can be elastically deformed can be secured by the amount of the gap between the erection wall 20724 and the engaging portion 20724a.

Further, the engaging portion 20724a is a bent portion 2 that bends toward the engaging member 20310 at the protruding tip portion.
0724a1 is provided, and the front view shape of the bent portion 20724a1 is the recess 2031 described above.
It is formed in a triangular shape having substantially the same shape as 2c. As a result, the engaging member 20310 has a bent portion 2 inside the recess 20312c of the engaging member 20310 before engaging with the fixing member 320.
0724a1 is arranged. Therefore, the engaging member 20310 is displaced in its displacement direction (arrows L-R).
It can be made difficult to slide in the direction) (see FIG. 168 (b)).

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the engaging member 20310 from vibrating with respect to the rear case 20300 due to a force such as vibration or shaking and moving in the engaging direction (arrow R direction) with the fixing member 320. Therefore, before the fixing member 320 is arranged on the back case 20300, the position of the engaging member 20310 is displaced, and when the fixing member 320 is arranged on the back case 20300, the fixing member 32
It is possible to prevent the engaged portion 332 of 0 from coming into contact with the engaging member 20310. In other words,
When arranging the fixing member 320 on the rear case 20300, the engaged portion 33 of the fixing member 320
It is possible to prevent the engaging member 20310 from being positioned in the displacement region when 2 (see FIG. 167) is arranged. As a result, it is not necessary to operate the engaging member 20310 in the direction of disengaging the fixing member 320, so that the workability when engaging the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 320 can be improved. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the engaging member 20310 and the rotating unit 20700 in a state where the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged will be described. Figure 169
(A) is a rear view of the rotating unit 20700 and the engaging member 20310, and is shown in FIG. 169 (
b) is a rear view of the rear case 20300. In addition, FIG. 169 (a) and FIG. 169 (b).
) Shows the state in which the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 20320 are engaged with each other. Further, in FIG. 169 (b), a part of the engaging member 20310 and the outer shape of the standing wall 20724 are shown by a chain line.

As shown in FIG. 169, the operator 3 is displayed from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 20300.
15 is operated and the engaging member 20310 is arranged on the left side (arrow L direction side) of the front view with respect to the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 20300, and then the bottom wall portion 30 of the rear case 20300.
When displaced to the right side (arrow R direction side) of the front view with respect to 1, the recess 20 of the engaging member 20310
The bent portion 20724a1 disposed inside the 312c is pushed out into the recess 20312c by the inclined surface of the recess 20312c.

Here, as described above, the recess 20312c has a distance dimension SH1 to the end on the side opposite to the connection side (arrow L direction side) of the second piece 20312 with the third piece 313 (see FIG. 168 (a)). However, the dimension SH2 (where the protrusion 301b can slide inside the sliding groove 314 of the engaging member 20310)
Since it is set to be substantially the same as (see FIG. 168 (b)), the engaging member 20310 is the fixing member 320.
When displaced to a position where it engages with, the third piece 31 of the second piece 20312 of the engaging member 20310
The end portion on the side opposite to the connecting side with 3 (the side in the direction of arrow L) is the bent portion 20724a1 and the engaging member 20.
The 310s are arranged adjacent to each other in the displacement direction (arrow LR direction). As a result, it is possible to prevent the engaging member 20310 from being illicitly displaced in the direction of disengagement from the fixing member 320 (arrow L direction).

As in the first embodiment, in the engaging member 20310, the engaging portion 316 is a fixing member 3.
By being caught (engaged) with the engaged portion 332 of 20, the displacement of the engaging member 20310 in the direction of disengagement from the fixing member 320 is restricted. However, since the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 is inserted through the first opening 301c of the rear case 300, the engaged portion 3
The engagement between the 32 and the engaging portion 316 may be illegally released via the first opening 301c.

On the other hand, in the twentieth embodiment, the displacement of the engaging member 20310 in the direction of disengagement from the fixing member 320 is changed to the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 20310 that engages with the fixing member 320.
Since the end portion on the opposite side to the bending portion 20724a1 can be brought into contact with the bent portion 20724a1 to be regulated, an illegal object is inserted from the first opening portion 301c, and the end portion and the bent portion 20724a of the engaging member 20310a are inserted.
It is possible to prevent the engagement with 1 from being released. As a result, the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 3
It is possible to prevent the board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 320 from being replaced with an illegal board by illegally disengaging the engagement with the 20.

As for the fixing member 320 and the engaging member 20310, the rotating unit 20700 arranged inside the back case 20300 (bottom wall portion 301) is removed from the back case 20300, and the end portion and the bent portion of the engaging member 20310 are removed. After disengaging the engagement member 20724a1, the end portion of the first piece 311 of the engagement member 20310 is elastically deformed, and the end portion of the engagement member 20310 is pulled out from the internal space of the engaged portion 332. You can disengage.

Therefore, when removing the fixing member 320 from the rear case 20300, it is necessary to remove the rotating unit 20700 from the front side of the rear case 20300, so that the engaging member 2
It is possible to prevent the board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 320 from being replaced with an illegal board by illegally disengaging the engagement between the 0310 and the fixing member 320.

Further, since the engaging member 20310 is formed by bending the shape in the front view into a crank shape as described above, an illegal object such as a wire or a wire inserted from the first piece 311 side is linearly second. It is possible to restrict the feeding to the end of the piece 20312. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the illegal object inserted from the first piece 311 side from being accurately sent to the engaging portion between the second piece 20312 and the bent portion 20724a1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement member 20310 and the fixing member 320 from being illegally disengaged and the board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 320 from being replaced with an illegal board. ..

Then, with reference to FIGS. 170 to 173, the rotary unit 21 according to the 21st embodiment.
The 700 will be described. In the first embodiment, the back base 72 of the rotating unit 700
The case where the movement of the engaging member 310 is restricted by the screw inserted through 0 has been described.
In the 21st embodiment, the movement of the engaging member 310 is restricted by inserting the first piece 311 into the insertion portion 21724b formed on the back base 21720 of the rotating unit 21700. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the engaging member 310 and the rotating unit 21700 according to the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171. FIG. 170 is an exploded perspective view of the rear case 300 and the rotating unit 21700 according to the 21st embodiment. FIG. 171 (a
) Is a rear view of the rotating unit 21700 and the engaging member 310, and FIG. 171 (b) is a rear view.
FIG. 17A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rotating unit 21700 in the CLXXIb-CLXXIb line of FIG. 171 (a).

The rear case 21300 in the 21st embodiment is the same as the rear case 300 in the 1st embodiment, from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular front view and the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is provided with an erected outer wall portion 302, and is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open by each of the wall portions 301 and 302. A front-view rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 can be visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

Further, the rear case 21300 in the 21st embodiment includes an engaging member 310 arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 (open side formed in a box shape (arrow F direction side)) and the rear case 21.
The board box 100 (main control device 110) is arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the 300.
Mainly includes a fixing member 320 for fixing the above. Further, in the back case 21300 according to the 21st embodiment, a rotating unit 21700 is arranged in front of the bottom wall portion 301.

As shown in FIGS. 170 and 171, the rotary unit 21700 according to the 21st embodiment.
Is a front view rectangular rear base 21720 arranged on the right side (arrow R direction side) of the lower side (arrow D direction side) portion of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and its back surface. A rotating body 800 (see FIG. 93) arranged on the front side of the base 21720 is provided, and the rotating body 800 is rotationally displaced via a light-transmitting center frame 86 arranged on the game board 13. It can be visually recognized by the player.

The back base 21720 is a plate member that connects the back surface of the ball cradle 710 and the back surface side of the decorative unit 750, and is arranged on the back surface side of the ball cradle 710 and the decoration unit 750. Further, the back surface base 21720 includes an erection wall 21724 erected on the back surface thereof.

The erection wall 21724 is extended so as to surround the outer edge of the engaging member 310 in the state of being arranged in the back case 300. Further, in the erection wall 21724, the engaging member 310 is the back case 30.
A state located at the end on the left side (arrow L direction side) with respect to 0 (engagement member 310 and fixing member 320)
In the state where the engagement with the engagement member 310 is released), the engagement member 310 is directed toward the recess 317 (arrow L).
It comprises an insertion portion 21724b that is projected (towards the direction).

The insertion portion 21724b is displaced from the erection wall 21724 in the displacement direction of the engaging member 310 (arrows L-R).
It is extended in a direction parallel to the direction) and is set to a dimension that overlaps with the engaging member 310 in the state of being engaged with the fixing member 320 in the direction of gravity (arrow UB direction). Further, the insertion portion 21
A bent portion 21724b1 that bends to the back surface side (engagement member 310 side) is formed at the tip portion of the 724b, and the bent tip portion of the bent portion 21742b1 is formed in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) of the pachinko machine 10. , The length is set to overlap with the engaging member 310.

Further, the width dimension of the insertion portion 21742b in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) is set to be smaller than the width dimension in the vertical direction of the recess 317 of the engaging member 310. Therefore, the insertion portion 21724b is in a state where the engaging member 310 is engaged with the fixing member 320.
It is assumed that the bent portion 21724b1 is inserted inside the recess 317. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first piece 311 of the engaging member 310 from being elastically deformed inside the recess of the recess 317 from the state in which the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged. As a result, the engaging member 20310
It is possible to prevent the board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 320 from being replaced with an illegal board by illegally disengaging the engagement with the fixing member 320.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 171 to 173, the operation of the insertion portion 21724b when the engaging member 310 is engaged with the fixing member 320 will be described. 172 (a) and 173 (FIG. 173)
a) is a rear view of the rotating unit 21700 and the engaging member 310. 172 (b) and 173 (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the rear case 300 and the rotating unit 21700. In addition, in FIGS. 172 (a) and 172 (b), the state in which the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are disengaged is shown, and in FIGS. 173 (a) and 173 (b), the engagement member 310 is engaged. Combined member 3
The state in which 10 is being engaged with the fixing member 320 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 172 and 173, from the state in which the engaging member 310 is disengaged from the fixing member 320, the end portion of the first piece 311 of the engaging member 310 is engaged with the fixing member 320. Part 3
When inserted into the internal space of 32, the end of the first piece 311 is elastically deformed toward the inside of the recess 317. As a result, the width dimension of the recess 317 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) is made smaller than the width dimension in the vertical direction of the insertion portion 21724b.

Further, when the engaging portion 316 is located in the internal space of the engaged portion 332 (when the position is shown in FIG. 173 (a)), the end portion of the first piece 311 presses the protruding tip portion of the insertion portion 21724b. It is placed in a position that exceeds it. In other words, the length dimension of the engaging portion 316 in the left-right direction is the insertion portion 21.
It is set to be larger than the facing distance dimension from the protruding tip portion of the 724b to the end portion of the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320.

Therefore, when the engaging portion 316 is extruded from the internal space of the engaged portion 332, the end portion of the engaging member 310 on the first piece 311 side can be brought into contact with the bent portion 21724b1 of the insertion portion 21724b. .. In this case, the tip of the insertion portion 21724b is pushed out toward the front side (arrow F direction side) along the inclined surface of the bending portion 21724b1. As a result, the engaging member 310 can be displaced to a position where it engages with the fixing member 320.

As shown in FIG. 171, when the engaging portion 316 is pulled out from the internal space of the engaged portion 332, as described above, from the width dimension of the recess 317 in the vertical direction of the first piece 311. However, since the width dimension of the insertion portion 21724b in the vertical direction is increased, the recess 317
The bent portion 21724b1 is inserted inside the.

Therefore, as described above, it is possible to prevent the first piece 311 of the engaging member 310 from being elastically deformed inside the recess of the recess 317. As a result, the engagement between the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 320 is illegally released, and the substrate box 100 (main control device 1) connected to the fixing member 320 is connected.
It is possible to prevent 10) from being replaced with an illegal substrate.

The engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are inside the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301).
) Is removed from the rear case 21300 to disengage the end of the engaging member 310 from the rear case 20300, and then the first engaging member 310.
By elastically deforming the end portion of the piece 311 and pulling out the end portion of the engaging member 310 from the internal space of the engaged portion 332, the engagement between the two can be released.

Therefore, when removing the fixing member 320 from the rear case 21300, it is necessary to remove the rotating unit 21700 from the front side of the rear case 21300, so that the engaging member 3
The engagement between 10 and the fixing member 320 is illegally released from the back side of the back case 21300, and the engagement is illegally released.
It is possible to prevent the board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 320 from being replaced with an unauthorized board.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 174 to 176, the engaging member 2231 according to the 22nd embodiment.
0 and the fixing member 22320 will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 310 is engaged with the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 has been described.
In the 22nd embodiment, the fixing member 22 is formed in the recess 22311a recessed in the engaging member 22310.
The bent portion 22332a1 formed on the 320 is engaged. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIGS. 174 to 176 (a), the engaging member 22310 according to the 22nd embodiment.
The configuration of the fixing member 22320 and the fixing member 22320 will be described. FIG. 174 is a perspective front view of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320. 175 (a) and 175 (b) are front views of the rear case 22300. FIG. 176 (a) shows CLXXVIa- of FIG. 175 (b).
It is a schematic sectional drawing of the back case 22300 in the CLXXVIa line. In addition, FIG. 175 (
In a), the state before the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 are engaged is illustrated, and FIG.
In 75 (b), the state in which the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 are engaged is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 174 to 176 (a), the rear case 223 in the 22nd embodiment.
00 includes a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side open. Further, the rear case 22300 has an engaging member 22310 arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 (open side formed in a box shape (arrow F direction side)) and the bottom wall portion 3.
It is provided on the back side of the 01 and includes a fixing member 22320 for fixing the board box 100 (main control device 110).

The engaging member 22310 has a crank shape in outer shape when viewed from the front, and extends in a direction parallel to each other, the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312, and the first piece 2231.
It is composed of a third piece 313 that connects the ends of the first piece and the second piece 312 in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312.

Further, in the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312, a sliding groove 31 having a long hole long in the extending direction thereof 31
4 is formed respectively, whereby the engaging member 22310 is slidable in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312.

The first piece 22311 includes a recess 22311a recessed toward the back side (arrow B direction side) on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the end portion opposite to the side to which the third piece 313 is connected. ..

The recess 22311a is a bent portion 22332a1 formed in the fixing member 22320 described later.
Is inserted to engage the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320, and as will be described later, the end portion on one side (arrow R direction side) of the first piece 22311 of the engaging member 22310 is fixed. When housed in the internal space of the engaged portion 22332 of the member 22320, the fixing member 223
It is formed at a position facing the 22332a of 20.

Further, the internal shape of the recess 22311a has a substantially right-angled triangular cross section, the right-angled portion is set on the end side (arrow R direction side) of the first piece 22311, and the recessed bottom surface is the first. It is formed as an inclined surface that becomes deeper toward the back surface side (direction of arrow B) toward the end side of one piece 22311.

The fixing member 22320 is composed of an intermediate member 22330 that engages with the above-mentioned engaging member 22310, and a shaft support member 340 that is fastened to the back surface side of the intermediate member 22330.

The interposition member 22330 is formed in a box shape in which the front side (arrow F direction side) is open, and the locking portion 331 projecting to the side surface on one side (arrow R direction side) and the other side (arrow L direction side). The engaged portion 22332 that protrudes from the side surface of the rear case 22300 to the bottom wall portion 301 side (back side (arrow B direction side)) and is formed in a frame shape, and the box-shaped bottom surface (side surface in the arrow B direction side). It mainly includes an insertion hole 333 (see FIG. 39 (b)) that opens in a circular shape and a protrusion 334 that protrudes from the back surface.

The engaged portion 22332 is the first piece 2231 of the engaging member 22310 in the enclosed internal space.
The end portion on one side (arrow R direction side) of 1 is inserted, and the inner edge shape thereof is the first piece 22.
It is set slightly larger than the outer shape of 311. Further, the engaged portion 22332 is formed in a frame shape from one side on the front side (arrow F direction side) to the engaged portion 22332 of the engaging member 22310.
A protrusion 22332a projecting in the insertion direction (arrow R direction side) is provided.

The protrusion 22332a is a bent portion 2233 that bends toward the front side (arrow F direction side) at the end of the tip.
2a1 is provided, and the bent portion 22332a1 thereof is a recess 223 of the engaging member 22310 described above.
By being inserted into 11a, the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 can be engaged with each other. That is, in the bent portion 22332a1, the engaging member 22310 is engaged with the engaged portion 22332.
It is formed at a position facing the recess 22311a in the state of being inserted into.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 176 (a), the engaging portion between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 is formed on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 22300 with the engaging member 22310 interposed therebetween. Will be done. Therefore, since the engaging portion between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 can be separated from the first opening 301c formed in the bottom wall portion 301, the first
It is possible to prevent an illegal member such as a wire or a wire from being inserted through the opening 301c and illegally disengage the engagement member 22310 from the fixing member 22320.

Further, since the first piece 22311 of the engaging member 22310 can be arranged between the bottom wall portion 301 and the engaging portion of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320, the bottom wall portion 301 can be arranged.
It is possible to prevent a wire, a wire, or the like illegally inserted from an opening such as the first opening 301c formed in the above from reaching the engaging portion of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 linearly. As a result, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized member (wire, wire, or the like) from being inserted through the opening of the bottom wall portion 301 and illegally disengaging the engagement member 22310 from the fixing member 22320.

Further, in the present embodiment, the protrusion 22332a is projected in the direction of inserting the engaging member 22310 into the internal space of the engaged portion 22332. Therefore, the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 223
The engagement portion with 20 is set on the front side of the fixing member 22320. As a result, the bottom wall portion 3
When an illegal member such as a wire or a wire is inserted from the first opening 301c of 01, the bottom wall portion 3 indicates the insertion direction of the illegal member that reaches the engaging portion between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320.
It can be tilted diagonally with respect to the front of 01. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the force in the direction of disengaging the engaging portion between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 to be transmitted from the tip of the fraudulent member. As a result, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized member from being inserted through the first opening 301c of the bottom wall portion 301 and illegally disengaging the engagement member 22310 and the fixing member 22320.

Next, the engaging member 23310 and the fixing member 23320 in the 23rd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 176 (b). In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the protrusion 22332a for engaging the engaging member 22310 is projected in the direction of inserting the engaging member 22310 into the engaged portion 22332 has been described, but in the 23rd embodiment, the case has been described. Engagement portion 23 of the engagement member 23310
The protrusion 23332a is projected in the direction opposite to the insertion direction of the 332. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 176 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rear case 23300 according to the 23rd embodiment. The cross-sectional view of FIG. 176 (b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 176 (a). Further, in the 23rd embodiment, as described above, the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 223 in the 22nd embodiment
Since the engagement position is different from that of 20, the description is omitted because it is the same as the 22nd embodiment except for the engagement portion between the engagement member 23310 and the fixing member 23320.

The rear case 22300 in the 23rd embodiment has a bottom wall portion 233 having a substantially rectangular front view.
01 and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 23301 toward the front are provided, and one side (front side) is opened by each of the wall portions 23301 and 302 in a box shape. It is formed. A front-view rectangular opening 301a (see FIG. 5) is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 5) is arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 through the opening 301a. 2) is visible.

Further, the rear case 23300 in the 23rd embodiment is on the front side of the bottom wall portion 23301 (
The engaging member 23310 arranged in a box shape on the open side (arrow F direction side) and the board box 100 (main control device) arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 23300. It mainly includes a fixing member 23320 for fixing 110).

As shown in FIG. 176 (b), in the 23rd embodiment, as described above, the engaged portion 2333
The protruding direction of the protrusion 23332a protruding from 2 is the protrusion 22332a of the 22nd embodiment (
A bent portion 23332a1 is formed at the protruding tip of the protruding portion 23332a, which is set in the direction opposite to (see FIG. 176 (a)) and bends toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side).

The engaging member 23310 has a bent portion 23332a1 at a position facing the bent portion 23332a1.
A rectangular opening 23310b larger than the outer shape of is formed. As a result, the engaging member 23
When the 310 is inserted into the internal space of the engaged portion 23332 of the fixing member 23320, the opening 2
The bent portion 23332a1 is inserted inside the 3310b, and the engaging member 23310 and the fixing member 23320 are engaged with each other.

Further, in the bottom wall portion 23301 of the back case 23300 in the 23rd embodiment, a third opening portion 23301e is formed at a position facing the fixing member 23320. The third opening 23301e allows the operator to disengage the engaging portion between the engaging member 23310 and the fixing member 23320 from the back surface side of the bottom wall portion 23301. As a result, the back case 23300
The work of removing the fixing member 23320 can be simplified.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 177 and 178, the back case 243 in the 24th embodiment.
00 will be described. In the 18th embodiment, the fixing member 18320 is attached to the bottom wall portion 1830.
The case where the fixing member 18320 and the engaging member 18310 are disengaged from the fixing member 18320 has been described. However, in the 24th embodiment, when the fixing member 24320 is removed from the bottom wall portion 24301, the engaging member 24310 has been described. The insertion portion of the fixing member 24320 into the fixing member 24320 is cut.
The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 177 (a) is a front view of the rear case 24300 in the 24th embodiment, and FIG. 177 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rear case 24300 in the CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb line of FIG. 177 (a). FIG. 178 is the CLXXVIII-C of FIG. 177 (b).
It is sectional drawing of the back case 24300 in the LXXVIII line.

As shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, the rear case 24300 according to the 24th embodiment.
Includes a bottom wall portion 24301 having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 24301 toward the front, and one side of each of the wall portions 24301 and 302. The (front side) is formed in an open box shape. Further, the rear case 24300 has a bottom wall portion 2
Engagement member 2 disposed on the front side of 4301 (open side formed in a box shape (arrow F direction side))
4310 and the board box 100 (main control device 1) arranged on the back side of the bottom wall portion 24301.
A fixing member 24320 for fixing 10) is provided.

The bottom wall portion 24301 has a front view rectangular opening 301a formed in the center thereof, and the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) is arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 24301 through the opening 301a.
See) is visible. Further, the bottom wall portion 24301 is located on the left side (arrow L direction side) of the first opening 24301c that opens at a position facing the fixing member 24320 and the first opening 24301c, and is located in the front-rear direction (arrow F-). An operator 24 that opens in the B direction) and is described inside.
It comprises an opening (not shown) into which the insertion portion 24362 of 360 is inserted.

The engaging member 24310 is a second piece 24312 formed in a T shape when viewed from the front, and the second piece 2 thereof.
It mainly comprises a first piece 24311 that bends from the end of 4312 and extends in an arc shape. The second piece 24312 is a through hole 24 that penetrates in the front-rear direction through the connecting portion of two orthogonal extending portions.
The 312d is provided, and the distance from the through hole 24312d to the outside of the extended portion of the second piece 24312 is set to be substantially the same.

The through hole 24312d is a portion into which the insertion portion 24362 of the operator 24360 described later is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the insertion portion 24362. As a result, the actuator 24360 is rotationally operated, so that the engaging member 24310 is rotationally displaced around the through hole 24312d.

The first piece 24311 is formed in an arc shape centered on the through hole 24312d, and the second piece 2
It is projected from each end of the 4312 in one direction of rotation (front view left rotation). again,
Each first piece 24311 has an engaging portion 24316 protruding from the tip of the protrusion on both sides in the radial direction about the axis of the through hole 24312d, and from the tip surface of the protrusion toward the connecting side with the second piece 24312. A recess 24317, which is recessed, is provided.

The engaging portion 24316 is a portion that engages with the fixing member 24320, which will be described later, and is a recess 24.
By 317, the protruding tip portion (the portion where the engaging portion 24316 is formed) of the first piece 24311 can be elastically deformed and engaged with the engaged portion 24332 formed on the fixing member 24320. A detailed description of the shape of the engaging portion 24316 and the recess 24317 will be described later.

The operator 24360 is an operating member that transmits an operation from the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the bottom wall portion 24301 to the engaging member 24310 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the bottom wall portion 24301. It is provided with an operation portion 24361 formed in a columnar shape and an insertion portion 24362 protruding coaxially with the operation portion 24361. The operation portion 24361 is formed in the bottom wall portion 24301, and the outer diameter is set to a size larger than the opening through which the insertion portion 24362 is inserted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the entire operator 24360 from being displaced toward the front side of the bottom wall portion 24301.

The insertion portion 24362 is a portion to be inserted into the through hole 24312d of the engagement member 24310 as described above, whereby the rotational force input from the operation portion 24361 is applied to the engagement member 24.
Can be transmitted to 310.

The fixing member 24320 is composed of an intermediate member 24330 that engages with the above-mentioned engaging member 24310, and a shaft support member 340 arranged on the back surface side of the intermediate member 24330.

The interposition member 24330 is formed in a box shape in which the front side (the side in the direction of arrow F) is open. again,
The interposing member 24330 includes a housing portion 24335 that is projected from the front and is formed in a box shape with the lower side (arrow D direction side) open. The accommodating portion 24335 has an engaging member 2 inside.
It is a portion for inserting the engaging portion (tip portion of the first piece 24311) of the 4310, and the lower open portion is arranged on the displacement locus of the first piece 24311 of the engaging member 24310 described above. As a result, the engaging member 24310 can be rotated to accommodate the end portion of the first piece 24311 of the engaging member 24310 in the internal space of the accommodating portion 24335.

Further, the internal space of the accommodating portion 24335 is formed to be larger than the engaging portion of the engaging member 24310 at one location. As a result, when the engaging member 24310 is cut as described later, the cut portion of the engaging member 24310 can be accommodated in the internal space of the accommodating portion 24335. In this embodiment, the size of the internal space of the accommodating portion 24335 is the engaging member 243.
It is set to be approximately three times as large as the engaging portion of 10 (the tip portion of the first piece 24311), and is set to be approximately three times larger than that of the accommodating portion 24.
At least three or more engaging members 24310 can be accommodated in the internal space of the 335.

As shown in FIG. 178, the accommodating portion 24335 is opened on the lower side, and the stepped portion 24335a is projected from the opening portion in a stepped manner, and the engaging member 24310 is accommodated inside the accommodating portion 24335 in the stepped portion 24335a. The engaging portion 24316 of the above is engaged. As a result, when the engaging member 24310 is rotated, the tip end portion of the first piece 24311 can be inserted inside the accommodating portion 24335, and the engaging member 24310 and the fixing member 24320 can be engaged with each other.

Further, in this case, the recessed depth SH3 (see FIG. 178) of the recess 24317 is the accommodating portion 243.
The distance dimension SH4 from the end of the first piece 24311 in the state of being accommodated and engaged in 35 to the lower end of the accommodating portion 24335 is set. Therefore, the engaged first piece 24311
The recess 24317 formed in the above is in a state of being accommodated inside the accommodating portion 24335. As a result, the end portion of the first piece 24311 is elastically deformed to form the engaging member 24310 and the fixing member 24.
It is possible to prevent the engagement with the 320 from being released.

Therefore, in the 24th embodiment, the first piece 24311 inserted inside the accommodating portion 24335.
By cutting the first piece 24311 protruding from the accommodating portion 24335, the bottom wall portion 24301
The fixing member 24320 can be removed from.

In this case, the distance dimension SH5 (see FIG. 178) from the upper inner edge of the accommodating portion 24335 to the tip end portion of the first piece 24311 is set to be larger than the above-mentioned distance dimension SH4. As a result, the cut portion of the first piece 24331 can be moved above the accommodating portion 24335, and the other first piece 24311 is inserted from the open side (arrow F direction side) of the accommodating portion 24335 to insert the step portion 24335a. Can be engaged with.

Therefore, the number of times the fixing member 24320 is removed from the bottom wall portion 24301 is the number of times the engaging member 24 is removed.
It can be determined by the number of the remaining first piece 24311 of 310 or the number of the cut first piece 24311 housed in the accommodating portion 24335. As a result, the fixing member 2432
When 0 is illegally removed from the bottom wall portion 24301 and the board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 24320 is replaced with an illegal board, the engaging member 24
The number of the remaining first piece 24311 of the 310 or the number of the cut first pieces 24311 accommodated in the accommodating portion 24335 can make the operator aware that the fixing member 24320 has been illegally removed.

Further, as described above, the engaging member 24310 utilizes the region on the side where the second piece 24312 is formed in a T-shape in front view and the first piece 24311 is not formed (upper side of the T-shape). The first piece 24311 can be inserted into the fixing member 24320 by rotating the engaging member 24310. Further, when the first piece 24311 is cut, the engaging member 24310 is made rotatable by using the cut region of the first piece 24311, and the next (other) first piece 24311 is used as the fixing member 24320. Can be inserted. As a result, the accommodating portion 2433 of the first piece 24311
The order of accommodation in 5 can be determined. Therefore, the worker is the first undisconnected
Since it is possible to visually check the position of the piece 24311 and determine whether the fixing member 24320 has been illegally released, the number of the first piece 24311 is more illegal than when the operator counts the number. It is possible to prevent the operator from overlooking the traces.

Next, the game board 25013 in the 25th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 179. In the first embodiment, the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 150 is the main body 1
Although the case of being bonded to the 51 has been described, in the 25th embodiment, the decorative member 154 is bonded to the front side of the base plate 60. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

179 (a) and 179 (b) are sectional views of the game board 25013 in the 25th embodiment. Note that FIGS. 179 (a) and 179 (b) correspond to the cross-sectional views of FIG.
Further, in FIG. 179 (b), a state in which the general winning opening unit 25150 is disassembled from the base plate 60 is shown.

The game board 25013 in the 25th embodiment is the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the game board 25013 includes a base plate 60 formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a center frame 86 arranged in an opening portion formed in the base plate 60.
In addition, the game board 25013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76, 77, a general winning opening 63, and a first. Winning opening 6
4. The second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2) are assembled and configured, and the peripheral portion thereof is the back surface of the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). Attached to the side. Further, in the 25th embodiment, the second opening 60b of the base 60 (FIG. 1).
1) The general winning opening unit 25150 is arranged in the opening portion.

As shown in FIG. 179, the general winning opening unit 25150 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 25013 in the 25th embodiment has a main body portion 151 arranged along the front surface of the base plate 60. The first standing portion 152 which is erected at the end of the main body portion 151, and the second standing portion which is erected from the front of the main body portion 141 and one end of which is connected to the first standing portion 152. 1
It mainly includes 53, a decorative member 25154 arranged on the back surface side of the main body portion 151, and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) general winning openings 63 formed on the main body portion 151.

The decorative member 25154 is formed in a plate shape from a light-transmitting material, and is decorated with a pattern or characters (pictures) connected to the decorative member 60c arranged on the front side of the base plate 60. again,
The shape of the outer edge of the decorative member 25154 is formed to be slightly smaller than the shape of the inner edge of the recess 151b formed in the main body portion 151.

Further, the decorative member 25154 is provided with an adhesive tape 25154a to be adhered to the front surface of the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c) at the end portion of the back surface of the decorative member 25154. Thereby, the decorative member 25154 can be adhered to and arranged on the base plate 60. Therefore, when the decorative member 25154 is arranged on the base plate 60, the operator can attach the decorative member 25154 to the front surface of the base plate 60 while visually recognizing the decoration of the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60. Therefore,
It is possible to facilitate the alignment of the decoration between the decorative member 25154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60. As a result, it is possible to prevent the decorative member 25154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 from being displaced from each other, and to give the player the decorative member 25154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 as one decoration. It can be made easy to see.

Further, since the decorative member 25154 is directly attached to the front surface of the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c), the front-rear direction between the decorative member 25154 and the decorative member 60c is higher than when the decoration is applied to the front side of the main body portion 151. The arrangement in (arrow FB direction) can be brought closer. As a result, each decorative member 25154, 6 when the player visually recognizes the decorative member 25154 from an angle.
It is possible to suppress a large displacement of the decoration of 0c. As a result, the player is given a decorative member 25.
The 154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be easily visually recognized by the player as the decoration of 1.

Further, in the 25th embodiment, the concave dimension X1 of the concave portion 151b of the main body portion 151 is set to be smaller than the width dimension X2 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) in which the decorative member 25154 and the adhesive tape 25154a are combined. Will be done. As a result, when the main body portion 151 is arranged from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the decorative member 25154, the decorative member 25154 is placed in the recess 151b.
It is possible to prevent the front surface of the decorative member 25154 from coming into contact with the recessed bottom surface 151b2.

Therefore, the back surface portion 151d forming the back surface of the main body portion 151 excluding the recess 151b can be brought into contact with the front surface of the base plate 60, and a gap is formed between the back surface portion 151d and the base plate 60. Can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering between the back surface portion 151d and the base plate 60, making it difficult to visually recognize the decoration of the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60.

Next, the game board 26013 in the 26th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 180. In the first embodiment, the case where the linear inclined surface 151a is formed at the end of the main body portion 151 of the general winning opening unit 150 has been described, but in the 26th embodiment, the main body portion 26 has been described.
The inclined surface 26151a formed at the end of 151 is formed in an arc shape with a cross section bulging outward. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

180 (a) and 180 (b) are cross-sectional views of the game board 26013 in the 26th embodiment. It should be noted that FIGS. 180 (a) and 180 (b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG.
Further, in FIG. 180 (a), the player places the game board 26013 at a higher position than usual (for example, in FIG. 180 (a)).
The line of sight when visually recognized from the pachinko machine 10 (viewpoint at the same height as the upper end in the gravity direction) of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is illustrated by a two-dot chain line. The line of sight when visually recognized from the position of (for example, a viewpoint having the same height as the position substantially intermediate in the gravity direction of the game board 26013) is shown by a two-dot chain line.

The game board 26013 in the 26th embodiment is the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the game board 26013 has a base plate 60 formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) arranged in an opening portion formed in the base plate 60. Be prepared. Further, the game board 26013 is a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view.
In addition to a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills for ball guidance, rails 76, 77, general winning openings 63,
The first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2) are assembled and configured, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (FIG. 1). See) attached to the back side. Further, in the 26th embodiment, the general winning opening unit 26150 is arranged in the opening portion of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 180, the general winning opening unit 26150 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 26013 in the 26th embodiment is a plate-shaped main body portion 26151 along the front surface of the base plate 60 and its own. A decorative member 154 arranged on the back surface side of the main body portion 26151 is provided.

The main body portion 26151 is a decorative member 15 formed of a transparent resin material and arranged on the back surface side.
The decoration of the pattern, characters, etc. (picture) of 4 can be visually recognized from the player side. In addition, the main body 261
51 has an inclined surface 26151a whose end portion in front view is inclined toward the back surface side and bulges in an arc shape in cross section, and a recess 1 recessed from the back surface of the main body portion 26151 toward the front surface side.
51b and the like are mainly provided.

The inclined surface 26151a is set so that the inclination angle θ1 with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 of the virtual line IL1 connecting the connection point with the plane on the front side of the main body portion 26151 and the end portion on the back side is smaller than 45 degrees. Will be done. As a result, the light traveling in the horizontal direction on the main body 26151 is transmitted from the inclined surface 26151a to the main body 2615 more than when the inclination angle θ1 is set to be larger than 45 degrees.
The angle of incidence when incident on the outside of 1 is increased. Therefore, when the light is emitted to the outside of the main body portion 26151, the traveling direction of the light can be easily bent upward. Therefore, the player can enter the general winning opening unit 2615 from a position higher than the normal position with respect to the game board 26013.
When 0 is visually recognized, the connecting portion of the decorative members 154 and 60c can be easily visually recognized from the front side. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the difference in the positions of the connecting portions of the decorative members 154 and 60c in the front-rear direction.
And the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be combined to make it easy to visually recognize as the decoration of 1.
In this embodiment, the angle θ1 is set to 40 degrees.

Further, as described above, since the inclined surface 26151a is formed in a cross-sectional arc shape that bulges outward, the main body portion 2615 is directed toward the center side (lower side in FIG. 180 (a)) of the main body portion 26151.
The angle of incidence is increased when the light traveling in the horizontal direction of 1 is incident on the outside of the main body portion 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a. Therefore, as the direction toward the center side of the main body portion 26151 (lower side in FIG. 180 (a)), the light traveling horizontally through the main body portion 26151 is directed from the inclined surface 26151a to the main body portion 261.
The angle of incidence when incident on the outside of 51 is increased.

Therefore, the player is below the horizontal line HR1 (see FIG. 180 (a)) through which the player passes through the inclined surface 26151a and the intermediate position between the connection point with the front surface surface of the main body portion 26151 and the end portion on the back surface side. When the decoration on the side is visually recognized, the angle of the line of sight of the player passing through the main body portion 26151 can be easily brought closer to the direction orthogonal to the front surface of the base plate 60 (horizontal direction).

Further, the decorative member 154 disposed inside the recess 151b has a horizontal line H whose end position passes through an intermediate position between a connection point with a flat surface on the front side of the main body portion 26151 and an end portion on the back side.
It is set below R1 (see FIG. 180 (a)) and is set on the back side of the inclined surface 26151a. As described above, when the decoration below the horizontal line HR1 (see FIG. 180 (a)) is visually recognized by the player through the inclined surface 26151a, the angle of the line of sight of the player passing through the main body portion 26151. Can be easily brought closer to the direction orthogonal to the front surface of the base plate 60 (horizontal direction).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 180 (a), even when the player visually recognizes the general winning opening unit 26150 and the base plate 60 from a position higher than usual on the game board 26013, the inclined surface 26
The decoration of the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and the general winning opening unit 2615 via 151a.
Combined with the decoration of the decorative member 154 of 0, it can be easily made visible to the player. As a result, the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 26150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be combined and easily visually recognized as the decoration of 1.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 180 (b), when the player visually recognizes the general winning opening unit 26150 and the base plate 60 from the normal height of the game board 26013, the main body due to the bulging shape of the inclined surface 26151a. Since the incident angle when the light traveling in the horizontal direction through the portion 26151 is incident on the outside of the main body portion 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a is close to a right angle, it is possible to make it difficult to refract the light emitted to the outside of the main body portion 26151. Therefore, the decorative member 15 of the general winning opening unit 26150 is suppressed from bending the direction of the player's line of sight when passing through the inclined surface 26151a.
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the positional deviation in the front-rear direction between the 4 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60. As a result, the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 26150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be combined and easily visually recognized as the decoration of 1.

Next, the game board 27013 in the 27th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 181. In the first embodiment, the case where the linear inclined surface 151a is formed at the end of the main body portion 151 of the general winning opening unit 150 has been described, but in the 27th embodiment, the main body portion 2 has been described.
The inclined surface 27151a formed at the end of the 6151 is formed in a circular arc shape recessed inward of the main body 27151. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

181 (a) and 181 (b) are cross-sectional views of the game board 27013 in the 27th embodiment. It should be noted that FIGS. 181 (a) and 181 (b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG.
Further, in FIG. 181 (a), the player places the game board 27013 at a higher position than usual (for example, in FIG. 181 (a)).
The line of sight when visually recognized from the pachinko machine 10 (viewpoint at the same height as the upper end in the gravity direction) of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is illustrated by a two-dot chain line. The line of sight when visually recognized from the position of (for example, a viewpoint having the same height as the position substantially intermediate in the gravity direction of the game board 27013) is shown by a two-dot chain line.

The game board 27013 in the 27th embodiment is the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the game board 27013 has a base plate 60 formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) arranged in an opening portion formed in the base plate 60. Be prepared. Further, the game board 27013 is a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view.
In addition to a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills for ball guidance, rails 76, 77, general winning openings 63,
The first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2) are assembled and configured, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (FIG. 1). See) attached to the back side. Further, in the 27th embodiment, the general winning opening unit 27150 is arranged in the opening portion of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 181 the general winning opening unit 27150 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 27013 in the 27th embodiment is a plate-shaped main body 27151 along the front surface of the base plate 60 and its own. A decorative member 154 arranged on the back surface side of the main body 27151 is provided.

The main body 27151 is a decorative member 15 formed of a transparent resin material and arranged on the back surface side.
The decoration of the pattern, characters, etc. (picture) of 4 can be visually recognized from the player side. In addition, the main body 271
51 has an inclined surface 27151a having an arcuate cross section whose end portion in front view is inclined toward the back surface side and is recessed toward the inside of the main body portion 27151, and a concave portion from the back surface of the main body portion 27151 toward the front side. It is mainly provided with a recess 151b to be provided.

In the inclined surface 27151a, the inclination angle θ2 with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 of the virtual line IL2 connecting the connection point with the plane on the front side of the main body 27151 and the end portion on the back side is set to be larger than 45 degrees. Will be done. As a result, the projecting distance of the inclined surface 2751a to the outside can be reduced, and it is possible to prevent the outer shape of the main body portion 27151 from becoming large.

Further, as described above, since the inclined surface 27151a is formed in a circular arc shape recessed inside the main body portion 27151, the player can use each decorative member 60c via the inclined surface 27151a.
When 154 is visually recognized, the concave shape thereof can widen the visible area of the decoration of each of the decorative members 60c and 154 via the inclined surface 27151a. That is, the main body 27151
Due to the arcuate cross-section that is recessed toward the inside of, the inclined surface 2 from each of the decorative members 60c and 154
The light incident on the 7151a can be refracted and focused toward the player's viewpoint. As a result, the patterns and characters (pictures) visually recognized through the inclined surface 27151a can be reduced, and the connection of the decorative members 60c and 154 can be made difficult for the player to understand. As a result, the misalignment of the decorative members 60c and 154 can be obscured by the player, and the player's interest can be suppressed from being impaired.

Further, the decorative member 154 disposed inside the recess 151b has a horizontal line H whose end position passes through an intermediate position between a connection point with a flat surface on the front side of the main body portion 27151 and an end portion on the back side.
It is set above R2 and on the back side of the inclined surface 27151a.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 181 (a), when the player visually recognizes the general winning opening unit 27150 and the base plate 60 from a position higher than usual on the game board 26013, the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 The incident angle when light traveling in the horizontal direction on the main body portion 26151 on the front side of the connecting portion of the above is incident on the outside of the main body portion 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a is increased. Therefore, the light traveling in the horizontal direction on the main body 27151 on the front side of the connecting portion with the decorative member 154 is easily refracted toward the viewpoint side of the player, so that the player can move the light from the normal position with respect to the game board 27013. When the general winning opening unit 27150 is visually recognized from a high position, the connecting portion of the decorative members 154 and 60c can be easily visually recognized from the front side. As a result, the decorative member 15
Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the difference in the positions of the connecting portions of the 4, 60c in the front-rear direction, the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 27150 and the decorative member 6 of the base plate 60
Combined with 0c, it can be easily seen as a decoration of 1.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 181 (b), when the player visually recognizes the general winning opening unit 27150 and the base plate 60 from the normal height of the game board 27013, it is decorated by the concave shape of the inclined surface 27151a. Since the incident angle when the light traveling in the horizontal direction on the main body 27151 on the front side of the connecting portion with the member 154 is incident on the outside of the main body 27151 from the inclined surface 27151a is approximated at a right angle, it is emitted to the outside of the main body 27151. It is possible to make it difficult to refract the light to be emitted. Therefore,
By suppressing the bending of the direction of the player's line of sight when passing through the inclined surface 27151a, the player can play a game in which the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 27150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 are displaced in the front-rear direction. It can be difficult for people to recognize. As a result, the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 27150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be combined and easily visually recognized as the decoration of 1.

Next, the game board 28013 in the 28th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (a). In the first embodiment, the case where the inner surface of the end portion of the recess 151b recessed in the main body portion 151 of the general winning opening unit 150 is parallel to the plate thickness direction of the main body portion 151 has been described. The inner surface of the end portion of the recess 28151b in the embodiment is a recessed bottom surface 151.
It is inclined inward toward the b2 side. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 182 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 28013 in the 28th embodiment. note that,
FIG. 182 (a) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Further, in FIG. 182 (a), the line of sight when the player visually recognizes the game board 28013 from a normal position (for example, a viewpoint having the same height as the substantially intermediate position in the gravity direction of the game board 28013) is a two-dot chain line. Illustrated.

The game board 28013 in the 28th embodiment is the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the game board 28013 has a base plate 60 formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) arranged in an opening portion formed in the base plate 60. Be prepared. Further, the game board 28013 is a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view.
In addition to a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills for ball guidance, rails 76, 77, general winning openings 63,
The first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2) are assembled and configured, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (FIG. 1). See) attached to the back side. Further, in the 28th embodiment, the general winning opening unit 28150 is arranged in the opening portion of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 182 (a), the base plate 6 of the game board 28013 in the 28th embodiment.
The general winning opening unit 28150 arranged on the front side of 0 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 28151 along the front surface of the base plate 60, and a decorative member 154 arranged on the back side of the main body portion 28151. ..

The main body portion 28151 is a decorative member 15 formed of a transparent resin material and arranged on the back surface side.
The decoration of the pattern, characters, etc. (picture) of 4 can be visually recognized from the player side. In addition, the main body 281
The 51 mainly includes an inclined surface 151a whose end portion is inclined toward the back surface side, and a recess 28151b whose end portion is recessed from the back surface side toward the front surface side of the main body portion 28151.

As described above, the inner side surface 28151b3 of the recess 28151b has a main body portion 2 outward from the recess bottom surface 151b2 side toward the recess opening side (from the arrow F direction side toward the arrow B direction side).
It is formed so as to be inclined toward the end side of 8151. In this case, the inclination angle θ3 with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 of the inner side surface 28151b3 in the cross section of the recess 28151b (FIG. 182).
(A)) is an inclination angle θ4 (see) with respect to the base plate 60 of the inclined surface 151a of the main body portion 151 (see).
It is set smaller than FIG. 182 (a)).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 182 (a), the player can use the inclined surface 2815 of the main body portion 28151.
When the decorative member 60c is visually recognized via 1a, the decorative position of the virtual image that is bent by passing through the main body 28151 and is visually recognized by the player, and the decorative member 60c without passing through the main body 28151.
It is possible to bring it closer to the decorative position of the real image when the image is visually recognized. That is, the decorative member 60 that is refracted and visually recognized by the inclined surface 28151a of the main body portion 28151 and the inner surface surface 28151b3 of the recess.
The position of c can be positioned on an extension of the player's line of sight. As a result, when the decorative member 60c is visually recognized by the player via the main body portion 28151, the misalignment of the decoration caused by the refraction of light can be suppressed, and the player's interest can be suppressed from being impaired.

Next, the game board 29013 according to the 29th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (b). In the 28th embodiment, the inner side surface 2915 in the cross section of the recess 29151b
The case where the inclination angle θ3 with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 of 1b3 is set to be smaller than the inclination angle θ4 with respect to the base plate 60 of the inclined surface 151a has been described, but in the 29th embodiment, the inner side surface 29151b3 in the cross section of the recess 29151b has been described. The inclination angle θ5 with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 is set to be larger than the inclination angle θ6 with respect to the base plate 60 of the inclined surface 151a. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 182 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 29013 according to the 29th embodiment. note that,
FIG. 182 (b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Further, in FIG. 182 (b), the line of sight when the player visually recognizes the game board 29013 from a normal position (for example, a viewpoint having the same height as the substantially intermediate position in the gravity direction of the game board 29013) is a two-dot chain line. Illustrated.

The game board 29013 in the 29th embodiment is the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the game board 29013 has a base plate 60 formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) arranged in an opening portion formed in the base plate 60. Be prepared. Further, the game board 29013 is a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view.
In addition to a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills for ball guidance, rails 76, 77, general winning openings 63,
The first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2) are assembled and configured, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (FIG. 1). See) attached to the back side. Further, in the 29th embodiment, the general winning opening unit 29150 is arranged in the opening portion of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 182 (b), the base plate 6 of the game board 29013 according to the 29th embodiment.
The general winning opening unit 29150 arranged on the front side of 0 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 29151 along the front surface of the base plate 60, and a decorative member 154 arranged on the back side of the main body portion 29151. ..

The main body portion 29151 is a decorative member 15 formed of a transparent resin material and arranged on the back surface side.
The decoration of the pattern, characters, etc. (picture) of 4 can be visually recognized from the player side. In addition, the main body 291
The 51 mainly includes an inclined surface 151a whose end portion is inclined toward the back surface side, and a recess 29151b whose end portion is recessed from the back surface side toward the front surface side of the main body portion 29151.

As described above, the inner side surface 29151b3 of the recess 29151b has a main body portion 2 outward from the recess bottom surface 151b2 side toward the recess opening side (from the arrow F direction side toward the arrow B direction side).
It is formed so as to be inclined toward the end side of 9151. In this case, the inclination angle θ5 with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 of the inner side surface 29151b3 in the cross section of the recess 29151b (FIG. 182).
(B)) is an inclination angle θ6 (inclination angle θ6 with respect to the base plate 60 of the inclined surface 151a of the main body 151).
It is set larger than (see FIG. 182 (b)).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 182 (b), the player can use the inclined surface 151a of the main body portion 29151.
When the decorative member 60c is visually recognized, the light emitted from the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 to the player's viewpoint through the inclined surface 151a is emitted from the inner surface 2915 of the recess 29151b.
The light can be emitted in a direction substantially orthogonal to the inclination of 1b3. Therefore, when light is incident on the inner side surface 29151b3 of the recess 29151b from the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154, it is possible to suppress the refraction of the light. As a result, the inner surface 291 of the recess 29151b
When light is incident on 51b3, the light is refracted, so that the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154
It is possible to prevent the connecting portion of the above from being visually recognized from the upper side in the direction of gravity, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 as the decoration of 1.

Further, since a predetermined gap is provided between the inner side surface 29151b3 of the recess 29151b and the end portion of the decorative member 154, it is possible to absorb the dimensional error that occurs when the decorative member 154 is formed by the gap.

Then, with reference to FIG. 183 (a), the general winning opening unit 30 in the thirtieth embodiment
150 will be described. In the 28th embodiment, the inner surface 2815 of the recess 28151b
The case where 1b3 is formed in an inclined manner has been described, but in the thirtieth embodiment, the recess 301
The inner side surface 30151b3 of 51b is formed so as to bulge inward of the recess 28151b and to be curved in a circular arc shape in cross section. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The game board 30013 in the thirtieth embodiment is the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the game board 30013 has a base plate 60 formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) arranged in an opening portion formed in the base plate 60. Be prepared. Further, the game board 30013 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view.
In addition to a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills for ball guidance, rails 76, 77, general winning openings 63,
The first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2) are assembled and configured, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (FIG. 1). See) attached to the back side. Further, in the thirtieth embodiment, the general winning opening unit 30150 is arranged in the opening portion of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

FIG. 183 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the general winning opening unit 30150 in the thirtieth embodiment. Note that FIG. 183 (a) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Further, in FIG. 183 (a), the line of sight when the player visually recognizes the game board 30013 from a normal position (for example, a viewpoint having the same height as the substantially intermediate position in the gravity direction of the game board 30013) is a two-dot chain line. Illustrated in.

As shown in FIG. 183 (a), the base plate 6 of the game board 30013 according to the thirtieth embodiment.
The general winning opening unit 30150 arranged on the front side of 0 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 30151 along the front surface of the base plate 60, and a decorative member 154 arranged on the back side of the main body portion 30151. ..

The main body portion 30151 is a decorative member 15 formed of a transparent resin material and arranged on the back surface side.
The decoration of the pattern, characters, etc. (picture) of 4 can be visually recognized from the player side. In addition, the main body 301
The 51 mainly includes an inclined surface 151a whose end portion is inclined toward the back surface side, and a recess 30151b which is recessed from the back surface side of the main body portion 30151 toward the front surface side.

The inner side surface 30151b3 of the concave portion 30151b is formed so as to be inclined outward from the concave bottom surface 151b2 side toward the concave opening side (from the arrow F direction side toward the arrow B direction side) toward the end portion side of the main body portion 30151. At the same time, it bulges in an arc shape in cross section toward the inside of the recess 30151b.
As a result, the line of sight of the player who visually recognizes the decorative member 60c through the recess 30151b can be easily directed in a direction (horizontal direction) orthogonal to the decorative surface of the decorative member 60c. As a result, the recess 30
When the decoration of the game board 30013 is visually recognized via 151b, the end portion of the decorative member 154 can be suppressed from being visually recognized, and the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 can be easily visually recognized by the player as the decoration of 1. ..

Then, referring to FIG. 183 (b), the general winning opening unit 311 in the 31st embodiment
50 will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the inclined surface 151a is formed as a surface having a linear cross section has been described, but the inclined surface 31151a in the 31st embodiment includes a plurality of recessed portions 31151a1. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 183 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the general winning opening unit 31150 in the 31st embodiment. Note that FIG. 183 (b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Further, the game board 31013 in the 31st embodiment is the same as the game board 13 in the 1st embodiment.
Includes a base plate 60 formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) arranged in an opening portion formed in the base plate 60. Also, the game board 3
The 1013 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76, 77, a general winning opening 63, and a first winning opening 64. Second winning opening 640, variable winning device 65, first through gate 66, variable display device unit 80, etc. (FIG. 2)
(See) is assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). Further, in the 31st embodiment, the general winning opening unit 31150 is arranged in the opening portion of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 183 (b), the base plate 6 of the game board 31013 according to the 31st embodiment.
The general winning opening unit 31150 disposed on the front side of 0 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 31151 along the front surface of the base plate 60, and a decorative member 154 arranged on the back surface side of the main body portion 31151.

The main body portion 31151 is a decorative member 15 formed of a transparent resin material and arranged on the back surface side.
The decoration of the pattern, characters, etc. (picture) of 4 can be visually recognized from the player side. In addition, the main body 311
The 51 mainly includes an inclined surface 31151a whose end portion is inclined toward the back surface side, and a recess 151b which is recessed from the back surface side of the main body portion 31151 toward the front surface side.

The inclined surface 31151a has a plurality of recessed portions 311 recessed in a direction orthogonal to the inclined direction thereof.
51a1 is provided. A plurality of the recessed portions 31151a1 are arranged side by side in the inclined direction of the inclined surface 31151a, and are extended along the end portion of the main body portion 31151 in the front view. As a result, it is incident on the inside of the main body 31151 and the end of the main body 31151 (inclined surface 311).
The light emitted from 51a) can be diffusely reflected. Therefore, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the decoration that is visually recognized through the inclined surface 31151a in a blurred state.

Here, since the end portion of the decorative member 154 arranged on the main body portion 31151 is arranged on the back surface side of the inclined surface 31151a as in the first embodiment, the decoration of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60
The connecting portion of the decoration of c can be visually recognized by the player in a blurred state. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the connection of each decorative member, and it is possible to easily make the player recognize the decoration of the decorative member 60c and the decoration of the decorative member 154 as one decoration.

<Adjustment means to change the flow direction by adjusting the distance between facing each other>
Then, with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186, the special winning device 32 according to the 32nd embodiment.
550 will be described. In the thirteenth embodiment, the shim member SI is sandwiched between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 to adjust the facing distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570. As described above, in the 32nd embodiment,
A case where the facing distance between the first path member 32560 and the second path member 32570 is adjusted by the screw fastening position will be described. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 184 and 185, the special winning device 32 according to the 32nd embodiment.
The configuration of 550 will be described. FIG. 184 shows the special winning device 32 in the 32nd embodiment.
It is an exploded perspective front view of 550. 185 (a) is a front view of the special winning device 32550, FIG. 185 (b) is a top view of the special winning device 32550, and FIG. 185 (c) is a top view.
It is sectional drawing of the special winning apparatus 32550 in the CLXXXVc-CLXXXVc line of FIG. 185 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 184 and 185, the special winning device 32550 according to the 32nd embodiment.
Includes a first path member 32560 disposed on the front side and a second path member 32570 disposed on the back side of the first path member 32560.

The first path member 32560 is formed of a non-light transmitting material. Further, the first path member 32
The 560 is a front plate 32564 formed in a plate shape and arranged on the front side of the game area, and a first wall portion projecting from the left and right ends of the front plate 32564 to the back side (base plate 60 side). 3256
5 and.

The front plate 32564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side of the flow path of the game ball formed between facing the second path member 32570, which will be described later, and is formed of a non-light transmitting material. As a result, the player can make the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 33550 invisible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the flow direction of the game ball inside the special winning device 33550, and to prevent the player from stopping the game.

The first wall portion 32565 is a portion connected (fastened) to the second path member 32570, and has a through hole 32565c penetrating in a circular shape in the left-right direction (plate thickness direction) and the first wall portion 32565 of 2.
One-sided protrusions 32565d, which are juxtaposed on the facing surfaces of the above and are projected in a triangular cross section.
It mainly includes an upright portion 32565e that is erected on the facing surface side of the second wall portion 32566 from both upper and lower ends of the first wall portion 32565.

The through hole 32565c is a through hole through which a screw for fastening the first path member 32560 to the second path member 32570 is inserted, and is formed at one place on each first wall portion 32565.

The one-side protrusion 32565d is a portion inserted into the other side recess 32573c of the second path member 32570 described later to position the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570, and is a portion in the front-rear direction (arrow F). -B direction) and vertical direction (arrow U-D)
It is extended in the direction.

The erection portion 32565e covers the one-side protrusion 32565d, and the player lays the one-side protrusion 325.
It is a portion that makes 65d invisible, and is set to be larger than the protrusion distance of the one-side protrusion 32565d. As a result, the position where the one-side protrusion 32565d is inserted into the other-side recess 32573c is suppressed from being visually recognized, and the position of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570 is recognized by the player. Can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from not playing the pachinko machine 10 because it is determined to be disadvantageous.

The second path member 32570 is a plate-shaped base plate 32571 facing the front plate 32564 of the first path member 32560, and the first path member 32560 from the left and right (arrow LR direction) ends of the base plate 32571. It is provided with a fourth wall portion 32573 projecting from the front plate 32564 side.

The base plate 32571 is a member that forms a throwing path for a game ball in a gap between the first path member 32560 and the front plate 32564 facing the front plate 32564, and is a member in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) of the base plate 32571 in the front view. The size is made smaller than the front plate 32564. As a result, it is possible to prevent the base plate 32571 from being visually recognized from the player side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the facing distance between the base plate 32571 and the front plate 32564 and determining that the game is advantageous or disadvantageous.

Further, the base plate 32571 has a fourth convex portion 3257 protruding toward the first path member 32560.
1b and the fifth convex portion 32571c, and the fourth convex portion 32571b and the fifth convex portion 32571.
It is provided with a sixth convex portion 32571d, which is located below c and projects from the front plate 32564 side.

The fourth convex portion 32571b and the fifth convex portion 32571c are protrusions for guiding the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 32550, and are bases from the outer side in the left-right direction (outer side in the arrow LR direction) of the base plate 32571. It is formed by inclining downward toward the center side of the plate 32571.
As a result, the fourth convex portion 3 flows down between the base plate 32571 and the front plate 32564 facing each other.
A game ball that collides with 2571b or the fifth convex portion 32571c, and the fourth convex portion 32571b thereof.
Alternatively, it can be easily flowed down in the inclined direction of the fifth convex portion 32571c.

The sixth convex portion 32571d is formed on the lower side of the fourth convex portion 32571b and the fifth convex portion 32571c described above, and is formed at a substantially central position in the left-right direction of the base plate 32571. Further, the sixth convex portion 32571d is extended in the direction of gravity. As a result, it flows down between the base plate 32571 and the front plate 32564 facing each other, and the fourth convex portion 32571b or the fifth convex portion 32571
The game ball guided by c is distributed to either the left or right side of the sixth convex portion 32571d.

The two facing fourth wall portions 32573 have a plurality of other side recesses 32573c recessed inward in the facing direction on the outer side surfaces in the facing direction, and an adjusting hole 32573 penetrating in the facing direction.
b and two fourth wall portions 32573 are formed on the inside in the opposite direction in the opposite direction, and the adjustment hole 32573 is formed.
It mainly includes a housing portion 32573d that surrounds b.

A plurality of other side recesses 32573c are juxtaposed in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) of the fourth wall portion 32573, and are extended in the gravity direction. Further, the other side recess 32573c is formed by being recessed in a substantially triangular cross section, and the cross section shape thereof is set to be substantially the same as that of the one side protrusion 32565d. As a result, the one-side protrusion 32565d is inserted into the other-side recess 32573c, and the first path member 3
The 2560 can be positioned.

The adjusting hole 32573b is a portion through which the tip of the screw through which the through hole 32565c of the first path member 32560 described above is inserted is inserted into the accommodating portion 32573d side. In addition, the adjustment hole 3257
The 3b is formed in a long hole long in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), whereby the movement of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570 is allowed.

The accommodating portion 32573d is formed in a U-shaped cross section when viewed from the front, and both ends thereof are connected to the fourth wall portion 32573. Further, the accommodating portion 32573d extends from the front surface of the base plate 32571 to the front end portion of the fourth wall portion 32573. As a result, the accommodating unit 3
In the space surrounded by 2573d, a screw plate 32590 for screwing a screw through which a through hole 32565c and an adjustment hole 32573b are inserted can be accommodated.

The screw plate 32590 is set to a size that can be inserted into the space formed by the accommodating portion 32573d, and the width dimension in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) is the front-rear direction dimension of the space formed by the accommodating portion 32573d (the width dimension in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction)). It is set to be smaller than the protrusion dimension to the front side of the fourth wall portion 32573). As a result, the screw plate 32590 can be inserted inside the accommodating portion 32573d and can be moved in the front-rear direction.

Further, the screw plate 32590 has a screw hole 32591 for screwing a screw through which a through hole 32565c and an adjustment hole 32573b are inserted, and a front-back direction (arrow FB direction) of the screw hole 32591.
Guide protrusions 3259 that are projected from both ends of the wall toward the facing surfaces of the fourth wall parts 32573.
2 and.

The screw holes 32591 are formed at two positions, and are formed side by side in the vertical direction. Also, 2
The screw hole 32591 at the location is formed at a position where the distance dimension of one screw hole 32591 from the upper end and the distance dimension of the other screw hole 32591 from the lower end are the same. As a result, when the screw groove of either one of the screw holes 32591 is crushed, the screw can be fastened by using the other screw hole 32591 by turning the screw plate 32590 upside down.

The guide protrusion 32592 is provided with a predetermined amount of protrusions from both front and rear ends on both outer sides in the left-right direction, and has an inclined surface inclined toward the screw hole 32591 side. As a result, the through hole 325
The tip of the screw through which the 65c and the adjusting hole 32573b are inserted can be guided to the screwing hole 32591. In particular, in the present embodiment, when the screw hole 32591 is damaged, a new screw hole 32591 can be used by turning it upside down. In this case, the screw hole 32 for the tip of the screw
Since the position of 591 tends to be out of alignment, the tip of the screw is screwed into the hole 32 as in the present embodiment.
The configuration guided to 591 is particularly effective.

The method of adjusting the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570 of the special winning device 32550 configured as described above is as follows: First, the through hole 3256 of the first path member 32560.
Loosen the screw that is inserted into 5c and screwed into the screw plate 32590. As a result, the second
It is assumed that the movement of the first path member 32560 is permitted with respect to the path member 32570.

Next, the first path member 32 inserted into the other side recess 32573c of the second path member 32570 by elastically deforming the first wall portion 32565 with respect to the front plate 32564 in the left-right direction.
After pulling out the one-side protrusion 32565d of the 560 from the other-side recess 32573c, adjust the position in the front-rear direction to return the elastic deformation of the first wall portion 32655 at the adjusted position and return the one-side protrusion 3 again.
2565d is inserted into the other side recess 32573c. As a result, the second path member 32570
The first path member 32560 can be temporarily fixed (positioned) with respect to the above.

Finally, it is inserted into the through hole 32565c of the first path member 32560 and the screw plate 32 is inserted.
By retightening the screw screwed into the 590, the first with respect to the second path member 32570
The adjustment of the path member 32560 is completed.

According to this, as described above, the one-side protrusion 32565d and the other-side recess 32573c are formed in a corresponding shape. Therefore, by temporarily fixing the screw and then fastening the screw, the one-side protrusion 3256
5d can be pushed into the other side recess 32573c. Therefore, the one-side protrusion 32565d can be adjusted so as to always be at the same position at each position where the other-side recess 32573c can be inserted. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of variation in the flow of the game ball depending on the operator performing the adjustment, and it is possible to simplify the adjustment.

Next, with reference to FIG. 186, the position adjustment of the second path member 32570 of the first path member 32560 will be described. FIG. 186 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device 32550.
FIG. 186 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device 32550 in the CLXXXVIb-CLXXXVIb line of FIG. 186 (a).

As shown in FIG. 186, when the first path member 32560 on the left side (arrow L direction side) is pulled out to the front side (arrow F direction side) with respect to the second path member 32570, as shown in FIG. 185. In addition, the distance between the front plate 32564 and the base plate 32571 on the left side facing each other is wider than that on the right side. In this case, the game ball flowing down between the front plate 32564 and the base plate 32571 facing each other is less likely to collide with the fourth convex portion 32571b on the left side, so that the game ball can easily flow down between the facing areas on the left side. .. As a result, the front plate 32564 and the base plate 32571
It is possible to easily eject the game ball flowing down between the opposite sides from the lower left side.

Next, the special winning device 33550 according to the 33rd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 187. In the 32nd embodiment, the case where the position of the 2nd path member 32570 with respect to the 2nd path member 32570 is adjusted in a state where the 1st wall portion 32565 of the 1st path member 32560 is elastically deformed has been described. In the form, the first wall portion 33565 is a front plate 32.
It is variably linked to 564. In addition, about the same part as each above embodiment,
The same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 187 (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the first path member 33560 in the 33rd embodiment, and FIG. 187 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device 33550. In addition, FIG. 187 (
b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 186 (c).

As shown in FIG. 187, the special winning device 33550 according to the 33rd embodiment has a first path member 33560 arranged on the front side and a second path member arranged on the back side of the first path member 33560. 32570 and.

The first path member 33560 is a front plate 33 formed in a plate shape and arranged on the front side of the game area.
564 and a first wall portion 33565 pivotally supported at the left and right ends of the front plate 33564 are provided.

The front plate 32564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side of the flow path of the game ball formed between facing the second path member 32570, which will be described later, and is formed of a non-light transmitting material. As a result, the player can make the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 33550 invisible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the flow direction of the game ball inside the special winning device 33550, and to prevent the player from stopping the game.

The holding portion 33564e is a member that holds the rod RD that pivotally supports the first wall portion 33565, which will be described later, and is set to a size that allows the rod RD to be inserted into the inner portion formed in an annular shape. Further, the holding portions 33564e are formed at two positions separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, and the axes of the annular portions of the holding portions 33564e are coaxial in the vertical direction. Further, the holding portion 33564e formed on the lower side of the two holding portions 33564e is the front plate 33564e.
It is formed at the lower end and the lower end is closed. As a result, the rod RD is held in the holding portion 3
When the rod RD is inserted inside the holding portion 33564e from the upper side of the 3564e, it is possible to prevent the rod RD from falling off (exiting) from the lower end of the holding portion 33564e.

The first wall portion 33565 is a portion connected (fastened) to the second path member 32570, and has a through hole 32565c penetrating in a circular shape in the left-right direction (plate thickness direction) and two first wall portions 325.
One-sided protrusion 32565d that is juxtaposed on the facing surface of 65 and is projected in a triangular cross section.
And the vertical section 32565e erected on the facing surface side of the second wall portion 32566 from both ends of the first wall portion 32565 (in the direction of arrow UD), and the cross-sectional annular shape on the front plate 33564 side. It is mainly provided with a shaft-mounted branch portion 33565f that protrudes into the shaft.

The shafted branch portion 33565f is a portion into which the rod RD inserted into the holding portion 33564e of the front plate 33564 described above is inserted, and the inner portion formed in an annular shape is set to a size in which the rod RD can be inserted. .. Further, the shafted branch portion 33565f is formed at two locations separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, and the axis of the annular portion of the shafted branch portion 33565f is coaxial in the vertical direction. Further, the two shafted support portions 33565f have the holding portion 335 described above between them.
A holding portion 33564e formed above the 64e is arranged.

As a result, the connection between the front plate 33564 and the first wall portion 33565 is made possible by the holding portion 33564.
By arranging e and the shafted support portion 33565f coaxially and inserting the rod RD inside the holding portion 33564e and the shafted support portion 33565f from the upper side, the front plate 3356
No. 4 is arranged with the first wall portion 33565 in a rotatable state.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 187 (b), the base plate 325 of the second path member 32570.
When the front plate 33564 of the first path member 33560 is arranged non-parallel to 71, the angle of the first wall portion 33565 can be changed and arranged with respect to the front plate 33564.

That is, in the 32nd embodiment, when the front plate 32564 of the first path member 32560 is arranged non-parallel to the base plate 32571 of the second path member 32570, the front plate 325
It is necessary to hold the first wall portion 33565 in a state of being elastically deformed with respect to 64. Further, when adjusting the position of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570, the first wall portion 32565 is elastically deformed outward in the left-right direction with respect to the front plate 32564, and the second path member 3
One side protrusion 325 of the first path member 32560 inserted into the other side recess 32573c of 2570
It is necessary to pull out 65d from the other side recess 32573c. Therefore, the front plate 32564
And the first wall portion 32565 may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the 33rd embodiment, since the first wall portion 33565 can be rotated with respect to the front plate 33564, it is not necessary to elastically deform the first path member 33560, and the front plate 33564 and the first wall It is possible to prevent the connecting portion with the portion 33565 from being damaged.

The method of adjusting the first path member 33560 with respect to the second path member 32570 of the special winning device 33550 configured as described above is as follows: First, the through hole 3256 of the first path member 33560.
Loosen the screw that is inserted into 5c and screwed into the screw plate 32590. As a result, the second
It is assumed that the movement of the first path member 33560 is permitted with respect to the path member 32570.

Next, by rotating the first wall portion 33565 outward in the left-right direction with respect to the front plate 33564, the first path member 3356 inserted into the other side recess 32573c of the second path member 32570.
After pulling out the one-side protrusion 32565d of 0 from the other-side recess 32573c, adjust the position in the front-rear direction and return the rotation of the first wall portion 33565 at the adjusted position to return the one-side protrusion 32565 again.
d is inserted into the recess 32573c on the other side. As a result, the first path member 32560 can be temporarily fixed to the second path member 32570.

Finally, it is inserted into the through hole 32565c of the first path member 33560 and the screw plate 32 is inserted.
By retightening the screw screwed into the 590, the first with respect to the second path member 32570
The adjustment of the path member 33560 is completed.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 188 to 190, the special winning device 345 according to the 34th embodiment.
50 will be described. In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the flowing direction of the game ball is adjusted by adjusting the facing distance between the front and rear plates of the special winning device 13550 has been described.
In the 34th embodiment, the flow direction of the game ball can be adjusted by changing the position of the protrusion projecting toward the inside of the flow path. In addition, about the same part as each above embodiment,
The same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the special winning device 34550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 188 and 189. FIG. 188 (a) is a front view of the game board 34013 in the 34th embodiment, and FIG. 188 (b) is a CLXXXVIIIb-CLXXXVIIIb of FIG. 188 (a).
It is sectional drawing of the game board 34013 in line. FIG. 189 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 34013.

As shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, the special winning device 34550 according to the 34th embodiment.
Is disposed above the first winning opening 64 disposed on the game board 34013. Further, in the special winning device 34550, the center line in the left-right direction of the first path member 34560 arranged on the front side is arranged in the same straight line as the center line in the left-right direction of the first winning opening 64 in the front view. ..

Further, the special winning device 34550 and the first winning opening 64 are in the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction).
It is arranged at a position separated by the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the player can visually recognize the game ball discharged from the special winning device 34550.

The special winning device 34550 is a first path member 345 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side).
60, a second path member 34570 arranged on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the first path member 34560, and a fixture 34553 screwed to the back surface side of the second path member 34570. Be prepared.

The first path member 34560 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side of the flow path of the game ball formed between facing the second path member 34570, which will be described later, and is formed of a non-light transmitting material.
As a result, the player can make the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 34550 invisible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the flow direction of the game ball inside the special winning device 34550, and to prevent the player from stopping the game.

Further, the first path member 34560 is formed in a plate shape and is arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the game area, and the front plate 34564 and the left and right end portions of the front plate 34564 to the back side (arrow). It is provided with a first wall portion 34565 erected on the B direction side).

The front plate 34564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side of the flow path of the game ball formed between facing the second path member 32570 described later, and is from the base plate 34571 of the second path member 34570 described later. However, the outer shape in front view is formed large. As a result, the front plate 3 is provided with the second path member 34570 arranged on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the first path member 34560.
It can be made difficult to see with 4564. Therefore, from the player side, the second path member 3457
It is possible to suppress the recognition of 0. Therefore, when the position of the second path member 34570 is changed, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the change.

The first wall portion 34565 is a portion to be fastened to the base plate 34060 of the game board 13, and is formed in a substantially L-shaped cross section. The vertical dimension of the first wall portion 34565 on the back side is the front plate 345.
Dimensions X3 between 64 and the fourth convex portion 34571b of the base plate 34571, which will be described later (FIG. 18).
8 (b)) is set to a value slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball.

Further, the first wall portion 34565 has a bent portion 34565 g that is bent in a direction parallel to the front surface of the base plate 34060 from the erected tip portion, and a through hole 34565 g1 that penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed in the bent portion 34565 g. NS. The through hole 34565g1 is a hole through which a screw is inserted, and by screwing the screw inserted through the through hole 34565g1 into the base plate 34060, the first through hole 34565g1 is inserted.
The path member 34560 can be fastened to the base plate 34060.

The second path member 34570 includes a plate-shaped base plate 34571 facing the front plate 34564 of the first path member 34560, and a support portion 34579 projecting from the back surface side of the base plate 34571 in a columnar shape.

The base plate 34571 is a member that forms a throwing path for a game ball in a gap between the first path member 34560 and the front plate 34564 facing the front plate 34564, and is formed at a position separated from the front plate 34564 by a predetermined amount. Further, the base plate 34571 has a fourth convex portion 345 protruding toward the front plate 34564 side.
71b is provided. As a result, it is possible to change the direction in which the game ball flowing down between the base plate 34571 and the front plate 34564 is caused to collide with the fourth convex portion 34571b and flow down.

The support portion 34579 is a portion that pivotally supports the second path member 34570, and the columnar shaft has a columnar shaft.
It is formed at a position coaxial with the axis of the base plate 34571 (center of the base plate 34571). Further, in the base plate 34060 of the game board 34013, a circular through hole 34060d is opened at a position corresponding to the support portion 34579, and the support portion 34 is inside the through hole 34060d.
579 is inserted. As a result, the second path member 34570 is pivotally supported by the base plate 34060.

The support portion 34579 has a fastening hole 34579a recessed at the tip of the protrusion. Fastening hole 345
The 79a is recessed coaxially with the axis of the support portion 34579, and the inner peripheral surface is internally threaded. As a result, the threaded portion 34553b of the fixture 34553 inserted into the through hole 34060d from the back surface side of the base plate 34060 can be screwed into the fastening hole 34579a.

The fixture 34553 is a fastening member for fastening the above-mentioned second path member 34570 to the base plate 34060 of the game board 34013, and protrudes from the operation portion 34553a formed in a columnar shape and the front side of the operation portion 34553a. It is provided with a screw portion 34553b to be provided.

The operation unit 34553a is a portion gripped by an operator who arranges the second path member 34570 on the base plate 34060, and is formed in an outer shape larger than the through hole 34060d formed in the base plate 34060. Further, the operation unit 34553a has a through hole 34 of the base plate 34060.
The outer diameter is set to be larger than the inner diameter of 060d.

As a result, when the screw portion 34553b of the fixture 34553 is screwed into the fastening hole 34579a and the second path member 34570 is arranged on the base plate 34060, the fixture 34553
Can be prevented from coming out to the front side of the base plate 34060 through the through hole 34060d.

The threaded portion 34553b is formed in a columnar shape coaxial with the axis of the operating portion 34553a, and is also formed.
Male screw processing is performed on the outer peripheral surface. As described above, the threaded portion 34553b is a portion screwed into the fastening hole 34579a of the second path member 34570, is set to have an outer diameter smaller than the through hole 34060d of the base plate 34060, and is inserted through the through hole 34060d. Is screwed into the fastening hole 34579a of the second path member 34570.

According to the special winning device 34550 configured as described above, when changing the discharging position of the game ball discharged from the special winning device 34550, the operator can use the base plate 34 of the game board 13.
A hand (arm) is inserted from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the game board 13 to the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 34060 via the first opening 60a (center frame 86) formed in 060. To access the operation unit 34553a of the fixture 34553.

Next, the operation unit 34553a is rotated to have the fastening hole 34579 of the second path member 34570.
Loosen the screw portion 34553b screwed into a. As a result, the second path member 34570 is made rotatable about the support portion 34579, and the second path member 34570 is rotated to change the position of the fourth convex portion 34571b of the second path member 34570. 4th convex part 345
When the position of 71b is changed, the position where the game ball flowing down inside the special prize device 34550 collides with the fourth convex portion 34571b is changed, so that the discharge position of the game ball discharged from the special prize device 34550 is changed. Can be changed.

In this case, as described above, the base plate 34571 of the second path member 34570 is formed in a circular shape in front view, and the support portion 34579 is formed coaxially with the axis thereof. Therefore, the second path member 34570 is rotated. In this case, it is possible to suppress the change in the arrangement of the second path member 34570 with respect to the base plate 34060 in the front view. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the second path member 34570 has been rotated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from not playing the game because it is judged to be disadvantageous.

Next, with reference to FIG. 190, a change in the ejection position of the game ball when the position of the fourth convex portion 34571b (second path member 34570) is changed will be described. FIGS. 190 (a) to 1
90 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 34010 in the CXC-CXC line of FIG. 188.

As shown in FIG. 190, the fourth convex portion 34571b has a substantially V-shaped protruding shape in front view. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 190 (a), when the bent side of the V-shape is arranged on the lower side, the game ball flowing in from above the special winning device 34550 is thrown to the central portion along the inclination of the V-shape. It can be done easily. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the flow of the game ball into the winning opening 64 arranged below the special winning device 34550.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 190 (b), when the bent side of the V-shape is arranged on the upper side, the game balls flowing in from above the special winning device 34550 are placed on the left and right ends along the inclination of the V-shape. It can be easily thrown. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to flow into the winning opening 64 arranged below the special winning device 34550.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 190 (c) and 190 (b), when the V-shaped bent side is arranged at either the left or right end, the game ball flowing in from above the special winning device 34550 is inserted. It is possible to easily throw the ball along the slope on the upper side of the V-shape, and the game ball that is thrown to the lower side of the V-shape without colliding with the upper side of the V-shape is thrown along the slope on the lower side of the V-shape. Can be done. Therefore,
The direction in which the game ball is thrown can be changed by the difference in the area where the game ball collides between the upper side of the V-shape and the lower side of the V-shape.

Although detailed description is omitted, it is also possible to arrange the bent portion of the fourth convex portion 34571b at a position other than the positions shown in FIGS. 190 (a) to 190 (d). For example, FIG.
When the second path member 34570 is rotated 10 degrees to the right in the front view from the position shown in 0 (a), the game ball flowing in from above the special winning device 34550 is made to flow down along the V-shaped inclination. Therefore, the game ball can be easily ejected from a position slightly shifted to the left side (arrow L direction side) from the upper side of the winning opening 64 arranged below the special winning device 34550.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 191 to 193, the special winning device 355 in the 35th embodiment
50 will be described. In the 34th embodiment, the case where the 2nd path member 34570 is rotated to change the position of the 4th convex portion 34571b has been described, but in the 35th embodiment, the case has been described.
The second path member 35570 is slid to change the position of the fourth convex portion 35571b. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 191 and 192, the special winning device 35 according to the 35th embodiment.
550 will be described. FIG. 191 (a) shows the game board 35013 in the 35th embodiment.
191 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 35013 in the CXCIb-CXCIb line of FIG. 191 (a). FIG. 192 is an exploded perspective view of the special winning device 35550.

As shown in FIGS. 191 and 192, the special winning device 35550 according to the 35th embodiment.
Is arranged on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the first winning opening 64 arranged on the game board 35013. Further, in the special winning device 35550, the center line in the left-right direction of the first path member 35560 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) is the same straight line in the front view as the center line in the left-right direction of the first winning opening 64. It is arranged in a shape.

Further, the special winning device 35550 and the first winning opening 64 are in the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction).
It is arranged at a position separated by the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the player can visually recognize the game ball discharged from the special winning device 35550.

The special winning device 34550 is a first path member 355 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side).
60, a second path member 35570 arranged on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the first path member 35560, and a fixture 34553 screwed to the back surface side of the second path member 35570. Be prepared.

The first path member 35560 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side of the flow path of the game ball formed between facing the second path member 35570, which will be described later, and is formed of a non-light transmitting material.
As a result, the player can make the flow direction of the game ball inside the special winning device 35550 invisible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the flow direction of the game ball inside the special winning device 35550, and to prevent the player from stopping the game.

Further, the first path member 35560 stands on the front plate 34564, which is formed in a plate shape and is arranged on the front side of the game area, and on the back side (arrow B direction side) from the left and right ends of the front plate 34564. It is provided with a first wall portion 35565 to be installed.

The front plate 35564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the flow path of the game ball formed between facing the second path member 35570 described later, and is a second path member described later. The outer shape in the front view is formed larger than that of the base plate 35571 of 35570. As a result, the second path member 35 disposed on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the first path member 35560.
The front plate 35564 can make the 570 difficult to see. Therefore, the second from the player side
It is possible to prevent the path member 35570 from being visually recognized. Therefore, when the position of the second path member 35570 is changed, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the change.

The first wall portion 35565 is a portion to be fastened to the base plate 60 of the game board 35013, and the vertical dimension of the first wall portion 34565 formed in a substantially L-shaped cross section is the front plate 3556.
Dimension X4 between facing 4 and the fourth convex portion 35571b of the base plate 35571 described later (FIG. 191).
(B)) is set to a value slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball.

Further, the first wall portion 35565 has a bent portion 35565 g that is bent in a direction parallel to the front surface of the base plate 60 from the erected tip portion, and penetrates the bent portion 35565 g in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). A through hole 35565 g1 is formed, and a recessed portion 35565 g2 is formed which is recessed from the back surface of the bent portion 35565 g toward the front side (arrow F direction side).

The through hole 35565g1 is a hole through which a screw is inserted, and the first path member 35560 can be fastened to the base plate 60 by screwing the screw inserted through the through hole 35565g1 into the base plate 60.

The recessed portion 35565 g2 is a portion for accommodating both left and right (arrow LR direction side) ends of the base plate 35571 of the second path member 35570 described later inward, and is recessed from the base end of the bent portion 35565 g. , Is recessed in the central portion in the vertical direction of the bent portion 35565 g. As a result, when the left and right ends of the base plate 35571 are housed inside the recessed portion 35565 g2, the left and right ends of the base plate 35571 can be hidden by the bent portion 35365 g. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the position of the base plate 35571. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from not playing the game because it is judged to be disadvantageous.

Further, the recessed dimension of the recessed portion 35565 g2 is set to a depth dimension larger than the plate thickness of the base plate 35571, and the distance between the left and right ends of the bent portion 35565 g is X5 (FIG. 191).
(B)) is set to be larger than the width dimension X6 in the left-right direction of the base plate 35571 (see FIG. 191 (b)). As a result, the base plate 35571 (second path member 35570) can be displaced in the left-right direction. The base plate 35571 (second path member 3557)
The displacement method of 0) will be described later.

The second path member 35570 is projected from the plate-shaped base plate 35571 facing the front plate 35564 of the first path member 35560 and the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 35571 in a rectangular shape in the rear view. A support portion 35579 is provided.

The base plate 35571 is a member that forms a throwing path for a game ball in a gap between the first path member 35560 facing the front plate 35564, and is formed at a position separated from the front plate 35564 by a predetermined amount. Further, the base plate 35571 includes a fourth convex portion 35571b projecting toward the front plate 35564 side (arrow F direction side). As a result, the base plate 35571 and the front plate 3556
It is possible to change the direction of flow by causing the game ball flowing down between the facing surfaces of 4 to collide with the fourth convex portion 35571b.

The support portion 35579 is a portion that pivotally supports the second path member 35570, and is a base plate 345.
A columnar shaft is formed at a position coaxial with the shaft of 71 (center of the base plate 34571).
Further, in the base plate 60 of the game board 34013, a long hole-shaped sliding hole 35060e that is long in the left-right direction is opened at a position corresponding to the support portion 35579, and the support portion 35579 is inserted inside the sliding hole 35060e. NS. As a result, the second path member 35570 is supported by the base plate 60.

The sliding hole 35060e is set to have a width dimension in the lateral direction (arrow UD direction) substantially the same as the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) dimension of the support portion 35579, and the left and right sides of the support portion 35579. The width dimension in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) is set larger than the direction (arrow LR direction) dimension. As a result, the support portion 35579 inserted inside the sliding hole 35060e can be slidable in the longitudinal direction of the sliding hole 35060e.

Further, the support portion 35579 is provided with a fastening hole 35579a recessed at the tip of the protrusion. The fastening hole 35579a can be internally threaded on the inner peripheral surface, and the threaded portion 34553b of the fixture 34553 can be screwed into the fastening hole 35579a. In addition, the protrusion dimension of the support part 34579 is
It is set smaller than the thickness dimension of the base plate 60, and the fixture 34 is set in the fastening hole 35579a.
By screwing the threaded portion 34553b of 553, the second path member 35570 is attached to the base plate 6
It can be fixed at 0.

According to the special winning device 35550 configured as described above, when changing the discharging position of the game ball discharged from the special winning device 35550, the operator is formed on the base plate 60 of the game board 35013. Game board 3501 via 1 opening 60a (center frame 86)
A hand (arm) is inserted from the front side (arrow F direction side) of 3 into the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 60 to access the operation unit 34553a of the fixture 34553.

Next, the operation unit 34553a is rotated to have the fastening hole 35579 of the second path member 35570.
Loosen the screw portion 34553b screwed into a. As a result, the second path member 35570 is brought into a state where it can be slidably displaced in the left-right direction, and the second path member 35570 is slid and displaced to change the position of the fourth convex portion 35571b of the second path member 35570. 4th convex part 3557
When the position of 1b is changed, the position where the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 35550 collides with the fourth convex portion 35571b is changed, so that the discharging position of the game ball discharged from the special winning device 35550 is changed. Can be changed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 193, a change in the ejection position of the game ball when the position of the fourth convex portion 35571b (second path member 35570) is changed will be described. FIGS. 193 (a) to 1
93 (c) is the game board 3501 on the CXCIII-CXCIII line of FIG. 191 (b).
3 is a cross-sectional view of 3. In FIGS. 193 (a) to 193 (c), the position of the second path member 35570 in FIG. 193 (b) is used as a reference position, and in FIG. 193 (a), the second path member 35570 is in front of the reference position. The state of being displaced to the left side of the view is illustrated, and in FIG. 193 (c), the state of the second path member 35570 being displaced from the reference position to the right side of the front view (the side in the direction of arrow R) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 193, in the fourth convex portion 35571b, the protruding shape in the front view is formed in a substantially V shape, and the game ball flowing in from above the special winning device 35550 is centered along the V-shaped inclination. Guided to the portion (V-shaped bent portion).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 193 (b), when the V-shaped bent portion of the fourth convex portion 35571b is arranged above the first winning opening 64, it is discharged from below the special winning device 35550. It is possible to easily flow the game ball into the first winning opening 64.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 193 (a) and 193 (c), when the second path member 35570 is moved from the reference position (the position shown in FIG. 193 (b)), the V of the fourth convex portion 35571b
Since the bent portion of the character is arranged at a position shifted to the left or right from the upper part of the first winning opening 64, the special winning device 3555 is compared with the case where the second path member 35570 is arranged at the reference position.
The game ball discharged from below 0 is less likely to flow into the first winning opening 64.

Next, the special winning device 36550 according to the 36th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 194. In the first embodiment, the first unit 5 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60
The case where the 51 is fastened to the second unit 552 arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 and held in a state of being urged toward the back side of the base plate 60 has been described. In the embodiment, the first unit 36551 is urged toward the back surface side of the base plate 60 by the elastic recovery force of the fastening portion 36551b formed in the first unit 36551. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 194 (a) is an exploded perspective front view schematically showing the game board 36013 in the 36th embodiment, and FIG. 194 (b) is a sectional schematic view of the game board 36013. In addition, FIG.
94 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 194, the special winning device 36550 according to the 36th embodiment is slidably displaced from the inside of the first opening 60a in which the center frame 86 is arranged, and the base plate 6 is displaced.
It is formed from the first unit 36551 arranged at 0.

The first unit 36551 is provided with a space in which a game ball can be thrown, and the space is arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 60. As a result, the game ball flowing down the front surface of the base plate 60 can flow into the inside of the first unit 36551. Also, the first
The unit 36551 includes a fastening portion 36551b projecting from a side surface (rear surface) adjacent to the front surface of the base plate 60 toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side).

The fastening portion 36551b is a portion through which a screw for fastening the first unit 36551 to the base plate 60 is inserted, and is projected toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side) and the base plate 60.
The tip of the protrusion is bent in the direction parallel to the back surface of the.

Further, the fastening portion 36551b has a bulging portion 36551b2 that bulges toward the front side (arrow F direction side) on the side surface on the bending side thereof, and a plate thickness direction (arrow FB) toward the bending tip side of the bulging portion 36551b2. A through hole 36551b1 penetrating in the direction) is provided.

Further, the fastening portion 36551b has a distance dimension X7 from the base end (the back surface of the first unit 36551) to the front surface of the bent portion when the first unit 36551 is not mounted on the base plate 60 (see FIG. 194 (b)). However, it is set to be larger than the thickness dimension of the base plate 60.
Further, the fastening portion 36551b has a distance dimension X8 (FIG. 194) from the base end (rear surface of the first unit 36551) to the bulging tip position of the bulging portion 36551b2 when the first unit 36551 is not mounted on the base plate 60. (B)) is set to be the same as or slightly smaller than the thickness dimension of the base plate 60.

When a screw is fastened to the through hole 36551b1, the bulging portion 36551b2 presses (forces) the first unit 36551 against the back surface side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 60 to force the screw to be fastened. It is a portion to be converted into, and is formed between the base end of the bent portion of the fastening portion 36551b and the through hole 36551b1.

As a result, when the screw through which the fastening portion 36551b is inserted is fastened to the back surface of the base plate 60, the bulging portion 36551b2 comes into contact with the back surface of the base plate 60, so that the gap between the bent portion and the base plate 60 is divided. , The force of pushing the bent tip side toward the base plate 60 side by the screw can be converted into the force of pulling out the base end side of the bent portion toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side). As a result, it is possible to prevent the formation of a gap between the back surface of the first unit 36551 and the front surface of the base plate 60.

As a result, it is not necessary to fasten the screw through which the first unit 36551 is inserted to the base plate 60 from the front side, and it is possible to easily form the first unit 36551 by the amount of the fastening allowance. Further, in the 36th embodiment, the first unit 36551 is attached to the base plate 60 by using the first opening 60a to which the center frame 86 is fastened, so that the first unit 3 is attached.
The 6551 can be easily mounted in the first opening 60a of the base plate 60 by sliding displacement.

Next, the special winning device 37550 according to the 37th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 195. In the first embodiment, the first unit 5 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60
The case where the 51 is fastened to the second unit 552 arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 and held in a state of being urged toward the back side of the base plate 60 has been described. In the embodiment, the first unit 37551 is fastened by a screw inserted from the back surface side of the base plate 60, and is held in a state of being urged toward the back surface side of the base plate 60. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 195 (a) is an exploded perspective front view schematically showing the game board 37013 in the 37th embodiment, and FIG. 195 (b) is a sectional schematic view of the game board 37013. In addition, FIG.
95 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 36 (b).

As shown in FIG. 195, the special winning device 37550 according to the 37th embodiment is formed from the first unit 37551 arranged in front of the base plate 60.

The first unit 37551 is provided with a space in which a game ball can be thrown, and the space is arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 60. As a result, the game ball flowing down the front surface of the base plate 60 can flow into the inside of the first unit 37551. Also, the first
The unit 37551 has a plurality of annular convex portions 3 projecting in an annular shape on the back surface side (arrow B direction side).
7551b is provided.

The annular convex portion 37551b is a portion for screwing a screw inserted from the back surface side of the base plate 60, and a female screw is processed on the inner peripheral surface. In this embodiment, the annular convex portions 37551b are formed at four locations on the back surface of the first unit 37551.

Further, a concave portion 37060d recessed in a circular shape is formed in the base plate 60 at a position facing the annular convex portion 37551b. The concave portion 37060d is a portion for inserting the annular convex portion 37551b inward, and is formed to have an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the annular convex portion 37551b. Further, the recessed depth of the recess 37060d is set to be larger than the protrusion dimension of the annular convex portion 37551b.

Further, on the bottom surface of the recessed recess 37060d, a through hole 37060d1 formed through the concave surface in a circular shape on the same axis is formed. The through hole 37060d1 has an annular convex portion 3755.
It is a hole through which the tip of a screw screwed into 1b is inserted, and is formed in an opening having an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the recess 37060d. Thereby, the screw can be fastened to the first unit 37551 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 60 from the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 60.

In this case, as described above, the recessed depth of the concave portion 37060d is set to be larger than the protrusion dimension of the annular convex portion 37551b. Therefore, by screwing the screw into the annular convex portion 37551b, the annular ring is formed. The first unit 37551 can be arranged on the base plate 60 in a state where the convex portion 37551b (first unit 37551) is urged toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side). As a result, it is possible to prevent the formation of a gap between the back surface of the first unit 37551 and the front surface of the base plate 60.

As a result, it is not necessary to fasten the screw through which the first unit 37551 is inserted to the base plate 60 from the front side, and it is possible to easily form the first unit 37551 by the amount of the fastening allowance. Further, in the 37th embodiment, since the fastening portion of the first unit 37551 can be accommodated inside the recess 37060d of the base plate 60, the first unit 37551 can be accommodated by that amount.
It is possible to increase the space for throwing the game ball formed in.

<Change the amount of light emitted to the front side depending on the game ball>
Then, with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197, the lower displacement member 384 in the 38th embodiment.
40 will be described. In the eleventh embodiment, a case where a shadow is formed at the position of the game ball accommodated in the lower displacement member 11440 by the light emitted from the control board 491 and the position of the game ball is recognized at the position of the shadow will be described. However, the lower displacement member 11 in the 38th embodiment
The 440 reflects the light emitted from the control board 491 on the outer surface of the game ball, and recognizes the position of the game ball at a position where the amount of light is increased. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 196 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 38440 according to the 38th embodiment.
197 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 38440, and FIG. 197 (b) is FIG. 197.
(A) is a sectional view of the lower displacement member 38440 in the CXCVIIb-CXCVIIb line, and FIG. 197 (c) is a sectional view of the lower displacement member 38440 in the CXCVIIc-CXCVIIc line of FIG. 197 (a). In addition, in FIG. 197 (a), the front side decorative member 384
The state in which 51 and the front case 38481 are removed is shown, and the front case 38 is shown.
The LED 38483b arranged in 481 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line. In addition, FIG. 197 (b)
Further, in FIG. 197 (c), a state in which the front side decorative portion 451 is attached is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 196 and 197, the lower displacement member 38440 in the 38th embodiment is a base member 470 connected to a front base 411 (see FIG. 46) and a base member 4 thereof.
A case member 38480 that covers both sides of the 70 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), a transmission mechanism 460 that is displaceably arranged between the case member 38480 and the base member 470, and a case member 38480 that covers the front and back. It is mainly provided with a decorative member 11450 formed in an embodiment.

The case member 38480 is a member that covers both sides of the base member 470 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and is arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member 470.
It mainly includes an 8488 and a back case 482 arranged on the back side (the side in the direction of arrow B).

The front case 38481 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular front view. In addition, the front case 38
The 481 has an opening 481a that extends in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) at a substantially intermediate position in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) and a bottom wall portion that protrudes from the lower end surface on the back surface side (arrow B direction side). 481b, a shaft hole 481c penetrating the lower end in the front-rear direction, and an LED substrate 38 arranged on the back side.
Mainly equipped with 483.

The LED substrate 38483 is a member that emits light inside the lower displacement member 38440 (front case 38481), and has a plate-shaped main body portion 38483a and a main body portion 38483a thereof.
A plurality of LEDs 38483b, which are arranged in the above and irradiate light, are provided.

The main body portion 38483a is a base on which wiring for conducting electricity is laid through a plurality of LEDs 38483b, and extends in the displacement direction (arrow LR direction) of the ball receiving portion 467. Multiple LEDs 384
The 83b are arranged at predetermined intervals in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the main body portion 38483a.

Further, each LED 38483b is set in a direction toward the center of the game ball when the game ball passes through the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of each LED 38483b. As a result, each LED 38
When the game ball is located on the back side of the 483b, the light of the LED can be reflected on the outer surface of the game ball to irradiate the front side decorative portion 11451. Therefore, as described above, since the front side decoration portion 11451 includes the transmission portion 11451b capable of transmitting light, the light reflected by the outer surface of the game ball and irradiated to the front side decoration portion 11451 is transmitted to the transmission portion 11451b. It can be emitted to the player side (arrow F direction side) through the light. Therefore, the amount of light visually recognized from the player side through the transmission portion 11451b can be increased in the portion reflected by the game ball as compared with the other portions. As a result, by increasing (changing) the amount of light, the player can be made to recognize the position of the game ball thrown inside the lower displacement member 38440.

In this embodiment, the interval at which the plurality of LEDs 38483b are arranged is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, even when the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced, at least a part of the game ball can be irradiated with the light emitted from the LED 38483b. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 38483b can always irradiate the game ball received by the ball receiving unit 467.

Further, according to the 38th embodiment, the base member 470, the transmission mechanism 460, and the back case 482 arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the LED 38483b are preferably members having a high light absorption rate. For example, the outer surface of each member constitutes a black color scheme. According to this, LED
It is possible to suppress that the light emitted from 38483b is reflected inside the case member 38480 (lower displacement member 38440) and emitted from the transmissive portion 11451b of the front side decorative portion 11451. As a result, it is possible to increase the difference in the amount of light emitted between the front surface on which the game ball is placed and the other front surface, and the player recognizes the position of the game ball received inside the lower displacement member 39440. It can be made easier.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199, the lower displacement member 3944 in the 39th embodiment.
0 will be described. In the 38th embodiment, the case where the game ball reflects light to make the player recognize the position where the game ball is arranged has been described, but in the 39th embodiment, the ball receiving portion 3 has been described.
The light is reflected by the reflective member arranged on the 9467 to recognize the position of the game ball. note that,
The same parts as those of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 198 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 39440 according to the 39th embodiment.
199 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 39440, and FIGS. 199 (b) and 199.
(C) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 39440. In addition, FIG. 199 (b) and FIG. 199 (
c) corresponds to the cross section of FIG. 198 (c).

As shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, the lower displacement member 39440 in the 39th embodiment is a base member 470 connected to a front base 411 (see FIG. 46) and a base member 4 thereof.
A case member 38480 that covers the front and back of the 70, a transmission mechanism 39460 that is displaceably arranged between the case member 38480 and the base member 470, and a decorative member 11450 that is arranged so as to cover the front and back of the case member 38480. , Equipped with.

The transmission mechanism 39460 is a member arranged on the front side of the base member 470, and is a drive motor KM2 in which a transmission gear 461, 462, 463 and a shaft portion are connected to the transmission gear 461.
A movable rack 464 having a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463 and rotatably arranged on the front side of the base member 470 so as to be slidably displaceable, and a rack gear 476 that is rotatably arranged on the movable rack 464. A transmission gear 465 in a state of being meshed with each other, a rack 39466 having a tooth surface meshed with the transmission gear 465 and displaced on the front side of the movable rack 464 so as to be slidable, and a rack 39466 thereof. Ball receiving portion 39467 rotatably arranged on one end side
It is formed mainly with and.

The rack 39466 is formed of a horizontally long rod-shaped body having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a rack gear 466a engraved on the upper end surface, a shaft portion 39466b which protrudes in a columnar shape from the other end to the front side, and a shaft portion 39466b which protrudes to the front side. It is mainly provided with two sliding plates 466c and a recessed portion 466d recessed from one end to the other end on the back surface side.

The shaft portion 39466b is a protrusion inserted into the shaft hole 467b of the ball receiving portion 39467, which will be described later, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b. As a result, the ball receiving unit 4
67 can be held rotatably.

The ball receiving portion 39467 is connected to the first piece 39467c formed by bending in a substantially L-shape in the front view, the second piece 39467d connected to the first piece 39467c, and the second piece 39467d. It includes a third piece 39467e arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d.

The first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d are portions for holding the game ball thrown inside the lower displacement member 39440 from the opening 451a (see FIG. 57), and the first piece 39467c.
When the game ball is thrown between the opposite pieces of the second piece 39467d, the second piece 39467d is displaced in the direction away from the first piece 39467c, and a part of the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39
The 467d and the 467d are arranged in a U shape in front view, and the game ball can be held in the inner portion of the U shape.

The first piece 39467c includes a receiving piece 39467c4 forming an L-shape in a front view, a leg portion 467a forming the other extending side, and a receiving piece 39467c4 and a leg portion 467a. An annular bent portion 39467c5 in which a shaft hole 467b penetrating in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) is formed in the connecting portion (bending portion), and a connecting portion 39467c1 projecting to the opposite side with the bent portion 39467c5 sandwiched between them. And prepare.

The receiving piece 39467c4 is a portion forming the side surface of the other side (arrow R direction side) formed in a U shape in front view by the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d, and is formed in a crescent shape in the front. It is formed in a curved shape that is concave in the direction away from the second piece 39467d.

The connecting portion 39467c1 is projected from two positions at a predetermined interval in the axial direction (arrow FB direction) of the bent portion 39467c5. Further, the connecting portion 39467c1 is a second piece 3 described later.
It is a portion that connects 9467d and the third piece 39467e, and includes a connecting hole 39467c2 that extends along the axial direction of the shaft hole 467b and is opened in a circular cross section.

The connecting hole 39467c2 is a shaft portion 39467e projecting from a third piece 39467e, which will be described later.
The opening into which 3 is inserted. The connecting hole 39467c2 has a shaft portion 39467e3 inserted into the insertion hole 39467d3 formed in the second piece 39467d, which will be described later, on the front side (arrow F direction side).
Is inserted from. Further, the shaft portion 39467e3 is fastened by a screw inserted from the side opposite to the insertion side (arrow B direction side) of the connecting hole 39467c2. As a result, the first piece 39467
The second piece 39467d and the third piece 39467e can be fastened to c.

Further, the first piece 39467c is provided with a recess 39467c3 that is recessed downward in the gravity direction (arrow D direction side) on the projecting base end side of the connecting portion 39467c1. The concave bottom surface of the recess 39467c3 is formed at the lowest position (bottom) of the side surface where the game ball is held by the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d. As a result, the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d
The game ball held in is rolled inside the recess 39467c3. As a result, the load of the game ball can easily displace the second piece 39467d with respect to the first piece 39467c.

The second piece 39467d is the receiving portion 39467c4 and the second piece 394 of the first piece 39467c.
It is a part that forms the side surface of the other side (arrow L direction side) formed by 67d in a U shape in the front view, is formed in a crescent shape in the front view, and is concave in the direction away from the first piece 39467c. It is formed into a curved shape. Further, the second piece 39467d is the first piece 39467c.
An insertion hole 39467d3 that opens in a circular shape in the front-rear direction in the connecting portion of the above, and a concave portion 39467d2 that is recessed in a circular shape from the front side (arrow F direction side) to the back side (arrow B direction side). Mainly prepare.

The second piece 39467d has a shaft portion 3946 of the third piece 39467e in the insertion hole 39467d3.
7e3 is inserted, and the connecting shaft 39467e of the third piece 39467e is inserted into the recessed portion 39467d2.
4 is inserted. Therefore, when the second piece 39567d is displaced, the third piece 39467e is also displaced as well. Therefore, when the second piece 39567d is rotationally displaced with respect to the first piece 39467c, the third piece 39567e is also rotationally displaced with respect to the first piece 39467c.

Further, the second piece 39467d is a connecting portion 39 projecting from two places of the first piece 39467c.
It is disposed between the opposite sides of 467c1 and is connected to the first piece 39467c. As a result, the second
When the piece 39467d is twisted in the axial direction of the insertion hole 39467d3, the connecting portion 39467c
It is possible to prevent the shaft portion 39467e3 from breaking by bringing the second piece 39467d into contact with the side surface on the opposite side of 1.

The recessed portion 39467d2 is a hole for inserting the connecting shaft 39467e4 of the third piece 39467e, which will be described later, and is recessed in substantially the same shape as the connecting shaft 39467e4.

The third piece 39467e includes a reflector 39467e1 formed in the shape of a semi-circular plate in front view, and the third piece 39467e.
Shaft portion 394 projecting from the reflector 39467e1 toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side)
It includes 67e3 and a connecting shaft 39467e4.

The reflector 39467e1 is formed of a resin material and has an outer surface coated with plating. As a result, when the reflector 39467e1 is irradiated with the light emitted from the LED 38483b, the light can be reflected on the outer surface thereof. Further, the reflector 39467e1 is
The whole is formed by being curved in an arc shape toward the front side (arrow F direction side). As a result, when the light emitted from the front side is reflected, the light can be focused on a predetermined portion. The shielding of light by the light emitter 11491a by the reflector 39467e1 will be described later.

As described above, the shaft portion 39467e3 is a cylindrical body inserted into the connecting hole 39467c2 of the first piece 39467c and the insertion hole 39467d3 of the second piece 39467d. In addition, the shaft portion 3
In the protruding tip surface of 9467e3, a connecting hole 394 is formed from the side opposite to the insertion side of the shaft portion 39467e3.
A hole is formed in which the screw to be inserted into 67c2 can be screwed. Therefore, with the shaft portion 39467e3 inserted into the connecting hole 39467c2 and the insertion hole 39467d3, the shaft portion 39467e3
By fastening a screw to the insertion tip surface of, the first piece 39467c, the second piece 39467d and the third piece 39467e can be connected, and the third piece 39467e can be connected to the first piece 3946.
It can be made rotatable with respect to 7c.

As described above, the connecting shaft 39467e4 has a recessed portion 39467d of the second piece 39467d.
It is inserted in 2. As a result, the second piece 39467d has the shaft portion 3 with respect to the first piece 39467c.
When rotationally displaced around 9467e3, the connecting shaft 39467e4 can be displaced with the displacement of the second piece 39467d. Therefore, the third piece 39467e is replaced with the second piece 39467.
It can be displaced with the displacement of d.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 199, when the ball receiving portion 39467 receives the game ball between the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d facing each other, the accepted game ball is the first piece 3
The receiving surface (inner side surface formed in a U-shape in front view) of the 9467c and the second piece 39467d is rolled and guided to the recess 39467c3 located at the lowermost end of the receiving surface. This will result in
On the outer surface of the game ball, the second piece 39467d can be rotated around the shaft portion 39467e3 in a direction away from the first piece 39467c. As a result, the third piece 39467e, which moves with the displacement of the second piece 39467d, can be displaced upward and placed on the light irradiation of the LED 38483b.

Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 38483b is reflected by the reflector 394 of the third piece 39467e.
Reflected by 67e1 on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the lower displacement member 39440, the transmission portion 1
It can be emitted from 1451b. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the transmission portion 11451b can be partially increased so that the player can recognize the position of the game ball thrown into the lower displacement member 39440.

Further, in the second piece 39467d, the connecting shaft 39467e4 is inserted into the recessed portion 39467d2, and the load of the third piece 39467e is always applied. The center of gravity G of the third piece 39467e is set on the opposite side of the connecting portion with the second piece 39567d and the third piece 39567e with the shaft portion 394673e interposed therebetween. As a result, in a state where no force other than gravity acts on the second piece 39467d and the third piece 39467de, the load of the third piece 39467e causes the second piece 39.
The 467e can be rotated to the first piece 39467c4 side.

Therefore, when the game ball is ejected (taken out) from the ball receiving portion 39467, the third piece 394
The load of 67e can displace the second piece 39467d toward the ball receiving piece 39467c4 of the first piece 39467c. Therefore, only when the game ball is received by the ball receiving portion 39467, the amount of light reflected by the reflector 39467e1 and emitted from the transmitting portion 11451b can be partially increased. As a result, it is possible to suppress the reflection of light by the reflector 39467e1 due to the positioning operation of the ball receiving portion 39467 or the like.

Further, the ball receiving portion 39467 is rotated around the shaft hole 39467b by the operation of sliding displacement inside the lower displacement member 39440, similarly to the ball receiving portion 467 in the first embodiment, and the lower displacement member 39440 is emitted. The game ball received from the opening 471 (see FIG. 66) is discharged to the outside.

Here, as a structure for discharging the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 39467, the ball receiving portion 39
In the structure in which the ball receiving portion 39467 is rotated around the shaft hole 467b with the slide movement of the 467, the ball receiving portion 39 centering on the shaft hole 467b is caused by the sliding speed of the ball receiving portion 39467.
The rotation speed of 467 is changed. Therefore, since the rotation speed depends only on the slide speed of the ball receiving portion 39467, there is a problem that the discharging speed of the game ball from the ball receiving portion 39467 is not stable.

On the other hand, in the 39th embodiment, the load of the third piece 39467e causes the second piece 39467.
Since the direction in which d rotates and the rotation direction of the ball receiving portion 39467 about the shaft hole 467b when the game ball is ejected are set in substantially the same direction, the game ball emitted from the exit opening 471 is set to substantially the same direction. A driving force can be applied when the second piece 39467d is displaced. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 394
Even if the force acting on the game ball from the ball receiving portion 39467 when the game ball is ejected from the exit opening 471 by displacing the 67 is reduced, the speed of the game ball to be emitted can be maintained. As a result, the ejection speed of the game ball emitted from the ball receiving portion 39467 can be stabilized.

Next, the first unit 40551 in the 40th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 200. In the first embodiment, the case where the game ball is notified when the curved portion 581a of the main path SK1 is clogged has been described, but in the 40th embodiment, the game ball having a size other than the specified size is the main path. Fraud can be notified when passing through SK1. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 200 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 40551 in the 40th embodiment, and FIG. 200 (b) is a diagram of the first unit 405 in the CCb-CCb line of FIG. 200 (a).
It is a schematic cross-sectional view of 51. The cross-sectional view of FIG. 200 (a) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 25.

As shown in FIG. 200, the first unit 40551 in the 40th embodiment is on the front side (
The first path member 560 arranged on the side facing the arrow F, the second path member 570 arranged on the back surface side (the side in the direction of arrow B) of the first path member 560, and the second path member 570 thereof. A third path member 40580, which is arranged on the back surface of the above, is mainly provided.

The third path member 40580 includes a first covering member 40581 arranged on the back surface of the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the second path member 570 and a lower side (arrow D direction side) of the second path member 570. A second lining member 582 (see FIG. 19), a first lining member 40581, and a second lining member arranged on the back surface of the above.
Mainly, a first drive unit 583 (see FIG. 19) arranged between the lining members 582 and a second drive unit 584 (see FIG. 19) arranged on the back surface of the second lining member 582. It is configured in preparation for.

The first covering member 40581 is a member that forms a throwing path of a game ball that curves in a substantially U shape toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side), and is a member that forms a throwing path of a game ball, and is a back surface side of the first opening portion 571a and the fourth opening portion 571d. A curved portion 40581a connecting the two, and a plate-shaped mounting portion 4 connected to the lower side of the curved portion 40581a.
Mainly equipped with 0581b.

The curved portion 40581a includes a first opening portion 571a and a fourth opening portion 571d (second path member 5).
70) The side is formed by being curved in a U-shaped cross section with an open cross section, and the first rolling portion 576 is arranged inside the curved cross section. Further, the curved portion 40581a is formed so that the width dimension in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) becomes smaller toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side), and the width dimension in the left-right direction in the curved portion having a U-shaped cross section. X10 (see FIG. 200 (a)) is formed to have a size of 1.1 times or less the diameter of the game ball. As a result, when a game ball having a diameter 1.1 times or more the diameter of the specified game ball is thrown, the game ball can be stopped inside the curved portion 40581a (main path SK1).

Further, the curved portion 40581a is arranged inside the recess 86b2 (see FIG. 17) of the center frame 86, similarly to the curved portion 581a in the first embodiment. Therefore, the curved portion 40
The gaming ball stopped inside the 581a can be detected by the detection device 86b3 (see FIG. 17), and the pachinko machine 10 can be notified of an error (illegal).

Further, the curved portion 40581a has an opening 40581a1 that opens in a curved portion having a U-shaped cross section, and a box-shaped housing portion 4 that opens upward from an end portion on the back side of the opening 40481a1.
It is provided with 0581a2.

The opening 40581a1 is an opening for discharging a ball having a diameter smaller than the diameter of the specified game ball from the main path SK1, and the opening size X15 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) (FIG. 200 (FIG. 200).
a)) is formed to a size larger than 0.9 times the diameter of the game ball. The opening 40
The 581a1 is formed on the back surface side of the curved portion 40581 which is the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the first rolling portion 576, and the game ball passing through the main path SK1 can be sent to the opening 40581a1. .. As a result, when a game ball having a diameter smaller than the specified game ball by 0.9% or more is thrown, the game ball can be discharged from the opening 40581a1 to the outside of the main path SK1.

The accommodating portion 40581a2 is a box for accommodating the game ball discharged from the opening 40581a1, and the inner space is formed to have a size larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the opening 40
The game balls discharged from 581a1 can be housed in the storage section 40581a2, and the housed game balls can be detected by the detection device 86b3 to notify the pachinko machine 10 of an error (illegal).

In the 40th embodiment, the case where the width dimension X10 and the opening dimension X11 are formed in different sizes of 0.1 times the game ball having the specified diameter (11 mm) has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to, and the magnification of the size with respect to the game ball may be changed.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 201 and 202, the first unit 415 in the 41st embodiment
51 will be described. In the first embodiment, the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i and the third recess 571j formed in the main path SK2, the curved path WK1 and the main path SK3 move up and down (arrows) about the curved portion of the curved path WK1. The case where the object is formed substantially in the U-D direction) has been described, but the first recess 41571h and the second recess 41571i in the 41st embodiment have been described.
The third recess 41571j is formed in a different shape, and the same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 201 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 41551 in the 41st embodiment, and FIG. 201 (b) is the first unit 4 in the CCIb-CCIb line of FIG. 201 (a).
It is a schematic cross-sectional view of 1551. FIG. 202 (a) shows CCIIa-CCI of FIG. 201 (a).
It is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 41551 in line Ia, and FIG. 202 (b) is FIG. 20
1 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 41551 in the CCIIb-CCIIb line.

As shown in FIGS. 201 and 202, the first unit 41551 in the 41st embodiment.
Is disposed on the back surface of the first path member 41560 disposed on the front side, the second path member 41570 disposed on the back surface side of the first path member 41560, and the second path member 41570. It is mainly provided with a third path member 580 (see FIG. 19).

The first path member 41560 has a front plate 41564 formed in a plate shape along the front surface of the game area of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) and a substantially U-shaped cross section opened on the upper side (arrow U direction side). The first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562, and the third receiving portion 563, which are formed in the front plate 41564 and project from the upper end (arrow U direction side) end to the back side (arrow B direction side). (See Figure 21),
The lower side (arrow D direction side) of the first receiving unit 561, the second receiving unit 562, and the third receiving unit 563.
The first wall portion 41565 extending along the end of a part of the front plate 41564 and the first wall portion 565 formed below the first wall portion 565, which are formed at predetermined intervals. It mainly includes two sets of second wall portions 566 and third wall portions 567 (see FIG. 21) that are projected from two locations.

The front plate 41564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the flow path of the game ball formed between the second path member 41570 and the third path member 580, which will be described later.
It is formed from a light transmitting member. As a result, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down inside the first unit 551 through the front plate 41564.

Further, the front plate 564 has a first convex portion 41564b and a second convex portion 415 at positions facing the first concave portion 41571h, the second concave portion 41571i and the third concave portion 41571j, which will be described later, respectively.
64c and the third convex portion 41564d are projected.

The second path member 41570 is projected from the plate-shaped base plate 41571 facing the front plate 41564 of the first path member 41560 and the front surface (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 41571 toward the first path member 41560 side. 4th wall part 573 (see FIG. 21) and its 4th wall part 573
A fifth wall portion 574 (see FIG. 21) projecting downward from the fifth wall portion 574 at a predetermined distance from the fifth wall portion 574, and a sixth wall portion 574 projecting downward from the fifth wall portion 574 at a predetermined distance. It is formed mainly with a wall portion 575 (see FIG. 21).

The base plate 41571 is a throwing path of a game ball formed between facing the front plate 41564 (
The first recess 41571h, which is recessed in the main path SK2, the curved path WK1 and the main path SK3),
It is provided with a second recess 41571i and a third recess 41571j.

The first recess 41571h, the second recess 41571i, and the third recess 41571j are formed by being recessed in a curved shape toward the back surface side. Further, the first concave portion 41571h and the first convex portion 4
The facing dimension of 1564b, the facing dimension of the second recess 41571i and the second convex portion 41564c, and the facing dimension of the third recess 41571j and the third convex portion 41564d are the same facing dimension L19 (FIG. 201 (FIG. 201). b) Set to).

Further, the facing dimension L19 is set to a value larger than the diameter of the game ball and smaller than the facing dimension L20 (see FIG. 201 (b)) on the back surface of the front plate 41564 and the front surface of the base plate 571. Is set to. As a result, the first recess 41571h and the second recess 4157
The game ball thrown between the 1i and the third concave portion 41571j and the facing between the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c and the third convex portion 41564d is the first concave portion 41571h and the second concave portion 4.
1571i and 3rd concave portion 41571j, 1st convex portion 41564b, 2nd convex portion 41564c
And the third convex portion 41564d can be brought into contact with the third convex portion to slow down the rolling (flowing) speed of the game ball.

Further, the protrusion dimensions of the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c, and the third convex portion 41564d toward the base plate 41571 are set to be the same. Further, the protruding tip surfaces of the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c, and the third convex portion 41564d, and the first concave portion 41571h,
The distance dimension L21 (see FIG. 201 (b)) between the front surface of the base plate 41571 excluding the second recess 41571i and the third recess 41571j is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the first recess 41571h, the second recess 41571i and the third recess 41571j
And the game ball thrown between the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c and the third convex portion 41564d is the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c and the third convex portion 415.
It can collide with 64d. As a result, the rolling (flowing) speed of the game ball can be slowed down.

The first recess 41571h is formed in the base plate 41571 of the main path SK2, and is recessed long along the throwing direction of the game ball of the main path SK2. As a result, the first recess 41571
When the game ball thrown inside h is thrown inside the first recess 41571h, it is possible to suppress an increase in frictional resistance with the first recess 41571h. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 from stopping due to contact with the first recess 41571h.

The first convex portion 41564b projecting from the surface facing the first concave portion 41571h is the first concave portion 41.
It is extended in a direction orthogonal to the extension direction of 571h. As a result, when the game ball to which the main path SK2 is sent is brought into contact with the first convex portion 41564b, the game ball is brought into contact with the first concave portion 41571h.
It can be easily thrown inside.

The second recess 41571i is formed in the base plate 41571 of the curved path WK1 and is recessed long along the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction). Further, the second recess 41571i is formed into an ellipse whose shape in the front view is long in the vertical direction, and the intermediate position in the horizontal direction of the ellipse is set to the intermediate position in the horizontal direction of the curved path WK1 extending in the vertical direction. Further, the curved center on the upper side (main path SK2 side) of the ellipse of the second recess 41571i is arranged on the throwing locus of the center of the game ball to which the main path SK2 is thrown. Therefore, the second recess 41571i is recessed above the throwing locus of the game ball thrown from the main path SK2, so that even when the game ball is thrown at a relatively high speed in the main path SK2, the second recess 41571i is recessed. The center of the game ball is the second recess 41571
It can pass through the front side of i. As a result, the game ball passing through the main route SK2 is second.
It is possible to easily slow down the speed of the game ball by throwing it inside the recess 41571i, and it is possible to suppress the game ball from going wild on the curved path WK1.

The second convex portion 41564c projecting from the surface facing the second concave portion 41571i is formed by being bent in a substantially L shape in front view. Further, in the second convex portion 41564c, the bent portion is set on the front side of the curved center on the upper side of the ellipse of the second concave portion 41571i in the front view. Further, the bent portion on one side of the second convex portion 41564c is extended in a direction orthogonal to the throwing direction of the game ball on the curved path WK1, and the bent portion on the other side is the throwing portion of the game ball on the main path SK2. It is extended in the direction orthogonal to the direction. As a result, the game ball thrown from the main path SK2 to the curved path WK1 is brought into contact with the second convex portion 41564c on the other side and thrown inside the second concave portion 41571i, and at the same time, the ball is thrown into the second convex portion 41564c on one side. It is possible to easily reduce the throwing speed of the game ball that is brought into contact with the ball and is thrown on the curved path WK11. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball thrown to the curved path WK1 from going wild, and to smoothly throw the game ball.

The third recess 41571j is formed in the base plate 41571 of the main path SK3, and is recessed in an elliptical shape long in the throwing direction of the game ball of the main path SK3. As a result, the third recess 415
When the game ball thrown inside the 71j is thrown inside the third recess 41571j, the third
It is possible to suppress an increase in frictional resistance with the recess 41571j. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the main path SK3 from stopping due to contact with the third recess 41571j.

Further, in the third recess 41571j, the bending center of the upstream end of the throwing path of the game ball is set to the lower side of the center position in the left-right direction of the second recess 41571i. As a result, the curved path WK1
The game ball that has flowed down inside the second recess 41571i can be easily received by the second recess 41571i, and the game ball can be easily sent from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK3.

The third convex portion 41564d projecting from the surface facing the third concave portion 415671j is formed by being bent in a substantially L shape in front view. Further, in the third convex portion 41564d, the bent portion is set on the front side of the bending center of the upstream end portion of the third concave portion 41571j in the front view. The bent portion on one side of the third convex portion 41564d extends in a direction orthogonal to the throwing direction of the game ball on the main path SK3, and the bent portion on the other side is orthogonal to the throwing direction of the game ball on the curved path WK1. It is extended in the direction. As a result, the game ball thrown from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK3 is brought into contact with the third convex portion 41564d on the other side and thrown inside the third concave portion 41571j, and at the same time, the ball is thrown into the third convex portion 41564d on one side. It is possible to reduce the throwing speed of the game ball which is brought into contact with the ball and throws the main path SK3. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball thrown from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK1 from going wild, and to smoothly throw the game ball.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 203 to 206, the game board 42013 in the 42nd embodiment.
Will be explained. In the first embodiment, the other end side of the board box 100 (main control device 110) arranged in the back case 300 is fixed to the back case 300 by a screw inserted from the back side of the board box 100. As described above, in the 42nd embodiment,
A case where the second engaging member 42370 arranged in the rear case 42300 is engaged with the board box 42100 will be described.

First, with reference to FIGS. 203 and 204, the rear case 423 according to the 42nd embodiment.
The overall configuration of 00 will be described. FIG. 203 shows the back case 42 according to the 42nd embodiment.
It is an exploded perspective front view of 300. 204 (a) is a front view of the rear case 42300, and FIG. 204 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case 42300 in the CCIVb-CCIVb line of FIG. 204 (a). The same parts as those of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 203 and 204, the rear case 42300 in the 42nd embodiment is erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 42301 having a substantially rectangular front view and the four sides of the bottom wall portion 42301 toward the front. It is provided with an outer wall portion 42302, and is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open by each of the wall portions 42301 and 42302.

Further, the back case 42300 is arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 42301 (the box-shaped open side (arrow F direction side)) and the engagement member 310 on the back side of the back case 42300. A fixing member 320 for fixing one end side of the board box 42100 and a bottom wall portion 4230.
A second engaging member 423 that is arranged on the front side of 1 and fixes the other end side of the board box 42100.
70 and.

The bottom wall portion 42301 has a front-view rectangular opening 301a formed in the center thereof, and a third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) is arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 42301 through the opening 301a.
See) is visible. Further, the bottom wall portion 42301 is provided with a columnar shape on the front side.
A protruding portion 301b inserted into the sliding groove 314 of the engaging member 310, a first opening 301c opening at a position facing the fixing member 320, and a second opening opening at a position facing the engaging member 310.
A second projecting portion 42301f that is projected in a columnar shape on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the opening portion 301d and the bottom wall portion 42301 and inserted into the sliding groove 42372 of the second engaging member 42370 described later.
And a third opening 42301 g formed through the second projecting portion 42301f in the plate thickness direction (arrow FB direction) above (arrow U direction).

The second projecting portion 42301f is a protrusion that defines the displacement direction of the second engaging member 42370, and is formed side by side at two positions in the gravity direction. Further, the outer diameter of the second projecting portion 42301f is set to a dimension slightly smaller than the groove width in the lateral direction of the sliding groove 42372 of the second engaging member 42370, which will be described later. Further, the two second projecting portions 42301f are set so that the distance between the centers of the two portions 42301f is smaller than the groove width in the longitudinal direction of the sliding groove 42372. As a result, the sliding groove 4
Two second projecting portions 42301f can be inserted and arranged inside the 2372.

The third opening 42301 g is a projecting portion 4211 of the substrate box 42100, which will be described later, inside.
8 is an opening into which the protrusion 8 is inserted, and is opened with a dimension larger than the outer shape of the projecting portion 42118 in the front view. Further, in the third opening 42301 g, the engaging member 310 is fixed to the fixing member 320 in a state where the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged (the state shown in FIG. 204A).
It is formed at a position adjacent to each other in the direction of disengaging the engagement with (arrow L direction). This makes it impossible to disengage the engaging member 310 from the fixing member 320 when the projecting portion 42118 is inserted into the third opening 42301g. A detailed description of the positional relationship between the projecting portion 42118 and the engaging member 310 will be described later.

The outer wall portion 42302 includes a second opening portion 42302b that opens in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) on the side surface on the lower side (arrow D direction side) in front view. The second opening 42302b is
It is an opening through which an end portion on the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the second engaging member 42370, which will be described later, is inserted, and an opening is formed in the displacement region of the second engaging member 42370. As a result, the second engaging member 4
The 2370 can be displaced.

The outer shape of the board box 42100 in front view is formed into a horizontally long rectangular rectangle, and the main control device 110 is arranged inside. Further, the board box 42100 has a bearing portion 117 (see FIG. 206 (a)) protruding from one end on one end side (arrow R direction side) and a projecting portion projecting from one surface on the front side of the board box 42100. 42118 and.

As described above, the projecting portion 42118 is the third opening 42301 of the rear case 42300.
A length to be inserted into g, in which an opening 42118a, which will be described later, is arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 42301 of the rear case 42300 in a state where the front surface of the board box 42100 and the back surface of the rear case 42300 are parallel to each other. It is set to. Further, the projecting portion 42118 is
An opening 42118a that opens in the direction of gravity is provided, and a second engaging member 42370, which will be described later, is inserted inside the opening 42118a. As a result, the board box 42100 is suppressed from rotating around the fixing member 320, and the board box 4210 is prevented from rotating.
0 can be arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 42300 in a non-displaceable state.

Further, the third opening 42301 g into which the projecting portion 42118 is inserted is engaged in a state in which the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged (the state shown in FIG. 204A) as described above. Since the member 310 is formed at a position adjacent to the fixing member 320 in the direction of disengagement (arrow L direction), the projecting portion 42118 is arranged at a position adjacent to the engaging member 310. Further, the insertion dimension Y6 (see FIG. 204 (b)) of the protruding portion 42118 into the third opening 42301 g is a separation distance Y7 between the front surface of the engaging member 310 and the front surface of the bottom wall portion 42301 (FIG. 204 (b).
) See). As a result, as shown in FIG. 204 (b), the engaging member 310 and the projecting portion 42118 are arranged at overlapping positions in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

Therefore, in a state where the second engaging member 42370 is inserted into the opening 42118a of the protruding portion 42118, the engaging member 310 disengages the engagement with the fixing member 320 (protruding portion 42).
Displacement in the direction in which 118 is arranged) is regulated. As a result, the second opening 42118a
With the engaging member 42370 inserted, the engaging member 310 can be prevented from being illegally disengaged from the fixing member 320, and the board box 42100 (main control device 110) is replaced with an illegal board. Can be suppressed.

Further, the opening 42118a of the projecting portion 42118 is opened in the direction of gravity, and the second engaging member 42370 inserted into the opening 42118a is displaced and inserted in the direction of gravity. Therefore, since the displacement direction (gravity direction) of the second engaging member 42370 and the displacement direction (horizontal direction) of the engaging member 310 are set in the orthogonal direction, the engaging member 310 is unreasonable due to the player's fraud. Second engaging member 423 inserted into the opening 42118a
It can be easily received at 70. As a result, when the engaging member 310 is forcibly operated by the player's fraud, it is possible to prevent the engaging member 310 from being disengaged from the fixing member 320.

The second engaging member 42370 faces downward (arrow D direction) from the plate member 42371 formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular rectangular plate in front view and the end portion of the plate member 42371 on the upper side (arrow U direction side). The recessed portion 42374, which is recessed, and the second engaging portion 42373, which is projected outward in the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction) of the upper end (arrow U direction side) end of the plate member 42371, are recessed. Setting part 4237
A sliding groove 42372 that is opened in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) at a position below 4 is mainly provided.

As described above, the sliding groove 42372 is an opening for displaceably disposing the second engaging member 42370, and is opened long in the gravity direction (arrow UD direction). In addition, the sliding groove 423
In 72, the width dimension in the lateral direction (arrow LR direction) is set to be substantially the same as the diameter of the second projecting portion 42301f arranged inside the sliding groove 42372. Therefore, as described above, the sliding groove 4
When the second projecting portion 42301f is inserted into 2372, the sliding direction of the second engaging member 42370 is defined as the longitudinal direction of the opening of the sliding groove 42372.

The recessed portion 42374 is an opening for easily elastically deforming the upper end portion of the plate member 42371, and is recessed downward and cut out in the front-rear direction. As a result, the rigidity of the upper end portion of the plate member 42371 can be lowered to facilitate elastic deformation.

The second engaging portion 42373 is a portion that engages with the end portion of the opening 42118a of the protruding portion 42118 described above, and is projected from both side surfaces in a direction orthogonal to the notch direction of the recessed portion 42374. The separation distance X12 (see FIG. 204 (a)) at the ends of the protrusions on both sides is the opening 421.
It is set to be larger than the opening dimension X13 in the left-right direction of 18a (see FIG. 204 (b)). As a result, when the second engaging member 42370 is inserted into the opening 42118a, the second engaging portion 42373 engages with the end of the opening 42118a, so that the second engaging portion 42373 becomes the opening 42118a. It is possible to prevent the person from getting out of the room.

The second engaging portion 42373 is formed so as to project outward in the horizontal direction from the upper side to the lower side of the plate member 42371. As a result, the second engaging member 42370 has an opening 4
When inserted into 2118a, the second engaging portion 42373 can be brought into contact with the inside of the opening 42118a to facilitate elastic deformation of the upper side of the plate member 42371.

Further, the second engaging member 42370 is in a state of being inserted into the opening 42118a (engaging portion 42).
In the state where 373 is engaged with the projecting portion 42118), the lower end portion is the outer wall portion 4230.
It is arranged inside the second opening 42302b of 2. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second engaging portion 42370 from being operated from the outside of the rear case 42300. As a result, the second engaging portion 4
It is possible to prevent the board box 42100 (main control device 110) from being replaced with an illegal board by illegally disengaging the engagement between the 2373 and the projecting portion 42118.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 204 and 205, the board box 4 to the rear case 42300
The arrangement method of 2100 will be described. 205 (a) is a front view of the rear case 42300, and FIG. 205 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case 42300 in the CCVb-CCVb line of FIG. 205 (a). In addition, in FIG. 204 (a) and FIG. 204 (b), the state after the board box 42100 is arranged in the rear case 42300 is shown, and FIG. 205 shows.
In (a) and 205 (b), the state before the substrate box 42100 is arranged in the back case 42300 is illustrated.

The substrate box 42100 in the 42nd embodiment is the same as the 1st embodiment described above.
First, the fixing member 320 is engaged with the engaging member 310 and one side is disposed on the back side of the back case 42300.

As shown in FIGS. 205 (a) and 205 (b), the engaging member 310 is the fixing member 3.
In the state before engaging with 20 (before displacement), the tip of the second piece 312 of the engaging member 310 is arranged on the front side of the third opening 42301 g. As a result, before the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged with each other, the projecting portion 42118 of the board box 42100 becomes the third opening 42301.
It is possible to suppress the insertion inside g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the substrate box 42100 from being arranged in the back case 42300 only by engaging the projecting portion 42118 and the second engaging portion 42370.

Next, the substrate box 42100 is rotated around the connecting portion between the fixing member on one side and the 320 on the other side, and the projecting portion 42118 is inserted inside the third opening 42301 g of the rear case 42300. As a result, the projecting portion 42118 is arranged at a position where it can engage with the second engaging member 42370.

The second engaging member 42370 is inserted inside the third opening 42301g before being inserted, and the lower side is inserted through the second opening 42302b and arranged outside the back case 42300 (FIG. 205 (a)). reference). As a result, the board box 42100 is placed in the back case 42.
The operator disposing the 300 can operate the second engaging member 42370 from the outside of the back case 42300, and the second engaging member 42370 can be inserted into the inside of the third opening 42301 g.

Further, since the displacement direction of the second engaging member 42370 is set to the direction of gravity, the second engaging member 42370 is disposed inside the third opening 42301 g at the lower end due to the action of gravity in the state before insertion. .. As a result, the protruding portion 42118 becomes the third opening 42301 of the rear case 42300.
It is possible to suppress collision with the second engaging member 42370 when it is inserted inside g. As a result, the work efficiency of the worker can be improved.

Further, if the second engaging member 42370 is forgotten to be engaged with the projecting portion 42118, the second engaging member 42370 can be arranged on the outside of the rear case 42300, so that it is not in a normal state for the operator. Can be made easier to recognize. As a result, it is possible to prevent forgetting to engage the second engaging member 42370 with the projecting portion 42118.

Next, the rear case 42300 and the base plate 42060 will be described with reference to FIG. 206. FIG. 206 (a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and FIG. 206 (b) is FIG. 206 (
It is sectional drawing of the game board 13 in the CCVIb-CCVIb line of a).

As shown in FIG. 206, an erection member 42060f is arranged on the back surface of the base plate 42060 in the 42nd embodiment. The erection member 4260f is erected toward the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 42060, and the erection tip position is the back case 4230.
It is set in the same plane of the bottom wall portion 42301 of 0. Further, the erection member 4260f is a second.
It is arranged below the engaging member 42370 and outside the back case 42300. As a result, when the rear case 42300 is arranged on the game board 42013 in a state where the second engaging member 42370 and the projecting portion 42118 are forgotten to be engaged, the standing portion 42060f is placed on the second engaging member 42370. It can collide with the lower side. As a result, the second engaging member 42
It is possible to prevent the back case 42300 from being arranged on the base plate 42060 in a state where the 370 and the projecting portion 42118 are forgotten to be engaged or when the board box 42100 is forgotten to be arranged on the back case 42300.

In this embodiment, a light emitting substrate that illuminates the inside of the back case 42300 is arranged on the upright portion 42060f. As a result, the upright portion 42060f can be used as both a portion that irradiates light and a portion that suppresses the engagement between the back case 42300 and the base plate 42060 in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the outer shape of the base plate 42060 from becoming large.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In the first embodiment, in order to retract the ball receiving portion 467 from the third position to the second position or the first position, the drive motor KM2 is driven, but the third position to the second position or the second position is followed. The drive for retracting to one position may be driven by an urging spring. For example, an urging spring is arranged between the rack 466 or the movable rack 464 and the base member 470 so that an elastic force is applied as the rack 466 or the movable rack 464 is displaced.

In this case, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position and performs the payout operation, the drive motor K
By turning off the drive of M3, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced to the second position or the first position side by the urging force of the urging spring.

Therefore, the time until the driving force of the drive motor KM2 is switched at the third position is used.
Since the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced, it is possible to suppress the wobbling of the lower displacement member 440 due to the reaction of the ejection operation when the game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467.

That is, when the game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the load of the lower displacement member 440 is reduced by the amount of the ejected game ball, and the lower displacement member 440 is likely to be displaced upward due to the reaction. By immediately displacing the ball receiving portion 467, a force that displaces the base member 470 downward by the reaction due to the rotational displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 is applied to cancel the reaction when the ball is ejected from the lower displacement member 440. be able to.

In the first embodiment, the engaging protrusion 882 that regulates the rotation of the rotating body 800 is the rotating body 800.
Although the case where two pieces are formed on the side surface of the above surface at a predetermined interval is described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of them may be continuously provided on the side wall of the rotating body 800 at predetermined intervals. In this case, the rotation of the rotating body 800 can be restricted at any position, and the rotating body 800 can be restricted from rotating by an external force when the lid member 770 is opened.

In the first embodiment, the case where the opening 831 is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 and the game ball is thrown from the opening 831 has been described. However, the opening 831 is the communication hole 881 of the rotating body 800.
It may be formed on the side surface opposite to b. That is, openings may be formed on both side surfaces of the rotating body 800 in the axial direction, one of which may be the inlet of the sphere and the other of which may be the outlet of the sphere. In this case, since the ball throwing path can be formed inside the rotating body 800, the accessory (rotating body 800) can be used as the throwing path, especially when there is no placement space on the back side of the game board 13. , The throwing route can be secured without increasing the size of the game board 13.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating body 800 is formed in a columnar shape has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a polygonal shape, an elliptical shape, or a combination thereof may be used as a shape. In this case, since the shape of the rotating body 800 can be complicated, it is possible to make it easy for the player to visually recognize that the effect is switched due to the rotational displacement of the rotating body 800.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation unit 8654 is formed so as to be operable by the player has been described, but a push-in type button may be provided on the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation unit 8654. In this case, the player can not only apply the rotational force to the rotation operation unit 8654, but also press the push button or combine the rotation operation and the pressing operation of the rotation operation unit 8654. .. As a result, since a plurality of operation modes of the rotation operation unit 8654 can be formed, it is possible to give the player an interest.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the transmission gear 8651 and the transmission gear 8652 are in mesh with each other has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, transmission gear 8651
A torque limiter or the like that blocks the transmission of the driving force when an overload is applied may be interposed between the transmission gear 8652 and the transmission gear.

In this case, when the player stops the rotation of the rotation operation unit 8654 in the rotating state, the transmission of the driving force of the rotation from the drive motor KM6 can be blocked, and the rotation of the rotation operation unit 8654 can be suppressed from being continued. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotation operation unit 8650 from being broken when the rotation in the direction opposite to the rotation in the A direction is input to the rotation operation unit 8654 by the player.

Further, when the player operates the rotation operation unit 8654, when the player's finger or clothes is sandwiched between the upper plate 8017 on the rotation direction side of the rotation operation unit 8654, the rotation is stopped.
It is possible to prevent the player's fingers and clothes from being further pinched. Therefore, the player can rotate the rotation operation unit 8
It is possible to prevent an injury caused by being sandwiched between the 654 and the upper plate 8017.

In the eighth embodiment, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 8654 is set to the A direction, but the rotation direction is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 8654 may be the left-right direction with respect to the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the player can be made to perform the movement accompanying the effect of the gaming machine, and the effect of the effect can be improved. For example, by tapping the rotation operation unit 8654 with the left hand so as to rotate to the right, it is possible to produce an effect such as tapping (slap) a character or the like displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the first embodiment, the board box 100 is arranged on the fixing member 320, and the fixing member 320 is engaged with the engaging member 310 to prevent the board box 100 from being replaced with an illegal board. The case has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other members (for example, the third symbol) can be arranged on the fixing member 320 to have an effect of suppressing unauthorized removal. It may be a display device 81 or a detection device capable of detecting an illegal input such as an illegal radio wave or vibration).

In the first embodiment, the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i and the third concave portion 571j formed in the first unit 551, the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c and the third convex portion 5
Although 64d has been described as being formed at positions facing each other, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564 are not limited thereto.
d is arranged on the upstream side with respect to the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i and the third concave portion 571j, and the flowing game ball is placed on the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c and the third convex portion 564d. It may be formed so as to be accepted by the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i and the third recess 571j after being brought into contact with each other.

In the first embodiment, the decorative member 154 has a thickness dimension of a recess 151 of the main body portion 151.
Although the case where the depth is made smaller than the recessed depth of b has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the decorative member 154 is formed of an elastically deformable material, and the main body portion 15 is formed.
It may be formed thicker than the recessed depth of the recessed portion 151b of 1. In this case, by compressing and elastically deforming the general winning opening unit 150 when disposing it on the base plate 60, the main body portion 151 can be arranged in a state of being in contact with the base plate 60.

In the first embodiment, when the cam member 422 is arranged at the position of the second displacement state, the forces PW1 and PW2 applied from the first link member 431 to the cam member 422 act in a direction of canceling each other. The case has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this.
For example, the direction of the force input to the cam member 422 from the point where the end portion of the cam member 422 and the plate-shaped protrusion 431b abut may be set in the direction from the abutting point toward the axial center of the shaft portion 422a. .. According to this, it is possible to suppress the action of the force in the direction of rotation about the shaft portion 422a on the cam member 422.

In the first embodiment, the other end side of the board box 100 is screwed to the back case 300.
Although the case where it is arranged on the back side of the above is described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the other end side of the board box 100 may be fixed by a sealing tool that cannot be removed when engaged with the back case 300. More specifically, a columnar sealing tool through which openings formed at a plurality of locations on the other end side of the rear case 300 are inserted into the insertion portions recessed at a plurality of locations on the back surface side of the rear case 300 is inserted. By engaging the insertion portion and the sealing tool, the substrate box 100 is arranged on the back side of the back case 300 in a non-rotatable (operable) state.

When removing the board box 100, the other end side of the board box 100 can be removed from the back case 300 by cutting the engaging portion between the insertion portion and the sealing tool.
Further, when the other end side of the board box 100 is arranged in the back case 300 again, a new sealing tool is inserted through an unused opening of the board box 100, and an unused insertion portion of the back case 300 is inserted. The other end side of the board box 100 can be arranged on the back case 300 by engaging with.

In the first embodiment, the outer shape of the decorative member 154 in front view is formed to be larger than the opening shape of the second opening 60b, and the end portion of the decorative member 154 is the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60.
Although the case where the components are arranged so as to overlap each other in the front-rear direction has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the outer shape of the decorative member 154 in the front view may be set to be substantially the same as the opening shape of the second opening 60b.

In this case, the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 150 and the decorative member 6 of the base plate 60.
By forming 0c from the same material, the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c are formed of a single sheet, and by cutting the decorative member 154 from the sheet, the decorative member 154 is formed.
And the decorative member 60c can be formed. Therefore, since it is not necessary to form the decorative member 154 in a separate process, the yield when forming the decorative member 154 can be improved.

When the outer shape of the decorative member 154 in the front view is formed to be substantially the same as the opening shape of the second opening 60b, the decorative member 154 is arranged inside the second opening 60b to form the decorative member 15.
It is preferable to arrange the front surface of 4 and the decorative member 60c on the same plane. In this case, since the decorative surfaces of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c coincide with each other in the front-rear direction in the front view, the player can recognize the decoration of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c as one decoration.

In the first embodiment, the first convex portion 571h is projected toward the back side (arrow B side direction side) on the inner surface of the front side (arrow F direction side) of the throwing path of the game ball of the first unit 551. , 2nd convex portion 571i and 3rd convex portion 571k are formed, and the first concave portion 571h and the second concave portion 571i are recessed toward the back side on the inner surface on the back side of the throwing path of the game ball of the first unit 511. And the third
Although the case where the recess 571j is provided has been described, the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, the third concave portion 571j, and the first convex portion 571.
h, the second convex portion 571i and the third convex portion 571k may be formed on the inner surface on the opposite side in the front-rear direction in the front view.

Further, a recess may be formed on the inner surface on the front side at a position facing the second recess 571i so as to be recessed toward the front image. In this case, the concave portion is recessed in the throwing space of the curved path WK1.
The throwing space can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the flow of the game ball from becoming too slow on the curved path WK1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from staying on the curved path WK1.

In the ninth embodiment, the case where the inclined surface 9431b1 projects toward the front side toward the cam member 422 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. for example,
The inclined surface 9431b1 may be formed as an inclination in which the amount of protrusion toward the front side is reduced toward the cam member 422.

In this case, when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state and the end portion of the cam member 422 abuts on the plate-shaped protrusion 9531a, the cam member 422 is placed on the curved wall portion 411e of the front base 411.
Can be pressed against. As a result, it is possible to suppress the cam member 422 from swinging in the front-rear direction, and it is possible to easily maintain the lower displacement member 440 at the position of the second displacement state.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, the case where the light emitting body 11491a is formed at a position higher than the center of the game ball accepted by the ball receiving portion 467 (in the direction of arrow U) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light emitting body 11491a may be arranged at substantially the same height as the center of the game ball accepted by the ball receiving portion 467. In this case, the transparent portion 11451
It is preferable that the height position of b is formed from the center of the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 to the upper side of the center.

According to this, when a part of the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a is blocked by the game ball, the shadow of the game ball formed on the transmission portion 11451b is formed in a semicircular shape by the upper hemisphere of the game ball. can. As a result, since the roundness of the game ball can be formed in the shadow formed on the transmission portion 11451b, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the position of the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467.

In the twelfth and thirty-nine embodiments, the case where the displacement of the third piece 12467e and 39467e is performed by the load of the game ball has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a sensor for detecting that the game ball has passed is attached to the ball receiving portions 12467 and 39467 in the throwing path for throwing the game ball, and the third piece 12467e, due to the detection of the game ball by the sensor, The 39467e may be displaced independently. According to this, the second piece 12
Since it is not necessary to displace the 467d and 39467d by the load of the game ball, the ball receiving portion 12
The reliability of the displacement of 467 and 39467 can be improved. In this case, the third piece 12467e
, 39467e are independently displaced in the ball receiving portion 12467, 39467.

In the twelfth and 39th embodiments, the case where the rotation axis when the third piece 12467e and 39467e are rotationally displaced is formed on the first piece 12467c and 39467c has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the shaft portions 12467e3 and 39467e3 of the third piece 12467e and 39467e are inserted into the openings formed in the rack 466, and the third piece 1
The 2467e and 39467e may be rotationally displaced with respect to the rack 466. In this case, since the distance between the rotating shaft and the connecting portion between the second pieces 12467d and 39467d can be easily increased, the third pieces 12467e and 394 with respect to the displacement amount of the second pieces 12467d and 39467d can be easily increased.
The displacement amount of 67e can be easily increased. As a result, the shielding plate 124 of the third piece 12467e
67e1 can be easily arranged on the front side of the light emitting body 11491a. In this case, the opening formed in the rack 466 is formed in an elongated hole into which the shaft portions 12467e3 and 39467e3 can slide.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the second path member 13570 is moved in the front-rear direction with respect to the first path member 13560 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the first path member 13560 may be moved in the front-rear direction with respect to the second path member 13570. In this case, the relative positional relationship between the second path member 13570 and the front surface of the base plate 60 (game board 13) prevents the player from grasping the distance between the first member and the second member facing each other. can. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the first, tenth, and twenty-fifth embodiments described above, the case where the decorative members 154, 10154, 25154 are attached by the adhesive tapes 154a, 10154a, 25154a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the present invention is described. An adhesive composed of a liquid material may be used.

In the thirteenth, thirty-two, thirty-third, thirty-fourth, and thirty-fiveth embodiments, the first arranged on the front side.
The path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 are formed of a non-light transmissive material, and the first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35
Although the case where the space between the 560 and the second path member 13570, 32570, 34570 is difficult to be recognized by the player has been described, the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, first path member 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560
The first path member 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 and the second path member 1357 are formed so as to form a slit-shaped opening having a width smaller than the diameter of the game ball.
A game ball flowing down between the faces of 0, 32570 and 34570 may be made visible to the player through the opening. In this case, the distance to the adjacent openings of the plurality of slit-shaped openings is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

As a result, the first path member 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 355
It is possible to make the player recognize the game ball flowing down between the 60 and the second path member 13570, 32570, 34570 through the opening.

Further, the first path member 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 is formed with an opening that is opened in a circle smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the first path member 13560,
32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 and the second path member 13570, 3257
A game ball flowing down between the faces of 0,34570 may be made visible to the player through the opening. In this case, the width dimension of the plurality of openings adjacent to each other is formed to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, since the opening of the opening can be made smaller than that in the case where the opening is formed in a slit shape, the first path member 13560, 32560, 33560, 34 is passed through the opening.
It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the distance between the 560, 35560 and the second path member 13570, 32570, 34570 facing each other.

In the 18th embodiment, the portion where the displacement member 18310 is engaged (engaged portion 18332).
) Has been described in the case of forming the fixing member 18320, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the engaged portion 18332 to which the displacement member 18310 is engaged may be formed on the substrate box 100 to be caulked and fixed to the fixing member 18320.

In this case, when the board box 100 is not arranged in the rear case 18300,
The displacement member 18310 cannot be placed inside the rear case 18300, and the displacement member 1
The 8310 can be made to protrude to the outside of the rear case 18300 by its own weight.

As a result, if the board box 100 is forgotten to be attached to the rear case 18300, the displacement member 18310 is hooked on the outer frame 11 when the game board 18013 is arranged on the outer frame 11 (see FIG. 164 (b)). This makes it possible for the operator to notice that the board box 100 has been forgotten to be attached.

In the 21st embodiment, the front side (arrow F direction side) of the bottom wall portion 302 of the rear case 300.
The insertion portion 21724b of the rotary unit 21700 arranged in the displacement member 310 is a recess 31 of the displacement member 310.
Although the case where the displacement member 310 and the fixing member 320 are inserted inside the 7 to prevent the engagement between the displacement member 310 and the fixing member 320 from being illegally disengaged has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the insertion portion 21724b inserted inside the recess 317 of the displacement member 310 may be formed in the substrate box 100 arranged in the fixing member 320.

In this case, the insertion portion 21724b is arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 302 via the opening formed in the fixing member 320. Further, the insertion portion 21724b is formed at a portion where a shaft for caulking and fixing to the fixing member 320 is inserted. As a result, when the bearing portion 117 of the board box 100 is cut and illegally removed from the rear case 21300, the insertion portion 21 is used.
The 724b can be left inside the recess 317 of the displacement member 310. As a result, it can be difficult to remove the fixing member 320 from the rear case 21300.

Therefore, when replacing the fixing member 320, it is necessary to correctly (cut the crimped portion) the caulked portion between the substrate box 100 and the fixing member 320. As a result, the fixing member 32
Since it is possible to make it difficult to illegally remove 0 from the back surface member 21300, it is possible to prevent the fixing member 320 from being removed and replaced with an unauthorized board box.

In the 42nd embodiment, the case where the light emitting substrate that irradiates the light is arranged on the upright portion 42060f has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the drive member arranged on the base plate 42060 is not limited to this. It may be formed as a control board for controlling the ball or as a passage for throwing a game ball.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 287. It should be noted that the first control example is for explaining the control example by changing a part of the configuration for each of the above-described embodiments, and the detailed description of the same configuration as each of the above-described embodiments will be described. Is omitted. In addition, some of the configurations used in this control example have different reference numerals for the same configurations as those in the above embodiments, but they are for explaining the invention of this control example in an easy-to-understand manner. Since the specific configuration is the same as the corresponding configuration of each of the above embodiments, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Conventionally, when a big hit is won in a special symbol lottery, a big hit game is executed, and the ball is easily won by a winning device (for example, a variable winning device) during the big hit game, so that the player can win the big hit. There is a pachinko machine 10 that allows a game to be played with the aim of playing a game. In this way, in the pachinko machine 10, when the player has a hard time winning the jackpot and the jackpot game is executed, if the ratio of the balls winning the winning device (variable winning device) is low, the player's willingness to play is reduced. There was a problem of letting them do it.

Such a problem is that when the ball flows down the game area formed on the game board 13, the ball flows down due to collision with a plurality of obstacles (for example, nails) provided on the game board 13. This is an unavoidable problem in the pachinko machine 10 because the number of balls to be won in the variable winning device 65 increases or decreases due to the change.

On the other hand, in the first control example, the pseudo attacker (attacker for directing) 165 (see FIG. 208) is driven in synchronization with the attacker (variable winning device) 65 that is opened during the jackpot game. In addition to the balls that have won the variable winning device 65, the balls that have entered the right general winning opening 163 (see FIG. 208) and the specific out opening 166 (see FIG. 208) also flow into the pseudo-attacker 165. It is composed. The pseudo-attacker 165 is configured to be easier for the player to see than the variable winning device 65.

With this configuration, when the jackpot game is started, the player executes the jackpot game while watching the ball winning the pseudo-attacker 165. Therefore, it can be made to think that more balls than the balls actually winning the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game have won the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game.

Also, among the balls fired in the right-handed game executed during the jackpot game, the balls that have not won the variable winning device 65 (by the time the variable winning device 65 is reached, the other winning (ball) openings are won ( The ball) is configured to win a prize in the pseudo-attacker 165. Therefore, when the number of balls won in the variable winning device 65 decreases, the number of balls winning (balls) in other winning (ball) openings (hereinafter referred to as winning openings, etc.) tends to increase, so that the variable winning is possible. Regardless of the increase or decrease in the number of balls won in the device 65, a predetermined number of balls can be stably won in the pseudo-attacker 165.

Further, in the first control example, the ball that has won (winned) in each winning opening, etc. (specific winning opening 65a, right general winning opening 163, specific out opening 166) wins the pseudo attacker 165. It is configured to perform a winning effect.

As a result, it is possible to execute a winning effect based on the winning of the ball to the variable winning device 65 at the timing when the ball wins the pseudo attacker 165. Therefore, the pseudo attacker 165 can be used as a real attacker (variable winning device) for the player. 65) can be made to think. The winning effect executed based on the winning of the ball to the variable winning device 65 is, for example, a winning sound notification effect for notifying the player that the ball has won the variable winning device 65, or a third prize effect. In the prize ball number display effect for displaying information (acquisition information) for showing the amount of privilege (prize ball) given to the player based on the ball winning in the variable winning device 65 in the symbol display device 81, etc. be.

Further, in this control example, in order to make the pseudo-attacker 165 win the ball that has won a prize in a plurality of different winning openings, the guiding flow path is such that the ball that has passed through each winning opening is guided above the pseudo-attacker 165. 690 (see FIG. 208) is provided, but since the distance from each winning opening to the pseudo attacker 165 is different, the order in which the ball wins in each winning opening and the order in which the ball wins in the pseudo attacker 165 are different. There is. Therefore, in the first control example, the order in which the pseudo-attacker 165 is awarded can be determined based on the type of the winning opening in which the ball has won the prize and the winning timing. Then, when the number of pseudo-attackers 165 exceeds a predetermined number (the number for which the closing condition of the variable winning device 65 is satisfied (for example, 10)) during the period in which the pseudo-attacker 165 is continuously opened, a specific winning effect (overflow effect) is achieved. Is configured to run.

In this way, in the configuration in which the ball winning in each winning opening or the like flows down the induction flow path 690, the order in which the pseudo attacker 165 is won is calculated instead of the order in which each winning opening or the like is won, and based on the calculation result. By configuring to execute a specific winning effect (overflow effect), the winning effect can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

In this control example, the above-mentioned winning effect is executed based on the detection results of the detection sensors 65s1, 65s2, 163s, 166s (see FIG. 208) for detecting that the ball has won a prize in each winning opening or the like. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated detection sensor for executing a winning effect using a ball that wins the pseudo attacker 165. Therefore, the number of detection means (sensors) attached to the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, and the design cost can be suppressed.

Next, the characteristic effect contents used in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example will be briefly described. Conventionally, the lottery right of a special symbol has a structure that can be held and stored up to a predetermined number (for example, 4), and the period from when the lottery right is held and stored until the lottery of the special symbol is actually executed. A process (so-called pre-reading process) is performed to determine (predict) the lottery result of the jackpot in advance using the information (winning information) included in the lottery right stored on hold, and the effect is based on the advance determination result. There is a pachinko machine 10 that executes (so-called look-ahead effect).

In the conventional gaming machine using such a configuration, for example, the lottery result is given to the player by changing the display mode of the identification information (so-called reserved symbol) for indicating the lottery right stored in the hold. A look-ahead effect may be executed to notify in advance. By executing such a look-ahead effect, when the display mode of the reserved symbol is changed, the jackpot may be won in the special symbol lottery corresponding to the reserved symbol, and the special symbol lottery corresponding to the reserved symbol may be won. (Special symbol lottery period executed before the corresponding reserved symbol), the player can continue to have a sense of expectation.

However, in the case of the above-mentioned look-ahead effect, if the special symbol lottery corresponding to the reserved symbol (variable reserved symbol) whose display mode is changed is executed, the display of the variable reserved symbol disappears, so that it is currently being executed. There is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to easily determine whether or not the special symbol lottery (variation) corresponds to the variable reserved symbol. On the other hand, in this control example, it is configured to display the running display mode based on the variable display mode of the reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol lottery (variation) currently being executed. This makes it possible for the player to easily determine whether or not the special symbol lottery (variation) being executed corresponds to the variable reserved symbol.

Further, in the case of configuring to notify a plurality of types of effect results in the look-ahead effect of notifying the player of the lottery result of the special symbol in advance by changing the display mode of the reserved symbol as described above. (For example, in the case of configuring to notify a plurality of effect results having different expectations of winning a big hit), it is necessary to make the variable display mode different in an easy-to-understand manner so that each effect result can be easily identified. Therefore, there was a problem that it was difficult to notify a lot of information in advance.

On the other hand, in this control example, in addition to the pre-reading effect described above, an effect of changing the display mode of the effect device (treasure box accessory 750 (see FIG. 210)) provided separately from the third symbol display device 81 is executed. It is configured as follows. Then, among the plurality of information acquired by the look-ahead process, the information to be notified in advance to the player by changing the display mode of the reserved symbol (for example, the advance look-ahead information for showing the result of determining whether the jackpot is successful or not) and the treasure box role. By changing the display mode of the object 750, the information previously notified to the player (for example, the pre-reading information for indicating the type of the winning jackpot) is configured to be different.

In this way, by providing a plurality of objects to be directed to be used for the look-ahead effect and different types of information to be previously notified by each object to be directed, it is easy to notify the player of a large amount of information in advance. be able to. In addition, in this control example, since an effect device other than the third symbol display device 81 is used, it is possible to continuously easily notify the effect result of the look-ahead effect.

In addition, conventionally, a variable effect is executed in which the identification information (third symbol) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is variablely displayed (dynamically displayed) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and then stopped and displayed. There is something to make. According to such a pachinko machine 10, it is possible to predict whether or not the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit depending on the variation effect mode of the third symbol, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. rice field. However, since the variation effect mode of the third symbol is determined only based on the lottery result of the special symbol, the lottery result of the special symbol is determined for the player who plays the game for a long time according to the variation effect mode to be executed. There was a problem that it could be easily identified.

In addition, in order to execute a specific variation effect mode (stop display mode of the third symbol) indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a lottery result (for example, a big hit) that is advantageous to the player, the special symbol lottery is performed. Since the condition is that the result is a lottery result (for example, a big hit) that is advantageous to the player, there is a problem that the frequency of executing the variable effect mode is low.

On the other hand, in the first control example, the lottery result of a symbol other than the special symbol (for example, a normal symbol) can be notified by using the variation effect mode of the third symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol. It is configured to be possible. With this configuration, it is possible to set the variation effect mode of the third symbol based on information other than the lottery result of the special symbol (for example, the lottery result of the normal symbol). It is possible to prevent the lottery result of the special symbol from being easily determined.

Further, since the specific variation effect mode can be executed even when the lottery result of the normal symbol is a lottery result (for example, a hit) that is advantageous to the player, the execution frequency of the specific variation effect mode can be increased. ..

Further, in the first control example, in order to show the lottery result of the normal symbol by using the variation effect set based on the fluctuation time (special symbol fluctuation time) set based on the lottery result of the special symbol, it is normal. The third symbol is temporarily stopped (actually, it is moving (swinging), but it is almost stopped) at the timing when the fluctuation time of the symbol elapses. As a result, it is possible to make it appear as if the third symbol is stopped and displayed in accordance with the stop timing of the normal symbol.

In addition, in this control example, when the third symbol is temporarily stopped at the stop timing of the normal symbol during the variation effect corresponding to the variation time (special symbol variation time) set based on the lottery result of the special symbol. In addition, the production mode of the remaining time effect executed during the remaining time is configured to be different based on the remaining time from the temporary stop timing (the time from the temporary stop timing until the special symbol is stopped and displayed). For example, if the remaining time is less than 3 seconds, the temporary stop display of the 3rd symbol is continued, and if the remaining time is 3 seconds or more, the 3rd symbol being temporarily stopped is displayed. It is configured to display fluctuations again.

As a result, even though the remaining time is short (for example, 0.5 seconds), the third symbol during temporary stop is changed again, and it is possible to prevent the player from performing an effect that is difficult for the player to understand. Can be done. Further, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game because the temporary stop display is continued even though the remaining time is long (for example, 10 seconds).

Further, in the first control example, the length of the remaining time is roughly divided (for example, divided into 3 second intervals), and the revariation effect corresponding to the division is executed. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the re-variation effect corresponding to the length of the remaining time. In addition, the effect mode that can be set as the re-variation effect is that the effect period is preset at 3 second intervals such as 3 seconds, 6 seconds, 9 seconds, and so on, and after setting the effect period corresponding to the remaining time. In order to correspond to the detailed remaining time, it is configured to execute the re-variation effect in which the first half of the effect mode is deleted for a predetermined time.

With this configuration, it is possible to execute a re-variation effect corresponding to the remaining time randomly calculated using a preset effect period at regular intervals, so that the effect data used for re-variation can be executed. The capacity can be reduced. Although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, an effect in which the third symbol swings is set as the first half portion (for one second) of the effect mode preset in correspondence with the remaining time. .. As a result, even if a part of the first half of the effect mode is deleted corresponding to the actual remaining time, it is possible to suppress the execution of the effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, in this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is other than the big hit, and the player wins the small hit, which is the lottery result that can give the player a smaller amount of privilege (prize ball) than the big hit game. Also, the above-mentioned specific variation effect is configured to be executed.

Then, as the small hit game executed when the small hit is won, the winning game executed in the initial period (the first round game period) of the big hit game executed when the above-mentioned big hit is won. It is configured so that the same game content is executed.

As a result, even if the winning game is executed after the specific fluctuation effect is executed, at that time, the player is asked whether the winning game this time is a winning game based on the big hit winning or a winning game based on the small winning winning. Since it can be difficult to understand, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation for winning a big hit for a long period of time.

In this first control example, the player determines whether the running hit game is a big hit game or a small hit game by using a period in which the same game content is executed in the big hit game and the small hit game. It is configured to execute a notification effect for notifying the user. With such a configuration, information that is difficult to discriminate only by the content of the winning game can be notified by the effect, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Conventionally, as an effect (notice effect) for suggesting a lottery result of a special symbol to a player, an effect (operation effect) of displaying the advance notice content by having the player operate an operation means (frame button 22) is executed. There is something to do. When executing such an operation effect, a period (operation valid period) in which the operation of the operation means can be effectively determined is set, and a notice content is displayed when the operation means is operated within the operation valid period. It is generally configured to do so. Then, in order to notify the player that the above-mentioned operation validity period is set, for example, a display mode (button display) imitating the operation means and a display mode (for example, a time gauge display) indicating the operation validity period are displayed. ) Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, in one operation effect, in order to make the player operate the operation means a plurality of times, a display mode in which a time gauge is attached to each of the plurality of button displays may be displayed.

According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, the player can grasp a plurality of notice contents by operating the operation means within the operation valid period corresponding to each button display, so that the player can understand the contents of the notice. It was possible to actively participate in the production. However, if a plurality of button displays for which the operation valid period is set are displayed at the same time and the operation for the frame button 22 is temporarily neglected, the operation valid period set individually is set. Since it becomes difficult to properly operate the operation means, there is a problem that the motivation to participate in the production is reduced while the operation validity period is set.

On the other hand, in the first control example, a plurality of operation effects having overlapping operation validity periods can be executed, and further, when the operation validity period of each operation effect satisfies a predetermined condition, each operation effect is satisfied. It is configured to execute a fusion operation effect that fuses. Specifically, when the display mode of the time gauge indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period is the same among the plurality of operation effects, the fusion operation effect is executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to have the possibility that a plurality of operation effects can be changed into one fusion operation effect, so that it is possible to leave the possibility of completing the operation effect until the end. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the motivation to participate in the operation effect from being reduced during the operation effect.

Further, some conventional pachinko machines 10 are configured so that specific notice contents are displayed even when the operating means is not operated within the operation valid period set for the operation effect. In such a pachinko machine 10, since a specific notice content can be displayed even when the player does not operate the operating means, the playing motivation of the player who could not operate the operating means within the operation valid period is reduced. It is possible to prevent this from happening. However, in such a configuration, there is a problem that the relationship between operating the operating means within the operation valid period and displaying the notice content becomes low, and the effect of the effect is reduced.

On the other hand, in the first control example, when the operation means is not operated when a predetermined period of the operation valid period elapses, the operation means is automatically operated (automatic pressing effect). It is configured to run. As a result, it is possible to strengthen the relationship between operating the operating means within the operation valid period and displaying the notice content, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

Further, in the first control example, when the player operates the operating means during the automatic pressing effect, the effect mode of the automatic pressing effect can be changed in response to the player's operation. There is. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of operating the operating means until the end of the period in which the operation valid period is set.

Here, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 used in the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. 207. FIG. 207 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 207, the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is the left side region of the game board 13 (variable display device unit 80) with respect to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 2) in the first embodiment described above. The game area formed on the left side) is different in that the through gate 67 is provided, and the other points are the same. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 207, the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is provided with a through gate 67 in the left side region, and a player can play a left-handed game (a game for causing a ball to flow down to the left side region of the game board 13). It is configured so that all the balls fired at the time of playing pass through the through gate 67. With this configuration, the player plays a left-handed game (a game for flowing the ball down to the left area of the game board 13), and the ball is won in the first winning opening 64 to draw a lottery for the first special symbol. It is possible to execute a lottery of ordinary symbols even while performing. As a result, the lottery of ordinary symbols is performed using the variable effect (special figure 1 variable effect) in which the identification information (third symbol) for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol is dynamically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The result can be shown.

The detailed contents of the special figure 1 variation effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 212, but in this first control example, the dynamic display period of the special symbol is matched with the timing when the lottery result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. During the middle (during the third symbol change), the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed (the third symbol is swung to the extent that the player thinks that the third symbol is stopped and displayed). It is composed. As a result, since the lottery result of the normal symbol can be notified using the third symbol, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

Further, in the first control example, the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) and displayed in the same winning display mode depending on whether the normal symbol is won or the special symbol is won (charge effect (charge effect). (See FIG. 212)) is configured to be executed. As a result, the player is made to determine whether the hit display mode stopped and displayed to the player is a display mode for showing the lottery result of the special symbol or a display mode for showing the lottery result of the normal symbol. It can be difficult. Therefore, it is possible to easily give a sense of expectation to the winning game executed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed.

Furthermore, since it is configured to execute the above-mentioned charge effect in either the case where the normal symbol is won or the case where the special symbol is won, the chart effect is produced only when the special symbol is won. It is possible to increase the execution frequency of the charge effect as compared with the case where is executed.

Returning to FIG. 207, the description will be continued. A game area (lower right game area) covered with a resin outer edge member 73 (73b) is formed in the right side area of the game board 13. This lower right gaming area is more transparent than the other gaming areas because it is covered with an outer edge member 73b that is transparent and has a surface treatment (for example, textured) that diffuses light. It becomes a game area that is difficult to see.

A detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 208, but in the lower right game area, a special winning device 550 having a flow path for flowing the ball and various winning openings where the ball can win is provided. Further, a discharge flow path for using the winning balls in various winning openings for a simulated effect is formed. The ball flowing down the lower right game area is configured to enter an out port (not shown) and be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, with reference to FIG. 208, the types of entry openings (winning openings) provided in the special winning device 550 and the flow paths of the game balls that have entered each entry opening will be described. The flow path (main paths SK1 to SK6) of the game ball that has flowed into the inside of the first unit 551 of the special winning device 550 has already been described in the first embodiment with reference to FIG. 22 and the like. Then, the details will be omitted. FIG. 208 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the special winning device 550. As shown in FIG. 208, a specific out opening 166 is provided on the upper right side of the front view of the special winning device 550, and a specific general winning opening 163 is provided on the left side of the front view with respect to the specific out opening 166. The specific general winning opening 163 corresponds to the second receiving unit 562 (see FIG. 22) in the above-mentioned explanation of the first embodiment, and in order to make the explanation easy to understand (to clarify that it is a ball entrance opening). ), The name has been changed. Similarly, the specific out port 166 is a name change of the third receiving unit 563 (see FIG. 22) in the above-described description of the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 208, the specific general winning opening 163 and the out opening 166 are provided with a general winning sensor 163s and an out entering sensor 166s capable of detecting the entry of a game ball. The specific general winning opening 163 is configured as a winning opening in which three prize balls are given to the winning (winning) of one game ball, and the winning of the game ball is detected by the general winning sensor 163s. Three prize balls will be paid out each time. On the other hand, the specific out port 166 is configured as an entry port in which a prize ball is not given even if a game ball enters (simply discharges the entered game ball to the outside), and an out entry sensor. Even if the entry of the game ball is detected by 166s, the prize ball is not paid out.

Further, as shown in FIG. 208, a variable winning device 65 having a specific winning opening 65a into which a game ball can be entered is provided in a substantially central portion of the special winning device 550. The variable winning device 65 is composed of a first variable plate 583b, a first receiving recess 574a, and a second receiving recess 574b in the description of the first embodiment described above, and is a winning opening (ball entry opening). In order to clarify a certain point, in the description of the first control example, the first variable plate 583b is referred to as an opening / closing door 65f1, and the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b are simply referred to as a specific winning opening 65a. It is called. When a big hit is achieved by a big hit lottery, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened a predetermined number of times (6 to 16 rounds) (displaced from the state of being overhanging to the front side to the state of being retracted to the back side) to the specific winning opening 65a. And the game ball becomes ready to enter.

As shown in FIG. 208, the specific winning openings 65a are provided with specific winning sensors 65s1, 65s2 (detection devices SE3 and SE4 in the description of the first embodiment) capable of detecting the entry of a game ball, respectively. ing. The specific winning opening 65a is configured as a winning opening in which 15 prize balls are given to the winning (winning) of one game ball, and the winning of the game ball is performed by the specific winning sensors 65s1 and 65s2. Each time it is detected, 15 prize balls will be paid out. In each round of the jackpot, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 game balls are won) (the opening / closing door 65f1 retracts to the back side), so that the jackpot is hit. By launching a game ball aiming at the specific winning opening 65a (launching the game ball toward the flow path on the right side of the front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80), a large amount of prize balls are paid out. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game of the jackpot.

Further, as shown in FIG. 208, in the lower left of the variable winning device 65 in the special winning device 550, there is a second ball entry port (second winning opening) 640 (third receiving recess 575a in the description of the first embodiment, a third. 4 Receiving recess 575b (see FIG. 22) and a first electric accessory 640a (second variable member 584b in the description of the first embodiment) for opening and closing the second ball entry port (second winning opening) 640 are provided. ing. When a game ball enters the second entrance 640, a big hit lottery (lottery of a special symbol) is executed, and when a big hit is made, a big hit game in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened and closed a plurality of times is executed. Further, as described above, the first electric accessory 640a is in the operating state for a predetermined time when it is hit by a lottery of a normal symbol executed based on the passage of the game ball through the first through gate 66. ..

The game ball that has entered the specific general winning opening 163 (second receiving section 562) rolls the second rolling section 577 (see FIG. 20) to the back side of the front view (the back side of the base plate 60). Is guided to. The game ball guided to the back side of the front view flows into the guidance flow path 690 shown by the broken line in FIG. 208. Similarly, the game ball that has entered the specific out port 166 is guided to the back surface side of the base plate 60 by rolling the third rolling portion 578 (see FIG. 20), and flows into the guidance flow path 690. do. Further, the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a rolls on the auxiliary path HK1 (see FIG. 22) and is guided to the back surface side of the base plate 60 and flows into the guidance flow path 690. That is, the game ball that has entered the specific general winning opening 163, the game ball that has entered the specific out opening 166, and the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a all have an induction flow path 690. Flow down.

As shown in FIG. 208, the induction flow path 690 entered the general throwing unit 690a for flowing the game ball that entered the specific general winning opening 163 into the guidance flow path 690 and the specific out opening 166. An out-throwing unit 690b for flowing a game ball into the guidance flow path 690, a specific ball-throwing unit 690c for flowing a game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a into the guidance flow path 690, and a specific flow path 690. It is provided at the most downstream, and is composed of at least a merging path 690d for flowing (merging) the game ball from the back surface side of the base plate 60 to the effect flow path 691 (secondary path HK3 in the description of the first embodiment). Has been done. The game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path 690 via any of the general throwing section 690a, the out throwing section 690b, and the specific throwing section 690c is guided to the directing flow path 691 via the merging path 690d. .. The game ball guided to the effect flow path 691 falls from the discharge portion 691a at the lower end of the effect flow path 691 toward the pseudo attacker 165 (decorative unit 750 in the description of the first embodiment, see FIG. 91). do. This pseudo-attacker 165 has a pseudo-winning opening 165a in which a game ball can enter, an open state in which a game ball can enter the pseudo-winning opening 165a, and a pseudo-winning opening 165a cannot be entered. It is composed of at least a pseudo door 165f1 (opening / closing member 870 in the description of the first embodiment, see FIG. 104 (b)) which is variably configured to be in a closed state. Further, on the front side of the pseudo-attacker 165, an out port 167 for discharging the game ball that has reached the pseudo-attacker 165 to the outside with the pseudo-door 165f1 closed (winning in the description of the first embodiment). The mouth 761a) is arranged.

Although the details will be described later, in this first control example, the specific winning opening 65a is opened and closed and the pseudo door 165f1 of the pseudo attacker 165 is opened and closed in each round of the jackpot game. Then, in the first control example, the effect of suggesting the payout of the prize ball (pseudo-winning effect) is executed according to the timing of entering the game ball with respect to the pseudo-winning opening 165a. In other words, instead of executing the effect of notifying the payout of the prize ball based on the detection of the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a, the pseudo winning effect is performed according to the timing of entering the pseudo winning opening 165a. It is configured to be executed. That is, by using a pseudo-attacker 165, which is easier to see than the specific winning opening 65a covered by the first path member 560, it is suggested whether or not the prize ball is paid out, so that the prize ball is hit at the jackpot. It is possible to make the player understand the opportunity to be paid out more clearly.

After the ball is detected by any of the specific winning sensors 65s1 and 65s2, the detected game ball flows down the guidance flow path 690 and the effect flow path 691 and enters the pseudo winning opening 165a. It takes about 0.5 seconds to complete the process. Therefore, in the first control example, the timing at which the pseudo winning opening 165a is opened and the timing at which the pseudo winning opening 165a is closed are set to 0. It is configured to be delayed for 5 seconds. As a result, all the game balls that have won (winned) in the specific winning opening 65a can be entered into the pseudo winning opening 165a.

Further, in the first control example, as described above, the game ball that has entered the specific general winning opening 163 and the specific out opening 166 is also configured to be reachable to the pseudo attacker 165. From the appearance of the player, it is difficult to distinguish which entry port the ball entered and reached the pseudo attacker 165. Therefore, regardless of the type of entry opening, the pseudo winning opening 165a is reached. It is configured to execute a pseudo-winning effect for all the winning balls. As a result, the more the game balls enter the specific general winning opening 163 and the specific out opening 166 during the round period of the jackpot, the more times the pseudo winning effect is executed, so that the prize is larger than the actual one. You can make the illusion that you have won the ball. Therefore, the satisfaction of the player in the jackpot game can be further increased. As described above, each round of the jackpot ends when the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a 10 times. On the other hand, for the pseudo winning opening 165a, in addition to the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a, the game ball that has entered the specific general winning opening 163 or the specific out opening 166 can also enter. Therefore, in each round of the jackpot, 10 or more game balls can easily enter the pseudo winning opening 165a. Therefore, in each round of the jackpot, it is possible to make the player feel as if more game balls than usual have won the specific winning opening 65a, which makes the player feel more satisfied. be able to. Here, in the first control example, the mode of the pseudo winning effect is determined by whether or not the number of balls entered into the pseudo winning opening 165a during the opening period of the pseudo door 165f1 exceeds the specified number of times (10 times). (Pseudo winning sound) is configured to be different. As a result, when the pseudo winning sound changes, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a (over winning) in excess of the specified number. You can have a greater sense of satisfaction.

Further, in the first control example, whether or not the pseudo winning effect can be executed and the execution timing are the timings at which the balls entering each entry opening (specific general winning opening 163, specific out opening 166, specific winning opening 65a) are detected. It is configured to be determined by. That is, at the timing when the entry into each entry port is detected, it is predicted whether or not the timing at which the game ball in which the entry is detected reaches the pseudo attacker 165 is during the opening period of the pseudo door 165f1. Therefore, when the opening period is in progress (that is, when the game ball that has detected the entry is predicted to enter the pseudo winning opening 165a during the opening period of the pseudo door 165f1), it is decided to execute the pseudo winning effect. It is configured to be. In other words, the pseudo-winning opening 165a is not provided with any configuration for detecting the entry of a game ball, and whether or not the pseudo-winning effect can be executed only by the winning sensor originally provided in each entry opening. And it is configured to determine the execution timing. With this configuration, the number of sensors for detecting incoming balls can be reduced, so that the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the number of parts.

In this first control example, it takes about 1.5 seconds from the detection of the ball entering the specific general winning opening 163 to the time when the game ball in which the ball is detected reaches the pseudo-attacker 165. It takes about 1 second from the detection of the ball entering the specific out port 166 until the game ball in which the ball is detected reaches the pseudo attacker 165, and the specific winning opening 65a It takes about 0.5 seconds from the detection of the ball entering the ball to the game ball in which the ball is detected reaches the pseudo-attacker 165. Therefore, when a ball entering the specific general winning opening 163 is detected, it is determined (predicted) whether or not the pseudo door 165f1 is opened after 1.5 seconds, and the pseudo door 165f1 is opened. When it is predicted that (the game ball that has detected the winning ball will enter the pseudo winning opening 165a), the pseudo winning effect is set to be executed 1.5 seconds later. Similarly, when the ball entering the specific out port 166 is detected, it is determined (predicted) whether or not the pseudo door 165f1 is opened after 1 second, and the pseudo door 165f1 is opened (predicted). When it is predicted that the game ball that has detected the entry will enter the pseudo-winning opening 165a), the pseudo-winning effect is set to be executed one second later. When a ball entering the specific winning opening 65a is detected, it is determined (predicted) whether or not the pseudo door 165f1 is opened after 0.5 seconds, and the pseudo door 165f1 is opened (ball entry). When it is predicted that the detected game ball will enter the pseudo winning opening 165a), the pseudo winning effect is set to be executed 0.5 seconds later. As a result, the pseudo-winning effect can be executed at the timing when the game ball enters the pseudo-winning opening 165a, so that the prize ball can be more reliably entered into the pseudo-attacker 165 at the jackpot. It is possible to make the player feel as if it was given. Therefore, in the big hit, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the game ball enters the pseudo-attacker 165 and play the game, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the first embodiment, not only the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a, but also the game ball that has entered the specific general winning opening 163 and the specific out opening 166 can reach the pseudo-attacker 165. However, it is not limited to this. For example, a game ball that has entered at least one of the specific general winning opening 163 and the specific out opening 166 may be configured so as not to reach the pseudo attacker 165. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the difference between the number of prize balls estimated from the number of pseudo-winning effects and the number of prize balls actually paid out.

In the first embodiment, the specific winning opening 65a is provided on the downstream side of the specific general winning opening 163 and the specific out opening 166, but the arrangement of each entry opening may be arbitrarily determined.

Returning to FIG. 207, the description will be continued. A center frame 86 is arranged in a variable display device unit 80 provided in a substantially central portion of the game board 13 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86. Further, the center frame 86 projects toward the front surface side of the game board 13 and surrounds the periphery of the third symbol display device 81 to prevent the game ball from coming into contact with the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, left, middle, and right 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed (variable) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed). The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment displays the gaming state according to the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37a and 37b. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 209. FIG. 209 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in this control example, and FIG. 209 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in this control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the display contents schematically. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, there are three symbols, left, middle, and right. The symbol column is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 209 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, and the upper two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The lower 1/3 is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the advance notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The third symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is composed of 10 types of main symbols imitating the numbers "0" to "9". .. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, "777"), and variable display is performed. It is configured so that a big hit occurs after the fluctuation display is finished. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

Specifically, in the main display area Dm, three symbol rows L1, L2, and L3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol of each symbol row is stopped and displayed on the effective line V1. If the third symbol is aligned and stopped on the effective line V1 with a combination of jackpot symbols (in the first control example, the same combination of main symbols), a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

The mode of variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, and each symbol. The number of symbols in the column can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbol that is variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and a symbol that combines an image such as a figure or a character and a number may be configured as the third symbol. Further, the area in which the third symbol is variablely displayed may be varied. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol may be changed. By making the size smaller or moving the variable display area to a position that is difficult for the player to see (for example, the corner of the display screen), it is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the third symbol is changed. You may try to do it. Further, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again during the period when the special symbol is fluctuating.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the second special symbol are the same (to the extent that it is difficult for the player to identify). However, the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be different so as to correspond to the type of special symbol that is changing.

In addition, in the first control example, the specific symbol can be stopped and displayed as the third symbol which is variablely displayed in the middle symbol row Z2. The details of this specific symbol will be described later with reference to FIG. 212, but it is configured in a display mode in which identification information (for example, “charge”) different from the numbers is attached, and this specific symbol is on the effective line V1. By displaying a stop on the screen, it is possible to notify that the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result.

In this control example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, for example, when the third symbol showing the same number in the left symbol row L1 and the right symbol row L3 is stopped and displayed, the changing middle symbol row L2 is specified. It is configured so that a specific symbol is displayed by interrupting a place (for example, a place between the numbers "0" and "9"). As a result, since the specific symbol is suddenly displayed after the variation display of the third symbol has elapsed for a predetermined period, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected variation effect.

The conditions for displaying the specific symbol may be other than the above-mentioned conditions. For example, the numbers indicated by the third symbol stopped and displayed in the left symbol row L1 and the right symbol row L3 are a predetermined combination. It may be a condition, or it may be a condition that the player operates the operating means during the variable display of the third symbol. Further, it may be a condition that is established based on the lottery result of the special symbol. In addition, a variation effect in which the specific symbol is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the variation display of the third symbol may be set in advance at the time of setting the variation effect (at the start of the variation).

Further, when displaying a specific symbol, a method other than the method of interrupting and displaying the symbol string set in advance may be used, and for example, it may be replaced with one third symbol preset in the symbol string. good. In this case, for example, among the third symbols set in the middle symbol row L2, the combination of the third symbols that indicates the jackpot winning of the special symbol when the specific third symbol is stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed. If it is in the state of being reached, that is, in the reach state, it may be configured to display the specific symbol by replacing it with the third symbol set before and after the specific third symbol. As a result, the lottery result that is advantageous to the player is shown regardless of which of the plurality of consecutive third symbols is stopped and displayed, so that the player can pay attention to the variable effect while having a sense of expectation. ..

In this control example, as the lottery result of the special symbol, three types of "big hit", "small hit", and "missing" can be set as the lottery result of the special symbol. It is configured so that one of the multiple jackpot types having different contents of the jackpot game to be executed and the game state set after the jackpot game is set is set. Then, the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is configured to suggest (notify) the lottery result of the special symbol and the jackpot type at the time of winning the jackpot.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit D" in which the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player is set, one of the main symbols of "3,7", which is an odd number, is doublet. The variable display is performed, which is displayed as a stop. Further, in the case of "big hit A", "big hit B", "big hit C", and "big hit E", variable display is performed in which any one of the main symbols of "0 to 9" is aligned. Further, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "small hit", the chance eye composed of the combination of "341" is displayed. It should be noted that this combination of chances is not selected when the lottery result is out of order. In the present embodiment, the chance eye is configured to be displayed by a combination of a specific third symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a special symbol (for example, a golden fish symbol) different from the normal third symbol from 0 to 9 is displayed. ) May be displayed in one or a plurality of combinations, or characters such as "chance" may be displayed for notification.

The sub-display area Ds is divided into two small areas, and on the display screen capable of executing the variable display of the special symbol, information for showing the winning information of the special symbol currently being executed in the small area Ds1 (execution). Information for indicating the winning information of the special symbol (special figure 1 first reserved symbol m1 to special figure 1 4th reserved symbol m4, special figure 2) in which the middle symbol m0) is displayed and is stored in the small area Ds2. The first reserved symbol m5 to the special figure 2 the fourth reserved symbol m8) are displayed. Further, the information (contents) displayed in the sub-display area Ds is configured to be switched depending on the game state. For example, if the jackpot game is in progress, a guidance display mode for guiding the game content during the jackpot game. Is displayed, and even during the variation display of the third symbol, if the variation effect in which the expectation of winning the jackpot is set to be high is executed, the jackpot expectation of the variation effect is given to the player. The display mode for showing is displayed. Further, when the variation effect is executed using the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the sub-display area Ds is configured to be erased.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 209 (b). As shown in FIG. 209 (b), in the upper left of the front view in the main display area Dm, there is a special figure 1 display area Dm1a in which the fourth symbol is variablely displayed in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol, and a second special. A special figure 2 display area Dm1b for variable display of the fourth symbol in conjunction with the variable display of the symbol is formed, and variable display is performed in conjunction with the variable display of the normal symbol in the upper right of the front view in the main display area Dm. The normal map display area Dm2 is configured to be stopped and displayed.

In the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 209 (b), the special figure 1 display area Dm1a, the special figure 2 display area Dm1b, and the normal figure display area Dm2 are shown in a size that can be visually recognized by the player. In reality, it is formed in a size that is difficult for the player to see. With this configuration, the player can be made to pay attention to the variation effect of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm.

Further, when an effect using the entire display screen is executed as a variation effect of the third symbol, or a movable accessory for effect provided in the vicinity of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a lower displacement member 440 (see FIG. 9). )) Is movable to cover the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the size of the display area of the special figure 1 display area Dm1a, the special figure 2 display area Dm1b, and the normal figure display area Dm2 is reduced. It may be made to change, the display position may be changed, or it may be temporarily hidden. As a result, it is possible to provide a powerful production without discomfort.

Further, instead of the special figure 1 display area Dm1a, the special figure 2 display area Dm1b, and the normal figure display area Dm2, the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol are interlocked with the variable display outside the third symbol display device 81. The fourth symbol to be dynamically displayed may be displayed. In this case, it is preferable to provide the LED for the fourth symbol in the same place as the decorative LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 10 so as to correspond to each symbol. As a result, it is possible to execute the dynamic display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the variable display of each symbol, which is difficult for the player to understand.

<Regarding the production content in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 210 to 218, the contents of various effects executed in the first control example will be described. First, a look-ahead effect using a reserved symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with reference to FIGS. 210 and 211 and a treasure box accessory 750 which is an effect accessory provided outside the third symbol display device. Will be explained.

In this first control example, when a ball enters the special symbol start opening (first entry port 64, second entry opening 640) during the variable display of the special symbol, the lottery right (ball is) of the special symbol. The right to execute a lottery of special symbols using the values (winning information) of various counters acquired at the time of entering the ball) is stored (held storage) up to a predetermined number (4 for each special symbol). It is configured. Then, as a display mode for indicating the number of lottery rights stored on hold, the reserved symbols are displayed in the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81.

Further, the content of the winning information stored on hold is determined in advance before the special symbol lottery is actually executed, and based on the determination result, the display mode of the reserved symbol and the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 are determined. It is configured to execute a variable effect (look-ahead effect).

When this look-ahead effect is executed, the display mode of the reserved symbol displayed in the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Then, when the special symbol lottery corresponding to the reserved symbol having a variable display mode is executed, as shown in FIG. 210 (a), the running symbol is executed in the display mode corresponding to the reserved symbol having a variable display mode. m0 is displayed in the small area Ds1. That is, the running symbol m0 displayed in the small area Ds1 notifies the player of the display mode of the reserved symbol changed by the look-ahead effect even while the special symbol change based on the reserved symbol is being executed. It is configured so that it can be done.

In addition, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 211 (b), the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 can be changed in addition to the reserved symbol by the look-ahead effect. Further, even when executing a look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the reserved symbol for the same winning information and a look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750, the result of the look-ahead effect. Is configured to be different.

According to the example shown in FIG. 210, it is shown that there is a high expectation that the running symbol m0 will win the jackpot during the variable display of the special symbol whose lottery result is the jackpot D (16 round jackpot). By displaying the "green" display mode (in FIG. 210 (a), the display mode of the checkered pattern), it is suggested to the player that the special symbol variation during execution may be a jackpot variation. Then, the treasure box accessory 750 is displayed in a "red" display mode (in FIG. 210 (b), a diagonal line pattern display mode) indicating that the jackpot type is a jackpot D and the degree of expectation is high.

Further, according to the example shown in FIG. 211, it is highly expected that the running symbol m0 will win the jackpot while the lottery result is the jackpot A (6 round jackpot) and the variable display of the special symbol is displayed. By displaying the "green" display mode (display mode of the checkered pattern in FIG. 211 (a)), it is suggested to the player that the special symbol variation during execution may be a jackpot variation. Then, the treasure box accessory 750 is displayed with a "green" display mode (in FIG. 211 (b), a grid pattern display mode) indicating that the jackpot type is the jackpot A and the degree of expectation is high.

That is, in the first control example, the pre-reading effect that changes the display mode of the reserved symbol mainly sets the pre-reading effect mode based on the information indicating the winning / failing determination result of the jackpot among the target winning information. The look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 is configured to mainly set the effect mode of the look-ahead effect based on the information indicating the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won among the target winning information. ing.

As a result, the player can comprehensively determine the display mode of a plurality of objects to be displayed whose display mode is changed by the look-ahead effect, and predict the lottery result of the special symbol based on the target winning information. You will watch the production carefully. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 210 and 211, the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 is, at the latest, that a part of the third symbol that is variablely displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed. Is also configured so that the look-ahead effect is executed so that it can be changed before. That is, as described above, the numbers of the third symbol and the jackpot type are related, and when the jackpot is actually hit, each third symbol is stopped in a predetermined combination (for example, doublet). Since the numbers of the 3rd symbol are displayed, the numbers of the 3rd symbol more directly suggest the result (big hit type) of this special symbol lottery to the player. The display mode of the object 750 is changed.

With this configuration, the lottery result of the special symbol can be suggested to the player in order, and the various effects to be executed can be made interested until the end.

In this control example, when the look-ahead effect is executed, the display mode of the reserved symbol or the treasure box accessory 750 is configured to be changed to a display mode showing the effect result of the look-ahead effect. The display mode may be changed to show the effect result of the above, and for example, the display mode may be changed stepwise with the effect result of the look-ahead effect as the final stage. In this case, it is preferable to configure the effect result of the look-ahead effect so that it can be set in a plurality of stages according to the size of the privilege given to the player. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the production while expecting that the display mode can be changed more.

Further, it is configured to make the determination of whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the reserved symbol and the determination of whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750. Therefore, it is possible to understand at what timing and which display mode of the object to be directed changes during the period from when the prize information is reserved and stored until the change of the special symbol corresponding to the prize information is started. Since it can be made difficult, even if the effect result of the look-ahead effect is already displayed, it is possible to expect that the display mode will be further changed.

As described above, in this control example, as the look-ahead effect, the display mode of a plurality of objects to be produced can be randomly and variably displayed, but the display mode is variably displayed as the look-ahead effect. The order of the objects may be predetermined. As a result, it is possible to clearly inform the player which object is to be produced whose display mode can be changed next. Therefore, it can be easily determined that the display mode has changed.

Further, in the case of randomly changing the display mode of a plurality of objects to be directed as in this control example, which display mode of the object to be directed changes immediately before the timing when the display mode actually changes. The same effect can be achieved by configuring to notify.

Further, in this control example, the timing for variably displaying the display mode of the object to be produced is set at random, but the display mode may be changed at a predetermined specific timing, or the game may be played. The display mode may be changed based on the operation of the operating means by a person.

Further, in this control example, by changing the display mode of the reserved symbol, the winning information that is the target of the pre-reading effect of this time is notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, and the target winning information is difficult to understand. It is configured to execute a look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of. As a result, for example, when the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 is changed before the display mode of the reserved symbol, the player can enjoy predicting which winning information the pre-reading effect is being executed. Can be provided.

In this control example, the display mode of the reserved symbol corresponding to the winning information that is the target of the look-ahead effect is changed. It may be configured to make it. As a result, even when the look-ahead effect using the reserved symbol is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which reserved symbol (winning information) the look-ahead effect is executed for. Further, in the look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750, the player may be notified of the target reserved symbol (winning information).

In addition, in this control example, as a look-ahead effect, a plurality of variable display effects are executed by using a plurality of objects to be produced for one winning information, but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of objects to be directed may be configured to execute a look-ahead effect for different winning information, for example, a look-ahead effect using a plurality of objects to be directed for one winning information. It is configured to determine whether or not to execute, and as a result of the determination, only the object to be directed that is determined not to execute the look-ahead effect is set as the object to be directed by the look-ahead effect targeting other winning information. You may. As a result, when the display mode of the plurality of objects to be produced is changed, the player may have a look-ahead effect executed for one prize information, or a plurality of executions for the plurality of prize information. It can be difficult to understand whether it is a look-ahead effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the content of the look-ahead effect from getting bored at an early stage.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 212 and 213, the contents of the charge effect for displaying the specific symbol (charge symbol) as the third symbol will be described. FIG. 212 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the charge effect, and FIG. 212 (b) shows an example of a case where the specific symbol Z4 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the charge effect. It is a schematic diagram.

This charge effect is a middle symbol row L2 (FIG. 210 (FIG. 210 (FIG. 210)) in which the middle symbol Z2 is variablely displayed when the third symbol showing the same number in the left symbol Z1 and the right symbol Z3 is stopped (that is, in the reach state). This is an effect of interrupting and displaying a specific symbol (charge symbol) Z4 in (see a)). Then, when the specific symbol Z4 is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row L2, it becomes a combination of the third symbols indicating that the special symbol has won the big hit or the small hit. Further, during this charge effect, when the normal symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, an effect of temporarily stopping the specific symbol Z4 at the stop timing is executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 212 (a), the left symbol Z1 and the right symbol Z3 are stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating "7", and the middle symbol row L2 is in variable display, that is, "7". In the reach state of ", the specific symbol Z4 is displayed in the middle symbol row L2 by interrupting the normal middle symbol row L2. In this state, the variable display mode of the fourth symbol indicating that the first special symbol is variablely displayed is executed in the special symbol 1 display area Dm1a, and the normal symbol is variablely displayed in the normal symbol display area Dm2. A variable display mode indicating that the device is displayed is displayed.

Then, when the timing at which the normal symbol is stopped and displayed is reached from the state shown in FIG. 212 (a), the specific symbol Z4 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row L2 as shown in FIG. 212 (b). .. This temporary stop display is a display state in which the specific symbol Z4 is oscillated to the extent that the player can recognize that the specific symbol Z4 has stopped, and the temporary stop display is not actually completely stopped. In this state, the variable display mode of the fourth symbol indicating that the first special symbol is variablely displayed is executed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1a, and the normal symbol is displayed in the normal symbol display area Dm2. A variable display mode indicating that the stop display has been performed is displayed. Since FIG. 212 (b) shows an example in which a normal symbol is won, the first electric accessory 640a is opened after the temporary stop of the specific symbol Z4 (after the fluctuation stop of the normal symbol). Will be done.

With this configuration, when the specific symbol Z4 stops (temporarily stops) in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the player wins a special symbol hit (big hit, small hit). It is difficult to tell whether you have won the prize or if you have won the prize. Therefore, it is possible to be interested in the game content executed after the specific symbol Z4 is stopped (temporarily stopped).

Further, since the above-mentioned charge effect (effect in which the specific symbol Z4 is stopped (temporarily stopped) is displayed) can be executed depending on whether the special symbol is won or the normal symbol is won. It is possible to increase the execution frequency of the production and enhance the production effect.

Next, since the charge effect described above is configured to be executed regardless of whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the specific symbol Z4 is stopped and displayed based on the lottery result of the special symbol. If this is the case, the player can be expected to have a lottery result (big hit) that is more advantageous to the player. For example, a big hit game executed after the specific symbol Z4 is stopped and displayed. If the game content of the game is configured so that the game content of the small hit game is completely different (for example, the attacker (variable winning device) that is opened is different), the player can obtain the lottery result of this special symbol. Since it is determined immediately, it is difficult for the player to continue to have a sense of expectation.

On the other hand, in the first control example, the initial game content of the big hit game executed after the specific symbol Z4 is stopped and displayed and the game content of the small hit game are configured to be the same. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from easily determining what the running hit game is immediately after the big hit game or the small hit game is executed. Further, using the period in which the same game content is set (common game period), an effect (roulette effect) of notifying the player of the winning result of this time is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured in.

Here, the contents of the above-mentioned roulette effect will be described with reference to FIG. 213. FIG. 213 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displayed during execution of the roulette effect, and FIG. 213 (b) displays the effect result of the roulette effect. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of a display screen.

As shown in FIG. 212 (a), when the roulette effect is executed, the character 811b imitating the boy who is the main character of the roulette effect and the lottery result (big hit or small hit) of this special symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. ) Is displayed, and a sword 811k for notifying the lottery result of a special symbol using the roulette 811c is displayed.

Since the example shown in FIG. 212 (a) is a roulette effect executed when a small hit of a special symbol is won, the display mode “triangle” indicating that the small hit is won in the special figure 1 display area Dm1a. The fourth symbol is stopped and displayed. That is, this roulette effect is executed during the small hit game.

The roulette 811c has a big hit area (area with a "circle") 811c1 indicating that the lottery result of this special symbol was a big hit, and a small hit area ("X") indicating that it was a small hit. Areas marked with ”) 811c2 are formed to have the same size, and each area is rotated and displayed to the right at a speed that allows the player to identify each area. After that, the roulette 811c is rotated and displayed at a high speed (a speed at which it is difficult for the player to identify each area), and the sword 811k is thrown toward the roulette 811c.

When the sword 811k is stuck in the roulette 811c, the rotation speed of the roulette 811c gradually decreases, and the roulette 811c is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 213 (b). In this state, the player is notified that the area where the sword 811k is stuck is the lottery result of this special symbol. Since FIG. 213 (b) shows the roulette effect (roulette effect executed during the small hit game) that is executed after winning the small hit, the effect that the sword 811k sticks into the small hit area 811c2 is executed. ..

Since the above-mentioned roulette effect is executed during the same period (common game period) between the game content of the small hit game and the game content of the big hit game, the game content of the hit game is executed during the roulette effect. It is not possible to determine the lottery result of this special symbol from. Therefore, the player who wants to know the lottery result of this special symbol as soon as possible will pay attention to the effect mode of the roulette effect being executed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the above-mentioned example, the large hit area 811c1 and the small hit area 811c2 formed in the roulette 811c are shown in the same size, but the lottery is not limited to this. It is preferable to configure the size of each area to be variable according to the result. As a result, the player can predict the lottery result of this special symbol by grasping the display mode (size of each area) of the roulette 811c at the start of the roulette effect (before the roulette 811c rotates at a high speed). Can be done. Further, in the above-mentioned example, the display mode in which the big hit area 811c1 and the small hit area 811c2 are formed one by one is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a plurality of big hit areas 811c1 and a small hit area 811c2 are formed. And may be formed alternately.

Further, in the above-mentioned example, an example of forming two types of a big hit area 811c1 and a small hit area 811c2 as a region showing a lottery result of a special symbol is shown. It may be further subdivided according to the jackpot type of the winning jackpot.

In addition, the rotation display mode of the roulette 811c, the display mode of the sword 811k, and the display mode of the character 811b may be varied to suggest the lottery result of the special symbol this time.

In the first control example, the above-mentioned roulette effect is executed when the winning game is started, and the effect result is automatically displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a hit. The roulette effect may be started based on the start of the game, and the effect result of the roulette effect may be displayed based on the ball winning the attacker that is open during the common game period. It may be configured to display the effect result of the roulette effect based on the fact that a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means during the period. As a result, the player can be enthusiastically participated in the production.

Further, in the first control example, the roulette effect is configured to be executed during the winning game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the roulette effect is configured to be executed during the change of the special symbol. Is also good. That is, for example, when the effect period of the roulette effect is 10 seconds and the effect period of the charge effect is 15 seconds, the charge effect is started 25 seconds before the change stop timing of the special symbol, and the change stop timing is 10. A variation effect corresponding to a special symbol variation may be set so that the roulette effect is executed seconds before.

In this way, when the roulette effect is configured to be executable during the variable display of the special symbol, not during the winning game, the above-mentioned roulette effect is executed even in the charge effect executed based on the winning of the normal symbol. It becomes possible. In this case, for example, when it is determined that the winning normal symbol is stopped during the fluctuation period of the special symbol, the stop timing is calculated and the roulette effect is executed 10 seconds before the calculated stop timing. (So that the specific symbol Z4 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the charge effect), the effect mode of the charge effect may be set. Further, the roulette 811c displayed in the roulette effect may be set to form a normal symbol hit area indicating a normal symbol hit in addition to the large hit area 811c1 and the small hit area 811c2. As a result, it is possible to execute the roulette effect even when the normal symbol is won, so that the execution frequency of the roulette effect can be increased.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 214 and 215, the content of the first operation effect (button fusion effect), which is one of the operation effects in which the player operates the operation means, will be described. FIG. 214 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect content at the time when the first operation effect (button fusion effect) is started, and FIG. 214 (b) is a diagram after a certain period of time has elapsed thereafter. FIG. 215 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect content, and FIG. 215 (a) shows the effect content when the player operates the operation means (frame button 22) once in the first operation effect (button fusion effect). It is a schematic diagram showing an example, and FIG. 215 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect contents after the buttons are fused in the first operation effect (button fusion effect).

Here, the content of the first operation effect (button fusion effect) will be described. In this first operation effect (button fusion effect), the player operates the operation means to display the lottery result of the special symbol this time in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Then, the operation means is operated a number of times (three times) corresponding to the number of third symbols (three in this control example) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol.

An operation valid period is set for each operation of each operating means, and if the operating means is not operated within the operation valid period, the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is not displayed. In addition, when the display mode of the time gauge displayed corresponding to the operation validity period set for the operation of each operation means satisfies a predetermined condition (when the same display mode is obtained), each operation means. A plurality of third symbols are displayed based on the operation of one operation means by fusing the operations of. As a result, even when the remaining period of the operation valid period is short, it is possible to display all the third symbols, so that the player can enthusiastically operate the operation means until the end.

As shown in FIG. 214 (a), the left display area 81a, the middle display area 81b, and the right display area 81c are formed so as to cover the left symbol row L1, the middle symbol row L2, and the right symbol row L3 during the variable display. NS. Then, the first button 822a and the time gauge t1 for indicating the operation valid period of the first button 822a are displayed in the left display area 81a, and the second button 822b and its second button are displayed in the middle display area 81b. A time gauge t2 for indicating the operation validity period of the 822b is displayed, and a third button 822c and a time gauge t3 for indicating the operation validity period of the third button 822c are displayed in the right display area 81c.

In this state, when the player operates the operating means (frame button 22), the display mode of the first button 822a is first changed to a display mode indicating that the operating means has been operated, and the left display area 81a is on the left. 3 Symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 215 (a)).

The operation valid periods corresponding to the buttons 822a to 822 are all the same length (5 seconds), and the start timings of the operation valid periods are also the same. However, in FIG. 214 (a), the operation valid period is configured to be the same. On the display screen, the remaining time displays t1a to t3a of the time gauges t1 to t3 are displayed in a display mode indicating different remaining times. Specifically, the remaining time display t1a is displayed in a display mode indicating that the remaining time is 4 seconds, and the remaining time display t2a is displayed in a display mode indicating that the remaining time is 3.5 seconds. The time display t3a is displayed in a display mode indicating that the remaining time is 5 seconds.

Further, in this control example, the moving speeds (lengths of the arrows in FIG. 214A) of the gauges of the time gauges t1 to t3 are configured to be the same. That is, in a state where the same operation valid period is set, the movement start timings (subtraction display timings) of the time gauges t1 to t3 are configured to be different.

When executing a plurality of operation effects for which the same operation validity period is set in this way, the order of the operation effects is visually displayed to the player by displaying them so that the remaining apparent time is different. It is possible to make a distinction. In addition, it is possible to make the user think that the operation means must be operated quickly according to the decrease (subtraction) of the remaining time, and the operation means can be operated enthusiastically.

Here, in the present effect in which the same operation validity period is set and the moving speeds (lengths of the arrows in FIG. 214A) of the gauges of the time gauges t1 to t3 are the same. If the movement start timings (subtraction display timings) of the time gauges t1 to t3 are different, the timing at which the remaining time becomes 0 may be different. Therefore, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 214 (b), the effect of blinking the time gauge is executed, and the remaining time is not reduced during the period when the time gauge is off (hidden). doing. As a result, it is possible to easily unify the timing at which the remaining time of each time gauge t1 to t3 becomes 0 without preparing a plurality of timing movement speeds. In this control example, the remaining time display of each time gauge t1 to t3 is set to be the same at the timing when the remaining time of the operation valid period set for each operation effect is 1 second.

In FIG. 214 (b), the remaining time t1b of the time gauge t1 indicating the operation valid period of the first button 822a is displayed in a blinking display mode (display mode shown by a broken line) indicating 2.5 seconds, and the second button 822b is displayed. The remaining time t2b of the time gauge t2 indicating the operation valid period is displayed in a blinking display mode (display mode shown by a broken line) indicating 3.5 seconds, and the remaining time t3b of the time gauge t3 indicating the operation valid period of the third button 822c is displayed. Is displayed in a display mode indicating 4.5 seconds. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 214 (b), the moving speeds of the time gauge t1 and the time gauge t2 are displayed so as to be lower than the moving speed of the time gauge t3.

When the player operates the frame button 22 once in the state shown in FIG. 214 (b), as shown in FIG. 215 (a), the left third symbol Z1 indicates “7” in the left display area 81a. Displayed in mode. Even in this state, the time gauge t2 is displayed in the blinking display mode and the time gauge t3 is displayed in the normal display mode as in FIG. 214 (b).

Then, when the predetermined period elapses in the state of FIG. 215 (a), the moving speed of the time gauge t3 is faster than the moving speed of the time gauge t2, so that the remaining time display of the time gauge t2 and the time gauge t3 becomes the same. .. When the remaining time display modes of the two time gauges t2 and t3 are the same, as shown in FIG. 215 (b), the fusion button 822d in which the second button 822b and the third button 822c are fused is displayed, and the time gauge is displayed. The fusion operation effect in which the fusion time gauge t4 in which t2 and the time gauge t3 are fused is displayed executes execution.

As described above, in this control example, the remaining time display of each time gauge t1 to t3 is set to be the same at the timing of 1 second remaining time of the operation valid period set for each operation effect. In the fusion time gauge t4, the remaining time display t4a is displayed in a display mode indicating the remaining time of 1 second. When the player operates the operating means while the fusion button 822d is displayed, the middle symbol Z2 is displayed in the middle display area 81b and the right symbol Z3 is displayed in the right display area 81c at once.

In the above-mentioned example with reference to FIGS. 214 and 215, an example is shown in which the fusion button 822d is displayed while the left symbol Z1 is already displayed, but the operation means is once performed during the first operation effect. If the remaining time of the operation valid period is 1 second without being operated, the fusion button 822d is displayed using all of the left display area 81a to the right display area 81c.

In this way, since the display area in which the fusion button 822d is displayed indicates the range of the effect (effect of displaying the third symbol) executed when the operation means is operated, the operation effect that is easy for the player to understand is provided. Can be provided.

In this control example, when the fusion operation effect is set, the fusion button 822d is displayed to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even after the fusion operation effect is set, the display screen shown in FIG. 214 (a) is continuously displayed, and the fusion operation effect is executed based on the player operating the operation means. It may be configured in. As a result, it is possible to provide a player with an unexpected effect.

Further, in this control example, the fusion operation effect is executed when the display mode indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period set for each operation effect is the same, but other conditions are satisfied. It may be configured to execute the fusion operation effect with, for example, when the operation means is operated within a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) after a plurality of operation effects are started, the fusion operation effect is executed. Alternatively, the remaining time of the operation valid period set in the plurality of operation effects may be all predetermined timing conditions (for example, the remaining time is all odd, the value of a specific digit indicating the remaining time is 0, and the remaining time is set. When the added value obtained by adding the values of each digit of the indicated numerical values satisfies 10), the fusion operation effect may be executed. As a result, it is possible to provide an unexpected operation effect.

In this control example, the case where a plurality of operation effects are executed at the same time has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the operation validity periods set for the plurality of operation effects overlap, and the start timing of each operation effect is sufficient. May be different, or the length of each operation valid period may be different.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 216 to 218, the contents of the second operation effect (automatic pressing effect) in this control example will be described. FIG. 216 is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect executed in the second operation effect, and FIG. 217 (a) schematically shows the effect content executed in the initial period (first period) of the automatic pressing effect. 217 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect executed in the intermediate period (second period) of the automatic pressing effect, and is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. 218 (a). Is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the effect executed in the final period (third period) of the automatic pressing effect.

Here, with reference to FIG. 216, the content of the automatic pressing effect in this control example will be described. In this control example, an operation valid period of 10 seconds is set as an operation effect in which the automatic pressing effect is executed, and an effect result display period of 2 seconds is set after the operation valid period elapses. Then, out of the operation valid period of 10 seconds, the first 8 seconds is set as a button operation immediate response period in which the effect result is immediately displayed based on the operation of the frame button 22 (operation means), and the rest. For 2 seconds, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 (operation means) is operated within the predetermined period at the timing when the predetermined period has elapsed, and if it is operated, the effect result is displayed. It is set as a period.

During the button operation immediate response period, the button display Z8 (see FIG. 217) corresponding to the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed, and when the button operation immediate response period elapses, as shown in FIG. 216. The automatic pressing effect is executed. This automatic pressing effect is an effect executed in the remaining 2 seconds of the operation valid period (2 seconds from the elapse of 8 seconds to the elapse of 10 seconds after the operation valid period is set), and is a detailed explanation. Will be described later with reference to FIGS. 217 and 218, but the effect that the character appearing in the main display area Dm presses the button display Z8 is executed.

In this control example, the automatic pressing effect is set by dividing it into three periods (first period, second period, and third period), and automatic effect 1 (button automatic pressing effect 1) is executed during the first period. Then, the automatic effect 2 (button automatic pressing effect 2) is executed during the second period, and the automatic effect 3 (button automatic pressing effect 3) is executed during the third period.

In the second operation effect configured in this way, for example, when the frame button 22 is operated during the button operation immediate response period (see (Example 1) in FIG. 216), the effect result display is displayed immediately after the button operation is executed. Until the end of the period, the display mode showing the effect result is displayed in the main display area Dm. Further, when the frame button 22 is operated during the first period (see (Example 2) in FIG. 216), the effect display period ends from the timing of the second period after the waiting period until the first period elapses. In the meantime, the display mode showing the effect result is displayed in the main display area Dm. Further, when the frame button 22 is operated during the third period (see (Example 3) in FIG. 216), the display mode showing the same effect result as when the operating means is not operated during the operation valid period is the main display area. It is configured to be displayed in Dm.

In this way, by setting the period during which the automatic pressing effect is being executed as the button operation periodic response period, even if the frame button 22 is operated during the automatic pressing effect, the executing effect is suddenly interrupted. It is possible to suppress the execution of an effect having a sense of incongruity, and it is possible to cancel the automatic pressing effect by operating the frame button 22. Therefore, the player can be enthusiastically participated in the operation effect.

Further, during the waiting period generated when the frame button 22 during the execution of the automatic pressing effect is operated, the automatic pressing effect is continuously executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, but the sound is produced. It is configured to set an effect mode indicating that the light emitting means is in the waiting period. As a result, it is possible to reliably notify the player that the frame button 22 has been operated.

Here, the contents of the effect during the automatic pressing effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 217 and 218. As shown in FIG. 217 (a), when the automatic pressing effect is executed and the button automatic pressing effect 1 is executed, a character 811a imitating a bird appears in the main display area Dm and land on the button display Z8. The production is executed. In this state, it is shown that the remaining time display t5a of the time gauge t5 indicating the operation valid period of the button display Z8 is 2 seconds (first period).

Then, when the remaining time of the operation valid period reaches 1.5 seconds (second period), the button automatic pressing effect 2 shown in FIG. 217 (b) is executed. In this button automatic pressing effect 2, the effect that the character 811a rides on the button display Z8 and looks around is executed. In this state, it is shown that the remaining time display t5b of the time gauge t5 indicating the operation valid period of the button display Z8 is 1.5 seconds (second period). Next, when the remaining time of the operation valid period reaches 1 second (third period), the button automatic pressing effect 3 shown in FIG. 218 is executed. In this button automatic pressing effect 3, the effect that the character 811a on the button display Z8 presses the button is executed.

As described above, in this control example, the character 811a appears as an automatic pressing effect, the effect of pressing the button is executed, and the operation result display period is set at the timing when the automatic pressing effect is completed (the timing when the operation valid period has elapsed). Since the setting and the effect result of the operation effect are displayed, it is possible to give the player a relationship between the operation effect and the effect result.

Further, when the frame button 22 is operated during the automatic pressing effect, the effect result display is executed at the timing when the currently set period (first period to third period) has elapsed. However, in this case, the start mode of the effect result display (the effect mode executed for 0.5 seconds after the start) is different depending on the period during which the frame button 22 is operated. Specifically, when the frame button 22 is operated during the first period, an effect mode is set in which the character 811a flying in the sky falls and presses the button display Z8, and the frame button is set during the second period. When 22 is pressed, another character imitating a bird rides on the button display Z8, and the effect mode in which the button display Z8 is pressed by the weight is set.

With this configuration, it is possible to display the effect result without changing the effect mode of the automatic pressing effect based on the operation of the frame button 22 and without giving a sense of discomfort. In this control example, the effect mode of the automatic pressing effect executed in each period is configured not to be changed depending on whether or not the frame button 22 is operated. It may be configured to change only an easy element (for example, changing a color or adding a comment), and in this case, it is preferable to change the effect content only when the effect result is advantageous to the player. .. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of operating the frame button 22 during the automatic pressing effect, so that the motivation for playing can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 219, the effect content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165 will be described. FIG. 219 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display screen at the time when a ball wins a prize in the variable winning device 65 during a jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165, and FIG. 219 (b) is a pseudo diagram. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen at the time when a ball wins a prize in the attacker 165.

As shown in FIG. 219 (a), when the variable winning device 65 provided in the special winning device 550 wins the jackpot (big hit D) in which the opening operation is performed and the jackpot game is executed, the third symbol display device is executed. At 81, the screen during the jackpot game is displayed. On this jackpot gaming screen, a jackpot display 830 indicating that a jackpot game is in progress is displayed in the main display area Dm, and acquisition information 831 for indicating the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the small area Ds1 and the small area Ds2 are integrated, and a comment "Please hit right" indicating the game method during the big hit game is displayed.

In FIG. 219 (a), a ball fired by a right-handed game wins a prize in a specific winning opening 65a (a winning opening in which the ball can be won by opening the variable winning device 65) in the special winning device 550. Although the display content is shown, the acquisition information 831 is displayed in a state where the number of prize balls given based on the winning of the balls in the specific winning opening 65a is not added.

Then, as shown in FIG. 219 (b), the ball winning the specific winning opening 65a in the state shown in FIG. 219 (a) at the timing when the ball winning the special winning opening 65a wins the pseudo attacker 165. It is configured so that the number of prize balls given based on the above is added. Specifically, when the specific winning sensor 65s1, 65s2 (see FIG. 208) detects that the ball has won in the specific winning opening 65a, the timing 0.5 seconds have passed from that point, that is, the specific winning opening 65a. The display mode indicating that the prize ball has been given is displayed at the timing when the period (0.5 seconds) required for the winning ball to reach the pseudo-attacker 165 has elapsed.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the prize ball is given based on the fact that the ball has won the pseudo-attacker 165. Further, since the winning sound for notifying by voice that the ball has won the variable winning device 65 is also configured to be delayed according to the update timing of the above-mentioned acquisition information 831, FIG. 219 (b) shows. The winning sound is output from the audio output device 226 at the indicated timing.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example>
As described above with reference to FIG. 4, the main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, and a display setting in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 220, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 220 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the first control example. These counters and the like have a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, in order to select the special hit random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol. Special hit type counter C2 to be used, stop type selection counter C3 for determining the stop type of the special symbol (reach hit type, non-reach deviation (disengagement length A, deviation short A), reach deviation type), variation pattern selection The variation type counter CS1 used for the above and the initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1 are used. Further, the normal hit random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol, and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the normal hit random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 253). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a composed of four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) for storing the reserved balls of the first special symbol, and a reserved ball of the second special symbol. A special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b consisting of four holding areas (holding 1st to 4th areas) is provided for each, and a common special symbol holding for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol is provided. A ball execution area is provided. In each area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special hit random number counter C1, a special hit type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, and a variable type counter are set according to the timing of entering the first ball entry port 64. Each value of CS1 is stored. Similarly, in each area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, similar values are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the second ball entry port 640.

Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and balls are left and right in each of these areas. The value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

Next, each counter will be described in detail. The special hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 499), reaches the maximum value (for example, 499 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 499), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return. In particular, when the special hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1.

Further, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the special hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the special hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 499, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 499. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 253).

The value of the special hit random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), for example, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 222A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and is the value of the special hit random number counter C1. However, if it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. Further, this special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is used for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special) in which the probability of becoming a special symbol jackpot is higher than that of the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for (a period in which the symbol is in a high probability state) and the other, and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently.

In this way, by making the number of random numbers that become big hits different, the probability of becoming a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol. What is the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 222 (a)) for the high probability of the special symbol and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 222 (a)) for the low probability of the special symbol? , Is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

The special hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). , It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the special hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the timing at which the ball wins the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

Here, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol is out of order. If it is a random number, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is off.

On the other hand, if the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in is the one at the time of the big hit of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. .. In this embodiment, five types of jackpots, "big hit A", "big hit B", "big hit C", "big hit D", and "big hit E", are set, and the special hit type counter C2 is used. Either is decided. Then, the display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

The special hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 499. In this special hit random number counter C1, there are five random numbers that become big hits of the special symbol at the time of low probability of the special symbol, and the random number values "0 to 4" are the special symbol big hit random number table for the low probability. It is stored in 202a. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 5 while the total number of random numbers is 500, so the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is "1/100".

On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 6 random numbers that are the jackpots of the special symbol, and the values "4 to 9" are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability. .. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 6 while the total number of random numbers is 500, so the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is "6/500".

In this control example, the random number value that is the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the low probability time and the random number value that is the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the high probability time. So, the random number values that are the big hits are set so that the values do not overlap. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a random value that becomes a big hit regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random value may be input from the outside and the big hit may be easily assigned illegally. On the other hand, as in this control example, the random value that becomes a big hit is changed according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random value that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

Further, the value of the special hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 223 (a), the jackpot type selection table 202d for determining the jackpot type includes the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1 and the first, which are referred to in correspondence with the lottery of the first special symbol. 2 Special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2, which is referred to corresponding to the lottery of special symbols, is set respectively.

The special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1 is set (acquired and stored) in the special symbol holding ball execution area when the change of the first special symbol is stopped and the lottery result in the change is a jackpot. The determination value for collating (determining) with the value of the hit type counter C2 is stored corresponding to the jackpot type.

FIG. 223 (b) is a data table schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1. In the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1, when the random number value in the acquired special hit type counter is "0 to 49", the jackpot type is "big hit A". The jackpot type when the value was "50 to 68" was "big hit B", and the jackpot type when the value was "69 to 98" was the value of "big hit C" or "99". As the jackpot type of the case, "big hit D" is set respectively.

In this way, when the pachinko machine 10 of this control example wins a big hit with the first special symbol (special figure 1), four types of hit types are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the special hit type counter C2. It is configured to be.

Further, the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2 is set (acquired and stored) in the special symbol holding ball execution area when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped and the lottery result in the fluctuation is a jackpot. The determination value for collating (determining) with the value of the special hit type counter C2 is stored corresponding to the jackpot type.

FIG. 223 (c) is a data table schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2. In the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2, when the random number value in the acquired special hit type counter is "0 to 49", the jackpot type is "big hit D". Further, when the value is "50 to 99", "big hit E" is set as the jackpot type.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured so that five types of hit types are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the special hit type counter C2. In addition, since the selection ratio of the jackpot type selected when the determination result is a jackpot is different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the player is given the first special symbol and the second special symbol. You can be interested in which of the lottery is being executed. In addition, since the selection ratio of the probability variation jackpot to which the probability variation is given is the same (100%) for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the probability variation ratio differs between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the gaming machine. It is possible to suppress problems in which the probability variation rate is not constant as a whole. Further, since the selection ratio of the jackpot D in the second special symbol is set higher, the probability that the 16R probability variation jackpot is selected is set higher than that of the first special symbol, and it is configured to be advantageous to the player. There is.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. The stop type selection counter C3 and the variable type counter CS1 described above determine a rough display mode such as so-called short-time off, long-time off, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. The reach type and details of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 based on the fluctuation time determined by the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1. The pattern variation mode is determined. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 253) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 224) that stores the random value that determines the variation time of the symbol variation from the values (random values) of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 is the main control device 110. It is provided in ROM 202.

As shown in FIG. 224 (b), in the variation pattern selection table 202b, the normal / latent state used for the game state (normal state, latent state) when the probability of winning / failing the normal symbol is low is low. The variation pattern selection table 202b1 and the probability variation variation pattern table 202b2 used for the gaming state (probability variation state) when the probability of winning or failing the normal symbol is high are set respectively.

The pachinko machine 10 in this control example has a normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) as a gaming state. It is configured to be able to set three game states, a latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), and at the end of the jackpot game, the type of jackpot won or the jackpot is won. It is configured so that the game state is set according to the game state set at the time of the game.

Although it will be described in more detail in the description of the selection of the fluctuation pattern in the voice lamp control device 113 described later, in the main control device 110, the hit / fail determination result, the number of reserved balls, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type Based on the value of the counter CS1, the contents of the rough fluctuation pattern (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) and the fluctuation time are determined, and the fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined contents is set.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 225 and 226, the variation pattern selection table 202b used when the main control device 110 selects the variation pattern will be described. FIG. 225 is a data table schematically showing the contents of the normal / latent variation pattern selection table 202b1. In the normal / latent variation pattern selection table 202b1, various variation patterns are set corresponding to the lottery results of special symbols, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 are set for each of the variation patterns. A value with the variation type counter CS1 is assigned. If the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the variation pattern corresponds to the determined jackpot type (the jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d according to the acquired special hit type counter C2 value). Is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 226, it is a data table schematically showing the contents of the time saving variation pattern table 202b2. In the time saving variation pattern table 202b2, various variation patterns are set corresponding to the lottery results of the special symbols, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 are set for each of the variation patterns. The value of is assigned. If the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the variation pattern corresponds to the determined jackpot type (the jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d according to the acquired special hit type counter C2 value). Is set.

The normal hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the normal hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal hit random number counter C4. In this control example, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entry port (through gate) 67. At that time, it is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that is the hit of the normal symbol is set by the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 222 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is set. If it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by the normal hit random number table 202c, it is determined to be the hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 221 (c)) has a probability of hitting a normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability (a period during which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and when the probability is low. It is divided into two types, one for high probability time (the period during which the time is shortened for a normal symbol), and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently. Further, the hit type of the normal symbol is set to normal hit and long-time hit, and the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is set for each.

Here, in this control example, it is configured so that the long hit can be won only in the low probability state of the normal symbol, and when the long hit is won, the electric accessory 640a is released in the opening time of 4 seconds. A long hit is executed. This makes it possible to temporarily execute the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state. The normal hit (short hit) of the normal symbol other than the above-mentioned long hit is a hit in which the operation of operating the electric accessory 640a in the open state with an opening time of 0.2 seconds is executed once.

In this control example, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a, which is executed in the probable variation period during the time reduction in the normal hit, and the opening operation in the long-time hit are set to be the same, but the opening operation is not limited to that, and the long-time hit is different. It may be an opening operation of. Specifically, for example, the operation of being in the open state may be performed once for 3 seconds. With such a configuration, it is possible to allow the ball to enter the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 more when hitting for a long time, and the variation display with the second special symbol during the normal game. It is possible to make it easy to execute, and it is possible to entertain the player with a change in the game effect by the variable display of the second special symbol in which a fresh notice display or the like is displayed.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 222 (c), when the value of the acquired normal hit random number counter C4 is "5" at the time of low probability of the normal symbol, it is determined that the normal symbol is a normal hit. If it is "6", it is determined that it is a long hit. On the other hand, when the value of the acquired normal hit random number counter C4 is any of 5 to 204 at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, it is determined that the normal symbol is a normal hit.

In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be hit different, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability time of the normal symbol and the high probability time of the normal symbol. Therefore, at the time of low probability, the frequency of operating the electric accessory 640a can be reduced, and the frequency of entering the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to increase the consumption of the game ball by the player and increase the profit on the side of the game store. On the other hand, during the time reduction and the probability variation period, which have a high probability, the opportunity for the electric accessory 640a to operate can be given with a probability of "1 / 1.2", and the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 can be given. It is possible to increase the chance of entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the consumption of the game ball of the player and set the game state advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player can play the game aiming at the game with a high probability, and can play the game for a longer time.

The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the normal hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interruption process (see FIG. 238). , Is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 253).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 218, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 219, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 255) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 251) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 253) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 221 (a), the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has a special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 222), a variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 224), and a normal hit random number. In addition to the table 202c (see FIG. 222 (c)) and the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 223), a small hit random number table 202e, a jackpot scenario table 202f, and a small hit scenario table 202g are set. Further, although omitted in this control example, in addition to the above-mentioned ones, various data and programs necessary for the game are stored in the ROM 202.

The small hit random number table 202e is a table referred to when determining whether or not a player has won a small hit that can be given less privilege than the case where the big hit is won in the special symbol lottery. Here, the contents of the small hit random number table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 222 (b). As shown in FIG. 222 (b), in this control example, only the lottery of the special figure 1 is configured to win a small hit.

The jackpot scenario table 202f and the small hit scenario table 202g are data tables in which the game operation content during the jackpot game and the game operation content during the small hit game are stored in association with the determined hit type, respectively. , The game operation during each hit is executed based on the information (scenario) stored in this data table.

Further, as shown in FIG. 221 (b), the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. , Special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, small hit medium flag 203g, time saving medium counter 203j, probability variation counter 203m, and other memory areas. It has 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area for the first special symbol and four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area), and each of these areas has a reserved ball storage area 203a. The values of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored respectively.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (1st area to 4th area on hold), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. A determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having a smaller area number. Will be done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data shift is performed only for the reserved area (the second reserved area to the fourth reserved area) in which the winning data is stored. Further, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol.

The ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. A random number counter C4 is normally stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the sphere passes through either the left or right through gate 67, and the acquired data is the four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). ) Is stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th) in the vacant area. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the winning order is maintained and the data corresponding to the winning is stored. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a, the prizes stored in the other hold areas are won. The shift process is performed to pack the data of the above into the holding area which is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of times of waiting) of the variable display (variation display performed by the display device 81) up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. 1 is added. On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (holding number N of variation display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command. The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter that counts the reserved balls based on winning the second entry port 640, and the other configurations are the same as the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. The detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The voice lamp control device 113 is the main control device by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e are changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of reserved balls of the variable display held at 110. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number of reserved balls in the actual fluctuation display is deviated from the actual number of reserved balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of reserved balls command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f sets the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed.

If the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the sphere passes through either the left or right through gate 67, the value of the normal random number counter C4 Is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c.

The small hit medium flag 203g is a flag that is set to be on while the small hit game is being executed. The probability change counter 203m is a counter for measuring the period during which the probability change state continues, and when the probability change state is set, a predetermined value is set. Then, the counter value is updated at the timing when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed during the probability change state, and when the updated value reaches a predetermined value, the process of ending the probability change state is executed. Will be done.

The time saving medium counter 203j is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203j is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. The initial value of the time reduction / medium counter 203j is set to zero, and each time a special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110 and it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Will be done. That is, when a special symbol becomes a big hit, a value corresponding to the big hit type is newly set regardless of the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j.

In the other memory area 203z, flags, counters, stored data, and the like necessary for other control processing executed by the MPU of the main control device 110 are set, but details thereof will be omitted.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 253) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 290 that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content of the above, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

As shown in FIG. 227 (a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, a hold rank selection table 222b, a hold mode selection table 222c, and a treasure box mode selection table 222d.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining a variation pattern based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are set corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command and the fluctuation pattern type, and a counter value for selection (not shown) is acquired to determine one fluctuation pattern.

The hold rank selection table 222b is a data table for selecting a rank (holding rank) regarding whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect based on the winning information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110. In this control example, a hold rank is set for all of the winning information corresponding to the received winning command, and whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect according to the set hold rank, or whether to perform the look-ahead effect or not. It is configured to set the effect mode when the effect is executed.

Here, the contents specified in the hold rank selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 228 (a). FIG. 228 (a) schematically shows the contents of the reserved rank selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 228 (a), the hold rank selection table 222b corresponds to the type of the win / fail determination result included in the received winning command and the value of the hold rank counter 223p1 of the effect counter group 223p. A plurality of pending ranks (ranks 1 to 4) are specified.

Specifically, when the hit / fail determination result is the most advantageous "big hit D" for the player, the value of the hold rank counter 223p1 is in the range of "0 to 69", and "rank 2" is "70 to". If "Rank 3" is specified in the range of "89" and "Rank 1" is specified in the range of "90 to 99", and the winning / failing judgment result is "Big hit A, B, E", it is for the pending rank. "Rank 3" is specified in the range of "0 to 69", "Rank 2" is specified in the range of "70 to 89", and "Rank 3" is specified in the range of "90 to 99". ..

When the hit / fail determination result is "big hit C, small hit", the value of the hold rank counter 223p1 is "rank 3" in the range of "0 to 69" and "rank 3" in the range of "70 to 89". If "Rank 4" is defined as "Rank 2" in the range of "90 to 99" and the hit / fail judgment result is the most disadvantageous "missing" for the player, the value of the hold rank counter 223p1 is set. "Rank 4" is defined in the range of "0 to 69", "Rank 4" is defined in the range of "70 to 89", and "Rank 3" is defined in the range of "90 to 99".

That is, in this control example, four types of "Rank 1" to "Rank 4" can be selected as the types of reserved ranks selected for each winning information, and the winning / failing determination result is advantageous to the player. Indeed, an advantageous rank (a rank with a small value) is set so that it is easy to select.

In this way, when executing a plurality of pre-reading effects, the hold rank is set based on the winning / failing judgment result of the winning information, instead of setting the effect mode of each pre-reading effect based on the winning / failing judgment result of the winning information. By configuring to set the effect mode of each look-ahead effect based on the hold rank, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable with the effect mode of the look-ahead effect to be executed. ..

In other words, when executing the look-ahead effect when the result of the hit / fail judgment is wrong, in order to give the player a sense of expectation, it is possible to set an effect mode with a high degree of expectation of the hit, but the player is excessive. In order to prevent the player's motivation to play from being lowered due to expectations, it is common to configure a production mode with a low hit expectation so that it can be set. When executing the look-ahead effect, the effect mode with a low hit expectation is set at a rate of about 90%, and the effect mode with a high hit expectation is set at a rate of about 10%. The look-ahead effect is executed without causing discomfort to the player.

When the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way sets the effect mode of each look-ahead effect based on the hit / fail determination result, an effect mode with a low expectation is set as one of the look-ahead effect effect modes. On the other hand, there is a problem that the effect of the look-ahead effect cannot be enhanced because the effect of the look-ahead effect is set to have a high expectation.

On the other hand, by setting the hold rank in advance based on the hit / fail determination result and setting the effect mode of each look-ahead effect according to the set hold rank, for example, the hit / fail judgment result is out of order. In the case, the low expectation pre-reading effect in which each pre-reading effect effect mode is selected from the low-expected effect mode and the high-expected look-ahead effect selected from the high-expected effect mode are separately executed. Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate effect mode for each look-ahead effect without causing the above-mentioned problem.

Further, for example, by configuring so that more hold ranks can be set than the type of the pass / fail determination result, it is possible to execute a wider variety of look-ahead effects without discomfort.

The hold mode selection table 222c is a data table for selecting the display mode of the hold symbol displayed in the small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. In this control example, the display mode of the reserved symbol can be changed at the timing when the winning command is received from the main control device 110 or at the timing when a new special symbol change (lottery) is started. ..

Here, with reference to FIG. 228 (b), the contents specified in the hold mode selection table 222c will be described. FIG. 228 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the holding mode selection table 222c. As shown in FIG. 228 (b), the hold mode selection table 222c corresponds to the hold rank selected by using the hold rank selection table 222b and the value of the hold mode counter 223p2 possessed by the effect counter group 223p. , A plurality of hold modes are specified.

In this control example, the color of the reserved symbol is changed as the reserved mode, and the color of the reserved symbol, which is normally displayed in "white", is changed to "rainbow" and "red" in descending order of the degree of expectation. , "Green", "Yellow", "Blue".

Specifically, when the hit expectation is the highest (set only when the jackpot D is won) "hold rank 1", the value of the hold mode counter 223p2 is "0 to 69". "Red" in the range of "70-89", "-(no change)" in the range of "70-89", "green" in the range of "90-93", and "yellow" in the range of "94-96". When "rainbow" is defined in the range of "97 to 99" and "hold rank 2", "green" is set in the range where the value of the hold mode counter 223p2 is "0 to 69". "Yellow" in the range of "70 to 79", "-(no change)" in the range of "80 to 89", "red" in the range of "90 to 96", in the range of "97 to 99" "Blue" is specified.

When the value is "hold rank 3", the value of the hold mode counter 223p2 is "-(no change)" in the range of "0 to 69" and "yellow" in the range of "70 to 79". , "Green" is specified in the range of "80 to 89", "blue" is specified in the range of "90 to 96", and "red" is specified in the range of "97 to 99". In some cases, the value of the hold mode counter 223p2 is in the range of "0 to 89" with "-(no change)", in the range of "90 to 93" with "blue", and in the range of "94 to 96". "Yellow" is specified, "green" is specified in the range of "97 to 98", and "red" is specified in the value of "99".

In this control example, the mode in which the color of the reserved symbol is changed is selected as the reserved mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the shape of the reserved symbol may be changed. , The display mode showing the effect result of the look-ahead effect may be displayed in the vicinity of the reserved symbol (the range in which the player can identify the reserved symbol).

The treasure box mode selection table 222d is a data table referred to when selecting the display mode (color) of the treasure box accessory 750, and sets the display mode based on the jackpot type included in the corresponding winning information. be.

Here, the contents specified in the treasure box mode selection table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 229. FIG. 229 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the treasure box mode selection table 222d. As shown in FIG. 229, the treasure box mode selection table 222d shows whether or not the jackpot type information (win / fail determination result) included in the winning information and the display mode of the reserved symbol indicating the corresponding winning information are changed (the holding mode is already variable). A plurality of treasure chest modes are defined in correspondence with the value of the treasure chest mode counter 223p3 possessed by the effect counter group 223p.

Specifically, when the hit / fail determination result is "big hit D" and the display mode of the corresponding reserved symbol is not variable, the value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3 is "red" in the range of "0 to 69". , "Rainbow" is specified in the range of "70 to 89", and "-(no change)" is specified in the range of "90 to 99", and the display mode of the corresponding reserved symbol is variable. The value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3 is defined as "red" in the range of "0 to 89" and "rainbow" in the range of "90 to 99".

That is, in this control example, when the display mode of the reserved symbol has already been changed for the reserved symbol corresponding to the winning information indicating that the "big hit D" has been won, the treasure box accessory 750 The display mode is always changed, while the display mode of the treasure chest accessory 750 may not be changed when the display mode of the reserved symbol is not changed. As a result, it is possible to set an effect pattern in which the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed without changing the display mode of the reserved symbol or the display mode of the treasure chest accessory 750.

Further, it is configured so that the display mode of the "rainbow" having the highest expectation of hitting is selected when the hold mode is not changed, as compared with the case where the hold mode is changed. As a result, the display mode (holding mode) of the reserved symbol is not changed by the look-ahead effect, and the treasure box accessory 750 can be easily changed to the display mode "rainbow" having the highest expectation. It is possible to perform an unexpected effect while providing the enjoyment of predicting for which reserved symbol the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 is changed.

Next, when the hit / fail determination result is "big hit B" and the display mode of the corresponding reserved symbol is not variable, the value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3 is "blue" in the range of "0 to 69". When "-(no change)" is specified in the range of "70 to 89" and "red" is specified in the range of "90 to 99" and the display mode of the corresponding reserved symbol is variable, it is for the treasure box mode. The value of the counter 223p3 is defined as "blue" in the range of "0 to 69" and "red" in the range of "70 to 99".

When the hit / fail determination result is "big hit A, C, E, or small hit" and the display mode of the corresponding reserved symbol is not variable, the value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3 is "0 to 69". "-(No change)" is specified in the range of, "Blue" is specified in the range of "70 to 89", and "-(No change)" is specified in the range of "90 to 99". When the mode is variable, the value of the treasure chest mode counter 223p3 is defined as "blue" in the range of "0 to 89" and "red" in the range of "90 to 99".

Finally, when the hit / fail judgment result is "missing" and the display mode of the corresponding reserved symbol is not variable, the value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3 is "-(no change) in the range of" 0 to 89 ". ) ”,“ Blue ”is specified in the range of“ 90 to 99 ”, and when the display mode of the corresponding reserved symbol is variable, the value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3 is in the range of“ 0 to 69 ”. "Blue" is defined as "-(no change)" in the range of "70 to 99".

Further, as shown in FIG. 227, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, a normal reserved ball number counter 223c, and a fluctuation start flag. 223d, stop type selection flag 223e, winning information storage area 223f, state setting area 223g, operation effect type storage area 223h, operation effect type storage area 223i, pressed flag 223k, hold effect information storage area 223m, operation valid timer 223n, effect Counter group 223p, hold production flag 223q, treasure box production flag 223r, pseudo winning order storage area 223s, normal figure fluctuation start flag 223t, normal figure production prohibition flag 223u, normal figure production flag 223v, other memory area 223z At least it is provided.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223a is a variation display of the first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is the first reserved ball number counter in the main control device 110. A counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waits) for the special symbol variation effect up to 4 times for each type of special symbol. Update according to the timing of increase / decrease.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation display of the second special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a. , When a winning information command is received, a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the second special symbol fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times for each type of special symbol. It is updated according to the timing when the number of reserved balls increases or decreases, such as when a fluctuation pattern command is received.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Unable to get the value. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and causes the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. Therefore, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the start winning is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted. When this is done, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 hold ball count command is transmitted from the hold ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the counter corresponding to the command among the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S2207 in FIG. 298). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The values can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110.

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b. , A display hold ball count command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball count counter 223a or the special symbol 2 hold ball count counter 223b after storage. ..

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113, or the special symbol 2 hold. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the value of the ball number counter 223b is displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is the main. The value is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is also set to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

The normal reserved ball number counter 223c differs from the above-mentioned special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b in that the target is changed from the special symbol to the normal symbol. Since the technical control concept is the same, detailed explanation is omitted.

The variation start flag 223d is turned on when the variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the variation pattern command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2302 of FIG. 259), and the variation start flag 223d is turned on. It is turned off when the variable display is set in the display device 81 (see S3002 in FIG. 267). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, the variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 257) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 has a variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs variation display of the third symbol. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2204 in FIG. 258), and the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S3007 in FIG. 267). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The winning information storage area 223f has one execution area, four areas corresponding to the first special symbol (first area to the fourth area), and four areas corresponding to the second special symbol (first area to the first area). It has 4 areas) and 4 areas (1st area to 4th area) corresponding to ordinary symbols, and prize information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when a start winning prize for the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 is detected in the main control device 110, the special hit random number counter C1 acquired according to the start winning prize, From each value of the special hit type counter C2 and the variable type counter CS1, various information (win / fail, big hit type in case of big hit, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the starting prize is drawn is obtained. It is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and various predicted information is notified from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

Further, when the passage of the sphere to the through gate 67 is detected, a lottery of ordinary symbols corresponding to the passage is performed from the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in response to the passage. The lottery result is predicted in advance, and various predicted information is notified from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 receives various information notified by the winning information command (in the case of winning information of a special symbol, whether it is successful or not, in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type, the fluctuation pattern, and the normal symbol. In the case of the winning information, the winning / failing) is extracted as the winning information, and the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223f. More specifically, the extracted winning information corresponds to the type of the entry opening where the entry was detected (first entry opening 64 or the second entry opening 640), or the four areas corresponding to the normal symbol (the first entry opening 64 or the second entry opening 640). Among the vacant areas (1st area to 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the more the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

In this first control example, the main control device 110 is based on various information (win / fail, jackpot type in case of jackpot, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning prize is performed. Although the configuration in which the winning information command is set and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified is used, other configurations may be used.

For example, when a start winning is generated, various information already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in the various information predicted corresponding to the start winning. Is included in the setting means for setting the winning information command, various information (winning information) already stored in the winning information storage area 223f when the winning information command is received, and the received winning information command. A configuration may be provided in which a determination means for determining whether or not various information (winning information) matches is provided. This makes it possible to determine whether various information (winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223f is appropriately stored.

Further, in the first control example, when a new start winning is generated, a winning information command is set and notified to the voice lamp control device 113. However, the winning information command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. The timing of notification is not limited to the above-mentioned timing (timing when the winning information command is set). For example, a storage means for temporarily storing the winning information command is provided, and in addition to the starting winning timing, the notification is periodically performed. (For example, every 5 seconds), when the game conditions are variable (for example, when the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state, or when the jackpot game starts or ends), or when the special symbol changes start (or). At the time of (stop), a configuration may be used in which the winning information command stored in the storage means is notified to the voice lamp control device 113. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute an effect using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f (so-called look-ahead effect).

In this control example, based on each winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, as a look-ahead effect, setting of an effect mode such as changing the display color of the reserved symbol is executed. In this way, by executing various effects (look-ahead effects) based on each prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223f, the player can be asked about each reserved ball before the variable display is started. You can have a feeling of expectation that will be a big hit. It is also possible to perform a long-term effect using a plurality of variable display periods.

In the state setting area 223g, the current gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 and the gaming state before a predetermined period (for example, if the current jackpot game is in progress, the gaming state at the time when the jackpot is won) It is a storage area that is set (stored).

In this state setting area 223g, when various state commands output from the main control device 110 are received by the command determination process (see S2114 in FIG. 258), information indicating the game state included in the received state commands is extracted. Then, the current game state is set. Further, in the command determination process (see S2114 in FIG. 258), when it is determined that a command indicating that the jackpot game is executed has been received, the information set (stored) as the current game state is immediately before. It is configured to be set (memorized) as the set gaming state. As a result, it is possible to change the effect mode of the variable effect executed after the end of the big hit game according to the game state set at the time of winning the big hit. Further, for example, even if the jackpots are of the same jackpot type, in the case where the game state to be executed after the jackpot game ends is changed according to the game state at the time of winning, the jackpot game is in progress. It is possible to predict the game state set after the end of the big hit game on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and execute the effect during the big hit game to suggest the prediction result.

The operation effect in progress flag 223h is for indicating that the operation effect is being executed, is a flag set to be turned on when the operation effect is being executed, and is a setting status of the operation effect in progress flag 223h. The processing content when the operating means is operated is configured to be different according to the above.

This operation effect in-progress flag 223h is executed when it is determined in the variation effect setting process (see S3004 in FIG. 268) that the operation effect is included in the variation pattern to be executed this time (S3105: Yes in FIG. 268). It is set to ON in the operation effect setting process (S3106 in FIG. 269) (see S3204 in FIG. 269), referenced in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see S2107 in FIG. 271) (S3304 in FIG. 271), and set to ON. If this is the case (S3304: Yes in FIG. 271), the pressed flag 223k is set to ON (see S3305 in FIG. 271). Then, it is also referred to in the operation effect management process (see S2111 in FIG. 273) (see S3501 in FIG. 273), and the effect mode of the operation effect based on the presence or absence of the operation of the frame button 22 is set for the operation effect being executed. ..

The operation effect type storage area 223i is a storage area for temporarily storing the type of the operation effect to be executed, and stores the effect type of the operation effect determined in the operation effect setting process (see S3106 in FIG. 269). The indicated information is stored (see S3203 and S3207 in FIG. 269). The effect type of the operation effect stored here is referred to when determining what the operation effect currently being executed in the operation effect management process (see S2111 in FIG. 273) (see S3502 and S3509 in FIG. 273). ). As a result, different processes can be executed depending on the type of operation effect. Further, the information stored in the operation effect type storage area 223i is cleared when the operation effect is completed (when the corresponding variation pattern effect is completed).

The pressed flag 223k is for indicating that the player has pressed (operated) the frame button 22 (operation means), and is set to be on when the frame button 22 is pressed during the operation effect. It is a thing.

This pressed flag 223k is determined when it is determined in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (see S2107 in FIG. 271) that the operation of the frame button 22 is performed with the operation effect flag 223h set to ON (FIG. FIG. 271 S3304: Yes), set to on (see S3305 in FIG. 271), and referenced in the operation effect management process (see S2111 in FIG. 273) (S3503, S3511, S3518 in FIG. 273). Then, after the effect mode of the operation effect based on the reference result is set, it is set to off (S3505, S3513, S3520 in FIG. 273).

In this control example, as the operation effect, there are a case where the effect mode is changed immediately after the player operates the operation means, and a case where the effect mode is changed after a predetermined period has elapsed. In such a case, by using the pressed flag 223k, it is possible to surely change the effect mode of the operation effect based on the operation result of the operation means.

The hold effect information storage area 223 m is a storage area for storing various information set for executing the look-ahead effect, and has four storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and a second. It is formed of four storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, and each storage area is configured to store information indicating the hold rank, the hold mode, and the treasure box mode. Then, when a new special symbol change is started, various information stored in each storage area is configured to shift as in the winning information storage area 223f.

In this control example, by using the information stored in the hold effect information storage area 223 m, the special symbol change starts with the information set when the winning command is received (for example, the information indicating the hold rank). Since it can be held until it is done, it is possible to execute the look-ahead effect using the information at any timing. As a result, it is possible to execute a look-ahead effect that is unexpected for the player, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

In this control example, the look-ahead effect is executed at the timing when the effect mode of the look-ahead effect is determined. In addition to this, for example, the determined effect mode of the look-ahead effect is stored in the hold effect information. It may be stored in the area 223m, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the look-ahead effect may be executed by using the stored effect mode. With this configuration, for example, by executing the look-ahead effect for another reserved symbol, the winning information included in the winning command received during the period during which the execution of the look-ahead effect is prohibited is used. It is possible to determine the effect mode of the look-ahead effect and execute a new look-ahead effect based on the completion of the look-ahead effect executed for another reserved symbol.

Further, when the process of setting the effect mode of the look-ahead effect is executed once, the process of setting the effect mode of the look-ahead effect is executed again for a predetermined period (for example, until the change of the special symbol is executed twice). Period) When the prohibited process is used, the information for which the prohibited period is specified may be stored in the hold effect information storage area 223 m, or the hold indicating the special symbol change to be executed next may be used. It is configured to set the prohibition information specific to a specific storage area on the storage area side so as to prohibit the execution of the look-ahead effect based on the hold effect information stored in the storage area where the hold effect information corresponding to the symbol is stored. You may.

The operation valid timer 223n is a timer for timing the operation valid period (the period during which it is effectively determined that the player has operated the operation means (frame button 22)) during the operation effect, and the operation effect is executed. A value is set to measure the corresponding period. In the operation valid timer 223n, the value set in the counter update process (S2113) executed at 1 millisecond intervals in the main process (see FIG. 257) of the voice lamp control device 113 is periodically subtracted.

The effect counter group 223p is a counter group having a plurality of counters used for selecting various effects. The contents of various counters included in the effect counter group 223p will be described with reference to FIG. 230. FIG. 230 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect counter group 223p. As shown in FIG. 230, in this control example, as the effect counter group 223p, there are a hold rank counter 223p1, a hold mode counter 223p2, a treasure box mode counter 223p3, and other counters 223pz, and each counter is "0 to 0". It is composed of a loop counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of "99".

Each counter included in the effect counter group 223p is updated by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 257) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. Then, each counter is configured to update within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) without synchronization.

The hold effect in progress flag 223q is a flag for indicating that the hold effect, which is one of the look-ahead effects, is being executed, and is set to be on when the hold effect is being executed. This hold effect in progress flag 223q is set to on (see S2506 in FIG. 261) in the hold mode selection process (see S2405 in FIG. 261), and when it is set to on, a new hold mode is not set. It is referenced (see S2501 in FIG. 261). Then, in the stop processing (see FIG. 266), when it is determined that the special symbol variation that is the target of the hold effect has stopped (S2957: Yes in FIG. 266), it is set to off (see S2958 in FIG. 266).

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the hold effect from being executed for a plurality of hold symbols at the same time, so that the player is made to pay attention to the look-ahead effect executed for a specific hold symbol. be able to. In addition, when a winning command indicating that the winning / failing judgment result is a hit is received while the look-ahead effect in which the winning / failing judgment result is out of order is already executed, the look-ahead effect is executed for the winning information corresponding to the winning command. Therefore, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect in which the fluctuation result of the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved symbol for which the look-ahead effect is not executed becomes a big hit.

In this control example, the hold effect in progress flag 223q is used to suppress the execution of the look-ahead effect for a plurality of reserved symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, 2 The look-ahead effect may be executed up to one reserved symbol, or there is winning information indicating a lottery result that is more advantageous to the player than the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the pre-reading effect being executed. When it is determined that, the reserved symbol to be the target of the look-ahead effect may be switched.

The treasure chest effect in progress flag 223r is a flag for indicating that the treasure box effect, which is one of the look-ahead effects, is being executed, and is set to be on when the treasure box effect is being executed. Since the target of the pending effect flag 223q described above is replaced with a look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750, the treasure box effecting flag 223r is different in that detailed description thereof is omitted. do.

The pseudo winning order storage area 223s is a pseudo attacker 165 calculated for a ball that has won a prize in each winning opening (right general winning opening 163, specific out opening 166, specific winning opening 65a) provided in the special winning device 550. This is a storage area for temporarily storing the order of arrival (pseudo-winning order). In the pseudo-winning order storage area 223s, it is indicated that a ball has won a prize in each winning opening in the pseudo-attacker effect processing (see S2812 in FIG. 265) executed in the right attacker jackpot-related processing (see S2702 in FIG. 264). When the indicated command is received, the winning order to the pseudo attacker 165 is calculated by adding the ball flow period from each winning opening to the pseudo attacker 165, and the calculation result is stored (S2903 in FIG. 265). .. Then, the winning order stored in the winning order storage area 223s is referred to when setting a specific effect mode (overflow effect mode) for the pseudo winning information 10 or later. The information stored in the pseudo-winning order storage area 223s is cleared after each round game (see S2808 in FIG. 264).

The normal symbol effectable flag 223t is a flag for indicating whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the winning normal symbol is executed per long opening, and the fluctuation pattern of the winning normal symbol per long opening is executed. If set to on. Thereby, while the charge effect is being executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol, it is possible to determine whether the effect mode can be changed based on the lottery result of the normal symbol. .. In addition, when it is determined that the effect mode of the charge effect cannot be replaced when the variation pattern command indicating that the variation pattern of the winning normal symbol is executed per the long opening is received ( S2305: No) in FIG. 259, it is never set to ON.

The normal figure effect prohibition flag 223u is a flag for indicating that the execution of the normal figure effect (the effect of changing the effect mode of the charge effect based on the lottery result of the normal symbol) is prohibited, and is a flag for the normal figure effect. It is set to on when it is determined that the execution of is prohibited. This general figure production prohibition flag 223u determines that there is winning information indicating that a special symbol hit (big hit or small hit) is won in the winning information-related processing (see S2209 in FIG. 260) (Fig.). (See S2407 of 260), set to on (see S2408 of FIG. 260).

Then, in the variation pattern reception process (see S2202 in FIG. 259), it is referred to when the variation pattern command corresponding to the long open per normal symbol (per the normal figure length) is received (S2305 in FIG. 259), and the reference result is used. Based on this, the setting status of the normal map effectable flag 223t is changed. This normal figure effect prohibition flag 223u is set to off when the special symbol indicating a hit (big hit, small hit) is stopped and displayed.

With this configuration, if there is winning information indicating a special symbol hit (big hit, small hit) that is more advantageous for the player than the long open hit of the normal symbol, it is special based on the lottery result of the normal symbol. It is possible to suppress the variable effect of the symbol. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an effect that is difficult to understand by executing the effect based on the normal figure length hit while the look-ahead effect is being executed based on the winning information indicating the hit. be able to.

In this control example, the normal figure production prohibition flag 223u is set to be turned on when it is determined that there is winning information indicating that a special symbol hit (big hit or small hit) is won. , The normal figure effect prohibition flag 223u may be set to be on under other conditions. For example, the normal figure effect prohibition flag 223u may be set at a timing other than during high-speed fluctuation of the variable effect indicating the lottery result of the special symbol. May be set to on. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of incongruity that the variable effect being executed is suddenly switched.

Furthermore, in addition to the timing at which the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the long opening of the normal map is received, the normal drawing production prohibition flag 223u is set to be on based on the timing at which the game is executed per the long opening of the normal map. Is also good.

The normal map effecting flag 223v is a flag for indicating that the normal map effect is being executed, and is set to be turned on when the normal map effect is being executed. This normal map effect in progress flag 223v is set to on when the normal map effect is executed in the liquid crystal display effect execution management process (see S2110 in FIG. 272) (see S3406 in FIG. 272). Then, in order to set the display mode of the third symbol to be displayed at the stop timing of the special symbol, it is referred to in the stop processing (see S2213 in FIG. 266) executed when the stop command of the special symbol is received (see FIG. 266). 266 S2952). It is also referred to for setting a variation pattern of the variation effect set according to the variation start of the special symbol (see S3103 in FIG. 268).

The continuation flag 223x is a flag for determining that the normal drawing effect is executed so as to straddle a plurality of special symbol fluctuations, and is a flag when the normal drawing effect is executed so as to straddle a plurality of special symbol fluctuations. It is set to on. This continuation flag 223x is turned on when it is determined in the charge effect setting process (see S3104 in FIG. 270) that the normal figure fluctuation time is longer than the special figure fluctuation time being executed (S3224: Yes in FIG. 270). It is set (see S3231 in FIG. 270). Then, when it is referred to in the stop process (see S3103 in FIG. 266) (see S2953 in FIG. 266) and it is determined that it is set to ON (S2953: Yes in FIG. 266), the normal drawing effect (charge effect) is performed. A process for displaying the reduced third symbol for reducing and stopping the third symbol is executed in order to continue without discomfort.

In this way, while the charge effect is being executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol, when the process of changing the effect mode of the charge effect based on the lottery result of the normal symbol is performed, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped. Even when the timing is later than the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol, by using the continuation flag 223x, it is possible to execute the charge effect across the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol. Further, when the charge effect is executed across the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol, it is difficult for the player to discriminate the stop display mode of the third symbol showing the lottery result of the special symbol as compared with the normal stop display mode. By variably setting to, it is possible to make the player execute the charge effect without discomfort.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display (variation) in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It controls the production). The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG. 231.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 251).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 231. FIG. 231 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches it, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset is applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by 1. When the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading is possible for the data on the second and subsequent pages, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-consecutive data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 described later of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and is, for example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to read and write data to and from the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b has one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in one bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a in the NOR type ROM 234d, specifically, the first program stored in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be executed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and also specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (command code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (command code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The program storage area of the work RAM 233 for each fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed so that the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 274) stored in the program storage area 233a and executed after the boot process by the boot program (see S6001 in FIG. 274) is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 237) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. By expanding the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 276 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes an image drawing process for the next frame, and also executes a process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays an image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, since the image controller 237 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started during the drawing of the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display a third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is held without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area for storing the corresponding data. Further, in the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first starting port 64a is detected. In this case, it is an area for storing the image data corresponding to the variable image at the time of turning on the power, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by the variable effect.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see FIG. 274).

Here, the fluctuation image when the power is turned on will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image (see FIG. 35). It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the variation, the display control device 114 receives the main image at power-on. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position facing the screen and the fluctuation image of the "×" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the fluctuation period. It is displayed repeatedly in the middle and alternately. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image showing it is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the image showing it is stopped. It will be displayed for a certain period later.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the variable image area at power-on The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the images showing "○" and "×" are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball entering the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Returning to FIG. 231, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 209) with numbers from "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when performing variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37, but the variation effect occurs in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the production is not started immediately.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the apparatus 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 has an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used to draw the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. NS.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. NS. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A or jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

Further, since the first starting port 64a is a winning port in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory is opened as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball is the second starting port. The easier it is to enter 64b, the more prize balls. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held or the number of balls held is not reduced even if the pachinko machine 10 is played. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a big hit of a special symbol without it. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the game is not performed on the pachinko machine 10.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 235. FIG. 235 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is specified for each address. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are obtained with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table.

When it is specified that the MPU 231 displays one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (underwater, beach, background of preparation period, background dedicated to time production) depending on this back type, the player of the background The back image corresponding to the specified stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified with the passage of time.

In this embodiment, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not the display should be performed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the rear image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the third symbol can be the variation symbol in the previous variation effect or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110. By managing by the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variablely displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 36). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 237) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 236. FIG. 236 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, the transfer data table is prepared. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and the transfer timing thereof are specified.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 236). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data for which the transfer should be started does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data for which the transfer should be started does not exist corresponding to the address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 236).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

In the "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 236, in the example of FIG. 236, In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is the display data table. If a transfer data table corresponding to the above exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 237) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 236, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified in the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIG. 35 on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 274) (see S6005 in FIG. 274). Then, at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in order to display an image other than the image at the time of turning on the power. It is set to off (see S7705 in FIG. 285 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 276 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 276 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 276 (b)) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 276 (b) see S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 277 to 282) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 283 to 284 (b)) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7601 in FIG. 285 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 285 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 286) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 237), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the content of the image drawing instruction for the user. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 237) described later, which describes drawing instructions, is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Null data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to the later drawing list (see FIG. 237) that describes the instruction content for image drawing to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 moves the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 276 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S7305 in FIG. 284 (b)) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list to be described later. (See FIG. 237) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 237. FIG. 237 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 38, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Design 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as a design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and the image controller 237 includes various types. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. Processing is performed, synthesis processing with other sprites is performed according to the α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to the color information, and filtering processing is performed by the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 has a drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and other contents of an image to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can be used according to the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...). , Characters (character 1, character 2, ..., Hold ball number symbol 1, hold ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list contains this transfer data information, the image controller 237 prepares an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 276 (b). ) Is executed, the time counting counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7307 in FIG. 283). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes to be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 274) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 286) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "Off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S7809 in FIG. 286). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7810 in FIG. 286). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233i is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as "drawing target buffer") that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7902 in FIG. 287).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when the value is "1", it is set to "0". It is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 276 (b)) is executed, it is performed (see S7902 of FIG. 287).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. NS.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. NS. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 238 to 255. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt processing, first, the reading processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated to RAM203. Store in the corresponding buffer area of.

Further, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values become the maximum values (299, 99, 239, respectively in this embodiment). When it reaches, it clears to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C2 and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, and then a special symbol variation process is executed (S104). The start winning process associated with winning the first starting port 64a (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 33 to 36.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passage process accompanying the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 37 and 39. After executing the through gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and then the other winning process is executed (S109). Further, other processing to be executed periodically is executed (S110), and the timer interrupt processing is terminated. The launch control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and launches the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 238), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being hit (S201). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. It includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of reserved balls N2 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 ( S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205), and the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e changed by the calculation is set. (S206). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 253) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the second special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store in.

After the reserved ball number command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After the process of S207 is executed, the process of S213 is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired. (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d acquired in the process of S208 is 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to 1. Subtraction (S210) is performed, and a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 253) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store in.

After the reserved ball number command is set by the process of S211 the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display device 37 executes a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S213). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 34.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If (S214: No) has not elapsed, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol 2 variation start process (S208) and the special symbol 1 variation start process (S213), which will be described later with reference to FIGS. 240 and 241. When the special symbol 2 variation start process (S208) or the special symbol 1 variation start process (S213) is executed, the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are common to each other. A special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the provided execution area. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the special hit random number counter C1, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it is a big hit according to the value of the special hit type counter C2. The type is determined.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S215 is completed, the stop display of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S216). Then, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery performed by the special symbol 2 variation start process (S208) or the special symbol 1 variation start process (S213) is performed. It is determined whether the result (the result of the lottery this time) is a big hit of the special symbol (S217). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot with a special symbol (S217: Yes), a jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot scenario table 202f is set (S218). After that, the values of the probability variation counter 203m and the time saving medium counter 203j are set to 0 (S219), and the jackpot medium flag 203n is set to ON (S220). Then, a stop command is set (S221), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S217, if it is determined that the lottery result this time is not a big hit (S217: No), the small hit setting process (S222) is executed. The small hit setting process (S222) will be described later with reference to FIG. 242. Next, the game state update process (S223) is executed. The game state update process (S223) will be described later with reference to FIG. 239. Then, a stop command is set (S221), and this process is terminated.

Next, the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 240. FIG. 240 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (S209). This special symbol 2 variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 239) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and is a process of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery (win / fail determination) for "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed in.

In the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (S208), first, each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired. (S251). Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is currently in the probability change period (high probability gaming state) (S252). It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not it is the probability variation period is executed by determining whether or not the probability variation counter 203m is on. The probability variation counter 203m is set to ON based on the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot D and the jackpot E. On the other hand, it is set to off based on the start of the jackpot game.

If it is determined that the pachinko machine is in the probable change state (S252: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol, so the process proceeds to the process of S253. In the processing of S253, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S251 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 222A). Acquire (S253). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 500 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a one by one. As described above, six random number values of "5 to 10" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol in the probabilistic gaming state (special gaming state), and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and these random numbers. If it matches the random number value that is the hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After acquiring the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S255.

On the other hand, in the process of S252, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal gaming state of the special symbol (S252: No), the process of S254 is executed. In the process of S254, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S251 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (S254). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 500 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a one by one. Five random numbers of "0 to 4" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol in the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state), and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the random numbers that hit these. If it matches the numerical value, it is judged to be a big hit of a special symbol. After acquiring the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S255.

In the processing of S255, whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S253 or S254 is the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, the value of the acquired special hit random number counter C1 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a are displayed. (S255), and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S255: Yes), the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S251. Based on the above, the display mode at the time of a big hit is set (S256). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S251 is compared with the random number value stored in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2, and the jackpot of two types of special symbols (((() Among the jackpot D and jackpot E)), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined that it is a jackpot D (16R probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", the jackpot E (See FIG. 223 (c)).

In this process of S256, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit D, jackpot E). Further, the jackpot type (big hit D, jackpot E) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined based on the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1 for normal use (S257). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S257, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. Specifically, when the jackpot type determined this time is jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot D, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 50", normal reach, "51 to 250". If it is within the range of ", the fluctuation pattern of super reach is determined.

In the fluctuation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the fluctuation time of the third symbol for notifying the hit / fail determination result, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variation display mode actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the fluctuation time and the hit / fail determination result. The main control device 110 is configured so that even if the display mode of the out-of-reach is used, the voice lamp control device 113 can switch between the reach display mode and the non-reach display mode as long as the fluctuation time is the same. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and the production can be diversified.

For example, as the variation pattern for disengagement, various types of "short disengagement", "long disengagement", "disengagement normal reach", and "disengagement super reach" are specified. As the fluctuation pattern shared by jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot D, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined.

On the other hand, in the process of S255, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S255: No), the display mode at the time of out of alignment is set (S258). In the process of S258, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-order symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. The fluctuation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the above.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S259). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S258, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is confirmed, and the normal reach and super are based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. Determine the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as reach.

When the processing of S257 or the processing of S259 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S257 or the process of S259 is set (S260). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S257 or the process of S259 is set (S261). When the processing of S261 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing (S104).

Next, the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 241. FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (S213). This special symbol 1 variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 239) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and is a process of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery (win / fail determination) for "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed in.

In this special symbol 1 variation start process (S214), as in the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209), the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a acquired by the process of S271 is stored in the execution area. Each value of the hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 is acquired (S271).

Next, it is determined whether the gaming state is currently in the probabilistic change period (high probability gaming state) (S272). If it is determined that the gaming state is in the probabilistic change period (S272: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 has a special symbol. Since it is in a probabilistic state, the process proceeds to S273. In the process of S273, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S271 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (S273). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 500 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a one by one. As described above, 11 random numbers of "5 to 10" are set as the random number values that are the big hits of the special symbol, and the values of the special hit random number counter C1 and the random number values that are the hits match. In some cases, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S275.

On the other hand, in the process of S272, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the probable change state (S272: No), the process of S274 is executed. In the process of S274, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S271 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (S254). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 500 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a one by one. Five random numbers of "0 to 4" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol, and when the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the random number values of these hits match, the special symbol is set. It is determined that it is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S275.

In the processing of S275, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S273 or S274 is a big hit of the special symbol (S275), and if it is determined to be a big hit of the special symbol (S275: Yes), the display mode at the time of a big hit is set based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S271 (S276). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S271 is compared with the random number value stored in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1, and the jackpots (big hits) of four types of special symbols are compared. A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D), the jackpot type is determined. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined to be a jackpot A (6R probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 68", the jackpot B It is determined to be (16R probability variation jackpot), if it is in the range of "69 to 98", it is determined to be jackpot C (8R probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of "99", it is determined to be jackpot C. (See FIG. 223 (c)).

In the process of S276, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jacket A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined based on the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1 for normal use (S277). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S277, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. Specifically, when the jackpot type determined this time is jackpot A, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 50", it is normal reach, and if it is in the range of "51 to 250". Determine the fluctuation pattern of super reach.

In the fluctuation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the fluctuation time of the third symbol for notifying the hit / fail determination result, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variation display mode actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the fluctuation time and the hit / fail determination result. The main control device 110 is configured so that even if the display mode of the out-of-reach is used, the voice lamp control device 113 can switch between the reach display mode and the non-reach display mode as long as the fluctuation time is the same. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and the production can be diversified.

For example, as the fluctuation pattern for disconnection, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disengagement normal reach", "disengagement super reach", and "disengagement special reach" are specified. ing. As the fluctuation pattern shared by the jackpot A, the jackpot B, and the jackpot D, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined.

In the process of S275, if it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S275: No), the display mode at the time of out of alignment is set (S278). In the process of S278, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-design symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. The fluctuation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the above.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S279). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S278, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is confirmed, and the normal reach and super are based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. Determine the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as reach.

When the processing of S277 or the processing of S279 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S277 or the process of S279 is set (S280). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S277 or the process of S279 is set (S281). When the processing of S281 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing (S104).

Next, the small hit setting process (S222) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 242. FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing the small hit setting process (S222). This small hit setting process (S222) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 239) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and is an execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in, a process for determining whether or not a small hit is performed, and a scenario for a small hit performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is determined. It is a process.

In the small hit setting process (S222), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result this time is a small hit (S301). If it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S301: Yes), a small hit scenario is set based on the small hit scenario table 202g (S302). Next, the small hit medium flag 203g is set to ON (S303), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S301, if it is determined that the lottery result this time is not a small hit (S301: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the game state update process (S223) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 243. FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing the game state update process (S223). This game state update process (S223) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 239) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and the values of the probability variation counter 203 m and the time reduction / medium counter 203j are set. It is a process for executing the process of subtraction and updating the game state based on the subtracted value.

In the game state update process (S223), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203m is larger than 1 (S351). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203m is smaller than 1 (that is, 0) (S351: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203m is larger than 1 (S351: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203m is subtracted by 1 (S352). Next, in the process of S352, it is determined whether or not the value of the subtracted probability variation counter 203m is 0 (S353). When it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203m is 0 (S353: Yes), since it is the timing to end the probability change, a state command indicating a normal state is set (S354), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S353, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203m is not 0 (S353: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is larger than 1 (S355). If it is determined that it is smaller than 1 (that is, 0) (S355: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S355, when it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is larger than 1 (S355: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is subtracted by 1 (S356). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j subtracted in the process of S356 is 0 (S357). When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203j is 0 (S357: Yes), a state command indicating the transition to the latent state is set (S358), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S357, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203j is not 0 (S357: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 244. FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64, and if there is a starting winning, This is a process for holding a value indicated by various random number counters and a process for executing pre-reading of a lottery result in a special symbol from the values indicated by the held various random number counters.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of pending numbers N1 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball The value (N) of the number counter 203d is added by 1 (S404). Then, a hold ball number command of the first special symbol indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1301) of the main process (see FIG. 253) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S405, each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above. Is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, with respect to S408 to S414, in each of the processes of S401 to S406 described above, the process for winning the first winning opening 64 is only changed to the processing for winning the second starting opening 64b. Since the same processing is executed, the detailed description thereof will be omitted. When a game ball wins in the second winning opening 640, the values of the special hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 are acquired even when the game ball is stored as a reserved ball, and the corresponding special symbol 2 is obtained. It is stored in the empty hold area of the hold ball storage area 203b.

In this way, by acquiring the values of the special hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 similar to the first special symbol for the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640. Since the lottery can be executed using a random number common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the winning probability can be constant for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

After executing the process of S413, the look-ahead process is executed (S414). The details of the look-ahead process (S414) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 245, based on the values of various counters acquired for the ball entering the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Then, a process of determining in advance the result of each lottery executed at the start of the fluctuation is executed.

In the present embodiment, the value of each counter is configured to be selected based on the incoming ball, but it may be configured to be selected at the start of fluctuation. With such a configuration, a storage area for storing the value of each counter is not required until the start of fluctuation, and the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 can be suppressed. Further, among the counters, some counters (for example, only the fluctuation type counter CS1) may be configured to be acquired at the start of fluctuation. With this configuration, the counter related to the hit / miss judgment can be acquired at the time of entering the ball, and the counter not related to the hit / miss judgment can be acquired later, and the amount of data to be stored while maintaining the fairness of the game can be stored. It can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a look-ahead process (S414), which is one process in the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S414).

In the look-ahead process (FIG. 36, S414), first, the hit / fail determination at the start of fluctuation is determined based on the acquired value of the special hit random number counter C1 (S421). The hit / fail judgment at the start of fluctuation indicates whether the gaming state at the start of fluctuation is the normal gaming state (low probability) or the probabilistic gaming state (high probability gaming state). 203a, special symbol 2 It is determined by the hit / fail judgment and the hit type of the counter value that is variablely displayed before each counter value stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b.

In the process of S422, it is determined whether or not the determination result executed in the process of S421 is a hit (S422). When it is determined that the determination result is a hit (S422: Yes), it is determined whether the hit type is the jackpot A or based on the special hit type counter C2 (S423). If it is determined that the hit type is jackpot A (S423: Yes), a winning command indicating jackpot A is set (S424). On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type is jackpot B (S423: No), a winning command indicating that the jackpot is B is set (S425). Further, in the process of S422, when it is determined that the result of the determined hit / fail determination is out of order (S422: No), the out-of-winning command is set (S426).

In this way, the result of the hit / fail determination in advance before the start of fluctuation is output as a winning command to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the reserved ball is established, so that the voice lamp control device 113 can be used. It is possible to recognize the result of the hit / fail judgment and the type of hit in advance. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 may change the color of the reserved symbol to a color for notifying the winning / failing determination result (for example, the color of the reserved symbol may be changed to a color for notifying the winning / failing determination result) in advance to notify the player of the winning / failing determination result for the reserved ball based on the winning command. , An effect such as outputting a notification sound for notifying the hit / fail determination result in the reserved ball) can be executed. Further, as the winning command, one winning command is output for the reserved ball each time the reserved ball is established, so that the voice lamp control device 113 can also recognize the establishment of the reserved ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 245, a look-ahead process (S407), which is one process in the start winning process (see S105 in FIG. 244) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S407).

In this look-ahead process (S407), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new prize in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new prize in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the winning is a winning of the first special symbol (S502).

In the process of S502, when it is determined that the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (S502: Yes), it is based on the special symbol big hit random number table 202a1, the special figure 1 big hit type selection table 202d1 and the small hit random number table 202e. Then, the lottery result, the big hit type and the small hit type are acquired (S503), and the process proceeds to S504. In the process of S504, the prize information command including the big hit determination result, the big hit type, the small hit determination result, and the small hit type acquired in S503 (or S505) is set (S504), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S502, when it is determined that the winning is the winning of the second special symbol (S502: No), the lottery result is based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a and the special symbol 2 jackpot selection table 202d2. The jackpot type is acquired (S505), the process of S504 is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 246. FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation processing (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 238), and the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second winning opening 640 attached to the second winning opening 640 are performed. 1 This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640 and the like.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S601). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the first electric accessory 640 attached to the second winning opening 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. Includes what is being done. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number of holdings of variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604 :). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

Next, the normal symbol change start process is executed (S608), and this process is terminated. The normal symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 247. In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S609). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S637 or the process of S638 of FIG. 38 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

If the fluctuation time has not elapsed in the process of S609 (S609: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S609, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S609: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S610). In the processing of S610, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the processing of S707 of FIG. 247 or the processing of S710, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is displayed as the second symbol. The device 83 is set to display a stop display (lighting display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is out of order and the display mode is set by the process of S713 in FIG. 247, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). When the stop display is set by the process of S610, when the second symbol display update process (see S1307) of the main process (see FIG. 253) is executed next, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S707, the process of S710, or the process of S713 in FIG. 38.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process a hit of the ordinary symbol? Is determined (S611). If the result of this lottery is a hit of a normal symbol (S611: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the first electric accessory 640 attached to the second winning opening 640 is set (S612), and the operation command per normal figure is set. (S613), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the first electric accessory 640 is set by the process of S612, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1306) of the main process (see FIG. 253) is executed, the first electric motor is executed. The opening / closing control of the accessory 640 is started, and the opening / closing control of the first electric accessory 640 is continued until the opening time and the number of openings set in the process of S709 or the process of S712 of FIG. 247 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S611, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S611: No), the processes of S612 and S613 are skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the normal symbol variation start processing (S608) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 247. FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol change start processing (S608). This normal symbol change start process (S608) sets the setting at the start of change of the normal symbol executed in the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 246) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238). It is a process to execute.

It is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being hit (S701). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. It includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S701: Yes), the process proceeds to S704.

In the process of S701, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S701: No), it is determined whether or not it is in the probable change (S702). If it is not in the probable change (S702: No), the process proceeds to S704.

If the probability is changing (S702: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol. Based on the value of and the normal hit random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 222 (c)), the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S703). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 222 (c)) for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that it is a hit of a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 222 (c)).

In the processing of S704, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. , Based on the normal hit random number table 202c for low probability (see FIG. 222 (c)), the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S704). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 222 (c)) for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5", it is determined that it is a short hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "6", it is the long-time hit of the normal symbol. If it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary symbol (see FIG. 222 (c)).

In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is less likely to be a hit. This is because during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special gaming state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning opening 65a, so that the first electric accessory 640 attached to the second winning opening 640 This is to prevent the ball that has been opened and tried to win the specific winning opening 65a from entering the second winning opening 640 as much as possible. Since the specific winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the second winning opening 640, even if the ball is suppressed from entering the second winning opening 640 during the big hit of the special symbol, the second winning opening Many balls enter the 640. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the second winning opening 640 becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S703 or S704 is a hit of the normal symbol (S705), and if it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol (S705: Yes). , It is determined whether the type of hit of the normal symbol is a long-time hit (S706). When it is determined that the hit type of the normal symbol is a long-time hit (S706: Yes), the display mode for the long-time hit is set (S707). In the process of S707, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). Next, the variation pattern command per normal figure length is set (S708), the opening time and the number of times of the first electric accessory 640 are set to 2 seconds × 2 times (S709), and the process proceeds to S715.

When it is determined in the process of S706 that the type of hit of the normal symbol is normal hit (S706: No), the display mode at the time of normal hit is set (S710). Next, a variation pattern command per normal figure is set (S711). The opening period of the first electric accessory 640 attached to the second winning opening 640 is set to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to one (S712), and the process proceeds to S636.

In the process of S705, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S705: No), the display mode at the time of out of alignment is set (S713). In the process of S713, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of deviation is completed, the deviation pattern command is set (S714), and the process proceeds to S715.

In the process of S715, it is determined whether or not the probability change is in progress (S715), and if the probability change is in progress (S715: Yes), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S716). , End this process. On the other hand, if the process of S715 is not probable (S715: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S717), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the time of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further. Since the release period of the second winning opening 640 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640.

In this embodiment, the opening time and the number of opening times per long time are set to the same operation as the case where the normal symbol is hit in the probable change state and the time saving state, but the operation is not limited to this, and the opening time and the number of opening times are different. It may be configured to be set.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 248. FIG. 248 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, and when the ball has passed, it is normal. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the hit random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the first through gate 66 (S801). Here, the passage of the sphere at the first through gate 66 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the sphere has passed through the first through gate 66 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of holding the variation display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S803).

Whether the sphere has passed through the first through gate 66 (S801: No), or even if the sphere has passed through the first through gate 66, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4. If not (S803: No), the process proceeds to S806. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the first through gate 66 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter The value (M) of 203f is added by 1 (S804). Then, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set to the first of the empty hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4 area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area (S805), and the process proceeds to S806. In the process of S805, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area. Next, the normal map look-ahead process (S806) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, the general drawing look-ahead process will be described with reference to FIG. 249 (S806). FIG. 249 is a flowchart showing the contents of this normal map look-ahead process (S806). In the normal figure look-ahead process (S806), first, the pre-determination based on the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is executed (S901). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 newly stored in the process of S805 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal hit random number table 202c.

Next, the hit pre-determination result and the fluctuation time determination result are acquired based on the pre-determination result (S902). After that, the general drawing prize information command is set (S903), and this process is terminated.

Next, the other winning process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 250. FIG. 250 is a flowchart showing the contents of the other winning process (S109). This other winning process (S109) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 238), determines whether or not a ball has entered in the specific winning opening 65a and the specific outro, and if there is a ball, it is determined. This is the process for setting the command.

In the other winning process (S109), first, it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the specific winning opening 65a (S1001). When it is determined that there is a prize in the specific prize opening 65a (S1001: Yes), the specific prize command is set and the process proceeds to S1003. On the other hand, in the process of S1001, when it is determined that there is a prize in the specific winning opening (S1001: No), the process of S1002 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1003.

After executing the process of S1001 or S1002, it is determined whether or not there is a ball entering the specific outro (S1003). When it is determined that there is a ball entering in the specific outro (S1003: Yes), a specific out ball entering command is set (S1004), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1003, when it is determined that there is no ball entering the specific outro (S1003: No), the process of S1004 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S801) as a setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process shifts to S913. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the processing is also shifted to S913 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and even in such a case, the process is transferred to S913. As will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 253, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S913, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S913). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S914, S915) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S914, S915) is executed. Further, the initialization process (S914, S915) of the RAM 203 is also executed when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S914, S915), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S914), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S915). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S911.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power off occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), a status command is transmitted based on the long-time open flag 203i (S908). Next, while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203, the power cutoff occurrence information is cleared (S909). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (S910), and the process proceeds to S911. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S911, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S912), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 253, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1301 to S1307 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1310 and S1311 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is input to each control device (periphery) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1301). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading processing of S131 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 238) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls is corresponded to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 239) and the start winning process (see FIG. 244) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning command set in the start winning processing and the look-ahead processing (see FIG. 245) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1302). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1303), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1304). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1304) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, when the special symbol is in the small hit state, the small hit effect is executed, and the small hit control process for opening or closing the third winning opening 82 of the third electric accessory is executed (S1305). In the jackpot control process, the third winning opening 82 is opened for each round in the small hit state, and whether the maximum opening time of the third winning opening 82 has elapsed or whether the specified number of balls have won in the third winning opening 82 is determined. judge. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the third winning opening 82 is closed. The opening and closing of the third winning opening 82 is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In this embodiment, the small hit control process (S1305) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the first electric accessory 640 attached to the second winning opening 640 is executed (S1305). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the first electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S612 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 246), the opening / closing control of the first electric accessory 640a is started. .. The opening / closing control of the first electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S709 or S712 of FIG. 247 in the normal symbol variation start processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1306). In the first symbol display update process, the process of S257 or S259 of the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 240), or the process of S277 or S279 of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 241) When the variation pattern is set, the variation display according to the variation pattern is started by the first symbol display device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, the process of S257 or S259 of the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 240), or the process of S277 or S279 of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 241). When the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern set by the processing ends, the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, and the processing of S256 of the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 208) or The stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the process of S258, the process of S276 of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 241), or the process of S278. (Lighting display).

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1307). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S716 or the process of S717 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 247), the variation display is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the symbol of "○" and the symbol of "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S610 of the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 246), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S707 or the process of S710 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 247) after ending the variable display. (Lighting display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1308), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1308: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1309). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1309: Yes), the process is shifted to S1301 and each process after S1301 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if a predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1309: No), the initial time is reached until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. The value random number counter CINI1, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1310, S1311).

First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1310). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1302 (S1311).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1301 to S1307 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special hit random number counter C1). (Initial value of, initial value of random number counter C4 per normal) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the process of S1308, if the power off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1308: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 40 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1312 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1312), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmit (S1313). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1314), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1315), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1308 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1301 to S1307, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1310 and S1311 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1301. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1301 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S901). By setting a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1301. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S2204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 254. FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S2204). This jackpot control process (S2204) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 257), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a specific winning opening (see FIG. 257). Large opening port) This is a process for opening or closing 65a.

In the jackpot control process (S1304), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot scenario is set (S1401). If it is determined that the jackpot scenario has not been set (S1401: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1401 that the jackpot scenario is set (S1401: Yes), the jackpot scenario is updated (S1402), and it is determined whether it is the timing to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (S1403). ). More specifically, in the processing of S1402, 1 is added to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown), and in the processing of S1403, the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown) starts the opening of the jackpot scenario. Determine if the value corresponds to.

If it is determined in the process of S1403 that it is the timing to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (S1403: Yes), the jackpot opening command is set (S1404), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the timing of the opening start of the jackpot scenario is not (S1403: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S1405).

In the process of S1405, if it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S1405: Yes), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot is set (S1406), and the number of newly started rounds is set. The indicated round number command is set (S1407), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1405, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S1405: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S1405: No). S1408). Here, in this control example, when a predetermined number (for example, 5) of balls are won in total while the specific winning opening 65a is open, or the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a elapses for a predetermined time. If so, it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the round end condition of the specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S1408: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed by the processing of S1409 (the opening / closing plate 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set. Set the solenoid to off so that it is in the closed state), and end this process. The above-mentioned discrimination processing from S140 to S1409 is repeatedly executed for the number of rounds of the jackpot set in the jackpot scenario.

On the other hand, in the process of S1409, if it is determined that the round end condition of the currently executed round is not satisfied (S1409: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1410), and the ending effect is produced. If it is the start timing of (S1410: Yes), the ending command for big hit is set (S1411), and this process is terminated. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1301) of the main process (see FIG. 253) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1410, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1410: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1412). Here, the end timing of the jackpot indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed. If it is determined in the processing of S1412 that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1412: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is set based on the current jackpot type (S1413), and the probability changes based on the jackpot type. The value of the counter 203m is set (S1414), the jackpot middle flag 203n is set to off (S1415), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1412, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the end of the big hit (S1412: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 255, a small hit control process (S1305), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 253) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing the contents of this small hit control process (S1305).

In the small hit control process (S1305), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit scenario is set (S1501). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the process of S1604 of the special figure 2 out-of-order stop process (see FIG. 45) is executed and the small hit scenario is set. If the small hit scenario is not set in the process of S1501 (S1501: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the small hit scenario is set in the process of S1501 (S1501: Yes), the small hit scenario is updated (S1502), and it is determined whether it is the timing to start the opening of the small hit scenario (S1503). More specifically, in the processing of S1502, 1 is added to the counter value of the small hit scenario counter (not shown), and in the processing of S1503, the counter value of the small hit scenario counter (not shown) is the small hit scenario. Determine if the value corresponds to the opening start of.

If it is determined in the process of S1503 that it is the timing to start the opening of the small hit scenario (S1503: Yes), the small hit opening command is set (S1504), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening start of the small hit scenario (S1503: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing of the round start of the small hit scenario (S1505).

In the process of S1505, if it is determined that it is the timing to start the round of the small hit scenario (S1505: Yes), the opening of the third winning opening 82 is set (S1506), and then the round start command is set (S1507). ), This process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the round start of the small hit scenario (S1505: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S1508). Here, in this control example, when a predetermined number (for example, 5) of balls are won in total while the third winning opening 82 is open, or the opening period of the third winning opening 82 is a predetermined time. If it has passed, it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied.

If it is determined in the processing of S1508 that the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S1508: Yes), the third winning opening 82 is set to be closed in the processing of S1509. End the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round end condition of the third winning opening 82 is not satisfied (S1508: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1510).

If it is determined in the process of S1510 that it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1510: Yes), the ending command for small hits is set (S1511), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1301) of the main process (see FIG. 253) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect indicating the end of the small hit is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1510, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1510: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small hit (S1512). Here, the end timing of the small hit indicates the case where the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed.

If it is determined in the process of S1512 that it is the end timing of the small hit (S1512: Yes), the small hit medium flag 203 g is set to off (S1513), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the small hit (S1513: No), this process is terminated.

<Control processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 256 to 273, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 256. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of S2119 is performed by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") (see FIG. 257). ) Is started in the middle of execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 257, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S2116 in FIG. 257), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S2119. The power cutoff processing flag is turned on before the power cutoff process is executed, and the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off after the power cutoff process is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of S2119 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S2002: No), the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S2119 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of S2118 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to the process of S2208.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S2002: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the voice lamp control device 113 is being executed during the power-off processing of S2119. MPU221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S2006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2119 is executed (see S2118 in FIG. 259). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S2119 is executed, the process of S2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S2119 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010), and then an interrupt is performed. Set the permission (S2011) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S2008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the processing of S2008 via the processing of S2004 to S2006 is started. This is the case when the process is reached or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power cutoff command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009, which is the clearing process of the work area of RAM223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S2010, the initial value of RAM223 is set (S2010), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S2011), the process shifts to the main process. After that, it is determined whether or not a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2012). It should be noted that this state command is a command set in the process of S1208 of the start-up process (see FIG. 252) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. If it is determined in the process of S2012 that the state command has been received (S2012: Yes), the information indicating the received state command is set in the state setting area 223 g, and this process is terminated (S2013).

In this way, when the power is turned on, the main control device 110 outputs a command that can determine whether or not the normal symbol has been hit for a long time, so that the voice lamp control device 113 also determines the state. Can be done.

It should be noted that the reason for skipping the clearing process of S2009 is that when the processing of S2008 is reached via the processing of S2004 to S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S2004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 257, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S2101 this time was executed (S2101), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S2101: No), the process of S2102 to S2113 is not performed and the process proceeds to the process of S2114. In the process of S2101, whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is mainly related to display (effect) in S2102 to S2113, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S2114, the variation display setting process of S2115, and the process of updating various counter values (not shown) in a short cycle. That is, by executing the processing of S2114 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception omission of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S2115 in a short cycle, it is received by the command determination processing. Based on the command, the settings related to the variable effect can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S2103 to S2115 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2102). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process shifts to the process of S2105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S2105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, the hold lamp (not shown) is turned on according to the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a, the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b, and the normal hold ball number counter 223c. Is done.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process to set to perform the production. The details of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107) will be described later with reference to FIG. 271.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S2108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S2109, the liquid crystal display effect execution management process is executed (S2110), and the process proceeds to the process of S2111. In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81. The details of the liquid crystal display effect execution management process (S2110) described above will be described later with reference to FIG. 272.

When the processing of S2110 is completed, the operation effect management processing is executed (S2111). The details of this operation effect management process (S2111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 273, but the effect mode displayed during the operation effect depends on whether or not the operation means (frame button 22) is operated. The process for making it variable is executed.

After executing the operation effect management process (S2111), the operation control process (S2112) is executed. In this motion control process (S2112), motion control of various movable accessories for effect provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is executed. The operation control of the movable accessories for various effects is set based on the lottery result of the special symbol, the lottery result of the normal symbol, the operation result of the operation means (frame button 22), the game result during the jackpot game, and the like. It is executed according to the contents of the operation scenario of the movable accessory, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the processing of S2112 is completed, the counter update processing is executed (S2113). In this counter update process (S2113), a process for updating the value of a counter (timer) for timekeeping information, for example, an operation valid timer 223n, which is necessary when executing various effects, is executed.

When the processing of S2113 is completed, the command determination processing is executed next (S2114). The details of this command determination process (S2114) will be described later with reference to FIG. 258. After the command determination process (S2114) is executed, the variable display setting process is executed (S2115). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 267.

When the processing of S2115 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2116). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2116 (S2116: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S2118), and the power-off process is executed (S2119). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (S2120), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2116 (S2116: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2117), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2117: No), the process returns to the process of S2101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2117: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 258. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S2114). This command determination process (S2114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 257) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. ..

In the command determination process (S2114: FIG. 258), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the main control device 110 is used. It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (S2201). When the variation pattern command is received (S2201: Yes), the variation pattern reception process is executed (S2202), and this process is terminated. The details of the variation pattern reception process (S2202) will be described later with reference to FIG. 259.

On the other hand, in the process of S2201, when the fluctuation pattern command is not received (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not the stop type command is received (S2203). When the stop type command is received (S2203: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2204), the stop type is extracted from the received command (S2205), and this process is terminated. ..

If the stop type command is not received in the process of S2203 (S2203: No), it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command is received (S2206). When the hold ball number command is received (S2206: Yes), the hold ball number is extracted from the received command, and the corresponding special symbol hold ball number counter (special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a, special symbol 2 hold ball count counter). It is stored (S2207) in the number counter 223b), and this processing is terminated. Here, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. Stored. Further, when the reserved ball number command indicating the reserved ball number of the normal symbol is received, the information for indicating the reserved ball number is stored in the normal reserved ball number counter.

On the other hand, in the process of S2206, when the reserved ball number command is not received (S2206: No), it is determined whether or not the winning-related command is received (S2208). When the winning-related command is received (S2208: Yes), the winning information-related processing is started (S2209), and this processing is terminated. The details of the prize information-related processing (S2209) will be described later with reference to FIG. 260, but the prize command output from the main control device 110 (the prize command corresponding to the special symbol, the prize command corresponding to the normal symbol). Based on the above, the winning information included in the winning command is pre-determined, and the process of executing the effect (look-ahead effect) based on the pre-determined result and the process of temporarily storing the pre-determined result are executed. Will be done.

In the process of S2208, if the winning-related command is not received (S2208: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning-related command is received (S2210), and if it is determined that the winning-related command is received (S2210: Yes). , The hit-related process is executed (S2211), and this process is terminated. This hit-related process (S2211) will be described later with reference to FIG. 263.

In the process of S2210, when it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S2210: No), it is determined whether or not the stop command has been received (S2212). If it is determined that the stop command has been received (S2212: Yes), the stop process is executed (S2213), and this process is hunted. This stop process (S2213) will be described later with reference to FIG. 264. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received in the process of S2212 (S2212: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 259, the details of the variation pattern reception process (S2202), which is one of the processes in the command determination process (S2114: FIG. 258), will be described. FIG. 259 is a flowchart showing this fluctuation pattern reception process. In this variation pattern reception process (S2202), a variation pattern (variation effect) of a special symbol is set using the variation pattern selection table 222a based on the received variation pattern command. Further, when the variation pattern command indicating the result of the ordinary symbol lottery is received, it is determined whether or not the variation effect of the special symbol can be executed based on the lottery result of the ordinary symbol.

In the variation pattern reception process (S2202: FIG. 259), first, it is determined whether the variation pattern command received this time is for a special figure (S2301), and the variation pattern command for the special figure, that is, the variation pattern of the special symbol is shown. When it is determined that the command is a command (S2301: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2302), and the fluctuation pattern is extracted using the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a based on the received command. Then (S2303), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2301, when it is determined that the variation pattern command received this time is not for the special figure, that is, when it is determined that the variation pattern command for the normal figure is received (S2301: No), then, It is determined whether the fluctuation pattern command for the normal map received this time is a fluctuation pattern command indicating that the normal map length per (long open) is won (S2304). In the processing of S2304, if it is determined that a fluctuation pattern command indicating that the command has been won per the length of the normal map (per long open) has been received (S2304: Yes), then the normal map production prohibition flag 223u is set to ON. If it is determined whether or not the command is set (S2305), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S2305: No), the normal map effect enable flag 223t is set to ON, and this process is terminated.

In the processing of S2304, when it is determined that a command other than the fluctuation pattern command indicating that the command is won per the length of the normal figure (per long opening) is received (S2304: No), or in the processing of S2305, the normal drawing production is prohibited. If it is determined that the flag 223u is set to ON (S2305: Yes), this process ends without setting the normal map effectable flag 223t to ON.

Next, with reference to FIG. 260, a prize information-related process (S2209), which is one process in the command determination process (S2114: see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing the winning information-related processing (S2209). This winning information-related process (S2209) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the prize information-related processing (S2209), first, it is determined whether the received prize information command is a command indicating the prize information of the special symbol (the prize information command for the special figure) (S2401), and the prize information command for the special figure is used. If it is determined to be (S2401: Yes), the winning information included in the received winning information command is read (S2402), the winning / failing judgment result included in the read winning information, and the acquired value of the hold rank counter 223p1. The hold rank is selected based on the hold rank selection table 222b using and (S2403).

Then, the hold rank selected in the process of S2403 is stored in the place corresponding to the winning information command received this time in the hold effect information storage area 223m (S2404). After that, the hold mode selection process (S2405) and the treasure box mode selection process (S2406) are executed. Here, the hold mode selection process (S2405) executes a process for setting a look-ahead effect (hold effect) that changes the display mode of the corresponding hold symbol based on the winning information read this time. A detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 261. Further, the treasure box mode selection process (S2406) executes a process for setting a look-ahead effect (treasure box effect) that changes the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 based on the winning information read this time, and the details thereof. The description will be described later with reference to FIG. 262.

After finishing the processing of S2406, next, it is determined whether or not the winning information read this time contains the winning information (S2407), and if it is determined that the winning information is included (S2407: Yes), the normal drawing effect is produced. The prohibition flag 223u is set to ON (S2408), the received winning information is stored in the corresponding position of the winning information storage area 223f (S2409), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2401, if it is determined that the winning information command received this time is for a normal symbol (normal figure) (S2401: No), the process of S2402 to S2408 is skipped and the present process is terminated. Although detailed explanation is omitted, when the prize information command for general drawing is received in the prize information related process (S2209), whether or not the received prize information command includes information is checked. And, if the hit information is included, it is configured to determine whether or not the hit information in which the long open hit game is executed is included, and further, the normal map fluctuation time is determined. The result is stored in the general drawing area of the winning information storage area 223f.

This makes it possible to determine in advance how many seconds the long open per game will be executed by hitting the normal symbol, so the lottery result of the normal symbol can be spread over multiple normal symbol fluctuations as in the case of the special symbol. It is possible to execute the effect (normal map look-ahead effect) that suggests. In addition, since it is possible to determine whether or not the game per long opening is executed during the special symbol change period during execution, for example, an effect based on the normal figure change is interrupted during the out-of-order change of the special symbol. It is also possible.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 in which a lottery of a plurality of different symbols (a lottery of a special symbol and a lottery of a normal symbol) is executed in parallel, the fluctuation is based on the symbol fluctuation on the side which is the lottery result advantageous to the player. Since the effect (variable effect executed by the third symbol display device 81) can be executed, the interest of the game can be improved. Further, since it is possible to suppress the execution of the variable effect based on the lottery result (outlier) that is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to play.

Next, with reference to FIG. 261, the contents of the hold mode selection process (S2405) executed in the prize information-related process (see FIG. 260) will be described. FIG. 261 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hold mode selection process (S2405). In this hold mode selection process (S2405), a process for setting a hold effect, which is an effect of changing the display mode of the hold symbol based on the winning information received this time, is executed.

When the hold mode selection process (S2405) is executed, first, it is determined whether the hold effect in-progress flag 223q is set to on (S2501), and it is determined that the hold effect in progress flag 223q is not set to on. (S2501: No), that is, when it is determined that the hold effect is not currently set (executed), it is possible to set a new hold effect, so S2502 to set the hold effect. The process of S2506 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S2501, when it is determined that the hold effect in progress flag 223q is set to ON (S2501: Yes), a new hold effect cannot be set (executed). This process is terminated by skipping the processes of S2502 to S2506.

When the processing of S2502 is executed, the holding rank stored in the holding effect information storage area is read (S2502), and the holding rank read by the processing of S2502 and the acquired value of the holding mode counter 223p2 are used. The holding mode is selected based on the holding mode selection table 222c (S2503).

Then, a display hold command corresponding to the selected hold mode is set (S2504), the selected hold mode is stored in the hold effect information storage area 223 m (S2505), and the hold mode for varying the display mode of the hold symbol is selected. If this is the case, the hold effect in progress flag 223q is set to ON (S2506), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in this control example, it is configured to be able to execute a hold effect that changes the display mode of the hold symbol when the winning information is acquired. Further, by using the hold effect in progress flag 223q, it is possible to suppress duplicate setting of the hold effect.

In this control example, while the hold effect is being executed (set), the look-ahead effect (hold effect) is prevented from being executed (set) based on the newly received winning command. ) Are executed more than once, and it is configured so that it is possible to suppress the execution of an effect that is difficult for the player to understand, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a predetermined number of times (for example,). 2) may be configured to be executed in duplicate with the pending effect up to the upper limit.

Further, in this control example, the process of selecting the hold effect is always executed when the hold effect in progress flag 223q is not set to ON, but the process is not limited to this, and for example, a winning command is used. Is executed when the winning information-related process (see S2209 in FIG. 260) is executed, and when the lottery result is the predetermined lottery result, the above-mentioned hold mode selection process is executed. It may be configured in. By configuring the process for setting the hold effect to be randomly executed in this way, the hold pattern for which the hold effect has not been executed is not executed even though the hold mode selection process is executed. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the hold mode selection process has not been executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the variable effect of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol for which the hold effect has not been executed.

Further, once the hold effect is executed, a predetermined condition (for example, a condition that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 10 times or a condition that is satisfied when the time elapses 10 minutes) is satisfied. A discriminating means for determining whether or not the condition is satisfied may be provided so that the new hold mode selection process is not executed until it is determined by the discriminating means that the predetermined condition is satisfied. This makes it possible to set a period during which the hold effect is not intentionally executed.

In addition, in this control example, when the hold effect for changing the display mode of the hold symbol is selected in the hold mode selection process (when other than "-" is selected by the hold mode selection table 222c (see FIG. 228)). Is configured to turn on the hold effect in progress flag 223q, but for example, it is configured to set the hold effect in progress flag 223q to on even when the display mode of the hold symbol is not changed in the hold mode selection process. You may. In this case, it is advisable to provide a period during which the above-mentioned reserved effect is not intentionally executed. With this configuration, it is possible to set a period in which the display mode of the reserved symbol is not changed more randomly, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 262, the contents of the hold mode selection process (S2405) executed in the prize information-related process (see FIG. 260) will be described. FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing the contents of the treasure box mode selection process (S2406). In this treasure box mode selection process (S2406), a process for setting (executing) a treasure box effect (see FIG. 210 (b)), which is an effect of changing the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 based on the winning information received this time. Is executed.

When the treasure box mode selection process (S2406) is executed, first, it is determined whether the treasure box effecting flag 223r is set to ON (S2601), and it is determined that the treasure box effecting flag 223r is not set to ON. (S2601: No), that is, when it is determined that the treasure box effect has not been set (executed), a new treasure box effect can be set. Therefore, S2602 to S2606 for setting the treasure box effect. Executes the processing of. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2601 that the treasure chest effect in progress flag 223r is set to ON (S2601: Yes), a new treasure box effect cannot be set (executed). This process is terminated by skipping the processes of S2602 to S2606.

When the process of S2602 is executed, the notification determination result is read from the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f (S2602), and then the holding mode is changed from the information stored in the holding effect information storage area 223m. Information indicating the presence / absence (information indicating whether or not the pending symbol is executed for the pending effect) is read out (S2603). Then, based on the treasure box mode selection table 222d using the hit / fail determination result read in the process of S2602, the information indicating the presence / absence of the hold mode change read in the process of S2603, and the acquired value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3. Select the treasure chest mode (S2604).

Then, the treasure box command for the lamp corresponding to the selected treasure box mode is set (S2605), the selected treasure box mode is stored in the corresponding place in the hold effect information storage area 223 m (S2606), and the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 is displayed. When the treasure box mode to be changed is selected, the treasure box effecting flag 223r is set to ON (S2606), and this process is terminated.

The display mode of the treasure chest accessory 750 is variably controlled based on the lamp treasure chest command set by the process of S2605. The voice lamp control device 113 may have a means for variably controlling the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750, or a control device different from the voice lamp control device 113 may be used.

As described above, in this control example, the treasure box mode selection process (see S2406 in FIG. 262) is performed in the prize information related process (see S2209 in FIG. 260) in the same manner as the above-mentioned hold mode selection process (see S2405 in FIG. 261). See). Then, when selecting the treasure box mode in which the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 is changed in this treasure box mode selection process, it is based on the determination result of whether or not the display mode of the target reserved symbol is variably displayed. It is configured to select the treasure box mode, and further, in one prize information related process (S2209 in FIG. 260), after executing the hold mode selection process (S2405 in FIG. 261), the treasure box mode setting process (FIG. It is configured to execute S2406) of 262. This makes it possible to reliably set an appropriate effect.

Next, the contents of the hit-related process (S2211 in FIG. 263) will be described with reference to FIG. 263. FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related process (S2211). This hit-related process (S2211) is executed by the command determination process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2114 in FIG. 258), and is related to the hit (big hit, small hit) from the main control device 110. It is executed when a command is received.

In this control example, when the big hit C is won by lottery of a special symbol and when the small hit is won, the third electric accessory 82a (see FIG. 207) provided in the left area of the game board 13 is opened. When a winning game (left-handed game) is executed and the jackpots A, B, D, and E are won by lottery of special symbols, the variable winning device 65 provided in the right area of the game board 13 is opened. It is configured to execute a hit game (right hit game), and in the hit-related process (S2211 in FIG. 263), a display command for displaying information about the hit game on the third symbol display device 81 is set. The processing and the different winning effects depending on the type of winning game to be executed are configured to be executed.

When the hit-related process (S2211 in FIG. 263) is executed, first, it is determined whether the command received this time is a command related to a big hit C or a small hit, that is, a command related to a left-handed game (S2701). ). Here, if it is determined that the command is related to the big hit C or the small hit (S2701: Yes), the processes of S2703 to S2709 are executed in order to set various display contents related to the left hit game. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command received this time is not a command related to the big hit C or a small hit, that is, a command related to the right hit game (S2701: No), various display contents related to the right hit game are displayed. In order to set, the right attacker jackpot related process is executed (S2702), and this process is terminated. The contents of the right attacker jackpot related processing (S2702) will be described later with reference to FIG. 264, and first, the processing of S2703 to S2709 for setting various display contents related to the left hit game will be described.

When the process of S2703 is executed, it is determined whether the command received this time is a hit start command indicating the start of a hit (S2703), and if it is determined to be a hit start command (S2703: Yes), the hit type. The roulette effect corresponding to (see FIG. 213) is determined (S2704), the display command corresponding to the determined roulette effect is set (S2705), and this process is terminated.

Here, the roulette effect described above with reference to FIG. 213 is an effect executed for a predetermined period (5 seconds), and when the small hit game is executed, the small hit game period (5 seconds). That is, it is executed using the opening period (2 seconds), the round game period (1.5 seconds), and the ending period (1.5 seconds) of the small hit game. When the jackpot (big hit C) game is executed, 5 seconds after the jackpot game is started, that is, the opening period (2 seconds) and a part of the round game period of the first round (from the start of the round game). 3 seconds).

In this control example, the same winning operation is executed during the period when the roulette effect is executed regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol. That is, in the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot C, the opening period is set to 2 seconds, and as the first round game, the third electric accessory 82a is opened for 1.5 seconds after the round game is started. Later, a round game is set in which the third electric accessory 82a is opened for 28.5 seconds after a closing period of 3 seconds (a period for closing the third electric accessory 82a).

With this configuration, while the roulette effect is being executed (while the small hit game or the first half of the big hit game corresponding to the big hit C is being executed), the content of the running hit game is being executed. Based on the above, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the hit game currently being executed is a big hit game or a small hit game. Further, as described above, as the first round game in the jackpot game, a closing period of 1.5 seconds is set after the execution period (5 seconds) of the roulette effect has elapsed. As a result, the third electric accessory 82a is not released from the time when the effect result of the roulette effect is displayed until the player recognizes the effect result, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 213, the type of the winning game being executed is notified to the player by the roulette effect. However, in addition to the roulette effect, the hit during execution is performed. It may be configured to execute a roulette effect (gasel roulette effect) that notifies the player of a hit type different from the type of the game. In this case, even though the big hit game is actually executed. , It is preferable to display the effect result indicating the small hit game as the effect result of the gasher roulette effect. As a result, it is possible to provide a player with an unexpected effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 263, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S2703, if it is determined that the command received this time is not a hit start command (S2703: No), then it is determined whether the command received this time is a round number command (S2706), and the number of rounds is determined. If it is determined to be a command (S2706: Yes), a display round number command is set based on the number of rounds indicated by the round number information included in the received round number command (S2707), and this process is terminated.

In the process of S2706, when it is determined that the command received this time is not a round number command (S2706: No), it is determined whether the command received this time is an ending command (S2708), and it is determined that it is an ending command. In the case (S2708: Yes), the display ending command is set (S2709), and this process is terminated. Also. If it is determined that the ending command has not been received in the process of S2708 (S2708: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, in the hit-related processing (see S2701 in FIG. 263), when it is determined that the hit-related command received this time is a command related to jackpots A, B, D, and E (S2701: No in FIG. 263), the command is executed. The contents of the right attacker jackpot-related process (S2702) will be described with reference to FIG. 264. FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing the contents of the right attacker jackpot related process (S2702).

In this control example, when the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 provided in the special winning device 550 in the right side area of the game board 13 is opened is executed, the pseudo jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165 is executed. (See FIG. 219). Then, in the right attacker jackpot related process (S2702), the process necessary for making the effect content of the pseudo jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165 correspond to the jackpot game (right hit game) actually executed is executed.

When the right attacker jackpot related process (S2702) is executed, first, it is determined whether the command received this time is a jackpot start command (S2801), and if it is determined to be a jackpot start command (S2801: Yes). , Set the display jackpot start command (S2802), and end this process.

In the process of S2801, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S2801: No), then it is determined whether the command received this time is a round number command (S2803), and it is a round number command. (S2803: Yes), a display round number command is set based on the number of rounds (S2804), an opening operation for releasing the pseudo attacker 165 is set (S2805), and this process is terminated. .. When the open operation is set in the process of S2805, the solenoid (shown) for operating the pseudo attacker 165 in the operation control process (see S2112) executed in the main process (see FIG. 257) of the voice lamp control device 113. Is set to ON, and the pseudo-attacker 165 is variably operated from a closed state in which it is difficult to enter the ball to an open state in which the ball is easy to enter.

In this way, the actual jackpot is configured so that the pseudo-attacker 165 opening operation is executed at the timing when the round number command for indicating that a new round game is started is received from the main control device 110. Since the game content and the pseudo jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165 can be made similar, the pseudo jackpot effect can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

In the process of S2803, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S2803: No), then it is determined whether the closing command has been received (S2806), and if it is determined that the closing command has been received, it is determined. (S2806: Yes), the closing operation of the pseudo attacker 165 is set (S2807), the information stored in the pseudo winning order storage area 223s is cleared (S2808), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2806, when it is determined that the closing command has not been received (S2806: No), it is determined whether the ending command has been received (S2809), and when it is determined that the ending command has been received (S2809). : Yes), set the display ending command (S2810), and end this process. Further, in the process of S2809, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S2809: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning-related command has been received (S2811).

Here, the prize-related commands are various commands output when the ball wins in the winning opening where the ball can win (win) when the player plays a right-handed game during the jackpot game. Specifically, a specific winning command for indicating that the ball has won in the specific winning opening 65a, a specific general winning command for indicating that the ball has won in the specific general winning opening 163, and a specific out opening 166. Indicates a specific out entry command to indicate that the ball has entered.

In this control example, there is a winning (winning) of the ball in both the winning opening where the winning ball is given based on the ball entering and the entry opening (out opening) where the winning ball is not given. The main control device 110 is configured to execute the determination, but the determination is not limited to this, and for example, a means for determining that a ball has entered the specific out port 166 is provided on the voice lamp control device 113 side. Is also good.

That is, in the case of a winning opening in which a prize ball must be awarded when the ball wins (wins), the main control device 110 wins the ball in order to execute a process for granting the prize ball. Since it has a configuration for discriminating, the configuration can be diverted. On the other hand, since there is no particular process that the main control device 110 must perform when a ball enters the specific out port 166, the configuration for determining that the ball has entered the specific out port 166 is a voice lamp control device. It may be provided on the 113 side. With such a configuration, the load of the control process of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

If it is determined that the winning-related command has been received in the processing of S2811 (S2811: Yes), the pseudo-attacker effect processing is executed (S2812), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2811, if it is determined that the winning-related command has not been received (S2811: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the contents of the pseudo-attacker effect processing (S2812) will be described with reference to FIG. 265. FIG. 265 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pseudo-attacker effect processing (S2812). In this pseudo-attacker effect processing (S2812), a process for setting various effects executed during the pseudo-big hit effect for opening the pseudo-attacker 165 is performed.

When the pseudo-attacker effect processing (S2812) is executed, first, the command received this time is a specific winning command, that is, a ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 208) of the variable winning device 65. It is determined whether or not the command indicating the above is received (S2901). Then, when it is determined that the specific winning command has been received (S2901: Yes), a pseudo winning effect is set after 0.5 seconds (S2902).

When the pseudo winning effect is set in this process, the winning sound is output from the voice output device 226 based on the setting information, and the ball to the specific winning opening 65a is output on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The acquisition information 831 for indicating the number of prize balls given based on the winning is displayed. In addition, the variable winning device 65 is made to perform an effect for indicating that the ball has won a prize for various effect devices provided in the pachinko machine 10.

After the processing of S2902 is completed, the timing at which the pseudo-winning effect set this time is executed is stored in the pseudo-winning order storage area 223s (S2903). Here, to explain the processing of S2903 in detail, in the pseudo-winning order storage area 223s, the timing at which the pseudo-winning effect is executed, that is, the timing at which the ball wins (reaches) the pseudo-attacker 165 is arranged in chronological order. It is a storage area for storing. The pseudo-winning order storage area 223s is provided with an area capable of storing 20 timing information corresponding to the order in which the pseudo-winning effect is executed, and the timing at which the pseudo-winning effect is executed is set. Timing information is stored in each area in the execution order of the pseudo-winning effect (pseudo-winning order) for each.

In this control example, since the distance (ball flow distance) from each winning opening (ball entry opening) provided in the special winning device 550 to the pseudo attacker 165 is different, each winning opening (ball entry opening) is configured. The order in which the ball wins at the entry slot) may differ from the order in which the ball reaches (wins) the pseudo-attacker 165. For example, 0.2 seconds from the time when the ball wins in the specific general winning opening 163. If the ball wins in the specific winning opening 65a later, the winning ball in the specific winning opening 65a that won later reaches the pseudo-attacker 165 first.

Therefore, the pseudo winning order storage area 223s stores the information stored in each area so that the timing information set later can be stored so as to interrupt the order of the plurality of timing information already stored. It is configured so that it can be easily shifted. Further, the upper limit of the timing information (30 pieces) stored in the pseudo winning order storage area 223s is configured to be larger than the winning number (10 pieces) which is a closing condition of the round game executed during the jackpot game. However, the timing information (normal timing information) stored in the number of winnings (10) that is the closing condition of the round game and the timing stored outside the number of winnings (10) that is the closing condition of the round game. It is configured to distinguish it from information (over timing information).

As a result, in addition to the timing information set corresponding to the ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game, the ball that has won (winning) the specific general winning opening 163 or the specific out opening 166. The correspondingly set timing information can also be reliably stored.

After finishing the processing of S2903, next, based on the information stored in the pseudo-winning order storage area 223s, the timing information in which the winning order of winning the pseudo-attacker 165 is stored in the area after 10 is stored, that is, over. An over pseudo-winning effect is set for the timing information (S2904), and this process ends.

As the over-pseudo-winning effect set in the process of S2904, for example, the voice mode of the winning sound output from the voice output device 226 is changed, or the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is over-winned. The effect of displaying the display mode indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is displayed, or the effect of performing an effect for indicating that the over-winning has been given to various effect devices provided in the pachinko machine 10 is applicable.

In the process of S2901, if it is determined that the command received this time is not a specific winning command (S2901: No), then it is determined whether the received command is a specific general winning command (S2905), and the specific general winning is given. If it is determined to be a command (S2905: Yes), a pseudo winning effect is set after 1.5 seconds (S2906), the above-mentioned processes of S2903 and S2904 are executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2905, when it is determined that the received command is not a specific general winning command (S2905: No), then it is determined whether the received command is a specific out-ball entry command (S2907), and the specification is made. If it is determined that the command is an out-ball entry command (S2907: Yes), a pseudo-winning effect is set after 1 second (S2908), the above-mentioned processes of S2903 and S2904 are executed, and this process is terminated. If it is determined in the process of S2907 that the specific out-ball entry command has not been received (S2907: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In this control example, the prize ball is given when the ball is won in the specific winning opening 65a and when the ball is won in the specific general winning opening 163, and the specific out opening is provided. When a ball wins in 166, the prize ball is not given. Therefore, in the pseudo-winning effect (S2902 and S2906 in FIG. 265) set based on the winning of the balls in the specific winning opening 65a and the specific general winning opening 163, the acquisition information 831 for indicating the number of winning balls is provided. In the pseudo winning effect (S2908 in FIG. 265) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and set based on the ball entering the specific out port 166, the acquisition information 831 for indicating the number of winning balls is the first. 3 It is configured so that it is not displayed on the symbol display device 81.

With this configuration, the display mode of the acquired information 831 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the pseudo jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165, and the number of prize balls actually paid out to the player. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a large error. Further, since many balls win the pseudo-attacker 165 during the pseudo-big hit effect, the game does not need to execute the process of updating the display mode of the acquired information 831 for each ball that wins the pseudo-attacker 165. The display mode of the acquired information 831 can be updated without giving a sense of discomfort to the person.

Further, in this control example, when updating the display mode of the acquired information 831, the minimum unit (for example, if it is a numerical value) until the value displayed in the acquired information 831 reaches the value corresponding to the set display mode. It is configured to be updated every "1"). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which ball the winning information is displayed based on, so that it is possible to provide the player with a less discomforting effect. ..

As described above, in this control example, as a pseudo jackpot effect, the display mode of the acquisition information 831 is updated based on the fact that the ball wins in the winning opening where the prize ball is generated, but the present invention is limited to this. Without, for example, a storage means for storing the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game, and acquisition information displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of prize balls stored in the storage means. An update means for executing the update process of 831, a discriminating means for determining the number of prize balls (the number of unreported prize balls) for which the process by the update means has not been executed, among the number of prize balls stored in the storage means. If the number of unreported prize balls is a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) or more, the update process may be periodically executed by the update means.

Further, the pseudo-attacker 165 is provided with a detecting means for detecting that a ball has won a prize, and when the detecting means detects the ball, the updating means is executed based on the number of prize balls stored in the above-mentioned storage means. It may be configured to execute the update process based on the detection that a ball has won a prize in each winning opening included in the special winning device 550.

Next, the contents of the stop processing (S2213) will be described with reference to FIG. 266. FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop process (S2213). In this stop process (S2213), a process for setting the display mode of the third symbol to be stopped and displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is executed according to the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol.

When this stop process (S2213) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special symbol variation (executed special symbol variation) corresponding to the current stop command is a special symbol per-special variation (big hit variation, small hit variation). Then (S2951), if it is determined that there is no fluctuation per special figure (S2951: No), then it is determined whether the normal map effecting flag 223v is set to ON (S2952), and the normal map effecting flag is set. If it is determined that 223v is set to ON (S2952: Yes), then it is determined whether the continuation flag 223x is set to ON (S2953).

That is, in the above-mentioned processes of S2951 to S2953, a process for determining whether or not the normal drawing effect is executed across the special figure stop timing of this time is executed. In the process of S2953, when it is determined that the continuation flag 223x is set to ON (S2953: Yes), that is, when the normal drawing effect is continuously executed even after the special figure fluctuation is stopped, the reduced third symbol (S2954), the stop display of the corresponding third symbol is set (S2955), and the process proceeds to S2957.

In this way, by configuring the reduced third symbol to be displayed when the normal symbol effect is continuously executed even after the special symbol fluctuation is stopped, it is difficult for the player to understand the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol. Therefore, the charge effect being executed for the player (see FIG. 212) is executed based on the special symbol lottery, or is executed based on the normal symbol lottery. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to discriminate whether it is, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S2951 when it is determined that the variation is per special figure (S2951: Yes), or in the process of S2952, the normal map effecting flag 223v is not set on (set to off). ) (S2952: No), since the charge effect was not executed during the execution of the special symbol change, the process proceeds to the process of S2955 without setting the reduced third symbol.

Further, when it is determined that the continuation flag 223x is not set to ON in the processing of S2953 (S2953: No), that is, when the normal symbol effect is completed during the current special symbol change, the normal third symbol is displayed. Since the stop display may be sufficient, the flag 223v during the normal drawing effect is set to off (S2956), and the process proceeds to S2955.

In the process of S2957, it is determined whether the special symbol change this time is a change subject to the hold effect (see FIG. 210 (a)) or the treasure box effect (see FIG. 210 (b)). Here, the determination is executed based on the information stored in the hold effect information storage area 223m. Then, when it is determined that the target variation is (S2957: Yes), the hold effect in progress flag 223q and the treasure box effect in progress flag 223r are set to off (S2958), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2957 that the change is not the target variation (S2957: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 267, the variation display setting process (S2115) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 267 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S2115). This variation display setting process (S2115) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 257) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the variation display setting process (S2115: FIG. 267), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S3001). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S3001: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so that the fluctuation pattern command is not received from S3006. Move to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S3001: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S3002), and the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the display variation pattern command is set. Obtained from RAM 223 (S3003).

Next, the variation effect setting process is executed (S3004), a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. (S3005). The content of the variation effect setting process executed in the process of S3004 will be described later with reference to FIG. 268.

By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, although not shown, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted. In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223f is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S3006.

In the process of S3006, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is on (S3006). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S3006: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S3006: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S3007), and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is set. Obtained from RAM 223 (S3008). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S3009), and the process proceeds to S3010.

In the process of S3010, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3010). .. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled. After the processing of Z2509 is executed, this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 268, the contents of the variation effect setting process (S3004), which is one process in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 267) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. .. FIG. 268 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation effect setting process (S3004). In this variation effect setting process (S3004), a process for setting a detailed effect mode (notice content) of the variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is executed.

When the variation effect setting process (S3004) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a probable change state (S3101). Here, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a probable change state based on the information set in the state setting area 223g. If it is determined in the process of S3101 that the current state is the probable change state (S3101: Yes), the display pattern command during the probable change is set based on the extracted fluctuation pattern (S3102), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3101 that the current state is not in the probable change state (S3101: No), then it is determined whether the flag 223v during the normal drawing effect is set to ON (S3103), and the flag is set to ON. When it is determined that the pattern is correct, that is, the normal symbol effect (charge effect based on the result of the normal symbol lottery) is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the previous special symbol change, and the normal symbol effect straddles the current special symbol change. If it is executed later (S3103: Yes), the charge effect setting process is executed (S3104), and this process is terminated.

The detailed contents of this charge effect setting process (S3104) will be described later with reference to FIG. 270, but based on the remaining period of the normal map effect and the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the special symbol variation this time. The effect mode of the continuously executed charge effect and the variable effect after the end of the charge effect is set.

On the other hand, in the process of S3103, when it is determined that the normal figure effecting flag 223v is not set to ON (S3103: No), it is determined whether or not the variation pattern acquired this time has an operation effect (S3105), and the operation is performed. If it is determined that there is an effect (S3105: Yes), the operation effect setting process is executed (S3106), and this process is terminated. The detailed contents of the operation effect setting process (S3106) will be described later with reference to FIG. 269.

In the process of S3105, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern acquired this time does not include the operation effect (S3105: No), then the charge effect (charge effect executed based on the special symbol lottery) is included. (S3107), if it is determined that the charge effect is included (S3107: Yes), the charge effect in progress flag 223y is set to ON (S3108), and this process is terminated. Here, by setting the charge effect in progress flag 223y to ON, it becomes possible to determine that it is the timing at which the normal figure effect can be executed.

Then, in the process of S3107, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern acquired this time does not include the charge effect (S3107: No), the hold mode selection process is executed (S3109), and the treasure box mode selection process is executed (S3109). S3110), this process is terminated. In the hold mode selection process (S3109), the same process as the hold mode selection process (S2405) described above is executed, and in the treasure box mode selection process (S3110), the same process as the treasure box mode selection process (S2406) described above is performed. Will be executed, so the detailed explanation will be omitted.

As described above, in this control example, the look-ahead effect (hold) is performed at the timing when the winning command of the special symbol is received and the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol is started, that is, the timing when the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the special symbol is changed. It is configured to perform production (directing, treasure chest directing).

Next, with reference to FIG. 269, the contents of the operation effect setting process (S3106) executed in the variation effect setting process (see S3004 in FIG. 268) will be described. FIG. 269 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation effect setting process (S3106). In this operation effect setting process (S3106), the preparation process according to the operation effect type included in the current variation pattern is executed.

When the operation effect setting process (S3106) is executed, first, it is determined whether the operation effect this time is the first operation effect (see FIG. 214) (S3201), and it is determined that the operation effect is the first operation effect (S3201). S3201: Yes) sets the operation command corresponding to the first operation effect (S3202), stores the first operation effect type in the operation effect type storage area (S3203), and sets the operation effect flag to ON (S3204). ), End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S3201, when it is determined that it is not the first operation effect (S3201: No), it is determined whether it is the second operation effect (S3205), and when it is determined that it is the second operation effect (S3201: No). S3205: Yes), an effect command corresponding to the second operation effect is set (S3206), the second operation effect means is stored in the operation effect type storage area (S3207), and the process proceeds to S3204. If it is determined in the process of S3205 that it is not the second operation effect (S3205: No), another effect command corresponding to the operation effect is set (S3208), the above-mentioned process of S3204 is executed, and this process is performed. To finish.

In this control example, the first operation effect is configured to be set more frequently than the second operation effect. Then, it is configured to discriminate in descending order of frequency of setting. With such a configuration, the processing speed can be increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 270, the contents of the charge effect setting process (S3104) executed in the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 268) will be described. FIG. 270 is a flowchart showing the contents of the charge effect setting process (S3104). When the charge effect setting process (S3104) is executed, first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol is a hit (big hit, small hit) (S3221), and if it is determined to be a hit (S3221). : No), the normal drawing effect enable flag 223t is set to off (S3222), and this processing is terminated.

With this configuration, the charge effect (normal pattern effect) that indicates that the lottery result of the normal symbol is a hit (normal pattern hit) can be more advantageous to the player than the normal symbol lottery. It will be set with a lower priority than the variable effect to show the result. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution of the effect that the player is most interested in (for example, the effect for indicating that the jackpot has been won) from being hindered by other effects.

If it is determined in the processing of S3221 that the lottery result is not a hit (missing) (S3221: No), the special map fluctuation time extracted from the current special map fluctuation pattern and the remaining period of the normal map fluctuation at the present time are used. (S3223), and based on the determination result of S3223, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal map is longer (S3224). If it is determined that the normal map fluctuation time is shorter in the processing of S3224, that is, the normal map fluctuation that is the target of the normal map effect ends during the current special map fluctuation period (S3224: No), then, It is determined whether the difference is 3 seconds or more (S3225), and if it is determined that the difference is 3 seconds or more (S3225: Yes), the charge symbol (specific symbol) Z4 is temporarily stopped according to the end timing of the normal symbol variation. The pattern (variable effect) is determined (S3226).

Then, the fluctuation pattern using the remaining period after the specific symbol Z4 is temporarily stopped is determined (S3227), the normal figure effecting flag 223v is set to ON (S3228), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S3225, when it is determined that there is no difference between the stop timing of the normal symbol and the stop timing of the special symbol for 3 seconds or more (S3225: No), from the normal symbol fluctuation end timing to the special symbol fluctuation end timing. A fluctuation pattern for temporarily stopping the charge symbol (specific symbol) Z4 is determined, and the process proceeds to S3228.

That is, in this control example, when setting a variation effect corresponding to a new special symbol variation, it is determined whether or not an effect (normal symbol effect) for showing the lottery result of the normal symbol variation being executed is executed. , When the normal map effect is continuously executed, the variable effect corresponding to the normal map effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to easily set a variation effect (general map effect) corresponding to the normal map variation executed across a plurality of special symbol variations.

In addition, the display mode of the identification information (charge symbol) for showing the lottery result of the normal drawing effect and the identification information (charge symbol) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol are the same (including some errors). Since it is configured to be an embodiment, and further, it is configured to execute the normal figure effect by using a part of the variable effect of the special symbol (for example, the charge effect), so that the effect result (charge) of the charge effect is performed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the symbol display) displays the lottery result of the special symbol or the lottery result of the normal symbol.

Further, in this control example, if the time from the fluctuation stop timing of the normal symbol to the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol is longer than the predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), the special symbol lottery this time is performed after the normal symbol production is completed. It is configured to execute a variation effect for special figures to show the result. As a result, the player can be surely notified of the lottery result.

On the other hand, in this control example, if the time from the fluctuation stop timing of the normal symbol to the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol is shorter than the predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), it is assumed that the variation effect for the special symbol is executed for a short period of time. However, since the variation effect that is difficult to understand is only executed, the symbol showing the lottery result of the normal symbol is configured to be stopped for a long time (temporary stop display) without executing the variation effect for special figures. There is. Returning to the process of FIG. 270, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S3224 that the fluctuation time of the normal figure is shorter, a fluctuation pattern for continuing the charge effect is determined, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 271, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107), which is one of the main processing (see FIG. 257) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 271 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107). In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107), the pressing operation of the frame button 22 is determined, and the execution of the advance notice effect or the like is set based on the pressing operation.

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107: see FIG. 271), first, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been operated (S3301), and when it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been operated (S3301: No). , Ends this process as it is. When it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S3301: Yes), it is determined whether or not the operation is currently in the valid period (S3302). In the process of S3302, when the type of the operation effect is set in the operation effect setting process (S3106 of FIG. 269), the operation valid period corresponding to the type is set in the operation valid timer 223n, and the operation valid timer 223n is set. Determines if the value of indicates the operation validity period.

In the process of S3302, if it is determined that the operation is in the valid period (S3302: Yes), then it is determined whether the pressed flag 223k is set to ON (S3303), and the pressed flag 223k is set to ON. If it is determined that it is not set (S3303: No), it is determined whether the operation effect in-progress flag 223h is on (S3304), and if it is determined that the operation effect in progress flag 223h is set to on (S3304). : Yes), the pressed flag 223k is set to on, and this process ends.

That is, in this control example, when the first operation effect and the second operation effect are set among the operation effects, the frame button 22 has been pressed (pressed) during the operation valid period. The flag 223k is set to ON, and the effect mode is set according to the progress of the first operation effect and the second operation effect according to the setting status of the pressed flag 223k. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect based on the operation immediately after operating the frame button 22, or to execute an effect based on the operation after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after operating the frame button 22, so that there are variations in the operation effect. Can be increased.

On the other hand, in the process of S3304, when it is determined that the operation effect in-progress flag 223h is not set to ON (S3304: No), the operation mode corresponding to the set operation validity period is determined (S3306) and determined. A display command corresponding to the operation mode is set (S3307), and this process is terminated. Further, in the process of S3302, when it is determined that the operation is not in the valid period (S3302: No), or when it is determined in the process of S3303 that the pressed flag 223k is on (S3303: Yes), This process ends as it is.

In this control example, an example is shown in which a variable condition for changing the effect mode of the operation effect is satisfied based on the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 once, but the present invention is not limited to this. The variable condition may be satisfied when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) within the operation valid period, or an operation means having a plurality of operation methods may be provided. It may be configured so that the variable condition is satisfied when the operation means is operated by a specific operation method.

Further, in this control example, it is shown that the operation means has been operated by setting one flag (pressed flag 223k) to ON, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, depending on the operation method for the operation means. , It may be configured to show different operation results, and the effect mode of the operation effect may be changed according to the type of the operation result.

Further, in this control example, a display effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is described as an example of an operation effect in which the effect mode is changed based on the operation of the operation means. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect of moving the decorative movable device provided in the pachinko machine 10 may be executed based on the operation of the frame button 22 (operating means).

In this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated when the first operation effect or the operation effect other than the second operation effect is executed, the operation mode corresponding to the set operation valid period is determined. Although it is configured as such (see S3306 in FIG. 271), other configurations may be used.

Specifically, an operation valid period in which the operation of the frame button 22 (operation means) can be effectively determined is set within the effect period of the display effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, and the set operation is performed. The value of the operation valid timer 223n is set in order to determine the valid period. Then, a storage means for storing the length of the set operation valid period and a calculation means for calculating the remaining period of the operation valid period based on the value of the operation valid timer 223n at the time when the operation means is operated are provided. Further, it is preferable to provide an operation mode selection table in which different operation modes are defined according to the length of the remaining period calculated by the calculation means.

With this configuration, different operation modes are selected according to the timing at which the player operates the operating means (according to the remaining time at the time when the operating means is operated), so that the player can be given a variety of effects. Can be provided.

In addition, an operation valid period setting means that can determine one operation valid period from a plurality of operation valid periods and can be set within the effect period of the display effect, and an operation valid timer 223n at the time when the operation means is operated. A calculation means for calculating the progress rate (%) of the operation valid period may be provided based on the value of. With this configuration, different operation validity periods can be set for the display effects of the same display mode, and further, based on the length of the set operation validity period and the timing at which the operation means is operated. The calculated progress rate of the operation valid period, that is, the length of the entire operation valid period is set to 100, and the ratio of the period that has already passed (or the period that has not passed) is calculated according to the value (%) calculated as a percentage. The mode of operation to be performed can be different.

As a result, even if the operation means are operated at the same timing based on the display effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, different operation modes can be set, so that the player can provide various effects. be able to.

Further, instead of setting the operation mode according to the length of the remaining period (elapsed period) of the operation valid period, the operation mode is set by setting the operation mode according to the value of the percentage calculated by the calculation means. The range specified in the data table for selection can be limited to "1-100". That is, when the operation mode is set according to the length of the remaining period (elapsed period) of the operation valid period, for example, when the length of the operation valid period is configured to be 2 to 15 seconds, 6 seconds. When the operating means is operated at the 3rd second when is set (remaining time 3 seconds), and when the operating means is operated at the 7th second when 14 seconds is set (remaining time 7 seconds). Since the remaining time is different between and, different operation modes are set.

Further, in the above-mentioned examples, since the operation means are operated at the intermediate point of the operation valid period and the operation difficulty is the same in each case, the operation is performed when the same operation mode is to be set. It is necessary to specify the data table so that the operation mode is selected based not only on the remaining time of the valid period but also on the length of the set operation valid period and the remaining time of the operation valid period at the time when the operation means is operated. There is.

In this case, if the length of the operation validity period is variably set to a plurality of lengths, the capacity of the above-mentioned data table will be significantly increased, and the data capacity will be squeezed. .. On the other hand, as described above, by configuring the operation mode to be selected using the percentage value, the same value can be used regardless of the length of the operation validity period, so that the operation mode is selected. It is possible to reduce the data capacity of the data table for this purpose.

In addition, as a classification means for dividing the percentage value calculated by the calculation means into a plurality of ranges, for example, a first classification means for dividing into "1% to 50%" and "51% to 99%", and a first classification means. "1% -10%", "11% -20%", "21% -30%", "41% -50%", "51% -60%", "61% -70%" and "71" A second classification means for classifying into "% -80%", "81% -90%", and "91% -99%" is provided, and further, based on the presence or absence of certain conditions such as the lottery result of a special symbol. The percentage value calculated by the calculation means is divided by the division means determined by the determination means, and the operation mode is selected based on the divided information. It may be configured to do so.

Further, in the case of using a configuration in which the operation mode to be executed thereafter is changed according to the operation timing of the operation means, for example, the pachinko machine is used as an operation effect executed by operating the operation means. It is preferable to use the effect of moving the movable accessory for effect provided in 10. Thereby, the operation effect can be executed without worrying about the period of the operation effect executed based on the set operation mode and the display effect period displayed on the display means.

Next, the contents of the liquid crystal display effect execution management process (S2110) will be described with reference to FIG. 272. FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing the contents of the liquid crystal display effect execution management process (S2110). In the liquid crystal display execution management process (S2110), a process of updating the effect mode of the special figure variation effect being executed by the third symbol display device 81 based on a predetermined variation pattern and an effect mode of the special figure variation effect are performed. A process for replacing with an effect based on a normal symbol lottery (ordinary pattern effect) is executed.

When the liquid crystal display effect execution management process (S2110) is executed, first, it is determined whether the charge effect in-progress flag 223y is set to ON (S3401), and if it is determined to be set to ON (S3401: Yes). ), It is determined whether the currently executing special figure fluctuation is a hit fluctuation (S3402). In the process of S3402, if it is determined that the hit is not in motion (S3402: No), then it is determined whether the normal figure effectable flag 223t is set to ON (S3403), and the flag is set to ON. If it is determined that (S3403: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is within the effect replaceable period (S3404).

In this control example, only the period during which the special symbol fluctuation is fluctuating at high speed (the period during which none of the third symbols Z1 to Z3 is stopped and displayed) and the third symbol Z1 which is first stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed. Only during this period, the effect mode of the variable effect set based on the lottery result of the special symbol can be replaced with the effect mode based on the result of the normal symbol lottery. With this configuration, the variation effect of the special symbol progresses, and after the player is in a state where the lottery result of the special symbol can be predicted (for example, a reach state), the effect mode of the variation effect is replaced. It is possible to prevent the player from performing an effect that is difficult for the player to understand.

In the process of S3404, if it is determined that the effect is within the replaceable period (S3404: Yes), the normal figure effectable flag 223t is set to off (S3405), and the normal figure effecting flag 223v is set to on. (S3406), a replacement display command is set (S3407), another liquid crystal display effect execution management process is executed (S3408), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3401 when it is determined that the charge effect in progress flag 223y is not set to ON (S3401: No), in the process of S3402, when it is determined that the hit is changing (S3402: Yes), S3403 In the process of S3404, when it is determined that the normal figure effectable flag 223t is not set to ON (S3403: No), and in the process of S3404, it is determined that the effect is not within the effect replaceable period (S3404: No). Since it is in a state where it is not possible to execute the normal drawing effect, the process proceeds to S3408 as it is.

Next, the contents of the operation effect management process (S2111) will be described with reference to FIG. 273. FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation effect management process (S2111). In this operation effect management process (S2111), a process for setting an effect mode based on the operation of the frame button 22 is executed during the period during which the operation effect is being executed.

When the operation effect management process (S2111) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the operation effect in-progress flag 223h is set to ON (S3501). Then, when it is determined that the operation effect in progress flag 223h is not set to ON, that is, it is determined that the operation effect is not currently in progress (S3501: No), the present process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the operation effect in-progress flag 223h is set to ON (S3501: Yes), then the first operation effect is executed based on the information stored in the operation effect type storage area 223i. It is determined whether or not (S3502), when it is determined that the first operation effect is in progress (S3502), and then it is determined whether or not the pressed flag 223k is set to ON (S3503).

If it is determined in the process of S3503 that the pressed flag 223k is set to on (S3503: Yes), the corresponding button effect is set (S3504), and the pressed flag 223k is set to off (S3505). The process related to the first operation effect is completed, and the process proceeds to the process of S3509. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3503 that the pressed flag 223k is not set to ON (S3503: No), next, a display mode indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period set in each operation effect. Is the timing that matches (in this control example, the timing when the remaining period of the operation-enabled transition period is 1 second) is determined (S3506).

Here, when it is determined that the timing is the same (S3506: Yes), the fusion effect display mode for changing the button display that has not been operated at the present time to the fusion button display is set. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3506 that the timing does not match, the process proceeds to the process of S3509 as it is. As a result, when a predetermined condition is satisfied for a plurality of operation effects without operating the frame button 22 in the state where the first operation effect is being executed, the fusion operation effect in which the plurality of operation effects are fused is executed. Will be. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Next, in the process of S3509, it is determined whether it is the second operation effect (see FIG. 216). Then, when it is determined that the second operation effect is in progress (S3509: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is in the first operation period (button operation immediate response period) (S3510). As described above with reference to FIG. 216, in the second operation effect of this control example, an operation valid period of 10 seconds is set, and the first 8 seconds of the operation result immediately corresponds to the operation of the frame button 22. Is set as the period during which is displayed (button operation immediate response period), and the remaining 2 seconds periodically determine whether or not the frame button 22 has been operated (0.5 second interval, 1 second interval), and the remaining 2 seconds. It is set as a period (button operation periodical response period) in which the effect result is displayed based on the determination result.

In the process of S3510, when it is determined that the first operation period is in progress (S3510: Yes), it is determined whether the pressed flag 223k is on (S3511), and the pressed flag 223k is not set to on. If it is determined (S3511: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3511 that the pressed flag 223k is set to on (S3511: Yes), the corresponding button effect is set (S3512), and the pressed flag 223k is set to off (S3513). ), End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S3510, when it is determined that the current state is not during the first operation period (S3510: No), then it is determined whether the timing is the elapse of the first operation period (S3514). Here, if it is determined that the timing has passed the first operation period (S3516: Yes), the automatic pressing effect mode is set (S3515), and then it is determined whether or not the current operation period is in progress. (S3516). In S3516, when it is determined that the second operation period is in progress (S3516: Yes), it is determined whether the current timing is for determining the operation status of the frame button 22 (whether the predetermined period has elapsed) (S3517). If it is determined that it is not the timing for determination (S3517: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Further, in the process of S3517, if it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed (S3517: Yes), then it is determined whether the pressed flag 223k is set to ON (S3518), and the pressed flag 223k is turned ON. If it is determined that it has been set (S3518: Yes), the corresponding button effect is set (S3519), the pressed flag 223k is set to off (S3520), and the process proceeds to S3522. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3518 that the pressed flag 223k is not set to ON (S3518: No), the automatic pressing effect is set (S3521), and the process proceeds to the process of S3522. In the process of S3522, a display effect command corresponding to each set effect mode is set, and this process ends.

<Control processing in the display control device 114>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 274 to 287, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 274, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 274 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is set in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs initially processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM has a high speed. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 275. FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to the predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 274) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 274) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, in the display control device 114. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 275, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S6102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. It may execute the process set in 231a. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. And S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. 1 It may be stored in the program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231, which is possible after the boot process, earlier.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 274. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct to execute the display process. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the last address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of this register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6003, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 285 (a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7602 in FIG. 285 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, during that time, a simple command determination process is performed so that the power-on image (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276 (b)). (See S6308 in FIG. 276 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 276 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying the image on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. By using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, the player entered the first starting port 64 (starting prize), and the main control device 110 issued a voice lamp control device to instruct the start of the variation effect. When the variation pattern command for display is received, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image at power-on, which is not shown, can be immediately displayed during the variation effect period to perform a simple variation effect. can. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery is possible. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S6005, the interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 276 (a). FIG. 276 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 276 (b). FIG. 276 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 237) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, since the image controller 237 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started during the drawing of the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V-interruption process, as shown in FIG. 276 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. The command determination process (S6302) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then the display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. If the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start the variation effect, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 277 to 282.

In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 283 to 284.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous warning command (not shown) is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the production and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 285 and 286.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), which are determined by the task process (S6304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 237 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 287.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type (big hit A, big hit B1, big hit B2, big hit C) indicated by the display stop type command is displayed. It is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed to process S6304. Move to.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 277 to 282, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process (FIG. 277, S6302), as shown in FIG. 277, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command, there is no unprocessed new command. (S6401: No), the command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command. For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S6403).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S6405), the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 278 (a). FIG. 278 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly for display. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S6501 is turned on, and other fluctuations are performed. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S6503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S6503, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6504), and the pointer. Initialize 233f to 0 (S6505). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S6506), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S6502e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6504, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 277. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 278 (b). FIG. 278 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B1, big hit B2, big hit C) indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S6601), and the stop type table and the stop type table are determined. , The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276 (b)) is executed. Finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set to off (S6603). After that, the process returns to the process of S6401 in FIG. 277.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop symbol is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Returning to FIG. 277, the explanation will be continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display notice display command among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If it is determined that the display notice display command has been received (S6408: Yes), the notice effect display process is executed (S6409). The details of the advance notice effect display processing (S6409) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 279 (a), but the degree of expectation for the jackpot to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the variable display of the special symbol. And the setting of the notice display mode for notifying the player of the fact that it is a big hit is executed.

Here, the advance notice effect display process (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 279 (a). FIG. 279 (a) is a flowchart showing this notice effect display process (S6409).

In the notice effect display process (FIG. 279 (a), S6409), first, the display data table corresponding to the received display notice display command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S6701). Determine the transfer data table corresponding to the set advance notice display data table to be displayed at the display timing based on the display timing of the notice display indicated by the received notice display command, and set it in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (S6702).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S6703), and the time data representing the fluctuation time is measured based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d. The counter is set to 233h (S6704), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6705).

In this way, the notice display is set based on the display notice display command output from the voice lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the instructed timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even if the same variation pattern is used, it can be shown to the player as if the display modes are different.

In the present embodiment, the content of the notice display and the display timing are selected by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is configured to execute the selection of the notice display. You may.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table for advance notice is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table that has already been set may be set to be overwritten by setting the advance notice display. good.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 277. If it is determined in the process of S6408 that there is no display notice display command (S6408: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display variable replacement command among the unprocessed commands (S6410). If it is determined that there is a variable replacement command for display (S6410: Yes), the variable replacement display process is executed (S6411). The variable replacement display process (S6411) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 279 (b).

Here, the variable replacement display process (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 279 (b). FIG. 279 (b) is a flowchart showing this variable replacement display process (S6411).

In the variable replacement display process (FIG. 279 (b), S6411), first, the display data table corresponding to the received variable replacement command for display is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S6801). Determine the transfer data table corresponding to the set variable replacement display data table for displaying at the display timing based on the display timing of the variable replacement display indicated by the received variable replacement command, and transfer the data table. It is set to the buffer 233e (S6802).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S6803), and the time data representing the fluctuation time is measured based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d. The counter is set to 233h (S6804), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6805).

In this way, the fluctuation replacement display is set based on the display fluctuation replacement command output from the voice lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the instructed timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even if the same variation pattern is used, it can be shown to the player as if the display modes are different.

In the present embodiment, the content and display timing of the variable replacement display are selected by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, but the selection is not limited to this, and the variable replacement display is selected by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It may be configured to do so.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table for variable replacement is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the already set display data table is set to overwrite the variable replacement display. It may be configured.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 277. If it is determined in the processing of S6410 that there is no display variation replacement command (S6410: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display operation effect command among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If it is determined that there is a display operation effect command (S6412: Yes), the operation effect display process is executed (S6413). The operation effect display process (S6413) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 280 (a).

Here, the operation effect display process (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 280 (a). FIG. 280 (a) is a flowchart showing this operation effect display process (S6413).

In the operation effect display process (FIG. 280 (a), S6413), first, the display data table corresponding to the received display operation effect command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S6901). The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for the set operation effect to be displayed at the display timing based on the display timing of the operation effect display indicated by the received operation effect command is determined and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Set (S6902).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S6903), and the time data representing the fluctuation time is measured based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d. The counter is set to 233h (S6904), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6905).

In this way, the operation effect display is set based on the display operation effect command output from the voice lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the instructed timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even if the same variation pattern is used, it can be shown to the player as if the display modes are different.

In the present embodiment, the content and display timing of the operation effect display are selected by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, but the selection is not limited to this, and the operation effect display is selected by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It may be configured in.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table for the operation effect is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table that has already been set is configured to be overwritten by setting the operation effect display. You may.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 277. When it is determined that there is no display operation effect command in the processing of S6412 (S6412: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display button fusion command among the unprocessed commands (S6414). If it is determined that there is a display button fusion command (S6414: Yes), the button fusion display process is executed (S6415). The button fusion display process (S6415) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 280 (b).

Here, the button fusion display process (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 280 (b). FIG. 280 (b) is a flowchart showing this button fusion display process (S6415).

In the button fusion display processing (FIG. 280 (b), S6415), first, the display data table corresponding to the received display button fusion command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7001). Button for display received Button fusion command indicates Button fusion display set to display at display timing based on display timing Determine the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for fusion and use it in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Set (S7002).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S7003), and the time data representing the fluctuation time is measured based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d. The counter is set to 233h (S7004), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7005).

In this way, the button fusion display is set based on the display button fusion command output from the voice lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the instructed timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even if the same variation pattern is used, it can be shown to the player as if the display modes are different.

In the present embodiment, the content of the button fusion display and the display timing are selected by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, but the selection is not limited to this, and the selection of the button fusion display is executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It may be configured in.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table for button fusion is configured to be set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table that has already been set is configured to be overwritten by setting the button fusion display. You may.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 277. When it is determined that there is no display button fusion command in the processing of S6414 (S6414: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display pseudo winning command among the unprocessed commands (S6416). If it is determined that there is a display pseudo-winning command (S6416: Yes), the pseudo-winning display process is executed (S6417). The pseudo winning display process (S6417) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 281.

Here, the pseudo-winning display process (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. 281. FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing this pseudo winning display process (S6417).

In the pseudo-winning display process (FIG. 281, S6417), first, the display data table corresponding to the received display pseudo-winning command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7101). The transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table for pseudo-winning to be displayed at the display timing based on the display timing of the pseudo-winning display indicated by the received pseudo-winning command is determined and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Set (S7102).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S7103), and the time data representing the fluctuation time is measured based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d. The counter is set to 233h (S7104), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7105).

In this way, the pseudo-winning display is set based on the display pseudo-winning command output from the voice lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the instructed timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even if the same variation pattern is used, it can be shown to the player as if the display modes are different.

In the present embodiment, the content and display timing of the pseudo winning display are selected by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, but the selection is not limited to this, and the selection of the pseudo winning display is executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It may be configured in.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table for pseudo winning is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table that has already been set is configured to be overwritten by setting the pseudo winning display. You may.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 277. If it is determined that there is no display pseudo-winning command in the processing of S6416 (S6416: No), it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6418), and there is an error command. If (S6418: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. 282. FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7201). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S7202). Ends the process and returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7201, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S7202 is determined and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the error discrimination flag corresponding to all the error types indicated by each error command is set to ON in the process in S7202. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 277. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S6418 (S6418: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6420), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the processing of S6401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), The processing of S6402 to S6420 is executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6420 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276 (b)) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands required to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 35 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop. Extract only the type commands, execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 278 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 278 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and perform other processes. For a command, a process of discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 278 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 283 to 284, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 283, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7301), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7301: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the processes of S7302 to S7304 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S7305. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S7301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S7302), S7303 to S7304 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S7303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S7303). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7303: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S7304).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 284 (a). FIG. 284 (a) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to and all the error discrimination set to ON is performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S7401).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various required parameters.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7401, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 283. After the warning image setting process (S7304) or in the process of S7303, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is turned off (S7303: No), the process proceeds to the process of S7305.

In S7305, the pointer update process is executed (S7305). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 284 (b). FIG. 284 (b) is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7501). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the respective values are sequentially started from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the process of S7501, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S7502). As a result, if it is End information (S7502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S7503), and if it is a demo display data table (S7503: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7505), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demo effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7503, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S7503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S753: No). S7506), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawing contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image specified in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7502, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7502: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 283. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7306). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the drawing content developed in the processing of S7306 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinates are displayed for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7308). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7308: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is 0 or less (S7308: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S7309).

As a result, if the definite display flag is off (S7309: No), the definite display effect has not been performed yet, and it is the timing to perform the definite display effect. Therefore, first, the definite display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S7310), and then the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7311). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the definite display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7313). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7314), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7315), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final symbol display effect of the stopped symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing content can be set as such. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table. Further, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S6304), from the start of the fluctuation until the predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S7315, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7309, if the confirmation display flag is on instead of off (S7309: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S7316). If the demo display flag is off (S7316: No), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S7317) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7318). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7320), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S7321), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

In the process of S7316, if the demo display flag is on (S7316: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276 (b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the stop type command for display for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table specified to stop and display the image (FIG. 35) in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 285 and 286, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 285 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7601: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S7602), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 285 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, off as a result of the processing of S7601 (S7601: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 286.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7602), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 285 (b). FIG. 285 (b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S7701), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S7701: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7702). In the process of S7702, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237 after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. .. When it is determined by the process of S7702 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7702: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7702: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7703. Further, as a result of the processing of S7701, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7701: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7703.

In the process of S7703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7703), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S7703: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7704), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S7703 (S7703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S7705), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 276 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 276 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 277 to 282) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 283 to 284 (b)) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device is set. An image at normal time is displayed in 81. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 286) (see S7601: No in FIG. 285 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 286, a normal image transfer setting process (S7603), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 286 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7305) of the display setting process (S6303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S7801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7802), and if it is transfer data information (S7802: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is stored from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source final address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7803) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7804), and the process proceeds to S7805.

Further, in the process of S7802, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S7802: No), the processes of S7803 and S7804 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S7805. In the process of S7805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7806).

In the process of S7806, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S7806 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7806: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7806: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7807. Further, as a result of the processing of S7805, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S7805: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7807.

In the process of S7807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7807), and if the transfer start flag is on (S7807: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S7808), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7803 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S7809. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7807: No), this process ends.

In the process of S7809, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7809). The discrimination in the processing of S7809 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the stored state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the stored state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is a normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7809 (S7809: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7809 (S7809: No), the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set (S7810). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 includes the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S7810, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7811), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that became the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 287, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 287 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined by the task process (S6304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305) to generate the drawing list shown in FIG. 237 (S7901). That is, in the processing of S7901, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). Then, the specified stored RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task process. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address is read in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. Then, in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the image expanded in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the processing of S7902 (S7903). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when the value is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 276 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

Further, in the above embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are provided separately, but instead, the respective devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as one device.

Further, in the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the voice lamp control device 113. The command to be to be determined is determined, and then the command is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Then, the display control device 114 may be configured to send a command to the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read the image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, in this case, the image data read from the character ROM 234 by the MPU 231 is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether or not the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused. If it is not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 at the transfer destination.

In this case, the image controller 237 is accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, it is in use) to determine whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. A resident video RAM access flag (not shown) and a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing (ie, in use) the normal video RAM 236. ) May be provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the buffer RAM of the transfer destination.

Alternatively, the signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or the signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231 and used resident from the state of the signal. You may check whether the video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts to access the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 or ends the access, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time, so that the MPU 231 can be used. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether or not the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused.

Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the drive state of the image controller 237 or notifies from the image controller 237 whether or not the scan is in the blank period. If the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 is unused. As a result, the image controller 237 confirms only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not it is unused, so that the determination can be easily performed.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 is a transfer data that is not full data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. If the information exists, the process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be started according to the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is specified for a predetermined address, when the image data is transferred according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table and the predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table or the like, the drawing of the sprite is drawn. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, which is necessary for the resident video RAM 235, can always be stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

The process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in the display main process or the loop of the main process executed by the MPU 231. As a result, in the MPU 231, the image data transfer process can be executed by utilizing the time during which important processes such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are not performed in the display control device 114. Further, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed with priority over the display main process, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process, and the MPU 231 is used as image data. Transfer processing can be executed.

In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage each video RAM by using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but is commonly used by the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In the address system, a different address area may be allocated to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. By doing so, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the image controller 237, but simply specifies the address, and the address is used. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or for the normal video RAM 236. That is, when the MPU 231 specifies the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply specified. The structure of the instruction that specifies it can be simplified. For example, the address set in the common address system is simply used as the information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the structure of the drawing list can be simplified.

In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the character ROM 234 is not necessarily limited to this. It may be provided by directly connecting to 237. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specifications of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specifications of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. May be good.

By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the premise that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM is used as it is, and the NAND flash memory 234a is used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the character ROM 234 may be configured to be directly accessible from the MPU 231.

In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the character ROM 234 is configured by a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage means such as a hard disk. May be done. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow read speed, but by adopting the display control device 114 with the configuration described in the above embodiment, the image can be displayed without any problem at the time to be displayed. be able to.

In the above embodiment, the case where the NOR type ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. The first program storage area is provided in a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the first program storage area is provided in that area after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. It may be possible to store a part of the boot program executed in. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the character ROM 234, a first program storage area is provided in the character ROM 234, and after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. It may contain a part of the boot program that is executed first.

Further, in the above embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in that area. However, the case is not limited to this, and the internal bus (bus line 240) is a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a. A first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 may be stored in the area. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in an internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided in the internal bus (bus line 240). You may store a part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is released.

In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then sets the boot program in the buffer RAM 234c. When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and the internal bus (bus line 240) is read. It may be output to MPU231 via 240). In this case, if the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" for the internal bus (bus line 240) after the system reset is released, is the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 already set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since it is in the process of being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (command code) with less delay after the address "0000H" is specified by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the display main process can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can be done.

Further, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified in the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the ROM controller 234b detects that the control program is stored in the first program storage area 234d1. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be read directly from the MPU 231 and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after the address "0000H" is specified, so that the display main process can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can be done. Further, in this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, the power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the internal bus (bus) to which the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected is not necessarily limited. It may be provided by directly connecting to the line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video is configured even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to be able to directly connect the resident video RAM 235. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

In the above embodiment, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more. A video RAM may be provided. Further, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each, and a resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a 1-port type (1 port input / output port) DRAM is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the multi-port is not always limited. A type RAM may be used. As a result, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. Therefore, for example, the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn while being read from the character ROM 234. The process of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one RAM is divided into a resident area and a normal area. It may be divided and the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. When a resident area and a normal area are configured by one RAM, in order to prevent the input / output port of the memory from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the read or write process. , It is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. In this case, at least the image data corresponding to the image to be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident in response to the reception command received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 or other external input. It is preferable to make it resident in the video RAM 235.

In the above embodiment, a case where a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident has been described, but all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. You may. In this case, since the image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 does not exist, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. You may.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is not overwritten and its contents are continuously retained while the power is turned on is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 is not limited to this. Even if the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is overwritten and updated based on a predetermined opportunity, such as when the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is significantly different based on the command received from. good. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period while the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is kept in the resident video RAM 235. You may leave it. Further, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out new image data to be resident, and the read image data is transmitted to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. It may be transferred while it is unused (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read out). Alternatively, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) for image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer command (transfer). Image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information), and transferred to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is unused (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may try to do it.

Further, when updating the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is transferred using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. 3 It may be displayed on the symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234, reads out the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. May be good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 that has received the transfer instruction of the image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234, reads out the newly resident image data, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In the above embodiment, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, the RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal or not is stored when the power failure is resolved, and the power supply is stored. In the display main process or main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after the power-on, the RAM determination value is confirmed before starting the transfer of the main image data at the time of power-on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be normally stored, so that the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. It may be configured to do so. In this case, by turning off the simple image display flag, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be non-executed. As a result, even when a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power failure and the display main process or the execution of the main process is started by the MPU 231, the data of the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. If this is the case, it is possible to prevent the image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to shorten the time required for recovery from a power failure. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a having a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, if the data of the resident video RAM 235 remains normally due to a momentary power failure by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, the normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Further, instead of this RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

In the above embodiment, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided inside the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the buffer RAM 237a may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). Further, when the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the internal bus (bus line 240) with many data signal exchanges. Transfers can be performed efficiently without being affected by.

In the above embodiment, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be appropriately set. For example, in the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the buffer is being scanned during the period (blank period) of scanning on the blank area which is the scanning area other than the display area where the actual image is displayed. The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be such that the transfer of image data can be completed from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 that occurs during this blank period. ..

In the above embodiment, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred from another buffer RAM. It may be configured. Further, another area in which the image data is stored while the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area. The image data may be configured to be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In either case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Since it can be processed, the time required for the processing can be shortened.

In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to transfer the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on. can do. During this period, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so that the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

Similarly, in the above embodiment, the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are input. Although the case of transferring to 235b has been described, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 from the character ROM 234. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so that the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the above is transferred, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. When the power is turned on, the image may be directly transferred to the main image area 235a. Further, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power is turned on using the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236. When the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the main image, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235. The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of image data can be completed faster without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation of the resident video RAM 235. The case of transferring to the image area 235b has been described, but since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred, the power supply is supplied. The image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. May be good. Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the main image at power-on and the power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored. While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the variable image, the resident video RAM 235. When the image data is not read from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of image data can be completed faster without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

In the above embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a rear image change command or a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the rear image change command or the frame button. Although the case of changing the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of the super reach based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, in accordance with the change of the gaming state. A rear image change command or a game state command may be generated. As a result, the display control device 114 can change the rear image and the super reach effect mode according to the game state based on the rear image change command and the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 and change the rear image or the super reach effect mode according to the gaming state. Then, the rear image after the change or the image data corresponding to at least a part of the range of the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the back image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 235c.

Further, the display control device 114 may change the rear image according to the provisions of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the changed rear image is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. You may. Here, when the image data of the rear image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, or the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored is used. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be specified so that a new rear image is stored in the sub area, and what is the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored? The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be specified so that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again, so that the processing of the display control device 114 It is possible to suppress an increase in load.

Further, in the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The case where the display control device 114 immediately displays the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 to be main. A vibration error may be detected by the control device 110, and an error command notifying the error may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to either the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. Then, when an error command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further sends an error command notifying the display control device 114 of the error command. You may.

On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may be configured to detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. When a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and further, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error occurrence flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 283). By executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 284 (a)) when the above is determined, the warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this case, since it is not necessary to send and receive the error command from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the vibration sensor is attached to the back surface of the game plate 13 has been described, but instead of the vibration sensor or together with the vibration sensor, the magnet sensor is attached to the back surface of the game plate 13. May be good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to suppress the intentional entry of the ball into the entry port due to the change in the flow of the ball due to the magnetic field such as a magnet. Therefore, the output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main control device 110, if it is determined by the main control device 110 that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is detected. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113 or directly. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, if it is determined by the voice lamp control device 113 that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field is determined. An error command that conveys an error may be transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Then, in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 81 is resident. When an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error is received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, it is determined that the display control device 114 has applied a magnetic field to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, and the display control device 113 May display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error occurrence flag and setting the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on. As a result, when the display control device 114 receives an error command from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, or grasps the occurrence of a magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the character ROM 234 is displayed. Even when configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error without delay using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is the third symbol. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the third symbol display device 81, so that the player behaves illegally. It can be deterred.

When the drawing contents necessary for changing the color tone of a part or all in one effect are specified by the additional data table or the display data table, the additional data table or the display data table is 1 in the third symbol display device 81. The type of sprite that changes the color tone in the time corresponding to the address expressed in units of the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for the frame is displayed, and the type of sprite after the change in the sprite. It may specify the color information that specifies the color tone. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of sprite that changes the color tone to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. When the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. The drawing list may be created by replacing with the color information specified by the additional drawing contents of the data table. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

Further, when the drawing content required for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect is defined by the display data table, in the display data table, the image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 is used. Corresponds to the address represented by the time when is displayed (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) as one unit, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new sprite type. It may specify the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the MPU 231 sets the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the sprite type to be newly displayed at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d. When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Of these, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the display data table includes the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing contents specified in the display data table has been described. The transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data required for drawing the image according to the additional drawing contents specified in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with the identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the effect that can be additionally displayed. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines the effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. It may be configured in.

As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used for drawing according to the additional drawing contents to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and surely displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information specified in the display data table, it is possible to transfer the necessary image data to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of the image based on the additional drawing contents. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing contents. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the above embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that causes the player to select the super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table, and the player The case of specifying only the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table. You may. Thereby, the drawing content of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. Further, since it is not necessary to specify the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress the increase in the data third of the display data table.

In the above embodiment, the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are included in the display data table has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. However, the additional drawing contents of the effect to be additionally displayed may be specified in the additional data table. In this case, the work RAM 233 may be provided with an additional data table buffer, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. .. Further, even if the additional data table includes not only the additional drawing contents but also the transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data necessary for drawing the image performed according to the additional drawing contents. good. As a result, it is possible to specify the drawing content of the effect to be added and displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image required for the drawing, so that the additional data table and the additional transfer data table can be used. Compared with the case of specifying the drawing content and the transferred data information, the load of processing required for the specification can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the case where the display control device 114 prepares the display data table for each variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is not necessarily limited to this, and the variation effect is, for example, the present invention. A display data table is prepared for each element such as "variable start-up", "high-speed fluctuation", "notice effect", "normal reach", and "super reach", and the display data table is prepared according to the fluctuation pattern shown in the display fluctuation pattern command. After specifying the elements required for the variation effect, the display data table corresponding to the specified paper for the variation effect is put together into one, and the final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may do so. In many cases, "variable start-up", "high-speed fluctuation", "normal reach", etc. are displayed in common with each fluctuation pattern. Therefore, by elementizing the variation effect in this way and preparing a display data table corresponding to each element, it is possible to efficiently have the data table.

In the above embodiment, a case where a common pointer 233f is used in the display data table and the transfer data table to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f has been described. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

In the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at every display interval (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) of an image for one frame at which the drawing process is completed will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. Since the third symbol display device 81 is always driven so that the images for one frame are always displayed at equal time intervals (20 milliseconds intervals), the V interrupt signal is displayed for each display of the images for one frame. By sending, it is possible to keep the time interval accurate without timing.

In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded based on the drawing target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information expanded first from the other frame buffer. The case where the image is read and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded each time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list. May be alternately selected, and the previously expanded image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Further, every time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image information is output to the frame buffer for expanding the drawn image and the third symbol display device 81. It may be replaced with the frame buffer to be used.

In the above embodiment, after the definite display data table corresponding to the definite display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 before the definite display effect is completed. When neither the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) nor the demo command (demo command for display) is received, the display data table for demo corresponding to the demo effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. Further, in this case, the definite display effect is displayed until either the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or the demo command (display demo command) is received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. The final display data table corresponding to the final display effect may be reset to the display data table buffer 233d each time the command is completed. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can continue to display the definite display effect until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110.

In the above embodiment, the case where the demo effect changes the rear image and stops and displays the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers “0” to “9” has been described, but it is not always the case. The present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol consisting of the main symbol with a number or the main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Further, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above embodiment, in the display control means 114, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power on and the variable image at power on is first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power on and the power on of the resident video RAM 235. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b, displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and then transferring the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, it is not always limited to this. For example, in the display control means 114, after the power is turned on, only the image data corresponding to the main image at the time of turning on the power is first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at the time of turning on the power of the resident video RAM 235, and when the power is turned on after the transfer is completed. After displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of turning on the power can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier after the power is turned on. You can immediately confirm that the operation has started without any problem when the power is turned on.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 may monitor the completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b. As a result, if the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on the above, a simple fluctuation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. It is desirable that the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to speed up the variation display by the variation image when the power is turned on.

In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table should correspond to the time expressed in units of 20 milliseconds, and the content of the image to be drawn (drawing content) at that time and the transfer data table should be transferred at that time. The case where the information of the image data (transfer data information) is specified has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any display content may be specified at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since one frame of image is displayed every second, the display data table may specify the display contents at 1/30 second intervals.

Further, in the display data table, the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is not specified as the sprite type to be drawn specified at each predetermined time interval. May be specified. In the display control device 114, since the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manages the address of. Therefore, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is specified as the display content specified for each predetermined time interval in the display data table, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, instead of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233 when instructing the transfer of the image data of the predetermined sprite type, and the predetermined image data. Is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if it is not stored, a transfer instruction for image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. Further, when the transfer instruction of the image data of a predetermined sprite type is set, the MPU 231 stores the information indicating the sprite type in which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and also stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub-area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

In the above embodiment, when the image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. The case where the MPU 231 performs a process of non-execution of the transfer process if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 is described. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite is determined. You may memorize it. Further, the work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer the image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 is used in the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

In the above embodiment, the case where only the image data corresponding to the “rear surface A” among the plurality of rear image is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Image data corresponding to two or more rear images may be made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the rear image used in some super reach may be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by resident the rear image of the super reach that appears frequently or is expected to be high in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data transfer process from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. It is possible to suppress the number of times.

In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines a transfer command for image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 specifies the transfer command at a predetermined time specified by the display pointer. The case where the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data specified in 1 to the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data is at the top of the display data table. The information regarding the sprite type required in the table is described, and the MPU 231 is an image controller so as to transfer the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the voice lamp controller 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and normally outputs the image data of the image type from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer data to the video RAM 236.

In the above embodiment, the case where the color tone of a part of the image changes with time in the back surface C, which is the back image of the “island stage”, has been described, but even if the color tone of the entire image changes with time. good. Further, as a rear image, not only an object that scrolls or changes in color tone with the passage of time, but also an object (for example, a person) that appears with the passage of time instead of such a rear image. It may be something that moves or changes.

In the above embodiment, the information of various counters (special hit random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2) acquired at the time of starting winning to be notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the main control device 110 is used as a hold ball number command. Although the case of including is described, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and the information of various counters (special hit random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2) acquired at the time of starting winning is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by another command. You may notify.

In the above embodiment, when the variation effect is executed, the case where the high-speed variation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed so as not to be visible by the player is displayed has been described. , All symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an invisible degree and displayed, or all symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

In the above embodiment, the case where one first starting port 64a for starting the lottery of the big hit of the special symbol when the ball enters is arranged in the game board 13, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A plurality of (for example, two) first ball entrances may be arranged on the game board 13 so that the ball entry is independently detected and the big hit lottery is started. In this case, the hold ball number command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when there is a hold at each first ball entry port indicates which first ball entry port is the hold. Information may be included. Further, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started includes information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by the first ball entry port. good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a hold ball number counter is prepared for each first ball entry port, and when a hold ball number command is received, the first ball entry indicated in the hold ball number command is received. When the number of reserved balls is set in the hold ball number counter for the mouth and the fluctuation pattern command is received, the number of reserved balls counter for the first entry port indicated in the fluctuation pattern command is decremented by 1, and the first entry port is used. The number of reserved balls can be counted for each.

In the above embodiment, every time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control device 110 (that is, when it increases or decreases), the reserved ball number command is mainly used. Although the case of transmitting from the control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d increases in the main control device 110. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to reduce the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 sends the hold number command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, respectively. The control load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the winning of the first starting port 64a and the passage of the through gate 67 are each suspended up to 4 times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of reserved balls of the variable display based on the winning of the first starting port 64a is different by the number of the reserved balls in a part of the third symbol display device 81 or by the area divided into four. It may be displayed in an embodiment (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled vertically on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and is vertical. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol or in various ways separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

<Second control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 288 to 306. In addition to the contents described in the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above, in the second control example, an effect of giving points to the player is executed, and the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is correct or not is determined by the points. , A control example in a configuration in which the reach content and the like can be selected by consuming the points owned by the player himself / herself will be mainly described. The same description as that of the first control example will be omitted. Further, in the second control example, there is a part described by the control process in which the effect and the like described in the first control example are deleted, but they are omitted for convenience of explanation, and of course, the first control example. In addition to all the contents described in the above, the configuration may be such that the contents of the second control example are added. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

An example of the point acquisition effect and the point consumption effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 288 to 291. FIG. 288 is an example of the point acquisition effect. In this control example, as a privilege given to the player, in addition to the prize ball paid out to the player when the game ball enters the jackpot game or the general winning opening, points (numerical privilege) are given as a production privilege. Is given, and the point effect in which the given points are accumulated is executed.

FIGS. 288 (a) to 288 (b) show a part of the display mode in the point acquisition effect variation pattern in which the execution of the point acquisition effect is set, which is one of the variation patterns determined by the voice lamp control device 113. It is a figure. This point acquisition effect variation pattern is a variation pattern determined by lottery based on the variation pattern command acquired from the main control device 110 when the hit / fail determination result is a hit or a miss. In the case of a hit, it is composed of a variation pattern (dynamic display mode) displayed by a symbol (a combination of the same doublet in which the third symbol is the same) that notifies the final hit, and in the case of a miss. Is composed of a variation pattern displayed by a symbol (a combination of doublets other than doublets in the third symbol) that finally notifies that the symbol is out of alignment.

FIG. 288 (a) is a diagram showing a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the execution of the point acquisition effect is started in the point acquisition effect variation pattern. This point acquisition effect is set to start in the middle of the execution period (dynamic display period) of the fluctuation pattern regardless of whether it is a hit or a miss, and the displayed third symbol is hidden or displayed. The semi-transparent point acquisition effect is displayed in an easy-to-see state, and along with the tornado display, information values (numerical symbols) indicating multiple point values are rotated and displayed like a tornado. In the same display area, the character of the hero is displayed facing the tornado, and a plurality of (for example, four) swords are displayed above the hero's head. In the example of FIG. 288 (a), four swords (a1 to a4) are displayed. It is notified that the player can obtain the point value by piercing the point value with the sword against a large number of point values that are rotated and displayed together with the tornado. In addition, at the bottom of the display area, the characters "Get points !!" are displayed as a notification mode suggesting that the player can earn points, and the player is accompanied by a tornado. It is clearly notified that the effect is such that one of the rotating point values is given to the player. Further, the total value of the point values currently acquired by the player is displayed in the lower left of the display area (the upper part of the display area Ds of the pending symbol) (in the example of FIG. 288 (a), the present value is present. The points are 500 points).

In FIG. 288 (b), in the point acquisition effect, the sword displayed above the hero's head is released toward the point value (flying effect is performed), and the effect that each sword pierces the point value is executed. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the case of.

In the example of FIG. 288 (b), the sword a1 has a point value of 100 points, the sword a2 has a point value of 20 points, the sword a3 has a point value of 50 points, and the sword a4 has a point value of 70 points. The case is shown. The total point value obtained by the four swords is displayed in the letters "240 points GET !!" at the bottom of the display area.

As will be described in detail later, in this control example, the timing at which points are awarded to the player is mainly during the fluctuation period of the special symbol, and the timing at which the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed (variation display period). The notice display suggesting the lottery result is displayed according to the period in which the notice display suggesting the lottery result is executed, before the period from the end of the above to the time of confirmation. The point value is selected with the result of determining the lottery result of the special symbol that has started to fluctuate and the lottery result of the special symbol that is stored on hold before the start of fluctuation (look-ahead result) as one of the selection information, and the game. The notice effect given to the person is executed.

When the fluctuation display or the stored hold pass / fail determination result is a hit, a higher point value can be easily determined than when the hold is off. As a result, by displaying the notice mode of the high point value, it is possible to expect that the lottery result of the special symbol being changed or the special symbol held and stored will be a hit, and the change of the special symbol concerned. Not only that, it is possible to play a game with the expectation of hitting a reserved ball that has already been stored. That is, the notice display effect that gives the player a point value displayed as a notice display is not only the displayed special symbol of the fluctuation, but also the lottery result of the special symbol that is variablely displayed across a plurality of fluctuations. It is a notice display effect for the player, and the player can have an expectation corresponding to the advance notice effect for a longer period of time.

In addition, even if the point value is given, but there is no such change or the lottery result of the special symbol stored on hold, the given point value is accumulated and given later. It can be used for effects that use the points (such as the effect of selecting the reach mode using the points), and the larger the total value of the accumulated points, the higher the expectation of the jackpot. It is configured so that the player can select a high reach display mode by using the point value.

As a result, when the reach selection variation pattern that allows the player to select the type of reach display mode using the point value is executed while the total value of the accumulated point values is large, the player is notified. It is possible to have a high expectation for the jackpot game. Therefore, the effect to which the point value is given is not only for notifying the player of the fluctuation of the special symbol and the lottery result of the special symbol stored on hold, but also for the first winning opening 64 in the future. Alternatively, it is also used for notifying the future lottery result when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640 and the lottery is executed, so that the player can have expectations for a long period of time.

Although the details will be described later, the display data of the point value displayed together with the tornado of the point acquisition effect displayed in FIG. 288 (a) is a display control device in which individual data can be set so as to be individually identifiable. It is set to 114, and when the display timing of the point acquisition effect is reached by the voice lamp control device 113, the sword (a1 to 1) is drawn by lottery based on the current point value, the change or the lottery result of the special symbol stored on hold. The point values pierced by a4) are determined respectively.

In detail, the first basic point value, the second basic point value (low), and the second basic point value (high) are the basic point values at the fluctuation start timing of the point acquisition effect variation pattern (point consumption effect variation pattern). ) Is determined. At the start of fluctuation, the point value is determined based on the total of the current accumulated point values, the lottery result of the fluctuating special symbol (win / fail judgment result), and the lottery result of the special symbol stored in hold (winning information). Will be done.

However, in the configuration of this control example, since the advance notice effect of giving the point value is executed at a random timing after the change of the special symbol is started, the cumulative effect is accumulated at the timing when the point acquisition effect is actually executed. The total value of the point values that have been set is the pre-reading result of the reserved ball that has been raised or newly won (the new reserved ball memorized by winning the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640). Changes such as hitting have occurred. It is necessary to determine the current point value and the state of the lottery result again at the timing when the advance notice effect for giving the point value is executed, and determine the point value to be given.

Here, in this control example, the point value determined at the time of executing the point acquisition effect fluctuation pattern is the first basic point (a part of the point values to be given is distributed to either or both of the two swords). The second basic point (low), which is less than the value obtained by subtracting the first basic point from the point value to be granted, and the second basic point value obtained by subtracting the first basic point from the point value to be granted. By determining two point values, points (high), when the cumulative points increase by more than the reference value (for example, 500 points or more) from the time of determination at the execution timing of the point acquisition effect, , A display command indicating the first basic point and the second basic point (low) is output to the display control device 114.

In addition, even when the cumulative point value is higher than the reference value or higher than at the time of determination, if the reserved ball to be hit is stored, the first basic point and the second basic point (high) are shown. The display command is output to the display control device 114.

In this way, since the point values of the two patterns are determined in advance at the time of determination, it is possible to reduce the control load at the time of executing the point acquisition effect.

Next, the point effect in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 289 to 291. First, FIG. 289 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the execution of the point acquisition effect on the reserved ball is started in the point acquisition effect variation pattern. In FIG. 289 (a), the variation of the special symbol is executed, and the total points currently acquired (900 points in the example of FIG. 289 (a)) are displayed in the point display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm. , The points currently earned are notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Then, the executing symbol m0, the first reserved symbol m1 and the second reserved symbol m2 are displayed in the sub-display area, and the reserved ball written as 500p is displayed in the second reserved symbol m2. There is. In this way, in this control example, as a result of determining the lottery result of the special symbol stored on hold before the start of the change (look-ahead result), the point value is given to the second change from the change using the hold ball. Can be notified to the player. With this configuration, the player can have the expectation that the point value can be obtained not only by the result of the change but also by the change of the special symbol stored on hold. Further, the point-giving effect using the reserved ball is not limited to the reserved ball stored in the reserved ball, and may be displayed for the running symbol m0. With this configuration, the player can execute the game while expecting unexpected points to be obtained.

FIG. 289 (b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect display mode in which the player can select the reach desired by the next variation by consuming the point values acquired so far.

In the example of FIG. 289 (b), the currently acquired point value is displayed in the point display area Dm3 (1800 points in the example of FIG. 289 (b)), and the player selects the reach of the next variation by using this. can do. The reach pattern that can be selected this time is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the left option 822e, the middle option 822f, and the right option 822g are displayed. At the top of the main display area Dm, the characters "Buy a reach !!" are displayed, and the player is informed in an easy-to-understand manner that the player can select the reach of the next fluctuation using the current point value. NS. Further, the cursor ka is displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. As will be described in detail later, when the player presses the frame button 22, the displayed cursor ka moves under the options 822e to 822g, and the cursor ka is aligned with the option desired by the player to select. be able to.

The reach contents and required point values are displayed in the options 822e to 822g, respectively. In the example of FIG. 289 (b), the left option 822e has "A reach 500 points" and the middle option 822f has "B reach 800 points". , Right option 822g is displayed as "SP reach 10000 points" respectively. The player can select the reach based on the display content of each option and the current earned point value displayed in the point display area Dm3. In the example of FIG. 289 (b), since the current point value is 1800 points, the player can select "A reach" and "B reach" of the left option 822e.

In this way, by configuring the player to select the fluctuation pattern of the next fluctuation according to the current earned point value, the player can have a sense of expectation for the point earned game, and the hobby of the game. Can be enhanced. Further, in this control example, the reach that cannot be selected by the current point value is also displayed, such as the right option 822g, but only the reach that can be selected by the current point value is displayed. May be good. With this configuration, the player can play the game without feeling disappointed that he / she cannot select the desired reach.

FIG. 290 is a diagram showing an example of the effect content that when the pseudo-variation of the special symbol is executed by the third symbol display device 81, it can be re-variated using the points.

In the example of FIG. 290 (a), the result of the special symbol being removed is temporarily stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm. 7 is displayed on the left symbol Z1 and 7 is displayed on the right symbol Z3 to reach, but 4 is stopped on the middle symbol Z2, and the display mode is off and temporarily stopped. Then, in the lower right corner of the main display area Dm, the characters "Re-variate using 500 points !!" are displayed, and the player can re-variate the special symbol by using the currently acquired point value. It informs the player that it can be done.

FIG. 290 (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the special symbol is re-variated from FIG. 290 (a) using points. In the main display area Dm, 7 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol Z1 and the right symbol Z3, and the middle symbol Z2 is displayed in a re-variable manner.

In this way, even when the pseudo fluctuation is set as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, by setting the point consumption effect, it is possible to provide the player with a feeling of excitement even after the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped.

FIG. 291 is a diagram showing an example of display contents in which a part of the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not changed (fixed) by using the acquired point value. In FIG. 291 (a), the symbols Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner. Then, at the upper part of the main display area Dm, the characters "hold the left symbol with 2000 points and 3 fluctuations with 7 symbols !!" are displayed. That is, if 2000 points are used, the player is informed in an easy-to-understand manner that the left symbol Z1 is fixed to the 7 symbols that are easy to win the jackpot with higher expectation during the period from the fluctuation to the 3 fluctuations.

FIG. 291 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents when the left symbol Z1 is fixed at 7. In the main display area Dm, the left symbol Z1 in which the symbol is fixed at 7, and the changing middle symbol Z2 and the right symbol Z3 are displayed. "Remaining 2 fluctuation HOLD" is displayed at the upper part of the main display area Dm, and the remaining number of fluctuations to which the left symbol Z1 is fixed is notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

With this configuration, the chances of executing the point effect increase, and the player can have a higher expectation for the point effect.

<Electrical configuration in the second control example>
The electrical configuration in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 292 to 296. The second control example differs from the first control example in that the point selection table 222ad, the fluctuation point selection table 222ae, and the consumption point selection table 222af are added to the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, respectively. .. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, the description thereof will be omitted.

The point selection table 222ad is a selection table for selecting a point value to be given to the player by advance notice or the like. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 293 and 294, the selection table is configured to be switched between the state with the holding ball and the state without the holding ball, and the state with the holding ball (see FIG. 293). Then, the hold effect (the effect of changing the hold symbol to give points (the point value is displayed in the hold symbol)) and the PUSH effect (the effect that the point value is displayed and given by pressing the frame button 22). ), The character effect (the effect that the character for the notice is displayed while the special symbol is changing and the character earns points) is determined by the effect counter acquired, and the point value set in the table is set. Will be done. For example, if the value of the acquired effect counter is 100, 200 pt is determined by the character effect.

Further, in a state where the special symbol is not variablely displayed (fixed timing or the like), the hold effect is forcibly selected. For example, if the value of the effect counter is 100, the hold effect of 200 pt is selected.

Next, in the state where there is no reserved ball, it is selected from the point selection table 222ae shown in FIG. 294. It should be noted that the difference is that the hold effect is not selected when there is no hold ball.

The variable point selection table 222ae is a selection table for setting a point value set in the point acquisition effect shown in FIG. 288. The variable point selection table is a table for selecting a first basic point (first) and a second basic point (second (low), second (high)). At the start of fluctuation, the first basic point, the second basic point (low), and the second basic point (high) are selected. The first basic point is a point value displayed in the production in any state, and the second basic point value is a high point value due to the point value held by the player at the actual production execution timing. The second basic point (high) is selected or the second basic point (low), which is a low point value, is selected. The second basic point (high) is selected when the possessed points are not 1000 pt or more higher than at the time of selection, while the second basic point (low) is displayed when the possessed points are 1000 pt or more higher. It is configured in.

In this way, it is possible to reduce the processing load at the time of executing the effect by making a selection so that even if there is a change in the point value at the start of the change, it can be dealt with.

Further, as shown in FIG. 288 (a), how many point values are given to which swords (a1 to a4) are sorted based on the display position table shown in FIG. 295 (b). It is determined. When the acquired effect counter is 100, the first basic point value is distributed to the sword a4 and the sword a3. This distribution is distributed so as to be within the first basic point value selected in a possible combination with respect to the point value displayed in FIG. 288 (a). For example, when the effect counter is 100 and the hold point value is 300, 60 points are selected as the first basic point value, 60 points are selected as the second basic point (low), and 120 points are selected as the second basic point (high). Will be done. Further, in the display position table, 60 points, which is the first basic point value, is set to, for example, 40 points for the sword a4 and 20 points for the sword a3. Here, the display control device individually sets display data of each sword and each point value shown in FIG. 288 (a) as display data for each point value, and each sword and each point value data. By setting in correspondence with and, the point value selected in the variable point selection table is distributed to each sword, and the effect acquired by the player can be executed.

With this configuration, even if the same first basic point is selected, the point value corresponding to each sword can be randomized, and various effects can be produced. With this configuration, it is possible to execute various point acquisition effects with fewer fluctuation patterns than setting a plurality of effect of point values that can be acquired for each fluctuation pattern.

The winning consumption point selection table 222g is a selection table for determining the consumption points of each reach in the consumption effect shown in FIG. 289 (b) when the hit / fail determination result is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 296 (a), the selection is made based on the current possession points and the acquired effect counter values.

The out-of-order consumption point selection table 222g is a table for determining the point value to be selected when the out-of-order fluctuation display is executed (see FIG. 296 (b)). Since the specific configuration is the same as that of the hit consumption point selection table, the description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the second control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 297 to 304. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example is the advance notice setting process (S2131), the special point selection process (S2132), and the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above. The difference is that the consumption reach selection process (S2133) is added, and the command determination process 2 (S2134) is executed instead of the command determination process (S2114 in FIG. 258). Regarding other processes, the same parts as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the main process in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 297. FIG. 297 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main process in the second control example. In the main process in the second control example, after the liquid crystal display effect execution management process (S2110) is executed for the main process (see FIG. 257) of the first control example, the notice setting process (S2031) and the special point selection process are performed. (S2132), point to add consumption reach selection process (S2133), frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (S2130) instead of frame button input monitoring / effect process (S2107), command determination process (S2114) It differs in the command determination process 2 (S2134). Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the command determination process 2 (S2134) in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 298. FIG. 298 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 2 (S2134) in the second control example. In the command determination process 2 (S2134) in the second control example, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received for the command determination process (S2114) in the first control example (S2201: Yes), the variation pattern is received. The difference is that the process 2 (S2220) is executed. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the variation pattern reception process 2 (S2220) in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 299. FIG. 299 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern reception process 2 (S2220) in the second control example. The variation pattern reception process 2 (S2220) in the second control example determines whether or not the variation pattern command received this time is a point acquisition effect for the variation pattern reception process (S2202) in the first control example, and points. The difference is that the selection process is executed. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the variation pattern reception process 2 (S2220), first, the variation start flag 223d is set to ON (S2221), and the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern command received this time and the value of the variation pattern selection counter 223aa (S2221). S2222). Next, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern determined in the process of S2222 is a point acquisition effect (S2223). When it is determined that the determined fluctuation pattern is the point acquisition effect (S2223: Yes), the point selection process is executed (S2224), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the determined fluctuation pattern is not the point acquisition effect (S2223: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the point selection process (S2224), which is one process of the variation pattern reception process 2 (S2220) in the second control example, will be described with reference to FIG. 300. FIG. 300 is a flowchart showing the contents of the point selection process (S2224).

In the point selection process (S2224), first, the value of the point storage area 223ab is acquired (S2321), and it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern determined this time is a hit (S2322). When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern determined this time is a hit (S2322: Yes), it is determined whether or not the received winning information is a hit (S2323). If it is determined that the winning information is correct (S2323: Yes), a pointless effect is set (S2324), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S2322, when it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is not a hit (that is, it is out of order) (S2322: No), or when it is determined that the received winning information is not a hit (that is, it is not a hit) ( S2323: No), a basic point is selected from the variable point selection table 222ae based on the current point and set in the first basic point setting area (S2325). Then, based on the current point value, a point value is selected from the second basic point selection table 222ae2, the current point value and the selected point value are set in the second basic point setting area (S2326), and this processing is performed. To finish.

Next, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S2130) in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 301. FIG. 301 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S2130) in the second control example. In the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (S2130) in the second control example, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received in the command determination process (S2114) of the first control example (S2201: Yes). , The difference is that the operation processing related to the selection and determination of points is executed.

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S2130), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation valid timer 223n is larger than 0, that is, whether or not the button operation is valid (S2421). If it is determined that the value of the operation valid timer 223n is not larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S2421: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S2421 that the value of the operation valid timer 223n is larger than 0 (S2421: No), the value of the operation valid timer 223n is subtracted (S2422), and then the value is subtracted in the processing of S2422. It is determined whether or not the value of the operation valid timer 223n is larger than 0 (S2423). When it is determined that the value of the subtracted operation valid timer 223n is larger than 0 (S2423: Yes), a display command indicating the reach content corresponding to the cursor position is set (S2424), and the process proceeds to S2425. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the operation valid timer 223n is 0 in the process of S2423 (S2423: No), the process of S2424 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2425.

After executing the process of S2423 or S2425, it is determined whether or not the selection operation is executed (S2425). When it is determined that the selection operation has been executed (S2425: Yes), the information corresponding to the operation is stored in the cursor position storage area 223ac (S2426), and the display command corresponding to the cursor position is set (S2427). This process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the selection operation has not been executed in the process of S2425 (S2425: No), it is determined whether or not the determination operation has been executed (S2428). When it is determined that the determination operation has been executed (S2428: Yes), the reach command for displaying the reach content determined in the processing of S2428 is set (S2429), and the points corresponding to the determined reach content are subtracted. (S2430), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the determination operation has been executed in the process of S2428 (S2428: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the contents of the notice setting process (S2131) will be described with reference to FIG. 302. FIG. 302 is a flowchart showing the contents of the notice setting process (S2131). The notice setting process (S2131) is one of the processes in the main process (FIG. 297) in the second control example, and is a process of selecting the point value of the point effect from the point selection table 222ad when the special symbol is changing. Will be executed.

In the notice setting process (S2131), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is changing (S2511). If it is determined that the special symbol is not changing (S2511: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2511 that the special symbol is changing (S2511: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is within the execution period of the advance notice effect (S2512). When it is determined that it is within the execution period of the advance notice effect (S2512: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223ad is acquired (S2513), and the point selection table is based on the value of the effect counter 223ad acquired in the process of S2513. A point value is selected from 222ad (S2514), and this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2512 that the advance notice is not within the period in which the advance notice can be executed (S2512: No), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls is more than 0 (S2515). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls is more than 0 (S2515: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223ad is acquired (S2516) because it is a period during which the hold effect can be executed, and the effect counter 223ad acquired in the process of S2516 is acquired. Based on the value of, the point of the hold effect is selected from the point selection table 222ad (S2517), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2515 that the number of reserved balls is 0 (S2515: No), it is determined that the advance notice cannot be set, and the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the contents of the special point selection process (S2132) will be described with reference to FIG. 303. FIG. 303 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special point selection process (S2132).

In the special point selection process (S2132), first, it is determined whether or not the point effect is being executed (S2611). If it is determined that the point effect is not a variation to be executed (S2611: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2611, it is determined whether or not it is the timing of point setting (S2612). If it is determined that the timing is not the point setting timing (S2612: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the timing is the point setting (S2612: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current point effect is an effect for setting 0 points (S2613). If it is determined that the current point is an effect for setting 0 point (S2613: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2613 that the effect of this time is not an effect of setting 0 points (S2613: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2614.

After executing the process of S2613, it is next determined whether or not there is hit information in the winning information storage area 223f (S2614). If it is determined that there is a hit in the winning information storage area 223f (S2614: Yes), a display command indicating the high points of the first basic point setting area and the second basic point setting area is set (S2615). End the process. On the other hand, in the process of S2614, when it is determined that the winning information storage area 223f is not hit (S2614: No), it is determined whether or not the difference between the points acquired this time and the current points is 1000 points or more (S2616). When it is determined that the difference between the points acquired this time and the current points is 1000 points or more (S2616: Yes), the above-mentioned processing of S2615 is executed, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2616, when it is determined that the difference between the points acquired this time and the current points is not 1000 points or more (S2616: No), the first basic point setting area and the second basic point setting area A display command indicating the low point of is set (S2617), and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the consumption reach selection process (S2133) will be described with reference to FIG. 304. FIG. 304 is a flowchart showing the contents of the consumption reach selection process (S2133).

In the consumption reach selection process (S2133), first, it is determined whether or not the consumption reach is feasible (S2711). If it is determined that the consumption reach is not feasible (S2711: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the consumption reach is feasible (S2711: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is the reach data selection timing (S2712). If it is determined that it is not the reach data selection timing (S2712: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the reach data selection timing (S2712: Yes), the process proceeds to S2713.

In the process of S2713, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation is a winning fluctuation pattern (S2713). If it is determined that the current fluctuation is a hit (S2713: Yes), the consumption points are set from the hit consumption point selection table 222af based on the current number of points (S2714), and the process proceeds to S2717. do. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2713 that the current fluctuation is not a winning fluctuation pattern (that is, it is out of alignment), it is determined whether the current point is equal to or higher than the set value (S2715). If it is determined that the current point is not equal to or higher than the set value (S2715: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2715 that the current point is equal to or higher than the set value (S2715: Yes), the consumption point is set from the consumption point selection table 222af for deviation based on the current number of points (S2716). ), The process proceeds to S2717. In the process of S2717, a display reach selection command corresponding to the selection reach effect in which the selected consumption points are set is set (S2717), and this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 305 to 306, each control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described. In the process of the display control device 114 in the second control example, the V interrupt process is replaced with the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276 (b)) for the process of the display control device 114 in the first control example. 2 (see FIG. 305) is executed, and the command determination process 2 (S6311 in FIG. 306) is executed instead of the command determination process (S6302 in FIG. 277). Regarding other processes, the same parts as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the V interrupt process 2 executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 305. FIG. 305 is a flowchart showing the contents of the V interrupt process 2. The V interrupt process 2 in the second control example differs in that the command determination process 2 (S6311) is executed instead of the command determination process (S6302). Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the command determination process 2 (S6311) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 306. FIG. 306 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 2 (S6311).

In the command determination process 2 (S6311) in the second control example, if it is determined that there is no display notice display command this time in the process of S6408 (S6408: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display point command. (S6421). If it is determined that there is a display point command (S6421: Yes), the point command received this time is set in the display point storage area (S6422), and the process returns to S6401. On the other hand, in the process of S6421, when it is determined that there is no display point command (S6421: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display effect point command (S6423). If it is determined that there is a display effect point command (S6423: Yes), the point display process (S6424) is executed, and the process returns to the process of S6401.

On the other hand, in the process of S6423, when it is determined that there is no display effect point command (S6423: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display reach command (S6425). If it is determined that there is a display reach command (S6425: Yes), the reach display data table corresponding to the command received this time is set (S6426), and the process returns to S6401. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no display reach command in the processing of S6425 (S6425: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display reach selection command (S6427), and it is determined that there is a display reach selection command. (S6427: Yes), the display data table of the corresponding selection reach is set (S6428), and the process returns to S6401. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display reach selection command (S6427: No), the process proceeds to S6418.

<About the third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 307 to 319. In the second control example, the control in the lower displacement unit 400 described above will be described. Of course, the first control example and the second control example described above may be combined with the third control example, but for convenience, some of the first control example and the second control example will be described by omitting the illustration. ..

In the third control example, the operation control of the lower displacement unit 400 and the control in the configuration in which the game ball is launched from the exit opening 400 will be described. The same description as that of the first control example will be omitted. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<About the configuration of the lower displacement unit 400 in the third control example>
FIG. 307 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the third control example, which is substantially the same as FIG. 66 described above, but the storage sensor SP5 is added. The storage sensor SP5 is configured to be capable of detecting that a game ball has entered from the opening 451a and also detecting whether or not the game ball has entered the ball receiving portion 467. Further, since both tip portions of the ball receiving portion 467 are arranged at a detectable position, it is also possible to detect the position of the ball receiving portion 467.

As a method of detecting the position of the ball receiving portion, when the movable rack 464 is moved from the origin position toward the exit opening 471, the tip of the ball receiving portion 467 is detected by the storage sensor SP5, and then the ball on the rear side is detected. The tip of the receiving portion 467 is detected. In this case, after the slide motor is driven for 10 steps from the state in which the storage sensor SP5 on the front side is turned on, the stop is controlled so that the ball receiving position (the position shown in FIG. 307 (b)) is reached. It can be moved so that the ball receiving portion 467 is located.

Further, if the storage sensor is turned on 20 steps after the storage sensor detects the tip on the front side of the ball receiving unit 467 and before the slide motor KM2 is driven, the game ball is held by the ball receiving unit 467 ( It can be determined that the game ball is in the ball receiving portion 467). Further, when the movable rack 464 is moved from the state where it is movable to the launch position (the position shown in FIG. 307 (c)) to the origin position (the position shown in FIG. 307 (a)), the tip on the rear side is also moved. The storage sensor SP5 detects (ball receiving portion 467) first, but the method for detecting the position of the ball receiving portion 467 is the same.

The storage sensor SP5 is composed of a reflection type laser output sensor, and the laser light output to the front surface from the storage sensor SP5 is blocked and the laser light reflected by the detection unit of the storage sensor SP5 is detected ( On state) Sensor.

Therefore, the storage sensor SP5 not only detects that the game ball has entered the opening 451a, but also detects the state in which the game ball has entered the ball receiving portion 467, detects the position of the ball receiving portion 467, and is movable. The position of the rack 464 can also be detected.

In the initial state (at the end of the initial operation after the power is turned on), the movable rack 464 is moved to the origin position shown in FIG. 307 (a). As already described with reference to FIG. 81, at the origin position, the contact plate 464c rotates the bulging portion 543a in the rear direction to regulate the distribution of the game ball to the opening 451a. By moving the movable rack 464 from the origin position to the ball receiving position (see FIG. 307 (b)), the bulging portion 543a rotates forward and the game ball is distributed to the opening 451a. Here, the time required for the movable rack 363 to be moved to the ball receiving position is until the distribution member 540 rotates and the game ball that distributes the game ball toward the opening 451a reaches the opening 451a. It is configured to be movable in a shorter time than the time of. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game ball enters the ball before the ball receiving portion 467 moves to the ball receiving position and the game ball cannot be received by the ball receiving portion 467.

When the game ball is received by the ball receiving portion 467, the movable rack 464 is moved to the origin position in the accepted state, and then the tilt motor KM1 of the lower displacement unit 400 is driven to drive the lower displacement unit 400. 1 It is rotationally driven so as to rise to the overhanging state (see FIG. 48). As a result, the lower displacement unit is driven ascending while the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged on the rotation axis side of the lower displacement unit 400, so that the driving force required for ascending can be reduced, and the motor or the like can be used. The load can be reduced.

When the lower displacement unit 400 is in the first overhanging state, the lower displacement unit 400 is driven upward by the operation of the frame button 22 of the player. This drive is stopped when the slide motor KM2 is driven in 30 steps, and then when the frame button 22 is operated, the 30-step slide motor KM2 is driven to drive the downward displacement unit 400. At this time, it is determined whether or not it is detected (detected as on) by the ascending position sensor that detects that the lower displacement unit 400 is in the position of the first overhanging state while driving 30 steps, and it is detected. It is configured to be stopped and controlled at the timing. Further, in the state where the ascending position sensor is not turned on even after driving 30 steps, the slide motor KM2 is driven until the ascending position sensor is further turned on. If the ascending position sensor does not turn on even after driving 15 steps, the lower displacement unit 400 is stopped at the position where the ascending position sensor is increased by 15 steps. In this way, it can be determined that the ascending position sensor is clearly not turned on, and the game can be played by switching to the control of only the number of steps. In this case, an error may be notified by a lamp, a display, an external terminal, or the like.

When the ending at the time of a big hit is set, the lower displacement unit is moved to the ascending position, and then the movable rack 464 is moved toward the launch position to eject the game ball held in the ball receiving portion 467. Fire more game balls. The timing of firing is the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22, and if the frame button 22 is not operated even after the valid time of the frame button 22 has elapsed, the firing operation is automatically executed. ..

When the power is turned on, the initial operation described later is also executed in the lower variable unit 400. When the small hit or big hit C is executed in the state where the power is cut off, when the power is turned on, the executed small hit or big hit C is restored in the state when the power is turned off. 3 The electric accessory is opened. In that case, the game ball enters the third electric accessory and the game ball moves to the lower variable unit 400 in a state where the initial operation of the lower variable unit 400 executed by the voice lamp control device 113 is not completed. There is a risk of flowing down.

In that case, the game ball enters from the opening 451a of the lower variable unit 400 and the game ball enters the ball receiving portion 467, or the game ball enters from the opening 451a and the lower variable unit 400. There is a problem that the game ball enters the inside (see FIG. 67 (c)). However, in the third control example, a command from the main control device 110 (a payout command or a winning effect (payout award) based on the entry of a game ball of the third electric accessory during the period in which the initial operation is executed). In order to execute the command) for displaying the value corresponding to the number of balls on the third symbol display device 81), the monitoring of the storage sensor SP5 is started, and the ending command is displayed after the initial operation is completed. 2 after receiving either the fluctuation pattern command or the customer waiting command (command output from the main controller 110 when the fluctuation is not executed for a certain period of time or the state where the fluctuation and the firing handle are not operated for a certain period of time continues) Monitoring whether the storage sensor SP5 is turned on until the elapse of seconds (identifying whether the game ball is turned on at intervals (for example, 4 ms) through which the game ball can pass) is executed.

With this configuration, even during the period when the third electric accessory is opened due to the timing when the initial operation is executed, the storage sensor is available for the period during which the game ball can enter the opening 451a. The SP5 can be monitored, and it is possible to monitor whether or not the game ball has entered the lower variable unit 400. When the storage sensor SP5 is monitored and the passage of the game ball is detected, one of the ending command (command output at the end of the jackpot game), the variation pattern command, and the customer waiting command is output. 2 In the operation of ejecting the game ball from the lower variable unit 400 at the timing when the second has elapsed, the ejection operation (after the operation rack 464 moves to the launch position while the rotation of the lower variable unit 400 is in the origin position, the origin position The operation of moving up to) is executed, and the operation of collecting the game ball discharged from the exit opening 471 of the lower variable unit 400 from the collection port 411f (see FIG. 43) is executed.

As a result, even when the game ball is guided into the lower variable unit 400 during the initial operation, the ejection operation is executed after the game ball does not enter the lower variable unit 400.

After 2 seconds have passed from each of the above commands, the ejecting operation is executed by moving the movable rack 464 from the firing position to the origin position, and the distribution member 540 moves the game ball to the lower variable unit 400. A lapse of 2 seconds is set in consideration of the period from when the game ball is not sorted until the game ball reaches the opening 451a (the game ball that was finally sorted).

When the above command output based on the fact that the ball has entered the third electric accessory from the main control device 110 is received during the period in which the initial operation is being executed, the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is turned on. It is configured so that the selection of the effect (variation pattern) that tilts the lower variable unit 400 until the discharge operation is completed is prohibited, and the execution thereof is prohibited. That is, the effect of using the lower variable unit 400 is prohibited until the fluctuation when the discharge operation is completed.

On the other hand, if the command is received but the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is not turned on (that is, OFF), either the ending command (command output at the end of the jackpot game), the variation pattern command, or the customer waiting command. The storage sensor SP5 is monitored until the monitoring period of 2 seconds elapses after receiving the command, and the lower variable unit 400 is used for the fluctuation started until the execution is completed. It is configured to be banned.

With this configuration, the lower variable unit 400 is configured so that the lower variable unit 400 does not tilt when the game ball carelessly enters the lower variable unit 400 due to the initial operation, so that the game ball becomes the lower variable unit 400. It is possible to suppress a problem that the tilting motor KM1 is damaged due to an excessive load applied to the tilting motor KM1 when the ball is tilted while the ball is in the ball.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third control example>
In the third control example, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 has initial operation data 222ba, firing operation data 222bb, origin operation data 222bc, discharge operation data 222b, and first operation data 222be for ROM 222 of the first control example. The second operation data 222bf has been added. Since the other points are the same as those of the first control example, the description thereof will be omitted.

The initial operation data 222ba is movable data set to execute the initial operation of the lower variable unit 400, which is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 309, the type of motor to be driven, the driving direction, and the stop condition of the motor are set for each operation status. The operation status is set from the initial value 0 by the initial operation setting process (S2021, see FIG. 312) executed in the start-up process executed by the MPU221 of the voice lamp set control device 113 executed when the power is turned on. It is started, added one by one, the drive corresponding to the operation status is executed, the operation status is added each time the execution is completed, and the necessary initial operation is executed in order. Regarding the drive direction set in the initial operation data 222ba, the + direction of the slide motor is the direction of driving the motor in the direction of moving the movable rack 464 from the origin position to the launch position direction, and the plus direction of the tilt motor is. , The direction in which the lower variable unit 400 is rotated from the origin position (the retracted position sensor is on) to the first overhanging state direction.

The launch operation data 222bb is operation data in which the movable rack 464 is driven from the origin position to the launch position and the game ball is launched from the exit opening 471. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 310 (a), the slide motor is driven in the + direction until the launch position sensor is turned on.

The origin operation data 222bc is movable data for returning to the origin for moving the movable rack 464 and the lower variable unit 400 to the origin position. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 310 (b), after launching the game ball from the exit opening 471, the origin position sensor is turned on in the-direction (driving toward the origin position) of the slide motor. Drives up to, and drives the tilt motor in the negative direction (drives in the retracted position (origin position) direction) until the retracted position sensor is turned on.

Further, when the lower variable unit 400 is in the retracted position (origin position) and the ejecting operation is executed by the operation of the movable rack 464, the setting of the movable data in the tilting motor is not executed.

The discharge operation data 222b is operation data for discharging the game ball that has entered the lower variable unit 400, and the same data as the launch operation data 222bb is set.

The first motion data is motion data for receiving a game ball into the ball receiving portion 467 while the lower variable unit 400 is in the retracted position. After moving the movable unit 464 from the origin position to the ball receiving position, the origin It is the drive data to move to the position (see FIG. 311 (a)).

The second operation data 222bc moves the lower variable unit 400 to the ascending position (first overhanging state), raises it by 30 steps based on the operation of the frame button 22, and then operates the frame button 22. It is the data for executing the fanning operation (swinging operation) of lowering until the ascending sensor is turned on. Further, the display mode imitating the lower displacement unit 400 can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the lower displacement unit 400 is operated in the effect of launching the game ball from the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement unit 400. The display mode imitating the lower displacement unit can be changed to the first overhanging state, and the effect of firing the game ball can be displayed in place of the display mode. Further, when the lower displacement unit 400 is oscillated, the lower displacement unit 400 is changed to the first overhanging state, but in the oscillating effect, the lower displacement unit 400 is not oscillated and is in the first overhanging state. In the third symbol display device 81 on the back side of the lower displacement unit 400, the symbol imitating the lower displacement unit 400 is swung from the stopped lower displacement unit 400 within a predetermined movable range. It is possible to display the imitated display mode and fuse the display mode with the lower displacement unit 400 to produce a swing effect. Here, the voice lamp control device 113 is equipped with an RTC capable of clocking the date and time, and the swing effect of the lower displacement unit 400 is not executed after a certain period of time (for example, one year later). By switching to the swing effect fused with the display mode, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement unit 400 from failing due to movement exceeding the durability of the lower displacement unit 400. Further, when a failure that does not operate even if the operation data of the lower displacement unit 400 is set is detected, the display mode imitating the lower displacement unit 400 is variably displayed instead of the effect that the lower displacement unit 400 operates. You may try to do it.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 312 to 319, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example is the initial operation setting process (S2071) and the initial discharge operation setting process (S2140) with respect to the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above. ), The difference is that the operation control process (S2112) is added. Specifically, a process of controlling the operation of the lower displacement unit 400 and a process of confirming the initial operation of the lower displacement unit 400 at the time of start-up processing are added.

Next, the initial operation setting process (S2071), which is one process of the start-up process in the third control example, will be described with reference to FIG. 312. FIG. 312 is a flowchart showing the contents of the initial operation setting process (S2071). The initial operation setting process (S2071) is a process for confirming the operation content of the lower displacement unit 400 at the time of the start-up process.

In the initial operation setting process (S2071), first, it is determined whether or not the savings sensor monitoring flag 223bi is on (S2031). When it is determined that the savings sensor monitoring flag 223bi is not on (S2031: No), it is determined whether or not the upper left prize ball command has been received (S2032). When it is determined that the upper left prize ball command has been received (S2032: Yes), the operation prohibition counter 223bk is set to 2 (S2033), the savings sensor monitoring flag 223bi is set to ON (S2034), and the process of S2038 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, in the process of S2032, when it is determined that the upper left prize ball command has not been received (S2032), the processes of S2033 to S2034 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S2038.

On the other hand, in the process of S2031, when it is determined that the savings sensor monitoring flag 223bi is on (S2031: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ball discharge flag 223bj is on (S2035). When it is determined that the ball discharge flag 223bj is not "on" (S2035: No), the ball discharge flag 223bj is set to on (S2036), the savings sensor monitoring flag 223bi is set to off (S2037), and S2038. Move to processing. On the other hand, in the process of S2035, when it is determined that the ball discharge flag 223bj is on (S2035: Yes), the processes of S2036 to S2037 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S2038.

In the process of S2038, it is determined whether the ball ejection operation is completed or whether the operation status value stored in the operation status storage area 223bf is 0. If it is determined that the ball ejection operation is not completed (S2038: No), the processes of S2031 to S2037 are repeatedly executed until the operation is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation is completed (S2038: Yes), it is determined whether or not the operation status is set to 5 (S2039). If it is determined that 5 is not set in the operation status (S2039: No), +1 is set in the operation status (S2040), the corresponding operation data is set (S2041), and the confirmation display data table is used as the basis. The time data is set in the timekeeping counter (S2042), and the process returns to S2031. On the other hand, if it is determined that the operation status is 5 in the process of S2039 (S2039: Yes), the operation status is reset (S2043), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 313, the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. In the main process in the third control example, the same processes as in S2101 to S2111 of the main process (see FIG. 257) in the first control example are executed, and then the initial discharge operation setting process (S2140) and the operation control process (S2141) are performed. The difference is that and is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the initial discharge operation setting process (S2140), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 313) in the third control example, will be described with reference to FIG. 314. FIG. 314 is a flowchart showing the contents of the initial discharge operation setting process (S2140).

In the initial discharge operation setting process (S2140), first, it is determined whether or not the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is on (S3901). When it is determined that the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is not on (S3901: No), since the ball is not stored in the ball receiving unit 455, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is on (S3901: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the standby counter 223bl is larger than 0 (S3902). When it is determined that the value of the standby counter 223bl is not larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S3902: No), it is determined whether or not the ball discharge flag 223bj is ON (S3903). When it is determined that the ball discharge flag 223bj is not on (S3903: No), it is determined whether or not the storage sensor is on (S3904). When it is determined that the storage sensor is on (S3904: Yes), the ball discharge flag 223bj is set to on (S3905), and the process proceeds to S3906. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball discharge flag 223bj is on in the processing of S3903 (S3903: Yes), or when it is determined that the storage sensor is not on in the processing of S3904 (S3904: No). The process of S3905 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3906.

In the process of S3906, it is determined whether or not any of the jackpot ending command, the variation pattern command, and the customer waiting command has been received (S3906). If it is determined that any of the jackpot ending command, fluctuation pattern command, and customer waiting command has been received (S3906: Yes), the value of the standby counter corresponding to 2 seconds is set (S3907), and this process ends. do. On the other hand, if it is determined that none of the jackpot ending command, fluctuation pattern command, or customer waiting command has been received (S3906: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S3902, when it is determined that the value of the standby counter 223bl is larger than 0 (S3902: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ball discharge flag 223bj is ON (S3908). When it is determined that the ball discharge flag 223bj is not on (S3908: No), it is determined whether or not the storage sensor is on (S3909). When it is determined that the storage sensor is on (S3909: Yes), the ball discharge flag 223bj is set to on (S3910), and the process proceeds to S3911. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball discharge flag 223bj is on in the processing of S3908 (S3908: Yes), or when it is determined that the storage sensor is not on in the processing of S3904 (S3909: No). The process of S3910 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3911.

In the process of S3911, the value of the standby counter 223bl is subtracted by 1 (S3911). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the standby counter 223bl subtracted in the process of S3911 is 0 (S3912). When it is determined that the value of the standby counter 223bl is 0 (S3912: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ball discharge flag 223bj is ON (S3913). When it is determined that the ball discharge flag 223bj is on (S3913: Yes), the discharge operation data is set (S3914), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the standby counter 223bl is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) in the processing of S3912 (S3912: No), or the ball discharge flag 223bj is not turned on in the processing of S3913. If it is determined (S3913: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the operation control process (S2141), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 313) in the third control example, will be described with reference to FIG. 315. FIG. 315 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation control process (S2141). In this operation control process (S2141), a process for controlling the operation of the lower displacement unit 400 is executed according to the gaming state.

In the operation control process (S2141), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit medium flag 223ac or the large hit medium flag 223ab is on, that is, whether the current gaming state is a small hit or a big hit (S4001). If it is determined that the small hit medium flag 223ab or the big hit medium flag 223ab is on, the first operation setting process is executed (S4002), and this process is terminated.

Here, the first operation setting process (S4002), which is one process in the operation control process (S2141), will be described with reference to FIG. 316. FIG. 316 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first operation setting process (S4002). In this first operation setting process (S4002), a process for controlling the operation of the ball receiving unit 445 is executed when the gaming state is a small hit or a big hit.

In the first operation setting process (S4002), first, it is determined whether or not the operation status is 0 (S4101). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the operation status storage area 223bf is 0. When it is determined that the operation status is 0 (S4101: Yes), the operation status is set to 1 (S4102), and the operation data is set in the ball receiving unit 445 (S4103). The operation status 1 is defined in the first operation data 222be (see FIG. 310 (a)), but when the operation status is set to 1, the slide motor KM is driven and is driven in the positive direction from the origin position. Then, when the first sensor is set to ON, it stops. By driving in this way, it is possible to drive the ball flowing in from the third winning opening 82 to a position where it can be received by the ball receiving portion 467.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation status is not 0 in the process of S4101, it is determined whether or not the operation status is 1 (S4104). When it is determined that the operation status is 1 (S4104: Yes), it is determined whether or not the second position sensor is ON (S4105). When it is determined that the second position sensor is not on (S4105: No), the ball receiving unit 445 is not driven to the second position, so the processing of S4106 to S4107 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4108. .. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second position sensor is on, the operation status is set to 2 (S4106) and the operation data is set (S4107). In the operation status 2, a standby is set from the third winning opening 82 until the ball is stored in the ball receiving portion 467.

On the other hand, in the process of S4104, when it is determined that the operation status is not 1, it is determined whether or not the operation status is 2 (S4108). When it is determined that the operation status is 2 (S4108: Yes), it is determined whether or not the storage sensor is on (S4109). When it is determined that the storage sensor is not on (S4109), the processing of S411 to S4111 is skipped and the processing of S4112 is performed because the ball that has entered from the third winning opening 82 is not stored. Transition. On the other hand, in the process of S4109, when it is determined that the storage sensor is on (S4109: Yes), the operation status is set to 3 (S4110), the operation data is set (S4111), and the process proceeds to S4112. do. In the operation status 3, when the ball is stored in the ball receiving portion 467 from the third winning opening 82, the slide motor is driven in the negative direction. And when the origin sensor is set to on, it stops. That is, the ball receiving unit 445 is controlled to return to the origin position once when the ball is stored from the third winning opening 82. Then, the balls stored in the discharge operation setting process (S4004) and the launch operation setting process (S4008), which will be described later, are discharged.

On the other hand, in the process of S4108, when it is determined that the operation status is not 2 (S4108: No), it is determined whether or not the operation status is 3 (S4112). When it is determined that the operation status is 3 (S4112: Yes), it is determined whether or not the origin sensor is ON (S4113). If it is determined that the origin sensor is on (S4113: Yes), the operation status is reset (S4114), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 315, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4001, when it is determined that the small hit medium flag 223bb or the big hit medium flag 223ba is not on (S4001: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit ending flag 223bd is set to on (S4003). .. If it is determined that the small hit ending flag 223db is on (S4003: Yes), the discharge operation setting process (S4004) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 317, the discharge operation setting process (S4004), which is one of the operations in the operation control process (S2141), will be described. FIG. 317 is a flowchart showing the contents of the discharge operation setting process (S4004). In this discharge operation setting process (S4004), a process for controlling the operation of discharging the ball from the ball receiving unit 445 is executed at the timing of the ending of the small hit.

In the discharge operation setting process (S4004), first, it is determined whether or not the origin operation flag 223bh is on. When it is determined that the origin operation flag 223bh is not on (S4201: No), the discharge operation data is set (S4202). Then, it is determined whether the launch position sensor is set to ON (S4203). When it is determined that the firing position sensor is off (S4203: Yes), the origin operation data is set (S4204), the origin operation flag 223bh is set to on (S4205), and the process proceeds to S4206. On the other hand, when it is determined that the origin operation flag 223bh is off in the processing of S4201 (S4201: No), the processing of S4201 to S4205 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4206.

Next, it is determined whether the origin sensor is on (S4206). When it is determined that the origin sensor is on (S4206: Yes), the origin operation flag is set to off (S4207), the small hit ending flag 223db is set to off (S4208), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4206 that the origin sensor is not on (S4206: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Returning to FIG. 315, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4003, when it is determined that the small hit ending flag 223bad is off (S4003: No), it is determined whether or not the big hit round is the eighth round (S4005). If it is determined that the jackpot round is the 8th round (S4005: Yes), the second operation setting process (S4006) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Here, the second operation setting process (S4006), which is one process in the operation control process (S2141), will be described with reference to FIG. 318. FIG. 318 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second operation setting process (S4006). This second operation setting process (S4006) is for raising the lower displacement unit 400 to the firing position in the eighth round of the jackpot and executing the up / down fanning effect when the player presses the frame button 22. It is a control process.

In the second operation setting process (S4006), first, it is determined whether or not the operation status is 0 (S4301). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the operation status storage area 223bf is 0. When it is determined that the operation status is 0 (S4301: Yes), the operation status is set to 1 (S4302), and the operation data is set in the lower displacement unit 400 (S4303). The operation status 1 is defined in the second operation data 222bf (see FIG. 310 (b)), but when the operation status is set to 1, the tilt motor is driven and is driven in the positive direction from the origin position. Then, when the rise sensor is set to on, it stops.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation status is not 0 in the process of S4301 (S4301: No), it is determined whether or not the operation status is 1 (S4304). When it is determined that the operation status is 1 (S4304: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ascending sensor is ON (S4305). When it is determined that the rise sensor is not on (S4305: No), the lower displacement unit 400 is not driven to the first position, so the processing of S4306 to S4307 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4308. On the other hand, when it is determined that the rise sensor is on, the operation status is set to 2 (S4306) and the operation data is set (S4307).

On the other hand, in the process of S4304, when it is determined that the operation status is not 1, it is determined whether or not the operation status is 2 (S4308). When it is determined that the operation status is 2 (S4308: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ascending sensor is ON (S4309). When it is determined that the rise sensor is not on (S4309), the lower displacement unit 400 is in the standby state at the origin position, so that the processing of S431 to S4312 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4313. On the other hand, in the process of S4308, when it is determined that the rise sensor is on (S4309: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S4310). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S4310: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S4310: Yes), the operation status is set to 3 (S4311), the operation data is set (S4312), and the process proceeds to S4313. In the operation status 3, when the ball is stored in the ball receiving portion 467 from the third winning opening 82, the tilting motor is driven in the positive direction. Then, when the lower displacement unit 400 is set to rise by 30 steps, it stops.

On the other hand, in the process of S4308, when it is determined that the operation status is not 2 (S4308: No), it is determined whether or not the operation status is 3 (S4313). When it is determined that the operation status is 3 (S4313: Yes), it is determined whether or not the lower displacement unit 400 has risen by 30 steps (S4314). If it is determined that the lower displacement unit 400 has risen by 30 steps (S4314: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lower displacement unit 400 has risen by 30 steps (S4314: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4315). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S4315: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed in the process of S4315 (S4315: Yes), the operation status is set to 2 (S4316), the operation data is set (S4317), and the present process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 315, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4005, when it is determined that there is no 8th round of the jackpot (S4005: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot ending flag is 223 bc (S4007). When it is determined that the jackpot ending flag 223bc is on (S4007: Yes), the firing operation setting process (S4008) is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot ending flag 223bc is not on (S4007: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Here, with reference to FIG. 318, the firing operation setting process (S4008), which is one of the operations in the operation control process (S2141), will be described. FIG. 318 is a flowchart showing the contents of the firing operation setting process (S4008). This firing motion setting process (S4008) executes a process for firing the ball stored in the first motion setting process (S4002) from the lower displacement unit 400 at the ending of the jackpot.

In the firing operation setting process (S4008), first, it is determined whether or not the rise sensor is on (S4401). If it is determined that the ascending sensor is not on (S4401: No), the descending 30-step data is set (S4402), and the process proceeds to S4411. On the other hand, when it is determined that the rise sensor is on (S4401: Yes), it is determined whether or not the firing effect flag 223be is on, that is, whether or not the firing effect is set (S4403). When it is determined that the firing effect flag 223be is not on (S4403: No), since the firing effect is not set, the firing effect flag 223be is set to on (S4404) and the firing effect is set (S4405). , The process proceeds to S4411.

On the other hand, in the process of S4403, when it is determined that the firing effect flag 223be is on (S4403: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is on (S4406). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is on (S4406: Yes), the processing of S4407 to S4410 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the processing of S4411. When it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S4406: No), the firing effect is set (S4407), and the firing effect flag 223be is set to off (S4408). Next, the firing operation data is set (S4409), the operation flag 223bg during the firing effect is set to ON (S4410), and the process proceeds to S4411.

In the process of S4411, it is determined whether or not the launch position sensor is on (S4411). When it is determined that the firing position sensor is on (S4411: Yes), the origin operation data is set (S4412) and the origin operation flag 223bh is set to ON in order to return the lower displacement unit 400 to the origin position. (S4413), the process proceeds to S4414. On the other hand, in the process of S4411, when it is determined that the launch position sensor is off (S4411: No), the lower displacement unit 400 is not in the launch position, so the processes of S4412 and S4413 are skipped and the process of S4414 is performed. Transition.

After executing the process of S4411 or S4413, it is determined whether the origin sensor is on, that is, whether the lower displacement unit 400 is in the origin position (S4441). When it is determined that the origin sensor is on (S4414: Yes), the jackpot ending flag 223bc is set to off (S4415), the origin operation flag 223bh is set to off (S4416), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4441 that the origin sensor is not on (S44414: No), this process is terminated.

<Fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 320 to 351. In this fourth control example, the configuration of the game board 13 is changed, the control content of the main control device 110 is changed, and the control content of the voice lamp control device 113 is different from the first control example described above. It is different from the changed point. The same elements as those of the first control example described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The major differences between the fourth control example and the first control example described above will be briefly described. In the above-mentioned first control example, the control process of the main control device 110 is executed so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not dynamically displayed at the same time (in parallel). The fourth control example is significantly different in that the control process is executed so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are dynamically displayed at the same time (in parallel).

Further, in the above-mentioned first control example, the pseudo jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165 is configured to be executed while the jackpot game is being executed, whereas in the fourth control example, the pseudo jackpot effect is executed. There is a big difference in that when the latent state is set as the game state, the pseudo jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165 is configured to be executed. Furthermore, there is a big difference in that the contents of the pseudo jackpot production are different.

First, the configuration of the game board 13 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 320 and 321. The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example has a lower first ball entry port 64D in the lower region of the game board 13 with respect to the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above. , A lower electric accessory 64Da attached to the lower first ball opening 64D was provided, and a second variable winning device 650 (second specific winning opening 650a) was provided below the lower first winning opening 64D. The difference is that a special winning device 1550 is provided in place of the special winning device 550 in the right area of the gaming board 13.

The lower first ball entry port 64D is in a state where it is difficult for the ball to enter due to the lower electric accessory 64Da, which is variably controlled from the closed position to the open position where the ball is difficult to enter when the ball is won by lottery of a normal symbol. It is a ball entry means that can set a state in which the ball is easy to enter. When a ball enters the lower first entry port 64Da, the same process as when the ball enters the first entry port 64 is executed.

The lower first ball entry port 64D is arranged at a position that is harder for the player to see than the first ball entry port 64, and is configured in a shape that is harder for the player to see than the first ball entry port 64. It is configured so as not to notify the player that the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the first ball entry port 64D. This makes it difficult for the player to know at what timing the lottery right of Special Figure 1 was acquired. In this control example, the lower first entry port 64D is provided directly under the first entry port 64, and among the balls launched aiming at the first entry port 64, the ball enters the first entry port 64. By configuring the ball that has not been played to enter the lower first winning opening 64D, it is possible to allow the ball to enter the lower first winning opening 64D without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. However, the arrangement position of the lower first ball entry port 64D is not limited to this, and may be provided above the first ball entry port 64 or may be provided in the vicinity of the general winning opening 63 to make it inconspicuous. ..

The second variable winning device 650 is a winning device that is opened when a specific jackpot is won in the lottery shown in FIG. 1. By opening the opening / closing door 650f1, the ball is easily opened and the opening / closing door is opened. By closing the 650f1, the operation is controlled so that the ball is in a closed state in which it is difficult to win a prize. In this control example, when the second variable winning device 650 wins a big hit in which the opening operation is performed, a big hit game in which only a small amount (about 40) of prize balls is given is executed. Therefore, the winning of the jackpot in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened is not the jackpot aimed at winning the prize ball, but is shifted to a gaming state (in this control example, a latent state) that is advantageous to the player. It will be a big hit to aim for. In this way, even if the number of prize balls given to the player by one big hit is small, if the game state advantageous to the player is set after the big hit is completed, the big hit game. (Big hit winning) gives the player a favorable privilege.

Next, with reference to FIG. 321 in this fourth control example, the details of the special winning device 1550 provided in place of the special winning device 550 in the above-mentioned first control example will be described. FIG. 208 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the special winning device 1550. As shown in FIG. 208, in the special winning device 1550 in the fourth control example, the position where the specific general winning opening 163 is arranged with respect to the special winning device 550 in the first control example (front surface of the specific out opening 166). A point where a second entry port 640 is provided on the left side of the view), a point where a pseudo through gate 1167 is provided above the second entry port 640, and a pseudo second entry above the effect flow path 691. At the point where the ball mouth 1640 is provided, on the upstream side of the guidance flow path 690 (around the general throwing portion 690a), a game ball flows down to a flow path different from the guidance flow path 690 (pseudo second entry port 1640). At the point where the branch portion 694a that branches to the second guide flow path 694) is provided, the game ball that has reached the branch portion 694a is allowed to flow down to the guide flow path 690 or to the second lead flow path 694. It is different in that a flow path switching member 695 for switching between flowing down and flowing down is provided. Further, with the relocation of the second ball entry port 640 to the position where the specific general winning opening 163 in the first control example was provided, the second ball entry port 640 was provided in the first control example. The difference is that the position is hollow. Further, the difference is that the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball is detected in the specific winning opening 65a is changed to 10.

As shown in FIG. 321, the second ball entry port 640 in the fourth control example is provided only with a pseudo through gate 1167 above it, and is not provided with any structure for hindering ball entry. When the player hits right, he / she can always enter the ball. More specifically, about 1/3 of the right-handed game ball enters the second entry port 640, and about 2/3 flows into the main path SK1. The branch portion 694a provided at a position where the game ball that has entered the second ball entry port 640 can reach is branched toward the back side of the front view of the general ball throwing unit 690a, and the flow path switching member 695. In the state where the ball is retracted to the retracted position (back side in the front view), the game ball flows down along the inclination of the induction flow path 690, so that the game ball flows down to the second induction flow path 694 via the branch portion 694a. There is no. On the other hand, in the state where the flow path switching member 694a overhangs at the overhanging position shown in FIG. 321, it becomes impossible to proceed in the induction flow path 690. Further, since the flow path switching member 695 is inclined in the direction of guiding the game ball toward the back side of the front view at the overhanging position, the game ball is guided to the branch portion 694a by the inclination of the flow path switching member 695. Is distributed to the induction flow path 694. It should be noted that the flow path switching member 695 temporarily receives a lottery for the second special symbol based on the fact that the ball has entered the second entry port 640 during the execution of the latent probability effect B described later. It is moved to the overhanging position, and after the game ball that triggered the lottery of the second special symbol is distributed to the second guide flow path 694, it is evacuated to the evacuation position.

As shown in FIG. 321, the second guide flow path 694 is provided with a guide flow path sensor 694s capable of detecting the passage of a game ball. When the passage of the game ball is detected by the guidance flow path sensor 694s, the pseudo electric accessory 1640a attached to the pseudo second entry port 1640 is opened for 2 seconds to reach the pseudo second entry port 1640. You will be able to enter the ball. On the most downstream side of the second guide flow path 694, the game ball flowing down the second guide flow path 694 is rolled from the back side of the front view to the front side of the front view and falls to the pseudo second entry port 1640. A ball discharging portion 694b that can be made to be discharged is provided. The gaming ball that has fallen from the ball ejection portion 694b enters the pseudo second entry port 1640 or enters the out port 1640b provided on the left side of the pseudo second entry port 1640. Then, it is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Since the period required for the flow of the second lead flow path 694 is about 1 second, the game ball that has flowed down the second lead flow path 694 is basically the opening period of the pseudo electric accessory 1640a for 2 seconds. In the meantime, the ball enters the pseudo second ball entry port 1640. The out port 1640b has irregularities such as ball clogging, and the purpose is to normally discharge the game ball that has reached the pseudo second entry port 1640 after the opening period of the pseudo electric accessory 1640a has elapsed. It is provided.

As shown in FIG. 321, a pseudo electric accessory 1640a is attached to the pseudo second ball entry port 1640. The pseudo-electric accessory 1640a is opened and closed as a part of the hobby effect (latent effect B) in the latent probability mode (high probability state of the special symbol and low probability state of the normal symbol) which is most advantageous for the player. The details will be described later, but once the mode is changed to the latent probability mode, there is a high probability that the specific winning opening 65a will be opened for 1 second if it is missed in the lottery of the second special symbol (small hit). Will be. As a result, in the latent probability mode, in addition to being able to enter the ball into the second entry port 640 and execute the lottery of the second special symbol by simply continuing to hit right, the second special symbol can be executed. If a small hit is obtained in the lottery, the main routes SK1 to SK3 can be flowed down, and the game ball can be entered into the open specific winning opening 65a. That is, it is in an advantageous state that the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed without reducing the number of balls held. Further, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol in the latent probability mode, the gaming state after the end of the big hit is set to the latent probability mode again unless the probability variation limit number is reached. That is, the latent mode and the jackpot are repeated until the probability variation limit is reached. In this fourth control example, since the probability variation limit number is set to 36 times, the advantageous latent probability mode and the big hit are repeated until the maximum 36 big hits (loop the latent probability mode).

However, the probability variation limit number of times, small hits, etc. are relatively few models installed, and the specifications are not familiar to many players, so it becomes difficult to understand the playability, and the game with the pachinko machine 10 There is a risk that the player will be shunned. Therefore, in the fourth control example, an effect (latent effect B) is executed in which the player is made to recognize the behavior in the advantageous latent mode as if it is a probabilistic state of a general model. It is composed. More specifically, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the latent mode (and the pseudo jackpot effect described later is not executed), the game that triggered the lottery of the second special symbol. A ball (a game ball that has entered the second entry port 640) is allowed to flow down into the second guidance flow path 694 (that is, the flow path switching member 695 is moved to the overhanging position), and the guidance flow path sensor 694s is used. The pseudo electric accessory 1640a is opened at the timing when the passage is detected, and the game ball flowing down the second guide flow path 694 is configured to enter the pseudo second entry port 1640 in the open state. The third symbol display device 81 is configured to execute a jackpot variation display effect after the game ball enters the pseudo second entry port 1640. Further, the board surface configuration is such that the ball cannot enter the second entry port 640 unless it passes through the pseudo through gate 1167. As a result, the player can be made to think that the pseudo electric accessory 1640a is opened based on the passage of the game ball through the pseudo through gate 1167. In addition, it is possible to perform an effect as if a lottery for the second special symbol was executed based on the ball entering the pseudo second ball entry port 1640. That is, a behavior similar to the behavior of a probabilistic state (a gaming state in which the electric accessory is easily released and the probability of a big hit is high) in a general gaming machine (in a favorable probabilistic state, a high probability of passing through the through gate by right-handed). By opening the electric accessory of the second starting port and letting the game ball enter the second starting port, it is possible to realize a behavior that becomes a big hit with a high probability).

In all gaming states (modes) other than the latent probability mode, the behavior is similar to the normal state (a gaming state in which the electric accessory is difficult to be released and the jackpot probability is low) in a general gaming machine. The production mode and the like are set in. As a result, it is possible to realize a well-balanced game that is easy for a wide range of players to understand.

Further, in the fourth control example, in the probability variation mode, an effect (pseudo jackpot effect) is configured to make the jackpot of a plurality of times (for example, five times) appear as if it is one jackpot. More specifically, by making a plurality of rounds (for example, 5 rounds) in the jackpot appear as if they are one round by the production, the number of prize balls in one jackpot is the actual number of prize balls. It can be illusioned as if there are more. Therefore, in the case of a big hit, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of satisfaction. Further, as described above, in the fourth control example, once the latent mode is set, the jackpot and the latent mode are repeated until the maximum hit is 36 times, so that the actual internal state and the production content are linked. If this happens, the jackpot mode and the latent mode are frequently switched, which may make the player feel annoyed. On the other hand, in the fourth control example, a plurality of jackpots (and a latent mode between jackpots) are configured to appear as if they are one jackpot (pseudo jackpot effect), so that the number of jackpots is small. You can feel as if you were able to win more prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed. Further, in the fourth control example, once the latent mode is entered, the latent mode is looped until the probability variation limit is reached, so that the remaining number of jackpots can be easily determined when the latent mode is entered. It becomes possible to grasp. As a result, it is possible to easily determine how many jackpots can be used as one pseudo jackpot effect to clearly end the pseudo jackpot effect at the end of the latent probability mode (that is, when the probability variation limit number is reached). .. Therefore, the pseudo jackpot effect can be executed in a more natural manner.

In the fourth control example, when the latent probability mode is set and the pseudo jackpot effect is not being executed, each time the game ball enters the second entry port 640, the game is entered. The structure was such that the ball was made to enter the pseudo second entrance 1640, and it was made to appear as if the variation display effect of the second special symbol was executed when the ball entered the pseudo second entrance 1640. , Not limited to this. For example, only when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, the game ball that triggered the big hit lottery may be flowed down to the pseudo second entrance ball opening 1640. With this configuration, in the latent mode, when the ball enters the pseudo second entry port 1640, the behavior as if it is a big hit can be realized, so that the pseudo second entry port 1640 can be realized. It is possible to pay attention to whether or not the game ball enters the game. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 322, the flow of the game in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 322 is a transition diagram schematically showing the flow of the gaming state. As shown in FIG. 322, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example is configured to be able to set four gaming states (normal state, probable change state, latent probable state, and time saving state). Then, when the jackpot of the special symbol is won, the high probability state of the special symbol is always set after the jackpot game is completed. In addition, an upper limit is set for the number of times that the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set, and the number of times that the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set reaches the upper limit (probability variation limit state). Only when the jackpot is won, the low probability state (time saving state) of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends.

Further, in the fourth control example, among the gaming states in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the latent probability state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the probability variation state. Further, once the latent state is entered, it is easy to continuously set the latent state until the probability variation limit state is reached. With this configuration, the player can be made to play an advantageous game by shifting to the latent state while the number of times that the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set is small.

When the normal state is set as the game state, the game state in which the lottery of the special figure 1 is mainly performed (the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state is set as a variable time for a long period (for example, 10 minutes)). ), 99.5% of the cases where the jackpot of Special Figure 1 is won shifts to the probable state, and 0.5% shifts to the latent state.

While the probabilistic state is set, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, so that it is easier for the ball to win the lower first entry slot 64D than in the normal state, so the special figure 1 lottery is performed. It will be easier. Further, the jackpot winning probability of the special figure 1 is also set higher than the normal state, and the transition rate to the latent state when the jackpot of the special figure 1 is won is 10 times (5%) the normal state. Since a long time (for example, 10 minutes) is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 lottery even when the probability change state is set, the game state in which the lottery of the special figure 1 is mainly performed even during this probability change state. Will be.

Then, in the latent state, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 lottery is set to a long time (for example, 10 minutes), and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 lottery is set to a short time. It is a game state that is mainly performed, and is configured to allow the player to perform a right-handed game. If a big hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, the latent probability state is set again until the probability variation limit state is reached. In addition, in the special figure 2 lottery, it is set to win a small hit in most cases where a big hit is not won. Therefore, the special figure 2 lottery in the latent state is the lottery most advantageous to the player, and the special figure 2 lottery is the most advantageous game state to the player in the latent state.

If you win the jackpot in the probability variation limit state, the time saving state will be set. In this time-saving state, the lottery of the special figure 1 is mainly performed in the game state, and the big hit lottery of the special figure 1 is executed with the same jackpot probability as in the normal state. Since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the special figure 1 lottery is easier to execute than the normal state. In addition, the time saving state continues until a predetermined condition other than the big hit winning (for example, a condition that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (50 times), a condition that a predetermined number of times (1 time) is won for a small hit, etc.) is satisfied. If a big hit is won during this time saving state, it is configured to shift to the most advantageous latent state for the player with a high probability (95%). By shifting (pulling back) from the time-saving state to the latent state in this way, it is possible to execute the game in the latent state from the first time in which the high-probability state of the special symbol is continuously set. It is possible to provide a player with a game of play.

In this control example, even in the special figure 1 lottery, a small hit is won, and when the small hit is won, the small hit game in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened is executed in the same manner as the big hit winning in the special figure 1. doing. This makes it difficult to grasp the current probability variation number (remaining number of times until the probability variation limit state) based on the number of times the second variable winning device 65 is opened.

In addition, unlike the configuration of this control example, even if it is configured to execute a suggestion effect that suggests the current probability variation number (remaining number of times until the probability variation limit state) to the player based on winning a small hit. good.

Next, with reference to FIG. 323, among the effects executed in the fourth control example, the effects (effect mode) executed according to the set gaming state will be described. FIG. 323 is a transition diagram showing the transition contents of the effect executed in response to the gaming state. As shown in FIG. 323, in the state where the normal state and the probabilistic state are set, the same effect mode (normal effect mode) is set, and whether the player is currently in the normal state or the probabilistic state. Is configured to be difficult to understand. This makes it difficult to easily grasp the number of remaining probability changes up to the probability change limit state.

In this control example, the time saving state is set only when the jackpot is won in the state where the probability variation limit state is reached, so that the normal effect mode is executed without winning the jackpot during the time saving state. Only in this case, it is possible to make the player know that the current state is normal. Therefore, it is possible to provide advantageous game information only to a player who has been playing a game for a long time.

Further, in this control example, the fluctuation time set based on the special drawing 1 lottery is configured to be the same in the normal state and the probabilistic state (configured to use the same fluctuation pattern selection table). There). As a result, it is possible to prevent the current gaming state from being determined by the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 lottery to be executed. Not limited to this, a variable time that can be set only in a probabilistic state or a normal state can be set, and when the variable time is set, the current gaming state can be suggested. You may. Further, it is configured to set the fluctuation time by referring to a different fluctuation pattern selection table according to the current probability variation number (remaining number of times until the probability variation limit state), and according to the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 lottery to be executed. It may be configured so that the player can determine the current number of probable changes.

Next, when shifting to the latent probability state in the state where the normal effect is being executed (the state in which the normal state and the probability change state are set), two effect modes are set according to the current number of probability changes. NS. Specifically, when the latent probability state is set and the remaining number of times until the probability variation limit state is 30 or more, an odd number of doublets (for example, 777) is stopped and displayed as a third symbol indicating a big hit. Then, a latent effect A mode is set in which a pseudo jackpot game effect is executed during the period from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the jackpot game executed in a state where the probability variation limit state is reached.

When the number of remaining times until the probability variation limit state is less than 30 in the state where the latent probability state is set, even-numbered doublets (for example, 666) are stopped and displayed as the third symbol indicating the jackpot. The period from the end of the jackpot game to the end of the jackpot game that is executed when the probability variation limit state is reached, the period until the winning of a predetermined number of jackpots (1 to 5 times), and the game production in the latent state are executed. After that, the latent effect B mode for executing the pseudo jackpot game effect is set for the period until the jackpot is won a predetermined number of times (1 to 5 times).

That is, in this control example, a large number of prize balls are given to the player in two states, a big hit game state and a continuous small hit game state (so-called small hit RUSH) in the latent probability state. However, in the latent state, not only the small hits are won frequently, but also the big hits are won with high probability. If the winning game effect is configured to be executed, there is a problem that the effect becomes complicated and the player executes the effect that is difficult to understand.

On the other hand, in this control example, as described above, in the period in which the latent probability state is set, the period in which the big hit game effect is executed in a pseudo manner regardless of the big hit game or the small hit game, and the pseudo latent It is configured to set a period for executing a certain state game effect (small hit RUSH effect). As a result, it is possible to prevent the performance to be executed from becoming complicated, and to provide the pachinko machine 10 that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, when the probability variation limit state is reached and then the time saving state is set, the pullback mode is set, and a fanning effect is provided to show the player that the game state is easy to shift to the latent state. Will be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 324, the characteristic effect contents in the fourth control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 324 (a), the contents of the pseudo jackpot effect (super jackpot effect) executed during the latent probability effect A mode will be described. FIG. 324 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a pseudo jackpot effect (super jackpot effect) executed during the latent probability effect A mode. The same elements as those of the display screen in the first control example described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 324 (a), in the pseudo jackpot effect (super jackpot effect) executed during the latent probability effect A mode, a comment indicating that the super jackpot is being performed is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the super jackpot is displayed. The acquisition information 803 indicating the number of prize balls given during the production is displayed. Then, a stored image for showing the player with a dynamic image that the acquired information 803 is increasing is displayed in the center. Then, the guidance display Dm9 for guiding the right-handed game to the player is displayed.

Here, during the latent probability effect A mode, the prize ball given during the latent probability state, that is, the prize ball given by the ball played right-handed during the latent probability state wins each winning opening ( All of the balls entered in the second entrance 640 and the prize balls awarded based on the balls entered in the variable winning device 65 by the small hit game) are treated as the prize balls acquired during the big hit game. During the latent probability effect A mode, the flow path switching member 695 (see FIG. 321) is located at the buried position and enters the second entry port 640. The ball is configured to be a ball flow that wins a prize in the pseudo-attacker 165.

As a result, a pseudo jackpot effect is executed in which all the winning balls in the latent state are awarded to the pseudo attacker 165, and a pseudo jackpot effect indicating that the jackpot game is continuously executed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed. Can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute a pseudo jackpot effect during the latent state without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Next, with reference to FIG. 324 (b), among the effects executed in the latent probability effect B mode, the contents of the pseudo latent probability state game effect will be described. FIG. 324 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a pseudo-latent state game effect. As shown in FIG. 324 (b), in the pseudo latent state game production, the character "RUSH" for indicating that the current state is the latent probability game state is displayed, and whether or not the small hit game is executed. (A game in which the character 811 opens the treasure box 812, and if the content of the treasure box 812 is "V", a small hit is won) is executed. This pseudo-latent state game effect is executed during the period during which the jackpot game is performed until the latent probability state and a predetermined number of times are reached, and the jackpot is won and the jackpot is won during the pseudo-latent state game effect. When the game is executed, the acquisition information 803 is notified so that the number of prize balls given during the big hit game and the prize balls given by the small hit game.

Here, during the period during which the pseudo-latent state game effect is being executed during the latent probability effect B mode, the special figure 2 lottery is executed when the ball enters the second entrance 640. Since it is necessary to show the player that, the flow path switching member 695 (see FIG. 321) is located at the protruding position, and the ball that has entered the second entry port 640 flows down toward the pseudo-electric accessory 1640a. It is configured to be a ball flow.

It should be noted that the update timing of the acquisition information 803 displayed in each of the above-mentioned effects and the update timing of the effect mode are pseudo based on the timing when the ball actually wins, as in the first control example described above. The timing at which the ball arrives at the winning opening is predicted, and the timing is set according to the timing based on the prediction result. Since the detailed contents are the same as those of the first control example described above, they will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration of the main control device in the 4th control example>
The ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the fourth control example changes the random number 4 table 202ca per special symbol instead of the random number table 202a per special symbol with respect to the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the first control example described above. The variable pattern selection 4 table 202cc is replaced with the pattern selection table 202b, the normal hit random number 4 table 202cc is replaced with the normal hit random number table 202c, and the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d is replaced with the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202c. The difference is that 202cd1 is replaced with the special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202d2 and the special figure 2 big hit type selection 4 table 202cd2 is provided, and the small hit random number table 202e is replaced with the small hit random number 4 table 202ce.

The RAM of the main control device 110 of the fourth control example has a probability variation flag 203ca, a game state storage area 203cc, a jackpot medium flag 203cc, and a special figure with respect to the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the first control example described above. 1 fluctuation stop flag 203cd, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce, small hit flag 203cf, special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg, special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ch, special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203ci, probability variation upper limit counter 203cj have been added. It differs in that. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the random number 4 table 202ca per special symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 325 (a). The random number 4 per special symbol table 202ca is different from the above-mentioned random number table 202a per special symbol in that the range of the value of the first random number counter C1 which is the big hit of the special symbol is different. Specifically, the range of "0 to 4" in the low probability state of the special symbol and the range of "0 to 39" in the high probability state of the special symbol are defined in the range corresponding to the jackpot. ..

Next, the contents of the small hit random number 4 table 202ce will be described with reference to FIG. 325 (b). Unlike the small hit random number table 202e described above, the small hit random number 4 table 202ce is configured so that each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 wins a small hit. Specifically, in the case of Special Figure 1, the value of the first random number counter C1 is determined to be in the range of "50 to 59", and in the case of Special Figure 2, the range of "50 to 479" is determined to be a big hit. It is stipulated in. That is, in the fourth control example, the small hit is won with a probability of about 1/50 in the lottery of Special Figure 1, and the small hit is won with a probability of about 1 / 1.1 in the lottery of Special Figure 2. It is composed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 325 (c), the contents of the ordinary random number 4 table 202cc will be described. This normal hit random number 4 table 202cc has a point that the element per long open is deleted from the above-mentioned normal hit random number table 202c, and a point that the probability of winning in the low probability state of the normal symbol is lowered, and that it is normal. The difference is that the probability of winning is increased in the high probability state of the symbol, and the other points are the same.

Next, the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd1 will be described with reference to FIG. 326 (a). FIG. 326 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd1. As shown in FIG. 326 (a), when the jackpot of Special Figure 1 is won in the normal state, the first attacker (second variable winning device 650) is opened and the jackpot (big hit) in which the probability change state is set is set. A, jackpot B) and jackpot (big hit C) in which the second attacker (variable winning device 65) is opened and the latent state is set are defined in association with the value of the special hit type counter C2.

Next, the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd2 will be described with reference to FIG. 326 (b). FIG. 326 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd2. As shown in FIG. 326 (b), when the jackpot in Special Figure 2 is won, the jackpot (big hit C) in which the second attacker (variable winning device 65) is opened and the latent state is set is special. It is defined in association with the value of the hit type counter C2.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection 4 table 202cc will be described with reference to FIGS. 327 to 329. As shown in FIG. 327, in this control example, the normal probabilistic change 4 table 202 kb1 used when the normal state and the probabilistic change state are set, and the latent probability use used when the latent probability state is set. It has 4 tables 202 bb2 and 4 tables 202 bb3 for time saving used when a time saving state is set, and a table corresponding to the set gaming state is referred to.

FIG. 328 is a schematic diagram usually showing the contents of the probability variation 4 table 202cb1. As shown in FIG. 328, in this control example, a long-time fluctuation pattern is set as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 in the state where the normal state and the probable change state are set. Therefore, the lottery game of the actual special figure 1 is performed.

FIG. 329 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the latent probability 4 table 202cb2. As shown in FIG. 329 (a), in this control example, a long-time fluctuation pattern is set as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 in the state where the latent probability state is set. Therefore, the lottery game of the actual special figure 2 is performed.

FIG. 329 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time saving 4 table 202 bb3. As shown in FIG. 329 (b), in this control example, a long-time fluctuation pattern is set as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 in the state where the time saving state is set. Therefore, the lottery game of the actual special figure 1 is performed. Then, it is usually specified that the length of the fluctuation time selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 is shorter than that of the probability variation 4 table 202ccb1. Therefore, it is usually possible to execute the special figure 1 fluctuation more efficiently than in the probabilistic state.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 330. FIG. 330 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 203. This control example differs from the first control example described above in that the following configuration is added. Since the other elements are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The probability variation flag 203ca is a flag indicating whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and when it is set to ON, it indicates that the special symbol is in the high probability state. That is, when the probability variation flag 203ca is set to on, the game state is a probability variation state (special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: high probability state) or a latent probability state (special symbol: high probability state, It means that one of (normal symbol: low probability state) is set.

This probability change flag 203ca is set to ON at the end of the jackpot when the winning jackpot type is a jackpot that sets the probability variation state or the latent probability state after the jackpot ends. Then, when the symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit is stopped and displayed, it is set to off.

In this embodiment, as described above, the high-probability state of the special symbol is set based on the jackpot winning of the special symbol, and the high-probability state of the special symbol is continued until the next jackpot is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the special symbol after the high probability state of the special symbol (special symbol high probability state) is set as the special symbol high probability end condition for terminating the high probability state of the special symbol. When the number of fluctuations (number of fluctuations in the special figure) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), the probability variation flag 203ca may be set to off. In this case, in order to set the timing to turn off the probability change flag 203ca, a storage means for storing the number of special figure fluctuations as the special figure high probability end condition in advance and a storage means after the special figure high probability state is set are set. End determination to determine whether the number of special figure fluctuations measured by the measuring means and the special figure fluctuation number measured by the measuring means satisfy the special figure fluctuation number (special figure high probability end condition) stored in the storage means. Means and means may be provided.

Further, a plurality of special figure high-accuracy end conditions are prepared, for example, the special figure 1 high-accuracy end condition and the variation of the second special symbol that can be satisfied based only on the number of changes of the first special symbol in the special figure high-accuracy state. Various special figure 2 high probability end conditions that can be established based only on the number of times, and lottery end conditions that can be established when the lottery result of the special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a lottery result of winning a small hit). The special figure high probability end condition may be facilitated, and the probability change flag 203ca may be set to off when any of the special figure high probability end conditions is satisfied.

The special figure 1 jackpot flag is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on entering the first ball entry port 64 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. This is the flag to be set. This special figure 1 jackpot flag is set to off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot.

When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol ends while the special figure 1 jackpot flag is on, the process of forcibly stopping the second special symbol with the off symbol is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem in which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit while the other is being executed.

The special figure 2 jackpot flag is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on entering the second entry port 640 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. This is the flag to be set. This special figure 2 jackpot flag is set to off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot.

When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol ends while the special figure 2 jackpot flag is on, the process of forcibly stopping the first special symbol with the off symbol is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem in which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit while the other is being executed.

The game state storage area 203cc is a storage area for storing information indicating the currently set game state and the game state at the time when the jackpot is won. Specifically, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (if the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203j is 0 and the probability variation flag 203ca is off), the game state storage area 203cb is in the winning state. "00H" is stored in the area as information indicating the normal state. On the other hand, if the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the probability change state (if the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203j is 1 or more and the probability change flag 203ca is on), the game state storage area 203cc is set to the winning state area. , "01H" is stored as information indicating the probability change state. Further, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the latent state (if the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203j is 0 and the probability change flag 203ca is on), the game state storage area 203cc is set to the winning state area. , "02H" is stored as information indicating the latent state.

The information stored in the game state storage area 203cc is retained until the end of the jackpot, and is referred to when setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

The small hit flag 203cf is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the entry into the second entry port 640 matches the small hit determination value at the start of fluctuation. It is a flag to be set. The small hit flag 203cf is set to off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol ends with the small hit flag 203cf turned on, the fluctuation of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (the counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the special symbol is subtracted). The process to stop) is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a problem that a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol and the big hit is started during the small hit while the small hit of the second special symbol is being executed. can.

The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ch and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203ci are counters for measuring the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, and are the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When the fluctuation pattern of the symbol is selected, the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern is set. Whether or not the fluctuation time of each special symbol has ended is determined by the time measurement results of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ch and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203ci.

The jackpot middle flag 203cc is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot is being hit. If the jackpot medium flag 203cc is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot, and if it is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot. This jackpot middle flag 203cc is set to on when the start of the jackpot is set. On the other hand, it is set to off in the jackpot end processing executed at the end of the jackpot.

The small hit medium flag is a flag indicating whether or not the small hit is in progress. If the small hit medium flag is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a small hit, and if it is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a small hit. This small hit medium flag is set to on when the start of small hits is set. On the other hand, it is set to off at the end of the small hit.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to win a small hit with the second special symbol, and when the small hit is won (when the small hit medium flag is set to ON), the first It is configured to interrupt the variable display of special symbols. That is, among the multiple types of special symbols (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol), one of the special symbols (2nd special symbol) is selected by lottery to win a small hit, and the small hit medium flag is set to ON. In this state, the variation display of the other special symbol (first special symbol) does not end, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the small hit game and play the game. Further, during the small hit game, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from ending and the big hit game from starting.

In this control example, the first special symbol is also configured to win a small hit in the same manner as the second special symbol described above. Since the processing when a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol is the same as the processing when the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is a flag indicating that the fluctuation of the first special symbol is the period from the stop display (confirmed display) of the jackpot stop symbol to the start of the jackpot. When this special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is set to on, the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided even when a new ball is entered into the second entry port 640. Will be done. This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is set to on when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped by a missed symbol, and is set to off when the process for executing the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided. NS.

In this control example, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cd in which the target is changed from the special figure 2 to the special figure 1 is provided for the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce, but the content thereof is described above. Since the difference is only in that the target of the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is changed from the special figure 2 to the special figure 1, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the period for opening the first specific winning opening 65a is set to 1.5 seconds as the game content of the small hit game, and the end condition of the round established by the number of winnings is set to 10. doing. That is, the valid period (1.5 seconds) of the round game elapses by the time 10 balls are won in the first specific winning opening 65a during the small hit game (until the round end condition for the number of winnings is satisfied). It will be. Therefore, since the period of the small hit game can be fixed, the effect straddling the small hit game (the period from the start of the change of one special symbol to the end of the change of the other special symbol via the small hit game). It is possible to predetermine the production period of a series of productions to be performed. Therefore, the fluctuation timing of the special symbol and the execution timing of the effect can be easily synchronized, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is a flag indicating a period for stopping the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1, and when it is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped. When the state set to on is set to off, the update (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is restarted.

This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to on when stopping the change of the second special symbol (special figure 2) whose lottery result is a small hit, and is referred to in the special symbol change processing (see FIG. 32). NS. As a result of reference, when it is set to ON, the process of updating the display of the first symbol display device corresponding to the special figure 1 is executed in the same manner as during the change. That is, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped, but the fluctuation display is continuously executed in the first symbol display device. Become. As a result, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped by setting the temporary stop flag 203cg of the special figure 1 to ON. Then, when it is determined that it is set to on in the process during execution of the first special symbol change, it is set to off.

In addition, in this embodiment, since only the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be able to win the small hit, the special symbol whose variation display is temporarily stopped based on the winning of the small hit is the first special. Only symbols are available, but if the lottery for the first special symbol is configured so that a small hit can be won, even if the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is provided to temporarily stop the variation display of the second special symbol. good.

The probability change upper limit counter 203cj is a counter for setting an upper limit value in which the probability change state is continuously set. In this control example, the upper limit number of times that the probability change state is continuously set after the end of the big hit is specified (36 times). Then, the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is referred to when determining whether or not the number of times in which the probability variation state is continuously set has reached the upper limit number of times. The value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is incremented by 1 each time the probability variation state is set at the end of the jackpot game. Then, the value of the counter is cleared when the normal state or the time saving state is set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit, it is based on the fact that one special symbol is stopped in the combination indicating the big hit (based on the execution of the big hit game). ), The process of forcibly stopping the variable display of the other special symbol, and if the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit, one special symbol is stopped by the combination indicating the small hit. Based on this, the variable display of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped until the small hit game is completed).

That is, it is configured so that the variable display of the other special symbol can be processed in various modes according to the lottery result of one special symbol. With this configuration, the lottery result of one special symbol becomes the most advantageous game result (for example, big hit) for the player, and while the variable display for showing the game result is being executed, the other The special symbol (the lottery result is a small hit) is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to prevent the big hit from being erased by the small hit.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example>
Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 331. The RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example is different from the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above in that an effect mode storage area 223ca and a probability variation upper limit number counter 223cc are added. ing. Other than that, they are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The effect mode storage area 223ca is an area for storing the currently set effect mode. In the fourth control example, as the effect mode set when the latent state is set as the game state, the pseudo jackpot effect that simulates the jackpot game effect executed during the jackpot game (FIG. 324 (FIG. 324). The latent effect A mode that executes a)) and the latent state that is set continuously are divided into predetermined periods (for example, the period until the jackpot is won three times), and each division is simulated. The latent probability effect B mode for executing the latent probability game effect (see FIG. 324 (b)) can be set.

In this effect mode storage area 223ca, a jackpot is won in a game state (normal state, probability variation state, time saving state) other than the latency state, and the probability variation upper limit counter 223cc when the latency state is set after the jackpot game is completed. The effect mode selected based on the value of is stored. Then, while the latent state is continuously set, the same effect mode is stored, and the information (effect mode) stored based on the fact that the game state other than the latent state is set is cleared. NS.

The probability variation upper limit number counter 223cc is a counter for measuring the number of times that the high probability state (probability variation state, latent probability state) of the special symbol is continuously set, and is a counter for continuously setting the high probability of the special symbol. It is referred to when determining whether the number of states (probability change state, latent state) has reached the upper limit number of times (for example, 36 times). This probability variation upper limit counter 223cc is cleared when the counter value is incremented by 1 when the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends, and when the high probability state of the special symbol is not set after the jackpot game ends. NS.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the 4th control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 332 to 347. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

First, with reference to FIG. 332, the contents of the special symbol variation processing 4 (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in this control example will be described. FIG. 332 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation processing 4 (S104). When the special symbol variation process 4 (S104) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current is a big hit or a small hit (S4501), and if it is determined that the current is a big hit or a small hit (S4501: Yes). ), Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON (S4502). In the process of S4502, it is determined whether the subtraction of the other special figure fluctuation time during the change is interrupted by the stop display of one special figure with the symbol indicating the hit. When it is determined in the processing of S4502 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON (S4502: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the temporary stop special figure is updated. (S4503), that is, the process of continuing the variable display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed for the special figure in which the subtraction of the variable time is interrupted, and this process is terminated. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the special figure fluctuation has not been forcibly stopped.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4501, when it is determined that the current is a big hit or a small hit (S4501: No), is the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ch larger than 0 (that is, the special figure 1 changes)? (S4504), and if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ch is not larger than 0 (0) (S4504: No), the first special symbol fluctuation start processing is performed. (S4508) is executed, and then the process proceeds to S4509, which executes the variation processing related to the special figure 2. The details of the first special symbol change start processing (S4508) will be described later with reference to FIG. 333.

In the process of S4504, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ch is larger than 0 (S4504: Yes), the first special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4505) is executed. The first special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4505) executes the process during the special diagram 1 variation, and a detailed description thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 336.

After finishing the first special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4505), it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the variation time (whether the variation time counter 203ch of the special figure 1 is 0) (S4506), and the variation time. If it is determined that it is the end timing of (S4506: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S4507) is executed, and then the process proceeds to S4509. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4506 that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation time (S4506: No), the processing of S4507 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4509.

In the processing of S4509 to S4513, the same processing as that of S4504 to S4507 executed for the special figure 1 is executed. When the processing of S4509 is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203ci is larger than 0 (that is, whether the special figure 2 is changing) (S4509), and the special figure 2 change. If it is determined that the value of the time counter 203ci is not larger than 0 (0) (S4509: No), the second special symbol variation start process 4 (S4510) is executed, and then this process ends. The details of the second special symbol change start processing 4 (S4510) will be described later with reference to FIG. 338.

On the other hand, in the process of S4509, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203ci is larger than 0 (S4509: Yes), the second special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4511) is executed. The second special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4511) executes the process during the special diagram 2 variation, and will be described later with reference to FIG. 343.

After finishing the second special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4511), it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the variation time (whether the variation time counter 203ci in the special figure 2 is 0) (S4512), and the variation time. If it is determined that it is the end timing of (S4512: Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (S4513) is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4512 that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation time (S4512: No), the process of S4513 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 333, the first special symbol variation start process (S4508), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (S104 in FIG. 332) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. .. FIG. 333 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start processing (S4508).

In the first special symbol change start processing (S4508), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is acquired (S4601), and the value of the acquired first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d (N1). ) Is a value greater than 0 (S4602). In the process of S4602, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S4602: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set. After subtracting 1 (S4603), a hold ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the hold ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d after the subtraction is set (S4604). ..

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol hold ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store in 223c. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

When the processing of S4604 is completed, the data of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is then shifted to the previous data (S4605). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

When the processing of S4605 is completed, the first special symbol jackpot determination processing is then executed (S4606). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (S4606) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 334, but the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. This is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not a jackpot is a jackpot based on the set gaming state.

When the processing of S4606 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 4 is next executed (see FIG. 335). Although the details will be described later, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S4607), the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol and the variation type stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. This is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on the value of the counter CS1.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S4607) is completed, it is then determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is larger than 0 (S4608). When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203j is larger than 0 (S4608: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203j is subtracted by 1 (S4609), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4608, when it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is not a value larger than 0 (S4608: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4602 that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S4602: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 334, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S4606), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S4504 in FIG. 333) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. explain. FIG. 334 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S4606). In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, whether or not the jackpot was won in the other special symbol lottery during the period during which the fluctuation display (big hit fluctuation) in which the jackpot was won in one of the special symbols is executed. It is configured so that no discrimination is made.

In other words, in a state where it is confirmed that the jackpot game will be executed after a predetermined period (after the fluctuation time has elapsed) by one special symbol lottery, the jackpot will be won by the other special symbol lottery, and multiple times in a short period of time. It is configured to prevent the jackpot from being won and giving excessive benefits.

In this way, the process of acquiring various counter values is performed in the same manner as in the normal special symbol lottery, the determination based on the various counter values acquired in the process is skipped, and the outlier symbol is set. It is possible to respond quickly to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S4606), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S4701). Next, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203ca is set to ON (S4702). That is, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in a high probability state (probability change state, latent probability state). When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203ca is on (that is, the probability variation state of the special symbol) (S4702: Yes), the random number value that becomes the jackpot specified in the first random number table 202a for high probability time. And whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer matches is determined, and the determination result (lottery result) is acquired (S4703). On the other hand, in the process of S4702, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203ca is off (that is, it is a low probability state of the special symbol) (S4702: No), the first random number table 202a for the low probability time is displayed. It is determined whether or not the specified random number value that becomes a big hit and the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer match, and the lottery result is acquired (S4704).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in S4703 or S4704 is a big hit (S4705), and if the lottery result is a big hit (S4705: Yes), the special figure 1 big hit flag 203ck is set for the first special symbol. It is set to ON (S4706), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a jackpot (S4707). Then, based on the acquired value of the hit type counter, the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S4709), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4705, when it is determined that the lottery result is out of order (S4705: No), the out-of-order symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S4709), and then. , End this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 335, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S4607), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S4508 of FIG. 333), will be described. FIG. 335 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S4607).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S4607 in FIG. 335), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S4606 in FIG. 334), the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot, that is, It is determined whether or not the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S4801). Here, the determination of whether or not the jackpot is a big hit is determined by whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is on. This special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is set to ON in the process of S4707 in the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 334).

When it is determined in the process of S4801 that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S4801: Yes), the first obtained in the process of S4701 in the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 334). Based on the value of the 1-per-type counter C2, the jackpot type is determined from the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 table 202d1 (see FIG. 326 (a)) (S4802), and the process proceeds to S4803.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4801 that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of order (that is, the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is off) (S4801: No), the processing of S4802 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S4803.

In the process of S4803, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S4803). Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 327 to 329) according to the gaming state is read out (S4804), and the process proceeds to S4805. The gaming state is determined based on the state of the probability change flag 203ca and the value of the time reduction counter 203f. In the process of S4805, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S4805), and then the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern (S4805). S4806).

When the processing of S4806 is completed, the special figure 1 stop type command indicating the stop symbol is set (S4807), then the change start of the first special symbol is set by the first symbol display device 37 (S4808), and the processing of S4805 is set. A value indicating the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in 1 is set in the fluctuation time counter 203ch of the special figure 1, and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 336, of the first special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4505) executed in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S154 of FIG. 332) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Explain the contents. FIG. 336 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4505). In the first special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4505), when the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure 1 is interrupted, the process of restarting the subtraction and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed.

When the first special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4505) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON (S4901). Here, a case where this process is executed with the temporary stop flag 203cg of Special Figure 1 set to ON will be briefly described. As described above, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to on when the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a hit (small hit) while the special figure 1 is changing. Then, when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON, the jackpot middle flag 203o is set to ON in the process, so that the timer interrupt executed every 2 milliseconds by the main control device 110 is performed. When the process loops and the next special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 332) is executed (after 2 milliseconds when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203 cg is set to ON), a big hit is made in the process of S4501. Therefore, the first special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4505) is not executed. Then, when the big hit game (or small hit game) is completed and it is determined in the process of S4501 that the game is not during the big hit (or during the small hit), the first special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4505) is executed. Will be. With this configuration, the state in which the first special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4505) is executed while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to the big hit (or small hit) game. Is completed, and the timing is set so that the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation, which has been suspended from the subtraction of the fluctuation time, is resumed.

Returning to FIG. 336, the explanation will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S4901 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to on (S4901: Yes), then the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is set (S4902), and the special figure 1 provisional stop flag 203cg is set. The stop flag 203cg is set to off (S4903), and the process proceeds to S4904. On the other hand, in the processing of S4901 when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is not set to on (set to off) (S4901: No), the processing of S4902 and S4903 is skipped and S4904. Move to the processing of.

In the process of S4904, the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ch is decremented by 1 and updated (S4904), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S4905), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 337, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S4507), which is one of the special symbol variation processing 4 (S154 of FIG. 332), will be described. FIG. 337 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S4507).

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S4507), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is set to ON for the first special symbol (special figure 1) (S5001). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is set to on for the first special symbol (S5001: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is set to on (S5002), and the special figure is set. 2 A special figure 2 indicating that the fluctuation stop flag 203ce is turned on is set (S5003). Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with a detached symbol (S5004).

When the processing of S5004 is completed, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203ci is set to 0 (S5005), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203cl is set to ON (S5006). The stored information for the special figure 2 jackpot is deleted (S5008), and the process proceeds to S5009. On the other hand, in the process of S5006, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203cl is set to off (S5006: No), the processes of S5007 to S5008 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S5009.

After executing the process of S5006 or S5008, the jackpot scenario is set (S5009). Next, the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck, the probability change flag 203ca, and the time saving / medium counter 203j are reset (S5010), the jackpot medium flag 203cc is set to ON (S5011), and the process proceeds to S5012. On the other hand, even when it is determined in the process of S5001 that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is not on (S5001: No), the process proceeds to the process of S5012.

In the process of S5012, a special figure 1 confirmation command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the first special symbol is confirmed and stopped is set (S5012). After that, a process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is variablely displayed by the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S5013), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the first special symbol stop process (S4507), the process (S5002 to S5009) of stopping the variable display with the symbol showing the determination result of the first lottery game is executed. Further, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a big hit (S5001: Yes), the process of forcibly stopping the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner (S5003, S5004) is executed.

In the fourth control example, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed by the jackpot symbol, the second special symbol being displayed in the variable manner is forcibly stopped and displayed by the off symbol. It is not limited to. For example, at the time when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol may be interrupted (temporarily stopped). Then, after the jackpot of the first special symbol is completed, the variable display of the second special symbol may be restarted. As a result, it is possible to produce a natural aspect as compared with the case where the forced stop is caused by the detachment.

Next, with reference to FIG. 338, the contents of the second special symbol variation start process 4 (S4510) executed in the special symbol variation process 4 (FIG. 332) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. do. FIG. 338 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol change start processing 4 (S4510). In the second special symbol change start processing 4 (S4510), a process for starting the change of the special figure 2 is executed. It should be noted that, in response to the above-mentioned processing related to the fluctuation of the first special symbol with reference to FIGS. 333 to 337, the target of the variation is simply changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. The detailed description of the element will be omitted.

In the second special symbol change start processing 4 (S4510), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 change stop flag 203ce is set to ON (S5101). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is set to on (S5101: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is set to off (S5102), and this process is terminated. As described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is a flag that is set to be turned on while displaying the stop of the second special symbol with the stop symbol corresponding to the deviation when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol ends. .. That is, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is on, it means that the jackpot is started, so that the fluctuation start of the second special symbol should not be set. Therefore, when the variation stop flag 203ce in FIG. 2 is turned on in the process of S5101, the present process is terminated as it is without executing each process of S5102 to S5107 for setting the variation start.

On the other hand, in the process of S5101, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is set to off (that is, it is not set to on) (S5101: No), the second special symbol execution area Acquire data (various counter values) (S5103). Next, it is determined whether or not there is acquired data based on the data acquired in the process of S5103 (S5104). That is, when it is determined that there is no data in the second special symbol execution area (S5104: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5103, when it is determined that there is data (S5104: Yes), the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 for executing the jackpot determination of the second special symbol based on each stored counter value. Is executed (S5105). The details of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 will be described later with reference to FIG. 339.

When the process of S5105 is completed, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 for selecting the variation pattern is executed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol and the data acquired in the process of S5103 (S5106). ). The details of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S5106) will be described later with reference to FIG. 341. After the processing of S5106 is completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203j is larger than 0 (S5107). When it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is larger than 0 (S5107: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is subtracted by 1 (S5108), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5107, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203j is 0, that is, it is determined that the time reduction is not in progress (S5107: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 339, the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S5105), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process 4 (S4510 in FIG. 338) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. ) Will be explained. FIG. 339 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S5105).

In the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S5105), the same process as the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 334) is executed, so that the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 334) is executed. The differences from the above will be mainly explained.

When the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S5105) is executed, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area is acquired (S5201). Then, the processes of S5202 to S5204 for acquiring the lottery result of whether or not it is a big hit are executed based on each acquired counter value and the state of the probability change flag 203ca. The only difference between these processes is that the counter value used for the lottery (judgment) is acquired from the second special symbol execution area, and the other controls are the same as those of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 334). Is executed.

When the processing of S5203 or S5204 is completed, it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a big hit (S5205), and if it is determined to be a big hit (S5205: Yes), the lottery result of the second special symbol is obtained. The processes of S5206 to S5208 for setting the jackpot are executed, and this process is terminated. In each of these processes S5206 to S5208, the same processes as those of S4706 to S4708 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol to the jackpot are executed in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 334). Will be done.

On the other hand, in the process of S5205, when it is determined that the lottery result of the acquired second special symbol is not a big hit (S5205: No), a stop symbol corresponding to a small hit or a miss of the second special symbol is set. The special figure 2 deviation variation processing 4 is executed (S5209), and this processing is terminated. The details of the special figure 2 deviation variation processing 4 (S5209) will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 deviation variation processing 4 (S5209).

In the special figure 2 deviation variation processing 4 (S5209), first, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in the processing of S5203 or S5204 of FIG. 339 is a small hit of the second special symbol (S5301), and the lottery result is small. When it is determined that it is a hit (S5301: Yes), the small hit flag 203cf is set to ON (S5302), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to the small hit (S5303). Then, the small hit symbol indicating the small hit type corresponding to the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is set as the stop symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S5304), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5301 that the lottery result is out of order (S5301: No), the out-of-order symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S5305), and then. This process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 341, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S4510 of FIG. 338), which is one of the second special symbol variation start processes 4 (S4510 in FIG. 338) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 ( S5106) will be described. FIG. 341 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S5106).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S5106 in FIG. 341), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area (S5401). Next, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S5105 in FIG. 339), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot of the second special symbol is set. (S5402). Here, the determination as to whether or not the jackpot is a big hit is determined by whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203cl is turned on for the second special symbol. The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203cl is set to ON in the process of S5207 in the above-mentioned second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see FIG. 339).

When it is determined in the process of S5402 that the jackpot of the second special symbol is set (S5402: Yes), the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 328 and 329) corresponding to the current gaming state is read out. (S5403). Then, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S5201 in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see FIG. 339) described above, the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd2 (FIG. 326 (b). )) To determine the jackpot type (S5404).

When the processing of S5404 is completed, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S5405), and then the special figure 2 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern. (S5406). Then, the process proceeds to S5408.

On the other hand, in the process of S5402, when it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is not set (S5402: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 4 (S5407) is executed, and the process of S5408 is executed. Move to.

In the process of S5408, a special figure 2 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S5408). Next, the variation start of the second special symbol is set by the first symbol display device 37 (S5409), and the value indicating the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the process of S5405 is set in the special figure 2 variation time counter 203ci (S). S5410), this process is terminated.

Next, the special FIG. 2 deviation pattern selection process 4 (S5407) will be described with reference to FIG. 342. FIG. 342 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation pattern selection process 4 (S5407).

In the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 4 (S5407 in FIG. 342), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S5501). Here, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203cf is set to ON (S5501). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203cf is on (S5501: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area (S5502). Then, the small hit type is selected based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type selection table 202ce (not shown) (S5503).

Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 327 to 389) corresponding to the current gaming state is read (S5504), and the variation pattern of the small hit corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is read from the read variation pattern selection table. Is selected (S5505). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command indicating the selected small hit fluctuation pattern is set (S5506), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5501, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is out of order) (S5501: No), the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current gaming state (FIG. (See 327 to FIG. 389) is read (S5507), and an outlier variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S5508). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is set (S5509) based on the selected deviation pattern, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 343, the second special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4511), which is one of the processes in the special symbol variation process (see S154 in FIG. 332) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. I will explain the contents of. FIG. 343 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4511). In the second special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4511), when the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure 2 is interrupted, the process of restarting the subtraction and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed.

When the second special symbol change execution processing 4 (S4511) is executed, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203ci is subtracted by 1 and updated (S5601), and the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated. The display is updated (S5602), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 344, the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (S4513) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 344 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (S4513). The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (S4513) executes a process for stopping the fluctuation of the special figure 2.

When the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (S4513) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203cl is set to ON (S5701), and the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203cl is set to ON. If it is determined that the command is present (S5701: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the stop of the special figure 1 fluctuation is set (S5703). Next, when the processing of S5703 is completed, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with a detached symbol (S5704). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is on (S5706). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is on (S5706: Yes), the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is set to off (S5707), and the stored information for the special figure 1 jackpot is deleted (S5708). , S5709. On the other hand, in the process of S5706, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is off (S5706: No), the processes of S5707 to S5708 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S5709.

In the process of S5709, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S5709), and the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203cl, the probability change flag 203ca, and the time saving / medium counter 203j are reset (S5710). Next, the jackpot middle flag 203cc is set to ON (S5711), and the process proceeds to S5712.

In the process of S5712, a special figure 2 confirmation command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the second special symbol is confirmed and stopped is set (S5712). After that, a process of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol that is variablely displayed by the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S5713), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5701, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203cl is not set to ON (S5701: No), the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 4 is executed (S5702), and the above-mentioned S5712, The process of S5713 is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 345, the special figure 2 deviation stop process 4 (S5702), which is one process of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (S4513 of FIG. 344), will be described. FIG. 345 is a flowchart showing the special drawing 2 off-off stop process 4 (S5702). In this special figure 2 loss stop process 4 (S5702), when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is other than a big hit (small hit, miss), the special figure 2 showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a small hit, the process for temporarily stopping the change of the special figure 1 being executed is executed.

In the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 4 (S5702), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203cf is set to ON (S5801). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203 cf is set to ON (S5801: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203 cg is set to ON (S5802). Next, a special figure 1 temporary stop command indicating that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203 cg is turned on is set (S5803).

When the processing of S5803 is completed, a small hit scenario based on the selected small hit type is set (S5804). After that, the small hit flag 203cf is set to off (S5805), and the small hit medium flag 203g is set to on (S5806).

When the processing of S5806 is completed, a special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the second special symbol is set (S5807). After that, the second special symbol, which is variablely displayed by the first symbol display device 37, is stopped to change at the small hit symbol (S5808), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5801 that the small hit flag 203cf is off (that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order) (S5801: No), the second special symbol is fixedly stopped. A special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to do so is set (S5809). After that, the second special symbol that is variablely displayed by the first symbol display device 37 is deviated and stops variable at the symbol (S5810), and this process is terminated.

As described above, since the control of the variation display between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is independently and can be executed in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are varied at the same time. It can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to execute a lottery game with more special symbols within a predetermined time, and it is possible to increase the probability that the player will be given a big hit within the predetermined time. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

In this control example, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be configured to be variablely displayed in a state where the temporary stop or the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special symbol is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode in which the player can know that the temporary stop is in progress, so that the player loses the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display. You can know that you haven't done so, and you can play big hit games with confidence.

Next, the normal symbol variation processing (S156) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 346. FIG. 346 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S156). This normal symbol variation process (S156) is executed in the timer interrupt process, and the variation display and variation time of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83, the lower electric motor attached to the lower first ball entry port 64D. This is a process for controlling the opening operation and opening time of the accessory 64Da.

In this normal symbol variation processing (S156 in FIG. 346), first, it is determined whether or not the current symbol is hit by the normal symbol (second symbol) (S5901). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the lower electric accessory 64Da attached to the lower first entrance ball opening 64D is being made while the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the hit. Is included in the process of being done. As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S5901: Yes), a new normal symbol change (lottery) cannot be started (executed), so that it is as it is. This process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S5901: No), then whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (normal symbol is changing). When it is determined (S5902) and it is determined that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not changing (normal symbol changing) (S5902: No), that is, even if the normal symbol is currently hit, the normal symbol changes. If it is determined that there is no such state, that is, it is possible to start (execute) a new normal symbol change (lottery), the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203e (hold of change display in the normal symbol). The number of times M) is acquired (S5903).

Next, when it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S5904), and it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0. (S5904: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S5904: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S5905). The data stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S5906).

In the process of S5906, the data stored in the normal symbol hold first to fourth areas of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, normal symbol hold 1st area → execution area, normal symbol hold 2nd area → normal symbol hold 1st area, normal symbol hold 3rd area → normal symbol hold 2nd area, normal symbol hold 4th area → Shift the data in each area, such as the 3rd area for holding normal symbols. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S5907).

Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is larger than 0 (S5908). When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203j is larger than 0 (S5908: Yes), since it is in the time reduction state, the lottery result is acquired based on the normal random number 4 table 202cc for high probability time (S5909). ). Specifically, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "205-232", the normal symbol is out of order. It is determined that. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S5908 that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is not larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S5908: No), it is based on the normal random number 4 table 202cc for low probability. Then, the lottery result is acquired (S5910). Specifically, the lottery result is acquired based on the random number 4 table 202cc of the normal symbol for low probability. If the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5", it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 6 to 232", it is determined that the normal symbol is out of order. do.

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S5909 or S5910 is a hit of the normal symbol (S5911), and when it is determined that the lottery result is a hit of the normal symbol (S5911: Yes). ), Set the display mode at the time of hit (S5912), and proceed to the process of S5914. In the process of S5911, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "○" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

On the other hand, in the process of S5911, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S5911: No), the display mode at the time of out of alignment is set (S5913), and the process proceeds to S5914. In the process of S5913, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S5914. When the processing of S5912 or the processing of S5913 is completed, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined based on the value of the normal symbol variation type counter (S5914), and this processing is terminated.

When the processing of S5912 or S5914 is completed, in the processing of S591, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol (S5911), and the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol. If it is determined to be in the state) (S5911: Yes), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device is set to 3 seconds (S5913), and then the normal symbol short fluctuation flag 203t is set to ON. (S5914), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol (it is the low probability state of the normal symbol) (S5911: No), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device. Is set to 10 seconds (S5915), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5902 that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S5902: Yes), the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S5915). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S5910 or the process of S5912 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

If it is determined in the process of S5915 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S5915: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5915, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S5915: Yes), then the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S5916). In the processing of S5916, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the processing of S5912, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighting display) in the second symbol display device. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is out of order and the display mode is set by the process of S5913, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. Is set. The period during which the second symbol is stopped and displayed is longer than the period during which one part of the blinking display (alternate display of "○" and "×") indicating that the second symbol is changing is turned on. It is configured to be (confirmed display). This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp that the second symbol has been stopped and displayed.

After finishing the processing of S5916, next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation processing (S156) (this lottery result). However, it is determined whether or not it is a hit of a normal symbol (S5917). If it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S5917: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S5917: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is larger than 0 (S5918).

In the process of S5918, when it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is 0, that is, when it is determined that the gaming state at the timing when the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol this time is started is the normal state (S5919). : No), the opening time of the lower electric accessory 64Da is set to 0.9 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S5920), and the process proceeds to S5921.

On the other hand, in the process of S5918, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203j is larger than 0, that is, when it is determined that the gaming state at the timing when the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol this time is started is the time reduction state. (S5918: Yes), the opening period of the lower electric accessory 64Da attached to the lower first entry port 64D is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S5924), and the process proceeds to S5923. do.

As described above, in this control example, the timing at which the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol is executed and the timing at which the opening operation of the lower electric accessory 64Da executed based on the winning of the normal symbol is set are set. Is configured to set an opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player as the opening operation of the lower electric accessory 64Da only when both are in the time saving state.

With this configuration, it is possible to strictly set the conditions for setting the opening operation that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, for example, a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed in a state where the normal state is set as the game state (for example). Even if the time reduction state is set before the fluctuation time (10 seconds) of the normal symbol is set after the execution of the fluctuation) is executed and the winning is won, the long opening is set as the operation of the lower electric accessory 64Da. There is no such thing. Similarly, in the change of the normal symbol (lottery) executed in the state where the time saving state is set, the normal state is set as the game state until the change of the normal symbol is stopped. Even in this case, the long opening of the lower electric accessory 64Da is not set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous privilege (long opening of the lower electric accessory 64Da).

Further, since it is possible to prevent the lower electric accessory 64Da from being opened for a long time in a state where the normal state is set as the game state, a lottery of a special symbol (second special symbol) advantageous to the player is executed. The easy period can be limited to the time saving state. In this control example, the game state is determined between the timing when the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol is started and the timing when the opening operation of the lower electric accessory 64Da is set, and the game state set at each timing. The above-mentioned configuration is used as the configuration for setting the opening operation content of the lower electric accessory 64Da based on the above, but other configurations may be used.

For example, the opening operation that is disadvantageous to the player only when both the timing when the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol is started and the timing when the opening operation of the lower electric accessory 64Da is set are in the normal state (FIG. 346). The opening operation set in S5924 may be set (short opening is set), and the long opening (opening operation set in S5922 in FIG. 346) may be set in other states. With this configuration, a privilege (long opening) that is advantageous to the player is provided even for normal symbol fluctuations that are executed during the period before and after the time saving state, which is the gaming state that is advantageous to the player, is set. Therefore, it is possible to make the time saving state more advantageous to the player.

In this way, while the time saving state is set as the game state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is very short, "10 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case where the normal state is set, and further. Since the opening period of the lower first entrance 64D is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", it is easy for the ball to enter the lower first entrance 64D. Become. In this control example, when the jackpot game is executed, the time saving state is configured to end, so that the normal state is reached during the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the small hit game is executed, the time reduction state is continuously set unless the time reduction end condition is satisfied, so that the small hit state is executed while the time reduction state is set. During the winning game, the first variable winning device 65 is opened in the small hit game, and the lower electric accessory 64Da is opened for a long time, and a plurality of winning openings (first specific winning opening 65a, lower first winning ball) are opened. It is a specific period during which the ball can easily enter the mouth 64D).

By using such a configuration, for example, instead of the configuration of the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2, the lower electric accessory 64Da and the lower first ball entrance 64D are arranged above the first variable winning device 65. However, it is preferable to configure the ball to enter the two winning openings (V winning device 65a, lower first entry opening 64D) during the small hit game, whereby the winning ball that can be obtained during the small hit game. The number can be increased, and it becomes possible to give more advantageous benefits to the player.

Returning to FIG. 346, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S5920, the opening / closing control start of the lower electric accessory 64Da attached to the lower first ball entry port 64D is set (S5921), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the lower electric accessory 64Da is set by the process of S5923, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started when the electric accessory opening / closing process of the main process is executed next, and the process of S5924 is started. Alternatively, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S5922 are completed.

Next, the jackpot end processing (S1451) will be described with reference to FIG. 347. FIG. 347 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (S1451). In the jackpot end process (S1451), a process for setting the game state after the jackpot is executed at the end of the jackpot game.

In the jackpot end processing (S1451), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is 35 or less (S5951). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is 35 or less (S5951: Yes), the probability variation flag 203ca is set to ON (S5952), and the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is added by 1 (S5953). Next, a number-of-times command indicating the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is set (S5954), and the process proceeds to S5955.

In the process of S5955, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203 cn added in the process of S5953 is 35 (S5955). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is 35 (S5955: Yes), the state command before reaching the upper limit is set (S5956), and the process proceeds to S5957. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5955 that the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is not 35 (S5955: No), the processing of S5956 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5957.

In the process of S5957, the read of the jackpot type executed this time is executed (S5957). Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type read in the process of S5957 is jackpot C (S5958). When it is determined that the read jackpot type is jackpot C (S5958: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is set to 0 (S5960), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5598 that the jackpot type is not the jackpot C (S5958: No), it is determined whether or not the read jackpot type is the jackpot B (S5959). When it is determined that the read jackpot type is jackpot B (S5959: Yes), the game state at the time of winning is read out from the game state storage area 203cc (S5961). Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the time of winning read in the process of S5962 is a latent or probable changing state (S5962). When it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning is not a latent state or a probable change state (that is, a normal state or a time saving state) (S5962: No), the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is set to 10000. (S5964), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5962, when it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning is a latent state or a probable change state (S5962: Yes), 0 is set to the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j (S5963). This process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5959 that it is not a jackpot B (S5959: No), the game state at the time of winning is read out from the game state storage area 203cc (S5965). Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the time of winning is the reduced working hours state (S5966). If it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning is the time saving state (S5966: Yes), 0 is set in the time saving medium counter 203j (S5960), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5966, if it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning is not the time saving state (S5966: No), 10000 is set in the time saving medium counter 203j (S5964), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5951 when it is determined that the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is not 35 or less (S5951: No), 50 is set to the value of the time saving medium counter 203j (S5967), and the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is set. The value is set to clear (S5968), and this process ends.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 348 to 351, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the voice lamp control device 110 in the fourth control example will be described. First, the main process 4 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 348. This main process 4 is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 257) in the first control example.

Of the main processes 4 (see FIG. 348) in the fourth control example, in each of the processes S2101 to S2113 and S2115 to S2120, S2101 to S2113 and S2115 of the main processes (see FIG. 257) in the first control example, respectively. The same process as each process of ~ S2120 is executed. Further, in the main process 4 (see FIG. 348) in the fourth control example, the command determination process 4 is used instead of the command determination process (see S2114 and FIG. 258) of the main process (see FIG. 257) in the first control example. It is executed (S2171), and the process shifts to S2115. This command determination process 4 (S2171) is a process for executing control according to the type of the command received from the main control device 110, similarly to the command determination process (see FIG. 258) in the first control example. The details of this command determination process 4 (S2171) will be described with reference to FIG. 349.

FIG. 349 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 4 (S2171) described above. As described above, the command determination process 4 (S2171) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 258) in the first control example. Of the command determination processes 4 (S2171) in the fourth control example, the processes of S2201 to S2213 are the same as the processes of S2201 to S2213 of the command determination process (see FIG. 258) in the first control example, respectively. Will be executed.

Further, in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 349) in the fourth control example, when it is determined that the unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 does not include the stop command in the process of S2212. (S2212: No) Then, it is determined whether or not the state command is included in the unprocessed command (S2251), and if it is determined that the state command is included (S2251: Yes), the state is determined. The state command for executing the control according to the game state notified by the command is executed (S2252). The details of this state command processing (S2252) will be described later with reference to FIG. 350. Further, when the state command processing (S2252) is completed, the effect type and effect of the pseudo effect (pseudo jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165, pseudo variable effect using the pseudo second entrance 1640, etc.) and the effect. The pseudo-effect setting process for setting the period is executed (S2253), and this process is terminated. The details of this pseudo-effect setting process (S2253) will be described later with reference to FIG. 351.

Further, in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 349) in the fourth control example, when it is determined that the unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 does not include the state command in the process of S2251. (S2251: No) Next, it is determined whether or not the probabilistic number command is included in the unprocessed command (S2254), and it is determined that the probabilistic number command is included in the unprocessed command. If this is the case (S2254: Yes), the number of consecutive probabilistic changes notified by the probabilistic change count command (value of the probabilistic change upper limit counter 203 cn provided in RAM 203 of the main controller 110) is used as the value of the probabilistic change upper limit counter 223 kb. After setting (S2255), this process ends. By the processing of S2255, every time the value of the probability change upper limit counter 203cj is changed on the main control device 110 side (every time the jackpot ends and the probability change state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol is set). , The value of the probability variation upper limit counter 223cc can be updated in synchronization with the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj. Therefore, on the voice lamp control device 113 side, it is possible to accurately grasp the remaining number of jackpots until the upper limit of the probability change state is reached. If it is determined in the processing of S2251 that the probability variation number command is not included in the unprocessed commands (S2251: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Next, the details of the state command process 4 (S2252) will be described with reference to FIG. 350. As described above, the state command process 4 (S2252) is a process for executing control according to the type of the gaming state notified by the state command received from the main control device 110.

In this state command process 4 (see FIG. 350), first, it is determined whether or not the change of the game state has been notified (S3601), and the game state has not been changed (that is, the number of time reductions has been subtracted by 1). If it is determined (S2601: No), the process shifts to S3609. On the other hand, when it is determined that the change of the gaming state is notified by the state command (S3601: Yes), whether the changed gaming state is either the normal state (normal mode) or the probable change state (probability change mode). (S3602), and if it is determined to be in either the normal state or the probabilistic state (S3602: Yes), a display command indicating the normal effect mode is set, and the process shifts to S3609. As described above, the normal effect mode is an effect mode in which an effect that pretends to be a normal state in a general gaming machine is executed.

As described above, in the fourth control example, both the normal state and the probable change state are game states in which the game progresses by performing a left-handed game aiming at the first ball entry port 64. In addition, even if it becomes a big hit, if the game state after the big hit does not become a latent state, the fact that it became a big hit is concealed, and the game ball simply enters the general winning opening in the normal state. The structure is such that it looks as if a prize ball has been awarded. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player play the game without being aware of the relatively complicated state transition until the transition to the most advantageous latent state (latent mode). In other words, despite being a big hit, getting only a few (40) prize balls can discourage the player, or shift to a probable state and easily open and close the lower electric accessory 64Da. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the disadvantage to the player. This makes the player feel as if the unfavorable gaming state simply continues during the type of jackpot state that does not transition to the normal state, probable change state, and latent state, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player. Since it can be pretended, it is possible to provide a player with a more understandable effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to understand the playability, and it is possible to prevent the player from avoiding the game by the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Further, in the state command process 4 (see FIG. 350) in the fourth control example, when it is determined in the process of S3602 that the notification by the current state command is neither the normal state nor the probable change state (S3602: No). ), It means that the gaming state notified by the status command is either the latent state (latent mode) or the time saving state, so next, the gaming state notified by the status command is the latent state. It is determined whether or not there is (S3604). In the process of S3604, if it is determined that the transition to the latent state (latent mode) is notified by the state command (S3604: Yes), then whether or not the value of the probability change upper limit number counter 223cc is 5 or less. (S3605), and it was determined that the value of the probability variation upper limit number counter 223b is 5 or less (that is, the number of loops in the latency mode remains 30 times or more before reaching the probability variation limit number). In the case (S3605: Yes), a display command indicating the latent probability effect A mode is set (S3606), and the process shifts to S3609. As a result, it is possible to continue to execute the effect (see FIG. 324 (a)) as if the jackpot state continues until the latent mode ends, so that the number of rounds is very large, 60 rounds or more. It is possible to make the player feel as if the jackpot of was executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of satisfaction.

On the other hand, in the process of S3605, it is determined that the value of the probability change upper limit number counter 223b is 6 or more (that is, the number of times the latent mode is looped before reaching the probability change limit number is less than 30 times). If this is done (S3605: No), a display command indicating the latent probability effect B mode is set (S3607), and the process shifts to S3609. In this latent effect B mode, the pseudo electric accessory 1640a is released every time the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by the pseudo special 2 variation effect, and the game ball is opened to the pseudo second entrance 1640. Is entered, and a period during which the variable display effect is executed and a period during which the pseudo jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165 is executed are set. In the pseudo jackpot effect, an effect is performed in which a maximum of five jackpots (and a latent mode between jackpots) appear to be one jackpot. As a result, a lottery of special symbols is executed based on the entry of the ball into the pseudo-second entry port 1640, and the pseudo-attacker 165 can be opened and closed as if it were in a big hit state. It is possible to realize an operation that is easier for a person to understand. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

On the other hand, in the process of S3604, when it is determined that the gaming state notified by the state command is not the latent state (S3604: No), it is notified by the state command that the transition to the time saving state (time saving mode) is notified. Therefore, a display command indicating the time saving mode is set (S3608), and this process is terminated.

In the processing of S3609, the information indicated by the received status command is stored (stored) in the status setting area 223g (S3609), and the information corresponding to the effect mode set by any of the processes of S3603, S3606, S3607, and S3608. Is stored in the effect mode storage area 223ca (S3610), and this process ends. By executing this state command process 4 (see FIG. 350), it is possible to set the effect mode according to the game state notified from the main control device 110.

Next, with reference to FIG. 351, the details of the above-mentioned pseudo-effect setting process (S2253) will be described. This pseudo-effect setting process (S2253) is a process for setting an effect operation according to the type of pseudo-effect set in the state command process 4 (see FIG. 350).

In this pseudo effect setting process (see FIG. 351), first, the information stored in the effect mode storage area 223ca is read (S3701), and whether or not the read information is the information indicating the latent effect A mode is determined. Determine (S3702). When it is determined in the process of S3702 that the information indicating the latent effect A mode is stored in the effect mode storage area 223ca (S3702: Yes), the discharge for controlling the closing and opening of the flow path switching member 695 is performed. By setting the path switching solenoid to off, the flow path switching member 695 is set to be in an open state (S3703). Next, as the number of rounds of the super jackpot effect, the number of rounds corresponding to the value of the probability variation upper limit number counter 223cc is set (S3704), and the process shifts to S3705. In the super jackpot effect, an effect is performed in which the actual 5 rounds of the jackpot appear to be one round. Since the jackpot of the second special symbol is all 10 rounds, the number of rounds of the super jackpot production is the value of the remaining number of jackpots up to the probability variation limit number (value obtained by subtracting the value of the probability variation upper limit number counter 223cc from 36). A value multiplied by 2 is set. On the other hand, in the process of S3702, if it is determined that the information stored in the effect mode storage area 223ca is not the information indicating the latent effect A mode (S3702), each process of S3703 and S3704 is skipped. The process shifts to S3705.

In the process of S3705, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the effect mode storage area 223ca is the information indicating the latent effect B mode (S3705), and it is determined that the information indicates the latent effect B mode. In the case (S3705: Yes), the value of the probability variation upper limit number counter 223cc is read out (S3706), the effect period of the pseudo jackpot effect is set based on the read counter value (S3707), and the effect period of the set jackpot effect is set. The period outside (outside the execution period of the pseudo jackpot effect) is set as the effect period of the pseudo special figure 2 variation effect (S3708), and the process shifts to S3709.

In the processing of S3707 and S3708, for example, when each pseudo jackpot is set to be as many as 5 actual jackpots and the remaining number of jackpots (the number of remaining jackpots up to the probability variation limit) is not divisible by 5. The jackpot for the remaining number of times divided by 5 is set as the continuation period of the first pseudo jackpot production. More specifically, for example, in the process of S3705, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 223cc is 8, the number of remaining jackpots up to the probability variation limit number (the number of jackpots won in the latent mode this time). ) Means 28 times, so the jackpot (and the duration of the latent mode between jackpots) of the 1st to 3rd times (the remainder of dividing 28 times by 5) is 1 pseudo jackpot effect. Set as the production period of. After that, the pseudo-special 2 variable effect period linked to the latent mode period between jackpots and the pseudo-big hit effect period that continues over 5 jackpots (and the latent mode period between jackpots) will be repeated. Set to.

On the other hand, in the process of S3705, if it is determined that the information stored in the effect mode storage area 223ca is not the information indicating the latent effect B mode (S3705: No), each process of S3706 to S3708 is skipped. , The process shifts to S3709. In the process of S3709, a display effect command corresponding to each set effect is set, and this process ends.

By executing this pseudo effect setting process (see FIG. 351), the effect mode of the pseudo effect executed in the latent mode is changed to the remaining number of big hits (the number of big hits to be won before reaching the probability variation limit number). It can be set according to the mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game in the latent mode.

In the fourth control example, in the latent effect B mode, the period of five jackpots is adjusted so as to be the effect period of one pseudo jackpot effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, the production period of each pseudo jackpot effect may be configured to be as close as possible (number of jackpots). Specifically, for example, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 223cc is 8, as a pseudo effect, a pseudo jackpot composed of four jackpot execution periods (and a latent mode period between jackpots). The effect may be set twice, and the pseudo jackpot effect composed of five jackpot execution periods (and the latent mode period between jackpots) may be set four times. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the difference in the duration of each pseudo jackpot effect and the number of prize balls won, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

<About a modified example of the first control example>
Next, a modified example of the first control example described above will be described with reference to FIG. 352. FIG. 352 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 in this modified example. In the configuration of the game board 13 of the first control example described above, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 and the second ball entry port 640 is provided in the right side region (see FIG. 208). On the other hand, in this modification, the difference is that the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 and the second ball entry port 640 is provided in the right side region.

With this configuration, if a player wins a game while playing a left-handed game, the ball can be inserted into the second entrance without changing the game method. Therefore, when the effect mode of the charge effect is changed based on the normal drawing lottery result, it is possible to notify the player of the lottery result which is advantageous to the player, so that it is possible to pay attention to the effect content to be executed. There is.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit is made, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the big hit until multiple (for example, two or three times) big hits occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, a first special symbol and a second special symbol, are used as a plurality of special symbol types, but the types of special symbols are not limited to this, and three or more. The special symbol type may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a game property in which a lottery (variation) is performed according to a predetermined rule for a plurality of special symbols and a game property in which a lottery (variation) is individually performed independently are described. However, each of the playability described in each embodiment may be replaced or combined.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Concept of the invention using the lower displacement unit 400 as an example>
A displacement member formed so as to be displaceable from the reference position in the first direction and movably formed to move the game ball in accordance with the displacement in the first direction, and a game from outside the orbital region of the displacement member to the orbital region of the displacement member. In a gaming machine provided with a regulating means for regulating the throwing of a ball, the displacement member is
A gaming machine A1 characterized in that it is formed so as to be displaceable from the reference position in a second direction opposite to the first direction.

Here, a displacement member formed so as to be displaceable in the first direction from the reference position and a game ball movably formed in accordance with the displacement in the first direction, and a track region of the displacement member from outside the track region of the displacement member. A gaming machine provided with a regulating means for regulating the throwing of a gaming ball to the ball is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-166997). According to this gaming machine, it is possible to prevent a predetermined number or more of gaming balls from being thrown into the orbital region of the displacement member by the regulation of the regulating means. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, if a malfunction occurs in the regulating means due to, for example, sticking or wear, there is a possibility that more than a specified number of gaming balls are thrown toward the track region of the displacement member. In this case, there is a problem that a problem may occur due to the amount of game balls exceeding the specified number. That is, for example, a game ball exceeding a specified number may enter the drive mechanism of the displacement member and be bitten into the movable portion, resulting in damage. Alternatively, there is a risk that more game balls than the specified number will flow out of the game area (for example, the back side of the game board).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable from the reference position in the second direction opposite to the first direction, so that the track region of the displacement member can be expanded accordingly. Therefore, for example, even if a malfunction occurs in the regulatory means and a specified number or more of game balls are thrown, the ball is thrown.
Since the orbital region of the displacement member is expanded, more game balls than the specified number can be accepted in the orbital region. As a result, the number of game balls exceeding the specified number can be moved along with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding the specified number from entering the drive mechanism portion of the displacement member and flowing out of the game area, and as a result, problems caused by the game balls exceeding the specified number can be prevented. It can be difficult to occur.

The gaming machine A1 includes a passage member formed as a passage through which the game ball can pass and whose downstream is communicated with the trajectory region of the displacement member, and the regulating means restricts the passage of the game ball in the passage member. Characteristic gaming machine A2.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, a passage member formed as a passage through which the game ball can pass and whose downstream is communicated with the track region of the displacement member is provided, and the regulating means is the game in the passage member. Since the passage of balls is restricted, for example, even if a malfunction occurs in the regulating means and a specified number or more of game balls are thrown, the number of game balls exceeding the specified number is transferred to the displacement member via the passage member. The ball can be reliably thrown into the orbital region. As a result, it is possible to prevent problems caused by the number of game balls exceeding the specified number.

In the gaming machine A2, the displacement member is formed so as to be able to receive and hold a predetermined number of gaming balls thrown from the passage member at the reference position, and at least the diameter of the gaming ball in the second direction from the reference position. The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that it is formed so as to be displaceable only by a distance exceeding the above.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2, the displacement member is formed so as to be able to receive and hold a predetermined number of game balls thrown from the passage member at the reference position, and is formed to be second from the reference position. Since it is formed so that it can be displaced at least by a distance exceeding the diameter of the game ball in the direction, after receiving the specified number of game balls at the reference position, the displacement member is displaced from the reference position in the second direction to reduce the specified number. The excess game ball can be thrown into the orbital region of the displacement member (the region on the first direction side of the displacement member). Therefore, the game balls exceeding the specified number can be moved along with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction.

In this case, since the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls and the number of game balls exceeding the specified number can be sent to the orbital region, the specified number of game balls and the number of game balls exceeding the specified number are separated. can do. Therefore, for example, by displacing the displacement member in the first direction, the operation of discharging only the game balls exceeding the specified number from the orbital region while maintaining the state in which the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls is performed. It will be possible.

The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine A3, the displacement member is displaced in the first direction and is formed so as to be able to change its posture when it reaches a predetermined position.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, the displacement member is displaced in the first direction and is formed so that the posture can be changed when the predetermined position is reached. Therefore, a predetermined number of games can be played up to the predetermined position. While it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the displacement member holds the ball and prevent the game ball from falling off from the displacement member, when the ball reaches a predetermined position, the change in the posture of the displacement member is used to prevent the game ball from falling off. Can be easily discharged from the displacement member.

In the game machine A4, the displacement member is provided with a recess recessed in the track region when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction from the reference position, and the displacement member is recessed in the recess when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. The gaming machine A5 is provided with a protrusion to be engaged, and the posture can be changed by engaging the protrusion with the recess.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of the game machine A4, the displacement member is provided with a recess recessed in the track region when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction from the reference position, and the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. The structure for changing the posture of the displacement member can be simplified because the protrusion is provided and the protrusion is engaged with the recess so that the posture can be changed.

In the gaming machine A5, the protrusion is projected from the displacement member toward the first direction, and the tip of the protrusion hits the lower half surface of the gaming ball thrown into the orbital region of the displacement member. A gaming machine A6 characterized by being touched.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5, the protrusion is projected from the displacement member in the first direction, and the tip of the protrusion is thrown into the orbital region of the displacement member. Since it is formed so as to be able to abut on the lower half surface (that is, a game ball exceeding a specified number), when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction, the game ball is placed on the lower half surface at the protrusion. You can move it while pushing it. As a result, it is possible to easily eject the game balls exceeding the specified number from the orbital region.

Further, the protrusion is interposed between the specified number of game balls held by the displacement member and the game balls sent to the orbital region of the displacement member (game balls exceeding the specified number). It is possible to secure the distance between the specified number of game balls and the number of game balls exceeding the specified number by the amount of the protrusion length of the portion. Therefore, while maintaining the state in which the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls, it is possible to easily eject only the game balls exceeding the specified number from the track region.

Furthermore, since the role of changing the posture of the displacement member by engaging with the concave portion and the role of moving the game ball while pushing the lower half surface thereof are also used for the protrusion, the number of parts is reduced by that amount and the product is manufactured. It is possible to reduce the cost.

In the gaming machine A5 or A6, the concave portion is characterized in that the size in the first direction is smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5 or A6, the size of the concave portion in the first direction is smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball, so that the gaming ball sent to the orbital region of the displacement member. (That is, a game ball exceeding a specified number) can easily pass through the recess when it is moved with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction. As a result, it is possible to easily eject the game balls exceeding the specified number from the orbital region.

In any of the game machines A5 to A7, the displacement member is erected in the orbital region when the displacement member is displaced from the reference position in the first direction at a height lower than the radius of the game ball and more than the recess. A wall portion located on the first direction side is provided, and when a game ball thrown into the orbital region of the displacement member is moved along with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction, the game ball moves to the wall. The gaming machine A8, characterized in that the displacement member is brought into contact with the portion and the posture change of the displacement member is regulated.

According to the game machine A8, in any of the game machines A5 to A7, the displacement member is erected in the orbital region when the displacement member is displaced from the reference position in the first direction at a height lower than the radius of the game ball and is recessed. A wall portion located on the first direction side of the displacement member is provided, and when a game ball thrown into the orbital region of the displacement member is moved along with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction, the game ball becomes a wall portion. Since the displacement member is in contact with the displacement member and the posture change of the displacement member is regulateably formed, only the number of game balls exceeding the specified number is maintained while the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls. It can be easily discharged from the orbital region.

That is, since the wall portion is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball, when the game ball is moved by being pushed by the protrusion as the displacement member is displaced in the first direction, the game ball is moved. The lower half surface can be brought into contact with the wall portion so that the game ball can easily get over the wall portion. In this case, the game ball is brought into contact with the displacement member (that is, the game ball is interposed between the displacement member and the wall portion), and a reaction force can be applied from the game ball to the displacement member. It is possible to regulate the change in posture and prevent the specified number of game balls held by the displacement member from falling off. As a result, it is possible to easily discharge only the game balls exceeding the specified number from the track region while maintaining the state in which the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls.

On the other hand, when a game ball (that is, a game ball exceeding a specified number) is not thrown in the orbital region of the displacement member, the game ball is not interposed between the wall portion and the displacement member, so that the protrusion is recessed. By being engaged, the posture of the displacement member can be changed. As a result, it is possible to easily discharge a predetermined number of game balls (that is, game balls held by the displacement member) from the displacement member by utilizing the change in the posture of the displacement member.

A9 is characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the restricting means is formed so as to be operable in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the regulating means is formed so as to be operable in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member, so that the displacement member is displaced according to the displacement of the displacement member. It is possible to regulate or allow the throwing of a gaming ball into the orbital region of a member. That is, since the regulation or tolerance of the throwing of the game ball can be switched mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member, for example, depending on the sensor device for detecting the position of the regulating means and the detection result of the sensor device. It is possible to eliminate the need to control the driving means for driving the regulating means or each of these means, thereby reducing the product cost and improving the reliability of the operation.

In the gaming machine A9, the regulating means allows the gaming ball to be thrown into the trajectory region of the displacement member in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member from the reference position in the second direction. A featured gaming machine A10.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A9, the regulating means is linked to the displacement of the displacement member from the reference position to the second direction, and the gaming ball of the displacement member to the orbital region. Since the ball is allowed to be thrown, the game ball can be reliably thrown in the orbital region of the displacement member and in the region on the first direction side of the displacement member.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the displacement member is displaceably arranged in the base member, and the end portion of the base member on the first direction side is arranged below the vertical direction and upward in the vertical direction. The gaming machine A11 is provided with a recovery member having an opening in the slingshot.

According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effect of the game machine A10, the displacement member is displaceably arranged and the base member is arranged vertically below the end portion on the first direction side of the base member. Along with this, a recovery member having an opening in the vertical direction is provided, so that the game balls are moved along with the movement of the displacement member in the first direction and discharged from the orbital region of the displacement member (that is, the amount exceeding the specified number). The game ball) can be received and collected from the opening of the collection member.

In the game machine A11, the base member is formed so as to be displaceable between the retracted position and the displaced position, and the opening of the recovered member is at least the first in the base member displaced to the retracted position or the displaced position. A game machine A12 characterized in that it is formed in a size located below the vertical end of the end on the directional side.

According to the game machine A12, in addition to the effect of the game machine A11, the base member is formed so as to be displaceable between the retracted position and the displacement position, and the opening of the recovery member is displaced to at least the retracted position or the displaced position. Since it is formed in a size located vertically below the end on the first direction side of the base member, it is discharged from the track region of the displacement member regardless of whether the base member is displaced to the retracted position or the displacement position. It is possible to receive and collect the game balls (that is, the game balls exceeding the specified number) from the opening of the collection member.

By being inserted into the recessed space of the recess in any of the gaming machines A5 to A8,
The gaming machine A13 is provided with an insertion member that regulates the engagement of the protrusion with the recess.

According to the gaming machine A13, in any of the gaming machines A5 to A8, a displacement member is provided because it is provided with an insertion member that regulates the engagement of the protrusion with the recess by being inserted into the recessed space of the recess. It is possible to suppress the change in the posture of the displacement member when the game balls exceeding the specified number are discharged from the orbital region of the displacement member due to the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction. Therefore, while maintaining the state in which the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls, it is possible to easily eject only the game balls exceeding the specified number from the track region.

The gaming machine A13 includes a base member that is displaceably formed between the retracted position and the displaced position and in which the displaced member is displaceably arranged. The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that it is inserted into the recessed space of the recess and is separated from the recessed space of the recess when the base member is displaced to the displacement position.
4.

According to the game machine A14, in addition to the effect of the game machine A13, when the base member is displaced to the retracted position, the insertion member is inserted into the recessed space of the recess, so that the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. Along with this, when the number of game balls exceeding the specified number is discharged from the orbital region of the displacement member, the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls by suppressing the change in the posture of the displacement member. On the other hand, when the base member is displaced to the displacement position, the insertion member is separated from the recessed space of the recess, so that the protrusion is engaged with the recess as the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. By being combined, the posture of the displacement member can be changed, and a predetermined number of game balls can be easily discharged from the displacement member.

<Concept of the invention using the distribution unit 500 as an example>
The flow-down passage through which the game ball flows, the first branch passage and the second branch passage branched from the flow passage, and the game ball flowing down the flow passage to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage. In a game machine provided with a distribution means for distribution, the game machine is provided with a displacement member which is formed so as to be displaceable and receives a game ball from the first branch passage, and the displacement member is in contact with the distribution means and is displaced. The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that the distribution means is displaced and the distribution destination is switched.

Here, the flow-down passage through which the game ball flows down, the first branch passage and the second branch passage branched from the flow-down passage, and the game ball flowing down the flow-down passage to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage. A gaming machine equipped with a sorting means for sorting is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-223).
176). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the gaming ball that has flowed down the flow passage is
Since the structure is such that one ball is alternately distributed to the first branch passage and the second branch passage, the game balls flowing down the flow passage are evenly distributed between the first branch passage and the second branch passage (that is, half each). It is sorted. That is, there is a problem that the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage cannot be changed.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, a displacement member that is formed so as to be displaceable and receives a game ball from the first branch passage is provided, and the displacement member abuts on the distribution means and is displaced to distribute. Since the means is displaced and the distribution destination is switched, the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage or the second branch passage can be changed according to the displacement of the displacement member. That is, the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage can be changed.

According to the gaming machine B1, the distribution means can be displaced by using the displacement of the displacement member, so that it is not necessary to separately provide a drive means or a transmission mechanism for displacementing the distribution means. can. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced by that amount, and the product cost can be reduced.

Further, for example, in a structure in which the displacement of the sorting means is controlled by using the position detection by the sensor device or the drive by the driving means, the reliability of the sorting operation of the sorting means is lowered due to the malfunction due to the detection failure or the control failure. However, according to the gaming machine B1, the distribution destination by the distribution means can be switched mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member, so that the reliability of the distribution operation can be improved.

In particular, since the displacement member is a member that receives the game ball from the first branch passage, the distribution destination of the distribution means can be switched to the first branch passage in synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member, so that the first branch can be obtained. It is possible to reliably receive the game balls distributed in the passage to the displacement member.

The gaming machine B1 is provided with an urging means for applying an urging force to the distribution means to maintain the distribution destination by the distribution means in either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, and the displacement member. Displaces the distribution means in a direction opposite to the direction of the urging force, so that the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage or the other of the second branch passage, and the urging means is used. The gaming machine B2, characterized in that the distribution destination by the distribution means is returned to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage by the urging force of the means.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the distribution means is given an urging force.
Since the urging means for maintaining the distribution destination by the distribution means in either the first branch passage or the second branch passage is provided, it is possible to prevent the distribution destination by the distribution means from being inadvertently switched. In this case, the distribution means is displaced according to the displacement of the displacement member, and after the distribution destination is switched, the return to the distribution destination before the switching can be performed by the urging force of the urging means. It can be unnecessary that the member is in contact with the distribution means. That is, the displacement member can be separated from the distribution means. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the movable range of the displacement member can be increased.

The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that the urging means applies an urging force to the sorting means to maintain the sorting destination by the sorting means in the second branch passage.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the urging means applies an urging force to the sorting means to maintain the sorting destination by the sorting means in the second branch passage, so that the displacement member. In a state where the pachinko ball cannot be received, it is possible to prevent the distribution destination by the distribution means from being switched to the first branch passage.

In the gaming machine B3, a base member that is displaceably formed between the first position and the second position and in which the displacement member is arranged is provided, and the base member is arranged in the first position. In a state where the displacement member can receive the game ball from the first branch passage and can come into contact with the distribution means, and the base member is arranged at the second position, the displacement member. The gaming machine B4, wherein the member cannot receive the gaming ball from the first branch passage and cannot contact the sorting means.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of the game machine B3, a base member formed so as to be displaceable between the first position and the second position is provided, and the displacement member is arranged on the base member. It is possible to form a mode in which the displacement member is displaced with the base member arranged at the first position and a mode in which the displacement member is displaced with the base member arranged at the second position. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

In this case, when the base member is arranged at the second position, the displacement member cannot receive the game ball from the first branch passage, but in such a state, the displacement member cannot contact the distribution means. Therefore, in a state where the displacement member cannot receive the game ball (a state in which the base member is arranged at the second position), it is possible to prevent the distribution destination by the distribution means from being switched to the first branch passage.

The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that a second base member formed as a member separate from the base member is provided, and the distribution means is arranged on the second base member.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B4, a second base member formed as a member separate from the base member is provided, and the distribution means is arranged on the second base member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the increase in size of the base member.

In any of the game machines B1 to B5, the displacement member is formed so as to be at least displaceable at a switching position and a receiving position set at a position different from the switching position, and the displacement member is displaced to the switching position. In this state, the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage, and in the state where the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position, the displacement member can receive the game ball from the first branch passage. The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the second branch passage.
..

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the displacement member is formed so as to be at least displaceable between the switching position and the receiving position set at a position different from the switching position. When the displacement member is displaced to the switching position, the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage, and when the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position, the displacement member moves the game ball from the first branch passage. Since it is possible to receive and the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the second branch passage, it is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding the specified number that can be received by the displacement member from being distributed to the first branch passage.

That is, when the switching position and the receiving position are set to the same position, the displacement member receives the game ball while the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage, so that the displacement member. There is a risk that the game balls will be distributed to the first branch passage in excess of the specified number that can be received. If a means for restricting the inflow of the game ball into the first branch passage is separately provided, the structure becomes complicated, the reliability is lowered, and the product cost is increased.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B6, the displacement member is displaced to the switching position, the specified number (or less than the specified number) of game balls are distributed to the first branch passage, and then the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position. Then, since the distribution destination is switched to the second branch passage, it is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding the specified number from flowing down to the first branch passage. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding the specified number that can be received by the displacement member from being distributed to the first branch passage. again,
Since it is not necessary to separately provide the above-mentioned means, it is possible to improve reliability and reduce product cost.

In the gaming machine B6, the first branch passage is formed as one or a plurality of protrusions or recesses protruding or recessed in the inner wall surface thereof, and a resistance is given to a gaming ball passing through the first branch passage. A gaming machine B7 characterized by being provided with means.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B6, the first branch passage is formed as one or more protrusions or recesses protruding or recessed in the inner wall surface thereof, and passes through the first branch passage. Since the resistance means for imparting resistance to the gaming ball is provided, the speed of the gaming ball passing through the first branch passage can be slowed down. Therefore, the time required for the displacement member to be displaced from the switching position to the receiving position can be lengthened by that amount, so that the displacement member can reliably receive the game ball. Further, the output of the drive means can be reduced by the amount that the displacement speed required for the displacement member can be slowed down, and the product cost can be reduced.

In the gaming machine B6 or B7, the distribution means is the first as the displacement of the distribution means.
It is provided with a first haunting portion and a second haunting portion formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the branch passage, and the first haunting portion projects into the first branch passage to allow a game ball flowing down the down passage. The second
The second haunting portion is formed so as to be able to be distributed to the branch passage, and the first haunting portion is more than the first haunting portion.
By being located on the downstream side of the branch passage and projecting to the first branch passage, the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage can be regulated, and the first haunting portion and the second of them are formed.
The gaming machine B8 is characterized in that when one of the haunting portions protrudes into the passage of the first branch passage, the other is retracted out of the passage of the first branch passage.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of the game machine B6 or B7, the distribution means has a first haunting portion and a first haunting portion formed so as to appear and disappear with respect to the first branch passage with the displacement of the distribution means. A second haunting portion is provided, and the first haunting portion is formed so that the game ball flowing down the downflow passage can be distributed to the second branch passage by projecting to the first branch passage, and the second haunting portion is formed by the first. It is located on the downstream side of the first branch passage from the haunting part, and by projecting to the first branch passage, the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage can be regulated, and the first haunting part thereof. And in the state where one of the second haunting portions protrudes into the passage of the first branch passage, the other is retracted out of the passage of the first branch passage, so that the distribution means is displaced according to the displacement of the displacement member. Then, only the specified number of game balls can be distributed to the first branch passage and received by the displacement member.

That is, the first state in which the first infestation portion protrudes to distribute the game ball flowing down the flow passage to the second branch passage, and the first infestation portion retracts to cause the game ball to flow down the downflow passage. The second state of distributing to the first branch passage, the third state of restricting the flow of the game ball distributed to the first branch passage (storing the game ball) by projecting the second haunting portion, and the third state. 2 By retracting the haunting part, the game ball stored in the first branch passage is made to flow down and is received by the displacement member.
By combining these states, only a predetermined number of game balls can be distributed to the first branch passage and received by the displacement member.

Further, according to the gaming machine B8, the distribution means includes a first haunting portion and a second haunting portion, that is,
Since it is formed as one component, the structure of the distribution means (structure for operating the first infestation portion and the second infestation portion to exert their functions) can be simplified. Further, in the state where one of the first infested portion and the second infested portion protrudes into the passage of the first branch passage, the other is retracted out of the passage of the first branch passage, so that two positions (switching positions) of the displacement members are obtained. And the receiving position), it is sufficient if the sorting means is also formed so as to be displaceable at two positions. That is, by displacing the sorting means at two positions, the above-mentioned first to fourth states can be formed. Therefore, the structure of the distribution means and the structure of displacement of the distribution means according to the displacement of the displacement member can be simplified, and the reliability of the distribution operation of the game ball can be improved accordingly.

<Concept of the invention using the distribution unit 500 as an example>
The flow-down passage through which the game ball flows, the first branch passage and the second branch passage branched from the flow passage, and the game ball flowing down the flow passage to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage. A gaming machine provided with a distribution means for distributing, characterized in that it is located downstream of the distribution means and is provided with a flow state changing means for restricting or allowing the flow of a game ball in the first branch passage. Game machine C1.

Here, the flow-down passage through which the game ball flows down, the first branch passage and the second branch passage branched from the flow-down passage, and the game ball flowing down the flow-down passage to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage. A gaming machine equipped with a sorting means for sorting is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-223).
176). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the gaming ball flowing down the flowing passage is
Since it is only distributed to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, there is a problem that it is insufficient to give the player an interest.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, it is located on the downstream side of the distribution means and is provided with a flow state changing means for restricting or allowing the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage, which is interesting to the player. Can be given.

That is, the flow of the game ball distributed to the first branch passage is regulated by the operation of the flow state changing means, the game ball is stored in the first branch passage, and the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage is allowed. , The game ball stored in the first branch passage can be flowed down (opened).
As a result, in addition to the operation of distributing the game ball flowing down the flow-down passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, the operation of temporarily stopping (storing) the flow of the game ball distributed to the first branch passage is performed. , The action of causing the stopped (stored) game ball to flow down (open) can be formed. As a result, the player can be given a hobby.

In the gaming machine C1, the first branch passage is provided in a state where the distribution means and the flow state changing means are integrally formed, and the distribution destination by the distribution means is the first branch passage. In a state where the flow of the gaming ball in the above is regulated by the flow state changing means and the distribution destination by the distribution means is the second branch passage, the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage is regulated by the flow state changing means. A gaming machine C2 characterized by being tolerated.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, an integrated member in which the sorting means and the flowing state changing means are integrally formed is provided, so that the sorting means and the flowing state changing means are operated. It is possible to simplify the structure and improve the reliability of operation. That is, when the sorting means and the flow state changing means are formed separately, the two parts are formed, which complicates the structure for operating the two parts and lowers the reliability of the operation. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, since the sorting means and the flow state changing means can be formed as one component, the structure can be simplified by that amount, the product cost can be reduced, and the reliability of operation can be improved. Can be planned.

Further, in this case, if the distribution destination by the distribution means is set to the first branch passage by the operation of the integrated member, the flow of the game ball distributed to the first branch passage is regulated by the flow state changing means, and the first When the game ball is stored in the branch passage and the distribution destination by the distribution means is the second branch passage, the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage is allowed by the flow state changing means and stored in the first branch passage. The game ball that has been played can be flowed down (opened). That is, in addition to the operation of distributing the game ball flowing down the flow-down passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, the operation of temporarily stopping (storing) the flow of the game ball distributed to the first branch passage. Not only can the stopped (stored) game ball flow down (open) motion, but these storage and release motions can be alternately formed in conjunction with the distribution motion.

In the game machine C2, the integrated member is formed so as to be displaceable in the first state position and the second state position, and in a state where the integrated member is displaced to the first state position, the distribution means is the first. The flow state changing means is arranged at a position where the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage is restricted, and the integrated member is displaced to the second state position. In the state, the distribution means is arranged at a position where the second branch passage is the distribution destination, and the flow state changing means is arranged at a position where the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage is allowed. The game machine C3.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C2, the integrated member is formed so as to be displaceable between the first state position and the second state position, and in the state where the integrated member is displaced to the first state position. , The distribution means is arranged at the position where the first branch passage is the distribution destination, and the flow state changing means is arranged at the position where the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage is restricted, and the integrated member is displaced to the second state position. In this state, the distribution means is arranged at a position where the second branch passage is the distribution destination, and the flow state changing means is arranged at a position where the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage is allowed.
By displacing the integrated member at two positions (first state position and second state position), in addition to the operation of distributing the game ball flowing down the flow-down passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, the first
It is possible to form an operation of temporarily stopping (storing) the flow of the game balls distributed to the branch passage and an operation of causing the stopped (stored) game balls to flow down (open), and to store and open these. Can be formed alternately in conjunction with the distribution operation. That is, the structure can be simplified to reduce the product cost and improve the reliability of operation.

In the gaming machine C3, the integrated member is rotatably formed, and at least the flow state changing means is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the first branch passage, and the gaming ball is projected to the first branch passage. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that it is formed into an arc-shaped curved shape centered on the rotation axis of the integrated member while restricting the flow of the slingshot.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3, the integrated member is formed rotatably, and at least the flow state changing means is formed so as to appear and disappear with respect to the first branch passage, and the first branch passage is formed. By protruding to, the flow of the game ball is restricted, and the shape is curved in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the integrated member. The area of the hole to be opened can be reduced.

In the gaming machine C4, the flowing state changing means is arranged in a posture in which the side facing the upstream of the first branch passage is concave.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4, the flow-down state changing means is arranged in a posture in which the side facing the upstream of the first branch passage is concave, so that the flow-down state is changed to the first branch passage. In the initial state where the means starts to protrude (that is, only the tip side of the flow state changing means is projected into the passage), the shape of the tip side of the flow state changing means can easily regulate the flow of the gaming ball. It can be arranged in a direction, and it is possible to easily regulate the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage.

Further, in a state where the flow-down state changing means is projected to the first branch passage to the maximum and the flow-down of the game ball is restricted, the game ball can be stably held by the recess of the flow-down state changing means, so that the game ball can be suppressed from rampaging. ..

In the gaming machine C4 or C5, the integrated member is provided with an urging means for urging the integrated member in a direction in which the flow state changing means projects in the direction of projecting to the first branch passage, and the flow state changing means is described as described above. The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that the distance to the rotation axis of the integral member is made larger than the distance from the distribution means to the rotation axis of the integral member.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4 or C5, an urging means for applying an urging force to the integrated member to urge the flow state changing means in the direction of projecting to the first branch passage is provided. Therefore, by utilizing such urging force, it is possible to easily maintain the integrated member in a posture in which the flow-down state changing means projects into the first branch passage (that is, the first state position).

In this case, in the game machine C6, the distance from the flow-down state changing means to the rotation axis of the integrated member is larger than the distance from the distribution means to the rotation axis of the integral member, so that the flowing game balls collide with each other. And, because the distance from the rotation axis is large, even if the same impact force is applied, the flow state changing means is likely to be absorbed, but the urging direction of the urging means is such that the flow state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage. It is possible to suppress the immersion of the flow state changing means by the amount of the urging force.

In the gaming machine C6, the integrated member is rotated in a direction in which the flow-down state changing means projects in the direction of projecting to the first branch passage due to its own weight.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C6, the integrated member is rotated in the direction in which the flow-down state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage due to its own weight. A posture in which the flow-down state changing means projects the member into the first branch passage (that is, the first state position).
Can be easily maintained. Therefore, when the game ball collides, it is possible to further suppress the immersion of the flow state changing means by the amount of its own weight.

Further, even if the urging means falls off, the integrated part is maintained in a posture in which the flow-down state changing means protrudes to the first branch passage due to its own weight, and the game ball flows down to the first branch passage. Can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines C2 to C7, the distribution destination by the distribution means is set to the first branch passage, and the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage is regulated by the flow state changing means. When a specified number of gaming balls are stored in the branch passage, the gaming machine C is characterized in that the gaming balls flowing down the flow-down passage are formed so as to be able to flow down to the second branch passage.
8.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C2 to C7, the distribution destination by the distribution means is set to the first branch passage, and the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage is the flow state changing means. In a state where a specified number of game balls are stored in the first branch passage, the game balls flowing down the flow passage are formed so as to be able to flow down to the second branch passage, so that more than the specified number of game balls flow down. When flowing down the aisle, it is possible to prevent the number of game balls exceeding the specified number from staying in the flowing down aisle. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the distribution means (the operation of the distribution destination as the second branch passage) from being obstructed by the game ball stagnating in the flow passage.

In the gaming machine C8, the inner wall of the flow passage on the side facing the second branch passage has the game balls flowing down the flow passage at the end of the specified number of game balls stored in the first branch passage. The gaming machine C9 is formed so as to be able to be guided to the side surface of the gaming ball on the side of the second branch passage.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C8, the inner wall on the side facing the second branch passage in the flow passage has a specified number of gaming balls flowing down the flow passage stored in the first branch passage. Since it is formed so that it can be guided to the side surface of the second branch passage side of the game ball at the end of the game balls.
After colliding the game ball flowing down the flow-down passage with the last game ball out of the specified number of game balls, it can be easily made to flow down to the second branch passage.

The last game ball out of the specified number of game balls means a game ball located on the upstream side (the side opposite to the flow state changing means). When the specified number is 1, the game ball at the end means the game ball itself stored in the first branch passage.

In the gaming machine C8 or C9, the gaming machine C10 is characterized in that the flowing direction of the downstream end of the flowing passage is formed in a direction different from the flowing direction of the upstream end of the first branch passage.

According to the game machine C10, in addition to the effect of the game machine C8 or C9, the flow direction at the downstream end of the flow passage is formed in a direction different from the flow direction at the upstream end of the first branch passage. When the flowing game ball collides with the last game ball among the specified number of game balls stored in the first branch passage, the direction of the repulsive force applied to the last game ball is the direction of the first branch passage. It can be different from the flow direction at the upstream end. As a result, it is possible to prevent the trailing game ball from jumping out from the upstream end of the first branch passage and flowing into the second branch passage due to the repulsive force at the time of collision.

In any of the gaming machines C2 to C10, the distribution means is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the flow passage or the first branch passage, and the appearance position thereof is the flow direction at the downstream end of the flow passage. A gaming machine C11 characterized by being an inner wall on an extension of the above.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effect of either of the gaming machines C2 to C10, the distribution means is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the flow-down passage or the first branch passage, and the appearance position thereof is the flow-down position. Since it is an inner wall on the extension line in the flow direction at the downstream end of the passage, the distribution means can be projected at a position close to the game ball flowing down from the downstream end of the flow passage. Therefore,
It is possible to shorten the time required from the start of projecting the sorting means to the flow-down passage or the first branch passage until the game balls can be sorted. As a result, it is possible to more reliably switch the distribution destination by the distribution means.

In the gaming machine C11, the distribution means distributes a game ball flowing down the flow passage to the second branch passage by projecting to the flow passage or the first branch passage. The gaming machine C12 characterized in that the protruding direction of the means is set in the direction direction at the upstream end of the second branch passage.

According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C11, the distribution means distributes the game ball flowing down the flow-down passage to the second branch passage by projecting to the flow-down passage or the first branch passage. Since the protruding direction of the distribution means is set to the direction toward the upstream end of the second branch passage, when the gaming ball flowing down the flow passage comes into contact with the distribution means in the middle of the protrusion operation. Can push the game ball into the second branch passage with the protruding operation of the distribution means. As a result, distribution to the second branch passage can be performed more reliably.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C12, the first branch passage is formed so as to incline downward toward the downstream, and the gaming ball is formed so as to be able to roll on the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity. The gaming machine C13 is characterized in that the changing means is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear from the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity into the first branch passage.

According to the game machine C13, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C12, the first branch passage is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream, and the game ball is formed on the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity. Since the flow state changing means is formed so as to be rollable and can appear and disappear from the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity into the first branch passage, the game is performed after the flow state changing means starts to protrude into the first branch passage. It is possible to shorten the time required for the flow of the ball to be regulated. As a result, when the distribution destination of the distribution means is switched from the second branch passage to the first branch passage and the game ball is distributed to the first branch passage, the flow state changing means is regulated by the flow regulation of the game ball. You can easily make the protrusion in time.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C13, the flow-down state changing means is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the first branch passage, and at least in a state of maximally projecting to the first branch passage, in a protruding direction. A gaming machine C14 characterized in that a force component is acted on from a gaming ball to the flow state changing means.

According to the gaming machine C14, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C13, the flow-down state changing means is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the first branch passage, and protrudes at least in a state of maximally projecting to the first branch passage. Since the force component in the direction of movement is applied from the game ball to the flow state changing means, when the flow of the game ball distributed to the first branch passage is restricted, the flow is caused by the impact when the game ball collides. It is possible to suppress the immersion of the state changing means. Therefore, it is possible to easily regulate the flow of the game ball.

<Concept of the invention using the lower displacement unit 400 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a base member, a base member displaceable on one side of the base member, and a displacement member displaceable on the base member, the base member is associated with the displacement of the displacement member. The gaming machine D1 comprising a suppressing means for suppressing the reaction of a member.

Here, a gaming machine including a base member, a base member displaceable on one side of the base member, and a displaceable member displaceable on the base member is known (for example,). , JP-A-2015-029849). According to this gaming machine, in addition to the effect of displacing the base member between the overhanging position where the base member is extended to the game area and visible to the player and the retracted position where the base member is retracted from the game area, the base member is displaced. It is possible to perform an effect of displacing the displacement member in the state of being arranged at the overhanging position.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since one side of the base member is displaceably arranged on the base member, when the displacement member is displaced, the base member rattles with respect to the base member with one side as a fulcrum. There was a problem that it was easy to occur.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the suppression means for suppressing the reaction of the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member is provided, the occurrence of rattling of the base member with respect to the base member when the displacement member is displaced is suppressed. can do.

The reaction force associated with the displacement of the displacement member is, for example, one generated by a change in the center of gravity due to the displacement of the displacement member, or an inertial force generated by an increase or decrease in the displacement speed of the displacement member (change in acceleration). Examples include those generated by the reaction force when the displacement member is displaced and the game ball is ejected.

In the gaming machine D1, the suppressing means includes an arrangement member displaceably arranged on the base member, the displacement member is formed so as to be able to hold and eject a game ball, and the disposition member is formed. A gaming machine D characterized in that it is formed so as to be displaceable when a gaming ball is ejected from the displacement member.
2.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the suppressing means includes an arrangement member displaceably arranged on the base member, and the displacement member is formed so that the gaming ball can be held and ejected. Being done
Since the disposing member is formed so as to be displaceable when the game ball is ejected from the displacement member, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the base member with respect to the base member. That is, when the game ball is launched from the displacement member, the position of the center of gravity of the base member is changed by the weight of the game ball, for example, the change in the position of the center of gravity due to the launch of the game ball is offset. When a configuration in which the installation member is displaced is adopted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the base member due to a change in the position of the center of gravity. Further, when the game ball is launched from the displacement member, the base member receives a reaction due to the launch of the game ball. For example, the arrangement member is displaced in a direction that cancels the reaction caused by the launch of the game ball. When adopted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the base member due to the reaction.

The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that, when the displacement member is displaced, the gaming machine D1 or D2 includes a reverse member that is displaced with at least a displacement component that is in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the displacement member.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1 or D2, when the displacement member is displaced, the reverse member is displaced with at least a displacement component that is in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the displacement member. Therefore, the change in the position of the center of gravity of the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member can be reduced by the displacement of the reverse member. As a result, rattling of the base member due to a change in the position of the center of gravity can be suppressed.

If the configuration is such that the displacement of the reverse member is started when the displacement of the displacement member is started, at least a part of the inertial forces of both can be canceled out. As a result, it is possible to easily suppress the rattling of the base member when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state.

The gaming machine D2 or D3 is characterized by comprising a transmission mechanism that transmits the displacement of the displacement member to the disposition member or (and) the reverse member to displace the displacement member or (and) the reverse member. Amusement machine D4.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D2 or D3, a transmission mechanism that transmits the displacement of the displacement member to the displacement member or (and) the reverse member to displace the displacement member or (and) the reverse member. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for displacing the disposing member or / or the reverse member. That is, the driving means for displacing the displacement member is a disposing member or (and).
It can also be used as a driving means for displacing the reverse member. Therefore, the weight of the base member can be reduced accordingly, and the rattling can be easily suppressed.

Further, since the arrangement or / or the reverse member can be displaced mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member, for example, the position of the displacement member is detected by a sensor device and arranged according to the detection result. It is possible to eliminate the need for control to drive the member or (and) reverse member by the driving means, thereby reducing the product cost and the reliability of the displacement operation of the displacement member or (and) reverse member with respect to the displacement member. Can be secured.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement member starts the displacement from the second position, and the displacement member starts the displacement from the first position closer to one side of the base member than the second position. D5 is a gaming machine D5, characterized in that the displacement is started from the first position, at least in a state where the base member is arranged at a predetermined position with respect to the base member.

Here, when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state, the change in acceleration is maximized.
The base member tends to rattle due to the influence of inertial force.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D4, the displacement member starts the displacement from the second position and one side of the base member from the second position. A mode in which the displacement is started from the first position close to the base member is formed so as to be formable, and at least the base member is arranged at a predetermined position with respect to the base member (for example, the base member protrudes into the game area and is displayed by the player. At the visible overhang position), the displacement is started from the first position, so that the rattling of the base member can be suppressed. That is, since the first position is closer to one side of the base member than the second position, the weight of the displacement member can be determined by setting the first position as the displacement start position of the displacement member. The member can be kept close to the fulcrum when the member rattles with respect to the base member, and the influence of the inertial force when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state can be made less likely to act on the base member by that amount. As a result, rattling of the base member can be easily suppressed.

The gaming machine D5 includes a pinion gear disposed on the base member and a rack member having a rack gear meshed with the pinion gear, and the displacement member is disposed on the rack member. Machine D6.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D5, a pinion gear arranged on the base member and a rack member on which a rack gear meshed with the pinion gear is formed are provided, and the rack member is provided with a displacement member. Therefore, when the displacement of the displacement member is started from the first position, not only the weight of the rack member but also the weight of the rack member is one side of the base member (the base member is relative to the base member). It can be kept close to the fulcrum when rattling). As a result, it is possible to easily suppress the rattling of the base member when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state.

The gaming machine D7 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine D6, the displacement direction when the displacement member starts displacement from the first position is a direction away from one side of the base member.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D6, the displacement direction when the displacement member starts displacement from the first position is a direction away from one side of the base member, so that the displacement member is in the first position. In the state of being arranged in, the rack member can be brought closer to one side of the base member. That is, in order for the displacement member (rack member) to be displaced in a direction away from one side of the base member, the rack member is based on the portion on the rack gear side to which the pinion gear is meshed after the displacement of the displacement member is started. It will be directed to one side of the member. Therefore, the weight of the rack member can be kept closer to one side of the base member (the fulcrum when the base member rattles with respect to the base member), and as a result, when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state. It is possible to easily suppress the rattling of the base member.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the base member is provided with a support structure that supports one side of the base member in a displaceable manner and a drive mechanism that drives the base member supported by the support structure. The displacement member is formed so as to be able to hold and eject the game ball, and the drive mechanism is a regulatory means for regulating the displacement of the base member in the direction of reaction when the game ball is ejected from the displacement member. A gaming machine D8 characterized by being provided with.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D7, a support structure that displaceably supports one side of the base member to the base member and a base member supported by the support structure are driven. The displacement member is formed so as to be able to hold and eject the game ball, and the drive mechanism is such that the base member is displaced in the direction of reaction when the game ball is ejected from the displacement member. Since the regulating means for regulating is provided, it is possible to prevent the base member from being displaced with respect to the base member due to the reaction. As a result, the occurrence of rattling of the base member can be suppressed.

<Concept of the invention using the rotating unit 700 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a rotating body member that is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is visibly arranged by a player, a displacement member that is rotatably arranged on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member is provided. The featured gaming machine E1.

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a rotating cylinder member which is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is visibly arranged by a player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-119140). In this gaming machine, the rotating body member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the display (design) on the outer peripheral surface thereof is visually recognized by the player while rotating the rotating body member or stopping the rotating body member. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since it is only possible to form an effect mode in which the display of the outer peripheral surface is visually recognized by the player as the rotating body member rotates or stops, the effect of the effect is small. There was a problem that was insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the displacement member displaceably arranged on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member is provided, the display of the outer peripheral surface is displayed to the player as the rotating cylinder member rotates or stops. Since it is possible to form an effect mode in which the displacement member is displaced in addition to the effect mode to be visually recognized, it is possible to give a change to the effect mode and enhance the effect.

The rotating cylinder member does not have to have a circular cross-sectional shape cut in a plane perpendicular to its rotation axis, and may have a polygonal shape, an elliptical shape, or a combination thereof. Therefore, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member does not have to be a peripheral surface, but may be a flat surface, a curved surface, or a combination thereof.

In the gaming machine E1, the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable between at least the first position and the second position, and at the first position, a part of the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member is formed by the displacement member. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that at least a part of the displacement member is projected outward in the radial direction of the rotating body member at the second position.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, a part of the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member is formed by the displacement member. The outer shape can be reduced, and the space required for the rotating cylinder member to rotate can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, at least a part of the displacement member is projected outward in the radial direction of the rotating cylinder member, so that the displacement of the displacement member can be easily visually recognized by the player, which has an effect. Can be enhanced. Further, for example, the rotating body member is rotated with the displacement member arranged at the first position, and the displacement member is arranged (displaced) at the second position when the rotation of the rotating body member is stopped. The portion (displacement member) that was visually recognized as the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member can be formed so as to project outward in the radial direction of the rotating cylinder member, and the interest can be enhanced.

The gaming machine E2 includes a light emitting means that emits light, the rotating body member is formed having an internal space, the light emitting means is arranged in the internal space, and the displacement member is the second.
The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that when it is displaced to a position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member is opened and the internal space is communicated with the outside.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, a light emitting means for emitting light is provided.
The rotating body member is formed to have an internal space, and a light emitting means is arranged in the internal space.
When the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member is opened and the internal space is communicated to the outside, so that the light emitted by the light emitting means can be emitted to the outside and the displacement member is second. By being displaced to one position, it is possible to block the emission to the outside. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

The gaming machine E4 is characterized in that any of the gaming machines E1 to E3 includes a driving means for generating a driving force and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving force to the rotating cylinder member and the displacement member. ..

Here, in order to form the rotating cylinder member rotatably and to displace the displacement member on the rotating cylinder member, a driving means is required for each of the rotating cylinder member and the displacement member, which increases the product cost. Bulky. Further, when the driving means for displacing the displacement member is mounted on the rotating cylinder member, the weight of the rotating cylinder member increases, so that it becomes difficult to smoothly start or stop the rotation of the rotating cylinder member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the driving means for generating the driving force and the driving force of the driving means are applied to the rotating body member and the displacement member. Since the transmission means for transmitting is provided, it is possible to rotate the rotating cylinder member and displace the displacement member by also using the driving means of 1. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced. Further, since it is not necessary to mount the driving means for displacing the displacement member on the rotating cylinder member, the weight of the rotating cylinder member can be reduced, and the rotation of the rotating cylinder member can be smoothly started or stopped.

In the game machine E4, the driving means is formed so as to be able to generate a rotational driving force, and the transmitting means includes a rotating side transmitting means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the rotating body member and the driving means. The displacement side transmitting means for transmitting the rotation driving force to the displacement member and the rotation driving force are transmitted to one of the rotation side transmitting means and the displacement side transmitting means according to the rotation direction of the rotation driving force of the driving means. The gaming machine E5 is provided with a one-way clutch mechanism that cuts off transmission to the other side.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of the game machine E4, the drive means is formed so as to be able to generate a rotary drive force, and the transmission means is a rotary side transmission for transmitting the rotary drive force of the drive means to the rotating body member. The means, the displacement side transmitting means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and the rotational driving force to be transmitted to either the rotating side transmitting means or the displacement side transmitting means according to the rotation direction of the rotational driving force of the driving means. Since it is provided with a one-way clutch mechanism that cuts off transmission to the other, it is possible to switch the drive target (rotating body member or displacement member) driven by the rotational driving force only by switching the rotational direction of the driving means. That is, it is possible to switch between the rotation of the rotating cylinder member and the stop of the rotation and the displacement of the displacement member and the stop of the displacement according to the rotation direction of the drive means, and the structure can be formed while forming a plurality of modes. Can be simplified.

In the game machine E5, the rotary side transmission means is a gear train forming a part or all of a transmission path for transmitting the rotary drive force of the drive means to the rotary cylinder member, and a gear of one of the gear trains. A gaming machine E6 characterized by being provided with a load gear to be meshed with each other.

Here, in a structure in which the drive target (rotating body member or displacement member) is switched according to the rotation direction of the drive means by using the one-way clutch mechanism, when the transmission of the drive force from the drive means is cut off, It becomes a state in which it can freely rotate or displace in the direction driven by the driving force. Therefore, for example, when the drive target of the drive means is switched from the rotating body member to the displacement member and the transmission of the driving force is cut off, the rotating body member becomes a rotatable state and continues to rotate due to the inertial force (rotation). There is a risk of being

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E5, the rotary side transmitting means is a gear train forming a part or all of the transmission path for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the rotating cylinder member. And a load gear meshed with one of the gears in the gear train, so even if the transmission of the rotational driving force from the drive means is interrupted, the load (resistance) when rotating the load gear is provided. ) Can be used to prevent the rotating body member from continuing to rotate.

The gaming machine E5 or E6 is characterized by comprising a reverse rotation regulating means for restricting the rotation of the rotating cylinder member in a direction opposite to the direction of rotation by the rotational driving force of the driving means. ..

According to the game machine E7, in addition to the effect of the game machine E5 or E6, the reverse rotation regulating means for restricting the rotation of the rotating body member in the direction opposite to the direction of rotation by the rotational driving force of the driving means is provided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the rotating body member from rotating in the reverse direction due to, for example, an deviation in the position of the center of gravity of the rotating body member or a collision of a game ball.

In the gaming machine E2 or E3, the rotating body member is formed to have an internal space, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member is opened and the internal space is opened. The gaming machine E8, which is characterized in that the is communicated to the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2 or E3, the rotating body member is formed to have an internal space, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member is formed. Is released,
Since the internal space is communicated with the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be made to flow into the internal space of the rotating body member, or the game ball in the internal space of the rotating body member can be made to flow out to the game area. .. Further, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member is closed, so that the inflow and outflow of the game ball between the internal space and the game area can be blocked. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine E8, one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the rotating body member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the other side opposite to the one side is the game. A gaming machine E9 characterized by being overhanging to an area.

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E8, one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the rotating body member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the opposite side to the one side. Since the other side is projected to the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received by the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the flow of the game ball flowing down the game area into the internal space of the rotating body member by using the displacement member.

In the gaming machine E9, the displacement member is tilted downward from the other side toward the one side when the displacement member is displaced to the second position.

According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E9, when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the upper surface thereof is tilted downward from the other side toward one side, so that the gaming area is covered. After the flowed game ball is received by the upper surface of the displacement member, the received game ball can be guided (rolled) to the internal space of the rotating body member along the downward inclination of the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the flow of the game ball flowing down the game area into the internal space of the rotating body member by using the displacement member.

The gaming machine E11 is characterized in that the gaming machine E9 or E10 is provided with a displacement setting means for regulating or allowing the displacement of the displacement member according to the rotation position of the rotating body member.

According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E9 or E10, the overhanging displacement member is provided with a displacement setting means for regulating or allowing the displacement of the displacement member according to the rotation position of the rotating body member. It is possible to suppress interference with other members around the rotating cylinder member.

In any of the game machines E9 to E11, a rotation regulating means for restricting the rotation of the rotating body member is provided, and the rotation regulating member is such that the displacement member is displaced to the second position and the other side of the displacement member is the said. A gaming machine E12 characterized by restricting the rotation of the rotating cylinder member when overhanging to the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E9 to E11, a rotation regulating means for regulating the rotation of the rotating body member is provided, and the displacement member is displaced to the second position in the rotation regulating member. , When the other side of the displacement member is overhanging to the game area, the rotation of the rotating body member is restricted. Therefore, the rotating body member is rotated with the displacement member overhanging and is located on the rotation locus. It is possible to prevent the displacement member from interfering with other members. Further, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the rotating body member due to the load acting when the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

<Concept of the invention using the rotating unit 700 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a rotating body member that is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is visibly arranged by a player, the rotating body member externally forms an internal space formed inside the machine and the internal space thereof. The gaming machine F1 is characterized by having a communication port formed so that the gaming ball can pass therethrough.

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a rotating cylinder member which is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is visibly arranged by a player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-119140). According to this gaming machine, the rotating body member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the display (design) on the outer peripheral surface thereof is visually recognized by the player while rotating the rotating body member or stopping the rotating body member. be able to. However,
The above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the rotation body member is insufficiently utilized because it is only used as a member for holding a display for the player to visually recognize on the outer peripheral surface thereof.
That is, since the rotating body member needs to hold a display that can be visually recognized by the player, it is formed to be relatively large. Therefore, while the space occupied by the rotating cylinder member is large, the portion other than the outer peripheral surface thereof is not utilized.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the rotating body member includes an internal space formed inside the body member and a communication port formed so that the internal space can be communicated to the outside and the game ball can pass therethrough. , The game ball flowing down the game area can flow into or out of the internal space through the communication port. Therefore, the internal space of the rotating body member, which is regarded as a dead space, can function as a storage space or a throwing passage for the game ball, and the rotating body member can be utilized accordingly.

The communication port may be formed at only one place of the rotating cylinder member, or may be formed at two or more places. When the communication port is formed at only one place, the communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member. As a result, the position of the communication port can be moved up and down according to the rotation position of the rotating cylinder member, so that the game ball flows into or out of the internal space through the communication port (the communication port faces upward). At the same time, the game ball can flow into the internal space, and when the communication port faces downward, the game ball in the internal space can flow out).

Further, the rotating cylinder member does not have to have a circular cross-sectional shape cut in a plane perpendicular to its rotation axis, and may have a polygonal shape, an elliptical shape, or a shape in which they are combined. Therefore, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member does not have to be a peripheral surface, but may be a flat surface, a curved surface, or a combination thereof.

The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the communication port includes a first communication port and a second communication port formed at a position different from the first communication port.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, the communication port includes a first communication port and a second communication port formed at a position different from the first communication port. One of the communication port or the second communication port is an inlet for the game ball to flow in from the outside to the internal space, and the other of the first communication port or the second communication port is an outlet for the game ball to flow out from the internal space to the outside. Can be. That is, the rotating body member can be utilized as a throwing passage for a game ball without rotating the rotating body member (while maintaining the stopped state). In the state where the rotating body member is rotated, the rotating body member may be utilized as a throwing passage.

In the gaming machine F2, the first communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member, and is formed as an inflow port for flowing a game ball flowing down the game area into the internal space, and the second communication port is formed. The gaming machine F3 is formed on an end surface of the rotating cylinder member in the direction of the rotation axis, and is formed as an outlet for flowing out a gaming ball from the internal space to the gaming region.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2, the first communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member and is formed as an inflow port for the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area to flow into the internal space. The second communication port is formed on the end surface of the rotating cylinder member in the rotation axis direction, and is formed as an outlet for flowing out the gaming ball from the internal space to the gaming area. The inflow can be easily visually recognized by the player, and the game ball can be discharged while the rotating body member is maintained in the stopped state.

That is, where the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member is arranged so as to be visible to the player, the outer peripheral surface thereof is.
Since the first communication port (inflow port) is formed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the inflow of the game ball. On the other hand, when the second communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member, when the rotating body member is displaced to the rotation position where the communication port is upward, the game ball cannot flow out from the internal space. Since the second communication port (outlet) is formed on the end surface of the rotating cylinder member in the rotation axis direction, it is possible to form a state in which the game ball can flow out from the internal space regardless of the rotation position of the rotating cylinder member.

In any of the game machines F1 to F3, a displacement member displaceable on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member is provided, and when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the communication port is displaced. The gaming machine F4 is shielded by a member, and when the displacement member is displaced to a second position, the communication port is opened.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F3, a displacement member displaceably arranged on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member is provided, and the displacement member is displaced to the first position. Then, the communication port is shielded by the displacement member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the communication port is opened, so that the inflow and outflow of the game ball through the communication port is blocked and allowed. You can switch.

In the gaming machine F4, the communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member, one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the rotating cylinder member, and the displacement member is positioned at the second position. The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that when it is displaced, the other side opposite to the one side is projected to the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E4, one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the rotating body member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the opposite side to the one side. Since the other side is projected to the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received by the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, for example, when the communication port is formed as an inflow port, the game ball flowing down the game area can be easily flowed into the internal space of the rotating body member by using the displacement member.

In the gaming machine F5, the displacement member is characterized in that one side thereof is located on the front side in the rotation direction of the rotating cylinder member with respect to the other side.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F5, since one side of the displacement member is located on the front side in the rotation direction of the rotating body member with respect to the other side, when the rotating body member is rotated. Even if the displacement member interferes with the member arranged around the rotating body member, the force generated by the interference can be applied in the direction of closing (displace to the first position) the displacement member. That is, when the rotating cylinder member rotates, the displacement member interferes with other members and overhangs (displaces to the second position).
Can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from engaging with other members and hindering the rotation of the rotating cylinder member.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the rotating body member is rotatably arranged, and the rotating body member is supported by the base member and is arranged in the internal space of the rotating body member. On the other hand, the gaming machine F7 is provided with a fixing member that is not rotated.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the base member in which the rotating body member is rotatably arranged, and the internal space of the rotating body member while being supported by the base member. Since it is provided with a fixing member that is arranged in the center and is non-rotating with respect to the rotating body member, the gaming ball that has flowed into the internal space is held by the fixing member or rolled on the fixing member toward the outlet. ,
With the rotation of the rotating body member, it is possible to prevent the game ball from rampaging in the internal space or hindering the rolling of the game ball and staying in the internal space.

The gaming machine F8 is characterized in that any one of the gaming machines F4 to F6 is provided with a displacement setting means for regulating or allowing the displacement of the displacement member according to the rotation position of the rotating body member.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F4 to F6, a displacement setting means for regulating or allowing the displacement of the displacement member according to the rotation position of the rotating body member is provided.
It is possible to prevent the displacement member displaced to the position from interfering with other members around the rotating cylinder member.

In the game machine F5 or F6, a rotation regulating means for restricting the rotation of the rotating body member is provided, in which the displacement member is displaced to the second position and the other side of the displacement member moves to the gaming area. A gaming machine F9 characterized by restricting the rotation of the rotating cylinder member when overhanging.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effect of the game machine F5 or F6, a rotation regulating means for restricting the rotation of the rotating body member is provided, and the displacement member is displaced to the second position and the displacement member is displaced. When the other side is overhanging to the game area, the rotation of the rotating body member is restricted. Therefore, the rotating body member is rotated with the displacement member overhanging, and the other member located on the rotation locus thereof. It is possible to prevent the displacement member from interfering with the displacement member. Further, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the rotating body member due to the load acting when the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

In the game machine F3, the light emitting means formed so as to be able to emit light and arranged in the internal space of the rotating cylinder member, and the second communication port formed on the end face in the rotation axis direction of the rotating cylinder member. The gaming machine F10 is provided with an opening formed on the end surface opposite to the end surface to be formed, and an electrical connection line of the light emitting means is wired through the opening.

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effect of the game machine F3, an opening is formed at the end face in the rotation axis direction of the rotating cylinder member and opposite to the end face on which the second communication port is formed. Since the electrical connection line of the light emitting means is wired through the opening, it is possible to easily secure the space that can be used for each of the second communication port and the opening. As a result, the outflow of the game ball can be smoothly performed through the second communication port, and the wiring work to the opening of the electrical connection line can be easily performed. In addition, since the second communication port and the opening can be separated as much as possible, the internal space can be seconded.
It is possible to easily suppress the interference between the game ball that rolls to the communication port and the electrical connection line.

<Concept of the invention using the rotating unit 700 as an example>
From the lining position in which the first member and the second member are displaceably formed and the first member invisiblely covers at least a part of the second member, and the state in which the first member is arranged at the lining position. In a gaming machine formed so as to be displaceable from a retractable position that reduces an area that invisiblely covers the second member, the first member is displaced to the retracted position and the second member is displaced. The gaming machine G1 characterized in that the displacement of the machine is regulateably formed.

Here, a state in which the first member and the second member formed so as to be displaceable are provided, and the first member is arranged at an lining position that invisiblely covers at least a part of the second member and a lining position thereof. There is known a gaming machine formed so as to be displaceable from a retracted position that reduces an area that invisiblely covers the second member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-029849). According to this gaming machine, the first
By arranging the member in the lining position and displacing the first member to the retracted position from the state where the second member is invisible to the player, the second member is exposed and the player can visually recognize the second member. be able to.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the second member is formed so as to be displaceable, the first member is displaced to the retracted position, and when the second member is exposed, the second member is displaced. There is a risk of Therefore, there is a problem that the player cannot visually recognize the second member in an appropriate state, and the effect of the effect is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the first member is in a state of being displaced to the retracted position.
Since the displacement of the second member is regulateably formed, the player can visually recognize the second member in an appropriate state, and the effect of production can be ensured. That is, when the effect of moving the first member to the retracted position and exposing the second member is performed, the displacement of the first member to the retracted position, which must be performed for the effect, is applied to the second member. It is used as a means to regulate displacement. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide or control a mechanism for regulating the displacement of the second member, and the structure can be simplified accordingly.

The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that the second member is rotatably formed and the position of the center of gravity thereof is eccentric from the center of rotation.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1, the second member is rotatably formed and the position of the center of gravity thereof is eccentric from the center of rotation. Can be enhanced. That is, it is not necessary for the second member to have a shape in which the position of the center of gravity thereof is located at the center of rotation, and for example, a shape asymmetrical with respect to the rotation axis can be adopted, so that the effect of the second member can be enhanced. .. On the other hand, if the position of the center of gravity of the second member is eccentric in this way, the second member may rotate (rotate) around the center of rotation due to its own weight. Therefore, it is particularly effective that the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed so that the displacement of the second member can be regulated, whereby the second member can be visually recognized by the player in an appropriate state. It can be done and the production effect can be secured.

In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the second member is provided with a displacement member displaceably arranged.
The gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable at least in a state where the first member is displaced to the retracted position.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1 or G2, a displacement member displaceably arranged in the second member is provided, and at least the first member is displaced to the retracted position. Since it is formed so that it can be displaced in the state, when the effect of displacement the first member to the retracted position and exposing the second member is performed, the effect of the effect is further enhanced by further displacing the displaced member. Can be done. On the other hand, if the displacement member is displaced when the second member is exposed, the position of the center of gravity may move with the displacement, and the second member may rotate (rotate). Therefore, it is particularly effective that the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed so that the displacement of the second member can be regulated, whereby the second member can be visually recognized by the player in an appropriate state. It can be done and the production effect can be secured.

In the gaming machine G3, the outer peripheral surface of the second member is visibly arranged by the player, and one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported on the outer peripheral surface of the second member, and the one side thereof. The gaming machine G4 is characterized in that the other side opposite to the above side is formed so as to be able to project into the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G3, the outer peripheral surface of the second member is arranged so as to be visible to the player, and the displacement member can rotate on one side to the outer peripheral surface of the second member. Axis-supported by
Since the other side opposite to one side is formed so as to be able to project to the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received by the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, for example, when the inflow port of the game ball is formed in the second member, the game ball flowing down the game area can be easily flowed into the inflow port by using the displacement member. .. In this case, if the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area, the second member may be rotated due to the load acting at that time or the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, it is particularly effective that the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed so that the displacement of the second member can be regulated, whereby the displaced member is projected to a predetermined position in the game area. Can be easily maintained.

In the gaming machine G4, the first member is arranged in the gaming area while facing the outer peripheral surface of the second member at the lining position, and outside the area of the gaming area at the retracting position. A gaming machine G5 characterized by being arranged.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G4, the first member is arranged in the gaming area while facing the outer peripheral surface of the second member at the lining position, so that the game flows down the gaming area. It is possible to prevent the sphere from colliding with the second member and causing the second member to rotate. In particular, when the rotation position of the second member is the rotation position at which the displacement member faces the game area side, the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the displacement member, and the displacement member is released (tension). Can be suppressed.

Further, since the first member is arranged outside the area of the game area at the retracted position, it is possible to secure a space for the displaced member to project to the game area due to the displacement of the first member to the retracted position. .. Therefore, the outer peripheral surface of the second member can be brought closer to the game area side (player side) by that amount, and the displacement member can be easily visually recognized by the player.

In the gaming machine G5, the first member is rotatably formed around a rotation axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the second member, and is formed in a plate shape curved along the outer peripheral surface of the second member. A gaming machine G6 characterized by being played.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect of the game machine G5, the first member is rotatably formed around a rotation axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the second member, and the outer peripheral surface of the second member is formed. Since it is formed in a plate shape that curves along the above, the space required for displacement between the lining position and the retracting position can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to secure a space for arranging other members by that amount.
Further, by forming the first member in a curved shape in this way, the game ball flowing down the game area can be formed.
It is possible to suppress the anchoring on the first member arranged at the lining position and allow the flow to flow smoothly.

In any of the gaming machines G3 to G6, the gaming machine G7 is provided with a driving means for generating a driving force and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving force to the second member and the displacement member. ..

Here, in order to form the second member rotatably and to displace the displacement member on the second member, a drive means is required for each of the second member and the displacement member, which increases the product cost. Bulky. Further, when the driving means for displacementing the displacement member is mounted on the second member, the second member is mounted.
Since the weight of the member increases, it becomes difficult to smoothly start or stop the rotation of the second member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G3 to G6, the driving means for generating the driving force and the driving force of the driving means are transferred to the second member and the displacement member. Since the transmission means for transmitting is provided, it is possible to rotate the second member and displace the displacement member by also using the driving means of 1. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced. Further, since it is not necessary to mount the driving means for displacing the displacement member on the second member, the weight of the second member can be reduced, and the rotation of the second member can be smoothly started or stopped.

The gaming machine G7 is characterized by comprising a connecting means for connecting the first member and the displacement member and interlocking the displacement of the displacement member with the displacement of the first member.

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G7, a connecting means for connecting the first member and the displacement member and interlocking the displacement of the first member with the displacement of the displacement member is provided, so that the displacement member is displaced. The driving means for causing the displacement can also be used as the driving means for displacementing the first displacement member.
In this case, when the displacement member and the first member are displaced by the driving forces of different driving means,
When a control failure occurs, the displacement member and the first member may interfere with each other. Since the displacement member and the first member can be mechanically connected and their displacements can be synchronized, the displacement member and the first member can be synchronized. Interference with one member can be reliably suppressed.

<Concept of the invention using the rotating unit 700 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a driving means for generating a driving force, a displacement member displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, the transmitting means is used. , The first member, the second member located closer to the displacement member in the driving force transmission path than the first member, and the engaging member disposed between the first member and the second member. When the first member is displaced in one direction with respect to the second member, the engaging member engages with the first member and the second member, and the driving force is transmitted. The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that, in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member, the second member is displaced in advance of the first member in the one direction.

Here, a gaming machine including a driving means for generating a driving force, a displacement member displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member is known. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-029849). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the transmission state of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is always constant, so that when the driving means is driven at a constant driving speed, the displacement member is also constant. It is displaced at the displacement speed, and it is not possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member. Therefore, there is a problem that the effect of the effect due to the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient.

Although the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed by increasing or decreasing the drive speed of the drive means, the displacement speed in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member is different from the displacement speed in other sections. In order to increase the speed, it is necessary to arrange a sensor device that detects the position of the displacement member and control to increase or decrease the output of the drive means according to the detection result of the sensor device, which leads to an increase in product cost and control cost. .. In addition, the structure and control become complicated, resulting in a decrease in reliability.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, the transmission means includes the first member, the second member located closer to the displacement member in the transmission path of the driving force than the first member, and the first member and the second member thereof. It is provided with an engaging member disposed between the members, and when the first member is displaced in one direction with respect to the second member, the engaging member engages with the first member and the second member. As the driving force is transmitted, the transmission of the driving force is cut off, and in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member, the second member is displaced in advance of the first member in one direction. Therefore, regardless of the driving state of the driving means, the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in the other section. Therefore, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the effect of the effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

Further, according to the gaming machine H1, the second member can be advanced in one direction with respect to the first member regardless of the driving state of the driving means. Therefore, for example, in the entire section of the displacement section of the displacement member, The driving means can be driven at a constant driving speed, and in the middle of the displacement section of the displacement member (that is,
It is not necessary to increase or decrease the drive speed of the drive means (depending on the predetermined section or another section). As a result, control can be simplified, control costs can be reduced, and operational reliability can be improved. Alternatively, the driving of the driving means can be stopped in a predetermined section, and in this case, the energy consumption can be suppressed.

Further, according to the gaming machine H1, in the driving state in which the first member is displaced in the other direction with respect to the two members, the engaging member is disengaged and the transmission of the driving force is cut off. The displacement member can be put into a stopped state (non-driving state), and the driving force of the driving means in such a driving state can be set.
It can be used as a driving force for driving other members. That is, by switching the driving direction of the driving means, the two members, the displacement member and the other member, can be displaced respectively.

The transmitting means is formed so that when the first member is displaced in the other direction with respect to the two members, the engaging member is disengaged and the transmission of the driving force is cut off. It may be something that is done.

In the game machine H1, the displacement member is rotatably formed and its center of gravity is eccentric from the center of rotation. In the predetermined section, the weight of the displacement member causes the second member to move in one direction. The gaming machine H2 characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to act in the direction of displacement.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1, the displacement member is rotatably formed and the position of the center of gravity thereof is eccentric from the center of rotation. Since the two members are operably formed in a direction that displaces them in one direction, the weight of the displaced members can be used to displace the second member in advance of the first member in one direction. .. That is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the effect of the effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

For example, when the displacement member is repeatedly formed to rotate 360 degrees around its rotation axis, the displacement speed (rotational speed) of the displacement member in a predetermined section is the displacement speed (rotational speed) of the displacement member in other sections. A mode in which the rotation speed is faster than the displacement speed (rotational speed), that is, a rotation mode in which the rotation speed is increased or decreased during one rotation can be repeatedly performed.

In the gaming machine H2, the transmission means includes a main body portion that is rotationally driven by the second member, a crank member that is projected from the main body portion and has a pin portion that is eccentrically located from the rotation center of the main body portion. A sliding groove into which a pin portion of the crank member is slidably inserted is formed on one end side, and an arm member whose intermediate portion is rotatably supported is provided, and the other end side of the arm member is displaced. A gaming machine H3 characterized by being connected to a member.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H2, the transmission means is projected from the main body portion rotationally driven by the second member and the main body portion thereof, and is positioned eccentrically from the rotation center of the main body portion. Since a crank member having a pin portion and an arm member in which a sliding groove into which the pin portion of the crank member is slidably inserted is formed on one end side and an intermediate portion is rotatably supported, the arm member is provided. By rotationally driving the crank member by the second member and sliding the pin member along the sliding groove, the other end side of the arm member can be reciprocated. In this case, since the other end side of the arm member is connected to the displacement member, the displacement member can be reciprocated between the first position and the second position in accordance with the reciprocating operation of the other end side of the arm member. .. That is,
The displacement direction of the displacement member can be switched without switching the drive direction of the drive means.

In the gaming machine H3, the displacement member moves with the reciprocating motion of the other end side of the arm member.
In the middle of the reciprocating operation between the first position and the second position and the displacement from the first position to the second position and the displacement from the second position to the first position. The direction in which the weight of the displacement member is applied to the second member is changed from the direction in which the second member is displaced in the other direction to the direction in which the second member is displaced in the one direction. Characteristic gaming machine H4.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H3, the displacement member is reciprocated between the first position and the second position with the reciprocating operation of the other end side of the arm member, and the first position. From the second
The direction in which the weight of the displacement member is applied to the second member in the middle of the displacement to the position and the displacement from the second position to the first position causes the second member to move in the other direction. Since the direction of displacement is changed to the direction of displacement of the second member in one direction, when the displacement member is reciprocated, the displacement member is displaced from the middle of the displacement regardless of which direction the displacement member is displaced. The displacement speed can be increased. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the effect of the effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

For example, the displacement member reciprocates between the overhanging position (first position), which is a position where the displacement member is visibly extended from the player, and the retracting position (second position), which is the overhanging position or retracted position. In the case of operation, when the displacement member is extended from the retracted position to the overhanging position, the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed until the middle, and the displacement speed of the displacement member is increased from the middle to vigorously move the displacement member. It is possible to overhang to the overhanging position, and when retracting the displacement member from the overhanging position to the overhanging position, the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed until the middle, and the displacement speed of the displacement member is increased from the middle. Then, the displacement member can be immediately retracted to the retracted position.

In the gaming machine H1, the displacement member is formed so as to be slidable, and in the predetermined section, the displacement member is tilted downward in the direction of the slide displacement, so that the weight of the displacement member makes the second member. The gaming machine H5 is characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to act in a direction of displacement in one direction.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1, the displacement member is formed so as to be slidable and is tilted downward in a predetermined section in the direction of the slide displacement, whereby the weight of the displacement member is increased. Since the sill is formed so as to be able to act in a direction that displaces the second member in one direction, the weight of the displaced member is used to displace the second member in advance of the first member in one direction. be able to. That is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the effect of the effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

A gaming machine H6, wherein in any of the gaming machines H2 to H5, the displacement member is formed so as to be able to hold the gaming ball at least in the predetermined section.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines H2 to H5, the displacement member is formed so as to be able to hold the game ball at least in a predetermined section, so that the displacement member holds the game ball. In the state, the weight of the displacement member as a whole can be increased by the weight of the game ball, and the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section can be further increased. Further, the weight of the displacement member as a whole is made different depending on whether the game ball is held by the displacement member, when the game ball is not held, or depending on the number of the game balls held. be able to. Thereby, in each case, the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the effect of the effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

In any of the gaming machines H2 to H6, the displacement member includes a receiving portion for receiving the game ball flowing down in the gaming area, and at least in the predetermined section, when the receiving portion receives the gaming ball, the gaming ball is provided. The gaming machine H7 is characterized in that a force applied to the displacement member is operably formed in a direction in which the second member is displaced in one direction.

According to the game machine H7, in any of the game machines H2 to H6, the displacement member includes a receiving portion for receiving the game ball flowing down the game area, and when the receiving portion receives the game ball at least in a predetermined section. Since the force applied to the displacement member from the game ball is formed so as to be able to act in the direction of displacement of the second member in one direction, the kinetic energy of the game ball when the receiving portion receives the game ball. Can be used to increase the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section. In addition, the force applied to the displacement member differs depending on whether the receiving portion receives the game ball, does not receive it, or receives the game ball according to the flow speed (magnitude of kinetic energy) of the game ball. be able to. Thereby, in each case, the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the effect of the effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

The game ball flowing down the game area is not limited to the game ball that moves in the front surface of the game board along the direction of gravity, but also includes the game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity. As a game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity, for example, a game ball that collides with a nail, a tulip, an object, etc. and moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity, or a game ball that rolls a stage and then jumps out of the stage. An example is a game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity.

In the gaming machine H6 or H7, the transmission means includes a gear train forming a part or all of the driving force transmission path, and a load gear meshed with one gear in the gear train. A game machine H8 characterized by.

According to the game machine H8, in addition to the effect of the game machine H6 or H7, the transmission means meshes with a gear train forming a part or all of the transmission path of the driving force and one of the gear trains. Since the load gear is provided, when the game ball is held by the displacement member or the game ball is received by the receiving portion in a predetermined section, the weight or kinetic energy of the game ball is used. The second member is displaced ahead of the first member in one direction (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section is made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in the other section). If the game ball is not held by the displacement member or the game ball is not received by the receiving portion, the load (resistance) when rotating the load gear is used to move the second member to the first member. It is possible to suppress the displacement in advance in one direction (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section is increased).

That is, when the game ball is not held by the displacement member or the receiving portion does not receive the game ball, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section becomes faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections. Only when the game ball is held by the displacement member or the receiving portion receives the game ball, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section is higher than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections. It is possible to easily form the aspect of speeding up.

<Concept of the invention using the back case 300 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a game board, a back member arranged on the back side of the game board, and a fixing member arranged on the back member, the game board is arranged between the game board and the back member facing each other. A displacement member that is provided and can be operated from the outside of the facing space between the game board and the back member, which is on the back side of the game board, is provided, and the fixing member has a protruding portion that engages with the displacement member. The gaming machine I1 is provided, wherein the protruding portion thereof is engaged with the displacement member, and the fixing member is arranged on the back surface member.

Conventionally, a gaming machine including a gaming board, a back member arranged on the back side of the gaming board, and a fixing member arranged on the back side of the backing member has been known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004). -3360
No. 3 publication). According to this gaming machine, the fixing member is fastened to the back member by a screw inserted from the front side of the back member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fixing member from being removed from the back surface side of the game board.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the process of arranging the fixing member on the back surface member is the process of arranging the fixing member on the back surface member, and the process of fastening the fixing member to the back surface member is the operation from the back surface side of the back surface member. And the work from the front side of the back member is the work from the opposite direction. for that,
There is a problem that the number of work steps for arranging the fixing member on the back member increases.

On the other hand, according to the game machine I1, a displacement member which is arranged between the game board and the facing surface of the back surface member and can be operated from the outside of the facing space between the game board and the back surface member on the back surface side of the game board. (Displacement member 310), the fixing member includes a protrusion (engaged portion 322) that engages with the displacement member, the protrusion and the displacement member engage, and the fixing member is arranged on the back surface member. Since it is installed, the fixing member can be arranged on the back case by working in one direction from the back side. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the step of wrapping around to the front side or reversing the back member after working from the back side. As a result, the number of work steps for arranging the fixing member on the back surface member can be reduced.

The gaming machine I1 includes a first member arranged between the gaming board and the back surface member, and the displacement member is arranged on the back surface side of the first member. I2
..

Here, in recent gaming machines, a first member (1st member) arranged between facing each other from the gaming board to the back surface member (
There is a tendency for the size of the accessory device, etc.) to increase. Therefore, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the enlarged first member is arranged in front of the fixing member or at a position close to the fixing member, the fixing member is fastened from the front side of the back member. At that time, the first member becomes an obstacle. Therefore, it has been difficult to fasten the fixing member with a screw inserted from the front side of the back member to dispose the fixing member on the back member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, the first pachinko machine is arranged between the gaming board and the back member.
Since the member is provided and the displacement member is arranged on the back surface side of the first member, the displacement member is arranged between the game board and the back member while the first member is arranged between the game board and the back member. The displacement member can be operated from the outside of the displacement member to engage the displacement member and the fixing member. Therefore, the fixing member can be arranged on the back surface member without being disturbed by the first member arranged between the gaming board and the back surface member.

Further, since the displacement member is arranged between the back surface member and the first member facing each other, the engaging portion between the displacement member and the fixing member can be arranged between the back surface member and the first member facing each other. Therefore, it is possible to suppress access to the engaging portion between the displacement member and the fixing member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being illegally disengaged from the fixing member and the fixing member from being illegally replaced (for example, being replaced with an illegal fixing member).

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the displacement member is slidably displaced on a plane parallel to the facing surface of the back surface member and the gaming board.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1 or I2, the displacement member is slid and displaced on a plane parallel to the facing surface between the back surface member and the gaming board, so that when the displacement member is displaced, the displacement member is displaced. The amount of displacement of the back member and the gaming board in the facing direction can be set to 0. As a result, it is possible to secure a space for arranging the first member between the displacement member and the game board facing each other. resulting in,
The outer shape of the first member in the direction opposite to the back member and the game board can be increased, and the degree of freedom in designing the first member can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the back member is a box including a bottom wall portion facing the gaming board and a side wall portion erected from the edge portion of the bottom wall portion toward the gaming board. An operator is formed in a shape, an opening is formed in either the bottom wall portion or the side wall portion, and the displacement member is inserted through the opening and protrudes from the inside of the back surface member to the outside. A gaming machine I4 characterized by being provided.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the back member is erected on the gaming board side from the bottom wall portion facing the gaming board and the edge portion of the bottom wall portion. The displacement member is formed in a box shape and has an opening formed in either the bottom wall portion or the side wall portion, and the displacement member is inserted through the opening portion from the inside to the outside of the back surface member. Since it is equipped with a protruding operator, the operator can be operated from the outside of the back member (outside the facing space from the game board to the back member).
The displacement member can be displaced. Therefore, even if the first member is disposed inside the back member (between the facing between the game board and the back member), the displacement member can be displaced without being disturbed by the first member. ..

The gaming machine I4 is characterized by comprising an urging means for urging the displacement member in a direction in which the displacement member is disengaged from the fixing member in a state where the displacement member and the fixing member are disengaged. The gaming machine I5.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effect of the game machine I4, when the displacement member and the fixing member are disengaged, the displacement member is urged in the direction of disengaging the fixing member. Since it is equipped with a force means, if the displacement member and the fixing member are forgotten to be engaged, or if the displacement member and the fixing member are incompletely engaged, the displacement member is engaged with the fixing member. It can be displaced in the direction of release. Therefore, the operator can determine whether or not the displacement member and the fixing member are properly engaged at the position where the operator projecting to the outside of the back surface member is arranged. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being forgotten to be engaged with the fixing member.

The urging means includes a form in which a spring, rubber, or the like is arranged between the displacement member and the back surface member to urge the displacement member in the direction of disengagement from the fixing member, or the weight of the displacement member itself. An example is a form in which the displacement member acts in the direction of disengaging the engagement with the fixing member.

The gaming machine I4 or I5 includes an outer frame formed in a frame shape capable of accommodating the gaming board and the back member, and the inner shape of the outer frame is the outer shape of the gaming board and the back member in front view. A gaming machine that is formed substantially in the same shape and in a state in which the displacement member and the fixing member are not engaged, the operator is arranged outside the facing space between the gaming board and the back surface member. I6.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I4 or I5, an outer frame formed in a frame shape capable of accommodating the gaming board and the back member is provided, and the inner shape of the outer frame is the gaming board and the back member. In the state where the displacement member and the fixing member are not engaged, they are formed to be substantially the same as the outer outer shape in the front view of.
Since the operator is placed on the outside of the facing space from the game board to the back member, if the displacement member and the fixing member are not engaged and the game board and the back member are housed in the outer frame, the outer frame is placed. The operator can be brought into contact with the. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game board and the back member from being housed in the outer frame. Therefore, when the fixing member is forgotten to be arranged on the back surface member, or when the displacement member and the fixing member are forgotten to engage with each other, the operator can be made aware of the forgetting (abnormality). As a result, it is possible to prevent the game board from being accommodated in the outer frame in a state where the fixing member is forgotten to be arranged on the back surface member or the displacement member and the fixing member are forgotten to be engaged.

In any of the gaming machines I4 to I6, the gaming machine I7 is provided with a suppressing means for suppressing the operation of the operator in the direction of disengaging the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member. ..

According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines I4 to I6, a suppressing means for suppressing the operation of the operator in the direction of disengaging the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member is provided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being displaced in the direction of disengagement from the fixing member by operating the operator. As a result, the operator can be used to prevent the displacement member from being disengaged from the fixing member.

As a means for suppressing the operation of the operator in the direction of disengaging the displacement member and the fixing member, the operator is pivotally supported in the direction of disengagement. , A form in which the protruding tip of the operator projects on an inclined surface in a direction in which the displacement member and the fixing member are disengaged, and a form in which the actuator is arranged between the displacement member and the fixing member. Etc. are exemplified.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I7, the displacement member includes an elastic piece that can be elastically deformed and an elastic piece.
The fixing member includes a first protrusion projecting from the elastic piece, and the fixing member includes an accommodating portion that opens in the displacement region of the displacement member and is recessed in the displacement direction of the displacement member. The accommodating portion includes a second protrusion that protrudes into the displacement region of the first protrusion, and the second protrusion is the same as the first protrusion because the displacement member is displaced in one direction. It is characterized in that the elastic piece is displaced by abutting and the displacement member is displaced in the other direction, so that the displacement member and the fixing member can be engaged with each other by abutting with the first member. The game machine I8.

According to the game machine I8, in addition to the effects of the game machines I1 to I7, the displacement member includes an elastic piece that can be elastically deformed and a first protrusion projecting from the elastic piece, and the fixing member is a fixing member. The housing portion is provided with a housing portion that is open to the displacement region of the displacement member and is recessed in the displacement direction of the displacement member, and the housing portion is provided with a second protrusion portion that is projected into the displacement region of the first protrusion portion. When the displacement member is displaced in one direction, the two protrusions come into contact with the first protrusion to displace the elastic piece, and when the displacement member is displaced in the other direction, the two protrusions are in contact with the first member. Since the displacement member and the fixing member can be engaged with each other in contact with each other, the second protrusion can allow the displacement member to be displaced in one direction and can regulate the displacement of the displacement member in the other direction. Thereby, it is possible to regulate the displacement of the displacement member in both the engagement direction with the fixing member and the detachment direction.

In the gaming machine I8, the accommodating portion is set to a size capable of accommodating the elastic piece, and when the first protrusion and the second protrusion are engaged with the accommodating portion, the elastic piece is placed in the accommodating portion. The gaming machine I9, characterized in that the machine is accommodated.

According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I8, the accommodating portion is set to a size capable of accommodating the elastic piece, and when the first protrusion and the second protrusion are engaged with each other, the accommodating portion is set to a size that can accommodate the elastic piece. Since the elastic piece is accommodated in the accommodating portion, it is possible to make it difficult to operate the elastic piece from the outside of the accommodating portion in a state where the displacement member and the fixing member are engaged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the elastic piece from being elastically deformed by being operated from the outside of the accommodating portion. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement member and the fixing member from being illegally disengaged. In this case, the fixing member can be removed from the back surface member by cutting the displacement member (base end portion of the accommodating portion) located outside the accommodating portion.

In the gaming machine I9, the displacement member includes a plurality of the elastic pieces that can be accommodated in the accommodating portion, and the accommodating portion is set to a size that can accommodate a plurality of the elastic pieces. Machine I10.

According to the game machine I10, in addition to the effect of the game machine I9, the displacement member is provided with a plurality of elastic pieces that can be accommodated in the accommodating portion, and the accommodating portion is set in a space having a size capable of accommodating a plurality of elastic pieces. Therefore, when the displacement member (the base end portion of the elastic piece) located outside the accommodating portion is cut and the fixing member is removed from the back surface member, the cut displacement member (elastic piece) is placed inside the accommodating portion. The displacement member (elastic piece) that has not been cut in that state can be accommodated inside the accommodating portion. Therefore, since the displacement member (elastic piece) cut inside the accommodating portion can be accommodated and left, the number of the displacement members accommodated in the accommodating portion and the number of cut elastic pieces of the displacement member are compared. Therefore, when the fixing member is illegally removed and changed to an illegal fixing member, the number of the fixing member is different, so that the operator can be notified that the gaming machine has been illegally used.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I10, the first member regulates the displacement of the displacement member in the direction of disengaging the engagement with the fixing member when the displacement member engages with the fixing member. The gaming machine I11, characterized in that it is provided with a regulatory means for performing a displacement.

According to the game machine I11, in addition to the effects of the game machines I1 to I10, when the displacement member engages with the fixing member, the regulation that regulates the displacement of the displacement member in the direction of disengagement from the fixing member. Since the means is provided, it is possible to regulate the displacement of the displacement member when a force acts in the direction of disengaging the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member due to fraud. Therefore, when a force acts in the direction of disengaging the displacement member from engaging with the fixing member due to fraud, it is possible to suppress the concentration of the force on the engaging portion between the displacement member and the fixing member, which is fraudulent. It is possible to prevent the displacement member or the fixing member from being damaged by the force input by.

Further, since the first member is provided with the regulating means, when the fixing member is removed from the back member, it is necessary to remove the fixing member from the back member.
By removing the first member from the back member, the restriction on the displacement of the displacement member by the regulating means can be released. In this case, by removing the first member, the engaging portion between the displacement member and the fixing member can be accessed, so that the work efficiency when removing the fixing member from the back surface member can be improved.

Examples of the regulating means for regulating the displacement of the displacement member include a form in which a protrusion is arranged inside the engaging recess to regulate the elastic deformation of the displacement member, a form in which the protrusion is engaged with the displacement member, and the like.

<Concept of the invention using the general winning opening unit 150 as an example>
A base member having a game area on the front side, and a first decoration forming a decoration on the front surface of the base member.
In a gaming machine including a decorative means and a second decorative means for forming a decoration continuous with the decoration of the first decorative means in the front view, the first decorative means and the second decorative means are in the front-rear direction in the front view. A gaming machine J1 characterized in that it is arranged at a position adjacent to the pachinko machine J1.

Conventionally, a base member having a gaming area on the front side, a first decorative means arranged on the front surface of the base member and a decoration formed on the front surface, and a first decorative means arranged on the front surface of the first decorative means. A gaming machine is known that includes one member and a second decorative means that is arranged in front of the first member and forms a continuous decoration with the decoration of the first decorative means in a front view (for example,). JP 2007
-000195 (Ab.). According to this gaming machine, the design of the base member can be ensured by making the player visually recognize the decorations of the first decorative means and the second decorative means as one decoration.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the second decorative means is arranged in front of the first member, the second decorative means is separated from the first decorative means by the thickness of the first member. It is placed in a distant position. Therefore, the decoration of the first decorative means and the decoration of the second decorative means are visually recognized offset by the thickness of the first member depending on the position (direction of the line of sight) in which the player visually recognizes the base member, and the base. There was a problem that the design of the member was deteriorated.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, the first decorative means and the second decorative means are arranged at positions adjacent to each other in the front-rear direction in the front view, so that the first decorative means and the second decorative means are used. The distance between the front and back can be reduced. As a result, when the first decorative means and the second decorative means are visually recognized from an angle inclined with respect to the front view of the first decorative means or the second decorative means, the decoration of the first decorative means and the decoration of the second decorative means It is possible to prevent the image from being misaligned and visually recognized. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the decoration of the first decorative means and the decoration of the second decorative means as the decoration of 1, and the design of the base member can be improved.

Further, the first decorative means may be any as long as the decoration is formed. For example, a sticker member having the decoration printed on the plate-shaped member is attached to the front surface of the base member, or the decoration is performed on the front surface of the base member. Is to be printed.

When the second decorative means is attached (adhered) to the front of the first decorative means, the operator may attach (adhere) the second decorative means while visually recognizing the decoration of the first decorative means. can. Therefore, the worker can easily attach the second decorative means to the first decorative means at a position where the decoration of the first decorative means and the decoration of the second decorative means are continuous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the worker who attaches the second decorative means to the first decorative means.

In the gaming machine J1, the front member is provided with a front member formed of a light-transmitting material, formed in an outer shape larger than the outer shape in the front view of the second decorative means, and arranged in front of the second decorative means. The member is provided with a recess that is recessed in a shape larger than the outer shape of the second decorative means on the surface facing the second decorative means, and the recessed dimension of the recess is larger than the thickness dimension of the second decorative means. The gaming machine J2, which is characterized by being set to a large value.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1, the outer shape is formed from a light-transmitting material and has a larger outer shape than the outer shape in the front view of the second decorative means, and is arranged in front of the second decorative means. The front member is provided with a recess that is recessed in a shape larger than the outer shape of the second decorative means on the surface facing the second decorative means, and the recessed dimension of the recess is the second decorative means. Since the value is set to be larger than the thickness dimension of the above, the front member can be arranged on the base member with the second decorative means housed in the recess. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the second decorative means from falling off from between the base member and the front member.

Further, since the recessed dimension of the recess is set to a value larger than the thickness dimension of the second decorative means,
It is possible to prevent the formation of a gap between the front member and the first decorative means. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust and dirt from being caught between the front member and the first decorative means, making it difficult to visually recognize the decoration of the first decorative means.

The gaming machine J2 is characterized in that the inner surface of the recess is formed along the outer shape of the second decorative means, and the second decorative means is arranged so as to be adhered to the recessed bottom surface of the recess. Amusement machine J3 to play.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J2, the inner side surface of the recess is formed along the outer shape of the second decorative means, and the second decorative means is adhered to the concave bottom surface of the recess. Because it will be set up
By disposing the second decorative means along the recess of the front member, the second decorative means can be positioned and arranged with respect to the front member. Thereby, when the front member is arranged in front of the first decorative means, it is possible to prevent the second decorative means from being sandwiched between the edge portion of the front member and the facing of the first decorative means. As a result, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the first decorative means and the front member, and dust or dirt is caught between the front member and the first decorative means to visually recognize the decoration of the first decorative means. It can be suppressed that it becomes difficult.

In the gaming machine J3, the front member includes a protrusion that projects from the surface facing the base member toward the base member, and the base member has an opening that opens at a position corresponding to the protrusion. The gaming machine J4 is characterized in that the front member is positioned with respect to the base member by being inserted into the opening.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J3, the front member is provided with a protrusion protruding from the surface facing the base member toward the base member, and the base member is an opening that opens at a position corresponding to the protrusion. Since the front member is positioned with respect to the base member by providing the portion and the protrusion being inserted into the opening, it is possible to prevent the front member from being displaced with respect to the first decorative means. Further, the second decorative means is positioned with respect to the front member by the recess of the front member. Therefore,
By positioning the front member with respect to the first decorative means, it is possible to prevent the first decorative means and the second decorative means from being displaced from each other. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means as one decoration.

In the gaming machine J4, the protrusion is formed on the concave bottom surface of the recess, and the second decorative means is formed with a through hole penetrating at a position corresponding to the protrusion, and the protrusion is inserted into the through hole. A gaming machine J5 characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J4, the protrusion is formed on the concave bottom surface of the recess, and the second decorative means is formed with a through hole penetrating at a position corresponding to the protrusion. Since the protrusion is inserted into the hole, the arrangement of the second decorative means with respect to the front member can be simplified.
That is, if the second decorative means is simply arranged inside the concave portion of the front member, it is necessary to arrange the edge portion of the second decorative means along the concave portion, whereas the protrusion is provided on the second decorative means. By forming the through hole to be inserted, the arrangement of the second decorative means with respect to the front member can be determined only by inserting the protrusion into the through hole. As a result, the arrangement of the second decorative means with respect to the front member can be simplified.

Further, since the protrusion for positioning the front member is inserted into the through hole of the second decorative means with respect to the first decorative means, the second decorative means and the first decorative means are positioned at the same portion (projection). Therefore, the accuracy of positioning between the decorative member and the first decorative means can be improved. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means as one decoration.

In any of the gaming machines J2 to J5, the front member includes an inclined portion that inclines toward the first decorative means side toward the outer edge in front view, and the second portion is on the back side of the inclined portion.
A gaming machine J6 characterized in that an edge portion of a decorative means is arranged.

Here, in order to make it easier for the player to visually recognize both the decoration of the first decorative means and the decoration of the second decorative means as the decoration of 1, it is necessary to suppress the misalignment of the two decorations. However, when the first decorative means and the second decorative means are overlapped in the front-rear direction, the positions of the decorations of both are displaced in the front-rear direction by the thickness of the second decorative means, so that the first decorative means or the first decorative means or the first. 2 There is a problem that when the first decorative means and the second decorative means are visually recognized from an angle inclined with respect to the front view of the decorative means, the front-rear positional deviation may be recognized.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines J2 to J5, the front member is provided with an inclined portion that is inclined toward the first decorative means toward the outer edge in the front view, and is inclined. Since the edge portion of the second decorative means is arranged on the back side of the portion, the misalignment of the decoration due to the difference in the arrangement in the front-rear direction between the second decorative means and the first decorative means is caused by the inclined portion of the front member. The refraction of light can make it difficult for the player to recognize.

More specifically, the light that is reflected by the decoration of the first decorative means or the second decorative means, passes through the inside of the front member, and is emitted from the inclined portion is inclined in the passing direction with respect to the front surface of the base member. When the angle is made smaller than the tilt angle in the direction orthogonal to the tilt plane of the tilted portion with respect to the front surface of the base member, the tilt angle in the light emission direction from the tilted portion with respect to the front surface of the base member is the base. It is made smaller than the tilt angle in the light passing direction with respect to the front surface of the member. Therefore, the connecting portion between the first decorative means and the second decorative means from the direction of the crossing angle smaller than the inclination angle in the direction orthogonal to the inclined surface of the inclined portion with respect to the front surface of the base member. The passing direction of the light visually recognized by the player can be brought closer to the overlapping direction of the first decorative means and the second decorative means. As a result, when the player visually recognizes the first decorative means and the second decorative means, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the front-back positional deviation.

In the gaming machine J6, the second decorative means includes an adhesive surface bonded to the front member and a non-adhesive surface not adhered to the front member, and the inclined portion and the second decorative means are at least. A gaming machine J7 characterized in that the non-adhesive surface is provided at a position facing each other.

Here, when the player visually recognizes the connecting portion of the decoration between the first decorative means and the second decorative means from the direction orthogonal to the inclination of the inclined portion, the front and back of the first decorative means and the second decorative means. There is a risk that the player will recognize the misalignment of the decoration in the direction.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J6, the second decorative means is
It has an adhesive surface that is adhered to the front member and a non-adhesive surface that is not adhered to the front member, and has an inclined portion and a second.
Since the non-adhesive surface is provided at least at a position facing the decorative means, a gap is formed between the second decorative means and the front member (inclined portion) on the non-adhesive surface, and the non-adhesive surface of the front member is passed through. It is possible to totally reflect the light. Thereby, when the player visually recognizes the second decorative means from the direction orthogonal to the inclination of the inclined portion, the player can not visually recognize the decoration of the end portion of the second decorative means. .. As a result, when the player visually recognizes the first decorative means and the second decorative means from the direction orthogonal to the inclination of the inclined portion, the decoration of the second decorative means is made difficult to recognize. , It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the misalignment of the decorations in the front-rear direction between the first decorative means and the second decorative means.

In the gaming machine J6 or J7, the inclined portion is formed in an arc shape in which the outer edge of the cross section in the direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the outer edge of the front member in front view curves convexly toward the outer edge of the front member. The gaming machine is characterized in that the end portion of the second decorative means is arranged on the center side of the front member in a front view rather than a substantially intermediate position of a straight line connecting the ends of the inclined portions. J8.

According to the game machine J8, in addition to the effect of the game machine J6 or J7, the inclined portion has an outer edge of a cross section in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the outer edge of the front member in a front view, and is convex toward the outer edge of the front member. Since the end of the second decorative means is arranged on the center side of the front member in the front view, rather than the substantially intermediate position of the straight line connecting the ends of the inclined portions, which are formed in an arc shape curved in a shape. When the first decorative means and the second decorative means are visually recognized from an angle inclined with respect to the front view of the first decorative means or the second decorative means, the refraction of light due to the curvature of the inclined portion causes the center of the front member. The direction of the light passing through the side can be brought closer to the direction in which the first decorative means and the second decorative means overlap. Further, the second portion is located on the center side of the front member from a substantially intermediate position of a straight line connecting the ends of the inclined portions.
Since the end portion of the decorative means is arranged, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the positional deviation between the first decorative means and the second decorative means in the front-rear direction. As a result, the decoration of the first decorative means and the second
It is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the decoration of the decoration means as the decoration of 1.

In any of the gaming machines J2 to J8, the inner surface of the recess is formed with a second inclined portion that is inclined outward in front view toward the first decorative means side, and the second inclined portion is the base. The gaming machine J9 is characterized in that the inclination angle with respect to the front surface of the member is set to be smaller than the inclination angle of the inclined portion with respect to the front surface of the base member.

According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines J2 to J8, the inner surface of the recess is the first.
A second inclined portion is formed that inclines outward in the front view toward the decorative means side, and the inclination angle of the second inclined portion with respect to the front surface of the base member is set to be smaller than the inclination angle of the inclined portion with respect to the front surface of the base member. Therefore, the position of the decoration (virtual image) of the first decorative means visually recognized through the inclined portion and the second inclined portion is visually recognized without the inclined portion and the second inclined portion. It can be brought closer to the position of (real image). As a result, when the first decorative means is visually recognized through the front member, it is possible to prevent the decoration of the first decorative means from becoming difficult to be visually recognized due to the refraction of light due to the front member.

<Concept of the invention using the special winning device 550 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a gaming board having a gaming area on the front side and a path unit arranged on the gaming board and having a path for guiding the throwing of a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area, the path unit is a path unit. The first path for throwing the game ball to one side in the horizontal direction with respect to the game board in the front view, and the game ball thrown from the first path in the horizontal direction opposite to the guiding direction of the first path. A second path for throwing a ball to the other side and a third path for connecting one side of the first path and the second path are provided, and the third path is on the front side or the back side with respect to the game board. The gaming machine K1 is characterized in that a guiding means for throwing a gaming ball to at least one of the above is provided on at least one inner wall on the front side or the back side of the gaming board.

Conventionally, a gaming machine including a gaming board having a gaming area on the front side and a path unit arranged on the gaming board and having a path for guiding the throwing of a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area has been known. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-131046). According to this gaming machine, a gaming ball that has flowed into a guiding path formed in a path unit is guided (rolled) along the path of the guiding path, thereby making the gaming ball roll (flow). Can be given.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, in order to secure the throwing distance of the gaming ball at a predetermined distance inside the path unit, the first path for throwing the gaming ball to one side with respect to the gaming board and the first path thereof. When a second path for throwing a game ball thrown from one path to the other side of the game board and a third path for connecting one side of the first path and the second path are formed, the first path is formed. Since the speed of the gaming ball rolling around is maximized at the portion communicating with the third path (the downstream end of the first path), the gaming ball is placed on the inner wall of the third path where the direction of throwing is changed. It collides and becomes easy to bounce. Therefore,
There was a risk that the game ball that collided with the inner wall of the third path would return to the first path, or sway (shake) in the throwing direction (horizontal direction in front view) of the first path inside the third path. Therefore, the first
Since the game ball thrown from the path to the third path sways in the third path, the player's line of sight cannot follow the game ball thrown in the third path in a certain direction, and the ball is thrown to the third path. There was a problem that it was difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball.

In this case, by lengthening the path of the third path, the throwing direction of the game ball thrown from the first path is smoothly switched to the rolling direction of the second path, and the game ball passing through the third path. However, since the third path is formed to be long, the size of the entire path unit becomes large by that amount, and it becomes impossible to secure a space for arranging the path unit on the game board.

On the other hand, according to the game machine K1, the path unit has a first path for throwing a game ball to one side in the horizontal direction with respect to the game board in front view, and a game ball thrown from the first path. 1st
The second path, the first path and the second path, which throw the ball to the other side in the horizontal direction opposite to the guiding direction of the route.
A third route connecting one side of the route to each other is provided, and the third route provides a guiding means for throwing a game ball to at least one of the front side and the back side of the game board on the front side of the game board. Alternatively, since it is provided on at least one inner wall on the back side, the game ball passing through the third path can be moved to the front side or the back side (the front-back direction of the game board in the front view). By moving the game ball on the front side or the back side, the game ball that has rolled and accelerated on the first path can be slowed down on the third path, and the game ball that collides with the inner wall of the third path is the third. It is possible to prevent the ball from returning to the first path or swinging (shaking) in the throwing direction (horizontal direction in front view) of the first path in the third path. As a result, the line of sight of the player can follow the game ball thrown from the third path in a certain direction. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball sent to the third path.

In addition, since it is possible to suppress the game ball from swinging (shaking) in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in the front view) with respect to the game board in the front view, the third path connecting the first path and the second path can be suppressed accordingly. It is not necessary to lengthen the path to suppress the swinging of the game ball, and the path of the third path can be shortened. As a result, the path unit can be housed in a predetermined area with respect to the game board, and a space for arranging the path unit with respect to the game board can be secured.

As the guiding means for guiding the game ball, the rolling direction of the game ball is switched due to unevenness, or a displacement member is arranged at the switching portion of the path, and the game ball is guided to the second path by the displacement of the displacement member. The method of doing is exemplified.

In the gaming machine K1, the guiding means is composed of a concave portion recessed in the inner wall of either the front side or the back side and a convex portion protruding in the inner wall of either the front side or the back side. The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the concave portion and the convex portion are formed at positions facing each other.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, the guiding means is a recess recessed in the inner wall of either the front side or the back side and an inner wall of either the front side or the back side. Since the concave portion and the convex portion are formed at positions facing each other, the gaming ball is partially displaced in the middle of the path of the third path to form the gaming ball. The throwing speed of the ball can be slowed down. Therefore, the route of the third route can be shortened. As a result, the route unit can be easily accommodated in a predetermined area with respect to the game board, and a space for arranging the route unit with respect to the game board can be secured.

The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the horizontal separation dimension from the protruding tip of the convex portion to the inner wall of one of the third paths is set to be smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K2, the horizontal separation dimension from the protruding tip of the convex portion to one inner wall of the third path is set to be smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball. , The gaming ball that flows down the third path and is thrown to the guiding means can be easily brought into contact with the convex portion of the guiding means. As a result, the game ball flowing down the first path and being thrown to the third path can be brought into contact with the convex portion, and its rolling speed can be easily slowed down. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has collided with the inner wall of the third path from returning to the first path or swinging in the third path in a direction different from the throwing direction of the third path. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the third path.

In the gaming machine K2 or K3, the convex portion is formed on the inner wall on the front side with respect to the game board, and the concave portion is formed on the inner wall on the back side with respect to the game board. Machine K4.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K2 or K3, a convex portion is formed on the inner wall on the front side with respect to the gaming board, and a concave portion is formed on the inner wall on the back side with respect to the gaming board. Therefore, the plate thickness on the front side of the path unit can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to see the inside of the route unit through the front of the route unit, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to see the game ball thrown inside the route unit. Further, since the concave portion is formed on the inner wall on the front side of the route unit, it is possible to prevent the guiding means from protruding to the front of the route unit. Therefore, the route unit is arranged on the player side accordingly. It is possible to make it easier for the player to see the game ball passing through the path unit.

More specifically, when the recess is formed on the inner surface on the front side, the plate thickness on the front side of the path unit needs to be larger than the recessed depth of the recess. Therefore, as the plate thickness on the front side of the path unit increases, it becomes difficult for the player to see the game ball thrown on the back side thereof. Further, when the concave portion is formed on the inner surface on the front side, it is conceivable to bend the plate on the front side of the path unit along the shape of the concave portion. It is necessary to have a space from the glass plate forming the front surface of the area, and it is necessary to arrange the entire game board on the back side. Therefore, as the distance from the player to the back side, it becomes difficult for the player to see the game ball to which the path unit is thrown.

Further, when the recess is formed on the inner surface on the front side, it is conceivable to open the portion where the recess is formed, but in this case, the rigidity of the path unit is lowered by the amount of the opening.
The route unit is easily damaged. Further, if an opening is formed in front of the path unit, there is a risk that the opening may be passed through and fraudulent.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine K4, since the concave portion is formed on the back surface side of the path unit and the convex portion is formed on the front side of the path unit, it is possible to suppress the thickening of the entire front side of the path unit. The game ball passing through the inside of the path unit can be easily visually recognized, and the path unit is arranged on the front side of the gaming machine by suppressing partial protrusion to the front side of the path unit so that the inside of the path unit can be easily seen. It is possible to make it easier to see the game ball passing through.

In the gaming machine K3 or K4, the convex portion and the concave portion are formed in an arc shape in a cross section in the direction of gravity in a front view, and the axis of the arc is set coaxially.

According to the gaming machine K5, in the gaming machine K3 or K4, the convex portion and the concave portion are formed in an arc shape in a cross section in the direction of gravity, and the axis of the arc is set coaxially. The separation distance can be made constant. As a result, it is possible to prevent the distance between the convex portion and the concave portion from being partially smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and it is possible to prevent the game ball passing through the inside of the path unit from being sandwiched between the convex portion and the inner wall. can.

In the gaming machine K5, the upper end of the recess is formed at a position along an extension of the rolling locus of the center of the gaming ball rolling on the first path in front view.

According to the gaming machine K6, since the upper end of the concave portion is formed at a position along the extension line of the rolling locus of the center of the gaming ball that rolls on the first path in the front view, the game that rolls on the first path. Even when the rolling speed of the ball is high, it is possible to prevent the center of the game ball thrown from the first path to the third path from being thrown above the upper end of the recess. As a result, the game ball thrown from the first path to the third path can be thrown inside the recess.

In any of the gaming machines K2 to K6, the recess is formed at a position separated from both side surfaces in the horizontal direction of the third path in the front view by a position separated from the radial dimension of the gaming ball. ..

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K2 to K6, the recess is formed at a position separated from both sides in the horizontal direction in the front view of the third path from the radial dimension of the gaming ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball flowing down along the inner wall of the recess from colliding with both sides in the horizontal direction in the front view of the path unit and swaying inside the recess. As a result, the game ball thrown along the inside of the recess can be smoothly thrown to the second path.

In any of the gaming machines K3 to K7, the recess is formed so that the cross section of the first path in the front view in the throwing direction is formed in an arc shape centered on the central portion in the horizontal direction of the third path. The game K8 is characterized in that the convex portion has a rectangular cross section in the throwing direction of the first path in front view.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K3 to K7, the concave portion has a cross section in the throwing direction of the first path in the front view recessed in an arcuate cross section, and the convex portion is the front surface. Since the cross section of the first path in the visual direction in the throwing direction is projected in a rectangular shape, the guiding means is
The distance between the concave portion and the convex portion facing each other is narrowed toward both ends in the throwing direction of the first path. Therefore, the game ball thrown inside the recess can be made less likely to swing in the throwing direction of the first path. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball sent to the third path.

In the gaming machine K8, the convex portion is extended so as to be inclined downward to one side in a direction opposite to the throwing direction of the gaming ball of the second path in a front view.

According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K8, the convex portion is extended so as to be inclined downward to one side in the direction opposite to the throwing direction of the gaming ball on the second path in the front view. The game ball that comes into contact with the convex portion when flowing down the three paths can be guided in the inclined direction of the convex portion. As a result, the game ball in contact with the convex portion can be guided along the inner wall of the concave portion on the side away from the second path.
As a result, the game ball flowing from the third path to the second path can be rolled in the throwing direction of the game ball of the second path, and the game ball can be smoothly flowed from the third path to the second path. can.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K9, the first path includes a second guiding means at a portion connected to the third path, and the second guiding means causes the gaming ball to be thrown from the first path. The gaming machine K10 characterized in that it can be guided to the guiding means.

According to the gaming machine K10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K1 to K9, the first path is provided with a second guiding means at the connecting portion with the third path, and the first path is more than the second guiding means. Since the gaming ball thrown from the route can be guided to the guiding means, it is possible to easily send the gaming ball thrown from the first route to the third route to the guiding means of the third route. This makes it possible to smoothly throw the game ball from the first path to the third path. Therefore, since the game ball thrown from the first path can be easily thrown to the guiding means, the inflow of the game ball from the third path to the second path can be smoothed. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of the game ball of the entire path unit.

In the gaming machine K10, the second guiding means is recessed at a position facing the second convex portion and the second convex portion projecting from either the front side or the back side of the first path. The second recess is composed of two recesses, and the second recess is characterized in that the width dimension in the direction orthogonal to the flow direction of the game ball is set large toward the upstream side of the first path in front view. K11.

According to the gaming machine K11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K10, the second guiding means includes a second convex portion projecting from either the front side or the back side of the first path, and the second convex portion thereof. It is composed of a second recess recessed at an opposite position, and the second recess has a large width dimension in a direction orthogonal to the flow direction of the gaming ball toward the upstream side of the first path in front view. Therefore, it is possible to easily accept the game ball sent through the first path into the second recess. This makes it possible to smoothly throw the game ball from the first path to the third path. Therefore, since the game ball thrown from the first path can be easily thrown to the guiding means, the inflow of the game ball from the third path to the second path can be smoothed. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of the game ball of the entire path unit.

In the gaming machine K10 or K11, the second recess is characterized in that the end portion in the downstream direction of the first path is located downstream of the rolling surface of the gaming ball of the first path. ..

According to the gaming machine K12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K10 or K11, the second recess is
Since the downstream end of the first path is located downstream of the rolling surface of the game ball of the first path, the game ball flowing into the third path from the first path along the inner wall of the second recess is , It can flow into the third path on the far side from the first path. As a result, the game ball flowing from the first path to the third path can be easily sent to the inside of the recess, and the inflow of the game ball from the third path to the second path can be facilitated.

<Concept of the invention using the special winning device 550 as an example>
The flow direction changing means in a gaming machine including a game board having a game area on the front side and a flow direction changing means for changing the flow direction of a game ball arranged in front of the game board and flowing down the game area. Is a first member arranged on the front surface of the gaming board, a second member arranged on the front side of the first member at a predetermined interval, and at least one of the first member or the second member. A gaming ball provided with an adjusting means for displacing one of them, and the adjusting means changes the distance between the facing portions of the first member and the second member to flow down between the facing portions of the first member and the second member. The gaming machine L1 characterized in that the flow direction of the machine can be adjusted.

Conventionally, a gaming machine including a gaming board having a gaming area on the front side and a nail to be struck on the front surface of the gaming board has been known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197311). According to this gaming machine, it is possible to adjust the angle of the nails struck on the gaming board (bending the nails) to adjust the flowing direction of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area. However, if the angle of the nail is changed to change the flow direction of the game ball, the angle of the nail is visually recognized by the player, which is disadvantageous to the player (it is difficult for the game ball to flow down into an advantageous flow path). There is a problem that when the player recognizes the angle of the nail), the player does not play with the gaming machine judged to be disadvantageous, and the operating rate of the gaming machine decreases.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, the flow direction changing means is arranged on the front side of the game board and the front side of the first member at a predetermined interval. It is provided with two members and an adjusting means for displacing at least one of the first member or the second member, and the adjusting means changes the distance between the facing surfaces of the first member and the second member to change the distance between the first member and the second member. Since the flow direction of the game ball flowing down between the two members can be adjusted, the flow direction of the game ball can be changed (adjusted) by the distance in the front-rear direction with respect to the front view of the game board. Therefore, it suppresses the player from visually recognizing the flow direction changing means and judging that it is disadvantageous or advantageous, rather than a nail that changes the flow direction of the game ball at a horizontal separation distance with respect to the front view of the game board. can. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the gaming machine L1, the second member is fixed to the gaming board and is fixed to the gaming board by the adjusting means.
The gaming machine L2, characterized in that the position of the first member is displaced.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L1, the second member is fixed to the gaming board, and the position of the first member is displaced by the adjusting means, so that the second member is arranged on the front side. At least a part of the first member arranged on the back surface side can be hidden by the two members, and the position of the first member can be made difficult to see from the player. Therefore, when the position of the first member is displaced, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the displacement of the position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the distance between the first member and the second member facing each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from not playing the game on the gaming machine because the player determines that it is disadvantageous from the distance between the first member and the second member facing each other, so that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the gaming machine L2, the gaming board is provided with a first opening that opens at a position corresponding to the first member, and the first member is a fastening member that inserts the first opening from the back side of the gaming board. The gaming machine L3, characterized in that the first member is arranged on the gaming board by fastening to.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L2, the gaming board is provided with a first opening that opens at a position corresponding to the first member, and the first opening is inserted from the back side of the gaming board. By fastening the fastening member to the first member, the first member is arranged on the gaming board, so that it is not necessary to form the fastening portion for fastening the first member on the front side of the gaming board. The outer shape of the first member in the visual sense can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space for arranging other members in front of the game board.

Further, since the fastening member is fastened from the back side of the game board, it is possible to make it difficult to access the fastening member from the front side of the game board when the flow direction changing means and the game board are assembled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fastening member from being illegally operated and the position of the first member being illegally changed.

In the gaming machine L3, the first member is provided with a protruding portion that protrudes toward the game board and is inserted into the first opening, and the fastening member is fastened to the tip of the protruding portion. 1st
The gaming machine L4, wherein the member is arranged on the gaming board.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L3, the first member is provided with a protruding portion that protrudes toward the game board and is inserted into the first opening, and the fastening member is fastened to the tip of the protruding portion. By doing so, the first member is arranged on the gaming board, so that the fastening portion of the fastening member can be accommodated inside the first opening. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the fastening portion with the fastening member from projecting to the front side of the first member, it is possible to secure a space between the first member and the second member facing each other.

In the gaming machine L4, the first member can be slidably displaced on a plane parallel to the front surface of the gaming board by the adjusting means, and the first opening has the same size as the displacement region of the protruding portion. A gaming machine L5 characterized by being opened in parallel.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L4, the first opening is opened to the same size as the displacement region of the protruding portion, so that the first member is projected when the position of the first member is displaced. The portion can be displaced along the first opening. Therefore, when the position of the first member is displaced, the first
It is possible to prevent the member from being displaced in a direction other than the displacement direction (direction displaced by the adjusting means). As a result, the work when the worker adjusts the position of the first member can be simplified.

In any of the gaming machines L3 to L5, the gaming machine L6 is characterized in that the gaming board includes a second opening that opens at a position different from that of the first opening.

According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L3 to L5, the gaming board is
Since the second opening that opens at a position different from that of the first opening is provided, the fastening member fastened to the back surface side of the game board can be operated via the second opening. As a result, the work process when the operator operates the adjusting means can be simplified.

That is, since the accessory device and the case member for accommodating the accessory device are arranged on the back side of the game board, when the fastening member is operated from the back side of the game board, the accessory device and its Where it is necessary to remove the case member accommodating the accessory device from the game board, the fastening member can be operated from the front side of the game board by the second opening, so that the operator can operate the fastening member on the back side of the game board. Since it is not necessary to remove the arranged accessory device and the case member accommodating the accessory device, the work process of the operator can be simplified.

In the gaming machine L1, the gaming machine L7 is characterized in that the position of the second member with respect to the first member is changed in the front-rear direction in front view by the adjusting means.

According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L1, the position of the second member with respect to the first member is changed in the front-rear direction in the front view, so that the second member with respect to the first member It is possible to suppress the change in the position of the second member in the front view as compared with the case where the position is changed in the left-right or up-down direction in the front view. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from determining that the position of the second member is advantageous or disadvantageous due to the change in the position of the second member in the front view. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines L2 to L7, the second member is formed of a non-light transmitting material, and the outer shape in front view is formed larger than that of the first member, and the first member is said in front view. A gaming machine L8 characterized in that it is covered with a second member.

According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L2 to L7, the second member is formed of a non-light transmitting material, and the outer shape in front view is formed larger than that of the first member.
Since the first member is overlaid on the second member in the front view, the first member is seconded in the front view.
It can be hidden by a member, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the first member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the distance between the first member and the second member facing each other, and it is possible to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L8, the second member is formed of a non-light transmitting material, and at least one of the first member or the second member projects to the other of the first member or the second member. A gaming machine L9 characterized by having a protruding portion.

According to the gaming machine L9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L1 to L8, the second member is formed of a non-light transmitting material, and at least one of the first member or the second member is the first member. Alternatively, since a protruding portion protruding from the other side of the second member is provided, it is possible to bring the game ball thrown between the facing portions of the first member and the second member into contact with the protruding portion to change the throwing direction. can. Therefore, by recognizing the distance between the first member and the second member facing each other, it is possible to suppress the player from determining that the first member is advantageous or disadvantageous. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L9, the adjusting means can adjust the position of the other of the first member or the second member stepwise with respect to one of the first member or the second member. A gaming machine L10 characterized by being provided with means.

According to the gaming machine L10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L1 to L9, the adjusting means positions the other of the first member or the second member with respect to one of the first member or the second member. Since the step adjusting means that can be adjusted stepwise is provided, the operator who changes the position of the first member or the second member can adjust the change of the position step by step. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an error in the adjustment position of the first member or the second member. Therefore, the position adjustment of the first member or the second member can be simplified.

As a means for adjusting the positions of the first member and the second member step by step, the first member or the second member may be provided with a plurality of grooves recessed in one of the first member or the second member. The first is a form in which the position of the first member or the second member is changed by changing the insertion position of the convex portion to be projected, or a plurality of grooves recessed in one of the first member or the game board. An example is a mode in which the position of the first member is changed by changing the insertion position of the convex portion projecting from the other side of the member or the game board.

<Concept of the invention using the special winning device 550 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a gaming area in which a gaming ball flows down and a path unit having a plurality of guidance paths for guiding the throwing of the gaming ball flowing down in the gaming area and arranged in the gaming area.
The path unit has a first guide path formed of a material capable of transmitting light and arranged on the front side of the gaming region, and a second guide path arranged on the back side of the first guide path. The first guide path is provided with a guide path, the first guide path is provided with a first winning opening capable of entering a game ball, and the second guide path is provided with a second winning opening capable of entering a game ball. The gaming machine M1 is characterized in that a gaming ball entering the first winning opening is given a higher gaming value than a gaming ball entering the second winning opening.

Conventionally, a gaming machine in which a path unit having a plurality of guide paths for flowing down a gaming ball is arranged in a gaming area and the gaming ball flowing down inside the unit is visually recognized by the player to improve the interest of the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-131046).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to make the player visually recognize the game ball flowing down the guide path and improve the interest of the player, the handling of each guide path tends to be complicatedly formed. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to determine which of the guide routes the game ball is flowing down. Therefore, when the game value of the game ball flowing down the guide route is different,
It becomes difficult for the player to judge whether the route is advantageous (high game value is given) or disadvantageous (low game value is given), and the player's interest is due to the game ball flowing down the route unit. There was a problem that it could not be sufficiently improved.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, the path unit is formed of a material capable of transmitting light and is arranged on the front side of the gaming area, and the back surface of the first guiding path. A second guide path arranged on the side is provided, the first guide path is provided with a first winning opening capable of entering a game ball, and the second guide path is provided with a game ball. Since a gaming ball having a possible second winning opening and entering the first winning opening is given a higher game value than a gaming ball entering the second winning opening.
It is possible to make it easier for the player to gaze at the game ball flowing down the first guide path. Further, when the game ball is flowed down to the first and second guide paths at the same timing, the second guide path provided with the second winning opening having a low game value is on the back side of the first guide path. Since it is formed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the first guide path provided with the first winning opening having a high game value. As a result, since the game ball to which a high game value is given can be visually recognized by the player, it is possible to easily improve the interest of the player.

The predetermined game value means, for example, a game ball that is paid out to the player as a privilege when the game ball is inserted into the first or second winning opening.

In the game machine M1, the first guide path is a first path for throwing a game ball to one side in the horizontal direction in a front view, and a game ball thrown from the first path is a game ball in the first path. A second path for throwing a game ball to the other side in the horizontal direction opposite to the guide direction of the above, and a connection path for connecting one side of the first path and the second path in the gravity direction, and said connection. The gaming machine M2 is characterized in that the path is formed by being curved in a semi-arc shape toward the back surface side of the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1, the first guide path is a first path for throwing the game ball to one side in the horizontal direction in the front view, and the ball is thrown from the first path. The second path for throwing the game ball to the other side in the horizontal direction opposite to the guiding direction of the game ball in the first path, and one side of the first path and the second path in the direction of gravity. The connecting path is provided with a connecting path to be connected, and the connecting path is formed by being curved in a semi-arc shape toward the back surface side of the gaming area, so that the first path and the second path are directly connected at the shortest distance. It is possible to increase the number of curved portions of the throwing path as compared with the case where the ball is thrown. As a result, the flow speed of the game ball can be gradually reduced at the curved portion, and the game ball can be prevented from colliding with the inner wall of the connecting path and swinging (shaking) in the connecting path. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed from the first path to the second path, so that the player can easily visually recognize the throwing of the game ball from the first path to the second path.

In addition, in order to prevent the game ball from colliding with the inner wall of the connecting path and swinging (shaking),
It is conceivable to increase the internal space of the connecting path in the throwing direction of the first path to prevent the game ball from repeatedly colliding with the inner wall of the connecting path. In this case, the internal space of the connecting path is the first. The connecting path is projected in the horizontal direction in the front view by the amount increased in the throwing direction of one path. Therefore, since the path unit in the front view is enlarged in the horizontal direction, it is difficult to keep the path unit within a predetermined range in the front view.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine M2, since the connecting path is curved in a semicircular shape toward the back surface side, the outer shape of the path unit in front view can be kept within a predetermined range. Therefore,
When the player visually recognizes the game ball flowing down the first guide path, the range visually recognized by the player can be contained within a predetermined range (outer shape of the route unit). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the path unit.

In the gaming machine M2, the path unit is arranged on the other side in the horizontal direction of the gaming area in the front view, and the connecting path is formed on one side in the horizontal direction of the path unit in the front view. Characterized gaming machine M3.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M2, the path unit is arranged on the other side in the horizontal direction of the gaming area in the front view, and the connecting path is one in the horizontal direction of the path unit in the front view. Since it is formed on the side, the connecting path can be formed at a position close to the player located in front of the gaming board. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the connecting path. As a result, even if the game ball is thrown to the back side by the connecting path, it is possible to make it easier for the player to see the game ball passing through the connecting path.

In the gaming machine M2 or M3, the gaming machine M4 is characterized in that the first winning opening is arranged between the first path and the second path in a front view.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M2 or M3, the first winning opening is
Since it is arranged between the first path and the second path in the front view, the first winning opening is formed in the first guide path by utilizing the dead space forming the first path and the second path. can. As a result, it is possible to prevent the outer shape of the path unit from becoming large in front view. resulting in,
The range in which the player can see the route unit can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the path unit.

In any of the gaming machines M2 to the gaming machine M4, the connecting path is a third winning opening capable of entering a game ball into two places of a connecting portion between the first path and the second path, and a third of them. The gaming ball is provided with a displacement member that can be displaced to a position where the winning opening is closed or opened, and the gaming ball entered into the third winning opening is the same as the gaming ball entering the first winning opening. A gaming machine M5 characterized in that a gaming value is given.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines M2 to M4, the connecting path is a third winning opening in which the gaming ball can be inserted into two places of the connecting portion with the first path and the second path. , Those third
The game ball is provided with a displacement member that can be displaced to a position where the winning opening is closed or opened, and the game ball entered into the third winning opening has the same game value as the game ball entering the first winning opening. Is given, so
It is possible to make it easier for the game ball thrown from the first path to the connecting path to enter either of the two third winning openings, and the game ball flowing down the connecting path gives the player a hobby. It can be easy.

That is, between the third winning opening on the upstream side formed in the connecting portion of the connecting path and the first path and the third winning opening on the downstream side formed in the connecting portion of the connecting path and the second path. The third winning opening is closed by the displacement member when the displacement member is repeatedly operated at a predetermined timing at a position where the displacement member closes or opens the third winning opening. At that time, the game ball thrown from the first path to the connecting path is allowed to flow down the connecting path curved to the back side to secure a time until the third winning opening is released, and the third on the downstream side. It can be made to flow into the winning opening. As a result, the game ball sent to the connecting path can be easily flowed into the third winning opening, so that the game ball flowing down the connecting path can easily give the player a hobby.

Further, since the two third winning openings are formed at the upstream and downstream ends of the connecting path (the connecting portion between the first path and the second path), respectively, the third winning opening is entered. It is possible to lengthen the time that the ball can be played. Therefore, it is possible to prolong the time for giving the player a hobby, and it is possible to easily enhance the player's hobby.

A gaming machine M6, wherein in any of the gaming machines M2 to M5, a detection means for detecting the passage of a gaming ball is provided outside the connecting path.

According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines M2 to the gaming machine M5, a detection means for detecting the passage of the gaming ball is provided in the connecting path, so that the gaming ball is clogged in the connecting path. In that case, the detection of the detection means is continued, so that the gaming machine can detect the error. Further, since the detecting means is arranged outside the connecting path, it is possible to suppress the game ball from being caught by the detecting means as compared with the case where the detecting means is arranged in the connecting path, and the game can be suppressed accordingly. It is possible to prevent the sphere from being clogged in the connecting path.

Further, since the detecting means is arranged outside the connecting path in which the rolling of the gaming ball is delayed, it is possible to easily accurately detect the number of gaming balls passing through the connecting path. Therefore, when the number of balls detected by the detecting means is larger than the number of balls winning in the first winning opening or the third winning opening, it is possible to make the gaming machine recognize that the fraud has been performed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the continuation of fraud by notifying that fraud has been performed by a warning sound, abnormal lighting, or the like.

In the gaming machine M6, in the connecting path, the dimension between the facing surfaces of the inner walls in the front view is set to be larger than the diameter of the gaming ball, and the facing of the inner walls of the first path in the direction orthogonal to the throwing direction of the gaming ball. The gaming machine M7 characterized in that it is set smaller than the interdimensional dimension.

According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M6, the connecting path is set so that the opposite dimension of the inner walls in the front view is larger than the diameter of the gaming ball and is orthogonal to the throwing direction of the gaming ball. Since it is set smaller than the opposite dimension of the inner wall of the first path in the direction, when a game ball having a diameter larger than a predetermined size (diameter larger than the specified value) is thrown, the game ball stays in the connecting path. It can be made (clogged). As a result, it is possible to prevent a game ball having a diameter larger than the specified value from flowing down the path unit.

Further, since a detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball is provided in the connecting path, when a game ball having a diameter larger than the specified value stays (clogs) in the connecting path, the detecting means causes the gaming machine. Can detect an error.

In the gaming machine M6 or M7, in the connecting path, an opening is formed on the radially outer side wall of the path that curves in a semicircular shape toward the back surface side so as to open at a predetermined value smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball. A gaming machine M7 characterized by the fact that.

According to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M6 or M7, the connecting path is predetermined to be smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball on the radial outer side wall of the path curved in a semicircular shape toward the back surface side. Since an opening having an opening is formed at the value of, when a gaming ball having a diameter smaller than a predetermined size (diameter smaller than the specified diameter) is thrown, the gaming ball is moved from the opening of the opening to the outside of the connecting path. Can be discharged. As a result, it is possible to prevent a game ball having a diameter smaller than the specified value from flowing down the path unit.

Since the opening is formed on the radial outer side wall of the connecting path, which is the rolling surface of the gaming ball flowing down the connecting path, the opening is formed when the diameter of the gaming ball flowing down the connecting path is smaller than the specified diameter. It is possible to easily eject the game ball.

The gaming machine M8 includes a box-shaped accommodating portion that protrudes from the radial outside of the connecting path and communicates with the opening, and the accommodating portion is set to a size capable of accommodating a gaming ball. ,
The gaming machine M9, characterized in that it is formed in the detection range of the detection means.

According to the gaming machine M9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M8, the accommodating portion is provided with a box-shaped accommodating portion that protrudes from the radial outside of the connecting path and communicates with the opening. Since the ball is formed in a size that can accommodate the ball and is formed in the detection range of the detection means, the game has a diameter (smaller than the specified diameter) of a predetermined size or less discharged from the opening of the opening to the outside of the connecting path. The sphere can be stored inside the containment. Further, since the accommodating portion is formed in the detection range of the detecting means, the gaming ball stored inside the accommodating portion can be detected by the detecting means. As a result, when the gaming ball is stored inside the accommodating portion, the detecting means can cause the gaming machine to detect an error.

In any of the game machines M1 to the game machine M9, the inflow port of the game ball of the first guide path and the inflow port of the game ball of the second guide path are adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction in the front view. A gaming machine M10 characterized in that it is formed in.

According to the gaming machine M10, in addition to the effect of either the gaming machine M1 to the gaming machine M9, the inflow port of the gaming ball in the first guide path and the inflow port of the gaming ball in the second guide path are Since it is formed at positions adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction in the front view, the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board is the first.
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the inflow is to the guide route of the above or the second guide route until just before the inflow. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the game ball that flows down the game area and is sent to the path unit. As a result, it is possible to easily give the player a hobby.

<Concept of the invention using the lower displacement unit 400 as an example>
It includes a base member having a game area on the front side, and a first member having a throwing path arranged on the front side of the base member and formed as a space in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be thrown. In a gaming machine, the first member is disposed on the base member in a state of being urged to the back side with respect to the base member by a fixing means fastened from the back side of the base member. Gaming machine N1 to play.

Conventionally, a base member having a game area on the front side and a first ball path arranged on the front side of the base member and formed as a space in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be thrown.
There is a gaming machine provided with a member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-131046). According to this gaming machine, the first member is provided with an extension portion extending on a plane parallel to the front surface of the base member on the side surface (contact portion with the base member) on the base member side, and the extension portion thereof. By screwing the screw inserted into the opening formed in the base member into the base member, the screw is arranged in close contact with the front surface of the base member.

However, in a conventional gaming machine, in order to dispose the first member in close contact with the front surface of the base member, it is essential to fasten a screw inserted from the front side of the first member to the base member. It is necessary to form an opening in the first member for inserting the. Here, in order to form the opening at a position that does not interfere with the throwing of the game ball, it is necessary to form the opening outside the throwing space of the game ball, and the extension portion where the opening is formed is outside the throwing space. Need to form. Therefore, since the extending portion is formed on the outer edge of the first member, the area that can be used as the throwing path becomes smaller than the outer shape of the first member, and the throwing path of the first member cannot be sufficiently increased. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, the first member is arranged on the base member in a state of being urged to the back side with respect to the base member by the fixing means fastened from the back side of the base member. The first member and the base member can be arranged in close contact with each other due to the urging force acting on the first member on the back surface side. Further, since the first member is arranged on the base member by the fixing means inserted from the back surface side of the base member, a fastening allowance (an opening through which the fixing means is inserted) with the base member is provided on the front side of the first member. There is no need to form an extension) to be formed. Therefore, the entire area can be used as a throwing path with respect to the outer shape of the first member in the front view. As a result, the throwing path of the first member can be increased.

Further, since the fastening portion between the base member and the first member is not exposed on the front side, it is possible to prevent the fastening portion between the base member and the first member from being illegally removed, and the fastening portion is visible to the player. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating.

In the gaming machine N1, a second arranged on the back side of the first member via the base member.
The second member is provided with a member, and the second member is fixed to the first member by the fixing means inserted from the back surface side of the second member to the first member side and fixed to the first member, and the first member is provided. A gaming machine N2, characterized in that it is disposed on the base member with a predetermined gap from the member.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1, a second member is provided on the back side of the first member via a base member, and the second member is on the back side of the second member. The first member is fixed to the first member by a fixing means inserted into the first member side and fixed to the first member, and is arranged on the base member with a predetermined gap from the first member. When fastening the second member to the second member, a force urged on the back surface side can be applied to the first member by the predetermined gap.
Further, since the force urged to the front side can be applied to the second member, the base member can be sandwiched between the first member and the second member. Therefore, the first member and the second member are less likely to be displaced from the base member due to the pinching force between the first member and the second member.
It is not necessary to fasten the member or the second member to the base member, and the fastening of the second member can be simplified accordingly.

The predetermined gap between the first member and the second member is set to a value larger than 0 and smaller than the width dimension in the front-rear direction of the base member in the front view. As a result, when the first member and the second member are fastened, a force that attracts each other can be applied to both the first member and the second member by the gap.

In the gaming machine N1 or N2, the base member includes a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the first member is a protrusion protruding inward of the first opening. The gaming machine N3 is characterized in that the first member is arranged on the base member by fastening the fixing means to the tip of the protruding portion thereof.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1 or N2, the base member is the first.
A first opening is provided at a position facing the member, and the first member is provided with a protrusion protruding inward of the first opening, and a fixing means is fastened to the tip of the protrusion. Since the first member is arranged on the base member, the fastening portion of the fixing means can be arranged inside the first opening. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fastening portion of the fixing means from being arranged on the front side of the base member, and it is possible to prevent the fastening portion of the fixing means from being formed in the throwing space of the first member. As a result, the first
It is possible to secure the size of the throwing space of the member.

Further, since the fastening allowance (insertion depth) of the fixing means can be secured by the protruding portion, it is possible to prevent the fixing means from being fastened from the first member. As a result, it is possible to easily increase the urging force on the back surface side acting on the first member.

In the gaming machine N1, a second arranged on the back side of the first member via the base member.
A first opening including a member and a third member arranged between the first member and the second member facing each other, and the base member is formed at a position facing the first member. The third member is provided with a portion, and the front-rear dimension in the front view is set to be smaller than the front-rear dimension in the front view of the base member, and the third member is arranged inside the first opening. The members are arranged in close contact with the front side of the third member, and the second member has a predetermined gap with the third member by the fixing means inserted from the back surface side of the base member. A gaming machine N4 characterized in that it is fastened to the back surface side of the third member in a state.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1, the second member arranged on the back surface side of the first member via the base member is arranged between the first member and the second member facing each other. A third member to be provided, and the base member includes a first opening formed at a position facing the first member.
The front-rear dimension of the third member is set to be smaller than the front-rear dimension of the base member in the front view, and the third member is arranged inside the first opening, and the first member is the front surface of the third member. The second member is arranged in close contact with the side, and the second member is fastened to the back side of the third member with a predetermined gap from the third member by a fixing means inserted from the back side of the base member. , The urging force to the back surface side can be applied to the first member via the third member. Therefore, the urging force on the back surface side that acts when the second member and the third member are fastened by the fixing means can also be applied to the third member. As a result, the urging force acting on the contact portion of the first member with the base member can be reduced, and damage to the first member can be suppressed.

Further, by bringing the third member into close contact with the back surface side of the first member, the rigidity of the entire first member can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the entire first member from being elastically deformed by the urging force acting on the first member toward the back surface, and the throwing path of the game ball formed on the first member from being deformed. As a result, the game ball of the first member can be stably thrown.

In the gaming machine N4, the third member is a part of a frame-shaped member arranged on the front side of the base member along the second opening formed in the base member. Pachinko machine N5.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N4, the third member is a part of the frame-shaped member arranged on the front side of the base member along the second opening opened in the base member. Because it is
The urging force acting on the third member can be used as the urging force to urge the frame-shaped member to the back side. Therefore,
The frame-shaped member can be easily arranged in a state of being in close contact with the base member.

Further, the urging force acting on the back surface side when the second member and the third member are fastened by the fixing means is applied.
Since it can act on the contact surface between the frame-shaped member and the base member, the force acting on the contact portion of the first member with the base member can be reduced, and damage to the first member can be suppressed. can.

In the gaming machine N4 or N5, the first member is a displacement member that can displace the throwing space of the game ball of the first member, and a drive that is arranged on the back surface side of the first member to drive the displacement member. The third member includes a means, and the third member includes a third opening that is opened to a size that allows the driving means to be inserted, and the driving means is inserted inside the third opening. A gaming machine characterized in that it is arranged on the back side of one member.

According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N4 or N5, the first member is arranged on the back side of the first member and a displacement member that can displace the throwing space of the gaming ball of the first member. The third member is provided with a third opening that is opened to a size that allows the driving means to be inserted, and the driving means is inserted inside the third opening. Since it is arranged on the back surface side of the first member in this state, the driving means can be covered with the third member. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized objects such as wires and piano wires inserted from the outside of the gaming machine from being accessed by the driving means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being fraudulent.

In the gaming machine N6, the second member is projected toward the first member, and the gaming ball that communicates with the throwing space of the first member and is thrown into the throwing space of the first member is used as the second member. The gaming machine N7 is provided with a communicating portion capable of throwing balls, and the communicating portion is arranged outside the third opening.

According to the gaming machine N7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N6, the second member is projected toward the first member side, communicates with the throwing space of the first member, and is thrown into the throwing space of the first member. Since the communication portion capable of sending the ball to the second member is provided and the communication portion is arranged outside the third opening, the third member can be arranged between the communication portion and the driving means. can. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the magnetic force generated by driving the driving means to act on the communicating portion. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball sent to the communicating portion from slowing down in passing through the communicating portion or stopping at the communicating portion due to the influence of the magnetic force of the driving means, and the first member to the second member can be prevented from stopping. It is possible to stabilize the throwing of the game ball to the member.

In the gaming machine N1, the base member includes a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the first member projects from at least two positions on the back surface side of the first member. The protrusion is provided with a first piece that protrudes from the back surface of the first member and inserts the first opening, and is bent at the end of the first piece to the outside of the first opening. The second piece is provided with a second piece extending toward the surface and a raised portion on the front side of the second piece that overlaps with the base member in the front view, and the first piece is in the front view of the base member. The protrusion dimension is set to a value larger than the width dimension in the front-rear direction, and the dimension between the raised portion and the back surface of the first member is the same as or the width dimension in the front-rear direction in the front view of the base member. It is set small, and the bent tip of the second piece is fastened to the base member by the fixing means.
The gaming machine N8, wherein the first member is arranged in a state of being urged to the back side with respect to the base member.

According to the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1, the base member includes a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the first member is the back surface of the first member. A first piece that protrudes from at least two points on the side and protrudes from the back surface of the first member to insert the first opening, and a first piece that is bent at the end of the first piece and first. It includes a second piece extending outward of the opening and a raised portion on the front side of the second piece that overlaps the base member in front view, and the first piece is in front view of the base member. The protrusion dimension is set to a value larger than the width dimension in the front-rear direction, and the dimension between the raised portion and the back surface of the first member is set to be the same as or smaller than the width dimension in the front-rear direction in the front view of the base member. , The bent tip of the second piece is fastened to the base member by the fixing means, so that the first member is arranged in a state of being urged to the back surface side with respect to the base member, so that the back surface of the first member is arranged. It is not necessary to provide a portion for fastening the fixing means (for example, a screw) on the side, and it is possible to secure a throwing space for the game ball formed on the first member. As a result, since the throwing space can be increased, it is possible to change the throwing direction of the game ball thrown to the first member and make the throwing interesting.

Further, since the screwed portion of the fixing means can be used as the base member, it is possible to prevent the throwing space of the first member from being elastically deformed by the urging force acting on the screwed portion of the fixing means. resulting in,
It is possible to prevent the first member from being elastically deformed and slowing down the speed of the game ball thrown from the throwing path of the first member.

In the gaming machine N8, the base member includes a second opening formed with an opening in the front-rear direction in a front view, and a frame-shaped member arranged on the front side of the base member along the second opening. The gaming machine N9 is characterized in that the first opening and the second opening communicate with each other.

According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N8, the base member has a second opening formed in the front-rear direction in the front view and the front side of the base member along the second opening. Since the frame-shaped member to be disposed is provided and the first opening and the second opening communicate with each other, the projecting portion is arranged inside the first opening by utilizing the opening of the second opening. Can be set up. Therefore, the work of arranging the first unit on the base member can be simplified, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

<Concept of the invention using the lower displacement unit 400 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a base member, a displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member, and a driven member connected to the displacement member and driven to the displacement of the displacement member, the driven direction of the driven member. The displacement member is displaced between the first position and the second position, and the displacement member is displaced between the first position and the second position, and the position is intermediate between the first position and the second position. The driven member has a first displacement region that displaces the third position of the above, and a second displacement region that displaces the second position from the third position, and the driven member has the displacement member from the first position. By being displaced to the second position, the first driven position is driven to the second driven position, and the third driven position, which is an intermediate position between the first driven position and the second driven position, is displaced from the first driven position. It has a first driven region and a second driven region that displaces the second driven position from the third driven position, and at least a part of the second displacement region and the first driven region is the same. The gaming machine O1 is set in a region, and when the displacement member is displaced in the second displacement region, the restricting means regulates the swing of the displacement member in a direction other than the displacement direction.

Conventionally, a base member, a displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member, and a driven member connected to the displacement member and driven by the displacement of the displacement member are provided, and the displacement member is driven by the displacement of the displacement member. A gaming machine that displaces a member is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-02984).
No. 9). However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to regulate the displacement of the displacement member and the driven member and the swing other than the driven direction, if a regulating means for regulating the swing of both the displacement member and the driven member is formed, the regulating means is provided. It is necessary to form it in two places, which causes a problem that the shape becomes complicated and the manufacturing cost increases.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine O1, the displacement member is provided with a regulating means for restricting the swing of the driven member in a direction other than the driven direction, and the displacement member is displaced between the first position and the second position. The driven member has a first displacement region that displaces the third position between the first position and the intermediate position between the first position and the second position, and a second displacement region that displaces the second position from the third position. When the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, it is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, and from the first driven position to the intermediate position between the first driven position and the second driven position. It has a first driven area that displaces the third driven position and a second driven area that displaces the second driven position from the third driven position, and at least a part of the second displacement area and the first driven area is Since it is set in the same region and the displacement member is displaced in the second displacement region, the restricting means regulates the swing of the displacement member in a direction other than the displacement direction.
The same part of the regulating means can be used to regulate the swing of the driven member and the displacement member. Therefore, since it is sufficient to form the regulating means at one place, the shape can be simplified and the manufacturing cost can be suppressed accordingly.

Further, since the swing of the driven member and the displacement member can be regulated by using the same portion of the regulating means, it is not necessary to form the driven member, the displacement member and the regulating portion of one regulating means, respectively. The regulatory means can be reduced accordingly.

In the gaming machine O1, the regulating means is configured as a wall portion projecting from the base member to the driven member side, and the driven member is positioned so as to overlap at least a part of the base member in a front view. It is characterized in that it can be slidably displaced on a plane parallel to the member, and the region overlapping with the base member in front view is gradually reduced as the driven position moves from the first driven position to the second driven position. Game machine O2.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O1, the regulating means is configured as a wall portion projecting from the base member to the driven member side, and the driven member is at least one of the base members in a front view. It is possible to slide and displace on a plane parallel to the base member at the position where it overlaps with the part.
As the driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, the area overlapping the base member in the front view is gradually reduced. Therefore, in the second driven position, the driven member projects to the outside of the base member in the front view. The area is made larger than the first driven position. Therefore, it is difficult to regulate the swing of the driven member by the regulating means arranged on the base member because the driven member projects to the outside of the base member. Therefore, the driven member is more likely to swing toward the base member side as it is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position. However, by regulating the swing of the displacement member connected to the driven member, the regulation means is used. It is possible to increase the number of restricted points to prevent the driven member from swinging. As a result, it is possible to suppress swinging when the driven member is arranged in the second driven region.

In the gaming machine O2, the driven member is formed in a rectangular shape having a long side when viewed from the front.
It has a rotatable axis on one side in the longitudinal direction and is rotatably arranged on the base member. At the first driven position, the longitudinal direction of the driven member is substantially parallel to the horizontal direction. When the driven member is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, the driven member rotates about the rotation axis, and the driven member rotates about the rotation axis.
The gaming machine O3 is characterized in that the other side of the driven member is arranged on the upper side in the direction of gravity with respect to the rotation axis.

According to the game machine O3, in addition to the effect of the game machine O2, the driven member is formed in a rectangular shape having a long side in the front view, has a rotatable axis on one side in the longitudinal direction, and is used as a base member. It is rotatably arranged, and in the first driven position, the longitudinal direction of the driven member is substantially parallel to the horizontal direction.
When the driven member is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, the driven member rotates about the rotation axis, and the other side of the driven member is arranged on the upper side in the gravity direction with respect to the rotation axis. When it is driven from the 1 driven position to the 2nd driven position, it rotates and the longitudinal side stands up. Therefore, as the driven member stands up, the load of the driven member tends to act toward the rotation axis, and the load acts on the driven member in the swinging direction of the driven member, so that the driven member tends to swing.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by restricting the swing of the displacement member connected to the driven member, it is possible to increase the number of regulated points by the regulating means and make it difficult for the driven member to swing. As a result, it is possible to suppress swinging when the driven member is arranged in the second driven region.

Further, when the driven member is driven in the first driven region where a force for lifting the other end side of the driven member is required, the regulation of the displacement member is released from the first position to the third position (first displacement region). However, since the regulation of the displacement member is released by the regulating means in the first displacement region, it is possible to prevent the operation of the displacement member from being delayed by the regulating means. Therefore,
When the displacement force of the driven member is required, the displacement force of the driven member can be secured.

In the gaming machine O2 or O3, the driven member includes a protruding portion that is projected at a position facing the wall portion, and the tip of the protruding portion is brought into contact with the wall portion to displace the driven member. Is restricted, the displacement member is set so that the space between the driven member and the wall portion facing each other can be displaced in the second displacement region, and the displacement member is set in the facing direction between the driven member and the wall portion. The gaming machine O3, characterized in that at least a part of the above overlaps with the driven member.

According to the game machine O3, in addition to the effect of the game machine O2, the driven member is provided with a projecting portion projecting at a position facing the wall portion, and the tip of the projecting portion is brought into contact with the wall portion. The displacement of the driven member is regulated, the displacement member is set so that the space between the driven member and the wall portion facing each other can be displaced in the displacement region at the end, and at least the displacement member is set in the facing direction between the driven member and the wall portion. Since a part of the displacement member overlaps with the driven member, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from tilting to the side opposite to the wall portion. As a result, the displacement of the displacement member in both axial directions can be regulated by the driven member and the wall portion, and swinging can be suppressed when the displacement member is displaced.

In the gaming machine O4, the gaming machine O5 is characterized in that the side surface of the displacement member is in contact with the projecting portion of the driven member at the second driven position.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O4, the side surface of the displacement member is in contact with the projecting portion of the driven member at the second driven position, so that the displacement member is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position. When displaced to a position, the outer edge can be brought into contact with the projecting portion of the displacement member to stop. Therefore, it is possible to make the protruding portion abut on the wall portion to regulate the displacement of the driven member and to assist the stopping operation of the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to secure a displaceable space for the displacement member and the driven member.

In the gaming machine O5, when one end of the driven member is pivotally supported by the base member and the displacement member is arranged at the second driven position, the displacement direction of the connecting portion of the driven member with the displacement member. Is set in the direction toward the axis of the displacement member, the gaming machine O6.
..

According to the game machine O6, in addition to the effect of the game machine O5, when one end of the driven member is pivotally supported by the base member and the displacement member is arranged at the second driven position, the driven member is connected to the displacement member. Since the displacement direction of the portion is set toward the axial center of the displacement member, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being displaced by the load of the driven member when the load of the driven member acts on the displaced member. That is, when the displacement member is arranged at the second driven position, the relationship between the driven member and the displacement member can be set to the dead center relationship, so that the displacement of the displacement member can be suppressed. As a result, the second
It is possible to prevent the displacement member from being displaced by an external force other than the driving means at the driven position.

In the gaming machine O5, when one end of the driven member is pivotally supported by the base portion and the displacement member is arranged at the second driven position, the displacement direction of the connecting portion of the driven member with the displacement member The gaming machine O7 is characterized in that the combined direction of the direction in which the reaction force due to the contact between the projecting portion and the displacement member acts is set to the direction toward the axial center of the displacement member.

According to the game machine O7, in addition to the effect of the game machine O5, the driven member is in contact with the displacement member of the driven member when one end is pivotally supported by the base member and the displacement member is arranged at the second driven position. Since the combined direction of the displacement direction of the connecting portion and the direction in which the reaction force due to the contact between the projecting portion and the displacement member acts is set toward the axial center of the displacement member, the load of the driven member is set. When acting on the displacement member, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being displaced by the load of the driven member. That is, when the displacement member is arranged at the second driven position, the direction of the force acting on the displacement member from the driven member is directed toward the axis of the displacement member, so that the displacement member rotates about the shaft support portion. It is possible to suppress the generation of force. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being displaced by an external force other than the driving means at the second driven position.

In the gaming machines O1 to O7, the projecting portion is arranged with a predetermined gap from the wall portion, and the displacement member abuts on the wall portion to abut the wall portion. Machine O8.

Here, if the projecting portion and the wall portion of the driven member are constantly in contact with each other, there is a risk that it becomes a resistance when the displacement member is displaced by the driving means, and it becomes difficult to stably displace the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine O8, the projecting portion is arranged with a predetermined gap from the wall portion, and when the displacement member comes into contact with the wall portion, the displacement member comes into contact with the wall portion, so that the displacement member is in the second driven position. When displaced, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from swinging and to prevent the protrusion and the bulging portion from becoming resistance during the displacement.

<Concept of the invention using the lower displacement member 440 as an example>
In front view, at least a part of the decorative member is formed of a light-transmitting material capable of transmitting light on the back side, and the decorative member is arranged on the back side of the decorative member in a displaceable state on a plane parallel to the front side.
In a gaming machine including a receiving portion capable of receiving and holding a game ball, the light emitting means provided on the back surface side of the decorative member and capable of emitting light toward a displacement region of the receiving portion is provided. The means is arranged on the back surface side of the receiving portion or between the decorative member and the receiving portion, and the light emitted from the light emitting means by the gaming ball received by the receiving portion or the receiving portion is emitted. A gaming machine P1 characterized in that the amount of light emitted from the decorative member is partially different by blocking or reflecting.

Conventionally, a decorative member formed of a light-transmitting material capable of transmitting at least a part of light on the back side in front view and a displaceable state on a plane parallel to the front side on the back side of the decorative member. A gaming machine provided with a receiving portion capable of receiving and holding a gaming ball is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-166997). According to this gaming machine, by receiving and holding the game ball in the receiving section and then moving the receiving section, it is possible to perform an effect of moving the game ball with the movement of the receiving section.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the receiving portion is arranged on the back side of the decorative member, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the positions of the receiving portion and the gaming ball received by the receiving portion. Therefore, when the receiving part moves after the game ball is received (held) by the receiving part,
It is difficult for the player to grasp in which direction the receiving section and the gaming ball accepted (held) by the receiving section have moved, and it is difficult for the player to grasp the position of the gaming ball accepted by the receiving section. There was a problem.

On the other hand, the gaming machine P1 is provided with light emitting means which is arranged on the back side of the decorative member and can emit light toward the displacement region of the receiving portion, and the light emitting means is on the back side of the receiving portion or decoration. A game ball disposed between the member and the receiving portion and received by the receiving portion or the receiving portion blocks or reflects the light emitted from the light emitting means, and determines the amount of light emitted from the decorative member. The amount of light emitted from the decorative member located on the front side of the receiving portion or the game ball received by the receiving portion and the amount of light emitted from the decorative member at other positions are different from each other. By making them different, it is possible to make the player recognize that the receiving portion or the game ball accepted by the receiving portion is located on the back side of the portion having a different amount of light.

More specifically, when the light emitting means is arranged on the back side of the receiving part, the light emitted from the light emitting means is blocked by the receiving part or the game ball received by the receiving part, so that the receiving part or the receiving part is blocked. The amount of light emitted from the decorative member on the front side of the game ball received in can be made darker than the other parts of the decorative member. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the decorative member is small (
It is possible to make the player recognize that the receiving portion or the gaming ball received by the receiving portion is located on the back side of the (dark) portion.

On the other hand, when the light emitting means is arranged between the decorative member and the receiving part, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the receiving part or the game ball received by the receiving part, so that the receiving part or the receiving part or the receiving part or the receiving part or the receiving part or the receiving part or the receiving part or the receiving part. The amount of light emitted from the decorative member on the front side of the game ball received by the receiving portion can be made brighter than the other parts of the decorative member. As a result, a large amount of light is emitted from the decorative member (
It is possible to make the player recognize that the receiving portion or the gaming ball received by the receiving portion is located on the back side of the (bright) portion.

In the gaming machine P1, the receiving portion is formed below the center of the gaming ball held by the receiving portion in the direction of gravity, and the light emitting means is substantially the same as the center of the gaming ball held by the receiving portion. The gaming machine P2 is characterized in that a light emitting portion is arranged at the height of the above, and a light transmitting portion of the decorative member is formed at a position higher than the light emitting portion of the light emitting means.

Here, in the structure in which the light emitted from the light emitting means is transmitted through the decorative member and the light is reflected or blocked by the game ball received by the receiving portion or the receiving portion, the light emitted from the light emitting means is the game ball. Not only that, but also the receiving portion is irradiated, so that the light is easily reflected or blocked by the receiving portion. Therefore, the light and darkness formed by the difference in the amount of light emitted from the decorative member is affected by the receiving portion, so that the shape of the light and darkness is different from the outer shape of the game ball, and the amount of light is given to the player. There was a risk that it would be difficult to recognize that the game ball was placed on the back side of the different parts of the.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P1, the receiving portion is formed below the center of the gaming ball held by the receiving portion in the direction of gravity, and the light emitting means is provided in the receiving portion. The light emitting part is arranged at substantially the same height as the center of the held game ball, and the light transmitting part of the decorative member is
Since it is formed at a position higher than the light emitting portion of the light emitting means, the light and shade formed by being emitted from the light emitting means and blocked or reflected by the receiving portion is transmitted through the light transmitting portion of the decorative member. It is possible to suppress the formation on the front side of the decorative member. As a result, the shape of the light and shade formed by passing through the light transmitting portion of the decorative member can be made closer to the outer shape (circular shape) of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the game ball is arranged in the portion where the amount of light is different.

A gaming machine P3, wherein in the gaming machine P1 or P2, the receiving portion is formed of a light-transmitting material.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P1 or P2, since the receiving portion is formed of a light transmitting material, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected or blocked by the receiving portion. Can be suppressed. As a result, when the game ball is not received in the receiving portion, it is possible to suppress the formation of a portion having a different amount of light in the light transmitting portion of the decorative member. Therefore, when the game ball is not accepted by the receiving unit, the positioning operation and the returning operation of the receiving unit can be performed without being noticed by the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from gazing at the decorative member in the positioning operation or the returning operation of the receiving portion, and to make the player gaze only at the displacement operation of the receiving portion when he / she wants to gaze.

In the game machine P2 or P3, a connecting member formed of a non-light transmitting material and connected to one side in the displacement direction of the receiving portion is provided, and the light emitting means is provided on the back side of the displacement region of the receiving portion. The connecting member is arranged so that the dimension in the displacement direction of the receiving portion is set larger than the displacement distance of the receiving portion, and the connecting member is arranged on the back surface side of the light transmitting portion of the decorative member, and the displacement of the receiving portion is set. A gaming machine P4, characterized in that the light emitting means and the decorative member face each other with each other, and the light emitting means is projected or retracted.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P2 or P3, a connecting member formed of a non-light transmitting material and connected to one side in the displacement direction of the receiving portion is provided, and the light emitting means receives. The connecting member is arranged on the back side of the displacement region of the portion, the dimension of the connecting member in the displacement direction of the receiving portion is set larger than the displacement distance of the receiving portion, and the connecting member is arranged on the back side of the light transmitting portion of the decorative member. With the displacement of, the light emitting means and the decorative member are projected from each other or retracted, so that the area of light emitted from the decorative member can be changed with the displacement of the receiving portion. That is, the light emitted from the light emitting means to the decorative member can be blocked by the connecting member, and the area for blocking the light can be changed according to the displacement of the receiving portion. As a result, the receiving portion and the connecting member are overhanging and displaced between the light emitting means and the decorative member, so that the emission area of the light emitted from the decorative member can be reduced. As a result, the light emitting surface of the decorative member is reduced, so that the player can easily recognize the portion where the amount of light emitted from the decorative member is small by the receiving portion or the game ball received by the receiving portion.

In the gaming machine P4, the gaming machine P5 is characterized in that the connecting member is a part of a driving means for driving the receiving portion.

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P4, since the connecting member is a part of the driving means for driving the receiving portion, it has a role of transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the receiving portion and a light emitting means. The connecting member can also have the role of blocking the light emitted from the slingshot. As a result, it is possible to secure a space for arranging the drive means for driving the receiving portion.

In the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is arranged on the back surface side of the displacement region of the receiving portion, and the receiving portion includes a displacement member displaceable from the game ball accepted by the receiving portion, and the displacement The member is made of a non-light transmissive material and is displaceable at a position where it protrudes or retracts between the light emitting means and the decorative member, and the gaming ball is received by the receiving portion. A gaming machine P6 characterized in that it projects between the light emitting means and the decorative member facing each other.

According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is arranged on the back side of the displacement region of the receiving portion, and the receiving portion is a gaming ball accepted by the receiving portion. A more displaceable displacement member is provided, the displacement member is formed of a non-light transmissive material, and is displaceable at a position where it protrudes or retracts between the light emitting means and the decorative member, and a gaming ball is provided in the receiving portion. Is accepted and protrudes between the light emitting means and the decorative member. Therefore, only when the game ball is held in the receiving portion, the displacement member and the game ball block the light emitted from the light emitting means. Therefore, the position of the game ball can be recognized by the player by the shadow (dark portion) formed on the decorative member. Therefore, when the game ball is not accepted by the receiving unit, the positioning operation and the returning operation of the receiving unit can be performed without being noticed by the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from gazing at the decorative member at the wrong timing, and the player can concentrate on playing the game.

In the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is arranged on the front side of the displacement region of the receiving portion, and the receiving portion includes a displacement member displaceable from the game ball accepted by the receiving portion, and the displacement The member is made of a non-light transmissive material and is displaceable at a position where it protrudes or retracts between the light emitting means and the decorative member, and the gaming ball is received by the receiving portion. A gaming machine P7 characterized in that it projects between the light emitting means and the gaming ball.
..

According to the gaming machine P7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is arranged on the front side of the displacement region of the receiving portion, and the receiving portion is a gaming ball accepted by the receiving portion. A more displaceable displacement member is provided, the displacement member is formed of a non-light transmissive material, and is displaceable at a position where it protrudes or retracts between the light emitting means and the decorative member, and a game ball is provided in the receiving portion. Is accepted and protrudes between the light emitting means and the game ball. Therefore, only when the game ball is held by the receiving portion, the displacement member and the game ball reflect the light emitted from the light emitting means. Therefore, the position of the game ball can be recognized by the player in the bright portion (the portion having a larger amount of light than the others) formed on the decorative member. Therefore, when the game ball is not accepted by the receiving unit, the positioning operation and the returning operation of the receiving unit can be performed without being noticed by the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from gazing at the decorative member at the wrong timing, and the player can concentrate on playing the game.

In this case, it is preferable that the displacement member is generally made of a metal material having a higher light reflectance than the resin material, or the outer surface is coated with metal. As a result, the light emitted to the displacement member can be easily reflected, and the difference in the amount of light emitted from the decorative member can be clarified.
It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the position of the game ball.

The gaming machine P8 is characterized in that the displacement member is formed in a concave curved shape recessed on the back surface side in the gaming machine P7.

According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P7, the displacement member is formed in a concave curved shape recessed on the back surface side, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means to the displacement member is reflected to the decorative member side. At that time, the reflected light can be made difficult to be diffused (light can be easily collected). Therefore, by collecting the light reflected by the displacement member and emitted from the decorative member, it is possible to clarify the difference in the amount of light and make it easier for the player to recognize the position of the game ball.

In the gaming machines P1 to P8, the gaming machine P9 is characterized in that the decorative member is formed by bulging convexly in the irradiation direction of the light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine P9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines P1 to P8, the decorative member is formed by bulging convexly in the irradiation direction of the light emitting means, so that the light of the light emitting means transmitted from the decorative member is emitted. It can be easily diffused. As a result, the portion where the amount of light formed by the game ball accepted by the receiving unit is different can be enlarged and recognized by the player, so that the player can recognize the position of the game ball accepted by the receiving unit. It can be done easily.

In the gaming machines 01 to P9, the gaming machine P10 is characterized in that the light emitting means can emit at least two or more colors.

According to the gaming machine P10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines P1 to P9, the light emitting means can emit at least two or more colors. Can be changed.

For example, it is better to divide the light emission between the first region of the first emission color and the second region of the second emission color and arrange the receiving portion in the first region to obtain the expectation of a big hit. Make it high. resulting in,
It is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the position of the game ball held in the receiving portion.

In this case, the range of the first region and the range of the second region can be changed only by changing the emission color. Therefore, by changing the emission range, a plurality of forms of the effect are formed. It is possible to make it easier for the player to enjoy the game.

<Characteristic Q group> (Be sure to take the firing sensor when descending by fanning up and down)
A movable means configured to be movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position, a movable control means capable of movablely controlling the movable means, and the movable means in the first position. In a gaming machine having a first position detecting means capable of detecting a position, when the movable control means is moved from the first position to the second position, the movable control means is moved from the first position to the second position. The movable means is stopped after the movable means is moved based on predetermined movable data for moving to the second position, and when the movable means is moved from the second position to the first position. Moves the movable means based on the movable data for moving from the second position to the first position direction, and stops the movable means when the movable means is detected by the first position detecting means. A gaming machine Q1 characterized by being a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, the effect of notifying the player of the lottery result after the design or the like is variablely displayed for a certain period is executed, and the effect of moving the movable object or the like is executed within the period in which the effect is executed. As a result, a gaming machine that informs a player of various production modes has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-130802). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine executes stop control for stopping a movable object at a predetermined stop position, but may stop at a predetermined stop position when the movable object is stopped. There was a problem that the stop position was scattered without being able to do it. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of stably controlling a movable object in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine Q1, when moving from the first position to the second position, by moving based on the movable data, the control load is smaller than when moving while detecting the movable position at any time. Although the configuration can be controlled, when moving from the second position to the first position, the movable means is stopped and controlled based on the result detected by the detecting means, so that the movable means moved to the first position is controlled. Even if there is a variation in the position of, it is possible to stop and control it at a more accurate first position, and the variation when moved to the first position increases depending on the number of movements. It has the effect of being able to prevent this and stably control moving objects.

In the gaming machine Q1, the movable means has a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball, and the launching means launches a gaming ball while being moved to the first position. Pachinko machine Q2.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1, the gaming ball is launched in a state of being moved to the first position, so that the firing accuracy of the gaming ball varies by accurately moving to the first position. There is an effect that the trouble that occurs can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the movable means has a base member that movably fixes the movable means, and the movable means has a shaft portion that is rotatably supported on one end side of the base member and the one end side. The movable means has at least a moving means for moving the game ball to the other end side and an opening for launching the game ball by the launching means on the other end side, and the movable means is the first from the origin position. It is movable to the first position set at the position rotated in the first direction with respect to the shaft portion by the momentum, and the shaft portion is rotated from the first position to the second rotation amount. The gaming machine Q3 is configured to be movable from the origin position to the second position set at the position rotated in the first direction.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the movement of the gaming ball by the moving means changes the center of gravity of the movable means, which makes stop control difficult. Since the configuration can be stopped accurately by the first position, there is an effect that a defect due to the stop control of the movable means can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine Q3, the moving means starts moving the game ball from the shaft portion to the other end side after the movable means starts the movable control from the origin position to the first position. A gaming machine Q4 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q3, the game ball moves to the other end side before rotating to the first position, so that the weight on the other end side becomes heavier and the movable load increases. It has the effect of suppressing the problems that occur. Further, by moving the movable means to the first position after the start of the movable control, there is an effect that the game ball can be moved to the other end side at the timing when the movable means is moved to the first position. be.

<Characteristic R group> (Sensor detection of power recovery)
An entry means in which a game ball can enter, a movable means capable of moving to a first position and a second position different from the first position, and a game ball entered into the entry means to the movable means. The movable means has an opening means into which the gaming ball guided by the guiding means can enter, and a gaming ball entered from the opening means. The gaming machine has a holding means capable of being able to move, and a moving means capable of moving the gaming ball held by the holding means, and the gaming machine moves the gaming ball entered from the opening means into the movable means. The gaming machine R1 is characterized by having a discharge control means capable of executing a discharge operation capable of discharging to the outside by the moving means.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a novel impression on the player by moving a movable object to a position where the player can see it, as one of the effects for notifying the hit / fail judgment result. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-130802) has been proposed which can prevent a player from getting tired of playing a game at an early stage. By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is a problem that a problem occurs due to the movement. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing defects in the above-mentioned gaming machines.

According to the gaming machine R1, even if the movable means is configured to allow the gaming ball to enter and the inserted gaming ball is moved, the gaming ball entered into the movable means is discharged to the outside by the discharging operation. Since it is configured so that it can be operated, even if the game ball enters the movable means excessively, the game ball can be discharged and operated normally, and there is an effect that a defect can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine R1, a main control means capable of executing game control, a slave control means capable of executing game control based on a control signal output from the main control means, and the ball entry means. It has a ball entry detecting means capable of detecting that a game ball has entered, and the main control means has detected that the game ball has entered by the ball entry detecting means. Based on this, the slave control means has an output means for outputting a ball entry signal to the slave control means, and the slave control means includes an opening detection means capable of detecting that a game ball has entered from the opening means and the movable. Movable control means capable of movably controlling the means, and initial operation control means for causing the movable control means to execute a predetermined initial operation for the movable means when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. When the ball entry signal is received during the period during which the initial operation is being executed, it is detected by the opening detection means that the game ball has entered the ball at least until the initial operation is completed. The gaming machine R2 is characterized by having an initial discharge operation control means for executing the discharge operation by the discharge control means based on the above.

According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R1, if there is a possibility that the gaming ball enters the movable means during the initial operation, monitoring by the opening detecting means is executed. By entering the ball, the ejection operation is executed after the end of the initial operation, so that there is an effect that a defect in the initial operation execution can be suppressed.

The gaming machine R2 is characterized in that the holding means is configured to be able to hold a game ball that has entered from the opening means when the moving means has moved the ball to a predetermined position. R3.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R2, the holding means is configured to be able to hold the gaming ball that has entered from the opening means by being moved to a predetermined position by the moving means. There is an effect that the acceptance of the game ball can be controlled by limiting the timing at which the holding means can hold the ball.

When the ball entry signal is received in the gaming machine R2 or R3 during the period during which the initial operation is being executed, the opening detecting means is used for a period until a predetermined period elapses after the initial operation is completed. The gaming machine R3 is characterized by having a determination control executing means for executing a determination control for determining whether or not a gaming ball is detected.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R2 or R3, when the entry signal is received during the period during which the initial operation is being executed, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball is detected by the opening detecting means. Therefore, in a state where the gaming ball cannot enter the movable means, the detection process can be omitted, and there is an effect that the control load can be reduced.

The gaming machine R3 is characterized in that the predetermined period is a period from receiving a specific control signal from the main control means until a predetermined number of seconds elapses.

According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R3, by executing after outputting a specific control signal, the timing at which the ejection operation is executed can be made constant, and the ejection operation can be executed at an appropriate timing. It has the effect of being able to perform actions.

In any of the gaming machines R1 to R4, the main control means includes a determination means capable of executing a determination and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means on the display means. , The dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information executed by the dynamic display means, and the identification information for showing the specific determination result to the display means are stopped and displayed. The gaming machine R5 is characterized by having a special state setting means capable of changing the ball entry means to a special state in which a gaming ball can easily enter the ball.

According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines R1 to R4, when the determination result is a specific determination result, the gaming ball can easily enter the ball entering means, so that the gaming ball can be moved to the movable means. It has the effect of giving the player an opportunity to enter the ball and providing the player with a novel effect.

The gaming machine R6 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine R5, the specific slave control signal is a signal output based on the end of the special state.

According to the gaming machine R6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R5, the ejection operation can be performed after the end of the special state, so that the ejection operation is performed after the gaming ball is difficult to enter into the movable means. This has the effect of suppressing problems.

<Characteristic S group> (Sound effect when winning a special electric accessory)
A game ball has entered by a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a first detection means capable of detecting that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, and the first detection means thereof. One of the first signal output means for outputting the first signal, the first flow path through which the game ball entering the first ball entry means can pass, and the first flow path thereof when it is detected. In a gaming machine having a visual recognition unit that makes it possible to visually recognize a game ball passing through the unit, a second ball entry means that allows a game ball that has not entered the first ball entry means to enter the ball. A second detection means capable of detecting that a game ball has entered the second ball entry means and a second signal are output when the second detection means detects that the game ball has entered the ball. The second signal output means, the first flow path guiding means for guiding the gaming ball that has entered the second ball entry means to the first flow path, and the first period after receiving the first signal. The first effect executing means for executing the first effect based on the elapse, and the second effect execution for executing the second effect based on the elapse of the second period after receiving the second signal. A gaming machine S1 characterized by having means and means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that the gaming becomes monotonous during the privileged gaming. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a problem that a player gets tired of playing a game at an early stage.

According to the game machine S1, the second effect is executed at the timing when the game ball that has entered the second ball entry means without entering the first ball entry means also passes through the visual recognition portion, so that the ball entry means can be used. It is possible to diversify the production together with the first production due to entering the ball, and there is an effect that the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine S1, based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the first ball entry means, the display means for displaying the information corresponding to the entry and the information displayed on the display means are displayed on the first. (1) The updating means includes an updating means for updating in response to a game ball that has entered the ball entering means, and the updating means updates the information at least at the timing when the second effect is executed. The gaming machine S2 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine S1, it is possible to make the game ball that did not enter the first entry means seem to have updated information, and the second entry. There is an effect that the player can be made to think as if he / she has entered the ball entry means including the game ball that has entered the ball means.

In the gaming machine S1 or 2, a third guiding means for guiding a gaming ball that has not entered the first entering means and the second entering means to the first taxiway, and the third guiding means. The gaming machine S3 is characterized by having a third effect executing means capable of executing a third effect at a timing when the game ball guided by the above reaches the visual recognition portion.

According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine S1 or S2, the gaming ball guided by the third guiding means is also guided to the visual recognition unit to execute the third effect, so that the gaming ball is used as the ball entry means. It is possible to make the player think that the game ball that has entered the ball passes through the visual recognition part, and it is possible to make the player think that many game balls are entering the ball entry means. be.

In the gaming machine S3, the updating means is characterized in that the information is updated at least at the timing when the third effect is executed.

According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine S3, the information is updated according to the timing when the third effect is executed, so that the game is not entered into the first and second ball entry means. It is possible to make the ball feel as if it is entering the first ball entry means, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines S1 to S4, the first period is set to be longer than the first flow period required for the gaming ball that has entered the first ball entry means to reach the visual recognition unit. The second period is set to be longer than the second flow period required for the gaming ball that has entered the second entry means to reach the visual recognition unit. S5.

According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines S1 to S4, the effect is produced according to the timing when the viewing portion is reached, so that the viewing portion seems to be a means of entering the ball. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the gaming machines S1 to S5, an opening through which a game ball can enter is formed as a part of the first flow path in the first flow path in the visual recognition portion, and the opening is formed in the opening. The gaming machine S6 is characterized in that the entering gaming ball is configured to be visible.

According to the gaming machine S6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines S1 to S5, the opening formed in the visual recognition portion can be made to look like a ball entry means, and more gaming balls can enter the ball entry means. It has the effect of making you feel as if you are playing a ball.

<Characteristic T group> (Pseudo jackpot production during latent state)
A discrimination means that executes a predetermined discrimination when the discrimination condition is satisfied, a display means that displays identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the identification information that shows the first discrimination result on the display means. When is displayed, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game that is advantageous to the player, and the first game state and the first game state after the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is completed. A game state setting means that can set a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the game state, and a privilege game effect that can execute the privilege game effect when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. It is characterized by having an execution means and a pseudo privilege game effect execution means capable of pseudo-execution of the privilege game effect when the second game state is set by the game state setting means. Pachinko machine T1.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There was a special game in which many prize balls could be awarded. Further, a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state can be set as the gaming state in which the above-mentioned lottery is executed, and the second gaming state is set. In this case, a gaming machine has been proposed that facilitates the execution of a special game in which a prize ball can be given to a player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-226399). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine can improve the interest of the game because it is possible to give the player a prize ball by the privilege game and the special game, but the aim is the privilege game. Since it is necessary to execute a game and a game aiming at a special game, there is a problem that the playability becomes complicated and the player's motivation to play is reduced. In the above-mentioned gaming machines, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that suppresses a decrease in motivation to play and improves the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine T1, when a gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set, a pseudo-privilege gaming effect is executed, so that the content of the effect that is executed in the state that is advantageous to the player is unified. be able to. Therefore, by performing an effect that is easy for the player to understand, there is an effect that the decrease in the motivation for the game can be suppressed and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, since the privilege game effect can be simulated in addition to the case where the privilege game is executed, it is possible to make the player think that many privilege games are being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine T1, a variable ball-entry means that can be changed into a first state in which a ball can enter and a second state in which a ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and at least the variable ball-entry means. Pseudo-ball-entry means on which a ball can be entered, and variable control means for changing the variable-entry means to the first state when the privilege game is executed by the privilege-game executing means. The gaming machine T2 is characterized in that the pseudo-privilege gaming means is such that a gaming ball is inserted when the pseudo-privilege gaming effect is executed by the pseudo-privilege gaming effect executing means.

According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine T1, when the pseudo-privilege gaming effect is executed, the effect of inserting the game ball into the pseudo-ball entry means is executed, so that a realistic simulated effect is achieved. It has the effect of being able to be executed.

In the gaming machine T1 or T2, when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the gaming machine T1 or T2 has an effect condition determining means for determining whether a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and the pseudo privileged gaming effect. The gaming machine T3 is characterized in that the execution means executes the pseudo-privilege gaming effect when it is determined by the effect condition determination means that the predetermined effect condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines T1 or T2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, if the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the pseudo privilege game effect is not executed even during the second game state. By configuring in this way, for example, when the period in which the second game state is set is short (when it is shorter than the execution period of one privilege game), it is possible to suppress the execution of the pseudo privilege game effect. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of the effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort, and thus there is an effect that the effect of the effect to be executed can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine T3, the second gaming state is continuously set by the upper limit value setting means for setting the upper limit value of the number of times the second gaming state is continuously set after the end of the jackpot game, and the gaming state setting means. It has a set number of times measuring means for measuring the set number of times, and the effect condition determining means determines that the number of times measured by the set number of times measuring means is less than a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine T4, which is characterized in that it is determined that is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine T4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T3. That is, the upper limit number of times that the second game state can be continuously set is set, and it is determined how many times the second game effect is currently set continuously. Then, when the number of consecutively set times in the second gaming state is less than the predetermined number of times, the effect condition is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to execute a stable pseudo-privilege game effect while securing a period in which the second game state is set, so that there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

When the game machine T4 determines that the number of times measured by the set number of times measuring means is greater than the predetermined number of times by the effect condition determining means, a second gaming state effect different from the pseudo privileged game effect is executed. The gaming machine T5, characterized in that it has a possible second gaming state effect executing means.

According to the gaming machine T5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T4. That is, when the number of consecutive settings of the second game state is more than a predetermined number, the specific second game state effect is executed without executing the pseudo privilege game effect, so that the player can easily understand the effect. It has the effect of being able to be executed.

<Characteristic U group> (Point consumption production)
Displays identification means for indicating a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a determination means capable of performing a determination based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means, and a determination result by the determination means. A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the means, a dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and a determination result specific to the display means. In a gaming machine having a privileged game execution means capable of executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the above is stopped and displayed, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. A numerical effect executing means capable of executing a numerical effect that gives numerical information to a player, and a numerical information storage means capable of accumulating and storing the numerical information of the numerical effect executed by the numerical effect executing means. , At least one of the operating means that can be operated by the player and the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means corresponding to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means. The gaming machine U1 is characterized by having a dynamic display mode determining control means capable of causing a player to determine the mode of the unit by operating the operating means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. As an effect for displaying the lottery result, a plurality of symbols for notifying the lottery result are displayed in a variable manner, and the lottery result is notified by a combination in which the symbols are stopped and displayed. As an effect other than the symbol, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a notice effect is executed to notify the player of the lottery result before the symbol stops. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that the player gets tired of the production performed until the lottery result is won. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a problem that a player gets tired of playing a game at an early stage.

According to the gaming machine U1, since the content of the dynamic display mode related to the notification of the determination result can be changed by the numerical information accumulated by the executed numerical effect, the numerical effect is executed and the numerical information is stored. It has the effect of making people interested in going and preventing them from getting bored of the game machines at an early stage.

In the game machine U1, when the partial mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination control means, the corresponding numerical information is subtracted from the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means. The gaming machine U2, which is characterized in that it is updated and stored as described above.

According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U1, the accumulated numerical information is subtracted by determining the dynamic display mode corresponding to the numerical information, so that the compensation using the numerical information is used. It is possible to execute an effect of providing a dynamic display mode, and there is an effect that the player's interest can be improved.

The gaming machine U3 is characterized in that the gaming machine U1 or U2 has a notifying means for notifying information corresponding to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machines U1 or U2, the information corresponding to the stored numerical information is notified by the gaming machine U3, so that the player can easily recognize the state of the numerical information stored. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the game machines U1 to U3, the numerical information determining means for determining the numerical information given to the player by the numerical effect executed by the numerical effect executing means is provided, and the numerical information determining means has a numerical information determining means. The gaming machine U4 is characterized in that it is configured so that numerical information corresponding to the numerical information stored by the numerical information storage means can be determined.

According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines U1 to U3, the numerical information given by the numerical effect can be determined corresponding to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the numerical information can be added according to the numerical information possessed by the player.

<Feature V group> (Common acquisition process for button press timing)
An operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation effect execution means that executes a predetermined operation effect based on the operation of the operation means, and an effective period for effectively discriminating the operation on the operation means are set. A gaming machine having a valid period setting means for setting an effect and an effect setting means for setting an effect mode for a predetermined period including the effective period set by the effective period setting means, and the operating means during the effective period. Is operated by the calculation means for calculating the operation timing based on the validity period set by the validity period setting means, and the operation effect executing means based on the operation timing calculated by the calculation means. A gaming machine V1 comprising: an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode of the operation effect to be executed.

Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines perform a winning lottery and perform a variable display effect for showing the lottery result on a display device. Further, a gaming machine that provides a plurality of suggestion effects for suggesting the lottery result and executes a specific suggestion effect based on the operation result to the operation means that the player can operate as a part of the plurality of suggestion effects. It has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-283442). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since a specific suggestion effect is executed regardless of the timing at which the operating means is operated, the motivation of the player to operate the operating means is reduced, and the player is early. There was a problem that the problem of getting tired of playing games occurred.

According to the gaming machine V1, since it is possible to set the effect mode of the operation effect based on the operation timing of the operation means during the valid period, it is possible to provide the player with various effects. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the gaming machine at an early stage.

The gaming machine V1 is characterized in that the calculation means calculates the ratio between the valid period and the remaining period of the valid period at the timing when the operating means is operated.

According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the effect mode of the operation effect is set based on the ratio between the effective period and the remaining period of the effective period calculated by the timing when the operating means is operated. As a result, since the operation effect is set based on the length of the set valid period and the operation timing of the operation means, it is possible to set various operation effects and enhance the effect. There is.

When the configuration of the gaming machine V2 is used, it is preferable to configure it so that different valid periods are set for the same effect mode set by the effect setting means. With this configuration, even if the operation means are operated at the same timing for the effect mode being executed, the calculation result of the calculation means may be different by changing the set valid period. It is possible to change the effect mode of the operation effect.

The gaming machine V1 or V2 has a display means capable of displaying a predetermined effect and a movable means capable of executing a predetermined movable effect, and the effect setting means is the effect mode executed by the display means. The gaming machine V3 is characterized in that the operation effect executing means is for executing the operation effect using the movable means.

According to the gaming machine V3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines V1 or V2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, if the effect operating means is operated while the effect displayed on the display means is being executed, the operation effect for moving the movable means is executed, so that the operation means is operated at any timing within the valid period. Even if the operation is performed, the operation effect can be executed without changing the effect content displayed on the display means. Therefore, there is an effect that the control for executing the operation effect can be simplified and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

The gaming machine V4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine V2 or 3, the valid period setting means can set different valid periods when the same effect setting mode is set by the effect setting means.

According to the gaming machine V4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V2 or 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, even when the operation means are operated at the same timing with respect to the effect mode being executed, the calculation result of the calculation means is different by changing the set valid period, and the effect of the operation effect is produced. The aspect can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety of operation effects to the player who always operates the operation means at a fixed timing, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

In any of the gaming machines V2 to V4, the first classification means for classifying the ratio calculated by the calculation means according to the first condition and the second classification means for classifying the ratio according to the second condition different from the first condition. The first division means and the division determination means for determining whether to divide the ratio by any of the second division means, and the effect mode setting means is determined by the division determination means. The gaming machine V5, characterized in that the effect mode of the operation effect is set based on the content.

According to the gaming machine V5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines V2 to V4, the following effects are played. That is, the ratios calculated by the calculation means are divided under different conditions, and the effect mode of the operation effect is set based on the divided contents. Therefore, even if the calculation results of the calculation means are the same, different operations are performed. The production can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety of operation effects to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

<Characteristic W group> (Notification of pre-reading result of jackpot)
A ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means, and a storage in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored. Means, a determination means capable of performing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means on the display means. When the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means capable of executing the privilege game advantageous to the player and the privilege game execution means. In the game machine having the privilege game type determination means for determining the type of the privilege game executed based on the information stored in the storage means, the said determination means is preceded by the determination means. Based on the information stored in the storage means, the pre-determination means for executing the pre-determination and the pre-determination for showing the result of the pre-determination by the pre-determination means correspond to the pre-determined information. The advance notification means for notifying before the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the determination result is started, and the privilege game type determination means when the determination means determines a specific determination result. The privilege game type pre-determination means for preliminarily determining the type of the privilege game to be performed with respect to the information stored in the storage means before the determination means is determined, and the determination by the privilege game type pre-determination means. It has a pre-privilege game type notification means for notifying before the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the determination result of the information for which the pre-game information for showing the result has been determined is started. A game machine W1 characterized by.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Different types of benefits that can be obtained by multiple types of players are set for the privileged games to be executed, and if a hit is made, one privileged game type is determined. A gaming machine has been proposed in which a player's interests differ depending on the type of privileged game being executed even when a hit is made (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machines are required to improve not only the effect of improving the interest in hitting and losing, but also the interest in the type of privileged game. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with further improved interest in gaming.

According to the game machine W1, the advance game information corresponding to the type of the privileged game to be executed in the case of a hit is also notified, so that it is possible to provide the player with an effect combined with the notification result by the advance determination. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

The gaming machine W1 has a symbol display means for displaying a symbol corresponding to the information stored in the storage means before being determined by the determination means on the display means, and the advance notification means has the symbol. The gaming machine W2 is characterized in that it is notified by changing the display mode of the symbol displayed by the display means.

According to the gaming machine W2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine W1, the information related to the determination result can be identified by the symbol in the state of being stored in the storage means before the identification information is dynamically displayed. It is possible to be interested not only in the judgment result of the dynamically displayed identification information but also in the judgment result stored in the storage means, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage. effective.

In the gaming machines W1 or W2, the effect means for executing the effect when the privilege game is executed and the advance privilege game type notification means are characterized in that the specific effect is executed by the effect means. Game machine W3 to play.

According to the gaming machine W3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine W1 or W2, the effect of executing the effect when the privileged game is executed causes the notification of the privileged game type to be executed at an early stage. There is an effect that it is possible to easily identify that the notification is related to.

The gaming machine W3 is characterized in that the advance privilege game type notification means performs notification in response to execution of notification for indicating the advance determination by the advance notification means. Machine W4.

According to the gaming machine W4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine W3, the bonus game type is also notified in advance in response to the execution of the advance notification related to the determination result, so that the player is notified of the determination result. There is an effect that advance notification can be performed in combination with the notification content.

<Characteristic X group> (Notification of small hits and charge design)
Information can be acquired based on the entry means in which the game ball can enter, the acquisition means in which the game ball enters the entry means, and the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored. The storage means, the first determination means for executing the first determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the identification information for showing the first determination result by the first determination means are dynamically displayed in the display means. A dynamic display means for displaying and a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating a specific first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. , When the second determination means capable of executing the second determination based on the establishment of the determination condition and the second determination result by the second determination means are the specific second determination results, the game is played in the ball entry means. In a gaming machine having a variable means that can be changed so that the ball can easily enter the ball, the variable means is changed to the easy entry state according to the specific second determination result. A first determination type and a second determination type in which the variable means is set to a special easy entry state are set so that the game ball can easily enter the ball entry means rather than the first determination means. The privilege game execution means can execute a special game different from the privilege game when the determination means determines that the special first determination result is different from the specific determination result, and the identification information Is displayed as the special identification information as a stop display mode for showing the special first determination result, and the specific second determination corresponding to the second determination type is displayed during the dynamic display of the identification information. When a special game determined to be the result is executed, the identification information being dynamically displayed is switched to the special identification information and temporarily stopped and displayed before the execution of the special game. Game machine X1 to play.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. As an effect for displaying the lottery result, a plurality of symbols for notifying the lottery result are displayed in a variable manner, and the lottery result is notified by a combination in which the symbols are stopped and displayed. As an effect other than the symbol, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a notice effect is executed to notify the player of the lottery result before the symbol stops. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that the player gets tired of the production performed until the lottery result is won. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a problem that a player gets tired of playing a game at an early stage.

According to the gaming machine X1, the frequency of displaying the special identification information can be increased, and the problem that the special identification information is displayed causes the player to get tired of the game during the period until the specific determination result is notified. It has the effect of being able to suppress it.

The gaming machine X1 has a dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information when the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display mode determining means is dynamic. The gaming machine X2 is characterized in that it determines whether or not the special game is executed during the target display, and determines a dynamic display mode based on the determination result.

According to the gaming machine X2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine X1, there is an effect that the special identification information can be easily set by discriminating the execution of the special game before the dynamic display.

<Characteristic Y group> (Notify the end of the effective time at the same timing with multiple button effects)
Corresponding to the operation means that can be operated by the player, the operation effect setting means that sets the operation effect to be executed corresponding to the operation of the operation means, and the operation effect set by the operation effect setting means. In a gaming machine having a valid period setting means for setting a valid period determined to be valid when the operating means is operated, the operation effect setting means can set a plurality of the operation effects. The valid period setting means determines the valid period of 1 for the plurality of operation effects set by the operation effect setting means, and the plurality of operation effects are set to 1 within the valid period. Based on the operation being executed by the player, the operation effect 1 is executed in a predetermined order, and the notification means individually responds to the plurality of operation effects. The gaming machine Y1 is characterized in that it notifies the identification information for indicating the individual valid period corresponding to the set valid period.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. When the lottery result is notified, after the symbols for notifying the lottery result are variablely displayed in the variable time determined by the lottery, the lottery result is stopped and displayed by the combination of the symbols indicating the lottery result. During the period when the variable display is executed, a gaming machine has been proposed in which an effect of displaying a notice display or the like regarding the lottery result to be notified is executed by operating an operation unit that can be operated by the player ( For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine has been required to further improve the gaming interest by appropriately performing various productions using operating means. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with further improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine Y1, even when a plurality of operation effects are set, the operation validity period is notified for each, so that the period during which the operation means can be operated can be recognized as an individual operation effect, which is a hobby of the game. Has the effect of improving.

The gaming machine Y1 is characterized in that the identification information is notified by varying the individual valid period in order corresponding to the predetermined order in response to the decrease in the valid period. Machine Y2.

According to the gaming machine Y2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Y1, the identification information indicating the individual validity period is variably displayed in the order in which the operation effects are executed, so that the player can execute a plurality of operation effects. It has the effect of being able to identify the order.

In the gaming machine Y2, when the valid period elapses in a state where the plurality of operation effects are set, each of the notified identification information is notified that the valid period has elapsed at the same timing. The gaming machine Y3, which is characterized in that it is variable so as to be.

According to the gaming machine Y3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Y2, it is possible to notify the player that the individual valid period will elapse according to the elapse of the valid period, and the effect that the elapse of the valid time can be correctly notified. There is.

From the gaming machine Y1 to the gaming machine Y3, when the identification information is variable in response to the decrease in the valid period, the identification information is updated and varied after blinking. Game machine Y4.

According to the gaming machine Y4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines Y1 to Y3, the identification information is changed after blinking, so that it is difficult to understand even if the speed at which the identification information is changed is not constant, which is effective. It has the effect of facilitating control to notify the time.

<Characteristic Z group> (automatic pressing of button effect)
When the operation effect is set by the operation means that can be operated by the player, the operation effect setting means that sets the operation effect to be executed when the operation means is operated, and the operation effect setting means. When the valid period setting means for setting the valid period for which the operation by the operating means is determined to be valid and the valid period setting means set the valid period, the identification information corresponding to the set valid period is notified. The gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that, in a gaming machine having the notification means, the notification means notifies a specific notification mode based on the fact that the valid period is equal to or less than a predetermined period.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. When the lottery result is notified, after the symbols for notifying the lottery result are variablely displayed in the variable time determined by the lottery, the lottery result is stopped and displayed by the combination of the symbols indicating the lottery result. During the period when the variable display is executed, a gaming machine has been proposed in which an effect of displaying a notice display or the like regarding the lottery result to be notified is executed by operating an operation unit that can be operated by the player ( For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine has been required to further improve the gaming interest by appropriately performing various productions using operating means. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with further improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine Z1, when the valid period reaches a predetermined period, the specific notification mode is notified, so that the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the specific period has been reached, and the interest of the game is improved. It has the effect of being able to do it.

The gaming machine Z1 has a suggestion mode display means for causing the display means to display a suggestion mode suggesting to the player that the operation means is operated during the period in which the validity period is set, and the suggestion mode display. The means is to change and display the suggestion mode to an operated suggestion mode indicating that the operation means has been operated based on the operation of the operation means, and the valid period is a predetermined period or less. However, based on the fact that the operating means is not operated, a pseudo operating mode indicating that the operating means has been pseudo-operated is displayed in a mode different from the operated suggestion mode. Game machine Z2 to play.

According to the gaming machine Z2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Z1, the pseudo operation mode is displayed, so that the valid period has elapsed even if the operation effect is automatically executed with the passage of the valid period. Has the effect of being able to recognize.

In the gaming machine Z2, the suggestion mode is configured by a symbol imitating the shape of the operating means, and the pseudo operation mode is configured by an effect mode in which the symbol is operated. The gaming machine Z3 featuring.

According to the gaming machine Z3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Z2, there is an effect that it is possible to clearly notify that the operation effect has been executed after the lapse of the valid period.

In any of the gaming machines Z1 to Z3, when the operating means is operated at the timing when the specific notification mode is displayed, the special notification mode is notified in addition to the specific notification mode. The gaming machine Z4.

According to the gaming machine Z4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines Z1 to Z3, when the operating means is operated at the timing when the specific notification mode is displayed, the special notification mode is notified, so that the game is played. There is an effect that it is possible to realize that the production has been executed by the operation of the person.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine γ1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine γ2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. The identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time, provided that the prize is won (or passed through the operating port). Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine γ3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Different types of benefits that can be obtained by multiple types of players are set for the privileged games to be executed, and if a hit is made, one privileged game type is determined. A gaming machine has been proposed in which a player's interests differ depending on the type of privileged gaming that is executed even when a hit occurs (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).
By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machines are required to improve not only the effect of improving the interest in hitting and losing, but also the interest in the type of privileged game. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with further improved interest in gaming.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball and an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry means of the game ball entering the ball entry means. To show a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, a determination means capable of performing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and a determination result by the determination means. A privilege that is advantageous to the player when the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information and the identification information for indicating a specific determination result are stopped and displayed on the display means. A game execution means and a privilege game type determining means for determining the type of the privilege game to be executed based on the information stored in the storage means when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. , And a pre-determination means for executing a pre-determination based on the information stored in the storage means prior to the pre-determination means, and a pre-determination for showing the result of the pre-determination by the pre-determination means. The pre-notification means for notifying the information before the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result corresponding to the pre-determined information is started, and the determination means for determining the specific determination result. If so, the privilege game type predetermined in advance with respect to the information stored in the storage means before the privilege game type determined by the privilege game type determination means is determined by the determination means. Prior to notifying the determination means and the advance game information for showing the determination result by the privilege game type advance determination means before the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determined information is started. It has a privilege game type notification means.
In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the gaming machine of the technical idea 2 displays a symbol corresponding to the information stored in the storage means before being determined by the determination means on the display means. The advance notification means has means, and the advance notification means notifies by changing the display mode of the symbol displayed by the symbol display means.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the effect means for executing the effect when the privilege game is executed in the game machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, and the advance privilege game type notification means is the effect. A specific effect is executed by means.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, an entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means, and acquisition thereof. A storage means in which the information acquired by the means is stored, a determination means capable of performing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means are displayed. A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the means, and a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. , A privilege game type determining means for determining the type of the privilege game to be executed based on the information stored in the storage means when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. The pre-determination means for executing the pre-determination based on the information stored in the storage means prior to the determination means, and the prior information for showing the result of the pre-determination by the pre-determination means are described above. When the pre-notification means for notifying before the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the determination result corresponding to the pre-determined information is started and the determination result is determined by the determination means. , A privilege game type pre-determination means for preliminarily determining the type of the privilege game determined by the privilege game type determination means with respect to the information stored in the storage means before being determined by the determination means. Prior privilege game type notification for notifying before the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determined information for indicating the determination result by the privilege game type advance determination means is started. It has means and.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1. That is, it has a symbol display means for displaying the symbol corresponding to the information stored in the storage means before being determined by the determination means on the display means, and the advance notification means is provided by the symbol display means. Notification is given by changing the display mode of the displayed symbol.
Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1 or 2. That is, the effect means for executing the effect when the privilege game is executed and the advance privilege game type notification means cause the effect means to execute the specific effect.
Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily identify that the notification is related to the privilege game.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)

Claims (3)

A means of entering a ball that allows a game ball to enter,
An acquisition means that can acquire information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry means,
A storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and a storage means for storing the information.
A determination means capable of performing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and a determination means.
A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means on the display means,
When the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, the privilege game execution means capable of executing the privilege game advantageous to the player, and the privilege game execution means.
A game having a privilege game type determining means for determining the type of the privilege game to be executed based on the information stored in the storage means when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. In the machine
A pre-determination means that executes a pre-determination based on information stored in the storage means prior to the determination means, and
Preliminary information for showing the result of the pre-determination by the pre-determination means is notified before the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the determination result corresponding to the pre-determined information is started. Advance notification means and
When the determination means determines a specific determination result, the type of the privilege game determined by the privilege game type determination means is stored in the information stored in the storage means before being determined by the determination means. On the other hand, the privilege game type pre-judgment means to judge in advance and
Prior privilege game type notification for notifying before the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determined information for indicating the determination result by the privilege game type advance determination means is started. A gaming machine characterized by having means and means. It has a symbol display means for displaying a symbol corresponding to the information stored in the storage means before being determined by the determination means on the display means.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the advance notification means notifies by changing the display mode of the symbol displayed by the symbol display means. When the privilege game is executed, the effect means for executing the effect and the effect means.
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the advance privilege game type notification means is for causing a specific effect to be executed by the effect means.

Images